This is a modern-English version of Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11th Edition, "Banks" to "Bassoon": Volume 3, Part 1, Slice 3, originally written by Various. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


Transcriber's note: A few typographical errors have been corrected. They appear in the text like this, and the explanation will appear when the mouse pointer is moved over the marked passage. Sections in Greek or Hebrew will yield a transliteration when the pointer is moved over them, and words using diacritic characters in the Latin Extended Additional block, which may not display in some fonts or browsers, will display an unaccented version. Volume and page numbers are displayed in the margin as: v.03 p.0001

THE ENCYCLOPÆDIA BRITANNICA

A DICTIONARY OF ARTS, SCIENCES, LITERATURE AND GENERAL INFORMATION

ELEVENTH EDITION

VOLUME III

AUSTRIA LOWER to BISECTRIX

[E-Text Edition of Volume III - Part 1 of 2, Slice 3 of 3 - BANKS to BASSOON]




[v.03 p.0333]

[v.03 p.0333]

BANKS, GEORGE LINNAEUS (1821-1881), British miscellaneous writer, was born at Birmingham on the 2nd of March 1821. After a brief experience in a variety of trades, he became at the age of seventeen a contributor to various newspapers, and subsequently a playwright, being the author of two plays, a couple of burlesques and several lyrics. Between 1848 and 1864 he edited in succession a variety of newspapers, including the Birmingham Mercury and the Dublin Daily Express, and published several volumes of miscellaneous prose and verse. He died in London on the 3rd of May 1881.

BANKS, GEORGE LINNAEUS (1821-1881), British writer known for various genres, was born in Birmingham on March 2, 1821. After trying out different jobs, he started contributing to several newspapers at the age of seventeen and later became a playwright, writing two plays, a few burlesques, and several lyrics. From 1848 to 1864, he successively edited various newspapers, including the Birmingham Mercury and the Dublin Daily Express, and published several books of prose and poetry. He passed away in London on May 3, 1881.

BANKS, SIR JOSEPH, Bart. (1743-1820), English naturalist, was born in Argyle Street, London, on the 13th of February 1743. His father, William Banks, was the son of a successful Lincolnshire doctor, who became sheriff of his county, and represented Peterborough in parliament; and Joseph was brought up as the son of a rich man. In 1760 he went to Oxford, where he showed a decided taste for natural science and was the means of introducing botanical lectures into the university. In 1764 he came into possession of the ample fortune left by his father, and in 1766 he made his first scientific expedition to Newfoundland and Labrador, bringing back a rich collection of plants and insects. Shortly after his return, Captain Cook was sent by the government to observe the transit of Venus in the Pacific Ocean, and Banks, through the influence of his friend Lord Sandwich, obtained leave to join the expedition in the "Endeavour," which was fitted out at his own expense. He made the most careful preparations, in order to be able to profit by every opportunity, and induced Dr Daniel Solander, a distinguished pupil of Linnaeus, to accompany him. He even engaged draughtsmen and painters to delineate such objects of interest as did not admit of being transported or preserved. The voyage occupied three years and many hardships had to be undergone; but the rich harvest of discovery was more than adequate compensation. Banks was equally anxious to join Cook's second expedition and expended large sums in engaging assistants and furnishing the necessary equipment; but circumstances obliged him to relinquish his purpose. He, however, employed the assistants and materials he had collected in a voyage to Iceland in 1772, returning by the Hebrides and Staffa. In 1778 Banks succeeded Sir John Pringle as president of the Royal Society, of which he had been a fellow from 1766, and held the office until his death. In 1781 he was made a baronet; in 1795 he received the order of the Bath; and in 1797 he was admitted to the privy council. He died at Isleworth on the 19th of June 1820. As president of the Royal Society he did much to raise the state of science in Britain, and was at the same time most assiduous and successful in cultivating friendly relations with scientific men of all nations. It was, however, objected to him that from his own predilections he was inclined to overlook and depreciate the labours of the mathematical and physical sections of the Royal Society and that he exercised his authority somewhat despotically. He bequeathed his collections of books and botanical specimens to the British Museum. His fame rests rather on what his liberality enabled other workers to do than on his own achievements.

BANKS, SIR JOSEPH, Bart. (1743-1820), English naturalist, was born in Argyle Street, London, on February 13, 1743. His father, William Banks, was the son of a successful doctor from Lincolnshire, who became sheriff of his county and represented Peterborough in parliament; Joseph was raised as the son of a wealthy man. In 1760, he went to Oxford, where he demonstrated a strong interest in natural science and played a key role in introducing botanical lectures at the university. In 1764, he inherited the substantial fortune left by his father, and in 1766, he embarked on his first scientific expedition to Newfoundland and Labrador, where he returned with a rich collection of plants and insects. Shortly after his return, Captain Cook was commissioned by the government to observe the transit of Venus in the Pacific Ocean, and Banks, through the influence of his friend Lord Sandwich, secured permission to join the expedition on the "Endeavour," which he financed himself. He made detailed preparations to take advantage of every opportunity, and he persuaded Dr. Daniel Solander, a prominent student of Linnaeus, to accompany him. He even hired artists and painters to document interesting objects that couldn't be transported or preserved. The voyage lasted three years and involved many hardships, but the wealth of discoveries made it all worthwhile. Banks was eager to join Cook's second expedition and spent a significant amount on hiring assistants and acquiring the necessary equipment; however, circumstances forced him to abandon his plans. Instead, he used the assistants and materials he had gathered for a voyage to Iceland in 1772, returning through the Hebrides and Staffa. In 1778, Banks succeeded Sir John Pringle as president of the Royal Society, having been a fellow since 1766, and he held the position until his death. In 1781, he was made a baronet; in 1795, he received the Order of the Bath; and in 1797, he was appointed to the privy council. He passed away in Isleworth on June 19, 1820. As president of the Royal Society, he significantly advanced the state of science in Britain and was dedicated to fostering friendly relations with scientists from all nations. However, some criticized him for favoring his own interests and overlooking the work of the mathematical and physical sections of the Royal Society, claiming he exercised his authority rather autocratically. He left his collections of books and botanical specimens to the British Museum. His legacy is more about what his generosity allowed others to accomplish than his own contributions.

See J. H. Maiden, Sir Joseph Banks (1909).

See J. H. Maiden, Sir Joseph Banks (1909).

BANKS, NATHANIEL PRENTISS (1816-1894), American politician and soldier, was born at Waltham, Massachusetts, on the 30th of January 1816. He received only a common school education and at an early age began work as a bobbin-boy in a cotton factory of which his father was superintendent. Subsequently he edited a weekly paper at Waltham, studied law and was admitted to the bar, his energy and his ability as a public speaker soon winning him distinction. He served as a Free Soiler in the Massachusetts house of representatives from 1849 to 1853, and was speaker in 1851 and 1852; he was president of the state Constitutional Convention of 1853, and in the same year was elected to the national House of Representatives as a coalition candidate of Democrats and Free Soilers. Although re-elected in 1854 as an American or "Know-Nothing," he soon left this party, and in 1855 presided over a Republican convention in Massachusetts. At the opening of the Thirty-Fourth Congress the anti-Nebraska men gradually united in supporting Banks for speaker, and after one of the bitterest and most protracted speakership contests in the history of congress, lasting from the 3rd of December 1855 to the 2nd of February 1856, he was chosen on the 133rd ballot. This has been called the first national victory of the Republican party. Re-elected in 1856 as a Republican, he resigned his seat in December 1857, and was governor of Massachusetts from 1858 to 1861, a period marked by notable administrative and educational reforms. He then succeeded George B. McClellan as president of the Illinois Central railway. Although while governor he had been a strong advocate of peace, he was one of the earliest to offer his services to President Lincoln, who appointed him in 1861 major-general of volunteers. Banks was one of the most prominent of the volunteer officers. When McClellan entered upon his Peninsular Campaign in 1862 the important duty of defending Washington from the army of "Stonewall" Jackson fell to the corps commanded by Banks. In the spring Banks was ordered to move against Jackson in the Shenandoah Valley, but the latter with superior forces defeated him at Winchester, Virginia, on the 25th of May, and forced him back to the Potomac river. On the 9th of August Banks again encountered Jackson at Cedar Mountain, and, though greatly outnumbered, succeeded in holding his ground after a very sanguinary battle. He was later placed in command of the garrison at Washington, and in November sailed from New York with a strong force to replace General B. F. Butler at New Orleans as commander of the Department of the Gulf. Being ordered to co-operate with Grant, who was then before Vicksburg, he invested the defences of Port Hudson, Louisiana, in May 1863, and after three attempts to carry the works by storm he began a regular siege. The garrison surrendered to Banks on the 9th of July, on receiving word that Vicksburg had fallen. In the autumn of 1863 Banks organized a number of expeditions to Texas, chiefly for the purpose of preventing the French in Mexico from aiding the Confederates, and secured possession of the region near the mouths of the Nueces and the Rio Grande. But his Red River expedition, March-May 1864, forced upon him by superior authority, was a complete failure. In August 1865 he was mustered out of the service, and from 1865 to 1873 he was again a representative in congress, serving as chairman of the committee on foreign affairs. A personal quarrel with President Grant led in 1872, however, to his joining the Liberal-Republican revolt in support of Horace Greeley, and as the Liberal-Republican and Democratic candidate he was defeated for re-election. In 1874 he was successful as a Democratic candidate, serving one term (1875-1877). Having rejoined the Republican party in 1876, he was United States marshal for Massachusetts from 1879 until 1888, when for the ninth time he was elected to Congress. He retired at the close of his term (1891) and died at Waltham on the 1st of September 1894.

BANKS, NATHANIEL PRENTISS (1816-1894), American politician and soldier, was born in Waltham, Massachusetts, on January 30, 1816. He received a basic education and started working at a young age as a bobbin boy in a cotton factory where his father was the superintendent. Later, he edited a weekly newspaper in Waltham, studied law, and was admitted to the bar, quickly gaining recognition for his energetic public speaking. He served as a Free Soiler in the Massachusetts House of Representatives from 1849 to 1853 and was the speaker in 1851 and 1852. He was the president of the state Constitutional Convention in 1853 and elected to the national House of Representatives that same year as a coalition candidate of Democrats and Free Soilers. Although he was re-elected in 1854 as a member of the "Know-Nothing" party, he soon left and chaired a Republican convention in Massachusetts in 1855. At the start of the Thirty-Fourth Congress, anti-Nebraska supporters gradually united to back Banks for speaker, and after one of the longest and most intense speakership contests in Congress history, lasting from December 3, 1855, to February 2, 1856, he was chosen on the 133rd ballot. This has been referred to as the first national victory of the Republican Party. Re-elected in 1856 as a Republican, he resigned his position in December 1857 and served as governor of Massachusetts from 1858 to 1861, a time noted for significant administrative and educational reforms. He then took over as president of the Illinois Central Railway after George B. McClellan. While he had been a strong advocate for peace as governor, he was one of the first to offer his services to President Lincoln, who appointed him major-general of volunteers in 1861. Banks became one of the most prominent volunteer officers. When McClellan started his Peninsular Campaign in 1862, it was Banks's corps that had the crucial responsibility of defending Washington from "Stonewall" Jackson's army. In the spring, he was ordered to confront Jackson in the Shenandoah Valley, but was defeated at Winchester, Virginia, on May 25 and forced back to the Potomac River. On August 9, Banks met Jackson again at Cedar Mountain and, although heavily outnumbered, managed to hold his position after a bloody battle. He was then put in charge of the Washington garrison, and in November, he sailed from New York with a strong force to take over command of the Department of the Gulf in New Orleans from General B. F. Butler. Ordered to cooperate with Grant, who was then laying siege to Vicksburg, he began to invest the defenses of Port Hudson, Louisiana, in May 1863, and after three assaults to take it by storm, he commenced a regular siege. The garrison surrendered to Banks on July 9 after they learned that Vicksburg had fallen. In the fall of 1863, Banks organized several expeditions to Texas mainly to prevent the French in Mexico from supporting the Confederates and secured the area near the mouths of the Nueces and Rio Grande. However, his Red River campaign from March to May 1864, which was imposed on him by higher authority, ended in total failure. In August 1865, he was mustered out of service, and from 1865 to 1873, he returned to Congress, serving as chairman of the committee on foreign affairs. A personal conflict with President Grant led him to join the Liberal-Republican revolt in support of Horace Greeley in 1872, and as the Liberal-Republican and Democratic candidate, he lost his bid for re-election. In 1874, he successfully ran as a Democratic candidate, serving one term from 1875 to 1877. After rejoining the Republican Party in 1876, he served as United States marshal for Massachusetts from 1879 until 1888, when he was elected to Congress for the ninth time. He retired at the end of his term in 1891 and died in Waltham on September 1, 1894.

BANKS, THOMAS (1735-1805), English sculptor, son of a surveyor who was land steward to the duke of Beaufort, was born in London on the 29th of December 1735. He was taught drawing by his father, and in 1750 was apprenticed to a wood-carver. In his spare time he worked at sculpture, and before 1772, when he obtained a travelling studentship and proceeded to Rome, he had already exhibited several fine works. Returning to England in 1779 he found that the taste for classic poetry, ever the source of his inspiration, no longer existed, and he spent two years in St Petersburg, being employed by the empress Catherine, who purchased his "Cupid tormenting a Butterfly." On his return he modelled his colossal "Achilles mourning the loss of Briseis," a work full of force and passion; and thereupon he was elected, in 1784, an associate of the Royal Academy and in the following year a full member. Among other works in St Paul's cathedral are the monuments to Captain Westcott and Captain Burges, and in Westminster Abbey to Sir Eyre Coote. His bust of Warren Hastings is in the National Portrait Gallery. Banks's best-known work is perhaps the colossal group of "Shakespeare attended by Painting and Poetry," now in the garden of New Place, Stratford-on-Avon. He died in London on the 2nd of February 1805.

BANKS, THOMAS (1735-1805), an English sculptor, was born in London on December 29, 1735, to a surveyor who managed land for the Duke of Beaufort. His father taught him how to draw, and in 1750, he became an apprentice to a wood-carver. During his free time, he practiced sculpture and had already showcased several impressive works before 1772, when he received a traveling scholarship and went to Rome. After returning to England in 1779, he found that the appreciation for classic poetry, which had always inspired him, was fading. He spent two years in St. Petersburg working for Empress Catherine, who bought his piece "Cupid tormenting a Butterfly." Upon his return, he modeled the massive "Achilles mourning the loss of Briseis," a work brimming with energy and emotion. In 1784, he was elected an associate of the Royal Academy and became a full member the following year. Among his works in St. Paul's Cathedral are the monuments for Captain Westcott and Captain Burges, and in Westminster Abbey, the monument for Sir Eyre Coote. His bust of Warren Hastings is housed in the National Portrait Gallery. Perhaps his most famous piece is the large group sculpture "Shakespeare attended by Painting and Poetry," which is currently in the garden of New Place in Stratford-on-Avon. He passed away in London on February 2, 1805.

[v.03 p.0334]

[v.03 p.0334]

BANKS AND BANKING. The word "bank," in the economic sense, covers various meanings which all express one object, a contribution of money for a common purpose. Thus Bacon, in his essay on Usury, while explaining "how the discommodities of it may be best avoided and the commodities retained," refers to a "bank or common stock" as an expression with which his readers would be familiar. Originally connected with the idea of a mound or bank of earth—hence with that of a monte, an Italian word describing a heap—the term has been gradually applied to several classes of institutions established for the general purpose of dealing with money.

BANKS AND BANKING. The word "bank," in the financial sense, has several meanings that all refer to the same idea: a contribution of money for a shared goal. In his essay on Usury, Bacon discusses "how to best avoid the downsides and keep the benefits," mentioning a "bank or common stock," something his readers would recognize. Initially linked to the concept of a mound or bank of earth—similar to the Italian word monte, meaning a heap—the term has gradually come to encompass various types of institutions set up to handle money on a broader scale.

The manner in which a bank prospers is explained by David Banking as a business. Ricardo, in his Proposals for an Economical and Secure Currency, in a passage where he tells us that a bank would never be established if it obtained no other profits but those derived from the employment of its own capital. The real advantage of a bank to the community it serves commences only when it employs the capital of others. The money which a bank controls in the form of the deposits which it receives and sometimes of the notes which it issues, is loaned out by it again to those who desire to borrow and can show that they may be trusted. A bank, in order to carry on business successfully, must possess a sufficient capital of its own to give it the standing which will enable it to collect capital belonging to others. But this it does not hoard. It only holds the funds with which it is entrusted till it can use them, and the use is found in the advances that it makes. Some of the deposits merely lie with the bank till the customer draws what he requires for his ordinary everyday wants. Some, the greater part by far, of the deposits enable the bank to make advances to men who employ the funds with which they are entrusted in reproductive industry, that is to say, in a manner which not only brings back a greater value than the amount originally lent to them, but assists the business development of the country by setting on foot and maintaining enterprises of a profitable description. It is possible that some part may be employed in loans required through extravagance on the part of the borrower, but these can only be a small proportion of the whole, as it is only through reproductive industry that the capital advanced by a banker can really be replaced. A loan sometimes, it is true, is repaid from the proceeds of the sale of a security, but this only means a transfer of capital from one hand to another; money that is not transferred in this way must be made by its owner. Granted that the security is complete, there is only one absolute rule as to loans if a bank desires to conduct its business on safe lines, that the advance should not be of fixed but of floating capital. Nothing seems simpler than such a business, but no business requires closer attention or more strong sense and prudence in its conduct. In other ways also, besides making loans, a well-conducted bank is of much service to the business prosperity of a country, as for example by providing facilities for the ready transmission of money from those who owe money to those to whom it is due. This is particularly obvious when the debtor lives in one town or district and the creditor in another at a considerable distance, but the convenience is very great under any circumstances. Where an easy method of transmission of cash does not exist, we become aware that a "rate of exchange" exists as truly between one place and another in the same country as between two places in different countries. The assistance that banking gives to the industries of a community, apart from these facilities, is constant and most valuable.

The way a bank thrives is explained by David Banking as an industry. Ricardo in his Proposals for an Economical and Secure Currency, where he mentions that a bank wouldn’t be created if it could only profit from its own capital. The real benefit of a bank to the community starts only when it uses other people's money. The money a bank manages comes from the deposits it receives and sometimes from the notes it issues, which is then loaned out to those who want to borrow and can prove they’re trustworthy. To operate successfully, a bank needs enough of its own capital to give it the credibility needed to attract funds from others. However, it doesn’t just hoard this money. It holds onto the funds it’s been entrusted with until it can use them, primarily through the loans it makes. Some deposits just sit in the bank until the customer withdraws what they need for daily expenses. A large portion of the deposits allows the bank to lend money to people who use those funds in productive industries, meaning they generate more value than what was initially lent and help develop profitable businesses in the country. While some loans might go to borrowers who are being extravagant, those make up only a small fraction, since the only way a bank can truly recover the capital it lends is through productive activities. Sometimes, loans are repaid from selling off a security, but that just shifts capital from one person to another; money that isn't interchanged this way has to be generated by its owner. Assuming the security is solid, there’s a fundamental principle for banks that want to operate safely: loans should be made with floating capital rather than fixed. It sounds straightforward, but no business requires more careful oversight and sound judgment than this. Additionally, aside from providing loans, a well-managed bank greatly benefits a country's economic prosperity by facilitating easy transfers of money from debtors to creditors. This is especially clear when the debtor lives in one town and the creditor is in another far away, but it’s useful in any situation. When there isn’t an easy way to transfer cash, we realize that a “rate of exchange” exists within the same country just as it does between different countries. The support provided by banks to a community's industries, beyond these facilities, is continuous and highly valuable.

With these preliminary remarks on some main features of the Historical development. business, we may pass on to a sketch of the history of modern banking. Banks in Europe from the 16th century onwards may be divided into two classes, the one described as "exchange banks," the other as "banks of deposits." These last are banks which, besides receiving deposits, make loans, and thus associate themselves with the trade and general industries of a country. The exchange banks included in former years institutions like the Bank of Hamburg and the Bank of Amsterdam. These were established to deal with foreign exchange and to facilitate trade with other countries. The others—founded at very different dates—were established as, or early became, banks of deposit, like the Bank of England, the Bank of Venice, the Bank of Sweden, the Bank of France, the Bank of Germany and others. Some reference to these will be made later. The exchange banks claim the first attention. Important as they were in their day, the period of their activity is now generally past, and the interest in their operations has become mainly historical.

With these initial comments on some key aspects of the Historical evolution. business, we can move on to an overview of the history of modern banking. Banks in Europe from the 16th century onward can be categorized into two types: "exchange banks" and "banks of deposits." The latter are banks that, in addition to accepting deposits, provide loans and thus connect themselves with the trade and general industries of a country. The exchange banks included institutions like the Bank of Hamburg and the Bank of Amsterdam in earlier times, which were set up to handle foreign exchange and facilitate trade with other nations. The other type—founded at various times—eventually became banks of deposit, such as the Bank of England, the Bank of Venice, the Bank of Sweden, the Bank of France, the Bank of Germany, and others. We'll refer to some of these later. The exchange banks deserve our primary focus. While they were significant in their era, their period of activity is mostly over now, and interest in their operations has largely become historical.

In one respect, and that a very important one, the business carried on by the exchange banks differed from banking as generally understood at the present time. No exchange bank had a capital of its own nor did it require any for the performance of the business. The object for which exchange banks were established was to turn the values with which they were entrusted into "current money," "bank money" as it was called, that is to say, into a currency which was accepted immediately by merchants without the necessity of testing the value of the coin or the bullion brought to them. The "value" they provided was equal to the "value" they received, the only difference being the amount of the small charge they made to their customers, who gained by dealing with them more than equivalent advantages.

In one important way, the way exchange banks operated was different from banking as we understand it today. No exchange bank had its own capital, nor did it need any to conduct its business. Exchange banks were created to convert the assets they managed into "current money," or "bank money," which meant a currency that merchants accepted right away without needing to check the value of the coins or bullion they were receiving. The "value" they provided was equal to the "value" they received; the only difference was the small fee they charged their customers, who benefited from dealing with them even more than the value they received.

Short notices of the Bank of Amsterdam, which was one of the most important, and of the Bank of Hamburg, which survived the longest, its existence not terminating till 1873, will suffice to explain the working of these institutions.

Short notices of the Bank of Amsterdam, which was one of the most important, and of the Bank of Hamburg, which lasted the longest, continuing until 1873, will be enough to explain how these institutions operated.

The Amsterdamsche Wisselbank, or exchange bank, known later as the Bank of Amsterdam, was established by the ordinance of the city of Amsterdam of 31st January 1609. The increased commerce of Holland, which made Amsterdam a leading city in international dealings, led to the establishment of this bank, to which any person might bring money or bullion for deposit, and might withdraw at pleasure the money or the worth of the bullion. The ordinance which established the bank further required that all bills of 600 gulden (£50), or upwards—this limit was, in 1643, lowered to 300 gulden (£25)—should be paid through the bank, or in other words, by the transfer of deposits or credits at the bank. These transfers came afterwards to be known as "bank money." The charge for making the transfers was the sole source of income to the bank. The bank was established without any capital of its own, being understood to have actually in its vaults the whole amount of specie for which "bank money" was outstanding. This regulation was not, however, strictly observed. Loans were made at various dates to the Dutch East India Company. In 1795 a report was issued showing that the city of Amsterdam was largely indebted to the bank, which held as security the obligations of the states of Holland and West Friesland. The debt was paid, but it was too late to revive the bank, and in 1820 "the establishment which for generations had held the leading place in European commerce ceased to exist." (See Chapters on the Theory and History of Banking, by Charles F. Dunbar, p. 105.)

The Amsterdamsche Wisselbank, or exchange bank, later known as the Bank of Amsterdam, was established by the ordinance of the city of Amsterdam on January 31, 1609. The growing trade in Holland, which turned Amsterdam into a key player in international commerce, led to the creation of this bank, where anyone could deposit money or bullion and withdraw it at their convenience. The ordinance that set up the bank also mandated that all bills of 600 gulden (£50) or more—this limit was lowered to 300 gulden (£25) in 1643—had to be paid through the bank, meaning by transferring deposits or credits at the bank. These transfers later became known as "bank money." The fees for these transfers were the only source of income for the bank. The bank was established without any capital of its own, as it was understood to hold the entire amount of specie for which "bank money" was outstanding in its vaults. However, this rule was not strictly followed. Loans were made on various occasions to the Dutch East India Company. In 1795, a report revealed that the city of Amsterdam owed a significant amount to the bank, which held as security the debts of the states of Holland and West Friesland. The debt was cleared, but it was too late to restore the bank, and in 1820, "the establishment which for generations had held the leading place in European commerce ceased to exist." (See Chapters on the Theory and History of Banking, by Charles F. Dunbar, p. 105.)

Similar banks had been established in Middelburg, (March 28th, 1616), in Hamburg (1619) and in Rotterdam (February 9th, 1635). Of these the Bank of Hamburg carried on much the largest business and survived the longest. It was not till the 15th of February 1873 that its existence was closed by the act of the German parliament which decreed that Germany should possess a gold standard, and thus removed those conditions of the local medium of exchange—silver coins of very different intrinsic values—whose circulation had provided an ample field for the operations of the bank. The business of the Bank of Hamburg had been conducted in absolute accordance with the regulations under which it was founded.

Similar banks were established in Middelburg (March 28th, 1616), in Hamburg (1619), and in Rotterdam (February 9th, 1635). Among these, the Bank of Hamburg was the most significant in terms of business and had the longest operation. It wasn’t until February 15, 1873, that its existence ended due to a decision by the German parliament, which established a gold standard for Germany. This move eliminated the conditions of the local currency—silver coins with varying intrinsic values—that had allowed the bank to operate effectively. The Bank of Hamburg conducted its business in full compliance with the regulations that established it.

The exchange banks were established to remedy the inconvenience to which merchants were subject through the uncertain value of the currency of other countries in reference to that of the city where the exchange bank carried on its business. The following quotation from Notes on Banking, written in 1873, explains the method of operation in Hamburg. "In this city, the most vigorous offshoot of the once powerful Hansa, the latest representative of the free commercial cities of medieval Europe, [v.03 p.0335]there still remains a representative of those older banks which were once of the highest importance in commercial affairs. Similar institutions greatly aided the prosperity of Venice, Genoa, Amsterdam and Nuremberg. The Bank of Hamburg is now the last survivor of these banks, whose business lay in the assistance of commerce, not by loans, but by the local manufacture, so to speak, of an international coinage. In a city of the highest rank of commercial activity, but greatly circumscribed in territory, continually receiving payments for merchandise in the coin of other countries, a common standard of value was a matter of primary necessity. The invention of bank money, that is, of a money of account which could be transferred at pleasure from one holder to another, enabled the trade of the place to be carried on without any of those hindrances to business which must have followed on the delay and expense attendant on the verification of various coins differing from each other in weight, intrinsic value, standard of purity of metal, in every point in fact in which coins can differ from each other. By supplying a currency of universal acceptation the Bank of Hamburg greatly contributed to the prosperity of that city." The regulations being strictly carried out, the currency was purely metallic; the "Mark Banco" being merely the representative of an equal value of silver.

The exchange banks were created to solve the problems faced by merchants due to the unstable value of foreign currencies compared to the local currency of the city where the exchange bank operated. The following quote from Notes on Banking, written in 1873, explains how things worked in Hamburg: "In this city, the most dynamic offshoot of the once-powerful Hansa, the latest representative of the free trading cities of medieval Europe, [v.03 p.0335]there still exists a representative of those older banks that were once crucial in commercial dealings. Similar institutions significantly contributed to the prosperity of Venice, Genoa, Amsterdam, and Nuremberg. The Bank of Hamburg is now the last remaining one of these banks, which aided commerce not through loans, but by essentially creating a local version of an international currency. In a city with high commercial activity but limited territory, which constantly received payments in foreign currency, a common standard of value was essential. The creation of bank money, or a money of account that could be easily transferred between holders, allowed the local trade to function without the obstacles that would arise from the delays and costs associated with verifying different coins that varied in weight, intrinsic value, and metal purity. By providing a universally accepted currency, the Bank of Hamburg greatly boosted the city’s prosperity." The regulations were strictly enforced, and the currency was purely metallic; the "Mark Banco" was simply a representative of an equal value of silver.

For the earliest example of a bank for the receipt of deposits carrying on a business on modern lines, we must turn, as in the case of the exchange banks, to a great commercial city of the middle ages. Private banking in Venice began as an adjunct of the business of the campsores or dealers in foreign moneys. "As early as 1270 it was deemed necessary to require them to give security to the government as the condition of carrying on their business, but it is not shown that they were then receiving deposits. In an act of the 24th of September 1318, however, entitled Bancherii scriptae dent plegiarias consulibus, the receipt of deposits by the campsores is recognized as an existing practice, and provision is made for better security for the depositors." From this act it becomes clear that between 1270 and 1318 the money-changers of Venice were becoming bankers, just as the same class of men became in Amsterdam a couple of centuries later, and as later still the goldsmiths in London.

For the earliest example of a bank that accepted deposits and operated on modern principles, we need to look, as with the exchange banks, to a major commercial city of the Middle Ages. Private banking in Venice started as a side business for the campsores, or dealers in foreign currencies. "As early as 1270, it was considered necessary to require them to provide security to the government in order to continue their business, but there is no evidence that they were actually receiving deposits at that time. However, in an act from September 24, 1318, titled Bancherii scriptae dent plegiarias consulibus, the acceptance of deposits by the campsores is acknowledged as a common practice, and measures are established to offer better security for the depositors." This act makes it clear that between 1270 and 1318, the money-changers in Venice were evolving into bankers, just as this same group of individuals did in Amsterdam a couple of centuries later and as the goldsmiths did in London even later.

Of the early banks in Europe, the bank in Venice, the Banco The first public bank in Europe. di Rialto, was established by the acts of the Venetian senate of 1584 and 1587. This appears to have been the first public bank in that city and in Europe. The senate by the act of the 3rd of May 1619[1] established by the side of the Banco di Rialto a second public bank known as the Banco Giro, or Banco del Giro, which ultimately became the only public bank of the city and was for generations famous throughout Europe as the Bank of Venice. Earlier than this the campsores or dealers in foreign moneys had carried on the business. The Bank of Venice (Banco del Giro) appears to have been called into existence by the natural developments of trade, but some banks have been established by governments and have been of great service to the development of the countries in which they have carried on their business. Of these, the Bank of Sweden (the Riksbank), established in 1656, is the earliest. This bank still exists and has always been the state bank of Sweden. It was founded by a Swede named Palmstruck, who also invented the use of the bank note—perhaps adapted for use in Europe is the better expression to employ, as notes were current in China about A.D. 800. The first bank note was issued by the Riksbank in 1658. An enquête made by the French government in 1729 recognizes the priority of Sweden in this matter, and declares the bank note to be an admirable Swedish invention, designed to facilitate commerce.

Of the early banks in Europe, the bank in Venice, the Banco The first public bank in Europe. di Rialto, was established by the Venetian senate in 1584 and 1587. This seems to have been the first public bank in both the city and Europe. The senate, by the act of May 3, 1619 [1], established alongside the Banco di Rialto a second public bank known as the Banco Giro, or Banco del Giro, which eventually became the only public bank in the city and was famous throughout Europe as the Bank of Venice. Before this, the campsores or foreign money dealers handled the business. The Bank of Venice (Banco del Giro) seems to have been created by the natural developments of trade, but some banks have been set up by governments and have greatly contributed to the growth of the countries where they operate. Among these, the Bank of Sweden (the Riksbank), established in 1656, is the earliest. This bank still exists and has always been the state bank of Sweden. It was founded by a Swede named Palmstruck, who also invented the use of the banknote—perhaps “adapted for use in Europe” is the more accurate phrase, as notes were already in circulation in China around CE 800. The first banknote was issued by the Riksbank in 1658. An enquête conducted by the French government in 1729 acknowledges Sweden’s priority in this matter and claims the banknote to be an excellent Swedish invention, created to facilitate commerce.

European Countries

European Nations

United Kingdom.—English banking may be traced back to the dealings in money carried on by the goldsmiths of London and thus certainly to the 16th century; but it has been so greatly influenced by the working of the Bank of England and by the Foundation of the Bank of England. acts of parliament connected with that institution, that a reference to this bank's foundation and development must precede any attempt at a detailed history of banking in the United Kingdom. The Bank of England was founded in 1694.[2] As in the case of some of the earlier continental banks, a loan to the government was the origin of its establishment. The loan, which was £1,200,000, was subscribed in little more than ten days, between Thursday, 21st June, and noon of Monday, 2nd July 1694. On Tuesday, 10th July, the subscribers appointed Sir John Houblon the governor, and Michael Godfrey (who was killed during the siege of Namur on the 17th of July 1695) deputy-governor. Michael Godfrey wrote a pamphlet explaining the purposes for which the bank was established and the use it would be to the country. The pamphlet supplies some curious illustrations of the dangers which some persons had imagined might arise from the establishment of the bank and its connexion with William III., deprecating the fear "lest it should hereafter joyn with the prince to make him absolute and so render parliaments useless."

United Kingdom.—English banking can be traced back to the money transactions carried out by London goldsmiths, definitely dating back to the 16th century. However, it has been heavily shaped by the operations of the Bank of England and by the Establishment of the Bank of England. acts of parliament related to that institution. Therefore, an overview of the foundation and development of this bank must come before any detailed history of banking in the United Kingdom. The Bank of England was established in 1694.[2] Similar to some of the earlier banks in continental Europe, its establishment began with a loan to the government. The loan, totaling £1,200,000, was raised in just over ten days, from Thursday, June 21, to noon on Monday, July 2, 1694. On Tuesday, July 10, the subscribers appointed Sir John Houblon as governor and Michael Godfrey (who was killed during the siege of Namur on July 17, 1695) as deputy-governor. Michael Godfrey wrote a pamphlet explaining the bank's purposes and how it would benefit the country. This pamphlet includes some interesting insights into the concerns some people had about the bank's establishment and its connection with William III., dismissing the worry "that it might later join with the prince to make him absolute and render parliaments useless."

The governor and the deputy-governor, having thus been appointed, the first twenty-four directors were elected on Wednesday, 11th July 1694. Two of them were brothers of the governor, Sir John Houblon. They were descended from James Houblon, a Flemish refugee who had escaped from the persecution of Alva. All the directors were men of high mercantile standing. The business of the bank was first carried on in the Mercers' chapel. It continued there till the 28th of September, when they moved to Grocers' Hall. They were tenants of the Grocers' Hall till 1732. The first stone of the building now occupied by the bank was laid on the 1st of August 1732. The bank has remained on the same site ever since. The structure occupied the space previously covered by the house and gardens of Sir John Houblon, the first governor, which had been bought for the purpose. Between 1764 and 1788 the wings were erected. In 1780 the directors, alarmed at the dangerous facilities which the adjacent church of St Christopher le Stocks might give to a mob, obtained parliamentary powers and acquired the fabric, on the site of which much of the present building stands. The structure was developed to its present form about the commencement of the 19th century.

The governor and the deputy-governor, having been appointed, the first twenty-four directors were elected on Wednesday, July 11, 1694. Two of them were brothers of the governor, Sir John Houblon. They were descendants of James Houblon, a Flemish refugee who had escaped from Alva's persecution. All the directors were prominent in the trading community. The bank originally operated in the Mercers' chapel. It remained there until September 28, when they moved to Grocers' Hall. They were tenants of Grocers' Hall until 1732. The first stone of the building currently used by the bank was laid on August 1, 1732. The bank has been at the same location since then. The structure stands where Sir John Houblon's house and gardens used to be, which he sold for this purpose. Between 1764 and 1788, the wings were added. In 1780, the directors, concerned about the potential dangers from the nearby church of St Christopher le Stocks attracting a mob, got parliamentary approval and bought the church, on the site of which much of the current building is located. The structure was developed into its present form around the beginning of the 19th century.

The bank commenced business with fifty-four assistants, the salaries of whom amounted to £4350. The total number employed in 1847 was upwards of nine hundred and their salaries exceeded £210,000. Mr Thomson Hankey stated that in 1867 upwards of one thousand persons were employed, and the salaries and wages amounted to nearly £260,000, besides pensions to superannuated clerks of about £20,000 more. The number of persons of all classes employed in 1906 (head office and eleven branches) was about 1400.

The bank started operations with fifty-four assistants, who earned a total of £4,350. By 1847, the workforce had grown to over nine hundred, with salaries surpassing £210,000. Mr. Thomson Hankey noted that in 1867, more than one thousand people were employed, and their combined salaries and wages were nearly £260,000, plus around £20,000 in pensions for retired clerks. In 1906, the total number of employees across the head office and eleven branches was approximately 1,400.

Originally established to advance the government a loan of £1,200,000, the management of the British national debt has been confided to the Bank of England from the date of its foundation, and it has remained the banker of the government ever since. The interest on the stock in which the debt is inscribed has always been paid by the bank, originally half-yearly, now quarterly, and the registration of all transfers of the stock itself is carried on by the bank, which assumes the responsibility of the correctness of these transfers. The dignity which the position of banker to the government gives; the monopoly granted to it of being the only joint-stock bank allowed to exist in England and Wales till 1826, while the liability of its shareholders was limited to the amount of their holdings, an advantage which alone of English banks it possessed till 1862; the privilege of issuing notes which since 1833 have been legal tender in England and Wales everywhere except at the bank itself; the fact that it is the banker of the other banks of the country and for many years had the control of far larger deposits than any one of them individually—all these privileges gave it early a pre-eminence which it still maintains, though more than one competitor now holds larger [v.03 p.0336]deposits, and though, collectively, the deposits of the other banks of the country which have offices in London many times overpass its own. Some idea of the strength of its position may be gained from the fact that stocks are now inscribed in the bank books to an amount exceeding 1250 millions sterling.

Originally set up to provide the government with a loan of £1,200,000, the management of the British national debt has been entrusted to the Bank of England since its inception, and it has remained the government's banker ever since. The bank has always paid the interest on the stock where the debt is recorded, initially on a semi-annual basis and now quarterly, and it handles all transfers of the stock itself, taking responsibility for the accuracy of these transfers. The prestige that comes with being the government's banker, the exclusive privilege it held of being the only joint-stock bank allowed to operate in England and Wales until 1826, while its shareholders' liability was limited to the amount they invested—a unique benefit among English banks until 1862—its ability to issue notes that have been legal tender in England and Wales since 1833, except at the bank itself, and the fact that it serves as the banker for other banks in the country and, for many years, managed larger deposits than any of them individually—these privileges conferred early dominance that it still maintains today, even though several competitors now hold larger deposits, and collectively, the deposits of other London banks far exceed its own. The strength of its position can be illustrated by the fact that stocks recorded in the bank's books now total over 1,250 million sterling.

In one sense, the power of the Bank of England is greater Bank Charter Act. now than ever. By the act of 1844, regulating the note-issue of the country, the Bank of England became the sole source from which legal tender notes can be obtained; a power important at all times, but pre-eminently so in times of pressure. The authority to supply the notes required, when the notes needed by the public exceed in amount the limit fixed by the act of 1844, was granted by the government at the request of the bank on three occasions only between 1844 and 1906. Hence the Bank of England becomes the centre of interest in times of pressure when a "treasury letter" permitting an excess issue is required, and holds then a power the force of which can hardly be estimated.

In a way, the power of the Bank of England is greater now than ever. Due to the 1844 act that regulates the country’s note issuance, the Bank of England became the only place where legal tender notes can be obtained; this power is crucial at all times, especially during crises. The government allowed the bank to issue more notes than the limit set by the 1844 act on only three occasions between 1844 and 1906. Therefore, the Bank of England becomes the center of attention during crises when a "treasury letter" to permit additional issuance is needed, holding a power that's hard to overstate.

One main feature of the act of 1844 was the manner in which the issue of notes was dealt with, as described by Sir Robert Peel in parliament on the 6th of May 1844:—"Two departments of the bank will be constituted: one for the issue of notes, the other for the transaction of the ordinary business of banking. The bullion now in the possession of the bank will be transferred to the issue department. The issue of notes will be restricted to an issue of £14,000,000 upon securities—the remainder being issued upon bullion and governed in amount by the fluctuations in the stock of bullion." The bank was required to issue weekly returns in a specified form (previously to the act of 1844 it was necessary only to publish every month a balance-sheet for the previous quarter), and the first of such returns was issued on the 7th of September 1844. The old form of return contained merely a statement of the liabilities and assets of the bank, but in the new form the balance-sheets of the Issue Department and the Banking Department are shown separately. A copy of the weekly return in both the old and new forms will be found in A History of the Bank of England, p. 290, by A. Andréadès (Eng. trans., 1909); see also R. H. I. Palgrave, Bank Rate and the Money Market, p. 297.

One key feature of the Act of 1844 was how the issuance of notes was managed, as explained by Sir Robert Peel in Parliament on May 6, 1844: "Two departments of the bank will be established: one for issuing notes and the other for handling regular banking operations. The bullion currently held by the bank will be moved to the issue department. The issuance of notes will be limited to £14,000,000 based on securities, with any additional issuance based on bullion and adjusted according to changes in the bullion stock." The bank was mandated to provide weekly returns in a specific format (prior to the Act of 1844, it only needed to publish a balance sheet every month for the previous quarter), and the first of these returns was released on September 7, 1844. The old format of return only included a summary of the bank's liabilities and assets, but the new format presented separate balance sheets for the Issue Department and the Banking Department. A copy of the weekly return in both the old and new formats can be found in A History of the Bank of England, p. 290, by A. Andréadès (Eng. trans., 1909); see also R. H. I. Palgrave, Bank Rate and the Money Market, p. 297.

One result of the division of the accounts of the bank into two departments is that, if through any circumstance the Bank of England be called on for a larger sum in notes or specie than the notes held in its banking department (technically spoken of as the "Reserve") amount to, permission has to be obtained from the government to "suspend the Bank Act" in order to allow the demand to be met, whatever the amount of specie in the "issue department" may be. Three times since the passing of the Bank Act—during the crises of 1847, 1857 and 1866—authority has been given for the suspension of that act. On one of these dates only, in 1857, the limits of the act were exceeded; on the other two occasions the fact that the permission had been given stayed the alarm. It should be remembered, whenever the act of 1844 is criticized, that since it came into force there has been no anxiety as to payment in specie of the note circulation; but the division of the specie held into two parts is an arrangement not without disadvantages. Bank rate. Certainly since the act of 1844 became law, the liability to constant fluctuations in the Bank's rate of discount—one main characteristic of the English money market—has greatly increased. To charge the responsibility of the increase in the number of those fluctuations on the Bank Act alone would not be justifiable, but the working of the act appears to have an influence in that direction, as the effect of the act is to cut the specie reserve held by the bank into two parts and to cause the smaller of these parts to receive the whole strain of any demands either for notes or for specie. Meanwhile the demands on the English money market are greater and more continuous than those on any other money market in the world. Of late years the changes in the bank rate have been frequent, and the fluctuations even in ordinary years very severe. From the day when the act came into operation in 1844, to the close of the year 1906, there had been more than 400 changes in the rate. The hopes which Sir Robert Peel expressed in 1844, that after the act came into force commercial crises would cease, have not been realized.

One outcome of splitting the bank's accounts into two departments is that if, for any reason, the Bank of England is asked for a larger amount in notes or cash than what is held in its banking department (known as the "Reserve"), it must get permission from the government to "suspend the Bank Act" in order to meet that demand, regardless of how much cash is in the "issue department." Since the Bank Act was passed, there have been three instances—during the crises of 1847, 1857, and 1866—where authorization was granted to suspend the act. On one of those occasions, in 1857, the limits of the act were actually exceeded; on the other two occasions, the granted permission helped ease the situation. It's important to note that when the act of 1844 is criticized, it should be remembered that since its implementation, there has been no worry about paying out cash for the note circulation. However, dividing the cash reserves into two parts has its drawbacks. Bank interest rate. Since the act became law in 1844, the tendency for constant fluctuations in the Bank's discount rate—a key feature of the English money market—has significantly increased. Blaming the rise in these fluctuations solely on the Bank Act wouldn't be fair, but the act does seem to contribute to this issue by splitting the bank's cash reserve and putting the burden of demand for notes or cash on the smaller part. Additionally, the demands on the English money market are greater and more persistent than in any other market worldwide. In recent years, changes in the bank rate have been frequent, with significant fluctuations even during normal years. From the day the act was enacted in 1844 until the end of 1906, there were over 400 changes in the rate. Sir Robert Peel's hopes in 1844 that commercial crises would end after the act's implementation have not come to fruition.

The number of changes in the bank rate from 1876[3] to 1906 in England, France, Germany, Holland and Belgium were as follows:—

The number of changes in the bank rate from 1876[3] to 1906 in England, France, Germany, Holland, and Belgium were as follows:—

England.

UK.

France.

France.

Germany.

Germany.

Holland.

Netherlands.

Belgium.

Belgium.

183

183

27

27

110

110

55

55

77

77

There has been frequent discussion among bankers and occasionally with the government as to the advantage it might be to grant the Bank of England an automatic power to augment the note issue on securities when necessary, similar to that possessed by the Bank of Germany (Reichsbank). One of the hindrances to the success of such a plan has been that the government, acting on the advice of the treasury, required an extremely high rate of interest, of which it would reap the advantage, to be paid on the advances made under these conditions. Those who made these suggestions did not bear in mind that the mere fact of so high a rate of interest being demanded intensifies the panic, a high rate being associated as a rule with risks in business. The object of the arrangement made between the Reichsbank and the treasury of the empire of Germany is a different one—to provide the banking accommodation required and to prevent panic, hence a rate of only 5% has been generally charged, though in 1899 the rate was 7% for a short time. As is often the case in business, a moderate rate has been accompanied by higher profit. The duty on the extra issue between 1881, when the circulation of the Bank of Germany first exceeded the authorized limit, and the close of the year 1906 amounted to £839,052. Thus a considerable sum was provided for the relief of taxation, while business proceeded on its normal course. The proposal made by Mr Lowe (afterwards Lord Sherbrooke) in 1873 was to charge 12%, a rate which presupposes panic. Hence the negotiations came to nothing. The act of 1844 remains unaltered. The issue on securities allowed by it to the Bank of England was originally £14,000,000. This has since been increased under the provisions of the act to £18,450,000 (29th March 1901). Hence against the notes issued by the bank less gold by £4,450,000 is now held by the bank than would have been the case had the arrangements as to the securities remained as they were in 1844.

There has been frequent discussion among bankers and occasionally with the government about the benefits of giving the Bank of England the automatic ability to increase its note issuance based on securities when needed, similar to the powers held by the Bank of Germany (*Reichsbank*). One of the obstacles to this plan's success has been that the government, following the treasury's advice, insisted on a very high interest rate, from which it would benefit, to be charged on the advances made under these conditions. Those making these suggestions didn’t consider that such a high-interest rate tends to heighten panic, as high rates are typically linked to business risks. The goal of the agreement between the *Reichsbank* and the German empire's treasury is different—it's to provide the necessary banking support and prevent panic, so they generally charge only 5%, although in 1899 the rate was briefly 7%. As is often seen in business, a moderate rate has led to higher profits. The total duty on the extra issuance between 1881, when the Bank of Germany's circulation first exceeded the authorized limit, and the end of 1906 was £839,052. This significant amount helped ease the tax burden while business continued normally. The proposal made by Mr. Lowe (later Lord Sherbrooke) in 1873 suggested a 12% rate, which implies panic. Therefore, the negotiations failed. The act of 1844 remains unchanged. The securities issuance allowed by it to the Bank of England was originally £14,000,000. This has since been increased to £18,450,000 (on 29th March 1901). Thus, the bank now holds £4,450,000 less in gold against the notes it has issued than it would have if the securities arrangements had stayed the same as in 1844.

The Bank of England has, from the date of its establishment, possessed a practical, though perhaps not an absolutely legal, monopoly of issuing notes in London. It became gradually surrounded by a circle of private banks, some of considerable power.

The Bank of England has had a practical, although not completely legal, monopoly on issuing notes in London since it was established. Over time, it became encircled by several private banks, some of which were quite powerful.

The state papers included in F. G. Hilton Price's Handbook Early English banking. of London Bankers (1876) contain some of the earliest records about the establishment of banking in England. The first of these is a petition, printed in the original Italian, to Queen Elizabeth, of Christopher Hagenbuck and his partners in November 1581, representing "that he had found out a method and form in which it will be possible to institute an office into which shall enter every year a very large sum of money without expense to your Majesty," so "that not only your Majesty will be able to be always provided with whatever notable sum of money your Majesty may wish, but by this means your State and people also; and it shall keep the country in abundance and remove the extreme usuries that devour your Majesty and your people." Hagenbuck proposed to explain his plan on condition that he should receive "6% every year of the whole mass of money" received by the office for twenty years. The queen agreed "to grant to the said Christopher and partners 4% for a term of twenty years, and to confirm the said grant under the great seal." The document is signed by Francis Walsingham, but nothing further appears to have come of it. When we compare the date of this document with that of the establishment of the Banco della Piazza di Rialto at Venice, it is not unlikely that the idea of the establishment of a bank was floating in the minds of people connected with business and had become familiar to Hagenbuck from commerce with Venice. Other state papers in 1621 and 1622 and again in 1662 and 1666 contain somewhat similar proposals which however were never carried into practice.

The state papers included in F. G. Hilton Price's Handbook Early English banking. of London Bankers (1876) contain some of the earliest records about the establishment of banking in England. The first of these is a petition, printed in the original Italian, to Queen Elizabeth from Christopher Hagenbuck and his partners in November 1581, stating "that he had discovered a method and structure through which it would be possible to set up an office that would receive a very large sum of money each year without any cost to your Majesty," so "that not only will your Majesty always have as much money as desired, but so will your State and people as well; and it shall keep the country prosperous and eliminate the extreme usuries that are draining your Majesty and your people." Hagenbuck proposed to explain his plan on the condition that he would receive "6% every year of the total money" received by the office for twenty years. The queen agreed "to grant to the said Christopher and partners 4% for a term of twenty years, and to confirm the said grant under the great seal." The document is signed by Francis Walsingham, but it seems nothing further came of it. When we compare the date of this document with the establishment of the Banco della Piazza di Rialto in Venice, it seems likely that the idea of starting a bank was circulating among business people and may have become familiar to Hagenbuck through trade with Venice. Other state papers from 1621 and 1622, and again in 1662 and 1666, contain somewhat similar proposals that were never implemented.

The little London Directory, 1677, contains a list of goldsmiths mentioned as keeping "running cashes." Of these firms described in 1677, five houses were carrying on business in 1876. Three of these, or firms immediately descended from them, Child & Co. of Temple Bar, Martin & Co. of Lombard Street (as Martin's Bank, Ltd.), and Hoare & Co. of Fleet Street, are still carrying on business. Barnetts, Hoare & Co. and Willis, Percival & Co. have been absorbed since 1876, the first by Lloyds Bank (1884), the second by the Capital and Counties (1878). Many of the goldsmiths carried on a considerable business. Thus the books of Edward Blackwell, who was an eminent goldsmith and banker in the reign of Charles II., show that the king himself, the queen mother, Henrietta Maria, James, duke of York, the prince of Orange, Samuel Pepys, the East India Company, the Goldsmiths' Company and other city companies did business with him. Sir John Houblon, the first governor of the Bank of England, kept an account with Blackwell, who was, however, ruined by the closing of the exchequer in 1672. But his son married into the family of Sir Francis Child, and his grandsons became partners in Child's Bank.

The little London Directory, 1677, includes a list of goldsmiths noted for keeping "running cashes." Of the firms listed in 1677, five were still operating in 1876. Three of these, or companies directly descended from them—Child & Co. of Temple Bar, Martin & Co. of Lombard Street (now Martin's Bank, Ltd.), and Hoare & Co. of Fleet Street—are still in business today. Barnetts, Hoare & Co. and Willis, Percival & Co. were absorbed after 1876, with the first being taken over by Lloyds Bank in 1884 and the second by Capital and Counties in 1878. Many of the goldsmiths conducted significant business. For instance, the records of Edward Blackwell, a prominent goldsmith and banker during Charles II's reign, reveal that King Charles himself, the queen mother Henrietta Maria, James, Duke of York, the Prince of Orange, Samuel Pepys, the East India Company, the Goldsmiths' Company, and other city companies all did business with him. Sir John Houblon, the first governor of the Bank of England, also had an account with Blackwell, who was eventually bankrupted by the closure of the exchequer in 1672. However, his son married into Sir Francis Child's family, and his grandsons became partners in Child's Bank.

[v.03 p.0337]

[v.03 p.0337]

Besides the banks in London already mentioned, one in the provinces claims to have been established before the Bank of England. Smiths' of Nottingham, since amalgamated with the Union of London Bank, is stated to have been founded in 1688. Others also claim considerable antiquity. The old Bank of Bristol (Bailey, Cave & Co.) was founded in 1750; the business amalgamated with Prescott & Co., Ltd., of London. The Hull Old Bank (Pease & Co.) dated from 1754; this business also still continues (amalgamated, 1894, with the York Union Banking Co., Ltd., and since with Barclay & Co., Ltd.). The banks of Gurney & Co., established at the end of the 18th century in the eastern counties, have with numerous other banks of similar standing amalgamated with the firm of Barclay & Co., Ltd., of Lombard Street.

Besides the banks in London already mentioned, one in the provinces claims to have been established before the Bank of England. Smiths' of Nottingham, which has since merged with the Union of London Bank, is said to have been founded in 1688. Others also claim to be quite old. The old Bank of Bristol (Bailey, Cave & Co.) was founded in 1750; it merged with Prescott & Co., Ltd., of London. The Hull Old Bank (Pease & Co.) dates back to 1754; this business is still operating (merged in 1894 with the York Union Banking Co., Ltd., and later with Barclay & Co., Ltd.). The banks of Gurney & Co., established at the end of the 18th century in the eastern counties, have merged with numerous other banks of similar age to form the firm of Barclay & Co., Ltd., on Lombard Street.

The business of banking had been carried on by the goldsmiths of the city, who took deposits from the time of James I. onwards, and thus established "deposit-banking" as early as that reign. This is described in a pamphlet published in 1676, entitled The Mystery of the New-Fashioned Goldsmiths or Bankers Discovered, quoted by Adam Anderson in his History of the Great Commercial Interests of the British Empire, vol. ii. p. 402. During the Civil War "the goldsmiths or new-fashioned bankers began to receive the rents of gentlemen's estates remitted to town, and to allow them and others who put cash into their hands some interest for it, if it remained but for a single month in their hands, or even a lesser time. This was a great allurement for people to put their money into their hands, which would bear interest till the day they wanted it. And they could also draw it out by £100 or £50, &c., at a time, as they wanted it, with infinitely less trouble than if they had lent it out on either real or personal security. The consequence was that it quickly brought a great quantity of cash into their hands; so that the chief or greatest of them were now enabled to supply Cromwell with money in advance on the revenues as his occasion required, upon great advantage to themselves."

The banking industry had been run by the goldsmiths of the city, who accepted deposits since the time of James I, thereby establishing "deposit-banking" as early as his reign. This is detailed in a pamphlet published in 1676, titled The Mystery of the New-Fashioned Goldsmiths or Bankers Discovered, referenced by Adam Anderson in his History of the Great Commercial Interests of the British Empire, vol. ii. p. 402. During the Civil War, the goldsmiths or new-fashioned bankers began accepting the rents from gentlemen's estates sent to town and offered them and others a return on their cash even if it was held for just a month or less. This was a significant incentive for people to deposit their money, which would earn interest until they needed it. They could also withdraw it in amounts like £100 or £50 as needed, with much less hassle than if they had lent it out secured by either real or personal guarantees. As a result, this quickly generated a large amount of cash in their possession, enabling the most prominent among them to provide Cromwell with money upfront based on the revenues as he needed, greatly benefiting themselves.

The Bank of England, as stated before, was incorporated by the act of 1694. The position of the other banks at that time was defined by that act and the act of 1697, which declared that no bank, that is, no joint-stock bank, was "to be established within England during the continuance of the Bank of England," and also by the act of 1708, which provided that "during the continuance of the Bank of England, no company or partnership exceeding six persons in England" should "borrow, owe or take up any sum or sums of money on their bills or notes payable on demand or at any less time than six months from the borrowing thereof." This was confirmed by the act of 1800. No change of importance was made till the act of 1826, which prohibited "bank notes under £5," and the second Banking Act of that year which allowed the establishment of co-partnerships of more than six persons, which necessarily were joint-stock companies, beyond 65 m. from London. The act of 1833 allowed the establishment of joint-stock banks within the 65 m. limit, and took away various restrictions of the amounts of notes for less than £50. But the power of issuing notes was not allowed to joint-stock banks within the 65 m. radius.

The Bank of England, as mentioned earlier, was established by the act of 1694. The status of other banks at that time was defined by that act and the act of 1697, which stated that no bank, meaning no joint-stock bank, was "to be established within England during the existence of the Bank of England," and also by the act of 1708, which stipulated that "during the existence of the Bank of England, no company or partnership with more than six people in England" should "borrow, owe, or take up any sum or sums of money on their bills or notes payable on demand or at any time shorter than six months from the borrowing." This was confirmed by the act of 1800. There wasn't any significant change until the act of 1826, which banned "bank notes under £5," and the second Banking Act of that year, which permitted the establishment of partnerships with more than six people, which were inevitably joint-stock companies, beyond 65 miles from London. The act of 1833 allowed the creation of joint-stock banks within the 65-mile limit and removed various restrictions on note amounts for less than £50. However, the power to issue notes was not granted to joint-stock banks within the 65-mile radius.

In the early days in England, issuing notes formed, as Bagehot says in his Lombard Street, the introduction to the system of deposit-banking—so much so, that a bank which had not the power of issuing notes could scarcely exist out of London.

In the early days in England, issuing notes was, as Bagehot mentions in his Lombard Street, the beginning of the deposit-banking system—so much so that a bank without the ability to issue notes could hardly survive outside of London.

Bank notes in England originated in goldsmiths' notes. Bank notes. Goldsmiths received deposits of moneys and gave notes or receipts for such moneys payable on demand. The London bankers continued to give their customers notes or deposit-receipts for the sums left by them until about 1781, when in lieu of such notes they gave them books of cheques. Before the invention of cheque-books, the practice of issuing notes was considered so essentially the main feature of banking, that a prohibition of issue was considered an effectual bar against banking. Accordingly the prohibitory clause in the act of 6 Anne, c. 50, 1707 (in Record edition), which was repeated in the Bank of England Act 1708, 7 Anne, c. 30, § 66 (in Record edition), prohibiting more than six persons from issuing promissory notes, was intended to prevent any bank being formed with more than six partners, and was so understood at the time; and it did have the effect of preventing any joint-stock bank being formed.

Bank notes in England started as goldsmiths' notes. Banknotes. Goldsmiths accepted deposits of money and issued notes or receipts that were payable on demand. London bankers continued to provide their customers with notes or deposit receipts for the amounts they left until around 1781, when instead of these notes, they began giving them checkbooks. Before checkbooks were invented, the practice of issuing notes was seen as a central aspect of banking, so not allowing banks to issue notes was viewed as a significant barrier to banking. Therefore, the prohibition in the act of 6 Anne, c. 50, 1707 (in Record edition), which was repeated in the Bank of England Act 1708, 7 Anne, c. 30, § 66 (in Record edition), that prevented more than six people from issuing promissory notes, was meant to stop any bank from being established with more than six partners, and this was understood at the time; it effectively prevented the formation of any joint-stock banks.

The prohibition, as already related, was modified in the year 1826 and removed in 1833. Even then the privilege of limitation of liability was not permitted to any other bank but the Bank of England. The result was that when joint-stock banks were first formed many persons of good means were kept back from becoming shareholders, that is to say partners, in banks. For up to the date of the act of 1862 permitting "limited liability," every shareholder in a joint-stock bank was liable to the extent of the whole of his means (see the article Company). Even as late as 1858 when the Western Bank of Scotland and 1878 when the City of Glasgow Bank failed, very great hardship was inflicted on many persons who had trusted with over confidence to the management of those banks. The failure of the City of Glasgow Bank was the cause of the Companies Act of 1879, passed to enable unlimited companies to adopt limited liability. In limited companies the shareholder who has paid up the nominal amount of his holding is not liable for any further amount, unless the company issues bank notes, in which case the shareholders are liable in the same way as if the company were registered as an unlimited company. The facilities allowed by this act were used by almost every joint-stock bank in the United Kingdom except those banks which were at that date limited by charter or by special act.

The prohibition, as previously mentioned, was changed in 1826 and lifted in 1833. Even then, the privilege of limited liability was not allowed for any bank except the Bank of England. As a result, when joint-stock banks were first established, many wealthy individuals were discouraged from becoming shareholders, or partners, in banks. Until the 1862 act that allowed "limited liability," every shareholder in a joint-stock bank was fully liable for their entire wealth (see the article Business). Even as late as 1858, when the Western Bank of Scotland failed, and 1878, when the City of Glasgow Bank collapsed, many people suffered significant hardship because they had overly trusted the management of those banks. The failure of the City of Glasgow Bank prompted the Companies Act of 1879, which was created to allow unlimited companies to adopt limited liability. In limited companies, a shareholder who has paid the nominal amount of their shares is not responsible for any additional amount, unless the company issues bank notes. In that case, the shareholders are liable just as if the company were registered as an unlimited company. The provisions of this act were utilized by almost every joint-stock bank in the United Kingdom, except those banks that were limited by charter or specific act at that time.

To return to the early history of banking—thus, as no bank Private banks. could be formed with more than six partners during the whole of the period from 1694 to 1826 and 1833, the majority of the banks formed throughout England and Wales for more than a century were necessarily small and usually isolated firms. Further, when a partner died, his capital not infrequently went out of the business; then a fresh partner with sufficient means had to be found, constant change was the result, and confidence, "a plant of slow growth," could not thrive, except in those instances when a son or a relation filled the vacancy.

To go back to the early days of banking—since no bank Private banks. could have more than six partners from 1694 to 1826 and 1833, most banks established in England and Wales for over a century were small and often independent businesses. Additionally, when a partner passed away, their capital frequently left the business; then, a new partner with enough resources had to be found, leading to constant changes, and trust, "a plant of slow growth," struggled to flourish, except in cases where a son or a relative took over the role.

The banks in the country districts had frequently branches in the small market-towns close to them; those in London had never more than one office. These banks were sometimes powerful and generally well managed, a considerable number being established by members of the Society of Friends.

The banks in the rural areas often had branches in the small market towns nearby; those in London usually only had one office. These banks were sometimes influential and generally well-run, with a significant number founded by members of the Society of Friends.

The restriction of partners in private banks to the number of six continued till 1862. By the act of that year they were allowed to be ten. This power, however, did not extend to issuing private banks, which were restricted to six partners as before. The power of increasing bank partnerships to ten has been made but little use of. The difficulties of carrying on business on a large scale by private firms were augmented by certain legal technicalities which practically rendered large private banks impossible in ordinary circumstances. Hence banking business did not begin to assume its present form till almost half-way through the 19th century. The gradual change followed the passing of the acts of 1826-1833, of 1844-1845, of 1862 and of 1879. Incidentally the act of 1844 had an unexpected influence on the constitution of the banking system. After favouring the existence of small banks for many years, it gradually led, as the time arrived when the establishment of large and powerful banks in England and Wales became necessary, to their formation. No new bank of issue whatever was allowed to be established—restrictions were placed on the English issuing banks—private issuing banks with not more than six partners were allowed to remain, to amalgamate with other private issuing banks and to retain their joint issues. The joint-stock banks which possessed issues were also allowed to continue these, but when two joint-stock banks amalgamated, the continuing bank only retained its issue. Also when a private issuing bank was formed into or joined a joint-stock bank, the issue lapsed.

The limitation on the number of partners in private banks remained at six until 1862, when it was increased to ten. However, this change didn’t apply to new private banks, which continued to be limited to six partners as before. The option to expand partnerships to ten has rarely been utilized. The challenges of running a large business as a private firm were made worse by certain legal complexities that effectively made large private banks impractical under normal conditions. As a result, the banking industry didn't really take its current shape until nearly the middle of the 19th century. This gradual shift followed the enactment of the laws of 1826-1833, 1844-1845, 1862, and 1879. Interestingly, the 1844 act had an unforeseen effect on the banking system's structure. After supporting the existence of small banks for many years, it gradually led to the creation of larger, more powerful banks in England and Wales when the need arose. No new issuing banks were permitted to be established—there were restrictions on English issuing banks—private issuing banks with no more than six partners were allowed to remain, merge with other private issuing banks, and keep their combined issues. Joint-stock banks that had issues were also permitted to maintain them, but when two joint-stock banks merged, only the continuing bank kept its issue. Additionally, when a private issuing bank was formed into or joined a joint-stock bank, its issue would lapse.

The greater number of the provincial banks in England and Wales had been banks of issue up to 1844. The act of 1844 [v.03 p.0338]restricted their power of issuing notes, which at that date and even subsequently continued to be of importance to them, in such a manner that, as Sir R. H. Inglis Palgrave stated in giving evidence before the committee of the House of Commons at the banking inquiry of 1875, these banks possessed in their issues a property they could use, but were not able to sell. The statistics forming part of Appendix 14 to the report of the select committee of the House of Commons on banks of issue (1875) give interesting information as to the proportion of notes in circulation to the deposits of banks in various districts of the country and at various dates. The statements were supplied by twenty-one banks, some in agricultural districts, some in places where manufactures flourished, some in mixed districts, commercial and agricultural, or industrial and manufacturing. In all of these, the inquiry being carried as far back as 1844, the proportion of the circulation to the banking deposits had greatly diminished in recent years. In several cases the deposits had increased three-fold in the time. In one case it was five times as large, in another nearly seven times, in another nearly twelve and a half times. The proportion of the circulation to the deposits had very largely diminished in that time. In one instance, from being about one-third of the deposits, at which proportion it had remained for five years consecutively, it fell to 9% at the end of the term. In another from being 22% it had diminished to 1½% of the total. In all cases where the detail was given it had diminished greatly.

Most of the provincial banks in England and Wales had been banks that issued currency up until 1844. The legislation from 1844 [v.03 p.0338]limited their ability to issue notes, which was still significant for them at that time and later on. As Sir R. H. Inglis Palgrave noted while testifying before the House of Commons committee during the banking inquiry of 1875, these banks had assets in their issued notes that they could utilize but weren’t able to sell. The statistics included in Appendix 14 of the House of Commons select committee report on banks of issue (1875) provide valuable insights into the ratio of notes in circulation to the deposits of banks in various regions and at different times. The data was provided by twenty-one banks, some located in agricultural areas, others in manufacturing hubs, and some in mixed commercial and agricultural or industrial and manufacturing regions. Across all these banks, the inquiry, which dates back to 1844, revealed that the ratio of currency in circulation to banking deposits had significantly declined in recent years. In several instances, deposits had increased three times over during that period. In one case, they were five times larger, in another almost seven times, and in another nearly twelve and a half times larger. The ratio of currency circulation to deposits had decreased considerably over time. In one example, it dropped from around one-third of the deposits—where it had stayed for five consecutive years—to 9% by the end of the period. In another, it fell from 22% down to 1½% of the total. In all cases where specific details were provided, the decline was substantial.

The Bank Act of 1844 was arranged with the intention of concentrating the note issues on the Bank of England in order to secure the monopoly of that bank as the one issuer in England and Wales. The result was that nearly all the provincial banks in England had by 1906 lost the right of issue. Doubtless all were destined to do so before long, a result by which banking in England and the industries of the country must lose the advantage which the local issues have been to Scotland and Ireland. Had the English country banks been allowed, as the Scottish banks were, to associate together and to retain their issues, powerful banks would many years since have been established throughout England and Wales, and the amalgamations of recent years would have been carried through at a much earlier date, and on terms much more favourable to the public.

The Bank Act of 1844 was designed to concentrate note issuance with the Bank of England to maintain its monopoly as the sole issuer in England and Wales. As a result, almost all the provincial banks in England had lost their right to issue notes by 1906. It was likely that all were bound to lose this right eventually, leading to a situation where banking in England and the country's industries would miss out on the advantages local issues had given Scotland and Ireland. If the English country banks had been allowed, like the Scottish banks, to partner up and keep their issuance, strong banks could have been established across England and Wales many years ago, and the recent mergers could have occurred much earlier and under terms more favorable to the public.

No security was ever required to be given for the local issues Security of note issue. in the United Kingdom. The provisions of the acts of 1844-1845 which compel the Irish and Scottish banks to hold specie against the notes issued beyond the legal limit, do not make the coin held a security for them. The legislation of 1879 which made the note issues a first charge, with unlimited liability, on the total assets of the joint-stock banks which accepted the principle of limited liability for the rest of their business, has been the only recognition by the state of the duty to the note-holders of rendering them secure. It has been a real disadvantage to England that this duty has never been sufficiently recognized, and that the provincial note issue, which is a very convenient power for a bank to possess, and incidentally a considerable advantage to its customers, has been swept away without any attempt being made to remedy its deficiencies. There may be objections raised to a note circulation secured by the bonds of the government, but the security of the note issues of the national banks of the United States made against such bonds, has scarcely ever been questioned.

No security was ever needed for the local issues Note issue security. in the United Kingdom. The rules from the acts of 1844-1845 that require Irish and Scottish banks to hold actual cash against the notes they issue beyond the legal limit don’t treat the cash held as a security for them. The legislation from 1879, which made the note issues a top priority, with unlimited liability, on the total assets of the joint-stock banks that accepted limited liability for their other business, has been the only acknowledgment by the government of the responsibility to make note-holders secure. It has been a significant drawback for England that this responsibility has never been fully acknowledged, and that the local note issue, which is a very handy power for a bank to have, and also a considerable benefit to its customers, has been eliminated without any effort to fix its shortcomings. There may be objections to a note circulation backed by government bonds, but the security of the note issues of the national banks of the United States, which are backed by such bonds, has rarely been questioned.

A different policy was followed by Sir Robert Peel in Scotland and in Ireland from that which he established in England. By the acts of 1844-1845 the Scottish and Irish banks were allowed to exceed their authorized issues on holding specie to the amount of the excess, and no restrictions were placed on amalgamations among banks in these countries. In Scotland and in Ireland notes for less than £5 continued to be allowed. The result has been that the ten large banks in Scotland, and six of the nine banks in Ireland, possess the power of issuing notes. The large proportion of local branches in these countries has been greatly assisted by this power.

A different approach was taken by Sir Robert Peel in Scotland and Ireland compared to what he established in England. According to the acts of 1844-1845, Scottish and Irish banks were allowed to issue more than their authorized amount as long as they held enough specie to cover the excess, and there were no limits on bank mergers in these regions. In Scotland and Ireland, notes worth less than £5 were still permitted. As a result, the ten major banks in Scotland and six out of the nine banks in Ireland have the ability to issue notes. This power has significantly supported the large number of local branches in these areas.

Originally, besides the Bank of England, nearly all the provincial Amounts in circulation. banks in England and Wales possessed the privilege of issue. These banks continued their operations as previously during the time while the Bank Act was discussed in parliament. When the arrangements which that act created were made public, nine banks, of which eight were private and one was a joint-stock bank, ceased to issue their notes prior to the 12th of October 1844, when the act came into operation. Of these, the Western District Joint-Stock Banking Co. was dissolved, one of the private banks was closed, the remaining seven issued Bank of England notes and were allowed certain privileges for doing this. By the act of 1844 the maximum circulation of the English issuing banks was fixed at the average circulation of the twelve weeks before the 27th of April 1844.

Originally, apart from the Bank of England, almost all the regional banks in England and Wales had the right to issue banknotes. These banks continued their operations as usual while the Bank Act was being discussed in Parliament. When the provisions of that act were made public, nine banks—eight were private and one was a joint-stock bank—stopped issuing their own notes before October 12, 1844, when the act went into effect. Among these, the Western District Joint-Stock Banking Co. was dissolved, one private bank shut down, and the remaining seven began issuing Bank of England notes and were granted certain privileges for doing so. The 1844 act set the maximum circulation for the English issuing banks at the average amount in circulation over the twelve weeks prior to April 27, 1844.

The number of the banks to which the privilege of circulation was then allowed and the amount of notes permitted were, in England:—

The number of banks that were allowed to circulate money and the amount of notes permitted were, in England:—

207 private banks with an authorized issue of

207 private banks with an authorized issue of

£5,153,417

£5.15 million

  72 joint-stock banks with an authorized issue of

72 joint-stock banks with an authorized issue of

3,478,230

3.48 million

£8,631,647

£8.6 million

The actual circulation of the country in October 1844 was as follows:—

The actual circulation of the country in October 1844 was as follows:—

Notes in Circulation.—The monthly return of the circulation ending the 12th of October 1844 (stamps and taxes, 25th October);

Notes in Circulation.—The monthly report on circulation ending October 12, 1844 (stamps and taxes, October 25);

England.

England.

Bank of England

Bank of England

£20,228,800

£20.2 million

Private banks

Private banks

4,674,162

4,674,162

Joint-stock banks

Shareholder banks

3,331,516

3.3 million


Scotland.

Chartered, private and joint-stock banks

Chartered, private, and commercial banks

2,987,665

2,987,665


Ireland.

Bank of Ireland

Bank of Ireland

3,597,850

3.6 million

Private and joint-stock banks

Private and public banks

2,456,261

2,456,261

Total         

Total

£37,276,254

£37.3 million

In May 1907 the number and amounts were reduced to:—

In May 1907, the numbers and amounts were decreased to:—

 

Authorized Issue.

Authorized Release.

Actual Issue.

Real Problem.

12 private banks

12 private banks

£482,744

£482,744

£122,536

£122,536

17 joint-stock banks

17 public limited banks

1,084,836

1,084,836

437,693

437,693

The reason why the actual circulation of these banks is so far below the authorized issue is that under existing circumstances their circulation can only extend over a very limited area. The notes of country banks are now almost unknown except in the immediate neighbourhood of the places where they are issued; though they may all be payable in London, yet there is often considerable difficulty in getting them cashed.

The reason why these banks' actual circulation is so much lower than the approved amount is that, under current conditions, their circulation can only cover a very small area. The notes from country banks are nearly unknown outside the immediate neighborhoods where they are issued; even though they can be cashed in London, there is often a significant challenge in getting them exchanged for money.

The average circulation in 1906 was as follows:—

The average circulation in 1906 was as follows:—

Bank of England

Bank of England

£28,890,000

£28.89 million

Private banks

Private banks

124,000

124,000

Joint-stock banks

Investment banks

429,000

429K

                    Total in England

Total in England

£29,443,000

£29.44 million

Scotland

Scotland

7,477,000

7.5 million

Ireland

Ireland

6,452,000

6.45 million

                    Total in United Kingdom

Total in the UK

£43,372,000

£43.37 million

This shows an apparent increase of more than £6,000,000 since 1844. The decrease of the country circulation in England and the increase of the Scottish and Irish circulations may be set off against each other. The increase is mainly in the notes of the Bank of England. In 1844 the number of banking offices in England and Wales was 976, while in 1906 there were more than 5880. Each of these offices must hold some till-money, and of this Bank of England notes almost always form a part. Hence it is probable that a large part of the increase in the circulation of the Bank of England since 1844 is held in the tills of the banks in England and Wales, and that the active note circulation of the United Kingdom is but little larger than it was.

This shows a clear increase of over £6,000,000 since 1844. The drop in currency circulation in England can be balanced against the rise in circulation in Scotland and Ireland. The increase is largely due to the notes from the Bank of England. In 1844, there were 976 banking offices in England and Wales, while by 1906, that number had grown to over 5,880. Each of these offices needs to keep some cash on hand, and Bank of England notes are usually a part of that. Therefore, it's likely that a significant portion of the increase in the circulation of the Bank of England since 1844 is held in the tills of banks in England and Wales, and that the actual active note circulation in the United Kingdom is only slightly higher than it was.

It may be added that the government received from the note circulation for a typical year (ending 5th of April 1904), out of the profits of issue (Bank of England) £184,930, 2s. 2d., and also composition for the duties on the bills and notes of the banks of England and Ireland and of country bankers, £120,768, 18s. 6d.

It can be mentioned that the government received from note circulation for a typical year (ending April 5, 1904), from the profits of issuing (Bank of England) £184,930, 2s. 2d., and also payments for the duties on the bills and notes of the banks of England and Ireland and of country bankers, £120,768, 18s. 6d.

In 1906 the banking business of England was carried on practically by about ten private and sixty joint-stock banks of which more than one was properly a private firm under a joint-stock form of organization. Though the number of individual banks had diminished, the offices had greatly increased.

In 1906, the banking industry in England was mainly run by around ten private banks and sixty joint-stock banks, with more than a few actually being private firms organized as joint-stock companies. Although the number of individual banks had decreased, the number of offices had significantly increased.

The records of the numbers of banks in the United Kingdom have up to quite recent years been very imperfect. Such as exist were made by individual observers. The banks of England and Wales are believed to have been 350 in number in 1792. Those registered from 1826 to 1842 were:—

The records of the number of banks in the United Kingdom have been quite incomplete until very recently. The data that do exist were gathered by individual observers. It is believed that there were about 350 banks in England and Wales in 1792. The banks registered from 1826 to 1842 were:—

[v.03 p.0339]

[v.03 p.0339]

 

Private.

Private.

Joint-stock.

Stock company.

1826

1826

554

554

...

Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.

1827

1827

465

465

    6

6

1833

1833

416

416

  35

35

1842

1842

311

311

118

118

The number of banking offices in England and Wales was estimated by Mr. William Leatham in 1840 as being 697. The Banking Almanac for 1845 gives the number in 1844 for England and Wales as 336 private bank offices and 640 joint-stock offices, Scotland 368 offices, Ireland 180 offices.

The number of bank branches in England and Wales was estimated by Mr. William Leatham in 1840 to be 697. The Banking Almanac for 1845 lists the number in 1844 for England and Wales as 336 private bank branches and 640 joint-stock branches, Scotland with 368 branches, and Ireland with 180 branches.

The number of inhabitants to each office was as follows in 1844 and 1906:—

The number of people for each office was as follows in 1844 and 1906:—

 

Number of
Banking
Offices.

Number of Banking Offices.

Number of
Inhabitants to
Each Office.

Number of Inhabitants per Office.

 

1844.

1844.

1906.

1906.

1844.

1844.

1906.

1906.

England and Wales

England & Wales

976

976

5527

5527

16,305

16,305

5885

5885

Isle of Man

Isle of Man

...  

Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.

23

23

...  

I'm sorry, but there doesn't appear to be any text provided for me to modernize. Please provide a short phrase, and I’ll be happy to assist!

2417

2417

Scotland

Scotland

368

368

1180

1180

7,120

7,120

3790

3790

Ireland

Ireland

180

180

777

777

45,417

45,417

5738

5738

In United Kingdom

In the UK

1524

1524

7507

7507

17,526

17,526

5530

5530

In the latter years of the 18th century and the early years of the 19th, the note circulation was a very important part of the business, but about that date the deposits began to be, as they have continued since, far more important. It is unfortunately impossible to give any trustworthy statistics of the position of banking in the United Kingdom extending back for more than forty or fifty years. Even the Scottish banks, who have been less reticent as to their position than the English banks, did not publish their accounts generally till 1865. The figures of the total deposits and cash balances in the Irish joint-stock banks were published collectively from the year 1840 by the care of Dr Neilson Hancock, but it is only of quite recent years that any statement of the general position other than an estimate has been possible owing to the long-continued reluctance of many banks to allow any publication of their balance-sheets. A paper by W. Newmarch, printed in the Journal of the Statistical Society for 1851, supplies the earliest basis for a trustworthy estimate. According to this the total amount of deposits, including the Bank of England, in England and Wales, Scotland and Ireland, may have been at that date from £250,000,000 to £360,000,000. The estimate in Palgrave's Notes on Banking (1872), excluding deposits in discount houses and the capitals of banks, was from £430,000,000 to £450,000,000. The corresponding amounts at the close of 1906 were, in round figures, including acceptances &c., £997,000,000. The total resources, including capitals and reserves and note circulation (in round figures £177,500,000), were for 1906:—

In the late 18th century and early 19th century, note circulation was a crucial part of banking, but around that time, deposits began to become, as they have remained since, significantly more important. Unfortunately, it's impossible to provide reliable statistics on the state of banking in the United Kingdom that go back more than forty or fifty years. Even the Scottish banks, which have been less secretive about their status than the English banks, didn’t start publishing their accounts widely until 1865. The total deposits and cash balances in the Irish joint-stock banks were published collectively from 1840 by Dr. Neilson Hancock, but it’s only in recent years that any statements about the overall situation other than estimates have been possible, due to many banks' long-standing reluctance to publish their balance sheets. A paper by W. Newmarch, published in the Journal of the Statistical Society in 1851, provides the earliest foundation for a reliable estimate. According to this, the total amount of deposits, including the Bank of England, in England and Wales, Scotland, and Ireland, was estimated at that time to be between £250,000,000 and £360,000,000. An estimate in Palgrave's Notes on Banking (1872), excluding deposits in discount houses and the capitals of banks, was between £430,000,000 and £450,000,000. The corresponding amounts at the end of 1906 were, in round figures, including acceptances, about £997,000,000. The total resources, including capitals, reserves, and note circulation (around £177,500,000), were for 1906:—

England and Wales—

England & Wales—

    Bank of England and other banks

Bank of England and other banks

£922,297,000

£922.3 million

Scotland

Scotland

135,042,000

135,042,000

Ireland

Ireland

73,707,000

73.7 million

Isle of Man

Isle of Man

898,000

898k

£1,131,944,000

£1.13 billion

The progressive growth in bank deposits since it has been possible to keep a record of their amounts, affords some means of checking roughly the correctness of the estimates of 1851 and 1872. Broadly speaking, it may be said that the bank deposits of the United Kingdom have about doubled since 1872.

The steady increase in bank deposits since records began offers a rough way to verify the estimates from 1851 and 1872. Generally speaking, we can say that bank deposits in the United Kingdom have roughly doubled since 1872.

The purely city banks had associated themselves in a "Clearing Clearing. House" certainly by 1776. An entry in the books of the Grasshopper,[4] namely—"1773 to quarterly charge for use of the Clearing-room of 19/6d.," points to an earlier and perhaps less definitely organized system of settlement. A house was taken for the purpose in 1810, in which year the number of banking houses who settled their accounts with each other at the "Clearing House" was forty-six (Gilbart's History and Principles of Banking, p. 78). The Bank of England has never been a member of the Clearing House, though it "clears on one side," i.e. its claim on the clearing bankers is made through the Clearing House, but the claims of the clearing bankers on the bank are forwarded direct to Threadneedle Street twice or thrice daily. Nor did the banks in Fleet Street or at Charing Cross belong to it. In 1858 the clearing of country cheques was added through arrangements made by Lord Avebury, then Sir John Lubbock. The "country clearing" is a great assistance to business, as it enables a cheque drawn on the most distant village in England to be dealt with as conveniently as a cheque on London. Of the forty-nine banks in London in 1844, twenty-six were connected with the Clearing House. At that time only private banks were allowed to be members. In 1854 the joint-stock banks made their way into that body, and in 1906 the numbers were one private bank and eighteen joint-stock banks who joined in the clearing—nineteen banks in all.

The city banks had come together in a "Clearing House" by 1776. An entry in the Grasshopper's books, which states—"1773 to quarterly charge for use of the Clearing-room of 19/6d.," suggests an earlier and possibly less organized system for settling accounts. A location was established for this purpose in 1810, the same year when the number of banking houses settling their accounts at the "Clearing House" reached forty-six (Gilbart's History and Principles of Banking, p. 78). The Bank of England has never been a member of the Clearing House, although it "clears on one side," meaning its claims against the clearing bankers are made through the Clearing House, while the claims from the clearing bankers to the Bank are sent directly to Threadneedle Street two or three times a day. The banks located on Fleet Street or at Charing Cross were also not part of it. In 1858, the clearing of country cheques was introduced through arrangements by Lord Avebury, then known as Sir John Lubbock. The "country clearing" greatly aids business, making it possible for a cheque drawn from the most remote village in England to be processed as easily as one drawn in London. Of the forty-nine banks in London in 1844, twenty-six were associated with the Clearing House. At that time, only private banks were permitted to be members. In 1854, joint-stock banks gained entry, and by 1906, there was one private bank and eighteen joint-stock banks participating in the clearing—nineteen banks in total.

Practically at the present time every large transaction in the United Kingdom is settled by cheque, that is, by a series of ledger transfers, notes and specie being but the small change by which the fractional amounts are paid. A large proportion of these transactions are arranged through the operation of the London Clearing House. This is facilitated by the fact that every bank in the United Kingdom has an agent in London.

Almost all major transactions in the United Kingdom are settled by cheque, meaning they involve a series of ledger transfers, while notes and coins are only used for smaller amounts. A significant number of these transactions are processed through the London Clearing House. This is made easier by the fact that every bank in the United Kingdom has an agent based in London.

The annual circulation shown by the London Clearing House is more than £12,000,000,000. No one asks what stock of gold is held by the bank on which the cheques are drawn, or what the bank itself keeps in reserve. The whole is taken in faith on a well-founded trust. It is the most easily worked paper circulation and circulating medium in existence. Like the marvellous tent of the fairy Paribanou, it expands itself to meet every want and contracts again the moment the strain is passed. (See the article by R. H. Inglis Palgrave on "Gold and the Banks," Quarterly Review, January 1906.)

The annual circulation reported by the London Clearing House exceeds £12,000,000,000. No one questions how much gold the bank holds against the cheques or what reserves the bank itself maintains. It all relies on trust and confidence. This is the most efficient paper currency and circulating medium that exists. Like the magical tent of the fairy Paribanou, it expands to satisfy every need and contracts back as soon as the pressure is relieved. (See the article by R. H. Inglis Palgrave on "Gold and the Banks," Quarterly Review, January 1906.)

If we add to the returns of the London Clearing House those of the clearing houses in the large towns of England, Ireland and Scotland, and the numerous exchanges which occur daily, and the large number which the different offices of banks with a great many branches settle among themselves, and the number drawn by one customer of a bank and paid to another, we may form some notion of the vast amount of the yearly turnover in cheques. This may be roughly estimated to be at least twice as great as that registered by the London Clearing House. The earliest authentic statement as to the clearing is found in the Appendix to the Second Report, Committee of House of Commons, Banks of Issue (1841).

If we combine the figures from the London Clearing House with those from the clearing houses in major cities across England, Ireland, and Scotland, along with the many exchanges that take place daily and the large volume of transactions settled between the various branches of banks, as well as the cheques drawn by one customer of a bank and paid to another, we can get an idea of the enormous yearly turnover in cheques. This amount may be roughly estimated to be at least double what is recorded by the London Clearing House. The earliest reliable information on the clearing can be found in the Appendix to the Second Report, Committee of House of Commons, Banks of Issue (1841).

In 1839 the figures of the London clearings were

In 1839, the numbers from the London clearings were

£954,401,600,

£954.4 million

29 banks.

29 banks.

In 1840          "          "          "          "     

In 1840          "          "          "          "

978,496,800,

978,496,800

29   "

29 "

In 1899          "          "          "          "     

In 1899          "          "          "          "

9,150,269,000,

9.15 billion

19   "

19 "

In 1900          "          "          "          "     

In 1900          "          "          "          "

8,960,170,000,

8.96 billion

19   "

19 "

In 1906          "          "          "          "     

In 1906          "          "          "          "

12,711,334,000,

12.71 billion

18   "

18 "

In 1695, shortly after the establishment of the Bank of England, Scottish banks. the Scottish parliament passed an act for the establishment of a public bank. Amongst the first names is that of Thomas Coutts, a name still commemorated in one of the most substantial banks in London. The terms of the establishment were more favourable than those connected with the establishment of the Bank of England, for they obtained the exclusive privilege of banking for twenty-one years without giving any consideration whatever. It may have been the natural caution of the country, or the fact that William III. was then king, which led to the Bank of Scotland being prohibited under a heavy penalty from lending money under any circumstances to the king. It is the only Scottish bank established by act of parliament. The directors began at a very early period to receive deposits and to allow interest thereon, also to grant cash credit accounts, a minute of the directors respecting the mode of keeping the latter being dated so far back as 1729.

In 1695, shortly after the establishment of the Bank of England, Scottish banks. the Scottish Parliament passed a law to create a public bank. Among the first names involved is Thomas Coutts, a name still associated with one of the largest banks in London. The terms for setting it up were more favorable than those for the Bank of England, as they received exclusive banking rights for twenty-one years without any compensation. This might have been due to the country’s natural caution, or the fact that William III was king at the time, which resulted in the Bank of Scotland being heavily penalized for lending money to the king under any circumstances. This bank is the only Scottish bank created by an act of Parliament. The directors started accepting deposits and offering interest on them early on, and they also began granting cash credit accounts, with a record from the directors about how to manage these accounts dating back to 1729.

Though the system of branches forms now so marked a feature of banking in Scotland, a good many years had to pass before they obtained any hold. It was not till about the year 1700 that the directors of the Bank of Scotland established branches at Glasgow, Aberdeen, Dundee and Montrose, but so little encouragement was given to these branches, the expenses far exceeding the profits arising from them, that the directors resolved to close them. In 1731 another attempt was made, and agencies were established at Glasgow, Aberdeen and Dundee. But after a trial of two years they were discontinued. It was not till 1774 that branches were again established by the bank.

Though the system of branches is now a prominent feature of banking in Scotland, it took many years before they became established. It wasn’t until around 1700 that the directors of the Bank of Scotland set up branches in Glasgow, Aberdeen, Dundee, and Montrose. However, these branches received very little support, with expenses far outweighing any profits, leading the directors to decide to close them. Another attempt was made in 1731, establishing agencies in Glasgow, Aberdeen, and Dundee, but after two years, they were shut down. It wasn’t until 1774 that the bank reopened branches.

Soon after the establishment of the Bank of Scotland the directors began to issue notes, or, as they were then called, bills or tickets, for £100, £50, £20, £10, and £5. In 1704 £1 notes were issued for the first time. In 1727 the Royal Bank of Scotland was established by a charter of incorporation,—which granted them "perpetual succession and a common seal." There was a great rivalry between the two companies. The British Linen Company was incorporated in 1746 for the [v.03 p.0340]purpose of undertaking the manufacture of linen, but by 1763 they found it best to confine their operations to banking transactions. This bank also was incorporated by charter.

Soon after the Bank of Scotland was established, the directors started issuing notes, or what were then called bills or tickets, for £100, £50, £20, £10, and £5. In 1704, £1 notes were issued for the first time. In 1727, the Royal Bank of Scotland was established by a charter of incorporation, which granted them "perpetual succession and a common seal." There was a lot of competition between the two banks. The British Linen Company was incorporated in 1746 to focus on linen manufacturing, but by 1763, they decided it was better to limit their activities to banking. This bank was also incorporated by charter.

The note circulation was always an important item in the Scottish banks. Thus in the case of the Bank of Dundee, the receiving money from the public did not commence till 1792. Up to that time the whole business of the bank from 1764 onwards, twenty-eight years in all, had consisted in its issue of notes, which had varied from about £23,000 to £56,000. The Bank of Dundee was amalgamated with the Royal Bank of Scotland in 1864, when its deposits amounted in round figures to £700,000 and its note circulation to £41,000. After 1792, the money deposited with the banks in Scotland rapidly increased, but the habit of hoarding savings in a chest up to amounts of £10 or £20 continued to a much later period (History of the Dundee Banking Co.).

The circulation of notes has always been a key aspect of Scottish banks. For example, the Bank of Dundee didn’t start accepting money from the public until 1792. Before that, from 1764 onwards, a span of twenty-eight years, the bank's entire operation had been issuing notes, ranging from about £23,000 to £56,000. The Bank of Dundee merged with the Royal Bank of Scotland in 1864, when its deposits were roughly £700,000 and its note circulation was £41,000. After 1792, the amount of money deposited in Scottish banks increased quickly, but the practice of keeping savings in a chest, typically around £10 or £20, persisted for quite some time (History of the Dundee Banking Co.).

Private banking never appears to have had any considerable hold in Scotland. In 1819 eight private banks were in existence. These had all disappeared by 1844. In 1906 there were only ten banks of issue in Scotland, which practically carried on the whole business of the country. There were two other small banks established comparatively recently. These ten banks had, in 1906, 1180 branches.

Private banking never really had a significant presence in Scotland. In 1819, there were eight private banks operating, but by 1844, they had all vanished. By 1906, there were only ten banks issuing currency in Scotland, which essentially handled all the financial transactions in the country. Additionally, there were two other smaller banks that had been established relatively recently. In 1906, these ten banks had a total of 1,180 branches.

The history of the growth and expansion of Scottish banking since 1826 is, as far as can be traced, as follows:—

The history of the growth and expansion of Scottish banking since 1826 is, as far as can be traced, as follows:—

Date.

Date.

Deposits.

Deposits.

Number of Offices.

Number of Offices.

1826

1826

£

£

21,000,000

21 million

 

167 = 1

167 = 1

to every  

to everyone

13,170

13,170

  inhabitants.

residents.

1841

1841

 

27,000,000

27 million

 

380 = 1

380 = 1

"

"

6,600

6,600

"

"

1856

1856

brace

brace

63,000,000
and capital

63 million
and capital

brace

brace

585 = 1

585 = 1

"

"

5,230

5,230

"

"

1872

1872

brace

brace

92,000,000
including all
liabilities
and capital

92 million
including all
liabilities
and capital

brace

brace

790 = 1

790 = 1

"

"

4,250

4,250

"

"

1906

1906

brace

brace

135,042,000
including all
liabilities
and capital

135,042,000
including all
liabilities
and capital

brace

brace

1,180 = 1

1,180 = 1

"

"

3,790

3,790

"

Against every note issued in excess of the limit allowed by the acts of 1844-1845, gold has to be held at the offices of the issuing banks in Scotland and Ireland. The amount of the specie to be thus held was, as explained by Sir Robert Peel in his speech of the 25th of April 1845, to be ascertained by the average amount of the note-issue for four weeks preceding. The object of the holding of this amount of specie by the bank which issued the notes was designed by Sir Robert Peel to cause the circulating medium of the country, being partly of notes and partly of specie, to fluctuate in the same manner as if it had been a metallic circulation only. The specie held in Scotland and Ireland against the note-issue is not a special security for the note circulation, but is placed in the banks there for this purpose. The influence ascribed to the working of the note circulation in the earlier part of the 19th century accounts for this legislation, which, as Sir Robert Peel stated in his speech of the 6th of May 1844, was intended to "ensure the uniform equivalency of bank notes to coin." It is not applicable to the present position of the circulating medium of the United Kingdom, which now consists mainly of a circulation of cheques. This differs absolutely from what was contemplated by Sir Robert Peel; no attempt is or can be made to cause such a paper circulation to fluctuate as if it were one of specie only. One result of the limitation of the power of note-issue to the banks in Scotland which possessed that power in 1845 has been that no important bank has been established in that country since. Notes are so largely employed in ordinary business in Scotland that a bank which does not possess the power, practically cannot carry on business and supply the needs of its customers. This limitation in the number of the banks has, however, not been accompanied by any deficiency in the supply of banking accommodation to the people. There is a larger number of banking offices in proportion to the population in Scotland than in England and Wales or Ireland.

Against any notes issued beyond the limit set by the acts of 1844-1845, gold must be held at the offices of the issuing banks in Scotland and Ireland. The amount of gold to be held was, as Sir Robert Peel explained in his speech on April 25, 1845, to be determined by the average amount of note issuance for the four weeks prior. The purpose of holding this amount of gold by the bank that issued the notes was meant by Sir Robert Peel to ensure that the country's currency, made up of both notes and gold, would fluctuate similarly to a purely metallic currency. The gold held in Scotland and Ireland against the note issuance is not a specific security for the note circulation, but is reserved in the banks for this reason. The influence attributed to the way the note circulation operated in the earlier part of the 19th century explains this legislation, which, as Sir Robert Peel noted in his speech on May 6, 1844, aimed to "ensure the uniform equivalency of bank notes to coin." This is not relevant to the current state of the UK's currency, which now mainly consists of cheques. This is completely different from what Sir Robert Peel envisioned; there’s no effort being made to make such a paper currency fluctuate as if it were solely gold. One outcome of restricting the power of note issuance to the banks in Scotland that had that authority in 1845 is that no significant bank has been established there since. Notes are so commonly used in everyday transactions in Scotland that a bank without this power practically cannot operate and meet the needs of its customers. However, this limitation on the number of banks has not resulted in a lack of banking services for the people. There are more banking offices per capita in Scotland than in England and Wales or Ireland.

The large number of branches must, however, be a cause of great expense, and in several other respects it is obvious that a business carried on in such thinly peopled districts as are found in many parts of Scotland, must be conducted at a disadvantage in comparison with those banks which deal with more active centres of commerce. Although the profit derived from their large issue of notes may be thought to be considerable, yet, when we consider the many expenses incurred in conducting a large note circulation, the cost of printing, stamp duty, and the charges on importing gold from London when the circulation exceeds the limit fixed by the act of 1845. no small deductions must be made from the apparent profit to be derived from this head, if there is any direct profit at all.

The large number of branches must be a major expense, and it’s clear that running a business in the sparsely populated areas found in many parts of Scotland puts them at a disadvantage compared to banks that operate in more bustling commercial centers. Although the profits from issuing a lot of notes might seem significant, when you take into account the various costs associated with managing a large note circulation—like printing expenses, stamp duty, and fees for bringing in gold from London when their circulation exceeds the limits set by the 1845 act—there are substantial deductions that need to be made from the apparent profits, if there’s any direct profit at all.

On the other hand, the great number of branches possessed by the Scottish banks tends beyond doubt to their stability and prosperity. The network of banks on the surface of Scotland is as important to the development of the prosperity of the country as the network of the railways. It has caused a great economy of capital, as the universal practice of people, even of the most moderate means, is to lodge their money with the banks.

On the other hand, the large number of branches owned by Scottish banks definitely contributes to their stability and success. The banking network throughout Scotland is just as crucial to the country’s economic growth as the railway system is. It has led to a significant saving of capital, as people, even those with limited means, typically choose to keep their money in banks.

The early history of banking in Ireland was marked by Irish banks. legislation even less favourable to the formation of a steady and dependable system than in England, and in 1695 several of the principal merchants in Dublin met together for the purpose of forming a public bank for Ireland on the model of the Bank of England. For many years this proposal met with no favour. It was not till 1783 that the Bank of Ireland was established and commenced its business. The first governor was David La Touche, junior, and two other members of his family were amongst the first board of directors. The bank met with very great success, but the jealousy against rival establishments was extreme. By the act forming the Bank of Ireland it was enacted that no company or society exceeding six in number, except the Bank of Ireland, should borrow or take up money on their bills or notes payable on demand. In the year 1821 the act was so far modified as to permit the establishment of banking companies exceeding six in number at a distance of 50 m. from Dublin. In 1824, in consequence of the ambiguity of that act, an act had to be passed to explain it. It was not till 1845 that the restriction as to the 50-m. limit was withdrawn.

The early history of banking in Ireland was characterized by Irish banks. legislation that was even less favorable to establishing a stable and reliable system than in England. In 1695, several leading merchants in Dublin gathered to propose creating a public bank for Ireland modeled after the Bank of England. For many years, this proposal received little support. It wasn't until 1783 that the Bank of Ireland was founded and started operations. The first governor was David La Touche, junior, with two other family members on the initial board of directors. The bank experienced significant success, but there was intense jealousy toward competing institutions. The act that created the Bank of Ireland stipulated that no company or society with more than six members, besides the Bank of Ireland, could borrow or accept money on their bills or notes payable on demand. In 1821, this act was slightly modified to allow the establishment of banking companies beyond six members at least 50 miles from Dublin. In 1824, due to the unclear language of that act, further legislation was needed for clarification. It wasn't until 1845 that the restriction concerning the 50-mile limit was lifted.

The establishment of any other bank but the Bank of Ireland was for a long time hindered by the legislation on the subject. Some of the restrictions were so extraordinary that it will be interesting to refer to three of the more important acts.

The creation of any bank other than the Bank of Ireland was for a long time blocked by the laws surrounding it. Some of the restrictions were so unusual that it will be worthwhile to mention three of the more significant acts.

1741, 15 Geo. II.—Partnerships authorized for the purpose of trade and manufacture; but such partnerships were not to exceed nine in number, nor was the capital stock of such co-partnership to exceed, at any time, the sum of £10,000.

1741, 15 Geo. II.—Partnerships were allowed for trading and manufacturing; however, these partnerships couldn't have more than nine members, and the total capital for any partnership couldn't be more than £10,000 at any time.

1780-1781, 21 and 22 Geo. III.—"Anonymous Partnership Act,"—limited liability not to exceed £50,000, but "business of banking or discounters of money" expressly excluded.

1780-1781, 21 and 22 Geo. III.—"Anonymous Partnership Act,"—limited liability cannot go over £50,000, but "business of banking or money lending" is specifically excluded.

1759, 33 Geo. II.—By this act a person while he continued a banker could not make a marriage settlement on a son or daughter, a grandson or granddaughter, so as to be good against his creditors, though for a valuable consideration, and though such creditors were not creditors at the time the grant was made. This act gave power to creditors over all conveyances by bankers affecting real estates; and all dispositions after the 10th of May 1760 by bankers of real or leasehold interest therein to or for children were made void as against creditors, though for valuable consideration and though not creditors at the time. No banker to issue notes or receipts bearing interest after the 10th of May 1760. Some of these enactments appear to be in force at the present day; suggestions have been made, though apparently unsuccessfully, for their repeal.

1759, 33 Geo. II.—This law stated that a person who was a banker couldn’t create a marriage settlement for a son or daughter, or a grandson or granddaughter, that would be valid against their creditors, even if there was a valuable consideration, and even if those creditors were not creditors when the settlement was made. This law gave creditors authority over all transactions by bankers related to real estate; any agreements made by bankers regarding real or leasehold interests for their children after May 10, 1760, were considered void against creditors, regardless of valuable consideration and even if those creditors were not present at the time. No banker was allowed to issue notes or receipts that earned interest after May 10, 1760. Some of these rules still seem to be in effect today; there have been attempts to repeal them, although they have not been successful.

So extraordinary were the views of the common people that a banker in Dublin of the name of Beresford having made himself very unpopular, a "large assemblage of ignorant country people having previously collected a quantity of Beresford's notes, publicly burnt them, crying out with enthusiasm while the promises to pay on demand were consuming, 'What will he do now; his bank will surely break.'"

So impressive were the opinions of the ordinary people that a banker in Dublin named Beresford, after becoming quite unpopular, found himself in a situation where a "large group of uninformed rural folks gathered together, collected a bunch of Beresford’s notes, and publicly burned them, shouting excitedly as the promises to pay on demand burned, 'What will he do now? His bank will definitely go under.'"

The number of banks which failed in Ireland in earlier times was extraordinary; thus Sir Robert Peel in his speech of the 9th of June 1845 on the Bank Act of that year, made a quotation "from the report of the committee of Irish exchanges, which sat in 1804. At that period there were fifty registered banks, but they all failed, and their failures, I know personally, led to the most fearful distress." Since the legislation of 1845, however, the business has been carried on with equally extraordinary steadiness and success, and at the present time is on a footing fully equal to that of any other part of the United Kingdom.

The number of banks that failed in Ireland in the past was astonishing. Sir Robert Peel, in his speech on June 9, 1845, about the Bank Act of that year, quoted "from the report of the committee of Irish exchanges, which met in 1804. At that time, there were fifty registered banks, but they all failed, and their failures, as I know personally, caused immense hardship." Since the legislation of 1845, however, the banking business has continued with remarkable stability and success, and currently, it is on par with any other region in the United Kingdom.

The earlier history of banking in Ireland pursued very closely the same process of development as in England. Circulation preceded and fed deposits. The credit which the banks obtained [v.03 p.0341]by the ready acceptance of their notes brought customers to their counters, and thus the existing system, fortunate in excellent managers, was built up gradually and surely.

The early history of banking in Ireland followed a very similar development process as in England. Circulation came before and fueled deposits. The credit that banks gained from the widespread acceptance of their notes attracted customers to their counters, and so the existing system, fortunate to have great managers, was gradually and steadily established.

Alone in the three kingdoms, Ireland maintains the same limit of authorized circulation as that established by Peel's Act of 1845. Not one of the six banks which had the privilege of issue at that period has lost it since.

Alone among the three kingdoms, Ireland keeps the same limit on authorized circulation set by Peel's Act of 1845. Not one of the six banks that had the right to issue money back then has lost that privilege since.

The names of the banks carrying on business in Ireland, the years when they were established and their position in 1906, are as follows:—

The names of the banks operating in Ireland, the years they were founded, and their status in 1906 are as follows:—

Capital of Irish Joint-Stock Banks in 1906

Capital of Irish Joint-Stock Banks in 1906

Name of Bank and Year
when established.

Name of Bank and Year
when established.

Capital
paid-up.

Paid-up capital.

Rate of
Dividend
per annum.

Dividend rate per year.

Bank of Ireland

Bank of Ireland

1783

1783

£2,769,230

£2.77 million

11     

11

Hibernian Bank*

Hibernian Bank*

1824

1824

500,000

500,000

10     

10

Provincial Bank

Regional Bank

1825

1825

540,000

540K

20     

20

Northern Banking Co.

Northern Bank

1825

1825

500,000

500,000

18½  

18.5

Belfast Banking Co.

Belfast Bank

1827

1827

500,000

500,000

36     

36

National Bank

National Bank

1835

1835

1,500,000

1.5 million

8     

8

Ulster Banking Co.

Ulster Bank

1836

1836

500,000

500k

18     

18

Royal Bank*

Royal Bank

1836

1836

300,000

300,000

12     

12

Munster Bank, Ltd.*

Munster Bank, Ltd.*

1864

1864

200,000

200,000

8     

8

* Thus marked are not banks of issue.

* Thus marked are not banks of issue.

Banking, like every other business, has to pass through periods Banking crises of difficulty. The severity of these in the case of banking is intensified by the vast number of interests affected. These, on the one hand, are world-wide in their scope, on the other they touch every home in the country. The stringency of such a time in England has since the passing of the act of 1844 been greatly enhanced by a doubt being sometimes felt as to whether a relaxation of the act of 1844 would be allowed. In any case, some little time must elapse before the assent of the ministers of the crown to the request of the Bank of England can be known. Since 1844 there have been five periods of pressure,—during 1847, 1857, 1866, 1870 and 1890. Of these in three, 1847, 1857 and 1866, the difficulties reached panic.

Banking, like any other business, goes through tough times Banking crises. The impact of these crises is amplified in banking because so many people are affected. On one hand, these issues are global in nature, and on the other, they affect every household in the country. The strain during such times in England has been significantly heightened since the 1844 act was passed, partly due to uncertainty about whether the act would be relaxed. In any case, it takes some time before the approval of the crown ministers regarding the Bank of England's requests can be confirmed. Since 1844, there have been five significant periods of pressure—during 1847, 1857, 1866, 1870, and 1890. Of these, difficulties led to panic in three years: 1847, 1857, and 1866.

The crisis of 1847 was brought on by the speculation in railway enterprise which had gone on since 1845. So little had the anxieties of the autumn been anticipated that the bank rate of discount was 3% on the 1st of January. It was raised to 3½% on the 14th and to 4% on the 21st. It became 5% on 8th April, 5½% on 5th August, 6% on 30th September and 8% on 25th October. This was the highest. It was lowered to 7% on 22nd November, on 2nd December to 6% and on 23rd December to 5%. An announcement was made on the 1st of October that no advances would be made on public securities. This was followed by general anxiety and alarm.

The crisis of 1847 was triggered by speculation in railroad investments that had been happening since 1845. The worries of the autumn were so unexpected that the bank discount rate was at 3% on January 1st. It was raised to 3.5% on the 14th and to 4% on the 21st. It increased to 5% on April 8th, 5.5% on August 5th, 6% on September 30th, and peaked at 8% on October 25th. This was the highest point. It decreased to 7% on November 22nd, to 6% on December 2nd, and to 5% on December 23rd. An announcement was made on October 1st that no loans would be given on public securities. This led to widespread anxiety and alarm.

The reserve of the bank was rapidly reduced to a very low ebb.

The bank's reserves quickly dropped to a very low level.

Bank of England Reserve of Specie.

Bank of England Reserve of Specie.

1847,

1847,

16th October

October 16

£3,070,000

£3.07 million

"

"

23rd October

October 23

1,990,000

1.99 million

"

"

30th October

October 30th

1,600,000

1.6 million

Meanwhile the anxiety and alarm prevailing were causing a general hoarding of coin and bank notes, and it really appeared not unlikely that the banking department of the Bank of England might be compelled to stop payment while there was more than £6,000,000 of specie in the issue department. The chancellor of the exchequer (Sir C. Wood, afterwards Lord Halifax) was urged by many deputations and remonstrances to relax the Bank Act, but he declined. At last, on the 22nd or 23rd of October, some of the leading city bankers had an interview with the prime minister (Lord John, afterwards Earl, Russell), and on their explaining the necessities of the position, the desired relaxation was given. The official letter (25th October) recommended "the directors of the Bank of England, in the present emergency, to enlarge the amount of their discounts and advances upon approved security." A high rate, 8%, was to be charged to keep these operations within reasonable limits; a bill of indemnity was promised if the arrangement led to a breach of the law. The extra profit derived was to be for the benefit of the public. The effect of the government letter in allaying the panic was complete.

Meanwhile, the widespread anxiety and fear were causing people to hoard coins and banknotes, and it really seemed likely that the banking department of the Bank of England might have to stop payment despite holding more than £6,000,000 in the issue department. The chancellor of the exchequer (Sir C. Wood, later Lord Halifax) was pressured by many delegations and protests to relax the Bank Act, but he refused. Finally, on the 22nd or 23rd of October, some of the leading city bankers met with the prime minister (Lord John, later Earl Russell), and when they explained the urgent situation, the requested relaxation was granted. The official letter (25th October) advised "the directors of the Bank of England, in the current emergency, to increase the amount of their discounts and advances on approved security." A high rate of 8% was to be charged to keep these operations within reasonable limits; a bill of indemnity was promised if the arrangement resulted in a breach of the law. The extra profit generated was meant for the public's benefit. The effect of the government letter in calming the panic was complete.

The crisis of 1857 was the last occasion of an official inquiry. This is contained in the Report and Evidence of the Select Committee of the House of Commons on the Bank Acts (1857, 1858). The evidence given by Mr Sheffield Neave, the governor, and Mr Bonamy Dobree, deputy-governor of the bank in 1858, gives a vivid picture not only of what occurred, but of what might be expected to recur on such occasions. The wildest alarm prevailed, exchequer bills were scarcely saleable, and the bank itself sold £3,000,000 government securities at a considerable loss.

The crisis of 1857 was the last time there was an official investigation. This is detailed in the Report and Evidence of the Select Committee of the House of Commons on the Bank Acts (1857, 1858). The testimony from Mr. Sheffield Neave, the governor, and Mr. Bonamy Dobree, the deputy-governor of the bank in 1858, paints a vivid picture of what happened and what could happen again in similar situations. There was widespread panic, exchequer bills were hardly sellable, and the bank itself sold £3,000,000 in government securities at a significant loss.

The extreme pressure was relaxed by the letter issued by the government on the 12th of November 1857, signed by Lord Palmerston, then premier, and Sir G. C. Lewis, which allowed a temporary relaxation of the Bank Act of 1844. The public alarm, however, was so great that it was not until the 21st of November that the severity of the pressure was in any way diminished. On the 20th of November the notes issued to the public on securities beyond the statutory limit (then £14,475,000) reached the sum of £928,000. By the next week the issue was almost down to the limit, and in the week following it was within the limit. On the 1st of January 1858 the bank rate was lowered to 8% and the anxiety gradually passed away. Had the treasury letter been issued earlier, the pressure might not have been so severe, and the governor of the bank expressed a strong opinion that, if it had been later, it would not have been sufficient. November 1857 was the only occasion when the limits of the Bank Act as to issue were actually passed.

The intense pressure eased with the letter issued by the government on November 12, 1857, signed by Lord Palmerston, the then prime minister, and Sir G. C. Lewis, which allowed for a temporary relaxation of the Bank Act of 1844. However, public alarm was so high that it wasn't until November 21 that the pressure noticeably decreased. On November 20, the notes issued to the public against securities exceeding the official limit (then £14,475,000) reached £928,000. By the following week, the issuance was nearly back to the limit, and the week after that, it was within the limit. On January 1, 1858, the bank rate was lowered to 8%, and the anxiety gradually faded. If the treasury letter had been released earlier, the pressure might not have been as intense, and the bank governor strongly believed that if it had come later, it wouldn’t have been enough. November 1857 was the only instance when the limits set by the Bank Act regarding issuance were actually exceeded.

During the crisis of May 1866 £4,000,000 left the bank on one day in notes and coin, and the reserve of the bank was reduced in the return of the 1st of June of that year to £415,000. The bank rate was raised to 10% and permission was given by the government to suspend the act. This, however, was not done. Tradition says that the bank asked the bankers, during the period of heaviest pressure of that terrible crisis—pressure more severe than anything that had taken place before or that has occurred since, to pay in every night the notes they had drawn out in the morning which were still in their tills at the close of the day, and that hence the legal limit was never exceeded. But it was not till the 6th of August that the rate was reduced to 8%.

During the crisis of May 1866, £4,000,000 left the bank in one day in notes and coins, and the bank's reserve was decreased to £415,000 in the return on June 1 of that year. The bank rate was raised to 10%, and the government allowed a suspension of the act. However, this was not implemented. Tradition has it that, during the peak of that devastating crisis—pressure more intense than anything before or since—the bank requested the bankers to deposit every night the notes they had withdrawn in the morning that were still in their tills at the end of the day, ensuring that the legal limit was never exceeded. But it wasn't until August 6 that the rate was lowered to 8%.

The effect of the crisis of October 1890 was far less severe. This was due to the judgment and skill displayed by the governor (Mr Lidderdale) and the directors of the bank, who imported £3,000,000 in gold from Paris. The reserve in that year never dropped below £10,000,000, and before the end of November the anxiety had greatly passed away. "Caution prevailed, but not panic, and the distinction is a very clear one." (See arts. on "Crises," Dictionary of Political Economy, vol. i.)

The impact of the crisis in October 1890 was much milder. This was thanks to the wise decisions and expertise shown by the governor (Mr. Lidderdale) and the bank's directors, who brought in £3,000,000 in gold from Paris. The reserve that year never fell below £10,000,000, and by the end of November, the worry had largely faded. "Caution was the norm, but there was no panic, and the difference is quite clear." (See arts. on "Crises," Dictionary of Political Economy, vol. i.)

The most important requirement of banking in the United Kingdom is still the establishment of an efficient specie reserve. The reserve in the banking department of the Bank of England averaged:—

The most important requirement of banking in the United Kingdom is still the establishment of an efficient cash reserve. The reserve in the banking department of the Bank of England averaged:—

£8,500,000 in 1845.

£8.5 million in 1845.

£11,600,000 in 1875.

£11.6 million in 1875.

  8,400,000 in 1855.

8.4 million in 1855.

  15,100,000 in 1885.

15.1 million in 1885.

  8,000,000 in 1865.

8 million in 1865.

  29,900,000 in 1895.

29.9 million in 1895.

£23,500,000 in 1906.

£23.5 million in 1906.

This provides but a narrow basis for the whole business The "Reserve" question. requirements of the country. Though much larger than in several previous years, it cannot be regarded as adequate. The figures fluctuate more severely than these decennial averages show, and the progress has not been one of uniform increase. Thus the £15,100,000 in 1885 was followed by £12,700,000 in 1888. The £29,900,000 of 1895 was followed by £34,600,000 in 1896 and £21,200,000 in 1899.

This provides only a limited foundation for the overall business The "Reserve" issue. needs of the country. While it's much larger than in several past years, it still cannot be considered sufficient. The figures fluctuate more dramatically than these ten-year averages suggest, and the growth has not been steady. For example, the £15,100,000 in 1885 was succeeded by £12,700,000 in 1888. The £29,900,000 of 1895 was followed by £34,600,000 in 1896 and £21,200,000 in 1899.

Beyond, or side by side with, the reserve of the Bank of England there are the reserves held by the other banks. Part of these are held in the form of balances at the Bank of England, part in specie and bank notes in their own tills. The latter, hence, are not unlikely to be estimated twice over. The published figures on this point are meagre.

Beyond, or alongside, the reserves of the Bank of England, there are the reserves managed by other banks. Some of these reserves are kept as balances at the Bank of England, while others are in the form of cash and banknotes in their own registers. As a result, it's likely that the latter are counted twice. The available data on this topic is limited.

The expectations expressed by Sir Robert Peel in his speech [v.03 p.0342]on the bank charter and the currency of the 6th of May 1844 have not yet been fulfilled. "I rejoice," he said, "on public grounds, in the hope that the wisdom of parliament will at length devise measures which shall inspire just confidence in the medium of exchange, shall put a check on improvident speculations, and shall ensure the just reward of industry and the legitimate profit of commercial enterprise conducted with integrity and controlled by provident calculation."

The expectations expressed by Sir Robert Peel in his speech [v.03 p.0342]on the bank charter and the currency on May 6, 1844, have still not been met. "I am pleased," he said, "for public reasons, to hope that parliament's wisdom will finally come up with measures that will inspire real confidence in our currency, put a stop to reckless speculation, and ensure that hard work is fairly rewarded and that legitimate profits from business conducted with honesty and proper planning are secured."

The extreme measures which have been required since the act af 1844 point out for themselves the necessity for reform. Three times since the date of the Bank Act of 1844 it has been needful to give permission for the suspension of that act which forms the very foundation of the monetary system of Great Britain. This, whenever it has occurred, has exercised a very injurious effect on credit abroad, as well as on prosperity at home.

The drastic measures needed since the 1844 Act highlight the need for reform. Three times since the Bank Act of 1844, it has been necessary to allow the suspension of that act, which is the foundation of Great Britain's monetary system. Each time this has happened, it has had a negative impact on international credit and domestic prosperity.

The British money-market, the clearing-house of the world, is, in consequence of the smallness of its reserve, exposed to greater fluctuations than that of any other country. These fluctuations may arise from the need of meeting the requirements of other countries for specie or those arising from domestic trade. The recorded excess of imports over exports, £147,000,000 in 1906, though the difference is eventually balanced by the "invisible" exports, gives foreign nations at times a power over the British money-market greater than has ever previously been the case. The current must always have a tendency to flow outwards; this is enhanced by the great increase in the number of foreign banks which have branches in England. The need of providing sufficient reserves to meet requirements thus occasioned is obvious.

The British money market, the clearinghouse of the world, is, due to its small reserve, more susceptible to fluctuations than any other country. These fluctuations can come from the need to meet other countries' demands for cash or from domestic trade activities. The recorded trade deficit of £147,000,000 in 1906, although eventually balanced by "invisible" exports, sometimes gives foreign nations more influence over the British money market than ever before. The flow of money tends to go outwards; this is made worse by the significant increase in the number of foreign banks with branches in England. It's clear that there's a need to maintain sufficient reserves to meet these demands.

As regards the banks in which British interests are concerned in British banking abroad. British colonies and other countries we can only speak briefly. It must not be overlooked that in the Dominion of Canada there are 29 banks, many of them large, managed much on the Scottish principle with capitals of nearly £19,000,000 and deposits of about £140,000,000. These banks have more than 1200 offices. In Australia and New Zealand there are 24 banks with capitals of nearly £18,000,000 and deposits of about £130,000,000. The number of offices is nearly 1700. There are, including the three Presidency banks, about 15 banks doing business mainly in India—in some cases connecting neighbouring countries and places like Bangkok, Hong-Kong and Zanzibar. These banks have capitals of more than £5,000,000 and deposits of fully £36,000,000 and over 210 offices. There are at least 8 banks in South and West Africa with capitals of nearly £5,000,000, deposits of nearly £50,000,000 and nearly 370 offices. There are 5 banks, including the Colonial Bank, in other British territories with capitals of about £1,000,000 and deposits of £3,300,000, and about 25 offices. There are thus, besides many private firms doing very considerable business, more than 80 joint-stock British banks working in the colonies with capitals amounting to £48,000,000, deposits £360,000,000 and offices 3505. Outside British territories there are 6 banks, principally in South America, with nearly £4,000,000 capital, £36,000,000 deposits and about 60 offices. There are 6 large banks doing business principally in the East with more than £6,700,000 capitals, £77,000,000 deposits and 106 offices: and 7 other banks, including Barings, with about £4,500,000 capitals and £22,000,000 deposits There are thus about 20 British banks doing business in foreign countries with capitals amounting to £15,200,000, deposits £135,000,000 and offices 173.

Regarding the banks that involve British interests in UK banking overseas. British colonies and other countries, we can only provide a brief overview. It's important to note that in the Dominion of Canada, there are 29 banks, many of which are large, operating largely on the Scottish model, with capital of nearly £19,000,000 and deposits around £140,000,000. These banks have over 1,200 branches. In Australia and New Zealand, there are 24 banks with capital of nearly £18,000,000 and deposits around £130,000,000, totaling nearly 1,700 branches. Including the three Presidency banks, there are about 15 banks primarily operating in India, often connecting neighboring countries and places like Bangkok, Hong Kong, and Zanzibar. These banks have capital exceeding £5,000,000 and deposits of about £36,000,000, with over 210 branches. There are at least 8 banks in South and West Africa with capital of nearly £5,000,000, deposits almost reaching £50,000,000, and about 370 branches. Additionally, there are 5 banks, including the Colonial Bank, in other British territories, with capital of around £1,000,000 and deposits of £3,300,000, along with about 25 branches. Thus, besides numerous private firms conducting significant business, there are more than 80 joint-stock British banks operating in the colonies, with a total capital of £48,000,000, deposits of £360,000,000, and 3,505 branches. Outside of British territories, there are 6 banks, mainly in South America, with nearly £4,000,000 in capital, £36,000,000 in deposits, and about 60 branches. There are also 6 major banks primarily operating in the East, with more than £6,700,000 in capital, £77,000,000 in deposits, and 106 branches; and 7 other banks, including Barings, with around £4,500,000 in capital and £22,000,000 in deposits. In total, there are about 20 British banks conducting business in foreign countries, with a combined capital of £15,200,000, deposits of £135,000,000, and 173 branches.

In this statement we have included only the more important banks, which collectively wield about £63,000,000 capital and more than £495,000,000 deposits—in all about £560,000,000 of resources operating at about 3700 offices situated in places as different from each other and as widely separated as California and Hong-Kong, Constantinople and New Zealand.

In this statement, we've included only the major banks, which together have about £63,000,000 in capital and over £495,000,000 in deposits—totaling around £560,000,000 in resources operating at approximately 3,700 offices located in places as different and far apart as California and Hong Kong, Constantinople and New Zealand.

France.—In France the first bank of issue, originally called the Banque Générale, was established in 1716 by John Law, the author of the Mississippi Scheme and the Système. Law's bank, which had been converted into the Banque Royale in 1718, and its notes guaranteed by the king (Louis XV.), came to an end in 1721; an attempt at reconstruction was made in 1767, but the bank thus established was suppressed in 1793. Other banks, some issuing notes, then carried on operations with limited success, but these never attained any real power. There were many negotiations on the subject of the establishment of a bank in 1796. The financial difficulties of the times prevented any immediate result, but the advice of those engaged in this plan was of great assistance to Napoleon I., who, aided by his minister Mollien, founded in 1800 the Bank of France, which has remained from that time to the present by far the most powerful financial institution in the country. The objects for which it was established were to support the trade and industry of France and to supply the use of loanable capital at a moderate charge. These functions it has exercised ever since with great vigour and great judgment, extending itself through its branches and towns attached to branches over the whole country. At its establishment and for some time subsequently the operations of the bank did not extend over the whole of France. Departmental banks with the privilege of issue had been formed under a law adopted in 1803. At the close of 1847 there were nine of these banks existing in as many of the larger towns. In 1848, however, they were absorbed into the Bank of France, which has since possessed an exclusive privilege of issue, and in 1863 took over the Bank of Savoy after that province was united to France.

France.—In France, the first issuing bank, originally called the Banque Générale, was set up in 1716 by John Law, the creator of the Mississippi Scheme and the Système. Law's bank, which changed its name to Banque Royale in 1718 and had its notes backed by the king (Louis XV.), ended in 1721; a reconstruction attempt was made in 1767, but this new bank was shut down in 1793. Other banks, some that issued notes, operated with limited success but never gained real power. There were numerous discussions about establishing a bank in 1796. The financial challenges of the time delayed any immediate results, but the guidance from those involved in this plan greatly helped Napoleon I., who, with the assistance of his minister Mollien, founded the Bank of France in 1800. This bank has since remained the most powerful financial institution in the country. It was established to support France's trade and industry and provide access to loanable capital at reasonable rates. It has fulfilled these roles with great energy and insight, expanding through its branches and towns across the entire country. At its founding and for some time afterward, the bank's operations did not cover all of France. Departmental banks with the right to issue notes were created under a law enacted in 1803. By the end of 1847, there were nine of these banks in various larger towns. However, in 1848, they were absorbed into the Bank of France, which has since held exclusive issuing privileges, and in 1863, it took over the Bank of Savoy following that province's unification with France.

The Bank of France has successfully surmounted many political as well as financial troubles both during and since the times of Napoleon I. The overthrow of the government of Louis Philippe in 1848, the war with Germany in 1870, the many difficulties that followed when the Commune reigned in Paris in 1871, the payment of the war indemnity—not completed till 1873—were all happily overcome. Great pains, too, have been taken, especially of recent years, to render services to large and small businesses and to agricultural industry. In 1877 the offices of the Bank of France were 78 in number; in 1906 they were 447, including the towns "connected with the branches"—an arrangement which, without putting the bank to the expense of opening a branch, gives the place connected many of the advantages which a branch confers. The quantity of commercial paper discounted is very large. More than 20,000,000 bills were discounted in 1906, the total amount being £559,234,996. The advances on securities were in the same year £106,280,124. The rate of discount in Paris is as a rule lower and the number of alterations fewer than in London. From May 1900 to January 1906 there was no change, the rate remaining uniformly at 3%. Bills as low as 4s. 2d. are admitted to discount, including those below 8s.; about 232,000 of this class were discounted in 1906. Since the 27th of March 1890 loans of as small an amount as £10 are granted. In most cases three "names" must be furnished for each bill, or suitable guarantees or security given, but these necessary safeguards have not to be furnished in such a manner as to hamper applicants for loans unduly. In this manner the Bank of France is of great service to the industry of the country. It has never succeeded, however, in attracting deposits on anything like the scale of the Bank of England or the banks of the English-speaking peoples, but it held, as stated in the balance-sheet for the 23rd of December 1906, about £35,000,000 in deposits, of which £14,000,000 was on account of the treasury and £21,000,000 for individuals, and the amount held in this manner gradually increases. The report for 1904 says "each year the movement in these increases, and this economical and safe mode of effecting receipts and payments is more and more appreciated by the public." In one respect the Bank of France stands at a great advantage in connexion with this branch of its business. The average amount held in this manner for individuals during 1906 was about £23,000,000. As the accounts numbered 77,159 the average for each account was comparatively small. Accounts so subdivided give a great probability of permanence. The figures of the accounts for 1904 were as follows:—

The Bank of France has successfully overcome many political and financial challenges both during and after the era of Napoleon I. The overthrow of Louis Philippe's government in 1848, the war with Germany in 1870, the various issues that arose during the Paris Commune in 1871, and the payment of the war indemnity—which wasn’t completed until 1873—were all managed well. In recent years, significant efforts have been made to support both large and small businesses as well as the agricultural sector. In 1877, the Bank of France had 78 offices; by 1906, this number had increased to 447, including towns "connected with the branches"—a setup that offers many of the advantages of a branch without incurring the costs of opening one. The volume of commercial paper discounted is substantial, with over 20,000,000 bills discounted in 1906, totaling £559,234,996. The advances on securities for the same year amounted to £106,280,124. Generally, the discount rate in Paris is lower and less variable than in London. From May 1900 to January 1906, the rate remained unchanged at 3%. Bills as low as 4s. 2d. are eligible for discount, including those under 8s.; about 232,000 of these were discounted in 1906. Since March 27, 1890, loans as small as £10 have been available. In most cases, three "names" are required for each bill, or suitable guarantees or security must be provided, but these safeguards do not overly burden loan applicants. This way, the Bank of France plays a significant role in supporting the country's industries. However, it hasn't managed to attract deposits on the scale of the Bank of England or banks in the English-speaking world. As noted in the balance sheet for December 23, 1906, it held about £35,000,000 in deposits, of which £14,000,000 was for the treasury and £21,000,000 was for individuals, and this amount is gradually increasing. The 1904 report stated, "each year the movement in these increases, and this economical and safe method of handling receipts and payments is increasingly appreciated by the public." In one area, the Bank of France has a significant advantage regarding this aspect of its business. The average amount held for individuals was around £23,000,000 in 1906. With 77,159 accounts, the average balance for each account was relatively small. This subdivision of accounts suggests a strong likelihood of permanence. The figures for the accounts in 1904 were as follows:—

11,178

11,178

current accounts, with power of discount.

current accounts, with the ability to discount.

4,576

4,576

simple current accounts.

basic checking accounts.

26,709

26,709

current accounts, with advances.

checking accounts with advances.

 

24,106

24,106

accounts, deposits.

accounts, deposits.

Total

Total

66,569

66,569

accounts, against 59,182 at the end of 1903.

accounts, against 59,182 at the end of 1903.

At the present time the Bank of France operates chiefly through its enormous note circulation (averaging in 1906 £186,300,000), by means of which most business transactions in France are carried on.

At this time, the Bank of France primarily operates through its vast amount of banknotes in circulation (averaging £186,300,000 in 1906), which facilitates most business transactions in France.

The limits of the circulation of the Bank of France and the dates when it has been extended are as follows:—

The limits on the circulation of the Bank of France and the dates when it was expanded are as follows:—

Dates

Dates

Millions of
Francs

Millions of Euros

Converting the
Franc as 25 = £1.

Converting the
Franc to £1 = 25.

15th March 1848

March 15, 1848

350

350

£14,000,000

£14 million

27th April, 2nd May 1848

April 27, May 2, 1848

452

452

18,000,000

18 million

2nd December 1849

December 2, 1849

525

525

21,000,000

21 million

12th August 1870

August 12, 1870

1800

1800

32,000,000

32 million

14th August 1870

August 14, 1870

2400

2400

96,000,000

96 million

29th December 1871

December 29, 1871

2800

2800

112,000,000

112 million

15th July 1872

July 15, 1872

3200

3200

128,000,000

128 million

30th January 1884

January 30, 1884

3500

3500

140,000,000

140 million

25th January 1893

January 25, 1893

4000

4000

160,000,000

160 million

17th December 1897

December 17, 1897

5000

5000

200,000,000

200 million

    In 1906

In 1906

5800

5800

232,000,000

232 million

[v.03 p.0343]

[v.03 p.0343]

Most business transactions in France are liquidated, not in cheques as in England, but in notes of the Bank of France. These, owing to their convenience, are preferred to specie. This is accumulated in the vaults of the Bank of France, which in 1906 held on average £115,000,000 gold and £42,000,000 silver. The gold held by the Bank of France is generally considerably larger in amount than that held by the Bank of England, which in the autumn of 1890 had to borrow £3,000,000 in gold from the Bank of France at the time of the Baring crisis. The large specie reserve of the bank has given stability to the trade of France, and has enabled the bank to manage its business without the numerous fluctuations in the rate of discount which are constantly occurring in England. It is true that the holding this very large amount of specie imposes a very heavy burden on the shoulders of the shareholders of the bank, but they do not complain. The advantage to business from the low rate of interest which has to be paid for the use of borrowed capital in France is a great advantage to the trade and industry of that country.

Most business transactions in France are settled not with checks like in England, but with notes from the Bank of France. Due to their convenience, these notes are preferred over cash. Cash is kept in the vaults of the Bank of France, which in 1906 had an average of £115,000,000 in gold and £42,000,000 in silver. The amount of gold held by the Bank of France is usually much greater than that held by the Bank of England, which in the fall of 1890 had to borrow £3,000,000 in gold from the Bank of France during the Baring crisis. The bank's large cash reserves have provided stability to French trade and have allowed it to operate without the frequent fluctuations in interest rates that often occur in England. While keeping such a large amount of cash puts a significant burden on the bank's shareholders, they don't complain. The benefit to businesses from the low interest rates on borrowed capital in France is a significant advantage for the trade and industry of the country.

The mass of the reserve in France is so great that the movements of the precious metals, when they are the result only of natural causes, are allowed to go on without corresponding movements in the discount rate. But it must be remembered that this large reserve is held in part against a gigantic note issue, and also that the trade activity and enterprise of the French people are less intense than in either the United Kingdom or Germany; thus it is much easier for the Bank of France to maintain a steady rate of discount.

The size of the reserve in France is so substantial that changes in the precious metals, when they happen naturally, can occur without any changes in the discount rate. However, it's important to note that this large reserve is partly held to back a massive issue of notes, and that the business activity and entrepreneurship of the French people are not as vigorous as in the United Kingdom or Germany; therefore, it's much easier for the Bank of France to keep a stable discount rate.

Besides the Bank of France, several great credit institutions carry on business in the country; as the Banque de Paris et des Pays-Bas (capital and reserve, £3,729,000; other liabilities, deposits, &c., £14,842,000), the Banque Française pour le Commerce et l'Industrie (£2,450,000; and £3,505,000), the Crédit Lyonnais (£14,000,000; and £82,570,000), the Comptoir National d'Escompte de Paris (£6,772,000; and £47,593,000), the Société Générale pour favoriser le développement du Commerce et de l'Industrie en France (£7,469,000; and £45,800,000), and the Société Générale de Crédit Industriel et Commercial (£1,600,000; and £10,060,000).

Besides the Bank of France, several major credit institutions operate in the country, such as the Banque de Paris et des Pays-Bas (capital and reserve, £3,729,000; other liabilities, deposits, etc., £14,842,000), the Banque Française pour le Commerce et l'Industrie (£2,450,000; and £3,505,000), the Crédit Lyonnais (£14,000,000; and £82,570,000), the Comptoir National d'Escompte de Paris (£6,772,000; and £47,593,000), the Société Générale pour favoriser le développement du Commerce et de l'Industrie en France (£7,469,000; and £45,800,000), and the Société Générale de Crédit Industriel et Commercial (£1,600,000; and £10,060,000).

There is also the Crédit Foncier de France with a very considerable capital, but the business done is so largely that of mortgages that it can hardly be included among banks, though it carries on in some measure the business of banking.

There is also the Crédit Foncier de France with a significant amount of capital, but its operations mostly involve mortgages, so it can hardly be classified as a bank, even though it does engage in some banking activities.

Besides the six important joint-stock banks mentioned above, there exists in France a large number of banks, principally in the provinces, carrying on a very considerable business. Little is known as to their deposits, but their business appears to be conducted with great prudence and discretion. One hundred and eighty-two of these firms were members of the French Country Bankers' Association in 1898. They carry on business in 66 out of the 86 departments into which France is divided. More than one of these banks has several offices—one possessing 18, including the head office. These branches are situated in the small towns in the vicinity. In this the business follows more the English method of small branches. The French Country Bankers' Association holds its meetings in Paris, where matters of interest to bankers are discussed. (See Bankers' Magazine, July 1898.)

Besides the six major joint-stock banks mentioned above, there are many banks in France, mainly in the provinces, that are doing significant business. There is little information about their deposits, but they seem to operate with a lot of care and caution. In 1898, one hundred and eighty-two of these firms were members of the French Country Bankers' Association. They operate in 66 out of the 86 departments that France is divided into. More than one of these banks has multiple branches—one has 18, including the main office. These branches are located in small towns nearby, reflecting a more English style of having small branches. The French Country Bankers' Association meets in Paris to discuss matters of interest to bankers. (See Bankers' Magazine, July 1898.)

Germany.—Besides the Imperial Bank of Germany, the "Reichsbank," there are about 140 banks doing business in the states which form the German empire. These credit and industrial banks with their large resources have had an immense influence in bringing about the astonishing industrial development of their country. Five banks possess the right of uncovered note-issue; these are:—

Germany.—In addition to the Imperial Bank of Germany, known as the "Reichsbank," there are around 140 banks operating in the states that make up the German empire. These credit and industrial banks, with their substantial resources, have played a significant role in driving the remarkable industrial growth of their country. Five banks have the authority to issue notes without backing; these are:—

The Imperial Bank of Germany

The Imperial Bank of Germany

with right of issue

with the right to issue

£23,641,450

£23.64 million

The Bank of Saxony

Saxony Bank

    "        "        "

"        "        "

838,500

838,500

The Bank of Bavaria

Bavarian Bank

    "        "        "

"        "        "

1,600,000

1.6 million

The Bank of Württemberg

Württemberg Bank

    "        "        "

"        "        "

500,000

500,000

The Bank of Baden

The Baden Bank

    "        "        "

"        "        "

500,000

500K

£27,079,950

£27,079,950

At the Bank of Germany the coin and bullion held is sometimes larger than at the Bank of England. The statement of the specie in the weekly accounts includes silver. The amounts held in gold and silver are only separated once a year, when the balance-sheet is published. The figures of the balance-sheet for the 31st of December 1906 showed in round numbers £24,000,000 gold and £9,000,000 silver. As far as the capital is concerned the £18,000,000 of the Bank of England considerably exceeds the £9,000,000 of the Bank of France and the £12,200,000 of the Bank of Germany. The note circulation of both the other banks is considerably larger than that of the Bank of England, that of the Bank of France being £186,300,000, and of the Imperial Bank of Germany £69,000,000 in 1906.

At the Bank of Germany, the amount of coin and bullion held is sometimes greater than at the Bank of England. The weekly accounts show the total of precious metals, including silver. The breakdown of gold and silver holdings is only done once a year when the balance sheet is published. The balance sheet figures for December 31, 1906, showed approximately £24,000,000 in gold and £9,000,000 in silver. In terms of capital, the Bank of England's £18,000,000 is significantly higher than the Bank of France's £9,000,000 and the Bank of Germany's £12,200,000. The note circulation of both other banks is much larger than that of the Bank of England, with the Bank of France having £186,300,000 and the Imperial Bank of Germany £69,000,000 in 1906.

The capitals and reserves of the German banks, including those of banks established to do business in other countries, as South America and the Far East, and of the Bank of Germany, are about £133,000,000, with further resources, including deposits, notes and mortgage bonds, amounting to fully £414,000,000. The amount of the capital compares very closely with that of the capitals of the banks of the United Kingdom. The deposits are increasing. The deposits, however, are not the whole of the resources of the German banks. The banks make use, besides, of their acceptances in a manner which is not practised by the banks of other countries, and the average note circulation of the Reichsbank, included in the statement given above, is between £60,000,000 and £70,000,000.

The capital and reserves of German banks, including those that operate in other countries like South America and the Far East, as well as the Bank of Germany, total about £133,000,000, with additional resources, including deposits, notes, and mortgage bonds, reaching around £414,000,000. The capital amount is very similar to that of banks in the United Kingdom. Deposits are on the rise. However, deposits aren't the only resources of German banks. They also utilize their acceptances in a way that's not used by banks in other countries, and the average note circulation of the Reichsbank, which is included in the figures mentioned above, is between £60,000,000 and £70,000,000.

A large and apparently increasing proportion of the resources of the German banks is employed in industrial concerns, some of which are beyond the boundaries of the empire. The dangers of this practice have called forth many criticisms in Germany, among which may be quoted the remarks of Caesar Strauss and of Dr R. Koch, the president of the Reichsbank. Dr Koch especially points out the need of the development of powerful banks in Germany unconnected with speculative business of this kind. The object of employing their funds thus is the higher rate of interest to be obtained from these investments than from discounting bills or making loans at home. But such an employment of the resources of a bank is opposed to all regular rules of business and of banking tradition, which abstains from making fixed investments of any large part of the resources of a bank. On the other hand, Dr Koch observes that the risks of the one "reserve system" mentioned by Bagehot are not to be feared in Germany.[5] The recent movement in favour of concentration among the banks has been described by Dr E. Depitre and Dr Riesser, who give particulars of the business done by these banks, which does not correspond with banking as practised in the United Kingdom, being more of an industrial character.

A large and seemingly increasing share of resources from German banks is being used for industrial ventures, some of which extend beyond the empire's borders. This practice has sparked numerous criticisms in Germany, including comments from Caesar Strauss and Dr. R. Koch, the president of the Reichsbank. Dr. Koch particularly emphasizes the necessity for the establishment of strong banks in Germany that are not involved in this kind of speculative business. The rationale for using their funds in this way is to achieve a higher interest rate from these investments compared to what they would earn from discounting bills or providing loans domestically. However, this use of a bank's resources goes against standard business practices and banking traditions, which typically avoid making significant fixed investments with a large portion of a bank's resources. On the other hand, Dr. Koch notes that the risks associated with the "reserve system" mentioned by Bagehot are not something to worry about in Germany. The recent push for consolidation among the banks has been detailed by Dr. E. Depitre and Dr. Riesser, who provide information about the operations of these banks, which do not align with banking practices in the United Kingdom and are more industrial in nature.

There are also many private banking firms in Germany which do a considerable amount of business.

There are also many private banking firms in Germany that do a significant amount of business.

The Reichsbank, by far the most powerful banking institution in Germany, is managed by the bank directory appointed by the chancellor of the empire. The shareholders join in the management through a committee, of which each member must be qualified by holding not less than three shares. The government exercises complete powers of control through the chancellor of the empire. The influence of the Imperial Bank now permeates, by means of its branches, all the separate kingdoms of the empire—the uniformity of coinage introduced through the laws of 1871-1873 rendering this possible. The Imperial Bank assists business principally in two ways—first, through the clearing system (Giro-Verkehr), which it has greatly developed, and secondly, through the facilities given to business by its note circulation. The Imperial Bank also receives deposits, and cheques are drawn against these, but in Germany notes are principally used in payments for ordinary business.

The Reichsbank, the most powerful banking institution in Germany, is run by a bank directory appointed by the chancellor of the empire. Shareholders participate in management through a committee, where each member must hold at least three shares. The government has full control through the chancellor of the empire. The influence of the Imperial Bank now spreads through its branches to all the separate kingdoms of the empire, made possible by the uniformity of coinage established by the laws of 1871-1873. The Imperial Bank supports businesses mainly in two ways: first, through the clearing system (Giro-Verkehr), which it has significantly expanded, and second, by providing business with its note circulation. The Imperial Bank also accepts deposits, and cheques can be drawn against these, but in Germany, notes are primarily used for everyday business payments.

Before the Reichsbank was established, Hamburg was the first, and for a long time the only, example of a clearing in Germany. This was taken up by the Reichsbank when it established its office in Hamburg in the time-honoured building which had belonged to the Hamburg Clearing House. Similar business had long been undertaken by the Bank of Prussia. This was absorbed and developed by the Reichsbank in 1876. Through the "clearing system" money can be remitted from any of the 443 places in which there is an office of the Reichsbank, to any of these places, without charge either to the sender or the receiver. It is sufficient that the person to whom the money is to be remitted should have an account at the bank. Any person owing him money in the remotest parts of the empire may go to the office of the bank which is most convenient to him and pay in the amount of his debt, which is credited on the following day at the office of the bank, without charge, to the account of his creditor wherever he may reside. The person who makes the payment need not have any account with the bank. The impetus given to business by this arrangement has been very considerable. It practically amounts to a money-order system without charge or risk of loss in transmission. From Hamburg and Bremen to the frontiers of Russia, from the shores of the Baltic to the frontiers of Switzerland, the whole of the empire of Germany has thus become for monetary purposes one country only. The amount of these transfers for the year 1906 exceeded £1,860,000,000.

Before the Reichsbank was established, Hamburg was the first and for a long time the only example of a clearinghouse in Germany. This was taken over by the Reichsbank when it set up its office in Hamburg in the historic building that had belonged to the Hamburg Clearing House. Similar operations had been handled by the Bank of Prussia, which the Reichsbank absorbed and expanded in 1876. Through the "clearing system," money can be sent from any of the 443 locations where there is a Reichsbank office to any of these locations, without any fees for the sender or the receiver. It's enough for the person receiving the money to have an account at the bank. Anyone who owes them money, even from the farthest parts of the empire, can go to the nearest bank office and pay the amount they owe, which will be credited the next day at the bank office to their creditor's account, no matter where they live. The person making the payment doesn’t need to have an account with the bank. This system has significantly boosted business. It's essentially a money-order system that incurs no fees and has no risk of loss in transit. From Hamburg and Bremen to the borders of Russia, and from the Baltic Sea to the borders of Switzerland, the entire German empire has effectively become a single monetary entity. The total amount of these transfers for the year 1906 exceeded £1,860,000,000.

The note circulation is also a powerful factor of the business of the Reichsbank. It is governed by the law of 1875 and the amending law of 1899, corresponding in some degree to Peel's act of 1844, which regulates the note circulation of the Bank of England. An uncovered limit, originally £12,500,000, increased to £14,811,450 by the lapse of the issues of other banks allowed to it, has been extended by these and by the act of the 5th of June 1902 to £23,641,450. Against the notes thus issued which are not represented by specie, treasury notes (Reichskassenscheine, the legal tender notes of the [v.03 p.0344]empire)[6] and notes of the issuing banks which are allowed to be reckoned as specie or discounted bills, must be held—maturing not later than three months after being taken—with, as a rule, three, but never less than two, good indorsements. There is also a provision that at least one-third of the notes in circulation must be covered by current German notes, money, notes of the imperial treasury, and gold in bullion or foreign coin reckoned at £69, 12s. per pound fine. The Reichsbank is bound by law to redeem its notes in current German money. It is stated that this may be gold coin or silver thalers, or bar-gold at the rate of 1392 marks (£69, 12s. reckoning marks as 20 = £1) the pound fine of gold. In practice, however, facilities have not always been given by the Reichsbank for the payment of its obligations in gold, though the importance of this is admitted. In the balance-sheet for 1906 the bills held amounted to £67,000,000, and the loans and advances to £14,200,000. The notes issued averaged for the year £69,000,000. The gold held amounted, 30th December 1906, to £24,069,000. If the condition of business requires that the notes in circulation should exceed the limits allowed by the law, the bank is permitted to do this on the payment of 5% on the surplus. In this respect the German act differs from the English act, which allows no such automatic statutory power of overpassing the limit of issue. Some good authorities consider that this arrangement is an advantage for the German bank, and the fact that it has been made use of annually since 1895 appears to show that it is needed by the business requirements of the country. Of late years the excess of issue of the Reichsbank has been annual and large, having been £25,267,000 on the 29th of September 1906 and £28,632,000 on the 31st of December of the same year. The amount of the duty paid on the excess issue in the year 1906 was £184,764, and the total amount paid thus from 1876 to 1906 was £839,052. The increase of the uncovered limit (untaxed limit of issue called in Germany the "note reserve") has not been sufficient to obviate the need for an excess of issue beyond the limit.

The circulation of notes is also a significant aspect of the Reichsbank's operations. It is regulated by the law of 1875 and the amending law of 1899, which somewhat mirrors Peel's Act of 1844 that governs the note circulation of the Bank of England. An uncovered limit, initially set at £12,500,000, has increased to £14,811,450 due to the expiration of issues from other banks. This limit was then raised again by the act of June 5, 1902, to £23,641,450. For the notes issued that aren't backed by gold or silver, the bank must hold treasury notes (Reichskassenscheine, the legal tender notes of the empire) and notes from other issuing banks that can be considered equivalent to specie or discounted bills, maturing no later than three months from the date of issuance, usually requiring three, but never fewer than two, reliable endorsements. Additionally, at least one-third of the notes in circulation must be backed by current German notes, cash, notes from the imperial treasury, and gold in bullion or foreign currency valued at £69, 12s. per pound of fine gold. By law, the Reichsbank is required to redeem its notes in current German currency, which could be in gold coins, silver thalers, or bar-gold at the rate of 1,392 marks (£69, 12s. at 20 marks to £1) per pound of fine gold. However, in practice, the Reichsbank has not always made it easy for people to redeem their obligations in gold, although its importance is recognized. In the balance sheet for 1906, the bills held amounted to £67,000,000, and loans and advances were £14,200,000. The average amount of notes issued over the year was £69,000,000, and the gold held on December 30, 1906, was £24,069,000. If business conditions require that the amount of notes in circulation exceeds legal limits, the bank is allowed to exceed this limit by paying a 5% fee on the surplus. This provision distinguishes the German law from the English law, which does not permit such automatic authority to exceed the issuance limit. Some reputable sources believe this arrangement benefits the German bank, and the fact that it has been utilized annually since 1895 suggests it is necessary for the country’s business needs. In recent years, the Reichsbank's issuance surplus has been significant and annual, amounting to £25,267,000 on September 29, 1906, and £28,632,000 on December 31 of the same year. The total duty paid on the excess issuance in 1906 was £184,764, with the total paid from 1876 to 1906 being £839,052. The increase in the uncovered limit (the untaxed issuance limit referred to in Germany as the "note reserve") has not been enough to eliminate the necessity for exceeding the issuance limit.

In accordance with a law passed in 1906 the Imperial Bank issues notes (Reichsbanknoten) of the value of 20 marks (£1), and 50 marks (£2, 10s.) in addition to the 5, 10, 100 and 1000 mark notes (5s., 10s., £5, £50) previously in circulation. Imperial paper currency of the value of 20 or 50 marks (£1 and £2, 10s.) had previously existed only in the form of treasury notes (Reichskassenscheine); these will in consequence be withdrawn from circulation.

According to a law passed in 1906, the Imperial Bank issues notes (Reichsbanknoten) worth 20 marks (£1) and 50 marks (£2, 10s.), in addition to the 5, 10, 100, and 1000 mark notes (5s., 10s., £5, £50) that were already in circulation. Imperial paper currency valued at 20 or 50 marks (£1 and £2, 10s.) had previously only existed as treasury notes (Reichskassenscheine), which will now be withdrawn from circulation.

The amendment of the banking law of Germany, passed in 1899, not only affects the position of the Reichsbank, but that of the four other note-issuing banks. The capital of the Reichsbank has been raised by the bill of that year to £9,000,000. The reserve fund has been raised out of surplus profits to £3,240,000. This exceeds the amount required by the act of 1899, which was £3,000,000. The amending act further diminishes the dividend receivable by the stockholders of the Reichsbank and increases the share which the government will obtain.

The update to the banking law in Germany, passed in 1899, not only impacts the role of the Reichsbank but also that of the four other note-issuing banks. The capital of the Reichsbank has been increased by this year's bill to £9,000,000. The reserve fund has grown from surplus profits to £3,240,000. This is more than the amount required by the 1899 act, which was £3,000,000. The amending act also reduces the dividends payable to the stockholders of the Reichsbank and increases the share that the government will receive.

The arrangement with the four note-issuing banks is designed to cause them to work in harmony with the Reichsbank when the Reichsbank has to raise its bank-rate in order to protect its gold reserves. The official published rate of discount of the Reichsbank is to be binding on the private note-issuing banks after it has reached or when it reaches 4%. At other times they are not to discount at more than ¼% below the official rate of the Reichsbank, or in case the Reichsbank itself discounts at a lower rate than the official rate, at more than ⅛% below that rate. If the Reichsbank discounts below the official rate, it is to announce that fact in the Gazette.

The agreement with the four banks that issue notes is meant to ensure they collaborate with the Reichsbank when it needs to increase its bank rate to safeguard its gold reserves. The official published discount rate of the Reichsbank will apply to the private note-issuing banks once it hits or surpasses 4%. At other times, these banks can't discount more than ¼% below the official Reichsbank rate, or if the Reichsbank itself is discounting at a lower rate than the official one, no more than ⅛% below that rate. If the Reichsbank discounts below the official rate, it will announce this in the Gazette.

The subject being important, we quote from the amending act the sections governing the discount rate:—Gesetz, betreffend die Abänderung des Bankgesetzes vom 14. März 1875; vom 7. Juni 1899, Artikel 7, S. 1. The private note-issuing banks are bound by Artikel 7, S. 2, after the 1st of January 1901:—"(1) Not to discount below the rate published in S. 15 of the bank law, so long as this rate attains or exceeds 4%, and (2) moreover, not to discount at more than ¼% below the Reichsbank rate, published in S. 15 of the bank law, or in case the Reichsbank itself discounts at a lower rate, not to discount at more than ⅛% below that rate."

The topic is significant, so we reference the amending act that outlines the discount rate:—Gesetz, betreffend die Abänderung des Bankgesetzes vom 14. März 1875; vom 7. Juni 1899, Artikel 7, S. 1. The private note-issuing banks must adhere to Artikel 7, S. 2, starting January 1, 1901:—"(1) They cannot discount below the rate stated in S. 15 of the bank law, as long as this rate is 4% or higher, and (2) additionally, they cannot discount more than ¼% below the Reichsbank rate, mentioned in S. 15 of the bank law, or if the Reichsbank itself is discounting at a lower rate, they cannot discount more than ⅛% below that rate."

It remains to be seen whether the note-issuing banks will find these conditions too onerous, and rather than be bound by them will give up their right of issuing notes. The object of the enactment is apparently to protect the specie reserve of the Reichsbank, but it may be doubted whether, considering the importance of the other banks of Germany—none of which is bound by similar conditions—relatively to the note-issuing banks, the restrictions put on the note-issuing banks will have any practical effect.

It’s still unclear whether the banks that issue notes will find these conditions too burdensome, and instead of adhering to them, might choose to forfeit their right to issue notes. The purpose of the law seems to be to safeguard the gold reserves of the Reichsbank, but one could question whether, given the significance of the other banks in Germany—none of which is subject to similar conditions—the limitations imposed on the note-issuing banks will actually have any real impact.

Since 1870 banking has made immense progress in Germany, but it may be some time before the habit of making payments by cheque instead of specie or notes becomes general.

Since 1870, banking has made huge strides in Germany, but it might take a while before people commonly switch from using cash or coins to making payments by check.

Authorities.—Parliamentary Papers: Report, together with Minutes of Evidence and Accounts, from the Select Committee on the High Price of Gold Bullion, House of Commons, 8th of June 1810; Reports, Committee of Secrecy on Bank of England Charter, House of Commons, 1832; Select Committee on Banks of Issue, House of Commons, 1840; First and Second Reports, Select Committee on Banks of Issue, House of Commons, 1841; First and Second Reports, Secret Committee on Commercial Distress, House of Commons, 1848; Report, Select Committee on Bank Acts, House of Commons, 1857; Report, Select Committee on Bank Acts, House of Commons, 1858; Report, Select Committee on Banks of Issue, House of Commons, 1875; Report from Secret Committee of the House of Lords on the Causes of the Distress which has for some time prevailed among the Commercial Classes, and how far it had been affected by the Laws for regulating the Issue of Bank Notes payable on demand, session 1847-1848; Analysis of the Minutes of Evidence taken before the Select Committee of the House of Commons on Banks of Issue, 1875, with a selection from the evidence, by R. H. Inglis Palgrave, London, 1876 (printed for private circulation).

Authorities.—Parliamentary Papers: Report, along with Minutes of Evidence and Accounts, from the Select Committee on the High Price of Gold Bullion, House of Commons, June 8, 1810; Reports, Committee of Secrecy on Bank of England Charter, House of Commons, 1832; Select Committee on Banks of Issue, House of Commons, 1840; First and Second Reports, Select Committee on Banks of Issue, House of Commons, 1841; First and Second Reports, Secret Committee on Commercial Distress, House of Commons, 1848; Report, Select Committee on Bank Acts, House of Commons, 1857; Report, Select Committee on Bank Acts, House of Commons, 1858; Report, Select Committee on Banks of Issue, House of Commons, 1875; Report from Secret Committee of the House of Lords on the Causes of the Distress affecting the Commercial Classes, and the impact of the Laws regulating the Issue of Bank Notes payable on demand, session 1847-1848; Analysis of the Minutes of Evidence collected by the Select Committee of the House of Commons on Banks of Issue, 1875, including a selection from the evidence, by R. H. Inglis Palgrave, London, 1876 (printed for private circulation).

General Information.—Articles on banking, &c., Dictionary of Political Economy, edited by R. H. Inglis Palgrave (Macmillan & Co., 1894-1906); Handwörterbuch der Staatswissenschaften, edited by Conrad, Elster, Lexis and Löning, 1899; Wörterbuch der Volkswirthschaft, 2 vols. (ed. Elster, 1898); Dictionnaire des finances, edited under the direction of Léon Say, by L. Foyot and A. Lanjalley (1889); Dictionnaire du commerce, de l'industrie et de la banque, edited by A. Raffalovich and Yves Guyot; Bankers' Magazine, commenced 1844, to present time; Journal of the Institute of Bankers, commenced 1879, to present time; Bankers' Magazine (New York); Economist newspaper, commenced 1843, to present time; Banking Almanac, commenced 1845, to present time; Reports of the Comptroller of the Currency (Washington).

Info Overview.—Articles on banking, etc., Dictionary of Political Economy, edited by R. H. Inglis Palgrave (Macmillan & Co., 1894-1906); Handwörterbuch der Staatswissenschaften, edited by Conrad, Elster, Lexis, and Löning, 1899; Wörterbuch der Volkswirthschaft, 2 vols. (ed. Elster, 1898); Dictionnaire des finances, edited under the direction of Léon Say, by L. Foyot and A. Lanjalley (1889); Dictionnaire du commerce, de l'industrie et de la banque, edited by A. Raffalovich and Yves Guyot; Bankers' Magazine, started in 1844, still ongoing; Journal of the Institute of Bankers, started in 1879, still ongoing; Bankers' Magazine (New York); Economist newspaper, started in 1843, still ongoing; Banking Almanac, started in 1845, still ongoing; Reports of the Comptroller of the Currency (Washington).

Early.—De Monetarum Augmento, variatione et diminutione, Tractatus varii (1509); A proposal to supply His Majesty with twelve or fourteen Millions of Money (or more if requir'd), by A. D. of Grey's Inn, Esq., and some Others, his Friends (1697); Hayes' Negociators' Magazine of Monies and Exchanges, 1730; Lord King, Thoughts on Bank Restrictions (1804); The Theory of Money with considerations on the Bank of England (1811); William Cobbett, Paper against Gold and Glory against Prosperity, 2 vols. (1815); Circulating Credit with Hints for improving the Banking System of Britain, by a Scottish Banker (1832); W. Leckie, Bank Restriction (1841); Debates in the House of Commons on Sir R. Peel's Bank Bills of 1844 and 1845, reprinted verbatim from "Hansard's Parliamentary Debates," 1875; Gilbart's Works, 6 vols. (1865); The History, Principles and Practice of Banking, by J. W. Gilbart, edited and revised by A. S. Michie, 1882; Thomson Hankey, Principles of Banking (1867); Walter Bagehot, Lombard Street (1873), a brilliant picture of the city at that date (new ed., 1906); A. S. Cobb, Threadneedle Street, a reply to "Lombard Street" (1891); John Dun, British Banking Statistics (1876); R. H. Inglis Palgrave, Notes on Banking; George Rae, The Country Banker (1886), and several editions later (many sound hints on practice); J. George Kiddy, The Country Banker's Handbook, 4th ed. (1903); C. F. Dunbar, Chapters on the Theory and History of Banking (1891); Charles Gairdner, The Making of the Gold Reserves (1891); J. B. Attfield, English and Foreign Banks (1893) (refers to management of banks); T. B. Moxon, English Practical Banking, 10th ed. (1899); A. Crump, The Key to the London Money Market (1872); W. Y. Duncan, Notes on the Rate of Discount in London, 3 vols., 1822-1856, 1856-1866, 1866-1873, privately printed, Edinburgh, 1856, 1867 and 1877; R. H. Inglis Palgrave, Bank Rate and the Money Market in England, France, Germany, Holland and Belgium, 1844-1900 (1903); Ernest Seyd, The Bank of England Note Issue and its Error (1874); Ernest Seyd, London Banking and Bankers' Clearing House System; Ernest Seyd, The Silver Question in 1893; Walter Bagehot, Depreciation of Silver (1877); Ernest Seyd, Bullion and the Foreign Exchanges (1868); Clare, The A B C of the Foreign Exchanges (1895, 2nd ed. 1895); Tracts, by Lord Overstone (1837-1857); Select Tracts on Money, &c., reprinted privately by Lord Overstone, 1856-1859 (containing much valuable and interesting information on early history); A. Crump, A Practical Treatise on Banking, Currency and the Exchanges (1866); Bonamy Price, Currency and Banking (1876) (the interest of this volume to the student of banking is found mainly in the correspondence between Mr Henry Hucks Gibbs (Lord Aldenham) and Professor Bonamy Price on the reserve of the Bank of England); R. H. Inglis Palgrave, On the Influence of a Note Circulation in the Conduct of Banking Business, read before the Manchester Statistical Society, 1877; Edgar Jaffé, Das englische Bankwesen (Leipzig, 1905); A History of Banks (1837); D. Hardcastle, Banks and Bankers (1843); W. J. Lawson, The History of Banking (1850); R. Baxter, The Panic of 1866 (1866); F. G. H. Price, A Handbook of London Bankers (1876); Conant, History of Modern Banks of Issue (New York, 1896); History of Banking in all Leading Nations, 4 vols. (New York, 1896); Viscount Goschen, Essays and Addresses on Economic Questions, 1865-1893 (1905), (arts. on "Seven per cent," "Two per cent," "Our cash reserves and central stock of gold"); C. F. Dunbar, Economic Essays, edited by O. M. W. Sprague (1904), (containing many articles on banking, particularly in the United States).

Before.—The Increase, Variation, and Decrease of Currency, Various Treatises (1509); A proposal to provide His Majesty with twelve or fourteen million in cash (or more if needed), by A. D. of Grey's Inn, Esq., and some friends (1697); Hayes' Negociators' Magazine of Money and Exchanges, 1730; Lord King, Thoughts on Bank Restrictions (1804); The Theory of Money with considerations on the Bank of England (1811); William Cobbett, Paper versus Gold and Glory versus Prosperity, 2 vols. (1815); Circulating Credit with Suggestions for Improving the Banking System of Britain, by a Scottish Banker (1832); W. Leckie, Bank Restriction (1841); Debates in the House of Commons on Sir R. Peel's Bank Bills of 1844 and 1845, reprinted verbatim from "Hansard's Parliamentary Debates," 1875; Gilbart's Works, 6 vols. (1865); The History, Principles and Practice of Banking, by J. W. Gilbart, edited and revised by A. S. Michie, 1882; Thomson Hankey, Principles of Banking (1867); Walter Bagehot, Lombard Street (1873), a brilliant portrayal of the city at that time (new ed., 1906); A. S. Cobb, Threadneedle Street, a Response to "Lombard Street" (1891); John Dun, British Banking Statistics (1876); R. H. Inglis Palgrave, Notes on Banking; George Rae, The Country Banker (1886), and several later editions (many valuable insights on practice); J. George Kiddy, The Country Banker's Handbook, 4th ed. (1903); C. F. Dunbar, Chapters on the Theory and History of Banking (1891); Charles Gairdner, The Making of the Gold Reserves (1891); J. B. Attfield, English and Foreign Banks (1893) (refers to bank management); T. B. Moxon, English Practical Banking, 10th ed. (1899); A. Crump, The Key to the London Money Market (1872); W. Y. Duncan, Notes on the Rate of Discount in London, 3 vols., 1822-1856, 1856-1866, 1866-1873, privately printed, Edinburgh, 1856, 1867 and 1877; R. H. Inglis Palgrave, Bank Rate and the Money Market in England, France, Germany, Holland and Belgium, 1844-1900 (1903); Ernest Seyd, The Bank of England Note Issue and its Error (1874); Ernest Seyd, London Banking and the Bankers' Clearing House System; Ernest Seyd, The Silver Question in 1893; Walter Bagehot, Depreciation of Silver (1877); Ernest Seyd, Bullion and the Foreign Exchanges (1868); Clare, The A B C of the Foreign Exchanges (1895, 2nd ed. 1895); Tracts, by Lord Overstone (1837-1857); Select Tracts on Money, &c., reprinted privately by Lord Overstone, 1856-1859 (containing much valuable and interesting information on early history); A. Crump, A Practical Treatise on Banking, Currency and the Exchanges (1866); Bonamy Price, Currency and Banking (1876) (the relevance of this volume to banking students lies mainly in the correspondence between Mr. Henry Hucks Gibbs (Lord Aldenham) and Professor Bonamy Price about the reserves of the Bank of England); R. H. Inglis Palgrave, On the Influence of Note Circulation in Conducting Banking Business, read before the Manchester Statistical Society, 1877; Edgar Jaffé, The English Banking System (Leipzig, 1905); A History of Banks (1837); D. Hardcastle, Banks and Bankers (1843); W. J. Lawson, The History of Banking (1850); R. Baxter, The Panic of 1866 (1866); F. G. H. Price, A Handbook of London Bankers (1876); Conant, History of Modern Banks of Issue (New York, 1896); History of Banking in all Leading Nations, 4 vols. (New York, 1896); Viscount Goschen, Essays and Addresses on Economic Questions, 1865-1893 (1905), (articles on "Seven percent," "Two percent," "Our cash reserves and central gold stock"); C. F. Dunbar, Economic Essays, edited by O. M. W. Sprague (1904), (containing many articles on banking, especially in the United States).

Bank of England.—T. Fortune, A Concise and Authentic History of the Bank of England (1802); John Francis, History of the Bank of England (1847); J. E. Thorold Rogers, The First Nine Years of [v.03 p.0345]the Bank of England (1887); B. B. Turner, Chronicles of the Bank of England (1897); T. A. Stephens, Bibliography of the Bank of England (1897); A. Andréadès, Histoire de la banque d'Angleterre (1904; Eng. trans., 1909); Sir F. Schuster, The Bank of England and the State (1906).

Bank of England.—T. Fortune, A Concise and Authentic History of the Bank of England (1802); John Francis, History of the Bank of England (1847); J. E. Thorold Rogers, The First Nine Years of [v.03 p.0345]the Bank of England (1887); B. B. Turner, Chronicles of the Bank of England (1897); T. A. Stephens, Bibliography of the Bank of England (1897); A. Andréadès, Histoire de la banque d'Angleterre (1904; Eng. trans., 1909); Sir F. Schuster, The Bank of England and the State (1906).

History of Banking Houses.—L. H. Grindon, Manchester Banks and Bankers (1877); J. B. Martin, "The Grasshopper" in Lombard Street (1892); M. Phillips, Banks, Bankers, and Banking in Northumberland, Durham and North Yorkshire (1894); C. H. Cave, History of Banking in Bristol (1899); Bidwell, Annals of an East Anglian Bank (1900); Richardson, Coutts & Co., Bankers, Edinburgh and London; H. T. Easton, History of a Banking House (Smith, Payne & Smiths) (1903); J. Hughes, Liverpool Banks and Bankers, 1760-1837 (1906).

History of Banks.—L. H. Grindon, Manchester Banks and Bankers (1877); J. B. Martin, "The Grasshopper" in Lombard Street (1892); M. Phillips, Banks, Bankers, and Banking in Northumberland, Durham and North Yorkshire (1894); C. H. Cave, History of Banking in Bristol (1899); Bidwell, Annals of an East Anglian Bank (1900); Richardson, Coutts & Co., Bankers, Edinburgh and London; H. T. Easton, History of a Banking House (Smith, Payne & Smiths) (1903); J. Hughes, Liverpool Banks and Bankers, 1760-1837 (1906).

Scotland.—W. H. Logan, The Scottish Banker (1847); Robert Somers, The Scotch Banks and System of Issue (1873); W. Mitchell, Scotch Banks and Limited Liability (1879); A. W. Kerr, History of Scotch Banking (1884); A. W. Kerr, Scottish Banking, 1865-1896 (1898); Boase, A Century of Banking in Dundee (1867).

Scotland.—W. H. Logan, The Scottish Banker (1847); Robert Somers, The Scotch Banks and System of Issue (1873); W. Mitchell, Scotch Banks and Limited Liability (1879); A. W. Kerr, History of Scotch Banking (1884); A. W. Kerr, Scottish Banking, 1865-1896 (1898); Boase, A Century of Banking in Dundee (1867).

Ireland.—Malcolm Dillon, History and Development of Banking in Ireland (1889).

Ireland.—Malcolm Dillon, History and Development of Banking in Ireland (1889).

British Colonies.—Edward B. Hamilton, A Manual of the Law and Practice of Banking in Australia and New Zealand (1880); Banking in Australasia (1883); The Canadian System of Banking and the National Banking System of the United States (Toronto, 1890); Journal of the Canadian Bankers' Association (Montreal).

France.—Annuaire-Chaix, Les Principales Sociétés par actions (1905); A. Raffalovich, Le Marché financier (1905).

France.—Annuaire-Chaix, The Major Joint-Stock Companies (1905); A. Raffalovich, The Financial Market (1905).

Germany.—Dr W. Scharling, Bank Politik (Jena, 1900); Die Reichsbank, 1876-1900 (a history and description of the operations of the bank); Dr Adolf Weber, Depositenbanken und Spekulationsbanken, Ein Vergleich deutschen und englischen Bankwesens (Leipzig, 1902); Dr Felix Hecht, Die Mannheimer Banken, 1870 bis 1900 (Leipzig, 1902); Siegfried Buff, Das Kontokurrentgeschaft im deutschen Bankwerbe (Stuttgart and Berlin, 1904); Dr Riesser, Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der deutschen Grossbanken mit besonderer Rucksicht auf die Konzentrationsbestrebungen (1905); G. M. Boissevain, Duitsche en Engelsche Deposito-Banken (1905).

Germany.—Dr. W. Scharling, Bank Politik (Jena, 1900); The Reichsbank, 1876-1900 (a history and description of the bank's operations); Dr. Adolf Weber, Depository Banks and Speculation Banks: A Comparison of German and English Banking (Leipzig, 1902); Dr. Felix Hecht, The Mannheim Banks, 1870 to 1900 (Leipzig, 1902); Siegfried Buff, The Current Account Business in German Banking (Stuttgart and Berlin, 1904); Dr. Riesser, On the Development History of German Major Banks with Special Attention to Concentration Efforts (1905); G. M. Boissevain, German and English Depository Banks (1905).

Italy.—La Banca Popolare di Milano (1881).

Italy.—Popolare di Milano Bank (1881).

Austria.—Compass, Finanzielles Jahrbuch für Österreich-Ungarn (Vienna).

Austria.—Compass, *Financial Yearbook for Austria-Hungary* (Vienna).

Japan.—The House of Mitsui (Tokio); The Law and the By-Laws of the Nippon Kogyo Ginko (The Industrial Bank of Japan) (1903).

Japan.—The House of Mitsui (Tokyo); The Law and the By-Laws of the Nippon Kogyo Ginko (The Industrial Bank of Japan) (1903).

H. W. Wolff, People's Banks (1893). (On systems worked by Schulze-Delitzsch, Raiffeisen, Luzzatti, Banche Popolari, Dr Wollemborg, Popular Banks in Belgium, Switzerland, France, England).

H. W. Wolff, People's Banks (1893). (On systems operated by Schulze-Delitzsch, Raiffeisen, Luzzatti, Banche Popolari, Dr. Wollemborg, Popular Banks in Belgium, Switzerland, France, England).

(R. H. I. P.)

(R. H. I. P.)

United States

USA

The early history of the American colonies is strewn, like that of most new countries, with many crude experiments in banking and currency issues. Most of these colonial enterprises, however, were projects for the issue of paper money rather than the creation of commercial banks. Speculative banking was checked to a large extent in the colonies by the Bubble Act (6 Geo. I. c. 18), which was passed in England after the bursting of the South Sea Bubble. This act, which forbade the formation of banking companies without a special charter, was in 1740 extended to the colonies.

The early history of the American colonies, like that of many new countries, is filled with rough attempts at banking and currency issues. However, most of these colonial efforts were focused on creating paper money instead of establishing commercial banks. Speculative banking was largely limited in the colonies by the Bubble Act (6 Geo. I. c. 18), which was enacted in England after the collapse of the South Sea Bubble. This act, which prohibited the formation of banking companies without a special charter, was extended to the colonies in 1740.

The serious history of banking in the United States may be said to have begun with the foundation of the Bank of Pennsylvania. This bank originated in the project of a number of the citizens of Philadelphia to supply the continental army with rations. The first bills, issued in 1780, were nothing more than interest-bearing notes payable at a future time. The advances in continental money made by the shareholders were secured by bills of exchange for £150,000, drawn on the American envoys in Europe, but not intended to be negotiated.

The serious history of banking in the United States can be said to have started with the founding of the Bank of Pennsylvania. This bank began as a project by several citizens of Philadelphia to provide rations for the continental army. The first bills, issued in 1780, were essentially interest-bearing notes that would be paid back later. The money advanced by the shareholders in continental currency was backed by bills of exchange for £150,000, drawn on the American representatives in Europe, but these were not meant to be negotiated.

A further outgrowth of the needs of the continental government was the Bank of North America, which was authorized by congress on May 26, 1781. The act gave to Robert Morris, the financier, power to create a bank with a capital of $400,000, to be increased if desirable. Morris arranged with the Bank of Pennsylvania to take over its holdings of foreign bills and paid in cash its claims against the Federation. The Bank of North America did not begin business until the 7th of January 1782, and there was so much doubt of the power of the continental congress to charter a bank that it was thought advisable to obtain a charter from the state of Pennsylvania. Under this charter the bank continued to operate until it was absorbed in the national banking system in 1863, and it may be considered the oldest organized banking institution in the United States.

A further result of the needs of the continental government was the Bank of North America, which was approved by Congress on May 26, 1781. The act gave Robert Morris, the financier, the authority to establish a bank with a capital of $400,000, which could be increased if necessary. Morris made arrangements with the Bank of Pennsylvania to take over its foreign bills and paid its claims against the Federation in cash. The Bank of North America didn’t start operating until January 7, 1782, and there was so much uncertainty about the continental congress's ability to charter a bank that it was deemed wise to get a charter from the state of Pennsylvania. Under this charter, the bank continued to operate until it was incorporated into the national banking system in 1863, and it can be considered the oldest organized banking institution in the United States.

The bank did much, during the first eight years after its organization, to restore order to the chaos of Federation finances. It loaned to Morris, as government superintendent of finance, $1,249,975, of which $996,581 was repaid in cash and the remainder by surrendering the stock in the bank owned by the government.

The bank did a lot in the first eight years after it was established to bring some order to the mess of Federation finances. It loaned Morris, the government superintendent of finance, $1,249,975, of which $996,581 was paid back in cash and the rest was settled by the government giving up its stock in the bank.

The Bank of the United States.—A national bank of issue was one of the essential parts of the system built up by Alexander Hamilton in organizing the finances of the Federal government under the constitution of 1789. The first "Bank of the United States" was accordingly incorporated in 1791, with a capital of $10,000,000, divided into 25,000 shares of $400 each. This bank issued circulating notes, discounted commercial paper and aided the government in its financial operations. The government subscribed one-fifth of the capital, but paid for it by a roundabout process which actually resulted in the loan of the amount by the bank to the treasury. Other loans were made by the bank to the government, which gradually carried the obligation by the end of 1795 to $6,200,000. In order to meet these obligations, the government gradually disposed of its bank stock, until by 1802 its entire holdings had been disposed of at a profit of $671,860. The bank did not publish regular reports, but a statement submitted by Gallatin to congress for January 24, 1811, showed resources of $24,183,046, of which $14,578,294 was in loans and discounts, $2,750,000 in United States stock and $5,009,567 in specie.

The Bank of the United States.—A national bank was a crucial part of the system that Alexander Hamilton established to manage the finances of the Federal government under the constitution of 1789. The first "Bank of the United States" was incorporated in 1791 with a capital of $10,000,000, divided into 25,000 shares of $400 each. This bank issued currency, discounted commercial loans, and supported the government with its financial activities. The government owned one-fifth of the capital, but acquired it through a complicated process that actually resulted in a loan from the bank to the treasury. The bank also provided other loans to the government, which by the end of 1795 had grown the total obligation to $6,200,000. To meet these obligations, the government gradually sold off its bank stock, and by 1802, it had entirely sold its shares for a profit of $671,860. The bank didn't release regular reports, but a statement submitted by Gallatin to Congress on January 24, 1811, showed total resources of $24,183,046, of which $14,578,294 was in loans and discounts, $2,750,000 in U.S. stock, and $5,009,567 in cash.

The expiration of the charter of the bank in 1811 was the occasion of a party contest, which prevented renewal and added greatly to the financial difficulties of the government in the war with Great Britain which began in the next year. Although foreign shareholders were not permitted to vote by proxy, and the twenty-five directors were required to be citizens of the United States, the bank was attacked on the ground of foreign ownership as well as on the constitutional ground that congress had no power to create such an institution.

The expiration of the bank's charter in 1811 led to a political battle that stopped its renewal and significantly worsened the financial challenges for the government during the war with Great Britain, which started the following year. Even though foreign shareholders couldn’t vote by proxy and all twenty-five directors had to be U.S. citizens, the bank faced criticism for foreign ownership and on the constitutional basis that Congress didn’t have the authority to create such an institution.

The government was compelled in the war of 1812 to rely on the state banks. Their suspension of specie payments, in 1814, made it very difficult for the treasury to transfer funds from one part of the Union to the other, because the notes of one section did not circulate readily in another. Gallatin left on record the opinion that the suspension of specie payments "might have been prevented at the time when it took place, had the former Bank of the United States been still in existence."

The government had to depend on state banks during the War of 1812. Their halting of cash payments in 1814 made it really tough for the treasury to move money from one part of the country to another, since the banknotes from one area didn’t easily circulate in another. Gallatin noted that the suspension of cash payments "could have been avoided if the former Bank of the United States had still been around."

The financial condition of the government became so bad during the war that the second Bank of the United States was authorized in April 1816. The general project was that of Alexander J. Dallas, who in October 1814 had become secretary of the treasury. The capital of the new bank was $35,000,000, and the government again appeared as owner of one-fifth of the stock, which was paid in a stock note. The president of the United States was authorized to appoint five of the twenty-five directors and public funds were to be deposited in the bank, "unless the secretary of the treasury shall at any time otherwise order and direct." The right of congress to charter the bank came before the Supreme Court in 1819 in the famous case of McCulloch v. Maryland. Chief Justice Marshall rendered the decision that the right to create the bank was within the implied powers granted by the Federal constitution, and that it was not competent for the states to levy taxes upon the circulating notes of the bank or upon its property except in common with other property.

The government's financial situation worsened significantly during the war, leading to the establishment of the second Bank of the United States in April 1816. The overall plan was designed by Alexander J. Dallas, who became the Secretary of the Treasury in October 1814. The new bank had a capital of $35,000,000, and the government owned one-fifth of the stock, which was paid for with a stock note. The President of the United States was authorized to appoint five of the twenty-five directors, and public funds were to be deposited in the bank "unless the Secretary of the Treasury orders otherwise at any time." The issue of Congress's authority to charter the bank reached the Supreme Court in 1819 in the landmark case of McCulloch v. Maryland. Chief Justice Marshall ruled that the authority to create the bank fell within the implied powers granted by the Federal Constitution and that states could not impose taxes on the bank's circulating notes or property, except along with other properties.

The second Bank of the United States was not well managed in the early part of its career, but was upon a firmer foundation under the presidency of Langdon Cheves in 1819. Its policy greatly benefited commerce, but invited bitter complaints from the private dealers in exchange, who had been enabled to make excessive profits while the currency was below par, because of its different values in different states and the constant fluctuations in these values. The Bank, in the language of the report of Senator Samuel Smith of Maryland in 1832, furnished "a currency as safe as silver, more convenient, and more valuable [v.03 p.0346]than silver, which through the whole western and southern and interior parts of the Union, is eagerly sought in exchange for silver; which, in those sections, often bears a premium paid in silver; which is, throughout the Union, equal to silver, in payment to the government, and payments to individuals in business."

The second Bank of the United States wasn't managed well early on, but it was on a stronger footing under Langdon Cheves's leadership in 1819. Its policies greatly helped commerce but led to harsh complaints from private exchange dealers, who had been able to make huge profits while the currency was undervalued, due to its varying values in different states and constant fluctuations. As Senator Samuel Smith of Maryland stated in a report in 1832, the Bank provided "a currency as safe as silver, more convenient, and more valuable [v.03 p.0346] than silver, which throughout the western, southern, and interior parts of the Union is eagerly traded for silver; which, in those areas, often has a premium that must be paid in silver; which is, across the Union, equivalent to silver for government payments and business transactions."

The bank in 1835 had attained a circulation of $23,075,422; loans of $59,232,445; and deposits of $5,061,456. The institution was ultimately destroyed by the open enmity of President Jackson, who in 1833 had suspended the deposit of public money in its custody. This policy known as the "removal of the deposits," excited a bitter political controversy in which Clay and Webster led the opposition, but Jackson was supported by the public (see Jackson, Andrew). The Federal charter of the bank expired in 1836. Under a charter obtained by President Nicholas Biddle from the state of Pennsylvania, the bank continued its business, but without success, and in 1841 it went into liquidation.

The bank in 1835 had reached a circulation of $23,075,422; loans of $59,232,445; and deposits of $5,061,456. The institution was ultimately destroyed by the outright hostility of President Jackson, who in 1833 had stopped the deposit of public money that it held. This policy, known as the "removal of the deposits," sparked a fierce political controversy in which Clay and Webster led the opposition, but Jackson was backed by the public (see Andrew Jackson). The Federal charter of the bank expired in 1836. With a charter obtained by President Nicholas Biddle from the state of Pennsylvania, the bank continued to operate, but without success, and it went into liquidation in 1841.

The State Banks.—The Bank of the United States found powerful rivals during its life and successors after its death in the banks chartered by the separate states. In the undeveloped state of the country in the early days there was much unsound and speculative banking. The most successful systems were those of New York and New England, where the surplus capital of the country in the early days was chiefly concentrated. The least successful banking systems were those in the newer and poorer sections of the country, and they grew progressively worse as poverty and inexperience added to the difficulty of setting aside capital for investment in the tools of exchange.

The State Banks.—The Bank of the United States faced strong competition during its existence and after its closure from banks established by individual states. In the early days of the country's development, there was a lot of unreliable and speculative banking. The most effective banking systems were in New York and New England, where much of the nation's surplus capital was concentrated in those early years. The least effective banking systems were in the newer and poorer areas of the country, and they continued to deteriorate as poverty and lack of experience made it harder to set aside capital for investment in exchange tools.

The termination of the first charter of the Bank of the United States was followed by a banking mania. In Pennsylvania a bill authorizing 41 new banks was passed over the veto of the governor, and 37 of them were in operation in 1814. Similar movements in other states increased the number of banks in four years (1811-1815) from 88 to 208. The amount of specie was not adequate to support the mass of credit which these banks created, and what there was in the country drifted to New England, which was upon a metallic basis. A number of banks collapsed in 1814, and business prostration was prolonged for several years.

The end of the first charter for the Bank of the United States triggered a banking frenzy. In Pennsylvania, a bill was passed to authorize 41 new banks despite the governor's veto, and by 1814, 37 of them were already operating. Similar actions in other states led to a rise in the number of banks from 88 to 208 between 1811 and 1815. The amount of gold and silver available wasn't enough to back all the credit these banks created, and what little there was flowed to New England, which was on a metallic standard. Several banks failed in 1814, and the economic downturn lasted for several years.

The banking laws of the states varied considerably. Some states authorized the issue of notes upon state bonds, many of which, especially at the outbreak of the Civil War, proved valueless. In New England, however, a system prevailed which required the prompt redemption of the banks' notes at par. The New England Bank was the pioneer of this movement in 1814. In 1824 what was known as the "Suffolk system" of redemption came into operation. This system provided for the deposit by a bank in the Suffolk Bank in Boston of a redemption fund, from which the notes were redeemed and afterwards sent home by the Suffolk Bank for collection. This system, with slight modifications, continued in successful operation until 1858. The circulation of the New England banks in 1858 was less than $40,000,000 and the redemptions in the course of the year through the Suffolk Bank were $400,000,000. It was the essential merit claimed for the system that it tended to keep the volume of the circulation constantly adjusted to the requirements of business. A branch redemption agency was established at Providence. Legal sanction was given to the system in Vermont by an act of 1842, which levied a tax of 1% upon bank capital, but remitted this tax to any bank which should "keep a sufficient deposit of funds in the city of Boston, and should at that city uniformly cause its bills to be redeemed at par."

The banking laws in the states varied a lot. Some states allowed the issuance of notes backed by state bonds, many of which, especially at the start of the Civil War, turned out to be worthless. However, in New England, there was a system that required banks to quickly redeem their notes at full value. The New England Bank was the first to adopt this approach in 1814. In 1824, the "Suffolk system" of redemption began. This system required banks to deposit a redemption fund in the Suffolk Bank in Boston, from which the notes would be redeemed and later sent back by the Suffolk Bank for collection. This system, with minor changes, worked successfully until 1858. In 1858, the total circulation of New England banks was under $40 million, while the redemptions throughout the year via the Suffolk Bank amounted to $400 million. The main benefit claimed for this system was that it helped keep the circulation volume in line with business needs. A branch redemption agency was set up in Providence. The system received legal approval in Vermont through a 1842 act, which imposed a 1% tax on bank capital but waived this tax for any bank that maintained a sufficient fund deposit in Boston and consistently redeemed its bills at full value there.

The period from 1836 to 1842 was a trying one for American banking. It was preceded by another great expansion in financial ventures, made without sufficient circulating capital or adherence to conservative banking methods. Foreign capital had come into the country in considerable amounts after the English crisis of 1825, the entire debt of the general government was paid off and a tremendous speculation occurred in public lands, which were expected to advance rapidly in value as the result of immigration and the growth of the country. The sales of public lands in 1836, on the eve of the crisis, reached 20,074,870 acres and brought receipts to the treasury of $25,167,833. How essentially speculative was the mass of these sales is indicated by the fact that such receipts declined in 1842 to only $1,417,972. President Jackson pricked the bubble of speculation by the "Specie circular" of July 11, 1836, requiring payments for public lands to be made only in specie or notes of specie value. Practically every bank in the Union stopped payment, and banking capital fell from $358,442,692 in 1840 to $196,894,309 in 1846. As usual in periods of business collapse the shrinkage of capital did not follow at once the outbreak of the panic, but was the result of gradual liquidation. Specie payments were resumed in 1838, but there was another crash in 1842, after the United States Bank finally suspended.

The years from 1836 to 1842 were tough for American banking. They followed a major boom in financial activities that happened without enough working capital or following prudent banking practices. After the English crisis of 1825, a significant amount of foreign investment flowed into the country. The federal government paid off its entire debt, and there was a huge speculative surge in public lands, which were expected to increase in value due to immigration and the country's growth. In 1836, right before the crisis hit, public land sales reached 20,074,870 acres, bringing in $25,167,833 to the treasury. The speculative nature of these sales is highlighted by the fact that revenues plummeted to just $1,417,972 by 1842. President Jackson deflated the speculation bubble with the "Specie Circular" on July 11, 1836, mandating that payments for public lands could only be made in gold or silver coins or notes backed by them. Almost every bank in the country halted payments, and banking capital fell from $358,442,692 in 1840 to $196,894,309 in 1846. As is common during economic downturns, the reduction in capital didn't occur immediately following the panic but resulted from a slow liquidation process. Specie payments resumed in 1838, but there was another collapse in 1842 after the United States Bank finally suspended operations.

In New York, which was becoming the chief commercial state of the Union, the banks of New York City were generally sound, but several different systems were tried of securing the circulating notes. The "safety-fund system," inaugurated in 1829, provided for a contribution by each bank towards a fund to meet the deficit of any contributing bank which might fail with assets insufficient to meet its liabilities. It was the intention of the act to protect by this fund only the bank-notes, but it was treated as a fund for the payment of all the liabilities of a failed bank and in consequence the fund was exhausted by important failures which occurred in the panics of 1837 and 1857. Before 1843 the issue of notes was not controlled by the state, so that in several cases there were illegal over-issues.

In New York, which was becoming the main commercial state of the Union, the banks in New York City were generally stable, but various systems were explored to secure the circulating notes. The "safety-fund system," launched in 1829, required each bank to contribute to a fund designed to cover any deficits from a contributing bank that might fail with assets insufficient to pay its debts. The purpose of the act was to protect only the banknotes with this fund, but it ended up being seen as a source for covering all the liabilities of a failed bank. As a result, the fund was depleted due to significant failures during the panics of 1837 and 1857. Before 1843, the state did not regulate the issuance of notes, leading to several instances of illegal over-issuance.

What was called the "free-banking system" was inaugurated in New York by the act of 1838. This system permitted any body of persons, complying with the requirements of the law, to form a bank and issue circulation secured by the deposit of various classes of public bonds. This system was in operation at the outbreak of the Civil War, was imitated in several other states, and became in a measure the model of the national banking system. The state banks of Indiana and Ohio were among the most successful of the state banks, being modelled somewhat on the European plan of a central bank. They held in their states an exclusive charter for issuing notes and had branches at important points throughout the state. Under the management of Hugh McCulloch, afterwards secretary of the treasury, the bank of Indiana weathered the crisis of 1857 without suspending specie payments, and retired its circulation when gold went to a premium in 1862.

What was known as the "free-banking system" started in New York with the act of 1838. This system allowed any group of people who met the legal requirements to establish a bank and issue currency backed by various types of public bonds. This system was in place when the Civil War began, was copied in several other states, and partly influenced the national banking system. The state banks of Indiana and Ohio were among the most successful, modeled somewhat after the European concept of a central bank. They held exclusive charters to issue notes in their states and had branches in key locations throughout the state. Under the leadership of Hugh McCulloch, who later became secretary of the treasury, the Bank of Indiana navigated the crisis of 1857 without stopping gold payments and withdrew its circulation when gold prices surged in 1862.

One of the defects of the state system of note-issues was the inconvenience which it occasioned. Notes issued outside a state could not safely be received without careful scrutiny as to the responsibility of their issuers. The systems prevailing in New England, in Louisiana, in Ohio and in Indiana were eminently successful, and proved the soundness of the issue of bank-notes upon the assets of a well-conducted commercial bank. But the speculation fostered by loose banking laws in some other states, and the need for uniformity, cast a certain degree of discredit upon the state banks, and prepared the way for the acceptance of a uniform banking system in 1864.

One of the problems with the state system of issuing banknotes was the inconvenience it caused. Notes issued outside a state couldn't be accepted safely without careful examination of the issuers' reliability. The systems in New England, Louisiana, Ohio, and Indiana were highly successful and demonstrated that issuing banknotes backed by the assets of a well-managed commercial bank was sound. However, the speculation encouraged by lax banking laws in some other states, along with the need for consistency, led to a certain level of mistrust towards state banks and paved the way for the adoption of a uniform banking system in 1864.

The power of note-issue formed a more important part of banking resources before the Civil War than in later years, because the deposit system had not attained its full development. Thus in 1835 circulation and capital of state banks combined were about $335,000,000 and deposits were only $83,000,000, in 1907 circulation and capital of national banks $1,430,000,000, while deposits were $4,322,000,000—in the earlier period deposits forming less than one-third of the other two items and in the later period three times the other items. The circulation of the state banks fluctuated widely at different periods. A maximum of $149,185,890 was attained in 1837, to decline to $106,968,572 three years later and to a minimum of $58,563,608 in 1843. From this point there was a tendency upward, with some variations, which put the circulation in 1845 at $89,608,711; 1848, $128,506,091; 1850, $131,366,526; 1854, $204,689,207; 1856, $195,747,950; 1858, $155,208,344; 1860, $207,102,477; 1863, $238,677,218.

The power of issuing notes played a more significant role in banking resources before the Civil War than in later years because the deposit system hadn’t fully developed yet. So, in 1835, the circulation and capital of state banks together were about $335,000,000, while deposits only amounted to $83,000,000. By 1907, the circulation and capital of national banks reached $1,430,000,000, with deposits soaring to $4,322,000,000—in the earlier period, deposits made up less than one-third of the other two items, whereas in the later period, they were three times greater. The circulation of the state banks varied widely at different times. It peaked at $149,185,890 in 1837, then dropped to $106,968,572 three years later, hitting a low of $58,563,608 in 1843. After that, there was a general upward trend with some fluctuations, leading to a circulation of $89,608,711 in 1845; $128,506,091 in 1848; $131,366,526 in 1850; $204,689,207 in 1854; $195,747,950 in 1856; $155,208,344 in 1858; $207,102,477 in 1860; and $238,677,218 in 1863.

Other leading items of the accounts of the state banks for representative years are as follows:—

Other main items in the accounts of the state banks for key years are as follows:—

[v.03 p.0347]

[v.03 p.0347]

State Banking Progress, 1835-1863.

State Banking Progress, 1835-1863.

Year.

Year.

No. of
Banks.

No. of Banks.

Capital Stock.

Equity Capital.

Loans and
Discounts.

Loans and Discounts.

Deposits.

Deposits.

1835

1835

704

704

$231,250,337

$231,250,337

$365,163,834

$365 million

$83,081,365

$83,081,365

1845

1845

707

707

206,045,969

206 million 45 thousand 969

288,617,131

288,617,131

88,020,646

88 million, 20 thousand, 646

1850

1850

824

824

217,317,211

217,317,211

364,204,078

364,204,078

109,586,595

109,586,595

1855

1855

1307

1307

332,177,288

332,177,288

576,144,758

576,144,758

190,400,342

190,400,342

1860

1860

1562

1562

421,880,095

421,880,095

691,945,580

691,945,580

253,802,129

253,802,129

1863

1863

1466

1466

405,045,829

405,045,829

648,601,863

648,601,863

393,686,226

393,686,226

The National Banking System.—The creation of the national banking system was mainly the outcome of the financial necessities of the Federal government in the Civil War. It was found difficult to float government bonds at profitable rates, and Mr Chase, the secretary of the treasury, devised the scheme of creating a compulsory market for the bonds by offering special privileges to banks organized under Federal charters, which would issue circulating notes only when secured by the deposit of government bonds. But this plan, authorized by the act of 25th February 1863 (supplemented by the act of 3rd June 1864), was not sufficient to give predominance to the national banks. The state banking systems in the older states were so firmly entrenched in the confidence of the commercial community that it became necessary to provide for imposing a tax of 10% upon the face-value of the notes of state banks in circulation after the 1st of July 1866. The state banks were thus driven out of the note-issuing business, some being converted into national banks, while others continued their commercial business under state laws without the privilege of note-issue. A remarkable growth in the national banking system took place; in 1864 there were 453 national banks with an aggregate capital of $79,366,950, and in 1865 there were 1014 banks with an aggregate capital of $242,542,982.

The National Banking System.—The national banking system was primarily established due to the financial needs of the Federal government during the Civil War. It was challenging to sell government bonds at favorable rates, and Mr. Chase, the Treasury Secretary, came up with a plan to create a mandatory market for the bonds by offering special benefits to banks chartered by the Federal government, which would only issue circulating notes when backed by the deposit of government bonds. However, this plan, authorized by the act of February 25, 1863 (later supplemented by the act of June 3, 1864), was not enough to make national banks dominant. The state banking systems in the older states were so deeply embedded in the trust of the business community that it became necessary to impose a 10% tax on the face value of the notes issued by state banks after July 1, 1866. This pushed state banks out of the note-issuing market, with some transitioning into national banks while others continued their commercial operations under state laws without the ability to issue notes. A significant expansion of the national banking system occurred; in 1864, there were 453 national banks with a total capital of $79,366,950, and by 1865, that number rose to 1,014 banks with a total capital of $242,542,982.

The national banking system was specially marked by the issue of circulating notes upon United States bonds. Any national bank desiring to issue notes might by law deposit with the United States treasurer bonds of the United States to an amount not exceeding its capital stock, and upon such bonds it might receive circulation equal to 90% of their par-value. No bank could be established which did not invest one-third of its capital in bonds. This was changed in 1874 so as to reduce the requirement to 25%, with a maximum mandatory requirement of $50,000. Notes were taxed at the rate of 1% per annum. The banks obtained from the provision for circulation the benefit of what was described by critics as "double interest," being credited with the interest on bonds in the custody of the treasury department, and being also able to lend their notes to the public. But several deductions had to be made: notes could not be issued to the full par-value of the bonds; the tax of 1% upon circulation reduced by that amount the profit which would otherwise be earned; and the banks had to set aside in gold or other lawful money what was needed for redemption purposes and for reserves. As the banks suspended specie payments at the close of 1861 and great masses of government paper-money were issued, gold ceased to be a medium of exchange except in California, and the new banks redeemed their notes in government paper. The gold-value of the bank-notes, therefore, rose and fell with that of government notes until the resumption of payments in specie by the national treasury on the 1st of January 1879.

The national banking system was characterized by the issuance of circulating notes backed by U.S. bonds. Any national bank wishing to issue notes could legally deposit U.S. bonds with the U.S. treasurer, up to an amount equal to its capital stock, and receive circulation equal to 90% of the bonds' par value. No bank could be established without investing one-third of its capital in bonds. This requirement was changed in 1874 to reduce it to 25%, with a maximum mandatory investment of $50,000. Notes were taxed at a rate of 1% per year. The banks benefited from the circulation provision, which critics described as "double interest," because they earned interest on the bonds held by the treasury and could also lend their notes to the public. However, several deductions had to be taken into account: notes could not be issued for the full par value of the bonds; the 1% tax on circulation decreased the potential profits; and banks were required to hold gold or other lawful money for redemption purposes and reserves. As banks stopped redeeming notes in gold at the end of 1861 and large amounts of government paper money were issued, gold ceased to be a medium of exchange except in California, and the new banks redeemed their notes in government paper. Consequently, the gold value of bank notes fluctuated with the value of government notes until the national treasury resumed specie payments on January 1, 1879.

The amount of bank-notes in circulation proved in practice to be influenced largely by the price of bonds. The maximum originally set for bank circulation was $300,000,000. This was increased in 1870 by $54,000,000, and in 1875 the limit was removed. The circulation reached $362,651,169 on the 1st of January 1883, but afterwards declined materially as bonds became scarce and the price rose. The fact that circulation could be issued to only 90% of the par-value of the bonds greatly reduced the net profits on circulation when the price of 4% bonds rose in 1889 above 129 and other classes of bonds rose in like ratio. The circulation of bank-notes fell as low as $167,927,574 on the 1st of July 1891, but afterwards increased somewhat as the supply of bonds was increased to meet the treasury deficiencies of 1894-1896 and the expenses of the war with Spain.

The amount of banknotes in circulation turned out to be heavily influenced by bond prices. The original maximum limit for bank circulation was set at $300,000,000. This limit was raised by $54,000,000 in 1870, and by 1875, it was completely removed. On January 1, 1883, circulation reached $362,651,169, but then it dropped significantly as bonds became scarce and their prices increased. The fact that circulation could only be issued up to 90% of the par value of the bonds really cut into the net profits from circulation when the price of 4% bonds rose above 129 in 1889, with other types of bonds increasing similarly. By July 1, 1891, the circulation of banknotes fell to as low as $167,927,574, but it started to rise again as more bonds were issued to address the treasury shortages from 1894 to 1896 and the costs of the war with Spain.

The national banks supported the government cordially in the measures taken to bring about resumption of gold payments on the 1st of January 1879 under the law of 1875. The banks held more than $125,000,000 in legal tender notes, of which sum nearly one-third was held in New York City. A run upon the treasury for the redemption of these notes would have exhausted the gold funds laboriously accumulated by secretary Sherman and compelled a new suspension. But the banks appointed a committee to co-operate with the treasury, declined to receive gold longer as a special deposit, and resolved to receive and pay balances without discrimination between gold and government notes. Thus resumption was accomplished without jar, and as early as the 17th of December 1878 gold sold at par in paper.

The national banks supported the government enthusiastically in the efforts to resume gold payments on January 1, 1879, under the law of 1875. The banks held more than $125,000,000 in legal tender notes, with nearly one-third of that amount held in New York City. A rush to the treasury for the redemption of these notes would have depleted the gold reserves painstakingly built up by Secretary Sherman and would have forced another suspension. However, the banks formed a committee to work with the treasury, decided not to accept gold anymore as a special deposit, and agreed to accept and pay balances without distinguishing between gold and government notes. This way, resumption was achieved smoothly, and by December 17, 1878, gold was selling at par in paper.

The silver legislation enacted by Congress in 1878 and 1890 caused uneasiness in banking circles, and the banks discriminated against silver dollars and silver certificates in their cash. When the treasury began to lose gold heavily, however, in 1893, a combination of leading bankers in New York, Boston, Philadelphia, Baltimore and Chicago turned over a large part of their holdings to replenish the government reserves. About 150 national banks suspended during the panic of 1893, but 84 of these afterwards resumed business. As in former periods of depression, the system suffered the greatest decline during the years of liquidation following the actual panic, the number of banks falling from 3856 on the 1st of June 1893 to 3585 on the 1st of June 1899, and aggregate capital falling during the same period from $698,454,665 to $610,028,895.

The silver laws passed by Congress in 1878 and 1890 made bankers uneasy, leading them to shy away from silver dollars and silver certificates in their cash reserves. However, when the treasury began to lose a lot of gold in 1893, a group of prominent bankers from New York, Boston, Philadelphia, Baltimore, and Chicago stepped in to transfer a significant portion of their holdings to help restore the government's reserves. Around 150 national banks shut down during the panic of 1893, but 84 of them later reopened. Like in previous economic downturns, the banking system experienced its biggest decline during the years of liquidation that followed the panic, with the number of banks dropping from 3,856 on June 1, 1893, to 3,585 on June 1, 1899, and total capital decreasing from $698,454,665 to $610,028,895 during that time.

A new extension was given to the national banking system by the provisions of the gold standard law of 14th March 1900. Banks were authorized to issue circulation to the full par-value of bonds deposited, and the tax upon circulation was reduced from 1% to ½ of 1% in the case of circulation which was secured by the 2% refunding bonds, which were authorized by this law. By issuing 2% bonds in exchange for those paying a higher interest, at approximately the market-price, it became possible to obtain a given amount of notes upon a smaller investment in bonds, independent of other provisions of the law. Under these provisions the volume of notes outstanding, secured by bonds, which stood on the 31st of October 1899 at $207,920,774, reached on the same date in 1900, $298,829,064; in 1901, $328,198,613; in 1902, $335,783,189; in 1903, $380,650,821; in 1904, $424,530,581; in 1905, $490,037,806; in 1906, $536,933,169; and in 1907 $562,727,614.

A new extension was added to the national banking system by the gold standard law passed on March 14, 1900. Banks were allowed to issue currency up to the full face value of the bonds they deposited, and the tax on this currency was lowered from 1% to 0.5% for notes secured by the 2% refunding bonds authorized by this law. By issuing 2% bonds in place of those with higher interest rates, and at about the market price, it became possible to get a certain amount of notes with a smaller investment in bonds, regardless of other provisions in the law. Because of these provisions, the volume of notes backed by bonds, which was $207,920,774 on October 31, 1899, grew to $298,829,064 on the same date in 1900; $328,198,613 in 1901; $335,783,189 in 1902; $380,650,821 in 1903; $424,530,581 in 1904; $490,037,806 in 1905; $536,933,169 in 1906; and $562,727,614 in 1907.

The lowest denomination of national bank-notes authorized by law is $5, and not more than one-third of any bank's issues can be of this denomination. The government issues notes for $1 and $2, as well as for higher denominations. The largest amount of bank-notes of one denomination is in bills for $10, which on the 31st of October 1907 constituted $249,946,530 in total outstanding issues of $609,905,441. Of this total circulation $562,727,614 was secured by bonds, and the remainder, $47,252,852, was covered by lawful money in the government treasury, deposited for the redemption and retirement of the notes as they might be received.

The smallest amount of national banknotes allowed by law is $5, and no more than one-third of any bank's total notes can be of this amount. The government issues notes for $1 and $2, as well as for larger amounts. The most common banknote denomination is $10, which, on October 31, 1907, made up $249,946,530 of a total of $609,905,441 in outstanding notes. Of this total, $562,727,614 was backed by bonds, while the rest, $47,252,852, was supported by legal tender in the government treasury, set aside for redeeming and retiring the notes as they were returned.

An important extension of the national system resulted from the authority given by the act of 1900 to incorporate national banks with a capital as low as $25,000, in places having a population not in excess of 3000. The previous minimum limit had been $50,000. Under this provision there were incorporated to the 31st of October 1907 2389 national banks with capitals of less than $50,000, with aggregate capital of $62,312,500, of which 272 banks were conversions of state and private institutions, 752 were reorganizations and 1365 were new institutions.

An important expansion of the national system came from the authority established by the act of 1900, which allowed for the incorporation of national banks with a capital as low as $25,000 in areas with a population of no more than 3,000. The previous minimum was $50,000. By October 31, 1907, 2,389 national banks had been incorporated under this provision with capitals below $50,000, totaling an aggregate capital of $62,312,500. This included 272 banks that were converted from state and private institutions, 752 that were reorganizations, and 1,365 that were brand new institutions.

The national banks possess most of the powers of commercial banks, but are not permitted to hold real estate other than their banking houses, unless taken for debt. Five reports are required each year to the comptroller of the currency at dates selected by him without notice, and each bank is subject to the visitation of bank examiners acting under the comptroller. No reserves against notes are required by existing law except 5%, which is [v.03 p.0348]kept in Washington for current redemption purposes. The redemption system is defective in that redemptions are not authorized at other places, and the notes reach the treasury on an average only about once in two years. For many years the banks were prohibited from retiring more than $3,000,000 of notes monthly, but the limit was raised by an act of 4th March 1907 to $9,000,000 per month.

The national banks have most of the same powers as commercial banks, but they can't hold real estate other than their banking buildings, unless it's taken in payment for a debt. They have to submit five reports each year to the comptroller of the currency on dates he picks without prior notice, and each bank is subject to visits from bank examiners working under the comptroller. Current law only requires a reserve of 5%, which is [v.03 p.0348]held in Washington for immediate redemption purposes. The redemption system has flaws because redemptions aren't allowed at other locations, and notes only make it to the treasury roughly once every two years. For many years, banks were not allowed to retire more than $3,000,000 in notes each month, but this limit was increased by legislation on March 4, 1907, to $9,000,000 per month.

Reserves are required against deposits to the amount of 25% in so-called "reserve cities," and 15% in what are called the "country banks" outside of reserve cities. Not all these amounts, however, are required to be kept in cash. The three central reserve cities, where cash is required, with only trifling deductions, are New York, Chicago and St Louis. In other reserve cities, which in 1908 numbered forty, the banks are permitted to deposit half their cash in national banks in central reserve cities, while country banks may deposit three-fifths of their cash in any reserve city. The shareholders of national banks are subject in case of liquidation to double liability upon their shares, and this is now the rule in most of the conservative state banking systems. National bank-notes are not legal tender, but are receivable by the government for all obligations except customs dues.

Reserves are required against deposits at a rate of 25% in so-called "reserve cities," and 15% in the "country banks" outside of those reserve cities. However, not all of these amounts need to be held in cash. The three central reserve cities—New York, Chicago, and St. Louis—require cash reserves with only minor exceptions. In other reserve cities, which numbered forty in 1908, banks are allowed to deposit half of their cash in national banks located in central reserve cities, while country banks can deposit three-fifths of their cash in any reserve city. Shareholders of national banks face double liability on their shares in the event of liquidation, which is now a common rule in most conservative state banking systems. National bank notes are not considered legal tender, but they can be accepted by the government for all obligations except customs fees.

The panic of 1907 imposed a severe strain upon the cash resources of the banks of New York City, but did not cause any such considerable number of failures as occurred in 1893.

The panic of 1907 put a huge strain on the cash resources of the banks in New York City, but it didn’t lead to nearly as many failures as happened in 1893.

Payment of cheques in currency was suspended in New York on the 28th of October 1907, and continued until about the beginning of the year 1908. The panic was precipitated by over-speculation by a group of national banks, followed by the suspension of the Knickerbocker Trust Company on the 22nd of October with deposits of $48,000,000. Then came runs on other companies, a deficit in the required reserves of New York banks of $38,838,825 in the week of 2nd November, and arrangements for the importation of foreign gold to an amount which soon approached $100,000,000. With an increase during the autumn of about $77,000,000 in national bank circulation, a transfer of $72,000,000 from the treasury to the banks, and a further decline in required reserves in New York during the next week, the amount of currency which was added to the circulation or disappeared during a few weeks of the panic amounted to more than $275,000,000, or nearly one-tenth of the usual volume of circulation in the country. The total bank-note circulation on the 28th of December 1907 had risen to $687,340,835; but this amount was abnormal and was reduced somewhat during the spring of 1908.

Payment of checks in cash was suspended in New York on October 28, 1907, and lasted until about the beginning of 1908. The panic was triggered by excessive speculation by a group of national banks, followed by the shutdown of the Knickerbocker Trust Company on October 22 with deposits of $48,000,000. After that, other companies faced runs, resulting in a deficit of $38,838,825 in the required reserves of New York banks during the week of November 2, and plans were made to import foreign gold totaling nearly $100,000,000. With an increase of about $77,000,000 in national bank circulation during the fall, a transfer of $72,000,000 from the treasury to the banks, and a continued decline in required reserves in New York the following week, the total amount of currency added to or lost from circulation during a few weeks of the panic exceeded $275,000,000, or nearly one-tenth of the usual circulation volume in the country. By December 28, 1907, the total bank-note circulation had risen to $687,340,835; however, this amount was abnormal and decreased somewhat during the spring of 1908.

The position of the trust companies, especially those of the city of New York, was one of the disturbing features of the panic. These companies were comparatively a small factor in New York finance at the time of the panic of 1893. The capitalization of all the trust companies in the United States, even as late as 1897, was only $106,968,253, and individual deposits were $566,922,205. The capital of these companies had risen in 1907 to $276,146,081 and their deposits to $2,061,623,035. The trust companies of New York were required by the law of the state to maintain only 5% of their demand deposits in cash in their vaults. Whilst most of them had also large amounts on deposit in national banks, these reserves proved inadequate to sustain the vast mass of credit which was built upon them. The absolute amount of the reserves, however, was perhaps less important than the class of business to which some of the less conservative of these companies had committed themselves. Instead of keeping their assets liquid by purchases of commercial paper and loans on first-class negotiable securities, they had in some cases engaged in speculative underwritings and had locked up their funds in enterprises requiring a long time for their consummation.

The role of trust companies, particularly in New York City, was one of the troubling aspects of the panic. At the time of the 1893 panic, these companies were a relatively small part of New York's financial scene. The total capitalization of all trust companies in the United States, even as late as 1897, was just $106,968,253, with individual deposits reaching $566,922,205. By 1907, the capital of these companies had grown to $276,146,081 and their deposits soared to $2,061,623,035. New York's trust companies were required by state law to keep only 5% of their demand deposits in cash in their vaults. While many of them also had significant amounts deposited in national banks, these reserves proved insufficient to support the massive amount of credit built on them. However, the actual amount of reserves might have been less crucial than the type of business that some of the less conservative companies had taken on. Instead of keeping their assets liquid by investing in commercial paper and loans on top-tier negotiable securities, some had engaged in speculative underwriting and tied up their funds in long-term projects.

It was these combined influences which led to distrust of the Knickerbocker Trust Company, and to the runs upon that company and others during the late days of October and early November. The result was to reduce the total resources of the forty-eight trust companies of Greater New York from $1,205,019,700 on the 22nd of August 1907 to $858,674,000 on the 19th of December 1907. Individual deposits subject to cheque fell from $692,744,900 to $437,733,400. Such a reduction of resources within so short a time, most of it being accomplished within a few weeks, has hardly ever been recorded in the history of banking, and the fact that the stronger companies were able to call in their cash and meet such demands was evidence to a certain extent that the criticisms upon them were exaggerated. The necessity for stronger reserves and for greater safeguards against speculative operations was so strongly impressed upon the public mind, however, that several restrictive measures were enacted at the session of the New York legislature in 1908, designed to prevent any abuses of this sort in the future.

It was these combined influences that caused people to distrust the Knickerbocker Trust Company, leading to bank runs on it and other companies during the late days of October and early November. As a result, the total resources of the forty-eight trust companies in Greater New York dropped from $1,205,019,700 on August 22, 1907, to $858,674,000 on December 19, 1907. Individual deposits that could be withdrawn on demand fell from $692,744,900 to $437,733,400. Such a rapid decline in resources over such a short period—most of it happening within just a few weeks—is rarely seen in banking history. The fact that the stronger companies were still able to call in cash and meet these demands showed that the criticism they faced was somewhat exaggerated. However, the need for stronger reserves and greater safeguards against risky operations became so clear to the public that several restrictive measures were passed during the 1908 New York legislature session, aimed at preventing any similar abuses in the future.

The function of issuing notes, which is exclusively a privilege of national banks, has diminished in importance in America, as other methods of transferring credit have attained a wide development. This has not only been true of the national banks themselves, but has accounted for the development alongside the national banking system of state banks, private banks and trust companies, which have not had the privilege of note-issue, but have obtained other privileges sometimes greater than those of the national banks.

The role of issuing notes, which is a privilege only for national banks, has become less significant in America, as other ways of transferring credit have grown widely. This has been the case not just for national banks, but has also contributed to the rise of state banks, private banks, and trust companies alongside the national banking system. These institutions don't have the privilege of issuing notes, but they have gained other advantages that are sometimes greater than those of the national banks.

The aggregate resources of all classes of banks in the United States have greatly increased in recent years. The following table shows the increase in the chief items of the accounts of national banks for representative years from the reports made nearest to the beginning of the year:—

The total resources of all types of banks in the United States have significantly risen in recent years. The table below displays the growth in the main items of national banks' accounts for selected years based on the reports closest to the start of the year:—

Progress of National Banks, 1865-1908

National Banks Progress, 1865-1908

Year.

Year.

No of
Banks

Number of
Banks

Loans and
Discounts.

Loans and Discounts.

Individual
Deposits

Personal
Deposits

1865

1865

638

638

$166,448,718

$166,448,718

$183,479,636

$183,479,636

1870

1870

1615

1615

688,875,203

688,875,203

546,236,881

546 million

1875

1875

2027

2027

955,862,580

955,862,580

682,846,607

682,846,607

1880

1880

2052

2052

933,543,661

933,543,661

755,459,966

755,459,966

1885

1885

2664

2664

1,234,202,226

1.23 billion

987,649,055

987,649,055

1890

1890

3326

3326

1,811,686,891

1.81 billion

1,436,402,685

1.4 billion

1895

1895

3737

3737

1,991,913,123

1.99 billion

1,695,489,346

1.69 billion

1897

1897

3661

3661

1,901,160,110

1.9 billion

1,639,688,393

1.64 billion

1899

1899

3590

3590

2,214,394,838

2.21 billion

2,225,269,813

2.2 billion

1900

1900

3602

3602

2,479,819,494

2.48 billion

2,380,610,361

2.38 billion

1901

1901

3942

3942

2,706,534,643

2.7 billion

2,623,997,521

2.6 billion

1902

1902

4291

4291

3,038,255,447

3.04 billion

2,964,417,965

2.96 billion

1903

1903

4666

4666

3,303,148,091

3.3 billion

3,152,878,796

3.15 billion

1904

1904

5180

5180

3,469,195,043

3.47 billion

3,300,619,898

3.3 billion

1905

1905

5528

5528

3,728,166,086

3.7 billion

3,612,499,598

3.6 billion

1906

1906

5911

5911

4,071,041,164

4 billion, 71 million, 41 thousand, 164

4,088,420,135

4,088,420,135

1907

1907

6288

6288

4,463,267,629

4.46 billion

4,115,650,294

4.12 billion

1908

1908

6625

6625

4,585,337,094

4.58 billion

4,176,873,717

4.18 billion

The combined returns of state and private banks, savings banks and loan and trust companies in the United States show a growth within a few years which is indicated by the principal items of their accounts:—

The total returns from state and private banks, savings banks, and loan and trust companies in the United States demonstrate significant growth over a few years, as reflected in the main items of their accounts:—

Resources of State Banks, Trust Companies, &c.

Resources of State Banks, Trust Companies, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ &c.

Items.

Items.

1897.

1897.

1907.

1907.

Capital stock

Equity capital

$380,090,778

$380,090,778

$807,178,262

$807 million

Surplus and profits

Surplus and profits

382,436,990

382,436,990

924,655,010

924,655,010

Loans

Loans

2,231,013,262

2.23 billion

6,099,897,535

6.1 billion

Deposits

Deposits

3,324,254,807

3.32 billion

8,776,755,207

8.8 billion

Total Resources

Total Resources

4,258,677,065

4.26 billion

11,168,514,516

11.17 billion

The aggregate banking power of the United States, as computed by the comptroller of the currency in his annual report for 1907, increased from $5,150,000,000 in 1890 to $17,824,800,000 in 1907, and the banking power of foreign countries from $10,835,000,000 to $27,034,200,000, representing an increase for all reporting countries from $15,985,000,000 to $44,859,000,000.

The total banking strength of the United States, as calculated by the comptroller of the currency in his annual report for 1907, grew from $5,150,000,000 in 1890 to $17,824,800,000 in 1907. Meanwhile, the banking strength of foreign countries increased from $10,835,000,000 to $27,034,200,000. This shows an overall rise for all reporting countries from $15,985,000,000 to $44,859,000,000.

The system of clearing cheques has attained a higher development in the United States than in any other country, except perhaps, Great Britain. Clearing-houses exist in about 112 leading cities, and the aggregate clearings for the year ending 30th September 1907 reached $154,662,515,258. The New York Clearing-House inevitably does a large proportion of this business; its clearings constituted in 1906 67.2% of the total clearings in 55 of the larger cities. The volume of clearings fluctuates greatly with the volume of stock-exchange transactions and with the business prosperity of the country. An indication of these fluctuations at New York is afforded by the following table, taken from Conant's Principles of Money and Banking, brought down to 1907.

The check-clearing system has developed more in the United States than in any other country, except maybe Great Britain. Clearinghouses operate in about 112 major cities, and the total clearings for the year ending September 30, 1907, reached $154,662,515,258. The New York Clearinghouse handles a significant portion of this business; its clearings accounted for 67.2% of the total clearings in 55 of the larger cities in 1906. The volume of clearings varies significantly based on stock exchange transactions and the overall economic health of the country. An example of these fluctuations in New York can be seen in the following table, taken from Conant's Principles of Money and Banking, updated to 1907.

[v.03 p.0349]

[v.03 p.0349]

Variations in Clearings at New York

Changes in Clearings at New York

Year.

Year.

Average
Daily
Clearings.

Average Daily Clearings.

Per cent
Balances to
Clearings.

Percentage
Balances to
Clearings.

Remarks.

Comments.

1870

1870

$90,274,479

$90.27 million

3.72

3.72

 

1873

1873

115,885,794

115,885,794

4.15

4.15

Great business activity.

Great business vibe.

1874

1874

74,692,574

74,692,574

5.62

5.62

Industrial depression.

Industrial recession.

1881

1881

159,232,191

159,232,191

3.66

3.66

Renewal of railway building.

Railway construction renewal.

1885

1885

82,789,480

82,789,480

5.12

5.12

Results of bank panic.

Results of the bank panic.

1890

1890

123,074,139

123,074,139

4.65

4.65

Business expansion.

Business growth.

1894

1894

79,704,426

79,704,426

6.54

6.54

Depression following panic.

Panic followed by depression.

1896

1896

96,232,442

96,232,442

6.28

6.28

Free silver panic.

Free silver crisis.

1899

1899

189,961,029

189,961,029

5.37

5.37

Renewed confidence and activity.

Increased confidence and engagement.

1901

1901

254,193,639

254,193,639

4.56

4.56

Culmination of industrial flotations.

Culmination of industrial investments.

1904

1904

195,648,514

195,648,514

5.20

5.20

Diminished stock-exchange and business activity.

Reduced stock market and business activity.

1906

1906

342,422,773

342,422,773

3.69

3.69

Stock-market activity.

Stock market trends.

The Clearing-House Committee of the New York Clearing-House exercises a powerful influence over the banking situation through its ability to refuse aid in emergencies to a bank which is unwisely conducted. This power was used in the panic of 1907 to eliminate several important, but speculative, financial interests from control of national banks. Only national and state banks and the sub-Treasury were members of the Clearing-House at this time. Their weekly reports of condition were awaited every Saturday as an index of the state of the money-market and the exchanges; but this index was incomplete and sometimes misleading, because regular weekly reports were not made by trust companies. It was announced early in 1908 by the state superintendent of banking that he would exercise a power vested in him by law to require weekly reports in future from trust companies, so that the two classes of reports would present a substantially complete mirror of banking conditions in New York.

The Clearing-House Committee of the New York Clearing-House holds significant influence over the banking landscape due to its ability to deny assistance during emergencies to poorly managed banks. This power was utilized during the panic of 1907 to remove several key, but speculative, financial interests from the control of national banks. At that time, only national and state banks, along with the sub-Treasury, were members of the Clearing-House. Their weekly reports on financial conditions were eagerly anticipated every Saturday as a gauge of the money market and currency exchanges; however, this gauge was often incomplete and sometimes misleading, as trust companies did not submit regular weekly reports. In early 1908, the state banking superintendent announced he would exercise the legal power granted to him to mandate weekly reports from trust companies moving forward, enabling a more complete representation of banking conditions in New York through the combined reports.

Authorities.—William M. Gouge, A History of Paper Money and Banking in the United States (Philadelphia, 1833); Condy Raguet, A Treatise on Currency and Banking (Philadelphia, 1840); J. S. Gibbons, The Banks of New York, their Dealers, the Clearing-House and the Panic of 1857 (New York, 1858); Albert S. Bolles. Financial History of the United States (3 vols., New York, 1884-1886); Charles F. Dunbar, Chapters on the Theory and History of Banking (New York and London, 1891); Horace White, Money and Banking (Boston, 1902); Charles A. Conant, A History of Modern Banks of Issue (New York, 1896); Alexander D. Noyes, Thirty Years of American Finance (New York, 1898); Davis Rich Dewey, Financial History of the United States (New York and London, 1903); John C. Schwab, The Confederate States of America, 1861-1865 (New York, 1901); David Kinley, The Independent Treasury of the United States (New York, 1893); Report of the Monetary Commission of the Indianapolis Convention (Chicago, 1898); Charles A. Conant, The Principles of Money and Banking (2 vols., New York, 1905); William G. Sumner, A History of American Currency (New York, 1884); Amos Kidder Fiske, The Modern Bank (New York, 1904); William G. Sumner, A History of Banking in the United States (New York, 1896), being vol. i. in A History of Banking in All the Leading Nations; John Jay Knox, History of Banking in the United States (rev. ed., New York, 1900); and R. C. H. Catterall, The Second Bank of the United States (Chicago, 1903).

Authorities.—William M. Gouge, A History of Paper Money and Banking in the United States (Philadelphia, 1833); Condy Raguet, A Treatise on Currency and Banking (Philadelphia, 1840); J. S. Gibbons, The Banks of New York, their Dealers, the Clearing-House and the Panic of 1857 (New York, 1858); Albert S. Bolles, Financial History of the United States (3 vols., New York, 1884-1886); Charles F. Dunbar, Chapters on the Theory and History of Banking (New York and London, 1891); Horace White, Money and Banking (Boston, 1902); Charles A. Conant, A History of Modern Banks of Issue (New York, 1896); Alexander D. Noyes, Thirty Years of American Finance (New York, 1898); Davis Rich Dewey, Financial History of the United States (New York and London, 1903); John C. Schwab, The Confederate States of America, 1861-1865 (New York, 1901); David Kinley, The Independent Treasury of the United States (New York, 1893); Report of the Monetary Commission of the Indianapolis Convention (Chicago, 1898); Charles A. Conant, The Principles of Money and Banking (2 vols., New York, 1905); William G. Sumner, A History of American Currency (New York, 1884); Amos Kidder Fiske, The Modern Bank (New York, 1904); William G. Sumner, A History of Banking in the United States (New York, 1896), being vol. i. in A History of Banking in All the Leading Nations; John Jay Knox, History of Banking in the United States (rev. ed., New York, 1900); and R. C. H. Catterall, The Second Bank of the United States (Chicago, 1903).

Much statistical information is contained in the annual reports of the comptroller of the currency of the United States, published annually at Washington.

Much statistical information is found in the annual reports of the Comptroller of the Currency of the United States, published every year in Washington.

(C. A. C.)

(C. A. C.)

English Law affecting Banks and their Customers

English Law Impacting Banks and Their Customers

Issue of Notes.—The legislation which culminated in the Bank Charter Acts of 1844 and 1845 secured to the Bank of England the absolute monopoly of the note issue within the city of London and a 3-m. radius. Outside that radius, and within 65 m. of the city, there is a concurrent right in banks, consisting of six or less than six persons, established before 1844, and issuing notes at that date; beyond the 65-m. radius the privilege may be exercised by all banks established before 1844, and then issuing notes, who have not since lost their right to do so by bankruptcy, abandonment of business, or temporary suspension of issue. According to some authorities, the effect of 20 and 21 Vict. cap. 49, sec. 12 [re-enacted Companies Consolidation Act 1908, sec. 286 (d)] was to sanction the increase in the constitution of any bank issuing notes outside the 3-m. and within the 65-m. radius from six to ten persons without affecting the power to issue notes. The rule as formulated above is, however, that enunciated by Bowen J. in Capital and Counties Bank v. Bank of England, 1889; 61 L.T. 516. The increase in the number of joint-stock banks and the gradual absorption of the smaller and older concerns have had the effect of minimizing the output of notes other than those issued by the Bank of England, and, as exemplified by the case of The Attorney-General v. Birkbeck, 12 Q.B.D. 57, it would seem impossible to devise any scheme by which the note-issuing power of an absorbed bank could be continued to the new or amalgamated body. But a bank having the right would not necessarily lose it by absorbing other banks (Capital and Counties Bank v. Bank of England). Foreign banks may establish branches in Great Britain on complying with the regulations imposed on them by the Companies Consolidation Act 1908, but cannot apparently issue notes, even though payable abroad.

Issue of Notes.—The legislation that led to the Bank Charter Acts of 1844 and 1845 gave the Bank of England a complete monopoly over note issuance within the city of London and a 3-mile radius. Outside of that radius, and within 65 miles of the city, banks with six or fewer partners that were established before 1844 and issuing notes at that time have concurrent rights. Beyond the 65-mile radius, any bank established before 1844 that was issuing notes and has not lost that right due to bankruptcy, ceasing operations, or temporarily stopping note issuance can exercise this privilege. According to some experts, the effect of 20 and 21 Vict. cap. 49, sec. 12 [re-enacted Companies Consolidation Act 1908, sec. 286 (d)] was to allow any bank issuing notes outside the 3-mile radius and within the 65-mile radius to increase its number of partners from six to ten without affecting its ability to issue notes. However, the rule stated here is the one laid out by Bowen J. in Capital and Counties Bank v. Bank of England, 1889; 61 L.T. 516. The rise in the number of joint-stock banks and the gradual merger of smaller and older ones have reduced the number of notes issued by banks other than the Bank of England, and, as shown in the case of The Attorney-General v. Birkbeck, 12 Q.B.D. 57, it appears impossible to create any system that would allow the note-issuing power of a merged bank to continue with the new or combined entity. However, a bank with this right would not automatically lose it by absorbing other banks (Capital and Counties Bank v. Bank of England). Foreign banks may set up branches in Great Britain as long as they comply with the regulations laid out by the Companies Consolidation Act 1908, but they seemingly cannot issue notes, even if those notes are payable abroad.

Deposit Business.—The term "bank of deposit" gives a mistaken Relation between banker and customer. idea of the real relation between banker and customer. So long ago as 1848 it was decided by the House of Lords in Foley v. Hill, 2 H. of L. 28, that the real relation between banker and customer was that of debtor and creditor, not in any sense that of trustee and cestui que trust, or depositee and depositor, as had been formerly supposed and contended. The ordinary process by which a man pays money in to his account at his banker's is in law simply lending the money to the banker; it fixes the banker with no fiduciary relation, and he is in no way responsible to the customer for the use he may make of the money so paid in. And as being a mere debt, a customer's right to recover money paid in is barred on the expiration of six years by the Statute of Limitations, if there has been no payment meantime on account of principal or interest, and no acknowledgment sufficient to bar the statute (Pott v. Clegg, 16 M. & W. 321). Such a state of affairs, however, is hardly likely to arise, inasmuch as, in the absence of specific appropriation, earlier drawings out are attributed to the earlier payments in, as in the ordinary case of current accounts, and so the items on the credit and debit side cancel each other. An apparent exception to this system of appropriation exists in cases where a man wrongfully pays into his own account moneys held by him in a fiduciary capacity. In such circumstances he is presumed to have drawn out his own moneys rather than those affected by the trust, and so long as the account is in credit, any balance will be attributed to the trust money. As between contending claims to the money, based on different breaches of trust, the ordinary rule of appropriation will apply.

Deposit Business.—The term "bank of deposit" gives a misleading Banker-customer relationship. view of the true relationship between a bank and its customers. As early as 1848, the House of Lords decided in Foley v. Hill, 2 H. of L. 28, that the actual relationship between a bank and its customers is that of debtor and creditor, not trustee and cestui que trust, or depositee and depositor, as was previously thought. When someone deposits money into their bank account, in legal terms, they are simply lending that money to the bank; this does not create any fiduciary relationship, and the bank is not obligated to the customer regarding how it uses the deposited funds. Because it's just a debt, a customer's right to withdraw money deposited is limited by the Statute of Limitations, which bars recovery after six years unless there has been a payment on the principal or interest, or a sufficient acknowledgment that would extend the statute (Pott v. Clegg, 16 M. & W. 321). However, such a situation is unlikely to occur, since, without specific allocation, earlier withdrawals are considered to come from earlier deposits, similar to how current accounts operate, resulting in the credit and debit amounts offsetting each other. An apparent exception to this allocation rule arises when someone wrongfully deposits funds they hold in a fiduciary role into their own account. In this case, it is assumed they withdrew their own money first rather than the trust funds, and as long as the account has a positive balance, any remaining amount will be regarded as the trust funds. In disputes over the money based on different breaches of trust, the standard appropriation rules will be applied.

It has often been suggested that the only method of withdrawing Cheques. money from a banker is by cheque, that the presentation of a cheque is a condition precedent to the liability of the banker to repay. This is not so; such view being inconsistent with the cases establishing the effect of the Statute of Limitations on money left in a banker's hands, and with the numerous cases in which a balance at a bank has been attached as a simple and unconditional debt by a garnishee order, as, for instance, in Rogers v. Whiteley, 1892, A.C. 118. The banker's position with regard to cheques is that, superadded to the relation of debtor and creditor, there is an obligation to honour the customer's cheques provided the banker has a sufficient and available balance in his hands for the purpose (Foley v. Hill). If, having such funds in his hands, the banker dishonours a cheque, he is liable to the customer in substantial damages without proof of actual injury having accrued (Rolin v. Steward, 14 C.B. 595). Where several cheques are presented simultaneously and the available balance is insufficient to pay all, the banker should pay as many as the funds will cover, and is not bound to discriminate between particular cheques. It would seem a legitimate condition that a cheque should be drawn in the ordinary recognized form, not in one raising any question or doubt as to its validity or effect. Cheques drawn to "wages or order," "petty cash or order," or the like, are common, and are sometimes regarded as payable to bearer. Such payees are not, however, "fictitious or non-existent persons," so as to render the cheques payable to the bearer under sec. 7, subs. 3 of the Bills of Exchange Act 1882, nor can such payees endorse. Some banks refuse to pay such cheques, and it is conceived they are justified in so doing. Money paid in so shortly before the presentation of the cheque that there would not have been time to pass it through the books of the bank would not be treated as available for drawing against. If a person have an account at one branch of a bank, he is not entitled to draw cheques on another branch [v.03 p.0350]where he has either no account or is overdrawn, but the bank has, as against the customer, the right to combine accounts at different branches and treat them as one account (Garnet v. McEwen, L.R. 8 Ex. 10). Funds are not available so long as a garnishee order, founded on a judgment against the customer, is pending, since it attaches all moneys on current account irrespective of the amount of the judgment (Rogers v. Whiteley).

It’s often said that the only way to withdraw checks. money from a bank is by writing a cheque, and that presenting a cheque is a requirement for the bank’s obligation to pay back. This isn’t true; this perspective contradicts cases that illustrate how the Statute of Limitations affects money kept in a banker’s care, as well as numerous instances where a bank balance has been claimed as a straightforward and unconditional debt through a garnishee order, for example, in Rogers v. Whiteley, 1892, A.C. 118. Regarding cheques, the bank has an obligation to honor a customer’s cheques as long as it has a sufficient and available balance to cover them, in addition to the standard debtor and creditor relationship (Foley v. Hill). If the bank has the necessary funds but refuses to honor a cheque, it can be liable to the customer for significant damages without needing to prove any actual harm suffered (Rolin v. Steward, 14 C.B. 595). When multiple cheques are presented at the same time and the available balance isn’t enough to cover all of them, the bank should pay as many as the funds allow and isn’t required to choose between specific cheques. It seems reasonable to expect that a cheque is written in the standard, accepted format and not in a way that raises questions about its validity or effect. Cheques written to "wages or order," "petty cash or order," or similar are common and are sometimes considered payable to bearer. However, such payees are not "fictitious or non-existent persons," which would make the cheques payable to bearer under sec. 7, subs. 3 of the Bills of Exchange Act 1882, nor can these payees endorse them. Some banks refuse to pay these types of cheques, and it is believed they are justified in doing so. Money deposited shortly before a cheque is presented, in a way that wouldn’t allow it to be processed in the bank’s records, won’t be considered available for withdrawal. If a person has an account at one branch of a bank, they cannot draw cheques on another branch where they either have no account or are overdrawn. However, the bank has the right to combine accounts across different branches and treat them as one account (Garnet v. McEwen, L.R. 8 Ex. 10). Funds are not available while a garnishee order is pending, based on a judgment against the customer, as it attaches all money in the current account, regardless of the judgment’s amount (Rogers v. Whiteley).

The very questionable practice of post-dating cheques has been the source of considerable doubt and inconvenience to bankers. The use of such documents enables the drawer to obtain the results of a bill at a fixed future date without the expense of a regular bill-stamp. But the Bills of Exchange Act 1882, sec. 13, subs. 1, provides that "a bill is not invalid by reason only that it is ante-dated or post-dated, or that it bears date on a Sunday." The banker cannot therefore refuse to pay a cheque presented after the apparent date of its issue on the ground that he knows it to have been post-dated. On the other hand, he is entitled and indeed bound to refuse payment if such a cheque is presented before the apparent date of its issue (Morley v. Culverwell, 7 M. & W. at p. 178). Revocation of authority to pay a cheque must come to the banker's conscious knowledge and be unequivocal both in terms and method of communication. He is not bound to act on an unconfirmed telegram (Curtice v. London City & Midland Bank [1908], 1 K.B. 293). The banker's authority to pay cheques is terminated by the death, insanity or bankruptcy of the customer, or by notice of an available act of bankruptcy committed by him.

The questionable practice of post-dating checks has caused a lot of doubt and inconvenience for bankers. Using these kinds of documents allows the person writing the check to get the benefits of a bill at a set future date without the cost of a regular bill stamp. However, the Bills of Exchange Act 1882, sec. 13, subs. 1, states that "a bill is not invalid simply because it is dated earlier or later than it should be, or because it’s dated on a Sunday." Therefore, a banker cannot refuse to pay a check presented after its apparent issue date just because they know it was post-dated. On the flip side, they are entitled—and indeed required—to refuse payment if a check is presented before its apparent issue date (Morley v. Culverwell, 7 M. & W. at p. 178). For a revocation of authority to pay a check to be effective, it must come to the banker's attention in a clear and unambiguous manner. They are not required to act on an unverified telegram (Curtice v. London City & Midland Bank [1908], 1 K.B. 293). A banker's authority to pay checks is terminated by the customer's death, insanity, bankruptcy, or by notice of a relevant act of bankruptcy committed by them.

The banker is bound to observe secrecy with respect to the customer's account, unless good cause exists for disclosure, and the obligation does not cease if the account becomes overdrawn (Hardy v. Veasey, L.R. 3 Ex. 107). In England a cheque is not an assignment of funds in the banker's hands (Bills of Exchange Act 1882, sec. 53). The holder of the cheque has therefore no claim on the banker in the event of payment being refused, his remedy being against the drawer and endorser, if any. On this section is also based the custom of English bankers not to pay part of the amount of a cheque where there are funds, though not sufficient to meet the whole amount. The section does not apply to Scotland, where it would seem that the bank is bound to pay over what funds it has towards satisfaction of the cheque. A banker is entitled to hold paid cheques as vouchers until there has been a settlement of account between him and the customer. The entries in a pass-book constitute prima facie evidence against the banker, and when returned by the customer without comment, against him; but the proposition that such return constitutes a settlement of account has been much disputed. Indeed where forgery is the ground of repudiation of a cheque, no dealings or omissions of the customer with regard to the pass-book would seem to preclude him from objecting to being debited and throwing the loss on the banker (Kepitigalla Rubber Co. v. National Bank of India, 25 Times L.R. 402). As against the banker, however, credit entries in the pass-book cannot be disputed if the customer has altered his position in reliance thereon, and cheques drawn against an apparent balance must be honoured (Holland v. Manchester & Liverpool District Bank, 25 Times L.R. 386).

The banker must keep the customer's account information confidential, unless there's a valid reason to reveal it, and this duty doesn't end even if the account goes into the red (Hardy v. Veasey, L.R. 3 Ex. 107). In England, a cheque does not mean that the customer is assigning any funds that the banker has (Bills of Exchange Act 1882, sec. 53). This means the holder of the cheque cannot claim anything from the banker if payment is refused; their only option is to pursue the drawer and any endorsers. This rule is also why English bankers won’t pay part of a cheque’s amount if there are only enough funds for a portion. This rule isn’t applicable in Scotland, where it seems the bank is obligated to pay whatever funds it has to cover the cheque. A banker can keep paid cheques as proof until the accounts between them and the customer are settled. Entries in a pass-book serve as prima facie evidence against the banker, and if returned by the customer without comment, it’s also against him; however, whether such a return counts as a settlement of accounts has been heavily debated. In fact, if forgery is the reason for rejecting a cheque, any actions or inactions by the customer regarding the pass-book wouldn’t stop them from disputing debits and shifting the loss to the banker (Kepitigalla Rubber Co. v. National Bank of India, 25 Times L.R. 402). However, credit entries in the pass-book cannot be challenged against the banker if the customer has relied on them and cheques drawn against an apparent balance must be honored (Holland v. Manchester & Liverpool District Bank, 25 Times L.R. 386).

The rule by which the holder of a cheque has no direct recourse against the banker who dishonours it, holds good even where the banker has before issue marked the cheque as good for the amount, such marking not amounting to an acceptance by the banker. As between banker and banker, however, such marking or certifying probably amounts to a binding representation that the cheque will be paid, and, if done by request of the drawer, the latter cannot subsequently revoke the authority to pay. In certain circumstances, marking at the instance of the person presenting the cheque for payment may amount to an undertaking by the banker to hold the money for his benefit (In re Beaumont [1902], 1 Ch. p. 895).

The rule that the person holding a cheque has no direct way to go after the bank when it refuses to honor the cheque still applies, even if the bank marked the cheque as good for the amount before it was issued—this marking doesn’t count as an acceptance by the bank. However, between banks, that marking or certifying likely serves as a firm promise that the cheque will be paid. If it’s done at the request of the person who wrote the cheque, that person cannot later take back the authority to pay. In certain situations, if the marking is done at the request of the individual presenting the cheque for payment, it might mean the bank is promising to hold the money for that person’s benefit (In re Beaumont [1902], 1 Ch. p. 895).

A banker either paying or collecting money on a cheque to which the person tendering it for payment or collection has no title or a defective title is prima facie liable to the true owner for conversion or money had and received, notwithstanding he acted in perfect good faith and derived no benefit from the operation. Payment of an open cheque, payable to bearer either originally or by endorsement, is, however, in all cases a good payment and discharge (Charles v. Blackwell, 2 C.P.D. at p. 158). Limited protection in other cases has been extended by legislation to the banker with regard to both payment and collection of cheques, usually on the principle of counterbalancing some particular risk imposed on him by enactments primarily designed to safeguard the public.

A banker who pays or collects money on a check from someone who doesn’t have the right or has a flawed right to it is, on the surface, liable to the true owner for conversion or for money received, even if they acted in complete good faith and didn’t benefit from the transaction. However, paying an open check made out to bearer, either originally or through endorsement, is considered a valid payment and discharge in all cases (Charles v. Blackwell, 2 C.P.D. at p. 158). Legislation has provided limited protection for bankers in other situations regarding both the payment and collection of checks, usually based on the idea of balancing out specific risks imposed on them by laws made primarily to protect the public.

By sec. 19 of the Stamp Act 1853, the banker paying a draft or order payable to order on demand, drawn upon him, was relieved from liability in the event of the endorsement having been forged or unauthorized. This enactment was not repealed by the Bills of Exchange Act 1882, and, in London City & Midland Bank v. Gordon (1903), A.C. 240, was held to cover the case of drafts drawn by a branch of a bank on its head office. Sec. 60 of the Bills of Exchange Act 1882 extends like protection to the banker in the case of cheques, the definition of which therein as "bills drawn on a banker payable on demand" debars drafts of the above-mentioned description. Such definition, involving the unconditional character of the instrument, also precludes from the protection of this section the documents now frequently issued by corporations and others, which direct bankers to make payments on a specific attached receipt being duly signed (London City & Midland Bank v. Gordon). Sec. 17 of the Revenue Act 1883, however, applies to these documents the crossed cheques sections of the Bills of Exchange Act 1882 (see Bavius, Jr., & Sims v. London & South-Western Bank [1900], 1 Q.B. 270), while denying them the position of negotiable instruments, and a banker paying one of them crossed, in accordance with the crossing and in the absence of any indication of its having been transferred, could probably claim immunity under sec. 80. The Bills of Exchange Act 1882 contains no direct prohibition against a banker paying a crossed cheque otherwise than in accordance with the crossing, but if he do so he is liable to the true owner for any loss suffered by him in consequence of such payment (sec. 79), and is probably unable to charge his customer with the amount. A banker paying a crossed cheque in accordance with its ostensible tenor obtains protection under sec. 80 and the proviso to sec. 79. Questions have arisen as to the bearing of the crossed cheques sections when a crossed cheque drawn on one branch of a bank is paid in for collection by a customer at another branch; but the transaction is so obviously a legitimate and necessary one that either by the collecting branch may be regarded as a separate bank for this purpose, or sec. 79 may be ignored as inapplicable (Gordon v. London City & Midland Bank [1902], 1 K.B. 242 C.A.).

By section 19 of the Stamp Act 1853, a banker who pays a draft or order payable to order on demand that is drawn on them is not held liable if the endorsement was forged or unauthorized. This law was not repealed by the Bills of Exchange Act 1882 and, in London City & Midland Bank v. Gordon (1903), A.C. 240, it was determined that it also applies to drafts drawn by a bank branch on its head office. Section 60 of the Bills of Exchange Act 1882 offers similar protection to bankers in the case of cheques, describing cheques as "bills drawn on a banker payable on demand," which excludes drafts of the type mentioned earlier. This definition, which emphasizes the unconditional nature of the instrument, also means that documents often issued by corporations and others that instruct bankers to make payments on a specific signed receipt do not receive this protection (see London City & Midland Bank v. Gordon). However, section 17 of the Revenue Act 1883 applies the crossed cheque provisions of the Bills of Exchange Act 1882 to these documents (see Bavius, Jr., & Sims v. London & South-Western Bank [1900], 1 Q.B. 270), while not granting them the status of negotiable instruments. A banker paying one of these crossed documents, in line with the crossing and without any indication that it has been transferred, could likely claim protection under section 80. The Bills of Exchange Act 1882 does not directly prohibit a banker from paying a crossed cheque in any way other than according to the crossing, but if they do, they are liable to the true owner for any losses suffered as a result of that payment (section 79) and likely cannot charge their customer for that amount. A banker who pays a crossed cheque in accordance with its apparent terms is protected under section 80 and the proviso to section 79. Questions have arisen about the implications of the crossed cheque sections when a crossed cheque drawn on one branch of a bank is deposited for collection by a customer at another branch; however, this situation is clearly a valid and necessary transaction, and either branch can be seen as a separate bank for this purpose, or section 79 can be considered irrelevant (see Gordon v. London City & Midland Bank [1902], 1 K.B. 242 C.A.).

The collection of crossed cheques for a customer being virtually incumbent on a banker, qualified immunity is accorded him in so doing by sec. 82, a final exposition of which was given by the House of Lords in London City & Midland Bank v. Gordon (1903), A.C. 240. To come within its provisions, the banker must fulfil the following conditions. He must receive the cheque from, and the money for, a customer, i.e. a person with whom he has definite and existing business relations (see Great Western Ry. Co. v. London & County Bank [1901], A.C. 414). He must take the cheque already crossed generally or specially to himself. His own crossing under sec. 77 is absolutely inefficacious in this connexion. He must take the cheque and receive the money in good faith and without negligence. Negligence in this relation is the omission to exercise due care in the interest of the true owner, not necessarily the customer. To avoid this disqualification of negligence, the banker must see that the endorsements, where necessary, are ostensibly correct; he must satisfy himself of the authority where an endorsement is per procuration; he must not take for private account a cheque which on its face indicates that the holder is in possession of it as agent, or in an official capacity, or for partnership purposes (Hannan's Lake View Central Ld. v. Armstrong & Co., 16 Times L.R. 236; Bevan v. National Bank, 23 Times L.R. 65); he must not take a cheque marked "account payee" for an account other than that [v.03 p.0351]indicated (Bevan v. National Bank). It is further demonstrated by the Gordon case that the banker only secures protection so long as he is acting strictly as a conduit pipe, or as agent for the customer. If he put himself in the position of owner of the cheque, he no longer fulfils the condition of receiving the money only for the customer. In the Gordon case, adoption of the not uncommon practice of crediting cheques as cash in the bank's books before the money was actually received was held equivalent to taking them as transferee or owner, and to debar the bank from the protection of sec. 82. The anxiety and inconvenience caused to bankers by this unexpected decision was ultimately removed by the Bills of Exchange (Crossed Cheques) Act 1906, which enacts that a banker receives payment of a crossed cheque for a customer within the meaning of sec. 82 of the Bills of Exchange Act 1882, notwithstanding that he credits his customer's account with the amount of the cheque before receiving payment thereof. Apparently the scope of this act must be confined to its immediate object, and it does not affect the relations and rights between the banker and his customer or parties to the cheque arising from such crediting as cash. For instance, the customer, in the absence of agreement to the contrary, may at once draw against cheques so credited, while the banker may still debit the customer with the amount of the cheque if returned unpaid, or sue the drawer or indorser thereon.

The collection of crossed cheques for a customer is essentially the responsibility of the banker, who is given qualified immunity for doing so under section 82. A definitive interpretation was provided by the House of Lords in London City & Midland Bank v. Gordon (1903), A.C. 240. To be protected under this provision, the banker must meet specific conditions. He must receive the cheque from and for a customer, meaning a person with whom he has a clear and ongoing business relationship (see Great Western Ry. Co. v. London & County Bank [1901], A.C. 414). He must take the cheque, which must already be crossed either generally or specifically in his favor. His own crossing under section 77 is completely ineffective in this regard. He must accept the cheque and receive the money honestly and without negligence. Negligence in this context refers to failing to exercise appropriate care in the interest of the true owner, who is not necessarily the customer. To avoid being disqualified due to negligence, the banker must ensure that the endorsements, when necessary, appear to be correct; he must confirm the authority where an endorsement is made on behalf of someone else; he must not accept a cheque that indicates on its face that the holder possesses it as an agent, in an official capacity, or for partnership purposes (Hannan's Lake View Central Ld. v. Armstrong & Co., 16 Times L.R. 236; Bevan v. National Bank, 23 Times L.R. 65); he must not take a cheque marked "account payee" for any account other than that indicated (Bevan v. National Bank). The Gordon case further illustrates that the banker only receives protection as long as he acts strictly as a middleman or agent for the customer. If he positions himself as the owner of the cheque, he no longer meets the condition of receiving the money solely for the customer. In the Gordon case, the practice of crediting cheques as cash in the bank's records before the actual money was received was determined to be equivalent to accepting the cheques as a transferee or owner, which disqualified the bank from protection under section 82. The concern and inconvenience caused to bankers by this unexpected ruling were ultimately resolved by the Bills of Exchange (Crossed Cheques) Act 1906, which states that a banker receives payment of a crossed cheque for a customer as defined in section 82 of the Bills of Exchange Act 1882, even if he credits his customer's account with the cheque amount before actually receiving payment. However, the scope of this act seems to be limited to its immediate purpose and does not alter the relationships and rights between the banker and his customer or the parties involved with the cheque arising from such crediting as cash. For example, unless agreed otherwise, the customer may immediately draw against cheques that have been credited, while the banker can still debit the customer for the amount of the cheque if it is returned unpaid or pursue the drawer or endorser.

The protection to the collecting banker is in no way affected by the cheque being crossed "not negotiable," or by the nature of the fraud or crime by which the cheque was obtained by the customer or any previous possessor, although there are dicta which have been interpreted in the contrary sense. Nor does the fact that the customer is overdrawn deprive the banker of the character of a collecting agent, unless the cheque be definitely given and taken in reduction of such overdraft. Where the conditions requisite for protection exist, the protection covers not only the receipt of the money, but all operations usual in business and leading up to such receipt, on the basis of the customer's title being unimpeachable. The provisions of the crossed cheques sections of the Bills of Exchange Act 1882 are extended to dividend warrants by sec. 95 of that act, and to certain orders for payment issued by a customer of a banker by sec. 17 of the Revenue Act 1883, as before stated. But the wording of the Bills of Exchange (Crossed Cheques) Act 1906, specifying as it does cheques alone, appears to exclude documents of both these classes from its operation. With regard to the orders for payment, inasmuch as the same section which brings them within the crossed cheques sections expressly provides that they shall not be negotiable, a banker would probably be protected only in taking them from the specified payee, though this distinction has been ignored in some recently decided cases.

The protection for the collecting banker is not impacted by the cheque being crossed "not negotiable," or by the type of fraud or crime that led the customer or any previous holder to obtain the cheque, even though some interpretations have suggested otherwise. Additionally, the fact that the customer is overdrawn does not remove the banker’s status as a collecting agent, unless the cheque is specifically given and accepted to reduce that overdraft. When the necessary conditions for protection are met, the protection includes not only receiving the money but also all usual business operations that lead up to that receipt, based on the assumption that the customer's title is beyond challenge. The rules regarding crossed cheques in the Bills of Exchange Act 1882 are also applicable to dividend warrants as stated in section 95 of that act, and to certain payment orders issued by a banker’s customer as noted in section 17 of the Revenue Act 1883. However, since the wording of the Bills of Exchange (Crossed Cheques) Act 1906 specifies only cheques, it seems to exclude documents of both these categories from its scope. Concerning the payment orders, since the same section that includes them under the crossed cheques provisions explicitly states that they are not negotiable, a banker would likely only be protected when accepting them from the designated payee, although this distinction has been overlooked in some recent cases.

Where a banker incurs loss through forgery or fraud in circumstances Fraud. not covered by statutory protection, his right to relief, if any, must depend on general principles. He cannot charge his customer with payments made on a forgery of that customer's signature, on the ground either that he is presumed to know such signature or that the payment is unauthorized. But if the customer has accredited the forgery, or, having knowledge or reasonable ground for belief that it has been committed, has failed to warn the banker, who has thereby suffered loss or prejudice, the customer will be held estopped from disputing the banker's right to debit him with the amount (Vagliano v. Bank of England [1891], A.C. 107; McKenzie v. British Linen Co. 6 A.C. 82; Ewing v. Dominion Bank [1904], A.C. 806). The doctrine of the fictitious person as payee may also exonerate a banker who has paid an order bill to a wrongful possessor. Payment on a forgery to an innocent holder is payment under mistake of fact; but the ordinary right of the payor to recover money so paid is subordinated to the necessity of safeguarding the characteristics of negotiability. Views differ as to whether the recovery is precluded only where the opportunity of giving notice of dishonour is lost or prejudiced by delay in reclaiming payment, or whether mere possibility of damage is sufficient (cf. London & River Plate Bank v. Bank of Liverpool [1896], 1 Q.B. 7, and Imperial Bank of Canada v. Bank of Hamilton [1903], A.C. 49).

If a bank suffers a loss due to forgery or fraud in situations not protected by law, their ability to seek relief, if any, relies on general principles. They can't charge their customer for payments made from a forgery of that customer's signature, based on the idea that they should know the signature or that the payment was unauthorized. However, if the customer has acknowledged the forgery, or if they knew or had a reasonable belief that it had occurred and failed to notify the bank, resulting in the bank suffering a loss or disadvantage, the customer cannot dispute the bank's right to charge them for that amount (Vagliano v. Bank of England [1891], A.C. 107; McKenzie v. British Linen Co. 6 A.C. 82; Ewing v. Dominion Bank [1904], A.C. 806). The concept of a fictitious person as payee can also protect a banker who has made a payment to someone wrongfully in possession of an order bill. Payment made on a forgery to an innocent holder is considered a payment made under a mistake of fact; however, the usual right of the payer to reclaim that money is secondary to the need to maintain the principles of negotiability. Opinions vary on whether recovery is only blocked when the chance to give notice of dishonor is lost or compromised by a delay in asking for the payment back, or whether just the possibility of damage is enough (cf. London & River Plate Bank v. Bank of Liverpool [1896], 1 Q.B. 7, and Imperial Bank of Canada v. Bank of Hamilton [1903], A.C. 49).

Cases have frequently arisen where the carelessness of a customer in filling up cheques has enabled a person to fraudulently increase the sum for which such cheques were originally drawn. In Colonial Bank of Australasia v. Marshall [1906], A.C. 559, the judicial committee of the privy council held that the affording such facilities for forgery was no breach of the customer's duty to his banker, and that the latter was not entitled to debit the customer with more than the original amount. As before stated, the customer's dealings with the pass-book cannot, in the present state of the authorities, be relied on as debarring him from disputing unauthorized payments appearing therein.

Instances have often occurred where a customer's negligence in filling out checks has allowed someone to fraudulently raise the amount that the checks were originally written for. In Colonial Bank of Australasia v. Marshall [1906], A.C. 559, the judicial committee of the privy council determined that providing such opportunities for forgery did not violate the customer's responsibility to their bank, and that the bank could not charge the customer more than the initial amount. As mentioned earlier, the customer's interactions with the passbook cannot, given the current state of legal precedents, be considered as preventing them from disputing unauthorized payments that appear in it.

The payment of bills accepted payable at the bank is not, Custody of valuables. like the payment of cheques, an essential obligation of the banker, and the risk involved is enhanced by the fact that the banker must pay or refuse payment at once, no interval being allowed for verification of endorsements. The abolition or modification of the practice has frequently been advocated, but it is one of the facilities which competition compels bankers to extend to their customers. On the same basis stands the receipt of a customer's valuables for safe custody. The question of the banker's responsibility for the loss of goods so deposited with him was raised, but not decided, in an action brought by Mrs Langtry against the Union Bank of London in 1896. Certain jewels belonging to her had been delivered up by the bank to an unauthorized person on a forged order. The case was settled; but bankers being desirous to ascertain their real position, many legal opinions were taken on the point, and after consideration of these, the Central Association of Bankers issued a memorandum, in which they stated that the best legal opinion appeared to be that a distinction must be drawn between cases in which valuables were by mistake delivered to the wrong person and cases in which they were destroyed, lost, stolen or fraudulently abstracted, whether by an officer of the bank or some other person. That in the former case the question of negligence did not arise, the case being one of wrongful conversion of the goods by a voluntary act for which the bank was liable apart from any question of negligence. That, in the second case, that of loss or theft, the banker, being a gratuitous bailee, would only be liable if he had failed to use such care as an ordinary prudent man would take of valuables of his own. The latter rule is practically that laid down in Giblin v. MacMullen, L.R. 2 P.C. 318, but in estimating the amount of care to be taken by the banker, the nature of the goods, if known or suspected, and the exceptional means of protection at the disposition of bankers, such as strong-rooms, must be taken into consideration. Methods of obviating both classes of risk by means of special receipts have frequently been suggested, but such receipts do not appear to have come into general use.

The payment of bills that the bank accepts is not, Valuables custody. like paying cheques, a necessary obligation for the banker, and the risk is increased because the banker has to pay or decline immediately, without any time to check endorsements. The idea of abolishing or changing this practice has often been suggested, but it’s one of the services that competition forces banks to offer their clients. The same principle applies to the safekeeping of a customer's valuables. The issue of the banker's liability for the loss of items deposited with them was raised, but not resolved, in a case brought by Mrs. Langtry against the Union Bank of London in 1896. Some of her jewels were handed over by the bank to an unauthorized person based on a forged order. The case was settled; however, the bankers wanted to clarify their actual position, so many legal opinions were sought on the matter, and after reviewing these, the Central Association of Bankers released a memorandum stating that the best legal opinion seemed to indicate that a distinction should be made between cases where valuables were mistakenly given to the wrong person and cases where they were destroyed, lost, stolen, or taken fraudulently, whether by a bank officer or someone else. In the first case, the issue of negligence didn’t apply since it involved wrongfully handing over the goods through a voluntary act for which the bank was liable regardless of negligence. In the second case, regarding loss or theft, the banker, being a gratuitous bailee, would only be liable if they failed to exercise the same care an ordinarily prudent person would use for their own valuables. This latter rule follows the principle established in Giblin v. MacMullen, L.R. 2 P.C. 318, but when assessing the level of care the banker should take, the nature of the items, if known or suspected, and the exceptional security measures available to banks, like strong rooms, must be considered. Suggestions for addressing both types of risk through special receipts have been made frequently, but these receipts don’t seem to have gained widespread adoption.

Theoretically, bankers are supposed to refuse accounts which Trustees. are either expressedly or are known to be trust accounts. In practice, however, it is by no means uncommon to find accounts opened with a definite heading indicating the fiduciary capacity. In other cases, circumstances exist which affect the banker with notice of that capacity. In either case, however, the obligation to honour the customer's cheque is the predominant factor, and the banker is not bound or entitled to question the propriety or object of the cheque, unless he has very clear evidence of impending fraud (Gray v. Johnston, L.R. 3 H. of L. 1). Even though the banker have derived some personal benefit from the transaction, it cannot be impeached unless the banker's conduct amount in law to his being party or privy to the fraud, as where he has stipulated or pressed for the settlement or reduction of an ascertained overdraft on private account, which has been effected by cheque on the trust account (Coleman v. Bucks & Oxon Union Bank [1897], 2 Ch. 243). A banker is entitled, in dealing with trust moneys, known to be such, to insist on the authority of the whole body of trustees, direct and not deputed, and this is probably the safest course to adopt. Scarcely larger responsibility devolves on Joint Stock Banks appointed custodian trustees under the Public Trustee Act 1906, [v.03 p.0352]a remunerative position involving custody of trust funds and securities, and making and receiving payments on behalf of the estate, while leaving the active direction thereof in the hands of the managing trustees.

Theoretically, bankers are supposed to refuse accounts that Trustees. are either explicitly stated or known to be trust accounts. In practice, however, it's not uncommon to see accounts opened with a clear label indicating the fiduciary role. In other cases, situations arise that inform the banker of that capacity. Regardless, the main obligation to honor the customer's check takes precedence, and the banker isn't required or allowed to question the validity or purpose of the check unless there's clear evidence of potential fraud (Gray v. Johnston, L.R. 3 H. of L. 1). Even if the banker has gained some personal benefit from the transaction, it can't be challenged unless the banker's actions legally imply he was involved in or aware of the fraud, such as when he has insisted on settling or reducing a known overdraft on a private account that was paid from the trust account (Coleman v. Bucks & Oxon Union Bank [1897], 2 Ch. 243). A banker dealing with trust funds known to be such is entitled to require the authorization of the entire group of trustees, directly and not through delegates, which is probably the safest approach. Joint Stock Banks acting as custodian trustees under the Public Trustee Act 1906 carry scarcely greater responsibility, overseeing trust funds and securities while making and receiving payments on behalf of the estate, while leaving the active management to the managing trustees.

Other incidents of the ordinary practice of banking are the Bill-discounting. discounting of bills, the keeping of deposit accounts, properly so called, and the making of advances to customers, counting either by way of definite loan or arranged overdraft. So far as the discounting of bills is concerned, there is little to differentiate the position of the banker from that of any ordinary bill-discounter. It has been contended, however, that the peculiar attribute of the banker's lien entitled him to hold funds of the customer against his liability on current discounted bills. This contention was ultimately disposed of by Bowen v. Foreign & Colonial Gas Company, 22 W.R. 740, where it was pointed out that the essential object of a customer's discounting bills with his banker was to feed the current account, and that a possible liability constituted no set-off against an existing debt. Whether a particular bill has been taken for discount or collection is a question of fact. As in the payment of bills, so in the collection of them, there is no statutory protection whatever for the banker; as against third parties he can only rely either on the customer's title or his own as a holder for value, if no forged endorsement intervene and he can establish a consideration.

Other common activities in banking include invoice financing, managing deposit accounts, and providing loans to customers, whether through a specific loan or an arranged overdraft. When it comes to bill discounting, there’s not much difference between a banker and any regular bill discounter. However, it has been argued that the banker's lien allows him to hold the customer's funds against their liability on currently discounted bills. This argument was ultimately settled in Bowen v. Foreign & Colonial Gas Company, 22 W.R. 740, where it was highlighted that the main purpose of a customer discounting bills with their banker is to fund their current account, and that a potential liability does not offset an existing debt. Determining whether a bill is taken for discount or collection is a factual matter. Just like in bill payments, there is no legal protection for the banker when it comes to collections; he can only rely on the customer’s title or his own as a holder for value, provided there's no forged endorsement and he can prove consideration.

A deposit account, whether at call or on fixed notice, does not Deposit accounts. constitute any fiduciary relation between the depositor and the banker, but merely a debt due from the latter to the former. It has been suggested that cheques can be drawn against deposit account on call, and, though a banker might safely honour such a cheque, relying, if necessary, on his right of lien or set-off, there appears no legal right in the customer to enforce such payment. Deposit receipts given by bankers are exempt from stamp duty, even though they contain an undertaking with respect to payment of principal and interest. They are clearly not negotiable instruments, but it is difficult to deduce from the cases how far dealings with them may amount to an equitable assignment of the moneys they represent. Probably deliberate definite transfer, coupled with endorsement, would confer an effective title to such moneys. Where, as is not uncommon, the form of deposit note includes a cheque, the banker could not refuse to pay were the cheque presented and any superadded formalities complied with.

A deposit account, whether on demand or with advanced notice, does notBank accounts. create a fiduciary relationship between the depositor and the bank; it simply represents a debt that the bank owes to the depositor. It's been suggested that cheques can be drawn against on-demand deposit accounts, and while a bank might safely honor such a cheque, relying on its right of lien or set-off if needed, the customer does not have a legal right to demand such payment. Deposit receipts issued by banks are exempt from stamp duty, even if they include a promise regarding the payment of principal and interest. These receipts are clearly not negotiable instruments, but it’s difficult to determine from the cases how far transactions involving them might qualify as an equitable transfer of the funds they represent. Likely, a deliberate transfer with endorsement would give an effective claim to those funds. In cases where the deposit note includes a cheque, the bank could not refuse to pay if the cheque is presented and all other required formalities are followed.

There is no obligation on a banker to permit his customer Overdrafts and advances. to overdraw, apart from agreement express or implied from course of business. Drawing a cheque or accepting a bill payable at the banker's which there are not funds meet is an implied request for an overdraft, which the banker may or may not comply with. Interest is clearly chargeable on overdrafts whether stipulated for or not. There is no direct authority establishing this right in the banker, and interest is not usually recoverable on mere debts, but the charge is justifiable on the ground of the universal custom of bankers, if not otherwise. The charging of compound interest or interest with periodical rests has been supported where such system of keeping the accounts has been brought to the notice of the customer by means of the pass-book, and not objected to by him, but in the present attitude of the courts towards the pass-book some further recognition would seem necessary. Such system of charging interest, even when fully recognized, only prevails so long as the relation of banker and customer, on which it is founded, continues in force; the taking a mortgage for the existing debt would put an end to it.

A banker isn't required to allow a customer Overdrafts and loans. to overdraw their account unless there's an explicit or implied agreement based on how they usually do business. Writing a cheque or accepting a bill payable at the bank when there aren't enough funds available is considered an implied request for an overdraft, which the banker can choose to approve or deny. Interest can definitely be charged on overdrafts, whether or not it's specifically mentioned. There's no direct rule that grants this right to bankers, and typically, interest isn’t recoverable on regular debts, but the charge is often justified based on common banking practices. Charging compound interest or interest with regular periods has been upheld when the customer is made aware of this system through their pass-book and doesn’t raise objections, but given the current court attitudes toward pass-books, some additional acknowledgment seems necessary. This system of charging interest only continues as long as the banker-customer relationship, which supports it, remains intact; taking a mortgage for the outstanding debt would end that relationship.

The main point in which advances made by bankers differ Lien. from those made by other people is the exceptional right possessed by bankers of securing repayment by means of the banker's lien. The banker's lien is part of the law merchant and entitles him, in the absence of agreement express or implied to the contrary, to retain and apply, in discharge of the customer's liability to him, any securities of the customer coming into his possession in his capacity as banker. It includes bills and cheques paid in for collection (Currie v. Misa, 1 A.C. 564). Either by virtue of it, or his right of set-off, the banker can retain moneys paid in by or received for the credit of the customer, against the customer's debt to him. Goods deposited for safe custody or moneys paid in to meet particular bills are exempt from the lien, the purpose for which they come to the banker's hands being inconsistent with the assertion of the lien. The existence of the banker's lien entitles him to sue all parties to bills or cheques by virtue of sec. 27, subs. 3 of the Bills of Exchange Act, and to the extent of his advances his title is independent of that of the previous holder. Moreover, the banker's lien, though so termed, is really in effect an implied pledge, and confers the rights of realization on default pertaining to that class of bailment. But with regard to the exercise of his lien, as in many other phases of his relation to his customer, the banker's strict rights may be curtailed or circumscribed by limitations arising out of course of business. The principle, based either on general equity or estoppel and independent of definite agreement or consideration, requires that when dealings between banker and customer have for a reasonable space of time proceeded on a recognized footing, the banker shall not suddenly break away from such established order of things and assert his strict legal rights to the detriment of the customer. By the operation of this rule, the banker may be precluded from asserting his lien in particular cases, as for instance for an overdraft on one account against another which had habitually been kept and operated on separately. It equally prevents the dishonouring of cheques in circumstances in which they have hitherto been paid independent of the actual available balance.

The main way that advances made by bankers differ Lien. from those made by others is the special right that bankers have to secure repayment through the banker's lien. The banker's lien is part of commercial law and gives bankers the right, unless there's an explicit or implied agreement to the contrary, to keep and use any securities from customers that come into their possession as bankers to cover the customer's debt. This includes bills and checks submitted for collection (Currie v. Misa, 1 A.C. 564). Because of this lien, or their right to set off, bankers can keep funds deposited by or received for the customer to offset the customer's debt. Goods left with the bank for safekeeping or money deposited to pay specific bills are not subject to the lien since their purpose contradicts the claim of the lien. The banker's lien allows them to sue all parties to bills or checks under section 27, subsection 3 of the Bills of Exchange Act, and their claim is independent of that of the previous holder to the extent of their advances. Additionally, the banker's lien is essentially an implied pledge, granting the rights to recover in case of default associated with that type of bailment. However, regarding the exercise of this lien, as in many aspects of their relationship with customers, the banker's strict rights can be limited by practices developed over time. The principle, based either on general fairness or estoppel and independent of any specific agreement or consideration, states that when interactions between a banker and a customer have consistently followed a certain pattern for a reasonable period, the banker cannot abruptly change course and claim their strict legal rights to the customer's detriment. This principle can prevent the banker from asserting their lien in certain situations, such as for an overdraft on one account against another account that has always been kept and operated separately. It also stops them from dishonoring checks in situations where those checks have been paid regardless of the actual available balance.

Restrictions arising from course of business can of course be put an end to by the banker, but only on reasonable notice to the customer and by providing for outstanding liabilities undertaken by the latter in reliance on the continuance of the pre-existing state of affairs (see Buckingham v. London & Midland Bank, 12 Times L.R. 70). As against this, the banker can, in some cases, fortify his position by appeal to the custom of bankers. The validity of such custom, provided it be general and reasonable, has frequently been recognized by the courts. Any person entering on business relations with a banker must be taken to contemplate the existence of such custom and implicitly agree that business shall be conducted in accordance therewith. Practical difficulty has been suggested with regard to proof of any such custom not already recognized in law, as to how far it can be established by the evidence of one party, the bankers, unsupported by that of members of the outside public, in most cases impossible to obtain. It is conceived, however, that on the analogy of local custom and the Stock Exchange rules, such outside evidence could be dispensed with, and this is the line apparently indicated with relation to the pass-book by the court of appeal in Vagliano's case (23 Q.B.D. at p. 245). The unquestionable right of the banker to summarily debit his customer's account with a returned cheque, even when unindorsed by the customer and taken by the banker in circumstances constituting him a transferee of the instrument, is probably referable to a custom of this nature. So is the common practice of bankers to refuse payment of a so-called "stale" cheque, that is, one presented an unreasonable time after its ostensible date; although the fact that some banks treat a cheque as stale after six months, others not till after twelve, might be held to militate against the validity of such custom, and lapse of time is not included by the Bills of Exchange Act among the matters working revocation of the banker's duty, and authority to pay his customer's cheque. Indirectly, this particular custom obtains some support from sec. 74 (2) of the Bills of Exchange Act, although the object of that section is different.

Restrictions that come from the way business is conducted can obviously be ended by the banker, but only with reasonable notice to the customer and by covering any outstanding liabilities the customer has taken on in reliance on the continuation of the existing situation (see Buckingham v. London & Midland Bank, 12 Times L.R. 70). On the flip side, the banker can sometimes strengthen their position by referring to banking customs. Courts have often recognized the validity of such customs, as long as they are general and reasonable. Anyone entering into a business relationship with a banker must understand that such customs exist and implicitly agree to conduct business accordingly. There have been practical concerns raised about proving any such customs not already recognized in law, particularly how far one party's evidence (the bankers') can establish it without input from the outside public, which is often impossible to obtain. However, it's believed that, similar to local customs and Stock Exchange rules, such external evidence could be waived, which appears to align with the court of appeal's remarks regarding the pass-book in Vagliano's case (23 Q.B.D. at p. 245). The banker’s unquestionable right to immediately debit a customer's account for a returned check, even if the customer hasn’t endorsed it and the bank has acted as a transferee, likely stems from this type of custom. The common practice among bankers to refuse payment on a so-called "stale" check, meaning one presented an unreasonable time after its dated issue, also falls under this custom; although, the fact that some banks consider a check stale after six months while others do so after twelve could challenge the validity of such custom. Furthermore, the lapse of time is not mentioned in the Bills of Exchange Act as a reason to revoke the banker's duty and the authority to pay the customer's check. Indirectly, this particular custom gets some backing from section 74 (2) of the Bills of Exchange Act, even though the intent of that section is different.

That section does, however, import the custom of bankers into the reckoning of a reasonable time for the presentation of a cheque, and with other sections clears up any doubts which might have arisen on the common law as to the right of the holder of a cheque, whether crossed or not, to employ his banker for its collection, without imperilling his rights against prior parties in case of dishonour. On dishonour of a cheque paid in for [v.03 p.0353]collection, the banker is bound to give notice of dishonour. Being in the position of an agent, he may either give notice to his principal, the customer, or to the parties liable on the bill. The usual practice of bankers has always been to return the cheque to the customer, and sec. 49, subs. 6 of the Bills of Exchange Act is stated to have been passed to validate this custom. Inasmuch as it only provides for the return of the dishonoured bill or cheque to the drawer or an endorser it appears to miss the case of a cheque to bearer or become payable to bearer by blank endorsement prior to the customer's.

That section does, however, incorporate the practice of bankers into the calculation of a reasonable time for presenting a cheque, and along with other sections, clarifies any uncertainties that might have arisen under common law regarding the holder of a cheque, whether crossed or not, having the right to use their bank for collection, without risking their rights against earlier parties in case of dishonor. If a cheque that has been submitted for collection is dishonored, the bank must notify about the dishonor. Acting as an agent, the bank can either inform its client, the customer, or the parties responsible for the bill. The usual practice for banks has always been to return the cheque to the customer, and section 49, subsection 6 of the Bills of Exchange Act is said to have been enacted to validate this practice. Since it only addresses the return of the dishonored bill or cheque to the drawer or an endorser, it seems to overlook the situation of a cheque payable to bearer or one that becomes payable to bearer through blank endorsement prior to the customer's involvement.

Where a bank or a banker takes a mortgage, legal or equitable, or a guarantee as cover for advances or overdraft, there is nothing necessarily differentiating the position from that of any other mortgagee or guaranteed party. It has, however, fallen to banks to evoke some leading decisions with respect to the former class of security. In London Joint Stock Bank v. Simmons ([1892], A.C. 201) the House of Lords, professedly explaining their previous decision in Sheffield v. London Joint Stock Bank, 13 A.C. 333, determined that negotiable securities, commercial or otherwise, may safely be taken in pledge for advances, though the person tendering them is, from his known position, likely to be holding them merely as agent for other persons, so long as they are taken honestly and there is nothing tangible, outside the man's position, to arouse suspicion. So again in Lloyd's Bank v. Cooke [1907], 1 K.B. 794, the bank vindicated the important principle that the common law of estoppel still obtains with regard to bills, notes and cheques, save where distinctly annulled or abrogated by the Bills of Exchange Act, and that therefore a man putting inchoate negotiable instruments into the hands of an agent for the purpose of his raising money thereon is responsible to any one taking them bona fide and for value, although the agent may have fraudulently exceeded and abused his authority and the case does not fall within the provisions of the Bills of Exchange Act.

Where a bank or banker accepts a mortgage, either legal or equitable, or a guarantee as security for loans or overdrafts, there isn’t anything that sets their position apart from that of any other mortgagee or guaranteed party. However, banks have had to reference some key decisions regarding the former type of security. In London Joint Stock Bank v. Simmons ([1892], A.C. 201), the House of Lords, while explaining their earlier decision in Sheffield v. London Joint Stock Bank, 13 A.C. 333, determined that negotiable securities, whether commercial or otherwise, can be safely pledged for loans, even if the person presenting them is, due to their known circumstances, likely holding them merely as an agent for others, provided the securities are accepted honestly and there’s nothing obvious about the person’s situation that raises suspicion. Similarly, in Lloyd's Bank v. Cooke [1907], 1 K.B. 794, the bank reinforced the important principle that common law on estoppel still applies to bills, notes, and checks, unless explicitly annulled or revoked by the Bills of Exchange Act, meaning a person delivering incomplete negotiable instruments to an agent to raise funds on them is accountable to anyone who accepts them in good faith and for value, even if the agent has fraudulently overstepped and abused their authority, and the situation doesn’t fall under the Bills of Exchange Act’s provisions.

With regard to guarantees, the main incidents peculiarly Guarantees. affecting bankers are the following. The existence of a guarantee does not oblige the banker to any particular system of keeping the account. So long as it is not unfairly manipulated to the detriment of the guarantor, there is no obligation to put moneys paid in, without appropriation, to the guaranteed rather than to the unguaranteed account, and on the termination of a guarantee, the banker may close the account, leaving it to be covered by the guarantee, and open a new one with the customer, to which he may devote payments in, not otherwise appropriated. Where by its nature or terms a continuing guarantee is revocable either summarily or on specified notice, difficult questions may arise on such revocation as to the banker's duty and obligations towards the customer, who has probably incurred liabilities on the strength of the credit afforded by the guarantee. Although the existence of a guarantee does not bind the banker to advance up to the prescribed limit, he could not well, on revocation, immediately shut off all facilities from the customer without notice, while subsequent purely voluntary advances might not be covered by the guarantee. These contingencies should therefore be fully provided for by the guarantee, particularly the crucial period of the pendency of notice.

When it comes to guarantees, the main issues that specifically Warranties. impact bankers are as follows. The existence of a guarantee does not require the banker to follow any specific method for maintaining the account. As long as it’s not unfairly manipulated to harm the guarantor, there’s no obligation to allocate funds deposited, without specification, to the guaranteed account instead of the unguaranteed one. Upon the end of a guarantee, the banker can close the account, leaving it under the guarantee, and open a new one with the customer for which payments that aren’t otherwise allocated may be directed. If a continuing guarantee can be revoked either immediately or with a specific notice, complicated issues could arise regarding the banker’s responsibilities and obligations to the customer, who may have taken on liabilities based on the trust given by the guarantee. Even though having a guarantee doesn’t obligate the banker to grant funds up to the specified limit, it wouldn’t be reasonable for them to suddenly cut off all services to the customer upon revocation without prior notice, especially since any future voluntary advances may not be protected by the guarantee. These potential situations should be clearly addressed in the guarantee, particularly during the critical period while notice is pending.

Authorities.—The Institute of Bankers (London), Questions on Banking Practice (6th ed., 1909); J. Douglas Walker, A Treatise on Banking Law (2nd ed., 1885); Chalmers, Bills of Exchange (7th ed., 1909); Sir J. R. Paget, The Law of Banking (2nd ed., 1908); H. Hart, The Law of Banking (2nd ed., 1906).

Authorities.—The Institute of Bankers (London), Questions on Banking Practice (6th ed., 1909); J. Douglas Walker, A Treatise on Banking Law (2nd ed., 1885); Chalmers, Bills of Exchange (7th ed., 1909); Sir J. R. Paget, The Law of Banking (2nd ed., 1908); H. Hart, The Law of Banking (2nd ed., 1906).

(J. R. P.)

(J. R. P.)

[1] A translation of the act of the 3rd of May 1619 may be found in the appendix to the Quarterly Journal of Economics (Boston, U.S.A.) for April 1892. These documents present a distinct picture of banking in its true sense.

[1] A translation of the act of May 3, 1619, can be found in the appendix of the Quarterly Journal of Economics (Boston, U.S.A.) for April 1892. These documents provide a clear picture of banking in its true sense.

[2] The clearest account of its early days is found in Thorold Rogers' History of the First Nine Years of the Bank of England.

[2] The best description of its early days is in Thorold Rogers' History of the First Nine Years of the Bank of England.

[3] The date 1876 is taken as being that when the Imperial Bank of Germany came into full operation.

[3] The year 1876 is considered when the Imperial Bank of Germany started full operations.

[4] "The Grasshopper" in Lombard Street, by John Biddulph Masters (1892).

[4] "The Grasshopper" in Lombard Street, by John Biddulph Masters (1892).

[5] See Vorträge und Aufsätze hauptsächlich aus dem Handels- und Wechselrecht, von Dr R. Koch, pp. 163-164.

[5] See Lectures and Essays Mainly on Commercial and Bills of Exchange Law, by Dr. R. Koch, pp. 163-164.

[6] The imperial treasury is bound to pay the state notes in cash at any time when this is required, but an independent fund of cash set apart for this purpose does not exist. See Handwörterbuch der Staatswissenschaften, vol. v. art. "Papiergeld," p. 97 (Jena, 1893; ed. J. Conrad, L. Elster, W. Lexis and E. Löning).

[6] The imperial treasury must pay state notes in cash whenever needed, but there isn’t a dedicated cash fund for this purpose. See Handwörterbuch der Staatswissenschaften, vol. v. art. "Papiergeld," p. 97 (Jena, 1893; ed. J. Conrad, L. Elster, W. Lexis and E. Löning).

BANKSIA, an Australian genus of shrubs and trees (natural order Proteaceae), with leathery leaves often deeply cut and handsome dense spikes of flowers. It is named after Sir Joseph Banks (q.v.). The plants are grown in England for their handsome foliage as evergreen greenhouse shrubs.

BANKSIA, is an Australian group of shrubs and trees (natural order Proteaceae), featuring tough, often deeply cut leaves and attractive, dense flower spikes. It is named after Sir Joseph Banks (q.v.). These plants are cultivated in England for their beautiful foliage as evergreen greenhouse shrubs.

BANKURA, a town and district of British India, within the Burdwan division of Bengal. The town has a population of 20,737. The district has an area of 2621 sq. m., and in 1901 its population was 1,116,411, showing an increase of 4% in the decade. It is bounded on the N. and E. by Burdwan district; on the S. by Midnapur district; and on the W. by Manbhum district. Bankura forms a connecting link between the delta of the Ganges on the E. and the mountainous highlands of Chota Nagpur on the W. Along its eastern boundary adjoining Burdwan district the country is flat and alluvial, presenting the appearance of the ordinary paddy lands of Bengal. Going N. and W., however, the surface gradually rises into long undulating tracts; rice lands and swamps give way to a region of low thorny jungle or forest trees; the hamlets become smaller and more scattered, and nearly disappear altogether in the wild forests along the western boundary. Large quantities of lac and tussur silk are gathered in the hilly tract. The stone quarries and minerals are little worked. There are indigo factories and two coal-mines. Both cotton and silk are woven, and plates, &c., are carved from soap-stone. The old capital of the country was at Bishnupur, which is still the chief centre of local industries. The north-east part of the district is skirted by the East Indian railway beyond the river Damodar. The Midnapur-Jherria line of the Bengal-Nagpur railway passes through the district, and there is a line from Howrah to Bankura. The climate of Bankura is generally healthy, the cold season being bracing, the air wholesome and dry, and fogs of rare occurrence. The district is exposed to drought and also to destructive floods. It suffered in the famines of 1866, 1874-1875 and 1896-1897. The temperature in the hot season is very oppressive and relaxing. The Bishnupur raj was one of the largest estates in Bengal in the end of the 18th century, but it was sold for arrears of revenue shortly after the conclusion of the permanent settlement in 1793.

BANKURA, a town and district in British India, located in the Burdwan division of Bengal. The town has a population of 20,737. The district covers an area of 2,621 square miles, and in 1901 its population was 1,116,411, showing a 4% increase over the decade. It is bordered to the north and east by Burdwan district; to the south by Midnapur district; and to the west by Manbhum district. Bankura connects the Ganges delta in the east with the mountainous highlands of Chota Nagpur in the west. Along its eastern border next to Burdwan district, the land is flat and alluvial, resembling the typical rice fields of Bengal. However, moving north and west, the land gradually rises into long rolling hills; rice fields and swamps transition into a region of low thorny jungles or forests; the villages become smaller and more spread out, nearly disappearing altogether in the dense forests along the western border. Large amounts of lac and tussur silk are harvested in the hilly areas. The stone quarries and mineral resources are not heavily exploited. There are indigo factories and two coal mines. Both cotton and silk are woven, and items like plates are carved from soapstone. The former capital of the region was at Bishnupur, which is still the main center for local industries. The northeastern part of the district is bordered by the East Indian railway across the Damodar River. The Midnapur-Jherria line of the Bengal-Nagpur railway runs through the district, and there's a line from Howrah to Bankura. The climate in Bankura is generally healthy, with a refreshing cold season, clean and dry air, and fogs being rare. The district is susceptible to drought and devastating floods. It experienced hardships during the famines of 1866, 1874-1875, and 1896-1897. The temperature during the hot season can be extremely oppressive and draining. The Bishnupur raj was one of the largest estates in Bengal at the end of the 18th century, but it was sold off due to unpaid taxes shortly after the permanent settlement was established in 1793.

BANN, the principal river in the north of Ireland. Rising in the Mourne mountains in the south of the Co. Down it runs N.W. until it enters Lough Neagh (q.v.), which it drains N.N.W. to an estuary at Coleraine, forming Lough Beg immediately below the larger lough. The length of its valley (excluding the lesser windings of the river) is about 90 m. The total drainage area, including the other important feeders of Lough Neagh, is about 2300 sq. m., extending westward to the confines of the Co. Fermanagh, and including parts of the Cos. Down and Antrim, Armagh and Monaghan, Tyrone and Londonderry. The river has valuable salmon fisheries, but is not of much importance for navigation. Above Lough Neagh it is known as the Upper Bann and below as the Lower Bann.

BANN, the main river in the north of Ireland. It starts in the Mourne Mountains in the south of County Down and flows northwest until it reaches Lough Neagh (q.v.), which it drains north-northwest into an estuary at Coleraine, creating Lough Beg just below the larger lake. The length of its valley (not counting the smaller twists of the river) is about 90 miles. The total drainage area, including other important tributaries of Lough Neagh, is around 2300 square miles, extending west to the borders of County Fermanagh, and including parts of Counties Down, Antrim, Armagh, Monaghan, Tyrone, and Londonderry. The river has valuable salmon fisheries, but isn't very significant for navigation. Above Lough Neagh, it's called the Upper Bann and below it’s known as the Lower Bann.

BANNATYNE, GEORGE (1545-?1608), collector of Scottish poems, was a native of Newtyle, Forfarshire. He became an Edinburgh merchant and was admitted a burgess in 1587. Some years earlier, in 1568, when the "pest" raged in the capital, he retired to his native county and amused himself by writing out copies of poems by 15th and early 16th century Scots poets. His work extended to eight hundred folio pages, divided into five parts. The MS. descended to his only daughter Janet, and later to her husband's family, the Foulises of Woodhall and Ravelston, near Edinburgh. From them it passed to the Advocates' library, where it is still preserved. This MS., known as the "Bannatyne Manuscript," constitutes with the "Asloan" and "Maitland Folio" MSS. the chief repository of Middle Scots poetry, especially for the texts of the greater poets Henryson, Dunbar, Lyndsay and Alexander Scott. Portions of it were reprinted (with modifications) by Allan Ramsay in his Ever Green (1724), and later, and more correctly, by Lord Hailes in his Ancient Scottish Poems (1770). The entire text was issued by the Hunterian Club (1873-1902) in a handsome and generally accurate form. The name of Bannatyne was honoured in 1823 by the foundation in Edinburgh of the Bannatyne Club, devoted to the publication of historical and literary material from Scottish sources. The thirty-third issue of the club (1829) was Memorials of George Bannatyne (1545-1608), with a memoir by Sir Walter Scott and an account of the MS. by David Laing.

BANNATYNE, GEORGE (1545-?1608), collector of Scottish poems, was from Newtyle, Forfarshire. He became a merchant in Edinburgh and was made a burgess in 1587. A few years earlier, in 1568, when there was an outbreak of "the plague" in the capital, he returned to his hometown and spent his time copying poems by 15th and early 16th-century Scots poets. His work totaled eight hundred folio pages, divided into five parts. The manuscript was passed down to his only daughter Janet, and later to her husband's family, the Foulises of Woodhall and Ravelston, near Edinburgh. From them, it went to the Advocates' library, where it is still kept. This manuscript, known as the "Bannatyne Manuscript," along with the "Asloan" and "Maitland Folio" manuscripts, serves as a major collection of Middle Scots poetry, especially for the texts of notable poets like Henryson, Dunbar, Lyndsay, and Alexander Scott. Sections of it were reprinted (with changes) by Allan Ramsay in his Ever Green (1724), and later, more accurately, by Lord Hailes in his Ancient Scottish Poems (1770). The complete text was published by the Hunterian Club (1873-1902) in a beautiful and mostly accurate edition. The name of Bannatyne was honored in 1823 with the founding of the Bannatyne Club in Edinburgh, dedicated to publishing historical and literary material from Scottish sources. The club's thirty-third publication (1829) was Memorials of George Bannatyne (1545-1608), which included a memoir by Sir Walter Scott and a description of the manuscript by David Laing.

See also Gregory Smith, Specimens of Middle Scots (1902).

See also Gregory Smith, Specimens of Middle Scots (1902).

BANNERET (Fr. banneret, from bannière, banner, elliptical for seigneur or chevalier banneret, Med. Lat. banneretus), in feudalism, the name given to those nobles who had the right to lead their vassals to battle under their own banner. Ultimately bannerets obtained a place in the feudal hierarchy between [v.03 p.0354]barons and knights bachelors, which has given rise to the idea that they are the origin of King James I.'s order of baronets. Selden, indeed, points out that "the old stories" often have baronetti for bannereti, and he points out that in France the title had become hereditary; but he himself is careful to say (p. 680) that banneret "hath no relation to this later title." The title of knight banneret, with the right to display the private banner, came to be granted for distinguished service in the field. "No knight banneret," says Selden, of the English custom, "can be created but in the field, and that, when either the king is present, or at least his royal standard is displayed. But the creation is almost the self-same with that in the old French ceremonies by the solemn delivery of a banner charged with the arms of him that is to be created, and the cutting of the end of the pennon or streamer to make it a square or into the shape of a banner in case that he which is to be created had in the field his arms on a streamer before the creation." The creation of bannerets is traceable, according to Selden, to the time of Edward I. "Under these bannerets," he adds, "divers knights bachelors and esquires usually served; and according to the number of them, the bannerets received wages." The last authentic instance of the creation of a knight banneret was that of John Smith, created banneret at the battle of Edgehill by Charles I. for rescuing the royal standard from the enemy.

BANNERET (Fr. banneret, from bannière, banner, short for seigneur or chevalier banneret, Med. Lat. banneretus), in feudalism, refers to the nobles who had the right to lead their vassals into battle under their own banner. Ultimately, bannerets held a position in the feudal hierarchy between [v.03 p.0354]barons and knights bachelors, which has led to the belief that they are the origin of King James I's order of baronets. Selden notes that "the old stories" often use baronetti for bannereti, and he mentions that in France the title had become hereditary; however, he himself clarifies (p. 680) that banneret "has no relation to this later title." The title of knight banneret, which allowed the display of a private banner, was awarded for distinguished service in battle. "No knight banneret," Selden states about the English custom, "can be created but in the field, and that, when either the king is present, or at least his royal standard is displayed. But the creation is almost identical to that in the old French ceremonies by the formal delivery of a banner featuring the arms of the person being created and by cutting the end of the pennon or streamer to make it square or into the shape of a banner if the new knight already had their arms on a streamer before the creation." The creation of bannerets can be traced back to the time of Edward I. "Under these bannerets," he adds, "various knights bachelors and esquires usually served; and depending on their number, the bannerets received wages." The last recorded instance of the creation of a knight banneret was John Smith, created banneret at the battle of Edgehill by Charles I for rescuing the royal standard from the enemy.

See Selden, Titles of Honor (3rd ed., London, 1672), p. 656; Du Cange, Glossarium (Niort, 1883), s.v. "Bannereti."

See Selden, Titles of Honor (3rd ed., London, 1672), p. 656; Du Cange, Glossarium (Niort, 1883), s.v. "Bannereti."

BANNERS, FEAST OF (Jap. Nobori-no-Sekku), a Japanese festival in honour of male children held on the 5th of May. Every householder who has sons fastens a bamboo pole over his door and hangs from it gaily-coloured paper fishes, one for each of his boys. These fishes are made to represent carp, which are in Japanese folklore symbolical of health and longevity. The day is recognized as a national holiday.

BANNERS, FEAST OF (Jap. Nobori-no-Sekku), a Japanese festival celebrating boys that takes place on May 5th. Every parent with sons puts up a bamboo pole above their door and hangs brightly colored paper fish from it, one for each of their boys. These fish represent carp, which in Japanese folklore symbolize health and longevity. The day is celebrated as a national holiday.

For banners in general see Flag.

For banners in general, see Flag.

BANNISTER, CHARLES (1738-1804), English actor and singer, was born in Gloucestershire, and after some amateur and provincial experience made his first London appearance in 1762 as Will in The Orators at the Haymarket. Gifted with a fine bass voice, Bannister acquired a reputation as a singer at Ranelagh and elsewhere, as well as an actor, and was received with such favour that Garrick engaged him for Drury Lane. He died on the 26th of October 1804.

BANNISTER, CHARLES (1738-1804), an English actor and singer, was born in Gloucestershire. After some amateur and regional experience, he made his first appearance in London in 1762 as Will in The Orators at the Haymarket. With a remarkable bass voice, Bannister gained recognition as a singer at Ranelagh and other venues, as well as an actor, and received such acclaim that Garrick hired him for Drury Lane. He passed away on October 26, 1804.

His son John Bannister (1760-1836), born at Deptford on the 12th of May 1760, first studied to be a painter, but soon took to the stage. His first formal appearance was at the Haymarket in 1778 as Dick in The Apprentice. The same year at Drury Lane he played in James Miller's version of Voltaire's Mahomet the part of Zaphna, which he had studied under Garrick. The Palmira of the cast was Mrs Robinson ("Perdita"). Bannister was the best low comedian of his day. As manager of Drury Lane (1802) he was no less successful. He retired in 1815 and died on the 7th of November 1836. He never gave up his taste for painting, and Gainsborough, Morland and Rowlandson were among his friends.

His son John Bannister (1760-1836), born in Deptford on May 12, 1760, initially studied to become a painter but quickly turned to acting. His first official performance was at the Haymarket in 1778 as Dick in The Apprentice. That same year, he appeared at Drury Lane in James Miller's adaptation of Voltaire's Mahomet as Zaphna, a role he learned under Garrick. The Palmira in the cast was Mrs. Robinson ("Perdita"). Bannister was the best low comedian of his time. As the manager of Drury Lane (1802), he was equally successful. He retired in 1815 and passed away on November 7, 1836. He never lost his passion for painting, and Gainsborough, Morland, and Rowlandson were among his friends.

See Adolphus's Memoirs of John Bannister (2 vols., 1838).

See Adolphus's Memoirs of John Bannister (2 vols., 1838).

BANNOCK (adapted from the Gaelic, and apparently connected with Lat. panis, bread), the term used in Scotland and the north of England for a large, flattish, round sort of bun or cake, usually made of barley-meal, but also of wheat, and sometimes with currants.

BANNOCK (adapted from Gaelic and seemingly related to Lat. panis, meaning bread) is the term used in Scotland and northern England for a large, flat, round bun or cake, typically made from barley flour, but can also be made from wheat and sometimes includes currants.

BANNOCK, the name of a county in the south-east of the state of Idaho, U.S.A., and of a river in the same state, which runs northward in Oneida county into the Snake or Lewis river. It is taken from that of the Bannock Indians (see Banate), a corruption of the native Panaiti.

BANNOCK, the name of a county in the southeast part of Idaho, U.S.A., as well as a river in the same state that flows northward into the Snake or Lewis River in Oneida County. It comes from the name of the Bannock Indians (see Ban it), which is a variation of the native term Panaiti.

BANNOCKBURN, a town of Stirlingshire, Scotland. Pop. (1901) 2444. It is situated on the "burn" from which its name is derived, the Bannock (Gaelic, ban oc, "white, shining stream"), a right-hand affluent of the Forth, which was once a considerable river. The town lies 2¼ m. S.S.E. of Stirling by the Caledonian railway, and now has thriving manufactures of woollens (chiefly tweeds, carpets and tartans) and leather, though at the beginning of the 19th century it was only a village. The Bore Stone, in which Bruce planted his standard before the battle in which he defeated Edward II. in 1314 (see below), is preserved by an iron grating. A mile to the west is the Gillies' Hill, now finely wooded, over which the Scots' camp-followers appeared to complete the discomfiture of the English, to which event it owes its name. Bannockburn House was Prince Charles Edward's headquarters in January 1746 before the fight at Falkirk.

BANNOCKBURN, a town in Stirlingshire, Scotland. Pop. (1901) 2444. It is located on the "burn" that gives it its name, the Bannock (Gaelic, ban oc, "white, shining stream"), a right-hand tributary of the Forth, which was once a significant river. The town is 2¼ miles S.S.E. of Stirling by the Caledonian railway and currently has established industries focused on wool products (mainly tweeds, carpets, and tartans) and leather, although it was just a village at the start of the 19th century. The Bore Stone, where Bruce raised his standard before the battle in which he defeated Edward II in 1314 (see below), is preserved by an iron grate. A mile to the west is Gillies' Hill, now beautifully forested, where the Scots' camp-followers appeared to help rout the English, which is how it got its name. Bannockburn House was Prince Charles Edward's headquarters in January 1746 before the battle at Falkirk.

The famous battle of Bannockburn (24th June 1314) was fought for the relief of Stirling Castle, which was besieged by the Scottish forces under Robert Bruce. The English governor of Stirling had promised that, if he were not relieved by that date, he would surrender the castle, and Edward II. hastily collected an army in the northern and midland counties of England. Bruce made no attempt to defend the border, and selected his defensive position on the Bannock Burn, 2½ m. S. of Stirling. His front was covered by the marshy bed of the stream, his left flank by its northerly bend towards the Forth, his right by a group of woods, behind which, until the English army appeared, the Scots concealed themselves. Two corps were left in the open in observation, one at St Ninian's to watch the lower course of the burn, one to guard the point at which the Falkirk-Stirling road crosses the burn. On the 23rd the van of the army of Edward, which numbered about 60,000 against the 40,000 of the Scots, appeared to the south of the burn and at once despatched two bodies of men towards Stirling, the first by the direct road, the other over the lower Bannock Burn near its junction with the Forth. The former was met by the Scottish outpost on the road, and here occurred the famous single combat in which Robert Bruce, though not fully armed for battle, killed Sir Henry Bohun. The English corps which took the other route was met and after a severe struggle defeated by the second Scottish outpost near St Ninian's. The English army assembled for battle on the following day. Early on St John's day the Scottish army took up its assigned positions. Three corps of pikemen in solid masses formed the first line, which was kept out of sight behind the crest until the enemy advanced in earnest. A line of "pottes" (military pits) had been previously dug to give additional protection to the front, which extended for about one mile from wing to wing. The reserve under Bruce consisted of a corps of pikemen and a squadron of 500 chosen men-at-arms under Sir Robert Keith, the marischal of Scotland. The line of the defenders was unusually dense; Edward, in forming up on an equal front with greatly superior numbers, found his army almost hopelessly cramped. The attacking army was formed in an unwieldy mass of ten "battles," each consisting of horse and foot, and the whole formed in three lines each of three "battles," with the tenth "battle" as a reserve in rear. In this order the English moved down into the valley for a direct attack, the cavalry of each "battle" in first line, the foot in second. Ignoring the lesson of Falkirk (q.v.), the mounted men rode through the morass and up the slope, which was now crowned by the three great masses of the Scottish pikemen. The attack of the English failed to make any gap in the line of defence, many knights and men-at-arms were injured by falling into the pits, and the battle became a mêlée, the Scots, with better fortune than at Falkirk and Flodden, presenting always an impenetrable hedge of spears, the English, too stubborn to draw off, constantly trying in vain to break it down. So great was the press that the "battles" of the second line which followed the first were unable to reach the front and stood on the slope, powerless to take part in the battle on the crest. The advance of the third English line only made matters worse, and the sole attempt to deploy the archers was crushed with great slaughter by the charge of Keith's mounted men. Bruce threw his infantry reserve into the battle, the arrows of the English archers wounded the men-at-arms of their own side, and the remnants of the leading line were tired and disheartened when the final impetus to their rout was given by the historic charge of the "gillies," some thousands of Scottish camp-followers who suddenly emerged from the woods, blowing horns, waving such weapons as they possessed, and holding aloft [v.03 p.0355]improvised banners. Their cries of "slay, slay!" seemed to the wearied English to betoken the advance of a great reserve, and in a few minutes the whole English army broke and fled in disorder down the slope. Many perished in the burn, and the demoralized fugitives were hunted by the peasantry until they re-crossed the English border. One earl, forty-two barons and bannerets, two hundred knights, seven hundred esquires and probably 10,000 foot were killed in the battle and the pursuit. One earl, twenty-two barons and bannerets and sixty-eight knights fell into the hands of the victors, whose total loss of 4000 men included, it is said, only two knights.

The famous Battle of Bannockburn (June 24, 1314) was fought to relieve Stirling Castle, which was under siege by the Scottish forces led by Robert Bruce. The English governor of Stirling had promised that if he wasn't rescued by that date, he would surrender the castle, prompting Edward II to quickly gather an army from the northern and midland counties of England. Bruce decided not to defend the border and chose a defensive position along the Bannock Burn, 2.5 miles south of Stirling. The marshy area of the stream protected his front, the northward bend of the stream toward the Forth covered his left flank, and his right was shielded by a group of woods where the Scots hid until the English army appeared. Two detachments were left in the open for observation: one at St Ninian's to monitor the lower part of the burn, and one to guard the point where the Falkirk-Stirling road crosses the burn. On the 23rd, Edward's advance guard, numbering about 60,000 compared to the Scots' 40,000, appeared south of the burn and immediately sent two groups of men toward Stirling, one by the direct road and the other over the lower Bannock Burn near its junction with the Forth. The first group was encountered by the Scottish outpost on the road, leading to the famous duel where Robert Bruce, despite not being fully armed, killed Sir Henry Bohun. The English group that took the alternate route was confronted and defeated after a tough battle by the second Scottish outpost near St Ninian's. The English army gathered for battle the next day. Early on St. John's Day, the Scottish army took their positions. Three groups of pikemen in solid formations made up the first line, hidden behind the crest until the enemy approached. A line of military pits ("pottes") had been dug beforehand for extra protection, stretching about a mile from wing to wing. Bruce's reserve consisted of a unit of pikemen and a squadron of 500 chosen men-at-arms led by Sir Robert Keith, the marischal of Scotland. The defenders' line was unusually dense; Edward, attempting to form an equal front with significantly superior numbers, found his army almost trapped. The attacking force was organized in an unwieldy mass of ten "battles," each made up of cavalry and infantry, arranged in three lines of three battles, with the tenth battle as a reserve in the rear. In this formation, the English advanced down into the valley for a direct assault, with the cavalry in the front line and the foot soldiers behind. Ignoring the lessons from Falkirk (q.v.), the mounted men navigated through the marsh and up the slope, which was now defended by three large groups of Scottish pikemen. The English attack failed to breach the defenders' line; many knights and men-at-arms were injured from falling into the pits, turning the battle into a mêlée, with the Scots, having better luck than at Falkirk and Flodden, presenting an unbreakable wall of spears. The English, too stubborn to retreat, kept trying in vain to break through. The sheer number of soldiers meant that the "battles" in the second line, which followed the first, struggled to reach the front and remained stuck on the slope, unable to participate in the fight at the crest. The advance of the third English line only worsened the situation, and the attempt to deploy the archers was brutally crushed by Keith's cavalry charge. Bruce sent in his infantry reserve, and the arrows from the English archers ended up wounding their own men-at-arms. The exhausted remnants of the leading line were disheartened when the decisive blow to their rout came from the historic charge of the "gillies," thousands of Scottish camp-followers who suddenly emerged from the woods, blowing horns, waving whatever weapons they had, and holding up makeshift banners. Their shouts of "slay, slay!" made the tired English think a large reserve was advancing, and within minutes, the entire English army panicked and fled down the slope in chaos. Many drowned in the burn, and the demoralized deserters were pursued by local peasants until they crossed back into England. One earl, forty-two barons and bannerets, two hundred knights, seven hundred esquires, and probably 10,000 foot soldiers were killed in the battle and the subsequent chase. One earl, twenty-two barons and bannerets, and sixty-eight knights were taken prisoner by the victors, who reportedly only lost 4,000 men, including just two knights.

See J. E. Shearer, Fact and Fiction in the Story of Bannockburn (1909).

See J. E. Shearer, Fact and Fiction in the Story of Bannockburn (1909).

BANNS OF MARRIAGE (formerly bannes, from A.S. gebann, proclamation, Fr. ban, Med. Lat. bannum), the public legal notice of an impending marriage. The church in earliest days was forewarned of marriages (Tertullian, Ad Uxorem, De Pudicitia, c. 4). The first canonical enactment on the subject in the English church is that contained in the 11th canon of the synod of Westminster in London (A.D. 1200), which orders that "no marriage shall be contracted without banns thrice published in the church, unless by special authority of the bishop." It is, however, believed that the practice was in France as old as the 9th century, and certainly Odo, bishop of Paris, ordered it in 1176. Some have thought that the custom originated in the ancient rule that all "good knights and true," who elected to take part in the tournaments, should hang up their shields in the nearest church for some weeks before the opening of the lists, so that, if any "impediment" existed, they might be "warned off." By the Lateran Council of 1215 the publication of banns was made compulsory on all Christendom. In early times it was usual for the priest to betroth the pair formally in the name of the Blessed Trinity; and sometimes the banns were published at vespers, sometimes during mass. In the United Kingdom, under the canon law and by statute, banns are the normal preliminary to marriage; but a marriage may also be solemnized without the publication of banns, by obtaining a licence or a registrar's certificate. In America there is no statutory requirement; and the practice of banns (though general in the colonial period) is practically confined to the Roman Catholics.

BANNS OF MARRIAGE (formerly bannes, from A.S. gebann, proclamation, Fr. ban, Med. Lat. bannum), is the public legal notice of an upcoming marriage. In the early days, the church was notified about marriages (Tertullian, Ad Uxorem, De Pudicitia, c. 4). The first official rule on this in the English church is found in the 11th canon of the synod of Westminster in London (CE 1200), which states that "no marriage shall be contracted without banns being published three times in the church, unless authorized by the bishop." However, it is believed that the practice originated in France as early as the 9th century, and certainly, Odo, bishop of Paris, mandated it in 1176. Some think this tradition started from the ancient rule that all "good knights and true," who chose to participate in tournaments, should display their shields in the nearest church for several weeks before the contests, so that if any "impediment" existed, they could be "warned off." The Lateran Council of 1215 made the publication of banns mandatory throughout Christendom. In earlier times, it was common for the priest to formally betroth the couple in the name of the Blessed Trinity; sometimes the banns were announced at vespers and sometimes during mass. In the United Kingdom, under canon law and by statute, banns are the usual preliminary to marriage; however, a marriage can also occur without the publication of banns by obtaining a license or a registrar's certificate. In America, there is no legal requirement, and while the practice of banns was common in the colonial period, it is now mostly limited to Roman Catholics.

BANNU, a town and district of British India, in the Derajat division of the North-West Frontier Province. The town (also called Edwardesabad and Dhulipnagar) lies in the north-west corner of the district, in the valley of the Kurram river. Pop. (1901) 14,300. It forms the base for all punitive expeditions to the Tochi Valley and Waziri frontier.

BANNU, a town and district in British India, located in the Derajat division of the North-West Frontier Province. The town (also known as Edwardesabad and Dhulipnagar) is situated in the north-west corner of the district, in the valley of the Kurram river. Population (1901) was 14,300. It serves as the main base for all punitive missions to the Tochi Valley and Waziri frontier.

The district of Bannu, which only consists of the Bannu and Marwat tahsils since the constitution of the North-West Frontier Province in 1901, contains an area of 1680 sq. m. lying north of the Indus. The cis-Indus portions of Bannu and Dera Ismail Khan now comprises the new Punjab district of Mianwali. In addition to the Indus the other streams flowing through the district are the Kurram (which falls into the Indus) and its tributary the Gambila. The valley of Bannu proper, stretching to the foot of the frontier hills, forms an irregular oval, measuring 60 m. from north to south and about 40 m. from east to west. In 1901 the population was 231,485, of whom the great majority were Mahommedans. The principal tribes inhabiting the district are: (1) Waziri Pathans, recent immigrants from the hills, for the most part peaceable and good cultivators; (2) Marwats, a Pathan race, inhabiting the lower and more sandy portions of the Bannu valley; (3) Bannuchis, a mongrel Afghan tribe of bad physique and mean vices. The inhabitants of this district have always been very independent and stubbornly resisted the Afghan and Sikh predecessors of the British. After the annexation of the Punjab the valley was administered by Herbert Edwardes so thoroughly that it became a source of strength instead of weakness during the Mutiny. The inhabitants of the valley itself are now peaceful, but it is always subject to incursion from the Waziri tribes in the Tochi valley and the neighbouring hills. Salt is quarried on government account at Kalabagh and alum is largely obtained in the same neighbourhood. The chief export is wheat. A military road leads from Bannu town towards Dera Ismail Khan. The Indus, which is nowhere bridged within the district, is navigable for native boats throughout its course of 76 m. The chief frontier tribes on the border are the Waziris, Battannis and Dawaris. All these are described under their separate names.

The district of Bannu, made up of the Bannu and Marwat tahsils since the North-West Frontier Province was established in 1901, covers an area of 1680 sq. m. north of the Indus River. The areas of Bannu and Dera Ismail Khan on this side of the Indus now make up the new Punjab district of Mianwali. Besides the Indus, other streams that flow through the district include the Kurram (which drains into the Indus) and its tributary the Gambila. The main valley of Bannu, reaching up to the base of the frontier hills, forms an irregular oval shape, measuring 60 miles from north to south and about 40 miles from east to west. In 1901, the population was 231,485, with the vast majority being Muslims. The main tribes in the district are: (1) Waziri Pathans, who are recent immigrants from the hills and mostly peaceful, good farmers; (2) Marwats, a Pathan group living in the lower, sandier parts of the Bannu valley; (3) Bannuchis, a mixed Afghan tribe known for poor health and undesirable traits. The people in this district have traditionally been very independent and have stubbornly resisted the Afghan and Sikh predecessors of the British. After the Punjab was annexed, Herbert Edwardes managed the valley so effectively that it became a source of strength rather than weakness during the Mutiny. The residents of the valley are now peaceful, but the area is always at risk of incursions from the Waziri tribes in the Tochi valley and the surrounding hills. Salt is mined for government use at Kalabagh, and considerable amounts of alum are also sourced nearby. The main export is wheat. There is a military road from Bannu town to Dera Ismail Khan. The Indus, which has no bridges in the district, is navigable for local boats along its 76-mile stretch. The main frontier tribes on the border are the Waziris, Battannis, and Dawaris. Each of these tribes is discussed under their own name.

BANSDA, a native state in the south Gujarat division of Bombay, India, belonging to the Surat agency. Area, 215 sq. m. Pop. (1901) 40,382, showing a decrease of 2% in the decade; estimated revenue £19,508. Its chief is a rajput. About half the total area of the state is cultivable, but the bulk is forested.

BANSDA, a native state in the southern Gujarat region of Bombay, India, part of the Surat agency. Area: 215 sq. m. Population (1901): 40,382, which reflects a 2% decrease over the decade; estimated revenue: £19,508. Its leader is a Rajput. About half of the state's total area is suitable for farming, but most of it is covered in forests.

BANSHEE (Irish bean sidhe; Gaelic ban sith, "woman of the fairies"), a supernatural being in Irish and general Celtic folklore, whose mournful screaming, or "keening," at night is held to foretell the death of some member of the household visited. In Ireland legends of the banshee belong more particularly to certain families in whose records periodic visits from the spirit are chronicled. A like ghostly informer figures in Brittany folklore. The Irish banshee is held to be the distinction only of families of pure Milesian descent. The Welsh have the banshee under the name gwrach y Rhibyn (witch of Rhibyn). Sir Walter Scott mentions a belief in the banshee as existing in the highlands of Scotland (Demonology and Witchcraft, p. 351). A Welsh death-portent often confused with the gwrach y Rhibyn and banshee is the cyhyraeth, the groaning spirit.

BANSHEE (Irish bean sidhe; Gaelic ban sith, "woman of the fairies") is a supernatural being in Irish and Celtic folklore. Her mournful scream, or "keening," at night is believed to predict the death of someone in the household she visits. In Ireland, tales of the banshee are especially linked to certain families, with records of her occasional visits. A similar ghostly figure appears in Breton folklore. The Irish banshee is said to be unique to families of pure Milesian descent. In Welsh tradition, the banshee is referred to as gwrach y Rhibyn (witch of Rhibyn). Sir Walter Scott notes that a belief in the banshee existed in the Scottish Highlands (Demonology and Witchcraft, p. 351). Another Welsh death omen, often mixed up with the gwrach y Rhibyn and banshee, is the cyhyraeth, the groaning spirit.

See W. Wirt Sikes, British Goblins (1880).

See W. Wirt Sikes, *British Goblins* (1880).

BANSWARA (literally "the forest country"), a rajput feudatory state in Rajputana, India. It borders on Gujarat and is bounded on the N. by the native states of Dungarpur and Udaipur or Mewar; on the N.E. and E. by Partabgarh; on the S. by the dominions of Holkar and the state of Jabua and on the W. by the state of Rewa Kantha. Banswara state is about 45 m. in length from N. to S., and 33 m. in breadth from E. to W., and has an area of 1946 sq. m. The population in 1901 was 165,350. The Mahi is the only river in the state and great scarcity of water occurs in the dry season. The Banswara chief belongs to the family of Udaipur. During the vigour of the Delhi empire Banswara formed one of its dependencies; on its decline the state passed under the Mahrattas. Wearied out by their oppressions, its chief in 1812 petitioned for English protection, on the condition of his state becoming tributary on the expulsion of the Mahrattas. The treaty of 1818 gave effect to this arrangement, Britain guaranteeing the prince against external enemies and refractory chiefs; he, on his part, pledging himself to be guided by her representative in the administration of his state. The chief is assisted in the administration by a hamdar or minister. The estimated gross revenue is £17,000 and the tribute £2500. The custom of suttee, or widow-burning, has long been abolished in the state, but the people retain all their superstitions regarding witches and sorcery; and as late as 1870, a Bhil woman, about eighty years old, was swung to death at Kushalgarh on an accusation of witchcraft. The perpetrators of the crime were sentenced to five years' rigorous imprisonment, but they had the sympathy of the people on their side. The chief town is Banswara, situated about 8 m. W. of the Mahi river, surrounded by an old disused rampart and adorned by various Hindu temples, with the battlements of the chief's palace overlooking it. Its population in 1901 was 7038. The petty state of Kushalgarh is feudatory to Banswara.

BANSWARA (which means "the forest country"), is a Rajput feudatory state in Rajputana, India. It shares borders with Gujarat and is surrounded to the north by the native states of Dungarpur and Udaipur (also known as Mewar); to the northeast and east by Partabgarh; to the south by the territories of Holkar and the state of Jabua; and to the west by the state of Rewa Kantha. Banswara extends about 45 miles from north to south and 33 miles from east to west, covering an area of 1,946 square miles. The population in 1901 was 165,350. The Mahi River is the only river in the state, and there is a significant shortage of water during the dry season. The chief of Banswara is from the Udaipur royal family. During the height of the Delhi empire, Banswara was one of its dependencies; as the empire declined, the state came under Maratha control. Exhausted by their oppression, the chief petitioned for British protection in 1812, agreeing to become a tributary state after the Marathas were expelled. The treaty of 1818 formalized this arrangement, with Britain promising to protect the prince from external threats and rebellious chiefs; in return, the chief agreed to follow the guidance of the British representative in governing his state. The chief is supported in administration by a hamdar or minister. The estimated gross revenue is £17,000, and the tribute is £2,500. The practice of suttee, or widow-burning, has been abolished in the state for a long time, but the people still hold superstitions about witches and sorcery; as recently as 1870, an eighty-year-old Bhil woman was executed by swinging on accusations of witchcraft in Kushalgarh. The perpetrators faced five years of rigorous imprisonment, yet they had the public's sympathy. The main town is Banswara, located about 8 miles west of the Mahi River, surrounded by an old, unused fortification and featuring several Hindu temples, with the prince's palace overlooking the town. Its population in 1901 was 7,038. The small state of Kushalgarh is a vassal to Banswara.

BANTAM, the westernmost residency of the island of Java, Dutch East Indies, bounded W. by the Strait of Sunda, N. by the Java sea, E. by the residencies of Batavia and Preanger, and S. by the Indian Ocean. It also includes Princes Island and Dwars-in-den-weg ("right-in-the-way") Island in Sunda Strait, as well as several smaller islands along the coasts. Bantam had a population in 1897 of 709,339, including 302 Europeans, 1959 Chinese and 89 Arabs and other Asiatic foreigners. The natives are Sundanese, except in the northern or Serang division, where they are Javanese. The coast is low-lying and frequently marshy. The northern portion of the residency constitutes the most fertile portion, is generally flat with a hilly group in the middle, where the two inactive volcanoes, Karang and Pulosari, [v.03 p.0356]are found, while the north-western corner is occupied by the isolated Gede Mountain. The southern portion is covered by the Kendang (Malay for "range") Mountains extending into the Preanger. The rivers are only navigable at their mouths. Various geysers and cold and warm sulphur springs are found in the centre of the residency, and on a ridge of the Karang Mountain is the large crater-lake Dano, a great part of which was drained by the government in 1835 for rice cultivation. Pulse (kachang), rice and coffee are the principal products of cultivation; but in the days of government culture sugar, indigo and especially pepper were also largely grown. The former considerable fishing and coasting trade was ruined by the eruption of Krakatoa in 1883, a large stretch of coast line and the seaport towns of Charingin and Anjer being destroyed by the inundation. The prosperity of the residency was further affected by a cattle plague in 1879, followed by a fever epidemic which carried off 50,000 people, and except in the rice season there is a considerable emigration of natives. Bantam contains five native regencies or territorial divisions, namely, Serang, Anjer, Pandeglang, Charingin, Lebak. The principal towns are Serang, the capital of the residency, Chilegon, Pandeglang, Menes and Rangkas Betug. The chief town, Serang, is situated 2½ m. from Bantam Bay on the high road from Batavia. The port of Serang is Karangantu, on Bantam Bay, and close by is the old ruined town of Bantam, once the capital of the kingdom of Bantam, and before the foundation of Batavia the principal commercial port of the Dutch East India Company. The ruins include the remains of the former pepper warehouses, the old factory, called Fort Speelwijk, belonging to the company, the fortified palace of the former sultans and a well-preserved mosque thought to have been built by the third Mahommedan ruler of Bantam about 1562-1576, and containing the tombs of various princes of Bantam. Before the Dutch conquest Bantam was a powerful Mahommedan state, whose sovereign extended his conquests in the neighbouring islands of Borneo and Sumatra. In 1595 the Dutch expelled the Portuguese and formed their first settlement. A British factory was established in 1603 and continued to exist till the staff was expelled in 1682. In 1683 the Dutch reduced the sultan to vassalage, built the fort of Speelwijk and monopolized the port, which had previously been free to all comers; and for more than a century afterwards Bantam was one of the most important seats of commerce in the East Indies. In 1811 after Batavia had surrendered to the British, Bantam soon followed; but it was restored to the Dutch in 1814. Two years later, however, they removed their chief settlement to the more elevated station of Serang, or Ceram, 7 m. inland, and in 1817 the ruin of Bantam was hastened by a fire.

Bantam, the westernmost district of the island of Java, Dutch East Indies, is bordered to the west by the Strait of Sunda, to the north by the Java Sea, to the east by the regions of Batavia and Preanger, and to the south by the Indian Ocean. It also includes Princes Island and Dwars-in-den-weg ("right-in-the-way") Island in the Sunda Strait, along with several smaller islands along the coasts. In 1897, Bantam had a population of 709,339, made up of 302 Europeans, 1959 Chinese, and 89 Arabs and other Asian foreigners. The native residents are primarily Sundanese, except in the northern or Serang division, where they are Javanese. The coastline is low and often marshy. The northern part of the residency is the most fertile area, generally flat with a hilly region in the middle, where the two inactive volcanoes, Karang and Pulosari, are located; the north-western corner is home to the isolated Gede Mountain. The southern section is covered by the Kendang (Malay for "range") Mountains, which extend into the Preanger. The rivers are only navigable at their mouths. Various geysers and both cold and warm sulfur springs can be found in the center of the residency, and on a ridge of Karang Mountain sits the large crater lake Dano, a significant part of which was drained by the government in 1835 for rice farming. The main agricultural products are pulse (kachang), rice, and coffee; however, during the era of government cultivation, sugar, indigo, and especially pepper were also extensively produced. The once-thriving fishing and coastal trade was devastated by the eruption of Krakatoa in 1883, which destroyed a large stretch of coastline and the seaport towns of Charingin and Anjer due to flooding. The residency's prosperity was further impacted by a cattle plague in 1879, followed by a fever epidemic that claimed 50,000 lives, and aside from the rice harvest season, there is significant emigration of natives. Bantam consists of five native regencies or administrative divisions: Serang, Anjer, Pandeglang, Charingin, and Lebak. The main towns are Serang, the capital of the residency, Chilegon, Pandeglang, Menes, and Rangkas Betug. The chief town, Serang, is located 2½ miles from Bantam Bay

For "Bantam" fowls see Poultry.

For "Bantam" chickens see Poultry.

BANTIN, or Banting, the native name of the wild ox of Java, known to the Malays as sapi-utan, and in zoology as Bos (Bibos) sondaicus. The white patch on the rump distinguishes the bantin from its ally the gaur (q.v.). Bulls of the typical bantin of Java and Borneo are, when fully adult, completely black except for the white rump and legs, but the cows and young are rufous. In Burma the species is represented by the tsaine, or h'saine, in which the colour of the adult bulls is rufous fawn. Tame bantin are bred in Bali, near Java, and exported to Singapore. (See Bovidae.)

BANTIN, or Banting diet, is the local name for the wild ox of Java, known to the Malays as sapi-utan, and scientifically referred to as Bos (Bibos) sondaicus. The white patch on its rump sets the bantin apart from its relative, the gaur (q.v.). Adult male bantin from Java and Borneo are completely black except for their white rumps and legs, while females and young ones are reddish-brown. In Burma, the species is known as the tsaine or h'saine, with adult males exhibiting a reddish-fawn color. Tamed bantin are raised in Bali, near Java, and shipped to Singapore. (See Bovids.)

BANTRY, a seaport, market-town and seaside resort of Co. Cork, Ireland, in the west parliamentary division, 58 m. S.W. of Cork by the Cork, Bandon & South Coast railway, on the bay of the same name. Pop. (1901) 3109. It is an important centre both for sea fisheries and for sport with the rod. It is the terminus of the railway, and a coaching station on the famous "Prince of Wales" route (named after King Edward VII.) from Cork to Glengarriff and Killarney. The bay, with excellent anchorage, is a picturesque inlet some 22m. long by 3 to 6 broad, with 12 to 32 fathoms of water. It is one of the headquarter stations of the Channel Squadron, which uses the harbour at Castletown Bearhaven on the northern shore, behind Bear Island, near the mouth of the bay. It was the scene of attempts by the French to invade Ireland in 1689 and 1796, and troops of William of Orange were landed here in 1697. There are several islands, the principal of which are Bear Island and Whiddy, off the town. Ruins of the so-called "fish palaces" testify to the failure of the pilchard fishery in the 18th century.

BANTRY, a seaport, market town, and seaside resort in County Cork, Ireland, is located in the west parliamentary division, 58 miles southwest of Cork by the Cork, Bandon & South Coast railway, on the bay of the same name. Population (1901) was 3,109. It serves as an important center for both sea fisheries and sport fishing. It is the terminus of the railway and a coaching station on the well-known "Prince of Wales" route (named after King Edward VII) from Cork to Glengarriff and Killarney. The bay, with excellent anchorage, is a picturesque inlet approximately 22 miles long and 3 to 6 miles wide, with depths ranging from 12 to 32 fathoms. It is one of the headquarters of the Channel Squadron, which uses the harbor at Castletown Bearhaven on the northern shore, behind Bear Island, near the mouth of the bay. It was the site of French attempts to invade Ireland in 1689 and 1796, and troops of William of Orange landed here in 1697. Several islands are nearby, the main ones being Bear Island and Whiddy. The ruins of the so-called "fish palaces" are evidence of the failure of the pilchard fishery in the 18th century.

BANTU LANGUAGES. The greater part of Africa south of the equator possesses but one linguistic family so far as its native inhabitants are concerned. This clearly-marked division of human speech has been entitled the Bantu, a name invented by Dr W. H. I. Bleek, and it is, on the whole, the fittest general term with which to designate the most remarkable group of African languages.[1]

BANTU LANGUAGES. Most of Africa south of the equator belongs to just one language family when it comes to its native people. This distinct category of human language is known as Bantu, a term created by Dr. W. H. I. Bleek, and it is generally the best term to describe the most notable group of African languages.[1]

It must not be supposed for a moment that all the people who speak Bantu languages belong necessarily to a special and definite type of negro. On the contrary, though there is a certain physical resemblance among those tribes who speak clearly-marked Bantu dialects (the Babangi of the upper Congo, the people of the Great Lakes, the Ova-herero, the Ba-tonga, Zulu-Kaffirs, Awemba and some of the East Coast tribes), there is nevertheless a great diversity in outward appearance, shape of head and other physical characteristics, among the negroes who inhabit Bantu Africa. Some tribes speaking Bantu languages are dwarfs or dwarfish, and belong to the group of Forest Pygmies. Others betray relationship to the Hottentots; others again cannot be distinguished from the most exaggerated types of the black West African negro. Yet others again, especially on the north, are of Gala (Galla) or Nilotic origin. But the general deduction to be drawn from a study of the Bantu languages, as they exist at the present day, is that at some period not more than 3000 years ago a powerful tribe of negroes speaking the Bantu mother-language, allied physically to the negroes of the south-western Nile and southern Lake Chad basins (yet impregnated with the Caucasian Hamite), pushed themselves forcibly from the very heart of Africa (the region between the watersheds of the Shari, Congo and western Nile) into the southern half of the continent, which at that time was probably sparsely populated except in the north-west, east and south. The Congo basin and the south-western watershed of the Nile at the time of the Bantu invasion would have been occupied on the Atlantic seaboard by West Coast negroes, and in the centre by negroes of a low type and by Forest Pygmies; the eastern coasts of Victoria Nyanza and the East African coast region down to opposite Zanzibar probably had a population partly Nilotic-negro and partly Hottentot-Bushman. From Lakes Tanganyika and Nyasa south-westwards to the Cape of Good Hope the population was Forest-negro, Nilotic-negro, Hottentot and Bushman. Over nearly all this area the Bantu swept; and they assimilated or absorbed the vast majority of the preceding populations, of which, physically or linguistically, the only survivors are the scattered tribes of pygmies in the forests of south-west Nile land, Congo basin and Gabun, the central Sudanese of the N.E. Congo, a few patches of quasi-Hottentot, Hamitic and Nilotic peoples between Victoria Nyanza and the Zanzibar coast, and the Bushmen and Hottentots of south-west Africa. The first area of decided concentration on the part of the Bantu was very probably Uganda and the shores of Tanganyika. The main line of advance south-west trended rather to the east coast of Africa than to the west, but bifurcated at the south end of Lake Tanganyika, one great branch passing west between that lake and Nyasa, and the other southwards. Finally, when the Bantu had reached the [v.03 p.0357]south-west corner of Africa, their farther advance was checked by two causes: first, the concentration in a healthy, cattle-rearing part of Africa of the Hottentots (themselves only a superior type of Bushman, but able to offer a much sturdier resistance to the big black Bantu negroes than the crafty but feeble Bushmen), and secondly, the arrival on the scene of the Dutch and British, but for whose final intervention the whole of southern Africa would have been rapidly Bantuized, as far as the imposition of language was concerned.

It shouldn't be assumed for a second that everyone who speaks Bantu languages fits into a specific and defined type of black person. In fact, while there is some physical similarity among tribes that speak distinct Bantu dialects (like the Babangi of the upper Congo, the people of the Great Lakes, the Ova-herero, the Ba-tonga, Zulu-Kaffirs, Awemba, and some East Coast tribes), there's still a wide range of appearances, head shapes, and other physical traits among the black people living in Bantu Africa. Some tribes that speak Bantu languages are small or have dwarf-like characteristics and belong to the group of Forest Pygmies. Others show connections to the Hottentots, while some can't be distinguished from the more extreme types of West African black people. Additionally, others, especially in the north, are of Gala (Galla) or Nilotic origin. The main conclusion to draw from studying the Bantu languages as we see them today is that not more than 3,000 years ago, a powerful tribe of black people who spoke the Bantu mother language and were physically similar to those from the southwestern Nile and southern Lake Chad basins (yet mixed with Caucasian Hamite traits) forcefully migrated from the heart of Africa (the area between the watersheds of the Shari, Congo, and western Nile) to the southern half of the continent, which at that time was likely sparsely populated except in the northwest, east, and south. The Congo basin and the southwestern Nile watershed during the Bantu invasion would have been occupied on the Atlantic seaboard by West Coast black people, and in the center by lower-type black people and Forest Pygmies; the eastern shores of Victoria Nyanza and the East African coastal region down to where Zanzibar is now would have had a population that was partly Nilotic-black and partly Hottentot-Bushman. From Lakes Tanganyika and Nyasa heading southwest to the Cape of Good Hope, the population consisted of Forest-black, Nilotic-black, Hottentot, and Bushman. The Bantu spread over nearly all this area; they assimilated or absorbed most of the populations that were there before, of which the only groups left, either physically or linguistically, are the scattered tribes of pygmies in the forests of the southwestern Nile region, the Congo basin, and Gabun, the central Sudanese of the northeast Congo, a few patches of quasi-Hottentot, Hamitic, and Nilotic people between Victoria Nyanza and the Zanzibar coast, and the Bushmen and Hottentots of southwestern Africa. The first area where the Bantu concentrated was likely Uganda and the shores of Tanganyika. Their main route south-west leaned more towards the east coast of Africa than the west, but split at the south end of Lake Tanganyika, with one large group moving west between that lake and Nyasa, and the other going southwards. Eventually, when the Bantu reached the southwestern corner of Africa, their further advance was stopped by two factors: first, the presence of the Hottentots in a healthy, cattle-rearing region of Africa (who, while being a more advanced type of Bushman, could resist the powerful black Bantu better than the crafty but weaker Bushmen), and second, the arrival of the Dutch and British, without whose eventual intervention the whole of southern Africa would have quickly become Bantuized in terms of language.

The theory thus set forth of the origin and progress of the Bantu and the approximate date at which their great southern exodus commenced, is to some extent attributable to the present writer only, and has been traversed at different times by other writers on the same subject. In the nearly total absence of any historical records, the only means of building up Bantu history lies in linguistic research, in the study of existing dialects, of their relative degree of purity, of their connexion one with the other and of the most widely-spread roots common to the majority of the Bantu languages. The present writer, relying on linguistic evidence, fixed the approximate date at which the Bantu negroes left their primal home in the very heart of Africa at not much more than 2000 years ago; and the reason adduced was worth some consideration. It lay in the root common to a large proportion of the Bantu languages expressing the domestic fowl—kuku (nkuku, ngoko, nsusu, nguku, nku). Now the domestic fowl reached Africa first through Egypt, at the time of the Persian occupation—not before 500 to 400 B.C. It would take at that time at least a couple of hundred years before—from people to people and tribe to tribe up the Nile valley—the fowl, as a domestic bird, reached the equatorial regions of Africa. The Muscovy duck, introduced by the Portuguese from Brazil at the beginning of the 17th century, is spreading itself over Negro Africa at just about the same rate. Yet the Bantu people must have had the domestic fowl well established amongst themselves before they left their original home, because throughout Bantu Africa (with rare exceptions and those not among the purest Bantu tribes) the root expressing the domestic fowl recurs to the one vocable of kuku.[2] Curiously enough this root kuku resembles to a marked degree several of the Persian words for "fowl," and is no doubt remotely derived from the cry of the bird. Among those Negro races which do not speak Bantu languages, though they may be living in the closest proximity to the Bantu, the name for fowl is quite different.[3] The fowl was only introduced into Madagascar, as far as researches go, by the Arabs during the historical period, and is not known by any name similar to the root kuku. Moreover, even if the fowl had been (and there is no record of this fact) introduced from Madagascar on to the east coast of Africa, it would be indeed strange if it carried with it to Cameroon, to the White Nile and to Lake Ngami one and the same name. It may, however, be argued that such a thing is possible, that the introduction of the fowl south of the equator need not be in any way coincident with the Bantu invasion, as its name in North Central Africa may have followed it everywhere among the Bantu peoples. But all other cases of introduced plants or animals do not support this idea in the least. The Muscovy duck, for instance, is pretty well distributed throughout Bantu Africa, but it has no common widely-spread name. Even tobacco (though the root "taba" turns up unexpectedly in remote parts of Africa) assumes totally different designations in different Bantu tribes. The Bantu, moreover, remained faithful to a great number of roots like "fowl," which referred to animals, plants, implements and abstract concepts known to them in their original home. Thus there are the root-words for ox (-ñombe, -ombe, -nte), goat (-budi, -buzi, -buri), pig (-guluba), pigeon (-jiba), buffalo (nyati), dog (mbwa), hippopotamus (-bugu, gubu), elephant (-jobo, -joko), leopard (ngwi), house (-zo, -do, -yumba, -anda, -dago, -dabo), moon (-ezi), sun, sky, or God (-juba), water (-ndi, -ndiba, mandiba), lake or river (-anza),[4] drum (ngoma), name (-ina or jina), wizard (nganga), belly, bowel (-vu, -vumo), buttocks (-tako); adjectives like -bi (bad), -eru (white); the numerals, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10 and 100; verbs like fwa (to die), ta (to strike, kill), la (da) or lia (di, dia) (to eat). The root-words cited are not a hundredth part of the total number of root-words which are practically common to all the spoken dialects of Bantu Africa. Therefore the possession amongst its root-words of a common name for "fowl" seems to the present writer to show conclusively that (1) the original Bantu tribe must have possessed the domestic fowl before its dispersal through the southern half of Africa began, and that (2) as it is historically certain that the fowl as a domestic bird did not reach Egypt before the Persian conquest in 525 B.C., and probably would not have been transmitted to the heart of Africa for another couple of hundred years, the Bantu exodus (at any rate to the south of the equatorial region) may safely be placed at a date not much anterior to 2100 years ago.

The theory presented here about the origin and movement of the Bantu, along with the estimated start of their significant southern migration, partially comes from the author alone, and has been examined at different times by other authors discussing the same topic. With almost no historical records available, the only way to piece together Bantu history is through linguistic research, studying current dialects, their relative purity, their connections with each other, and the shared roots common to most Bantu languages. The author, using linguistic evidence, estimated that the Bantu people left their original home deep in Africa around 2000 years ago, and this reasoning deserves some thought. It stems from a common root in many Bantu languages that refers to the domestic chicken—kuku (nkuku, ngoko, nsusu, nguku, nku). The domestic chicken first came to Africa through Egypt during the Persian occupation—not before 500 to 400 BCE It likely took at least a couple of hundred years for the chicken, as a domesticated bird, to reach the equatorial regions of Africa via trade-up the Nile Valley. The Muscovy duck, brought by the Portuguese from Brazil in the early 17th century, is spreading throughout sub-Saharan Africa at a similar pace. However, the Bantu must have had the domestic chicken well established among them before departing their original homeland, because across Bantu Africa (with rare exceptions, which are not found among the purest Bantu tribes), the root for the domestic chicken consistently appears as kuku.[2] Interestingly, this root kuku closely resembles several Persian words for "bird," likely deriving from the sound of the bird itself. Among those African ethnic groups that do not speak Bantu languages, even if they live closely alongside the Bantu, the term for chicken is entirely different.[3] Chickens in Madagascar, based on available research, were introduced by Arabs during the historical period and don't share any name similar to the root kuku. Furthermore, even if chickens had somehow been introduced from Madagascar to the east coast of Africa (and there’s no record of this), it would be strange if they carried a single name all the way to Cameroon, the White Nile, and Lake Ngami. One could argue that this is possible, and that the introduction of chickens south of the equator doesn't need to coincide with the Bantu migration, as its name in North Central Africa might have followed the Bantu people everywhere. However, this is not supported by any other cases of introduced plants or animals. For example, the Muscovy duck is widely distributed across Bantu Africa but lacks a common name. Even tobacco (although the root "taba" appears unexpectedly in distant parts of Africa) has completely different names in various Bantu tribes. The Bantu have remained faithful to many root words like "fowl," referring to animals, plants, tools, and abstract concepts known to them in their homeland. Thus, root words for ox (-ñombe, -ombe, -nte), goat (-budi, -buzi, -buri), pig (-guluba), pigeon (-jiba), buffalo (nyati), dog (mbwa), hippopotamus (-bugu, gubu), elephant (-jobo, -joko), leopard (ngwi), house (-zo, -do, -yumba, -anda, -dago, -dabo), moon (-ezi), sun, sky, or God (-juba), water (-ndi, -ndiba, mandiba), lake or river (-anza),[4] drum (ngoma), name (-ina or jina), wizard (nganga), belly, bowel (-vu, -vumo), buttocks (-tako); adjectives like -bi (bad), -eru (white); numerals like 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, and 100; verbs such as fwa (to die), ta (to strike, kill), la (da) or lia (di, dia) (to eat). The root words listed here are just a fraction of the total number that are practically shared among all Bantu dialects. Therefore, having a common name for "chicken" among these root words strongly suggests that (1) the original Bantu tribe had domesticated chickens before they began their movements through the southern half of Africa, and (2) since it’s historically confirmed that chickens as domesticated animals didn't reach Egypt until after the Persian takeover in 525 B.C., and likely wouldn’t have been brought into the heart of Africa for a few more hundred years, the Bantu migration (at least to the south of the equatorial region) can be placed around 2100 years ago.

The creation of the Bantu type of language (pronominal-prefix) was certainly a much more ancient event than the exodus from the Bantu mother-land. Some form of speech like Fula, Kiama (Tern), or Kposo of northern Togoland, or one of the languages of the lower Niger or Benue, may have been taken up by ancient Libyan, Hamite or Nilotic conquerors and cast into the type which we now know as Bantu,—a division of sexless Negro speech, however, that shows no obvious traces of Hamitic (Caucasian) influence. We have no clue at present to the exact birth-place of the Bantu nor to the particular group of dialects or languages from which it sprang. Its origin and near relationships are as much a puzzle as is the case with the Aryan speech. Perhaps in grammatical construction (suffixes taking the place of prefixes) Fula shows some resemblance; and Fula possesses the concord in a form considerably like that of the Bantu, as well as offering affinities in the numerals 3 and 4, and in a few nominal, pronominal and verbal roots. The Timne and cognate languages of Sierra Leone and the north Guinea coast use pronominal prefixes and a system of concord, the employment of the latter being precisely similar to the same practice in the Bantu languages; but in word-roots (substantives, numerals, pronouns, verbs) there is absolutely no resemblance with this north Guinea group of prefix-using languages. In the numerals 2, 3, 4, and sometimes 5, and in a few verbal roots, there is a distinct affinity between Bantu and the languages of N. Togoland, the Benue river, lower Niger, Calabar and Gold Coast. The same thing may be said with less emphasis about the Madi and possibly the Nyam-Nyam (Makarka) group of languages in Central Africa though in none of these forms of speech is there any trace of the concord. Prefixes of a simple kind are used in the tongues of Ashanti, N. Togoland, lower Niger and eastern Niger delta, Cross River and Benue, to express differences between singular and plural, and also the quality of the noun; but they do not correspond to those of the Bantu type, though they sometimes fall into "classes." In the north-west of the Bantu field, in the region between Cameroon and the north-western basin of the Congo, the Cross river and the Benue, there is an area of great extent occupied by languages of a "semi-Bantu" character, such as Nki, Mbudikum, Akpa, Mbe, Bayoñ, Manyañ, Bafut and Banshō, and the Munshi, Jaráwa, Kororofa, Kamuku and Gbari of the central and western Benue basin. The resemblances to the Bantu in certain word-roots are of an obvious nature; and prefixes in a very simple form are generally used for singular and plural, but the rest of the concord is very doubtful. Here, however, we have the nearest relations of the Bantu, so far as [v.03 p.0358]etymology of word-roots is concerned. Further evidence of slight etymological and even grammatical relationships may be traced as far west as the lower Niger and northern and western Gold Coast languages (and, in some word-roots, the Mandingo group). The Fula language would offer some grammatical resemblance if its suffixes were turned into prefixes (a change which has actually taken place in the reverse direction in the English language between its former Teutonic and its modern Romanized conditions; cf. "offset" and "set-off," "upstanding" and "standing-up").

The development of the Bantu language (pronominal-prefix) definitely occurred much earlier than the migration from the original Bantu homeland. Some form of language like Fula, Kiama (Tern), or Kposo from northern Togoland, or one of the languages from the lower Niger or Benue, could have been adopted by ancient Libyan, Hamite, or Nilotic conquerors and transformed into what we now refer to as Bantu—a category of gender-neutral Negro speech that shows no clear signs of Hamitic (Caucasian) influence. Currently, we have no idea where exactly the Bantu originated or what specific group of dialects or languages it came from. Its origins and close connections remain as much of a mystery as those of the Aryan languages. Perhaps in grammatical structure (where suffixes replace prefixes), Fula bears some similarity; moreover, Fula has a concord system that is quite like that of Bantu, as well as some similarities in the numerals 3 and 4, along with a few nominal, pronominal, and verbal roots. The Timne and related languages from Sierra Leone and the northern Guinea coast use pronominal prefixes and a concord system, which is exactly like that of the Bantu languages; however, in terms of word roots (nouns, numerals, pronouns, verbs), there is absolutely no resemblance with this northern Guinea group of prefix-using languages. In the numerals 2, 3, 4, and sometimes 5, along with a few verbal roots, there is a clear connection between Bantu and the languages of northern Togoland, the Benue river, lower Niger, Calabar, and the Gold Coast. The same can be said, though with less emphasis, about the Madi and possibly the Nyam-Nyam (Makarka) languages in Central Africa, even though none of these languages show any trace of concord. Simple prefixes are used in the languages of Ashanti, northern Togoland, lower Niger, and the eastern Niger delta, Cross River, and Benue to indicate differences between singular and plural, as well as the quality of the noun; however, they do not align with the Bantu type, even though they sometimes fit into "classes." In the northwest of the Bantu region, between Cameroon and the northwestern basin of the Congo, as well as the Cross River and Benue, there is a large area covered by languages of a "semi-Bantu" nature, such as Nki, Mbudikum, Akpa, Mbe, Bayoñ, Manyañ, Bafut, and Banshō, and the Munshi, Jaráwa, Kororofa, Kamuku, and Gbari from the central and western Benue basin. The similarities to Bantu in certain word roots are quite obvious; and simple prefixes are generally employed for singular and plural, but the rest of the concord is somewhat uncertain. Here, however, we find the closest relatives of the Bantu in terms of etymology of word roots. Further evidence of slight etymological and even grammatical relationships can be traced as far west as the lower Niger and northern and western Gold Coast languages (and, in some word roots, the Mandingo group). The Fula language would offer some grammatical similarity if its suffixes were converted into prefixes (a change that has actually occurred in the opposite direction in the English language between its earlier Teutonic and modern Romanized states; cf. "offset" and "set-off," "upstanding" and "standing-up").

The legends and traditions of the Bantu peoples themselves invariably point to a northern origin, and a period, not wholly removed from their racial remembrance, when they were strangers in their present lands. Seemingly the Bantu, somewhat early in their migration down the east coast, took to the sea, and not merely occupied the islands of Pemba and Zanzibar, but travelled as far afield as the Comoro archipelago and even the west coast of Madagascar. Their invasion of Madagascar must have been fairly considerable in numbers, and they doubtless gave rise to the race of black people known traditionally to the Hovas as the Va-zimba.

The stories and traditions of the Bantu people consistently suggest a northern origin and a time, not completely distant from their racial memory, when they were newcomers in their current territories. It seems that the Bantu, early on in their migration down the east coast, ventured out to sea, not just settling on the islands of Pemba and Zanzibar, but also traveling as far as the Comoro Islands and even the west coast of Madagascar. Their arrival in Madagascar must have been significant in number, and they likely led to the emergence of the group of black people traditionally known to the Hovas as the Va-zimba.

The accompanying map will show pretty accurately the distribution of the Bantu-speaking Negroes at the present day.

The accompanying map will accurately show the current distribution of Bantu-speaking Black people.

Banto Africa.

It will be seen by a glance at this map that the areas in which are spoken Bantu languages of typical structure and archaic form are somewhat widely spread. Perhaps on the whole the most archaic dialects at the present day are those of Mount Elgon, Ruwenzori, Unyoro, Uganda, the north coast of Tanganyika and of the Bemba country to the south-west of Tanganyika; also those in the vicinity of Lake Bangweulu, and the Nkonde and Kese dialects of the north and north-east coasts of Lake Nyasa; also (markedly) the Subiya speech of the western Zambezi. Another language containing a good many original Bantu roots and typical features is the well-known Oci-herero of Damaraland (though this S.W. African group also presents marked peculiarities and some strange divergencies). Kimakonde, on the east coast of Africa, is a primitive Bantu tongue; so in its roots, but not in its prefixes, is the celebrated Ki-swahili of Zanzibar. Ci-bodzo of the Zambezi delta is also an archaic type of great interest. The Zulu-Kaffir language, though it exhibits marked changes and deviations in vocabulary and phonetics (both probably of recent date), preserves a few characteristics of the hypothetical mother-tongue: so much so that, until the languages of the Great Lakes came to be known, Zulu-Kaffir was regarded as the most archaic type of Bantu speech, a position from which it is now completely deposed. It is in some features unusually divergent from the typical Bantu.

It can be observed at a glance at this map that the regions where Bantu languages of typical structure and ancient form are spoken are quite widespread. Overall, the most ancient dialects today are those from Mount Elgon, Ruwenzori, Unyoro, Uganda, the northern coast of Tanganyika, and the Bemba area to the southwest of Tanganyika; also, those near Lake Bangweulu, and the Nkonde and Kese dialects on the northern and northeastern coasts of Lake Nyasa; notably, the Subiya speech from the western Zambezi. Another language with many original Bantu roots and typical features is the well-known Oci-herero from Damaraland (though this South West African group also shows distinct characteristics and some unusual divergences). Kimakonde, on the east coast of Africa, is a primitive Bantu language; likewise, the famous Ki-swahili from Zanzibar has primitive roots, but not in its prefixes. Ci-bodzo from the Zambezi delta is also an ancient type of great interest. The Zulu-Kaffir language, while showing significant changes and differences in vocabulary and phonetics (likely of recent origin), retains some characteristics of the hypothetical mother-tongue: so much so that, until the languages of the Great Lakes were recognized, Zulu-Kaffir was considered the most ancient type of Bantu speech, a status it has now completely lost. It is unusually different in some aspects from typical Bantu.

Classification.—With our present knowledge of the existing Bantu tongues and their affinities, it is possible to divide them approximately into the following numbered groups and subdivisions, commencing at the north-eastern extremity of the Bantu domain, where, on the whole, the languages approximate nearest to the hypothetical parent speech.

Classification.—With what we currently know about the existing Bantu languages and their connections, we can roughly divide them into the following numbered groups and subgroups, starting from the northeastern edge of the Bantu region, where, overall, the languages are closest to the theorized parent language.

(1) The Uganda-Unyoro group. This includes all the dialects between the Victoria Nile and Busoga on the east and north, the east coast of Lake Albert, the range of Ruwenzori and the Congo Forest on the west; on the south-east and south, the south coast of the Victoria Nyanza, and a line from near Emin Pasha Gulf to the Malagarazi river and the east coast of Tanganyika. On the south-west this district is bounded more or less by the Rusizi river down to Tanganyika. It includes the district of Busoga on the north-east and all the archipelagoes and inhabited islands of the Victoria Nyanza even as far east as Bukerebe, except those islands near the north-east coast. The dialects of Busoga, the Sese Islands and the west coast of Lake Victoria are closely related to the language of the kingdom of Uganda. Allied to, yet quite distinct from the Uganda subjection, is that which is usually classified as Unyoro.[5] This includes the dialects spoken by the Hima (Hamitic aristocracy of these equatorial lands—Uru-hima, Ru-hinda, &c.), Ru-songora, Ru-iro, Ru-toro, Ru-tusi, and all the kindred dialects of Karagwe, Busiba, Ruanda, Businja and Bukerebe. Ki-rundi, of the Burundi country at the north end of Tanganyika, and the other languages of eastern Tanganyika down to Ufipa are closely allied to the Unyoro sub-section of group 1, but perhaps adhere more closely to group 12. The third independent sub-section of this group is Lu-konjo, the language which is spoken on the southern flanks of the Ruwenzori Range and thence southwards to Lake Kivu and the eastern limits of the Congo Forest.

(1) The Uganda-Unyoro group. This includes all the dialects spoken between the Victoria Nile and Busoga to the east and north, the east coast of Lake Albert, the Ruwenzori mountain range, and the Congo Forest to the west; on the southeast and south, the southern coast of Victoria Nyanza, and a line from near Emin Pasha Gulf to the Malagarazi river and the east coast of Tanganyika. To the southwest, this area is more or less bordered by the Rusizi river down to Tanganyika. It includes the Busoga district in the northeast and all the archipelagos and inhabited islands of Victoria Nyanza, extending as far east as Bukerebe, except for those islands near the northeast coast. The dialects of Busoga, the Sese Islands, and the west coast of Lake Victoria are closely related to the language of the Kingdom of Uganda. Linked to, yet quite distinct from the Uganda dialect, is what is typically classified as Unyoro.[5] This encompasses the dialects spoken by the Hima (the Hamitic aristocracy of these equatorial lands—Uru-hima, Ru-hinda, etc.), Ru-songora, Ru-iro, Ru-toro, Ru-tusi, and all the related dialects from Karagwe, Busiba, Ruanda, Businja, and Bukerebe. Ki-rundi, from the Burundi region at the northern end of Tanganyika, and the other languages of eastern Tanganyika down to Ufipa are closely linked to the Unyoro sub-section of group 1, but may adhere more closely to group 12. The third independent sub-section of this group is Lu-konjo, the language spoken on the southern slopes of the Ruwenzori Range and then southwards to Lake Kivu and the eastern boundaries of the Congo Forest.

(2) The second group on the geographical list is Lihuku-Kuamba, the separate and somewhat peculiar Bantu dialects lingering in the lands to the south and south-west of Albert Nyanza (Mboga country). Lihuku (or Libvanuma) is a very isolated type of Bantu, quite apart from the Uganda-Unyoro groups, with which it shows no special affinity at all, though in close juxtaposition. Its alliance with Kuamba of western Ruwenzori is not very close. Other affinities are with the degraded Bantu dialects (Ki-bira, &c.) of the Ituri-Aruwimi forests. Kuamba is spoken on the west and north slopes of Ruwenzori. Both Kuamba and Lihuku show a marked relationship with the languages on the northern Congo and Aruwimi, less in grammar than in vocabulary.

(2) The second group on the geographical list is Lihuku-Kuamba, the distinct and somewhat unusual Bantu dialects found in the regions to the south and southwest of Albert Nyanza (Mboga country). Lihuku (or Libvanuma) is a very isolated type of Bantu, quite different from the Uganda-Unyoro groups, with which it has no particular connection, despite being in close proximity. Its relationship with Kuamba from western Ruwenzori is not very strong. Other connections are with the degraded Bantu dialects (Ki-bira, etc.) of the Ituri-Aruwimi forests. Kuamba is spoken on the western and northern slopes of Ruwenzori. Both Kuamba and Lihuku show a clear relationship with the languages of northern Congo and Aruwimi, primarily in vocabulary rather than grammar.

(3) The Kavirondo-Masaba section. This group, which includes the Lu-nyara, Luwanga, Lukonde and Igizii of the north-east and eastern shores of the Victoria Nyanza and the northern Kavirondo and Mount Elgon territories, is related to the Luganda section more than to any group of the Bantu tongues, but it is a very distinct division, in its prefixes the most archaic. It includes the languages spoken along the western flanks of Mount Elgon, those of Bantu Kavirondo, and of the eastern coast-lands of the Victoria Nyanza (Igizii).

(3) The Kavirondo-Masaba section. This group, which includes the Lu-nyara, Luwanga, Lukonde, and Igizii from the north-east and eastern shores of Lake Victoria, as well as the northern Kavirondo and Mount Elgon regions, is more closely related to the Luganda section than to any other group of Bantu languages, but it is a very distinct division, characterized by the most archaic prefixes. It encompasses the languages spoken along the western slopes of Mount Elgon, those of Bantu Kavirondo, and those of the eastern coastal areas of Lake Victoria (Igizii).

(4) The Kikuyu-Kamba group of British East Africa, east of the Rift valley. It includes, besides the special dialects of Kikuyu and Ukambani, all the scattered fragments of Bantu speech on Mount Kenya and the upper Tana river (Dhaicho).

(4) The Kikuyu-Kamba group in British East Africa, located east of the Rift Valley, includes not only the distinct dialects of Kikuyu and Ukambani but also all the scattered fragments of Bantu languages found on Mount Kenya and along the upper Tana River (Dhaicho).

(5) The Kilimanjaro (Chaga-Siha) group, embracing the rather peculiar dialects of Mount Kilimanjaro, Mount Meru and Ugweno.

(5) The Kilimanjaro (Chaga-Siha) group includes the unique dialects of Mount Kilimanjaro, Mount Meru, and Ugweno.

(6) The Pokomo-Nyika-Giriama-Taveita group represents the Bantu dialects of the coast province of British East Africa, between (and including) the Tana river on the north and the frontier of German East Africa on the south.

(6) The Pokomo-Nyika-Giriama-Taveita group represents the Bantu dialects of the coastal region of British East Africa, spanning from the Tana River to the border of German East Africa.

(7) Swahili, the language of Zanzibar and of the opposite coast, a form of speech now widely spread as a commercial language over Eastern and Central Africa. Swahili is a somewhat archaic Bantu dialect, indigenous probably to the East African coast south of the Ruvu (Pangani) river, which by intermixture with Arabic has become the lingua franca of eastern Africa between the White Nile and the Zambezi. It was almost certainly of mainland origin, distinct from the original local dialects of Zanzibar and Pemba, which may have belonged to group No. 6. There are colonies of Swahili-speaking people at Mombasa, Malindi, Lamu, and even as far north as the Shebeli river in Somaliland, also along the coast of German and Portuguese East Africa as far south as Angoche. In the coast-lands between the Ruvu or Pangani river on the north and the Kilwa settlements on the south, the local languages and dialects are more or less related to Swahili, though they are independent languages. Amongst these may be mentioned Bondei, Shambala (north of the Ruvu), Nguru, Zeguha, Ki-mrima and Ki-zaramo.

(7) Swahili, the language of Zanzibar and the opposite coast, is now widely used as a trade language across Eastern and Central Africa. Swahili is a somewhat old-fashioned Bantu dialect, likely originating from the East African coast south of the Ruvu (Pangani) River. Through mixing with Arabic, it has become the lingua franca of eastern Africa, stretching from the White Nile to the Zambezi. It probably started on the mainland, separate from the original local dialects of Zanzibar and Pemba, which may have been part of group No. 6. There are communities of Swahili speakers in Mombasa, Malindi, Lamu, and even as far north as the Shebeli River in Somaliland, extending along the coast of German and Portuguese East Africa down to Angoche. In the coastal areas between the Ruvu or Pangani River to the north and the Kilwa settlements to the south, the local languages and dialects are somewhat related to Swahili, although they are distinct languages. These include Bondei, Shambala (north of the Ruvu), Nguru, Zeguha, Ki-mrima, and Ki-zaramo.

(8) This group might be described as Kaguru-Sagala-Kami. It is one which occupies the inland territories of German East Africa, between the Swahili coast dialects on the east and the domain of the Nyamwezi (No. 11) on the west. On the north this group is bounded by the non-Bantu languages of the Masai, Mbugu and Taturu, and on the south by the Ruaha river. This group includes Kigogo and Irangi.

(8) This group can be referred to as Kaguru-Sagala-Kami. It occupies the inland areas of German East Africa, situated between the Swahili coast dialects in the east and the territory of the Nyamwezi (No. 11) in the west. To the north, this group is bordered by the non-Bantu languages of the Masai, Mbugu, and Taturu, and to the south, it is bounded by the Ruaha river. This group includes Kigogo and Irangi.

[v.03 p.0359]

[v.03 p.0359]

(9) The dialects of the Comoro Islands, between the East African coast and Madagascar, are styled Hi-nzua or Anzuani and Shi-ngazija. They are somewhat closely related to Swahili.

(9) The dialects of the Comoro Islands, located between the East African coast and Madagascar, are called Hi-nzua or Anzuani and Shi-ngazija. They are somewhat closely related to Swahili.

(10) The archaic Makonde or Mabiha of the lower Ruvuma, and the coast between Lindi and Ibo; this might conceivably be attached to the Swahili branch.

(10) The old Makonde or Mabiha from the lower Ruvuma, and the coast between Lindi and Ibo; this could possibly be linked to the Swahili branch.

(11) The Nyamwezi group includes all the dialects of the Nyamwezi country west of Ugogo as far north as the Victoria Nyanza (where the tongues melt into group No. 1), and bounded on the south by the Upper Ruaha river, and on the west by the eastern borderlands of Tanganyika. The Nyamwezi genus penetrates south-west to within a short distance of Lake Rukwa. A language of this group was at one time a good deal spoken in the southern part of the Belgian Congo, having been imported there by traders who made themselves chiefs.

(11) The Nyamwezi group includes all the dialects spoken in the Nyamwezi region, located west of Ugogo and extending north to Lake Victoria (where the languages blend into group No. 1). It is bounded to the south by the Upper Ruaha River and to the west by the eastern borderlands of Tanganyika. The Nyamwezi language reaches southwest to just a short distance from Lake Rukwa. At one point, a language from this group was widely spoken in the southern part of the Belgian Congo, having been brought there by traders who established themselves as chiefs.

(12) The Tanganyika languages (Ki-rega, Kabwari, Kiguha, &c). These dialects are chiefly spoken in the regions west-north-west, and perhaps north and east of Tanganyika, from the vicinity of Lake Albert Edward on the north and the Lukuga outlet of Tanganyika on the south. On the west they are bounded by the Congo Forest and the Manyema genus (No. 13). The languages on the east coast of Tanganyika (Ki-rundi, Kigeye, &c.) seem to be more nearly connected with those of group No. 1 (Uganda-Unyoro), yet perhaps they are more conveniently included here.

(12) The Tanganyika languages (Ki-rega, Kabwari, Kiguha, etc.). These dialects are mainly spoken in the areas to the west-northwest, and possibly to the north and east of Tanganyika, from the area around Lake Albert Edward in the north to the Lukuga outlet of Tanganyika in the south. To the west, they are bordered by the Congo Forest and the Manyema group (No. 13). The languages along the east coast of Tanganyika (Ki-rundi, Kigeye, etc.) appear to be more closely related to those in group No. 1 (Uganda-Unyoro), but they might be more appropriately categorized here.

(13) The Manyema (Baenya) group includes most of the corrupt Bantu dialects between the western watershed of Tanganyika and the main stream of the Luapula-Congo, extending also still farther north, and comprising (seemingly) the languages of the Aruwimi basin, such as Yalulema, Soko, Lokele, Kusu, Tu-rumbu, &c. On the west the Manyema group is bounded by the languages of the Lomami valley, which belong to groups Nos. 15 and 16; on the east the Manyema genus merges into the much purer Bantu dialects of groups Nos. 1 and 12. An examination of the Lihuku-Kuamba section (No. 2) shows these tongues to be connected with the Manyema group. The Kibira dialects of the north-eastern Congo Forest (Ituri district) may perhaps be placed in this section.[6]

(13) The Manyema (Baenya) group includes most of the corrupt Bantu dialects found between the western watershed of Tanganyika and the main stream of the Luapula-Congo, extending further north as well. It seems to include the languages of the Aruwimi basin, such as Yalulema, Soko, Lokele, Kusu, Tu-rumbu, and others. To the west, the Manyema group is bordered by the languages of the Lomami valley, which belong to groups Nos. 15 and 16. To the east, the Manyema dialects blend into the much purer Bantu dialects of groups Nos. 1 and 12. A look at the Lihuku-Kuamba section (No. 2) shows these languages are connected to the Manyema group. The Kibira dialects from the northeastern Congo Forest (Ituri district) might also fit into this section.[6]

(14) The Rua-Luba-Lunda-Marungu group (in which are included Kanyoka, Lulua and Ki-tabwa) occupies a good deal of the south central basin of the Congo, between the south-west coast-line of Tanganyika on the east and the main streams of the Kasai and Kwango on the west, between the Bakuba country on the north and the Zambezi watershed on the south.

(14) The Rua-Luba-Lunda-Marungu group (which includes Kanyoka, Lulua, and Ki-tabwa) is spread across much of the south-central basin of the Congo, situated between the southwestern coastline of Tanganyika to the east and the main rivers of the Kasai and Kwango to the west, bordered by the Bakuba territory to the north and the Zambezi watershed to the south.

(15) The Bakuba assemblage of Central Congo dialects (Songe, Shilange, Babuma, &c.) probably includes all the Bantu languages between the Lomami river on the east and the Kwa-Kasai and Upper Kwilu on the west. Its boundary on the north is perhaps the Sankuru river.

(15) The Bakuba group of Central Congo dialects (Songe, Shilange, Babuma, etc.) likely includes all the Bantu languages between the Lomami River to the east and the Kwa-Kasai and Upper Kwilu to the west. Its boundary to the north is possibly the Sankuru River.

(16) The Balolo group consists of all the languages of the Northern Congo bend (bounded on the north, east and west by the main stream of the Congo), and perhaps the corrupt dialects of the Northern Kasai, Kwilu and Kwango (Babuma, Bahuana, Bambala, Ba-yaka, Bakutu, &c.), where these are not nearer allied to Teke (No. 18) or to Bakuba.

(16) The Balolo group includes all the languages of the Northern Congo bend (which is bordered on the north, east, and west by the main stream of the Congo), and possibly the variant dialects of Northern Kasai, Kwilu, and Kwango (Babuma, Bahuana, Bambala, Ba-yaka, Bakutu, etc.), as long as these are not more closely related to Teke (No. 18) or to Bakuba.

(17) The Bangala-Bobangi-Liboko group comprises the commercial languages of the Upper Congo (Ngala, Bangi, Liboko, Poto, Ngombe, Yanzi, &c.) and all the known Congo dialects along and to the north and sometimes south of the main stream, from as far west as the junction of the Sanga to as far east as the Rubi and Lomami rivers, and those between the Congo and the Lower Ubangi river and up the Ubangi, as far north as the limits of the Bantu domain (about 3° 30′ N.). Allied to these perhaps are the scarcely-known forms of speech in the basin of the Sanga river, besides the "Ba-yanzi" dialects of Lakes Mantumba and Leopold II.

(17) The Bangala-Bobangi-Liboko group includes the commercial languages of the Upper Congo (Ngala, Bangi, Liboko, Poto, Ngombe, Yanzi, etc.) and all the known Congo dialects along and to the north, and sometimes south, of the main river, stretching from as far west as the confluence of the Sanga to as far east as the Rubi and Lomami rivers, and those between the Congo and the Lower Ubangi river and up the Ubangi, reaching as far north as the boundaries of the Bantu region (around 3° 30′ N.). Possibly related to these are the barely-known dialects in the Sanga river basin, along with the "Ba-yanzi" dialects of Lakes Mantumba and Leopold II.

(18) The Bateke (Batio) group. This may be taken roughly to include most of the Bantu dialects west of the Sanga river, northwest of the Lower Congo, south of the Upper Ogowe and Ngoko rivers and east of the Atlantic coast-lands.

(18) The Bateke (Batio) group. This can be understood to generally cover most of the Bantu dialects located west of the Sanga River, northwest of the Lower Congo, south of the Upper Ogowe and Ngoko rivers, and east of the Atlantic coastal areas.

(19) The Di-Kele and Benga dialects of Spanish Guinea and the Batanga coast of German Cameroon.

(19) The Di-Kele and Benga dialects of Spanish Guinea and the Batanga coast of German Cameroon.

(20) The Fañ or Pangwe forms of speech (so corrupt as to be only just recognizable as Bantu), which occupy the little-known interior of German Cameroon and French Gabun, down to the Ogowe, and as far east and north as the Sañga, Sanagá and Mbam rivers, and the immediate hinterland of the "Duala" Cameroon.

(20) The Fañ or Pangwe language forms (so altered that they are barely recognizable as Bantu), are found in the little-known interior of German Cameroon and French Gabon, extending down to the Ogowe River, and as far east and north as the Sañga, Sanagá, and Mbam rivers, along with the nearby region of "Duala" Cameroon.

(21) The Duala group, which on the other hand is of a much purer Bantu type, includes the languages spoken on the estuary and delta of the Cameroon river.

(21) The Duala group, which is of a much purer Bantu type, includes the languages spoken in the estuary and delta of the Cameroon river.

(22) The Isubu-Bakwiri group of the coast-lands north of Cameroon delta (Ambas Bay), and on the west slopes of Cameroon Mts.

(22) The Isubu-Bakwiri group from the coastal areas north of the Cameroon delta (Ambas Bay) and on the western slopes of the Cameroon Mountains.

(23) The Bantu dialects of Fernando Pô (Ediya, Bateti, Bani, &c.) distantly allied to Nos 24, 2 and 13.

(23) The Bantu dialects of Fernando Pô (Ediya, Bateti, Bani, etc.) are distantly related to Nos 24, 2, and 13.

(24) The Barondo-Bakundu group, which begins on the north at the Rio del Rey on the extremity of the Bantu field, near the estuary of the Cross river. This group may also include Barombi and Basā, Boñkeñ, Abo, Nkosi and other much-debased dialects, which are spoken on the eastern slopes of the Cameroon mountains and on the Cameroon river (Magombe), and thence to the Sanagá and Nyong rivers. Eastwards and north-eastwards of this group, the languages (such as Mbe, Bati, Nki, Mbudikum, Bafut, Bayoñ) may be described as "semi-Bantu," and evincing affinities with the forms of speech in the basin of the Central Benue river and also with the Fañ (No. 20).

(24) The Barondo-Bakundu group starts in the north at the Rio del Rey, at the edge of the Bantu area, near the estuary of the Cross River. This group may also include Barombi, Basā, Boñkeñ, Abo, Nkosi, and several other heavily altered dialects, which are spoken on the eastern slopes of the Cameroon mountains and along the Cameroon River (Magombe), extending to the Sanagá and Nyong rivers. To the east and northeast of this group, languages such as Mbe, Bati, Nki, Mbudikum, Bafut, and Bayoñ can be categorized as "semi-Bantu," showing similarities to the speech forms in the Central Benue River basin and also to the Fañ (No. 20).

(25) Turning southwards again from the north-westernmost limit of the Bantu, we meet with another group, the Mpongwe-Orungu and Aduma languages of French Gabun, and the tongues of the Lower Ogowe and Fernan Vaz promontory.

(25) Turning south again from the northwesternmost edge of the Bantu, we come across another group, the Mpongwe-Orungu and Aduma languages spoken in French Gabun, along with the languages of the Lower Ogowe and Fernan Vaz peninsula.

(26) These again shade on the south into the group of Kakongo dialects of the Loango and Sete Kama coast—such as Ba-kama, Ba-nyanga, Ma-yombe, Ba-vili, Ba-kamba and Ka-kongo (Kabinda).

(26) These also transition to the south into the group of Kakongo dialects from the Loango and Sete Kama coast—like Ba-kama, Ba-nyanga, Ma-yombe, Ba-vili, Ba-kamba, and Ka-kongo (Kabinda).

(27) The Kongo language group comprises the dialects along the lower course of the Congo from its mouth to Stanley Pool; also the territory of the old kingdom of Congo, lying to the south of that river (and north of the river Loje) from the coast eastwards to the watershed of the river Kwango (and the longitude, more or less, of Stanley Pool).

(27) The Kongo language group includes the dialects spoken along the lower part of the Congo River from its mouth to Stanley Pool; it also covers the area of the former kingdom of Congo, located south of that river (and north of the Loje River), stretching from the coast eastward to the watershed of the Kwango River (around the longitude of Stanley Pool).

(28) In the south the Kongo dialects melt imperceptibly into the closely-allied Angola language. This group may be styled in a general way Mbundu, and it includes the languages of Central Angola, such as Ki-mbundu, Mbamba, Ki-sama, Songo, U-mbangala. The boundary of this genus on the east is probably the Kwango river, beyond which the Lunda languages begin (No. 14). On the north, the river Loje to some extent serves as a frontier between the Kongo and Mbundu tongues. On the south the boundary of group No. 28 is approximately the 11th degree of south latitude.

(28) In the south, the Kongo dialects gradually blend into the closely related Angola language. This group can be generally referred to as Mbundu, which includes the languages of Central Angola, like Ki-mbundu, Mbamba, Ki-sama, Songo, and U-mbangala. The eastern boundary of this group is likely the Kwango River, beyond which the Lunda languages start (No. 14). To the north, the Loje River partially acts as a border between the Kongo and Mbundu languages. To the south, the boundary of group No. 28 is roughly along the 11th degree of south latitude.

(29) Very distinct from the Ki-mbundu speech (though with connecting forms) is the Oci-herero group, which includes the Herero language of Damaraland, the Umbundu of the Bihe highlands of south Angola, the Nano of the Benguela coast, and Si-ndonga, Ku-anyama and Oci-mbo of the southern regions of Portuguese Angola and the northern half of German South-West Africa. The languages of group No. 29 probably extend as far inland as the Kwito and Kubango rivers, in short, to the Zambezi watershed. On the south they are confronted with the Hottentot languages. The Haukoin or Hill Damaras—a Negro race of unexplained affinities and apparently speaking a Hottentot language—occupy an enclave in the area of Herero speech.

(29) Very different from the Ki-mbundu language (although there are some connections) is the Oci-herero group, which includes the Herero language of Damaraland, Umbundu from the Bihe highlands in southern Angola, Nano from the Benguela coast, and Si-ndonga, Ku-anyama, and Oci-mbo from the southern parts of Portuguese Angola and the northern half of German South-West Africa. The languages of group No. 29 likely reach as far inland as the Kwito and Kubango rivers, essentially extending to the Zambezi watershed. To the south, they border the Hottentot languages. The Haukoin or Hill Damaras—a Negro group with unclear affiliations who apparently speak a Hottentot language—reside in a region within the Herero language area.

(30) What may be called the Kiboko or Kibokwe (also Kioko) family of eastern Angola is a language-group which seems to offer affinities to the languages of the Upper Zambezi and to those of groups Nos. 28 and 29. It extends eastwards into the south-western portion of the Belgian Congo, and includes the Lubale of northern Barotseland and the sources of the river Zambezi, and possibly the Gangela of south-western Angola.

(30) The group known as the Kiboko or Kibokwe (also Kioko) family from eastern Angola is a language group that appears to be related to the languages of the Upper Zambezi and those of groups Nos. 28 and 29. It stretches eastward into the southwestern part of the Belgian Congo, including the Lubale of northern Barotseland and the sources of the Zambezi River, and possibly the Gangela from southwestern Angola.

(31) Southwards of group No. 30 is that of the Barotseland languages, of which the best-known form—almost the only one that is effectively illustrated—is Si-luyi. To Si-luyi may be related the Mabunda of Western Barotseland. The dialects of the Ambwela, A-mbwe, Ma-bukushu and A-kwamashi are probably closely related.

(31) To the south of group No. 30 is the Barotseland languages group, with the most well-known form—almost the only one that is effectively represented—being Si-luyi. The Mabunda language of Western Barotseland may be related to Si-luyi. The dialects of Ambwela, A-mbwe, Ma-bukushu, and A-kwamashi are likely closely related as well.

(32) Next is a group which might be styled the Subiya-Tonga-Ila, though some authorities think that Tonga and Ila deserve to be ranked as an independent group. There is, however, a close alliance in structure between the languages of each of the two subsections. The Tonga subgroup would include the dialects of the Ba-tetela, the Ba-ila (Mashukulumbwe) and of all Central Zambezia. Ci-subiya is the dominant language of South-West Zambezia, along a portion of the Zambezi river south of Barotseland, and in the lands lying between the Zambezi and the Chobe-Linyante river. Subiya is one of the most archaic of Bantu languages, more so than Tonga. Both are without any strong affinity to Oci-herero, and only evince a slight relationship with the Zulu group (No. 44).

(32) Next is a group that could be called the Subiya-Tonga-Ila, although some experts believe that Tonga and Ila should be considered independent groups. However, there is a strong structural connection between the languages in each of the two subsections. The Tonga subgroup includes the dialects of the Ba-tetela, the Ba-ila (Mashukulumbwe), and all of Central Zambezia. Ci-subiya is the main language of South-West Zambezia, along the Zambezi river south of Barotseland, and in the areas between the Zambezi and the Chobe-Linyante river. Subiya is one of the most ancient Bantu languages, even more so than Tonga. Both languages show no strong connection to Oci-herero, and only display a slight relationship with the Zulu group (No. 44).

(33) The Bisa or Wisa family includes the languages of Iramba, Bausi, Lukinga, in the southernmost projection of the Belgian Congo, and the dialects of Lubisa and Ilala between the Chambezi river and Lake Bangweulu on the north, and the Luangwa river on the east and south; perhaps also some of the languages along the course of the Upper Luapula river.

(33) The Bisa or Wisa family includes the languages of Iramba, Bausi, and Lukinga, located in the southernmost part of the Belgian Congo, as well as the dialects of Lubisa and Ilala between the Chambezi River and Lake Bangweulu to the north, and the Luangwa River to the east and south; it might also include some languages along the Upper Luapula River.

(34) With it is closely allied that of the Bemba or Emba dialects. This interesting genus occupies the ground between the south-west and south coasts of Tanganyika, Lake Mweru, and the Upper Chambezi river. The Ki-bemba domain may be taken to include the locally-modified Ki-lungu and Ki-mambwe of South and South-East Tanganyika.

(34) Closely related to this is the Bemba or Emba dialects. This fascinating group is situated between the southwest and south coasts of Tanganyika, Lake Mweru, and the Upper Chambzi River. The Ki-bemba area can be considered to encompass the locally-adapted Ki-lungu and Ki-mambwe of South and Southeast Tanganyika.

(35) What may be called the North Nyasa or Nkonde group comprises all the dialects of the north-west and north coasts of Lake Nyasa (such as Ici-wandia and Iki-nyikiusa) and Ishi-nyiχa of the Nyasa-Tanganyika plateau, and extends perhaps as far north west as the Fipa country (Iki-fipa), and the shores of Lake Rukwa (Ici-wungu) in the vicinity of the Nyamwezi domain (No. 11). Iki-fipa, however, has some affinities to the Tanganyika and western Victoria-Nyanza languages (groups Nos. 1 and 12).

(35) The group known as the North Nyasa or Nkonde includes all the dialects from the northwest and north coasts of Lake Nyasa (like Ici-wandia and Iki-nyikiusa) and Ishi-nyiχa from the Nyasa-Tanganyika plateau, and possibly stretches as far northwest as the Fipa region (Iki-fipa) and the shores of Lake Rukwa (Ici-wungu) near the Nyamwezi area (No. 11). However, Iki-fipa shows some similarities to the Tanganyika and western Victoria-Nyanza languages (groups Nos. 1 and 12).

[v.03 p.0360]

[v.03 p.0360]

(36) The western part of Nyasaland, south of group No. 35, is occupied by the Tumbuka section, which includes the languages of the Tumbuka, Henga and A-tonga peoples, and occupies the area between the western shores of Lake Nyasa and the Upper Luangwa river.

(36) The western part of Nyasaland, south of group No. 35, is home to the Tumbuka section, which includes the languages of the Tumbuka, Henga, and A-tonga peoples, and covers the area between the western shores of Lake Nyasa and the Upper Luangwa river.

(37) Eastwards of No. 35 (North Nyasa group) lies the Kinga speech of the lofty Livingstone mountains, which is sufficiently distinct from its neighbours to be classified as a separate group.

(37) To the east of No. 35 (North Nyasa group) is the Kinga speech of the towering Livingstone mountains, which is distinct enough from its neighbors to be considered a separate group.

(38) East of the Livingstone mountains and west of the Ruaha river, south also of the Unyamwezi domain, extends the Sango-Bena-Hehe-Sutu group.

(38) East of the Livingstone mountains and west of the Ruaha river, south of the Unyamwezi area, lies the Sango-Bena-Hehe-Sutu group.

(39) The extensive Yao genus of languages stretches from just behind the coast of the Lindi settlements in German East Africa (Ki-mwera) south-westward across the Ruvuma river to the north-east shores of Lake Nyasa (Ki-kese), and thence back to the valley of the Lujenda-Ruvuma (Cingindo), and southwards in various dialects of the Yao language to the south-east corner of Lake Nyasa and the region east of the Shire river, between Lake Nyasa, the Shire highlands and Mt. Mlanje. It is only since the middle of the 19th century that the Yao language has conquered territory to the south of Lake Nyasa. There still remain within its domain colonies of Nyanja-speaking people.

(39) The large Yao language group stretches from just behind the coast of the Lindi settlements in German East Africa (Ki-mwera) southwest across the Ruvuma River to the northeastern shores of Lake Nyasa (Ki-kese), and then back to the Lujenda-Ruvuma valley (Cingindo), continuing south in various dialects of the Yao language to the southeast corner of Lake Nyasa and the area east of the Shire River, between Lake Nyasa, the Shire highlands, and Mt. Mlanje. It has only been since the mid-19th century that the Yao language has expanded into areas south of Lake Nyasa. There are still clusters of Nyanja-speaking people within its territory.

(40) Eastwards of the Yao domain, and bounded on the north by the range of that language in the Ruvuma valley and by the separate group of Ki-makonde (No. 10), ranges the well-marked Makua genus. The languages thus described occupy the greater part of Portuguese East Africa away from the watershed of Lake Nyasa. The Makua language is probably divided into the following dialects:—I-medo, I-lomwe, I-tugulu and Anguru. There are other dialects unnamed in the Angoji coast-region, where, however, strong colonies of Swahili-speaking people are settled. The southern part of the Makua domain is occupied by the Ci-cuambo of the Quelimane district.

(40) To the east of the Yao area, and bordered to the north by the language range in the Ruvuma valley and the separate group of Ki-makonde (No. 10), lies the distinct Makua group. The languages mentioned cover most of Portuguese East Africa, away from the Lake Nyasa watershed. The Makua language is likely divided into the following dialects: I-medo, I-lomwe, I-tugulu, and Anguru. There are other unnamed dialects in the Angoji coastal area, which is home to strong communities of Swahili speakers. The southern part of the Makua region is occupied by the Ci-cuambo in the Quelimane district.

(41) Nyanja, perhaps the most extensive group of cognate languages in the Bantu field, is principally associated with the east and west shores of the southern half of Lake Nyasa. It also covers all the valley of the Shire, except portions of the Shire highlands, down to the junction of that stream with the Zambezi, and further, the lands on both banks of the Zambezi down to and including its delta. West of Lake Nyasa, the Nyanja domain extends in the Senga language to the river Luangwa and the Central Zambezi, also along both banks of the Central Zambezi. South of the Central Zambezi, Nyanja dialects are spoken as far west as the Victoria Falls. Thence they extend eastwards over Mashonaland to the sea-coast. With this family may also be associated the languages of the Portuguese coast-region south of the Zambezi as far as Inhambane. The principal dialects of the Nyanja language are the Cinyanja of Eastern Nyasaland, Ci-peta and Ci-maravi of South-West Nyasaland to as far as the watershed of the Luangwa river, the Ci-mañanja of the Shire highlands, Ci-mobo and Ci-machinjiri of the Shire valley, Ci-sena or Ci-nyungwe of Tete and Sena (Zambezi), and Ci-mazaro of the Lower Zambezi. The Luangwa regions, as already mentioned, are occupied by the distinct but closely-allied Senga language. South of the Central Zambezi there are Ci-nanzwa in the region near the Victoria Falls, Ci-nyai, Shi-kalaña, Ci-shuna (Ci-gomo), Ci-loze, and possibly Ci-shangwe (or Ci-hlangane) and Shi-lenge which link on to the Beira coast dialects. In the delta of the Zambezi is to be found Ci-podzo, a very distinct language, yet one which belongs to the Nyanja genus. Ci-shangane, Chopi or Shi-lenge and other dialects of the Beira and Inhambane coast-lands and of Manika have been much influenced by Zulu dialects (Tebele and Ronga).

(41) Nyanja, probably the largest group of related languages in the Bantu family, is mainly found on the east and west shores of the southern part of Lake Nyasa. It also includes the entire valley of the Shire, except for parts of the Shire highlands, down to where the river meets the Zambezi, and beyond that, the lands on both sides of the Zambezi all the way to its delta. To the west of Lake Nyasa, the Nyanja area stretches into the Senga language territory to the Luangwa River and the Central Zambezi, along both sides of the Central Zambezi as well. South of the Central Zambezi, Nyanja dialects are spoken as far west as the Victoria Falls. From there, they spread eastward over Mashonaland to the coast. This language family may also include the languages from the Portuguese coastal region south of the Zambezi, extending to Inhambane. The main dialects of the Nyanja language include Cinyanja from Eastern Nyasaland, Ci-peta and Ci-maravi from South-West Nyasaland to the watershed of the Luangwa River, Ci-mañanja from the Shire highlands, Ci-mobo and Ci-machinjiri from the Shire valley, Ci-sena or Ci-nyungwe from Tete and Sena (Zambezi), and Ci-mazaro from the Lower Zambezi. As previously mentioned, the Luangwa regions are home to the distinct but closely related Senga language. South of the Central Zambezi, you can find Ci-nanzwa near the Victoria Falls, along with Ci-nyai, Shi-kalaña, Ci-shuna (Ci-gomo), Ci-loze, and possibly Ci-shangwe (or Ci-hlangane) and Shi-lenge, which connect to the Beira coast dialects. In the Zambezi delta, there is Ci-podzo, a very distinct language that still belongs to the Nyanja family. Ci-shangane, Chopi or Shi-lenge, and other dialects from the Beira and Inhambane coastal areas and Manika have been heavily influenced by Zulu dialects (Tebele and Ronga).

(42) The well-marked Bechuana language group has very distinct features of its own. This includes all the Bantu dialects of the Bechuanaland protectorate west of the Guai river. Bechuana dialects (such as Ci-venda, Se-suto, Se-peli, Se-roloñ, Se-χlapi, &c.) cover a good deal of the north and west of the Transvaal, and extend over all the Orange River Colony and Bechuanaland. Se-suto is the language of Basutoland; Se-rolon, Se-mangwato, of the Eastern Kalahri; Se-kololo is the court language of Barotseland; Ci-venda and Se-pedi or Peli are the principal dialects of the Transvaal. Group No. 42, in fact, stretches between the Zambezi on the north and the Orange river on the south, and extends westward (except for Hottentot and Bushmen interruptions) to the domain of the Oci-herero.

(42) The well-defined Bechuana language group has very distinct features. This includes all the Bantu dialects from the Bechuanaland protectorate west of the Guai river. Bechuana dialects (like Ci-venda, Se-suto, Se-peli, Se-roloñ, Se-χlapi, etc.) cover a significant part of the north and west of the Transvaal, and extend across the entire Orange River Colony and Bechuanaland. Se-suto is the language of Basutoland; Se-rolon and Se-mangwato are found in the Eastern Kalahari; Se-kololo is the court language of Barotseland; Ci-venda and Se-pedi or Peli are the main dialects of the Transvaal. Group No. 42, in fact, stretches from the Zambezi in the north to the Orange river in the south, and extends westward (except for interruptions by Hottentot and Bushmen) to the territory of the Oci-herero.

(43) The Ronga (Tonga) languages of Portuguese South-East Africa (Gazaland, Lower Limpopo valley, and patches of the North Transvaal (Shi-gwamba), Delagoa Bay) are almost equally related to the Nyanja group (41) on the one hand, and to Zulu on the other, probably representing a mingling of the two influences, of which the latter predominates.

(43) The Ronga (Tonga) languages of Portuguese South-East Africa (Gazaland, Lower Limpopo valley, and areas of the North Transvaal (Shi-gwamba), Delagoa Bay) are closely related to the Nyanja group (41) on one side and to Zulu on the other, likely showing a mix of the two influences, with the latter being more dominant.

(44) Lastly comes the Zulu-Kaffir group, occupying parts of Rhodesia, the eastern portion of the Transvaal, Swaziland, Natal and the eastern half of Cape Colony. In vocabulary, and to some degree in phonetics, the Zulu language (divided at most into three dialects) is related in some phonetic features to No. 42, and of course to No. 43; otherwise it stands very much alone in its developments. It may have distant relations in groups Nos. 29 and 32. Dialects of Zulu (Tebele and Ki-ngoni or Ci-nongi) are spoken at the present day in South-West Rhodesia and in Western Nyasaland and on the plateaus north-east of Lake Nyasa, carried thither by the Zulu raiders of the early 19th century.

(44) Lastly comes the Zulu-Kaffir group, which occupies parts of Rhodesia, the eastern part of the Transvaal, Swaziland, Natal, and the eastern half of Cape Colony. In terms of vocabulary and to some extent phonetics, the Zulu language (which is divided into up to three dialects) shares some phonetic features with No. 42 and, of course, with No. 43; otherwise, it is quite unique in its development. It may have distant connections to groups Nos. 29 and 32. Dialects of Zulu (Tebele and Ki-ngoni or Ci-nongi) are still spoken today in South-West Rhodesia, Western Nyasaland, and on the plateaus northeast of Lake Nyasa, brought there by Zulu raiders in the early 19th century.

The foregoing is only an attempt to classify the known forms of Bantu speech and to give their approximate geographical limits. The writer is well aware that here and there exist small patches of languages spoken by two or three villages which, though emphatically Bantu, possess isolated characters making them not easily included within any of the above-mentioned groups; but too detailed a reference to these languages would be wearisome and perhaps puzzling. Broadly speaking, the domain of Bantu speech seems to be divided into four great sections:—(a) the languages of the Great Lakes and the East Coast down to and including the Zambezi basin; (b) the South-Central group (Bechuana-Zulu); (c) the languages of the South-West, from the southern part of the Belgian Congo to Damaraland and the Angola-Congo coast; and (d) the Western group, including all the Central and Northern Congo and Cameroon languages, and probably also group No. 2 of the Albert Nyanza and Semliki river.

The above is just an attempt to categorize the known forms of Bantu speech and outline their approximate geographical areas. The author understands that there are small pockets of languages spoken by a couple of villages that, while distinctly Bantu, have unique features that make them difficult to fit into any of the groups mentioned earlier; however, going into too much detail about these languages would be tedious and possibly confusing. Generally, the realm of Bantu speech seems to be divided into four main sections: (a) the languages of the Great Lakes and the East Coast, extending down to and including the Zambezi basin; (b) the South-Central group (Bechuana-Zulu); (c) the languages of the South-West, from the southern part of the Belgian Congo to Damaraland and the Angola-Congo coast; and (d) the Western group, which includes all the Central and Northern Congo and Cameroon languages, and probably also group No. 2 of the Albert Nyanza and Semliki river.

Common Features.—There is no mistaking a Bantu language, which perhaps is what renders the study of this group so interesting and encouraging. The homogeneity of this family is so striking, as compared with the inexplicable confusion of tongues which reigns in Africa north of the Bantu borderland, that the close relationships of these dialects have perhaps been a little exaggerated by earlier writers.

Common Features.—You can easily recognize a Bantu language, which is likely why studying this group is so fascinating and rewarding. The uniformity within this family is so noticeable, especially when compared to the confusing variety of languages found in Africa north of the Bantu border, that earlier writers may have slightly overstated the close connections among these dialects.

The phonology of the Western group (d) is akin to that of the Negro languages of Western and West-Central Africa. A small portion of (b) the South-Central group (Zulu) has picked up clicks, perhaps borrowed from the Hottentots and Bushmen. Otherwise, the three groups (a), (b) and (c) are closely related in phonology, and never, except here and there on the borders of the Western group, adopt the peculiar West African combinations of kp and gb, which are so characteristic of African speech between the Upper Nile and the Guinea coast.

The sound system of the Western group (d) is similar to that of the Negro languages from Western and West-Central Africa. A small part of the South-Central group (b) such as (Zulu) has adopted clicks, possibly borrowed from the Hottentots and Bushmen. Other than that, the three groups (a), (b), and (c) are closely related in their phonetics and only occasionally, at the edges of the Western group, use the unique West African combinations of kp and gb, which are typical of African languages between the Upper Nile and the Guinea coast.

The following propositions may be laid down to define the special or peculiar features of the Bantu languages:—

The following statements can be made to outline the unique characteristics of the Bantu languages:—

(1) They are agglutinative in their construction, the syntax being formed by adding prefixes principally and also suffixes to the root, but no infixes (that is to say, no mutable syllable incorporated into the middle of the root-word).[7] (2) The root excepting its terminal vowel is practically unchanging, though its first or penultimate vowel or consonant may be modified in pronunciation by the preceding prefix, or the last vowel in the same way by the succeeding suffix.

(1) They are built by sticking parts together, with the sentence structure mainly formed by adding prefixes and also suffixes to the root, but no infixes (meaning, no changing syllable added in the middle of the root word).[7] (2) The root, except for its final vowel, stays mostly the same, although its first or second-to-last vowel or consonant might change in pronunciation due to the preceding prefix, or the last vowel might change similarly because of the following suffix.

(3) The vowels of the Bantu languages are always of the Italian type, and no true Bantu language includes obscure sounds like ö and ü. Each word must end in a vowel (though in some modern dialects in Eastern Equatorial, West and South Africa the terminal vowel may be elided in rapid pronunciation, or be dropped, or absorbed in the terminal consonant, generally a nasal). No two consonants can come together without an intervening vowel, except in the case of a nasal, labial or sibilant.[8] No consonant is doubled. Apparent exceptions occur to this last rule where two nasals, two r's or two d's come together through the elision of a vowel or a labial.

(3) The vowels in Bantu languages are always like those in Italian, and no true Bantu language includes sounds like ö and ü. Every word has to end with a vowel (though in some modern dialects in Eastern Equatorial, West, and South Africa, the final vowel might get dropped or mixed into the last consonant, which is usually a nasal). No two consonants can be next to each other without a vowel in between, except for nasals, labials, or sibilants. No consonant is repeated. Apparent exceptions to this rule happen when two nasals, two r's, or two d's come together because of the loss of a vowel or a labial.

(4) Substantives are divided into classes or genders, indicated by the pronominal particle prefixed to the root. These prefixes are used either in a singular or in a plural sense. With the exception of the "abstract" prefix Bu (No. 14), no singular prefix can be used as a plural nor vice versa. There is a certain degree of correspondence between the singular and plural prefixes (thus No. 2 prefix serves almost invariably as a plural to No. 3; No. 8 corresponds as a plural to No. 7). The number of prefixes common to the whole group is perhaps sixteen. The pronominal particle or prefix of the noun is attached as a prefix to the roots of the adjectives, pronouns, prepositions and verbs of the sentence which are connected with the governing noun; and though in course of time these particles may differ in form from the prefix of the substantive, they were akin in origin. (This system is the "concord" of Dr Bleek.[9]) The pronominal particles, whether in nominative or accusative case, must always precede the nominal, pronominal, adjectival and verbal roots, though they often follow the auxiliary prefix-participles used in conjugating verbs,[10] and the roots of some prepositions.

(4) Nouns are divided into classes or genders, which are indicated by the pronoun-like prefixes attached to the root. These prefixes can be used in either a singular or a plural sense. Except for the "abstract" prefix Bu (No. 14), no singular prefix can be used as a plural or vice versa. There is a certain level of correspondence between the singular and plural prefixes (for example, the No. 2 prefix usually functions as a plural for No. 3; No. 8 serves as the plural for No. 7). The total number of prefixes common to the entire group is probably around sixteen. The pronoun-like prefix of the noun is added as a prefix to the roots of the adjectives, pronouns, prepositions, and verbs in the sentence that are related to the governing noun; and although over time these particles may take different forms from the noun prefix, they share a common origin. (This system is known as the "concord" of Dr. Bleek.[9]) The pronoun-like particles, whether in the nominative or accusative case, must always come before the nominal, pronominal, adjectival, and verbal roots, although they often follow the auxiliary prefix-participles used in verb conjugation,[10] and the roots of some prepositions.

[v.03 p.0361]

[v.03 p.0361]

(5) The root of the verb is the second person singular of the imperative.

(5) The root of the verb is the second person singular form of the imperative.

(6) No sexual gender is recognized in the pronouns and concord. Sexual gender may be indicated by a male "prefix" of varying form, often identical with a word meaning "father," while there is a feminine prefix, na or nya, connected with the root meaning "mother," or a suffix ka or kazi, indicating "wife," "female." The 1st and 2nd prefixes invariably indicate living beings and are Usually restricted to humanity.

(6) No sexual gender is recognized in the pronouns and concord. Sexual gender can be shown by a male "prefix" of different forms, often the same as a word meaning "father," while there is a feminine prefix, na or nya, related to the root meaning "mother," or a suffix ka or kazi, indicating "wife" or "female." The 1st and 2nd prefixes always refer to living beings and are usually limited to humans.

The sixteen original prefixes of the Bantu languages are given below in the most archaic forms to be found at the present day. The still older types of these prefixes met with in one or two languages, and deduced generally by the other forms of the particle used in the syntax, are given in brackets. It is possible that some of these prefixes resulted from the combination of a demonstrative pronoun and a prefix indicating quality or number.

The sixteen original prefixes of the Bantu languages are listed below in their most ancient forms found today. The even older types of these prefixes found in one or two languages, and generally inferred from the other forms of the particle used in syntax, are noted in brackets. It's possible that some of these prefixes came from combining a demonstrative pronoun with a prefix indicating quality or quantity.

Old Bantu Prefixes.

Traditional Bantu Prefixes.

 

          Singular.

Single.

 

          Plural.

Plurals.

Class

Class

  1. Umu- (Ñgu-mu-).[11]

Umu- (Ñgu-mu-).__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Class

Class

  2. Aba (Mba-ba or Ñga-ba).[11]

2. Aba (Mba-ba or Ñga-ba). __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

"

"

  3. Umu- (Ñgu-mu-).

3. Umu- (Ñgu-mu-).

"

"

  4. Imi- (Ñgi-mi-).

4. Imi- (Ñgi-mi-).

"

"

  5. Idi (Ndi-di-).

5. Id (Ndi-di-).

"

"

  6. Ama- (Ñga-ma-).

6. Ama- (Ñga-ma-).

"

"

  7. Iki- (Ñki-ki-).

7. Iki- (Ñki-ki-).

"

"

  8. Ibi- (Mbi-bi-).

8. Ibi- (Mbi-bi-).

"

"

  9. I-n- or I-ni- (?Ngi-ni-).

9. I-n- or I-ni- (?Ngi-ni-).

"

"

10. Iti-, Izi-, Iti-n-, Izi-n- (?Ñgi-ti-).

10. Iti-, Izi-, Iti-n-, Izi-n- (?Ñgi-ti-).

"

"

11. Ulu (Ndu-du-).

11. Ulu (Ndu-du-).

"

"

12. Utu (?Ntu-tu-); often diminutive in sense.

12. Utu (?Ntu-tu-); often small in meaning.

"

13. Aka (?Nka-ka-); usually diminutive, sometimes honorific.

13. Aka (?Nka-ka-); usually cute, sometimes respectful.

"

"

14. Ubu- (?Mbu-bu-); sometimes used in a plural sense;
          generally employed to indicate abstract nouns.

14. Ubu- (?Mbu-bu-); sometimes used in a plural sense;
          generally used to indicate abstract nouns.

"

"

15. Uku (?Ñku-ku-); identical with the preposition "to,"
          used as an infinitive with verbs, but also with
          certain nouns indicating primarily functions of the body.

15. Uku (?Ñku-ku-); the same as the preposition "to,"
used as an infinitive with verbs,
but also with
certain nouns primarily indicating body functions.

"

"

16. Apa (Mpa-pa-); locative; applied to nouns and other
          forms of speech to indicate place or position;
          identical with the adverb "here," as Ku- is with "there."

16. Apa (Mpa-pa-); locative; used with nouns and other
forms of speech to show place or position;
the same as the adverb "here," just like Ku- is with "there."

To these sixteen prefixes, the use of which is practically common to all members of the family, might perhaps be added No. 17, Fi- or Vi-, a prefix in the singular number, having a diminutive sense, which is found in some of the western and north-western Bantu tongues, chiefly in the northern half of the Congo basin and Cameroon. It is represented as far east (in the form of I-) as the Manyema language on the Upper Congo, near Tanganyika. This prefix cannot be traced to derivation from any others among the sixteen, certainly not to No. 8, as it is always used in the singular. Its corresponding plural prefix is No. 12 (Tu-). Prefix No. 18 is Ogu-, which has, as a plural prefix, No. 19, Aga-. These are both used in an augmentative sense, and their use seems to be confined to the Luganda and Masaba dialects, and perhaps some branches of the Unyoro language. These, like No. 17, are regular prefixes, since they are supplied with the concord (-gu- and -ga-). Lastly, there is the 20th prefix, Mu-, which is really a preposition meaning "in" or "into," often combined in meaning with another particle, -ni, used always as a suffix.[12] The 20th prefix, Mu-, however, does not seem to have a complete concord, as it is only used adjectivally or as a preposition and has no pronominal accusative.

To these sixteen prefixes, which are almost universally used by all members of the family, we might also consider adding No. 17, Fi- or Vi-, a singular prefix that conveys a diminutive sense. This prefix is found in some of the western and north-western Bantu languages, mainly in the northern part of the Congo basin and Cameroon. It appears as far east (in the form of I-) as the Manyema language in the Upper Congo, near Tanganyika. This prefix cannot be traced back to any of the sixteen, definitely not to No. 8, since it is always used in the singular. Its corresponding plural prefix is No. 12 (Tu-). Prefix No. 18 is Ogu-, which has a plural prefix, No. 19, Aga-. Both of these are used in an augmentative sense and seem to be limited to the Luganda and Masaba dialects, and possibly some branches of the Unyoro language. Like No. 17, they are regular prefixes, as they are paired with concord (-gu- and -ga-). Finally, there is the 20th prefix, Mu-, which is essentially a preposition meaning "in" or "into," often combined in meaning with another particle, -ni, which is used only as a suffix.[12] The 20th prefix, Mu-, however, does not seem to have a complete concord because it is only used adjectivally or as a preposition and lacks a pronominal accusative.

The concord may be explained thus:—Let us for a moment reconstruct the original Bantu mother-tongue (as attempts are sometimes made to deduce the ancient Aryan from a comparison of the most archaic of its daughters) and propound sentences to illustrate the repetition of pronominal particles known as the concord.

The concord can be explained like this:—Let's briefly recreate the original Bantu language (just like people sometimes try to trace back the ancient Aryan language by comparing its oldest descendants) and present sentences to demonstrate the repetition of pronominal particles known as the concord.

Old Bantu.

Old Bantu.

 

Babo

Babo

mbaba-ntu[13]

mbaba-person__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

babi

baby

ba-bo-ta

ba-bo-ta

tu-ba-oga.

tu-ba-oga.

 

 

They

They

these-they person

these-they person

they bad

they're bad

they who kill

those who kill

we fear them.

we're afraid of them.

 

Rendered into the modern dialect of Luganda this would be:—

Rendered into the modern dialect of Luganda this would be:—

 

Bo

Bo

aba-ntu

people

ba-bi

baby

babota

babota

tu-ba-tia.

tu-ba-tia.

 

 

They

They

these-they person

these-they person

they bad

they're bad

they who kill

those who kill

we them fear.

we fear them.

 

(They are bad people who kill; we fear them.)

(They are dangerous people who kill; we are afraid of them.)

 

Old Bantu.

Traditional Bantu.

 

Ñgu-mu-ti

Ñgu-mu-ti

ñguno

ñguno

ñgu-gwa

ñgu-gwa

ku-ñgu-mbona.

ku-ñgu-mbona.

 

 

This tree

This tree

this here

this here

this falls;

this drops;

thou this seest?

do you see this?

 

Rendered into Kiguha of North-West Tanganyika, this would be:—

Rendered into Kiguha of North-West Tanganyika, this would be:—

 

Umuti

Umuti

guno

gu no

gugwa

gu gwa

ugumona?

ugumona?

 

 

It tree

It’s a tree

this here

this here

it falls;

it drops;

thou it seest?

do you see it?

 

(The tree falls; dost thou see it?)

(The tree falls; do you see it?)

The prefixes and their corresponding particles have varied greatly in form from the original syllables, as the various Bantu dialects became more and more corrupt. Assuming these prefixes to have consisted once of two distinct particles, such as, for example, Nos. 1 and 3, Ñgu-mu-, or the 6th plural prefix Nga-ma-, the first syllable seems to have been of the nature of a demonstrative pronoun, and the second more like a numeral or an adjective. Mu- probably meant "one," and Ma- a collective numeral of indefinite number, applied to liquids (especially water), a tribe of men, a herd of beasts—anything in the mass.[14] In the corresponding particles of the concord as applied to adjectives, verbs and pronouns, sometimes the first syllable, Ñgu or Ñga was taken for the concord and sometimes the second mu or ma. This would account for the seemingly inexplicable lack of correspondence between the modern prefix and its accompanying particle, which so much puzzled Bleek and other early writers on the Bantu languages. In many of these tongues, for example, the particle which corresponds at the present day to the plural prefix Ma- is not always Ma, but more often Ga-, Ya-, A-; while to Mu- (Classes 1 and 3) the corresponding particle besides -mu- is gu-, gw-, u-, wu-, yu-, ñ-, &c.

The prefixes and their related particles have changed significantly from the original syllables as the various Bantu dialects became more corrupted. Assuming these prefixes once consisted of two distinct particles, like in examples Nos. 1 and 3, Ñgu-mu- or the 6th plural prefix Nga-ma-, the first syllable appears to function like a demonstrative pronoun, while the second resembles a numeral or an adjective. Mu- probably meant "one," and Ma- indicated a collective numeral of an indefinite number, used for liquids (especially water), a group of people, a herd of animals—anything in mass.[14] In the corresponding particles of the concord when applied to adjectives, verbs, and pronouns, sometimes the first syllable, Ñgu or Ñga, was assumed to represent the concord, and other times the second mu or ma. This explains the puzzling lack of connection between the modern prefix and its accompanying particle, which bewildered Bleek and other early scholars of the Bantu languages. In many of these languages, for instance, the particle that corresponds today to the plural prefix Ma- is not always Ma, but more often Ga-, Ya-, A-; while for Mu- (Classes 1 and 3), the corresponding particle in addition to -mu- includes gu-, gw-, u-, wu-, yu-, ñ-, &c.

The second prefix. Ba- or Aba-, is, in the most archaic Bantu speech (the languages of Mt. Elgon), Baba- in its definite form (Ñgaba sometimes in Zulu-Kaffir). The concord is -ba- in all the less corrupt Bantu tongues, but this plural prefix degenerates into Va-, Wa-, Ma-, and A-. The concord of the 4th prefix, Mi-, is gi-, -i-, -ji-, and sometimes -mi-. The commonest form of the 5th prefix at the present day is Li- (the older and more correct is Di-), and its concord is the same; this 5th prefix is often dropped (the concord remaining) or becomes Ri-, I-, Ji-, and Ni-. The 7th prefix, Ki-, in many non-related dialects pursues a parallel course through Ci- into Si- (=Shi) and Si- and its concord resembles it. The 8th prefix is still more variable. In its oldest form this is Ibi- or Mbibi-. It is invariably the plural of the 7th. It becomes in different forms of Bantu speech Vi-, Pi-, Fi-, Fy-, Pši-, Ši-, I-, By-, Bzi-, Psi-, Zwi-, Zi- and Ri-, with a concord that is similar. The 10th prefix, which was originally Ti- or Tin-, or Zi- or Zin-, becomes Jin-, Rin-, Din-, Lin-, θin-, θon-. &c. The n in this prefix is really the singular prefix No. 9, which is sometimes retained in the plural, and sometimes omitted. In the case of the 10th prefix, the concord or corresponding pronoun persists long after the prefix has fallen out of use as a definite article. Thus, though it is absent as a plural prefix for nouns in the Swahili of Zanzibar, it reappears in the concord. For instance:—Ñombe hizi zangu—Cows these mine (These cows are mine), although Ñombe has ceased to be ziñombe in the plural, the Zi- particle reappears in hizi and zangu. In fact, the persistence of this concord, which exists in almost every known Bantu language in connexion with the 10th prefix, shows that prefix to have been in universal use at one time. The 11th prefix -Lu- seems to be descended from an older form, Ndu-. Its commonest type is Lu-, but it sometimes loses the L and becomes U-, and in the more archaic dialects is usually pronounced Du- or Ru-. It is also Nu- in one or two languages. The 12th prefix (Tu-), always used in a diminutive sense, disappears in many of these languages. Where met with it is generally Tu- or To-, but sometimes the initial T becomes R (Ru-, Ro-) or L (Lu-, Lo-) or even Y (Yo-), the concord following the fortunes of the prefix. The 13th prefix (Ka-) is sometimes confused with the 7th (Ki) and merged into it and vice versa. Ka- very often takes the 8th prefix as a plural, more commonly the 12th, sometimes the 14th. This prefix (Ka-) entirely disappears in the north-western section of the Bantu languages. Bleek thought that it persisted in the attenuated form of E- so characteristic of the Cameroon and northern Congo languages, but later investigations show this E- to be a reduction of Ki- (Ke-) the 7th prefix. The 14th prefix Bu- is very persistent, but frequently loses its initial letter B, which is either softened into V or W, or disappears altogether, the prefix becoming U- or O- or Ow-. Sometimes this prefix becomes palatized into By- or even Tš- (C-). The concord follows suit. The 15th prefix, Ku-, occasionally loses its initial K or softens into Hu or χυ or strengthens into Gu. Its concord under these circumstances sometimes remains in the form of Ku-. The 16th, Pa-, prefix is one of the most puzzling in its distribution and its phonetic changes. A very large number of the Bantu languages in the north, east and west have a dislike to the consonant P, which they frequently transmute into an aspirate (H), or soften into V, W, or F, or simply drop out. There is too much evidence in favour of this prefix having been originally Pa- or Mpa-pa to enable us to give it any other form in reconstructing the Bantu mother-tongue. Yet in the most archaic Bantu dialects to the north of the Victoria Nyanza it is nowhere found in the form of Pa-. It is either Ha- (and Ha- changes eastward into Sa-!) or Wa-.[15] But for its existence in this shape in the language of Uganda one might almost be led to think that the 16th locative prefix began as Ha-, and by some process without a parallel changed in the east and south to the form of Pa-. There are, however, a good many place names in the northern part of the Uganda protectorate, in the region now occupied by Nilotic negroes, which begin with Pa-. These place names would seem to be of ancient Bantu origin in a [v.03 p.0362]land from which the Bantu negroes were subsequently driven by Nilotic invaders from the north. They may be relics therefore of a time before the Pa- prefix of those regions had changed to the modern form of Ha-. In S.W. and N.W. Cameroon the initial p of the 16th prefix reappears in two or three dialects; but elsewhere in North-West Bantu Africa and in the whole basin of the Congo, except the extreme south and south-east, the form Pa- is never met with; it is Va-, Wa-, Ha-, Fa-, or A-. In the Secuana group of dialects it is Fa- or Ha-; in the Luyi language of Barotseland it assumes the very rare form of Ba-, while the first prefix is weakened to A-.

The second prefix, Ba- or Aba-, is seen in the oldest Bantu languages (the languages of Mt. Elgon) as Baba- in its definite form (Ñgaba sometimes in Zulu-Kaffir). The concord is -ba- in all the less corrupted Bantu languages, but this plural prefix changes into Va-, Wa-, Ma-, and A-. The concord of the 4th prefix, Mi-, is gi-, -i-, -ji-, and sometimes -mi-. The most common form of the 5th prefix today is Li- (the older and more correct form is Di-), and its concord is the same; this 5th prefix is often dropped (with the concord remaining) or becomes Ri-, I-, Ji-, and Ni-. The 7th prefix, Ki-, in many unrelated dialects follows a similar path through Ci- into Si- (=Shi) and Si- and its concord resembles it. The 8th prefix is even more variable. In its oldest form, this is Ibi- or Mbibi-. It is always the plural of the 7th. In different forms of Bantu speech, it becomes Vi-, Pi-, Fi-, Fy-, Pši-, Ši-, I-, By-, Bzi-, Psi-, Zwi-, Zi-, and Ri-, with a concord that is similar. The 10th prefix, originally Ti- or Tin-, or Zi- or Zin-, becomes Jin-, Rin-, Din-, Lin-, θin-, θon-. The n in this prefix is actually the singular prefix No. 9, which is sometimes kept in the plural and sometimes left out. In the case of the 10th prefix, the concord or corresponding pronoun continues long after the prefix has fallen out of use as a definite article. So, although it's absent as a plural prefix for nouns in the Swahili of Zanzibar, it reappears in the concord. For example:—Ñombe hizi zangu—Cows these mine (These cows are mine), even though Ñombe has stopped being ziñombe in the plural, the Zi- particle shows up again in hizi and zangu. In fact, the persistence of this concord, which can be found in almost every known Bantu language in connection with the 10th prefix, indicates that this prefix was universally used at one time. The 11th prefix -Lu- seems to come from an older form, Ndu-. Its most common type is Lu-, but it sometimes drops the L and becomes U-, and in the more ancient dialects is usually pronounced Du- or Ru-. It's also Nu- in one or two languages. The 12th prefix (Tu-), which is always used in a diminutive sense, disappears in many of these languages. When it does appear, it is generally Tu- or To-, but sometimes the initial T changes to R (Ru-, Ro-) or L (Lu-, Lo-) or even Y (Yo-), with the concord following the prefix's changes. The 13th prefix (Ka-) is sometimes mixed up with the 7th (Ki-) and merged into it and vice versa. Ka- often takes the 8th prefix as a plural, more commonly the 12th, and sometimes the 14th. This prefix (Ka-) completely disappears in the northwestern section of the Bantu languages. Bleek believed it remained in the reduced form of E- so typical of the Cameroon and northern Congo languages, but later studies show this E- to be a short form of Ki- (Ke-) the 7th prefix. The 14th prefix Bu- is very persistent, but often loses its initial letter B, which either softens into V or W, or disappears entirely, resulting in the prefix becoming U- or O- or Ow-. Sometimes this prefix becomes palatalized into By- or even Tš- (C-). The concord follows these changes. The 15th prefix, Ku-, sometimes loses its initial K or softens into Hu or χυ or strengthens into Gu. Its concord under these conditions sometimes remains as Ku-. The 16th prefix, Pa-, is one of the most confusing in terms of its distribution and phonetic changes. Many Bantu languages in the north, east, and west tend to avoid the consonant P, which they often change to an aspirate (H), soften into V, W, or F, or simply drop. There's a lot of evidence that this prefix was originally Pa- or Mpa-pa, making it difficult to reconstruct any other form for the Bantu mother tongue. However, in the oldest Bantu dialects north of Victoria Nyanza, it's not found in the form of Pa-. It is either Ha- (and Ha- changes eastward to Sa-!) or Wa-.[15] If it weren't for its existence in this form in Uganda's language, one might almost think that the 16th locative prefix began as Ha-, and by a process without a parallel, changed in the east and south to Pa-. However, there are quite a few place names in the northern part of the Uganda protectorate, now occupied by Nilotic Africans, that begin with Pa-. These place names seem to have ancient Bantu origins in a [v.03 p.0362]land from which Bantu people were later driven by Nilotic invaders from the north. Therefore, they may be remnants of a time before the Pa- prefix in those regions had turned into the modern Ha-. In S.W. and N.W. Cameroon, the initial p of the 16th prefix appears again in a couple of dialects; but elsewhere in North-West Bantu Africa and throughout the Congo basin, except for the extreme south and southeast, the form Pa- is never found; it's Va-, Wa-, Ha-, Fa-, or A-. In the Secuana dialects, it is Fa- or Ha-; in the Luyi language of Barotseland, it takes the very rare form of Ba-, while the first prefix is weakened to A-.

The pronouns in Bantu are in most cases traceable to some such general forms as these:—

The pronouns in Bantu usually come from general forms like these:—

I, me, my

I, me, my

ñgi, mi,[16] ñgu.

ñgi, mi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ñgu.

Thou, thee, thy

You, your

gwe, ku; -ko.

gwe, ku; -ko.

He or she, him, her, his, &c

He or she, him, her, his, etc.

a-, ya-, wa- (nom.); also ñgu-
(which becomes yu-, ye-, wu-,
hu-, u-); -mu (acc.); -ka,
-kwe (poss.); there is also
another form, ndi (nom. and
poss.) in the Western Bantu sphere.

a-, ya-, wa- (nominative); also ñgu-
(which changes to yu-, ye-, wu-,
hu-, u-); -mu (accusative); -ka,
-kwe (possessive); there's also
another form, ndi (nominative and
possessive) in the Western Bantu area.

We, us, our

We, us, our

isu, swi-, tu-, ti-; -tu- (acc.);
-itu (poss.).

isu, swi-, tu-, ti-; -tu- (acc.);
-itu (poss.).

Ye, you, your

You, your

inu, mu-, nyu-, nyi-, -ni;
-nu, -mu- (acc.); -inu (poss.).

inu, mu-, nyu-, nyi-, -ni;
-nu, -mu- (acc.); -inu (poss.).

They, them, their

They, them, their

babo, ba-; -ba- (acc.); -babo (poss.).

bab, ba-; -ba- (acc.); -babo (poss.).

The Bantu verb consists of a practically unchangeable root which is employed as the second person singular of the imperative. To this root are prefixed and suffixed various particles. These are worn-down verbs which have become auxiliaries or they are reduced adverbs or prepositions. It is probable (with one exception) that the building up of the verbal root into moods and tenses has taken place independently in the principal groups of Bantu languages, the arrangement followed being probably founded on a fundamental system common to the original Bantu tongue. The exception alluded to may be a method of forming the preterite tense, which seems to be shared by a great number of widely-spread Bantu languages. This may be illustrated by the Zulu tanda, love, which changes to tandile, have loved, did love. This -ile or -ili may become in other forms -idi, didi, -ire, -ine, but is always referable back to some form like -ili or ile, which is probably connected with the root li or di (ndi or ni), which means "to be" or "exist." The initial i in the particle -ile often affects the last or penultimate syllable of the verbal root, thereby causing one of the very rare changes which take place in this vocable. In many Bantu dialects the root pa (which means to give) becomes pele in the preterite (no doubt from an original pa-ile). Likewise the Zulu tandile is a contraction of tanda-ile.

The Bantu verb has a mostly unchangeable root that is used as the second person singular of the imperative. Various particles are added to this root, either as prefixes or suffixes. These are worn-down verbs that have turned into auxiliaries, or they are simplified adverbs or prepositions. It is likely (with one exception) that the development of the verbal root into moods and tenses happened independently in the main groups of Bantu languages, probably based on a fundamental system common to the original Bantu language. The exception mentioned might be a way of forming the past tense, which seems to be shared by many widely spread Bantu languages. This can be seen in Zulu with tanda, meaning love, which changes to tandile, meaning have loved or did love. The -ile or -ili can also appear in other forms like -idi, didi, -ire, -ine, but it always traces back to something like -ili or -ile, likely connected to the root li or di (ndi or ni), which means "to be" or "exist." The initial i in the particle -ile often impacts the last or second-to-last syllable of the verbal root, causing one of the rare changes that occur in this word. In many Bantu dialects, the root pa (which means to give) becomes pele in the past tense (likely from the original pa-ile). Likewise, the Zulu tandile is a contraction of tanda-ile.

Two other frequent changes of the terminal vowel of the common root are those from a (which is almost invariably the terminal vowel of Bantu verbs), (1), into e to form the subjunctive tense, (2) into i to give a negative sense in certain tenses. With these exceptions the vowel a almost invariably terminates verbal roots. The departures from this rule are so rare that it might almost be included among the elementary propositions determining the Bantu languages. And these instances when they occur are generally due (as in Swahili) to borrowed foreign words (Arabic, Portuguese or English).[17] This point of the terminal a is the more interesting because, by changing the terminal vowel of the verbal root and possibly adding a personal prefix, one can make nouns from verbs. Thus in Luganda senyua is the verbal root for "to pardon." "A pardon" or "forgiveness" is ki-senyuo. "A pardoner" might be mu-senyui. In Swahili pataniša would be the verbal root for "conciliate"; mpatanaši is a "conciliator," and upatanišo is "conciliation." Another marked feature of Bantu verbs is their power of modifying the sense of the original verbal root by suffixes, the affixion of which modifies the terminal vowel and sometimes the preceding consonant of the root. Familiar forms of these variations and their usual meanings are as follows:—

Two other common changes to the ending vowel of the basic root are from a (which is usually the ending vowel of Bantu verbs), (1) into e to create the subjunctive tense, and (2) into i to give a negative meaning in certain tenses. With these exceptions, the vowel a almost always ends verbal roots. Departures from this rule are so rare that they could almost be considered a basic principle of Bantu languages. When these instances occur, they are typically due (as in Swahili) to borrowed foreign words (Arabic, Portuguese, or English).[17] This aspect of the ending a is particularly interesting because by changing the ending vowel of the verbal root and possibly adding a personal prefix, you can create nouns from verbs. For example, in Luganda, senyua is the verbal root for "to pardon." "A pardon" or "forgiveness" is ki-senyuo. "A pardoner" might be mu-senyui. In Swahili, pataniša serves as the verbal root for "conciliate"; mpatanaši is "conciliator," and upatanišo is "conciliation." Another notable feature of Bantu verbs is their ability to change the meaning of the original verbal root with suffixes, which alter the ending vowel and sometimes the preceding consonant of the root. Some familiar forms of these variations and their usual meanings are as follows:—

Supposing an original Bantu root, tanda, to love; this may become

Supposing an original Bantu root, tanda, meaning to love; this may become

tandwa

tandwa

to be loved.

to be cherished.

tandeka or tandika

or

to be lovable.

to be likable.

tandila or tandela[18]

tandila or tandela[18]

to love for, with, or by some other person.

to love for, with, or by someone else.

tandiza (or -eza)

tandiza (or -eza)

brace

brace

to cause to love.

to make someone love.

tandisa (or -esa)[19]

tandisa (or -esa)__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

tandana

tandana

to love reciprocally.

to love back.

The suffix -aka or -añga sometimes appears and gives a sense of continuance to the verbal root. Thus tanda may become tandaka in the sense of "to continue loving."[20]

The suffix -aka or -añga sometimes shows up and adds a sense of continuity to the verb root. So, tanda can turn into tandaka, meaning "to continue loving."[20]

The negative verbal particle in the Bantu languages may be traced back to an original ka, ta or sa, ki, ti or si in the Bantu mother-tongue. Apparently in the parent language this particle had already these alternative forms, which resemble those in some West African Negro languages. In the vast majority of the Bantu dialects at the present day, the negative particle in the verb (which nearly always coalesces with the pronominal particle) is descended from this ka, ta or sa, ki, ti or si, assuming the forms of ka, ga, ñga, sa, ta, ha, a, ti, si, hi, &c. It has coalesced to such an extent in some cases with the pronominal particle that the two are no longer soluble, and it is only by the existence of some intermediate forms (as in the Kongo language) that we are able to guess at the original separation between the two. Originally the negative particle ka, sa, &c., was joined to the pronominal particles, thus:—

The negative verbal particle in the Bantu languages can be traced back to an original ka, ta or sa, ki, ti or si in the Bantu mother tongue. It seems that in the parent language, this particle already had these alternative forms, which are similar to those found in some West African Negro languages. In most Bantu dialects today, the negative particle in the verb (which almost always merges with the pronominal particle) comes from this ka, ta or sa, ki, ti or si, taking the forms of ka, ga, ñga, sa, ta, ha, a, ti, si, hi, etc. In some cases, it has merged to the point where the two are no longer separable, and it is only through the existence of some intermediate forms (as seen in the Kongo language) that we can infer the original distinction between them. Originally, the negative particle ka, sa, etc., was attached to the pronominal particles like this:—

Ka-ngi

Ka-ngi

not I.

not me.

    (Therefore Ka-ngi tanda = not I love.)

(Therefore Ka-ngi tanda = I don't love.)

Ka-ku or ka-wu

Ka-ku or ka-wu

not thou.

not you.

Ka-a

Ka-a

not he, she.

not him, her.

Ka-tu

Ka-tu

not we.

not us.

Ka-nu

Ka-nu

not ye.

not yet.

Ka-ba

Ka-ba

not they.

not them.

In like manner sa would become sa-ngi, sa-wu, &c. But very early in the history of Bantu languages ka-ngi, or sa-ngi, became contracted into kai, sai, and finally, ki, si; ka-ku or ka-wu into ku; and kaa or saa have always been ka or sa. Sometimes in the modern languages the negative particle (such as ti or si) is used without any vestige of a pronoun being attached to it, and is applied indifferently to all the persons. Occasionally this particle has fallen out of use, and the negative is expressed (1) by stress or accent; (2) by suffix (traceable to a root -pe or -ko) answering to the French pas, and having the same sense; and (3) by the separate employment of an adverb. If not a few Bantu languages, the verb used in a negative sense changes its terminal -a to -i. The subjunctive is very frequently formed by changing the terminal -a to -e: thus, tanda = love; -tande = may love.

In the same way, sa would become sa-ngi, sa-wu, etc. But early on in the history of Bantu languages, ka-ngi or sa-ngi got shortened to kai, sai, and finally to ki, si; ka-ku or ka-wu became ku; and kaa or saa have consistently been ka or sa. Sometimes in modern languages, the negative particle (like ti or si) is used without attaching it to a pronoun and can apply to all persons. Occasionally, this particle has fallen out of use, and the negative is expressed (1) through stress or accent; (2) by a suffix (traced back to a root -pe or -ko) that corresponds to the French pas, carrying the same meaning; and (3) by using an adverb separately. In some Bantu languages, the verb used in a negative sense changes its ending from -a to -i. The subjunctive form is frequently made by changing the ending from -a to -e: for example, tanda = love; -tande = may love.

Bibliography.—A Comparative Grammar of South African Languages (in two parts, left unfinished), by Dr W. I. Bleek (London, 1869); A Sketch of the Modern Languages of Africa, by R. N. Cust (1882); Comparative Grammar of the South African Bantu Languages, by Father J. Torrend (1894; mainly composed on a study of the languages of the Central Zambezi, interesting, but erroneous in some deductions, and incomplete). In Sir H. H. Johnston's The Kilimanjaro Expedition (1884), British Central Africa (1898), and The Uganda Protectorate (1902-1904), there are illustrative vocabularies; and in George Grenfell and the Congo (1908) the Congo groups of Bantu speech are carefully classified, also the Fernandian and Cameroon. In the numerous essays of Carl Meinhof on the original structure of the Bantu mother-speech, and on existing languages in East and South-East Africa, in the Mittheilungen des Seminärs für Orientalische Sprachen, Berlin (also issued separately through Brockhaus, Leipzig, 1899), and also in his Grundzüge einer vergleichenden Grammatik der Bantusprachen (Berlin, 1906), a vast amount of valuable information has been collected, but Meinhof's deductions therefrom are not in every case in accord with those of other authorities. The Swahili-English Dictionary, by Dr L. Krapf (London, 1882), contains a mass of not well-sorted but invaluable information concerning the Swahili language as spoken on the coast of East Africa, especially regarding many words now becoming obsolete. A similar mine of information is to be found in An Encyclopaedic Dictionary of the Manañja (Mang'anja) Language of British Central Africa, by the Rev. D. C. Scott (1891). Other admirable works are the Dictionary of the Congo Language, by the Rev. Holman Bentley (1891), and The Folklore of Angola, and a Grammar of Kimbundu, by Dr. Heli Chatelain. The many handbooks and vocabularies written and published by Bishop Steere on the languages of the East African coast-lands are of great importance to the student, especially as they give forms of the prefixes now passing out of use. The Introductory Handbook of the Yao Language, by the Rev. Alexander Hetherwick, illustrates very fully that peculiar and important member of the East African group. Vocabularies of various Congo languages have been compiled by Dr. A. Sims; more important works on this subject have been published by the Rev. W. H. Stapleton (Comparative Handbook of Congo Languages), and by Rev. John Whitehead (Grammar and Dictionary of the Bobangi Language (London, 1899). E. Torday has illustrated the languages of the Western Congo basin (Kwango, Kwilu, northern Kasai) in the Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute. There is a treatise on the Lunda language of the southwestern part of the Belgian Congo, in Portuguese, by Henrique de Carvalho, who also in his Ethnographia da Expedicaõ portugueza [v.03 p.0363]ao Muata Yanvo goes deeply into Bantu language questions. The Duala language of Cameroon, has been illustrated by the Baptist missionary Saker in his works published about 1860, and since 1900 by German missionaries and explorers (such as Schuler). The German work on the Duala language is mostly published in the Mittheilungen des Seminärs für Orientalische Sprachen (Berlin); see also Schuler's Grammatik des Duala. The Rev. S. Koelle, in his Polyglotta Africana, published in 1851, gave a good many interesting vocabularies of the almost unknown north-west Bantu borderland, as well as of other forms of Bantu speech of the Congo coast and Congo basin. J. T. Last, in his Polyglotta Africana Orientalis, has illustrated briefly many of the East African dialects and languages, some otherwise touched by no one else. He has also published an excellent grammar of the Kaguru language of the East African highlands (Usagara). The fullest information is now extant regarding the languages of Uganda and Unyoro, in works by the missionaries of the Church Missionary Society (Pilkington, Blackledge, Hattersley, Henry Duta and others). Mr Crabtree, of the same mission, has collected information regarding the Masaba dialects of Elgon, and these have also been illustrated by Mr C. W. Hobley, and by Sir H. H. Johnston (Uganda Protectorate), and privately by Mr S. A. Northcote. Mr A. C. Madan has published works on the Swahili language and on the little-known Senga of Central Zambezia and Wisa of North-East Rhodesia (Oxford University Press). Jacottet (Paris, 1902) has in his Grammaire Subiya provided an admirable study of the Subiya and Luyi languages of Barotseland, and in 1907, Edwin W. Smith (Oxford University Press) brought out a Handbook of the Ila Language (Mashukulumbwe). The Rev. W. Govan Robertson is the author of a complete study of the Bemba language. Mrs Sydney Hinde has illustrated the dialects of Kikuyu and Kamba. F. Van der Burgt has published a Dictionary of Kirundi (the language spoken at the north end of Tanganyika). Oci-herero of Damaraland has chiefly been illustrated by German writers, old and new; such as Dr Kolbe and Dr P. H. Brincker. The northern languages of this Herero group have been studied by members of the American Mission at Bailundu under the name of Umbundu. Some information on the languages of the south-western part of the Congo basin and those of south-eastern Angola may be found in the works of Capello and Ivens and of Henrique de Carvalho and Commander V. L. Cameron. The British, French and German missionaries have published many dictionaries and grammars of the different Secuana dialects, notable amongst which is John Brown's Dictionary of Secuana and Meinhof's Study of the Tši-venda. The grammars and dictionaries of Zulu-Kaffir are almost too numerous to catalogue. Among the best are Maclaren's Kafir Grammar and Roberts' Zulu Dictionary. The works of Boyce, Appleyard and Bishop Colenso should also be consulted. Miss A. Werner has written important studies on the Zulu click-words and other grammatical essays and vocabularies of the Bantu languages in the Journal of the African Society between 1902 and 1906. The Tebele dialect of Zulu has been well illustrated by W. A. Elliott in his Dictionary of the Tebele and Shuna languages (London, 1897). The Ronga (Tonga, Si-gwamba, Hlengwe, &c.) are dealt with in the Grammaire Ronga (Lausanne, 1896) of Henri Junod. Bishop Smyth and John Mathews have published a vocabulary and short grammar of the Xilenge (Shilenge) language of Inhambane (S.P.C.R., 1902). The journal Anthropos (Vienna) should also be consulted.

References.—A Comparative Grammar of South African Languages (in two parts, left unfinished), by Dr W. I. Bleek (London, 1869); A Sketch of the Modern Languages of Africa, by R. N. Cust (1882); Comparative Grammar of the South African Bantu Languages, by Father J. Torrend (1894; mainly based on a study of the languages of the Central Zambezi, which is interesting but contains some errors and is incomplete). In Sir H. H. Johnston's The Kilimanjaro Expedition (1884), British Central Africa (1898), and The Uganda Protectorate (1902-1904), there are illustrative vocabularies; and in George Grenfell and the Congo (1908), the Congo groups of Bantu languages are carefully classified, including the Fernandian and Cameroon. Carl Meinhof's numerous essays on the original structure of the Bantu mother language and existing languages in East and South-East Africa, found in the Mittheilungen des Seminärs für Orientalische Sprachen, Berlin (also published separately through Brockhaus, Leipzig, 1899), and in his Grundzüge einer vergleichenden Grammatik der Bantusprachen (Berlin, 1906), have gathered a large amount of valuable information, though Meinhof's conclusions do not always align with those of other scholars. The Swahili-English Dictionary, by Dr L. Krapf (London, 1882), offers a wealth of unorganized yet invaluable information about the Swahili language as spoken on the East African coast, particularly regarding many words that are becoming obsolete. A similar treasure trove of information is found in An Encyclopaedic Dictionary of the Manañja (Mang'anja) Language of British Central Africa, by the Rev. D. C. Scott (1891). Other noteworthy works include the Dictionary of the Congo Language, by Rev. Holman Bentley (1891), and The Folklore of Angola and a Grammar of Kimbundu, by Dr. Heli Chatelain. The various handbooks and vocabularies written and published by Bishop Steere on the languages of the East African coastal regions are very important for students, especially as they provide forms of prefixes that are now falling out of use. The Introductory Handbook of the Yao Language, by Rev. Alexander Hetherwick, thoroughly illustrates this unique and significant member of the East African group. Vocabularies of different Congo languages have been compiled by Dr. A. Sims; more significant works on this topic have been published by Rev. W. H. Stapleton (Comparative Handbook of Congo Languages) and Rev. John Whitehead (Grammar and Dictionary of the Bobangi Language (London, 1899). E. Torday has documented the languages of the Western Congo basin (Kwango, Kwilu, northern Kasai) in the Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute. There is a treatise on the Lunda language of the southwestern part of the Belgian Congo, in Portuguese, by Henrique de Carvalho, who also delves deeply into Bantu language topics in his Ethnographia da Expedicaõ portugueza ao Muata Yanvo. The Duala language of Cameroon has been discussed by the Baptist missionary Saker in his works published around 1860, and since 1900 by German missionaries and explorers, such as Schuler. The German work on the Duala language is primarily published in the Mittheilungen des Seminärs für Orientalische Sprachen (Berlin); see also Schuler's Grammatik des Duala. The Rev. S. Koelle, in his Polyglotta Africana, published in 1851, provided many interesting vocabularies of the relatively unknown north-west Bantu borderland, as well as other forms of Bantu language from the Congo coast and basin. J. T. Last, in his Polyglotta Africana Orientalis, briefly illustrated many East African dialects and languages, some of which were not covered by anyone else. He has also published an excellent grammar of the Kaguru language of the East African highlands (Usagara). The most comprehensive information is currently available regarding the languages of Uganda and Unyoro, in works by missionaries of the Church Missionary Society (Pilkington, Blackledge, Hattersley, Henry Duta, and others). Mr. Crabtree, from the same mission, has gathered information about the Masaba dialects of Elgon, which have also been documented by Mr. C. W. Hobley, Sir H. H. Johnston (Uganda Protectorate), and privately by Mr. S. A. Northcote. Mr. A. C. Madan has published works on the Swahili language and the lesser-known Senga of Central Zambezia and Wisa of North-East Rhodesia (Oxford University Press). Jacottet (Paris, 1902) provided an excellent study of the Subiya and Luyi languages of Barotseland in his Grammaire Subiya, and in 1907, Edwin W. Smith (Oxford University Press) released a Handbook of the Ila Language (Mashukulumbwe). The Rev. W. Govan Robertson is the author of a complete study of the Bemba language. Mrs. Sydney Hinde has documented the dialects of Kikuyu and Kamba. F. Van der Burgt has published a Dictionary of Kirundi (the language spoken at the north end of Tanganyika). Oci-herero of Damaraland has primarily been illustrated by both old and new German writers, such as Dr. Kolbe and Dr. P. H. Brincker. The northern languages of this Herero group have been studied by members of the American Mission at Bailundu under the name of Umbundu. Some information on the languages of the southwestern part of the Congo basin and those of southeastern Angola can be found in the works of Capello and Ivens, and Henrique de Carvalho and Commander V. L. Cameron. British, French, and German missionaries have published many dictionaries and grammars of the different Secuana dialects, notable among which is John Brown's Dictionary of Secuana and Meinhof's Study of the Tši-venda. The grammars and dictionaries of Zulu-Kaffir are almost too numerous to count. Among the best are Maclaren's Kafir Grammar and Roberts' Zulu Dictionary. The works of Boyce, Appleyard, and Bishop Colenso should also be consulted. Miss A. Werner has written important studies on Zulu click-words, along with other grammatical essays and vocabularies of Bantu languages, which appeared in the Journal of the African Society between 1902 and 1906. The Tebele dialect of Zulu has been well documented by W. A. Elliott in his Dictionary of the Tebele and Shuna languages (London, 1897). The Ronga (Tonga, Si-gwamba, Hlengwe, etc.) are discussed in the Grammaire Ronga (Lausanne, 1896) by Henri Junod. Bishop Smyth and John Mathews have published a vocabulary and short grammar of the Xilenge (Shilenge) language of Inhambane (S.P.C.R., 1902). The journal Anthropos (Vienna) should also be consulted.

(H. H. J.)

(H. H. J.)

[1] Bantu (literally Ba-ntu) is the most archaic and most widely spread term for "men," "mankind," "people," in these languages. It also indicates aptly the leading feature of this group of tongues, which is the governing of the unchangeable root by prefixes. The syllable -ntu is nowhere found now standing alone, but it originally meant "object," or possibly "person." It is also occasionally used as a relative pronoun—"that," "that which," "he who." Combined with different prefixes it has different meanings. Thus (in the purer forms of Bantu languages) muntu means "a man," bantu means "men," kintu means "a thing," bintu "things," kantu means "a little thing," tuntu "little things," and so on. This term Bantu has been often criticized, but no one has supplied a better, simpler designation for this section of Negro languages, and the name has now been definitely consecrated by usage.

[1] Bantu (literally Ba-ntu) is the oldest and most widely used term for "men," "mankind," "people" in these languages. It also accurately reflects the main characteristic of this group of languages, which is the management of the unchanging root using prefixes. The syllable -ntu is not found by itself anymore, but it originally meant "object," or possibly "person." It is sometimes used as a relative pronoun—"that," "that which," "he who." When combined with different prefixes, it takes on various meanings. For example, in the more traditional forms of Bantu languages, muntu means "a man," bantu means "men," kintu means "a thing," bintu means "things," kantu means "a little thing," tuntu means "little things," and so on. The term Bantu has faced criticism, but no one has provided a better, simpler name for this group of African languages, and the term has now become widely accepted through use.

[2] In Luganda and other languages of Uganda and the Victoria Nyanza, and also in Runyoro on the Victoria Nile, the word for "fowl" is enkoko. In Ki-Swahili of Zanzibar it is kuku. In Zulu it is inkuku. In some of the Cameroon languages it is lokoko, ngoko, ngok, and on the Congo it is nkogo, nsusu. On the Zambezi it is nkuku; so also throughout the tribes of Lakes Nyasa and Tanganyika, and most dialects of South Africa.

[2] In Luganda and other languages of Uganda and Lake Victoria, as well as in Runyoro along the Victoria Nile, the word for "chicken" is enkoko. In Ki-Swahili spoken in Zanzibar, it's kuku. In Zulu, it's inkuku. In some languages of Cameroon, it's lokoko, ngoko, ngok, and in the Congo, it's nkogo, nsusu. Along the Zambezi River, it's nkuku; the same goes for many tribes around Lakes Nyasa and Tanganyika, as well as most dialects in South Africa.

[3] From this statement are excepted those tongues classified as "semi-Bantu." In some languages of the Lower Niger and of the Gold Coast the word for "fowl" is generally traceable to a root kuba. This form kuba also enters the Cameroon region, where it exists alongside of -koko. Kuba may have arisen independently, or have been derived from the Bantu kuku.

[3] This statement excludes languages considered "semi-Bantu." In some languages spoken around the Lower Niger and the Gold Coast, the word for "fowl" can usually be traced back to the root kuba. This form kuba also appears in the Cameroon area, where it is found alongside -koko. Kuba may have developed independently or could have come from the Bantu word kuku.

[4] Whence the many nyanza, nyanja, nyasa, mwanza, of African geography.

[4] From where the many nyanza, nyanja, nyasa, mwanza, of African geography come.

[5] In using the forms Uganda, Unyoro, the writer accepts the popular mis-spelling. These countries should be called Buganda and Bunyoro, and their languages Luganda and Runyoro.

[5] While using the names Uganda and Unyoro, the writer acknowledges the common misspelling. These countries should actually be called Buganda and Bunyoro, and their languages are Luganda and Runyoro.

[6] It is an important and recently discovered fact (delineated in the work of the Baptist missionaries and of the Austrian traveller Dr. Franz Thonner) that the Congo at its northern and north-eastern bend, between the Rubi river and Stanley Falls, lies outside the Bantu field. The Bondonga and Wamanga languages are not Bantu. They are allied to the Mbuba-Momfu of the Ituri and Nepoko, and also to the Mundu of the Egyptian Sudan. The Mundu group extends westward to the Ubangi river, as far south as 3° 30′ N. See George Grenfell and the Congo, by Sir Harry Johnston; and Dans la Grande Forêt de l'Afrique équatoriale, by Franz Thonner (1899).

[6] It's an important and recently discovered fact (outlined in the work of Baptist missionaries and the Austrian traveler Dr. Franz Thonner) that the Congo at its northern and northeastern bend, between the Rubi River and Stanley Falls, is outside the Bantu area. The Bondonga and Wamanga languages are not Bantu. They are related to the Mbuba-Momfu of the Ituri and Nepoko, as well as to the Mundu of the Egyptian Sudan. The Mundu group extends westward to the Ubangi River and as far south as 3° 30′ N. See George Grenfell and the Congo, by Sir Harry Johnston; and Dans la Grande Forêt de l'Afrique équatoriale, by Franz Thonner (1899).

[7] These features are characteristic of almost all the Negro languages of Africa.

[7] These features are typical of nearly all African languages spoken by Black people.

[8] This does not preclude the aspiration of consonants, or the occasional local change of a palatal into a guttural.

[8] This doesn’t exclude the aspiration of consonants, or the occasional local change of a palatal into a guttural.

[9] As already mentioned, a somewhat similar concord is also present as regards the suffixes of the Fula and the Kiama (Tem) languages in Western Africa, and as regards the prefixes of the Timne language of Sierra Leone; it exists likewise in Hottentot and less markedly in many Aryan, Semitic and Hamitic tongues.

[9] As previously mentioned, a similar agreement can also be found in the suffixes of the Fula and Kiama (Tem) languages in Western Africa, as well as in the prefixes of the Timne language from Sierra Leone; it also appears in Hottentot and to a lesser extent in many Aryan, Semitic, and Hamitic languages.

[10] An apparent but not a real exception to this rule is in the second person plural of the imperative mood, where an abbreviated form of the pronoun is affixed to the verb. Other phases of the verb may be occasionally emphasized by the repetition of the governing pronoun at the end.

[10] A seemingly obvious but not actual exception to this rule is in the second person plural of the imperative mood, where a shortened form of the pronoun is attached to the verb. Other forms of the verb can sometimes be emphasized by repeating the governing pronoun at the end.

[11] The full hypothetical forms of the prefixes as joined with definite articles—Ñgumu, Mbaba, Ñgimi, Ñgama and so on—are added in brackets. Forms very like these are met with still in the Mt. Elgon languages (Group No. 3) and in Subiya group (No. 32).

[11] The complete hypothetical forms of the prefixes combined with definite articles—Ñgumu, Mbaba, Ñgimi, Ñgama, and so on—are included in brackets. Very similar forms can still be found in the Mt. Elgon languages (Group No. 3) and in the Subiya group (No. 32).

[12] This is prominently met with in East Africa, and also in the various Bechuana dialects of Central South Africa, where it takes the form of ñ at the end of words.

[12] This is commonly found in East Africa, as well as in the different Bechuana dialects of Central South Africa, where it appears as ñ at the end of words.

[13] Or perhaps ñga-ba-ntu (afterwards ña-ba-, aba-); the form ñgabantu is actually met with in Zulu-Kaffir: also ñgumuntu.

[13] Or maybe ñga-ba-ntu (later ña-ba-, aba-); the form ñgabantu is actually found in Zulu-Kaffir: also ñgumuntu.

[14] Likewise ba- may have meant "two" (Bantu root Bali = two); a dual first and then a plural.

[14] Likewise ba- might have meant "two" (Bantu root Bali = two); a dual first and then a plural.

[15] Wa- in Luganda. In Lusoga (north coast of Victoria Nyanza) Wa- becomes Γa (Gha).

[15] Wa- in Luganda. In Lusoga (north coast of Victoria Nyanza), Wa- becomes Γa (Gha).

[16] Mi is possibly a softening of ñgi, ñi; ñgi becomes in some dialects nji, ndi, ni or mbi; there is in some of the coast Cameroon languages, and in the north-eastern Congo, a word mbi, mba for "I," "me," which seems to be borrowed from the Sudanian Mundu tongues. The possessive pronoun for the first person is devired from two forms, -ami and -añgi (-am, -añgu, -anji, -ambi, &c.).

[16] Mi might be a softer version of ñgi, ñi; in some dialects, ñgi changes to nji, ndi, ni, or mbi; there is a word mbi, mba for "I," "me" in some languages of coastal Cameroon and in northeastern Congo, which seems to be borrowed from the Sudanian Mundu languages. The possessive pronoun for the first person comes from two forms, -ami and -añgi (-am, -añgu, -anji, -ambi, etc.).

[17] An exception to this rule is the verbal particle li or di, which means "to be."

[17] An exception to this rule is the verbal particle li or di, which means "to be."

[18] Or -ira, -era.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Or -ira, -era.

[19] This form may also appear as ša, as for instance aka—to be on fire becomes aša, to set on fire.

[19] This form may also appear as ša, as in aka—to be on fire becomes aša, to set on fire.

[20] In choosing this common root tanda, and applying it to the above various terminations, the writer is not prepared to say that it is associated with all of them in any one Bantu language. Although tanda is a common verb in Zulu, it has not in Zulu all these variations, and in some other language where it may by chance exhibit all the variations its own form is changed to londa or randa.

[20] In choosing this common root tanda and applying it to the various endings mentioned above, the writer is not ready to claim that it’s linked to all of them in any single Bantu language. While tanda is a common verb in Zulu, it doesn’t have all these variations in Zulu itself, and in some other language where it might happen to show all the variations, its form changes to londa or randa.

BANVILLE, THÉODORE FAULLAIN DE (1823-1891), French poet and miscellaneous writer, was born at Moulins in the Bourbonnais, on the 14th of March 1823. He was the son of a captain in the French navy. His boyhood, by his own account, was cheerlessly passed at a lycée in Paris; he was not harshly treated, but took no part in the amusements of his companions. On leaving school with but slender means of support, he devoted himself to letters, and in 1842 published his first volume of verse (Les Cariatides), which was followed by Les Stalactites in 1846. The poems encountered some adverse criticism, but secured for their author the approbation and friendship of Alfred de Vigny and Jules Janin. Henceforward Banville's life was steadily devoted to literary production and criticism. He printed other volumes of verse, among which the Odes funambulesques (Alençon, 1857) received unstinted praise from Victor Hugo, to whom they were dedicated. Later, several of his comedies in verse were produced at the Théâtre Français and on other stages; and from 1853 onwards a stream of prose flowed from his industrious pen, including studies of Parisian manners, sketches of well-known persons (Camées parisiennes, &c.), and a series of tales (Contes bourgeois, Contes héroïques, &c.), most of which were republished in his collected works (1875-1878). He also wrote freely for reviews, and acted as dramatic critic for more than one newspaper. Throughout a life spent mainly in Paris, Banville's genial character and cultivated mind won him the friendship of the chief men of letters of his time. He was also intimate with Frédérick-Lemaître and other famous actors. In 1858 he was decorated with the legion of honour, and was promoted to be an officer of the order in 1886. He died in Paris on the 15th of March 1891, having just completed his sixty-eighth year. Banville's claim to remembrance rests mainly on his poetry. His plays are written with distinction and refinement, but are deficient in dramatic power; his stories, though marked by fertility of invention, are as a rule conventional and unreal. Most of his prose, indeed, in substance if not in manner, is that of a journalist. His lyrics, however, rank high. A careful and loving student of the finest models, he did even more than his greater and somewhat older comrades, Victor Hugo, Alfred de Musset and Théophile Gautier, to free French poetry from the fetters of metre and mannerism in which it had limped from the days of Malherbe. In the Odes funambulesques and elsewhere he revived with perfect grace and understanding the rondeau and the villanelle, and like Victor Hugo in Les Orientales, wrote pantoums (pantuns) after the Malay fashion. He published in 1872 a Petit traité de versification française in exposition of his metrical methods. He was a master of delicate satire, and used with much effect the difficult humour of sheer bathos, happily adapted by him from some of the early folk-songs. He has somewhat rashly been compared to Heine, whom he profoundly admired; but if he lacked the supreme touch of genius, he remains a delightful writer, who exercised a wise and sound influence upon the art of his generation.

BANVILLE, THÉODORE FAULLAIN DE (1823-1891), French poet and diverse writer, was born in Moulins in Bourbonnais on March 14, 1823. He was the son of a captain in the French navy. His childhood, as he described it, was spent unhappily at a high school in Paris; he was not mistreated, but he didn't engage in the fun activities of his peers. After leaving school with barely enough means to support himself, he devoted his life to writing, publishing his first poetry collection, Les Cariatides, in 1842, followed by Les Stalactites in 1846. The poems faced some negative reviews, but they earned him the approval and friendship of Alfred de Vigny and Jules Janin. From then on, Banville's life was focused on literary creation and critique. He published more volumes of poetry, including Odes funambulesques (Alençon, 1857), which received generous praise from Victor Hugo, to whom they were dedicated. Later, several of his verse comedies were staged at the Théâtre Français and other venues; from 1853 onwards, he produced a significant amount of prose, covering studies of Parisian life, profiles of notable figures (Camées parisiennes, etc.), and various tales (Contes bourgeois, Contes héroïques, etc.), most of which were republished in his collected works (1875-1878). He also contributed extensively to journals and served as a drama critic for multiple newspapers. Throughout his life in Paris, Banville's warm personality and educated mind earned him the friendship of leading literary figures of his time. He was close with Frédérick-Lemaître and other renowned actors. In 1858, he was awarded the Legion of Honor and was promoted to an officer of the order in 1886. He passed away in Paris on March 15, 1891, shortly after turning sixty-eight. Banville is mainly remembered for his poetry. His plays, while distinguished and refined, lack dramatic impact; his stories, although creative, tend to be conventional and unrealistic. Much of his prose resembles that of a journalist, in substance if not in style. However, his lyrics are highly regarded. As a careful and devoted student of the finest literary models, he did more than his more famous and slightly older contemporaries, Victor Hugo, Alfred de Musset, and Théophile Gautier, to liberate French poetry from the constraints of meter and mannerism that had plagued it since Malherbe. In Odes funambulesques and elsewhere, he gracefully and expertly revived the rondeau and the villanelle, and like Victor Hugo in Les Orientales, he wrote pantoums (pantuns) in the Malay style. In 1872, he published a Petit traité de versification française outlining his poetic techniques. He was a master of subtle satire and effectively employed the challenging humor of deep bathos, skillfully adapted from early folk songs. He has been somewhat rashly compared to Heine, whom he admired greatly; yet, despite lacking the ultimate genius, he remains an enchanting writer who had a positive and significant influence on the art of his time.

Among his other works may be mentioned the poems, Idylles prussiennes (1871), and Trente-six ballades joyeuses (1875); the prose tales, Les Saltimbanques (1853); Esquisses parisiennes (1859) and Contes féeriques; and the plays, Le Feuilleton d'Aristophane (1852), Gringoire (1866), and Deidamia (1876).

Among his other works are the poems, Idylles prussiennes (1871), and Trente-six ballades joyeuses (1875); the prose stories, Les Saltimbanques (1853); Esquisses parisiennes (1859) and Contes féeriques; and the plays, Le Feuilleton d'Aristophane (1852), Gringoire (1866), and Deidamia (1876).

See also J. Lemaître, Les Contemporains (first series, 1885); Sainte-Beuve, Causeries du lundi, vol. xiv.; Maurice Spronck, Les Artistes littéraires (1889).

See also J. Lemaître, Les Contemporains (first series, 1885); Sainte-Beuve, Causeries du lundi, vol. xiv.; Maurice Spronck, Les Artistes littéraires (1889).

(C.)

(C.)

BANYAN, or Banian (an Arab corruption, borrowed by the Portuguese from the Sanskrit vanij, "merchant"), the Ficus Indica, or Bengalensis, a tree of the fig genus. The name was originally given by Europeans to a particular tree on the Persian Gulf beneath which some Hindu "merchants" had built a pagoda. In Calcutta the word was once generally applied to a native broker or head clerk in any business or private house, now usually known as sircar. Bunya, a corruption of the word common in Bengal generally, is usually applied to the native grain-dealer. Early writers sometimes use the term generically for all Hindus in western India. Banyan was long Anglo-Indian for an undershirt, in allusion to the body garment of the Hindus, especially the Banyans.

BANYAN, or Banyan (an Arabic adaptation, borrowed by the Portuguese from the Sanskrit vanij, meaning "merchant"), refers to the Ficus Indica or Bengalensis, a tree belonging to the fig genus. The name was initially used by Europeans for a specific tree on the Persian Gulf where some Hindu "merchants" had constructed a pagoda. In Calcutta, the term was commonly used to describe a native broker or head clerk in any business or private household, now typically referred to as sircar. The term Bunya, a variation commonly used in Bengal, generally denotes the native grain dealer. Early writers sometimes used the term generically to refer to all Hindus in western India. Banyan was for a long time the Anglo-Indian term for an undershirt, referencing the body garment worn by Hindus, particularly the Banyans.

Banyan days is a nautical slang term. In the British navy there were formerly two days in each week on which meat formed no part of the men's rations. These were called banyan days, in allusion to the vegetarian diet of the Hindu merchants. Banyan hospital also became a slang term for a hospital for animals, in reference to the Hindu's humanity and his dislike of taking the life of any animal.

Banyan days is a nautical slang term. In the British navy, there used to be two days each week when meat was not included in the men's rations. These were known as banyan days, referencing the vegetarian diet of Hindu merchants. Banyan hospital also became a slang term for an animal hospital, relating to the Hindu's compassion and aversion to killing any animal.

BAOBAB, Adansonia digitata (natural order Bombaceae), a native of tropical Africa, one of the largest trees known, its stem reaching 30 ft. in diameter, though the height is not great. It has a large woody fruit, containing a mucilaginous pulp, with a pleasant cool taste, in which the seeds are buried. The bark yields a strong fibre which is made into ropes and woven into cloth. The wood is very light and soft, and the trunks of living trees are often excavated to form houses. The name of the genus was given by Linnaeus in honour of Michel Adanson, a celebrated French botanist and traveller.

BAOBAB, Adansonia digitata (natural order Bombaceae), is native to tropical Africa and is one of the largest trees known, with a trunk reaching 30 ft. in diameter, even though its height isn't very impressive. It produces a large woody fruit that contains a mucilaginous pulp, which has a pleasantly cool taste and holds the seeds. The bark provides a strong fiber that's made into ropes and woven into fabric. The wood is very light and soft, and the trunks of living trees are often hollowed out to create houses. The genus name was given by Linnaeus in honor of Michel Adanson, a renowned French botanist and traveler.

BAPHOMET, the imaginary symbol or idol which the Knights Templars were accused of worshipping in their secret rites. The term is supposed to be a corruption of Mahomet, who in several medieval Latin poems seems to be called by this name. J. von Hammer-Purgstall, in his Mysterium Baphometis relevatum, &c., and Die Schuld der Templer, revived the old charge against the Templars. The word, according to his interpretation, signifies the baptism of Metis, or of fire, and is, therefore, connected with the impurities of the Gnostic Ophites (q.v.). Additional [v.03 p.0364]evidence of this, according to Hammer-Purgstall, is to be found in the architectural decorations of the Templars' churches.

BAPHOMET, the fictional symbol or idol that the Knights Templars were accused of worshipping in their secret rituals. The term is thought to be a corruption of Mahomet, which appears in several medieval Latin poems. J. von Hammer-Purgstall, in his Mysterium Baphometis relevatum, &c. and Die Schuld der Templer, brought back the old accusations against the Templars. According to his interpretation, the word means the baptism of Metis, or of fire, and is, therefore, linked to the impurities of the Gnostic Ophites (q.v.). Additional [v.03 p.0364] evidence of this, according to Hammer-Purgstall, can be found in the architectural decorations of the Templars' churches.

An elaborate criticism of Hammer-Purgstall's arguments was made in the Journal des Savans, March and April 1819, by M. Raynouard, a well-known defender of the Templars. (See also Hallam, Middle Ages, c. i. note 15.)

An in-depth critique of Hammer-Purgstall's arguments was published in the Journal des Savans, March and April 1819, by M. Raynouard, a prominent supporter of the Templars. (See also Hallam, Middle Ages, c. i. note 15.)

BAPTISM. The Gr. words βαπτισμός and βάπτισμα (both of which occur in the New Testament) signify "ceremonial washing," from the verb βαπτίζω, the shorter form βάπτω meaning "dip" without ritual significance (e.g. the finger in water, a robe in blood). That a ritual washing away of sin characterized other religions than the Christian, the Fathers of the church were aware, and Tertullian notices, in his tract On Baptism (ch. v.), that the votaries of Isis and Mithras were initiated per lavacrum, "through a font," and that in the Ludi Apollinares et Eleusinii, i.e. the mysteries of Apollo and Eleusis, men were baptized (tinguntur, Tertullian's favourite word for baptism), and, what is more, baptized, as they presumed to think, "unto regeneration and exemption from the guilt of their perjuries." "Among the ancients," he adds, "anyone who had stained himself with homicide went in search of waters that could purge him of his guilt."

BAPTISM. The Greek words baptism and baptism (both found in the New Testament) mean "ceremonial washing," derived from the verb baptize, while the shorter form baptize means "dip" without any ritual significance (e.g., dipping a finger in water, a garment in blood). The early church Fathers recognized that the ritual washing away of sin was common in other religions besides Christianity. Tertullian notes in his work On Baptism (ch. v.) that followers of Isis and Mithras were initiated per lavacrum, "through a font," and that in the Ludi Apollinares et Eleusinii, meaning the mysteries of Apollo and Eleusis, individuals were baptized (tinguntur, Tertullian's preferred term for baptism). Moreover, they believed they were baptized "unto regeneration and exemption from the guilt of their perjuries." "In ancient times," he adds, "anyone who had committed homicide sought waters that could cleanse them of their guilt."

The texts of the New Testament relating to Christian baptism, given roughly in chronological order, are the following:—

The New Testament texts about Christian baptism, listed roughly in chronological order, are as follows:—

A.D. 55-60, Rom. vi. 3, 4; 1 Cor. i. 12-17, vi. 11, x. 1-4, xii. 13, xv. 29; Gal. iii. 27.

CE 55-60, Rom. vi. 3, 4; 1 Cor. i. 12-17, vi. 11, x. 1-4, xii. 13, xv. 29; Gal. iii. 27.

A.D. 60-65, Col. ii. 11, 12; Eph. iv. 5, v. 26.

CE 60-65, Col. ii. 11, 12; Eph. iv. 5, v. 26.

A.D. 60-70, Mark x. 38, 39.

A.D. 60-70, Mark 10:38-39.

A.D. 80-90, Acts i. 5, ii. 38-41, viii. 16, 17, x. 44-48, xix. 1-7, xxii. 16; 1 Pet. iii. 20, 21; Heb. x. 22.

CE 80-90, Acts 1:5, 2:38-41, 8:16, 17, 10:44-48, 19:1-7, 22:16; 1 Peter 3:20, 21; Hebrews 10:22.

A.D. 90-100, John iii. 3-8, iii. 22, iii. 26, iv. 1, 2.

AD 90-100, John 3:3-8, 3:22, 3:26, 4:1, 2.

Uncertain, Matt, xxviii. 18-20; Mark xvi. 16.

Uncertain, Matt, 28:18-20; Mark 16:16.

The baptism of John is mentioned in the following:—

The baptism of John is mentioned in the following:—

A.D. 60-70, Mark i. 1-11.

A.D. 60-70, Mark 1:1-11.

A.D. 80-90, Matt. iii. 1-16:; Luke iii. 1-22, vii. 29, 30; Acts i. 22, x. 37, xiii. 24, xviii. 25, xix. 3, 4.

CE 80-90, Matt. iii. 1-16; Luke iii. 1-22, vii. 29, 30; Acts i. 22, x. 37, xiii. 24, xviii. 25, xix. 3, 4.

A.D. 90-100, John i. 25-33, iii. 23, x. 40.

A.D. 90-100, John 1:25-33, 3:23, 10:40.

It is best to defer the question of the origin of Christian baptism until the history of the rite in the centuries which followed has been sketched, for we know more clearly what baptism became after the year 100 than what it was before. And that method on which a great scholar[1] insisted when studying the old Persian religion is doubly to be insisted on in the study of the history of baptism and the cognate institution, the eucharist, namely, to avoid equally "the narrowness of mind which clings to matters of fact without rising to their cause and connecting them with the series of associated phenomena, and the wild and uncontrolled spirit of comparison, which, by comparing everything, confounds everything."

It’s better to put off the question about the origins of Christian baptism until we’ve outlined the history of the rite in the centuries that followed. We have a clearer understanding of what baptism became after the year 100 than what it was before then. The approach that a great scholar[1] emphasized while studying the ancient Persian religion should also be emphasized in the study of the history of baptism and its related practice, the eucharist. This means we should avoid both “the narrow-mindedness that focuses on the facts without recognizing their causes and connecting them to the larger picture,” and “the wild and reckless spirit of comparison that, by comparing everything, mixes everything up.”

Our earliest detailed accounts of baptism are in the Teaching of the Apostles (c. 90-120) and in Justin Martyr.

Our earliest detailed accounts of baptism are in the Teaching of the Apostles (c. 90-120) and in Justin Martyr.

The Teaching has the following:—

The Teaching includes the following:—

1. Now concerning baptism, thus baptize ye: having spoken beforehand all these things, baptize into the name of the Father and of the Son and of the Holy Spirit, in living water.

1. Now regarding baptism, here's how you should do it: after discussing all these things, baptize in the name of the Father, the Son, and the Holy Spirit, using living water.

2. But if thou hast not living water, baptize into other water; if thou canst not in cold, in warm.

2. But if you don't have living water, baptize in other water; if you can't in cold, then in warm.

3. But if thou hast not either, pour water upon the head thrice, in the name of the Father and of the Son and of the Holy Spirit.

3. But if you have neither, pour water on the head three times, in the name of the Father, the Son, and the Holy Spirit.

4. Now before the baptism, let him that is baptizing and him that is being baptized fast, and any others who can; but thou biddest him who is being baptized to fast one or two days before.

4. Now, before the baptism, both the person baptizing and the person being baptized should fast, as well as anyone else who can; but you instruct the person being baptized to fast for one or two days beforehand.

The "things spoken beforehand" are the moral precepts known as the two ways, the one of life and the other of death, with which the tract begins. This body of moral teaching is older than the rest of the tract, and may go back to the year A.D. 80.

The "things spoken beforehand" refer to the moral guidelines known as the two paths, one of life and the other of death, which the tract starts with. This set of moral teachings predates the rest of the tract and might date back to the year CE 80.

Justin thus describes the rite in ch. lxi. of his first Apology, (c. 140):—

Justin describes the ritual in chapter 61 of his first Apology, (c. 140):—

"I will also relate the manner in which we dedicated ourselves to God when we had been made new through Christ. As many as are persuaded and believe that what we teach and say is true, and undertake to be able to live accordingly, are instructed to pray and entreat God with fasting, for the remission of their sins that are past, we praying and fasting with them. Then they are brought by us where there is water, and are regenerated in the same manner in which we were ourselves regenerated. For in the name of God, the Father and Lord of the universe, and of our Saviour Jesus Christ and of the Holy Spirit, they then receive the washing with water."

"I will also share how we dedicated ourselves to God after being renewed through Christ. Everyone who believes that what we teach is true and is willing to live accordingly is encouraged to pray and ask God for forgiveness of their past sins, while we pray and fast with them. Then we take them to a place with water, and they are baptized just like we were. In the name of God, the Father and Lord of the universe, and our Savior Jesus Christ, and the Holy Spirit, they receive the baptism with water."

In the sequel Justin adds:—

In the sequel, Justin adds:—

"There is pronounced over him who chooses to be born again, and has repented of his sins, the name of God the Father and Lord of the universe, he who leads to the laver the person that is to be washed calling Him by this name alone. For no one can utter the name of the ineffable God, and this washing is called Illumination (Gr. φωτισμός), because they who learn these things are illuminated in their understandings. And in the name of Jesus Christ, who was crucified under Pontius Pilate, and in the name of the Holy Ghost, who through the prophets foretold all things about Jesus, he who is illuminated is washed."

"There is a significant emphasis on the person who chooses to be born again and has repented of their sins, invoking the name of God the Father and Lord of the universe. The person leading someone to the baptismal water calls on this name alone. For no one can truly pronounce the name of the ineffable God, and this baptism is referred to as Illumination (Gr. lighting), because those who understand these teachings are enlightened in their minds. And in the name of Jesus Christ, who was crucified under Pontius Pilate, and in the name of the Holy Spirit, who through the prophets foretold everything about Jesus, the one who is illuminated is baptized."

In ch. xiv. of the dialogue with Trypho, Justin asserts, as against Jewish rites of ablution, that Christian baptism alone can purify those who have repented. "This," he says, "is the water of life. But the cisterns which you have dug for yourselves are broken and profitless to you. For what is the use of that baptism which cleanses the flesh and body alone? Baptize the soul from wrath, from envy and from hatred; and, lo! the body is pure."

In chapter XIV of the dialogue with Trypho, Justin argues, against Jewish washing rituals, that only Christian baptism can purify those who have truly repented. “This,” he says, “is the water of life. But the cisterns you’ve dug for yourselves are broken and useless to you. What’s the point of a baptism that only cleanses the flesh and body? You need to cleanse the soul from anger, envy, and hatred; and then, look! The body will be pure.”

In ch. xliii. of the same dialogue Justin remarks that "those who have approached God through Jesus Christ have received a circumcision, not carnal, but spiritual, after the manner of Enoch."

In ch. xliii. of the same dialogue, Justin points out that "those who have come to God through Jesus Christ have received a circumcision, not physical, but spiritual, similar to that of Enoch."

In after ages baptism was regularly called illumination. Late in the 2nd century Tertullian describes the rite of baptism in his treatise On the Resurrection of the Flesh, thus:

In later times, baptism was commonly referred to as illumination. Toward the end of the 2nd century, Tertullian describes the baptism rite in his treatise On the Resurrection of the Flesh, saying:

1. The flesh is washed, that the soul may be freed from stain.

1. The body is cleansed so that the soul can be free from impurities.

2. The flesh is anointed, that the soul may be consecrated.

2. The body is blessed so that the spirit may be made sacred.

3. The flesh is sealed (i.e. signed with the cross), that the soul also may be protected.

3. The flesh is sealed (i.e. marked with the cross), so that the soul may also be protected.

4. The flesh is overshadowed with imposition of hands, that the soul also may be illuminated by the Spirit.

4. The body is covered by the laying on of hands so that the soul can also be enlightened by the Spirit.

5. The flesh feeds on the body and blood of Christ, that the soul also may be filled and sated with God.

5. The body feeds on the body and blood of Christ so that the soul can also be fulfilled and satisfied with God.

6. He also mentions elsewhere that the neophytes, after baptism, were given a draught of milk and honey. (The candidate for baptism, we further learn from his tract On Baptism, prepared himself by prayer, fasting and keeping of vigils.)

6. He also mentions elsewhere that the new members, after baptism, were given a drink of milk and honey. (The person preparing for baptism, we learn further from his tract On Baptism, got ready by praying, fasting, and keeping watch.)

Before stepping into the font, which both sexes did quite naked, the neophytes had to renounce the devil, his pomps and angels. Baptisms were usually conferred at Easter and in the season of Pentecost which ensued, and by the bishop or by priests and deacons commissioned by him.

Before entering the font, which both men and women did completely naked, the newcomers had to reject the devil, his temptations, and his angels. Baptisms typically took place at Easter and during the following Pentecost season, conducted by the bishop or by priests and deacons authorized by him.

Such are the leading features of the rite in Tertullian, and they reappear in the 4th century in the rites of all the orthodox churches of East and West; Tertullian testifies that the Marcionites observed the particulars numbered one to six, which must therefore go back at least to the year 150. About the year 300, those desirous of being baptized were (a) admitted to the catechumenate, giving in their names to the bishop. (b) They were subjected to a scrutiny and prepared, as to-day in the western churches the young are prepared for confirmation. The catechetic course included instruction in monotheism, in the folly of polytheism, in the Christian scheme of salvation, &c. (c) They were again and again exorcized, in order to rid them of the lingering taint of the worship of demons. (d) Some days or even weeks beforehand they had the creed recited to them. They might not write it down, but learned it by heart and had to repeat it just before baptism. This rite was called in the West the traditio and redditio of the symbol. The Lord's Prayer was communicated with similar solemnity in the West [v.03 p.0365](traditio precis). The creed given in Rome was the so-called Apostles' Creed, originally compiled as we now have it to exclude Marcionites. In the East various other symbols were used. (e) There followed an act of unction, made in the East with the oil of the catechumens blessed only by the priest, in the West with the priest's saliva applied to the lips and ears. The latter was accompanied by the following formula: "Effeta, that is, be thou opened unto odour of sweetness. But do thou flee, O Devil, for the judgment of God is at hand." (f) Renunciation of Satan. The catechumens turned to the west in pronouncing this; then turning to the east they recited the creed. (g) They stepped into the font, but were not usually immersed, and the priest recited the baptismal formula over them as he poured water, generally thrice, over their heads. (h) They were anointed all over with chrism or scented oil, the priest reciting an appropriate formula. Deacons anointed the males, deaconesses the females. (i) They put on white garments and often baptismal wreaths or chaplets as well. In some churches they had worn cowls during the catechumenate, in sign of repentance of their sins. (j) They received the sign of the cross on the brow; the bishop usually dipped his thumb in the chrism and said: "In name of Father, Son and Holy Ghost, peace be with thee." In laying his hands on their heads the bishop in many places, especially in the West, called down upon them the sevenfold spirit. (k) The first communion followed, with milk and honey added. (l) Usually the water in the font was exorcized, blessed and chrism poured into it, just before the catechumen entered it. (m) Easter was the usual season of baptism, but in the East Epiphany was equally favoured. Pentecost was sometimes chosen. We hear of all three feasts being habitually chosen in Jerusalem early in the 4th century, but fifty years later baptisms seem to have been almost confined to Easter. The preparatory fasts of the catechumens must have helped to establish the Lenten fast, if indeed they were not its origin.

These are the main aspects of the rite according to Tertullian, and they reappeared in the 4th century in the practices of all the orthodox churches in both the East and West. Tertullian confirms that the Marcionites followed the details numbered one to six, which must date back to at least the year 150. Around the year 300, those who wanted to be baptized were (a) welcomed into the catechumenate, submitting their names to the bishop. (b) They underwent a review and preparation, similar to how young people are prepared for confirmation in today's Western churches. The catechetical course included teachings on monotheism, the absurdity of polytheism, the Christian concept of salvation, etc. (c) They were repeatedly exorcised to cleanse them of any lingering association with demonic worship. (d) Several days or even weeks before baptism, they had the creed recited to them. They weren’t allowed to write it down but memorized it and had to recite it right before baptism. This rite was called traditio and redditio of the symbol in the West. The Lord's Prayer was communicated with similar seriousness in the West [v.03 p.0365](traditio precis). The creed used in Rome was the so-called Apostles' Creed, originally put together as we have it today to exclude the Marcionites. In the East, various other creeds were used. (e) Next came an act of anointing, done in the East with oil of the catechumens that had only been blessed by the priest, and in the West, with the priest's saliva applied to their lips and ears. This was accompanied by the formula: "Effeta, meaning, be opened to the sweet scent. But flee, O Devil, for God's judgment is near." (f) They renounced Satan. The catechumens faced the west while saying this; then turned to the east to recite the creed. (g) They stepped into the baptismal font but were usually not fully immersed as the priest recited the baptismal formula while pouring water, generally three times, over their heads. (h) They were anointed all over with chrism or scented oil, with the priest reciting an appropriate formula. Deacons anointed the males, and deaconesses anointed the females. (i) They wore white garments and often received baptismal wreaths or chaplets as well. In some churches, they wore hoods during the catechumenate as a sign of repentance for their sins. (j) They received the sign of the cross on their foreheads; the bishop usually dipped his thumb in the chrism and said: "In the name of the Father, Son, and Holy Spirit, peace be with you." By laying hands on their heads, the bishop in many places, especially in the West, invoked the sevenfold spirit upon them. (k) The first communion followed, with milk and honey added. (l) Usually, the water in the font was exorcised, blessed, and chrism was poured into it just before the catechumen entered it. (m) Easter was the usual time for baptisms, but in the East, Epiphany was also popular. Pentecost was sometimes chosen. It is noted that all three feasts were commonly chosen in Jerusalem early in the 4th century, but by fifty years later, baptisms seemed to have been mostly limited to Easter. The preparatory fasts for catechumens likely contributed to the establishment of the Lenten fast, if they weren’t its origin.

Certain features of baptism as used during the earlier centuries must now be noticed. They are the following:—(1) Use of fonts; (2) Status of baptizer; (3) Immersion, submersion or aspersion; (4) Exorcism; (5) Baptismal formula and trine immersion; (6) The age of baptism; (7) Confirmation; (8) Disciplina arcani; (9) Regeneration; (10) Relation to repentance; (11) Baptism for the dead; (12) Use of the name; (13) Origin of the institution; (14) Analogous rites in other religions.

Certain aspects of baptism from earlier centuries need to be highlighted. They are the following:—(1) Use of fonts; (2) Status of the baptizer; (3) Immersion, submersion, or sprinkling; (4) Exorcism; (5) Baptismal formula and triple immersion; (6) The age for baptism; (7) Confirmation; (8) Disciplina arcani; (9) Regeneration; (10) Relationship to repentance; (11) Baptism for the dead; (12) Use of the name; (13) Origin of the institution; (14) Similar practices in other religions.

1. Fonts.—The New Testament, the Didachē, Justin, Tertullian and other early sources do not enjoin the use of a font, and contemplate in general the use of running or living water. It was a Jewish rule that in ablutions the water should run over and away from the parts of the body washed. In acts of martyrdom, as late as the age of Decius, we read of baptisms in rivers, in lakes and in the sea. In exceptional cases it sufficed for a martyr to be sprinkled with his own blood. But a martyr's death in itself was enough. Nearchus (c. 250) quieted the scruples of his unbaptized friend Polyeuctes, when on the scaffold he asked if it were possible to attain salvation without baptism, with this answer: "Behold, we see the Lord, when they brought to Him the blind that they might be healed, had nothing to say to them about the holy mystery, nor did He ask them if they had been baptized; but this only, whether they came to Him with true faith. Wherefore He asked them, Do ye believe that I am able to do this thing?"

1. Fonts.—The New Testament, the Didachē, Justin, Tertullian, and other early sources do not require the use of a font and generally consider the use of running or living water. There was a Jewish rule that during washings, the water should flow over and away from the body parts being washed. In accounts of martyrdom, even as late as the time of Decius, we read about baptisms in rivers, lakes, and the sea. In exceptional cases, it was sufficient for a martyr to be sprinkled with his own blood. However, a martyr's death alone was enough. Nearchus (around 250) reassured his unbaptized friend Polyeuctes when, on the scaffold, he asked if it was possible to achieve salvation without baptism, by replying: "Look, we see that the Lord, when people brought to Him those who were blind for healing, didn’t mention the holy mystery nor ask them if they had been baptized; He only asked if they came to Him with true faith. Therefore, He questioned them, 'Do you believe that I am able to do this?'"

Tertullian (c. 200) writes (de Bapt. iv.) thus: "It makes no difference whether one is washed in the sea or in a pool, in a river or spring, in a lake or a ditch. Nor can we distinguish between those whom John baptized (tinxit) in the Jordan and those whom Peter baptized in the Tiber." The custom of baptizing in the rivers when they are annually blessed at Epiphany, the feast of the Lord's baptism, still survives in Armenia and in the East generally. Those of the Armenians and Syrians who have retained adult baptism use rivers alone at any time of year.

Tertullian (around 200) writes (in *de Bapt.* iv.) this: "It doesn't matter if someone is baptized in the sea, in a pool, in a river or a spring, in a lake or a ditch. We can't differentiate between those John baptized in the Jordan and those Peter baptized in the Tiber." The practice of baptizing in rivers during the annual blessing at Epiphany, which celebrates the Lord's baptism, still exists in Armenia and generally in the East. Those Armenians and Syrians who still practice adult baptism use rivers exclusively at any time of the year.

The church of Tyre described by Eusebius (H.E. x. 4) seems to have had a font, and the church order of Macarius, bishop of Jerusalem (c. 311-335), orders the font to be placed in the same building as the altar, behind it and on the right hand; but the same order lays down that a font is not essential in cases of illness for "the Holy Spirit is not hindered by want of a vessel."

The church of Tyre mentioned by Eusebius (H.E. x. 4) appears to have had a baptismal font, and the church order from Macarius, bishop of Jerusalem (c. 311-335), instructs that the font should be located in the same building as the altar, positioned behind it and on the right side. However, the same order states that a font is not necessary in cases of illness because "the Holy Spirit is not obstructed by the lack of a vessel."

2. Status of Baptizer.—Ignatius (Smyrn. viii.) wrote that it is not lawful to baptize or hold an agapē (Lord's Supper) without the bishop. So Tertullian (de Bapt. xvii.) reserves the right of admitting to baptism and of conferring it to the summus sacerdos or bishop, Cyprian (Epist. lxxiii. 7) to bishops and priests. Later canons continued this restriction; and although in outlying parts of Christendom deacons claimed the right, the official churches accorded it to presbyters alone and none but bishops could perform the confirmation or seal. In the Montanist churches women baptized, and of this there are traces in the earliest church and in the Caucasus. Thus St Thekla baptized herself in her own blood, and St Nino, the female evangelist of Georgia, baptized king Mirian (see "Life of Nino," Studia Biblica, 1903). In cases of imminent death a layman or a woman could baptize, and in the case of new-born children it is often necessary.

2. Status of Baptizer.—Ignatius (Smyrn. viii.) wrote that it is not allowed to baptize or hold an agapē (Lord's Supper) without the bishop. Tertullian (de Bapt. xvii.) stated that only the summus sacerdos or bishop has the authority to admit and confer baptism, while Cyprian (Epist. lxxiii. 7) assigned this right to bishops and priests. Later church regulations continued this restriction; although in remote areas of Christendom, deacons claimed the right, the official churches granted it solely to presbyters, and only bishops could perform confirmations or seal baptisms. In the Montanist churches, women were permitted to baptize, and traces of this practice can be found in the early church and in the Caucasus. For example, St. Thekla baptized herself in her own blood, and St. Nino, the female evangelist of Georgia, baptized King Mirian (see "Life of Nino," Studia Biblica, 1903). In cases of imminent death, a layperson or a woman could baptize, which is often necessary for newborns.

3. Immersion or Aspersion.—The Didachē bids us "pour water on the head," and Christian pictures and sculptures ranging from the 1st to the 10th century represent the baptizand as standing in the water, while the baptizer pours water from his hand or from a bowl over his head. Even if we allow for the difficulty of representing complete submersion in art, it is nevertheless clear that it was not insisted on; nor were the earliest fonts, to judge from the ruins of them, large and deep enough for such an usage. The earliest literary notices of baptism are far from conclusive in favour of submersion, and are often to be regarded as merely rhetorical. The rubrics of the MSS., it is true, enjoin total immersion, but it only came into general vogue in the 7th century, "when the growing rarity of adult baptism made the Gr. word βαπτίζω) patient of an interpretation that suited that of infants only."[2] The Key of Truth, the manual of the old Armenian Baptists, archaically prescribes that the penitent admitted into the church shall advance on his knees into the middle of the water and that the elect one or bishop shall then pour water over his head.

3. Immersion or Aspersion.—The Didachē instructs us to "pour water on the head," and Christian artworks from the 1st to the 10th century depict the person being baptized as standing in the water, while the person baptizing pours water from their hand or from a bowl over their head. Even if we take into account the challenges of showing complete immersion in art, it’s clear that it wasn't strictly required; nor were the earliest baptismal fonts, based on their ruins, large and deep enough for such use. The earliest written references to baptism do not definitively favor immersion and are often more rhetorical than anything else. True, the guidelines of the manuscripts call for total immersion, but that practice didn't become widespread until the 7th century, "when the decreasing frequency of adult baptisms allowed the Greek word baptize to be interpreted in a way that applied only to infants."[2] The Key of Truth, the manual of the old Armenian Baptists, archaically states that the penitent entering the church shall move on their knees into the center of the water, and then the selected person or bishop shall pour water over their head.

4. Exorcism.—The Didachē and Justin merely prescribe fasting, the use of which was to hurry the exit of evil spirits who, in choosing a nidus or tenement, preferred a well-fed body to an emaciated one, according to the belief embodied in the interpolated saying of Matt. xvii. 21: "This kind (of demon) goeth not forth except by prayer and fasting." The exorcisms tended to become longer and longer, the later the rite. The English prayer-book excludes them, as it also excludes the renunciation of the devil and all his angels, his pomps and works. These elements were old, but scarcely primitive; and the archaic rite of the Key of Truth (see Paulicians) is without them. Basil, in his work On the Holy Spirit, confesses his ignorance of how these and other features of his baptismal rite had originated. He instances the blessing of the water of baptism, of the oil of anointing and of the baptizand himself, the use of anointing him with oil, trine immersion, the formal renunciation of Satan and his angels. All these features, he says, had been handed down in an unpublished and unspoken teaching, in a silent and sacramental tradition.

4. Exorcism.—The Didachē and Justin only recommend fasting, which was meant to speed up the departure of evil spirits that preferred well-nourished bodies over undernourished ones, based on the belief expressed in the added saying of Matt. xvii. 21: "This kind (of demon) cannot be driven out except by prayer and fasting." The exorcisms became longer and longer as the rite developed. The English prayer book excludes them, along with the renunciation of the devil and all his angels, his pomp and works. These elements were old but not particularly primitive; the ancient rite of the Key of Truth (see Paulicians) does not include them. Basil, in his work On the Holy Spirit, admits he doesn’t know how these and other aspects of his baptismal rite began. He mentions the blessing of the baptismal water, the anointing oil, and the person being baptized, the practice of anointing with oil, triple immersion, and the formal renunciation of Satan and his angels. He notes that all these aspects had been passed down through an unpublished and unspoken teaching, part of a silent and sacramental tradition.

5. The Baptismal Formula.—The trinitarian formula and trine immersion were not uniformly used from the beginning, nor did they always go together. The Teaching of the Apostles, indeed, prescribes baptism in the name of Father, Son and Holy Ghost, but on the next page speaks of those who have been baptized into the name of the Lord—the normal formula of the New Testament. In the 3rd century baptism in the name of Christ was still so widespread that Pope Stephen, in opposition to Cyprian of Carthage, declared it to be valid. From Pope Zachariah (Ep. x.) we learn that the Celtic missionaries in baptizing omitted one or more persons of the Trinity, and this was one of the reasons why the church of Rome anathematized [v.03 p.0366]them; Pope Nicholas, however (858-867), in the Responsa ad consulta Bulgarorum, allowed baptism to be valid tantum in nomine Christi, as in the Acts. Basil, in his work On the Holy Spirit just mentioned, condemns "baptism into the Lord alone" as insufficient. Baptism "into the death of Christ" is often specified by the Armenian fathers as that which alone was essential.

5. The Baptismal Formula.—The trinitarian formula and triple immersion were not consistently used from the start, nor did they always occur together. The Teaching of the Apostles indeed prescribes baptism in the name of the Father, Son, and Holy Spirit, but on the following page, it refers to those who have been baptized in the name of the Lord—the usual formula of the New Testament. In the 3rd century, baptism in the name of Christ was still so common that Pope Stephen declared it valid in opposition to Cyprian of Carthage. From Pope Zachariah (Ep. x.), we learn that the Celtic missionaries sometimes left out one or more persons of the Trinity during baptisms, which contributed to the Roman Church's decision to condemn them; however, Pope Nicholas (858-867), in the Responsa ad consulta Bulgarorum, affirmed that baptism was valid tantum in nomine Christi, as noted in the Acts. Basil, in his work On the Holy Spirit just mentioned, criticizes "baptism into the Lord alone" as inadequate. Baptism "into the death of Christ" is frequently identified by the Armenian fathers as the only essential element.

Ursinus, an African monk (in Gennad. de Scr. Eccl. xxvii.), Hilary (de Synodis, lxxxv.), the synod of Nemours (A.D. 1284), also asserted that baptism into the name of Christ alone was valid. The formula of Rome is, "I baptize thee in the name of Father and Son and Holy Spirit." In the East, "so-and-so, the servant of God, is baptized," &c. The Greeks add Amen after each person, and conclude with the words, "Now and ever and to aeons of aeons, amen."

Ursinus, an African monk (in Gennad. de Scr. Eccl. xxvii.), Hilary (de Synodis, lxxxv.), and the synod of Nemours (CE 1284) also claimed that baptism in the name of Christ alone was valid. The Roman formula is, "I baptize you in the name of the Father, the Son, and the Holy Spirit." In the East, it goes, "So-and-so, the servant of God, is baptized," etc. The Greeks add Amen after each person and finish with the words, "Now and ever and to the ages of ages, amen."

We first find in Tertullian trine immersion explained from the triple invocation, Nam nec semel, sed ter, ad singula nomina in personas singulas tinguimur: "Not once, but thrice, for the several names, into the several persons, are we dipped" (adv. Prax. xxvi.). And Jerome says: "We are thrice plunged, that the one sacrament of the Trinity may be shown forth." On the other hand, in numerous fathers of East and West, e.g. Leo of Rome, Athanasius, Gregory of Nyssa, Theophylactus, Cyril of Jerusalem and others, trine immersion was regarded as being symbolic of the three days' entombment of Christ; and in the Armenian baptismal rubric this interpretation is enjoined, as also in an epistle of Macarius of Jerusalem addressed to the Armenians (c. 330). In Armenian writers this interpretation is further associated with the idea of baptism into the death of Christ.

We first see Tertullian explain trine immersion in relation to the triple invocation, Nam nec semel, sed ter, ad singula nomina in personas singulas tinguimur: "Not once, but three times, for each name, we are dipped into each person" (adv. Prax. xxvi.). Jerome states: "We are immersed three times to reveal the one sacrament of the Trinity." Similarly, many fathers from both the East and West, such as Leo of Rome, Athanasius, Gregory of Nyssa, Theophylactus, Cyril of Jerusalem, and others, viewed trine immersion as symbolic of the three days Christ spent in the tomb. This interpretation is also noted in the Armenian baptismal rite and in a letter from Macarius of Jerusalem to the Armenians (c. 330). Armenian writers further connect this interpretation with the idea of baptism into the death of Christ.

Trine immersion then, as to the origin of which Basil confesses his ignorance, must be older than either of the rival explanations. These are clearly aetiological, and invented to explain an existing custom, which the church had adopted from its pagan medium. For pagan lustrations were normally threefold; thus Virgil writes (Aen. vi. 229): Ter socios pura circumtulit unda. Ovid (Met. vii. 189 and Fasti, iv. 315), Persius (ii. 16) and Horace (Ep. i. 1. 37) similarly speak of trine lustrations; and on the last mentioned passage the scholiast Acro remarks: "He uses the words thrice purely, because people in expiating their sins, plunge themselves in thrice." Such examples of the ancient usage encounter us everywhere in Greek and Latin antiquity.

Trine immersion, which Basil admits he doesn’t understand the origin of, must be older than either of the competing explanations. These explanations are clearly aetiological, created to justify a tradition that the church adopted from its pagan practices. Pagan purification rituals were typically done in three parts; for instance, Virgil writes (Aen. vi. 229): Ter socios pura circumtulit unda. Ovid (Met. vii. 189 and Fasti, iv. 315), Persius (ii. 16), and Horace (Ep. i. 1. 37) also refer to trine lustrations. On the last-mentioned passage, the scholiast Acro notes: "He uses the words thrice purely because people, in atoning for their sins, immerse themselves three times." Such examples of this ancient practice can be found everywhere in Greek and Latin antiquity.

6. Age of Baptism.—In the oldest Greek, Armenian, Syrian and other rites of baptism, a service of giving a Christian (i.e. non-pagan) name, or of sealing a child on its eighth day, is found. According to it the priest, either at the door of the church or at the home, blessed the infant, sealed it (this not in Armenia) with the sign of the cross on its forehead, and prayed that in due season (ἐν καιρῷ εὐθέτῳ) or at the proper time (Armenian) it may enter the holy Catholic church. This rite announces itself as the analogue of Christ's circumcision.

6. Age of Baptism.—In the oldest Greek, Armenian, Syrian, and other baptism rituals, there is a service of giving a Christian (i.e. non-pagan) name, or of blessing a child on its eighth day. According to this practice, the priest, either at the church door or at home, blessed the infant, marked it (not in Armenia) with the sign of the cross on its forehead, and prayed that at the right time (in the right time) or when appropriate (Armenian), it may enter the holy Catholic church. This rite is seen as the equivalent of Christ's circumcision.

On the fortieth day from birth another rite is prescribed, of churching the child, which is now taken into the church with its mother. Both are blessed by the clergy, whose petition now is that God "may preserve this child and cause him to grow up by the unseen grace of His power and made him worthy in due season of the washing of baptism." As the first rite corresponds to the circumcision and naming of Jesus, so does the second to His presentation in the temple. These two rites really begin the catechumenate or period of instruction in the faith and discipline of the church. It depended on the individual how long he would wait for initiation. Whenever he felt inclined, he gave in his name as a candidate. This was usually done at the beginning of Lent. The bishop and clergy next examined the candidates one by one, and ascertained from their neighbours whether they had led such exemplary lives as to be worthy of admission. In case of strangers from another church certificates of character had to be produced. If a man seemed unworthy, the bishop dismissed him until another occasion, when he might be worthier; but if all was satisfactory he was admitted, in the West as a competens or asker, in the East as a φωτιζόμενος, i.e. one in course of being illumined. Usually two sponsors made themselves responsible for the past life of the candidate and for the sincerity of his faith and repentance. The essential thing was that a man should come to baptism of his own free will and not under compulsion or from hope of gain. Macarius of Jerusalem (op. cit.) declares that the grace of the spirit is given in answer to our prayers and entreaties for it, and that even a font is not needful, but only the wish and desire for grace. Tertullian, however, in his work On Baptism, holds that even that is not always enough. Some girls and boys at Carthage had asked to be baptized, and there were some who urged the granting of their request on the score that Christ said: "Forbid them not to come unto Me" (Matt. xix. 14), and: "To each that asketh thee give" (Luke vi. 30). Tertullian replies that "We must beware of giving the holy thing to dogs and of casting pearls before swine." He cites 1 Tim. v. 22: "Lay not on thy hands hastily, lest thou share in another's sins." He denies that the precedents of the eunuch baptized by Philip or of Paul baptized without hesitation by Simon (to which the other party appealed) were relevant. He dwells on the risk run by the sponsors, in case the candidates for whose purity they went bail should fall into sin. It is more expedient, he concludes, to delay baptism. Why should persons still in the age of innocence be in a hurry to be baptized and win remission of sins? Let people first learn to feel their need of salvation, so that we may be sure of giving it only to those who really want it. Especially let the unmarried postpone it. The risks of the age of puberty are extreme. Let people have married or be anyhow steeled in continence before they are admitted to baptism. It would appear from the homilies of Aphraates (c. 340) that in the Syriac church also it was usual to renounce the married relation after baptism. Cyril of Jerusalem, in his Catecheses, insists on "the longing for the heavenly polity, on the goodly resolution and attendant hope" of the catechumen (Pro. Cat. ch. 1.). If the resolution be not genuine, the bodily washing, he says, profits nothing. "God asks for nothing else except a goodly determination. Say not: How can my sins be wiped out? I tell thee, by willing, by believing" (ch. viii.). So again (Cat. 1. ch. iii.) "God gives not his holy treasures to the dogs; but where he sees the goodly determination, there he bestows the seed of salvation.... Those then who would receive the spiritual saving seal have need of a determination and will of their own.... Grace has need of faith on our part." In Jerusalem, therefore, whither believers flocked from all over Christendom to be buried, the official point of view as late as A.D. 350 was entirely that of Tertullian. Tertullian's scruples were not long respected in Carthage, for in Cyprian's works (c. 250.) we already hear of new-born infants being baptized. In the same region of Africa, however, Monica would not let her son Augustine be baptized in boyhood, though he clamoured to be. She was a conservative. In the Greek world thirty was a usual age in the 4th century for persons to be baptized, in imitation of Christ. It is still the age preferred by the Baptists of Armenia. But it was often delayed until the deathbed, for the primitive idea that mortal sins committed after baptism were sins against the Holy Spirit and unforgivable, still influenced men, and survived among the Cathars up to the 14th century. The fathers, however, of the 4th century emphasized already the danger of deferring the rite until men fall into mortal sickness, when they may be unconscious or paralysed or otherwise unable to profess their faith and repentance, or to swallow the viaticum. Gregory Theologus therefore (c. 340) suggests the age of three years as suitable for baptism, because by then a child is old enough, if not to understand the questions put to him, at any rate to speak and make the necessary responses. Gregory sanctions the baptism of infants only where there is imminent danger of death. "It is better that they should be sanctified without their own sense of it than that they pass away unsealed and uninitiated." And he justifies his view by this, that circumcision, which foreshadowed the Christian seal (σφραγίς), was imposed on the eighth day on those who as yet had no use of reason. He also urges the analogue of "the anointing of the doorposts, which preserved the first-born by things that have no sense." On such grounds was justified the transition of a baptism which began as a spontaneous act of [v.03 p.0367]self-consecration into an opus operatum. How long after this it was before infant baptism became normal inside the Byzantine church, we do not exactly know, but it was natural that mothers should insist on their children being liberated from Satan and safeguarded from demons as soon as might be. The change came more quickly in Latin than in Greek Christendom, and very slowly indeed in the Armenian and Georgian churches. Augustine's insistence on original sin, a doctrine never quite accepted in his sense in the East, hurried on the change.

On the fortieth day after birth, another ceremony is performed, called churching, where the child is taken into the church along with its mother. Both are blessed by the clergy, who pray that God "may watch over this child and help him grow up with the unseen grace of His power, making him worthy in due season of baptism." The first rite corresponds to the circumcision and naming of Jesus, while the second relates to His presentation in the temple. These two ceremonies mark the beginning of the catechumenate, a time for learning about the faith and discipline of the church. How long an individual waited for initiation was up to him. When he felt ready, he would submit his name as a candidate, usually at the start of Lent. The bishop and clergy would then evaluate the candidates one at a time, checking with their neighbors to confirm that they had lived exemplary lives deserving admission. If the candidates were from another church, character references were required. If someone was deemed unworthy, the bishop would dismiss him until a later time when he might be deemed more suitable; if everything was satisfactory, he would be admitted, referred to in the West as a competens or asker, and in the East as a illuminated, meaning one on the path to enlightenment. Typically, two sponsors would take responsibility for the candidate's past conduct and the sincerity of his faith and repentance. The key point was that a person should come to baptism of their own accord and not out of coercion or for personal gain. Macarius of Jerusalem (op. cit.) states that the grace of the Spirit is granted in response to our prayers and requests for it, and that even a baptismal font isn’t necessary—just the desire for grace. However, Tertullian, in his work On Baptism, argues that even that may not always be enough. Some children in Carthage had asked for baptism, and others argued that their request should be granted because Christ said: "Do not hinder them from coming to Me" (Matt. xix. 14), and: "Give to everyone who asks" (Luke vi. 30). Tertullian responds that "we must be careful not to give holy things to dogs or cast pearls before swine." He cites 1 Tim. v. 22: "Do not be hasty in laying on hands, or you may share in the sins of others." He dismisses the examples of the eunuch baptized by Philip or Paul baptized without hesitation by Simon as irrelevant. He highlights the risk faced by sponsors, should the candidates they vouch for fall into sin. He concludes that it is better to delay baptism. Why should those still innocent hurry to be baptized and receive forgiveness for sins? People should first learn to feel their need for salvation to ensure it is given only to those who truly want it. Especially, he advises the unmarried to postpone it. The challenges during puberty are significant. People should be married or at least prepared in their continence before being admitted to baptism. From the homilies of Aphraates (c. 340), it appears that in the Syriac church, it was also customary to renounce marriage after baptism. Cyril of Jerusalem, in his Catecheses, emphasizes "the longing for the heavenly community, the good resolution and hope" of the catechumen (Pro. Cat. ch. 1.). If the resolution is not sincere, he states, the physical washing means nothing. "God asks for nothing but a good determination. Do not say: How can my sins be erased? I tell you, by willing, by believing" (ch. viii.). Again, he says (Cat. 1. ch. iii.) "God does not give His holy treasures to dogs; where He sees sincere determination, there He gives the seed of salvation... Those who wish to receive the spiritual saving mark need their own determination and will... Grace requires our faith." In Jerusalem, where believers gathered from across Christendom to be buried, the official stance as late as CE 350 was entirely in line with Tertullian’s views. However, Tertullian's concerns were soon ignored in Carthage, as Cyprian's works (c. 250.) already reference the baptism of newborn infants. In the same African region, though, Monica refused to allow her son Augustine to be baptized during his childhood, even though he insisted. She was traditional. In the Greek world, thirty was a common age for baptism in the 4th century, following Christ's example. This age preference is still upheld by Baptists in Armenia. However, baptism was often postponed until death, due to the belief that mortal sins committed after baptism were sins against the Holy Spirit and unforgivable, a notion that persisted among the Cathars until the 14th century. The church fathers of the 4th century, however, highlighted the dangers of delaying the ceremony until individuals fell seriously ill, where they might be unconscious, paralyzed, or otherwise unable to express their faith and repentance or receive final communion. Therefore, Gregory Theologus (c. 340) suggested that three years is an appropriate age for baptism since by that age, a child is capable of speaking and making necessary responses, even if they don't fully understand the questions. Gregory endorsed the baptism of infants only when death was imminent. "It is better for them to be sanctified without their awareness than to pass away unmarked and uninitiated." He justifies his viewpoint by stating that circumcision, which foreshadowed the Christian seal (seal), was performed on the eighth day on those who had yet to reach reason. He also points to the analogy of "the anointing of the doorposts, which saved the firstborn through things without sense." Such reasoning supported the evolution of baptism from a spontaneous act of self-consecration into an opus operatum. It’s unclear exactly when infant baptism became common in the Byzantine church, but it was expected that mothers would want their children freed from Satan and protected from demons as soon as possible. The transition happened more quickly in Latin than in Greek Christianity, and very slowly in the Armenian and Georgian churches. Augustine's emphasis on original sin, a doctrine not fully accepted in the East, accelerated the change.

7. Confirmation.—In the West, however, the sacrament has been saved from becoming merely magical by the rite of confirmation or of reception of the Spirit being separated from the baptism of regeneration and reserved for an adult age. The English church confirms at fifteen or sixteen; the Roman rather earlier. The catechetic course, which formerly preceded the complete rite, now intervenes between its two halves; and the sponsors who formerly attested the worthiness of the candidate and received him up as anadochi out of the font, have become god-parents, who take the baptismal vows vicariously for infants who cannot answer for themselves. In the East, on the contrary, the complete rite is read over the child, who is thus confirmed from the first. The Roman church already foreshadowed the change and gave a peculiar salience to confirmation as early as the 3rd century, when it decreed that persons already baptized by heretics, but reverting to the church should not be baptized over again, but only have hands laid on them. It was otherwise in Africa and the East. Here they insisted in such cases on a repetition of the entire rite, baptism and confirmation together. The Cathars (q.v.) of the middle ages discarded water baptism altogether as being a Jewish rite, but retained the laying on of hands with the traditio precis as sufficient initiation. This they called the spiritual baptism, and interpreted Matt. xxviii. 19, as a command to practise it, and not water baptism.

7. Confirmation.—In the West, however, the sacrament has been prevented from becoming merely magical by separating the rite of confirmation or receiving the Spirit from the baptism of regeneration, reserving it for adulthood. The English church confirms at age fifteen or sixteen, while the Roman Church does it a bit earlier. The catechetical course that used to precede the complete rite now comes between its two parts; and the sponsors who once confirmed the candidate's worthiness and brought them up as anadochi from the font have become godparents, who take the baptismal vows on behalf of infants who can't answer for themselves. In the East, on the other hand, the complete rite is performed over the child, so they are confirmed from the very beginning. The Roman Church hinted at this change and emphasized confirmation as early as the 3rd century, when it ruled that people already baptized by heretics, returning to the church, should not be baptized again but just have hands laid on them. In Africa and the East, however, they insisted on repeating the entire rite, combining baptism and confirmation. The Cathars (q.v.) of the Middle Ages rejected water baptism altogether as a Jewish practice but kept the laying on of hands with the traditio precus as sufficient initiation. They referred to this as spiritual baptism and understood Matt. xxviii. 19 as a command to practice it, rather than water baptism.

8. Disciplina arcani.—The communication to the candidates of the Creed and Lord's Prayer was a solemn rite. Cyril of Jerusalem, in his instruction of the catechumens, urges them to learn the Creed by heart, but not write it down. On no account must they divulge it to unbaptized persons. The same rule already meets us in Clement of Alexandria before the year 200. In time this rule gave rise to what is called the Disciplina arcani. Following the fashion of the pagan mysteries in which men were only permitted to gaze upon the sacred objects after minute lustrations and scrupulous purifications, Christian teachers came to represent the Creed, Lord's Prayer and Lord's Supper as mysteries to be guarded in silence and never divulged either to the unbaptized or to the pagans. And yet Justin Martyr, Tertullian and other apologists of the 2nd century had found nothing to conceal from the eye and ear of pagan emperors and their ministers. In the 3rd century this love of mystification reached the pitch of hiding even the gospels from the unclean eyes of pagans. Probably Mgr. Pierre Battifol is correct in supposing that the Disciplina arcani was more or less of a make-believe, a bit of belletristic trifling on the part of the over-rhetorical Fathers of the 4th and 5th centuries.[3] It is in them that the atmosphere of mystery attains a maximum of intensity. They clearly felt themselves called upon to out-trump the pagan Mystae. Yet it is inconceivable that men and women should spend years, even whole lives, as catechumens within the pale of the church, and really remain ignorant all the time of the Trinitarian Epiclesis used in baptism, of the Creed, and above all of the Lord's Prayer. Wherever the Disciplina arcani, i.e. the obligation to keep secret the formula of the threefold name, the creed based on it and the Lord's Prayer, was taken seriously, it was akin to the scruple which exists everywhere among primitive religionists against revealing to the profane the knowledge of a powerful name or magic formula. The name of a deity was often kept secret and not allowed to be written down, as among the Jews.

8. Disciplina arcani.—Sharing the Creed and the Lord's Prayer with candidates was a serious ritual. Cyril of Jerusalem, in teaching the catechumens, encourages them to memorize the Creed but not to write it down. They must never reveal it to unbaptized people. This same guideline appears in Clement of Alexandria before the year 200. Over time, this rule led to what is called the Disciplina arcani. Similar to the pagan mysteries, where only those who had undergone specific purifications could view sacred items, Christian teachers began to regard the Creed, the Lord's Prayer, and the Lord's Supper as mysteries to be kept secret and never shared with the unbaptized or pagans. However, Justin Martyr, Tertullian, and other defenders of the faith in the 2nd century found nothing to hide from the eyes and ears of pagan emperors and their officials. By the 3rd century, this tendency towards secrecy escalated to the point of concealing even the gospels from the 'unclean' eyes of pagans. Mgr. Pierre Battifol probably rightly assumes that the Disciplina arcani was somewhat of a pretense, a literary game played by the overly rhetorical Fathers of the 4th and 5th centuries.[3] During this time, the atmosphere of mystery peaked. They clearly felt compelled to outdo the pagan Mystae. Yet it's hard to believe that men and women would spend years, or even their entire lives, as catechumens within the church, while truly remaining unaware of the Trinitarian Epiclesis used in baptism, the Creed, and especially the Lord's Prayer. Wherever the Disciplina arcani, i.e. the requirement to keep secret the formula of the threefold name, the Creed based on it, and the Lord's Prayer, was taken seriously, it resembled the scruples seen among primitive religious practitioners against revealing powerful names or magical formulas to the uninformed. The name of a deity was often kept secret and not written down, as was common among the Jews.

9. Regeneration.—The idea of regeneration seldom occurs in the New Testament, and perhaps not at all in connexion with baptism; for in the conversation with Nicodemus, John iii. 3-8, the words "of water and" in v. 5 offend the context, spiritual re-birth alone being insisted upon in vv. 3, 6, 7 and 8; moreover, Justin Martyr, who cites v. 5, seems to omit them. Nor is there any mention of water in ch. i. 13, where, according to the oldest text, Christ is represented as having been born or begotten not of blood, nor of the will of the flesh, nor of the will of man, but of God.

9. Regeneration.—The concept of regeneration rarely appears in the New Testament, and possibly not at all in relation to baptism; in the conversation with Nicodemus, John 3:3-8, the phrase "of water and" in verse 5 disrupts the context, as the focus is solely on spiritual rebirth in verses 3, 6, 7, and 8. Additionally, Justin Martyr, who references verse 5, seems to leave it out. There is also no reference to water in chapter 1, verse 13, where, according to the earliest texts, Christ is described as being born not of blood, nor of the will of the flesh, nor of the will of man, but of God.

In 1 Pet. i. 3, it is said of the saints that God the Father begat them anew unto a living hope by the resurrection of Jesus, and in v. 23 that they have been begotten again, not of corruptible seed, but of incorruptible through the word of God. But here again it is not clear that the writer has in view water baptism or any rite at all as the means and occasion of regeneration. In the conversation with Nicodemus we seem to overhear a protest against the growing tendency of the last years of the 1st century to substitute formal sacraments for the free afflatus of the spirit, and to "crib, cabin and confine" the gift of prophecy.

In 1 Pet. i. 3, it states that God the Father has caused the saints to be born again into a living hope through the resurrection of Jesus, and in v. 23 that they have been reborn, not from perishable seed, but from imperishable seed through the word of God. However, it’s still unclear whether the author is referring to water baptism or any ritual as the means and occasion for regeneration. In the discussion with Nicodemus, we seem to catch a hint of resistance against the increasing trend in the last years of the 1st century to replace genuine spiritual inspiration with formal sacraments, and to "crib, cabin and confine" the gift of prophecy.

The passage where re-birth is best put forward in connexion with baptism is Luke iii. 22, where ancient texts, including the Gospel of the Hebrews, read, "Thou art my beloved Son, this day have I begotten Thee." These words were taken in the sense that Jesus was then re-born of the Spirit an adoptive Son of God and Messiah; and with this reading is bound up the entire adoptionist school of Christology. It apparently underlies the symbolizing of Christ as a fish in the art of the catacombs, and in the literature of the 2nd century. Tertullian prefaces with this idea his work on baptism. Nos pisciculi secundum ΙΧΘΥΝ nostrum Jesum Christum in aqua nascimur. "We little fishes, after the example of our Fish Jesus Christ, are born in the water." So about the year 440 the Gaulish poet Orientius wrote of Christ; Piscis natus aquis, auctor baptismatis ipse est. "A fish born of the waters is himself originator of baptism."

The passage that best presents the idea of re-birth in relation to baptism is Luke 3:22, where ancient texts, including the Gospel of the Hebrews, say, "You are my beloved Son; today I have begotten You." These words were interpreted to mean that Jesus was re-born of the Spirit as the adopted Son of God and the Messiah; this interpretation is linked to the entire adoptionist perspective in Christology. It seems to be the reason Christ is symbolized as a fish in catacomb art and in 2nd-century literature. Tertullian introduces this idea in his work on baptism: Nos pisciculi secundum FISH nostrum Jesum Christum in aqua nascimur. "We little fishes, following the example of our Fish Jesus Christ, are born in the water." Similarly, around the year 440, the Gaulish poet Orientius wrote of Christ: Piscis natus aquis, auctor baptismatis ipse est. "A fish born of the waters is himself the originator of baptism."

But before his time and within a hundred years of Tertullian this symbolism in its original significance had become heretical, and the orthodox were thrown back on another explanation of it. This was that the word ΙΧΘΥΣ is made up of the letters which begin the Greek words meaning "Jesus Christ, Son of God, Saviour." An entire mythology soon grew up around the idea of re-birth. The font was viewed as the womb of the virgin mother church, who was in some congregations, for example, in the early churches of Gaul, no abstraction, but a divine aeon watching over and sympathizing with the children of her womb, the recipient even of hymns of praise and humble supplications. Other mythoplastic growths succeeded, one of which must be noticed. The sponsors or anadochi, who, after the introduction of infant baptism came to be called god-fathers and god-mothers, were really in a spiritual relation to the children they took up out of the font. This relation was soon by the canonists identified with the blood-tie which connects real parents with their offspring, and the corollary drawn that children, who in baptism had the same god-parent, were real brothers and sisters, who might not marry either each the other or real children of the said god-parent. The reformed churches have set aside this fiction, but in the Latin and Eastern churches it has created a distinct and very powerful marriage taboo.

But before his time, within a hundred years of Tertullian, this symbolism in its original meaning became heretical, and the orthodox had to rely on another interpretation. They argued that the word ΙΧΘΥΣ is formed from the initials of the Greek words that mean "Jesus Christ, Son of God, Savior." Soon, an entire mythology developed around the idea of rebirth. The baptismal font was seen as the womb of the virgin mother church, who in some congregations, like the early churches in Gaul, wasn't just an abstract concept but a divine being watching over and caring for her children, even receiving hymns of praise and humble requests. Other mythological ideas emerged as well, one of which deserves mention. The sponsors or anadochi, who were known as godfathers and godmothers after the introduction of infant baptism, held a spiritual connection to the children they lifted out of the font. This connection was soon recognized by the canonists as equivalent to the blood relationship between real parents and their children, leading to the conclusion that children baptized with the same godparent were considered real siblings, who could not marry each other or the biological children of that godparent. The reformed churches have dismissed this idea, but in the Latin and Eastern churches, it has created a strong marriage taboo.

10. Relation to Repentance.—Baptism justified the believer, that is to say, constituted him a saint whose past sins were abolished. Sin after baptism excluded the sinner afresh from the divine grace and from the sacraments. He fell back into the status of a catechumen, and it was much discussed from the 2nd century onwards whether he could be restored to the church at all, and, if so, how. A rite was devised, called exhomologesis, by which, after a fresh term of repentance, marked by austerities more strict than any Trappist monk imposes on himself to-day, the persons lapsed from grace could re-enter the church. In effect this rite was a repetition of baptism, the water of the font alone being omitted. Such restoration could in the earlier church only be effected once. A second lapse from the state of grace entailed perpetual exclusion from the sacraments, the means of salvation. As has been remarked above, the terror of post-baptismal sin and the fact that only one restoration was allowable influenced many as late as the 4th century to remain catechumens all their lives, and, like Constantine, to receive baptism on the [v.03 p.0368]deathbed alone. The same scruples endured among the medieval Cathars. (See Penance and Novatianus.)

10. Relation to Repentance.—Baptism justified the believer, making them a saint whose past sins were wiped away. However, sin after baptism cut the sinner off from divine grace and the sacraments again. They would revert to the status of a catechumen, and from the 2nd century onward, there was much debate about whether they could be welcomed back into the church, and if so, how. A rite called exhomologesis was created, allowing those who had fallen from grace to rejoin the church after a new period of repentance that involved stricter austerities than even today’s most rigorous monks. Essentially, this rite was like a second baptism, except for the water from the font. In the early church, this kind of restoration could only happen once. A second fall from grace meant permanent exclusion from the sacraments, which are essential for salvation. As mentioned earlier, the fear of sinning after baptism and the fact that only one restoration was permitted led many, even as late as the 4th century, to stay as catechumens their entire lives, receiving baptism only on their deathbeds, like Constantine. The same concerns persisted among the medieval Cathars. (See Repentance and Novatian.)

11. Baptism for the Dead.—Paul, in 1 Cor. xv. 29, glances at this as an established practice familiar to those whom he addresses. Three explanations are possible: (1) The saints before they were quickened or made alive together with Christ, were dead through their trespasses and sins. In baptism they were buried with Christ and rose, like Him, from the dead. We can, therefore, paraphrase v. 29 thus: "Else what shall they do which are baptized for their dead selves?" &c. It is in behalf of his own sinful, i.e. dead self, that the sinner is baptized and receives eternal life. (2) Contact with the dead entailed a pollution which lasted at least a day and must be washed away by ablutions, before a man is re-admitted to religious cult. This was the rule among the Jews. Is it possible that the words "for the dead" signify "because of contact with the dead"? (3) Both these explanations are forced, and it is more probable that by a make-believe common in all religions, and not unknown in the earliest church, the sins of dead relatives, about whose salvation their survivors were anxious, were transferred into living persons, who assumed for the nonce their names and were baptized in their behalf, so in vicarious wise rendering it possible for the sins of the dead to be washed away. The Mormons have this rite. The idea of transferring sin into another man or into an animal, and so getting it purged through him or it, was widespread in the age of Paul and long afterwards. Chrysostom says that the substitutes were put into the beds of the deceased, and assuming the voice of the dead asked for baptism and remission of sins. Tertullian and others attest this custom among the followers of Cerinthus and Marcion.

11. Baptism for the Dead.—Paul, in 1 Cor. xv. 29, briefly mentions this as a common practice familiar to his audience. There are three possible explanations: (1) The saints before being made alive with Christ were dead because of their wrongdoings. In baptism, they were buried with Christ and rose, like Him, from the dead. Therefore, we can rephrase v. 29 as: "Otherwise, what will those do who are baptized for their dead selves?" Essentially, it is on behalf of their own sinful, i.e. dead selves that sinners are baptized and receive eternal life. (2) Being in contact with the dead caused a pollution that lasted at least a day and had to be cleansed through washing before a person could return to religious activities. This was the rule among the Jews. Could it be that the words "for the dead" mean "because of contact with the dead"? (3) Both of these explanations seem forced, and it’s more likely that, through a practice common in many religions and not unknown in the early church, the sins of deceased relatives, whose salvation their loved ones were concerned about, were symbolically transferred to living people, who took on their names temporarily and were baptized on their behalf, thus allowing for the cleansing of the sins of the dead. The Mormons practice this rite. The concept of transferring sin onto another person or an animal to have it purged was widespread in Paul’s time and after. Chrysostom mentions that substitutes were placed in the beds of the deceased and, speaking as the dead, asked for baptism and forgiveness of sins. Tertullian and others confirm this custom among the followers of Cerinthus and Marcion.

12. Use of the Name.—In Acts iv. 7, the rulers and priests of the Jews summon Peter and inquire by what power or in what name he has healed the lame. Here a belief is assumed which pervades ancient magic and religion. Only so far as we can get away from the modern view that a person's name is a trifling accident, and breathe the atmosphere which broods over ancient religions, can we understand the use of the name in baptisms, exorcisms, prayers, purifications and consecrations. For a name carried with it, for those who were so blessed as to be acquainted with it, whatever power and influence its owner wielded in heaven or on earth or under the earth. A vow or prayer formulated in or through a certain name was fraught with the prestige of him whose name it was. Thus the psalmist addressing Jehovah cries (Ps. liv. 1): "Save me, O God, by Thy name, and judge me in Thy might." And in Acts iii. 16, it is the name itself which renders strong and whole the man who believed therein. In Acts xviii. 15, the Jews assail Paul because he has trusted and appealed to the name of a Messiah whom they regard as an overthrower of the law; for Paul believed that God had invested Jesus with a name above all names, potent to constrain and overcome all lesser powers, good or evil, in heaven or earth or under earth. Baptism then in the name or through the name or into the name of Christ placed the believer under the influence and tutelage of Christ's personality, as before he was in popular estimation under the influence of stars and horoscope. Nay, more, it imported that personality into him, making him a limb or member of Christ's body, and immortal as Christ was immortal. Nearly all the passages in which the word name is used in the New Testament become more intelligible if it be rendered personality. In Rev. xi. 13, the revisers are obliged to render it by persons, and should equally have done so in iii. 4: "Thou hast a few names (i.e. persons) in Sardis which did not defile their garments." (See Consecration.)

12. Use of the Name.—In Acts 4:7, the Jewish rulers and priests call Peter and ask by what power or in what name he has healed the lame man. This assumes a belief that runs throughout ancient magic and religion. To really understand the importance of names in baptisms, exorcisms, prayers, purifications, and consecrations, we need to move away from the modern idea that a person’s name is just a minor detail, and instead embrace the mindset of ancient religions. For those who understood it, a name carried with it whatever power and influence its owner had, whether in heaven, on earth, or below. A vow or prayer made in or through a certain name held the weight of the person whose name was invoked. So, when the psalmist addresses Jehovah, he boldly says (Psalm 54:1): "Save me, O God, by Your name, and judge me by Your might." And in Acts 3:16, it is the name itself that makes the man who believed in it strong and whole. In Acts 18:15, the Jews attack Paul because he has placed his trust in the name of a Messiah they see as a threat to the law; Paul believed that God gave Jesus a name above all names, one powerful enough to overcome all lesser powers, whether good or evil, in heaven, on earth, or below. Thus, being baptized in the name, through the name, or into the name of Christ puts the believer under the influence and guidance of Christ’s personality, similar to how people used to be seen as influenced by stars and horoscopes. Even more, it brings that personality into the believer, making them a part of Christ's body, immortal like Christ himself. Almost all the instances where the word name appears in the New Testament become clearer if we interpret it as personality. In Revelation 11:13, the revisers have to translate it as persons, and they should have done the same in 3:4: "You have a few names (i.e. persons) in Sardis who did not defile their garments." (See Dedication.)

13. Origin of Christian Baptism.—When it is asked, Was this a continuance of the baptism of John or was it merely the baptism of proselytes?—a distinction is implied between the two latter which was not always real. In relation to the publicans and soldiers who, smitten with remorse, sought out John in the wilderness, his baptism was a purification from their past and so far identical with the proselyte's bath; but so far as it raised them up to be children unto Abraham and filled them with the Messianic hope, it advanced them further than that bath could do, and assured them of a place in the kingdom of God, soon to be established—this, without imposing circumcision on them; for the ordinary proselyte was circumcised as well as baptized. For the Jews, however, who came to John, his baptism could not have the significance of the proselyte's baptism, but rather accorded with another baptism undergone by Jews who wished to consecrate their lives by stricter study and practice of the law. So Epictetus remarks that he only really understands Judaism who knows "the baptized Jew" (τὸν βεβαμμένον). We gather from Acts xix. 4, that John had merely baptized in the name of the coming Messiah, without identifying him with Jesus of Nazareth. The apostolic age supplied this identification, and the normal use during it seems to have been "into Christ Jesus," or "in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ," or "of Jesus Christ" simply, or "of the Lord Jesus Christ." Paul explains these formulas as being equivalent to "into the death of Christ Jesus," as if the faithful were in the rite raised from death into everlasting life. The likeness of the baptismal ceremony with Christ's death and resurrection ensured a real union with him of the believer who underwent the ceremony, according to the well-known principle in sacris simulata pro veris accipi.

13. Origin of Christian Baptism.—When it's asked whether this was a continuation of John's baptism or just the baptism for converts, there's a distinction implied between the two that wasn't always clear. For the tax collectors and soldiers who, feeling guilty, sought out John in the wilderness, his baptism was a cleansing from their past and, in that sense, similar to the bath for converts; but since it lifted them up to be children of Abraham and filled them with the hope of the Messiah, it took them further than that bath could and guaranteed them a place in the soon-to-be-established kingdom of God—without requiring circumcision; because the typical convert was both circumcised and baptized. However, for the Jews who came to John, his baptism couldn’t carry the same meaning as the baptism for converts; instead, it was more aligned with another type of baptism done by Jews who wanted to dedicate their lives through stricter study and practice of the law. As Epictetus points out, you only really understand Judaism if you know "the baptized Jew" (τὸν βεβαμμένον). We see in Acts xix. 4 that John baptized only in the name of the coming Messiah, without identifying him as Jesus of Nazareth. The apostolic age provided this identification, and it seems the usual phrasing during that time was "into Christ Jesus," or "in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ," or simply "of Jesus Christ," or "of the Lord Jesus Christ." Paul clarifies that these phrases are equivalent to "into the death of Christ Jesus," as if the believers who went through the rite were raised from death into eternal life. The likeness of the baptismal ceremony to Christ's death and resurrection ensured a real connection with him for the believer undergoing the ceremony, in accordance with the well-known principle in sacris simulata pro veris accipi.

But opinion was still fluid about baptism in the apostolic age, especially as to its connexion with the descent of the Spirit. The Spirit falls on the disciples and others at Pentecost without any baptism at all, and Paul alone of the apostles was baptized. So far was the afflatus of the Spirit from being conditioned by the rite, that in Acts x. 44 ff., the gift of the Spirit was first poured out upon the Gentiles who heard the word preached so that they spoke with tongues, and it was only after these manifestations that they were baptized with water in the name of Jesus Christ at the instance of Peter. We can divine from this passage why Paul was so eager himself to preach the word, and left it to others to baptize.

But opinions were still changing about baptism in the apostolic age, especially regarding its connection to the descent of the Spirit. The Spirit came down on the disciples and others at Pentecost without any baptism at all, and Paul was the only apostle who was baptized. The presence of the Spirit was so independent of the ritual that in Acts x. 44 ff., the gift of the Spirit was first given to the Gentiles who listened to the message, and they spoke in tongues. It was only after these signs that they were baptized with water in the name of Jesus Christ under Peter's direction. This passage helps us understand why Paul was so eager to preach the word himself and left the baptizing to others.

But as a rule the repentant underwent baptism in the name of Christ Jesus, and washed away their sins before hands were laid upon them unto reception of the Spirit. Apollos, who only knew the baptism of John (Acts xviii. 24), needed only instruction in the prophetic gnosis at the hands of Priscilla and Aquila in order to become a full disciple. On the other hand, in Acts xix. 1-7, twelve disciples, for such they were already accounted, who had been baptized into John's baptism, i.e. into the name of him that should follow John, but had not even heard of the Holy Spirit, are at Paul's instance re-baptized into the name of the Lord Jesus. Then Paul himself lays hands on them and the Holy Ghost comes upon them, so that they speak with tongues and prophecy. Not only do we hear of these varieties of practice, but also of the laying on of hands together with prayer as a substantive rite unconnected with baptism. The seven deacons were so ordained. And this rite of laying on hands, which was in antiquity a recognized way of transmitting the occult power or virtue of one man into another, is used in Acts ix. 17, by Ananias, in order that Paul may recover his sight and be filled with the Holy Ghost. Saul and Barnabas equally are separated for a certain missionary work by imposition of hands with prayer and fasting, and are so sent forth by the Holy Ghost. It was also a way of healing the sick (Acts xxviii. 8), and as such accompanied by anointing with oil (Jas. v. 14). The Roman church then had early precedents for separating confirmation from baptism. It would also appear that in the primitive age confirmation and ordination were one and the same rite; and so they continued to be among the dissident believers of the middle ages, who, however, often dropped the water rite altogether. (See Cathars.) More than one sect of the 2nd century rejected water baptism on the ground that knowledge of the truth in itself makes us free, and that external material washing of a perishable body cannot contribute to the illumination of the inner man, complete without it. St Paul himself recognizes (1 Cor. vii. 14) that children, one of whose parents only is a believer, are ipso facto not unclean, but holy. Even an unbelieving husband or wife is sanctified by a believing partner. If we remember the force of the words ἅγιος ἁγιάζω (cf. 1 Cor. [v.03 p.0369]i. 2), here used of children and parents, we realize how far off was St Paul from the positions of Augustine.

But generally, those who repented underwent baptism in the name of Christ Jesus to wash away their sins before hands were laid on them for the reception of the Spirit. Apollos, who only knew John's baptism (Acts xviii. 24), just needed guidance in the prophetic knowledge from Priscilla and Aquila to become a full disciple. In contrast, in Acts xix. 1-7, twelve disciples, already regarded as such, had been baptized with John's baptism—meaning they were baptized in the name of the one who would come after John—but had not even heard of the Holy Spirit. At Paul's request, they were re-baptized in the name of the Lord Jesus. Then Paul laid hands on them, and the Holy Spirit came on them, enabling them to speak in tongues and prophesy. We see different practices noted, including the laying on of hands accompanied by prayer as a significant rite separate from baptism. The seven deacons were ordained this way. This rite of laying on hands, which in ancient times was a recognized method of transmitting one person's power or virtue to another, is utilized in Acts ix. 17 by Ananias to restore Paul's sight and fill him with the Holy Spirit. Saul and Barnabas were also set apart for a specific missionary task through the laying on of hands with prayer and fasting, sent forth by the Holy Spirit. It was also a method of healing the sick (Acts xxviii. 8), often accompanied by anointing with oil (Jas. v. 14). The Roman church had early examples for separating confirmation from baptism. It also seems that in the early church, confirmation and ordination were the same rite; they remained so among the dissenting believers of the Middle Ages, who often omitted the water rite altogether. (See Cathars.) More than one sect in the 2nd century dismissed water baptism, arguing that knowledge of the truth itself sets us free and that a physical cleansing of a temporary body can't enhance the enlightenment of the inner self, which is complete without it. St. Paul himself acknowledges (1 Cor. vii. 14) that children with only one believing parent are not unclean, but holy. Even an unbelieving spouse is sanctified by a believing partner. If we consider the significance of the words holy sanctify (cf. 1 Cor. [v.03 p.0369]i. 2), used here for children and parents, we realize how far St. Paul was from Augustine's views.

The question arises whether Jesus Himself instituted baptism as a condition of entry into the Messianic kingdom. The fourth gospel (iii. 22, and iv. 1) asserts that Jesus Himself baptized on a greater scale than the Baptist, but immediately adds that Jesus Himself baptized not, but only His disciples, as if the writer felt that he had too boldly contradicted the older tradition of the other gospels. Nor in these is it recorded that the disciples baptized during their Master's lifetime; indeed the very contrary is implied. There remain two texts in which the injunction to baptize is attributed to Jesus, namely, Mark xvi. 16 and Matt. xxviii. 18-20. Of these the first is part of an appendix headed "of Ariston the elder" in an old Armenian codex, and taken perhaps from the lost compilations of Papias; as to the other text, it has been doubted by many critics, e.g. Neander, Harnack, Dr Armitage Robinson and James Martineau, whether it represents a real utterance of Christ and not rather the liturgical usage of the region in which the first gospel was compiled. The circumstance, unknown to these critics when they made their conjectures, that Eusebius Pamphili, in nearly a score of citations, substitutes the words "in My Name" for the words "baptizing them into the name of the Father and of the Son and of the Holy Ghost," renders their conjectures superfluous. Aphraates also in citing the verse substitutes "and they shall believe in Me"—a paraphrase of "in My Name." The first gospel thus falls into line with the rest of the New Testament.

The question comes up about whether Jesus Himself established baptism as a requirement for entering the Messianic kingdom. The fourth gospel (3:22 and 4:1) claims that Jesus baptized more people than the Baptist but quickly clarifies that Jesus didn't actually baptize anyone; it was His disciples who did, as if the writer realized he had contradicted the older traditions found in the other gospels. None of these gospels mention that the disciples baptized during their Master's lifetime; in fact, the opposite is suggested. There are two passages where the command to baptize is attributed to Jesus: Mark 16:16 and Matthew 28:18-20. The first is part of an appendix titled "of Ariston the elder" in an ancient Armenian manuscript, possibly derived from the lost works of Papias. Regarding the second passage, many critics, like Neander, Harnack, Dr. Armitage Robinson, and James Martineau, have questioned whether it truly reflects a saying of Christ or if it reflects liturgical practices from the region where the first gospel was written. What these critics didn’t know when they made their claims is that Eusebius Pamphili, in numerous references, replaces "baptizing them into the name of the Father and of the Son and of the Holy Spirit" with "in My Name," which makes their hypotheses unnecessary. Likewise, Aphraates, when citing the verse, uses the phrase "and they shall believe in Me," which is a paraphrase of "in My Name." Therefore, the first gospel aligns with the rest of the New Testament.

14. Analogous Rites in other Religions (see also Purification).—The Fathers themselves were the first to recognize that "the devil too had his sacraments," and that the Eleusinian, Isiac, Mithraic and other mystae used baptism in their rites of initiation. But it is not to be supposed that the Christians borrowed from these or from any Gentile source any essential features of their baptismal rites. Baptism was long before the advent of Jesus imposed on proselytes, and existed inside Judaism itself.

14. Similar Rites in Other Religions (see also Cleansing).—The early Church leaders were the first to acknowledge that "the devil also had his sacraments," and that the Eleusinian, Isiac, Mithraic, and other mystae practiced baptism in their initiation ceremonies. However, it shouldn't be assumed that Christians took any key elements of their baptismal rites from these or any non-Christian sources. Baptism was already required for converts long before Jesus arrived and was part of Judaism itself.

It has been remarked that the developed ceremony of baptism, with its threefold renunciation, resembles the ceremony of Roman law known as emancipatio, by which the patria potestas (or power of life and death of the father over his son) was extinguished. Under the law of the XII. Tables the father lost it, if he three times sold his child. This suggested a regular procedure, according to which the father sold his son thrice into mancipium, while after each sale the fictitious vendee enfranchized the son, by manumissio vindicta, i.e. by laying his rod (vindicta) on the slave and claiming him as free (vindicatio in libertatem). Then the owner also laid his rod on the slave, declaring his intention to enfranchise him, and the praetor by his addictor confirmed the owner's declaration. The third manumission thus gave to the son and slave his freedom. It is possible that this common ceremony of Roman law suggested the triple abrenunciatio of Satan. Like the legal ceremony, baptism freed the believer from one (Satan) who, by the mere fact of the believer's birth, had power of death over him. And as the legal manumission dissolved a son's previous agnatic relationships, so, too, the person baptized gave up father and mother, &c., and became one of a society of brethren the bond between whom was not physical but spiritual. The idea of adoption in baptism as a son and heir of God was almost certainly taken by Paul from Roman law.

It has been noted that the established baptism ceremony, with its threefold rejection, resembles the Roman law ceremony known as emancipatio, which ended the patria potestas (the father's power of life and death over his son). According to the law of the XII Tables, the father lost this power if he sold his child three times. This led to a standard process where the father would sell his son three times into mancipium, and after each sale, the fictitious buyer would free the son through manumissio vindicta, meaning he would place his rod (vindicta) on the slave and claim him as free (vindicatio in libertatem). Then the owner would also place his rod on the slave, stating his intent to free him, and the praetor would confirm the owner's statement through his addictor. The third manumission granted the son and slave his freedom. It’s possible that this common Roman law ceremony inspired the triple abrenunciatio against Satan. Just like the legal manumission freed someone from a power (Satan) that had authority over them simply because of their birth, baptism also liberated the believer. And just as legal manumission severed a son's previous familial ties, the person being baptized also renounced father and mother, etc., and became part of a community of brothers, bound by spiritual rather than physical ties. The concept of adoption in baptism as a son and heir of God was almost certainly derived by Paul from Roman law.

The ceremony of turning to the west three times with renunciation of the Evil One, then to the east, is exactly paralleled in a rite of purification by water common among the Malays and described by Skeat in his book on Malay magic. If the Malay rite is not derived through Mahommedanism from Christianity, it is a remarkable example of how similar psychological conditions can produce almost identical rites.

The ceremony of turning to the west three times to reject the Evil One, then to the east, is directly mirrored in a purification ritual using water that is common among the Malays, as described by Skeat in his book on Malay magic. If the Malay ritual isn't derived through Islam from Christianity, it serves as a striking example of how similar psychological conditions can lead to nearly identical rites.

The idea of spiritual re-birth, so soon associated with baptism, was of wide currency in ancient religions. It is met with in Philo of Alexandria and was familiar to the Jews. Thus the proselyte is said in the Talmud to resemble a child and must bathe in the name of God. The Jordan is declared in 2 Kings v. 10 to be a cleansing medium, and Naaman's cure was held to pre-figure Christian baptism. Jerome relates that the Jew who taught him Hebrew communicated to him a teaching of the Rabbi Baraciba, that the inner man who rises up in us at the fourteenth year after puberty (i.e. at 29) is better than the man who is born from the mother's womb.

The concept of spiritual rebirth, soon linked with baptism, was widely recognized in ancient religions. We find it in Philo of Alexandria, and it was well-known among the Jews. In the Talmud, it’s said that a proselyte is like a child and must immerse themselves in the name of God. The Jordan River is mentioned in 2 Kings 5:10 as a source of purification, and Naaman's healing is seen as a foreshadowing of Christian baptism. Jerome recounts that the Jew who taught him Hebrew shared with him a lesson from Rabbi Baraciba, stating that the inner person who rises within us at the age of fourteen after puberty (i.e., at 29) is greater than the person born from the mother's womb.

In a Paris papyrus edited by Albr. Dieterich (Leipzig, 1903) under the title of Eine Mithrasliturgie, an ancient mystic describes his re-birth in impressive language. In a prayer addressed to "First birth of my birth, first beginning (or principle) of my beginning, first spirit of the spirit in me," he prays "to be restored to his deathless birth (genesis), albeit he is let and hindered by his underlying nature, to the end that according to the pressing need and spur of his longing he may gaze upon the deathless principle with deathless spirit, through the deathless water, through the solid and the air; that he may be re-born through reason (or idea), that he may be consecrated, and the holy spirit breathe in him, that he may admire the holy fire, that he may behold the abyss of the Orient, dread water, and that he may be heard of the quickening and circumambient ether; for this day he is about to gaze on the revealed reality with deathless eyes; a mortal born of mortal womb, he has been enhanced in excellence by the might of the All-powerful and by the right hand of the Deathless one," &c.

In a Paris papyrus edited by Albr. Dieterich (Leipzig, 1903) titled Eine Mithrasliturgie, an ancient mystic vividly describes his rebirth. In a prayer to "First birth of my birth, first beginning (or principle) of my beginning, first spirit of the spirit within me," he prays "to be restored to his deathless birth (genesis), even though he is held back by his inherent nature, so that due to his deep need and yearning he may look upon the deathless principle with a deathless spirit, through the deathless water, through the solid and the air; that he may be reborn through reason (or idea), that he may be consecrated, and that the holy spirit may breathe within him, that he may admire the holy fire, that he may see the abyss of the East, the dreadful water, and that he may be heard by the life-giving and surrounding ether; for today he is about to behold the revealed reality with deathless eyes; as a mortal born from a mortal womb, he has been elevated in excellence by the power of the All-powerful and by the right hand of the Deathless one," &c.

This is but one specimen of the pious ejaculations, which in the first centuries were rising from the lips of thousands of mystae, in Egypt, Asia Minor, Italy and elsewhere. The idea of re-birth was in the air; it was the very keynote of all the solemn initiations and mysteries—Mythraic, Orphic, Eleusinian—through which repentant pagans secured pardon and eternal bliss. Yet there is not much evidence that the church directly borrowed many of its ceremonies or interpretations from outside sources. They for the most part originated among the believers, and not improbably the outside cults borrowed as much from the church as it from them.

This is just one example of the heartfelt prayers that were spoken by thousands of mystae in Egypt, Asia Minor, Italy, and beyond during the early centuries. The concept of rebirth was prevalent; it was the main theme of all the significant initiations and mysteries—Mythraic, Orphic, Eleusinian—through which repentant pagans sought forgiveness and eternal happiness. However, there's not much evidence that the church directly borrowed many of its rituals or interpretations from external sources. Most originated among the believers, and it's quite possible that the outside cults borrowed as much from the church as the church did from them.

Authorities.—The following ancient works are recommended: Tertullian, De Baptismo (edition with introd. J. M. Lupton, 1909); Cyril of Jerusalem, Catecheses; Basil, De Spiritu Sancto; Constitutiones Apostolicae; Gregory Nazianzen, Orat. 40; Gregory Nyss., Oratio in eos qui differunt baptismum; Sacramentary of Serapion of Thmuis; Augustine, De Baptismo contra Donatistas; Jac. Goar, Rituale Graecorum (gives the current Greek rites); F. C. Conybeare, Rituale Armenorum (the oldest forms of Armenian and Greek rites); Gerard G. Vossius, De Baptismo (Amsterdam, 1648); Edmond Martene, De Ant. Ecclesiae Ritibus (gives Western rites) (Bassani, 1788). The modern literature is infinite; perhaps the most exhaustive works are W. F. Höfling, Das Sacrament der Taufe (Erlangen, 1859): Jos. Bingham's Antiquities (London, 1834), and W. Wall, On Infant Baptism (London, 1707); J. Anrich, Das antike Mysterienwesen (Göttingen, 1894), details the corresponding rites of the Greek mysteries, also A. Dieterich, Eine Mithras Liturgie (Leipzig, 1903); J. C. Suicer, Thesaurus, sub voce βάπτισμα; Ad. Harnack, Dogmengeschichte (Freiburg im Br. 1894); L. Duchesne, Origines du culte chrétien (Paris, 1898); Mgr. P. Batiffol, Etudes historiques (Paris, 1904); J. C. W. Augusti, Denkwürdigkeiten (Leipzig, 1829-1831); Monumenta Ecclesiae Liturgica by Dom Cabrol and Dom Leclercq (Paris, 1902) (a summary of all liturgical passages given in the early Fathers); Corblet, Histoire du sacrement de baptême (2 vols. Paris, 1881-1882).

Authorities.—The following ancient works are recommended: Tertullian, On Baptism (edition with introduction by J. M. Lupton, 1909); Cyril of Jerusalem, Catecheses; Basil, On the Holy Spirit; Apostolic Constitutions; Gregory Nazianzen, Oration 40; Gregory Nyssa, Oration on Those Who Delay Baptism; the Sacramentary of Serapion of Thmuis; Augustine, On Baptism Against the Donatists; Jac. Goar, Ritual of the Greeks (provides the current Greek rites); F. C. Conybeare, Ritual of the Armenians (the oldest forms of Armenian and Greek rites); Gerard G. Vossius, On Baptism (Amsterdam, 1648); Edmond Martene, On the Ancient Rites of the Church (provides Western rites) (Bassani, 1788). The modern literature is vast; perhaps the most comprehensive works are W. F. Höfling, The Sacrament of Baptism (Erlangen, 1859); Jos. Bingham's Antiquities (London, 1834), and W. Wall, On Infant Baptism (London, 1707); J. Anrich, The Ancient Mystery Religions (Göttingen, 1894), which details the corresponding rites of the Greek mysteries, as well as A. Dieterich, A Mithras Liturgy (Leipzig, 1903); J. C. Suicer, Thesaurus, under the entry baptism; Ad. Harnack, History of Dogma (Freiburg im Br. 1894); L. Duchesne, Origins of Christian Worship (Paris, 1898); Mgr. P. Batiffol, Historical Studies (Paris, 1904); J. C. W. Augusti, Memoirs (Leipzig, 1829-1831); Monumenta Ecclesiae Liturgica by Dom Cabrol and Dom Leclercq (Paris, 1902) (a summary of all liturgical passages found in the early Fathers); Corblet, History of the Sacrament of Baptism (2 vols. Paris, 1881-1882).

(F. C. C.)

(F.C.C.)

[1] James Darmesteter, in "Introd. to the Vendidad," in the Sacred Books of the East.

[1] James Darmesteter, in "Introduction to the Vendidad," in the Sacred Books of the East.

[2] Rogers' essay on Baptism and Christian Archaeology in Studia Biblica, vol. v.

[2] Rogers' essay on Baptism and Christian Archaeology in Studia Biblica, vol. 5.

[3] Études historiques, Essai sur Disc. arc. (Paris 1902).

[3] Historical Studies, Essay on Disc. arc. (Paris 1902).

BAPTISTE, NICOLAS ANSELME (1761-1835), French actor, was born in Bordeaux on the 18th of June 1761, the elder son of Joseph François Anselme, a popular actor. His mother played leading parts in tragedy, and both his parents enjoyed the protection of Voltaire and the friendship of Lekain. It was probably under the auspices of the latter that Nicolas Anselme made his first appearance as de Belloy in Gaston et Bayard; and shortly afterwards, under the name of Baptiste, he made a contract to play young lover parts at Arras, where he also appeared in opera and even in pantomime. From Rouen, where he had three successful years, his reputation spread to Paris and he was summoned to the new theatre which the comedian Langlois-Courcelles had just founded, and where he succeeded, not only in making an engagement for himself, but in bringing all his family, father, mother, wife and brother. They were thus distinguished in the playbills: Baptiste, aîné, Baptiste père, Baptiste cadet, Madame Baptiste mère, Madame Baptiste bru. This resulted in the pun of calling a play in which they all appeared une pièce de baptistes. Nicolas soon obtained the public favour, specially in La Martellière's mediocre Robert, chef de [v.03 p.0370]brigands, and as Count Almaviva, in Beaumarchais' La Mère coupable. His success in this was so great that the directors of the Théâtre de la République—who had already secured Talma, Dugazon and Madame Vestris—hastened to obtain his services, and, in order to get him at once (1793), paid the 20,000 francs forfeit which he was obliged to surrender on breaking his contract. Later he, as well as his younger brother, became sociétaire. Nicolas took all the leading parts in comedy and tragedy. As he grew older his special forte lay in noble fathers. After a brilliant career of thirty-five years of uninterrupted service, he retired in 1828. But, after the revolution of 1830, when the Théâtre Français was in great straits, the brothers Baptiste came to the rescue, reappeared on the stage and helped to bring back its prosperity. The elder died in Paris on the 1st of December 1835. The younger brother, Paul Eustache Anselme, known as Baptiste cadet (1765-1839), was also a comedian of great talent, and had a long and brilliant career at the Comédie Française, where he made his début in 1792 in L'Amour et l'intérêt.

BAPTISTE, NICOLAS ANSELME (1761-1835), French actor, was born in Bordeaux on June 18, 1761, the older son of Joseph François Anselme, a well-known actor. His mother had leading roles in tragedies, and both of his parents were supported by Voltaire and friends with Lekain. It was probably under Lekain's guidance that Nicolas Anselme made his first appearance as de Belloy in Gaston et Bayard; shortly after, using the name Baptiste, he signed a contract to play young lover roles in Arras, where he also performed in opera and even pantomime. From Rouen, where he had three successful years, his reputation grew and reached Paris, leading to an invitation to the new theater founded by the comedian Langlois-Courcelles. There, he not only secured a role for himself but also brought along his entire family: father, mother, wife, and brother. They were all listed distinctly in the playbills: Baptiste, aîné, Baptiste père, Baptiste cadet, Madame Baptiste mère, Madame Baptiste bru. This led to the joke of calling a play in which they all performed une pièce de baptistes. Nicolas quickly gained public favor, especially in La Martellière's mediocre Robert, chef de brigands, and as Count Almaviva in Beaumarchais' La Mère coupable. His success was so significant that the directors of the Théâtre de la République—who had already secured Talma, Dugazon, and Madame Vestris—rushed to hire him. To bring him on board immediately (1793), they paid the 20,000 francs penalty he needed to forfeit for breaking his contract. Later, he and his younger brother became sociétaire. Nicolas took on all the leading roles in both comedy and tragedy. As he got older, his particular strength was in portraying noble fathers. After a remarkable career of 35 years of continuous performance, he retired in 1828. However, after the revolution of 1830, when the Théâtre Français faced serious difficulties, the Baptiste brothers came to its aid, returned to the stage, and helped restore its success. The elder brother died in Paris on December 1, 1835. The younger brother, Paul Eustache Anselme, known as Baptiste cadet (1765-1839), was also a talented actor and had a long and distinguished career at the Comédie Française, where he debuted in 1792 in L'Amour et l'intérêt.

BAPTISTERY (Baptisterium, in the Greek Church φωτιστήριον), the separate hall or chapel, connected with the early Christian Church, in which the catechumens were instructed and the sacrament of baptism administered. The name baptistery is also given to a kind of chapel in a large church, which serves the same purpose. The baptistery proper was commonly a circular building, although sometimes it had eight and sometimes twelve sides, and consisted of an ante-room (προαύλιος οἶκος) where the catechumens were instructed, and where before baptism they made their confession of faith, and an inner apartment where the sacrament was administered. In the inner apartment the principal object was the baptismal font (κολυμβήθρα, or piscina), in which those to be baptized were immersed thrice. Three steps led down to the floor of the font, and over it was suspended a gold or silver dove; while on the walls were commonly pictures of the scenes in the life of John the Baptist. The font was at first always of stone, but latterly metals were often used. Baptisteries belong to a period of the church when great numbers of adult catechumens were baptized, and when immersion was the rule. We find little or no trace of them before Constantine made Christianity the state religion, i.e. before the 4th century; and as early as the 6th century the baptismal font was built in the porch of the church and then in the church itself. After the 9th century few baptisteries were built, the most noteworthy of later date being those at Pisa, Florence, Padua, Lucca and Parma. Some of the older baptisteries were very large, so large that we hear of councils and synods being held in them. It was necessary to make them large, because in the early Church it was customary for the bishop to baptize all the catechumens in his diocese (and so baptisteries are commonly found attached to the cathedral and not to the parish churches), and also because the rite was performed only thrice in the year. (See Baptism.) During the months when there were no baptisms the baptistery doors were sealed with the bishop's seal. Some baptisteries were divided into two parts to separate the sexes; sometimes the church had two baptisteries, one for each sex. A fireplace was often provided to warm the neophytes after immersion. Though baptisteries were forbidden to be used as burial-places by the council of Auxerre (578) they were not uncommonly used as such. Many of the early archbishops of Canterbury were buried in the baptistery there. Baptisteries, we find from the records of early councils, were first built and used to correct the evils arising from the practice of private baptism. As soon as Christianity made such progress that baptism became the rule, and as soon as immersion gave place to sprinkling, the ancient baptisteries were no longer necessary. They are still in general use, however, in Florence and Pisa. The baptistery of the Lateran must be the earliest ecclesiastical building still in use. A large part of it remains as built by Constantine. The central area, where is the basin of the font, is an octagon around which stand eight porphyry columns, with marble capitals and entablature of classical form; outside these are an ambulatory and outer walls forming a larger octagon. Attached to one side, towards the Lateran basilica, is a fine porch with two noble porphyry columns and richly carved capitals, bases and entablatures. The circular church of Santa Costanza, also of the 4th century, served as a baptistery and contained the tomb of the daughter of Constantine. This is a remarkably perfect structure with a central dome, columns and mosaics of classical fashion. Two side niches contain the earliest known mosaics of distinctively Christian subjects. In one is represented Moses receiving the Old Law, in the other Christ delivers to St Peter the New Law—a charter sealed with the X P monogram.

BAPTISTERY (Baptisterium, in the Greek Church lamp), the separate hall or chapel associated with the early Christian Church, where catechumens were taught and baptized. The term baptistery is also used for a kind of chapel in a large church that serves the same purpose. Typically, the baptistery was a circular building, though it sometimes had eight or twelve sides. It consisted of an ante-room (outdoor house) where catechumens received instruction and confessed their faith before baptism, and an inner room where the baptism took place. In the inner room, the main feature was the baptismal font (baptismal font, or piscina), where candidates were immersed three times. Three steps led down to the font, and a gold or silver dove was suspended above it, while the walls often featured pictures of scenes from the life of John the Baptist. Initially, the font was always made of stone, but later, metals were commonly used. Baptisteries date from a time when many adult catechumens were baptized, and immersion was the standard practice. We find little evidence of them before Constantine made Christianity the state religion, which occurred in the 4th century. By the 6th century, the baptismal font began to be placed in the church entrance and then within the church itself. After the 9th century, few new baptisteries were constructed, with notable examples being those in Pisa, Florence, Padua, Lucca, and Parma. Some older baptisteries were very large, even hosting councils and synods. Their size was necessary because, during the early Church, it was customary for the bishop to baptize all the catechumens within his diocese, which is why baptisteries are often found attached to cathedrals rather than parish churches. Baptisms typically occurred only three times a year. (See Baptism.) During the months without baptisms, the baptistery doors were sealed with the bishop's seal. Some baptisteries were divided into two sections to separate the sexes; occasionally, a church might have two separate baptisteries for each gender. A fireplace was often included to warm the newly baptized after immersion. Although the council of Auxerre (578) prohibited baptisteries from being used as burial sites, it was common for them to serve this purpose. Many of the early archbishops of Canterbury were buried in the baptistery there. From the records of early councils, we see that baptisteries were initially constructed to address the issues arising from private baptisms. Once Christianity gained enough ground that baptism became a standard practice, and immersion was replaced with sprinkling, ancient baptisteries were no longer essential. However, they are still widely used in Florence and Pisa. The Lateran baptistery must be the earliest church building still in use, with much of it remaining as originally built by Constantine. The central area, where the font basin is located, is octagonal, surrounded by eight porphyry columns with marble capitals and classical entablature; outside of these are an ambulatory and outer walls forming a larger octagon. Attached to one side, facing the Lateran basilica, is a beautiful porch with two magnificent porphyry columns and intricately carved capitals, bases, and entablatures. The circular church of Santa Costanza, also from the 4th century, served as a baptistery and housed the tomb of Constantine's daughter. This structure is remarkably well-preserved, featuring a central dome, classical columns, and mosaics. Two side niches contain the earliest known mosaics depicting distinctly Christian subjects: one shows Moses receiving the Old Law, while the other depicts Christ handing the New Law, a charter sealed with the X P monogram, to St. Peter.

Another baptistery of the earliest times has recently been excavated at Aquileia. Ruins of an early baptistery have also been found at Salona. At Ravenna exist two famous baptisteries encrusted with fine mosaics, one of them built in the middle of the 5th century, and the other in the 6th. To the latter date also belongs a large baptistery decorated with mosaics at Naples.

Another baptistery from the earliest times has recently been uncovered in Aquileia. Ruins of an early baptistery have also been discovered in Salona. Ravenna has two renowned baptisteries adorned with beautiful mosaics, one built in the middle of the 5th century and the other in the 6th. A large baptistery decorated with mosaics in Naples also dates back to the 6th century.

In the East the metropolitan baptistery at Constantinople still stands at the side of the mosque which was once the patriarchal church of St Sophia; and many others, in Syria, have been made known to us by recent researches, as also have some belonging to the churches of North Africa. In France the most famous early baptistery is St Jean at Poitiers, and other early examples exist at Riez, Fréjus and Aix. In England, a detached baptistery is known to have been associated with the cathedral of Canterbury.

In the East, the main baptistery in Constantinople still stands next to the mosque that used to be the patriarchal church of St. Sophia; and many others in Syria have come to our attention through recent research, as well as some from the churches in North Africa. In France, the most famous early baptistery is St. Jean in Poitiers, with other early examples found in Riez, Fréjus, and Aix. In England, a separate baptistery is known to have been linked to the cathedral of Canterbury.

See Hefele's Concilien, passim; Du Cange, Glossary, article "Baptisterium"; Eusebius, Hist. Eccl. x. 4; Bingham's Antiquities of the Christian Church, book xi.

See Hefele's Concilien, passim; Du Cange, Glossary, article "Baptisterium"; Eusebius, Hist. Eccl. x. 4; Bingham's Antiquities of the Christian Church, book xi.

(W. R. L.)

(W. R. L.)

BAPTISTS, a body of Christians, distinguished, as their name imports, from other denominations by the view they hold respecting the ordinance of baptism (q.v.). This distinctive view, common and peculiar to all Baptists, is that baptism should be administered to believers only. The mode of administration of the ordinance has not always been the same, and some Baptists (e.g. the Mennonites) still practise baptism by pouring or sprinkling, but among those who will here be styled modern Baptists, the mode of administration is also distinctive, to wit, immersion. It should, however, be borne in mind that immersion is not peculiar to the modern Baptists. It has always been recognized by Paedobaptists as a legitimate mode, and is still practised to the exclusion of other modes by a very large proportion of paedobaptist Christendom (e.g. the Orthodox Eastern Church). We shall distinguish here between two main groups of Baptists in Europe; the Anabaptists, now practically extinct, and the modern Baptists whose churches are in nearly every European country and in all other countries where white men reside.

BAPTISTS, a group of Christians, are marked, as their name suggests, from other denominations by their belief regarding the practice of baptism (q.v.). This unique belief, shared by all Baptists, is that baptism should only be given to believers. The method of practicing this ordinance has varied over time, and some Baptists (e.g. the Mennonites) still use pouring or sprinkling for baptism. However, among those referred to here as modern Baptists, the method is specifically immersion. It’s important to note that immersion is not exclusive to modern Baptists. It has always been accepted by Paedobaptists as a valid method, and it is still used exclusively by a significant portion of paedobaptist Christianity (e.g. the Orthodox Eastern Church). Here, we will differentiate between two main groups of Baptists in Europe: the Anabaptists, which are now nearly extinct, and the modern Baptists, whose churches exist in nearly every European nation and in all other countries with a significant white population.

I. The Anabaptists

I. The Anabaptists

The great spiritual movement of the 15th and 16th centuries had for its most general characteristic, revolt against authority. This showed itself not merely in the anti-papal reformation of Luther, but also in the anti-feudal rising of the peasants and in a variety of anti-ecclesiastical movements within the reformation areas themselves. One of the most notable of these radical anti-ecclesiastical movements was that of the Zwickau prophets, (Marcus Stübner, Nikolaus Storch and Thomas Münzer): the most vigorous and notorious that of the Münster Anabaptists. Although they have been called the "harbingers" of the Anabaptists, the characteristic teaching of the Zwickau prophets was not Anabaptism. (See, however, Anabaptists.) For although Münzer repudiated infant baptism in theory, he did not relinquish its practice, nor did he insist on the re-baptism of believers. The characteristic teaching of the Zwickau movement, so closely linked with the peasant rising, was the great emphasis laid upon the "inner word." Divine revelation, said Münzer, was not received from the church, nor from preaching, least of all from the dead letter of the Bible; it was received solely and directly from the Spirit of God. It is this daring faith in divine illumination that brings the Zwickau teachers most nearly into touch with the Anabaptists. But if they are not typical of Anabaptism, still less are the later representatives of the movement in the last sad months at Münster.

The significant spiritual movement of the 15th and 16th centuries was primarily characterized by a rebellion against authority. This was evident not only in Luther's anti-papal reformation but also in the peasant uprising against feudalism and a range of anti-church movements within the reformation areas themselves. One of the most notable radical anti-church movements was led by the Zwickau prophets (Marcus Stübner, Nikolaus Storch, and Thomas Münzer), with the most intense and infamous being the Münster Anabaptists. Although they've been referred to as the "harbingers" of the Anabaptists, the key teachings of the Zwickau prophets were not Anabaptist in nature. (See, however, None.) Even though Münzer rejected infant baptism in theory, he did not abandon its practice, and he did not push for the re-baptism of believers. The central teaching of the Zwickau movement, closely tied to the peasant uprising, emphasized the "inner word." Münzer argued that divine revelation was not received from the church, preaching, or the literal text of the Bible; it was received directly from the Spirit of God. It is this bold faith in divine insight that connects the Zwickau teachers most closely with the Anabaptists. However, while they are not typical of Anabaptism, the later representatives of the movement during the last tragic months in Münster are even less representative.

The beginnings of the Anabaptist movement proper were in [v.03 p.0371]Zürich, where Wilheld Reubli (1480-1554), Konrad Grebel (d. 1526), Felix Manz (d. 1527) and Simon Strumpf separated from Zwingli and proposed to form a separate church. They repudiated the use of force, advocated a scriptural communism of goods, and asserted that Christians must always exercise love and patience towards each other and so be independent of worldly tribunals. But their most radical doctrine was the rejection of infant baptism as unscriptural. They rapidly gained adherents, among whom was Hans Brödli, pastor of Zollikon. Their refusal, however, to baptize infants, and the formation of a separate church as the outcome of this refusal, brought upon them the condemnation of Zwingli, and a number of them were banished. This act of banishment, however, drove Jörg Blaurock, Konrad Grebel and others to take the step which definitely instituted "Anabaptism": they baptized one another and then partook of the Lord's Supper together. This step took them much farther than the repudiation of paedobaptism. It formed a new religious community, which sought to fashion itself on the model of primitive Christianity, rejecting all tradition and accretions later than New Testament records. Its members claimed to get back to the simple church founded on brotherly love. The result was that their numbers grew with astonishing rapidity, and scholarly saints like Balthasar Hubmaier (ca. 1480-1528) and Hans Denck (ca. 1495-1527) joined them. Hubmaier brought no new adherents with him, and in 1525 himself baptized 300 converts. This baptism, however, was not immersion. Blaurock and Grebel baptized each other, and many adherents, kneeling together in an ordinary room. Hubmaier baptized his 300 from one bucket. The mode was sprinkling or pouring. In all this the Anabaptists had maintained one central article of faith that linked them to the Zwickau prophets, belief in conscience, religious feeling, or inner light, as the sole true beginning or ground of religion; and one other article, held with equal vigour and sincerity, that true Christians are like sheep among wolves, and must on no account defend themselves from their enemies or take vengeance for wrong done. Very soon this their faith was put to fiery test. Not only were Catholics and Protestants opposed to them on doctrinal grounds, but the secular powers, fearing that the new teaching was potentially as revolutionary as Münzer's radicalism had been, soon instituted a persecution of the Anabaptists. On the 7th of March 1526 the Zürich Rath issued an edict threatening all who were baptized anew with death by drowning, and in 1529 the emperor Charles V., at the diet of Spires, ordered Anabaptists to be put to death with fire and sword without even the form of ecclesiastical trial. A cruel persecution arose. Manz was drowned at Zürich and Michael Sattler (ca. 1495-1527) burned to death after torture in 1527; Hubmaier was burned in 1528 and Blaurock in 1529, and Sebastian Franck (1499-1542) asserts that the number of slain was in 1530 already about 2000.

The Anabaptist movement really began in [v.03 p.0371]Zürich, where Wilheld Reubli (1480-1554), Konrad Grebel (d. 1526), Felix Manz (d. 1527), and Simon Strumpf broke away from Zwingli to form a separate church. They rejected the use of violence, promoted a communal sharing of goods based on scripture, and insisted that Christians must always show love and patience toward one another, remaining independent of worldly courts. Their most radical belief was the rejection of infant baptism as unbiblical. They quickly gained followers, including Hans Brödli, a pastor from Zollikon. However, their refusal to baptize infants and their decision to create a separate church led to Zwingli condemning them, resulting in the banishment of several members. This banishment prompted Jörg Blaurock, Konrad Grebel, and others to take a decisive step that established "Anabaptism": they baptized each other and then shared the Lord's Supper together. This act went beyond just rejecting infant baptism; it established a new religious community that aimed to emulate the early Christian church, discarding all traditions and practices that came after the New Testament. Its members sought to return to a simple church built on brotherly love. Consequently, their numbers grew rapidly, and intellectual leaders like Balthasar Hubmaier (ca. 1480-1528) and Hans Denck (ca. 1495-1527) joined them. Although Hubmaier didn't bring any new followers, in 1525 he baptized 300 converts himself. However, this baptism was not by immersion. Blaurock and Grebel baptized each other along with many supporters who knelt together in a regular room. Hubmaier baptized his 300 from a single bucket. The method used was sprinkling or pouring. Throughout this, the Anabaptists upheld a key belief connecting them to the Zwickau prophets: the importance of conscience, religious feeling, or inner light as the only true foundation for religion. They also held firmly to another belief: that true Christians are like sheep among wolves and should never defend themselves or seek revenge on their enemies. Soon, this faith was put to the test. Not only did Catholics and Protestants oppose them on doctrinal grounds, but secular authorities, fearing that their new teachings could be as revolutionary as Münzer's radicalism, began to persecute the Anabaptists. On March 7, 1526, the Zürich council issued an edict declaring that anyone who was rebaptized would face death by drowning, and in 1529, Emperor Charles V ordered the execution of Anabaptists by fire and sword without any ecclesiastical trial. This persecution became brutal. Manz was drowned in Zürich, and Michael Sattler (ca. 1495-1527) was burned alive after being tortured in 1527; Hubmaier was burned in 1528, and Blaurock in 1529. Sebastian Franck (1499-1542) claims that by 1530, around 2000 had already been killed.

Two results followed from this persecution. First, the development of a self-contained and homogeneous community was made impossible. No opportunity for the adoption of any common confession was given. Only a few great doctrines are seen to have been generally held by Anabaptists—such as the baptism of believers only, the rejection of the Lutheran doctrine of justification by faith as onesided and the simple practice of the breaking of bread. This last, the Anabaptist doctrine of the Lord's Supper, was to the effect that brothers and sisters in Christ should partake in remembrance of the death of Christ, and that they should thereby renew the bond of brotherly love as the basis of neighbourly life. In the second place, the persecution deprived the Anabaptists of the noble leaders who had preached non-resistance and at the same time provoked others to an attitude of vengeance which culminated in the horrors of Münster. For Melchior Hofmann (ca. 1498-1543 or 1544) having taken the Anabaptist teaching to Holland, there arose in Haarlem a preacher of vengeance, Jan Matthisson or Matthyszoon (Matthys) (d. 1534) by name, who, prophesying a speedy end of the world and establishment of the kingdom of heaven, obtained many adherents, and despatched Boekebinder and de Kniper to Münster. Here the attempt was made to realise Matthisson's ideals. All who did not embrace Anabaptism were driven from Münster (1533), and Bernt Knipperdolling (ca. 1495-1536) became burgomaster. The town was now besieged and Matthisson was killed early in 1534. John (Johann Bockelson) of Leiden (1510-1536) took his place and the town became the scene of the grossest licence and cruelty, until in 1535 it was taken by the besieging bishop. Unhappily the Anabaptists have always been remembered by the crimes of John of Leiden and the revelry of Münster. They should really be known by the teaching and martyrdom of Blaurock, Grebel and Hubmaier, and by the gentle learning and piety of Hans Denck—of whom, with many hundred others, "the world was not worthy."

Two outcomes came from this persecution. First, the formation of a united and cohesive community became impossible. There was no chance for a common belief to take shape. Only a few core doctrines were generally accepted by Anabaptists—like believer's baptism only, the rejection of the Lutheran doctrine of justification by faith as one-sided, and the straightforward practice of breaking bread. This last practice, the Anabaptist view of the Lord's Supper, emphasized that brothers and sisters in Christ should partake in remembrance of Christ's death, renewing the bond of brotherly love as the foundation for community life. Secondly, the persecution stripped the Anabaptists of their noble leaders who preached non-resistance, while also provoking others into a vengeful mindset that peaked in the atrocities of Münster. Melchior Hofmann (ca. 1498-1543 or 1544) brought Anabaptist teachings to Holland, leading to the rise of a vengeful preacher in Haarlem, Jan Matthisson or Matthyszoon (Matthys) (d. 1534), who, predicting a swift end of the world and the establishment of God's kingdom, gained many followers and sent Boekebinder and de Kniper to Münster. There, an attempt was made to implement Matthisson's ideals. All who didn’t accept Anabaptism were expelled from Münster in 1533, and Bernt Knipperdolling (ca. 1495-1536) became the town's mayor. The town was besieged, and Matthisson was killed in early 1534. Johann Bockelson of Leiden (1510-1536) succeeded him, leading the town into extreme license and cruelty until it was captured by the besieging bishop in 1535. Unfortunately, the Anabaptists have often been remembered for the crimes of John of Leiden and the chaos in Münster. They should instead be recognized for the teachings and martyrdom of Blaurock, Grebel, and Hubmaier, as well as the gentle knowledge and piety of Hans Denck—of whom, along with many others, "the world was not worthy."

For the teaching of the Anabaptists, see Anabaptists.

For the teachings of the Anabaptists, see Anabaptists.

Reference has already been made to the reason why a common Anabaptist confession was never made public. Probably, however, the earliest confession of faith of any Baptist community is that given by Zwingli in the second part of his Elenchus contra Catabaptistas, published in 1527. Zwingli professes to give it entire, translating it, as he says, ad verbum into Latin. Whatever opinion may be held as to the orthodoxy of the seven articles of the Anabaptists, the vehemence with which they were opposed, and the epithets of abuse which were heaped upon the unfortunate sect that maintained them, cannot fail to astonish those used to toleration. Zwingli, who details these articles, as he says, that the world may see that they are "fanatical, stolid, audacious, impious," can scarcely be acquitted of unfairness in joining together two of them,—the fourth and fifth,—thus making the article treat "of the avoiding of abominable pastors in the church" (Super devitatione abominabilium pastorum in Ecclesia), though there is nothing about pastors in the fourth article, and nothing about abominations in the fifth, and though in a marginal note he himself explains that the first two copies that were sent him read as he does, but the other copies make two articles, as in fact they evidently are. It is strange that the Protestant Council of Zürich, which had scarcely won its own liberty, and was still in dread of the persecution of the Romanists, should pass the decree which instituted the cruel persecution of the Anabaptists.

Reference has already been made to why a common Anabaptist confession was never made public. However, the earliest confession of faith from any Baptist community seems to be the one presented by Zwingli in the second part of his Elenchus contra Catabaptistas, published in 1527. Zwingli claims to provide it in full, translating it, as he states, ad verbum into Latin. Regardless of opinions about the orthodoxy of the seven articles of the Anabaptists, the intensity of the opposition they faced and the abusive names directed at the unfortunate group that upheld these beliefs would surely astonish those accustomed to tolerance. Zwingli, who outlines these articles to show that they are "fanatical, dull, audacious, impious," can hardly be seen as fair for combining two of them—the fourth and fifth—into one article that claims to address "the avoidance of abominable pastors in the church" (Super devitatione abominabilium pastorum in Ecclesia), even though there's nothing about pastors in the fourth article and nothing about abominations in the fifth. In fact, he notes in the margins that the first two copies sent to him read as he states, but other copies treat them as two distinct articles, which they clearly are. It is odd that the Protestant Council of Zürich, which had barely secured its own freedom and was still fearing Romanist persecution, would enact the decree that initiated the brutal persecution of the Anabaptists.

After Münster had fallen the harassed remnants of the Anabaptists were gathered together under Menno Simonis, who joined them in 1537. His moderation and piety held in check the turbulence of the more fanatical amongst them. He died in 1561 after a life passed amidst continual dangers and conflicts. His name remains as the designation of the Mennonites (q.v.), who eventually settled in the Netherlands under the protection of William the Silent, prince of Orange.

After Münster fell, the beleaguered remnants of the Anabaptists were gathered under Menno Simons, who joined them in 1537. His moderation and piety kept the more fanatical members in check. He died in 1561 after a life filled with constant dangers and conflicts. His name is still used to refer to the Mennonites (q.v.), who eventually settled in the Netherlands under the protection of William the Silent, prince of Orange.

Of the introduction of Anabaptist views into England we have no certain knowledge. Fox relates that "the registers of London make mention of certain Dutchmen counted for Anabaptists, of whom ten were put to death in sundry places in the realm, anno 1535; other ten repented and were saved." In 1536 King Henry VIII. issued a proclamation together with articles concerning faith agreed upon by Convocation, in which the clergy are told to instruct the people that they ought to repute and take "the Anabaptists' opinions for detestable heresies and to be utterly condemned." Thomas Fuller (1608-1661) tells us from Stow's Chronicles that, in the year 1538, "four Anabaptists, three men and one woman, all Dutch, bare faggots at Paul's Cross, and three days after a man and woman of their sect was burnt in Smithfield." In the reign of Edward VI., after the return of the exiles from Zürich, John Hooper (bishop of Gloucester and Worcester, d. 1555) writes to his friend Bullinger in 1549, that he reads "a public lecture twice in the day to so numerous an audience that the church cannot contain them," and adds, "the Anabaptists flock to the place and give me much trouble." It would seem that at this time they were united together in communities separate from the established Church. Latimer, in 1552, speaks of them as segregating themselves from the company of other men. In the sixth examination of John Philpot (1516-1555) in 1555 we are told that Lord Riche said to him, "All heretics do boast of the Spirit of God, and every one would have a church by himself, as Joan of Kent and the Anabaptists." Philpot was imprisoned [v.03 p.0372]soon after Mary's accession in 1553; and it is very pleasing to find, amidst the records of intense bitterness and rancour which characterized these times, and with which Romanist and Protestant alike assailed the persecuted Anabaptists, a letter of Philpot's, to a friend of his, "prisoner the same time in Newgate," who held the condemned opinions. His friend had written to ask his judgment concerning the baptism of infants. Philpot in a long reply, whilst maintaining the obligation of infant baptism, yet addresses his correspondent as, "dear brother, saint, and fellow-prisoner for the truth of Christ's gospel"; and at the close of his argument he says, "I beseech thee, dear brother in the gospel, follow the steps of the faith of the glorious martyrs in the primitive church, and of such as at this day follow the same."

We don’t have clear information about how Anabaptist beliefs entered England. Fox notes that "the records from London mention some Dutch individuals who were considered Anabaptists, ten of whom were executed in different parts of the kingdom, in 1535; another ten repented and were saved." In 1536, King Henry VIII issued a proclamation with articles on faith agreed upon by Convocation, instructing clergy to teach the public that they should regard the "Anabaptists' beliefs as terrible heresies that should be completely condemned." Thomas Fuller (1608-1661) references Stow's Chronicles to say that in 1538, "four Anabaptists, three men and one woman, all Dutch, carried faggots at Paul's Cross, and three days later a man and a woman from their group were burned in Smithfield." During Edward VI's reign, after the exiles returned from Zürich, John Hooper (bishop of Gloucester and Worcester, d. 1555) wrote to his friend Bullinger in 1549 that he preached "a public lecture twice a day to such a large audience that the church can't hold them," adding, "the Anabaptists gather there and cause me a lot of trouble." It seems they were organized into separate communities from the established Church at this time. Latimer, in 1552, mentioned them separating from others. In the sixth examination of John Philpot (1516-1555) in 1555, Lord Riche said to him, "All heretics boast about the Spirit of God, and everyone wants to have their own church, like Joan of Kent and the Anabaptists." Philpot was imprisoned [v.03 p.0372]shortly after Mary became queen in 1553; and it’s heartening to find, amidst the deep hostility and bitterness of those times, endured by both Romanists and Protestants against the persecuted Anabaptists, a letter from Philpot to a friend, also imprisoned in Newgate, who shared the condemned views. His friend had asked for his thoughts on infant baptism. In a lengthy response, while supporting the necessity of infant baptism, Philpot addressed his friend as "dear brother, saint, and fellow-prisoner for the truth of Christ's gospel"; and at the end of his argument, he stated, "I urge you, dear brother in the gospel, to follow the example of the faith of the glorious martyrs in the early church, and of those who today continue in the same way."

Many Anabaptist communities existed in England toward the end of the 16th century, particularly in East Anglia, Kent and London. Their most notable representative was Robert Cooke, but they were more notorious for heretical views as to the Virgin Mary (see Anabaptists) than for their anti-paedobaptist position. It was for these views that Joan Boucher of Kent was burnt in 1550. There is no doubt that these prepared the way for the coming of the modern Baptists, but "the truth is that, while the Anabaptists in England raised the question of baptism, they were almost entirely a foreign importation, an alien element; and the rise of the Baptist churches was wholly independent of them."

Many Anabaptist communities were present in England toward the end of the 16th century, especially in East Anglia, Kent, and London. Their most notable representative was Robert Cooke, but they were more infamous for their controversial views on the Virgin Mary (see Anabaptists) than for their stance against infant baptism. It was these views that led to Joan Boucher from Kent being burned at the stake in 1550. There’s no doubt that these beliefs paved the way for the emergence of modern Baptists, but “the truth is that, while the Anabaptists in England raised the issue of baptism, they were primarily a foreign influence, an outside element; and the rise of the Baptist churches was completely independent of them.”

II. The Modern Baptists

II. The Modern Baptists

1. Great Britain and Ireland.—If the Anabaptists of England were not the progenitors of the modern Baptist church, we must look abroad for the beginnings of that movement. Although there were doubtless many who held Baptist views scattered among the Independent communities, it was not until the time of John Smith or Smyth (d. 1612) that the modern Baptist movement in England broke away from Brownism. Smyth was appointed preacher of the city of Lincoln in 1600 as an ordained clergyman, but became a separatist in 1605 or 1606, and, soon after, emigrated under stress of persecution with the Gainsborough Independents to Amsterdam. With Thomas Helwys (ca. 1560-ca. 1616) and Morton he joined the "Ancient" church there, but, coming under Mennonite teaching in 1609, he separated from the Independents, baptized himself (hence he is called the "Se-baptist"), Helwys and others probably according to the Anabaptist or Mennonite fashion of pouring. These then formed the first English Baptist Church which in 1611 published "a declaration of faith of English people remaining at Amsterdam in Holland." The article relating to baptism is as follows:—"That every church is to receive in all their members by baptism upon the confession of their faith and sins, wrought by the preaching of the gospel according to the primitive institution and practice. And therefore churches constituted after any other manner, or of any other persons, are not according to Christ's testament. That baptism or washing with water is the outward manifestation of dying unto sin and walking in newness of life; and therefore in no wise appertaineth to infants." They held "that no church ought to challenge any prerogative over any other"; and that "the magistrate is not to meddle with religion, or matters of conscience nor compel men to this or that form of religion." This is the first known expression of absolute liberty of conscience in any confession of faith.

1. Great Britain and Ireland.—If the Anabaptists of England weren't the founders of the modern Baptist church, we need to look elsewhere for the origins of that movement. While there were certainly many people with Baptist beliefs scattered among the Independent communities, it wasn't until the time of John Smith or Smyth (d. 1612) that the modern Baptist movement in England officially broke away from Brownism. Smyth was appointed as the preacher of Lincoln in 1600 as an ordained clergyman, but he became a separatist around 1605 or 1606, and soon after, he emigrated due to persecution with the Gainsborough Independents to Amsterdam. Together with Thomas Helwys (ca. 1560-ca. 1616) and Morton, he joined the "Ancient" church there, but after coming under Mennonite teaching in 1609, he separated from the Independents, baptized himself (which is why he's called the "Se-baptist"), and likely baptized Helwys and others in line with the Anabaptist or Mennonite practice of pouring. They then formed the first English Baptist Church, which in 1611 published "a declaration of faith of English people remaining at Amsterdam in Holland." The article concerning baptism states:—"That every church should accept all their members through baptism based on their confession of faith and sins, resulting from the preaching of the gospel according to the original institution and practice. Therefore, churches established in any other way or with any other people are not in accordance with Christ's testament. That baptism or washing with water is the outward sign of dying to sin and living a new life; and thus should not be applied to infants." They also believed "that no church should have any privilege over any other"; and that "the magistrate should not interfere with religion or matters of conscience nor force people into any particular form of religion." This is the first known assertion of complete freedom of conscience in any confession of faith.

Smyth died in Holland, but in 1612 Helwys returned to England with his church and formed the first Baptist church worshipping on English soil. The church met in Newgate Street, London, and was the origin of the "General" Baptist denomination. Helwys and his followers were Arminians, repudiating with heat the Calvinistic doctrine of predestination. They thus differed from other Independents. "They also differed on the power of the magistrate in matters of belief and conscience. It was, in short, from their little dingy meeting house ... that there flashed out, first in England, the absolute doctrine of Religious Liberty" (Prof. Masson). Leonard Busher, the author of "Religious Peace: or a Plea for Liberty of Conscience," was a member of this church.

Smyth died in Holland, but in 1612, Helwys returned to England with his church and formed the first Baptist church to worship on English soil. The church met on Newgate Street in London and became the foundation of the "General" Baptist denomination. Helwys and his followers were Arminians, strongly rejecting the Calvinistic doctrine of predestination. This made them different from other Independents. "They also disagreed on the authority of the magistrate concerning belief and conscience. It was, in short, from their small, worn meeting house that there emerged, for the first time in England, the absolute doctrine of Religious Liberty" (Prof. Masson). Leonard Busher, the author of "Religious Peace: or a Plea for Liberty of Conscience," was a member of this church.

The next great event in the history of the Baptists (though it should be mentioned that the last execution for heresy in England by burning was that of a Baptist, Edward Wightman, at Lichfield 1612) is the rise of the first Calvinistic or Particular Baptist Church. This was the Jacob church in Southwark, which numbered among its members John Lothropp or Lathrop (d. 1653), Praise-God Barbon (ca. 1596-1679), Henry Jessey (1601-1663), Hanserd Knollys (ca. 1599-1691) and William Kiffin (1616-1701). It was originally Independent but then became Baptist. From this six other churches sprang, five of which were Baptist. Before the Jacob church, however, had itself become Baptist, it dismissed from its membership a group of its members (the church having grown beyond what was regarded as proper limits) who, in 1633, became the first Particular Baptist Church.

The next major event in Baptist history (and it's worth noting that the last execution for heresy by burning in England was of a Baptist, Edward Wightman, in Lichfield in 1612) is the formation of the first Calvinistic or Particular Baptist Church. This was the Jacob church in Southwark, which included members like John Lothropp or Lathrop (d. 1653), Praise-God Barbon (c. 1596-1679), Henry Jessey (1601-1663), Hanserd Knollys (c. 1599-1691), and William Kiffin (1616-1701). It started as an Independent church but later became Baptist. From this church, six other churches emerged, five of which were Baptist. However, before the Jacob church became Baptist, it dismissed a group of its members (as it had grown beyond what was seen as appropriate limits) who, in 1633, formed the first Particular Baptist Church.

Thus there were now in existence in England two sets of Baptists whose origins were quite distinct and who never had any real intercourse as churches. They differed in many respects. The General Baptists were Arminian, owing to the influence of the Mennonite Anabaptists. The Particular Baptists were Calvinist, springing as they did from the Independents. But on the question of Baptism both groups, while they utterly rejected the baptism of infants, were as yet unpledged to immersion and rarely practised it. The development of their doctrine as to baptism was marked along three lines of dispute:—(1) who is the proper administrator of baptism? (2) who are the proper subjects? and (3) what is the proper mode? Eventually agreement was reached, and in 1644 a Confession of Faith was published in the names of the Particular Baptist churches of London, now grown to seven, "commonly (though falsely) called Anabaptist."

Thus, there were now two groups of Baptists in England with completely different origins who never interacted much as churches. They had many differences. The General Baptists were Arminian, influenced by the Mennonite Anabaptists. The Particular Baptists were Calvinist, emerging from the Independents. However, on the topic of Baptism, both groups completely rejected infant baptism but were not committed to immersion and rarely practiced it. Their development of baptism doctrine involved three main disputes: (1) who is the proper administrator of baptism? (2) who are the proper subjects? and (3) what is the proper mode? Eventually, they reached an agreement, and in 1644 a Confession of Faith was published in the names of the Particular Baptist churches of London, which had grown to seven, "commonly (though falsely) called Anabaptist."

The article on baptism is as follows:—"That baptism is an ordinance of the New Testament given by Christ to be dispensed only upon persons professing faith, or that are disciples, or taught, who, upon a profession of faith, ought to be baptized." "The way and manner of dispensing this ordinance the Scripture holds out to be dipping or plunging the whole body under water." They further declare (particularly in order that they may avoid the charge of being Anabaptists) that "a civil magistracy is an ordinance of God," which they are bound to obey. They speak of the "breathing time" which they have had of late, and their hope that God would, as they say, "incline the magistrates' hearts so for to tender our consciences as that we might be protected by them from wrong, injury, oppression and molestation"; and then they proceed: "But if God withhold the magistrates' allowance and furtherance herein, yet we must, notwithstanding, proceed together in Christian communion, not daring to give place to suspend our practice, but to walk in obedience to Christ in the profession and holding forth this faith before mentioned, even in the midst of all trials and afflictions, not accounting our goods, lands, wives, children, fathers, mothers, brethren, sisters, yea, and our own lives, dear unto us, so that we may finish our course with joy; remembering always that we ought to obey God rather than men." They end their confession thus: "If any take this that we have said to be heresy, then do we with the apostle freely confess, that after the way which they call heresy worship we the God of our fathers, believing all things which are written in the Law and in the Prophets and Apostles, desiring from our souls to disclaim all heresies and opinions which are not after Christ, and to be stedfast, unmovable, always abounding in the work of the Lord, as knowing our labour shall not be in vain in the Lord." The "breathing time" was not of long continuance. Soon after the Restoration (1660) the meetings of nonconformists were continually disturbed and preachers were fined or imprisoned. One instance of these persecutions will, perhaps, be more impressive than any general statements. In the records of the Broadmead Baptist Church, Bristol, we find this remark: "On the 29th of November 1685 our pastor, Brother Fownes, died in Gloucester jail, having been kept there for two years and about nine months a prisoner, unjustly and maliciously, for the testimony of Jesus and preaching the gospel. He was a man of great learning, of a sound judgment, an able preacher, having great knowledge in divinity, law, physic, &c.; a bold and patient sufferer for the Lord Jesus and the gospel he preached."

The article on baptism states: “Baptism is an ordinance of the New Testament given by Christ, meant to be practiced only on individuals who profess faith, or are disciples, or have been taught, and who, upon declaring their faith, should be baptized.” “The manner of administering this ordinance, according to Scripture, is by fully immersing the person under water.” They also emphasize (especially to avoid being accused of being Anabaptists) that “civil government is an ordinance established by God,” which they must obey. They mention the “breathing time” they have experienced recently and their hope that God would, as they put it, “influence the magistrates’ hearts to respect our consciences so that we can be protected by them from harm, injustice, oppression, and harassment”; then they continue: “But if God denies the support and assistance from the magistrates in this matter, we must continue in Christian fellowship, determined not to pause our practice, but to obey Christ in professing and upholding this faith mentioned above, even amidst all trials and difficulties, valuing neither our possessions, lands, spouses, children, fathers, mothers, brothers, sisters, nor even our own lives, as dear to us, so that we can complete our journey with joy; always remembering that we ought to obey God rather than men.” They conclude their confession with: “If anyone claims that what we have stated is heresy, then we, with the apostle, freely confess that in the way they call heresy, we worship the God of our ancestors, believing all that is written in the Law, the Prophets, and the Apostles, and sincerely wishing to reject all heresies and ideas that do not align with Christ, and to be steadfast, unmovable, always excelling in the work of the Lord, knowing that our labor is not in vain in the Lord.” The “breathing time” did not last long. Shortly after the Restoration (1660), nonconformist meetings were frequently disrupted, and preachers faced fines or imprisonment. One particular instance of these persecutions may be more striking than any general summaries. In the records of the Broadmead Baptist Church in Bristol, we find this note: “On November 29, 1685, our pastor, Brother Fownes, died in Gloucester jail, having been unjustly imprisoned for two years and about nine months for his testimony for Jesus and preaching the gospel. He was a highly educated man, with sound judgment, a skilled preacher, possessing extensive knowledge in theology, law, medicine, etc.; a courageous and patient sufferer for the Lord Jesus and the gospel he preached.”

[v.03 p.0373]

Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links.

With the Revolution of 1688, and the passing of the Act of Toleration in 1689, the history of the persecution of Baptists, as well as of other Protestant dissenters, ends. The removal of the remaining disabilities such as those imposed by the Test and Corporation Acts repealed in 1828, has no special bearing on Baptists more than on other nonconformists. The ministers of the "three denominations of dissenters,"—Presbyterians, Independents and Baptists,—resident in London and the neighbourhood, had the privilege accorded to them of presenting on proper occasions an address to the sovereign in state, a privilege which they still enjoy under the name of "the General Body of Protestant Dissenting Ministers of the three Denominations." The "General Body" was not organized until 1727.

With the Revolution of 1688 and the passing of the Act of Toleration in 1689, the history of the persecution of Baptists and other Protestant dissenters came to an end. The removal of remaining restrictions, like those imposed by the Test and Corporation Acts repealed in 1828, does not specifically affect Baptists more than other nonconformists. The ministers of the "three denominations of dissenters"—Presbyterians, Independents, and Baptists—living in London and the surrounding areas were granted the privilege of presenting addresses to the sovereign on appropriate occasions, a privilege they still hold under the name of "the General Body of Protestant Dissenting Ministers of the three Denominations." The "General Body" wasn't organized until 1727.

The Baptists, having had a double origin, continued for many years in two sections—those who in accordance with Arminian views held the doctrine of "General Redemption," and those who, agreeing with the Calvinistic theory, held the doctrine of "Particular Redemption"; and hence they were known respectively as General Baptists and Particular Baptists. In the 18th century many of the General Baptists gradually adopted the Arian, or, perhaps, the Socinian theory; whilst, on the other hand, the Calvinism of the Particular Baptists in many of the churches became more rigid, and approached or actually became Antinomianism. In 1770 the orthodox portion of the General Baptists, mainly under the influence of Dan Taylor (b. 1738), formed themselves into a separate association, under the name of the General Baptist New Connection, since which time the "Old Connection" has gradually merged into the Unitarian denomination. By the beginning of the 19th century the New Connection numbered 40 churches and 3400 members. The old General Baptists "still keep up a shadowy legal existence." Towards the end of the 18th century many of the Particular Baptist churches became more moderate in their Calvinism, a result largely attributable to the writings of Andrew Fuller. Up to this time a great majority of the Baptists admitted none either to membership or communion who were not baptized, the principal exception being the churches in Bedfordshire and Hertfordshire, founded or influenced by Bunyan, who maintained that difference of opinion in respect to water baptism was no bar to communion. At the beginning of the 19th century this question was the occasion of great and long-continued discussion, in which the celebrated Robert Hall (1764-1831) took a principal part. The practice of mixed communion gradually spread in the denomination. Still more recently many Baptist churches have considered it right to admit to full membership persons professing faith in Christ, who do not agree with them respecting the ordinance of baptism. Such churches justify their practice on the ground that they ought to grant to all their fellow-Christians the same right of private judgment as they claim for themselves. It may not be out of place here to correct the mistake, which is by no means uncommon, that the terms Particular and General as applied to Baptist congregations were intended to express this difference in their practice, whereas these terms related, as has been already said, to the difference in their doctrinal views. The difference now under consideration is expressed by the terms "strict" and "open," according as communion (or membership) is or is not confined to persons who, according to their view, are baptized.

The Baptists, having originated from two different sources, continued for many years in two groups—those who, following Arminian beliefs, supported the idea of "General Redemption," and those who, aligning with Calvinism, supported the concept of "Particular Redemption"; thus, they were known respectively as General Baptists and Particular Baptists. In the 18th century, many of the General Baptists gradually adopted Arian or possibly Socinian views; meanwhile, the Calvinism of the Particular Baptists in many churches became stricter and sometimes leaned towards Antinomianism. In 1770, the orthodox faction of the General Baptists, mainly influenced by Dan Taylor (b. 1738), formed a separate association called the General Baptist New Connection, after which the "Old Connection" gradually merged into the Unitarian denomination. By the early 19th century, the New Connection comprised 40 churches and 3,400 members. The old General Baptists "still maintain a faint legal presence." Towards the end of the 18th century, many Particular Baptist churches became more moderate in their Calvinism, largely due to the writings of Andrew Fuller. Up to this point, a significant majority of Baptists restricted both membership and communion to those who were baptized, with the main exceptions being the churches in Bedfordshire and Hertfordshire, founded or influenced by Bunyan, who argued that differing opinions on water baptism should not prevent communion. At the start of the 19th century, this issue sparked extensive and ongoing debate, in which the well-known Robert Hall (1764-1831) played a key role. The practice of mixed communion gradually became more common in the denomination. More recently, many Baptist churches have decided it is right to admit into full membership individuals who profess faith in Christ but do not share their views on baptism. These churches justify their approach on the grounds that they should extend the same right of personal judgment to all their fellow Christians that they claim for themselves. It's worth noting that the terms Particular and General, when applied to Baptist congregations, did not indicate differences in their practices but rather differences in their doctrinal beliefs. The current distinction is expressed with the terms "strict" and "open," depending on whether communion (or membership) is restricted to those who, according to their understanding, have been baptized.

In 1891, largely under the influence of Dr John Clifford, a leading General Baptist, the two denominations, General and Particular, were united, there being now but one body called "The Baptist Union of Great Britain and Ireland." This Union, however, is purely voluntary, and some Baptist churches, a few of them prosperous and powerful, hold aloof from their sister churches so far as organization is concerned.

In 1891, mainly due to the influence of Dr. John Clifford, a prominent General Baptist, the two denominations, General and Particular, came together to form a single group known as "The Baptist Union of Great Britain and Ireland." However, this Union is entirely voluntary, and some Baptist churches, including a few that are quite successful and influential, remain independent from their sister churches in terms of organization.

There are other Baptist bodies outside the Baptist Union beside certain isolated churches. Throughout England there are many "Strict" Baptist churches which really form a separate denomination. For the most part they are linked together according to geographical distribution in associations, such as the "Metropolitan Association of Strict Baptist Churches," and the "Suffolk and Norfolk Association of Particular Baptist Churches." In the latter case the name "Particular" is preferred, but the association holds aloof from other Baptist churches because its principles are "strict." There is, however, no national Union. Indeed, the Strict Baptists are themselves divided into the "Standard" and "Vessel" parties—names derived from the "Gospel Standard" and "Earthen Vessel," the organs of the rival groups.

There are other Baptist groups outside the Baptist Union, along with some independent churches. Across England, there are many "Strict" Baptist churches that actually make up a separate denomination. Generally, they are organized by location into associations, such as the "Metropolitan Association of Strict Baptist Churches" and the "Suffolk and Norfolk Association of Particular Baptist Churches." In the latter case, the term "Particular" is preferred, but the association stays apart from other Baptist churches due to its "strict" principles. However, there is no national Union. In fact, the Strict Baptists are also split into the "Standard" and "Vessel" factions—names taken from the "Gospel Standard" and "Earthen Vessel," which are the publications of the competing groups.

The general characteristic of the Strict Baptists is their rigorous adherence to a type of Calvinistic theology now generally obsolete, and their insistence upon baptism as the condition of Christian communion. Their loose organization makes it impossible to obtain accurate statistics, but the number of their adherents is small. There is a strict Baptist Missionary Society (founded 1860, refounded 1897) which conducts mission work in South India. The income of this society was £1146 in 1905. It comprises 730 church members and 72 pastors and workers.

The main feature of the Strict Baptists is their strict commitment to a form of Calvinistic theology that is now largely outdated, and their insistence on baptism as a requirement for Christian fellowship. Their loosely organized structure makes it difficult to get precise statistics, but their following is small. There is a Strict Baptist Missionary Society (founded in 1860, re-established in 1897) that carries out mission work in South India. The income of this society was £1146 in 1905. It includes 730 church members and 72 pastors and workers.

The Baptists early felt the necessity of providing an educated ministry for their congregations. Some of their leading pastors had been educated in one or other of the English universities. Others had by their own efforts obtained a large amount of learning, amongst whom Dr John Gill was eminent for his knowledge of Hebrew, as shown in his Exposition of the Holy Scriptures, a work in 9 vols. folio, 1746-1766. Edward Terrill, who died in 1685, left a considerable part of his estate for the instruction of young men desiring to be trained for the ministry, under the superintendence of the pastor of the Broadmead Church, Bristol, of which he was a member. Other bequests for the same purpose were made, and from the year 1720 the Baptist Academy, as it was then called, received young men as students for the ministry among the Baptists. In 1770 the Bristol Education Society was formed to enlarge this academy; and about the year 1811 the present Bristol Baptist College was erected. In the north of England a similar education society was formed in 1804 at Bradford, Yorkshire, which has since been removed to Rawdon, near Leeds. In London another college was formed in 1810 at Stepney; it was removed to Regent's Park in 1856. The Pastors' College in connexion with the Metropolitan Tabernacle was instituted in 1856, and in 1866 the present Baptist College at Manchester was instituted at Bury in the interests of the "Strict" Baptist views. Besides these, which were voluntary colleges not under denominational control, the General Baptists maintained a college since 1797, which, since the amalgamation of the two Baptist bodies, has become also a voluntary institution, though previously supported by the General Baptist Association. It is called the "Midland Baptist College," and is situated in Nottingham. There is also a Baptist theological college in Glasgow, and there are two colleges in Wales and one in Ireland. The total number of students in these institutions is about 210.

The Baptists early recognized the need for an educated ministry for their congregations. Some of their prominent pastors had studied at various English universities. Others had gained considerable knowledge through their own efforts, with Dr. John Gill standing out for his expertise in Hebrew, as demonstrated in his Exposition of the Holy Scriptures, a work in 9 volumes, published between 1746 and 1766. Edward Terrill, who passed away in 1685, left a significant portion of his estate to support young men wishing to be trained for the ministry under the guidance of the pastor of the Broadmead Church in Bristol, where he was a member. Additional bequests for this purpose were made, and starting in 1720, the Baptist Academy, as it was known then, accepted young men as students for the ministry. In 1770, the Bristol Education Society was established to expand this academy; and around 1811, the current Bristol Baptist College was founded. In northern England, a similar education society was created in 1804 in Bradford, Yorkshire, which later moved to Rawdon, near Leeds. In London, another college was founded in 1810 in Stepney and relocated to Regent's Park in 1856. The Pastors' College associated with the Metropolitan Tabernacle was established in 1856, and in 1866, the current Baptist College in Manchester was founded in Bury to support "Strict" Baptist beliefs. In addition to these voluntary colleges not under denominational control, the General Baptists had maintained a college since 1797, which, following the merger of the two Baptist groups, became a voluntary institution, previously funded by the General Baptist Association. This college is called the "Midland Baptist College" and is located in Nottingham. There is also a Baptist theological college in Glasgow, two colleges in Wales, and one in Ireland. The total number of students in these institutions is approximately 210.

The Baptists were the first denomination of British Christians to undertake in a systematic way that work of missions to the heathen, which became so prominent a feature in the religious activity of the 19th century. As early as the year 1784 the Northamptonshire Association of Baptist churches resolved to recommend that the first Monday of every month should be set apart for prayer for the spread of the gospel. Shortly after, in 1792, the Baptist Missionary Society was formed at Kettering in Northamptonshire, after a sermon on Isaiah lii. 2, 3, preached by William Carey (1761-1834), the prime mover in the work, in which he urged two points: "Expect great things from God; attempt great things for God." In the course of the following year Carey sailed for India, where he was joined a few years later by Marshman and Ward, and the mission was established at Serampore. The great work of Dr Carey's life was the translation of the Bible into the various languages and dialects of India. The society's operations are now carried on, not only in the East, but in the West Indies, China, Africa (chiefly on the Congo river), and Europe.

The Baptists were the first group of British Christians to systematically engage in missionary work to non-Christians, which became a key aspect of religious activity in the 19th century. As early as 1784, the Northamptonshire Association of Baptist churches decided to dedicate the first Monday of every month to prayer for the spread of the gospel. Soon after, in 1792, the Baptist Missionary Society was established in Kettering, Northamptonshire, following a sermon on Isaiah 52:2-3 delivered by William Carey (1761-1834), who was a key figure in this movement. He emphasized two main points: "Expect great things from God; attempt great things for God." The following year, Carey sailed to India, where he was joined a few years later by Marshman and Ward, and the mission was set up at Serampore. The significant work of Dr. Carey's life was translating the Bible into various languages and dialects of India. The society now operates not only in the East but also in the West Indies, China, Africa (mainly along the Congo River), and Europe.

In regard to church government, the Baptists agree with the Congregationalists that each separate church is complete in itself, and has, therefore, power to choose its own ministers and to make such regulations as it deems to be most in accordance with the purpose of its existence, that is, the advancement of the kingdom of Christ. A comparatively small section of the denomination maintain that a "plurality of elders" or pastors is required for the complete organization of every separate church. This is the distinctive peculiarity of those churches in Scotland and the north of England which are known as Scotch Baptists. The largest church of this section, consisting of approximately 500 members, originated in Edinburgh in 1765, before which date only one Baptist church—that of Keiss in Caithness, formed about 1750—appears to have existed in Scotland. The greater number of the churches are united in association voluntarily formed, all of them determined by geographical limits. The associations, as well as the churches not in connexion with them, are united together in the Baptist Union of Great Britain and Ireland, formed in 1813 by the Particular Baptists. This union, however, exerts no authoritative action over the separate churches. One important part of the work of the union is the collection of information in which all the churches are interested. In 1909 there were in the United Kingdom: Baptist churches, 3046; chapels, 4124; sittings, 1,450,352; members, 424,008; Sunday school teachers, 58,687; Sunday scholars, 578,344; local preachers, 5615; and pastors in charge, 2078.

In terms of church governance, Baptists share the view with Congregationalists that each individual church is self-sufficient and, therefore, has the authority to choose its own ministers and establish regulations that it believes best serve its purpose, which is to promote the kingdom of Christ. A relatively small segment of the denomination argues that a "plurality of elders" or pastors is necessary for the full organization of each church. This is a defining characteristic of the churches in Scotland and northern England known as Scotch Baptists. The largest church in this group, with about 500 members, was founded in Edinburgh in 1765, at which point only one Baptist church—the one in Keiss, Caithness, established around 1750—seemed to exist in Scotland. Most of the churches are voluntarily associated based on geographical boundaries. Both the associations and the churches not connected to them are unified in the Baptist Union of Great Britain and Ireland, created in 1813 by the Particular Baptists. However, this union does not exercise authoritative control over the individual churches. A crucial role of the union is to gather information that all the churches find valuable. In 1909, the statistics in the United Kingdom were as follows: Baptist churches, 3,046; chapels, 4,124; total sittings, 1,450,352; members, 424,008; Sunday school teachers, 58,687; Sunday scholars, 578,344; local preachers, 5,615; and pastors in charge, 2,078.

At the beginning of the 20th century the Baptist Union collected a "Twentieth Century Fund" of £250,000, which has largely assisted the formation of new churches, and gives an indication of [v.03 p.0374]the unity and virility of the denomination. A still stronger evidence to the same effect was given by the Religious Census taken in 1904. While this only applied to London, its results are valuable as showing the comparative strength of the Baptist Church. These results are to the effect that in all respects the Baptists come second to the Anglicans in the following three particulars:—(1) Percentage of attendances at public worship contributed by Baptists, 10.81 (London County), 10.70 (Greater London); (2) aggregate of attendances, 54,597; (3) number of places of worship, 443.

At the beginning of the 20th century, the Baptist Union gathered a "Twentieth Century Fund" of £250,000, which has greatly helped establish new churches and shows the unity and strength of the denomination. A stronger indication of this was provided by the Religious Census taken in 1904. Although it only focused on London, its findings are useful in demonstrating the relative strength of the Baptist Church. The results indicate that in all respects, Baptists come in second to Anglicans in the following three areas: (1) Percentage of attendance at public worship contributed by Baptists: 10.81 (London County), 10.70 (Greater London); (2) total attendance: 54,597; (3) number of places of worship: 443.

2. The Continent of Europe.—During the 19th century what we have called the modern Baptist movement made its appearance in nearly every European country. In Roman Catholic countries Baptist churches were formed by missionaries coming from either England or America: work in France began in 1832, in Italy missions were started in 1866 (Spezia Mission) and in 1884 (Baptist Missionary Society, which also has a mission in Brittany), and in Spain in 1888. In Protestant countries and in Russia the Baptist movement began without missionary intervention from England or America. J. G. Oncken (1800-1884) formed the first church in Hamburg in 1834, and thereafter Baptist churches were formed in other countries as follows:—Denmark (1839), Holland and Sweden (1848), Switzerland (1849), Norway (1860), Austria and Rumania (1869), Hungary (1871), and Bulgaria (1884). Baptist churches also began to be formed in Russia and Finland in the 'fifties and 'sixties.

2. The Continent of Europe.—During the 19th century, what we now call the modern Baptist movement appeared in nearly every European country. In Roman Catholic countries, Baptist churches were established by missionaries coming from either England or America: work in France started in 1832, in Italy missions were launched in 1866 (Spezia Mission) and in 1884 (Baptist Missionary Society, which also has a mission in Brittany), and in Spain in 1888. In Protestant countries and in Russia, the Baptist movement began without missionary help from England or America. J. G. Oncken (1800-1884) founded the first church in Hamburg in 1834, and afterwards, Baptist churches were established in other countries as follows:—Denmark (1839), the Netherlands and Sweden (1848), Switzerland (1849), Norway (1860), Austria and Romania (1869), Hungary (1871), and Bulgaria (1884). Baptist churches also started to form in Russia and Finland in the '50s and '60s.

3. British Colonies.—In every colony the Baptists have a considerable place. There are unions of Baptist churches in the following colonies:—New South Wales, Victoria, S. Australia, Western Australia, Queensland, New Zealand, Tasmania, Canada (four Unions) and S. Africa. The work in S. Africa is assisted by the Baptist South African Missionary and Colonial Aid Society, having its seat in London.

3. British Colonies.—In every colony, Baptists hold a significant position. There are unions of Baptist churches in the following colonies: New South Wales, Victoria, South Australia, Western Australia, Queensland, New Zealand, Tasmania, Canada (four unions), and South Africa. The work in South Africa is supported by the Baptist South African Missionary and Colonial Aid Society, which is based in London.

The Baptist World Alliance was formed in 1905, when the first Baptist World Congress was held in London. The preamble of the constitution of this Alliance sufficiently indicates its nature: "Whereas, in the providence of God, the time has come when it seems fitting more fully to manifest the essential oneness in the Lord Jesus Christ, as their God and Saviour, of the churches of the Baptist order and faith throughout the world, and to promote the spirit of fellowship, service and co-operation among them, while recognizing the independence of each particular church and not assuming the functions of any existing organization, it is agreed to form a Baptist alliance, extending over every part of the world." This alliance does in fact include Baptists in every quarter of the globe, as will be seen from the following statistics:—

The Baptist World Alliance was established in 1905, during the first Baptist World Congress held in London. The preamble of the alliance's constitution clearly outlines its purpose: "Whereas, in God’s plan, the time has come to more fully demonstrate the essential unity in the Lord Jesus Christ, as their God and Savior, of the Baptist churches worldwide, and to promote a spirit of fellowship, service, and cooperation among them, while respecting the independence of each local church and not taking on the role of any existing organization, it is agreed to form a Baptist alliance that spans every part of the world." This alliance indeed includes Baptists from all corners of the globe, as shown by the following statistics:—

 

Churches.

Churches.

Members.

Members.

United States—

U.S.—

    National Baptist Convention

National Baptist Convention

16,996

16,996

2,110,269

2,110,269

    Southern Baptist Convention

SBC

20,431

20,431

1,832,638

1.8M

    "Disciples of Christ"

"Followers of Christ"

11,157

11,157

1,235,798

1,235,798

    Thirty-five Northern States

Thirty-five Northern States

8,894

8,894

986,821

986,821

    Fourteen other Bodies

Fourteen other bodies

7,921

7,921

414,775

414,775

Australasia

Australasia

270

270

23,253

23,253

Canada

Canada

985

985

103,062

103,062

S. Africa

South Africa

52

52

4,865

4,865

United Kingdom

UK

2,934

2,934

426,563

426,563

Austria Hungary

Austro-Hungarian Empire

37

37

9,783

9,783

Denmark

Denmark

29

29

3,954

3,954

Finland

Finland

43

43

2,301

2,301

France

France

28

28

2,278

2,278

Germany

Germany

180

180

32,462

32,462

Italy

Italy

53

53

1,375

1,375

Mexico and Central America

Mexico & Central America

58

58

1,820

1,820

Netherlands

Netherlands

22

22

1,413

1,413

Norway

Norway

39

39

2,849

2,849

Rumania and Bulgaria

Romania and Bulgaria

5

5

374

374

Russia and Poland[1]

Russia and Poland__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

131

131

24,136

24,136

S. America

South America

63

63

3,641

3,641

Spain

Spain

7

7

245

245

Sweden

Sweden

567

567

43,305

43,305

Switzerland

Switzerland

8

8

796

796

West Indies

Caribbean

318

318

42,310

42,310

Ceylon

Sri Lanka

25

25

1,044

1,044

China

China

137

137

12,160

12,160

India

India

1,215

1,215

121,716

121,716

Japan

Japan

40

40

2,326

2,326

Palestine

Palestine

1

1

106

106

Philippines

Philippines

4

4

425

425

Congo

Congo

21

21

4,673

4,673

West Africa

West Africa

10

10

629

629

          Total

Total

72,681

72,681

7,454,165

7.4 million

In 1909 the comparative totals were roughly:—72,988 churches; 7,480,940 members. In both sets of figures the Disciples of Christ (U.S.A.) are included.

In 1909, the overall numbers were approximately:—72,988 churches; 7,480,940 members. In both sets of figures, the Disciples of Christ (U.S.A.) are included.

Literature.—Thomas Crosby, The History of the English Baptists (4 vols. London, 1738-1740); D. Masson, Life of John Milton in Connexion with the History of his Time (6 vols. 1859-1880, new ed. 1881, &c.); B. Evans, The Early English Baptists, i. ii. (1862-1864); H. C. Vedder, A Short History of the Baptists (London, 1897); A. H. Newman, A Manual of Church History (Philadelphia, 1900-1903); R. Heath, Anabaptism (1895); C. Williams, The Principles and Practices of the Baptists (1903); E. C. Pike, The Story of the Anabaptists (1904); J. H. Shakespeare, Baptist and Congregational Pioneers; J. G. Lehmann, Geschichte der deutschen Baptisten (1896-1900); G. Tumbült, Die Wiedertäufer (Bielefeld, 1899); The Baptist Handbook (annually); The Baptist World Congress, 1905; The Religious Census of London (1904).

Literature.—Thomas Crosby, The History of the English Baptists (4 vols. London, 1738-1740); D. Masson, Life of John Milton in Connection with the History of His Time (6 vols. 1859-1880, new ed. 1881, etc.); B. Evans, The Early English Baptists, i. ii. (1862-1864); H. C. Vedder, A Short History of the Baptists (London, 1897); A. H. Newman, A Manual of Church History (Philadelphia, 1900-1903); R. Heath, Anabaptism (1895); C. Williams, The Principles and Practices of the Baptists (1903); E. C. Pike, The Story of the Anabaptists (1904); J. H. Shakespeare, Baptist and Congregational Pioneers; J. G. Lehmann, Geschichte der deutschen Baptisten (1896-1900); G. Tumbült, Die Wiedertäufer (Bielefeld, 1899); The Baptist Handbook (annually); The Baptist World Congress, 1905; The Religious Census of London (1904).

(N. H. M.)

(N. H. M.)

4. United States of America.—The first Baptist Church in America was that founded in the Providence settlement on Narragansett Bay under the leadership of Roger Williams (q.v.). Having been sentenced to banishment (October 1635) by the Massachusetts Court because of his persistence in advocating separatistic views deemed unsettling and dangerous, to escape deportation to England he betook himself (January 1636) to the wilderness, where he was hospitably entertained by the natives who gave him a tract of land for a settlement. Having been joined by a few friends from Massachusetts, Williams founded a commonwealth in which absolute religious liberty was combined with civil democracy. In the firm conviction that churches of Christ should be made up exclusively of regenerate members, the baptism of infants appeared to him not only valueless but a perversion of a Christian ordinance. About March 1639, with eleven others, he decided to restore believers' baptism and to form a church of baptized believers. Ezekiel Holliman, who had been with him at Plymouth and shared his separatist views, first baptized Williams and Williams baptized the rest of the company. Williams did not long continue to find satisfaction in the step he had taken. Believing that the ordinances and apostolic church organization had been lost in the general apostasy, he became convinced that it was presumptuous for any man or company of men to undertake their restoration without a special divine commission. He felt compelled to withdraw from the church and to assume the position of a seeker. He continued on friendly terms with the Baptists of Providence, and in his writings he expressed the conviction that their practice came nearer than that of other communities to the first practice of Christ.

4. United States of America.—The first Baptist Church in America was established in the Providence settlement on Narragansett Bay under the leadership of Roger Williams (q.v.). He was sentenced to banishment (October 1635) by the Massachusetts Court for persistently advocating separatist views that were considered unsettling and dangerous. To avoid being deported to England, he fled (January 1636) into the wilderness, where he was welcomed by the natives who gave him land for a settlement. After being joined by a few friends from Massachusetts, Williams created a community that combined complete religious freedom with civil democracy. Firmly believing that churches of Christ should consist only of regenerated members, he saw infant baptism as not only pointless but as a corruption of a Christian ordinance. Around March 1639, along with eleven others, he decided to restore believers' baptism and form a church of baptized believers. Ezekiel Holliman, who had been with him in Plymouth and shared his separatist views, first baptized Williams, and then Williams baptized the rest of the group. However, Williams soon became dissatisfied with this step. He believed that the ordinances and original church structure had been lost due to widespread apostasy, and he was convinced it was presumptuous for anyone to try to restore them without a special divine commission. He felt the need to withdraw from the church and take on the role of a seeker. He maintained a friendly relationship with the Baptists of Providence, and in his writings, he expressed the belief that their practices were closer to the original practices of Christ than those of other communities.

In November 1637 John Clarke (1609-1676), a physician, of religious zeal and theological acumen, arrived at Boston, where, instead of the religious freedom he was seeking, he found the dominant party in the Antinomian controversy on the point of banishing the Antinomian minority, including Mrs Anne Hutchinson (q.v.) and her family, John Wheelwright (c. 1592-1679), and William Coddington (1601-1678). Whether from sympathy with the persecuted or aversion to the persecutors, he cast in his lot with the former and after two unsuccessful attempts at settlement assisted the fugitives in forming a colony on the island of Aquidnek (Rhode Island), procured from the Indians through the good offices of Williams. By 1641 there were, according to John Winthrop, "professed Anabaptists" on the island, and Clarke was probably their leader. Robert Lenthall, who joined the Newport company in 1640 when driven from Massachusetts, probably brought with him antipaedobaptist convictions. Mrs Scott, sister of Mrs Hutchinson, is thought to have been an aggressive antipaedobaptist when the colony was founded. Mark Lucar, who was baptized by immersion in London in January 1642 (N.S.) and was a member of a Baptist church there, reached Newport about 1644. A few years later we find [v.03 p.0375]him associated with Clarke as one of the most active members of the Newport church, and as the date of the organization is uncertain, there is some reason to suspect that he was a constituent member, and that as a baptized man he took the initiative in baptizing and organizing. At any rate we have in Lucar an interesting connecting link between early English and American Baptists.

In November 1637, John Clarke (1609-1676), a physician known for his religious passion and theological insight, arrived in Boston. Instead of finding the religious freedom he sought, he discovered that the leading group in the Antinomian controversy was about to expel the Antinomian minority, which included Mrs. Anne Hutchinson (q.v.) and her family, John Wheelwright (c. 1592-1679), and William Coddington (1601-1678). Whether out of sympathy for the persecuted or dislike for the persecutors, he aligned himself with the former and, after two unsuccessful attempts to settle, helped the refugees establish a colony on Aquidneck Island (Rhode Island), which was secured from the Native Americans through the mediation of Williams. By 1641, there were, according to John Winthrop, "professed Anabaptists" on the island, and Clarke was likely their leader. Robert Lenthall, who joined the Newport group in 1640 after being pushed out of Massachusetts, probably brought antipaedobaptist beliefs with him. Mrs. Scott, sister of Mrs. Hutchinson, is thought to have been a strong antipaedobaptist at the founding of the colony. Mark Lucar, who was baptized by immersion in London in January 1642 (N.S.) and was part of a Baptist church there, arrived in Newport around 1644. A few years later, we find [v.03 p.0375]him working with Clarke as one of the most active members of the Newport church; since the date of its organization is uncertain, there is some reason to believe that he was a founding member, and that as a baptized individual, he played a key role in baptizing and organizing the church. In any case, Lucar represents an intriguing link between early English and American Baptists.

The Providence church maintained a rather feeble existence after Williams's withdrawal, with Thomas Olney (d. 1682), William Wickenden, Chad Brown (d. 1665) and Gregory Dexter as leading members. A schism occurred in 1652, the last three with a majority of the members contending for general redemption and for the laying on of hands as indispensable to fellowship, Olney, with the minority, maintaining particular redemption and rejecting the laying on of hands as an ordinance. Olney's party became extinct soon after his death in 1682. The surviving church became involved in Socinianism and Universalism, but maintained a somewhat vigorous life and, through Wickenden and others, exerted considerable influence at Newport, in Connecticut, New York and elsewhere. Dexter became, with Williams and Clarke, a leading statesman in Rhode Island and Providence Plantations.

The Providence church had a pretty weak existence after Williams left, with Thomas Olney (d. 1682), William Wickenden, Chad Brown (d. 1665), and Gregory Dexter as its main members. A split happened in 1652, with the last three and most of the members arguing for general redemption and insisting that laying on of hands was essential for fellowship, while Olney and his smaller group argued for particular redemption and rejected the laying on of hands as a practice. Olney's group disappeared soon after his death in 1682. The remaining church got involved in Socinianism and Universalism but continued to have a somewhat vibrant life and, through Wickenden and others, had significant influence in Newport, Connecticut, New York, and beyond. Dexter became a leading politician in Rhode Island and Providence Plantations alongside Williams and Clarke.

The Newport church extended its influence into Massachusetts, and in 1649 we find a group of Baptists at Rehoboth, with Obadiah Holmes as leader. The intolerance of the authorities rendered the prosecution of the work impracticable and these Massachusetts Baptists became members of the Newport church. In 1651 Clarke, Holmes and Joseph Crandall of the Newport church made a religious visit to Lynn, Mass. While holding a meeting in a private house they were arrested and were compelled to attend the church services of the standing order. For holding an unlawful meeting and refusing to participate quietly in the public service they were fined, imprisoned and otherwise maltreated. While in England on public business in 1652, Clarke published Ill News from New England, which contained an impressive account of the proceedings against himself and his brethren at Lynn, and an earnest and well-reasoned plea for liberty of conscience.

The Newport church expanded its influence into Massachusetts, and in 1649 we find a group of Baptists in Rehoboth, led by Obadiah Holmes. The authorities' intolerance made it impossible for them to continue their work, so these Massachusetts Baptists joined the Newport church. In 1651, Clarke, Holmes, and Joseph Crandall from the Newport church made a religious visit to Lynn, Mass. While holding a meeting in a private home, they were arrested and forced to attend the church services of the established order. For holding an unauthorized meeting and refusing to quietly participate in the public service, they were fined, imprisoned, and mistreated. While in England on public business in 1652, Clarke published Ill News from New England, which included a powerful account of the proceedings against him and his fellow Baptists in Lynn, along with a passionate and well-reasoned argument for freedom of conscience.

Henry Dunster (1612-1659), the first president of the college at Cambridge (Harvard), had by 1653 become convinced that "visible believers only should be baptized." Being unwilling to hold his views in abeyance, he relinquished in 1654, under circumstances of considerable hardship, the work that he greatly loved.

Henry Dunster (1612-1659), the first president of the college at Cambridge (Harvard), had by 1653 become convinced that "only visible believers should be baptized." Not wanting to keep his views to himself, he stepped down in 1654, facing significant challenges, from the work he deeply loved.

In 1663 John Myles (1621-1683), a Welsh Baptist who had been one of Cromwell's Tryers, with his congregation, took refuge in Massachusetts from the intolerance of the government of Charles II. They were allowed to settle in Rehoboth, Mass., and even after they were discovered to be Baptists they were allowed to remain on condition of establishing their meeting-place at a considerable distance from that of the standing order. Myles did much to promote the growth of the Baptist Church in Massachusetts, and was of service to the denomination in Boston and elsewhere. Thomas Gould of Charlestown seems to have been in close touch with President Dunster and to have shared his antipaedobaptist views as early as 1654. Some time before 1665 several English Baptists had settled in the neighbourhood of Boston and several others had adopted Baptist views. These, with Gould, were baptized (May 1665) and joined with those who had been baptized in England in a church covenant. The church was severely persecuted, the members being frequently imprisoned and fined and denied the use of a building they had erected as a meeting-house. Long after the Act of Toleration (1689) was in full force in England, the Boston Baptists pleaded in vain for the privileges to which they were thereby entitled, and it required the most earnest efforts of English Baptists and other dissenters to gain for them a recognition of the right to exist. A mandate from Charles II. (July 1679), in which the Massachusetts authorities were sharply rebuked for denying to others the liberty to secure which they themselves had gone into exile, had produced little effect.

In 1663, John Myles (1621-1683), a Welsh Baptist who had been one of Cromwell's Tryers, sought refuge in Massachusetts with his congregation to escape the intolerance of Charles II's government. They were allowed to settle in Rehoboth, Mass., and even after their Baptist identity was discovered, they were permitted to stay on the condition that they established their meeting place a significant distance from the existing church. Myles played a significant role in promoting the growth of the Baptist Church in Massachusetts and contributed to the denomination in Boston and elsewhere. Thomas Gould from Charlestown seemed to have been closely associated with President Dunster and shared his anti-infant baptism views as early as 1654. Before 1665, several English Baptists settled near Boston, and more individuals adopted Baptist beliefs. These, along with Gould, were baptized in May 1665 and joined those baptized in England in a church covenant. The church faced severe persecution, with members frequently imprisoned, fined, and denied the use of a building they had constructed as a meeting place. Long after the Act of Toleration (1689) was fully enforced in England, the Boston Baptists unsuccessfully sought the rights to which they were entitled. It took significant efforts from English Baptists and other dissenters to gain recognition of their right to exist. A mandate from Charles II (July 1679), which sharply criticized the Massachusetts authorities for denying others the liberties they themselves had sought through exile, had little impact.

In 1682 William Screven (1629-1713) and Humphrey Churchwood, members of the Boston church, gathered and organized, With the co-operation of the mother church, a small congregation at Kittery, Me. Persecution led to migration, Screven and some of the members making their way to South Carolina, where, with a number of English Baptists of wealth and position, what became the First Baptist church in Charleston, was organized (about 1684). This became one of the most important of early Baptist centres, and through Screven's efforts Baptist principles became widely disseminated throughout that region. The withdrawal of members to form other churches in the neighbourhood and the intrusion of Socinianism almost extinguished the Charleston church about 1746.

In 1682, William Screven (1629-1713) and Humphrey Churchwood, members of the Boston church, came together and organized a small congregation in Kittery, Maine, with the support of the mother church. Persecution prompted them to migrate, and Screven, along with some members, traveled to South Carolina. There, along with several affluent English Baptists, they established what became the First Baptist Church in Charleston around 1684. This church emerged as one of the key early Baptist centers, and thanks to Screven's efforts, Baptist principles were spread widely throughout the area. However, the departure of members to form other local churches and the rise of Socinianism nearly caused the Charleston church to collapse around 1746.

A few Baptists of the general (Arminian) type appeared in Virginia from 1714 onward, and were organized and fostered by missionaries from the English General Baptists. By 1727 they had invaded North Carolina and a church was constituted there.

A few Baptists of the general (Arminian) type showed up in Virginia starting in 1714, organized and supported by missionaries from the English General Baptists. By 1727, they had spread into North Carolina, where a church was established.

From 1643 onward antipaedobaptists from New England and elsewhere had settled in the New Netherlands (New York). Lady Deborah Moody left Massachusetts for the New Netherlands in 1643 because of her antipaedobaptist views and on her way stopped at New Haven, where she won to her principles Mrs Eaton, the wife of the governor, Theophilus Eaton. She settled at Gravesend (now part of Brooklyn) having received from the Dutch authorities a guarantee of religious liberty. Francis Doughty, an English Baptist, who had spent some time in Rhode Island, laboured in this region in 1656 and baptized a number of converts. This latter proceeding led to his banishment. Later in the same year William Wickenden of Providence evangelized and administered the ordinances at Flushing, but was heavily fined and banished. From 1711 onward Valentine Wightman (1681-1747) of Connecticut (General Baptist) made occasional missionary visits to New York at the invitation of Nicolas Eyres, a business man who had adopted Baptist views, and in 1714 baptized Eyres and several others, and assisted them in organizing a church. The church was well-nigh wrecked (1730) by debt incurred in the erection of a meeting-house. A number of Baptists settled on Block Island about 1663. Some time before 1724 a Baptist church (probably Arminian) was formed at Oyster Bay.

From 1643 onward, antipaedobaptists from New England and beyond settled in New Netherlands (New York). Lady Deborah Moody left Massachusetts for New Netherlands in 1643 because of her antipaedobaptist beliefs and stopped in New Haven, where she convinced Mrs. Eaton, the wife of Governor Theophilus Eaton, to adopt her views. She settled in Gravesend (now part of Brooklyn) after receiving a guarantee of religious freedom from the Dutch authorities. Francis Doughty, an English Baptist who had spent some time in Rhode Island, worked in this area in 1656 and baptized several converts, which led to his banishment. Later that same year, William Wickenden from Providence preached and administered the ordinances in Flushing, but he was heavily fined and banished as well. From 1711 onward, Valentine Wightman (1681-1747) from Connecticut (General Baptist) made occasional missionary trips to New York at the invitation of Nicolas Eyres, a businessman who had adopted Baptist views. In 1714, he baptized Eyres and several others, helping them organize a church. The church faced serious financial issues in 1730 due to debt from building a meeting house. A group of Baptists settled on Block Island around 1663. A Baptist church (likely Arminian) was established at Oyster Bay sometime before 1724.

The Quaker colonies, with their large measure of religious liberty, early attracted a considerable number of Baptists from New England, England and Wales. About 1684 a Baptist church was founded at Cold Spring, Bucks county, Pa., through the efforts of Thomas Dungan, an Irish Baptist minister who had spent some time in Rhode Island. The Pennepek church was formed in 1688 through the labours of Elias Keach, son of Benjamin Keach (1640-1704), the famous English evangelist. Services were held in Philadelphia under the auspices of the Pennepek church from 1687 onward, but independent organization did not occur till 1698. Several Keithian Quakers united with the church, which ultimately became possessed of the Keithian meeting-house. Almost from the beginning general meetings had been held by the churches of these colonies. In 1707 the Philadelphia Association was formed as a delegated body "to consult about such things as were wanting in the churches and to set them in order." From its inception this body proved highly influential in promoting Baptist co-operation in missionary and educational work, in efforts to supply the churches with suitable ministers and to silence unworthy ones, and in maintaining sound doctrine. Sabbatarianism appeared within the bounds of the association at an early date and Seventh-day Baptist churches were formed (1705 onward).

The Quaker colonies, known for their significant religious freedom, soon attracted a large number of Baptists from New England, England, and Wales. Around 1684, a Baptist church was established at Cold Spring, Bucks County, PA, thanks to Thomas Dungan, an Irish Baptist minister who had spent time in Rhode Island. The Pennepek church was created in 1688 through the efforts of Elias Keach, the son of Benjamin Keach (1640-1704), the well-known English evangelist. Services began in Philadelphia under the Pennepek church’s direction from 1687 onwards, but it wasn’t until 1698 that they became an independent organization. Several Keithian Quakers joined the church, which eventually acquired the Keithian meeting-house. Almost from the start, general meetings were held by the churches in these colonies. In 1707, the Philadelphia Association was formed as a representative body "to discuss the needs of the churches and to organize them." From the beginning, this group was very influential in encouraging Baptist cooperation in missionary and educational efforts, in helping to provide the churches with qualified ministers and to remove unworthy ones, and in upholding sound doctrine. Sabbatarianism emerged within the association early on, leading to the formation of Seventh-day Baptist churches (from 1705 on).

The decades preceding the "Great Awakening" of 1740-1743 were a time of religious declension. A Socinianized Arminianism had paralysed evangelistic effort. The First Church, Providence, had long since become Arminian and held aloof from the evangelism of Edwards, Whitefield and their coadjutors. The First Church, Boston, had become Socinianized and discountenanced the revival. The First Church, Newport, had been rent asunder by Arminianism, and the nominally Calvinistic remnant had itself become divided on the question of the laying on of hands and showed no sympathy with the Great Awakening. The First Church, Charleston, had been wrecked by Socinianism. The General (Six Principles) Baptists of Rhode Island and [v.03 p.0376]Connecticut had increased their congregations and membership, and before the beginning of the 18th century had inaugurated annual associational meetings. But the fact that the Great Awakening in America was conducted on Calvinistic principles was sufficient to prevent their hearty co-operation. The churches of the Philadelphia Association were organized and engaged to some extent in missionary endeavour, but they showed little interest in the Edwards-Whitefield movement. And yet the Baptists ultimately profited by the Great Awakening beyond almost any of the denominations. In many New England communities a majority in the churches of the standing order bitterly opposed the new evangelism, and those who came under its influence felt constrained to organize "Separate" or "New Light" churches. These were severely persecuted by the dominant party and were denied even the scanty privileges that Baptists had succeeded in gaining. As the chief objection of the "Separates" to the churches of the standing order was their refusal to insist on personal regeneration as a term of membership, many of them were led to feel that they were inconsistent in requiring regenerate membership and yet administering baptism to unconscious infants. In several cases entire "Separate" churches reached the conviction that the baptism of infants was not only without Scriptural warrant but was a chief corner-stone of state-churchism, and transformed themselves into Baptist churches. In many cases a division of sentiment came to prevail on the matter of infant-baptism, and for a while mutual toleration prevailed; but mixed churches had their manifest disadvantages and separation ultimately ensued.

The years leading up to the "Great Awakening" from 1740 to 1743 were a period of religious decline. A Socinian-influenced Arminianism stifled evangelistic efforts. The First Church in Providence had fully embraced Arminianism and distanced itself from the evangelism of Edwards, Whitefield, and their supporters. The First Church in Boston became Socinianized and disapproved of the revival. The First Church in Newport was divided by Arminianism, and the remaining Calvinist faction was split over the issue of laying on of hands, showing little support for the Great Awakening. The First Church in Charleston was torn apart by Socinianism. The General (Six Principles) Baptists in Rhode Island and Connecticut grew their congregations and memberships and began holding annual associational meetings before the 18th century began. However, since the Great Awakening in America was based on Calvinistic principles, their enthusiastic cooperation was lacking. The churches of the Philadelphia Association were organized and somewhat involved in missionary work, but they showed little interest in the Edwards-Whitefield movement. Nevertheless, the Baptists ultimately benefited from the Great Awakening more than nearly any other denomination. In many New England communities, a majority of the established churches opposed the new evangelism, prompting those influenced by it to form "Separate" or "New Light" churches. These groups faced harsh persecution from the dominant faction and were denied even the limited rights that Baptists had managed to secure. Since the main complaint of the "Separates" against the established churches was their reluctance to emphasize personal regeneration as a requirement for membership, many began to question how they could demand regenerate membership while still baptizing unconscious infants. In several instances, entire "Separate" churches came to believe that infant baptism lacked Scriptural support and was a fundamental element of state-churchism, leading them to transform into Baptist churches. In many cases, differing opinions on infant baptism arose, and for a time, mutual tolerance existed; however, mixed churches exhibited clear disadvantages, and separation eventually occurred.

Among the Baptist leaders gained from Congregationalism as a result of the awakening was Isaac Backus (1724-1806), who became the New England champion in the cause of religious liberty and equality, and the historian of his denomination. To Daniel Marshall (d. 1784) and Shubael Stearns, "New Light" evangelists who became Baptists, the spread of Baptist principles and the multiplication of Baptist churches throughout the southern colonies were in great measure due. The feeble Baptist cause in Virginia and North Carolina had been considerably strengthened by missionaries from the churches of the Philadelphia Association, including Benjamin Griffith, John Gano (1727-1804), John Thomas, Benjamin Miller, Samuel Eaton, John Garrard and David Thomas, and several churches, formed or reformed under their influence, united with the association. In 1776 the Ketockton Association was formed by this group of churches. The Virginia colonial government, in earlier days cruelly intolerant, gave a limited toleration to Baptists of this type; but the "Separate" Baptists were too enthusiastic and too much alive to the evils of state control in religious matters to be willing to take out licences for their meetings, and soon came into sharp conflict with the authorities. Stearns was an evangelist of great power. With Marshall, his brother-in-law, and about a dozen fellow-believers he settled at Sandy Creek, North Carolina, and in a few years had built up a church with a membership of more than six hundred. Marshall afterward organized and ministered to a church at Abbott's Creek about 30 m. distant. From these centres "Separate" Baptist influence spread throughout North and South Carolina and across the Georgia border, Marshall himself finally settling and forming a church at Kiokee, Georgia. From North Carolina as a centre "Separate" Baptist influence permeated Virginia and extended into Kentucky and Tennessee. The Sandy Creek Association came to embrace churches in several colonies, and Stearns, desirous of preserving the harmonious working of the churches that recognized his leadership, resisted with vehemence all proposals for the formation of other associations.

Among the Baptist leaders influenced by Congregationalism during the awakening was Isaac Backus (1724-1806), who became the champion for religious freedom and equality in New England, as well as the historian for his denomination. To Daniel Marshall (d. 1784) and Shubael Stearns, "New Light" evangelists who became Baptists, a significant part of the spread of Baptist beliefs and the growth of Baptist churches throughout the southern colonies can be attributed. The once weak Baptist presence in Virginia and North Carolina was greatly strengthened by missionaries from the churches of the Philadelphia Association, which included Benjamin Griffith, John Gano (1727-1804), John Thomas, Benjamin Miller, Samuel Eaton, John Garrard, and David Thomas. Several churches that were formed or reformed under their guidance joined the association. In 1776, the Ketockton Association was established by this group of churches. The Virginia colonial government, which had previously been very intolerant, granted limited toleration to these Baptists; however, the "Separate" Baptists were too passionate and aware of the problems with state control over religious practices to apply for licenses for their meetings, leading to significant conflicts with the authorities. Stearns was a powerful evangelist. Together with Marshall, his brother-in-law, and around a dozen fellow-believers, he settled in Sandy Creek, North Carolina, and within a few years built a church with over six hundred members. Marshall later organized and led a church at Abbott's Creek about 30 miles away. From these centers, the influence of the "Separate" Baptists spread throughout North and South Carolina and into Georgia, where Marshall eventually settled and established a church at Kiokee, Georgia. From North Carolina, the "Separate" Baptist presence began to permeate Virginia and expanded into Kentucky and Tennessee. The Sandy Creek Association included churches from several colonies, and Stearns, wanting to maintain the smooth operation of the churches under his leadership, strongly opposed any proposals to create other associations.

From 1760 to 1770 the growth of the "Separate" Baptist body in Virginia and the Carolinas was phenomenal. Evangelists like Samuel Harris (1724-c.1794) and John Waller (1741-1802) stirred whole communities and established Baptist churches where the Baptist name had hitherto been unknown. The Sandy Creek Association, with Stearns as leader, undertook to "unfellowship ordinations, ministers and churches that acted independently," and provoked such opposition that a division of the association became necessary. The General Association of Virginia and the Congaree Association of South Carolina now took their places side by side with the Sandy Creek. The Virginia "Separate" Baptists had more than doubled their numbers in the two years from May 1771 to May 1773. In 1774 some of the Virginia brethren became convinced that the apostolic office was meant to be perpetuated and induced the association to appoint an apostle. Samuel Harris was the unanimous choice and was solemnly ordained. Waller and Elijah Craig (1743-1800) were made apostles soon afterward for the northern district. This arrangement, soon abandoned, was no doubt suggested by Methodist superintendency. In 1775 Methodist influence appeared in the contention of two of the apostles and Jeremiah Walker for universal redemption. Schism was narrowly averted by conciliatory statements on both sides. As a means of preserving harmony the Philadelphia Confession of Faith, a Calvinistic document, with provision against too rigid a construction, was adopted and a step was thus taken toward harmonizing with the "Regular" Baptists of the Philadelphia type. When the General Association was sub-divided (1783), a General Committee, made up of delegates from each district association, was constituted to consider matters that might be for the good of the whole society. Its chief work was to continue the agitation in which for some years the body had been successfully engaged in favour of religious equality and the entire separation of church and state. Since 1780 the "Separate" Baptists had had the hearty co-operation of the "Regular" Baptists in their struggle for religious liberty and equality. In 1787 the two bodies united and agreed to drop the names "Separate" and "Regular." The success of the Baptists of Virginia in securing step by step the abolition of everything that savoured of religious oppression, involving at last the disestablishment and the disendowment of the Episcopal Church, was due in part to the fact that Virginia Baptists were among the foremost advocates of American independence, while the Episcopal clergy were loyalists and had made themselves obnoxious to the people by using the authority of Great Britain in extorting their tithes from unwilling parishioners, and that they secured the co-operation of free-thinking statesmen like Thomas Jefferson and James Madison and, in most measures, that of the Presbyterians.

From 1760 to 1770, the growth of the "Separate" Baptist movement in Virginia and the Carolinas was remarkable. Evangelists like Samuel Harris (1724-c.1794) and John Waller (1741-1802) energized entire communities and established Baptist churches where the denomination had previously been unknown. The Sandy Creek Association, led by Stearns, sought to "unfellowship" ordinations, ministers, and churches acting independently, which created so much opposition that a split in the association became necessary. The General Association of Virginia and the Congaree Association of South Carolina emerged alongside Sandy Creek. The Virginia "Separate" Baptists more than doubled their numbers from May 1771 to May 1773. In 1774, some Virginia members believed the apostolic office should be continued and convinced the association to appoint an apostle. Samuel Harris was unanimously chosen and formally ordained. Waller and Elijah Craig (1743-1800) were also made apostles shortly afterward for the northern district. This setup, which was soon abandoned, was likely inspired by the Methodist superintendency. In 1775, Methodist influence surfaced in the debate between two apostles and Jeremiah Walker about universal redemption. A schism was narrowly avoided through conciliatory statements from both sides. To maintain harmony, the Philadelphia Confession of Faith, a Calvinistic document that included a provision against overly strict interpretation, was adopted, taking a step toward aligning with the "Regular" Baptists of the Philadelphia type. When the General Association was subdivided in 1783, a General Committee made up of delegates from each district association was formed to address matters beneficial to the entire society. Its main focus was to continue the successful push for religious equality and the complete separation of church and state. Since 1780, the "Separate" Baptists had received strong support from the "Regular" Baptists in their fight for religious liberty and equality. In 1787, the two groups united and decided to drop the names "Separate" and "Regular." The success of Virginia Baptists in gradually abolishing all forms of religious oppression, ultimately leading to the disestablishment and disendowment of the Episcopal Church, was partly due to the fact that Virginia Baptists were among the leading advocates of American independence, while the Episcopal clergy were loyalists who had alienated the people by using British authority to extract tithes from unwilling parishioners. They also gained the support of free-thinking politicians like Thomas Jefferson and James Madison, along with most Presbyterians.

The Baptist cause in New England that had profited so largely from the Great Awakening failed to reap a like harvest from the War of Independence. The standing order in New England represented the patriotic and popular party. Baptists lost favour by threatening to appeal to England for a redress of their grievances at the very time when resistance to English oppression was being determined upon. The result was slowness of growth and failure to secure religious liberty. Though a large proportion of the New England Baptists co-operated heartily in the cause of independence, the denomination failed to win the popularity that comes from successful leadership.

The Baptist movement in New England, which had greatly benefited from the Great Awakening, did not enjoy the same rewards from the War of Independence. The established church in New England represented the patriotic and popular side. Baptists lost support by threatening to appeal to England to address their issues at a time when resistance to English oppression was becoming essential. As a result, they experienced slow growth and failed to achieve religious freedom. Although many New England Baptists actively supported the cause of independence, the denomination did not gain the popularity that comes from effective leadership.

About 1762 the Philadelphia Association began to plan for the establishment of a Baptist institution of learning that should serve the entire denomination. Rhode Island was finally fixed upon, partly as the abode of religious liberty and because of its intelligent, influential and relatively wealthy Baptist constituency, the consequent likelihood of procuring a charter from its legislature, and the probability that the co-operation of other denominations in an institution under Baptist control would be available. James Manning (1738-1791), who had just been graduated from Princeton with high honours, was thought of as a suitable leader in the enterprise, and was sent to Rhode Island (1763) to confer with leading men, Baptist and other. As a result a charter was granted by the legislature in 1764, and after a few years of preliminary work at Warren (where the first degrees ever bestowed by a Baptist institution were conferred in 1769), Providence was chosen as the home of the college (1770). Here, with Manning as president and Hezekiah Smith (1737-1805), his class-mate at Princeton, as financial agent and influential supporter, the institution (since 1804 known as Brown University) was for many years the only degree-conferring [v.03 p.0377]institution controlled by Baptists. The Warren Association (1767) was organized under the influence of Manning and Smith on the model of the Philadelphia, and became a chief agency for the consolidation of denominational life, the promotion of denominational education and the securing of religious liberty. Hezekiah Smith was a highly successful evangelist, and through his labours scores of churches were constituted in New England. As chaplain in the American Revolutionary Army he also exerted a widespread influence.

Around 1762, the Philadelphia Association began planning to create a Baptist institution of higher education that would serve the entire denomination. Rhode Island was eventually chosen, partly due to its reputation for religious freedom and its educated, influential, and relatively affluent Baptist community, which made it likely to secure a charter from its legislature. Additionally, there was a good chance that other denominations would support an institution under Baptist control. James Manning (1738-1791), who had recently graduated with honors from Princeton, was seen as a suitable leader for this initiative and was sent to Rhode Island in 1763 to meet with prominent individuals, both Baptist and non-Baptist. As a result, the legislature granted a charter in 1764, and after a few years of preliminary work in Warren (where the first degrees ever awarded by a Baptist institution were conferred in 1769), Providence was selected as the college's home in 1770. With Manning as president and Hezekiah Smith (1737-1805), his classmate from Princeton, as the financial agent and a key supporter, the institution (now known as Brown University since 1804) was for many years the only degree-granting institution controlled by Baptists. The Warren Association, formed in 1767 under the influence of Manning and Smith, was modeled after the Philadelphia Association and became a major force for strengthening denominational life, promoting denominational education, and securing religious liberty. Hezekiah Smith was a very successful evangelist, and through his efforts, many churches were established in New England. Additionally, as a chaplain in the American Revolutionary Army, he had a broad influence.

The First Church, Charleston, which had become almost extinct through Arminianism in 1746, entered upon a career of remarkable prosperity in 1749 under the leadership of Oliver Hart (1723-1795), formerly of the Philadelphia Association. In 1751 the Charleston Association was formed, also on the model of the Philadelphia, and proved an element of denominational strength. The association raised funds for domestic missionary work (1755 onward) and for the education of ministers (1756 onward). Brown University shared largely in the liberality of members of this highly-cultivated and progressive body. Among the beneficiaries of the education fund was Samuel Stillman (1737-1807), afterward the honoured pastor of the Boston church. The most noted leader of the Baptists of South Carolina during the four decades following the War of Independence was Richard Furman (1755-1825), pastor of the First Church, Charleston. The remarkable numerical progress of Baptists in South Carolina from 1787 to 1812 (from 1620 members to 11,325) was due to the "Separate" Baptist movement under Stearns and Marshall far more than to the activity of the churches of the Charleston Association. Both these types of Baptist life permeated Georgia, the latter making its influence felt in Savannah, Augusta and the more cultivated communities, the former evangelizing the masses. Many negro slaves became Baptists in Virginia, the Carolinas and Georgia. In most cases they became members of the churches of the white Baptists; but in Richmond, Savannah and some other towns they were encouraged to have churches of their own.

The First Church in Charleston, which had nearly died out due to Arminianism in 1746, began a period of impressive growth in 1749 under the leadership of Oliver Hart (1723-1795), who previously was part of the Philadelphia Association. In 1751, the Charleston Association was established, modeled after the Philadelphia Association, and became a significant force for the denomination. The association collected funds for domestic missionary work starting in 1755 and for minister education from 1756 onward. Brown University greatly benefited from the generosity of this educated and progressive group. Among those who benefited from the education fund was Samuel Stillman (1737-1807), who later served as the respected pastor of the Boston church. The most prominent leader of the Baptists in South Carolina in the four decades after the War of Independence was Richard Furman (1755-1825), pastor of the First Church in Charleston. The impressive growth of Baptists in South Carolina from 1787 to 1812 (from 1,620 members to 11,325) was primarily due to the "Separate" Baptist movement led by Stearns and Marshall, rather than the efforts of the churches in the Charleston Association. Both types of Baptist congregations influenced Georgia, with the latter having an impact in cities like Savannah and Augusta, while the former focused on reaching the masses. Many enslaved African Americans became Baptists in Virginia, the Carolinas, and Georgia. In most cases, they joined white Baptist churches; however, in Richmond, Savannah, and some other towns, they were encouraged to form their own congregations.

By 1812 there were in the United States 173,972 Baptist church members, the denominational numerical strength having considerably more than doubled since the beginning of the 19th century.

By 1812, there were 173,972 Baptist church members in the United States, more than doubling the number since the start of the 19th century.

Foreign Missions.—Baptists in Boston and vicinity, Philadelphia and Charleston, and a few other communities had from the beginning of the 19th century taken a deep interest in the missionary work of William Carey, the English missionary, and his coadjutors in India, and had contributed liberally to its support. The conversion to Baptist views of Adoniram Judson (q.v.) and Luther Rice (1812), who had just been sent, with others, by the newly-formed American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions to open up missionary work in India, marks an epoch in American Baptist history. Judson appealed to his American brethren to support him in missionary work among the heathen, and Rice returned to America to organize missionary societies to awaken interest in Judson's mission. In January 1813 there was formed in Boston "The Baptist Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in India and other Foreign Parts." Other societies in the Eastern, Middle and Southern states speedily followed. The desirability of a national organization soon became manifest, and in May 1814 thirty-three delegates, representing eleven states, met in Philadelphia and organized the "General Missionary Convention of the Baptist Denomination in the United States of America for Foreign Missions." As its meetings were to be held every three years it came to be known as the "Triennial Convention." A Board of Commissioners was appointed with headquarters in Philadelphia (transferred in 1826 to Boston). The need of a larger supply of educated ministers for home and for mission work alike soon came to be profoundly felt, and resulted in the establishment of Columbian College, Washington (now George Washington University), with its theological department (1821), intended to be a national Baptist institution. Destitution on the frontiers led the Triennial Convention to engage extensively in home mission work (1817 onward), and in 1832 the American Baptist Home Mission Society was constituted for the promotion of this work. The need of an organ for the dissemination of information, and the quickening of interest in the missionary and educational enterprises of the Triennial Convention, led Rice to establish the Latter Day Luminary (1816) and the Columbian Star, a weekly journal (1822). From the first the attempt to rouse the denomination to organized effort for the propagation of the gospel met with much opposition, agents of the Convention being looked upon by the less intelligent pastors and churches as highly-paid and irresponsible collectors of money to be used they knew not how, or for purposes of which they disapproved. The fact that Rice was unduly optimistic and allowed the enterprises of the Convention to become almost hopelessly involved in debt, and was constrained to use some of the fund collected for missions to meet the exigencies of his educational and journalistic work, intensified the hostility of those who had suspected from the beginning the good faith of the agents and denied the scriptural authority of boards, paid agents, paid missionaries, &c. So virulent became the opposition that in several states, as Tennessee and Kentucky, the work of the Convention was for years excluded, and a large majority in each association refused to receive into their fellowship those who advocated or contributed to its objects. Hyper-Calvinism, ignorance and avarice cooperated in making the very name "missions" odious, ministerial education an impertinent human effort to supplant a spirit-called and spirit-endowed ministry, Sunday-schools and prayer-meetings as human institutions, the aim of which was to interfere with the divine order, and the receiving of salaries for ministerial work as serving God for hire or rather as serving self. To counteract this influence, Baptist State Conventions were formed by the friends of missions and education, only contributing churches, associations, missionary societies and individuals being invited to membership (1821 onward—Massachusetts had effected state organization in 1802). These became highly efficient in promoting foreign and domestic missions, Sunday-school organization, denominational literature and education. Nearly every state soon had its institutions of learning, which aspired to become universities.

Foreign Missions.—Baptists in Boston and nearby areas, Philadelphia, Charleston, and a few other communities had been deeply engaged in the missionary efforts of William Carey, the English missionary, and his associates in India since the early 1800s, contributing generously to support these efforts. The conversion of Adoniram Judson (q.v.) and Luther Rice (1812) to Baptist beliefs, who were sent by the newly established American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions to start missionary work in India, marked a significant moment in American Baptist history. Judson called on his American peers to back him in missionary work among non-believers, while Rice returned to the U.S. to organize missionary societies to generate interest in Judson's mission. In January 1813, "The Baptist Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in India and other Foreign Parts" was formed in Boston. Other societies quickly sprang up in the Eastern, Middle, and Southern states. The need for a national organization soon became clear, and in May 1814, thirty-three delegates from eleven states gathered in Philadelphia to create the "General Missionary Convention of the Baptist Denomination in the United States of America for Foreign Missions." Since its meetings would be held every three years, it came to be known as the "Triennial Convention." A Board of Commissioners was established with its headquarters in Philadelphia (which moved to Boston in 1826). The urgent need for more educated ministers for both home and mission work led to the creation of Columbian College, Washington (now George Washington University), with its theological department (1821), aimed at being a national Baptist institution. The poverty on the frontiers prompted the Triennial Convention to engage extensively in home mission work (starting in 1817), resulting in the establishment of the American Baptist Home Mission Society in 1832 to further this effort. The need for a platform to share information and boost interest in the missionary and educational initiatives of the Triennial Convention led Rice to launch the Latter Day Luminary (1816) and the Columbian Star, a weekly publication (1822). From the start, efforts to motivate the denomination into organized action for spreading the gospel faced considerable opposition; agents of the Convention were viewed by some less informed pastors and churches as overpaid and irresponsible fund collectors with unclear intentions. Rice’s overly optimistic outlook caused the Convention's ventures to accumulate significant debt, and his use of some mission funds for his educational and journalistic activities intensified resentment from those who doubted the integrity of the agents and opposed the biblical validity of boards, paid agents, and missionaries, etc. The opposition grew so fierce that in several states, such as Tennessee and Kentucky, the Convention's activities were largely banned for years, and a significant majority in each association excluded those who supported or contributed to its goals. Hyper-Calvinism, ignorance, and greed contributed to making the term "missions" detestable, viewing ministerial education as an unnecessary human endeavor that undermined a spirit-led ministry, and regarding Sunday schools and prayer meetings as human institutions aimed at disrupting divine order, with salaries for ministerial work perceived as serving oneself rather than God. To counter this negative sentiment, Baptist State Conventions were formed by mission and education supporters, inviting only contributing churches, associations, missionary societies, and individuals to join (starting in 1821—Massachusetts had organized at the state level in 1802). These conventions became very effective in promoting foreign and domestic missions, organizing Sunday schools, and advancing denominational literature and education. Soon, nearly every state developed its educational institutions aspiring to become universities.

Before 1844 the sessions of the Triennial Convention had occasionally been made unpleasant by harsh anti-slavery utterances by Northern members against their Southern brethren and somewhat acrimonious rejoinders by the latter. The controversy between Francis Wayland and Richard Fuller (1804-1876) on the slavery question ultimately convinced the Southern brethren that separate organization for missionary work was advisable. The Southern Baptist Convention, with its Home and Foreign Missionary Boards, and (later) its Sunday-school Board, was formed in 1845. Since then Northern and Southern Baptists, though in perfect fellowship with each other, have found it best to carry on their home and foreign missionary work through separate boards and to have separate annual meetings. In 1905 a General Baptist Convention for America was formed for the promotion of fellowship, comity and denominational esprit de corps, but this organization is not to interfere with the sectional organizations or to undertake any kind of administrative work.

Before 1844, the meetings of the Triennial Convention were sometimes uncomfortable due to strong anti-slavery comments from Northern members directed at their Southern counterparts, who would respond quite sharply. The debate between Francis Wayland and Richard Fuller (1804-1876) on the issue of slavery ultimately convinced the Southern members that it was better to establish a separate organization for missionary work. The Southern Baptist Convention, along with its Home and Foreign Missionary Boards and later its Sunday-school Board, was established in 1845. Since then, Northern and Southern Baptists, while maintaining a perfect fellowship, have found it more effective to conduct their home and foreign missionary work through separate boards and to hold separate annual meetings. In 1905, a General Baptist Convention for America was created to promote fellowship, cooperation, and denominational esprit de corps, but this organization doesn’t interfere with the regional organizations or engage in any administrative functions.

Since 1845 Northern and Southern Baptists alike have greatly increased in numbers, in missionary work, in educational institutions, in literary activity and in everything that pertains to the equipment and organization of a great religious denomination. Since 1812 they have increased in numbers from less than 200,000 to more than 5,000,000. In 1812 American Baptists had no theological seminary; in 1906 they had 11 with more than 100 instructors, 1300 students, and endowments and equipments valued at about $7,000,000. In 1812 they had only one degree-conferring college with a small faculty, a small student body and almost no endowment; in 1906 they had more than 100 universities and colleges with endowment and equipment valued at about $30,000,000, and an annual income of about $3,000,000. In 1812 the value of church property was small; in 1906 it was estimated at $100,000,000. Then a single monthly magazine, with a circulation of a few hundreds, was all that the denomination possessed in the way of periodical literature; in 1906 its quarterlies, monthlies and weeklies were numbered by hundreds. The denomination has a single publishing concern (the American Baptist Publication Society) with an annual business of nearly $1,000,000 and assets of $1,750,000.

Since 1845, both Northern and Southern Baptists have significantly grown in numbers, missionary efforts, educational institutions, literary endeavors, and everything else related to the development and organization of a major religious denomination. Since 1812, their numbers have risen from fewer than 200,000 to over 5,000,000. In 1812, American Baptists had no theological seminary; by 1906, they had 11, with more than 100 instructors, 1,300 students, and assets valued at about $7,000,000. In 1812, they had only one degree-granting college with a small faculty, a limited student body, and virtually no endowment; by 1906, they had more than 100 universities and colleges with an endowment and resources valued at approximately $30,000,000 and an annual income of about $3,000,000. In 1812, the value of church property was minimal; by 1906, it was estimated at $100,000,000. At that time, they had just one monthly magazine with a circulation of a few hundred; by 1906, their quarterlies, monthlies, and weeklies numbered in the hundreds. The denomination had a single publishing entity (the American Baptist Publication Society) with an annual revenue of nearly $1,000,000 and assets of $1,750,000.

Baptists in the Dominion of Canada had their rise about the close of the 18th century in migrations from the United States. They have been reinforced by considerable numbers of English, Welsh and Scottish Baptists. They are divided into four sections:—those of the Maritime Provinces, with their Convention, their Home and Foreign Mission Boards, an Education Board and a Publication Board, and with McMaster University (Arts, Theological and [v.03 p.0378]Academic departments) as its educational institution; those of Manitoba and the North-west, with Brandon College as its educational institution; and those of British Columbia. Canadian Baptists numbered 120,000 in 1909, and are considered in the above general estimates.

Baptists in the Dominion of Canada emerged around the end of the 18th century due to migrations from the United States. They have been bolstered by significant numbers of English, Welsh, and Scottish Baptists. They are divided into four groups: those in the Maritime Provinces, with their Convention, Home and Foreign Mission Boards, Education Board, and Publication Board, and McMaster University (Arts, Theological and [v.03 p.0378]academic departments) as their educational institution; those in Manitoba and the Northwest, with Brandon College as their educational institution; and those in British Columbia. Canadian Baptists numbered 120,000 in 1909 and are included in the general estimates above.

(A. H. N.)

(A. H. N.)

[1] The figures for Russia include only the German-speaking Baptists. It is impossible to ascertain the numbers of properly Russian Baptists. Estimates have been made which vary from 60,000 to 100,000.

[1] The numbers for Russia only include German-speaking Baptists. It's difficult to determine the actual number of Russian Baptists. Estimates range from 60,000 to 100,000.

BAR, FRANÇOIS DE (1538-1606), French scholar, was born at Seizencourt, near St Quentin, and having studied at the university of Paris entered the order of St Benedict. He soon became prior of the abbey of Anchin, near Pecquencourt, and passed much of his time in the valuable library of the abbey, studying ecclesiastical history, especially that of Flanders. He also made a catalogue of the manuscripts at Anchin and annotated many of them. During the French Revolution his manuscripts passed to the library at Douai. Bar died at Anchin on the 25th of March 1606.

BAR, FRANÇOIS DE (1538-1606), a French scholar, was born in Seizencourt, near St Quentin. After studying at the University of Paris, he joined the Order of St Benedict. He quickly became the prior of the Abbey of Anchin, near Pecquencourt, where he spent much of his time in the abbey's valuable library, focusing on ecclesiastical history, especially that of Flanders. He also created a catalog of the manuscripts at Anchin and noted many of them. During the French Revolution, his manuscripts were transferred to the library at Douai. Bar passed away at Anchin on March 25, 1606.

See J. Lelong, Bibliothèque historique de la France (Paris, 1768-1778); C. C. A. Dehaisnes, "Catalogue des manuscrits de Douai," in the Catalogue général des manuscrits des bibliothèques des départements, t. vi. (Paris, 1849-1885).

See J. Lelong, Historical Library of France (Paris, 1768-1778); C. C. A. Dehaisnes, "Catalog of Manuscripts from Douai," in the General Catalog of Manuscripts in the Libraries of the Departments, vol. vi. (Paris, 1849-1885).

BAR, a town of Russia, in the government of Podolia, 50 m. N.E. of Kamenets, on an affluent of the Bug. Pop. (1897) 10,614. It was formerly called Rov. Its present designation was bestowed upon it in memory of Bari in Italy (where she was born) by Bona Sforza, the consort of Sigismund I. of Poland, who rebuilt the town after its destruction in 1452 by the Tatars. From 1672 to 1699 it remained in possession of the Turks. In 1768 a confederation of the Polish nobles (see next article) against the Russians was formed in the town, which was shortly after taken by storm, but did not become finally united to Russia till the partition of 1793.

BAR, a town in Russia, located in the Podolia region, is 50 miles northeast of Kamenets, on a tributary of the Bug River. Population (1897) was 10,614. It was previously known as Rov. The town received its current name in honor of Bari, Italy (where she was born) from Bona Sforza, the wife of Sigismund I of Poland, who rebuilt it after it was destroyed by the Tatars in 1452. From 1672 to 1699, it was under Turkish control. In 1768, a group of Polish nobles (see next article) formed a confederation in the town against the Russians, which was soon after captured, but it didn't officially become part of Russia until the partition of 1793.

BAR, CONFEDERATION OF, a famous confederation of the Polish nobles and gentry formed at the little fortress of Bar in Podolia in 1768 to defend the internal and external independence of Poland against the aggressions of the Russian government as represented by her representative at Warsaw, Prince Nicholas Repnin. The originators of this confederation were Adam Krasinski, bishop of Kamenets, Osip Pulawski and Michael Krasinski. King Stanislaus was at first inclined to mediate between the confederates and Russia; but finding this impossible, sent a force against them under the grand hetman Ksawery Branicki and two generals, who captured Bar. Nevertheless, a simultaneous outbreak of a jacquerie in Little-Russia contributed to the extension of the confederation throughout the eastern province of Poland and even in Lithuania. The confederates, thereupon, appealed for help abroad and contributed to bring about a war between Russia and Turkey. So serious indeed was the situation that Frederick II. advised Catherine to come to terms with the confederates. Their bands under Ignaty Malchewsky, Michael Pac and Prince Charles Radziwill ravaged the land in every direction, won several engagements over the Russians, and at last, utterly ignoring the king, sent envoys on their own account to the principal European powers. In 1770 the Council of the Confederation was transferred from its original seat in Silesia to Hungary, from whence it conducted diplomatic negotiations with France, Austria and Turkey with the view of forming a league against Russia. The court of Versailles sent Dumouriez to act as commander-in-chief of the confederates, but neither as a soldier nor as a politician did this adroit adventurer particularly distinguish himself, and his account of his experiences is very unfair to the confederates. Among other blunders, he pronounced King Stanislaus a tyrant and a traitor at the very moment when he was about to accede to the Confederation. The king thereupon reverted to the Russian faction and the Confederation lost the confidence of Europe. Nevertheless, its army, thoroughly reorganized by Dumouriez, gallantly maintained the hopeless struggle for some years, and it was not till 1776 that the last traces of it disappeared.

BAR, CONFEDERATION OF, a well-known alliance of Polish nobles and gentry established at the small fortress of Bar in Podolia in 1768 to protect Poland's internal and external independence against the aggressions of the Russian government, represented by its envoy in Warsaw, Prince Nicholas Repnin. The founders of this confederation were Adam Krasinski, bishop of Kamenets, Osip Pulawski, and Michael Krasinski. King Stanislaus initially intended to mediate between the confederates and Russia; however, finding this impossible, he dispatched a force against them led by the grand hetman Ksawery Branicki and two generals, who captured Bar. Still, a simultaneous uprising in Little-Russia helped the confederation expand throughout the eastern province of Poland and even into Lithuania. The confederates then sought international assistance and helped spark a war between Russia and Turkey. The situation became so critical that Frederick II advised Catherine to negotiate with the confederates. Their forces, under Ignaty Malchewsky, Michael Pac, and Prince Charles Radziwill, wreaked havoc across the land, winning several battles against the Russians, and ultimately, without waiting for the king's approval, sent envoys to the major European powers. In 1770, the Council of the Confederation moved from its original location in Silesia to Hungary, where it engaged in diplomatic talks with France, Austria, and Turkey to form an alliance against Russia. The court of Versailles sent Dumouriez to serve as the commander-in-chief of the confederates, but neither in military nor political matters did this savvy adventurer stand out, and his account of his experiences is quite biased against the confederates. Among his mistakes, he labeled King Stanislaus a tyrant and a traitor just when the king was about to join the Confederation. As a result, the king shifted back to the Russian side, and the Confederation lost Europe's trust. Nevertheless, its army, thoroughly reorganized by Dumouriez, bravely continued the hopeless struggle for several more years, and it wasn't until 1776 that the last remnants disappeared.

See Alexander Kraushar, Prince Repnin in Poland (Pol.) (Warsaw, 1900); F. A. Thesby de Belcour, The Confederates of Bar (Pol.) (Cracow, 1895); Charles François Dumouriez, Mémoires et correspondance (Paris, 1834).

See Alexander Kraushar, Prince Repnin in Poland (Pol.) (Warsaw, 1900); F. A. Thesby de Belcour, The Confederates of Bar (Pol.) (Cracow, 1895); Charles François Dumouriez, Mémoires et correspondance (Paris, 1834).

(R. N. B.)

(R. N. B.)

BAR (O. Fr. barre, Late Lat. barra, origin unknown), in physical geography, a ridge of sand or silt crossing an estuary under water or raised by wave action above sea-level, forming an impediment to navigation. When a river enters a tidal sea its rate of flow is checked and the material it carries in suspension is deposited in a shifting bar crossing the channel from bank to bank. Where the channel is only partly closed, a spur of this character is called a "spit." A bar may be produced by tidal action only in an estuary or narrow gulf (as at Port Adelaide) where the tides sweep the loose sand backwards and forwards, depositing it where the motion of the water is checked. Nahant Bay, Mass., is bordered by the ridge of Lynn Beach, which separates it from Lynn Harbor, and ties Nahant to the mainland by a bar formed in this way.

BAR (O. Fr. barre, Late Lat. barra, origin unknown), in physical geography, is a ridge of sand or silt that crosses an estuary underwater or is raised by wave action above sea level, creating a barrier to navigation. When a river flows into a tidal sea, its current slows down, and the materials it carries in suspension are deposited in a shifting bar that spans the channel from bank to bank. When the channel is only partially obstructed, this feature is called a "spit." A bar can also form from tidal action alone in an estuary or narrow gulf (like Port Adelaide), where the tides move loose sand back and forth, depositing it where the water's motion is slowed down. Nahant Bay, Mass., is bordered by the ridge of Lynn Beach, which separates it from Lynn Harbor and connects Nahant to the mainland through a bar formed in this way.

BAR, THE. This term, as equivalent to the profession of barrister (q.v.), originated in the partition or bar dividing the English law-courts into two parts, for the purpose of separating the members and officials of the court from the prisoners or suitors, their advocates and the general public. Theoretically, this division of the court is still maintained in England, those who are entitled to sit within the bar including king's counsel, barristers with patents of precedence, serjeants (till the order died out) and solicitors, while the other members of the bar and the general public remain without. Parties in civil suits who appear in person are allowed to stand on the floor within the bar instead of, as formerly, appearing at the bar itself. In criminal trials the accused still stands forward at the bar. There is also a "bar" in parliament. In the House of Commons it remains literally a bar—a long brass rod hidden in a tube from which it is pulled out when required to mark the technical boundary of the House. Before it appear those who are charged with having violated the privileges of the House; below it also sit those members who have been returned at bye-elections, to await their introduction to the House and the taking of the oath of allegiance. In the House of Lords the place where Mr Speaker and the members of the House of Commons stand when summoned by Black Rod is called "the bar."

BAR, THE. This term, equivalent to the profession of barrister (q.v.), comes from the barrier or bar that divides the English law courts into two sections, intended to separate court members and officials from the prisoners or plaintiffs, their advocates, and the general public. In theory, this division of the court is still upheld in England, with those allowed to sit within the bar including king's counsel, barristers with patents of precedence, serjeants (until that order died out), and solicitors, while other members of the bar and the public remain outside. Individuals involved in civil cases who appear in person are allowed to stand on the floor within the bar instead of, as in the past, appearing directly at the bar itself. In criminal trials, the accused still stands at the bar. There is also a "bar" in Parliament. In the House of Commons, it is literally a bar—a long brass rod hidden in a tube, which is pulled out when needed to indicate the official boundary of the House. Those accused of violating the House's privileges appear before it; below it also sit members who were elected in bye-elections, waiting for their introduction to the House and the taking of the oath of allegiance. In the House of Lords, the area where Mr. Speaker and the House of Commons members stand when summoned by Black Rod is called "the bar."

The "call to the bar" in England, by which a law student at one of the Inns of Court is converted into a barrister, is dealt with under Inns of Court. The exclusive privilege of calling to the bar belongs to those bodies, which also exercise disciplinary power over their members; but it was widely felt by members of the bar in recent years that the benchers or governing body with their self-elected members did not keep a sufficiently watchful eye on the minutiae of the profession. Consequently, in 1883, a bar committee was formed for the purpose of dealing with all matters relating to the profession, such as the criticizing of proposed legal reforms, and the expression of opinions on matters of professional etiquette, conduct and practice. In 1894 the committee was dissolved, and succeeded by the general council of the bar, elected on a somewhat wider basis. It is composed of a due proportion of king's counsel and outer barristers elected by voting-papers sent to all barristers having an address in the Law List within the United Kingdom. Its expenses are paid by contributions from the four Inns of Court. Its powers are not disciplinary, but it would draw the attention of the benchers to any gross violation of the professional etiquette of the bar.

The "call to the bar" in England, which turns a law student at one of the Inns of Court into a barrister, is discussed under Inns of Court. The exclusive right to call someone to the bar belongs to these institutions, which also have disciplinary authority over their members; however, in recent years, many bar members felt that the benchers or governing body, made up of self-elected members, weren’t paying enough attention to the details of the profession. As a result, in 1883, a bar committee was established to address all matters related to the profession, including reviewing proposed legal reforms and sharing opinions on professional etiquette, conduct, and practice. In 1894, this committee was dissolved and replaced by the general council of the bar, elected on a broader basis. It includes a fair representation of King's Counsel and outer barristers chosen through voting papers sent to all barristers listed in the Law List throughout the United Kingdom. Its expenses are covered by contributions from the four Inns of Court. While it doesn’t have disciplinary powers, it would inform the benchers of any serious breaches of the bar’s professional etiquette.

Each state in America has its own bar, consisting of all attorneys-at-law residing within it who have been admitted to practice in its courts. Generally attorneys are admitted in one court to practice in all courts. Each of the United States courts has a bar of its own. An attorney of a state cannot practise in a court of the United States unless he has been admitted to it, or to one of the same class in another district or circuit. He cannot appear in the Supreme Court of the United States unless specially admitted and sworn as an attorney of that court, which is done on motion in case of any one who has practised for three years in the highest courts of his state and is in good standing at its bar. In most of the states there is a state bar association, and in some cities and counties local bar associations. These consist of such members of its bar as desire thus to associate, the object being to guard and advance the standards of the profession. Some own valuable libraries. These associations have no official recognition, but their influence is considerable in [v.03 p.0379]recommending and shaping legislation respecting the judicial establishment and procedure. They also serve a useful purpose in instituting or promoting proceedings to discipline or expel unworthy attorneys from the bar. There is an American Bar Association, founded in 1878, composed of over 3500 members of different states of like character and position. Some of these associations publish annually a volume of transactions. The rights, duties and liabilities of counsellor-at-law are stated under Attorney. As members of the bar of the state in which they practise they are subject to its laws regulating such practice, e.g. in some states they are forbidden to advertise for divorce cases (New York Penal Code [1902] § 148a) (1905, People v. Taylor [Colorado], 75 Pac. Rep. 914). It is common throughout the United States for lawyers to make contracts for "contingent fees," i.e. for a percentage of the amount recovered. Such contracts are not champertous and are upheld by the courts, but will be set aside if an unconscionable bargain be made with the client (Deering v. Scheyer [N.Y.], 58 App. D. 322). So also by the U.S. Supreme Court (Wright v. Tebbets, 91 U.S. 252; Taylor v. Benis, 110 U.S. 42). The reason for upholding such contracts is that otherwise poor persons would often fail of securing or protecting their property or rights. In fact such contracts are seldom set aside, though no doubt the practice is capable of abuse.

Each state in America has its own bar, which includes all attorneys-at-law who live there and have been approved to practice in its courts. Generally, attorneys are admitted in one court to practice in all courts. Each of the United States courts has its own bar. A state attorney cannot practice in a U.S. court unless they have been admitted to it or to a similar court in another district or circuit. They cannot appear in the Supreme Court of the United States unless they are specially admitted and sworn in as an attorney of that court, which happens through a motion for anyone who has practiced for three years in the highest courts of their state and is in good standing with its bar. In most states, there is a state bar association, and in some cities and counties, there are local bar associations. These consist of members of the bar who choose to join together, with the goal of protecting and advancing the standards of the profession. Some own valuable libraries. These associations do not have official recognition, but they hold significant influence in recommending and shaping legislation related to the judicial system and procedure. They also help in initiating or promoting actions to discipline or expel unworthy attorneys from the bar. There is an American Bar Association, founded in 1878, with over 3,500 members from different states with similar backgrounds and positions. Some of these associations publish an annual volume of transactions. The rights, duties, and liabilities of counselors-at-law are outlined under Lawyer. As members of the bar in their practicing state, they must adhere to its laws regulating that practice, for example, in some states they are prohibited from advertising for divorce cases (New York Penal Code [1902] § 148a) (1905, People v. Taylor [Colorado], 75 Pac. Rep. 914). It is common across the United States for lawyers to enter into contracts for "contingent fees," meaning they take a percentage of the amount recovered. Such contracts are not considered champertous and are upheld by the courts, but they may be overturned if an unfair bargain is made with the client (Deering v. Scheyer [N.Y.], 58 App. D. 322). This is also affirmed by the U.S. Supreme Court (Wright v. Tebbets, 91 U.S. 252; Taylor v. Benis, 110 U.S. 42). The reason for upholding these contracts is that otherwise, poor individuals would often struggle to secure or protect their property or rights. In fact, such contracts are rarely set aside, although the practice can be abused.

BARA BANKI, a town and district of British India in the Fyzabad division of the United Provinces. The town, which forms one municipality with Nawabganj, the administrative headquarters of the district, is 17 m. E. of Lucknow by railway. The population of Bara Banki alone in 1901 was 3020. There is some trade in sugar and cotton.

BARA BANKI, a town and district in British India located in the Fyzabad division of the United Provinces. The town, which is part of the same municipality as Nawabganj, the district's administrative headquarters, is 17 miles east of Lucknow by train. The population of Bara Banki alone in 1901 was 3,020. There is some trade in sugar and cotton.

The district has an area of 1758 sq. m. It stretches out in a level plain interspersed with numerous jhils or marshes. In the upper part of the district the soil is sandy, while in the lower part it is clayey and produces finer crops. The principal rivers are the Gogra, forming the northern boundary, and the Gumti, flowing through the middle of the district. In 1856 it came, with the rest of Oudh, under British rule. During the Sepoy war of 1857-1858 the whole of the Bara Banki talukdars joined the mutineers, but offered no serious resistance after the capture of Lucknow. The cultivators are still, for the most part, tenants-at-will, rack-rented and debt-ridden. In 1901 the population was 1,179,323, showing an increase of 4% in the decade. The principal crops are rice, wheat, pulse and other food-grains, sugar-cane and opium. Both the bordering rivers are navigable; and the district is traversed by two lines of the Oudh and Rohilkhand railway, with branches. Trade in agricultural produce is active.

The district covers an area of 1,758 square miles. It spreads across a flat plain mixed with many jhils or marshes. In the northern part of the district, the soil is sandy, while in the southern part, it is clayey, leading to more productive crops. The main rivers are the Gogra, which forms the northern boundary, and the Gumti, which flows through the center of the district. In 1856, it came under British rule, along with the rest of Oudh. During the Sepoy uprising of 1857-1858, all the Bara Banki talukdars sided with the mutineers but put up little resistance after Lucknow was captured. Most farmers are still tenants-at-will, heavily taxed, and burdened with debt. In 1901, the population was 1,179,323, reflecting a 4% increase over the decade. The main crops are rice, wheat, pulses, and other grains, as well as sugarcane and opium. Both rivers are navigable, and the district has two lines of the Oudh and Rohilkhand railway, including branches. Trade in agricultural products is thriving.

BARABOO, a city and the county-seat of Sauk county, Wisconsin, U.S.A., about 37 m. N.W. of Madison, on the Baraboo river, a tributary of the Wisconsin. Pop. (1890) 4605; (1900) 5751, of whom 732 were foreign-born; (1905) 5835; (1910) 6324. The city is served by the Chicago & North-Western railway, which maintains here an engine house and extensive machine shops, and of which it is a division headquarters. Baraboo has an attractive situation on a series of hills about 1000 ft. above sea-level. In the vicinity are Devil's Lake (3 m. S.) and the famous Dells of the Wisconsin river (near Kilbourn, about 12 m. N.), two summer resorts with picturesque scenery. The principal public buildings are the court-house (in a small public park), the public library and a high school. Dairying and the growing of small fruits are important industries in the surrounding region; and there is a large nursery here. Stone quarried in the vicinity is exported, and the city is near the centre of the Sauk county iron range. Among the manufactures are woollen goods, towels, canned fruit and vegetables, dairy products, beer, and circus wagons (the city is the headquarters of the Ringling and the Gollmar circuses). The first permanent settlement here was made in 1839. Baraboo was named in honour of Jean Baribault, an early French trapper, and was chartered as a city in 1882.

BARABOO, a city and the county seat of Sauk County, Wisconsin, U.S.A., is located about 37 miles northwest of Madison, on the Baraboo River, which is a tributary of the Wisconsin River. Population: (1890) 4,605; (1900) 5,751, of whom 732 were foreign-born; (1905) 5,835; (1910) 6,324. The city is served by the Chicago & North-Western railway, which has an engine house and extensive machine shops here, and it serves as a division headquarters. Baraboo has a lovely location on a series of hills approximately 1,000 feet above sea level. Nearby are Devil's Lake (3 miles south) and the famous Dells of the Wisconsin River (near Kilbourn, about 12 miles north), both popular summer resorts with beautiful scenery. The main public buildings include the courthouse (located in a small public park), the public library, and a high school. Dairying and the cultivation of small fruits are significant industries in the surrounding area, and there is a large nursery here. Stone quarried nearby is exported, and the city is close to the center of the Sauk County iron range. Major manufactures include woolen goods, towels, canned fruits and vegetables, dairy products, beer, and circus wagons (the city is home to the headquarters of the Ringling and Gollmar circuses). The first permanent settlement in the area was established in 1839. Baraboo was named in honor of Jean Baribault, an early French trapper, and was chartered as a city in 1882.

BARABRA, a name for the complex Nubian races of the Egyptian Sudan, whose original stock is Hamitic-Berber, long modified by negro crossings. The word is variously derived from Berberi, i.e. people of Berber, or as identical with Barabara, figuring in the inscription on a gateway of Tethmosis I. as the name of one of the 113 tribes conquered by him. In a later inscription of Rameses II. at Karnak (c. 1300 B.C.) Beraberata is given as that of a southern conquered people. Thus it is suggested that Barabra is a real ethnical name, confused later with Greek and Roman barbarus, and revived in its proper meaning subsequent to the Moslem conquest. A tribe living on the banks of the Nile between Wadi Haifa and Assuan are called Barabra. (See further Nubia.)

BARABRA, a term for the diverse Nubian ethnic groups of the Egyptian Sudan, whose original ancestry is Hamitic-Berber, significantly altered by intermixing with black Africans. The term is thought to originate from Berberi, meaning people of Berber, or it may be linked to Barabara, appearing in an inscription on a gateway of Tethmosis I. as the name of one of the 113 tribes he conquered. In a later inscription from Rameses II. at Karnak (c. 1300 BCE), Beraberata is identified as a southern conquered group. This suggests that Barabra is a legitimate ethnic name, later confused with the Greek and Roman term barbarus, and reclaimed in its correct context after the Muslim conquest. A tribe residing along the Nile between Wadi Haifa and Aswan is referred to as Barabra. (See further Nubia.)

BARACALDO, a river-port of north-eastern Spain, in the province of Biscay; on the left bank of the river Nervion or Ansa (in Basque, Ibaizabal), 5 m. by rail N.W. of Bilbao. Pop. (1900) 15,013. Few Spanish towns have developed more rapidly than Baracaldo, which nearly doubled its population between 1880 and 1900. During this period many immigrant labourers settled here; for the ironworks and dynamite factory of Baracaldo prospered greatly, owing to the increased output of the Biscayan mines, the extension of railways in the neighbourhood, and the growth of shipping at Bilbao. The low flat country round Baracaldo is covered with maize, pod fruit and vines.

BARACALDO, a river port in northeastern Spain, located in the province of Biscay; on the left bank of the Nervion River (known as Ibaizabal in Basque), 5 miles by rail northwest of Bilbao. Population (1900) 15,013. Few Spanish towns have grown as quickly as Baracaldo, which nearly doubled its population between 1880 and 1900. During this time, many immigrant laborers moved here; the ironworks and dynamite factory in Baracaldo thrived due to increased production from the Biscayan mines, the expansion of nearby railways, and the growth of shipping in Bilbao. The low, flat land surrounding Baracaldo is filled with corn, legumes, and vineyards.

BARACOA, a seaport city of N.E. Cuba, in Santiago province. Pop. (1907) 5633. The town lies under high hills on a small circular harbour accessible to small craft. The country round about is extremely rugged. The hill called the "Anvil of Baracoa" (about 3000 ft.) is remarkable for its extremely regular formation. It completely dominates the city's background, and is a well-known sailors' landmark. The town is the trading centre of a large plantation region behind it and is the centre of the banana and cocoanut export trade. There is a fort dating from the middle of the 18th century. Baracoa is the oldest town in Cuba, having been settled by Diego Velazquez in 1512. It held from its foundation the honours of a city. From 1512 to 1514 it was the capital of the island, and from 1518 to 1522 its church was the cathedral of the island's first diocese. Both honours were taken from it to be given to Santiago de Cuba; and for two centuries after this Baracoa remained an obscure village, with little commerce. In the 16th century it was repeatedly plundered by pirates until it came to terms with them, gave them welcome harbourage, and based a less precarious existence upon continuous illicit trade. Until the middle of the 18th century Baracoa was almost without connexion with Havana and Santiago. In the wars of the end of the century it was a place of deposit for French and Spanish corsairs. At this time, too, about 100 fugitive immigrant families from Santo Domingo greatly augmented its industrial importance. In 1807 an unsuccessful attack was made upon the city by an English force. In 1826 the port was opened to foreign commerce.

BARACOA, a seaport city in northeastern Cuba, located in Santiago province. Pop. (1907) 5,633. The town is situated beneath towering hills on a small circular harbor that can be accessed by small boats. The surrounding area is very rugged. The hill known as the "Anvil of Baracoa" (around 3,000 ft.) is notable for its exceptionally regular shape. It completely dominates the city's backdrop and is a well-recognized landmark for sailors. The town serves as the trading hub for a large plantation region behind it and is central to the banana and coconut export trade. There is a fort that dates back to the mid-18th century. Baracoa is the oldest town in Cuba, established by Diego Velazquez in 1512. It enjoyed city status from the beginning. From 1512 to 1514, it was the capital of the island, and from 1518 to 1522, its church served as the cathedral of the island's first diocese. Both honors were taken away and given to Santiago de Cuba; for two centuries afterward, Baracoa remained a little-known village with minimal commerce. In the 16th century, it was repeatedly attacked by pirates until it reached agreements with them, providing them shelter, and establishing a more stable existence through ongoing illicit trade. Until the mid-18th century, Baracoa had almost no connection with Havana and Santiago. Towards the end of the century, it was used as a storage location for French and Spanish privateers. During this time, about 100 immigrant families fleeing from Santo Domingo significantly boosted its economic importance. In 1807, an unsuccessful attack was made on the city by a British force. In 1826, the port was opened to foreign trade.

BARAHONA DE SOTO, LUIS (1535?-1595), Spanish poet, was born about 1535 at Lucena (Cordova), was educated at Granada, and practised as a physician at Cordova. His principal poem is the Primera parte de la Angélica (1586), a continuation of the Orlando furioso; the second part was long believed to be lost, but fragments of it have been identified in the anonymous Diálogos de la monteria, first printed in 1890; the Diálogos also embody fragments of a poem by Barahona entitled Los Principios del mundo, and many graceful lyrics by the same writer have been published by Francisco Rodriguez Marín. Cervantes describes Barahona as "one of the best poets not only in Spain, but in the whole world"; this is friendly hyperbole. Nevertheless Barahona has high merits: poetic imagination, ingenious fancy, and an exceptional mastery of the methods transplanted to Spain from Italy. His Angélica has been reproduced in facsimile (New York, 1904) by Archer M. Huntington.

BARAHONA DE SOTO, LUIS (1535?-1595), Spanish poet, was born around 1535 in Lucena (Cordova), educated in Granada, and worked as a physician in Cordova. His main poem is the Primera parte de la Angélica (1586), which continues the story of Orlando furioso; the second part was long thought to be lost, but fragments of it have been identified in the anonymous Diálogos de la monteria, first published in 1890. The Diálogos also include fragments of a poem by Barahona titled Los Principios del mundo, and many elegant lyrics by him have been published by Francisco Rodriguez Marín. Cervantes describes Barahona as "one of the best poets not only in Spain, but in the whole world"; this is friendly exaggeration. Nonetheless, Barahona has significant merits: poetic imagination, clever creativity, and exceptional skill with techniques imported from Italy to Spain. His Angélica has been reproduced in facsimile (New York, 1904) by Archer M. Huntington.

See F. Rodriguez Marín, Luis Barahona de Solo, estudio biográfico, bibliografico, y critico (Madrid. 1903); Diálogos de la monteria, edited by F. R. de Uhagón (Madrid, 1890).

See F. Rodriguez Marín, Luis Barahona de Solo, biographical, bibliographical, and critical study (Madrid, 1903); Dialogues of Hunting, edited by F. R. de Uhagón (Madrid, 1890).

(J. F.-K.)

(J. F.-K.)

BARANTE, AMABLE GUILLAUME PROSPER BRUGIÉRE, Baron de (1782-1866), French statesman and historian, the son of an advocate, was born at Riom on the 16th of June 1782. At the age of sixteen he entered the École Polytechnique at [v.03 p.0380]Paris, and at twenty obtained his first appointment in the civil service. His abilities secured him rapid promotion, and in 1806 he obtained the post of auditor to the council of state. After being employed in several political missions in Germany, Poland and Spain, during the next two years, he became prefect of Vendée. At the time of the return of Napoleon I. he held the prefecture of Nantes, and this post he immediately resigned. On the second restoration of the Bourbons he was made councillor of state and secretary-general of the ministry of the interior. After filling for several years the post of director-general of indirect taxes, he was created in 1819 a peer of France and was prominent among the Liberals. After the revolution of July 1830, M. de Barante was appointed ambassador to Turin, and five years later to St Petersburg. Throughout the reign of Louis Philippe he remained a supporter of the government; and after the fall of the monarchy, in February 1848, he withdrew from political affairs and retired to his country seat in Auvergne. Shortly before his retirement he had been made grand cross of the Legion of Honour. Barante's Histoire des ducs de Bourgogne de la maison de Valois, which appeared in a series of volumes between 1824 and 1828, procured him immediate admission to the French Academy. Its narrative qualities, and purity of style, won high praise from the romantic school, but it exhibits a lack of the critical sense and of scientific scholarship. Amongst his other literary works are a Tableau de la littérature française au dixhuitième siècle, of which several editions were published; Des communes et de l'aristocratie (1821); a French translation of the dramatic works of Schiller; Questions constitutionnelles (1850); Histoire de la Convention Nationale, which appeared in six volumes between 1851 and 1853; Histoire du Directoire de la République française (1855); Études historiques et biographiques (1857); La Vie politique de M. Royer-Collard (1861). The version of Hamlet for Guizot's Shakespeare was his work. He died on the 22nd of November 1866.

BARANTE, AMABLE GUILLAUME PROSPER BRUGIÉRE, Baron (1782-1866), French statesman and historian, the son of a lawyer, was born in Riom on June 16, 1782. At sixteen, he entered the École Polytechnique in [v.03 p.0380]Paris, and by twenty, he secured his first position in the civil service. His talents led to quick promotions, and in 1806 he became an auditor for the council of state. After being assigned to various political missions in Germany, Poland, and Spain over the next two years, he was named prefect of Vendée. When Napoleon I returned, he was the prefect of Nantes, which he promptly resigned. Following the second restoration of the Bourbons, he was appointed councillor of state and secretary-general of the ministry of the interior. After several years as director-general of indirect taxes, he was made a peer of France in 1819 and became a key figure among the Liberals. After the July Revolution of 1830, M. de Barante was appointed ambassador to Turin, and five years later to St. Petersburg. Throughout Louis Philippe's reign, he remained a supporter of the government; but after the monarchy’s fall in February 1848, he stepped back from politics and retreated to his country estate in Auvergne. Just before his retirement, he was honored with the grand cross of the Legion of Honour. Barante's Histoire des ducs de Bourgogne de la maison de Valois, published in several volumes between 1824 and 1828, earned him immediate membership in the French Academy. Its narrative style and clarity were praised by the romantic school, but it lacks critical insight and scientific rigor. Among his other literary works are a Tableau de la littérature française au dixhuitième siècle, published in several editions; Des communes et de l'aristocratie (1821); a French translation of Schiller's plays; Questions constitutionnelles (1850); Histoire de la Convention Nationale, released in six volumes from 1851 to 1853; Histoire du Directoire de la République française (1855); Études historiques et biographiques (1857); La Vie politique de M. Royer-Collard (1861). He also worked on the version of Hamlet for Guizot's Shakespeare. He died on November 22, 1866.

His Souvenirs were published by his grandson (Paris, 1890-99). See also the article by Guizot in the Revue des deux Mondes, July 1867.

His Souvenirs were published by his grandson (Paris, 1890-99). See also the article by Guizot in the Revue des deux Mondes, July 1867.

BARASAT, a subdivisional town in the district of the Twenty-four Parganas, Bengal, India. For a considerable time Barasat town was the headquarters of a joint magistracy, known as the "Barasat District," but in 1861, on a readjustment of boundaries Barasat district was abolished by order of government, and was converted into a subdivision of the Twenty-four Parganas. Pop. (1901) 8634. It forms a striking illustration of the rural character of the so-called "towns" in Bengal, and is merely an agglomeration of 41 separate villages, in which all the operations of husbandry go on precisely as in the adjacent hamlets.

BARASAT, a subdivisional town in the Twenty-four Parganas district of Bengal, India. For a long time, Barasat was the headquarters of a combined magistracy known as the "Barasat District," but in 1861, due to a boundary realignment, the Barasat district was dissolved by government order and became a subdivision of the Twenty-four Parganas. Population (1901) 8,634. It serves as a notable example of the rural nature of the so-called "towns" in Bengal, essentially being a collection of 41 separate villages where all farming activities continue just like in the surrounding hamlets.

BARATIER, JOHANN PHILIPP (1721-1740), German scholar of precocious genius, was born at Schwabach near Nuremberg on the 10th of January 1721. His early education was most carefully conducted by his father, the pastor of the French church at Schwabach, and so rapid was his progress that by the time he was five years of age he could speak French, Latin and Dutch with ease, and read Greek fluently. He then studied Hebrew, and in three years was able to translate the Hebrew Bible into Latin or French. He collected materials for a dictionary of rare and difficult Hebrew words, with critical and philological observations; and when he was about eleven years old translated from the Hebrew Tudela's Itinerarium. In his fourteenth year he was admitted master of arts at Halle, and received into the Royal Academy at Berlin. The last years of his short life he devoted to the study of history and antiquities, and had collected materials for histories of the Thirty Years' War and of Antitrinitarianism, and for an Inquiry concerning Egyptian Antiquities. His health, which had always been weak, gave way completely under these labours, and he died on the 5th of October 1740. He had published eleven separate works, and left a great quantity of manuscript.

BARATIER, JOHANN PHILIPP (1721-1740), a German scholar of exceptional talent, was born in Schwabach near Nuremberg on January 10, 1721. His father, who was the pastor of the French church in Schwabach, carefully guided his early education, and he progressed so quickly that by the age of five, he could easily speak French, Latin, and Dutch, and read Greek fluently. He then studied Hebrew and within three years could translate the Hebrew Bible into Latin or French. He compiled materials for a dictionary of rare and complex Hebrew words, with critical and linguistic insights; and by the age of eleven, he translated Tudela's Itinerarium from Hebrew. At fourteen, he was granted a master of arts degree at Halle and was admitted to the Royal Academy in Berlin. In the final years of his brief life, he focused on studying history and antiquities, gathering materials for histories of the Thirty Years' War, Antitrinitarianism, and an Inquiry concerning Egyptian Antiquities. His health, which had always been fragile, ultimately succumbed to these efforts, and he passed away on October 5, 1740. He published eleven works and left behind a significant amount of manuscript material.

BARATYNSKI, JEWGENIJ ABRAMOVICH (1800-1844), Russian poet, was educated at the royal school at St Petersburg and then entered the army. He served for eight years in Finland, where he composed his first poem Eda. Through the interest of friends he obtained leave from the tsar to retire from the army, and settled in 1827 near Moscow. There he completed his chief work The Gipsy, a poem written in the style of Pushkin. He died in 1844 at Naples, whither he had gone for the sake of the milder climate.

BARATYNSKI, JEWGENIJ ABRAMOVICH (1800-1844), was a Russian poet who was educated at the royal school in St. Petersburg before joining the army. He served for eight years in Finland, where he wrote his first poem, Eda. With the help of friends, he got permission from the tsar to leave the army and moved to near Moscow in 1827. There, he completed his main work, The Gipsy, a poem styled after Pushkin. He passed away in 1844 in Naples, where he had gone for the warmer climate.

A collected edition of his poems appeared at St Petersburg, in 2 vols. in 1835; later editions, Moscow 1869, and Kazan 1884.

A collected edition of his poems was published in St. Petersburg in 2 volumes in 1835; later editions were released in Moscow in 1869 and in Kazan in 1884.

BARB. (1) (From Lat. barba, a beard), a term used in various senses, of the folds of mucous membrane under the tongue of horses and cattle, and of a disease affecting that part, of the wattles round the mouth of the barbel, of the backward turned points of an arrow and of the piece of folded linen worn over the neck by nuns. (2) (From Fr. barbe, meaning "from Barbary"), a name applied to a breed of horses imported by the Moors into Spain from Barbary, and to a breed of pigeons.

BARB. (1) (From Lat. barba, meaning beard), a term used in various ways: the folds of mucous membrane under the tongue of horses and cattle, a disease affecting that area, the wattles around the mouth of the barbel, the backward-facing points of an arrow, and the piece of folded linen worn around the neck by nuns. (2) (From Fr. barbe, meaning "from Barbary"), a name used for a breed of horses brought by the Moors into Spain from Barbary, as well as a breed of pigeons.

BARBACENA, an inland town of Brazil, in the state of Minas Geraes, 150 m. N.N.W. of Rio de Janeiro and about 3500 ft. above sea-level. The surrounding district is chiefly agricultural, producing coffee, sugar-cane, Indian corn and cattle, and the town has considerable commercial importance. It is also noted for its healthiness and possesses a large sanatorium much frequented by convalescents from Rio de Janeiro during the hot season. Barbacena was formerly a principal distributing centre for the mining districts of Minas Geraes, but this distinction was lost when the railways were extended beyond that point.

BARBACENA, an inland town in Brazil, located in the state of Minas Gerais, is 150 miles north-northwest of Rio de Janeiro and about 3,500 feet above sea level. The surrounding area is mainly agricultural, producing coffee, sugarcane, corn, and livestock, and the town has significant commercial importance. It's also recognized for its healthy environment and has a large sanatorium that attracts many convalescents from Rio de Janeiro during the hot season. Barbacena used to be a key distribution center for the mining regions of Minas Gerais, but that status faded when railways were extended beyond it.

BARBADOS, or Barbadoes, an island in the British West Indies. It lies 78 m. E. of St Vincent, in 13° 4′ N. and 59° 37′ W.; is 21 m. long, 14½ m. at its broadest, and 166 sq. m. (106,470 acres) in extent (roughly equalling the Isle of Wight). Its coasts are encircled with coral reefs, extending in some places 3 m. seaward. In its configuration the island is elevated but not mountainous. Near the centre is its apex, Mount Hillaby (1100 ft.), from which the land falls on all sides in a series of terraces to the sea. So gentle is the incline of the hills that in driving over the well-constructed roads the ascent is scarcely noticeable. The only natural harbour is Carlisle Bay on the south-western coast, which, however, is little better than a shallow roadstead, only accessible to light draught vessels.

BARBADOS, or Barbados, is an island in the British West Indies. It’s located 78 miles east of St. Vincent, at 13° 4′ N. and 59° 37′ W. The island is 21 miles long, 14½ miles at its widest point, and covers an area of 166 square miles (106,470 acres), which is roughly the size of the Isle of Wight. Its shores are surrounded by coral reefs, extending up to 3 miles into the sea in some areas. The island is hilly but not mountainous, with its highest point, Mount Hillaby (1100 ft.), located near the center. From there, the land slopes gently down in terraces to the ocean. The hills are so gently sloped that you can barely notice the ascent when driving on the well-maintained roads. The only natural harbor is Carlisle Bay on the southwestern coast, which is not much better than a shallow anchorage and is only accessible to smaller boats.

Geology.—The oldest rocks of Barbados, known as the Scotland series, are of shallow water origin, consisting of coarse grits, brown sandstones and sandy clays, in places saturated with petroleum and traversed by veins of manjak. They have been folded and denuded, so as to form the foundation on which rest the later beds of the island. Upon the denuded edges of the Scotland beds lies the Oceanic series. It includes chalky limestones, siliceous earths, red clay, and, at the top, a layer of mudstone composed mainly of volcanic dust. The limestones contain Globigerina and other Foraminifera, the siliceous beds are made of Radiolaria, sponge spicules and diatoms, while the red clay closely resembles the red clay of the deepest parts of the oceans. There can be no doubt that the whole series was laid down in deep waters. The Oceanic series is generally overlaid directly, and unconformably, by coral limestones; but at Bissex Hill, at the base of the coral limestones, and resting unconformably upon the Oceanic series, there is a Globigerina marl. The Coral Limestone series lies indifferently upon the older beds. Although of no great thickness it covers six-sevenths of the island, rising in a series of steps or platforms to a height of nearly 1100 ft.

Geology.—The oldest rocks of Barbados, known as the Scotland series, originated in shallow water and consist of coarse grits, brown sandstones, and sandy clays, some of which are saturated with petroleum and have veins of manjak running through them. They have been folded and eroded, forming the foundation on which the island's later layers rest. On the eroded edges of the Scotland beds lies the Oceanic series. This series includes chalky limestones, siliceous earths, red clay, and at the top, a layer of mudstone made mostly of volcanic dust. The limestones contain Globigerina and other Foraminifera, the siliceous beds consist of Radiolaria, sponge spicules, and diatoms, while the red clay closely resembles the deep ocean's red clay. It's clear that the entire series was deposited in deep waters. The Oceanic series is typically directly and unconformably covered by coral limestones; however, at Bissex Hill, at the base of the coral limestones that rest unconformably on the Oceanic series, there is a Globigerina marl. The Coral Limestone series indiscriminately overlays the older layers. Although it is not very thick, it covers six-sevenths of the island, rising in a series of steps or platforms to a height of nearly 1100 ft.

Even the Scotland series probably belongs to the Tertiary system, but owing to the want of characteristic fossils, it is impossible to determine with any degree of certainty the precise homotaxis of the several formations. Jukes-Browne and Harrison ascribe the Scotland beds to the Eocene or Oligocene period, the Oceanic series to the Miocene, the Bissex Hill marls to the Pliocene, and the coral limestones partly to the Pliocene and partly to the Pleistocene. But these correlations rest upon imperfect evidence.

Even the Scotland series likely belongs to the Tertiary system, but due to the lack of distinctive fossils, it's impossible to determine the exact arrangement of the various formations with any level of certainty. Jukes-Browne and Harrison assign the Scotland beds to the Eocene or Oligocene period, the Oceanic series to the Miocene, the Bissex Hill marls to the Pliocene, and the coral limestones partly to the Pliocene and partly to the Pleistocene. However, these correlations are based on incomplete evidence.

Sandstone, and clays suitable for brick-making, are found in the district of Scotland, so called from a fancied resemblance to the Highlands of North Britain. The only other mineral product is manjak, a species of asphalt, also found in this district and to some extent exported.

Sandstone and clay suitable for brick-making are found in the region of Scotland, named for its imagined similarity to the Highlands of North Britain. The only other mineral product is manjak, a type of asphalt, also found in this area and partially exported.

Climate, &c.—The climate of Barbados is pleasant. The [v.03 p.0381]seasons are divided into wet and dry, the latter (extending from December to the end of May) being also the cold season. The temperature ranges from 70° F. to 86° F., rarely, even on the coldest days, falling below 65° F. The average annual rainfall is about 60 in., September being the wettest month. For eight months the invigorating N.E. trade winds temper the tropical heat. The absence of swamps, the porous nature of the soil, and the extent of cultivation account for the freedom of the island from miasma. Fever is unknown. The climate has a beneficial effect on pulmonary diseases, especially in their earlier stages, and is remarkable in arresting the decay of vital power consequent upon old age. Leprosy occurs amongst the negroes, and elephantiasis is so frequent as to be known as "Barbados leg."

Climate, &c.—The climate of Barbados is pleasant. The [v.03 p.0381]seasons are split into wet and dry, with the dry season (running from December to the end of May) also being the cooler time. The temperature ranges from 70°F to 86°F, and even on the coldest days, it rarely drops below 65°F. The average annual rainfall is around 60 inches, with September being the wettest month. For eight months, the refreshing N.E. trade winds help ease the tropical heat. The lack of swamps, the porous soil, and extensive cultivation keep the island free from miasma. Fever is unheard of. The climate positively impacts respiratory diseases, especially in their early stages, and is notable for helping slow down the decline of vitality associated with old age. Leprosy is found among the Black population, and elephantiasis occurs commonly enough to be referred to as "Barbados leg."

Industries.—The cultivation of sugar was first introduced in the middle of the 17th century, and owing to the cheapness of labour, the extreme fertility of the soil and the care bestowed on its cultivation, became the staple product of the island. Cotton growing has recently become of importance. The few other industries include rum distilleries and factories for chemicals, ice and tobacco. A railway 28 m. long runs from Bridgetown partly round the coast. The island is a place of call for almost all the steamships plying to and from the West Indies, and is a great centre of distribution. There is direct communication at frequent intervals with England, the United States, Canada and the other West Indian islands.

Industries.—Sugar cultivation was first introduced in the mid-17th century, and due to affordable labor, the rich fertility of the soil, and the care given to its cultivation, it became the island's main product. Cotton farming has recently gained significance. Other industries include rum distilleries and factories for chemicals, ice, and tobacco. A railway 28 miles long runs from Bridgetown partly around the coast. The island is a stop for nearly all the steamships traveling to and from the West Indies and serves as a major distribution center. There is direct communication at regular intervals with England, the United States, Canada, and the other West Indian islands.

Population and Administration.—The greater part of the inhabitants belong to the Church of England, which exceeds in numbers the combined total of all other denominations. The island is the see of a bishop, who, with the clergy of all creeds, is paid by the government. The chief educational establishment is Codrington College, founded by Colonel Christopher Codrington, who in 1710 bequeathed two estates to the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel. It trains young men for holy orders and is affiliated to the university of Durham. Harrison College and The Lodge are secondary schools for boys, Queen's College for girls. There are several second grade and a large number of primary schools. The colony possesses representative institutions but not responsible government. The crown has a veto on legislation and the home government appoints the public officials, excepting the treasurer. The island is administered by a governor, assisted by an executive council, a legislative council of 9 nominated members, and a house of assembly of 24 members elected on a limited franchise. Barbados is the headquarters of the Imperial Agricultural Department of the West Indies, to which (under Sir Daniel Morris) the island owes the development of cotton growing, &c. The majority of the population consists of negroes, passionately attached to the island, who have a well-marked physiognomy and dialect of their own, and are more intelligent than the other West Indian negroes. They outnumber the whites by 9 to 1. Barbados is one of the most densely populated areas in the world. In 1901 the numbers amounted to 195,588, or 1178 to the sq. m., and in 1906 they were 196,287. There are no crown lands nor forests.

Population and Administration.—Most of the inhabitants belong to the Church of England, which has more members than all other denominations combined. The island is home to a bishop, who, along with clergy from all faiths, is funded by the government. The main educational institution is Codrington College, founded by Colonel Christopher Codrington, who in 1710 left two estates to the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel. The college trains young men for the clergy and is affiliated with the University of Durham. Harrison College and The Lodge are secondary schools for boys, while Queen's College is for girls. There are several secondary schools and many primary schools. The colony has representative institutions but no responsible government. The crown can veto legislation, and the home government appoints public officials, except for the treasurer. The island is governed by a governor, supported by an executive council, a legislative council with 9 appointed members, and a house of assembly made up of 24 members elected under a limited franchise. Barbados is the headquarters of the Imperial Agricultural Department of the West Indies, which (under Sir Daniel Morris) has helped develop cotton growing, among other things. The majority of the population consists of Black people, who are deeply connected to the island, possess distinct physical features and a unique dialect, and are generally more intelligent than other Black populations in the West Indies. They outnumber white people by 9 to 1. Barbados is one of the most densely populated regions in the world. In 1901, the population was 195,588, or 1,178 per square mile, and in 1906 it increased to 196,287. There are no crown lands or forests.

Towns.—Bridgetown (pop. 21,000), the capital, situated on the S.W. coast, is a pretty town nestling at the foot of the hills leading to the uplands of the interior. It has a cathedral, St Michael's, which also serves as a parish church. In Trafalgar Square stands the earliest monument erected to the memory of Nelson. There are a good many buildings, shops, pleasure grounds, a handsome military parade and exquisite beaches. Pilgrim, the residence of the governor, is a fine mansion about a mile from the city. Fontabelle and Hastings are fashionable suburban watering-places with good sea-bathing. Speighstown (1500) is the only other town of any size.

Towns.—Bridgetown (pop. 21,000), the capital, located on the S.W. coast, is a charming town nestled at the base of the hills that lead to the interior uplands. It has a cathedral, St. Michael's, which also functions as a parish church. In Trafalgar Square stands the earliest monument dedicated to Nelson's memory. There are plenty of buildings, shops, recreational areas, a beautiful military parade ground, and stunning beaches. Pilgrim, the governor's residence, is a lovely mansion about a mile from the city. Fontabelle and Hastings are trendy suburban seaside spots with great swimming. Speighstown (1,500) is the only other town of any significant size.

History.—Opinions differ as to the derivation of the name of the island. It may be the Spanish word for the hanging branches of a vine which strike root in the ground, or the name may have been given from a species of bearded fig-tree. In the 16th-century maps the name is variously rendered St Bernardo, Bernados, Barbudoso, Barnodos and Barnodo. There are more numerous traces of the Carib Indians here than in any other of the Antilles. Barbados is thought to have been first visited by the Portuguese. Its history has some special features, showing as it does the process of peaceful colonization, for the island, acquired without conquest, has never been out of the possession of the British. It was touched in 1605 by the British ship "Olive Blossom," whose crew, finding it uninhabited, took possession in the name of James I.; but the first actual settlement was made in 1625, at the direction of Sir William Courteen under the patent of Lord Leigh, afterwards earl of Marlborough, to whom the island had been granted by the king. Two years later, a compromise having been effected with Lord Marlborough, a grant of the island was obtained by the earl of Carlisle, whose claim was based on a grant, from the king, of all the Caribbean islands in 1624; and in 1628 Charles Wolferstone, a native of Bermuda, was appointed governor. In the same year sixty-four settlers arrived at Carlisle Bay and the present capital was founded. During the Civil War in England many Royalists sought refuge in Barbados, where, under Lord Willoughby (who had leased the island from the earl of Carlisle), they offered stout resistance to the forces of the Commonwealth. Willoughby, however, was ultimately defeated and exiled. After the Restoration, to appease the planters, doubtful as to the title under which they held the estates which they had converted into valuable properties, the proprietary or patent interest was abolished, and the crown took over the government of the island; a duty of 4½% on all exports being imposed to satisfy the claims of the patentees. In 1684, under the governorship of Sir Richard Dutton, a census was taken, according to which the population then consisted of 20,000 whites and 46,000 slaves. The European wars of the 18th century caused much suffering, as the West Indies were the scene of numerous battles between the British and the French. During this period a portion of the 4½% duty was returned to the colony in the form of the governor's salary. In the course of the American War of Independence Barbados again experienced great hardships owing to the restrictions placed upon the importation of provisions from the American colonies, and in 1778 the distress became so acute that the British government had to send relief. For three years after the peace of Amiens in 1802 the colony enjoyed uninterrupted calm, but in 1805 it was only saved from falling into the hands of the French by the timely arrival of Admiral Cochrane. Since that date, however, it has remained unthreatened in the possession of the British. The rupture between Great Britain and the United States in 1812 caused privateering to be resumed, the trade of the colony being thereby almost destroyed. This led to an agitation for the repeal of the 4½% duty, but it was not till 1838 that the efforts to secure this were successful. The abolition of slavery in 1834 was attended by no ill results, the slaves continuing to work for their masters as hired servants, and a period of great prosperity succeeded. The proposed confederation of the Windward Islands in 1876, however, provoked riots, which occasioned considerable loss of life and property, but secured for the people their existence as a separate colony. Hurricanes are the scourge of Barbados, those of 1780, 1831, and 1898 being so disastrous as to necessitate relief measures on the part of the home government.

History.—Opinions vary on the origin of the island's name. It might come from the Spanish word for the hanging branches of a vine that root in the ground, or it could be named after a type of bearded fig tree. In maps from the 16th century, the name appears in various forms: St Bernardo, Bernados, Barbudoso, Barnodos, and Barnodo. There are more signs of the Carib Indians here than in any other part of the Antilles. Barbados is believed to have been first visited by the Portuguese. Its history has unique aspects, showing a process of peaceful colonization, as the island, acquired without conquest, has always remained under British control. In 1605, the British ship "Olive Blossom" reached it; since the island was uninhabited, the crew claimed it in the name of James I. However, the first actual settlement occurred in 1625, led by Sir William Courteen under a patent from Lord Leigh, later the Earl of Marlborough, to whom the king had granted the island. Two years later, after reaching a compromise with Lord Marlborough, the Earl of Carlisle obtained a grant of the island based on a royal grant of all the Caribbean islands in 1624; in 1628, Charles Wolferstone from Bermuda became governor. That same year, sixty-four settlers arrived at Carlisle Bay, leading to the founding of the present capital. During England's Civil War, many Royalists sought refuge in Barbados, where they, under Lord Willoughby (who had leased the island from the Earl of Carlisle), provided strong resistance against Commonwealth forces. However, Willoughby was eventually defeated and exiled. After the Restoration, to satisfy the planters wrestling with their land titles, the proprietary or patent interest was abolished, and the crown took control of the island's government, imposing a 4½% duty on all exports to cover the claims of the patentees. In 1684, under Governor Sir Richard Dutton, a census showed a population of 20,000 whites and 46,000 slaves. The wars in Europe during the 18th century caused significant suffering, with the West Indies witnessing many battles between the British and French. During this time, part of the 4½% duty was returned to the colony as the governor's salary. During the American War of Independence, Barbados again faced severe hardships due to restrictions on importing provisions from the American colonies; in 1778, the situation became so desperate that the British government had to send aid. For three years following the peace of Amiens in 1802, the colony experienced calm, but in 1805, it narrowly avoided falling into French hands thanks to Admiral Cochrane's timely arrival. Since then, it has remained securely under British control. The conflict between Great Britain and the United States in 1812 led to the resumption of privateering, severely damaging the colony's trade. This sparked a movement to repeal the 4½% duty, which was only achieved in 1838. The abolition of slavery in 1834 had no negative consequences, as former slaves continued to work for their owners as paid servants, ushering in a prosperous period. However, a proposed confederation of the Windward Islands in 1876 led to riots that resulted in significant loss of life and property, but ultimately secured the people's status as a separate colony. Hurricanes frequently plague Barbados, with those in 1780, 1831, and 1898 being so catastrophic that they necessitated government relief efforts.

See Ligon, History of Barbados (1657); Oldmixon, British Empire in America (1741); A Short History of Barbados (1768); Remarks upon the Short History (1768); Poyer, History of Barbados (1808); Capt. Thom. Southey, Chron. Hist. of W. Indies (1827); Schomburgk, History of Barbados (1848); J. H. S. Moxby, Account of a West Indian Sanatorium (1886); N. D. Davis, The Cavaliers and Roundheads of Barbados (1887); J. H. Stark, History and Guide to Barbados (1893); R. T. Hill, Cuba and Porto Rico (1897). For geology, see A. J. Jukes-Browne and J. B. Harrison, "The Geology of Barbados," Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. London vol. xlvii. (1891), pp. 197-250, vol. xlviii. (1892), pp. 170-226; J. W. Gregory, "Contributions to the Palaeontology and Physical Geology of the West Indies," ibid. vol. li. (1895), pp. 255-310; G. F. Franks and J. B. Harrison, "The Globigerina-marls and Basal Reef-rocks of Barbados," ibid. vol. liv. (1898), pp. 540-555; J. W. Spencer, "On the Geological and Physical Development of Barbados; with Notes on Trinidad," ibid. vol. lviii. (1902), pp. 354-367.

See Ligon, History of Barbados (1657); Oldmixon, British Empire in America (1741); A Short History of Barbados (1768); Remarks upon the Short History (1768); Poyer, History of Barbados (1808); Capt. Thom. Southey, Chron. Hist. of W. Indies (1827); Schomburgk, History of Barbados (1848); J. H. S. Moxby, Account of a West Indian Sanatorium (1886); N. D. Davis, The Cavaliers and Roundheads of Barbados (1887); J. H. Stark, History and Guide to Barbados (1893); R. T. Hill, Cuba and Porto Rico (1897). For geology, see A. J. Jukes-Browne and J. B. Harrison, "The Geology of Barbados," Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. London vol. xlvii. (1891), pp. 197-250, vol. xlviii. (1892), pp. 170-226; J. W. Gregory, "Contributions to the Palaeontology and Physical Geology of the West Indies," ibid. vol. li. (1895), pp. 255-310; G. F. Franks and J. B. Harrison, "The Globigerina-marls and Basal Reef-rocks of Barbados," ibid. vol. liv. (1898), pp. 540-555; J. W. Spencer, "On the Geological and Physical Development of Barbados; with Notes on Trinidad," ibid. vol. lviii. (1902), pp. 354-367.

BARBARA, SAINT, a virgin martyr and saint of the Roman Catholic and Orthodox Eastern Churches, whose festival day is December 4th. Her legend is that she was immured in a tower [v.03 p.0382]by her father who was opposed to her marriage; that she was converted to Christianity by a follower of Origen, and that when her father learnt this, he beheaded her. The place of her martyrdom is variously given as Heliopolis, as a town of Tuscany, and as Nicomedia, Bithynia, about the year 235. St Barbara is the patron saint of armourers and gunsmiths, and her protection is sought specially against lightning.

BARBARA, SAINT, a virgin martyr and saint of the Roman Catholic and Orthodox Eastern Churches, celebrated on December 4th. Her legend says that her father, opposed to her marriage, locked her in a tower [v.03 p.0382]; she was converted to Christianity by a follower of Origen, and when her father found out, he beheaded her. The location of her martyrdom is variously reported as Heliopolis, a town in Tuscany, and Nicomedia, Bithynia, around the year 235. St Barbara is the patron saint of armourers and gunsmiths, and she is especially invoked for protection against lightning.

BARBARIAN (Gr. βάρβαρος, the name among the early Greeks for all foreigners. The word is probably onomatopoetic, designed to represent the uncouth babbling of which languages other than their own appeared to the Greeks to consist. Even the Romans were included in the term. The word soon assumed an evil meaning, becoming associated with the vices and savage natures of which they believed their enemies to be possessed. The Romans adopted the word for all peoples other than those under Graeco-Roman influence and domination. It has long become synonymous with a general lack of civilization.

BARBARIAN (Gr. barbarian, the term used by early Greeks for all foreigners. The word likely imitates the sounds of languages that seemed to the Greeks to be nothing but uncivilized babbling. Even the Romans were included in this term. It quickly took on a negative connotation, becoming linked to the vices and savage behaviors that they thought characterized their enemies. The Romans used the term for all peoples outside of Graeco-Roman influence and control. It has long been associated with a general lack of civilization.

BARBARO, ERMOLAO (Hermolaus Barbarus) (1454-1493), Italian scholar, was born at Venice on the 21st of May 1454. At an early age he was sent to Rome, where he studied under Pomponius Laetus. He completed his education at the university of Padua, where he was appointed professor of philosophy in 1477. Two years later he revisited Venice, but returned to Padua when the plague broke out in his native city. He was sent on various missions to persons of high rank, amongst them Pope Innocent VIII., by whom he was nominated to the important office of patriarch of Aquileia (1491). The Venetian senate, however, refused to ratify the appointment, which, contrary to the law, he had accepted without first obtaining its sanction. He was banished and forced to resign the patriarchate, under the threat of being punished vicariously by the confiscation of his father's property. Barbarus remained at Rome, in receipt of a small pension from the pontifical government, until his death (probably from the plague) on the 14th of June 1493 (according to some, two years later). He edited and translated a number of classical works, of which the most important were: Castigationes Plinianae (1492), in which he boasted of having made 5000 corrections in the text of Pliny's Natural History; Themistius' Paraphrases of certain works of Aristotle (1480); Aristotle's Rhetorica (published in 1544); Castigationes in Pomponium Melam (1493).

BARBARO, ERMOLAO (Hermolaus Barbarus) (1454-1493), an Italian scholar, was born in Venice on May 21, 1454. At a young age, he moved to Rome, where he studied under Pomponius Laetus. He finished his education at the University of Padua, where he became a professor of philosophy in 1477. Two years later, he visited Venice again but went back to Padua when the plague hit his hometown. He was sent on various missions to influential people, including Pope Innocent VIII., who appointed him as the patriarch of Aquileia in 1491. However, the Venetian senate refused to approve the appointment, which he had accepted without prior approval, violating the law. He was exiled and forced to give up the patriarchate under the threat of his father's property being confiscated. Barbarus stayed in Rome, receiving a small pension from the papal government, until his death (likely from the plague) on June 14, 1493 (though some say it was two years later). He edited and translated several classical works, with the most significant being: Castigationes Plinianae (1492), where he claimed to have made 5,000 corrections to Pliny's Natural History; Themistius' Paraphrases of certain works by Aristotle (1480); Aristotle's Rhetorica (published in 1544); Castigationes in Pomponium Melam (1493).

BARBAROSSA ("Redbeard"), the name given by the Christians to a family of Turkish admirals and sea rovers of the 16th century,—Arouj and Khizr (alias Khair-ed-Din) and Hassan the son of Khair-ed-Din. As late as 1840, Captain Walsin Esterhazy, author of a history of the Turkish rule in Africa, ventured the guess that "Barbarossa" was simply a mispronunciation of Bábá Arouj, and the supposition has been widely accepted. But the prefix Bábá was not applied to Arouj by contemporaries. His name is given in Spanish or Italian form as "Orux" or "Harrach" or "Ordiche." The contemporary Arab chronicle published by S. Rang and F. Denis in 1837 says explicitly that Barbarossa was the name applied by Christians to Khair-ed-Din. It was no doubt a nickname given to the family on account of their red or tawny beards (Lat. barba). The founder of the family was Yakub, a Roumeliot, probably of Albanian blood, who settled in Mitylene after its conquest by the Turks. He was a coasting trader and skipper, and had four sons—Elias, Isaak, Arouj and Khizr, all said to have been born after 1482. Khizr became a potter and Isaak a trader. Elias and Arouj took to sea roving. In an action with a galley of the Knights of Saint John, then established at Rhodes, Elias was killed and Arouj taken prisoner; the latter was ransomed by a Turkish pasha and returned to the sea. For some time he served the Mamelukes who still held Egypt. During the conflict between the Mamelukes and the sultan Selim I., he considered it more prudent to transfer himself to Tunis. The incessant conflicts among the Berber princes of northern Africa gave him employment as a mercenary, which he varied by piratical raids on the trade of the Christians. At Tunis he was joined by Khizr, who took, or was endowed with, the name of Khair-ed-Din. Isaak soon followed his brothers. Arouj and Khair-ed-Din joined the exiled Moors of Granada in raids on the Spanish coast. They also pushed their fortunes by fighting for, or murdering and supplanting, the native African princes. Their headquarters were in the island of Jerba in the Gulf of Gabes. They attempted in 1512 to take Bougie from the Spaniards, but were beaten off, and Arouj lost an arm, shattered by an arquebus shot. In 1514 they took Jijelli from the Genoese, and after a second beating at Bougie in 1515 were called in by the natives of Cherchel and Algiers to aid them against the Spaniards. They occupied the towns and murdered the native ruler who called them in. The Spaniards still held the little rocky island which gives Algiers its name and forms the harbour. In 1518 Arouj was drawn away to take part in a civil war in Tlemçen. He promptly murdered the prince he came to support and seized the town for himself. The rival party then called in the Spaniards, by whom Arouj was expelled and slain while fleeing at the Rio Salado. Khair-ed-Din clung to his possessions on the coast and appealed to the sultan Selim I. He was named beylerbey by the sultan, and with him began the establishment of Turkish rule in northern Africa. For years he was engaged in subduing the native princes, and in carrying on warfare with the Christians. In 1519 he repelled a Spanish attack on Algiers, but could not expel his enemies from the island till 1529. As a combatant in the forefront of the war with the Christians he became a great hero in Islam, and dreaded by its enemies under his name of Barbarossa. In 1534 he seized Tunis, acting as capitan pasha for the sultan Suleiman. The emperor Charles V. intervened on behalf of the native prince, retook the town, and destroyed great part of Barbarossa's fleet. The corsair retaliated by leading what remained of his navy on a plundering raid to the Balearic Islands. During the remainder of his life—till 1547—Barbarossa, though still beylerbey of northern Africa, was mainly engaged as capitan pasha in co-operating with the armies of the sultan Suleiman in the east. He was absent from Algiers when it was attacked by Charles V. in 1541. In 1543-1544 he commanded the fleet which Suleiman sent to the coast of Provence to support Francis I. Barbarossa would not allow the bells of the Christian churches to be rung while his fleet was at anchor in the ports. He plundered the coast of Italy on his way back to Constantinople. When he died in his palace at Constantinople he was succeeded as beylerbey of Africa by his son Hassan. Hassan Barbarossa, like his father, spent most of his life in the Levant, but was occasionally in Africa when the influence of his family was required to suppress the disorders of the Turkish garrisons. He left it for the last time in 1567, and is said by Hammer-Purgstall to have been present at Lepanto in 1571. His last years are obscure.

BARBAROSSA ("Redbeard") is the name the Christians used for a family of Turkish admirals and sea raiders in the 16th century—Arouj and Khizr (also known as Khair-ed-Din) and Hassan, the son of Khair-ed-Din. As late as 1840, Captain Walsin Esterhazy, who wrote a history of Turkish rule in Africa, suggested that "Barbarossa" was simply a mispronunciation of Bábá Arouj, and this idea has been widely accepted. However, the prefix Bábá was not used for Arouj by his contemporaries. His name appears in Spanish or Italian as "Orux," "Harrach," or "Ordiche." A contemporary Arab chronicle published by S. Rang and F. Denis in 1837 states that Barbarossa was the name given by Christians to Khair-ed-Din. It was likely a nickname given to the family because of their red or tawny beards (Lat. barba). The family's founder was Yakub, a Roumeliot, probably of Albanian descent, who settled in Mitylene after the Turks conquered it. He was a coastal trader and skipper with four sons—Elias, Isaak, Arouj, and Khizr—all believed to have been born after 1482. Khizr became a potter, while Isaak became a trader. Elias and Arouj took to sea raiding. During a confrontation with a galley from the Knights of Saint John, who were then based at Rhodes, Elias was killed and Arouj was captured; he was later ransomed by a Turkish pasha and returned to the sea. For a while, he served the Mamelukes, who still controlled Egypt. When conflict arose between the Mamelukes and Sultan Selim I, he decided it was wiser to move to Tunis. Ongoing conflicts among the Berber princes of North Africa provided him with work as a mercenary, which he supplemented with pirate raids against Christian trade. In Tunis, he was joined by Khizr, who adopted the name Khair-ed-Din. Isaak soon followed his brothers. Arouj and Khair-ed-Din collaborated with the exiled Moors from Granada in attacks on the Spanish coast. They also sought fortunes by fighting for or assassinating native African princes. They established their base on the island of Jerba in the Gulf of Gabes. In 1512, they attempted to capture Bougie from the Spaniards but were repelled, resulting in Arouj losing an arm from an arquebus shot. In 1514, they took Jijelli from the Genoese, and after another defeat at Bougie in 1515, the natives of Cherchel and Algiers called them in for help against the Spaniards. They took control of the towns and killed the local ruler who invited them in. The Spaniards continued to hold the small rocky island that gives Algiers its name and forms its harbor. In 1518, Arouj was distracted by a civil war in Tlemçen. He quickly killed the prince he came to support and seized the town for himself. The rival faction then invited the Spaniards, who expelled Arouj, who was killed while retreating at the Rio Salado. Khair-ed-Din held on to his territorial gains along the coast and appealed to Sultan Selim I for help. The sultan appointed him beylerbey, marking the beginning of Turkish rule in North Africa. He spent years subduing the native princes and waging war against the Christians. In 1519, he repelled a Spanish attack on Algiers but couldn't expel them from the island until 1529. As a key combatant in the war with Christians, he became a great hero in Islam and was feared by his enemies under the name Barbarossa. In 1534, he captured Tunis while serving as capitan pasha for Sultan Suleiman. Emperor Charles V intervened on behalf of the local prince, retook the city, and destroyed a significant portion of Barbarossa's fleet. The corsair retaliated by leading what remained of his navy on a plundering expedition to the Balearic Islands. For the rest of his life—until 1547—Barbarossa, though still beylerbey of North Africa, primarily served as capitan pasha, working with Sultan Suleiman's armies in the east. He was not in Algiers during Charles V's attack in 1541. In 1543-1544, he commanded the fleet that Suleiman sent to the coast of Provence to support Francis I. Barbarossa forbade the church bells of Christian churches to be rung while his fleet was docked in the ports. He raided the Italian coast on his return to Constantinople. Upon his death in his palace in Constantinople, he was succeeded as beylerbey of Africa by his son Hassan. Like his father, Hassan Barbarossa spent most of his life in the Levant but occasionally returned to Africa to help manage the Turkish garrisons. He left Africa for the last time in 1567 and is said by Hammer-Purgstall to have been present at Lepanto in 1571. The last years of his life remain unclear.

Authorities.—The History of the Ottoman Empire, by Joseph von Hammer-Purgstall (French translation J. J. Hellert, 1835-1843), contains accounts of the Barbarossas, but requires to be corrected by other authorities. See La Fondation de la régence d'Alger, histoire des Barberousse, chronique arabe du XVIème siècle published by Sander Rang and Ferdinand Denis, Paris, 1837—for a curious Moslem version of their story. H. D. de Grammont has collected later evidence in his Histoire d'Alger (Paris, 1887); and he discusses the origin of the name in a paper contributed to the Révue Africaine, No. 171. Their campaigns are told in a readable way with the advantage of technical knowledge by Ad. Jurien de la Gravière in Les Corsaires barbaresques et la marine de Soliman le Grand (1887), and Doria et Barberousse (1886). The History of the Maritime Wars of the Turks, by Hajji Khalifa (translated by J. Mitchell for the Oriental Translation Fund, 1831), is said to have been founded on evidence collected by order of the sultan Suleiman.

Authorities.—The History of the Ottoman Empire, by Joseph von Hammer-Purgstall (French translation by J. J. Hellert, 1835-1843), contains accounts of the Barbarossas but needs to be cross-checked with other sources. See La Fondation de la régence d'Alger, histoire des Barberousse, chronique arabe du XVIème siècle published by Sander Rang and Ferdinand Denis, Paris, 1837—for an interesting Muslim version of their story. H. D. de Grammont has gathered more recent evidence in his Histoire d'Alger (Paris, 1887), where he also discusses the origin of the name in a paper published in the Révue Africaine, No. 171. Ad. Jurien de la Gravière narrates their campaigns in an accessible manner, bolstered by his technical expertise, in Les Corsaires barbaresques et la marine de Soliman le Grand (1887) and Doria et Barberousse (1886). The History of the Maritime Wars of the Turks, by Hajji Khalifa (translated by J. Mitchell for the Oriental Translation Fund, 1831), is said to be based on evidence collected at the direction of Sultan Suleiman.

BARBAROUX, CHARLES JEAN MARIE (1767-1794), French revolutionist, was educated at first by the Oratorians of Marseilles, then studied law, and became a successful advocate. He was appointed secretary (greffier) to the commune of Marseilles, and in 1792 was commissioned to go to the Legislative Assembly and demand the accusation of the directory of the department of Bouches-du-Rhone, as accomplice in a royalist movement in Arles. At Paris he was received in the Jacobin club and entered into relations with J. P. Brissot and the Rolands. It was at his instigation that Marseilles sent to Paris the battalion of volunteers which contributed to the insurrection of the 10th of August 1792 against the king. Returning to Marseilles he helped to repress a royalist movement at Avignon and an ultra-Jacobin movement [v.03 p.0383]at Marseilles, and was elected deputy to the Convention by 775 votes out of 776 voting. From the first he posed as an opponent of the Mountain, accused Robespierre of aiming at the dictatorship (25th of September 1792), attacked Marat, and proposed to break up the commune of Paris. Then he got the act of accusation against Louis XVI. adopted, and in the trial voted for his death "without appeal and without delay." During the final struggle between the Girondists and the Mountain, he refused to resign as deputy and rejected the offer made by the sections of Paris to give hostages for the arrested representatives. He succeeded in escaping, first to Caen, where he organized the civil war, then to Saint-Emilion near Bordeaux, where he wrote his Mémoires, which were published in 1822 by his son, and re-edited in 1866. Discovered, he attempted to shoot himself, but was only wounded, and was taken to Bordeaux, where he was guillotined when his identity was established.

BARBAROUX, CHARLES JEAN MARIE (1767-1794), French revolutionary, was initially educated by the Oratorians in Marseilles, then went on to study law and became a successful lawyer. He was appointed secretary (greffier) to the commune of Marseilles, and in 1792, he was sent to the Legislative Assembly to demand the indictment of the directorate of the department of Bouches-du-Rhone, as it was involved in a royalist movement in Arles. In Paris, he joined the Jacobin club and established connections with J. P. Brissot and the Rolands. It was his initiative that led to Marseilles sending a battalion of volunteers to Paris, which participated in the insurrection of August 10, 1792, against the king. After returning to Marseilles, he played a role in quelling a royalist uprising in Avignon and an ultra-Jacobin movement at Marseilles, and he was elected as a deputy to the Convention with 775 out of 776 votes. From the beginning, he positioned himself as an opponent of the Mountain, accused Robespierre of seeking dictatorship (September 25, 1792), criticized Marat, and proposed dissolving the commune of Paris. He then managed to get the accusation against Louis XVI approved, and during the trial, he voted for his execution "without appeal and without delay." During the final conflict between the Girondists and the Mountain, he refused to resign as deputy and turned down offers from the sections of Paris to provide hostages for the arrested representatives. He managed to escape first to Caen, where he organized the civil war, and then to Saint-Emilion near Bordeaux, where he wrote his Mémoires, which his son published in 1822 and were revised in 1866. After being discovered, he tried to shoot himself but only sustained a wound and was taken to Bordeaux, where he was guillotined once his identity was confirmed.

See Ch. Vatel, Charlotte Corday et les Girondins (Paris, 1873); A. Aulard, Les Orateurs de la Législative et de la Convention (Paris, 2nd ed., 1906).

See Ch. Vatel, Charlotte Corday et les Girondins (Paris, 1873); A. Aulard, Les Orateurs de la Législative et de la Convention (Paris, 2nd ed., 1906).

BARBARY, the general designation of that part of northern Africa bounded E. by Egypt, W. by the Atlantic, S. by the Sahara and N. by the Mediterranean, comprising the states of Morocco, Algeria, Tunisia and Tripoli. The name is derived from the Berbers, the chief inhabitants of the region.

BARBARY, the general term for the region of northern Africa that is bordered to the east by Egypt, to the west by the Atlantic, to the south by the Sahara, and to the north by the Mediterranean, which includes the countries of Morocco, Algeria, Tunisia, and Tripoli. The name comes from the Berbers, the main inhabitants of the area.

BARBARY APE, a tailless monkey inhabiting Algeria, Morocco, and the rock of Gibraltar (where it may have been introduced), and referable to the otherwise Asiatic group of macaques, in which it alone represents the subgenus Inuus. This monkey, Macacus inuus, is light yellowish-brown above and yellowish-white below, with the naked part of the face flesh-coloured. It is entirely terrestrial in habits, at least on Gibraltar, and goes about in droves.

BARBARY APE, a tailless monkey found in Algeria, Morocco, and the rock of Gibraltar (where it may have been introduced), belongs to the otherwise Asiatic group of macaques, being the only representative of the subgenus Inuus. This monkey, Macacus inuus, has a light yellowish-brown color on its back and a yellowish-white underside, with the bare skin on its face being flesh-colored. It is fully terrestrial in behavior, at least on Gibraltar, and moves in groups.

BARBARY PIRATES. The coast population of northern Africa has in past ages been addicted to piratical attacks on the shores of Europe opposite. Throughout the decline of the Roman empire, the barbarian invasions, the Mahommedan conquest and the middle ages, mere piracy always existed by the side of the great strife of peoples and religions. In the course of the 14th century, when the native Berber dynasties were in decadence, piracy became particularly flagrant. The town of Bougie was then the most notorious haunt of these "skimmers of the sea." But the savage robber powers which, to the disgrace of Europe, infested the commerce and the coasts, not only of the Mediterranean but even for a time of the ocean; who were not finally suppressed till the 19th century was well advanced; and who are properly known as the Barbary pirates, arose in the 16th century, attained their greatest height in the 17th, declined gradually throughout the 18th and were extinguished about 1830. Isolated cases of piracy have occurred on the Rif coast of Morocco even in our time, but the pirate communities which lived by plunder and could live by no other resource, vanished with the French conquest of Algiers in 1830. They are intimately connected with the general history of northern Africa from about 1492 to their end. The story of the establishment of Turkish rule in northern Africa and of the revolutions of Morocco must be sought under the heads of Turkey, Tripoli, Tunisia, Algeria and Morocco.

BARBARY PIRATES. The coastal population of northern Africa has historically engaged in pirate attacks on the shores of Europe across various ages. Throughout the decline of the Roman Empire, during the barbarian invasions, the spread of Islam, and the Middle Ages, piracy was a persistent issue alongside the larger conflicts of peoples and religions. In the 14th century, as the native Berber dynasties declined, piracy became especially rampant. The town of Bougie was then the most infamous hideout for these "skimmers of the sea." The brutal pirate groups that, to Europe’s shame, plagued trade and coastal areas, not only in the Mediterranean but briefly even in the Atlantic, were not fully suppressed until well into the 19th century. Known as the Barbary pirates, they emerged in the 16th century, reached their peak in the 17th, gradually declined through the 18th, and were finally eradicated around 1830. Isolated incidents of piracy have occurred on the Rif coast of Morocco even in modern times, but the pirate communities that thrived on plunder and had no other means of survival disappeared with the French conquest of Algiers in 1830. Their history is deeply intertwined with the broader history of northern Africa from about 1492 until their demise. The narrative of the establishment of Turkish rule in northern Africa and the revolutions in Morocco should be looked for under the sections of Turkey, Tripoli, Tunisia, Algeria, and Morocco.

In dealing with the pirates, it will be sufficient to note a few leading dates. The conquest of Granada in 1492 by the Catholic sovereigns of Spain drove many Moors into exile. They revenged themselves by piratical attacks on the Spanish coast. They had the help of Moslem adventurers from the Levant, of whom the most successful were Arouj and his brother Khair-ed-Din, natives of Mitylene, both of whom were known to the Christians by the nickname of Barbarossa (q.v.) or "Redbeard." Spain in self-defence began to conquer the coast towns of Oran, Algiers and Tunis. Arouj having fallen in battle with the Spaniards in 1518, his brother Khair-ed-Din appealed to Selim, the sultan of Turkey, who sent him troops. He drove the Spaniards in 1529 from the rocky island in front of Algiers, where they had a fort, and was the founder of the Turkish power. From about 1518 till the death of Uluch Ali in 1587, Algiers was the main seat of government of the beylerbeys of northern Africa, who ruled over Tripoli, Tunisia and Algeria. From 1587 till 1659, they were ruled by Turkish pashas, sent from Constantinople to govern for three years; but in the latter year a military revolt in Algiers reduced the pashas to nonentities. From 1659 onwards, these African cities, though nominally forming parts of the Turkish empire, were in fact anarchical military republics which chose their own rulers and lived by plunder.

When it comes to the pirates, it's important to highlight a few key dates. The conquest of Granada in 1492 by the Catholic monarchs of Spain forced many Moors into exile. They retaliated with pirate attacks on the Spanish coast. They were aided by Muslim adventurers from the Levant, with Arouj and his brother Khair-ed-Din, natives of Mitylene, being the most successful. The Christians referred to them by the nickname Barbarossa (q.v.) or "Redbeard." To defend themselves, Spain began to capture the coastal towns of Oran, Algiers, and Tunis. After Arouj was killed in battle with the Spaniards in 1518, Khair-ed-Din sought assistance from Selim, the sultan of Turkey, who sent him troops. In 1529, he expelled the Spaniards from the rocky island off Algiers, where they had a fort, and became the founder of Turkish power. From around 1518 until the death of Uluch Ali in 1587, Algiers was the main seat of government for the beylerbeys of northern Africa, who ruled over Tripoli, Tunisia, and Algeria. From 1587 until 1659, Turkish pashas sent from Constantinople governed for three years at a time; however, in 1659, a military revolt in Algiers diminished the pashas to powerless figures. After 1659, these African cities, while still officially part of the Turkish empire, became chaotic military republics that chose their own leaders and sustained themselves through plunder.

It may be pointed out that during the first period (1518-1587) the beylerbeys were admirals of the sultan, commanding great fleets and conducting serious operations of war for political ends. They were slave-hunters and their methods were ferocious, but their Christian enemies were neither more humane nor more chivalrous. After 1587, plunder became the sole object of their successors—plunder of the native tribes on land and of all who went upon the sea. The maritime side of this long-lived brigandage was conducted by the captains, or reises, who formed a class or even a corporation. Cruisers were fitted out by capitalists and commanded by the reises. Ten per cent of the value of the prizes was paid to the treasury of the pasha or his successors, who bore the titles of Agha or Dey or Bey. Bougie was the chief shipbuilding port and the timber was mainly drawn from the country behind it. Until the 17th century the pirates used galleys, but a Flemish renegade of the name of Simon Danser taught them the advantage of using sailing ships. In this century, indeed, the main strength of the pirates was supplied by renegades from all parts of Christendom. An English gentleman of the distinguished Buckinghamshire family of Verney was for a time among them at Algiers. This port was so much the most formidable that the name of Algerine came to be used as synonymous with Barbary pirate, but the same trade was carried on, though with less energy, from Tripoli and Tunis—as also from towns in the empire of Morocco, of which the most notorious was Salli. The introduction of sailing ships gave increased scope to the activity of the pirates. While the galleys, being unfit for the high seas, were confined to the Mediterranean and the coast, the sailing vessels ranged into the Atlantic as far as the Canaries or even to Iceland. In 1631 a Flemish renegade, known as Murad Reis, sacked Baltimore in Ireland, and carried away a number of captives who were seen in the slave-market of Algiers by the French historian Pierre Dan.

It can be noted that during the first period (1518-1587), the beylerbeys were admirals of the sultan, commanding large fleets and conducting significant military operations for political reasons. They were involved in slave-hunting, and their methods were brutal, but their Christian adversaries were no more humane or noble. After 1587, their successors focused solely on plunder—robbing the native tribes on land and capturing anyone at sea. The maritime aspect of this long-lasting piracy was handled by captains, or reises, who formed a class or even a kind of corporation. Cruisers were outfitted by investors and led by the reises. Ten percent of the value of captured goods went to the treasury of the pasha or his successors, who held titles like Agha, Dey, or Bey. Bougie was the main shipbuilding port, with timber primarily sourced from the surrounding regions. Until the 17th century, pirates used galleys, but a Flemish renegade named Simon Danser showed them the benefits of using sailing ships. During this century, the majority of the pirates were renegades from various parts of Christendom. An English gentleman from the notable Buckinghamshire family of Verney spent some time among them in Algiers. This port was so dominant that "Algerine" became synonymous with Barbary pirate, although the same trade was also conducted, albeit less vigorously, from Tripoli and Tunis, as well as from towns in the Moroccan empire, the most infamous being Salli. The introduction of sailing ships expanded the pirates' operations. While galleys were unsuitable for the open sea and remained confined to the Mediterranean and coastal areas, the sailing vessels ventured into the Atlantic as far as the Canaries and even Iceland. In 1631, a Flemish renegade known as Murad Reis raided Baltimore in Ireland and took several captives who were later seen in the slave market of Algiers by the French historian Pierre Dan.

The first half of the 17th century may be described as the flowering time of the Barbary pirates. More than 20,000 captives were said to be imprisoned in Algiers alone. The rich were allowed to redeem themselves, but the poor were condemned to slavery. Their masters would not in many cases allow them to secure freedom by professing Mahommedanism. A long list might be given of people of good social position, not only Italians or Spaniards, but German or English travellers in the south, who were captives for a time. The chief sufferers were the inhabitants of the coasts of Sicily, Naples and Spain. But all traders belonging to nations which did not pay blackmail in order to secure immunity were liable to be taken at sea. The payment of blackmail, disguised as presents or ransoms, did not always secure safety with these faithless barbarians. The most powerful states in Europe condescended to make payments to them and to tolerate their insults. Religious orders—the Redemptionists and Lazarites—were engaged in working for the redemption of captives and large legacies were left for that purpose in many countries. The continued existence of this African piracy was indeed a disgrace to Europe, for it was due to the jealousies of the powers themselves. France encouraged them during her rivalry with Spain; and when she had no further need of them they were supported against her by Great Britain and Holland. In the 18th century British public men were not ashamed to say that Barbary piracy was a useful check on the competition of the weaker Mediterranean nations in the carrying trade. When Lord Exmouth sailed to coerce Algiers in 1816, he expressed doubts in a private letter whether the suppression of piracy would be acceptable to the trading community. Every power was, indeed, desirous to secure immunity for itself and more or less ready to compel Tripoli, Tunis, Algiers, Salli and [v.03 p.0384]the rest to respect its trade and its subjects. In 1655 the British admiral, Robert Blake, was sent to teach them a lesson, and he gave the Tunisians a severe beating. A long series of expeditions was undertaken by the British fleet during the reign of Charles II., sometimes single-handed, sometimes in combination with the Dutch. In 1682 and 1683 the French bombarded Algiers. On the second occasion the Algerines blew the French consul from a gun during the action. An extensive list of such punitive expeditions could be made out, down to the American operations of 1801-5 and 1815. But in no case was the attack pushed home, and it rarely happened that the aggrieved Christian state refused in the end to make a money payment in order to secure peace. The frequent wars among them gave the pirates numerous opportunities of breaking their engagements, of which they never failed to take advantage.

The first half of the 17th century can be seen as the peak of the Barbary pirates' activity. More than 20,000 captives were reportedly imprisoned in Algiers alone. Wealthy individuals were allowed to buy their freedom, but the poor were doomed to slavery. In many cases, their captors wouldn't let them gain freedom by converting to Islam. A long list could be compiled of people from good social backgrounds, not just Italians or Spaniards, but also German and English travelers in the south, who were held captive for a time. The main victims were the residents of the coasts of Sicily, Naples, and Spain. However, traders from nations that did not pay bribes to ensure protection were at risk of being taken at sea. Paying bribes, masked as gifts or ransoms, didn’t always guarantee safety against these untrustworthy barbarians. The most powerful states in Europe chose to make payments to them and put up with their insults. Religious groups like the Redemptionists and Lazarites worked to free captives, and substantial legacies were left for that purpose in many countries. The ongoing existence of this African piracy was indeed a shame for Europe, as it was fueled by the rivalries of the powers themselves. France supported them during its rivalry with Spain, and when France no longer needed them, Great Britain and Holland backed the pirates against France. In the 18th century, British politicians had no shame in claiming that Barbary piracy was a useful way to limit competition from weaker Mediterranean nations in the shipping trade. When Lord Exmouth went to force Algiers in 1816, he privately expressed doubts in a letter about whether stopping piracy would be welcome within the trading community. Every power was indeed eager to ensure its own immunity and was more or less willing to compel Tripoli, Tunis, Algiers, Salli, and the rest to respect its trade and its citizens. In 1655, British Admiral Robert Blake was sent to teach them a lesson, and he dealt a heavy blow to the Tunisians. A long series of expeditions was carried out by the British fleet during the reign of Charles II, sometimes alone, sometimes in cooperation with the Dutch. In 1682 and 1683, the French bombarded Algiers. On the second occasion, the Algerians executed the French consul from a cannon during the battle. A comprehensive list of such punitive expeditions could be compiled, leading up to the American actions of 1801-5 and 1815. But in every case, the attacks were never fully pursued, and it was rare for the aggrieved Christian state to refuse to make a monetary payment to secure peace. The frequent wars among them gave the pirates numerous chances to break their agreements, and they always took advantage of those opportunities.

After the general pacification of 1815, the suppression of African piracy was universally felt to be a necessity. The insolence of a Tunisian squadron which sacked Palma in the island of Sardinia and carried off 158 of its inhabitants, roused widespread indignation. Other influences were at work to bring about their extinction. Great Britain had acquired Malta and the Ionian Islands and had now many Mediterranean subjects. She was also engaged in pressing the other European powers to join with her in the suppression of the slave trade which the Barbary states practised on a large scale and at the expense of Europe. The suppression of the trade was one of the objects of the congress of Vienna. Great Britain was called on to act for Europe, and in 1816 Lord Exmouth was sent to obtain treaties from Tunis and Algiers. His first visit produced diplomatic documents and promises and he sailed for England. While he was negotiating, a number of British subjects had been brutally ill-treated at Bona, without his knowledge. The British government sent him back to secure reparation, and on the 27th of August, in combination with a Dutch squadron under Admiral Van de Capellen, he administered a smashing bombardment to Algiers. The lesson terrified the pirates both of that city and of Tunis into giving up over 3000 prisoners and making fresh promises. But they were not reformed and were not capable of reformation. Algiers renewed its piracies and slave-taking, though on a smaller scale, and the measures to be taken with it were discussed at the conference or congress of Aix-la-Chapelle in 1818. In 1824 another British fleet under Admiral Sir Harry Neal had again to bombard Algiers. The great pirate city was not in fact thoroughly tamed till its conquest by France in 1830.

After the overall peace established in 1815, everyone agreed that stopping African piracy was essential. The boldness of a Tunisian squadron that plundered Palma on the island of Sardinia and took 158 of its residents sparked widespread outrage. Other factors were also influencing the need to eliminate piracy. Great Britain had gained control of Malta and the Ionian Islands and had many Mediterranean subjects. They were also urging other European countries to join in ending the slave trade that the Barbary states conducted on a large scale, harming Europe in the process. Ending the trade was one of the goals of the Congress of Vienna. Great Britain was asked to act on behalf of Europe, and in 1816, Lord Exmouth was sent to secure treaties from Tunis and Algiers. His first visit resulted in diplomatic agreements and promises, and he returned to England. While he was negotiating, several British citizens were brutally mistreated in Bona without his knowledge. The British government sent him back to seek justice, and on August 27, alongside a Dutch squadron led by Admiral Van de Capellen, he launched a devastating bombardment on Algiers. This attack frightened the pirates in both Algiers and Tunis into releasing over 3,000 prisoners and making new promises. However, they were not truly changed and were incapable of reform. Algiers resumed its piracy and slave raids, although on a smaller scale, and plans for action were discussed at the Aix-la-Chapelle conference in 1818. In 1824, another British fleet, commanded by Admiral Sir Harry Neal, had to bombard Algiers again. The notorious pirate city was not completely subdued until France conquered it in 1830.

Authorities.—The Histoire d'Alger of H. D. de Grammont (Paris, 1887) is based on original authorities. Sir R. L. Playfair's Scourge of Christendom (London, 1884) gives the history of the British consulate in Algiers. The main authorities for the early history of the Barbary states are:—Luis del Marmol Carvajal, Descripcion de Africa (Granada, 1573); Diego de Haedo, Topographia e Historia General de Argel (Valladolid, 1612); and Père Pierre Dan, Histoire de Barbarie et de ses corsaires (Paris, 1637). The readable treatises of Ad. Jurien de la Gravière, all published in Paris, Doria et Barberousse (1886), Les Corsaires barbaresques (1887), Les Chevaliers de Malte (1887), and La Guerre de Chypre (1888), deal with the epoch of the beylerbeys and the regular wars. For American work see Gardner Weld Allen, Our Navy and the Barbary Corsairs (New York, 1905).

Authorities.—The Histoire d'Alger by H. D. de Grammont (Paris, 1887) is based on original sources. Sir R. L. Playfair's Scourge of Christendom (London, 1884) details the history of the British consulate in Algiers. The key sources for the early history of the Barbary states include:—Luis del Marmol Carvajal, Descripcion de Africa (Granada, 1573); Diego de Haedo, Topographia e Historia General de Argel (Valladolid, 1612); and Père Pierre Dan, Histoire de Barbarie et de ses corsaires (Paris, 1637). The accessible works of Ad. Jurien de la Gravière, all published in Paris, Doria et Barberousse (1886), Les Corsaires barbaresques (1887), Les Chevaliers de Malte (1887), and La Guerre de Chypre (1888), discuss the era of the beylerbeys and the regular wars. For American scholarship, see Gardner Weld Allen, Our Navy and the Barbary Corsairs (New York, 1905).

(D. H.)

(D. H.)

BARBAULD, ANNA LETITIA (1743-1825), English poet and miscellaneous writer, was born at Kibworth-Harcourt, in Leicestershire, on the 20th of June 1743. Her father, the Rev. John Aikin, a Presbyterian minister and schoolmaster, taught his daughter Latin and Greek. In 1758 Mr Aikin removed his family to Warrington, to act as theological tutor in a dissenting academy there. In 1773 Miss Aikin published a volume of Poems, which was very successful, and co-operated with her brother, Dr John Aikin, in a volume of Miscellaneous Pieces in Prose. In 1774 she married Rochemont Barbauld, a member of a French Protestant family settled in England. He had been educated in the academy at Warrington, and was minister of a Presbyterian church at Palgrave, in Suffolk, where, with his wife's help, he established a boarding school. Her admirable Hymns in Prose and Early Lessons were written for their pupils. In 1785 she left England for the continent with her husband, whose health was seriously impaired. On their return about two years later, Mr Barbauld was appointed to a church at Hampstead. In 1802 they removed to Stoke Newington. Mrs Barbauld became well known in London literary circles. She collaborated with Dr Aikin in his Evenings at Home; in 1795 she published an edition of Akenside's Pleasures of Imagination, with a critical essay; two years later she edited Collins's Odes; in 1804 she published a selection of papers from the English Essayists, and a selection from Samuel Richardson's correspondence, with a biographical notice; in 1810 a collection of the British Novelists (50 vols.) with biographical and critical notices; and in 1811 her longest poem, Eighteen Hundred and Eleven, giving a gloomy view of the existing state and future prospects of Britain. This poem anticipated Macaulay in contemplating the prospect of a visitor from the antipodes regarding at a future day the ruins of St Paul's from a broken arch of Blackfriars Bridge. Mrs Barbauld died on the 9th of March 1825; her husband had died in 1808. A collected edition of her works, with memoir, was published by her niece, Lucy Aikin, in 2 vols., 1825.

BARBAULD, ANNA LETITIA (1743-1825), an English poet and writer, was born in Kibworth-Harcourt, Leicestershire, on June 20, 1743. Her father, Rev. John Aikin, a Presbyterian minister and schoolmaster, taught her Latin and Greek. In 1758, the Aikin family moved to Warrington, where he became a theological tutor at a dissenting academy. In 1773, Miss Aikin published a successful volume of Poems and worked with her brother, Dr. John Aikin, on a volume of Miscellaneous Pieces in Prose. In 1774, she married Rochemont Barbauld, a member of a French Protestant family living in England. He had studied at the academy in Warrington and was the minister of a Presbyterian church in Palgrave, Suffolk, where, with his wife’s help, he set up a boarding school. Her excellent Hymns in Prose and Early Lessons were written for their students. In 1785, they left England for the continent due to her husband’s declining health. When they returned about two years later, Mr. Barbauld was appointed to a church in Hampstead. In 1802, they moved to Stoke Newington. Mrs. Barbauld became well-known in London literary circles. She collaborated with Dr. Aikin on Evenings at Home; in 1795, she published an edition of Akenside's Pleasures of Imagination, along with a critical essay; two years later, she edited Collins's Odes; in 1804, she published a selection of papers from the English Essayists and a selection from Samuel Richardson's correspondence, with a biographical notice; in 1810, she worked on a collection of the British Novelists (50 vols.) with biographical and critical notices; and in 1811, she published her longest poem, Eighteen Hundred and Eleven, which presented a bleak view of the current state and future prospects of Britain. This poem foreshadowed Macaulay by imagining a visitor from the antipodes reflecting on the ruins of St. Paul's from a broken arch of Blackfriars Bridge. Mrs. Barbauld passed away on March 9, 1825; her husband had died in 1808. A collected edition of her works, with a memoir, was published by her niece, Lucy Aikin, in two volumes in 1825.

See A. L. le Breton, Memoir of Mrs Barbauld (1874); G. A. Ellis, Life and Letters of Mrs A. L. Barbauld (1874); and Lady Thackeray Ritchie, A Book of Sibyls (1883).

See A. L. le Breton, Memoir of Mrs. Barbauld (1874); G. A. Ellis, Life and Letters of Mrs. A. L. Barbauld (1874); and Lady Thackeray Ritchie, A Book of Sibyls (1883).

BARBECUE (Span. barbacoa), originally a framework on posts placed over a fire on which to dry or smoke meat; hence, a gridiron for roasting whole animals, and in Cuba an upper floor on which fruit or grain is stored. In the United States the word means an open-air feast, either political or social, where whole animals are roasted and eaten and hogsheads of beer and other vast quantities of food and drink consumed.

BARBECUE (Span. barbacoa), originally a structure of posts set up over a fire used for drying or smoking meat; thus, a grill for roasting whole animals. In Cuba, it refers to an upper level where fruit or grain is stored. In the United States, the term refers to an outdoor gathering, whether political or social, where whole animals are roasted and eaten, along with large amounts of beer and other food and drinks.

BARBED WIRE, a protective variety of fencing, consisting usually of several strands of wire twisted together with sharp spikes or points clinched or fastened into the strands.

BARBED WIRE, a type of fencing designed for protection, typically made of several strands of wire twisted together with sharp spikes or points fixed into the strands.

In the United States, barbed wire for fencing was originally suggested to meet conditions existing in the western states, by reason of the large cattle-raising industry in sections where timber was scarce. Prior to its introduction, a No. 9 round or oval iron wire was popular on the frontier of the United States and in South America, as a fencing material. Large amounts were used annually for this purpose, but iron lacked strength, and single wire strand was not fully satisfactory on account of stretching in warm and contracting in cold weather, and of thus being broken. Cattle would rub against a smooth fence, and this constant pressure loosened the posts and broke the wire. To overcome this defect, ingenious people—the most successful being farmers—set themselves to find a way by which wire could be used and at the same time be free from destruction by the animals it was intended to confine. This investigation resulted in the invention of barbed wire. Soon after, automatic machinery was invented for rapidly and cheaply placing the barb upon the smooth wire, so that the cost of barbed wire is much less than the cost of smooth wire when it was in general use. So immediately did barbed wire find favour with the farmers of the United States, and, in fact, all over the world, that the manufacture of wire was revolutionized.

In the United States, barbed wire for fencing was originally proposed to address the conditions in the western states due to the large cattle-raising industry in areas where timber was hard to come by. Before its introduction, No. 9 round or oval iron wire was commonly used on the frontier of the United States and in South America as a fencing material. A significant amount was used each year for this purpose, but iron didn't have enough strength, and a single wire strand was not completely satisfactory because it would stretch in the heat and contract in the cold, leading to breakage. Cattle would rub against a smooth fence, and this constant pressure would loosen the posts and break the wire. To solve this problem, clever individuals—mostly farmers—set out to develop a way to use wire that wouldn't be easily destroyed by the animals it was meant to contain. This effort led to the invention of barbed wire. Shortly after, automatic machinery was created to quickly and cheaply add barbs to the smooth wire, which made barbed wire much less expensive than smooth wire when it was widely used. Barbed wire quickly gained popularity among farmers in the United States and, indeed, around the world, leading to a revolution in wire manufacturing.

The history of barbed wire fencing is of recent date. In the United States—the real home of this industry—patents were taken out by Lucien B. Smith, Kent, Ohio, in 1867; by William B. Hunt, of Scott, N.Y., at almost the same time; and by Michael Kelly, of New York, a year later. The practical beginning of the industry, however, was in the patents issued to Joseph F. Glidden, De Kalb, Ill., 1874, on barbed fence wire, and during the same year, to Joseph F. Glidden and Phineas W. Vaughan, for a machine to manufacture the same. These inventions were the foundation of the system of patents under which barbed wire has been protected and sold. The development of the barbed wire industry would hardly have been possible without steel. Iron wire, used for fencing prior to the introduction of steel, was not suitable, seeing that iron does not possess sufficient tensile strength and lacks homogeneity, qualities which Bessemer and open-hearth steels possess in a high degree.

The history of barbed wire fencing is quite recent. In the United States—the true birthplace of this industry—patents were filed by Lucien B. Smith from Kent, Ohio, in 1867; William B. Hunt from Scott, N.Y., around the same time; and Michael Kelly from New York a year later. However, the real start of the industry began with the patents granted to Joseph F. Glidden from De Kalb, Ill., in 1874 for barbed fence wire, and that same year, to Joseph F. Glidden and Phineas W. Vaughan for a machine to make it. These inventions laid the groundwork for the patent system that has protected and sold barbed wire. The growth of the barbed wire industry would hardly have been possible without steel. Iron wire, which was used for fencing before the advent of steel, was inadequate since iron lacks the necessary tensile strength and uniformity, qualities that Bessemer and open-hearth steels possess in abundance.

The advantages of galvanized barbed wire fencing are that it is almost imperishable, is no burden on the posts; does not [v.03 p.0385]oppose the wind with enough surface to rack the posts, thus allowing water to settle around them and rot them; is economical, not only in the comparative cheapness of its first cost but also in the amount of land covered by it; and is effective as a barrier against all kinds of stock and a protection against dogs and wild beasts. Cattle, once discovering what it is, will not press against it, nor even go near it, and thus it becomes an effective means of dividing the farmer's ranch into such fields as he may desire. It is quickly and cheaply constructed, and has the advantage of freedom from harbouring weeds. It affords no impediment to the view. A man can see across his farm, and ascertain what is going on in every portion within the scope of vision, as plainly as if there were no fences. It does not contribute to the formation of snow drifts as do other kinds of efficient fence. This makes it a favourite form of fencing for railroads and along highways. Finally, barbed wire composed of two wires twisted together, once firmly put in place, will retain its taut condition through many seasons without repair. The fact of the wire being twisted allows it to adapt itself to all the varying temperatures.

The benefits of galvanized barbed wire fencing include its durability, as it is nearly indestructible and doesn't put weight on the posts; it doesn't block wind enough to strain the posts, which prevents water from pooling around them and causing rot; it is cost-effective, both in terms of its initial low price and the amount of land it can cover; and it serves as an effective barrier against various types of livestock as well as protection from dogs and wild animals. Cattle quickly learn to avoid it and won't push against it or even approach it, making it a great option for dividing a farmer's land into desired sections. It's easy and inexpensive to set up, and it doesn’t promote weed growth. It also doesn’t obstruct the view. A person can see across their farm and observe all activities clearly, as if there were no fences. Unlike other types of fencing, it doesn't contribute to snow drifts. This is why it’s a popular choice for railroads and along roads. Lastly, barbed wire made from two twisted wires, once secured, will stay tight for many seasons without needing repairs. The twisting of the wire allows it to adjust to changing temperatures.

The introduction of barbed wire met with some opposition in America on supposed humanitarian grounds, but ample and extended tests, both of the economy and the humanity of the new material, silenced this objection. Now no American farmer, especially in the west, ever thinks of putting any other kind of fencing on his farm, unless it may be the new types of meshed wire field fencing which have been coming so generally into use since 1899. Generally speaking, the use of barbed wire fencing in other countries has not been as extensive as in the western United States. While it has been used on a comparatively large scale in Argentina and Australia, both these countries use a much larger quantity of plain wire fence, and in Argentina there is an important consumption of high-carbon oval fence wire of great strength, which apparently forms the only kind of fence that meets the conditions in a satisfactory manner.

The introduction of barbed wire faced some opposition in America on supposed humanitarian grounds, but extensive tests showed that the new material was actually economical and humane, which put those concerns to rest. Now, no American farmer, especially in the west, considers using any other kind of fencing on their farm, except for the new types of mesh wire field fencing that have become widely used since 1899. Overall, barbed wire fencing hasn't been as widely adopted in other countries as it has in the western United States. While it is used on a larger scale in Argentina and Australia, both countries still primarily rely on plain wire fencing. In Argentina, there's also significant use of high-carbon oval fence wire that is very strong, which seems to be the only type of fence that satisfactorily meets their needs.

It is interesting to note the largely increased demand for meshed wire field fencing in the more thickly settled-portions of the United States, and along the lines of railway. Beginning with 1899, there has been an annual increase in this demand, owing to the scarcity and high cost of labour, and the discontinuing of the building of rail fences. Meshed wire is considered by many a better enclosure for small animals, like sheep and hogs, than the barbed wire fence. Barbed wire has been popular with railroads, but of late meshed wire fencing has been substituted with advantage, the fabric being made of wires of larger diameter than formerly, to insure greater stability. The popularity of barbed wire is best shown by the following statistics:—

It’s interesting to see the significant increase in demand for meshed wire field fencing in the more populated areas of the United States and along railway lines. Since 1899, this demand has grown every year due to a shortage and high cost of labor, along with the decline of rail fence construction. Many people believe that meshed wire is a better option for enclosing small animals like sheep and hogs compared to barbed wire. While barbed wire has been popular with railroads, recently, meshed wire fencing has been adopted instead, offering advantages as it’s made with thicker wires than before for better stability. The popularity of barbed wire is best illustrated by the following statistics:—

Approximate Production for the United States.

Estimated Production for the United States.

Year.

Year.

Tons barbed wire.

Tons of barbed wire.

Tons meshed field fencing.

Tons of mesh field fencing.

1874

1874

5    

5

1875

1875

300    

300

1876

1876

1,500    

1,500

1877

1877

7,000    

7,000

1878

1878

13,000    

13,000

1879

1879

25,000    

25,000

1880

1880

40,000    

40,000

1890

1890

125,000    

125K

1900

1900

200,000    

200K

  50,000

50K

1907

1907

250,000    

250,000

425,000

425K

Barbed wire is usually shipped to customers on wooden spools, each holding approximately 100 lb or 80 to 100 rods. A hole is provided through the centre of the spool for inserting a bar, on which the reel can revolve for unwinding the wire as it is put up. After the wire is stretched in place, it is attached to the wooden posts by means of galvanized steel wire staples, ordinarily made from No. 9 wire. They are cut with a sharp, long, diagonal point and can be easily driven into the posts. On account of the rapid decay and destruction of wooden posts, steel posts have become popular, as also have reinforced concrete posts, which add materially to the durability of the fence. It is essential that barbed wire should be stretched with great care. For this purpose a suitable barbed wire stretcher is necessary.

Barbed wire is typically delivered to customers on wooden spools, each holding about 100 lbs or 80 to 100 rods. There's a hole in the center of the spool for inserting a bar, allowing the reel to spin and unwind the wire as it's installed. Once the wire is in place, it's secured to the wooden posts using galvanized steel wire staples, usually made from No. 9 wire. These staples are cut with a sharp, long diagonal point and can be easily driven into the posts. Due to the rapid decay and damage to wooden posts, steel posts have become popular, along with reinforced concrete posts, which significantly enhance the fence's durability. It's crucial to stretch the barbed wire carefully, so a suitable barbed wire stretcher is needed for this task.

Barbed wire fencing is now manufactured in various patterns. The general process may be outlined briefly as follows:—The wire is made of soft Bessemer or Siemens-Martin steel, and is drawn in the wire mill in the usual way. Galvanizing is done by a continuous process. The coil of wire to be galvanized is placed on a reel. The first end of the wire is led longitudinally through an annealing medium—either red-hot lead or heated fire-brick tubes—of sufficient length to soften the wire. From the annealing furnace, the wire is fed longitudinally through a bath of muriatic acid, which removes the scale, and from the acid, after a thorough washing in water, the wire passes through a bath of spelter, heated slightly above the melting point. After coming from the spelter and being cooled by water, the wire is wound on suitable take-up blocks into finished coils. From 30 to 60 wires are passing simultaneously in parallel lines through this continuous galvanizing apparatus, thus insuring a large output. The galvanizing gives the wire a bright finish and serves to protect it from the corrosive action of the atmosphere. There is a considerable demand for painted fencing, in the manufacture of which the galvanizing is dispensed with, and the spools of finished barbed wire, as they come from the barbing machine, are submerged in paint and dried. The barbing and twisting together of the two longitudinal strand wires is done by automatic machinery. A brief description of the manufacture of 2 and 4 point Glidden wire is as follows:—Two coils of wire on reels are placed behind the machine, designed to form the main or strand wires of the fence. One of the main wires passes through the machine longitudinally. One or two coils of wire are placed on reels at either side of the machine for making 2 or 4 point wire respectively. These wires are fed into the machine at right angles to the strand wire. At each movement of the feeding mechanism, when fabricating 2 point wire, one cross wire is fed forward. A diagonal cut forms a sharp point on the first end. The wire is again fed forward and instantly wrapped firmly around one strand wire and cut off so as to leave a sharp point on the incoming wire as before, while the bit of pointed wire cut off remains as a double-pointed steel barb attached firmly to the strand wire. This wire armed with barbs at regular intervals passes on through a guide, where it is met by a second strand wire—a plain wire without barbs. The duplex strand wires are attached to a take-up reel, which is caused to revolve and take up the finished barbed wire simultaneously and in unison with the barbing machine. In this way the strand wires are loosely twisted into a 2-ply strand, armed with barbs projecting at right angles in every direction.

Barbed wire fencing is now made in different designs. The basic process can be described briefly as follows: The wire is made from soft Bessemer or Siemens-Martin steel and is drawn in the wire mill using standard methods. Galvanizing is carried out through a continuous process. The coil of wire to be galvanized is placed on a reel. The first end of the wire is passed through an annealing medium—either red-hot lead or heated fire-brick tubes—long enough to soften the wire. After the annealing furnace, the wire goes through a bath of muriatic acid to remove the scale and is thoroughly washed in water before passing through a bath of spelter, slightly above its melting point. After coming out of the spelter and cooling in water, the wire is wound onto suitable take-up blocks into completed coils. Between 30 to 60 wires run simultaneously in parallel through this continuous galvanizing setup, ensuring a large output. The galvanizing gives the wire a shiny finish and protects it from corrosion. There is a significant demand for painted fencing, which does not use galvanizing; instead, the finished spools of barbed wire, as they come from the barbing machine, are submerged in paint and dried. The barbing and twisting of the two longitudinal strand wires are done by automatic machines. A brief description of the manufacture of 2 and 4 point Glidden wire is as follows: Two coils of wire on reels are placed behind the machine to form the main or strand wires of the fence. One of the main wires runs through the machine longitudinally. One or two coils of wire are placed on reels on either side of the machine for making 2 or 4 point wire, respectively. These wires are fed into the machine at right angles to the strand wire. For each movement of the feeding mechanism when creating 2 point wire, one cross wire is advanced. A diagonal cut makes a sharp point on the first end. The wire is then advanced again, tightly wrapped around one strand wire, and cut off to leave a sharp point on the incoming wire as before, while the bit of pointed wire cut off remains as a double-pointed steel barb attached firmly to the strand wire. This wire, with barbs at regular intervals, continues through a guide where it meets a second strand wire—a plain wire without barbs. The duplex strand wires are connected to a take-up reel that rotates to take up the finished barbed wire simultaneously and in sync with the barbing machine. This way, the strand wires are loosely twisted into a 2-ply strand, with barbs sticking out at right angles in every direction.

When once started, the operation of barbed wire making is continuous and rapid. The advantage of two strands is the automatic adjustment to changes of temperature. When heat expands the strands, the twist simply loosens without causing a sag, and when cold contracts them, the twist tightens, all without materially altering the relative lengths of the combined wires. A barbed wire machine produces from 2000 to 3000 lb of wire per day of ten hours.

Once started, the process of making barbed wire is continuous and fast. The benefit of having two strands is that they automatically adjust to changes in temperature. When heat expands the strands, the twist just loosens without creating a sag, and when it gets cold and they contract, the twist tightens, all without significantly changing the relative lengths of the combined wires. A barbed wire machine produces between 2000 and 3000 pounds of wire in a ten-hour day.

In some American states, the use of barbed wire is regulated by law, but as a rule these laws apply to placing barbed wire on highways. Others prohibit the use of barbed wire fencing to indicate the property line between different owners, unless both agree to its use. In some states the use of barbed wire is prohibited unless it has a top rail of lumber.

In some American states, barbed wire usage is regulated by law, but generally, these laws relate to placing barbed wire along highways. Some states ban using barbed wire fencing to mark property lines between different owners unless both parties agree to its use. In certain states, barbed wire is not allowed unless it has a top rail made of wood.

Barbed wire is also employed in connexion with "obstacles" in field fortifications, especially in what are known as "high wire entanglements." Pointed stakes or "pickets," 4 ft. high, are planted in rows and secured by ordinary wire to holdfasts or pegs in the ground. Each picket is connected to all around it, top and bottom, by lengths of barbed wire.

Barbed wire is also used in relation to "obstacles" in field fortifications, particularly in what are called "high wire entanglements." Pointed stakes or "pickets," 4 ft. tall, are planted in rows and attached with regular wire to anchors or pegs in the ground. Each picket is linked to the ones around it, both at the top and bottom, by pieces of barbed wire.

In England, where the use of barbed wire has also become common, the Barbed Wire Act 1893 enacted that, where there is on any land adjoining a highway within the county or district of a local authority, a fence which is made with barbed wire (i.e. any wire with spikes or jagged projections), or in which barbed wire has been placed, and where such barbed wire may probably be injurious to persons or animals lawfully using the highway, the local authority may require the occupier of the land to abate the nuisance by serving notice in writing upon him. If the occupier fails to do so within the specified time, the local authority may apply to a court of summary jurisdiction, and such court, if satisfied that the barbed wire is a nuisance, may by summary order direct the occupier to abate it, and on his failure to comply with the order within a reasonable time, the local authority may execute it and recover in a summary manner from the occupier the expenses incurred.

In England, where barbed wire is commonly used, the Barbed Wire Act of 1893 stated that if there's a fence made with barbed wire (i.e., any wire with spikes or sharp projections) on land next to a highway within a local authority's county or district, and this barbed wire could potentially harm people or animals legally using the highway, the local authority can require the landowner to remove the hazard by sending them a written notice. If the landowner doesn't comply within the given time frame, the local authority can take the case to a summary court, which can decide if the barbed wire is indeed a nuisance. If the court agrees, it can issue an order for the landowner to remove it, and if they fail to do so within a reasonable time, the local authority can carry out the removal and recover the costs from the landowner in a quick legal process.

BARBEL (Barbus vulgaris), a fish of the Cyprinid family, which is an inhabitant of the rivers of central Europe, and is very locally distributed in England. It has four barbels (Lat. barba, beard; fleshy appendages hanging from the mouth), and the first ray of the short dorsal fin is strong, spine-like and serrated behind. It attains a weight of 50 lb on the continent of Europe. The genus of which it is the type is a very large one, comprising about 300 species from Europe, Asia and Africa, among which is the mahseer or mahaseer, the great sporting fish of India.

BARBEL (Barbus vulgaris), a fish from the Cyprinid family, is found in the rivers of central Europe and is rare in England. It has four barbels (from Latin barba, meaning beard; these are fleshy protrusions hanging from the mouth), and the first ray of its short dorsal fin is strong, spine-like, and serrated along the back. It can weigh up to 50 lb in continental Europe. The genus it belongs to is quite large, including about 300 species from Europe, Asia, and Africa, one of which is the mahseer or mahaseer, a well-known game fish in India.

BARBÉ-MARBOIS, FRANÇOIS, Marquis de (1745-1837), French politician, was born at Metz. He began his public career as intendant of San Domingo under the old régime. At the close of 1789 he returned to France, and then placed his services at the disposal of the revolutionary government. In 1791 he was sent to Regensburg to help de Noailles, the French ambassador, in the negotiations with the diet of the Empire concerning the [v.03 p.0386]possessions of German princes in Alsace and Lorraine. Suspected of treason, he was arrested on his return but set at liberty again. In 1795 he was elected to the Council of the Ancients, where the general moderation of his attitude, especially in his opposition to the exclusion of nobles and the relations of émigrés from public life, brought him under suspicion of being a royalist, though he pronounced a eulogy on Bonaparte for his success in Italy. At the coup d'état of the 18th Fructidor (September 4) 1797, he was arrested and transported to French Guiana. Transferred to Oléron in 1799, he owed his liberty to Napoleon, after the 18th Brumaire. In 1801 he became councillor of state and director of the public treasury, and in 1802 a senator. In 1803 he negotiated the treaty by which Louisiana was ceded to the United States, and was rewarded by the First Consul with a gift of 152,000 francs. In 1805 he was made grand officer of the legion of honour and a count, and in 1808 he became president of the cour des comptes. In return for these favours, he addressed Napoleon with servile compliments; yet in 1814 he helped to draw up the act of abdication of the emperor, and declared to the cour des comptes, with reference to the invasion of France by the allies, "united for the most beautiful of causes, it is long since we have been so free as we now are in the presence of the foreigner in arms." In June 1814, Louis XVIII. named him peer of France and confirmed him in his office as president of the cour des comptes. Deprived of his positions by Napoleon during the Hundred Days he was appointed minister of justice in the ministry of the duc de Richelieu (August 1815). In this office he tried unsuccessfully to gain the confidence of the ultra-royalists, and withdrew at the end of nine months (May 10, 1816).

BARBÉ-MARBOIS, FRANÇOIS, Marquis de (1745-1837), a French politician, was born in Metz. He started his public career as the intendant of San Domingo under the old regime. At the end of 1789, he returned to France and offered his services to the revolutionary government. In 1791, he was sent to Regensburg to assist de Noailles, the French ambassador, with negotiations with the Diet of the Empire regarding the possessions of German princes in Alsace and Lorraine. Suspected of treason, he was arrested upon his return but was released again. In 1795, he was elected to the Council of the Ancients, where his moderate stance, especially his opposition to the exclusion of nobles and the participation of émigrés in public life, led to suspicion of him being a royalist, even though he praised Bonaparte for his successes in Italy. After the coup d'état of 18th Fructidor (September 4) 1797, he was arrested and exiled to French Guiana. Transferred to Oléron in 1799, he regained his freedom thanks to Napoleon after the 18th Brumaire. In 1801, he became a councillor of state and director of the public treasury, and in 1802, a senator. In 1803, he negotiated the treaty that ceded Louisiana to the United States and was rewarded with a gift of 152,000 francs from the First Consul. In 1805, he was made a grand officer of the Legion of Honour and a count, and in 1808, he became president of the cour des comptes. In return for these favors, he lavished servile compliments on Napoleon; however, in 1814, he contributed to drafting the emperor's act of abdication, and declared to the cour des comptes regarding the allies' invasion of France, "united for the most beautiful of causes, it has been a long time since we've been as free as we now are in the presence of the foreigner in arms." In June 1814, Louis XVIII appointed him a peer of France and confirmed him in his role as president of the cour des comptes. Removed from his positions by Napoleon during the Hundred Days, he was appointed minister of justice in the ministry of the duc de Richelieu (August 1815). In this position, he unsuccessfully tried to earn the trust of the ultra-royalists and resigned after nine months (May 10, 1816).

In 1830, when Louis Philippe assumed the reins of government, Barbé-Marbois went, as president of the cour des comptes, to compliment him and was confirmed in his position. It was the sixth government he had served and all with servility. He held his office until April 1834, and died on the 12th of February 1837. He published various works, of which may be mentioned: Réflexions sur la colonie de Saint-Domingue (1794), De la Guyane, &c. (1822), an Histoire de la Louisiane et la cession de cette colonie par la France aux États-Unis, &c. (1828), and the story of his transportation after the 18th Fructidor in Journal d'un déporté non jugé, 2 vols. (1834).

In 1830, when Louis Philippe took over the government, Barbé-Marbois, as president of the cour des comptes, went to congratulate him and was confirmed in his position. This was the sixth government he had served, always with subservience. He held his office until April 1834 and died on February 12, 1837. He published several works, including: Réflexions sur la colonie de Saint-Domingue (1794), De la Guyane, &c. (1822), Histoire de la Louisiane et la cession de cette colonie par la France aux États-Unis, &c. (1828), and his account of his exile after the 18th Fructidor in Journal d'un déporté non jugé, 2 vols. (1834).

BARBER (from Lat. barba, beard), one whose occupation it is to shave or trim beards, a hairdresser. In former times the barber's craft was dignified with the title of a profession, being conjoined with the art of surgery. In France the barber-surgeons were separated from the perruquiers, and incorporated as a distinct body in the reign of Louis XIV. In England barbers first received incorporation from Edward IV. in 1461. By 32 Henry VIII. c. 42, they were united with the company of surgeons, it being enacted that the barbers should confine themselves to the minor operations of blood-letting and drawing teeth, while the surgeons were prohibited from "barbery or shaving." In 1745 barbers and surgeons were separated into distinct corporations by 18 George II. c. 15. The barber's shop was a favourite resort of idle persons; and in addition to its attraction as a focus of news, a lute, viol, or some such musical instrument, was always kept for the entertainment of waiting customers. The barber's sign consisted of a striped pole, from which was suspended a basin, symbols the use of which is still preserved. The fillet round the pole indicated the ribbon for bandaging the arm in bleeding, and the basin the vessel to receive the blood.

BARBER (from Lat. barba, beard), someone whose job is to shave or trim beards, a hairdresser. In the past, the barber's trade was considered a profession, combined with the practice of surgery. In France, barber-surgeons were separated from wig makers and formed a distinct group during the reign of Louis XIV. In England, barbers first received official recognition from Edward IV in 1461. By 32 Henry VIII. c. 42, they were merged with the surgeons' company, with a law stating that barbers should limit themselves to minor tasks like blood-letting and tooth extraction, while surgeons were banned from "barbery or shaving." In 1745, barbers and surgeons were split into separate organizations by 18 George II. c. 15. The barber shop was a popular hangout for idle people; besides being a hub for news, it always had a lute, viol, or some other musical instrument to entertain waiting customers. The barber's sign featured a striped pole, with a basin hanging from it, symbols of which are still in use today. The band around the pole represented the ribbon for wrapping the arm during bleeding, and the basin was the vessel for collecting blood.

See also Beard, and Annals of the Barber Surgeons of London (1890).

See also Facial hair, and Annals of the Barber Surgeons of London (1890).

BARBERINI, the name of a powerful Italian family, originally of Tuscan extraction, who settled in Florence during the early part of the 11th century. They acquired great wealth and influence, and in 1623 Maffeo Barberini was raised to the papal throne as Urban VIII. He made his brother, Antonio, a distinguished soldier, and two nephews, cardinals, and gave to a third nephew, Taddeo, the principality of Palestrina. Great jealousy of their increasing power was excited amongst the neighbouring princes, and Odoardo Farnese, duke of Parma, made war upon Taddeo, and defeated the papal troops. After the death of Urban in 1644 his successor, Innocent X., showed hostility to the Barberini family. Taddeo fled to Paris, where he died in 1647, and with him the family became extinct in the male line. His daughter Cornelia married Prince Giulio Cesare Colonna di Sciarra in 1728, who added her name to his own. On the death of Prince Enrico Barberini-Colonna the name went to his daughter and heiress Donna Maria and her husband Marquis Luigi Sacchetti, who received the title of prince of Palestrina and permission to bear the name of Barberini. The fine Barberini palace and library in Rome give evidence of their wealth and magnificence. The ruthless way in which they plundered ancient buildings to adorn their own palaces is the origin of the saying, "Quod non fecerunt barbari, fecerunt Barberini."

BARBERINI, the name of a powerful Italian family, originally from Tuscany, who settled in Florence in the early 11th century. They gained significant wealth and influence, and in 1623 Maffeo Barberini became pope as Urban VIII. He made his brother, Antonio, a notable soldier, and two of his nephews cardinals, and granted a third nephew, Taddeo, the principality of Palestrina. Their growing power caused jealousy among neighboring princes, leading Odoardo Farnese, duke of Parma, to wage war against Taddeo, defeating the papal troops. After Urban's death in 1644, his successor, Innocent X., opposed the Barberini family. Taddeo fled to Paris, where he died in 1647, marking the end of the family line through males. His daughter Cornelia married Prince Giulio Cesare Colonna di Sciarra in 1728, who then added her name to his own. Upon the death of Prince Enrico Barberini-Colonna, the name passed to his daughter and heiress Donna Maria and her husband Marquis Luigi Sacchetti, who were granted the title of prince of Palestrina and the right to bear the Barberini name. The impressive Barberini palace and library in Rome showcase their wealth and grandeur. The ruthless manner in which they stripped ancient buildings to decorate their own palaces gave rise to the saying, "Quod non fecerunt barbari, fecerunt Barberini."

See A. von Reumont, Geschichte der Stadt Rom (Berlin, 1868), iii. b. 611-612, 615, 617, &c.; Almanach de Gotha (Gotha, 1902); J. H. Douglas, The Principal Noble Families of Rome (Rome, 1905).

See A. von Reumont, Geschichte der Stadt Rom (Berlin, 1868), iii. b. 611-612, 615, 617, &c.; Almanach de Gotha (Gotha, 1902); J. H. Douglas, The Principal Noble Families of Rome (Rome, 1905).

BARBERRY (Berberis vulgaris), a shrub with spiny-toothed leaves, which on the woody shoots are reduced to forked spines, and pale yellow flowers in hanging racemes, which are succeeded by orange-red berries. It is a member of the botanical natural order Berberidaceae, and contains about 100 species in the north temperate zone and in the Andes of South America extending into Patagonia. The order is nearly allied to the buttercup order in having the parts of the flowers all free and arranged in regular succession below the ovary which consists of only one carpel. It is distinguished by having the sepals, petals and stamens in multiples of 2, 3 or 4, never of 5. The berries of Berberis are edible; those of the native barberry are sometimes made into preserves. The alkaloid berberine (q.v.) occurs in the roots.

BARBERRY (Berberis vulgaris) is a shrub with spiny leaves, where the woody shoots feature forked spines, and it produces pale yellow flowers in hanging clusters, followed by orange-red berries. It belongs to the botanical family Berberidaceae, which includes about 100 species found in the northern temperate zone and in the Andes of South America, extending into Patagonia. This family is closely related to the buttercup family, characterized by flowers with parts that are all separate and arranged in a regular order below the ovary, which has only one carpel. It is notable for having sepals, petals, and stamens in multiples of 2, 3, or 4, but never in 5. The berries of Berberis are edible, and those from the native barberry are sometimes used to make preserves. The alkaloid berberine (q.v.) is present in the roots.

BARBERTON, a town of the Transvaal, 283 m. by rail (175 m. in a direct line) E. of Pretoria and 136 m. W.N.W. of Delagoa Bay. Pop. (1904) 2433, of whom 1214 were whites. Barberton lies 2825 ft. above the sea and is built on the side of a valley named De Kaap, from a bold headland of the Drakensberg which towers above it. The chief town of a district of the same name, it owes its existence to the discovery of gold in the Kaap valley, and dates from 1886. There are several fine public buildings grouped mainly round President Square. The town is connected with the Lourenço Marques-Pretoria trunk railway by a branch line, 35 m. long, which runs N.E. through fine mountainous country and joins the main line at Kaapmuiden. During the war of 1899-1902 the Boers were driven out of Barberton (13th of September 1900) by General (afterwards Sir John) French.

BARBERTON, a town in the Transvaal, is located 283 miles by rail (175 miles in a direct line) east of Pretoria and 136 miles west-northwest of Delagoa Bay. The population in 1904 was 2,433, with 1,214 being white. Barberton is situated 2,825 feet above sea level and is built on the side of a valley called De Kaap, beneath a prominent headland of the Drakensberg mountains. As the main town of a district that shares its name, it was established following the discovery of gold in the Kaap valley in 1886. There are several impressive public buildings primarily located around President Square. The town is connected to the Lourenço Marques-Pretoria main railway line by a 35-mile branch line that runs northeast through beautiful mountainous terrain and meets the main line at Kaapmuiden. During the war from 1899 to 1902, the Boers were expelled from Barberton on September 13, 1900, by General (later Sir John) French.

BARBETTE (Fr. diminutive of barbe, a beard), a platform inside a fortification raised sufficiently high for artillery placed thereon to be able to fire en barbette, viz. over the top of the parapet; also in warships a raised platform, protected by armour on the sides, upon which guns are mounted en barbette.

BARBETTE (French diminutive of barbe, meaning a beard), is a platform within a fortification that is elevated enough for the artillery positioned on it to fire en barbette, that is, over the top of the parapet; it also refers to a raised platform on warships, shielded by armor on the sides, where guns are mounted en barbette.

BARBEY D'AUREVILLY, JULES AMÉDÉE (1808-1889), French man of letters, was born at Saint-Sauveur-le-Vicomte (Manche) on the 2nd of November 1808. His most famous novels are Une Vieille Maîtresse (1851), attacked at the time of its publication on the charge of immorality; L'Ensorcelée (1854), an episode of the royalist rising among the Norman peasants against the first republic; the Chevalier Destouches (1864); and a collection of extraordinary stories entitled Les Diaboliques (1874). Barbey d'Aurevilly is an extreme example of the eccentricities of which the Romanticists were capable, and to read him is to understand the discredit that fell upon the manner. He held extreme Catholic views and wrote on the most risqué subjects, he gave himself aristocratic airs and hinted at a mysterious past, though his parentage was entirely bourgeois and his youth very hum-drum and innocent. In the 'fifties d'Aurevilly became literary critic of the Pays, and a number of his essays, contributed to this and other journals, were collected as Les Œuvres et les hommes du XIXe siècle (1861-1865). Other literary studies are Les Romanciers (1866) and Goethe et Diderot (1880). He died in Paris on the 23rd of April 1889. Paul Bourget describes him as a dreamer with an exquisite sense of vision, who sought and found in his work a refuge from the [v.03 p.0387]uncongenial world of every day. Jules Lemaître, a less sympathetic critic, finds in the extraordinary crimes of his heroes and heroines, his reactionary views, his dandyism and snobbery, an exaggerated Byronism.

BARBEY D'AUREVILLY, JULES AMÉDÉE (1808-1889), a French writer, was born in Saint-Sauveur-le-Vicomte (Manche) on November 2, 1808. His most well-known novels include Une Vieille Maîtresse (1851), which was criticized at the time of its release for its supposed immorality; L'Ensorcelée (1854), about the royalist uprising among Norman peasants against the first republic; Chevalier Destouches (1864); and a collection of unusual stories called Les Diaboliques (1874). Barbey d'Aurevilly is a striking example of the eccentricities that Romanticists exhibited, and reading his work reveals the discredit that fell upon the movement. He held extreme Catholic beliefs and wrote on very risqué topics, displayed an aristocratic attitude, and alluded to a mysterious background, even though he came from a totally bourgeois family and had a very ordinary and innocent upbringing. In the 1850s, d'Aurevilly became a literary critic for the Pays, and several of his essays published in this and other journals were compiled into Les Œuvres et les hommes du XIXe siècle (1861-1865). Other literary studies include Les Romanciers (1866) and Goethe et Diderot (1880). He passed away in Paris on April 23, 1889. Paul Bourget describes him as a dreamer with a delicate sense of vision who sought refuge in his work from the [v.03 p.0387]unfriendly everyday world. Jules Lemaître, a less favorable critic, sees in the bizarre crimes of his characters, his conservative views, his dandyism, and snobbery, an exaggerated form of Byronic inspiration.

See also Alcide Dusolier, Jules Barbey d'Aurevilly (1862), a collection of eulogies and interviews; Paul Bourget, Preface to d'Aurevilly's Memoranda (1883); Jules Lemaître, Les Contemporains; Eugène Grelé, Barbey d'Aurevilly, sa vie et son œuvre (1902); René Doumic, in the Revue des deux mondes (Sept. 1902).

See also Alcide Dusolier, Jules Barbey d'Aurevilly (1862), a collection of tributes and interviews; Paul Bourget, Preface to d'Aurevilly's Memoranda (1883); Jules Lemaître, Les Contemporains; Eugène Grelé, Barbey d'Aurevilly, his life and his work (1902); René Doumic, in the Revue des deux mondes (Sept. 1902).

BARBEYRAC, JEAN (1674-1744), French jurist, the nephew of Charles Barbeyrac, a distinguished physician of Montpellier, was born at Beziers in Lower Languedoc on the 15th of March 1674. He removed with his family into Switzerland after the revocation of the edict of Nantes, and there studied jurisprudence. After spending some time at Geneva and Frankfort-on-Main, he became professor of belles-lettres in the French school of Berlin. Thence, in 1711, he was called to the professorship of history and civil law at Lausanne, and finally settled as professor of public law at Groningen. He died on the 3rd of March 1744. His fame rests chiefly on the preface and notes to his translation of Pufendorf's treatise De Jure Naturae et Gentium. In fundamental principles he follows almost entirely Locke and Pufendorf; but he works out with great skill the theory of moral obligation, referring it to the command or will of God. He indicates the distinction, developed more fully by Thomasius and Kant, between the legal and the moral qualities of action. The principles of international law he reduces to those of the law of nature, and combats, in so doing, many of the positions taken up by Grotius. He rejects the notion that sovereignty in any way resembles property, and makes even marriage a matter of civil contract. Barbeyrac also translated Grotius's De Jure Belli et Pacis, Cumberland's De Legibus Naturae, and Pufendorf's smaller treatise De Officio Hominis et Civis. Among his own productions are a treatise, De la morale des pères, a history of ancient treaties contained in the Supplément au grand corps diplomatique, and the curious Traité du jeu (1709), in which he defends the morality of games of chance.

BARBEYRAC, JEAN (1674-1744), a French jurist and the nephew of Charles Barbeyrac, a notable physician from Montpellier, was born in Béziers, Lower Languedoc on March 15, 1674. After the revocation of the Edict of Nantes, he and his family moved to Switzerland, where he studied law. After spending some time in Geneva and Frankfurt, he became a professor of literature at the French school in Berlin. In 1711, he was appointed to teach history and civil law at Lausanne, and eventually became a professor of public law in Groningen. He died on March 3, 1744. His reputation mainly comes from the preface and notes he wrote for his translation of Pufendorf's work De Jure Naturae et Gentium. In fundamental principles, he closely follows Locke and Pufendorf but skillfully develops the theory of moral obligation, linking it to the command or will of God. He highlights the distinction, later elaborated by Thomasius and Kant, between legal and moral aspects of action. He bases the principles of international law on natural law and challenges many positions held by Grotius in the process. He denies that sovereignty resembles property and treats marriage as a civil contract. Barbeyrac also translated Grotius's De Jure Belli et Pacis, Cumberland's De Legibus Naturae, and Pufendorf's shorter work De Officio Hominis et Civis. His own works include a treatise titled De la morale des pères, a history of ancient treaties found in the Supplément au grand corps diplomatique, and the intriguing Traité du jeu (1709), in which he defends the morality of gambling.

BARBICAN (from Fr. barbacane, probably of Arabic or Persian origin), an outwork for the defence of a gate or drawbridge; also a sort of pent-house or construction of timber to shelter warders or sentries from arrows or other missiles.

BARBICAN (from Fr. barbacane, probably of Arabic or Persian origin), a fortified structure for protecting a gate or drawbridge; also a type of roofed shelter made of wood to protect guards or sentries from arrows or other projectiles.

BARBIER, ANTOINE ALEXANDRE (1765-1825), French librarian and bibliographer, was born on the 11th of January 1765 at Coulommiers (Seine-et-Marne). He took priest's orders, from which, however, he was finally released by the pope in 1801. In 1794 he became a member of the temporary commission of the arts, and was charged with the duty of distributing among the various libraries of Paris the books that had been confiscated during the Revolution. In the execution of this task he discovered the letters of Huet, bishop of Avranches, and the MSS. of the works of Fénelon. He became librarian successively to the Directory, to the Conseil d'État, and in 1807 to Napoleon, from whom he carried out a number of commissions. He produced a standard work in his Dictionnaire des ouvrages anonymes et pseudonymes (4 vols., 1806-1809; 3rd edition 1872-1879). Only the first part of his Examen critique des dictionnaires historiques (1820) was published. He had a share in the foundation of the libraries of the Louvre, of Fontainebleau, of Compiègne and Saint-Cloud; under Louis XVIII. he became administrator of the king's private libraries, but in 1822 he was deprived of all his offices. Barbier died in Paris on the 5th of December 1825.

BARBIER, ANTOINE ALEXANDRE (1765-1825), was a French librarian and bibliographer, born on January 11, 1765, in Coulommiers (Seine-et-Marne). He originally took priest's orders but was released from them by the pope in 1801. In 1794, he became a member of the temporary commission of the arts and was tasked with distributing the books that had been confiscated during the Revolution among the various libraries in Paris. While doing this, he discovered the letters of Huet, the bishop of Avranches, and the manuscripts of Fénelon's works. He served as librarian first to the Directory, then to the Conseil d'État, and in 1807 to Napoleon, from whom he completed several commissions. He published a significant work titled Dictionnaire des ouvrages anonymes et pseudonymes (4 vols., 1806-1809; 3rd edition 1872-1879). Only the first part of his Examen critique des dictionnaires historiques (1820) was released. He contributed to the establishment of libraries at the Louvre, Fontainebleau, Compiègne, and Saint-Cloud; under Louis XVIII, he became the administrator of the king's private libraries, but in 1822, he lost all his positions. Barbier passed away in Paris on December 5, 1825.

See also a notice by his son, Louis Barbier, and a list of his works prefixed to the 3rd edition of the Dict. des ouvrages anonymes et pseudonymes.

See also a notice from his son, Louis Barbier, and a list of his works that appears at the beginning of the 3rd edition of the Dict. des ouvrages anonymes et pseudonymes.

BARBIER, HENRI AUGUSTE (1805-1882), French dramatist and poet, was born in Paris on the 29th of April 1805. Inspired by the revolution of July he poured forth a series of eager, vigorous poems, denouncing, crudely enough, the evils of the time. They are spoken of collectively as the Iambes (1831), though the designation is not strictly applicable to all. As the name suggests, they are modelled on the verse of André Chénier. They include La Curée, La Popularité, L'Idole, Paris, Dante, Quatre-vingt-treize and Varsovie. The rest of Barbier's poems are forgotten, and when, in 1869, he received the long delayed honour of admission to the Academy, Montalembert expressed the general sentiment in his Barbier? mais il est mort! It was even asserted, though without foundation, that he was not the real author of the Iambes. He died at Nice on the 13th of February 1882. He collaborated with Léon de Wailly in the libretto of Berlioz's opera, Benvenuto Cellini, and his works include two series of poems on the political and social troubles of Italy and England, printed in later editions of Iambes et poèmes.

BARBIER, HENRI AUGUSTE (1805-1882), French playwright and poet, was born in Paris on April 29, 1805. Inspired by the July Revolution, he wrote a series of passionate and bold poems that criticized the issues of his time, often in a blunt manner. These works are collectively referred to as the Iambes (1831), though this label doesn’t strictly apply to all of them. As the title suggests, they are modeled after the verses of André Chénier. They include La Curée, La Popularité, L'Idole, Paris, Dante, Quatre-vingt-treize, and Varsovie. The rest of Barbier's poems are largely forgotten, and when he finally received the long-awaited honor of being admitted to the Academy in 1869, Montalembert captured the general feeling with his remark, Barbier? mais il est mort! It was even claimed, though without evidence, that he was not the actual author of the Iambes. He passed away in Nice on February 13, 1882. He collaborated with Léon de Wailly on the libretto for Berlioz's opera, Benvenuto Cellini, and his works include two collections of poems addressing the political and social issues in Italy and England, which were published in later editions of Iambes et poèmes.

See also Sainte-Beuve, Portraits Contemporains, vol. ii.

See also Sainte-Beuve, Portraits Contemporains, vol. ii.

BARBIER, LOUIS, known as the Abbé de la Rivière (1593-1670), French bishop, was born of humble parents in Vaudelaincourt, near Compiègne. He entered the church and made his way by his wit and cleverness, until he was appointed tutor, and then became the friend and adviser, of Gaston d'Orléans, brother of Louis XIII. He thus gained an entrance to the court, became grand almoner of the queen, and received the revenue of rich abbeys. In March 1655 he was named bishop of Langres, but he spent his time at court, where his wit was always in demand, and where he gained great sums by gambling. He died very rich.

BARBIER, LOUIS, known as the Abbé de la Rivière (1593-1670), was a French bishop born to humble parents in Vaudelaincourt, near Compiègne. He joined the church and advanced through his intelligence and charm, eventually becoming a tutor and then a friend and advisor to Gaston d'Orléans, brother of Louis XIII. This connection opened the door to the court, where he became the grand almoner of the queen and collected the income from wealthy abbeys. In March 1655, he was appointed bishop of Langres, but he spent most of his time at court, where his wit was always appreciated, and he made substantial profits from gambling. He passed away quite wealthy.

BARBIERI, GIOVANNI FRANCESCO (otherwise called Guercino, from his squinting), (1591-1666), Italian historical painter, was born at Cento, a village not far from Bologna. His artistic powers were developed very rapidly, and at the age of seventeen he was associated with Benedetto Gennari (1550-1610), a well-known painter of the Bolognese school. The fame of the young painter spread beyond his native village, and in 1615 he removed to Bologna, where his paintings were much admired. His first style was formed after that of the Caracci; but the strong colouring and shadows employed by Caravaggio made a deep impression on his mind, and for a considerable period his productions showed evident traces of that painter's influence. Some of his latest pieces approach rather to the manner of his great contemporary Guido, and are painted with more lightness and clearness. Guercino was esteemed very highly in his lifetime, not only by the nobles and princes of Italy, but by his brother artists, who placed him in the first rank of painters. He was remarkable for the extreme rapidity of his execution; he completed no fewer than 106 large altar-pieces for churches, and his other paintings amount to about 144. His most famous piece is thought to be the St Petronilla, which was painted at Rome for Gregory XV. and is now in the Capitol. In 1626 he began his frescoes in the Duomo at Piacenza. Guercino continued to paint and teach up to the time of his death in 1666. He had amassed a handsome fortune by his labours. His life, by J. A. Calvi, appeared at Bologna in 1808.

BARBIERI, GIOVANNI FRANCESCO (also known as Guercino, due to his squint), (1591-1666), was an Italian historical painter born in Cento, a village near Bologna. He rapidly developed his artistic skills, and by the age of seventeen, he was working with Benedetto Gennari (1550-1610), a notable painter from the Bolognese school. The young painter's reputation spread beyond his hometown, and in 1615, he moved to Bologna, where his art was widely admired. Initially, he was influenced by the Caracci style; however, the bold colors and shadows of Caravaggio left a significant mark on him, and for a considerable time, his works reflected that influence. Some of his later pieces show a shift towards the lighter and clearer style of his contemporary, Guido. Guercino was highly regarded during his lifetime, not just by the nobles and princes of Italy but also by fellow artists, who ranked him among the top painters. He was known for his incredible speed in completing artworks, having created no less than 106 large altar paintings for churches and about 144 other works. His most famous painting is considered to be St. Petronilla, which he completed in Rome for Gregory XV and is now housed in the Capitol. In 1626, he began his frescoes in the Duomo at Piacenza. Guercino continued to paint and teach until his death in 1666, during which time he amassed a considerable fortune through his work. His life was chronicled by J. A. Calvi, published in Bologna in 1808.

His brother, Paolo Antonio Barbieri (1603-1649), was a celebrated painter of still life and animals. He chose for his subjects fruits, flowers, insects and animals, which he painted after nature with a lively tint of colour, great tenderness of pencil, and a strong character of truth and life.

His brother, Paolo Antonio Barbieri (1603-1649), was a famous painter known for his still life and animal artwork. He selected fruits, flowers, insects, and animals as his subjects, painting them from nature with vibrant colors, delicate strokes, and a strong sense of realism and vitality.

BARBITON, or Barbitos (Gr. βάρβιτον or βάρβιτος; Lat. barbitus; Pers. barbat, barbud), an ancient stringed instrument known to us from the Greek and Roman classics, but derived from Persia. Theocritus (xvi. 45), the Sicilian poet, calls it an instrument of many strings, i.e. more than seven, which was by the Hellenes accounted the perfect number, as in the cithara of the best period. Anacreon,[1] (a native of Teos in Asia Minor) sings that his barbitos only gives out erotic tones. Pollux (Onomasticon iv. chap. 8, § 59) calls the instrument barbiton or barymite (from βαρύς, heavy and μίτος, a string), an instrument producing deep sounds; the strings were twice as long as those of the pectis and sounded an octave lower. Pindar (in Athen. xiv. p. 635), in the same line wherein he attributes the introduction of the instrument into Greece to Terpander, tells us one could magadize, i.e. play in two parts at an interval of an octave on the two instruments. The word barbiton was frequently used for the lyre itself. Although in use in Asia Minor, Italy, [v.03 p.0388]Sicily, and Greece, it is evident that the barbiton never won for itself a place in the affections of the Greeks of Hellas; it was regarded as a barbarian instrument affected by those only whose tastes in matters of art were unorthodox. It had fallen into disuse in the days of Aristotle,[2] but reappeared under the Romans.

BARBITON, or Barbitos (Gr. βάρβιτον or barbiton; Lat. barbitus; Pers. barbat, barbud), is an ancient string instrument known from Greek and Roman classics, but originally from Persia. Theocritus (xvi. 45), the Sicilian poet, refers to it as an instrument with many strings, meaning more than seven, which was considered the ideal number by the Greeks, similar to the cithara of the best era. Anacreon, [1] (from Teos in Asia Minor) states that his barbitos only produces erotic tones. Pollux (Onomasticon iv. chap. 8, § 59) describes the instrument as barbiton or barymite (from heavy, heavy and thread, a string), an instrument that makes deep sounds; its strings were twice as long as those of the pectis and sounded an octave lower. Pindar (in Athen. xiv. p. 635), in the same sentence where he credits Terpander with introducing the instrument to Greece, explains that one could magadize, or play in two parts an octave apart on both instruments. The term barbiton was often used to refer to the lyre itself. Although it was found in Asia Minor, Italy, [v.03 p.0388]Sicily, and Greece, it's clear that the barbiton never became popular among the Greeks of Hellas; it was seen as a barbaric instrument favored only by those whose artistic tastes were unconventional. It had fallen out of use by the time of Aristotle, [2] but made a comeback under the Romans.

In spite of the few meagre shreds of authentic information extant concerning this somewhat elusive instrument, it is possible nevertheless to identify the barbiton as it was known among the Greeks and Romans. From the Greek writers we know that it was an instrument having some feature or features in common with the lyre, which warranted classification with it. From the Persians and Arabs we learn that it was a kind of rebab or lute, or a chelys-lyre,[3] first introduced into Europe through Asia Minor by way of Greece, and centuries later into Spain by the Moors, amongst whom it was in the 14th century known as al-barbet.[4] There is a stringed instrument, as yet unidentified by name, of which there are at least four different representations in sculpture,[5] which combines the characteristics of both lyre and rebab, having the vaulted back and gradual narrowing to form a neck which are typical of the rebab and the stringing of the lyre. In outline it resembles a large lute with a wide neck, and the seven strings of the lyre of the best period, or sometimes nine, following the decadent lyre. Most authors in reproducing these sculptures showing the barbiton represent the instrument as boat-shaped and without a neck, as, for instance, Carl Engel. This is due to the fact that the part of the instrument where neck joins body is in deep shadow, so that the correct outline can hardly be distinguished, being almost hidden by hand on one side and drapery on the other.

Despite the few scant pieces of genuine information available about this somewhat elusive instrument, we can still identify the barbiton as it was known among the Greeks and Romans. From Greek writers, we know it was an instrument with some features similar to the lyre, which justified its classification alongside it. From the Persians and Arabs, we learn that it was a type of rebab or lute, or a chelys-lyre, first introduced to Europe through Asia Minor via Greece, and centuries later into Spain by the Moors, who referred to it as al-barbet in the 14th century. There is a stringed instrument, not yet named, of which there are at least four different representations in sculpture, that combines characteristics of both the lyre and the rebab, having the vaulted back and gradual narrowing to form a neck typical of the rebab, along with the stringing of the lyre. In shape, it resembles a large lute with a wide neck, featuring seven strings, typical of the best lyres, or sometimes nine, in line with the declining lyre. Most authors reproducing these sculptures depicting the barbiton represent the instrument as boat-shaped and without a neck, as noted by Carl Engel. This is because the area where the neck joins the body is deeply shadowed, making the correct outline difficult to distinguish, as it is almost obscured by a hand on one side and drapery on the other.

Barbiton.

Barbiton, from a bas-relief in the Louvre, "Achilles at Scyros."

Barbiton, from a bas-relief in the Louvre, "Achilles at Scyros."

The barbiton, as pictured here, had probably undergone considerable modification at the hands of the Greeks and had diverged from the archetype. The barbiton, however, although it underwent many changes, retained until the end the characteristics of the instruments of the Greek lyre whose strings were plucked, whereas the rebab was sounded by means of the bow at the time of its introduction into Europe. At some period not yet determined, which we can but conjecture, the barbat approximated to the form of the large lute (q.v.). An instrument called barbiton was known in the early part of the 16th[6] and during the 17th century. It was a kind of theorbo or bass-lute, but with one neck only, bent back at right angles to form the head. Robert Fludd[7] gives a detailed description of it with an illustration:—"Inter quas instrumenta non nulla barbito simillima effinxerunt cujus modi sunt illa quae vulgo appellantur theorba, quae sonos graviores reddunt chordasque nervosas habent." The people called it theorbo, but the scholar having identified it with the instrument of classic Greece and Rome called it barbiton. The barbiton had nine pairs of gut strings, each pair being in unison. Dictionaries of the 18th century support Fludd's use of the name barbiton. G. B. Doni[8] mentions the barbiton, defining it in his index as Barbitos seu major chelys italice tiorba, and deriving it from lyre and cithara in common with testudines, tiorbas and all tortoiseshell instruments. Claude Perrault,[9] writing in the 18th century, states that "les modernes appellent notre luth barbiton" (the moderns call our lute barbiton). Constantijn Huygens[10] declares that he learnt to play the barbiton in a few weeks, but took two years to learn the cittern.

The barbiton, as shown here, likely underwent significant changes thanks to the Greeks and strayed from its original form. However, despite many modifications, the barbiton still maintained the features of the Greek lyre instruments, which had plucked strings, while the rebab was played with a bow when it first came to Europe. At some point that we can only guess, the barbat took on a shape similar to that of the large lute (q.v.). An instrument named barbiton was recognized in the early part of the 16th century and throughout the 17th century. It was a type of theorbo or bass-lute, but with just one neck, bent back at a right angle to form the head. Robert Fludd[7] provides a detailed description accompanied by an illustration: "Among the various instruments, they created some quite similar to the barbiton, such as those commonly referred to as theorba, which produce deeper sounds and have gut strings." People called it theorbo, but scholars identified it with the instruments of ancient Greece and Rome, referring to it as barbiton. The barbiton had nine pairs of gut strings, each pair tuned to the same pitch. Dictionaries from the 18th century back up Fludd's use of the term barbiton. G. B. Doni[8] mentions the barbiton, defining it in his index as Barbitos seu major chelys italice tiorba, and tracing its roots back to the lyre and cithara, along with testudines, tiorbas, and all instruments made from tortoiseshell. Claude Perrault,[9] writing in the 18th century, states that "les modernes appellent notre luth barbiton" (the moderns call our lute barbiton). Constantijn Huygens[10] claims that he learned to play the barbiton in a few weeks, but it took him two years to master the cittern.

The barbat was a variety of rebab (q.v.), a bass instrument, differing only in size and number of strings. This is quite in accordance with what we know of the nomenclature of musical instruments among Persians and Arabs, with whom a slight deviation in the construction of an instrument called for a new name.[11] The word barbud applied to the barbiton is said to be derived[12] from a famous musician living at the time of Chosroes II. (A.D. 590-628), who excelled in playing upon the instrument. From a later translation of part of the same authority into German[13] we obtain the following reference to Persian musical instruments: "Die Sänger stehen bei seinem Gastmahl; in ihrer Hand Barbiton(i.) und Leyer(ii.) und Laute(iii.) und Flöte(iv.) und Deff (Handpauke)." Mr Ellis, of the Oriental Department of the British Museum, has kindly supplied the original Persian names translated above, i.e. (i.) barbut, (ii.) chang, (iii.) rubāb, (iv.) nei. The barbut and rubab thus were different instruments as late as the 19th century in Persia. There were but slight differences if any between the archetypes of the pear-shaped rebab and of the lute before the application of the bow to the former—both had vaulted backs, body and neck in one, and gut strings plucked by the fingers.

The barbat was a type of rebab (q.v.), a bass instrument, differing mainly in size and number of strings. This fits with what we know about the naming of musical instruments among Persians and Arabs, where even a slight change in the design of an instrument warranted a new name.[11] The term barbud for the barbiton is believed to come from a famous musician who lived during the time of Chosroes II. (CE 590-628), known for his exceptional skill with the instrument. From a later translation of part of the same source into German[13] we find this reference to Persian musical instruments: "Die Sänger stehen bei seinem Gastmahl; in ihrer Hand Barbiton(i.) und Leyer(ii.) und Laute(iii.) und Flöte(iv.) und Deff (Handpauke)." Mr. Ellis, from the Oriental Department of the British Museum, has kindly provided the original Persian names as translated above, i.e. (i.) barbut, (ii.) chang, (iii.) rubāb, (iv.) nei. The barbut and rubab were recognized as different instruments as recently as the 19th century in Persia. There were only minor differences, if any, between the designs of the pear-shaped rebab and the lute before the bow was applied to the former—both had vaulted backs, a body and neck combined, and gut strings plucked by the fingers.

(K. S.)

(K. S.)

[1] See Bergk's Poetae Lyrici Graeci (4th ed., 1882), p. 291, fr. 143 [113]; and p. 311, 23 [1], 3; and 14 [9], 34, p. 306.

[1] See Bergk's Poetae Lyrici Graeci (4th ed., 1882), p. 291, fr. 143 [113]; and p. 311, 23 [1], 3; and 14 [9], 34, p. 306.

[2] Polit. viii. (v.), 6, ed. Susemihl-Hicks (1894), pp. 604 (= 1341a 40) and 632; Daremberg and Saglio, Dict. d'ant. gr. et rom., article "Lyre," p. 1450, for a few more references to the classics.

[2] Polit. viii. (v.), 6, ed. Susemihl-Hicks (1894), pp. 604 (= 1341a 40) and 632; Daremberg and Saglio, Dict. d'ant. gr. et rom., article "Lyre," p. 1450, for a few more references to the classics.

[3] Johnson's Persian-Arabic-English dictionary: barbat, a harp or lute, barbatzan, player upon lute, pl.barābit; G. W. Freytag, Lexicon Arabico-Latinum, i. p. 102; barbat (Persian and Arabic), barbitus, genus testudinis, plerumque sex septamve chordis instructum (rotundam habet formam in Africa); Lexicon Aegidii Forcellini (Prato, 1858; "Barbito aurataque chely ac doctis fidibus personare" (Martianus Capella i. 36); G. B. Doni, Lyra Barberina, ii. index.

[3] Johnson's Persian-Arabic-English dictionary: barbat, a harp or lute, barbatzan, a lute player, pl. barābit; G. W. Freytag, Lexicon Arabico-Latinum, i. p. 102; barbat (Persian and Arabic), barbitus, a type of tortoise, usually equipped with six or seven strings (it has a round shape in Africa); Lexicon Aegidii Forcellini (Prato, 1858; "Barbito aurataque chely ac doctis fidibus personare" (Martianus Capella i. 36); G. B. Doni, Lyra Barberina, ii. index.

[4] Enumeration of Arab Musical Instruments, xiv. c.

[4] List of Arab Musical Instruments, xiv. c.

[5] (a) See C. Clarac, Musée du Louvre, vol. i. pl. 202, No. 261. (b) Accompanying illustration. See also Kathleen Schlesinger, "Orchestral Instruments", part ii., "Precursors of the Violin Family," fig. 108 and p. 23, pp. 106-107, fig. 144 and appendix. (c) Sarcophagus in the cathedral of Girgenti in Sicily, illustrated by Carl Engel, Early History of the Violin Family, p. 112. A cast is preserved in the sepulchral basement at the British Museum. Domenico, Lo Faso Pietra-Santa, le antichità della Sicilia (Palermo, 1834), vol. 3, pl. 45 (2), text p. 89. (d) C. Zoega, Antike Basreliefe von Rom (Giessen, 1812), atlas, pl. 98, sarcophagus representing a scene in the story of Hippolytus and Phaedra.

[5] (a) See C. Clarac, Musée du Louvre, vol. i. pl. 202, No. 261. (b) Accompanying illustration. See also Kathleen Schlesinger, "Orchestral Instruments," part ii., "Precursors of the Violin Family," fig. 108 and p. 23, pp. 106-107, fig. 144 and appendix. (c) Sarcophagus in the cathedral of Girgenti in Sicily, illustrated by Carl Engel, Early History of the Violin Family, p. 112. A cast is preserved in the sepulchral basement at the British Museum. Domenico, Lo Faso Pietra-Santa, le antichità della Sicilia (Palermo, 1834), vol. 3, pl. 45 (2), text p. 89. (d) C. Zoega, Antike Basreliefe von Rom (Giessen, 1812), atlas, pl. 98, sarcophagus representing a scene in the story of Hippolytus and Phaedra.

[6] In Jacob Locher's Navis Stultifera (Basil, 1506), titulus 7, is an illustration of a small harp and lute with the legend nec cytharum tangit nec barbiton.

[6] In Jacob Locher's Navis Stultifera (Basel, 1506), title 7, there's an illustration of a small harp and lute with the caption nec cytharum tangit nec barbiton.

[7] Historia Utriusque Cosmi (Oppenheim, 1617), tom. i. tract ii. part ii. lib. iv. cap. i. p. 226.

[7] History of Both Worlds (Oppenheim, 1617), vol. i. part ii. section ii. book iv. chap. i. p. 226.

[8] Lyra Barberina, vol. ii. index, and also vol. i. p. 29.

[8] Lyra Barberina, vol. ii. index, and also vol. i. p. 29.

[9] "La Musique des anciens," Œuvres complètes (ed. Amsterdam, 1727), tom. i. p. 306.

[9] "The Music of the Ancients," Complete Works (ed. Amsterdam, 1727), vol. i. p. 306.

[10] De Vita propria sermonum inter liberos libri duo (Haarlem, 1817). See also Edmund van der Straeten, La Musique aux Pays-Bas, vol. ii. p. 349.

[10] On Life Properly Speaking of Words Among Children, Two Books (Haarlem, 1817). See also Edmund van der Straeten, Music in the Netherlands, vol. ii. p. 349.

[11] See The Seven Seas, a dictionary and grammar of the Persian language, by Ghazi ud-din Haidar, king of Oudh, in seven parts (Lucknow, 1822) (only the title of the book is in English). A review of this book in German with copious quotations by von Hammer-Purgstall is published in Jahrbücher der Literatur (Vienna, 1826), Bd. 35 and 36; names of musical instruments, Bd. 36, p. 292 et seq. See also R. G. Kiesewetter, Die Musik der Araber, nach Originalquellen dargestellt (Leipzig, 1843, p. 91, classification of instruments).

[11] See The Seven Seas, a dictionary and grammar of the Persian language, by Ghazi ud-din Haidar, king of Oudh, in seven parts (Lucknow, 1822) (only the title of the book is in English). A review of this book in German with extensive quotes by von Hammer-Purgstall is published in Jahrbücher der Literatur (Vienna, 1826), Vol. 35 and 36; names of musical instruments, Vol. 36, p. 292 and following. See also R. G. Kiesewetter, Die Musik der Araber, nach Originalquellen dargestellt (Leipzig, 1843, p. 91, classification of instruments).

[12] The Seven Seas, part i. p. 153; Jahrb. d. Literatur, Bd. 36, p. 294.

[12] The Seven Seas, part i. p. 153; Jahrb. d. Literatur, Vol. 36, p. 294.

[13] Fr. Rückert, Grammatik, Poetik und Rhetorik der Perser, nach dem 7ten Bde. des Hefts Kolzum (Gotha, 1874), p. 80.

[13] Fr. Rückert, Grammar, Poetry, and Rhetoric of the Persians, according to the 7th volume of the Kolzum issue (Gotha, 1874), p. 80.

BARBIZON, a French village, near the forest of Fontainebleau, which gave its name to the "Barbizon school" of painters, whose leaders were Corot, Rousseau, Millet and Daubigny, together with Diaz, Dupré, Jacque, Français, Harpignies and others. They put aside the conventional idea of "subject" in their pictures of landscape and peasant life, and went direct to the fields and woods for their inspiration. The distinctive note of the school is seen in the work of Rousseau and of Millet, each of whom, after spending his early years in Paris, made his home in Barbizon. Unappreciated, poor and neglected, it was not until after years of struggle that they attained recognition and success. They both died at Barbizon—Rousseau in 1867 and Millet in 1875. It is difficult now to realize that their work, so unaffected and beautiful, should have been so hardly received. To understand this, it is necessary to remember the conflicts that existed between the classic and romantic schools in the first half of the 19th century, when the classicists, followers of the tradition of [v.03 p.0389]David, were the predominant school. The romantic movement, with Géricault, Bonington and Delacroix, was gaining favour. In 1824 Constable's pictures were shown in the Salon, and confirmed the younger men in their resolution to abandon the lifeless pedantry of the schools and to seek inspiration from nature. In those troubled times Rousseau and Millet unburdened their souls to their friends, and their published lives contain many letters, some extracts from which will express the ideals which these artists held in common, and show clearly the true and firmly-based foundation on which their art stands. Rousseau wrote, "It is good composition when the objects represented are not there solely as they are, but when they contain under a natural appearance the sentiments which they have stirred in our souls.... For God's sake, and in recompense for the life He has given us, let us try in our works to make the manifestation of life our first thought: let us make a man breathe, a tree really vegetate." And Millet—"I try not to have things look as if chance had brought them together, but as if they had a necessary bond between themselves. I want the people I represent to look as if they really belonged to their station, so that imagination cannot conceive of their ever being anything else. People and things should always be there with an object. I want to put strongly and completely all that is necessary, for I think things weakly said might as well not be said at all, for they are, as it were, deflowered and spoiled—but I profess the greatest horror for uselessness (however brilliant) and filling up. These things can only weaken a picture by distracting the attention toward secondary things." In another letter he says—"Art began to decline from the moment that the artist did not lean directly and naively upon impressions made by nature. Cleverness naturally and rapidly took the place of nature, and decadence then began.... At bottom it always comes to this: a man must be moved himself in order to move others, and all that is done from theory, however clever, can never attain this end, for it is impossible that it should have the breath of life." The ideas of the "Barbizon school" only gradually obtained acceptance, but the chief members of it now rank among the greater artists of their time.

BARBIZON, a French village near the forest of Fontainebleau, gave its name to the "Barbizon school" of painters, whose leading figures were Corot, Rousseau, Millet, and Daubigny, along with Diaz, Dupré, Jacque, Français, Harpignies, and others. They moved away from the traditional idea of "subject" in their landscape and peasant life paintings and sought inspiration directly from the fields and woods. The distinctive style of the school is evident in the works of Rousseau and Millet, both of whom, after spending their early years in Paris, settled in Barbizon. Unappreciated, poor, and overlooked, they only achieved recognition and success after years of struggle. They both passed away in Barbizon—Rousseau in 1867 and Millet in 1875. It’s hard to believe that their work, so genuine and beautiful, was received with such difficulty. To understand this, we must remember the conflicts between the classic and romantic movements in the first half of the 19th century, when the classicists, followers of the tradition of [v.03 p.0389]David, dominated the art scene. Meanwhile, the romantic movement, with artists like Géricault, Bonington, and Delacroix, was gaining popularity. In 1824, Constable's paintings were exhibited at the Salon, encouraging younger artists to abandon the lifeless pedantry of the schools and draw inspiration from nature. During those challenging times, Rousseau and Millet confided in their friends, and their published lives include many letters, some excerpts of which express the ideals these artists shared and highlight the strong, solid foundation of their art. Rousseau wrote, "Good composition happens when the objects depicted are not just there as they are, but when they reflect the emotions they evoke in our souls... For God's sake, and in gratitude for the life He has given us, let’s strive in our work to make the display of life our primary concern: let’s make a man breathe, a tree truly grow." And Millet said, "I try not to make things appear as if they were randomly assembled but as if they had a necessary bond among themselves. I want the people I depict to seem like they truly belong in their place so that imagination cannot envision them ever being anything else. People and objects should always have a purpose. I want to express everything necessary thoroughly and strongly, because I believe things said weakly might as well not be said at all, as they are, in a way, defiled and ruined—but I deeply dislike uselessness (no matter how brilliant) and filler. These elements can only weaken a painting by distracting attention to secondary aspects." In another letter he states, "Art began to decline the moment artists stopped relying directly and simply on impressions made by nature. Cleverness quickly took the place of nature, and then decadence set in... Ultimately, it comes down to this: a person must be moved to move others, and anything done from theory, no matter how clever, can never achieve this goal, for it lacks the breath of life." The ideas of the "Barbizon school" were only gradually accepted, but the main figures of the movement are now regarded among the greatest artists of their time.

See D. Croal Thomson, The Barbizon School (1891), with a full list of the French authorities to be consulted; Jules Breton, Nos peintres du siècle, Paris, 1900.

See D. Croal Thomson, The Barbizon School (1891), with a complete list of the French sources to be consulted; Jules Breton, Nos peintres du siècle, Paris, 1900.

BARBON, NICHOLAS (c. 1640-1698), English economist, probably the son of Praise-god Barbon, was born in London, studied medicine at Leiden, graduated M.D. at Utrecht in 1661, and was admitted an honorary fellow of the College of Physicians in 1664. He took a considerable part in the rebuilding of London after the great fire of 1666, and has a claim to be considered the institutor of fire-insurance in England, which he started somewhere about 1680. He was M.P. for Bramber in 1690 and 1695. He founded a land bank which, according to contemporaries, was fairly successful and was united with that of John Briscoe in 1696. He died in 1698. His writings are interesting as expressing views much in advance of his time and very near akin to those of modern times on such important topics as value, rent and foreign trade. The more important were Apology for the Builder; or a Discourse showing the Cause and Effects of the Increase of Building (1685); A Discourse of Trade (1690); and A Discourse Concerning Coining the New Money Lighter (1696).

BARBON, NICHOLAS (c. 1640-1698), English economist, likely the son of Praise-god Barbon, was born in London, studied medicine at Leiden, graduated M.D. from Utrecht in 1661, and became an honorary fellow of the College of Physicians in 1664. He played a significant role in rebuilding London after the Great Fire of 1666 and is credited with being the originator of fire insurance in England, which he initiated around 1680. He served as M.P. for Bramber in 1690 and 1695. He established a land bank which, according to his contemporaries, was quite successful and merged with that of John Briscoe in 1696. He passed away in 1698. His writings are notable for expressing views that were well ahead of his time and closely aligned with modern perspectives on crucial topics such as value, rent, and foreign trade. The most significant works include Apology for the Builder; or a Discourse showing the Cause and Effects of the Increase of Building (1685); A Discourse of Trade (1690); and A Discourse Concerning Coining the New Money Lighter (1696).

BARBON (Barebone or Barebones), PRAISE-GOD (c. 1596-1679), English leather-seller and Fifth Monarchy man, was admitted freeman of the Leathersellers Company on the 20th of January 1623 and liveryman on the 13th of October 1634. About the same time he became minister to a congregation which assembled at his own house, "The Lock and Key," in Fleet Street, where his preaching attracted large audiences. The exact nature of his religious opinions is not perfectly clear. He is styled by his enemies a Brownist and Anabaptist, i.e. probably Baptist, but he wrote two books in support of paedobaptism, and his congregation had separated from a larger one of Baptists on that point of controversy. Later he belonged to the sect of Fifth Monarchy men. He was the object of the abuse and ridicule of the opposite party, and his meetings were frequently disturbed by riots. On the 20th of December 1641 his house was stormed by a mob and he narrowly escaped with his life. Barbon, who was a man of substantial property, was summoned by Cromwell on the 6th of June 1653 as a member for London to the assembly of nominees called after him in derision Barebone's Parliament. His name is occasionally mentioned, but he appears to have taken no part in the debates. In 1660 he showed great activity in endeavouring to prevent the Restoration. He published Needham's book, News from Brussels in a Letter from a Near Attendant on His Majesty's Person ..., which retailed unfavourable anecdotes relating to Charles's morals, and on the 9th of February he presented the petition to the Parliament, which proposed that all officials should abjure the Stuarts, and all publicly proposing the Restoration should be deemed guilty of high treason. His conduct drew upon him several royalist attacks. On the 31st of March he was obliged to sign an engagement to the council not to disturb the peace, and on the 26th of November 1661 he was arrested, together with John Wildman and James Harrington, and was imprisoned in the Tower till the 27th of July 1662, when he was released on bail. Barbon, who was married, was buried on the 5th of January 1680. He was the author of A Discourse tending to prove ... Baptism ... to be the ordinance of Jesus Christ. As also that the Baptism of Infants is warentable (1642), the preface of which shows a spirit of wide religious tolerance; and A Reply to the Frivolous and Impertinent answer of R. B. and E. B. to the Discourse of P. B. (1643).

BARBON (Barebones or Minimalist), PRAISE-GOD (c. 1596-1679), was an English leather seller and Fifth Monarchy man. He became a freeman of the Leathersellers Company on January 20, 1623, and a liveryman on October 13, 1634. Around that time, he became the minister for a congregation that met at his home, "The Lock and Key," in Fleet Street, where his preaching drew large crowds. The exact nature of his religious beliefs isn't completely clear. His opponents labeled him a Brownist and Anabaptist, which likely means Baptist, but he wrote two books supporting paedobaptism, and his congregation broke away from a larger Baptist group over that issue. Later on, he joined the sect of Fifth Monarchy men. He faced abuse and ridicule from opposing groups, and his meetings were often disrupted by riots. On December 20, 1641, a mob attacked his house, and he barely escaped with his life. Barbon, who was well-off, was called by Cromwell on June 6, 1653, to serve as a representative for London in the assembly mockingly named Barebone's Parliament. His name comes up occasionally, but he seems to have played no role in the debates. In 1660, he actively tried to prevent the Restoration. He published Needham's book, News from Brussels in a Letter from a Near Attendant on His Majesty's Person ..., which contained unfavorable stories about Charles's morals, and on February 9, he submitted a petition to Parliament proposing that all officials reject the Stuarts and anyone advocating for the Restoration should be seen as committing high treason. His actions led to several attacks from royalists. On March 31, he had to sign an agreement with the council promising not to disturb the peace, and on November 26, 1661, he was arrested along with John Wildman and James Harrington. He was imprisoned in the Tower until July 27, 1662, when he was released on bail. Barbon, who was married, was buried on January 5, 1680. He authored A Discourse tending to prove ... Baptism ... to be the ordinance of Jesus Christ. As also that the Baptism of Infants is warentable (1642), whose preface reflects a spirit of wide religious tolerance; and A Reply to the Frivolous and Impertinent answer of R. B. and E. B. to the Discourse of P. B. (1643).

BARBOUR, JOHN (? 1316-1395), Scottish poet, was born, perhaps in Aberdeenshire, early in the 14th century, approximately 1316. In a letter of safe-conduct dated 1357, allowing him to go to Oxford for study, he is described as archdeacon of Aberdeen. He is named in a similar letter in 1364 and in another in 1368 granting him permission to pass to France, probably for further study, at the university of Paris. In 1372 he was one of the auditors of exchequer, and in 1373 a clerk of audit in the king's household. In 1375 (he gives the date, and his age as 60) he composed his best known poem The Brus, for which he received, in 1377, the gift of ten pounds, and, in 1378, a life-pension of twenty shillings. Additional rewards followed, including the renewal of his exchequer auditorship (though he may have continued to enjoy it since his first appointment) and ten pounds to his pension. The only biographical evidence of his closing years is his signature as a witness to sundry deeds in the "Register of Aberdeen" as late as 1392. According to the obit-book of the cathedral of Aberdeen, he died on the 13th of March 1395. The state records show that his life-pension was not paid after that date.

BARBOUR, JOHN (? 1316-1395), Scottish poet, was born, probably in Aberdeenshire, early in the 14th century, around 1316. In a letter of safe-conduct dated 1357, which allowed him to study at Oxford, he is referred to as the archdeacon of Aberdeen. He is mentioned in a similar letter in 1364 and again in 1368, which gave him permission to travel to France, likely for further study at the university of Paris. In 1372, he served as one of the auditors of the exchequer, and in 1373, he became a clerk of audit in the king's household. In 1375 (he specifies the date and mentions his age as 60), he wrote his most famous poem The Brus, for which he received, in 1377, a payment of ten pounds, and in 1378, a lifetime pension of twenty shillings. He received additional rewards, including a renewal of his position as an exchequer auditor (though he may have continued in this role since his initial appointment) and an increase of ten pounds to his pension. The only biographical information about his later years is his signature as a witness on various deeds in the "Register of Aberdeen" as late as 1392. According to the obit-book of the cathedral of Aberdeen, he died on March 13, 1395. State records indicate that his life-pension payments stopped after that date.

Considerable controversy has arisen regarding Barbour's literary work. If he be the author of the five or six long poems which have been ascribed to him by different writers, he adds to his importance as the father of Scots poetry the reputation of being one of the most voluminous writers in Middle English, certainly the most voluminous of all Scots poets.

Considerable debate has emerged over Barbour's literary work. If he is indeed the author of the five or six long poems that various writers have attributed to him, he not only solidifies his importance as the father of Scots poetry but also gains recognition as one of the most prolific writers in Middle English, undoubtedly the most prolific of all Scots poets.

(1) The Brus, in twenty books, and running to over 13,500 four-accent lines, in couplets, is a narrative poem with a purpose partly historical, partly patriotic. It opens with a description of the state of Scotland at the death of Alexander III. (1286) and concludes with the death of Douglas and the burial of the Bruce's heart (1332). The central episode is the battle of Bannockburn. Patriotic as the sentiment is, it is in more general terms than is found in later Scots literature. The king is a hero of the chivalric type common in contemporary romance; freedom is a "noble thing" to be sought and won at all costs; the opponents of such freedom are shown in the dark colours which history and poetic propriety require; but there is none of the complacency of the merely provincial habit of mind. The lines do not lack vigour; and there are passages of high merit, notably the oft-quoted section beginning "A! fredome is a noble thing." Despite a number of errors of fact, notably the confusion of the three Bruces in the person of the hero, the poem is historically trustworthy as compared with contemporary verse-chronicle, and especially with the Wallace of the next century. No one [v.03 p.0390]has doubted Barbour's authorship of the Brus, but argument has been attempted to show that the text as we have it is an edited copy, perhaps by John Ramsay, a Perth scribe, who wrote out the two extant texts, preserved in the Advocates' library, Edinburgh, and in the library of St John's College, Cambridge. Extensive portions of the poem have been incorporated by Wyntoun (q.v.) in his Chronicle. The first printed edition extant is Charteris's (Edinburgh, 1571); the second is Hart's (Edinburgh, 1616).

(1) The Brus, in twenty books with over 13,500 four-accent lines in couplets, is a narrative poem that serves both historical and patriotic purposes. It begins with a description of the state of Scotland after the death of Alexander III in 1286 and ends with the death of Douglas and the burial of Bruce's heart in 1332. The main event is the battle of Bannockburn. While the sentiment is patriotic, it's expressed in broader terms than what you find in later Scottish literature. The king is portrayed as a heroic figure typical of contemporary romance; freedom is seen as a "noble thing" to be pursued and secured at any cost; the enemies of that freedom are depicted in the dark tones that history and poetic tradition demand; however, there is no narrow-minded provincial attitude. The lines are vigorous, and there are many notable passages, particularly the often-quoted section that starts with "A! fredome is a noble thing." Despite some historical inaccuracies, especially the mix-up of the three Bruces regarding the hero, the poem is more historically reliable compared to contemporary verse chronicles, especially compared to the Wallace of the following century. No one [v.03 p.0390]has questioned Barbour's authorship of The Brus, but there has been some debate suggesting that the existing text might be an edited version, possibly by John Ramsay, a scribe from Perth, who copied the two surviving texts kept in the Advocates' library in Edinburgh and in the library of St John's College in Cambridge. Large sections of the poem were included by Wyntoun (q.v.) in his Chronicle. The first surviving printed edition is Charteris's from Edinburgh in 1571, followed by Hart's edition in 1616.

(2) Wyntoun speaks (Chronicle III. iii.) of a "Treteis" which Barbour made by way of "a genealogy" of "Brutus lynagis"; and elsewhere in that poem there are references to the archdeacon's "Stewartis Oryginale." This "Brut" is unknown; but the reference has been held by some to be to (3) a Troy-book, based on Guido da Colonna's Historia Destructionis Troiae. Two fragments of such a work have been preserved in texts of Lydgate's Troy-book, the first in MS. Camb. Univ. Lib. Kk. v. 30, the second in the same and in MS. Douce 148 in the Bodleian library, Oxford. This ascription was first made by Henry Bradshaw, the librarian of Cambridge University; but the consensus of critical opinion is now against it. Though it were proved that these Troy fragments are Barbour's, there remains the question whether their identification with the book on the Stewart line is justified. The scale of the story in these fragments forces us to doubt this identification. They contain 595 + 3118 = 3713 lines and are concerned entirely with "Trojan" matters. This would be an undue allowance in a Scottish "genealogy."

(2) Wyntoun mentions (Chronicle III. iii.) a "Treteis" that Barbour created as "a genealogy" of "Brutus lynagis"; and there are mentions in that poem of the archdeacon's "Stewartis Oryginale." This "Brut" is unknown, but some believe it refers to (3) a Troy-book based on Guido da Colonna's Historia Destructionis Troiae. Two fragments of such a work have been preserved in texts of Lydgate's Troy-book, the first in MS. Camb. Univ. Lib. Kk. v. 30, the second in the same and in MS. Douce 148 at the Bodleian library, Oxford. This attribution was initially made by Henry Bradshaw, the librarian at Cambridge University; however, most scholars now disagree with it. Even if it could be proven that these Troy fragments are Barbour's, there's still the issue of whether they can be linked to the book about the Stewart line. The scope of the story in these fragments makes us question this connection. They include 595 + 3118 = 3713 lines and focus entirely on "Trojan" topics. This would be excessive for a Scottish "genealogy."

(4) Yet another work was added to the list of Barbour's works by the discovery in the university library of Cambridge, by Henry Bradshaw, of a long Scots poem of over 33,000 lines, dealing with Legends of the Saints, as told in the Legenda Aurea and other legendaries. The general likeness of this poem to Barbour's accepted work in verse-length, dialect and style, and the facts that the lives of English saints are excluded and those of St Machar (the patron saint of Aberdeen) and St Ninian are inserted, made the ascription plausible. Later criticism, though divided, has tended in the contrary direction, and has based its strongest negative judgment on the consideration of rhymes, assonance and vocabulary (see bibliography). That the "district" of the author is the north-east of Scotland cannot be doubted in the face of a passage such as this, in the fortieth legend (St Ninian), 11, 1359 et seq.

(4) A new work was added to the list of Barbour's writings when Henry Bradshaw discovered a lengthy Scots poem of over 33,000 lines in the Cambridge university library. This poem explores the Legends of the Saints, as recounted in the Legenda Aurea and other collections of legends. The poem shares many similarities with Barbour's recognized works in terms of verse length, dialect, and style. Additionally, it omits the lives of English saints while including those of St. Machar (the patron saint of Aberdeen) and St. Ninian, which makes attributing it to Barbour seem plausible. However, later criticism, although divided, has leaned in the opposite direction, grounding its strongest objections in factors such as rhyme, assonance, and vocabulary (see bibliography). It is undeniable that the author is from the north-east of Scotland, as evidenced by a passage in the fortieth legend (St. Ninian), lines 11, 1359 et seq.

"A lytil tale ȝet herd I tel,

A little story I still hear,

þat in to my tyme befel,

þat in to my tyme befel,

of a gudman, in murrefe [Moray] borne

of a good man, born in Moray

in elgyne [Elgin], and his kine beforne,

in Elgin, and his cows before,

and callit was a faithful man

and call it was a loyal man

vith al þame þat hyme knew than;

with all the things that he knew then;

& þis mare trastely I say,

& I say this very truly,

for I kend hyme weile mony day.

for I knew him well many days.

John balormy ves his name,

John changed his name,

a man of ful gud fame."

a man of full good fame.

But whether this north-east Scots author is Barbour is a question which we cannot answer by means of the data at present available.

But whether this north-east Scots author is Barbour is a question we can't answer with the data currently available.

(5) If Barbour be the author of the Legends, then (so does one conclusion hang upon another) he is the author of a Gospel story with the later life of the Virgin, described in the prologue to the Legends and in other passages as a book "of the birth of Jhesu criste" and one "quhare-in I recordit the genology of our lady sanct Mary."

(5) If Barbour wrote the Legends, then it follows that he is also the author of a Gospel story about the later life of the Virgin, mentioned in the prologue to the Legends and in other sections as a book "about the birth of Jesus Christ" and one "where I recorded the genealogy of our lady Saint Mary."

(6) In recent years an attempt has been made to name Barbour as the author of the Buik of Alexander (a translation of the Roman d'Alexandre and associated pieces, including the Vœux du Paon), as known in the unique edition, c. 1580, printed at the Edinburgh press of Alexander Arbuthnot. The "argument" as it stands is nothing more than an exaggerated inference from parallel-passages in the Bruce and Alexander; and it makes no allowance for the tags, epithets and general vocabulary common to all writers of the period. Should the assumption be proved to be correct, and should it be found that the "Troy fragments were written first of all, followed by Alexander and Bruce or Bruce and Alexander, and that the Legends end the chapter," it will be by "evidence" other than that which has been produced to this date.

(6) In recent years, there’s been an effort to identify Barbour as the author of the Buik of Alexander (a translation of the Roman d'Alexandre and related works, including the Vœux du Paon), particularly known from the unique edition, c. 1580, printed at the Edinburgh press of Alexander Arbuthnot. The reasoning presented is really just an overblown assumption based on similar passages in the Bruce and Alexander; it doesn’t take into account the common phrases, descriptors, and general vocabulary shared among all writers of that time. If it turns out to be true that the "Troy fragments" were written first, and then followed by Alexander and Bruce or Bruce and Alexander, with the Legends wrapping up the chapter, it will have to be based on "evidence" beyond what has been presented so far.

For Barbour's life see Exchequer Rolls of Scotland, ii. and iii.; Registrum Episcopatus Aberdonensis (Spalding Club); Rymer's Foedera.

For Barbour's life, see Exchequer Rolls of Scotland, ii. and iii.; Registrum Episcopatus Aberdonensis (Spalding Club); Rymer's Foedera.

Works.—(1)The Brus MSS. and early editions u.s. Modern editions: J. Pinkerton, 3 vols. (1790) (called by the editor "the first genuine edition," because printed from the Advocates' Library text, but carelessly); Jamieson (1820); Cosmo Innes (Spalding Club, 1856); W. W. Skeat (Early English Text Society, 1870-1889; reprinted, after revision by the editor, by the Scottish Text Society, 1893-1895). On the question of the recension of Barbour's text, see J. T. T. Brown, The Wallace and The Bruce restudied (Bonn, 1900). (2 and 3) Troy Fragments. C. Horstmann has printed the text in his Legendensammlung (ut infra). See Bradshaw, Transactions of the Cambridge Antiquarian Society (1866); the prolegomena in Horstmann's edition; Skeat, Brus (S. T. S. edit. u.s. pp. xlvi. et seq.); Köppel, "Die Fragmente von Barbours Trojanerkrieg," in Englische Studien, x. 373; Panton and Donaldson, The Gest Historiale of the Destruction of Troye (E. E. T. S. pt. ii. Introd. pp. x. et seq.); G. Neilson (ut infra); and J. T. T. Brown (ut supra) passim. (4) Legends of the Saints. C. Horstmann, who upholds Barbour's authorship, has printed the text in his Barbours des schottischen Nationaldichters Legendensammlung nebst den Fragmenten seines Trojanerkrieges, 2 vols. (Heilbronn, 1881-1882), and that of the legend of St Machor in his Altenglische Legenden. Neue Folge (Heilbronn, 1881) pp. 189-208. A later edition by W. M. Metcalfe, who disputes Barbour's claim, appeared in 1896 (Legends of the Saints in the Scottish Dialect of the Fourteenth Century, 3 vols., Scottish Text Society). See the introductions to these editions; also Skeat and Koppel u.s., and P. Buss, Sind die von Horstmann herausgegebenen schottischen Legenden ein Werk Barberes? (Halle, 1886) (cf. Anglia, ix. 3, 1886). (5) For the Gospel-story evidence see Metcalfe, u.s. I. xxix. (6) On the Alexander Book and its assumed relationships, see G. Neilson, John Barbour, Poet and Translator (1900) (a reprint from the Transactions of the Philological Society); J. T. T. Brown u.s., "Postscript," pp. 156-171; and Athenaeum, 17th of November, 1st and 8th December 1900, and the 9th of February 1901.

Works.—(1)The Brus manuscripts and early editions u.s. Modern editions: J. Pinkerton, 3 vols. (1790) (called by the editor "the first genuine edition," because it was printed from the Advocates' Library text, but done carelessly); Jamieson (1820); Cosmo Innes (Spalding Club, 1856); W. W. Skeat (Early English Text Society, 1870-1889; reprinted after revision by the editor, by the Scottish Text Society, 1893-1895). For discussions on the recension of Barbour's text, see J. T. T. Brown, The Wallace and The Bruce Restudied (Bonn, 1900). (2 and 3) Troy Fragments. C. Horstmann printed the text in his Legendensammlung (ut infra). See Bradshaw, Transactions of the Cambridge Antiquarian Society (1866); the prolegomena in Horstmann's edition; Skeat, Brus (S. T. S. edit. u.s. pp. xlvi. et seq.); Köppel, "Die Fragmente von Barbours Trojanerkrieg," in Englische Studien, x. 373; Panton and Donaldson, The Gest Historiale of the Destruction of Troye (E. E. T. S. pt. ii. Introd. pp. x. et seq.); G. Neilson (ut infra); and J. T. T. Brown (ut supra) passim. (4) Legends of the Saints. C. Horstmann, who supports Barbour's authorship, printed the text in his Barbours des schottischen Nationaldichters Legendensammlung nebst den Fragmenten seines Trojanerkrieges, 2 vols. (Heilbronn, 1881-1882), and that of the legend of St Machor in his Altenglische Legenden. Neue Folge (Heilbronn, 1881) pp. 189-208. A later edition by W. M. Metcalfe, who contests Barbour's claim, was published in 1896 (Legends of the Saints in the Scottish Dialect of the Fourteenth Century, 3 vols., Scottish Text Society). Refer to the introductions to these editions; also Skeat and Koppel u.s., and P. Buss, Sind die von Horstmann herausgegebenen schottischen Legenden ein Werk Barberes? (Halle, 1886) (cf. Anglia, ix. 3, 1886). (5) For evidence from Gospel stories, see Metcalfe, u.s. I. xxix. (6) For information on the Alexander Book and its other relationships, see G. Neilson, John Barbour, Poet and Translator (1900) (a reprint from the Transactions of the Philological Society); J. T. T. Brown u.s., "Postscript," pp. 156-171; and Athenaeum, 17th of November, 1st and 8th December 1900, and 9th of February 1901.

(G. G. S.)

(G. G. S.)

BARBUDA, an island in the British West Indies. It lies 25 m. N. of Antigua, of which it is a dependency, in 17° 33′ N. and 61° 43′ W., and it has an area of 62 sq. m. Pop. (1901) 775. It is flat and densely wooded. On the western side there is a large lagoon, separated from the sea by a spit of sand. The part of the island under cultivation is very fertile, and the air is remarkable for its purity. Cattle and horses are bred and wild deer are still found. Salt and phosphates of lime are exported. The island was annexed by Great Britain in 1628 and was bestowed in 1680 upon the Codrington family who, for more than 200 years, held it as a kind of feudal fief.

BARBUDA, an island in the British West Indies. It is located 25 miles north of Antigua, which it depends on, at 17° 33′ N. and 61° 43′ W., with an area of 62 square miles. Population (1901) was 775. The island is flat and densely wooded. On the western side, there is a large lagoon, separated from the sea by a sand spit. The cultivated part of the island is very fertile, and the air is known for its purity. Cattle and horses are raised, and wild deer can still be found. Salt and lime phosphates are exported. The island was annexed by Great Britain in 1628 and was granted in 1680 to the Codrington family, who held it as a sort of feudal estate for over 200 years.

BARBY, a town of Germany, in the kingdom of Prussia, on the left bank of the Elbe, 82 m. S.W. of Berlin on the direct railway to Cassel. Pop. (1900) 5136. It has two evangelical churches and a seminary for school teachers, which is housed in the former castle of the lords of Barby. The industries are mainly agricultural, but there are sugar factories and breweries. Here from 1749 to 1809 was a settlement of the Herrnhut evangelical brotherhood.

BARBY, a town in Germany, located in the kingdom of Prussia on the left bank of the Elbe, 82 miles southwest of Berlin along the direct railway to Cassel. Population (1900) 5,136. It features two evangelical churches and a seminary for school teachers, which is situated in the former castle of the lords of Barby. The local economy is primarily agricultural, but there are also sugar factories and breweries. From 1749 to 1809, it was home to a settlement of the Herrnhut evangelical brotherhood.

BARCA (mod. Merj), an ancient city founded in the territory of Cyrene in the middle of the 6th century B.C. Rising quickly to importance it became a rival of the older city, and gave its name to the western province of the latter's territory. The name as a provincial designation is still in occasional use, but is now applied to all the province of Bengazi. Barca is said to have owed its origin to Greek refugees flying from the tyranny of Arcesilaus II. (see Cyrene), but it is certain that it was rather a Libyan than a Greek town at all times. A Persian force invited by the notorious Pheretima, mother of Arcesilaus III., in revenge for Barcan support of a rival faction, sacked it towards the close of the 6th century and deported a number of its inhabitants to Bactria. Under Ptolemaic rule it began to decline, like Cyrene, and its port Ptolemais (Tolmeita) took its place: but after the Arab conquest (A.D. 641) it became the chief place of the Cyrenaica for a time and a principal station on the Kairawan road. Though now a mere village, Merj is still the chief centre of administration inland, and has a fort and small garrison. No ruins of earlier period than the late Roman and early Arab seem to be visible on the site. The latter lies, like Cyrene, about ten miles from the coast on the crest of Jebel Akhdar, here sunk to a low downland. It owed its early prosperity to its easy access to the sea, and to the fact that natural conditions in Cyrenaica and the [v.03 p.0391]Sahara behind it, tend to divert trade to the west of the district—a fact which is exemplified by the final survival of Berenice (mod. Bengazi). Merj stands in a rich but ill-cultivated stretch of red soil.

BARCA (now known as Merj), an ancient city established in the territory of Cyrene around the middle of the 6th century B.C., quickly rose to prominence, becoming a rival to the older city and giving its name to the western province of that city’s territory. The name is still occasionally used as a provincial designation, but it now refers to the entire province of Bengazi. Barca is said to have originated from Greek refugees fleeing the tyranny of Arcesilaus II (see Cyrene), though it is clear that it was predominantly a Libyan town throughout its history. A Persian army, invited by the infamous Pheretima, mother of Arcesilaus III, in retaliation for Barca's support of a rival faction, sacked the city towards the end of the 6th century and deported many of its residents to Bactria. Under Ptolemaic control, it began to decline, similar to Cyrene, and its port, Ptolemais (Tolmeita), took its place. However, after the Arab conquest (CE 641), it became the main center of Cyrenaica for a time and a key stop along the Kairawan road. Although Merj is now just a village, it is still the main administrative center inland, with a fort and a small garrison. No ruins from earlier periods than the late Roman and early Arab eras appear to be visible at the site. This location lies, like Cyrene, about ten miles from the coast on the crest of Jebel Akhdar, which has been lowered to a gentle upland. Its early prosperity was due to its easy access to the sea and the fact that natural conditions in Cyrenaica and the [v.03 p.0391]Sahara behind it tend to divert trade away from the eastern part of the region—something that is illustrated by the lasting presence of Berenice (modern Bengazi). Merj is situated in a fertile but poorly cultivated expanse of red soil.

(D. G. H.)

(D. G. H.)

BARCAROLE, or Barcarolle (Ital. barcaruola, a boat-song) properly a musical term for the songs sung by the Venetian gondoliers, and hence for an instrumental or vocal composition, generally in 6-8 time, written in imitation of their characteristic rhythm.

BARCAROLE, or Barcarolle (Italian barcaruola, a boat song) is a musical term for the songs sung by the gondoliers of Venice, and it refers to an instrumental or vocal piece, usually in 6-8 time, created to imitate their unique rhythm.

BARCELONA, a maritime province of north-eastern Spain, formed in 1833 out of districts belonging to the ancient kingdom of Catalonia, and bounded on the N.E. and E. by Gerona; S. by the Mediterranean Sea; S.W. by Tarragona; and W. and N.W. by Lérida. Pop. (1900) 1,054,541; area 2968 sq. m. Apart from a few tracts of level country along the coast and near Igualada, Manresa, Sabadell and Vich, almost the whole surface consists of mountain ranges, often densely wooded, rich in minerals and intersected by deep ravines. These ranges are outliers of the Pyrenees, which extend along the northern frontier, forming there the lofty Sierra del Cadi with the peak of Tosa (8317 ft.). Towards the sea, the altitudes become gradually less, although not with a uniform decrease; for several isolated peaks and minor ranges such as Montserrat and Monseny rise conspicuously amid the lower summits to a height of 4000-6000 ft. The central districts are watered by the Llobrégat, which rises at the base of the Sierra del Cadi, and flows into the sea near Barcelona, the capital, after receiving many small tributaries. The river Ter crosses the eastern extremity of the province.

BARCELONA, a coastal province in northeastern Spain, was established in 1833 from parts of the ancient kingdom of Catalonia and is bordered on the N.E. and E. by Gerona; S. by the Mediterranean Sea; S.W. by Tarragona; and W. and N.W. by Lérida. Population (1900) 1,054,541; area 2968 sq. m. Aside from a few flat areas along the coast and near Igualada, Manresa, Sabadell, and Vich, almost the entire region consists of mountain ranges, often densely forested, mineral-rich, and cut through by deep ravines. These mountains are extensions of the Pyrenees, which run along the northern border, featuring the impressive Sierra del Cadi with the peak of Tosa (8317 ft.). As you move toward the sea, the heights decrease gradually, though not uniformly; several isolated peaks and smaller ranges, such as Montserrat and Monseny, rise distinctly among the lower hills to elevations of 4000-6000 ft. The central areas are supplied with water by the Llobrégat River, which originates at the base of the Sierra del Cadi and flows into the sea near Barcelona, the capital, after collecting many minor tributaries. The Ter River crosses the eastern edge of the province.

Barcelona can be divided into three climatic zones; a temperate one near the sea, where even palm and orange trees grow; a colder one in the valleys and plains, more inland; and a colder still among the mountains, where not a few peaks are snow-clad for a great part of the year. Agriculture and stock-keeping are comparatively unimportant in this province, which is the centre of Spanish industry and commerce. In every direction the country looks like a veritable hive of human activity and enterprise, every town and village full of factories, and alive with the din of machinery. Lead, zinc, lignite, coal and salt are worked, and there are numerous mineral springs; but the prosperity of the province chiefly depends on its transit trade and manufactures. These are described in detail in articles on the chief towns. Barcelona (pop. 1900, 533,000), Badalona (19,240), Cardona (3855), Igualada (10,442), Manresa (23,252), Mataró (19,704), Sabadell (23,294), Tarrasa (15,956), Vich (11,628) and Villanueva y Geltru (11,856). Berga (5465), perhaps the Roman Castrum Bergium, on the Llobrégat, is the home of the Catalonian cotton industry. None of the rivers is navigable, and the roads are in general indifferent and insufficient. The province is better off in regard to railways, of which there are 349 m. Important lines radiate from the city of Barcelona north-east along the coast to Gerona and to Perpignan in France; south-west along the coast to Tarragona and Valencia; and west to Saragossa and Madrid. Several local railways link together the principal towns. For a general description of the people, and for the history of this region see Catalonia. The population is greater and increases more rapidly than that of any other Spanish province, a fact due not to any large excess of births over deaths, but to the industrial life which attracts many immigrants. In the last quarter of the 19th century the increase exceeded 200,000, while the average yearly number of emigrants was below 2000. In point of education this province is quite among the first in Spain, and as far back as 1880 there were 97,077 children enrolled on the school registers; the figures have since steadily increased.

Barcelona is divided into three climate zones: a mild one near the coast where palm and orange trees thrive, a cooler one in the valleys and plains further inland, and a much colder one in the mountains, where many peaks are covered in snow for a large part of the year. Agriculture and livestock farming are relatively minor in this province, which is the hub of Spanish industry and commerce. Everywhere you look, the region resembles a bustling hive of human activity and enterprise, with every town and village filled with factories and alive with the noise of machinery. Lead, zinc, lignite, coal, and salt are extracted, and there are many mineral springs; however, the province's prosperity mainly relies on its transit trade and manufacturing. These are detailed in articles about the main towns. Barcelona (pop. 1900, 533,000), Badalona (19,240), Cardona (3,855), Igualada (10,442), Manresa (23,252), Mataró (19,704), Sabadell (23,294), Tarrasa (15,956), Vich (11,628), and Villanueva y Geltrú (11,856). Berga (5,465), possibly the Roman Castrum Bergium, located on the Llobrégat, is the center of the Catalonian cotton industry. None of the rivers are navigable, and the roads are generally poor and inadequate. The province is better served in terms of railways, with a total of 349 miles. Important lines extend from the city of Barcelona northeast along the coast to Gerona and to Perpignan in France; southwest along the coast to Tarragona and Valencia; and west to Saragossa and Madrid. Several local railroads connect the main towns. For a general overview of the people and the history of this area, see Catalonia. The population is larger and grows more rapidly than that of any other Spanish province, a result not of a significant birth surplus but due to the industrial lifestyle that attracts many immigrants. In the last quarter of the 19th century, the population increased by over 200,000, while the average annual number of emigrants was below 2,000. In terms of education, this province is among the top in Spain, and as far back as 1880, there were 97,077 children registered in schools; this number has steadily risen since then.

BARCELONA, formerly the capital of Catalonia, and since 1833 the capital of the province of Barcelona in eastern Spain, in 41° 23′ N. and 2° 11′ E., on the Mediterranean Sea, and at the head of railways from Madrid, Saragossa, and Perpignan in France. Pop. (1900) 533,000. Barcelona is a flourishing city and the principal seaport of Spain. It is built on the sloping edge of a small plain between the rivers Besós, on the north, and Llobrégat, on the south. Immediately to the south-west the fortified hills of Montjuich rise to an altitude of 650 ft., while the view is bounded on the west by the heights which culminate in Tibidabo (1745 ft.), and on the north-east by the Montañas Matas. The greater part of the space thus enclosed is occupied by comparatively modern suburbs and gardens of almost tropical luxuriance, strongly contrasting with the huge factories and busy port of the original city in their midst.

BARCELONA, formerly the capital of Catalonia and since 1833 the capital of the province of Barcelona in eastern Spain, located at 41° 23′ N. and 2° 11′ E. on the Mediterranean Sea, serves as a hub for railways coming from Madrid, Saragossa, and Perpignan in France. Population (1900) was 533,000. Barcelona is a vibrant city and the main seaport of Spain. It is situated on the sloping edge of a small plain, nestled between the Besós River to the north and the Llobrégat River to the south. Just to the south-west, the fortified hills of Montjuich rise to 650 ft., while the western view is framed by the heights culminating in Tibidabo (1745 ft.), and the north-east is defined by the Montañas Matas. Most of the enclosed area is filled with relatively modern suburbs and gardens that boast almost tropical greenery, standing in stark contrast to the large factories and bustling port of the original city at the center.

Barcelona was formerly surrounded by a strong line of ramparts, and defended, or more correctly, overawed by a citadel on the north-east, erected in 1715 by Philip V.; but these fortifications being felt as a painful restriction on the natural development of the city, were, in spite of the opposition of the central government, finally abolished by the local authorities in 1845. The walls of the moat were utilized for the cellars of the houses which soon occupied the site of the ramparts, and the ground, which had been covered by the citadel, was laid out in gardens. A rapid extension of the city to the north-west took place, and in 1860 an elaborate plan for the laying out of new districts received the royal sanction. Barcelona thus comprises an old town, still consisting for the most part of irregular and narrow streets, and a new town built with all the symmetry and precision of a premeditated scheme. The buildings of the old town are chiefly of brick, from four to five storeys in height, with flat roofs, and other oriental peculiarities; while in the new town hewn stone is very largely employed, and the architecture is often of a modern English style. To the east, on the tongue of land that helps to form the port, lies the suburb of Barceloneta. It owes its origin to the marquis de la Mina, who, about 1754, did much for the city, and is regularly laid out, the houses being built of brick after a uniform pattern. The main street or axis of the old town is the Rambla, which has a fine promenade planted with plane-trees running down the middle, and contains the principal hotels and theatres of the city. The most important suburbs are Grácia, Las Corts de Sarriá, Horta, San Andrés de Palomar, San Gervasio de Cassolas, San Martin de Provensals and Sans. Exclusive of these, the city contains about 334,000 inhabitants, an increase of nearly 150,000 since 1857. Large numbers of immigrant artisans joined the population during the latter half of the 19th century, attracted by the great development of industry. Barcelona is the see of a bishop, and, like most Spanish towns, has a large number of ecclesiastical buildings, though by no means so many as it once possessed. No fewer than eighteen convents were still standing in 1873. The cathedral, erected between 1298 and 1448 on Monte Taber, an oval hill which forms the highest point of the Rambla, is one of the finest examples of Spanish Gothic; although it is not designed on a great scale and some parts have been freely modernized. It contains the early 14th-century tomb of Santa Eulalia, the patron saint of the city, besides many other monuments of artistic or historical interest. Its stained glass windows are among the finest in Spain, and it possesses archives of great value. Santa Maria del Mar, Santa Ana, Santos Justo y Pastor, San Pedro de las Puellas, and San Pablo del Campo are all churches worthy of mention.

Barcelona was once surrounded by a strong line of walls and defended, or more accurately, overshadowed by a citadel to the northeast, built in 1715 by Philip V. However, these fortifications were seen as a hindrance to the city's natural growth and, despite resistance from the central government, were finally removed by local authorities in 1845. The walls of the moat were repurposed for the cellars of houses that soon took the place of the ramparts, and the area that had been covered by the citadel was turned into gardens. The city rapidly expanded to the northwest, and in 1860, an elaborate plan for developing new districts received royal approval. As a result, Barcelona consists of an old town, mostly characterized by narrow, winding streets, and a new town built with the symmetry and precision of a planned design. The old town's buildings are primarily made of brick, typically four to five stories high, with flat roofs and other oriental features. In contrast, the new town largely uses hewn stone, often reflecting a modern English architectural style. To the east, on the land that forms the port, lies the suburb of Barceloneta. It was established by the Marquis de la Mina, who contributed greatly to the city around 1754, and is laid out in a regular pattern, with houses built of brick following a consistent design. The main street of the old town is the Rambla, which has a lovely promenade lined with plane trees down the center and features the city's main hotels and theaters. The most significant suburbs include Grácia, Las Corts de Sarriá, Horta, San Andrés de Palomar, San Gervasio de Cassolas, San Martin de Provensals, and Sans. Excluding these areas, the city has about 334,000 residents, which is an increase of nearly 150,000 since 1857. A large influx of immigrant workers joined the population during the latter half of the 19th century, drawn by the booming industry. Barcelona is home to a bishopric and, like most Spanish cities, has many religious buildings, though not as many as it once did. There were still eighteen convents standing in 1873. The cathedral, built between 1298 and 1448 on Monte Taber, an oval hill that is the highest point of the Rambla, is one of the finest examples of Spanish Gothic architecture; while it isn't grandiose in scale and some parts have been significantly modernized. It houses the early 14th-century tomb of Santa Eulalia, the city’s patron saint, along with many other artistic and historical monuments. Its stained glass windows are among the best in Spain, and it has valuable archives. Other notable churches include Santa Maria del Mar, Santa Ana, Santos Justo y Pastor, San Pedro de las Puellas, and San Pablo del Campo.

The educational institutions of Barcelona have from an early period been numerous and important. The university (Universidad Literaria), which was originally founded in 1430 by the magistracy of the city, and received a bull of confirmation from Pope Nicholas V. in 1450, possessed at that time four faculties and thirty-one chairs all endowed by the corporation. It was suppressed in 1714, but restored in 1841, and now occupies an extensive building in the new town. There are, besides, an academy of natural sciences, a college of medicine and surgery—confirmed by a bull of Benedict XIII. in 1400—an academy of fine arts, a normal school, a theological seminary, an upper industrial school, an institution for the education of deaf-mutes, a school of navigation and many minor establishments. Gratuitous instruction of a very high order is afforded by the Board of Trade to upwards of 2000 pupils. The principal charitable foundations are the Casa de Caridad or house of charity, the hospital general, dating from 1401, and the foundling hospital. The principal civic and commercial buildings are the [v.03 p.0392]Casa Consistorial, a fine Gothic hall (1369-1378), the Lonja or exchange (1383), and the Aduana or custom-house (1792). At the seaward end of the Rambla is a large ancient structure, the Atarazanas or Arsenals, which was finished about 1243, and partly demolished in the 19th century to give a better view to the promenade. Remains of the former royal state of Barcelona are found in the Palacio Real of the kings of Aragon and the Palacio de la Reina. At the highest part of the city, in the Calle del Paradis, are some magnificent columns, and other Roman remains, which, however, are hidden by the surrounding buildings. Means of public recreation are abundantly supplied. There are many theatres, the two most important being the Teatro Principal, and the Teatro del Liceo, a very fine building, originally erected in 1845 on the site of a convent of Trinitarian monks. The number of restaurants and similar places of evening resort is very great, and there are several public courts where the Basque game of pelota can be witnessed.

The educational institutions in Barcelona have been numerous and significant since an early time. The university (Universidad Literaria), originally established in 1430 by the city's magistracy, received confirmation from Pope Nicholas V in 1450. At that time, it had four faculties and thirty-one chairs, all funded by the corporation. It was shut down in 1714 but was restored in 1841, and now occupies a large building in the new town. In addition, there is an academy of natural sciences, a college of medicine and surgery—confirmed by a bull of Benedict XIII in 1400—an academy of fine arts, a normal school, a theological seminary, an upper industrial school, an institution for educating deaf-mutes, a school of navigation, and many smaller establishments. The Board of Trade provides free, high-quality education to over 2,000 students. The main charitable foundations include the Casa de Caridad (house of charity), the hospital general, which dates back to 1401, and the foundling hospital. The main civic and commercial buildings include the [v.03 p.0392]Casa Consistorial, an impressive Gothic hall (1369-1378), the Lonja or exchange (1383), and the Aduana or customs house (1792). At the waterfront end of the Rambla stands a large ancient structure, the Atarazanas or Arsenals, completed around 1243, which was partially demolished in the 19th century for a better view of the promenade. Remnants of the former royal state of Barcelona can be found in the Palacio Real of the kings of Aragon and the Palacio de la Reina. At the highest point of the city, on Calle del Paradis, there are some magnificent columns and other Roman remains, although they are obscured by surrounding buildings. Public recreational opportunities are plentiful. There are numerous theaters, the two main ones being Teatro Principal and Teatro del Liceo, a beautiful building originally built in 1845 on the site of a Trinitarian monk convent. There are many restaurants and evening spots, and several public courts where you can watch the Basque game of pelota.

The so-called port of Barcelona was at first only an open beach, on the east, slightly sheltered by the neighbouring hills, but at an early period the advantage of some artificial protection was felt. In 1438 Don Alphonso V. granted the magistracy a licence to build a mole; and in 1474 the Moll de Santa Creu was officially begun. Long after this, however, travellers speak of Barcelona as destitute of a harbour; and it is only in the 17th century that satisfactory works were undertaken. Until modern times all the included area was shut off from the open sea by a sand-bank, which rendered the entrance of large vessels impossible. An extension of the former mole, and the construction of another from the foot of Montjuich, have embraced a portion of the sea outside of the bank, and a convenient shelter is thus afforded for the heaviest battleships. From 1873 the work of extension and improvement was carried on systematically, with the addition of new quays, greater storage room, and better means for handling cargo. After thirty years of steady development, further plans were approved in 1903. At this time the port included an inner harbour, with a depth of 18 to 30 ft. at low tide, and an outer harbour with a depth of 20 to 35 ft. In the following year 8075 vessels of nearly 5,000,000 tons entered the port. Barcelona is well supplied with inland communication by rail, and the traffic of its streets is largely facilitated by tramway lines running from the port as far as Grácia and the other chief suburbs.

The so-called port of Barcelona was initially just an open beach, on the east side, slightly sheltered by nearby hills, but it soon became clear that some artificial protection was needed. In 1438, Don Alphonso V granted permission to the city government to build a breakwater; and in 1474, the Moll de Santa Creu was officially started. However, long after this, travelers described Barcelona as lacking a proper harbor; it wasn't until the 17th century that significant construction began. Until modern times, the entire area was blocked from the open sea by a sandbank, which made it impossible for large vessels to enter. An extension of the original breakwater and the construction of another from the foot of Montjuich created a section of the sea outside of the sandbank, providing a suitable harbor for the largest battleships. Starting in 1873, development and improvements were carried out systematically, adding new quays, more storage space, and better cargo handling facilities. After thirty years of consistent growth, new plans were approved in 1903. At this time, the port featured an inner harbor with a depth of 18 to 30 feet at low tide and an outer harbor with a depth of 20 to 35 feet. The following year, 8,075 vessels totaling nearly 5 million tons entered the port. Barcelona is well connected by rail for inland transport, and the traffic on its streets is greatly facilitated by tram lines running from the port all the way to Grácia and other main suburbs.

Barcelona has long been the industrial and commercial centre of eastern Spain—a pre-eminence which dates from the 12th and 13th centuries. It received a temporary check from the disasters of the Spanish-American War of 1898; but less than a year later it paid about £550,000 in industrial and commercial taxes, or more than 11% of the whole amount thus collected in the kingdom; and within five years it had become a port of regular call for thirty-five important shipping companies. It also contained the head offices of thirteen other lines, notably those of the Transatlantic Mail Company, which possessed a fleet of twenty-five fine steamships. Trades and industries give occupation to more than 150,000 hands of both sexes. The spinning and weaving of wool, cotton and silk are the principal industries, but the enterprising spirit of the Catalans has compelled them to try almost every industry in which native capital could attempt to compete with foreign, especially since the institution of the protectionist tariffs of 1892. The native manufacturers are quite able to compete in peninsular markets with foreign rivals. This prosperity has been in part due to the great development of means of communication around the city and in the four Catalan provinces. Comestibles, raw materials, and combustibles form the greater part of the imports, but this great manufactory also imports a considerable quantity of foreign manufactured goods. The principal exports are wines, cereals, olive-oil, cotton goods, soap, cigarette-paper, furniture and barrels, boots, shoes and leather goods, and machinery.

Barcelona has been the industrial and commercial hub of eastern Spain for a long time, dating back to the 12th and 13th centuries. Its progress faced a setback due to the Spanish-American War in 1898, but less than a year later, it paid around £550,000 in industrial and commercial taxes, accounting for over 11% of the total collected in the kingdom. Within five years, it became a regular stop for thirty-five major shipping companies. The city was also home to the main offices of thirteen other lines, including the Transatlantic Mail Company, which operated a fleet of twenty-five high-quality steamships. More than 150,000 people of both genders are employed in various trades and industries. The main industries include the spinning and weaving of wool, cotton, and silk, but the innovative spirit of the Catalans has inspired them to explore nearly every industry where local capital could compete with foreign businesses, especially since the introduction of protectionist tariffs in 1892. Local manufacturers are quite capable of competing with foreign rivals in domestic markets. This growth is partly thanks to the significant improvement in transportation methods around the city and the four Catalan provinces. Most imports consist of food, raw materials, and fuels, but this large manufacturing center also brings in a substantial amount of foreign-made goods. The main exports include wine, grains, olive oil, cotton products, soap, cigarette paper, furniture, barrels, boots, shoes, leather goods, and machinery.

Barcino, the ancient name of the city, is usually connected with that of the Carthaginian Hamilcar Barca, its traditional founder in the 3rd century B.C. After the Roman conquest, it received from Augustus (27 B.C.-A.D. 14) the name of Julia Faventia (afterwards Augusta and Pia), with the status of a Roman colony; and thenceforward it rapidly grew to be the leading mart of the western Mediterranean, rivalling Tarraco (Tarragona) and Massilia (Marseilles) as early as the 2nd century A.D. As its remains testify, the Roman city occupied Monte Taber. The bishopric of Barcelona was founded in 343. In 415 and 531, the Visigoths chose Barcelona as their temporary capital; in 540 and 599 church councils were held there. Barcinona or Bardjaluna, as it was then called, was captured by the Moors in 713, and in 801 it passed, with the rest of Catalonia, under the dominion of the Franks. From 874 the counts of Barcelona ruled as independent monarchs. But the accession of larger resources due to the union between Catalonia and Aragon in 1149, brought the city to the zenith of its fame and wealth. Its merchant ships vied with those of Genoa, Venice and Ragusa, trading as far west as the North Sea and the Baltic, and as far east as Alexandria. In 1258 James I. of Aragon empowered Barcelona to issue its famous Consulado del Mar, a code of maritime law recognized as authoritative by many European states. Consuls represented Barcelona at the principal commercial centres on or near the Mediterranean; and the city was among the first communities to adopt the practice of marine insurance. But the union of Castile and Aragon in 1479 favoured other cities of Spain at the expense of Barcelona, whose commercial supremacy was transferred to the ports of western Spain by the discovery of America in 1492. The citizens attributed their misfortunes to the "Castilian" government, and a strong party among them favoured annexation by France. In 1640 Barcelona was the centre of the Catalonian rebellion against Philip IV., and threw itself under French protection. In 1652 it returned to its allegiance, but was captured by the duke of Vendôme in 1697. At the peace of Ryswick, in the same year, it was restored to the Spanish monarchy. During the War of the Succession (1701-1714) Barcelona adhered to the house of Austria. The seizure of Montjuich in 1705, and the subsequent capture of the city by the earl of Peterborough, formed one of his most brilliant achievements. In 1714 it was taken after an obstinate resistance by the duke of Berwick in the interests of Philip V., and at the close of the war was reluctantly reconciled to the Bourbon dynasty. In 1809 the French invaders of Spain obtained possession of the fortress and kept the city in subjection until 1814. Since then it has shared in most of the revolutionary movements that have swept over Spain, and has frequently been distinguished by the violence of its civic commotions. For the historic antagonism between the Catalans and the other inhabitants of Spain was strengthened by the industrial development of Barcelona. Among the enterprising and shrewd Catalans, who look upon their rulers as reactionary, and reserve all their sympathies for the Provençal neighbours whom they so nearly resemble in race, language and temperament, French influence and republican ideals spread rapidly; taking the form partly of powerful labour and socialist organizations, partly of less reputable bodies, revolutionary and even anarchist. Strikes are very common, seventy-three having occurred in such a year of comparative quiet as 1903; but the causes of disturbance are almost as often political as economic, and the annals of the city include a long list of revolutionary riots and bomb outrages. A strange contrast is presented by the co-existence of these turbulent elements with the more old-fashioned Spanish society of Barcelona. Church festivals, civic and ecclesiastical processions are almost as animated and picturesque as in Seville itself; and many medieval customs continue to flourish side by side with the most modern features of industrial life, giving to Barcelona a character altogether unique among Spanish cities.

Barcino, the ancient name for the city, is commonly linked to the Carthaginian Hamilcar Barca, its traditional founder in the 3rd century B.C. After the Roman conquest, it was named Julia Faventia by Augustus (27 BCE-A.D. 14), obtaining the status of a Roman colony. From that point on, it quickly became the leading market of the western Mediterranean, competing with Tarraco (Tarragona) and Massilia (Marseilles) as early as the 2nd century CE The remains show that the Roman city occupied Monte Taber. The bishopric of Barcelona was established in 343. In 415 and 531, the Visigoths made Barcelona their temporary capital; church councils were held there in 540 and 599. Barcinona or Bardjaluna, as it was then known, was captured by the Moors in 713, and in 801, it, along with the rest of Catalonia, came under Frankish control. From 874, the counts of Barcelona ruled as independent monarchs. However, the union of Catalonia and Aragon in 1149 brought greater resources, leading the city to its peak of fame and wealth. Its merchant ships competed with those of Genoa, Venice, and Ragusa, trading as far west as the North Sea and the Baltic, and as far east as Alexandria. In 1258, James I of Aragon granted Barcelona the authority to issue its famous Consulado del Mar, a maritime law code recognized as authoritative by many European nations. Consuls represented Barcelona at major commercial centers around the Mediterranean; the city was among the first to adopt marine insurance. However, the union of Castile and Aragon in 1479 favored other cities in Spain over Barcelona, whose commercial dominance shifted to western Spain's ports following the discovery of America in 1492. Citizens blamed their misfortunes on the "Castilian" government, and a strong faction among them supported annexation by France. In 1640, Barcelona became the center of the Catalonian rebellion against Philip IV and sought French protection. It returned to allegiance in 1652 but was captured by the Duke of Vendôme in 1697. At the peace of Ryswick that same year, it was restored to the Spanish monarchy. During the War of the Succession (1701-1714), Barcelona sided with the House of Austria. The capture of Montjuich in 1705 and the city's subsequent takeover by the Earl of Peterborough was one of his most impressive achievements. In 1714, after fierce resistance led by the Duke of Berwick in support of Philip V, the city fell, and at the end of the war, it reluctantly accepted the Bourbon dynasty. From 1809, the French invaders took control of the fortress and kept the city under their rule until 1814. Since then, Barcelona has participated in most revolutionary movements across Spain and has often been marked by violent civic unrest. The historic rivalry between the Catalans and other Spaniards intensified due to Barcelona's industrial development. Among the resourceful and savvy Catalans, who view their rulers as backward and align closely with their Provençal neighbors in race, language, and temperament, French influence and republican ideals spread rapidly; manifesting partly through strong labor and socialist organizations, and partly through less reputable revolutionary and anarchist groups. Strikes are common, with seventy-three occurring in the relatively calm year of 1903; however, the reasons for unrest are often political rather than economic, and the city’s history includes numerous accounts of revolutionary riots and bomb attacks. A striking contrast exists between these turbulent elements and the more traditional Spanish society of Barcelona. Church festivals and civic and ecclesiastical processions remain almost as vibrant and colorful as those in Seville, and many medieval customs continue to thrive alongside modern industrial life, giving Barcelona a distinct character among Spanish cities.

The literature relating to Barcelona is extensive. For a general description of the city, see A. A. P. Arimon, Barcelona antigua y moderna, two illustrated folio volumes (Madrid, 1850); and J. Artigas y Feiner, Guia itineraria de Barcelona (Barcelona, 1888). For the antiquities, see S. Sampere, Topografia antigua de Barcelona (1890). The economic history of the city is dealt with by A. Capmany in his Memorias historicas sobra la marina, comercio, y artes de la antigua ciudad de Barcelona (Madrid, 1779-1792); and, for its political history, the same work should be consulted, together with Historias e conquestas dels comtes de Barcelona, by T. Tomich (Barcelona, 1888), and the Colecció de documents inédits del Arxin [v.03 p.0393]municipal de la ciutat de Barcelona (Barcelona, 1892). The spread of the revolutionary movement is traced by M. Gil Maestre, in his El Anarquismo en España, y el especial de Barcelona (Madrid, 1897), and in his La Criminalidad en Barcelona (Barcelona, 1886).

The literature about Barcelona is vast. For a general overview of the city, check out A. A. P. Arimon's Barcelona antigua y moderna, two illustrated folio volumes (Madrid, 1850); and J. Artigas y Feiner's Guia itineraria de Barcelona (Barcelona, 1888). For details on antiquities, refer to S. Sampere's Topografia antigua de Barcelona (1890). The city's economic history is covered by A. Capmany in Memorias historicas sobre la marina, comercio, y artes de la antigua ciudad de Barcelona (Madrid, 1779-1792); for its political history, consult the same work, along with Historias e conquestas dels comtes de Barcelona by T. Tomich (Barcelona, 1888), and the Colecció de documents inédits del Arxin [v.03 p.0393]municipal de la ciutat de Barcelona (Barcelona, 1892). The growth of the revolutionary movement is examined by M. Gil Maestre in El Anarquismo en España, y el especial de Barcelona (Madrid, 1897), and in La Criminalidad en Barcelona (Barcelona, 1886).

BARCELONA, a town and port of Venezuela, capital of the state of Bermudez, on the Neveri river, 3 m. from its mouth and 12 m. by rail from the port of Guanta, which has superseded the incommodious river port in the trade of this district. Pop. (est. 1904) 13,000. Built on the border of a low plain and having a mean annual temperature of 82° F., the town has the reputation of being unhealthy. There are salt works and important coal deposits in its vicinity, the latter at Naricual and Capiricual, 12 m. distant by rail. Though the adjacent country is fertile, its prosperity has greatly declined, and the exports of coffee, sugar, cacao and forest products are much less important than formerly. The town dates from 1637, when it was located at the foot of the Cerro Santo and was called Nueva Barcelona; it reached a state of much prosperity and commercial importance before the end of the century. The War of Independence, however, and the chronic political disorders that followed nearly ruined its industries and trade.

BARCELONA, a town and port in Venezuela, is the capital of the state of Bermudez, located on the Neveri River, 3 miles from its mouth and 12 miles by rail from the port of Guanta, which has replaced the inconvenient river port for trade in this area. Population (est. 1904) is 13,000. Built on the edge of a low plain and with an average annual temperature of 82°F, the town is known for being unhealthy. There are salt works and significant coal deposits nearby, with the latter found at Naricual and Capiricual, 12 miles away by rail. Although the surrounding area is fertile, the town's prosperity has significantly declined, and the exports of coffee, sugar, cacao, and forest products are much less important than they used to be. The town was established in 1637 at the foot of Cerro Santo and was originally named Nueva Barcelona; it experienced considerable prosperity and commercial importance before the end of the century. However, the War of Independence and the ongoing political turmoil that followed nearly destroyed its industries and trade.

BARCELONNETTE, a town in the department of Basses-Alpes, in the S.E. of France. Pop. (1906) 2075. It is built at a height of 3717 ft. on the right bank of the Ubaye river, on which it is the most important place. It is situated in a wide and very fertile valley, and is surrounded by many villas, built by natives who have made their fortune in Mexico, and are locally known as les Américains. The town itself is mainly composed of a long street (flanked by two others), which is really the road from Grenoble to Cuneo over the Col de l'Argentière (6545 ft.). The only remarkable buildings in the town are a striking clock-tower of the 15th century (the remains of a Franciscan convent) and the Musée Chabrand, which contains a very complete collection of birds, both European and extra-European.

BARCELONNETTE, a town in the Basses-Alpes department in southeastern France. Population (1906) 2075. It's located at an elevation of 3717 ft. on the right bank of the Ubaye River, where it serves as the most significant place. The town is situated in a spacious and very fertile valley, surrounded by many villas built by locals who made their fortunes in Mexico, known locally as les Américains. The town itself mainly consists of a long street (flanked by two others), which serves as the road from Grenoble to Cuneo over the Col de l'Argentière (6545 ft.). The only notable buildings in town are an impressive clock tower from the 15th century (the remnants of a Franciscan convent) and the Musée Chabrand, which features a comprehensive collection of birds, both European and non-European.

Refounded in 1231 by Raymond Bérenger IV., count of Provence (he was of the family of the counts of Barcelona, whence the name of the town he rebuilt), Barcelonnette passed to Savoy in 1388 (formal cession in 1419), and in 1713 by the treaty of Utrecht was ceded to France in exchange for the valleys of Exilles, Fénestrelles, and Château Dauphin (Casteldelfino). It was the birth-place of J. A. Manuel (1775-1827), the well-known Liberal orator at the time of the Restoration of 1815, after whom the principal square of the town is named.

Refounded in 1231 by Raymond Bérenger IV, the count of Provence (who was part of the family of the counts of Barcelona, from whom the name of the town he rebuilt comes), Barcelonnette became part of Savoy in 1388 (with a formal cession in 1419), and was ceded to France in 1713 by the Treaty of Utrecht in exchange for the valleys of Exilles, Fénestrelles, and Château Dauphin (Casteldelfino). It was the birthplace of J. A. Manuel (1775-1827), a well-known Liberal speaker during the Restoration of 1815, after whom the main square of the town is named.

See F. Arnaud, Barcelonnette et ses environs (Guide du C. A. F.) (1898), and La Vallée de Barcelonnette (1900).

See F. Arnaud, Barcelonnette et ses environs (Guide du C. A. F.) (1898), and La Vallée de Barcelonnette (1900).

(W. A. B. C.)

(W. A. B. C.)

BARCLAY, ALEXANDER (c. 1476-1552), British poet, was born about 1476. His nationality is matter of dispute, but William Bulleyn, who was a native of Ely, and probably knew him when he was in the monastery there, asserts that he was born "beyonde the cold river of Twede"; moreover, the spelling of his name and the occasional Scottish words in his vocabulary point to a northern origin. His early life was spent at Croydon, but it is not certain whether he was educated at Oxford or Cambridge. It may be presumed that he took his degree, as he uses the title of "Syr" in his translation of Sallust, and in his will he is called doctor of divinity. From the numerous incidental references in his works, and from his knowledge of European literature, it may be inferred that he spent some time abroad. Thomas Cornish, suffragan bishop in the diocese of Bath and Wells, and provost of Oriel College, Oxford, from 1493 to 1507, appointed him chaplain of the college of St Mary Ottery, Devonshire. Here he translated Sebastian Brant's Ship of Fools, and even introduced his neighbours into the satire:—

BARCLAY, ALEXANDER (c. 1476-1552), British poet, was born around 1476. His nationality is debated, but William Bulleyn, who was from Ely and likely knew him while he was at the monastery there, claims he was born "beyond the cold river of Tweed." Additionally, the way his name is spelled and occasional Scottish words in his vocabulary suggest he came from the north. He spent his early life in Croydon, but it's unclear if he was educated at Oxford or Cambridge. It's assumed he earned a degree since he uses the title "Syr" in his translation of Sallust, and in his will, he is referred to as a doctor of divinity. From the many references in his works and his knowledge of European literature, it's likely he spent some time abroad. Thomas Cornish, who was a suffragan bishop in the diocese of Bath and Wells and provost of Oriel College, Oxford, from 1493 to 1507, appointed him chaplain of St Mary Ottery College in Devonshire. There, he translated Sebastian Brant's Ship of Fools, even incorporating his neighbors into the satire:—

"For if one can flatter, and beare a Hauke on his fist,

"For if one can flatter and hold a hawk on his fist,

He shall be parson of Honington or Cist."

He will be the parish priest of Honington or Cist.

The death of his patron in 1513 apparently put an end to his connexion with the west, and he became a monk in the Benedictine monastery of Ely. In this retreat he probably wrote his eclogues, but in 1520 "Maistre Barkleye, the Blacke Monke and Poete" was desired to devise "histoires and convenient raisons to florisshe the buildings and banquet house withal" at the meeting between Henry VIII. and Francis I. at the Field of the Cloth of Gold. He at length became a Franciscan monk of Canterbury. It is presumed that he conformed with the change of religion, for he retained under Edward VI. the livings of Great Baddow, Essex, and of Wokey, Somerset, which he had received in 1546, and was presented in 1552 by the dean and chapter of Canterbury to the rectory of All Hallows, Lombard Street, London. He died shortly after this last preferment at Croydon, Surrey, where he was buried on the 10th of June 1552. All the evidence in Barclay's own work goes to prove that he was sincere in his reproof of contemporary follies and vice, and the gross accusations which John Bale[1] brings against his moral character may be put down to his hatred of Barclay's cloth.

The death of his patron in 1513 seemingly ended his connection with the west, and he became a monk at the Benedictine monastery of Ely. During this time, he likely wrote his eclogues, but in 1520, "Maistre Barkleye, the Black Monk and Poet" was asked to come up with "stories and suitable reasons to decorate the buildings and banquet hall" at the meeting between Henry VIII and Francis I at the Field of the Cloth of Gold. Eventually, he became a Franciscan monk in Canterbury. It’s believed that he adapted to the change in religion, as he kept the positions of Great Baddow, Essex, and Wokey, Somerset, which he received in 1546, during Edward VI's reign. In 1552, the dean and chapter of Canterbury presented him with the rectory of All Hallows, Lombard Street, London. He died shortly after this last appointment in Croydon, Surrey, where he was buried on June 10, 1552. All the evidence in Barclay's own work indicates that he was genuine in his criticism of contemporary follies and vices, and the harsh accusations made against his moral character by John Bale may be attributed to his disdain for Barclay's cloth.

The Ship of Fools was as popular in its English dress as it had been in Germany. It was the starting-point of a new satirical literature. In itself a product of the medieval conception of the fool who figured so largely in the Shrovetide and other pageants, it differs entirely from the general allegorical satires of the preceding centuries. The figures are no longer abstractions; they are concrete examples of the folly of the bibliophile who collects books but learns nothing from them, of the evil judge who takes bribes to favour the guilty, of the old fool whom time merely strengthens in his folly, of those who are eager to follow the fashions, of the priests who spend their time in church telling "gestes" of Robin Hood and so forth. The spirit of the book reflects the general transition between allegory and narrative, morality and drama. The Narrenschiff of Sebastian Brant was essentially German in conception and treatment, but his hundred and thirteen types of fools possessed, nevertheless, universal interest. It was in reality sins and vices, however, rather than follies that came under his censure, and this didactic temper was reflected in Barclay. The book appeared in 1494 with woodcuts said to have been devised and perhaps partly executed by Brant himself. In these illustrations, which gave an impulse to the production of "enblems" and were copied in the English version, there appears a humour quite absent from the text. In the Latin elegiacs of the Stultifera Navis (1497) of Jacob Locher the book was read throughout Europe. Barclay's The Shyp of Folys of the Worlde was first printed by Richard Pynson in 1509. He says he translated "oute of Laten, Frenche, and Doche," but he seems to have been most familiar with the Latin version. He used a good deal of freedom in his translation, "sometyme addynge, sometyme detractinge and takinge away suche thinges as semeth me necessary and superflue." The fools are given a local colour, and Barclay appears as the unsparing satirist of the social evils of his time. At the end of nearly every section he adds an envoi of his own to drive home the moral more surely. The poem is written in the ordinary Chaucerian stanza, and in language which is more modern than the common literary English of his day.

The Ship of Fools was just as popular in English as it had been in Germany. It marked the beginning of a new kind of satirical literature. While it originated from the medieval idea of the fool, featured prominently in Shrovetide and other festivals, it completely differs from the typical allegorical satires of previous centuries. The characters are no longer just abstract ideas; they're specific examples of foolishness like the book lover who collects books without learning from them, the corrupt judge who takes bribes to help the guilty, the old fool who only becomes more foolish with time, those who eagerly follow trends, and priests who spend their time in church recounting stories of Robin Hood, among others. The overall tone of the book captures the shift between allegory and narrative, morality and drama. Sebastian Brant's Narrenschiff was fundamentally German in its ideas and style, yet his one hundred thirteen types of fools still held universal appeal. However, it was sins and vices, rather than mere folly, that he criticized, and this moralizing mindset also influenced Barclay. The book was published in 1494 with woodcuts that are said to have been designed and possibly partially created by Brant himself. These illustrations, which inspired the production of "emblems" and were reproduced in the English edition, feature a humor that's largely absent from the text. Jacob Locher's Stultifera Navis (1497) was read all over Europe. Barclay's The Shyp of Folys of the Worlde was first printed by Richard Pynson in 1509. He claims to have translated it "from Latin, French, and Dutch," but he seems to have been most comfortable with the Latin version. He exercised considerable freedom in his translation, "sometimes adding, sometimes removing, and omitting things he deemed necessary or superfluous." The fools were given a local flavor, and Barclay emerged as a relentless critic of the social issues of his time. At the end of nearly every section, he adds his own envoi to emphasize the moral more effectively. The poem is written in the typical Chaucerian stanza and in language that's more contemporary than the standard literary English of his era.

Certayne Ecloges of Alexander Barclay, Priest, written in his youth, were probably printed as early as 1513, although the earliest extant edition is that in John Cawood's reprint (1570) of the Ship of Fools. They form, with the exception of Henryson's Robin and Makyn, the earliest examples of the English pastoral. The first three eclogues, in the form of dialogues between Coridon and Cornix, were borrowed from the Miseriae Curialium of Aeneas Sylvius Piccolomini (Pope Pius II.), and contain an eulogy of John Alcock, bishop of Ely, the founder of Jesus College, Cambridge. The fourth is based on Mantuan's eclogue, De consuetudine divitum erga poetas, with large additions. It contains the "Descrypcion of the towre of Virtue and Honour," an elegy on Sir Edward Howard, lord high admiral of England, who perished in the attack on the French fleet in the harbour of Brest in 1513. The fifth, printed by Wynkyn de Worde, also without date, is entitled the "Fyfte Eglog of Alexandre Barclay of the Cytezen and the uplondyshman" and is also based on Mantuan. Two shepherds, Amintas and Faustus, discuss the familiar theme of the respective merits of town and country life, and relate a quaint fable of the origin of the different classes of society. Barclay's pastorals contain many pictures of rustic life as he knew it. He describes for instance the Sunday games in the village, football, and the struggle for food at great feasts; [v.03 p.0394]but his eclogues were, like his Italian models, also satires on social evils. The shepherds are rustics of the Colin Clout type, and discuss the follies and corruptions around them. Barclay had, however, no sympathy with the anti-clerical diatribes of John Skelton, whom he more than once attacks. Bale mentions an Anti-Skeltonum which is lost. His other works are:—The Castell of Laboure (Wynkyn de Worde, 1506), from the French of Pierre Gringoire; the Introductory to write and to pronounce Frenche (Robert Copland, 1521); The Myrrour of Good Maners (Richard Pynson, not dated), a translation of the De quatuor virtutibus of Dominicus Mancinus; Cronycle compyled in Latyn by the renowned Sallust (Richard Pynson, no date), a translation of the Bellum Jugurthinum, The Lyfe of the glorious Martyr Saynt George (R. Pynson, c. 1530). The Lyfe of Saynte Thomas, and Haython's Cronycle, both printed by Pynson, are also attributed to Barclay, but on very doubtful grounds.

Certayne Ecloges of Alexander Barclay, Priest, written in his youth, were likely printed as early as 1513, although the earliest existing edition is John Cawood's reprint (1570) of the Ship of Fools. They are among the earliest examples of English pastoral poetry, except for Henryson's Robin and Makyn. The first three eclogues, presented as dialogues between Coridon and Cornix, were taken from the Miseriae Curialium of Aeneas Sylvius Piccolomini (Pope Pius II.) and include praise for John Alcock, bishop of Ely, founder of Jesus College, Cambridge. The fourth is based on Mantuan's eclogue, De consuetudine divitum erga poetas, with substantial additions. It features the "Description of the Tower of Virtue and Honour," an elegy for Sir Edward Howard, lord high admiral of England, who died while attacking the French fleet in the harbor of Brest in 1513. The fifth, printed by Wynkyn de Worde, also undated, is titled "The Fifth Eclog of Alexandre Barclay of the Citizen and the Countryman" and is also based on Mantuan. Two shepherds, Amintas and Faustus, discuss the familiar theme of the advantages of city versus country life, sharing a charming fable about the origins of different social classes. Barclay's pastorals offer many glimpses of rural life as he experienced it. For instance, he describes Sunday games in the village, football, and the struggle for food at large feasts; [v.03 p.0394] but like his Italian influences, his eclogues are also critiques of social problems. The shepherds are rustic characters of the Colin Clout type, discussing the foolishness and corruption around them. However, Barclay did not share the anti-clerical views of John Skelton, whom he criticizes repeatedly. Bale mentions an Anti-Skeltonum which is now lost. His other works include: The Castell of Laboure (Wynkyn de Worde, 1506), from the French of Pierre Gringoire; Introductory to Write and to Pronounce Frenche (Robert Copland, 1521); The Myrrour of Good Maners (Richard Pynson, undated), a translation of the De quatuor virtutibus of Dominicus Mancinus; Cronycle compyled in Latyn by the renowned Sallust (Richard Pynson, date unknown), a translation of the Bellum Jugurthinum, The Lyfe of the Glorious Martyr Saynt George (R. Pynson, c. 1530). The Lyfe of Saynte Thomas, and Haython's Cronycle, both printed by Pynson, are also attributed to Barclay, but with considerable doubt.

See T. H. Jamieson's edition of the Ship of Fools (Edinburgh, 1874), which contains an account of the author and a bibliography of his works; and J. W. Fairholt's edition of The Cytezen and Uplondyshman (Percy Soc. 1847), which includes large extracts from the other eclogues; also Zarncke's edition of Brant (Leipzig, 1854); and Dr Fedor Fraustadt, Über das Verhältnis von Barclays Ship of Fools zu den lateinischen, französischen und deutschen Quellen (1894). A prose version of Locher's Stultifera Navis, by Henry Watson, was printed by Wynkyn de Worde in 1518.

See T. H. Jamieson's edition of the Ship of Fools (Edinburgh, 1874), which includes a biography of the author and a bibliography of his works; and J. W. Fairholt's edition of The Cytezen and Uplondyshman (Percy Soc. 1847), which features extensive excerpts from the other eclogues; also Zarncke's edition of Brant (Leipzig, 1854); and Dr. Fedor Fraustadt's Über das Verhältnis von Barclays Ship of Fools zu den lateinischen, französischen und deutschen Quellen (1894). A prose version of Locher's Stultifera Navis, by Henry Watson, was published by Wynkyn de Worde in 1518.

[1] Script. Ill. Maj. Brit. (1557, Cent. ix. No. 66).

[1] Script. Ill. Maj. Brit. (1557, Cent. ix. No. 66).

BARCLAY, JOHN (1582-1621), Scottish satirist and Latin poet, was born, on the 28th of January 1582, at Pont-à-Mousson, where his father William Barclay held the chair of civil law. His mother was a Frenchwoman of good family. His early education was obtained at the Jesuit College. While there, at the age of nineteen, he wrote a commentary on the Thebaid of Statius. In 1603 he crossed with his father to London. Barclay had persistently maintained his Scottish nationality in his French surroundings, and probably found in James's accession an opportunity which he would not let slip. He did not remain long in England, where he is supposed to have published the first part of his Satyricon, for in 1605 when a second edition of that book appeared in Paris, he was there, having already spent some time in Angers, and being now the husband of a French girl, Louise Debonaire. He returned to London with his wife in 1606, and there published his Sylvae, a collection of Latin poems. In the following year the second part of the Satyricon appeared in Paris. Barclay remained on in London till 1616. In 1609 he edited the De Potestate Papae, an anti-papal treatise by his father, who had died in the preceding year, and in 1611 he issued an Apologia or "third part" of the Satyricon, in answer to the attacks of the Jesuits and others who were probably embittered by the tone of the earlier parts of the satire. A so-called "fourth part," with the title of Icon Animorum, appeared in 1614. James I. is said to have been attracted by his scholarship, but particulars of this, or of his life in London generally, are not available. In 1616 he went to Rome, for some reason unexplained, and there resided till his death on the 15th of August 1621. He appears to have been on better terms with the Church and notably with Bellarmine; for in 1617 he issued, from a press at Cologne, a Paraenesis ad Sectarios, an attack on the position of Protestantism. The literary effort of his closing years was his best-known work the Argenis, completed about a fortnight before his death, which has been said to have been hastened by poison. The romance was printed in Paris in the same year.

BARCLAY, JOHN (1582-1621), Scottish satirist and Latin poet, was born on January 28, 1582, in Pont-à-Mousson, where his father, William Barclay, taught civil law. His mother was a Frenchwoman from a respectable family. He received his early education at a Jesuit College. While there, at the age of nineteen, he wrote a commentary on the Thebaid by Statius. In 1603, he traveled to London with his father. Barclay consistently asserted his Scottish identity in his French environment and likely saw James's accession as an opportunity he wouldn't pass up. He didn't stay long in England, where he is thought to have published the first part of his Satyricon, because by 1605, when a second edition of that book was published in Paris, he was there, having already spent some time in Angers and being married to a French woman, Louise Debonaire. He returned to London with his wife in 1606 and published his Sylvae, a collection of Latin poems. The following year, the second part of the Satyricon came out in Paris. Barclay stayed in London until 1616. In 1609, he edited the De Potestate Papae, an anti-papal treatise by his father, who had died the year before, and in 1611, he published an Apologia or "third part" of the Satyricon, in response to critiques from the Jesuits and others likely upset by the tone of the earlier parts of the satire. A so-called "fourth part," titled Icon Animorum, was published in 1614. James I is said to have been drawn to his scholarly work, but details about this or his life in London in general are scarce. In 1616, he went to Rome for reasons that remain unclear and lived there until his death on August 15, 1621. He seems to have had a better relationship with the Church, notably with Bellarmine; in 1617, he published, from a press in Cologne, a Paraenesis ad Sectarios, which criticized Protestantism. The literary effort of his final years was his most famous work, the Argenis, completed about two weeks before his death, which some say was hastened by poison. The novel was printed in Paris the same year.

Barclay's contemporary reputation as a writer was of the highest; by his strict scholarship and graceful style he has deserved the praise of modern students. The Satyricon, a severe satire on the Jesuits, is modelled on Petronius and catches his lightness of touch, though it shows little or nothing of the tone of its model, or of the unhesitating severity and coarseness of the humanistic satire of Barclay's age. The Argenis is a long romance, with a monitory purpose on the dangers of political intrigue, probably suggested to him by his experiences of the league in France, and by the catholic plot in England after James's accession. The work has been praised by all parties; and it enjoyed for more than a century after his death a remarkable popularity. Most of the innumerable editions are supplied with a key to the characters and names of the story. Thus Aneroëtus is Clement VIII; Arx non eversa is the Tower of London; Hippophilus and Radirobanes are the names of the king of Spain; Hyanisbe is Queen Elizabeth; Mergania, by an easy anagram, is Germany; Usinulca, by another, is Calvin. The book is of historical importance in the development of 17th century romance, including especially Fénelon's Télémaque. Ben Jonson appears, from an entry at Stationers' Hall on the 2nd of October 1623, to have intended to make a translation. Barclay's shorter poems, in two books, were printed in the Delitiae Poetarum Scotorum (Amsterdam, 1637, i. pp. 76-136). In the dedication, to Prince Charles of England, he refers to his earlier publication, the Sylvae.

Barclay's reputation as a writer in his time was exceptional. Through his meticulous scholarship and elegant style, he earned the admiration of modern readers. The Satyricon, a sharp satire on the Jesuits, is inspired by Petronius and captures his lightness, although it lacks the tone and the unflinching harshness characteristic of the satirical works of Barclay's time. The Argenis is a lengthy romance that serves as a warning about the dangers of political intrigue, likely influenced by his experiences with the league in France and the Catholic plot in England after James I took the throne. This work received praise from various factions and enjoyed significant popularity for over a century after his death. Most of the countless editions come with a guide to the characters and names in the story. For instance, Aneroëtus represents Clement VIII; Arx non eversa refers to the Tower of London; Hippophilus and Radirobanes are the names for the king of Spain; Hyanisbe stands for Queen Elizabeth; Mergania is an easy anagram for Germany; and Usinulca is Calvin. The book holds historical significance in the evolution of 17th-century romance, particularly influencing works like Fénelon's Télémaque. Ben Jonson seems to have intended to create a translation, as indicated by an entry at Stationers' Hall on October 2, 1623. Barclay's shorter poems, compiled in two volumes, were published in the Delitiae Poetarum Scotorum (Amsterdam, 1637, i. pp. 76-136). In the dedication to Prince Charles of England, he references his earlier work, the Sylvae.

The best account of Barclay is the preface by Jules Dukas in his bibliography of the Satyricon (Paris, 1889). This supersedes the life in Bayle's Dictionary, which had been the sole authority. A "fifth part" of the Satyricon appears in most of the editions, by Alethophilus (Claude Morisot). For the Argenis, see the dissertations by Léon Boucher (Paris, 1874), and Dupond (Paris, 1875). The Icon Animorum was Englished by Thomas May in 1631 (The Mirrour of Mindes, or Barclay's Icon Animorum). Barclay's works have never been collected.

The best account of Barclay is the preface by Jules Dukas in his bibliography of the Satyricon (Paris, 1889). This replaces the biography in Bayle's Dictionary, which had been the only reference. A "fifth part" of the Satyricon is included in most editions, by Alethophilus (Claude Morisot). For the Argenis, check out the dissertations by Léon Boucher (Paris, 1874) and Dupond (Paris, 1875). The Icon Animorum was translated into English by Thomas May in 1631 (The Mirrour of Mindes, or Barclay's Icon Animorum). Barclay's works have never been compiled.

BARCLAY, JOHN (1734-1798), Scottish divine, was born in Perthshire and died at Edinburgh. He graduated at St Andrews, and after being licensed became assistant to the parish minister of Errol in Perthshire. Owing to differences with the minister, he left in 1763 and was appointed assistant to Antony Dow of Fettercairn, Kincardine. In this parish he became very popular, but his opinions failed to give satisfaction to his presbytery. In 1772 he was rejected as successor to Dow, and was even refused by the presbytery the testimonials requisite in order to obtain another living. The refusal of the presbytery was sustained by the General Assembly, and Barclay thereupon left the Scottish church and founded congregations at Sauchyburn, Edinburgh and London. His followers were sometimes called Bereans, because they regulated their conduct by a diligent study of the Scriptures (Acts xvii. 11). They hold a modified form of Calvinism.

BARCLAY, JOHN (1734-1798), Scottish minister, was born in Perthshire and died in Edinburgh. He graduated from St Andrews and, after being licensed, became the assistant to the parish minister of Errol in Perthshire. Due to disagreements with the minister, he left in 1763 and was appointed as the assistant to Antony Dow of Fettercairn, Kincardine. In this parish, he became quite popular, but his views did not satisfy his presbytery. In 1772, he was rejected as Dow's successor and was even denied the necessary testimonials from the presbytery to secure another position. The presbytery's refusal was upheld by the General Assembly, and Barclay then left the Scottish church to establish congregations in Sauchyburn, Edinburgh, and London. His followers were sometimes called Bereans because they based their actions on careful study of the Scriptures (Acts xvii. 11). They adhere to a modified version of Calvinism.

His works, which include many hymns and paraphrases of the psalms, and a book called Without Faith, without God, were edited by J. Thomson and D. Macmillan, with a memoir (1852).

His works, which include many hymns and adaptations of the psalms, as well as a book titled Without Faith, without God, were edited by J. Thomson and D. Macmillan, along with a memoir (1852).

BARCLAY, ROBERT (1648-1690), one of the most eminent writers belonging to the Society of Friends, or Quakers, was born in 1648 at Gordonstown in Morayshire. His father had served under Gustavus Adolphus, and pursued a somewhat tortuous course through the troubles of the civil war. Robert was sent to finish his education in Paris, and it appears he was at one time inclined to accept the Roman Catholic faith. In 1667, however, he followed the example of his father, and joined the recently-formed Society of Friends. In 1670 he married a Quaker lady, Christian Mollison of Aberdeen. He was an ardent theological student, a man of warm feelings and considerable mental powers, and he soon came prominently forward as the leading apologist of the new doctrine, winning his spurs in a controversy with one William Mitchell. The publication of fifteen Theses Theologiae (1676) led to a public discussion in Aberdeen, each side claiming a victory. The most prominent of the Theses was that bearing on immediate revelation, in which the superiority of this inner light to reason or scripture is sharply stated. His greatest work, An Apology for the True Christian Divinity, was published in Latin at Amsterdam in 1676, and was an elaborate statement of the grounds for holding certain fundamental positions laid down in the Theses. It was translated by its author into English in 1678, and is "one of the most impressive theological writings of the century." It breathes a large tolerance and is still perhaps the most important manifesto of the Quaker Society. Barclay experienced to some extent the persecutions inflicted on the new society, and was several times thrown into prison. He travelled extensively in Europe (once with Penn and George Fox), and had several interviews with Elizabeth, princess palatine. In later years he had much influence with James II., who as duke of York had given to twelve members of the society a patent of the province of East New Jersey, Barclay being made governor (1682-88). He is said to have visited James with a view to making terms of accommodation with William of Orange, [v.03 p.0395]whose arrival was then imminent. He died on the 3rd of October 1690.

BARCLAY, ROBERT (1648-1690), one of the most distinguished writers connected to the Society of Friends, or Quakers, was born in 1648 in Gordonstown, Morayshire. His father served under Gustavus Adolphus and navigated a complicated path during the civil war troubles. Robert was sent to Paris to complete his education, and at one point seemed interested in converting to Roman Catholicism. However, in 1667, he followed his father's example and joined the recently established Society of Friends. In 1670, he married Christian Mollison, a Quaker from Aberdeen. He was a passionate theological student, with deep emotions and significant intellectual abilities, and soon became the leading defender of the new doctrine, gaining recognition in a debate with William Mitchell. The release of his fifteen Theses Theologiae (1676) resulted in a public discussion in Aberdeen, with both sides claiming victory. The most significant of the Theses addressed immediate revelation, clearly stating the superiority of this inner light over reason or scripture. His most important work, An Apology for the True Christian Divinity, was published in Latin in Amsterdam in 1676, providing a detailed argument for certain foundational positions established in the Theses. The author translated it into English in 1678, and it is regarded as "one of the most impressive theological writings of the century." It embodies a strong sense of tolerance and remains one of the most crucial manifestos of the Quaker Society. Barclay also faced some of the persecutions endured by the new society and was imprisoned several times. He traveled extensively around Europe (once alongside Penn and George Fox) and had several meetings with Elizabeth, princess palatine. In his later years, he had considerable influence with James II, who, as duke of York, granted a patent of the province of East New Jersey to twelve members of the society, with Barclay being appointed governor (1682-88). It is said that he visited James to negotiate terms of accommodation with William of Orange, whose arrival was imminent. He passed away on October 3, 1690.

BARCLAY, WILLIAM (1546-1608) Scottish jurist, was born in Aberdeenshire in 1546. Educated at Aberdeen University, he went to France in 1573, and studied law under Cujas, at Bourges, where he took his doctor's degree. Charles III., duke of Lorraine, appointed him professor of civil law in the newly-founded university of Pont-à-Mousson, and also created him counsellor of state and master of requests. In 1603, however, he was obliged to quit France, having incurred the enmity of the Jesuits, through his opposition to their proposal to admit his son John (q.v.) a member of their society. Returning to England, he was offered considerable preferment by King James on condition of becoming a member of the Church of England. This offer he refused, and returned to France in 1604, when he was appointed professor of civil law in the university of Angers. He died at Angers in 1608. His principal works were De Regno et Regali Potestate, &c. (Paris, 1600), a strenuous defence of the rights of kings, in which he refutes the doctrines of George Buchanan, "Junius Brutus" (Hubert Languet) and Jean Boucher; and De Potestate Papae, &c. (London, 1609), in opposition to the usurpation of temporal powers by the pope, which called forth the celebrated reply of Cardinal Bellarmine; also commentaries on some of the titles of the Pandects.

BARCLAY, WILLIAM (1546-1608) Scottish jurist, was born in Aberdeenshire in 1546. He studied at Aberdeen University and went to France in 1573, where he studied law under Cujas in Bourges, earning his doctorate. Charles III, Duke of Lorraine, appointed him professor of civil law at the newly founded university of Pont-à-Mousson, and he was also made a counselor of state and master of requests. However, in 1603, he had to leave France due to the hostility of the Jesuits, which arose from his opposition to their proposal to have his son John (q.v.) join their society. After returning to England, he was offered a prominent position by King James on the condition that he would join the Church of England. He turned down the offer and went back to France in 1604, where he became a professor of civil law at the university of Angers. He passed away in Angers in 1608. His main works included De Regno et Regali Potestate, & c. (Paris, 1600), a strong defense of royal rights, in which he refutes the ideas of George Buchanan, "Junius Brutus" (Hubert Languet), and Jean Boucher; and De Potestate Papae, & c. (London, 1609), which opposed the pope's claims to temporal power and sparked a famous response from Cardinal Bellarmine, as well as commentaries on some of the titles of the Pandects.

BARCLAY DE TOLLY, MICHAEL ANDREAS, called by the Russians Michael, Prince Bogdanovich (1761-1818), Russian field marshal, was born in Livonia in 1761. He was a descendant of a Scottish family which had settled in Russia in the 17th century. He entered the Russian army at an early age. In 1788-1789 he served against the Turks, in 1790 and 1794 against the Swedes and Poles. He became colonel in 1798 and major-general in 1799. In the war of 1806 against Napoleon, Barclay took a distinguished part in the battle of Pultusk and was wounded at Eylau, where his conduct won him promotion to the rank of lieut.-general. In 1808 he commanded against the Swedes in Finland, and in 1809 by a rapid and daring march over the frozen Gulf of Bothnia he surprised and seized Umeo. In 1810 he was made minister of war, and he retained the post until 1813. In 1812 Barclay was given command of one of the armies operating against Napoleon. There was very keen opposition to the appointment of a foreigner as commander-in-chief, and after he was defeated at Smolensk the outcry was so great that he resigned his command and took a subordinate place under the veteran Kutusov. Barclay was present at Borodino, but left the army soon afterwards. In 1813 he was re-employed in the field and took part in the campaign in Germany. After the battle of Bautzen he was reinstated as commander-in-chief of the Russian forces, and in this capacity he served at Dresden, Kulm and Leipzig. After the last battle he was made a count. He took part in the invasion of France in 1814 and at Paris received the baton of a field marshal. In 1815 he was again commander-in-chief of the Russian army which invaded France, and he was made a prince at the close of the war. He died at Insterburg in Prussia on the 14th (16th) of May 1818.

BARCLAY DE TOLLY, MICHAEL ANDREAS, known to the Russians as Michael, Prince Bogdanovich (1761-1818), was a Russian field marshal born in Livonia in 1761. He came from a Scottish family that had settled in Russia during the 17th century. He joined the Russian army when he was young. From 1788 to 1789, he fought against the Turks, and in 1790 and 1794, he took on the Swedes and Poles. He became a colonel in 1798 and a major-general in 1799. During the 1806 war against Napoleon, Barclay played a key role in the Battle of Pultusk and was injured at Eylau, where his actions earned him a promotion to lieutenant-general. In 1808, he led operations against the Swedes in Finland, and in 1809, he made a bold and quick march across the frozen Gulf of Bothnia, surprising and capturing Umeo. In 1810, he was appointed minister of war, holding that position until 1813. In 1812, Barclay was given command of one of the armies fighting against Napoleon. There was significant opposition to his appointment as the commander-in-chief because he was a foreigner, and after his defeat at Smolensk, the backlash was so intense that he resigned and took a subordinate role under the experienced Kutusov. Barclay was present at Borodino but left the army shortly thereafter. In 1813, he was called back into service and participated in the campaign in Germany. After the Battle of Bautzen, he was restored as the commander-in-chief of the Russian forces and served in this role at Dresden, Kulm, and Leipzig. Following the last battle, he was awarded the title of count. He took part in the invasion of France in 1814 and received the baton of a field marshal in Paris. In 1815, he again served as the commander-in-chief of the Russian army during the invasion of France and was made a prince at the end of the war. He passed away in Insterburg, Prussia, on the 14th (16th) of May 1818.

BARCOCHEBAS, Bar-Cochab, or Bar Kokba ("son of a star"), the name given in Christian sources to one Simeon, the leader in the Jewish revolt against Rome in the time of Hadrian (A.D. 132-135). The name does not appear in the Roman historians. In Rabbinic sources he is called Bar (Ben) Coziba, "son of deceit," which perhaps reflects the later verdict of condemnation recorded after his failure (root כזב "to be false"). Cochab is, therefore, the name either of his father or of his home. But it is recorded that the Rabbi ‛Aqība (q.v.), who recognized him as Messiah, applied Num. xxiv. 17 to him, reading not Cochab ("a star"), but Cosiba ("goes forth from Jacob"); thus Bar-cochab is a Messianic title of the "man of Cozeba" (cf. Chron. iv. 22) whose original name was recalled by later Rabbis with sinister intention. At first the Romans paid little attention to the insurgents, who were able to strike coins in the name of Simeon, prince of Israel, and Eleazar the priest, and to persecute the Christians, who refused to join the revolt. But troops were collected and the various fortresses occupied by the Jews were successively reduced. The end came with the fall of Beth-thar (Bethar). Extraordinary stories were told of the prowess of Barcochebas and of the ordeals to which he subjected his soldiers in the way of training.

BARCOCHEBAS, Bar-Cochab, or Bar Kokhba ("son of a star"), is the name given in Christian sources to a man named Simeon, who led the Jewish revolt against Rome during Hadrian's reign (A.D. 132-135). This name doesn't show up in Roman histories. In Rabbinic texts, he is referred to as Bar (Ben) Coziba, meaning "son of deceit," which might reflect the later judgment of condemnation noted after his defeat (root כזב "to be false"). Cochab is probably the name of his father or his hometown. It's recorded that Rabbi ‛Aqíba (q.v.) recognized him as the Messiah and connected him to Num. xxiv. 17, interpreting it not as Cochab ("a star"), but as Cosiba ("goes forth from Jacob"); thus Bar-cochab becomes a Messianic title for the "man of Cozeba" (cf. Chron. iv. 22), whose original name was remembered by later Rabbis with negative implications. Initially, the Romans didn’t pay much attention to the rebels, allowing them to mint coins in the names of Simeon, prince of Israel, and Eleazar the priest, and to persecute Christians who refused to participate in the uprising. However, troops were gathered, and the various strongholds held by the Jews were gradually taken down. The conflict ended with the fall of Beth-thar (Bethar). There were incredible stories about Barcochebas’s military skills and the tough training he put his soldiers through.

See Eusebius H.E. iv. 6; Dio Cassius xix. 12-14; Schürer, Gesch. d. jüd. Volkes, 3rd ed. i. 682 ff.; Derenbourg, Hist. de la Palest. 423 ff. (distinguishes Barcochebas from Simeon); Schlattler, Gesch. Israels, 2nd ed. 303 ff.; articles Jews and Palestine, History; also art. s.v. "Bar Kokba" in Jewish Encyc. (S. Krauss).

See Eusebius H.E. iv. 6; Dio Cassius xix. 12-14; Schürer, Gesch. d. jüd. Volkes, 3rd ed. i. 682 ff.; Derenbourg, Hist. de la Palest. 423 ff. (distinguishes Barcochebas from Simeon); Schlattler, Gesch. Israels, 2nd ed. 303 ff.; articles Jews and Palestine, History; also art. s.v. "Bar Kokba" in Jewish Encyc. (S. Krauss).

BARD, a word of Celtic derivation (Gaelic baird, Cymric bardh, Irish bard) applied to the ancient Celtic poets, though the name is sometimes loosely used as synonymous with poet in general. So far as can be ascertained, the title bards, and some of the privileges peculiar to that class of poets, are to be found only among Celtic peoples. The name itself is not used by Caesar in his account of the manners and customs of Gaul and Britain, but he appears to ascribe the functions of the bards to a section of the Druids, with which class they seem to have been closely connected. Later Latin authors, such as Lucan (Phar. p. 447), Festus (De Verb. Sign. s.v.), and Ammianus Marcellinus (bk. xv.), used the term Bardi as the recognized title of the national poets or minstrels among the peoples of Gaul and Britain. In Gaul, however, the institution soon disappeared; the purely Celtic peoples were swept back by the waves of Latin and Teutonic conquest, and finally settled in Wales, Ireland, Brittany and the north of Scotland. There is clear evidence of the existence of bards in all these places, though the known relics belong almost entirely to Wales and Ireland, where the institution was more distinctively national. In Wales they formed an organized society, with hereditary rights and privileges. They were treated with the utmost respect and were exempt from taxes or military service. Their special duties were to celebrate the victories of their people and to sing hymns of praise to God. They thus gave poetic expression to the religious and national sentiments of the people, and therefore exercised a very powerful influence. The whole society of bards was regulated by laws, said to have been first distinctly formulated by Hywell Dha, and to have been afterwards revised by Gruffydd ap Conan. At stated intervals great festivals were held, at which the most famous bards from the various districts met and contended in song, the umpires being generally the princes and nobles. Even after the conquest of Wales, these congresses, or Eisteddfodau, as they were called (from the Welsh eistedd, to sit), continued to be summoned by royal commission, but from the reign of Elizabeth the custom has been allowed to fall into abeyance. They have not been since summoned by royal authority, but were revived about 1822, and are held regularly at the present time. In modern Welsh, a bard is a poet whose vocation has been recognized at an Eisteddfod. In Ireland also the bards were a distinct class with peculiar and hereditary privileges. They appear to have been divided into three great sections: the first celebrated victories and sang hymns of praise; the second chanted the laws of the nation; the third gave poetic genealogies and family histories. The Irish bards were held in high repute, and frequently were brought over to Wales to give instruction to the singers of that country.

BARD, a word derived from Celtic (Gaelic baird, Cymric bardh, Irish bard) refers to the ancient Celtic poets, although the term is sometimes loosely used to mean any poet. From what we can tell, the title bards and some unique privileges associated with this group of poets exist only among Celtic peoples. Caesar doesn't use the term in his writings about the customs and traditions of Gaul and Britain, but he seems to connect the roles of the bards to a part of the Druids, indicating a close relationship between the two groups. Later Latin writers like Lucan (Phar. p. 447), Festus (De Verb. Sign. s.v.), and Ammianus Marcellinus (bk. xv.) referred to the national poets or minstrels of the Gauls and Britons as Bardi. However, in Gaul, the institution eventually faded away; the Celtic peoples were overtaken by the forces of Latin and Teutonic invasions and ultimately settled in Wales, Ireland, Brittany, and northern Scotland. There is clear evidence of bards in all these areas, although most known remains are primarily from Wales and Ireland, where the institution was more distinctly national. In Wales, bards formed an organized society with hereditary rights and privileges. They were highly respected and exempted from taxes and military service. Their main roles were to celebrate their people's victories and to sing hymns of praise to God. They provided poetic expression for the religious and national feelings of the people, thus wielding significant influence. The entire bardic society was governed by laws that were said to have been first clearly defined by Hywell Dha and later revised by Gruffydd ap Conan. At regular intervals, grand festivals were organized where the most renowned bards from various regions gathered to compete in song, usually judged by princes and nobles. Even after the conquest of Wales, these gatherings, or Eisteddfodau, as they were called (from the Welsh eistedd, meaning to sit), continued to be held under royal commission, but this practice fell out of favor starting in Elizabeth's reign. They have not been called by royal authority since but were revived around 1822 and are now held regularly. In modern Welsh, a bard is a poet recognized for their craft at an Eisteddfod. Similarly, in Ireland, the bards were a distinct group with unique hereditary rights. They seemed to be divided into three main categories: the first celebrated victories and sang hymns of praise; the second recited the laws of the nation; the third provided poetic genealogies and family histories. The Irish bards were held in high esteem and were often invited to Wales to teach local singers.

In consequence, perhaps, of Lucan's having spoken of carmina bardi, the word bard began to be used, early in the 17th century, to designate any kind of a serious poet, whether lyric or epic, and is so employed by Shakespeare, Milton and Pope. On the other hand, in Lowland Scots it grew to be a term of contempt and reproach, as describing a class of frenzied vagabonds.

As a result, possibly because Lucan referred to carmina bardi, the term bard started being used in the early 17th century to refer to any serious poet, whether they wrote lyrics or epics, and this usage can be found in the works of Shakespeare, Milton, and Pope. Conversely, in Lowland Scots, it became a derogatory term, describing a group of crazed wanderers.

See Ed. Jones, Relics of the Welsh Bards (1784); Walker, Memoirs of the Irish Bards (1786); Owen Jones, Myvyrian Archaeology of Wales (3 vols., 1801-1807); W. F. Skene, Four Ancient Books of Wales (2 vols., 1868).

See Ed. Jones, Relics of the Welsh Bards (1784); Walker, Memoirs of the Irish Bards (1786); Owen Jones, Myvyrian Archaeology of Wales (3 vols., 1801-1807); W. F. Skene, Four Ancient Books of Wales (2 vols., 1868).

BARDAIṢĀN, an early teacher of Christianity in Mesopotamia, the writer of numerous Syriac works which have entirely perished[1] (with one possible exception, the Hymn of the Soul in the Acts of Thomas), and the founder of a school which was soon branded as heretical. According to the trustworthy Chronicle of Edessa, he was born in that city on the 11th Tammuz (July), A.D. 154. [v.03 p.0396]His parents were of rank and probably pagan; according to Barhebraeus, he was in youth a priest in a heathen temple at Mabbōg. Another probable tradition asserts that he shared the education of a royal prince who afterwards became king of Edessa—perhaps Abgar bar Manu, who reigned 202-217. He is said to have converted the prince to Christianity, and may have had an important share in christianizing the city. Epiphanius and Barhebraeus assert that he was first an orthodox Christian and afterwards an adherent of Valentinus; but Eusebius and the Armenian Moses of Chorene reverse the order, stating that in his later days he largely, but not completely, purged himself of his earlier errors. The earliest works attributed to him (by Eusebius and others) are polemical dialogues against Marcionism and other heresies; these were afterwards translated into Greek. He also wrote, probably under Caracalla, an apology for the Christian religion in a time of persecution. But his greatest title to fame was furnished by his hymns, which, according to St Ephrem, numbered 150 and were composed in imitation of the Davidic psalter. He thus became the father of Syriac hymnology, and from the favour enjoyed by his poems during the century and a half that intervened between him and St Ephrem we may conclude that he possessed original poetic genius. This would be clearly proved if (as is not unlikely) the beautiful Hymn of the Soul incorporated in the apocryphal Acts of Thomas could be regarded as proceeding from his pen; it is practically the only piece of real poetry in Syriac that has come down to us. Perhaps owing to the persecution under Caracalla mentioned above, Bardaiṣān for a time retreated into Armenia, and is said to have there preached Christianity with indifferent success, and also to have composed a history of the Armenian kings. Porphyry states that on one occasion at Edessa he interviewed an Indian deputation who had been sent to the Roman emperor, and questioned them as to the nature of Indian religion. He was undoubtedly a man of wide culture. He died (according to the patriarch Michael) in 222.

BARDAIṢĀN, an early teacher of Christianity in Mesopotamia, wrote many Syriac works that have completely vanished[1] (with one possible exception, the Hymn of the Soul in the Acts of Thomas), and founded a school that was soon labeled as heretical. According to the reliable Chronicle of Edessa, he was born in that city on the 11th Tammuz (July), A.D. 154. [v.03 p.0396]His parents were likely of high status and probably pagan; as per Barhebraeus, he was a priest in a pagan temple at Mabbōg during his youth. Another likely tradition claims that he was educated alongside a royal prince who later became the king of Edessa—possibly Abgar bar Manu, who ruled from 202-217. He is said to have converted the prince to Christianity and may have played a significant role in spreading the faith throughout the city. Epiphanius and Barhebraeus say he was initially an orthodox Christian and later followed Valentinus; however, Eusebius and the Armenian Moses of Chorene present the opposite, stating that in his later years he largely, but not entirely, rid himself of his earlier mistakes. The earliest works attributed to him (by Eusebius and others) are polemical dialogues against Marcionism and other heresies; these were later translated into Greek. He also wrote an apology for Christianity during a time of persecution, likely under Caracalla. His most significant contribution was his hymns, which, according to St. Ephrem, numbered 150 and were written in the style of the Davidic psalms. Thus, he became the father of Syriac hymnology, and the popularity of his poems in the century and a half leading up to St. Ephrem suggests that he had original poetic talent. This would be further demonstrated if (as seems possible) the beautiful Hymn of the Soul found in the apocryphal Acts of Thomas could be considered his work; it is virtually the only piece of true poetry in Syriac that has survived. Perhaps due to the aforementioned persecution under Caracalla, Bardaisan briefly retreated to Armenia and is said to have preached Christianity there with limited success, as well as writing a history of the Armenian kings. Porphyry mentions that at one point in Edessa, he met with an Indian delegation sent to the Roman emperor and asked them about Indian religion. He was undoubtedly a man of broad knowledge. He passed away (according to the patriarch Michael) in 222.

For our knowledge of Bardaiṣān's doctrine we are mainly dependent on the hostile witness of St Ephrem, and on statements by Greek writers who had no acquaintance with his works in their original form. His teaching had certain affinities with gnosticism. Thus he certainly denied the resurrection of the body; and so far as we can judge by the obscure quotations from his hymns furnished by St Ephrem he explained the origin of the world by a process of emanation from the supreme God whom he called "the Father of the living." On the other hand the dialogue known as the Book of the Laws of the Countries, which was written by a disciple and is quoted by Eusebius as a genuine exposition of the master's teaching—while it recognizes the influence of the celestial bodies over the body of man and throughout the material sphere and attributes to them a certain delegated authority[2]—upholds the freedom of the human will and can in the main be reconciled with orthodox Christian teaching. On this M. Nau has based his effort (see Une Biographie inédite de Bardesane l'astrologue, Paris, 1897; Le Livre des lois des pays, Paris, 1899) to clear Bardaiṣān of the reproach of gnosticism, maintaining that the charge of heresy arises from a misunderstanding of certain astrological speculations. It must be admitted that it is impossible to reconstruct Bardaiṣān's system from the few fragments remaining of his own work and therefore a certain verdict cannot be given. But the ancient testimony to the connexion of Bardaiṣān with Valentinianism is strong, and the dialogue probably represents a modification of Bardesanist teaching in the direction of orthodoxy. The later adherents of the school appear to have moved towards a Manichean dualism.

For our understanding of Bardaisan's beliefs, we mainly rely on the critical viewpoint of St. Ephrem and the comments from Greek writers who were unfamiliar with his works in their original language. His teachings shared some similarities with gnosticism. He definitely denied the resurrection of the body; and based on the unclear quotes from his hymns provided by St. Ephrem, he seemed to explain the creation of the world as an emanation from the supreme God, whom he referred to as "the Father of the living." Conversely, the dialogue known as the Book of the Laws of the Countries, written by a disciple and cited by Eusebius as an authentic representation of the master's teachings—though it acknowledges the influence of celestial bodies over human beings and the material world, granting them some level of delegated authority[2]—maintains the freedom of human will and can generally align with orthodox Christian beliefs. M. Nau has based his work (see Une Biographie inédite de Bardesane l'astrologue, Paris, 1897; Le Livre des lois des pays, Paris, 1899) on this idea, aiming to exonerate Bardaisan from the accusation of gnosticism, arguing that the heresy claim stems from a misunderstanding of some astrological theories. It must be acknowledged that we cannot fully reconstruct Bardaisan's system from the few remnants of his own work, so a definitive judgment can't be made. However, the ancient evidence linking Bardaisan to Valentinianism is strong, and the dialogue likely reflects a rewriting of Bardesanist teachings toward orthodoxy. Later followers of the school seem to have shifted toward a Manichean dualism.

The subject is exhaustively discussed in Hort's article "Bardaisan" in Dict. Christ. Biog., and a full collection of the ancient testimonies will be found in Harnack's Altchristliche Litteratur, vol. i. pp. 184 ff.

The topic is thoroughly covered in Hort's article "Bardaisan" in Dict. Christ. Biog., and you'll find a complete collection of the ancient testimonies in Harnack's Altchristliche Litteratur, vol. i. pp. 184 ff.

(N. M.)

(N. M.)

[1] The Book of the Laws of the Countries, referred to below, is the work of a disciple of Bardaiṣān.

[1] The Book of the Laws of the Countries, mentioned below, is by a follower of Bardaisan.

[2] Even Ephrem allows that Bardaiṣān was in principle a monotheist.

[2] Even Ephrem acknowledges that Bardaisan was fundamentally a monotheist.

BARDILI, CHRISTOPH GOTTFRIED (1761-1808), German philosopher, was born at Blaubeuren in Württemberg, and died at Stuttgart. His system has had little influence in Germany; Reinhold (q.v.) alone expounded it against the attacks of Fichte and Schelling. Yet in some respects his ideas opened the way for the later speculations of Schelling and Hegel. He dissented strongly from the Kantian distinction between matter and form of thought, and urged that philosophy should consider only thought in itself, pure thought, the ground or possibility of being. The fundamental principle of thought is, according to him, the law of identity; logical thinking is real thinking. The matter upon which thought operated is in itself indefinite and is rendered definite through the action of thought. Bardili worked out his idea in a one-sided manner. He held that thought has in itself no power of development, and ultimately reduced it to arithmetical computation. He published Grundriss der ersten Logik (Stuttgart, 1800); Über die Gesetze der Ideenassociation (Tübingen, 1796); Briefe über den Ursprung der Metaphysik (Altona, 1798); Philos. Elementarlehre (Landshut, 1802-1806); Beiträge zur Beurteilung des gegenwärtigen Zustandes der Vernunftlehre (Landshut, 1803).

BARDILI, CHRISTOPH GOTTFRIED (1761-1808), German philosopher, was born in Blaubeuren, Württemberg, and died in Stuttgart. His system hasn’t had much influence in Germany; only Reinhold (q.v.) defended it against the criticisms from Fichte and Schelling. However, in some ways, his ideas paved the way for later theories by Schelling and Hegel. He strongly disagreed with Kant’s distinction between matter and form of thought, arguing that philosophy should focus solely on thought itself—pure thought, the foundation or possibility of being. According to him, the core principle of thought is the law of identity; logical thinking is real thinking. The substance on which thought works is inherently indefinite and becomes definite through the process of thought. Bardili developed his ideas in a somewhat narrow way. He believed that thought lacks any power of development and ultimately reduced it to arithmetic computation. He published Grundriss der ersten Logik (Stuttgart, 1800); Über die Gesetze der Ideenassociation (Tübingen, 1796); Briefe über den Ursprung der Metaphysik (Altona, 1798); Philos. Elementarlehre (Landshut, 1802-1806); Beiträge zur Beurteilung des gegenwärtigen Zustandes der Vernunftlehre (Landshut, 1803).

See C. L. Michelet, Geschichte der letzten Systeme; J. E. Erdmann, Versuch einer Geschichte d. neu. Phil. Bd. iii. pt. i.; B's und Reinholds Briefwechsel.

See C. L. Michelet, History of the Recent Systems; J. E. Erdmann, Attempt at a History of Modern Philosophy Vol. iii. pt. i.; Correspondence of B. and Reinhold.

BARDOUX, AGÉNOR (1820-1897), French statesman, was a native of Bourges. Established as an advocate at Clermont, he did not hesitate to proclaim his republican sympathies. In 1871 he was elected deputy of the National Assembly, and re-elected in 1876 and in 1877. In the chamber he was president of the group of the left centre, standing strongly for the republic but against anti-clericalism. After the coup d'état of the 16th of May, he was one of the leaders of the "363." In the republican chamber elected after the 16th of May, he became minister of public instruction (December 1877), and proposed various republican laws, notably on compulsory primary education. He resigned in 1879. He was not re-elected in 1881, but in December 1882 was named senator for life. He wrote essays on Les Légistes et leur influence sur la société française (1878); Le Comte de Montlosier et le Gallicanisme (1881); and published in 1882 his Dix Années de vie politique.

BARDOUX, AGÉNOR (1820-1897), French statesman, was born in Bourges. He established himself as a lawyer in Clermont and didn't shy away from expressing his republican beliefs. In 1871, he was elected as a deputy to the National Assembly and was re-elected in 1876 and 1877. In the chamber, he served as president of the left-center group, strongly supporting the republic while opposing anti-clericalism. After the coup d'état on May 16, he became one of the leaders of the "363." In the republican chamber elected after May 16, he became the Minister of Public Instruction in December 1877 and proposed several republican laws, particularly on mandatory primary education. He resigned in 1879. Although he wasn't re-elected in 1881, he was appointed a life senator in December 1882. He wrote essays on Les Légistes et leur influence sur la société française (1878); Le Comte de Montlosier et le Gallicanisme (1881); and published his work Dix Années de vie politique in 1882.

BARDOWIEK, a village of Germany, in the Prussian province of Hanover, 3 m. N. of Lüneburg on the navigable Ilmenau. Pop. 2000. Its trade consists entirely in agricultural produce. The Gothic parish church (c. 1400) incorporates remains of a cathedral of vast dimensions.

BARDOWIEK, a village in Germany, located in the Prussian province of Hanover, 3 miles north of Lüneburg along the navigable Ilmenau river. Population: 2000. Its economy is based entirely on agricultural products. The Gothic parish church (around 1400) includes remnants of a large cathedral.

Bardowiek was founded in the 8th century by Charlemagne, who established a bishopric in it, and until its destruction by Henry the Lion in 1189, it was the most prosperous commercial city of north Germany. Its name is derived from the Longobardi, the tribe for whom it was the home and centre, and from it the colonization of Lombardy started.

Bardowiek was established in the 8th century by Charlemagne, who set up a bishopric there, and it remained the most prosperous commercial city in northern Germany until its destruction by Henry the Lion in 1189. Its name comes from the Longobardi, the tribe that made it their home and center, and from there, the colonization of Lombardy began.

BARDSEY (i.e. "Bards' Island": cf. Anglesey, "Angles' Island"; Welsh, Ynys Enlli, "isle of the current"), an island at the northern extremity of Cardigan Bay. The "sound" between Aberdaron point and the island is some 4 m. wide. Bardsey is included in Carnarvonshire, North Wales (but traditionally in S. Wales). On the N.W. side it has high cliffs. It is about 2½ m. long by ¾ m. broad, with an area of some 370 acres, a third of which is hilly. Barley and oats are grown. On the S.E. side is a fairly deep harbour. On the N.E. are the ruins of the tower of St Mary's abbey (13th century). There is no Anglican church, the inhabitants being Dissenters. They are farmers and fishermen. The lighthouse, with fixed light, 140 ft. high and visible for 17 m., is locally celebrated. The rectory of Aberdaron (on the mainland, opposite Bardsey), Penmachno and Llangwnadl (Llangwynhoedl), in Lleyn (S. Carnarvonshire), belong to St John's College, Cambridge. St Dubricius made the sanctuary famous, and died here in 612. Here was the burial-place of all the monks whose friends could afford to go thither with their bodies. All the great abbeys of England sent their quota. Roads to Bardsey—with the monks' wells, found at intervals of 7 to 9 m.—run from north, east and south. The remnant of priests fled thither (after the great massacre of Bangor-is-coed in 613, by Ethelfride of Northumbria) by the road of the Rivals (Yn Eifl) [v.03 p.0397]hill, S. Carnarvonshire, on which Pistyll farm still gives food gratis to all pilgrims or travellers. A part of the isle is one great cemetery of about 3 to 4 acres, with rude, rough graves as close to each other as possible, with slabs upon them. Though Aberdaron rectory does not belong to the isle, the farm "Cwrt" (Court), where the abbot held his court, still goes with Bardsey, which was granted to John Wynn of Bodvel, Carnarvonshire, after the battle and partial sack of Norwich by the Puritans in the Civil War; passing through Mary Bodvel to her husband, the earl of Radnor, who sold it to Dr Wilson of York. The doctor, in turn, sold it to Sir John Wynn, of Glynllifon and Bodfean Hall, Carnarvonshire. One of the Wynns, the 3rd Baron Newborough, was, at his wish, buried here. The archaeology and history of the isle are voluminous. Lady Guest's Mabinogion translation (i. p. 115, ed. of 1838) gives an account of the (legendary) Bardsey House of Glass, into which Merlin (Myrddin) took a magic ring, originally kept at Caerleon-on-Usk.

BARDSEY (i.e. "Bards' Island": cf. Anglesey, "Angles' Island"; Welsh, Ynys Enlli, "isle of the current"), is an island at the northern tip of Cardigan Bay. The channel between Aberdaron point and the island is about 4 miles wide. Bardsey is part of Carnarvonshire, North Wales (though traditionally considered part of South Wales). It has steep cliffs on the northwest side. The island is approximately 2½ miles long and ¾ mile wide, covering about 370 acres, a third of which is hilly. Barley and oats are cultivated there. On the southeast side, there's a fairly deep harbor. On the northeast side, you can find the ruins of St Mary's Abbey tower (from the 13th century). There isn't an Anglican church; the residents are Dissenters. They primarily work as farmers and fishermen. The lighthouse, which has a fixed light, stands 140 feet tall and can be seen from 17 miles away, and is well known locally. The rectory of Aberdaron (across the mainland from Bardsey), along with Penmachno and Llangwnadl (Llangwynhoedl) in Lleyn (South Carnarvonshire), belongs to St John's College, Cambridge. St Dubricius made the sanctuary renowned and died here in 612. This was the burial place for monks whose friends could afford to bring their bodies here. All the major abbeys in England contributed their share. Paths to Bardsey—with the monks' wells located every 7 to 9 miles—come from the north, east, and south. The remaining priests fled here after the massacre at Bangor-is-coed in 613 by Ethelfride of Northumbria via the road of the Rivals (Yn Eifl) [v.03 p.0397] hill, South Carnarvonshire, where Pistyll farm still provides free food to all pilgrims and travelers. A portion of the island is a large cemetery of about 3 to 4 acres, with crude, simple graves placed as closely together as possible, covered with slabs. Although Aberdaron rectory doesn't belong to the island, the farm "Cwrt" (Court), where the abbot held his court, is still associated with Bardsey. It was granted to John Wynn of Bodvel, Carnarvonshire, after the battle and partial sack of Norwich by the Puritans during the Civil War; passing to Mary Bodvel and her husband, the Earl of Radnor, who sold it to Dr. Wilson of York. The doctor then sold it to Sir John Wynn, of Glynllifon and Bodfean Hall, Carnarvonshire. One of the Wynns, the 3rd Baron Newborough, was buried here by his own request. The archaeology and history of the island are extensive. Lady Guest's Mabinogion translation (i. p. 115, ed. of 1838) provides a description of the (legendary) Bardsey House of Glass, into which Merlin (Myrddin) brought a magic ring, originally kept at Caerleon-on-Usk.

BARÈGES, a town of south-western France, in the department of Hautes-Pyrénées, in the valley of the Bastan, 25 m. S.S.W. of Bagnères-de-Bigorre by road. The town, which is situated at an altitude of 4040 ft., is hardly inhabited in the winter. It is celebrated for its warm sulphurous springs (75° to 111° F.), which first became generally known in 1675 when they were visited by Madame de Maintenon and the duke of Maine, son of Louis XIV. The waters, which are used for drinking and in baths, are efficacious in the treatment of wounds and ulcers and in cases of scrofula, gout, skin diseases, &c. There is a military hospital, founded in 1760. The town was formerly much exposed to avalanches and floods, which are now less frequent owing to the construction of embankments and replanting of the hillsides. It is a centre for mountain excursions. The light silk and wool fabric called barège takes its name from the place, where it was first made.

BARÈGES, a town in south-western France, located in the Hautes-Pyrénées department, is in the valley of the Bastan, 25 miles S.S.W. of Bagnères-de-Bigorre by road. The town, perched at an altitude of 4,040 feet, is scarcely populated during the winter. It’s famous for its warm sulphurous springs (75° to 111° F.), which gained widespread attention in 1675 when they were visited by Madame de Maintenon and the Duke of Maine, son of Louis XIV. The waters, used for drinking and baths, are effective in treating wounds and ulcers, as well as conditions like scrofula, gout, skin diseases, etc. There’s a military hospital founded in 1760. The town used to be prone to avalanches and floods, but these events are now less common due to the construction of embankments and the replanting of hillsides. It serves as a hub for mountain excursions. The light silk and wool fabric known as barège takes its name from the town, where it was first produced.

BAREILLY, or Bareli, a city and district of British India in the Bareilly or Rohilkhand division of the United Provinces. The city is situated on the Ramganga river, 812 m. N.W. from Calcutta by rail. Pop. (1901) 131,208. The principal buildings are two mosques built in the 17th century; a modern fort overlooking the cantonments; the railway station, which is an important junction on the Oudh and Rohilkhand line; the palace of the nawab of Rampur, and the government college. Bareilly is the headquarters of a brigade in the 7th division of the eastern army corps. The chief manufactures are furniture and upholstery. Bareilly college is a seat of upper class learning for the surrounding districts. It is conducted by an English staff, and its course includes the subjects for degrees in the Calcutta University.

BAREILLY, or Bareli, is a city and district in British India, located in the Bareilly or Rohilkhand division of the United Provinces. The city lies on the Ramganga River, 812 km northwest of Calcutta by rail. Population (1901): 131,208. Notable buildings include two mosques from the 17th century, a modern fort overlooking the cantonments, the railway station, which serves as a key junction on the Oudh and Rohilkhand line, the palace of the nawab of Rampur, and the government college. Bareilly serves as the headquarters for a brigade in the 7th division of the eastern army corps. The main industries are furniture and upholstery. Bareilly College is a center for higher education for the surrounding districts, managed by an English faculty, offering courses that lead to degrees from Calcutta University.

The district of Bareilly has an area of 1580 sq. m. It is a level country, watered by many streams, the general slope being towards the south. The soil is fertile and highly cultivated, groves of noble trees abound, and the villages have a neat, prosperous look. A tract of forest jungle, called the tarai, stretches along the extreme north of the district, and teems with large game, such as tigers, bears, deer, wild pigs, &c. The river Sarda or Gogra forms the eastern boundary of the district and is the principal stream. Next in importance is the Ramganga, which receives as its tributaries most of the hill torrents of the Kumaon mountains. The Deoha is another great drainage artery and receives many minor streams. The Gomati or Gumti also passes through the district. The population in 1901 was 1,090,117. The Mahommedans are chiefly the descendants of Yusafzai Afghans, called the Rohilla Pathans, who settled in the country about the year 1720. The Rohillas were formerly the ruling race of the tract of country called Rohilkhand, and are men of a taller stature, a fairer complexion and a more arrogant air than the general inhabitants of the district. Bishop Heber described them as follows:—"The country is burdened with a crowd of lazy, profligate, self-called sawars (cavaliers), who, though many of them are not worth a rupee, conceive it derogatory to their gentility and Pathan blood to apply themselves to any honest industry, and obtain for the most part a precarious livelihood by sponging on the industrious tradesmen and farmers, on whom they levy a sort of blackmail, or as hangers-on to the wealthy and noble families yet remaining in the province. These men have no visible means of maintenance, and no visible occupation except that of lounging up and down with their swords and shields, like the ancient Highlanders, whom in many respects they much resemble." The Rohillas, after fifty years' precarious independence, were subjugated in 1774 by the confederacy of British troops with the nawab of Oudh's army, which formed so serious a charge against Warren Hastings. Their territory was in that year annexed to Oudh. In 1801 the nawab of Oudh ceded it to the Company in commutation of the subsidy money. During the Mutiny of 1857 the Rohillas took a very active part against the English, but since then they have been disarmed. Both before and after that year, however, the Bareilly Mahommedans have distinguished themselves by fanatical tumults against the Hindus. The district is irrigated from the Rohilkhand system of government canals. There are no manufactures except for domestic use and little external trade. Several lines of the Oudh and Rohilkhand railway pass through the district.

The Bareilly district covers an area of 1,580 square miles. It’s mostly flat land, fed by many streams, with a general slope towards the south. The soil is fertile and well-farmed, filled with groves of impressive trees, and the villages look tidy and prosperous. A forest area known as the tarai stretches along the northern edge of the district, home to large game like tigers, bears, deer, and wild pigs. The Sarda, or Gogra, river forms the eastern boundary of the district and is the main river. The Ramganga is the next most important one, receiving most of the hill torrents from the Kumaon mountains as its tributaries. Another major drainage river is the Deoha, which gathers many smaller streams. The Gomati, or Gumti, also flows through the district. The population in 1901 was 1,090,117. The Muslim community mainly descends from Yusafzai Afghans, known as Rohilla Pathans, who settled in the area around 1720. The Rohillas were once the ruling class of what was known as Rohilkhand, and they tend to be taller, have a lighter complexion, and exhibit a more arrogant demeanor than the general population. Bishop Heber described them as follows:—"The country is burdened with a crowd of lazy, profligate, self-styled sawars (cavaliers), who, though many of them are not worth a rupee, find it beneath their dignity and Pathan heritage to engage in any honest work, mostly scraping by by relying on industrious tradespeople and farmers, on whom they impose a kind of blackmail, or by clinging to the wealthy and noble families still present in the region. These men have no evident means of support and no visible job except idling about with their swords and shields, similar to the ancient Highlanders, whom in many ways they greatly resemble." After fifty years of uncertain independence, the Rohillas were conquered in 1774 through a coalition of British troops and the nawab of Oudh’s army, which became a major issue for Warren Hastings. Their territory was annexed to Oudh that same year. In 1801, the nawab of Oudh handed it over to the Company in exchange for subsidy payments. During the 1857 Mutiny, the Rohillas actively opposed the British, but they have been disarmed since then. However, both before and after that year, the Bareilly Muslims have shown a history of fanatical riots against Hindus. The district is irrigated through the Rohilkhand system of government canals. There are no significant industries apart from domestic use, and little external trade takes place. Several lines of the Oudh and Rohilkhand railway run through the district.

BARENTIN, a town of northern France, in the department of Seine-Inférieure, 11 m. N.N.W. of Rouen by rail. Pop. (1906) 5245. The town is situated in the valley of the Austreberthe, a small affluent of the Seine, here crossed at a height of 100 ft. by a fine railway viaduct 540 yds. long. The manufacture of cotton fabrics is the principal industry.

BARENTIN, a town in northern France, in the Seine-Maritime department, 11 miles N.N.W. of Rouen by train. Population (1906) 5,245. The town is located in the valley of the Austreberthe, a small tributary of the Seine, which is crossed here by a beautiful railway viaduct that is 540 yards long and reaches a height of 100 feet. The main industry is the production of cotton fabrics.

BARENTS, WILLEM (d. 1597), Dutch navigator, was born about the middle of the 16th century. In 1594 he left Amsterdam with two ships to search for a north-east passage to eastern Asia. He reached the west coast of Novaya Zemlya, and followed it northward, being finally forced to turn back when near its northern extremity. In the following year he commanded another expedition of seven ships, which made for the strait between the Asiatic coast and Vaygach Island, but was too late to find open water; while his third journey equally failed of its object and resulted in his death. On this occasion he had two ships, and on the outward journey sighted Bear Island and Spitsbergen, where the ships separated. Barents' vessel, after rounding the north of Novaya Zemlya, was beset by ice and he was compelled to winter in the north; and as his ship was not released early in 1597, his party left her in two open boats on the 13th of June and most of its members escaped. Barents himself, however, died on the 30th of June 1597. In 1871 the house in which he wintered was discovered, with many relics, which are preserved at the Hague, and in 1875 part of his journal was found.

BARENTS, WILLEM (d. 1597), a Dutch navigator, was born around the middle of the 16th century. In 1594, he left Amsterdam with two ships to look for a northeast passage to eastern Asia. He reached the west coast of Novaya Zemlya and traveled northward, but ultimately had to turn back when he got close to its northern tip. The following year, he led another expedition with seven ships aimed at the strait between the Asian coast and Vaygach Island, but he arrived too late to find open water. His third journey also failed to achieve its goal and ended with his death. This time, he had two ships, and during the outward journey, he sighted Bear Island and Spitsbergen, where the ships parted ways. Barents' ship, after rounding the north of Novaya Zemlya, got trapped in ice, forcing him to spend the winter in the north. As his ship wasn't freed early in 1597, his group left it in two open boats on June 13, and most of them made it out. Barents, however, died on June 30, 1597. In 1871, the house where he wintered was discovered, along with many artifacts that are now kept in The Hague, and in 1875, part of his journal was found.

See The Three Voyages of Barents, by Gerrit de Veer, translated by the Hakluyt Society (1876) from de Veer's text (Amsterdam, 1598).

See The Three Voyages of Barents, by Gerrit de Veer, translated by the Hakluyt Society (1876) from de Veer's text (Amsterdam, 1598).

BARENTS SEA, that part of the Arctic Ocean which is demarcated by the north coast of Europe, the islands of Novaya Zemlya, Franz Josef Land and Spitsbergen, and smaller intervening islands; it was named after the Dutch navigator. Omitting the great inlet of the White Sea in the south, it extends from about 67° to 80° N., and from 20° to 60° E. The southern part, off the Murman coast of the Kola peninsula, is sometimes called the Murman Sea.

BARENTS SEA, the section of the Arctic Ocean bordered by the northern coast of Europe, the islands of Novaya Zemlya, Franz Josef Land, and Spitsbergen, along with smaller islands in between; it was named after the Dutch navigator. Excluding the large inlet of the White Sea to the south, it stretches from about 67° to 80° N and from 20° to 60° E. The southern area, off the Murman coast of the Kola peninsula, is sometimes referred to as the Murman Sea.

BARÈRE DE VIEUZAC, BERTRAND (1755-1841), one of the most notorious members of the French National Convention, was born at Tarbes in Gascony on the 10th of September 1755. The name of Barère de Vieuzac, by which he continued to call himself long after the renunciation of feudal rights on the famous 4th of August, was assumed from a small fief belonging to his father, a lawyer at Vieuzac. He began to practise as an advocate at the parlement of Toulouse in 1770, and soon earned a considerable reputation as an orator; while his brilliant and flowing style as a writer of essays led to his election as a member of the Academy of Floral Games of Toulouse in 1788. At the age of thirty he married. Four years later, in 1789, he was elected deputy by the estates of Bigorre to the states-general, which met in May. He had made his first visit to Paris in the preceding year. His personal appearance, his manners, social qualities and liberal opinions, gave him a good standing among the multitude of provincial deputies then thronging into Paris. He [v.03 p.0398]attached himself at first to the constitutional party; but he was less known as a speaker in the Assembly than as a journalist. His paper, however, the Point du Jour, according to Aulard, owes its reputation not so much to its own qualities as to the fact that the painter David, in his famous picture of the "Oath in the Tennis Court," has represented Barère kneeling in the corner and writing a report of the proceedings as though for posterity. The reports of the debates of the National Assembly in the Point du Jour, though not inaccurate, are as a matter of fact very incomplete and very dry. After the flight of the king to Varennes, Barère passed over to the republican party, though he continued to keep in touch with the duke of Orleans, to whose natural daughter, Paméla, he was tutor. Barère, however, appears to have been wholly free from any guiding principle; conscience he had none, and his conduct was regulated only by the determination to be on the side of the strongest. After the close of the National Assembly he was nominated one of the judges of the newly instituted court of cassation from October 1791 to September 1792. In 1792 he was elected deputy to the National Convention for the department of the Hautes-Pyrénées. At first he voted with the Girondists, attacked Robespierre, "a pygmy who should not be set on a pedestal," and at the trial of the king voted with the Mountain for the king's death "without appeal and without delay." He closed his speech with a sentence which became memorable: "the tree of liberty could not grow were it not watered with the blood of kings." Appointed member of the Committee of Public Safety on the 7th of April 1793, he busied himself with foreign affairs; then, joining the party of Robespierre, whose resentment he had averted by timely flatteries, he played an important part in the second Committee of Public Safety—after the 17th of July 1793—and voted for the death of the Girondists. He was thoroughly unscrupulous, stopping at nothing to maintain the supremacy of the Mountain, and rendered it great service by his rapid work, by the telling phases of his oratory, and by his clear expositions of the problems of the day. On the 9th Thermidor (July 27th, 1794) Barère hesitated, then he drew up the report outlawing Robespierre. In spite of this, in Germinal of the year III. (the 21st of March to the 4th of April 1795), the Thermidorians decreed the accusation of Barère and his colleagues of the Terror, Collot d'Herbois and Billaud-Varenne, and he was sent to the Isle of Oléron. He was removed to Saintes, and thence escaped to Bordeaux, where he lived in concealment for several years. In 1795 he was elected member of the Council of Five Hundred, but was not allowed to take his seat. Later he was used as a secret agent by Napoleon I., for whom he carried on a diplomatic correspondence. On the fall of Napoleon, Barère played the part of royalist, but on the final restoration of the Bourbons in 1815 he was banished for life from France as a regicide, and then withdrew to Brussels and temporary oblivion. After the revolution of July 1830 he reappeared in France, was reduced by a series of lawsuits to extreme indigence, accepted a small pension assigned him by Louis Philippe (on whom he had heaped abuse and railing), and died, the last survivor of the Committee of Public Safety, on the 13th of January 1841. (See also French Revolution.)

BARÈRE DE VIEUZAC, BERTRAND (1755-1841), one of the most notorious members of the French National Convention, was born in Tarbes, Gascony, on September 10, 1755. The name Barère de Vieuzac, which he continued to use long after renouncing feudal rights on the famous August 4, was taken from a small estate owned by his father, a lawyer in Vieuzac. He started practicing as a lawyer at the parlement of Toulouse in 1770 and quickly gained a reputation as an orator; his brilliant and eloquent writing style led to his election as a member of the Academy of Floral Games of Toulouse in 1788. At age thirty, he got married. Four years later, in 1789, he was elected deputy by the estates of Bigorre to the states-general, which convened in May. He had made his first trip to Paris the year before. His appearance, manners, social skills, and liberal views gave him good standing among the many provincial deputies arriving in Paris at the time. He initially aligned himself with the constitutional party; however, he was better known as a journalist than as a speaker in the Assembly. His newspaper, Point du Jour, according to Aulard, gained its reputation not so much for its quality as for the fact that the painter David depicted Barère kneeling in the corner, writing a report of the proceedings as if for posterity, in his famous painting "Oath in the Tennis Court." The reports of the National Assembly debates in the Point du Jour were somewhat accurate but actually very incomplete and dry. After the king's flight to Varennes, Barère switched to the republican party, although he maintained contact with the Duke of Orleans, whom he tutored by his natural daughter, Paméla. However, Barère seemed to lack any guiding principles; he had no conscience, and his actions were solely driven by the desire to be on the side of the strongest. After the National Assembly ended, he was appointed one of the judges of the newly established court of cassation from October 1791 to September 1792. In 1792, he was elected deputy to the National Convention for the Hautes-Pyrénées department. Initially, he voted with the Girondists, criticized Robespierre as "a pygmy who shouldn't be put on a pedestal," and during the trial of the king, he voted with the Mountain for the king's execution "without appeal and without delay." He concluded his speech with a memorable line: "the tree of liberty cannot grow without being watered with the blood of kings." Appointed to the Committee of Public Safety on April 7, 1793, he focused on foreign affairs and then joined Robespierre's party, whose anger he avoided through timely flattery. He played a key role in the second Committee of Public Safety after July 17, 1793, and voted for the execution of the Girondists. He was entirely unscrupulous, stopping at nothing to uphold the Mountain's dominance, and he greatly aided it with his quick work, striking phrases in his speeches, and clear explanations of contemporary issues. On the 9th of Thermidor (July 27, 1794), Barère hesitated before preparing the report that declared Robespierre an outlaw. Nonetheless, in Germinal of Year III (from March 21 to April 4, 1795), the Thermidorians decided to accuse Barère and his Terror colleagues, Collot d'Herbois and Billaud-Varenne, and he was sent to the Isle of Oléron. He was later moved to Saintes, where he escaped to Bordeaux, living in hiding for several years. In 1795, he was elected to the Council of Five Hundred but was not permitted to take his seat. Later, he served as a secret agent for Napoleon I, conducting diplomatic correspondence on his behalf. After Napoleon's fall, Barère portrayed himself as a royalist, but following the restoration of the Bourbons in 1815, he was banished for life from France as a regicide and withdrew to Brussels, where he faded into obscurity. After the July Revolution of 1830, he resurfaced in France but was reduced to extreme poverty due to a series of lawsuits. He accepted a small pension from Louis Philippe (whom he had previously criticized and condemned) and died, the last surviving member of the Committee of Public Safety, on January 13, 1841. (See also French Revolution.)

The Mémoires de B. Barère ... publiés par MM. H. Carnot ... et David (d'Angers) ... précédés d'une notice historique (Paris, 1824-1844) are false, but contain valuable information; Carnot's Notice, which is very good, was published separately in 1842. See F. A. Aulard, Les Orateurs de la Constituante (Paris, 1882); Les Orateurs de la Convention (2nd ed., Paris, 1905). Macaulay's essay on Barère, (Edinburgh Review, vol. 79) is eloquent, but incorrect.

The Mémoires de B. Barère ... published by MM. H. Carnot ... and David (d'Angers) ... preceded by a historical notice (Paris, 1824-1844) are inaccurate, but they contain valuable information; Carnot's Notice, which is excellent, was published separately in 1842. See F. A. Aulard, Les Orateurs de la Constituante (Paris, 1882); Les Orateurs de la Convention (2nd ed., Paris, 1905). Macaulay's essay on Barère, (Edinburgh Review, vol. 79) is eloquent, but incorrect.

BARETTI, GIUSEPPE MARC' ANTONIO (1719-1789), Italian critic, was born at Turin in 1719. He was intended by his father for the profession of law, but at the age of sixteen fled from Turin and went to Guastalla, where he was for some time employed in a mercantile house. His leisure hours he devoted to literature and criticism, in which he became expert. For many years he led a wandering life, supporting himself chiefly by his writings. At length he arrived in London, where he remained for a considerable time. He obtained an appointment as secretary to the Royal Academy of Painting, and became acquainted with Johnson, Garrick and others of that society. He was a frequent visitor at the Thrales'; and his name occurs repeatedly in Boswell's Life. In 1769 he was tried for murder, having had the misfortune to inflict a mortal wound with his fruit knife on a man who had assaulted him on the street. Johnson among others gave evidence in his favour at the trial, which resulted in Baretti's acquittal. He died in May 1789. His first work of any importance was the Italian Library (London, 1757), a useful catalogue of the lives and works of many Italian authors. The Lettere famigliari, giving an account of his travels through Spain, Portugal and France during the years 1761-1765, were well received, and when afterwards published in English (4 vols., 1770), were highly commended by Johnson. While in Italy on his travels Baretti set on foot a journal of literary criticism, to which he gave the title of Frusta letteraria, the literary scourge. It was published under considerable difficulties and was soon discontinued. The criticisms on contemporary writers were sometimes just, but are frequently disfigured by undue vehemence and coarseness. Among his other numerous works may be mentioned a useful Dictionary and Grammar of the Italian Language, and a dissertation on Shakespeare and Voltaire. His collected works were published at Milan in 1838.

BARETTI, GIUSEPPE MARC' ANTONIO (1719-1789), Italian critic, was born in Turin in 1719. His father intended for him to pursue a career in law, but at sixteen, he ran away from Turin and went to Guastalla, where he worked for a time in a trading company. He spent his free time on literature and criticism, becoming quite skilled in both. For many years, he lived a nomadic life, mostly supporting himself through his writing. Eventually, he made his way to London, where he stayed for a considerable time. He got a job as secretary to the Royal Academy of Painting and became friends with Johnson, Garrick, and others in that circle. He often visited the Thrales', and his name appears frequently in Boswell's Life. In 1769, he was tried for murder after accidentally fatally wounding a man who had attacked him in the street with a fruit knife. Johnson and others testified on his behalf at the trial, which led to Baretti's acquittal. He died in May 1789. His first significant work was the Italian Library (London, 1757), a helpful catalog of the lives and works of various Italian authors. The Lettere famigliari, detailing his travels through Spain, Portugal, and France from 1761 to 1765, received a positive response, and when later published in English (4 vols., 1770), they were highly praised by Johnson. While in Italy, Baretti started a literary criticism journal called the Frusta letteraria, or the literary scourge. It faced many challenges and was soon discontinued. His critiques of contemporary writers were sometimes fair but were often marred by excessive intensity and coarseness. Among his other numerous works, he produced a useful Dictionary and Grammar of the Italian Language, and a dissertation on Shakespeare and Voltaire. His collected works were published in Milan in 1838.

BARFLEUR, a small seaport of north-western France, overlooking the Bay of the Seine, in the department of Manche, 22½ m. N.N.E. of Valognes by rail. Pop. (1906) 1069. In the middle ages Barfleur was one of the chief ports of embarkation for England. In 1120 the "White Ship," carrying Prince William, only son of Henry I., went down outside the harbour. About 2 m. to the north is Cape Barfleur, with a lighthouse 233 ft. high.

BARFLEUR, a small seaport in northwestern France, looks out over the Bay of the Seine, located 22½ miles N.N.E. of Valognes by train. Population (1906) was 1,069. In the Middle Ages, Barfleur was one of the main ports for traveling to England. In 1120, the "White Ship," which was carrying Prince William, the only son of Henry I, sank just outside the harbor. About 2 miles to the north is Cape Barfleur, featuring a lighthouse that stands 233 feet tall.

BARFURUSH, a town of Persia, in the province of Mazandaran in 36° 32′ N., and 52° 42′ E., and on the left bank of the river Bawul [Babul], which is here crossed by a bridge of eight arches, about 15 m. distant from the southern shore of the Caspian Sea, where the small town of Meshed i Sar serves as a port. It is the commercial capital of Mazandaran, and 26 m. distant from Sari and 90 m. from Teheran. Pop. about 50,000. Built in a low and swampy country and approached by deep and almost impassable roads, Barfurush would not seem at all favourably situated for the seat of an extensive inland trade; it is, however, peopled entirely by merchants and tradesmen, and is wholly indebted for its present size and importance to its commercial prosperity. The principal articles of its trade are rice and cotton, some sugar cane (nai shakar), flax (Katūn) and hemp (Kanab) are also grown. The town is of peculiar structure and aspect, being placed in the midst of a forest of tall trees, by which the buildings are so separated from one another, and so concealed, that, except in the bazars, it has no appearance of a populous town. The streets are broad and neat, though generally unpaved, and kept in good order. No ruins are to be seen as in other Persian towns; the houses are comfortable, in good repair, roofed with tiles and enclosed by substantial walls. There are no public buildings of any importance, and the only places of interest are the bazars, which extend fully a mile in length, and consist of substantially built ranges of shops covered with roofs of wood and tiles, and well stored with commodities. There are about ten commodious caravanserais and a number of colleges (medresseh), the place being as much celebrated for learning as for commerce. On an island in a small lake east of the town is a garden, called Bagh i Shah (garden of the Shah), with ruined palaces and baths. At Meshed i Sar, the port, or roadstead of Barfurush, the steamers of the Caucasus and Mercury Company call weekly, and a brisk shipping trade is carried on between it and other Caspian ports.

BARFURUSH, a town in Persia, located in the province of Mazandaran at 36° 32′ N and 52° 42′ E, sits on the left bank of the Bawul [Babul] River, which is crossed by an eight-arch bridge about 15 meters from the southern shore of the Caspian Sea, near the small town of Meshed i Sar that serves as a port. It’s the commercial capital of Mazandaran, situated 26 kilometers from Sari and 90 kilometers from Teheran, with a population of around 50,000. Built in a low and swampy area with deep, nearly impassable roads, Barfurush doesn't seem ideally located for extensive inland trade; however, it's inhabited entirely by merchants and tradespeople, thriving on its commercial success. The main products traded here are rice and cotton, along with some sugar cane (nai shakar), flax (Katūn), and hemp (Kanab). The town has a unique structure and appearance, nestled among tall trees that separate and conceal the buildings, making it seem less populated outside the bazaars. The streets are wide and clean, though generally unpaved, and well-maintained. Unlike other Persian towns, there are no ruins; the houses are comfortable, well-kept, with tiled roofs and sturdy walls. There are no significant public buildings, and the main attractions are the bazaars, which stretch over a mile, comprising solidly built shops with wooden and tiled roofs, well-stocked with goods. There are about ten spacious caravanserais and several colleges (medresseh), as the town is known for its scholarship as much as for its trade. On an island in a small lake east of the town is a garden called Bagh i Shah (garden of the Shah), featuring ruined palaces and baths. At Meshed i Sar, the port or roadstead of Barfurush, steamers from the Caucasus and Mercury Company arrive weekly, facilitating an active shipping trade with various Caspian ports.

Barfurush was formerly called Māmatīr. The present name is from a settlement called Barfurush-deh, which was added to the old city A.D. 1012.

Barfurush used to be known as Māmatīr. The current name comes from a settlement called Barfurush-deh, which was added to the old city in CE 1012.

(A. H.-S.)

(A. H.-S.)

BARGAIN[1] AND SALE, in English law, a contract whereby property, real or personal, is transferred from one person—called the bargainer—to another—called the bargainee—for a [v.03 p.0399]valuable consideration; but the term is more particularly used to describe a mode of conveyance of lands. The disabilities under which a feudal owner very frequently lay gave rise to the practice of conveying land by other methods than that of feoffment with livery of seisin, that is, a handing over of the feudal possession. That of "bargain and sale" was one. Where a man bargained and sold his land to another for pecuniary consideration, which might be merely nominal, and need not necessarily be actually paid, equity held the bargainer to be seised of the land to the use of the bargainee. The Statute of Uses (1535), by converting the bargainee's interest into a legal estate, had an effect contrary to the intention of its framers. It made bargain and sale an easy means of secret or private conveyance, a policy to which the law was opposed. To remedy this defect, a statute (called the Statute of Enrolments) was passed in the same year, which provided that every conveyance by bargain and sale of freehold lands should be enrolled in a court of record or with the custos rotulorum of the county within six months of its date. The Statute of Enrolments applied only to estates of inheritance or for life, so that a bargain and sale of an estate for years might be made without enrolment. This in turn was the foundation of another mode of conveyance, namely, lease and release, which took the place of the deed of bargain and sale, so far as regards freehold. Bargain and sale of copyhold estates, which operates at common law, is still a mode of conveyance in England in the case of a sale by executors, where a testator has directed a sale of his estate to be made, instead of devising it to trustees upon trust to sell.

BARGAIN[1] AND SALE, in English law, is a contract where property, whether real or personal, is transferred from one person—called the bargainer—to another—called the bargainee—in exchange for a [a id="page399">valuable consideration. This term is mainly used to refer to a way of transferring land. The limitations often faced by a feudal owner led to the practice of transferring land through methods other than the traditional feoffment with livery of seisin, which involves the physical handing over of feudal possession. Bargain and sale was one such method. When someone bargained and sold their land to another for a monetary consideration, which could be nominal and didn’t necessarily need to be paid upfront, equity recognized the bargainer as having legal possession of the land for the benefit of the bargainee. The Statute of Uses (1535) turned the bargainee's interest into a legal estate but had an unintended effect, making bargain and sale an easy way for private or secret transfers, which the law opposed. To fix this issue, a statute called the Statute of Enrolments was passed in the same year, requiring that every bargain and sale of freehold land be recorded in a court of record or with the custos rotulorum of the county within six months. The Statute of Enrolments only applied to estates of inheritance or for life, allowing a bargain and sale of a leasehold estate without enrollment. This led to the development of another way to transfer property, known as lease and release, which replaced the bargain and sale deed for freehold transactions. Bargain and sale of copyhold estates, which operates under common law, still exists in England when executors sell property as directed by a testator, rather than leaving it in trust to sell.

See also Conveyancing.

See also Conveyancing.

[1] From O. Fr. bargaigne, a word of doubtful origin, appearing in many Romance languages, cf. Ital. bargagno; it is connected with Late Lat. barcaniare, to traffic, possibly derived from barca, a barge.

[1] From O. Fr. bargaigne, a word of uncertain origin, found in various Romance languages, cf. Ital. bargagno; it is linked to Late Lat. barcaniare, meaning to trade, possibly coming from barca, a barge.

BARGE (Med. Lat. barca, possibly connected with Lat. baris, Gr. βᾶρις, a boat used on the Nile), formerly a small sailing vessel, but now generally a flat-bottomed boat used for carrying goods on inland navigations. On canals barges are usually towed, but are sometimes fitted with some kind of engine; the men in charge of them are known as bargees. On tidal rivers barges are often provided with masts and sails ("sailing barges"), or in default of being towed, they drift with the current, guided by a long oar or oars ("dumb-barges"). Barges used for unloading, or loading, the cargo of ships in harbours are sometimes called "lighters" (from the verb "to light" = to relieve of a load). A state barge was a heavy, often highly ornamented vessel used for carrying passengers on occasions of state ceremonials. The college barges at Oxford are houseboats moored in the river for the use of members of the college rowing clubs. In New England the word barge frequently means a vehicle, usually covered, with seats down the side, used for picnic parties or the conveyance of passengers to or from piers or railway stations.

BARGE (Med. Lat. barca, possibly connected with Lat. baris, Gr. βᾶρις, a boat used on the Nile), was once a small sailing vessel but is now typically a flat-bottomed boat used for transporting goods on inland waterways. On canals, barges are usually towed, though some are equipped with engines; the people operating them are called bargees. On tidal rivers, barges often have masts and sails ("sailing barges"), or if not towed, they drift with the current, navigated by a long oar or oars ("dumb-barges"). Barges used to load or unload ships in harbors are sometimes referred to as "lighters" (from the verb "to light" meaning to relieve of a load). A state barge was a large, often elaborately decorated boat used for transporting passengers during official ceremonies. The college barges at Oxford are houseboats anchored in the river for the use of members of the college rowing clubs. In New England, the term barge often refers to a covered vehicle with seats along the sides, used for picnic outings or shuttling passengers to and from piers or train stations.

BARGEBOARD (probably from Med. Lat. bargus, or barcus, a scaffold, and not from the now obsolete synonym "vergeboard"), the boards fastened to the projecting gables of a roof to give strength to the same and to mask or hide the horizontal timbers of the roof to which they were attached. Bargeboards are sometimes moulded only or carved, but as a rule the lower edges were cusped and had tracery in the spandrels besides being otherwise elaborated. The richest example is one at Ockwells in Berkshire, England, which is moulded and carved as if it were intended for internal work.

BARGEBOARD (likely from Med. Lat. bargus or barcus, meaning a scaffold, and not from the now outdated synonym "vergeboard"), are the boards attached to the overhanging edges of a roof to provide strength and to conceal the horizontal beams of the roof they connect to. Bargeboards can be simply molded or intricately carved, but usually, the lower edges are cut into shapes and have decorative patterns in the spandrels, along with other embellishments. The most elaborate example can be found at Ockwells in Berkshire, England, where it is molded and carved as if it were meant for interior use.

BARGHEST, Barguest or Bargest, the name given in the north of England, especially in Yorkshire, to a monstrous goblin-dog with huge teeth and claws. The spectre-hound under various names is familiar in folk-lore. The Demon of Tedworth, the Black Dog of Winchester and the Padfoot of Wakefield all shared the characteristics of the Barghest of York. In Wales its counterpart was Gwyllgi, "the Dog of Darkness," a frightful apparition of a mastiff with baleful breath and blazing red eyes. In Lancashire the spectre-hound is called Trash or Striker. In Cambridgeshire and on the Norfolk coast it is known as Shuck or Shock. In the Isle of Man it is styled Mauthe Doog. It is mentioned by Sir Walter Scott in "The Lay of the Last Minstrel"—

BARGHEST, Barguest or Bargest (mythical creature), the name used in the north of England, particularly in Yorkshire, for a monstrous goblin-dog with massive teeth and claws. This ghostly hound, known by various names, is a familiar figure in folklore. The Demon of Tedworth, the Black Dog of Winchester, and the Padfoot of Wakefield all share traits with the Barghest of York. In Wales, its equivalent is Gwyllgi, "the Dog of Darkness," a terrifying vision of a mastiff with malevolent breath and fiery red eyes. In Lancashire, this ghostly hound is called Trash or Striker. In Cambridgeshire and along the Norfolk coast, it goes by Shuck or Shock. In the Isle of Man, it’s referred to as Mauthe Doog. It is mentioned by Sir Walter Scott in "The Lay of the Last Minstrel"—

"For he was speechless, ghastly, wan

For he was silent, pale, and ghostly.

Like him of whom the story ran

Like the guy who the story was about

Who spoke the spectre hound in Man."

Who spoke the ghost hound in Man.

A Welsh variant is the Cwn Annwn, or "dogs of hell." The barghest was essentially a nocturnal spectre, and its appearance was regarded as a portent of death. Its Welsh form is confined to the sea-coast parishes, and on the Norfolk coast the creature is supposed to be amphibious, coming out of the sea by night and travelling about the lonely lanes. The derivation of the word barghest is disputed. "Ghost" in the north of England is pronounced "guest," and the name is thought to be burh-ghest, "town-ghost." Others explain it as German Berg-geist, "mountain demon," or Bar-geist, "bear-demon," in allusion to its alleged appearance at times as a bear. The barghest has a kinsman in the Rongeur d'Os of Norman folklore. A belief in the spectre-hound still lingers in the wild parts of the north country of England, and in Nidderdale, Yorkshire, nurses frighten children with its name.

A Welsh version is the Cwn Annwn, or "dogs of hell." The barghest was basically a nighttime ghost, and seeing it was considered a sign of death. Its Welsh form is mostly found in the coastal parishes, and along the Norfolk coast, this creature is thought to be amphibious, coming out of the sea at night and wandering the lonely lanes. The origin of the word barghest is debated. In northern England, "ghost" is pronounced "guest," leading some to believe the name comes from burh-ghest, meaning "town-ghost." Others suggest it comes from the German Berg-geist, meaning "mountain demon," or Bar-geist, meaning "bear-demon," referencing its supposed appearance at times as a bear. The barghest has a relative in the Rongeur d'Os of Norman folklore. Belief in the spectre-hound still exists in the wild areas of northern England, and in Nidderdale, Yorkshire, parents frighten children with its name.

See Wirt Sikes, British Goblins (1880); Notes and Queries, first series, ii. 51; Joseph Ritson, Fairy Tales (Lond. 1831), p. 58; Lancashire Folklore (1867); Joseph Lucas, Studies in Nidderdale (Pateley Bridge, 1882).

See Wirt Sikes, British Goblins (1880); Notes and Queries, first series, ii. 51; Joseph Ritson, Fairy Tales (Lond. 1831), p. 58; Lancashire Folklore (1867); Joseph Lucas, Studies in Nidderdale (Pateley Bridge, 1882).

BARHAM, RICHARD HARRIS (1788-1845), English humourist, better known by his nom de plume of Thomas Ingoldsby, was born at Canterbury on the 6th of December 1788. At seven years of age he lost his father, who left him a small estate, part of which was the manor of Tappington, so frequently mentioned in the Legends. At nine he was sent to St Paul's school, but his studies were interrupted by an accident which shattered his arm and partially crippled it for life. Thus deprived of the power of bodily activity, he became a great reader and diligent student. In 1807 he entered Brasenose College, Oxford, intending at first to study for the profession of the law. Circumstances, however, induced him to change his mind and to enter the church. In 1813 he was ordained and took a country curacy; he married in the following year, and in 1821 removed to London on obtaining the appointment of minor canon of St Paul's cathedral. Three years later he became one of the priests in ordinary of the King's Chapel Royal, and was appointed to a city living. In 1826 he first contributed to Blackwood's Magazine; and on the establishment of Bentley's Miscellany in 1837 he began to furnish the series of grotesque metrical tales known as The Ingoldsby Legends. These became very popular, were published in a collected form and have since passed through numerous editions. In variety and whimsicality of rhymes these verses have hardly a rival since the days of Hudibras. But beneath this obvious popular quality there lies a store of solid antiquarian learning, the fruit of patient enthusiastic research, in out-of-the-way old books, which few readers who laugh over his pages detect. His life was grave, dignified and highly honoured. His sound judgment and his kind heart made him the trusted counsellor, the valued friend and the frequent peacemaker; and he was intolerant of all that was mean and base and false. In politics he was a Tory of the old school; yet he was the lifelong friend of the liberal Sydney Smith, whom in many respects he singularly resembled. Theodore Hook was one of his most intimate friends. Barham was a contributor to the Edinburgh Review and the Literary Gazette; he wrote articles for Gorton's Biographical Dictionary; and a novel, My Cousin Nicholas (1834). He retained vigour and freshness of heart and mind to the last, and his last verses ("As I laye a-thynkynge") show no signs of decay. He died in London after a long, painful illness, on the 17th of June 1845.

BARHAM, RICHARD HARRIS (1788-1845), English humorist, better known by his pen name of Thomas Ingoldsby, was born in Canterbury on December 6, 1788. When he was seven, he lost his father, who left him a small estate, part of which included the manor of Tappington, frequently mentioned in the Legends. At nine, he was sent to St Paul's school, but his studies were interrupted by an accident that shattered his arm and partially crippled it for life. Deprived of physical activity, he became an avid reader and dedicated student. In 1807, he entered Brasenose College, Oxford, initially intending to study law. However, circumstances led him to change his plans and enter the church. In 1813, he was ordained and took a country curacy; he married the following year and in 1821 moved to London after being appointed minor canon of St Paul's cathedral. Three years later, he became one of the priests in ordinary of the King's Chapel Royal and was appointed to a city living. In 1826, he first contributed to Blackwood's Magazine; and with the establishment of Bentley's Miscellany in 1837, he began writing the series of grotesque metrical tales known as The Ingoldsby Legends. These tales became very popular, were published in collected form, and have since gone through numerous editions. In terms of variety and whimsy, these verses have hardly been matched since the days of Hudibras. Beneath this popular appeal lies a wealth of solid antiquarian knowledge gained from patient, enthusiastic research in obscure old books, which few readers who enjoy his work recognize. His life was serious, dignified, and highly respected. His sound judgment and kind heart made him a trusted advisor, valued friend, and frequent peacemaker; he was intolerant of all that was mean, base, and false. In politics, he was a Tory of the old school, yet he was a lifelong friend of the liberal Sydney Smith, whom he resembled in many ways. Theodore Hook was one of his closest friends. Barham contributed to the Edinburgh Review and the Literary Gazette; he wrote articles for Gorton's Biographical Dictionary; and authored a novel, My Cousin Nicholas (1834). He maintained a youthful spirit and vibrant mind until the end, and his last verses ("As I laye a-thynkynge") show no signs of deterioration. He died in London after a long, painful illness on June 17, 1845.

A short memoir, by his son, was prefixed to a new edition of Ingoldsby in 1847, and a fuller Life and Letters, from the same hand, was published in 2 vols. in 1870.

A brief memoir by his son was added to a new edition of Ingoldsby in 1847, and a more comprehensive Life and Letters from the same author was published in two volumes in 1870.

BAR HARBOR, a well-known summer resort of Hancock county, Maine, U.S.A., an unincorporated village, in the township of Eden, on Frenchman's Bay, on the E. side of Mount Desert Island, about 45 m. S.E. of Bangor. Pop. of the township (1900) 4379; (1910) 4441; of the village (1910), about 2000, greatly increased during the summer season. Bar Harbor is served by the Maine Central railway and by steamship lines to New York, Boston, Portland and other ports. The summer climate is cool, usually too cool for sea-bathing, but there is a [v.03 p.0400]large open-air salt water swimming bath. Rugged mountains from 1000 to 1500 ft. in height, a coast with deep indentations and lined with bold cliffs, a sea dotted with rocky islets, clear lakes, sparkling rivulets, deep gorges, and wooded glens are features of the attractive scenery here and in the vicinity. Several fine hotels and a number of costly residences occupy a plateau along the shore and the hillsides farther back. The Kebo Valley Club has fine golf links here; and since 1900 an annual horse show and fair has been held at Robin Hood Park at the foot of Newport Mountain. Bar Harbor is usually a summer rendezvous of the North Atlantic Squadron of the United States Navy. The name Bar Harbor, which displaced East Eden, was suggested by the bar which appears at low water between it and Bar Island. Although the first summer hotel was built here in 1855, Bar Harbor's development as a summer resort began about 1870, after some artists had visited the place, and made it widely known through their pictures. (See Mount Desert.)

BAR HARBOR, a popular summer vacation spot in Hancock County, Maine, U.S.A., is an unincorporated village located in the township of Eden, on Frenchman's Bay, on the east side of Mount Desert Island, about 45 miles southeast of Bangor. The township population was 4,379 in 1900 and 4,441 in 1910; the village population was around 2,000 in 1910, which increases significantly during the summer months. Bar Harbor is accessible via the Maine Central Railway and steamship lines to New York, Boston, Portland, and other ports. The summer weather is cool, often too chilly for swimming in the sea, but there is a large outdoor saltwater swimming pool. The scenery here and nearby features rugged mountains ranging from 1,000 to 1,500 feet high, a coastline with deep inlets and bold cliffs, a sea scattered with rocky islands, clear lakes, sparkling streams, deep gorges, and wooded valleys. Several upscale hotels and many expensive homes are situated on a plateau along the shore and on the hillsides behind. The Kebo Valley Club offers excellent golf links, and since 1900, an annual horse show and fair has been held at Robin Hood Park at the base of Newport Mountain. Bar Harbor is typically a summer gathering spot for the North Atlantic Squadron of the U.S. Navy. The name Bar Harbor, which replaced East Eden, was inspired by the sandbar that appears at low tide between it and Bar Island. Although the first summer hotel was built here in 1855, Bar Harbor's rise as a summer resort began around 1870 after some artists visited the area and popularized it through their artwork. (See Mount Desert.)

BAR-HEBRAEUS or Abu‛l-Faraj, a maphriān or catholicus of the Jacobite (Monophysite) Church in the 13th century, and (in Dr. Wright's words) "one of the most learned and versatile men that Syria ever produced." Perhaps no more industrious compiler of knowledge ever lived. Simple and uncritical in his modes of thought, and apparently devoid of any striking originality, he collected in his numerous and elaborate treatises the results of such research in theology, philosophy, science and history as was in his time possible in Syria. Most of his works were written in Syriac, but some few in Arabic, which had long before his time supplanted Syriac as a living speech.

BAR-HEBRAEUS or Abu'l-Faraj, a maphriān or catholicus of the Jacobite (Monophysite) Church in the 13th century, and (in Dr. Wright's words) "one of the most learned and versatile people that Syria ever produced." Perhaps no one was more dedicated to gathering knowledge. Simple and uncritical in his thinking, and seemingly lacking any notable originality, he compiled in his many detailed works the findings of such research in theology, philosophy, science, and history as was possible in his time in Syria. Most of his writings were in Syriac, but a few were in Arabic, which had already replaced Syriac as a spoken language long before his era.

The son of a physician of Jewish descent, Bar-Hebraeus was born in 1226 at Malaṭiah on the upper Euphrates. His youth was passed in the troublous times of the Mongol advance into western Asia, and his father eventually retired to Antioch, where Bar-Hebraeus completed his education. In 1246 he was ordained at Tripolis as Jacobite bishop of Gūbās near Malaṭia, and a year later was transferred to the neighbouring diocese of Laḳabhīn, whence in 1253 he passed to be bishop of Aleppo. Deposed almost immediately by an ecclesiastical superior on account of disputes about the patriarchate, he was restored to his see in 1258, and in 1264 was promoted by the patriarch Ignatius III. to be maphriān—the next rank below that of patriarch—an office which he held till his death at Marāgha in 1286. He seems to have been a model of devotion to his ecclesiastical duties and to have won the respect of all parties in his diocese.

The son of a Jewish physician, Bar-Hebraeus was born in 1226 at Malatya on the upper Euphrates. He grew up during the turbulent times of the Mongol invasion in western Asia, and his father later moved the family to Antioch, where Bar-Hebraeus finished his education. In 1246, he was ordained in Tripolis as the Jacobite bishop of Gūbās near Malatya, and a year later, he was moved to the neighboring diocese of Laḳabhīn. In 1253, he became the bishop of Aleppo. He was removed from his position almost immediately by a higher church authority due to conflicts over the patriarchate but was reinstated in 1258. In 1264, the patriarch Ignatius III promoted him to maphriān—the rank just below that of patriarch—an office he held until his death in Marāgha in 1286. He appears to have been dedicated to his church duties and earned the respect of everyone in his diocese.

It is mainly as an historian that Bar-Hebraeus interests the modern student. His great historical work—the Syriac Chronicle—is made up of three parts. The first[1] is a history of secular events from the Creation to his own time, and in its later portions gives valuable information regarding the history of south-east Europe and western Asia. A compendium in Arabic of this secular history was made by Bar-Hebraeus under the title al-Mukhtaṣar fi‛d-Duwal (Compendious History of the Dynasties). The second and third parts[2] of the Chronicle deal with the history of the Church, the second being mainly concerned with the patriarchate of Antioch, and the third with the eastern branch of the Syrian Church. Of special value to theologians is the Auṣar Rāzē (Storehouse of Secrets), a critical and doctrinal commentary on the text of the Scriptures. Of this many portions have been edited by various scholars, and a valuable study of the work, together with a biography and estimate of its author, has been published by J. Göttsberger (Barhebräus und seine Scholien zur heiligen Schrift, Freiburg i. B., 1900).

It is primarily as a historian that Bar-Hebraeus captivates the modern student. His major historical work—the Syriac Chronicle—consists of three parts. The first[1] is a history of secular events from Creation to his own time and provides valuable information about the history of southeastern Europe and western Asia in its later sections. Bar-Hebraeus created an Arabic summary of this secular history titled Summary of the States (Compendious History of the Dynasties). The second and third parts[2] of the Chronicle focus on the history of the Church, with the second primarily addressing the patriarchate of Antioch, and the third discussing the eastern branch of the Syrian Church. The Oshar Raze (Storehouse of Secrets), a critical and doctrinal commentary on the Scripture text, is especially valuable to theologians. Many sections of this work have been edited by various scholars, and a significant study of it, along with a biography and evaluation of its author, has been published by J. Göttsberger (Barhebräus und seine Scholien zur heiligen Schrift, Freiburg i. B., 1900).

A full list of Bar-Hebraeus's other works, and of editions of such of them as have been published, will be found in W. Wright's Syriac Literature, pp. 268-281. The more important of them are:—(1) Kĕthābhā dhe-Bhābhāthā (Book of the Pupils of the Eyes), a treatise on logic or dialectics; (2) Ḥēwath Hēkhmĕthā (Butter of Wisdom), an exposition of the whole philosophy of Aristotle; (3) Sullāḳā Haunānāyā (Ascent of the Mind), a treatise on astronomy and cosmography, edited and translated by F. Nau (Paris, 1899); (4) various medical works; (5) Kĕthābhā dhĕ-Ṣemḥē (Book of Ravs), a treatise on grammar; (6) ethical works; (7) poems; (8) Kĕthābhā dhĕ-Thunnāyē Mĕghaḥḥĕkhānē (Book of Entertaining Stories), edited and translated by E. A. W. Budge (London, 1897).

A full list of Bar-Hebraeus's other works, along with the published editions of these works, can be found in W. Wright's Syriac Literature, pp. 268-281. The more significant ones include: (1) Kĕthābhā dhe-Bhābhāthā (Book of the Pupils of the Eyes), a treatise on logic or dialectics; (2) Ḥēwath Hēkhmĕthā (Butter of Wisdom), an exploration of the entire philosophy of Aristotle; (3) Sullāḳā Haunānāyā (Ascent of the Mind), a treatise on astronomy and cosmography, edited and translated by F. Nau (Paris, 1899); (4) various medical works; (5) Hebrew letters (Book of Ravs), a treatise on grammar; (6) ethical works; (7) poems; (8) Kĕthābhā dhĕ-Thunnāyē Mĕghaḥḥĕkhānē (Book of Entertaining Stories), edited and translated by E. A. W. Budge (London, 1897).

(N. M.)

(N. M.)

[1] Imperfectly edited and translated by Bruns and Kirsch in 1789. There is now a better edition by Bedjan (Paris, 1890).

[1] Not perfectly edited and translated by Bruns and Kirsch in 1789. There's a better edition available now by Bedjan (Paris, 1890).

[2] Edited and translated by Abbeloos and Lamy (Paris and Louvain, 1872-1873).

[2] Edited and translated by Abbeloos and Lamy (Paris and Louvain, 1872-1873).

BARI, a tribe of Nilotic negroes, living on the banks of the upper Nile some 200 m. N. of Albert Nyanza. They have as neighbours the Dinka to the north, the Madi to the south, and the Galla to the east. The men are tall and thin, the women fat and under middle height. Their colour is a deep dead brown. The men and unmarried girls go practically naked, the married women wearing a goatskin dyed red. The body is ornamented with red clay and the lower incisors are often extracted. Their sole wealth is cattle and their chief food milk and blood; meat is only eaten when a cow happens to die. They live in round grass huts with conical roofs. Twins are considered unlucky, the mother is divorced by her husband and her family must refund part of the marriage-price. The dead are buried in the hut; a square grave is dug in which the body is arranged in a sitting position with the hands tied behind the back. The most important men in the country are the rainmakers, who are reverenced even more than the chiefs, and, indeed, are famous among the surrounding tribes. The Bari warriors have been much recruited for the Egyptian army and were formerly used as slave-hunters by the Arab traders.

BARI, a group of Nilotic people, lives along the banks of the upper Nile about 200 miles north of Albert Nyanza. They are neighbors to the Dinka to the north, the Madi to the south, and the Galla to the east. The men are tall and slim, while the women are short and overweight. Their skin is a deep, dull brown. The men and unmarried girls are mostly nude, whereas married women wear a red-dyed goatskin. Their bodies are adorned with red clay, and the lower front teeth are often removed. Their only wealth is cattle, and their main food source is milk and blood; meat is only consumed when a cow dies. They live in round grass huts with conical roofs. Twins are seen as bad luck, leading to the mother being divorced by her husband, who must also pay back part of the bride price. The deceased are buried in the hut; a square grave is dug, and the body is positioned sitting down with hands tied behind the back. The most respected individuals in the community are the rainmakers, who are honored even more than the chiefs and are well-known among neighboring tribes. Bari warriors have been heavily recruited into the Egyptian army and were historically used as slave hunters by Arab traders.

See Sir Samuel Baker, The Albert N'yanza (London, 1866); Friedrich Muller, Die Sprache der Bari (Vienna, 1864); G. Casati, Ten Years in Equatoria (London, 1891); W. Junker, Travels in Africa (English ed., 1890-1892); R. C. Owen, Bari Grammar (1908).

See Sir Samuel Baker, The Albert N'yanza (London, 1866); Friedrich Muller, Die Sprache der Bari (Vienna, 1864); G. Casati, Ten Years in Equatoria (London, 1891); W. Junker, Travels in Africa (English ed., 1890-1892); R. C. Owen, Bari Grammar (1908).

BARI (anc. Barium), a seaport and archiepiscopal see of Apulia, Italy, capital of the province of Bari, situated on a small peninsula projecting into the Adriatic, 69 m. N.W. of Brindisi by rail. Pop. (1901) 77,478. The town consists of two parts, the closely built old town on the peninsula to the N., and the new town to the S., which is laid out on a rectangular plan. The former contains the cathedral of S. Sabino, begun in 1035 but not completed till 1171: the exterior preserves in the main the fine original architecture (notably the dome and campanile), but the interior has been modernized. Not far off is the church of S. Nicola, founded in 1087 to receive the relics of this saint, which were brought from Myra in Lycia, and now lie beneath the altar in the crypt. The facade is fine, and the interior, divided into three naves by columns, with galleries over the aisles, has fortunately not been restored; the vaulting of the crypt has, however, been covered with modern stucco. The church is one of the four Palatine churches of Apulia (the others being the cathedrals of Acquaviva and Altamura, and the church of Monte S. Angelo sul Gargano). Adjacent is the small church of S. Gregorio, belonging also to the 11th century. The castle, built in 1169, and strengthened in 1233, lies on the W. side of the old town: it is now used as a prison. The old harbour lies on the E. side of the peninsula, and the new on the W. In the new town is the Ateneo, containing the provincial museum, with a large collection of vases found in the district, in which the pre-Hellenic specimens are especially important (M. Mayer in Römische Mitteilungen, 1897, 201; 1899, 13; 1904, 188, 276). Bari is the seat of the command of the IX. army corps, and the most important commercial town in Apulia. It manufactures olive oil, soap, carbon sulphide and playing-cards, and has a large iron foundry.

BARI (formerly Barium), a seaport and archiepiscopal see in Apulia, Italy, is the capital of the province of Bari, located on a small peninsula jutting into the Adriatic, 69 miles northwest of Brindisi by rail. Population (1901) was 77,478. The town is divided into two parts: the densely built old town on the northern peninsula, and the new town to the south, which follows a rectangular layout. The old town features the cathedral of S. Sabino, which began construction in 1035 and was completed in 1171; its exterior largely retains its beautiful original architecture (especially the dome and campanile), but the interior has been updated. Nearby is the church of S. Nicola, established in 1087 to house the saint's relics, brought from Myra in Lycia, currently resting beneath the altar in the crypt. The facade is impressive, and the interior, which has three naves separated by columns and galleries above the aisles, has thankfully not been remodeled; however, the crypt's vaulting has been covered with modern stucco. This church is one of the four Palatine churches of Apulia (the others being the cathedrals of Acquaviva and Altamura, and the church of Monte S. Angelo sul Gargano). Next to it is the small church of S. Gregorio, also from the 11th century. The castle, constructed in 1169 and reinforced in 1233, is located on the west side of the old town and now serves as a prison. The old harbor is on the east side of the peninsula, while the new harbor is on the west. In the new town, there is the Ateneo, which houses the provincial museum that includes a large collection of vases found in the area, particularly significant are the pre-Hellenic pieces (M. Mayer in Römische Mitteilungen, 1897, 201; 1899, 13; 1904, 188, 276). Bari is the headquarters of the IX army corps and is the most significant commercial town in Apulia, producing olive oil, soap, carbon disulfide, and playing cards, and it has a large iron foundry.

Barium does not seem to have been a place of great importance in early antiquity; only bronze coins struck by it have been found. In Roman times it was the point of junction between the coast road and the Via Traiana; there was also a branch road to Tarentum from Barium. Its harbour, mentioned as early as 181 B.C., was probably the principal one of the district in ancient times, as at present, and was the centre of a fishery. But its greatest importance dates from the time when it became, in 852, a seat of the Saracen power, and in 885, the residence of the Byzantine governor. In 1071 it was captured by Robert Guiscard. In 1095 Peter the Hermit preached the first crusade there. In 1156 it was razed to the ground, and has several times suffered destruction. In the 14th century it became an [v.03 p.0401]independent duchy, and in 1558 was left by Bona Sforza to Philip II. of Spain and Naples.

Barium doesn't seem to have been a place of great significance in early history; only bronze coins minted there have been discovered. During Roman times, it was the intersection between the coastal road and the Via Traiana; there was also a side road to Tarentum from Barium. Its harbor, noted as early as 181 BCE, was likely the main one in the area in ancient times, as it is today, and was the hub of a fishing industry. However, its biggest importance began when it became a center of Saracen power in 852, and in 885, it became the residence of the Byzantine governor. In 1071, Robert Guiscard took it over. In 1095, Peter the Hermit preached the first crusade there. In 1156, it was completely destroyed and has faced several acts of destruction. In the 14th century, it became an independent duchy, and in 1558, Bona Sforza handed it over to Philip II of Spain and Naples.

(T. As.)

(T. As.)

BARILI, a town of the province of Cebu, island of Cebu, Philippine Islands, on the Barili river, 2 m. from its mouth and about 35 m. S.W. of Cebu, the capital. Pop. (1903) 31,617. It has a relatively cool and healthful climate. Its people are agriculturists and raise Indian corn, sibucao, hemp, cacao and coffee. The language is Cebu-Visayan.

BARILI, a town in the province of Cebu on Cebu Island, Philippines, located 2 miles from the mouth of the Barili River and about 35 miles southwest of Cebu, the capital. Population (1903) 31,617. It has a relatively cool and healthy climate. The residents are mainly farmers and grow corn, sibucao, hemp, cacao, and coffee. The local language is Cebu-Visayan.

BARING, the name of a family of English financiers and bankers. The firm of Baring Brothers was founded by Francis Baring (1740-1810), whose father, John Baring, son of a Lutheran minister at Bremen, had come to England from Germany, and started a cloth manufactory at Larkbear, near Exeter. Francis Baring was born at Larkbear, and in due course was placed in a London commercial firm. In 1770, in conjunction with his brother John, Francis Baring established a banking-house in London, and before he died in 1810 had so developed the business that he was regarded as the first merchant in Europe. He was for many years a director of the East India Company, and chairman in 1792-1793, receiving a baronetcy for his services. From 1784-1806 he sat almost continuously in parliament as a Whig. He left five sons, of whom the eldest, Sir Thomas Baring (1772-1848), was a well-known art-patron and collector. The control of the business passed to his second son, Alexander (1774-1848), better known as Lord Ashburton, who had already been highly successful in extending the firm's operations in America, where his marriage with the daughter of William Bingham, a wealthy resident of Philadelphia and United States senator, secured him considerable influence with the American commercial community. From 1806-1835 he represented various constituencies in parliament where he strongly opposed reform. In 1834 he became president of the Board of Trade and master of the mint in Sir Robert Peel's first administration, and the following year was raised to the peerage as Baron Ashburton. His business capacity and intimate acquaintance with American customs and institutions caused his appointment in 1842 as commissioner to the United States to negotiate the settlement of the north-eastern boundary question and other matters in dispute between the two countries, and he concluded in that year at Washington the treaty, commonly known as the Ashburton treaty, by which the frontier between Maine and Canada was fixed. After his death in 1848 the affairs of the house were managed by Thomas Baring (1799-1873), the son of Sir Thomas Baring. Thomas Baring represented Huntingdon in parliament from 1844 till his death. His elder brother, Sir Francis Thornhill Baring (1796-1866), sat for Portsmouth from 1826-1865. From 1839-1841 he was chancellor of the exchequer, and from 1849-1852 first lord of the admiralty. In 1866 he was created Baron Northbrook, the barony being converted in 1876 into an earldom in favour of his eldest son Thomas George Baring (1826-1904). The latter, the 1st Earl of Northbrook, was occupied almost entirely with public affairs, and filled at different times many important official positions. He is best remembered as viceroy of India, which office he held from 1872-1876, but his last public position was first lord of the admiralty (1880-1885). With the death of Thomas Baring, Edward Charles Baring (1828-1897), son of Henry Baring, M.P., and grandson of Sir Francis Baring, became head of the firm of Baring Brothers, and in 1885 was raised to the peerage as Baron Revelstoke. The house of Baring then stood at the height of its prosperity. During the following years a large amount of English capital was advanced to the Argentine Republic, Barings undertaking the loans and guaranteeing the interest. Through the continued default of the Argentine government, Barings became seriously involved, their heavy obligations precipitating a general financial crisis. Towards the end of 1890 it became known that the firm was on the eve of suspending payment, with liabilities amounting to £21,000,000. The prompt action of the Bank of England, which in conjunction with the leading joint-stock banks of the United Kingdom took over these liabilities, averted further disaster, and the firm of Baring Brothers was subsequently reorganized as a limited company with a capital of £1,000,000. Besides those already referred to, various other members of the Baring family have achieved public distinction, notably Charles Baring (1807-1879), bishop of Durham, and Evelyn Baring, 1st Earl of Cromer (q.v.).

BARING, the name of a family of English financiers and bankers. The firm Baring Brothers was founded by Francis Baring (1740-1810), whose father, John Baring, the son of a Lutheran minister from Bremen, moved to England from Germany and started a cloth manufacturing business at Larkbear, near Exeter. Francis Baring was born in Larkbear and eventually joined a commercial firm in London. In 1770, along with his brother John, Francis Baring established a banking house in London, and by the time of his death in 1810, he had developed the business to the point where he was seen as the leading merchant in Europe. He served for many years as a director of the East India Company and was chairman from 1792-1793, receiving a baronetcy for his contributions. From 1784-1806, he was almost constantly in parliament as a Whig. He had five sons, the eldest of whom, Sir Thomas Baring (1772-1848), was a prominent art patron and collector. The control of the business passed to his second son, Alex (1774-1848), better known as Lord Ashburton, who had already found significant success expanding the firm’s operations in America. His marriage to the daughter of William Bingham, a wealthy Philadelphian and U.S. senator, gave him considerable influence within the American commercial community. From 1806-1835, he represented various constituencies in parliament and strongly opposed reform. In 1834, he became president of the Board of Trade and master of the mint during Sir Robert Peel's first administration, and the following year he was elevated to the peerage as Baron Ashburton. His business acumen and deep understanding of American customs and institutions led to his appointment in 1842 as commissioner to the United States to negotiate the resolution of the north-eastern boundary dispute and other issues between the two countries. He successfully concluded the treaty known as the Ashburton treaty in Washington that year, which defined the border between Maine and Canada. After his death in 1848, the affairs of the house were managed by Thomas Baring (1799-1873), the son of Sir Thomas Baring. Thomas Baring represented Huntingdon in parliament from 1844 until his death. His older brother, Sir Francis Thornhill Baring (1796-1866), served for Portsmouth from 1826-1865. From 1839-1841, he was chancellor of the exchequer, and from 1849-1852, he was first lord of the admiralty. In 1866, he was made Lord Northbrook, with the barony becoming an earldom in 1876 in favor of his eldest son Thomas George Baring (1826-1904). The latter, the 1st Northbrook Earl, was primarily involved in public affairs and held many important official positions over time. He is most remembered as viceroy of India, a position he held from 1872-1876, but his final public role was as first lord of the admiralty from 1880-1885. After Thomas Baring's passing, Edward Charles Baring (1828-1897), son of Henry Baring, M.P., and grandson of Sir Francis Baring, became the head of Baring Brothers and was raised to the peerage as Baron Revelstoke in 1885. At that point, Baring Brothers was at the peak of its prosperity. In the subsequent years, a significant amount of English capital was lent to the Argentine Republic, with Barings managing the loans and guaranteeing the interest. Due to the continued defaults of the Argentine government, Barings became seriously embroiled in financial difficulties, leading to a major financial crisis. By late 1890, it became known that the firm was about to suspend payments, with liabilities totaling £21,000,000. The swift actions of the Bank of England, which collaborated with the leading joint-stock banks in the UK to take on these liabilities, prevented further disaster, and the firm of Baring Brothers was later reorganized as a limited company with a capital of £1,000,000. In addition to those mentioned, several other members of the Baring family have gained public recognition, notably Charles Baring (1807-1879), bishop of Durham, and Evelyn Baring, 1st Earl of Cromer (q.v.).

BARING-GOULD, SABINE (1834- ), English novelist, was born at Exeter on the 28th of January 1834. After graduating at Clare College, Cambridge, he spent some years in travel, and became in 1864 curate of Horbury, Yorkshire; then perpetual curate of Dalton, in the same county, in 1867; and in 1871 rector of East Mersea, Essex. On his father's death in 1872 he inherited the estate of Lew Trenchard, North Devon, where his family had been settled for nearly three centuries, and he exchanged his Essex living for the rectory of Lew Trenchard in 1881. He had a ready pen, and began publishing books on one subject or another—fiction, travel, history, folk-lore, religion, mythology, from 1854 onwards. His novel Mehalah (1880), the scene of which is laid on the east coast of England, was an excellent story, and among many others may be mentioned John Herring (1883), a tale of the west country; Court Royal (1886); Red Spider (1887); The Pennycomequicks (1889); Cheap Jack Zita (1893); and Broom Squire (1896), a Sussex tale. His contributions to the study of topography, antiquities and folk-lore, while popularly written, were also full of serious research and real learning, notably his Book of Were-wolves (1865), Curious Myths of the Middle Ages (1866), Curious Survivals (1892). He produced at the same time many volumes of sermons and popular theology, and edited (1871-1873) The Sacristy, a quarterly review of ecclesiastical art and literature.

BARING-GOULD, SABINE (1834- ), English novelist, was born in Exeter on January 28, 1834. After graduating from Clare College, Cambridge, he spent several years traveling, and in 1864 became the curate of Horbury, Yorkshire; then in 1867 he became the perpetual curate of Dalton, also in Yorkshire; and in 1871 he became the rector of East Mersea, Essex. After his father's death in 1872, he inherited the estate of Lew Trenchard in North Devon, where his family had lived for nearly three centuries, and in 1881 he swapped his Essex position for the rectory of Lew Trenchard. He was a prolific writer, publishing books on various topics—fiction, travel, history, folklore, religion, and mythology—starting in 1854. His novel Mehalah (1880), set on the east coast of England, was a great story, and among many others, he wrote John Herring (1883), a tale from the west country; Court Royal (1886); Red Spider (1887); The Pennycomequicks (1889); Cheap Jack Zita (1893); and Broom Squire (1896), a story from Sussex. His works on topography, antiquities, and folklore, while accessible, were also rich in serious research and genuine scholarship, particularly his Book of Were-wolves (1865), Curious Myths of the Middle Ages (1866), and Curious Survivals (1892). At the same time, he produced many volumes of sermons and popular theology, and he edited The Sacristy, a quarterly review of ecclesiastical art and literature, from 1871 to 1873.

Living the life of the rapidly disappearing English "squarson," and full of cultivated interests, especially in humanizing the local village mind, and investigating and recording the good things of old-time, his many-sided activities were shown in every direction and his literary facility made his work known far and wide. His familiarity with the country-side and his interest in folk-lore were of special utility in recovering and preserving for publication a large mass of English popular song, and in assisting the new English movement for studying and appreciating the old national ballad-music.

Living the life of the quickly fading English "squarson," and full of cultivated interests, especially in enriching the local village community and exploring and documenting the positive aspects of the past, his diverse activities were evident everywhere, and his writing skills made his work known far and wide. His knowledge of the countryside and his passion for folklore were particularly useful in recovering and preserving a large collection of English popular songs for publication, as well as supporting the new English movement focused on studying and appreciating traditional national ballad music.

BARINGO, a lake of British East Africa, some 30 m. N. of the equator in the eastern rift-valley. It is one of a chain of lakes which stud the floor of the valley and has an elevation of 3325 ft. above the sea. It is about 16 m. long by 9 broad and has an irregular outline, the northern shore being deeply indented. Its waters are brackish. Fed by several small streams it has no outlet. The largest of the rivers which enter it, the Tigrish and the Nyuki, run north through a flat marshy country which extends south of the lake. This district, inhabited by the negro tribe of Njamusi, was by the first explorers called Njemps. It is a fertile grain-growing region containing two considerable villages. The Njamusi are peaceful agriculturists who show marked friendliness to Europeans. N. of the lake rise the Karosi hills; to the E. the land rises in terraces to the edge of the Laikipia escarpment. A characteristic of the country in the neighbourhood of the lake are the "hills" of the termites (white ants). They are hollow columns 10 to 12 ft. high and from 1 ft. to 18 in. broad. The greater kudu, almost unknown elsewhere in East Africa, inhabits the flanks of the Laikipia escarpment to the east of the lake and comes to the foot-hills around Baringo to feed.

BARINGO, a lake in British East Africa, is located about 30 miles north of the equator in the eastern rift valley. It's part of a series of lakes that dot the valley floor and sits at an elevation of 3,325 feet above sea level. The lake is approximately 16 miles long and 9 miles wide, featuring an irregular shoreline with a deeply indented northern shore. Its waters are brackish. Supplied by several small streams, it has no outlet. The largest rivers flowing into it, the Tigrish and the Nyuki, travel north through a flat, marshy area that stretches south of the lake. This region, home to the Njamusi tribe, was referred to as Njemps by the first explorers. It's a fertile area for growing grains and has two significant villages. The Njamusi are peaceful farmers who are notably friendly to Europeans. To the north of the lake are the Karosi hills; to the east, the land slopes in terraces up to the edge of the Laikipia escarpment. A distinctive feature of the area around the lake is the "hills" created by termites (white ants). These are hollow columns that reach 10 to 12 feet high and range from 1 foot to 18 inches wide. The greater kudu, which is rare in other parts of East Africa, lives on the slopes of the Laikipia escarpment to the east of the lake and visits the foothills around Baringo to graze.

The existence of Lake Baringo was first reported in Europe by Ludwig Krapf and J. Rebmann, German missionaries stationed at Mombasa, about 1850; in J. H. Speke's map of the Nile sources (1863) Baringo is confused with Kavirondo Gulf of Victoria Nyanza; it figures in Sir H. M. Stanley's map (1877) as a large sheet of water N.E. of Victoria Nyanza. Joseph Thomson, in his journey through the Masai country in 1883, was the first white man to see the lake and to correct the exaggerated notions as to its size. Native tradition, however, asserts that the lake formerly covered a much larger area.

The existence of Lake Baringo was first reported in Europe by Ludwig Krapf and J. Rebmann, German missionaries in Mombasa, around 1850. In J. H. Speke's map of the Nile sources (1863), Baringo is mistakenly identified as the Kavirondo Gulf of Victoria Nyanza. It appears in Sir H. M. Stanley's map (1877) as a large body of water northeast of Victoria Nyanza. Joseph Thomson, during his journey through the Masai country in 1883, was the first white man to see the lake and to correct exaggerated ideas about its size. However, local tradition claims that the lake once covered a much larger area.

BARISAL, a town of British India, headquarters of Backergunje district in Eastern Bengal and Assam, situated on a river of the same name. Pop. (1901) 18,978. It is an important centre of river trade, on the steamer route through the Sundarbans [v.03 p.0402]from Calcutta to the Brahmaputra. It contains a first grade college and several schools. There are a public library, established by subscription in 1858; and a students' union, for helping the sick and poor and promoting the intellectual and physical improvement of boys. Barisal has given its name to a curious physical phenomenon, known as the "Barisal guns," the cause of which has not been satisfactorily explained. These are noises, like the report of cannon, frequently heard in the channels of the delta of the Brahmaputra, at the rising of the tide.

BARISAL, a town in British India, is the headquarters of the Backergunje district in Eastern Bengal and Assam, located on a river that shares its name. Population (1901) was 18,978. It is a key hub for river trade, positioned on the steamer route through the Sundarbans [v.03 p.0402] connecting Calcutta to the Brahmaputra. The town has a first-grade college and several schools. There is a public library, established by subscription in 1858, and a student union aimed at assisting the sick and poor while promoting the intellectual and physical development of boys. Barisal has also lent its name to a mysterious phenomenon known as the "Barisal guns," the cause of which remains unclear. These sounds, resembling cannon fire, are often heard in the channels of the Brahmaputra delta as the tide rises.

BARIUM (symbol Ba, atomic weight 137.37 [O=16]), one of the metallic chemical elements included in the group of the alkaline earths. It takes its name from the Greek βαρύς (heavy) on account of its presence in barytes or heavy spar which was first investigated in 1602 by V. Casciorolus, a shoemaker of Bologna, who found that after ignition with combustible substances it became phosphorescent, and on this account it was frequently called Bolognian phosphorus. In 1774 K. W. Scheele, in examining a specimen of pyrolusite, found a new substance to be present in the mineral, for on treatment with sulphuric acid it gave an insoluble salt which was afterwards shown to be identical with that contained in heavy spar. Barium occurs chiefly in the form of barytes or heavy spar, BaSO4, and witherite, BaCO3, and to a less extent in baryto-calcite, baryto-celestine, and various complex silicates. The metal is difficult to isolate, and until recently it may be doubted whether the pure metal had been obtained. Sir H. Davy tried to electrolyse baryta, but was unsuccessful; later attempts were made by him using barium chloride in the presence of mercury. In this way he obtained an amalgam, from which on distilling off the mercury the barium was obtained as a silver white residue. R. Bunsen in 1854 electrolysed a thick paste of barium chloride and dilute hydrochloric acid in the presence of mercury, at 100° C., obtaining a barium amalgam, from which the mercury was separated by a process of distillation. A. N. Guntz (Comptes rendus, 1901, 133, p. 872) electrolyses a saturated solution of barium chloride using a mercury cathode and obtains a 3% barium amalgam; this amalgam is transferred to an iron boat in a wide porcelain tube and the tube slowly heated electrically, a good yield of pure barium being obtained at about 1000° C. The metal when freshly cut possesses a silver white lustre, is a little harder than lead, and is extremely easily oxidized on exposure; it is soluble in liquid ammonia, and readily attacks both water and alcohol.

BARIUM (symbol Ba, atomic weight 137.37 [O=16]) is one of the metallic elements categorized as alkaline earth metals. It gets its name from the Greek heavy (heavy) due to its presence in barytes or heavy spar, which was first studied in 1602 by V. Casciorolus, a shoemaker from Bologna. He discovered that after being ignited with combustible materials, it became phosphorescent, leading to its frequent description as Bolognian phosphorus. In 1774, K. W. Scheele, while examining a sample of pyrolusite, identified a new substance in the mineral that, when treated with sulfuric acid, formed an insoluble salt later confirmed to be the same as that found in heavy spar. Barium mainly exists as barytes or heavy spar, BaSO4, and witherite, BaCO3, and to a lesser extent in baryto-calcite, baryto-celestine, and various complex silicates. The metal is hard to isolate, and until recently, it was uncertain if pure metal had ever been produced. Sir H. Davy attempted to electrolyze baryta but did not succeed; he later tried using barium chloride with mercury. This method yielded an amalgam, and after distilling off the mercury, barium was recovered as a silver-white residue. In 1854, R. Bunsen electrolyzed a thick paste of barium chloride and dilute hydrochloric acid with mercury at 100° C., producing a barium amalgam, and the mercury was removed through distillation. A. N. Guntz (Comptes rendus, 1901, 133, p. 872) electrolyzed a saturated solution of barium chloride with a mercury cathode, obtaining a 3% barium amalgam; this amalgam was moved to an iron boat in a wide porcelain tube and slowly heated electrically, yielding a good amount of pure barium at around 1000° C. When freshly cut, the metal has a silver-white luster, is slightly harder than lead, and oxidizes easily when exposed to air; it dissolves in liquid ammonia and readily reacts with both water and alcohol.

Three oxides of barium are known, namely, the monoxide, BaO, the dioxide, BaO2, and a suboxide, obtained by heating BaO with magnesium in a vacuum to 1100° (Guntz, loc. cit., 1906, p. 359). The monoxide is formed when the metal burns in air, but is usually prepared by the ignition of the nitrate, oxygen and oxides of nitrogen being liberated. It can also be obtained by the ignition of an intimate mixture of the carbonate and carbon, and in small quantities by the ignition of the iodate. It is a greyish coloured solid, which combines very energetically with water to form the hydroxide, much heat being evolved during the combination; on heating to redness in a current of oxygen it combines with the oxygen to form the dioxide, which at higher temperatures breaks up again into the monoxide and oxygen.

Three barium oxides are known: the monoxide, BaO, the dioxide, BaO2, and a suboxide created by heating BaO with magnesium in a vacuum at 1100° (Guntz, loc. cit., 1906, p. 359). The monoxide is produced when the metal burns in air but is usually made by igniting the nitrate, releasing oxygen and nitrogen oxides. It can also be obtained by igniting a well-mixed blend of carbonate and carbon, and in small amounts by igniting the iodate. It appears as a grayish solid that reacts vigorously with water to form the hydroxide, releasing a lot of heat during the reaction. When heated to a bright red in an oxygen flow, it reacts with the oxygen to form the dioxide, which at higher temperatures breaks back down into monoxide and oxygen.

Barium hydroxide, Ba(OH)2, is a white powder that can be obtained by slaking the monoxide with the requisite quantity of water, but it is usually made on the large scale by heating heavy spar with small coal whereby a crude barium sulphide is obtained. This sulphide is then heated in a current of moist carbon dioxide, barium carbonate being formed, BaS + H2O + CO2 = BaCO3 + H2S, and finally the carbonate is decomposed by a current of superheated steam, BaCO3 + H2O = Ba(OH)2 + CO2, leaving a residue of the hydroxide. It is a white powder moderately soluble in cold water, readily soluble in hot water, the solution possessing an alkaline reaction and absorbing carbon dioxide readily. The solution, known as baryta-water, finds an extensive application in practical chemistry, being used in gas-analysis for the determination of the amount of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere; and also being used in organic chemistry as a hydrolysing agent for the decomposition of complex ureides and substituted aceto-acetic esters, while E. Fischer has used it as a condensing agent in the preparation of α- and β-acrose from acrolein dibromide. A saturated solution of the hydroxide deposits on cooling a hydrated form Ba(OH)2 · 8H2O, as colourless quadratic prisms, which on exposure to air lose seven molecules of water of crystallization.

Barium hydroxide, Ba(OH)2, is a white powder that can be produced by mixing barium oxide with the right amount of water, but it's usually manufactured on a larger scale by heating barite with coal, which results in crude barium sulfide. This sulfide is then heated with moist carbon dioxide, producing barium carbonate: BaS + H2O + CO2 = BaCO3 + H2S. Finally, the carbonate is broken down using superheated steam: BaCO3 + H2O = Ba(OH)2 + CO2, leaving behind the hydroxide. It appears as a white powder that's moderately soluble in cold water and easily soluble in hot water; the solution is alkaline and readily absorbs carbon dioxide. This solution, known as baryta-water, is widely used in practical chemistry, particularly in gas analysis to measure the amount of carbon dioxide in the air. It’s also applied in organic chemistry as a hydrolyzing agent to break down complex ureides and substituted aceto-acetic esters. Additionally, E. Fischer has used it as a condensing agent in the synthesis of α- and β-acrose from acrolein dibromide. When a saturated solution of the hydroxide cools, it forms a hydrated version, Ba(OH)2 · 8H2O, in the shape of colorless quadratic prisms, which lose seven water molecules when exposed to air.

Barium dioxide, BaO2, can be prepared as shown above, or in the hydrated condition by the addition of excess of baryta-water to hydrogen peroxide solution, when it is precipitated in the crystalline condition as BaO2 · 8H2O. These crystals on heating to 130° C. lose the water of crystallization and leave a residue of the anhydrous peroxide. In the Brin process for the manufacture of oxygen, barium dioxide is obtained as an intermediate product by heating barium monoxide with air under pressure. It is a grey coloured powder which is readily decomposed by dilute acids with the production of hydrogen peroxide.

Barium dioxide, BaO2, can be prepared as shown above, or in a hydrated form by adding excess baryta-water to a hydrogen peroxide solution, resulting in the precipitation of crystalline BaO2 · 8H2O. When these crystals are heated to 130° C, they lose their water of crystallization, leaving behind an anhydrous peroxide residue. In the Brin process for producing oxygen, barium dioxide is obtained as an intermediate product by heating barium monoxide with air under pressure. It appears as a gray powder that easily decomposes in dilute acids, producing hydrogen peroxide.

Barium chloride, BaCl2 · 2H2O, can be obtained by dissolving witherite in dilute hydrochloric acid, and also from heavy spar by ignition in a reverberatory furnace with a mixture of coal, limestone and calcium chloride, the barium chloride being extracted from the fused mass by water, leaving a residue of insoluble calcium sulphide. The chloride crystallizes in colourless rhombic tables of specific gravity 3.0 and is readily soluble in water, but is almost insoluble in concentrated hydrochloric acid and in absolute alcohol. It can be obtained in the anhydrous condition by heating it gently to about 120° C. It has a bitter taste and is a strong poison. Barium bromide is prepared by saturating baryta-water or by decomposing barium carbonate with hydrobromic acid. It crystallizes as BaBr2 · 2H2O isomorphous with barium chloride. Barium bromate, Ba(BrO3)2, can be prepared by the action of excess of bromine on baryta-water, or by decomposing a boiling aqueous solution of 100 parts of potassium bromate with a similar solution of 74 parts of crystallized barium chloride. It crystallizes in the monoclinic system, and separates from its aqueous solution as Ba(BrO3)2 · H2O. On heating, it begins to decompose at 260-265° C. Barium chlorate, Ba(ClO3)2, is obtained by adding barium chloride to sodium chlorate solution; on concentration of the solution sodium chloride separates first, and then on further evaporation barium chlorate crystallizes out and can be purified by recrystallization. It can also be obtained by suspending barium carbonate in boiling water and passing in chlorine. It crystallizes in monoclinic prisms of composition Ba(ClO3)2 · H2O, and begins to decompose on being heated to 250° C. Barium iodate, Ba(IO3)2, is obtained by the action of excess of iodic acid on hot caustic baryta solution or by adding sodium iodate to barium chloride solution. It crystallizes in monoclinic prisms of composition Ba(IO3)2 · H2O, and is only very sparingly soluble in cold water.

Barium chloride, BaCl2 · 2H2O, can be made by dissolving witherite in diluted hydrochloric acid, and it's also produced from heavy spar by heating it in a reverberatory furnace along with a mix of coal, limestone, and calcium chloride, with the barium chloride being extracted from the melted mass using water, leaving behind insoluble calcium sulfide. The chloride forms colorless rhombic crystals with a specific gravity of 3.0 and dissolves easily in water, but is nearly insoluble in concentrated hydrochloric acid and absolute alcohol. It can be obtained in anhydrous form by gently heating it to about 120° C. It has a bitter taste and is highly toxic. Barium bromide is made by treating baryta-water with excess bromine or by breaking down barium carbonate with hydrobromic acid. It crystallizes as BaBr2 · 2H2O, which is similar in structure to barium chloride. Barium bromate, Ba(BrO3)2, can be created by reacting excess bromine with baryta-water, or by decomposing a boiling aqueous solution of 100 parts potassium bromate with a similar solution of 74 parts crystallized barium chloride. It forms crystals in the monoclinic system and precipitates from its aqueous solution as Ba(BrO3)2 · H2O. When heated, it starts to decompose at 260-265° C. Barium chlorate, Ba(ClO3)2, is produced by adding barium chloride to a sodium chlorate solution; as the solution is concentrated, sodium chloride precipitates first, followed by barium chlorate during further evaporation, which can be purified through recrystallization. It can also be made by suspending barium carbonate in boiling water and introducing chlorine. It crystallizes in monoclinic prisms of composition Ba(ClO3)2 · H2O and starts to decompose at 250° C. Barium iodate, Ba(IO3)2, is obtained by reacting excess iodic acid with hot caustic baryta solution or by adding sodium iodate to a barium chloride solution. It crystallizes in monoclinic prisms of composition Ba(IO3)2 · H2O, and is only slightly soluble in cold water.

Barium carbide, BaC2, is prepared by a method similar to that in use for the preparation of calcium carbide (see Acetylene). L. Maquenne has also obtained it by distilling a mixture of barium amalgam and carbon in a stream of hydrogen. Barium sulphide, BaS, is obtained by passing sulphuretted hydrogen over heated barium monoxide, or better by fusion of the sulphate with a small coal. It is a white powder which is readily decomposed by water with the formation of the hydroxide and hydrosulphide. The phosphorescence of the sulphide obtained by heating the thiosulphate is much increased by adding uranium, bismuth, or thorium before ignition (J. pr. Chem., 1905, ii. p. 196).

Barium carbide, BaC2, is made using a method similar to the one used for making calcium carbide (see Acetylene gas). L. Maquenne has also produced it by distilling a mixture of barium amalgam and carbon in a stream of hydrogen. Barium sulfide, BaS, is obtained by passing hydrogen sulfide over heated barium monoxide, or preferably by fusing the sulfate with a small amount of coal. It appears as a white powder that readily breaks down when mixed with water, forming hydroxide and hydrosulfide. The phosphorescence of the sulfide created by heating thiosulfate is significantly increased by adding uranium, bismuth, or thorium before ignition (J. pr. Chem., 1905, ii. p. 196).

Barium sulphate, BaSO4, is the most abundant of the naturally occurring barium compounds (see Barytes) and can be obtained artificially by the addition of sulphuric acid or any soluble sulphate to a solution of a soluble barium salt, when it is precipitated as an amorphous white powder of specific gravity 4.5. It is practically insoluble in water, and is only very slightly soluble in dilute acids; it is soluble to some extent, when freshly prepared, in hot concentrated sulphuric acid, and on cooling the solution, crystals of composition BaSO4 · H2SO4 are deposited. It is used as a pigment under the name of "permanent white" or blanc fixe.

Barium sulfate, BaSO4, is the most common naturally occurring barium compound (see Barium sulfate) and can be created artificially by adding sulfuric acid or any soluble sulfate to a solution of a soluble barium salt, resulting in a white powder with a specific gravity of 4.5. It's nearly insoluble in water and only slightly soluble in dilute acids; however, it can dissolve to some degree when freshly prepared in hot concentrated sulfuric acid, and as the solution cools, crystals of BaSO4 · H2SO4 form. It is used as a pigment known as "permanent white" or blanc fixe.

Barium nitride, Ba3N2, is obtained as a brownish mass by [v.03 p.0403]passing nitrogen over heated barium amalgam. It is decomposed by water with evolution of hydrogen, and on heating in a current of carbonic oxide forms barium cyanide (L. Maquenne). Barium amide, Ba(NH2)2, is obtained from potassammonium and barium bromide.

Barium nitride, Ba3N2, is produced as a brownish mass by [v.03 p.0403]passing nitrogen over heated barium amalgam. It decomposes in water, releasing hydrogen, and when heated in a stream of carbon monoxide, it produces barium cyanide (L. Maquenne). Barium amide, Ba(NH2)2, is created from potassammonium and barium bromide.

Barium nitrate, Ba(NO3)2, is prepared by dissolving either the carbonate or sulphide in dilute nitric acid, or by mixing hot saturated solutions of barium chloride and sodium nitrate. It crystallizes in octahedra, having a specific gravity of 3.2, and melts at 597° C. (T. Carnelley). It is decomposed by heat, and is largely used in pyrotechny for the preparation of green fire. Barium carbonate, BaCO3, occurs rather widely distributed as witherite (q.v.), and may be prepared by the addition of barium chloride to a hot solution of ammonium carbonate, when it is precipitated as a dense white powder of specific gravity 4.3; almost insoluble in water.

Barium nitrate, Ba(NO3)2, is made by dissolving either barium carbonate or barium sulfide in dilute nitric acid, or by mixing hot saturated solutions of barium chloride and sodium nitrate. It crystallizes in octahedra, has a specific gravity of 3.2, and melts at 597° C. (T. Carnelley). It decomposes when heated and is widely used in fireworks to create green fire. Barium carbonate, BaCO3, is found fairly commonly as witherite (q.v.) and can be produced by adding barium chloride to a hot solution of ammonium carbonate, resulting in a dense white powder with a specific gravity of 4.3, which is almost insoluble in water.

Barium and its salts can be readily detected by the yellowish-green colour they give when moistened with hydrochloric acid and heated in the Bunsenflame, or by observation of their spectra, when two characteristic green lines are seen. In solution, barium salts may be detected by the immediate precipitate they give on the addition of calcium sulphate (this serves to distinguish barium salts from calcium salts), and by the yellow precipitate of barium chromate formed on the addition of potassium chromate. Barium is estimated quantitatively by conversion into the sulphate. The atomic weight of the element has been determined by C. Marignac by the conversion of barium chloride into barium sulphate, and also by a determination of the amount of silver required to precipitate exactly a known weight of the chloride; the mean value obtained being 136.84; T. W. Richards (Zeit. anorg. Chem., 1893, 6, p. 89), by determining the equivalent of barium chloride and bromide to silver, obtained the value 137.44. For the relation of barium to radium, see Radioactivity.

Barium and its salts can easily be detected by the yellowish-green color they produce when moistened with hydrochloric acid and heated in a Bunsen flame, or by observing their spectra, where two distinctive green lines appear. In solution, barium salts can be identified by the immediate precipitate formed when calcium sulfate is added (this helps differentiate barium salts from calcium salts) and by the yellow precipitate of barium chromate that occurs when potassium chromate is added. Barium is quantitatively assessed by converting it into sulfate. The atomic weight of the element was determined by C. Marignac through the conversion of barium chloride into barium sulfate, as well as by measuring the amount of silver needed to exactly precipitate a known weight of the chloride; the average value obtained was 136.84. T. W. Richards (Zeit. anorg. Chem., 1893, 6, p. 89) found the value 137.44 by determining the equivalent of barium chloride and bromide to silver. For the relationship between barium and radium, see Radioactive material.

BARKER, EDMUND HENRY (1788-1839), English classical scholar, was born at Hollym in Yorkshire. He entered Trinity College, Cambridge, as a scholar in 1807, but left the university without a degree, being prevented by religious scruples from taking the oath then required. He had previously obtained (in 1809) the Browne medal for Greek and Latin epigrams. After acting as amanuensis to the famous Samuel Parr, the vicar of Hatton in Warwickshire, he married and settled down at Thetford in Norfolk, where he lived for about twenty-five years. He was in the habit of adding the initials O. T. N. (of Thetford, Norfolk) to the title-page of his published works. In later life he became involved in a law-suit in connexion with a will, and thus exhausted his means. In 1837-1838 he was a prisoner for debt in the king's bench and in the Fleet. He died in London on the 21st of March 1839. Barker was a prolific writer on classical and other subjects. In addition to contributing to the Classical Journal, he edited portions of several classical authors for the use of schools. He was one of the first commentators to write notes in English instead of Latin. In a volume of letters he disputed the claims of Sir Philip Francis to the authorship of the Letters of Junius; his Parriana (1828) is a vast and ill-digested compilation of literary anecdotes and criticisms. He also saw through the press the English edition of Lemprière's Classical Dictionary (revised by Anthon) and of Webster's English Dictionary. It is as a lexicographer, however, that Barker is chiefly known. While at Hatton, he conceived the design of a new edition of Stephanus's Thesaurus Graecae Linguae. The work was undertaken by A. J. Valpy, and, although not expressly stated, it was understood that Barker was the responsible editor. When a few parts had appeared, it was severely criticized in the Quarterly Review (xxii., 1820) by Blomfield; the result was the curtailment of the original plan of the work and the omission of Barker's name in connexion with it. It was completed in twelve volumes (1816-1828). The strictures of the Quarterly were answered by Barker in his Aristarchus Anti-Blomfieldianus, which, although unconvincing, was in turn answered by Bishop Monk. He also published notes on the Etymologicum Gudianum, and collaborated with Professor Dunbar of Edinburgh in a Greek and English Lexicon (1831). The editio princeps (1820) of the treatise attributed to Arcadius, Περὶ τόνων, was published by him from a Paris MS. Continental scholars entertained a more favourable opinion of him than those of his own country. He expressed contempt for the minute verbal criticism of the Porsonian school, in which he was himself deficient.

BARKER, EDMUND HENRY (1788-1839), an English classical scholar, was born in Hollym, Yorkshire. He started at Trinity College, Cambridge, as a scholar in 1807 but left without earning a degree because his religious beliefs prevented him from taking the required oath. He had previously won the Browne medal for Greek and Latin epigrams in 1809. After serving as an assistant to the well-known Samuel Parr, the vicar of Hatton in Warwickshire, he married and settled in Thetford, Norfolk, where he lived for about twenty-five years. He often added the initials O. T. N. (of Thetford, Norfolk) to the title page of his published works. Later in life, he became embroiled in a lawsuit related to a will, which drained his resources. From 1837-1838, he was imprisoned for debt in the king's bench and the Fleet. He died in London on March 21, 1839. Barker was a prolific writer on classical and various other topics. Besides contributing to the Classical Journal, he edited parts of several classical authors for school use. He was one of the first commentators to write notes in English instead of Latin. In a volume of letters, he contested Sir Philip Francis's claims to the authorship of the Letters of Junius; his Parriana (1828) is a large and poorly organized collection of literary anecdotes and critiques. He also published the English edition of Lemprière's Classical Dictionary (revised by Anthon) and Webster's English Dictionary. However, he is best known as a lexicographer. While at Hatton, he planned a new edition of Stephanus's Thesaurus Graecae Linguae. This work was taken on by A. J. Valpy, and although it wasn't clearly stated, it was understood that Barker was the main editor. After a few parts were released, it faced harsh criticism in the Quarterly Review (xxii., 1820) from Blomfield, leading to a reduction in the original scope of the work and the omission of Barker's name from it. It was completed in twelve volumes (1816-1828). Barker responded to the Quarterly's criticisms in his Aristarchus Anti-Blomfieldianus, which, while not convincing, was further countered by Bishop Monk. He also published notes on the Etymologicum Gudianum and worked with Professor Dunbar of Edinburgh on a Greek and English Lexicon (1831). The first edition (1820) of the treatise attributed to Arcadius, About tones, was released by him from a Paris manuscript. Continental scholars had a more favorable view of him compared to those in his own country. He expressed disdain for the detailed verbal criticism of the Porsonian school, in which he himself was lacking.

An account of his life will be found in the Gentleman's Magazine for May 1839; see also Notes and Queries (6th series, xii. p. 443), where a full list of his works is given.

An account of his life can be found in the Gentleman's Magazine for May 1839; also check Notes and Queries (6th series, xii. p. 443), where a complete list of his works is provided.

BARKER'S MILL, a mechanical contrivance invented by a Dr Barker about the end of the 17th century. It consisted of a hollow vertical cylinder, provided with a number of horizontal arms fitted with lateral apertures; the contrivance is mounted so as to rotate about the vertical axis. By allowing water to enter the vertical tube, a rotation, due to the discharge through the lateral orifices, is set up.

BARKER'S MILL, a mechanical device created by Dr. Barker around the late 17th century. It had a hollow vertical cylinder with several horizontal arms equipped with side openings; the device was designed to rotate around a vertical axis. By allowing water to flow into the vertical tube, the water exiting through the side openings causes it to spin.

BARKING, a market-town in the Romford parliamentary division of Essex, England, on the river Roding near its junction with the Thames, 8 m. E. of Fenchurch Street station and Liverpool Street station, London, by the London, Tilbury & Southend and Great Eastern railways. Pop. of urban district of Barking town (1891) 14,301; (1901) 21,547. The church of St Margaret is Norman with perpendicular additions, and contains many monuments of interest. Barking was celebrated for its nunnery, one of the oldest and richest in England, founded about 670 by Erkenwald, bishop of London, and restored in 970 by King Edgar, about a hundred years after its destruction by the Danes. The abbess was a baroness ex officio, and the revenue at the dissolution of the monasteries was £1084. There remains a perpendicular turreted gateway. There is also an ancient market-house, used as a town-hall. Victoria Gardens form a public pleasure-ground, and there are recreation grounds. The Gaslight and Coke Company's works at Beckton are in the parish, and also extensive rubber works. At the mouth of the Roding (Barking Creek) are great sewage works, receiving the Northern Outfall sewer from London. There are also chemical works, and some shipping trade, principally in timber and fish. Barking is a suffragan bishopric in the diocese of St Albans.

Barking, a market town in the Romford parliamentary district of Essex, England, is located on the river Roding near where it meets the Thames, 8 miles east of Fenchurch Street station and Liverpool Street station in London, accessible via the London, Tilbury & Southend and Great Eastern railways. The population of the urban district of Barking town was 14,301 in 1891 and grew to 21,547 in 1901. The church of St Margaret features Norman architecture with later perpendicular additions and holds many interesting monuments. Barking was famous for its nunnery, one of the oldest and wealthiest in England, founded around 670 by Erkenwald, bishop of London, and restored in 970 by King Edgar, roughly a century after its destruction by the Danes. The abbess held the title of baroness ex officio, and the revenue at the time of the monasteries' dissolution was £1,084. There is still a turreted gateway from the perpendicular style that remains. Additionally, there is an ancient market house that now serves as the town hall. Victoria Gardens provide a public park, and there are recreation grounds available. The Gaslight and Coke Company's facilities at Beckton are located in the parish, along with large rubber manufacturing plants. At the mouth of the Roding (Barking Creek), there are significant sewage treatment works that receive the Northern Outfall sewer from London. Chemical industries and some shipping trade, primarily in timber and fish, are also present. Barking serves as a suffragan bishopric in the diocese of St Albans.

BARKLY EAST, a town of Cape province, South Africa, capital of a district of the same name, and 80 m. by rail E.S.E. of Aliwal North. The town lies north of the Drakensberg on the Kraai tributary of the Orange river at an elevation of 5831 ft. The district has an area of 1564 sq. m. and a population (1904) of 8490, of whom 50% are whites. The chief occupation followed is sheep-farming, the pasturage being excellent. Like Barkly West, the town and district are named after Sir Henry Barkly, governor of Cape Colony, 1870-1877.

BARKLY EAST, a town in the Eastern Cape province of South Africa, is the capital of a district with the same name and is located 80 miles by rail east-southeast of Aliwal North. The town is situated north of the Drakensberg mountains on the Kraai river tributary of the Orange River at an elevation of 5,831 feet. The district covers an area of 1,564 square miles and had a population of 8,490 in 1904, with 50% being white residents. The main industry here is sheep farming, as the grazing land is excellent. Like Barkly West, the town and district are named after Sir Henry Barkly, who was the governor of the Cape Colony from 1870 to 1877.

BARKLY WEST, a town of Cape province, South Africa, 21 m. N.W. of Kimberley, capital of a district and of an electoral division of the same name in Griqualand West. It is built on the right bank of the Vaal, here spanned by a bridge. Pop. (1904) 1037. Originally called Klipdrift, the town was the first founded by the diggers after the discovery in 1867 of diamonds along the valley of the Vaal, and it had for some years a large floating population. On the discovery of the "dry diggings" at Kimberley, the majority of the diggers removed thither. Barkly West remains, however, the centre of the alluvial diamonds industry. The diamonds of this district are noted for their purity and lustre, and are generally associated with other crystals—garnets, agates, quartz and chalcedonies.

BARKLY WEST, a town in the Cape province of South Africa, is located 21 miles northwest of Kimberley, the capital of a district with the same name in Griqualand West. It’s situated on the right bank of the Vaal River, which is crossed by a bridge. Population (1904) was 1,037. Originally named Klipdrift, this town was the first established by miners after diamonds were found in 1867 along the Vaal River valley, and for several years it had a large transient population. When the "dry diggings" were discovered at Kimberley, most miners moved there. However, Barkly West still serves as the center of the alluvial diamond industry. The diamonds from this area are renowned for their purity and brilliance, and are often found alongside other crystals such as garnets, agates, quartz, and chalcedony.

Barkly West electoral division includes the whole of Griqualand West save the Kimberley division. It is divided into the fiscal districts of Barkly West, Hay and Herbert, with a total pop. (1904) of 48,388, of whom 12,170 are whites (see Griqualand).

Barkly West electoral division covers all of Griqualand West except for the Kimberley division. It's split into the fiscal districts of Barkly West, Hay, and Herbert, with a total population of 48,388 in 1904, including 12,170 white residents (see Griqualand).

BARLAAM AND JOSAPHAT, one of the most popular and widely disseminated of medieval religious romances, which owes its importance and interest to the fact that it is a Christianized version of the story of Gautama Siddharta, the Buddha, with which it agrees not only in broad outline but in essential details.

BARLAAM AND JOSAPHAT, one of the most popular and widely spread medieval religious romances, is significant and intriguing because it is a Christianized retelling of the story of Gautama Siddharta, the Buddha. It aligns with the original not just in general plot but also in key details.

The Christian story first appears in Greek among the works of John (q.v.) of Damascus, who flourished in the early part of the 8th century, and who, before he adopted the monastic life, had [v.03 p.0404]held high office at the court of the caliph Abū Ja‛far al-Mansūr, as his father Sergius is said to have done before him.

The Christian story first appears in Greek among the works of John (q.v.) of Damascus, who thrived in the early 8th century. Before embracing monastic life, he held a prominent position in the court of the caliph Abū Ja‛far al-Mansūr, just like his father Sergius reportedly did before him.

The outline of the Greek story is as follows:—St Thomas had converted the people of India, and after the eremitic life originated in Egypt, many Indians adopted it. But a powerful pagan king arose who hated and persecuted the Christians, especially the ascetics. After this king, Abenner by name, had long been childless, a boy greatly desired and matchless in beauty, was born to him and received the name of Josaphat. The king, in his joy, summons astrologers to predict the child's destiny. They foretell glory and prosperity beyond those of all his predecessors. One sage, most learned of all, assents, but intimates that the scene of this glory will be, not the paternal kingdom, but another infinitely more exalted, and that the child will adopt the faith which his father persecutes.

The outline of the Greek story is as follows:—St. Thomas converted the people of India, and after the eremitic life began in Egypt, many Indians took it up. But a powerful pagan king emerged who despised and persecuted the Christians, especially the ascetics. After this king, named Abenner, had long been without children, a boy, greatly desired and unmatched in beauty, was born to him and given the name Josaphat. The king, in his happiness, calls in astrologers to predict the child's future. They foresee a glory and prosperity greater than that of all his predecessors. One wise man, the most knowledgeable of all, agrees but hints that this glory will not take place in the king's homeland but in a realm infinitely more exalted, and that the child will embrace the faith that his father persecutes.

The boy shows a thoughtful and devout turn. King Abenner, troubled by this and by the remembrance of the prediction, selects a secluded city, in which he causes a splendid palace to be built, where his son should abide, attended only by tutors and servants in the flower of youth and health. No stranger was to have access, and the boy was to be cognizant of none of the sorrows of humanity, such as poverty, disease, old age or death, but only of what was pleasant, so that he should have no inducement to think of the future life; nor was he ever to hear a word of Christ and His religion.

The boy is thoughtful and devoted. King Abenner, worried about this and the prophecy, chooses a remote city and has a magnificent palace built there for his son, where he can live with only young, healthy tutors and servants. No outsiders were allowed, and the boy was to be kept unaware of the hardships of life, like poverty, illness, old age, or death, only experiencing what was enjoyable, so he wouldn’t have any reason to think about the future; he was never to hear anything about Christ or His teachings.

Prince Josaphat grows up in this seclusion, acquires all kinds of knowledge and exhibits singular endowments. At length, on his urgent prayer, the king reluctantly permits him to pass the limits of the palace, after having taken all precautions to keep painful objects out of sight. But through some neglect of orders, the prince one day encounters a leper and a blind man, and asks of his attendants with pain and astonishment what such a spectacle should mean. These, they tell him, are ills to which man is liable. Shall all men have such ills? he asks. And in the end he returns home in deep depression. Another day he falls in with a decrepit old man, and stricken with dismay at the sight, renews his questions and hears for the first time of death. And in how many years, continues the prince, does this fate befall man? and must he expect death as inevitable? Is there no way of escape? No means of eschewing this wretched state of decay? The attendants reply as may be imagined; and Josaphat goes home more pensive than ever, dwelling on the certainty of death and on what shall be thereafter.

Prince Josaphat grows up in this isolation, learns all kinds of knowledge, and shows unique talents. Eventually, after much prayer, the king reluctantly allows him to leave the palace, after taking every precaution to keep any painful sights hidden. But due to some oversight, the prince one day comes across a leper and a blind man, and he asks his attendants, filled with pain and astonishment, what such a sight means. They tell him these are afflictions that humans can suffer. "Will all people face such afflictions?" he asks. In the end, he returns home feeling deeply depressed. Another day, he meets a frail old man and, horrified by the sight, repeats his questions, hearing about death for the first time. "In how many years does this fate befall a person?" the prince continues. "Must everyone expect death as unavoidable? Is there no way to escape it? No means to avoid this miserable state of decay?" The attendants respond as one might expect, and Josaphat goes home more troubled than ever, reflecting on the certainty of death and what comes after.

At this time Barlaam, an eremite of great sanctity and knowledge, dwelling in the wilderness of Sennaritis, divinely warned, travels to India in the disguise of a merchant, and gains access to Prince Josaphat, to whom he imparts the Christian doctrine and commends the monastic life. Suspicion arises and Barlaam departs. But all attempts to shake the prince's convictions fail. As a last resource the king sends for Theudas, a magician, who removes the prince's attendants and substitutes seductive girls; but all their blandishments are resisted through prayer. The king abandons these efforts and associates his son in the government. The prince uses his power to promote religion, and everything prospers in his hands. At last Abenner himself yields to the faith, and after some years of penitence dies. Josaphat surrenders the kingdom to a friend called Barachias and departs for the wilderness. After two years of painful search and much buffeting by demons he finds Barlaam. The latter dies, and Josaphat survives as a hermit many years. King Barachias afterwards arrives, and transfers the bodies of the two saints to India, where they are the source of many miracles.

At this time, Barlaam, a very holy and knowledgeable hermit living in the wilderness of Sennaritis, is divinely warned and travels to India disguised as a merchant. He gains access to Prince Josaphat and shares the Christian faith with him, encouraging a monastic lifestyle. Suspicion grows, and Barlaam leaves. However, all efforts to shake the prince's beliefs fail. As a last resort, the king calls for Theudas, a magician, who removes the prince's attendants and replaces them with enticing girls, but the prince resists all their temptations through prayer. The king gives up these efforts and involves his son in the governance. The prince uses his authority to promote religion, and everything flourishes under his leadership. Eventually, even Abenner yields to the faith and, after several years of penance, dies. Josaphat hands the kingdom over to a friend named Barachias and retreats to the wilderness. After two years of painful searching and struggles against demons, he finds Barlaam. Barlaam then passes away, and Josaphat lives on as a hermit for many years. Later, King Barachias comes and transfers the remains of the two saints to India, where they become the source of many miracles.

Now this story is, mutatis mutandis, the story of Buddha. It will suffice to recall the Buddha's education in a secluded palace, his encounter successively with a decrepit old man, with a man in mortal disease and poverty, with a dead body, and, lastly, with a religious recluse radiant with peace and dignity, and his consequent abandonment of his princely state for the ascetic life in the jungle. Some of the correspondences in the two stories are most minute, and even the phraseology, in which some of the details of Josaphat's history are described, almost literally renders the Sanskrit of the Lalita Vistara. More than that, the very word Joasaph or Josaphat (Arabic, Yūdasatf) is a corruption of Bodisat due to a confusion between the Arabic letters for Y and B, and Bodisatva is a common title for the Buddha in the many birth-stories that clustered round the life of the sage. There are good reasons for thinking that the Christian story did not originate with John of Damascus, and a strong case has been made out by Zotenberg that it reflects the religious struggles and disputes of the early 7th century in Syria, and that the Greek text was edited by a monk of Saint Saba named John, his version being the source of all later texts and translations. How much older than this the Christian story is, we cannot tell, but it is interesting to remember that it embodies in the form of a speech the "Apology" of the 2nd-century philosopher Aristides. After its appearance among the writings of John of Damascus, it was incorporated with Simeon Metaphrastes' Lives of the Saints (c. 950), and thence gained great vogue, being translated into almost every European language. A famous Icelandic version was made for Prince Hakon early in the 13th century. In the East, too, it took on new life and Catholic missionaries freely used it in their propaganda. Thus a Tagala (Philippine) translation was brought out at Manila in 1712. Besides furnishing the early playwrights with material for miracle plays, it has supplied episodes and apologues to many a writer, including Boccaccio, John Gower and Shakespeare. Rudolph of Ems about 1220 expanded it into a long poem of 16,000 lines, celebrating the victory of Christian over heathen teaching. The heroes of the romance have even attained saintly rank. Their names were inserted by Petrus de Natalibus in his Catalogus Sanctorum (c. 1380), and Cardinal Baronius included them in the official Martyrologium authorized by Sixtus V. (1585-1590) under the date of the 27th of November. In the Orthodox Eastern Church "the holy Josaph, son of Abener, king of India" is allotted the 26th of August. Thus unwittingly Gautama the Buddha has come to official recognition as a saint in two great branches of the Catholic Church, and no one will say that he does not deserve the honour. A church dedicated Divo Josaphat in Palermo is probably not the only one of its kind.

Now this story is, mutatis mutandis, the story of Buddha. It’s enough to recall Buddha’s upbringing in a secluded palace, his encounters with an old man, a person suffering from illness and poverty, a dead body, and finally, a peaceful and dignified religious recluse, which led him to leave his royal life for an ascetic existence in the wilderness. Some of the parallels in the two stories are very detailed, and even the way some elements of Josaphat's story are expressed closely matches the Sanskrit of the Lalita Vistara. Furthermore, the name Joasaph or Josaphat (Arabic, Yūdasatf) is a variation of Bodisat, stemming from a mix-up between the Arabic letters for Y and B. Bodhisattva is a common title for the Buddha in the numerous birth-stories surrounding the sage’s life. There are strong reasons to believe that the Christian story didn’t originate with John of Damascus, and Zotenberg has presented a solid argument that it mirrors the religious conflicts and debates of early 7th century Syria, suggesting the Greek text was edited by a monk from Saint Saba named John, whose version became the basis for all later texts and translations. How much older the Christian story is remains unknown, but it’s notable that it includes a speech version of the "Apology" from the 2nd-century philosopher Aristides. After appearing in the writings of John of Damascus, it was included in Simeon Metaphrastes' Lives of the Saints (c. 950), which significantly boosted its popularity, leading to translations into nearly every European language. A well-known Icelandic version was created for Prince Hakon in the early 13th century. In the East, it thrived as well, and Catholic missionaries widely utilized it in their outreach efforts. A Tagalog (Philippine) translation was published in Manila in 1712. Besides providing early playwrights with material for miracle plays, it has inspired many writers, including Boccaccio, John Gower, and Shakespeare. Rudolph of Ems expanded it into a lengthy poem of 16,000 lines around 1220, celebrating the triumph of Christian teachings over pagan ones. The heroes of the story have even been elevated to saintly status. Their names were added by Petrus de Natalibus in his Catalogus Sanctorum (c. 1380), and Cardinal Baronius included them in the official Martyrologium authorized by Sixtus V. (1585-1590) for November 27th. In the Orthodox Eastern Church, "the holy Josaph, son of Abener, king of India" is celebrated on August 26th. Thus, unknowingly, Gautama the Buddha has gained official recognition as a saint in two major branches of the Catholic Church, and no one would dispute that he deserves this honor. A church dedicated Divo Josaphat in Palermo is likely not the only one of its kind.

The identity of the stories of Buddha and St Josaphat was recognized by the historian of Portuguese India, Diogo do Couto (1542-1616), as may be seen in his history (Dec. v. liv. vi. cap. 2). In modern times the honour belongs to Laboulaye (1859), Felix Liebrecht in 1860 putting it beyond dispute. Subsequent researches have been carried out by Zotenberg, Max Müller, Rhys Davids, Braunholtz and Joseph Jacobs, who published his Barlaam and Josaphat in 1896.

The connection between the stories of Buddha and St. Josaphat was acknowledged by the historian of Portuguese India, Diogo do Couto (1542-1616), as noted in his history (Dec. v. liv. vi. cap. 2). In more recent times, this recognition was attributed to Laboulaye (1859), with Felix Liebrecht in 1860 putting the matter beyond doubt. Further research has been conducted by Zotenberg, Max Müller, Rhys Davids, Braunholtz, and Joseph Jacobs, who published his Barlaam and Josaphat in 1896.

BAR-LE-DUC, a town of north-eastern France, capital of the department of Meuse, 50 m. E.S.E. of Châlons-sur-Marne, on the main line of the Eastern railway between that town and Nancy. Pop. (1906) 14,624. The lower, more modern and busier part of the town extends along a narrow valley, shut in by wooded or vine-clad hills, and is traversed throughout its length by the Ornain, which is crossed by several bridges. It is limited towards the north-east by the canal from the Marne to the Rhine, on the south-west by a small arm of the Ornain, called the Canal des Usines, on the left bank of which the upper town (Ville Haute) is situated. The Ville Haute, which is reached by staircases and steep narrow thoroughfares, is intersected by a long, quiet street, bordered by houses of the 15th, 16th and 17th centuries. In this quarter are the remains (16th century) of the château of the dukes of Bar, dismantled in 1670, the old clock-tower and the college, built in the latter half of the 16th century. Its church of St Pierre (14th and 15th centuries) contains a skilfully-carved effigy in white stone of a half-decayed corpse, the work of Ligier Richier (1500-1572), a pupil of Michelangelo—erected to the memory of René de Châlons (d. 1544). The lower town contains the official buildings and two or three churches, but these are of little interest. Among the statues of distinguished natives of the town is one to Charles Nicolas Oudinot, whose house serves as the hôtel-de-ville. Bar-le-Duc has tribunals of first instance and of commerce, a board of trade arbitrators, a lycée, a training-college for girls, a chamber of commerce, a branch of the Bank of France and an art museum. The industries of the town include iron-founding and the manufacture of machinery, corsets, hosiery, [v.03 p.0405]flannel goods, jam and wall-paper, and brewing, cotton spinning and weaving, leather-dressing and dyeing. Wine, timber and iron are important articles of commerce.

BAR-LE-DUC, a town in northeastern France, is the capital of the Meuse department, located 50 miles east-southeast of Châlons-sur-Marne along the main line of the Eastern railway connecting that town to Nancy. Its population was 14,624 in 1906. The lower, more modern, and busier section of the town stretches along a narrow valley surrounded by wooded or vine-covered hills and is traversed by the Ornain River, which is spanned by several bridges. It is bounded to the northeast by the canal from the Marne to the Rhine and to the southwest by a small branch of the Ornain called the Canal des Usines, where the upper town (Ville Haute) is located. Ville Haute, accessible by staircases and steep narrow streets, features a long, quiet road lined with houses from the 15th, 16th, and 17th centuries. In this area are the remains of the 16th-century château of the dukes of Bar, which was dismantled in 1670, along with the old clock tower and the college built in the latter half of the 16th century. The church of St Pierre, dating from the 14th and 15th centuries, houses a skillfully carved white stone effigy of a decaying corpse, created by Ligier Richier (1500-1572), a pupil of Michelangelo, in memory of René de Châlons (d. 1544). The lower town contains the official buildings and a few churches that are of little interest. Among the statues of prominent local figures is one dedicated to Charles Nicolas Oudinot, whose house functions as the town hall. Bar-le-Duc has courts of first instance and of commerce, a board of trade arbitrators, a lycée, a training college for girls, a chamber of commerce, a branch of the Bank of France, and an art museum. The town's industries include iron founding, machinery manufacturing, corset and hosiery production, flannel goods, jam and wallpaper, as well as brewing, cotton spinning and weaving, leather dressing, and dyeing. Wine, timber, and iron are significant commercial products.

Bar-le-Duc was at one time the seat of the countship, later duchy, of Bar, the history of which is given below. Though probably of ancient origin, the town was unimportant till the 10th century when it became the residence of the counts.

Bar-le-Duc was once the center of the countship, and later duchy, of Bar, which is detailed below. Although it likely has ancient roots, the town was not significant until the 10th century when it became the home of the counts.

Counts and Dukes of Bar. In the middle of the 10th century the territory of Bar (Barrois) formed a dependency of the Empire. In the 11th century its lords were only counts by title; they belonged to the house of Mousson (which also possessed the countships of Montbéliard and Ferrette), and usually fought in the French ranks, while their neighbours, the dukes of Lorraine, adhered to the German side. Theobald I., count of Bar, was an ally of Philip Augustus, as was also his son Henry II., who distinguished himself at the battle of Bouvines in 1214. But sometimes the counts of Bar bore arms against France. In 1301 Henry III. having made an alliance with Edward I. of England, whose daughter he had married, was vanquished by Philip the Fair, who forced him to do homage for a part of Barrois, situated west of the Meuse, which was called Barrois mouvant. In 1354 Robert, count of Bar, who had married the daughter of King John, was made marquis of Pont-à-Mousson by the emperor Charles IV. and took the title of duke of Bar. His successor, Edward III., was killed at Agincourt in 1415. In 1419 Louis of Bar, brother of the last-named, a cardinal and bishop of Châlons, gave the duchy of Bar to René of Anjou, the grandson of his sister Yolande, who married Isabella, duchess of Lorraine. Yolande of Anjou, who in 1444 had married Ferri of Lorraine, count of Vaudémont, became heiress of Nicholas of Anjou, duke of Calabria and of Lorraine, in 1473, and of René of Anjou, duke of Bar, in 1480; thus Lorraine, with Barrois added to it, once more returned to the family of its ancient dukes. United with Lorraine to France in 1634, Barrois remained, except for short intervals, part of the royal domain. It was granted in 1738 to Stanislaus Leszczynski, ex-king of Poland, and on his death in 1766 was once more attached to the crown of France.

Counts and Dukes of Bar. In the middle of the 10th century, the territory of Bar (Barrois) became part of the Empire. By the 11th century, its rulers held only the title of counts; they were from the house of Mousson (which also had the countships of Montbéliard and Ferrette) and typically fought alongside the French, while their neighbors, the dukes of Lorraine, sided with the Germans. Theobald I, count of Bar, was an ally of Philip Augustus, as was his son Henry II, who made a name for himself at the battle of Bouvines in 1214. However, there were times when the counts of Bar took up arms against France. In 1301, Henry III formed an alliance with Edward I of England, who was married to his daughter, but was defeated by Philip the Fair, who compelled him to pay homage for part of Barrois, located west of the Meuse, known as Barrois mouvant. In 1354, Robert, count of Bar, who had married King John's daughter, was made marquis of Pont-à-Mousson by Emperor Charles IV and took on the title of duke of Bar. His successor, Edward III, was killed at Agincourt in 1415. In 1419, Louis of Bar, brother of the aforementioned, a cardinal and bishop of Châlons, gave the duchy of Bar to René of Anjou, the grandson of his sister Yolande, who married Isabella, duchess of Lorraine. Yolande of Anjou, who married Ferri of Lorraine, count of Vaudémont in 1444, became the heiress of Nicholas of Anjou, duke of Calabria and Lorraine, in 1473, and of René of Anjou, duke of Bar, in 1480; thus, Lorraine, with Barrois added, returned to the family of its former dukes. Joined with Lorraine to France in 1634, Barrois remained, except for brief periods, part of the royal domain. It was granted in 1738 to Stanislaus Leszczynski, the ex-king of Poland, and upon his death in 1766, it was again attached to the French crown.

(M. P.*)

(M. P.*)

BARLETTA (anc. Barduli), a seaport town and episcopal see of Apulia, Italy, on the E.S.E. coast, in the province of Bari, 34½ m. W.N.W. of Bari by rail. Pop. (1901) 42,022. Its importance dates from the time of the Hohenstaufen. The Gothic church of S. Sepolcro was built at the close of the 12th century, and the Romanesque cathedral was begun at the same period, but added to later. In front of the former church stands a bronze statue, 14 ft. in height, of the emperor Heraclius. The castle behind the cathedral dates from 1537. The harbour is good. It was cleared by 508 sailing-vessels and 461 steamers, the latter with a total tonnage of 364,904 in 1904; the exports were of the value of £180,699 (principally wine, sulphur, oil, tartar and tartaric acid), and the imports £92,486 (coal, timber and sundries).

BARLETTA (formerly Barduli) is a seaport town and the episcopal see of Apulia, Italy, located on the southeast coast in the province of Bari, 34½ miles west-northwest of Bari by rail. Population (1901) was 42,022. Its significance goes back to the time of the Hohenstaufen dynasty. The Gothic church of S. Sepolcro was built at the end of the 12th century, and the Romanesque cathedral started being constructed around the same time, with additions made later. In front of the former church is a 14-foot tall bronze statue of Emperor Heraclius. The castle behind the cathedral was built in 1537. The harbor is good. In 1904, it handled 508 sailing vessels and 461 steamers, which had a total tonnage of 364,904; exports were valued at £180,699 (mainly wine, sulfur, oil, tartar, and tartaric acid), and imports were £92,486 (coal, timber, and miscellaneous goods).

In the neighbourhood (between Andria and Corato), during the siege of Barletta by the French in 1503, the town being defended by the Spanish army, a combat took place between thirteen picked knights of Italy and France, which resulted in favour of the former: it has been celebrated by Massimo d' Azeglio in his Disfida di Barletta. Seven miles to the N.W. are the salt-works of Barletta, now known under the name of Margherita di Savoia.

In the neighborhood (between Andria and Corato), during the French siege of Barletta in 1503, where the Spanish army was defending the town, a battle occurred between thirteen selected knights from Italy and France, which ended in favor of the Italians. This event has been commemorated by Massimo d'Azeglio in his Disfida di Barletta. Seven miles to the northwest are the salt works of Barletta, now called Margherita di Savoia.

(T. As.)

(T. As.)

BARLEY (Hordeum sativum), a member of the grass family, and an important cereal which belongs peculiarly to temperate regions. It originated from a wild species, H. spontaneum, a native of western Asia and has been cultivated from the earliest times. Three subspecies or races are recognized, (i.) H. sativum, subsp. distichum (described by Linnaeus as a distinct species, H. distichon), two-rowed barley. Only the middle spikelet of each triplet is fertile; the ear has therefore only two longitudinal rows of grain, and the spikes are strongly compressed laterally. This approaches most nearly to the wild stock, from which it is distinguished by the non-jointed axis and somewhat shorter awns. This is the race most commonly grown in the British Isles and in central Europe, and includes a large number of sub-races and varieties among which are the finest malting-barleys. The chief sub-races are (a) peacock, fan or battledore barley, described by Linnaeus as a distinct species, H. zeocriton, with erect short ears about 2½ in. long, broad at the base and narrow at the tip, suggesting an open fan or peacock's tail; (b) erect-eared barleys (var. erectum) with erect broad ears and closely-packed plump grains; (c) nodding barleys (var. nutans). The ripe ears of the last hang so as to become almost parallel with the stem; they are narrower and longer than in (b), owing to the grains being placed farther apart on the rachis; it includes the Chevalier variety, one of the best for malting purposes, (ii.) H. sativum, subsp. hexastichum, six-rowed barley (the H. hexastichon of Linnaeus). All the flowers of each triplet of spikelets on both sides of the rachis are fertile and produce ripe fruits; hence the ear produces six longitudinal rows of grain. The ears are short, erect, and the grain thin and coarse; the straw is also short. It is a hardy race, but owing to the poor quality of the grain is rarely met with in Great Britain, (iii.) H. sativum, subsp. vulgare, bere, bigg or four-rowed barley (the H. vulgare of Linnaeus). All the flowers of each triplet are fertile as in (ii.), but the rows are not arranged regularly at equal distances round the rachis. The central fruits of each triplet form two regular rows, but the lateral spikelets form not four straight single rows as in (ii.), but two regular double rows, the whole ear appearing irregularly four-rowed. This race seems to be of later origin than the others. The ears are erect, about 2½ in. long, the grains thinner and longer than in the two-rowed race, and the awns stiff and firmly adhering to the flowering glume. The var. pallidum is the barley most frequently cultivated in northern Europe and northern Asia. This race was formerly used for malt and beer, but owing to its larger amount of gluten as compared with starch it is less adapted for brewing than the two-rowed sorts. To this belong the varieties naked barley (H. coeleste and H. nudum) and Himalayan barley (H. trifurcatum and H. aegiceras). In both the fruits fall out freely from the glume, and in the latter the awns are three-pronged and shorter than the grain.

BARLEY (Hordeum sativum) is a type of grass and an important cereal crop that thrives in temperate regions. It originated from a wild species, H. spontaneum, found in western Asia, and has been cultivated since ancient times. There are three recognized subspecies or races: (i.) H. sativum, subsp. distichum (previously classified by Linnaeus as H. distichon), known as two-rowed barley. In this variety, only the middle spikelet of each triplet is fertile, resulting in two longitudinal rows of grain on the ear, which is laterally compressed. This variety is the closest to the wild ancestor and differs from it by having a non-jointed axis and somewhat shorter awns. It is the type most commonly grown in the British Isles and central Europe, including many sub-races and varieties that produce the best malting barleys. The main sub-races include (a) peacock, fan, or battledore barley, described by Linnaeus as H. zeocriton, characterized by erect short ears about 2½ inches long, broad at the base and narrowing at the tip, resembling an open fan or peacock’s tail; (b) erect-eared barleys (var. erectum) with upright broad ears and closely packed, plump grains; (c) nodding barleys (var. nutans). The mature ears of this last variety hang almost parallel to the stem, are narrower and longer than in (b), because the grains are spaced further apart on the rachis, and it includes the Chevalier variety, which is one of the best for malting. (ii.) H. sativum, subsp. hexastichum, known as six-rowed barley (also referred to as H. hexastichon by Linnaeus). In this variety, all flowers in each spikelet triplet on both sides of the rachis are fertile and yield ripe fruits, resulting in six longitudinal rows of grain. The ears are short and erect, and the grain is thin and coarse, with short straw. Although it is a hardy variety, its grain quality is poor, making it rare in Great Britain. (iii.) H. sativum, subsp. vulgare, known as bere, bigg, or four-rowed barley (referred to as H. vulgare by Linnaeus). Similar to (ii), all flowers in each triplet are fertile, but their arrangement is not regular around the rachis. The central fruits of each triplet form two regular rows, while the lateral spikelets create not four straight single rows as in (ii), but two regular double rows, causing the ear to appear irregularly four-rowed. This variety seems to be of more recent origin than the others. The ears are erect and about 2½ inches long, with grains that are thinner and longer than in the two-rowed variety, and the awns are stiff and firmly attached to the flowering glume. The var. pallidum is the type most commonly cultivated in northern Europe and northern Asia. This race was once used for malt and beer, but due to its higher gluten content compared to starch, it is less suitable for brewing than the two-rowed varieties. This group also includes naked barley (H. coeleste and H. nudum) and Himalayan barley (H. trifurcatum and H. aegiceras), where the fruits fall freely from the glume, and in the latter, the awns are three-pronged and shorter than the grains.

Barley is the most hardy of all cereal grains, its limit of cultivation extending farther north than any other; and, at the same time, it can be profitably cultivated in sub-tropical countries. The opinion of Pliny, that it is the most ancient aliment of mankind, appears to be well-founded, for no less than three varieties have been found in the lake dwellings of Switzerland, in deposits belonging to the Stone Period. According to Professor Heer these varieties are the common two-rowed (H. distichum), the large six-rowed (H. hexastichum, var. densum), and the small six-rowed (H. hexastichum, var. sanctum). The last variety is both the most ancient and the most commonly found, and is the sacred barley of antiquity, ears of which are frequently represented plaited in the hair of the goddess Ceres, besides being figured on ancient coins. The cultivation of barley in ancient Egypt is indicated in Exod. ix. 31. Till within recent times barley formed an important source of food in northern countries, and barley cakes are still to some extent eaten. Owing, however, to its poverty in that form of nitrogenous compound called gluten, so abundant in wheat, barley-flour cannot be baked into vesiculated bread; still it is a highly-nutritious substance, the salts it contains having a high proportion of phosphoric acid. The following is the composition of barley-meal according to Von Bibra, omitting the salts:—

Barley is the hardiest of all cereal grains, growing farther north than any other and can also be profitably cultivated in subtropical regions. Pliny's view that it is the oldest food for humans seems valid since three varieties have been found in the lake dwellings of Switzerland, dating back to the Stone Age. According to Professor Heer, these varieties include the common two-rowed (H. distichum), the large six-rowed (H. hexastichum, var. densum), and the small six-rowed (H. hexastichum, var. sanctum). The last variety is both the oldest and the most commonly found; it's the sacred barley of ancient times, often depicted woven into the hair of the goddess Ceres and featured on ancient coins. The cultivation of barley in ancient Egypt is mentioned in Exod. ix. 31. Until recently, barley was an important food source in northern countries, and barley cakes are still eaten to some extent. However, due to its low gluten content compared to wheat, barley flour cannot be used to make airy bread; nonetheless, it's highly nutritious, with a high proportion of phosphoric acid in its salts. The following is the composition of barley meal according to Von Bibra, excluding the salts:—

Water

Water

15

15

per cent.

percent.

Nitrogenous compounds      

Nitrogen compounds

12.981

12.981

"

"

Gum

Chewing gum

  6.744

6.744

"

"

Sugar

Sugar

  3.200

3.200

"

"

Starch

Starch

59.950

59.95

"

"

Fat

Overweight

  2.170

2.170

"

"

Barley is now chiefly cultivated for malting (see Malt) to prepare spirits and beer (see Brewing), but it is also largely employed in domestic cookery. For the latter purpose the hard, somewhat flinty grains are preferable, and they are prepared by grinding off the outer cuticle which forms "pot barley." When the attrition is carried further, so that the grain is reduced to small round pellets, it is termed "pearl barley." Patent barley is either pot or pearl barley reduced to flour. Under the name decoctum hordei, a preparation of barley is included in the [v.03 p.0406]British Pharmacopoeia, which is of value as a demulcent and emollient drink in febrile and inflammatory disorders.

Barley is now primarily grown for malting (see Malted grain) to make spirits and beer (see Brewing), but it is also widely used in home cooking. For cooking, the hard, somewhat gritty grains are preferred, and they are prepared by grinding off the outer shell, resulting in "pot barley." When the grinding continues further, producing small round pellets, it’s called "pearl barley." Patent barley refers to either pot or pearl barley that has been ground into flour. A preparation of barley under the name decoctum hordei is included in the [v.03 p.0406]British Pharmacopoeia, which is useful as a soothing and softening drink for fevers and inflammatory conditions.

Cultivation.—Apart from the growth-habits of the plant itself, the consideration that chiefly determines the routine of barley cultivation is the demand on the part of the maltster for uniformity of sample. Less care is required in its cultivation when it is intended for feeding live-stock. It is essential that the grains on the maltster's floor should germinate simultaneously, hence at the time of reaping, the whole crop must be as nearly as possible in the same stage of maturity. On rich soils the crop is liable to grow too rapidly and yield a coarse, uneven sample, consequently the best barley is grown on light, open and preferably calcareous soils, while if the condition of the soil is too high it is often reduced by growing wheat before the barley.

Cultivation.—Aside from the growth habits of the plant itself, the main factor that influences barley cultivation is the maltster's demand for uniform samples. Less attention is needed for cultivation when it's meant for feeding livestock. It's crucial that the grains on the maltster's floor germinate at the same time, so when harvesting, the entire crop should be as close as possible to the same level of maturity. On rich soils, the crop can grow too quickly and produce a coarse, uneven sample, which is why the best barley is grown on light, open, and preferably chalky soils. If the soil conditions are too rich, they are often improved by growing wheat before the barley.

Barley (see Agriculture, Crops and Cropping) is a rapidly-growing and shallow-rooted plant. The upper layer of the soil must therefore be free from weeds, finely pulverized and stocked with a readily-available supply of nutriment. In most rotations barley is grown after turnips, or some other "cleaning" crop, with or without the interposition of a wheat crop. The roots are fed off by sheep during autumn and early winter, after which the ground is ploughed to a depth of 3 or 4 in. only in order not to put the layer of soil fertilized by the sheep beyond reach of the plant. The ground is then left unworked and open to the crumbling influence of frost till towards the end of winter, when it is stirred with the cultivator followed by the harrows, or in some cases ploughed with a shallow furrow. The seed, which should be plump, light in colour, with a thin skin covered by fine wrinkles, is sown in March and early April[1] at the rate of from 8 to 12 pecks to the acre and lightly harrowed in. As even distribution at a uniform depth is necessary, the drill is preferred to the broadcast-seeder for barley sowing. In early districts seeding may take place as early as February, provided a fine tilth is obtainable, but it rarely extends beyond the end of April. If artificial manures are used, a usual dressing consists of 2 or 3 cwt. of superphosphate to the acre at the time of sowing, followed, if the ground is in poor condition, by 1 cwt. of nitrate of soda when the plant is showing. Nitrogen must, however, be applied with caution as it makes the barley rich in albumen, and highly albuminous barley keeps badly and easily loses its germinating capacity. Farm-yard manure should also be avoided. After-cultivation may comprise rolling, harrowing (to preserve the fineness of the tilth) and in some districts hoeing. Barley is cut, either with scythe or machine, when it is quite ripe with the ears bending over. The crop is often allowed to lie loose for a day or two, owing to the belief that sunshine and dews or even showers mellow it and improve its colour. It may even be stacked without tying into sheaves, though this course involves greater expenditure of labour in carrying and afterwards in threshing. There is a prejudice against the use of the binder in reaping barley, as it is impossible to secure uniformity of colour in the grain when the stalks are tightly tied in the sheaf, and the sun has not free access to those on the inside. In any case it must not be stacked while damp, and if cut by machine is therefore sometimes tied in sheaves and set up in stocks as in the case of wheat. The above sketch indicates the general principles of barley-cultivation, but in practice they are often modified by local custom or farming exigencies.

Barley (see Farming, Crops and Cropping) is a fast-growing plant with shallow roots. The topsoil needs to be free of weeds, finely broken up, and rich in nutrients. Typically, barley is planted after turnips or another "cleaning" crop, sometimes following a wheat crop. In autumn and early winter, sheep graze on the roots, and then the ground is plowed to a depth of only 3 or 4 inches to keep the nutrient-rich soil accessible to the plants. The ground is left untouched and exposed to frost until late winter, when it's worked with a cultivator and then harrowed, or occasionally plowed with a shallow furrow. The seeds, which should be plump, light-colored, and have a thin, wrinkled skin, are sown in March or early April at a rate of 8 to 12 pecks per acre and lightly harrowed in. Because even distribution at a uniform depth is essential, drills are preferred over broadcast seeders for sowing barley. In warmer areas, sowing can start as early as February if the soil is suitable, but it usually doesn’t extend beyond the end of April. If using fertilizers, a common application is 2 or 3 hundredweight of superphosphate per acre at sowing, followed by 1 hundredweight of nitrate of soda if the soil is poor and the plants are visible. However, nitrogen should be used carefully since it increases the protein content of barley, which can lead to spoilage and loss of germination ability. Farmyard manure should also be avoided. After planting, maintenance may include rolling, harrowing (to keep the soil fine), and in some areas, hoeing. Barley is harvested with a scythe or machine when fully ripe and the ears are drooping. It’s often left to dry for a day or two because it's believed that sunshine and dew or light rain improve its color. It can even be stacked without being tied into sheaves, although this requires more labor for transport and threshing later. There’s a tendency to avoid using binders for harvesting barley because tightly tied sheaves do not allow for even color in the grain, as the inner stalks don’t get enough sunlight. Regardless, it shouldn't be stacked while damp, and if harvested with a machine, it may be tied into sheaves and arranged in stocks like wheat. This overview outlines the general principles of barley cultivation, but local customs or farming needs often lead to variations in practice.

Barley is liable to smut and the other fungus diseases which attack wheat (q.v.), and the insect pests which prey on the two plants are also similar. The larvae of the ribbon-footed corn-fly (Chlorops taeniopus) caused great injury to the barley crop in Great Britain in 1893, when the plant was weakened by extreme drought. A fair crop of barley yields about 36 bushels (56 lb to the bushel) per acre, but under the best conditions 40 and 50 bushels may be obtained. The yield of straw is from 15 to 20 cwt. per acre. Barley-straw is considered inferior both as fodder and litter.

Barley is susceptible to smut and other fungal diseases that also affect wheat (q.v.), and the insect pests that target both plants are quite similar. In 1893, the larvae of the ribbon-footed corn-fly (Chlorops taeniopus) caused significant damage to the barley crop in Great Britain, especially since the plants were weakened by severe drought. A good barley crop yields about 36 bushels (56 lb per bushel) per acre, but under optimal conditions, yields of 40 to 50 bushels can be achieved. The straw yield ranges from 15 to 20 cwt. per acre. Barley straw is regarded as inferior for both fodder and bedding.

[1] Barley is occasionally sown in autumn to provide keep for sheep in the following spring.

[1] Barley is occasionally planted in the fall to provide feed for sheep in the upcoming spring.

BARLEY-BREAK, an old English country game frequently mentioned by the poets of the 17th and 18th centuries. It was played by three pairs composed of one of each sex, who were stationed in three bases or plots, contiguous to each other. The couple occupying the middle base, called hell or prison, endeavoured to catch the other two, who, when chased, might break to avoid being caught. If one was overtaken, he and his companion were condemned to hell. From this game was taken the expression "the last couple in hell," often used in old plays.

BARLEY-BREAK, an old English country game often mentioned by poets in the 17th and 18th centuries. It was played by three pairs, each consisting of one male and one female, who were placed in three adjacent bases or areas. The couple in the middle base, called hell or prison, tried to catch the other two, who, while being chased, could break to avoid being caught. If one was caught, he and his partner were sent to hell. This game gave rise to the phrase "the last couple in hell," which is commonly found in old plays.

BARLEY-CORN, a grain of barley, and thus a measure taken from the length of a grain of barley, three of which (sometimes four) were considered to make up an inch. The barley-corn has been personified as representing the malt liquor made from barley, as in Burns's song "John Barleycorn."

BARLEY-CORN, a grain of barley, and therefore a measure based on the length of a grain of barley, three of which (sometimes four) were thought to equal an inch. The barley-corn has been personified to symbolize the malt liquor made from barley, as seen in Burns's song "John Barleycorn."

BARLOW, SIR GEORGE HILARO (1762-1847), Anglo-Indian statesman, was appointed to the Bengal Civil Service in 1778, and in 1788 carried into execution the permanent settlement of Bengal. When the marquess of Cornwallis died in 1805, Sir George Barlow was nominated provisional governor-general, and his passion for economy and retrenchment in that capacity has caused him to be known as the only governor-general who diminished the area of British territory; but his nomination was rejected by the home government, and Lord Minto was appointed. Subsequently Barlow was created governor of Madras, where his want of tact caused a mutiny of officers in 1809, similar to that which had previously occurred under Clive. In 1812 he was recalled, and lived in retirement until his death in February 1847. He was created a baronet in 1803.

BARLOW, SIR GEORGE HILARO (1762-1847), Anglo-Indian statesman, was appointed to the Bengal Civil Service in 1778, and in 1788 implemented the permanent settlement of Bengal. When the Marquess of Cornwallis died in 1805, Sir George Barlow was nominated as the provisional governor-general, and his focus on economy and budget cuts in that role led to him being known as the only governor-general who reduced the area of British territory; however, his nomination was rejected by the home government, and Lord Minto was appointed instead. Later, Barlow became the governor of Madras, where his lack of tact resulted in a mutiny of officers in 1809, similar to one that had occurred earlier under Clive. In 1812, he was recalled and lived in retirement until his death in February 1847. He was made a baronet in 1803.

BARLOW, JOEL (1754-1812), American poet and politician, born in Redding, Fairfield county, Connecticut, on the 24th of March 1754. He graduated at Yale in 1778, was a post-graduate student there for two years, and from September 1780 until the close of the revolutionary war was chaplain in a Massachusetts brigade. He then, in 1783, removed to Hartford, Connecticut, established there in July 1784 a weekly paper, the American Mercury, with which he was connected for a year, and in 1786 was admitted to the bar. At Hartford he was a member of a group of young writers including Lemuel Hopkins, David Humphreys, and John Trumbull, known in American literary history as the "Hartford Wits." He contributed to the Anarchiad, a series of satirico-political papers, and in 1787 published a long and ambitious poem, The Vision of Columbus, which gave him a considerable literary reputation and was once much read. In 1788 he went to France as the agent of the Scioto Land Company, his object being to sell lands and enlist immigrants. He seems to have been ignorant of the fraudulent character of the company, which failed disastrously in 1790. He had previously, however, induced the company of Frenchmen, who ultimately founded Gallipolis, Ohio, to emigrate to America. In Paris he became a liberal in religion and an advanced republican in politics. He remained abroad for several years, spending much of his time in London; was a member of the obnoxious "London Society for Constitutional Information"; published various radical essays, including a volume entitled Advice to the Privileged Orders (1792), which was proscribed by the British government; and was made a citizen of France in 1792. He was American consul at Algiers in 1795-1797, securing the release of American prisoners held for ransom, and negotiating a treaty with Tripoli (1796). He returned to America in 1805, and lived near Washington, D.C., until 1811, when he became American plenipotentiary to France, charged with negotiating a commercial treaty with Napoleon, and with securing the restitution of confiscated American property or indemnity therefor. He was summoned for an interview with Napoleon at Wilna, but failed to see the emperor there; became involved in the retreat of the French army; and, overcome by exposure, died at the Polish village of Zarnowiec on the 24th of December 1812. In 1807 he had published in a sumptuous volume the Columbiad, an enlarged edition of his Vision of Columbus, more pompous even than the original; but, though it added to his reputation in some quarters, on the whole it was not well received, and it has subsequently been much ridiculed. The poem for which he is now best known is his mock heroic Hasty Pudding (1793). Besides the writings mentioned above, he published Conspiracy of Kings, a Poem addressed to [v.03 p.0407]the Inhabitants of Europe from another Quarter of the Globe (1792); View of the Public Debt, Receipts and Expenditure of the United States (1800); and the Political Writings of Joel Barlow (2nd ed., 1796). He also published an edition, "corrected and enlarged," of Isaac Watt's Imitation of the Psalms of David (1786).

BARLOW, JOEL (1754-1812) was an American poet and politician, born in Redding, Fairfield County, Connecticut, on March 24, 1754. He graduated from Yale in 1778 and was a post-graduate student there for two years. From September 1780 until the end of the Revolutionary War, he served as a chaplain in a Massachusetts brigade. In 1783, he moved to Hartford, Connecticut, where he established a weekly newspaper, the American Mercury, in July 1784, and worked on it for a year. He passed the bar exam in 1786. In Hartford, he was part of a group of young writers, including Lemuel Hopkins, David Humphreys, and John Trumbull, known in American literary history as the "Hartford Wits." He contributed to the Anarchiad, a series of satirical political papers, and published a long and ambitious poem, The Vision of Columbus, in 1787, which earned him significant literary recognition and was widely read. In 1788, he traveled to France as the agent for the Scioto Land Company to sell land and attract immigrants. He appeared to be unaware of the company's fraudulent nature, which collapsed disastrously in 1790. However, he had previously persuaded a group of French settlers, who eventually founded Gallipolis, Ohio, to immigrate to America. While in Paris, he became a liberal in his religious views and an advanced republican politically. He spent several years abroad, mostly in London, and was a member of the controversial "London Society for Constitutional Information." He published various radical essays, including a book titled Advice to the Privileged Orders (1792), which was banned by the British government; he also became a citizen of France in 1792. He served as American consul in Algiers from 1795 to 1797, securing the release of American hostages and negotiating a treaty with Tripoli in 1796. Barlow returned to America in 1805 and lived near Washington, D.C., until 1811, when he was appointed as the American plenipotentiary to France. His task was to negotiate a commercial treaty with Napoleon and seek restitution for confiscated American property. Summoned for a meeting with Napoleon in Wilna, he missed the emperor and became caught up in the retreat of the French army, ultimately succumbing to exposure and dying in the Polish village of Zarnowiec on December 24, 1812. In 1807, he published an elaborate edition of the Columbiad, an expanded version of his Vision of Columbus, which was more grandiose than the original; although it boosted his reputation in some circles, it was generally poorly received and has been widely mocked since. The poem he is now best known for is his mock-heroic Hasty Pudding (1793). In addition to the works mentioned above, he published Conspiracy of Kings, a Poem addressed to the Inhabitants of Europe from another Quarter of the Globe (1792); View of the Public Debt, Receipts and Expenditure of the United States (1800); and Political Writings of Joel Barlow (2nd ed., 1796). He also published a "corrected and enlarged" edition of Isaac Watt's Imitation of the Psalms of David (1786).

See C. B. Todd's Life and Letters of Joel Barlow (New York and London, 1886); and a chapter, "The Literary Strivings of Joel Barlow," in M. C. Tyler's Three Men of Letters (New York and London, 1895).

See C. B. Todd's Life and Letters of Joel Barlow (New York and London, 1886); and a chapter, "The Literary Strivings of Joel Barlow," in M. C. Tyler's Three Men of Letters (New York and London, 1895).

BARLOW, PETER (1776-1862), English writer on pure and applied mathematics, was born at Norwich in 1776 and died on the 1st of March 1862. In 1806 he was appointed mathematical master in the Woolwich Academy, and filled that post for forty-one years. In 1823 he was made a fellow of the Royal Society, and two years later received the Copley medal. Steam locomotion received much attention at his hands, and he sat on the railway commissions of 1836, 1839, 1842, 1845. He received many distinctions from British and foreign scientific societies. Barlow's principal works are—Elementary Investigation of the Theory of Numbers (1811); New Mathematical and Philosophical Dictionary (1814); Essay on Magnetic Attractions (1820). The investigations on magnetism led to the important practical discovery of a means of rectifying or compensating compass errors in ships. Besides compiling numerous useful tables, he contributed largely to the Encyclopaedia Metropolitana.

BARLOW, PETER (1776-1862), an English writer on pure and applied mathematics, was born in Norwich in 1776 and passed away on March 1, 1862. In 1806, he was appointed as the mathematical master at Woolwich Academy, a position he held for forty-one years. In 1823, he became a fellow of the Royal Society, and two years later, he was awarded the Copley medal. He devoted significant attention to steam locomotion and served on the railway commissions in 1836, 1839, 1842, and 1845. Barlow received numerous accolades from both British and international scientific societies. His main works include Elementary Investigation of the Theory of Numbers (1811); New Mathematical and Philosophical Dictionary (1814); and Essay on Magnetic Attractions (1820). His research on magnetism led to the crucial practical discovery of a method for correcting compass errors in ships. In addition to compiling many useful tables, he also made substantial contributions to the Encyclopaedia Metropolitana.

BARM (a word common to Teutonic languages), the scum formed on the top of malt liquor when fermenting; yeast used to leaven bread, or to set up fermentation in liquor.

BARM (a word used in Germanic languages) is the foam that forms on top of malt liquor during fermentation; it's also the yeast used to leaven bread or to start fermentation in beverages.

BARMECIDES, more accurately Barmakids, a noble Persian family which attained great power under the Abbasid caliphs. Barmak, the founder of the family, was a Persian fire-worshipper, and is supposed to have been a native of Khorasan. According to tradition, his wife was taken for a time into the harem of Abdallah, brother of Kotaiba the conqueror of Balkh, and became the mother of Khalid b. Barmak the Barmecide. Barmak subsequently (about A.D. 736) rebuilt and adorned his native city of Balkh after the rebellion of Harith. The family prospered, and his grandson Yaḥyā b. Khalid was the vizier of the caliph Mahdi and tutor of Harūn al-Rashid. His sons Fadl and Ja‛far (the Giafar of the Arabian Nights) both occupied high offices under Harūn. The story of their disgrace, though romantic, is not improbable. Harūn, it is said, found his chief pleasure in the society of his sister ‛Abbāsa and Ja‛far, and in order that these two might be with him continuously without breach of etiquette, persuaded them to contract a purely formal marriage. The conditions were, however, not observed and Harūn, learning that ‛Abbāsa had borne a son, caused Ja‛far suddenly to be arrested and beheaded, and the rest of the family except Mahommed, Yaḥyā's brother, to be imprisoned and deprived of their property. It is probable, however, that Harūn's anger was caused to a large extent by the insinuations of his courtiers that he was a mere puppet in the hands of a powerful family. See further Caliphate, section C, §§ 4, 5.

BARMECIDES, more accurately Barmakids, a prestigious Persian family that gained significant power under the Abbasid caliphs. Barmak, the family's founder, was a Persian fire-worshipper and is believed to have been from Khorasan. According to tradition, his wife was briefly taken into the harem of Abdallah, brother of Kotaiba, the conqueror of Balkh, and became the mother of Khalid b. Barmak, the Barmecide. Barmak later (around CE 736) rebuilt and enhanced his hometown of Balkh after the Harith rebellion. The family flourished, and his grandson Yahya b. Khalid served as the vizier to caliph Mahdi and tutored Harūn al-Rashid. His sons Fadl and Ja‛far (the Giafar of the Arabian Nights) both held important positions under Harūn. Their story of disgrace, while dramatic, seems plausible. It is said that Harūn greatly enjoyed the company of his sister ‛Abbāsa and Ja‛far, and to keep them close while maintaining propriety, he convinced them to enter into a purely formal marriage. However, the terms were not followed, and when Harūn discovered that ‛Abbāsa had given birth to a son, he had Ja‛far arrested and executed, while the rest of the family, except for Mahommed, Yaḥyā's brother, was imprisoned and stripped of their possessions. However, it’s likely that Harūn's fury was largely fueled by suggestions from his courtiers that he was just a puppet controlled by a powerful family. See further Caliphate, section C, §§ 4, 5.

The expression "Barmecide Feast," to denote an imaginary banquet, is drawn from one of the tales ("The Barber's Tale of his Sixth Brother") in the Arabian Nights, in which a series of empty dishes is served up to a hungry man to test his sense of humour by one of the Barmecides (see edition by L. C. Smithers, Lond., 1894, vol. i. 317).

The term "Barmecide Feast," which refers to a fake banquet, comes from one of the stories ("The Barber's Tale of his Sixth Brother") in the Arabian Nights. In the story, a hungry man is presented with a series of empty dishes by one of the Barmecides to see if he can find humor in the situation (see edition by L. C. Smithers, Lond., 1894, vol. i. 317).

BARMEN, a town of Germany, in the Prussian Rhine province and the governmental district of Düsseldorf. Pop. (1816) 19,030; (1890) 116,144; (1905) 156,148. It is served by the main railway from Berlin to Aix-la-Chapelle, and lies immediately east of Elberfeld, with which it virtually forms one town. It stretches for some 4 m. along the narrow valley of the river Wupper, which, within the municipal boundaries, is crossed by twenty bridges. High wooded hills surround it. It is divided into three main districts, Upper, Middle and Lower Barmen, and is connected, throughout its length, with Elberfeld, by railway, tramway, and a suspended trolley line, hanging over the bed of the Wupper. It contains nine Evangelical and two Roman Catholic churches, a stately modern town hall, a Hall of Fame (Ruhmeshalle), with statues of the emperors William I. and Frederick III., a theatre, a picture-gallery, an ethnographical museum, and an exchange. There are many public monuments, one to Bismarck another to the poet Emil Rittershaus (1834-1897), a native of the town, and one commemorative of the Franco-German War of 1870-71. There are several high-grade public schools, academies of technical science, engineering and textile industry, and a missionary theological seminary. Barmen is one of the most important manufacturing centres of Germany. The rapid development of its commercial activity only dates from the beginning of the 19th century. It is the chief seat of ribbon weaving in Germany, and manufactures thread, lace, braids, cotton and cloth goods, carpets, silks, machinery, steel wares, plated goods and buttons, the last industry employing about 15,000 hands. There are numerous bleaching-fields, print-fields and dyeworks famous for their Turkey-red, soap works, chemical works and potteries. There are also extensive breweries. Its export trade, particularly to the United States, is very considerable. The hills lying S. of the town are laid out in public grounds. Here are a health resort, a tower commanding an extensive view, and numerous villas. Barmen, although mentioned in chronicles in the 11th century, did not attain civic rights until 1808, when it was formed into a municipality by the grand-duke of Berg.

Barmen, a town in Germany, located in the Prussian Rhine province and the Düsseldorf administrative district. Population: (1816) 19,030; (1890) 116,144; (1905) 156,148. It is served by the main railway from Berlin to Aix-la-Chapelle and is situated just east of Elberfeld, effectively forming one continuous town. The town stretches about 4 miles along the narrow valley of the Wupper River, which is crossed by twenty bridges within its municipal boundaries. It is surrounded by high wooded hills. Barmen is divided into three main districts: Upper, Middle, and Lower Barmen, and it is connected along its length to Elberfeld by railway, tramway, and a suspended trolley line that hangs over the Wupper River. The town features nine Evangelical and two Roman Catholic churches, a modern town hall, a Hall of Fame (Ruhmeshalle) with statues of Emperors William I and Frederick III, a theater, an art gallery, an ethnographical museum, and an exchange. There are several public monuments, including one to Bismarck, another to poet Emil Rittershaus (1834-1897), a native of the town, and a memorial for the Franco-German War of 1870-71. Barmen has several high-quality public schools, academies for technical science, engineering, and textile industry, as well as a missionary theological seminary. It is one of the most significant manufacturing centers in Germany. The rapid growth of its commercial activities started in the early 19th century. It is the leading center for ribbon weaving in Germany and produces thread, lace, braids, cotton and cloth goods, carpets, silks, machinery, steel products, plated goods, and buttons, with the button industry employing about 15,000 people. The town also has many bleaching fields, printing fields, and dye works known for their Turkey-red, as well as soap works, chemical plants, and potteries. There are also large breweries. Its export trade, particularly to the United States, is substantial. The hills to the south of the town are laid out as public grounds, featuring a health resort, a tower with a panoramic view, and numerous villas. Although Barmen is mentioned in chronicles from the 11th century, it did not gain civic rights until 1808, when it was established as a municipality by the Grand Duke of Berg.

See A. Shadwell, Industrial Efficiency (1906), for a good description of the industrial aspect.

See A. Shadwell, Industrial Efficiency (1906), for a solid description of the industrial aspect.

BARMOTE COURT (also written Berghmote, Barghmote, Bargemote, Barmoot), a name applied to courts held in the lead-mining districts of Derbyshire, England, for the purpose of determining the customs peculiar to the industry and also for the settlements of any disputes which may arise in connexion therewith. Barmote courts are of very ancient origin, having been in existence in the reign of Edward I. Their jurisdiction extends both to the crown lands in the duchy of Lancaster and to those under individual ownership, comprising seven clearly defined districts. Owing to the progress made in modern mining, many of the customs and much of the procedure had become obsolete, and their powers were regulated by the High Peak Mining Customs and Mineral Courts Act 1851. An appeal from the jurisdiction of the courts lies by way of certiorari.

BARMOTE COURT (also spelled Berghmote, Barghmote, Bargemote, Barmoot) refers to courts held in the lead-mining areas of Derbyshire, England, to address the unique customs of the industry and resolve any disputes that may arise related to it. Barmote courts are very old, dating back to the reign of Edward I. Their authority covers both crown lands in the duchy of Lancaster and privately owned lands, encompassing seven clearly defined districts. Due to advancements in modern mining, many customs and procedures have become outdated, and their powers were governed by the High Peak Mining Customs and Mineral Courts Act 1851. Appeals from the jurisdiction of these courts can be made through certiorari.

BARMOUTH (Abermaw, mouth of the Maw, or Mawddach, in Cardigan Bay, the only haven in Merionethshire, North Wales), a small seaport on the north of the estuary. Pop. of urban district (1901), 2214. The ride to Dolgelley (Dolgellau) is fine. The parish church, Llanaber, 1½ m. from Barmouth, is on a cliff overlooking the sea. Barmouth is a favourite bathing place, on the Cambrian railway. It is a centre for coaching in summer, especially to and through the Vale of Llangollen.

BARMOUTH (Abermaw, mouth of the Maw, or Mawddach, in Cardigan Bay, the only harbor in Merionethshire, North Wales), is a small seaport located on the north side of the estuary. The population of the urban district in 1901 was 2,214. The journey to Dolgelley (Dolgellau) is beautiful. The parish church, Llanaber, is 1½ miles from Barmouth and sits on a cliff with a view of the sea. Barmouth is a popular beach destination on the Cambrian railway. It serves as a hub for summer coaching, especially to and through the Vale of Llangollen.

BARNABAS, in the New Testament, the surname, according to Acts iv. 36, given by the apostles (possibly in contrast to Joseph Barsabbas, Acts i. 23) to Joseph, "a Levite, a man of Cyprus by birth," who, though like Paul not of the Twelve, came like him to rank as an apostle (Acts xiv. 4, 14, 1 Cor. ix. 6; see Apostle). The Greek rendering of this Semitic name υἱὸς παρακλήσεως) may be translated "son of consolation" (as in the A.V.), or "son of exhortation" (as in the R.V.). But there is an initial difficulty about the Greek rendering itself, as no satisfactory etymology of Bar-nabas in this sense has as yet been suggested. The one at present in favour on the ground of philological analogy (see Z.N.T.W., 1906, p. 91 for a fresh instance), viz. Bar-Nebo, lacks intrinsic fitness for a Jew and a Levite, and of course does not accord with the statement in Acts itself. Hence it still seems best to assume some unknown Aramaic form equivalent to παράκλησις, and then to take the latter in the sense of comfort or encouragement. This rendering, rather than "exhortation" in the sense of eloquence, best suits the usage of Acts, which suggests such comfort as is given by encouraging rather than rousing words (ix. 31, xi. 23, xiii. 15, xv. 31 f.; cf. Luke ii. 25, vi. 24). All we hear of Barnabas points to goodness of heart ("a good man," xi. 24) as his distinctive quality, giving fineness of perception (ix. 27, xi. 25 f.) and large insight into essentials (xi. 23 f.). It was probably the practically helpful and encouraging form that his gift as a "prophet" took (Acts xiii. i, [v.03 p.0408]with 1 Cor. xiv. 3). It is perhaps significant that his first appearance is of the generously helpful kind described in Acts iv. 36 f. Yet we must beware of regarding Barnabas as merely a fine character; he plays too prominent a part in the New Testament for any such limitation. Thus, he next appears as braving the suspicions which dogged the ex-persecutor Saul (Paul)—possibly an old acquaintance in Hellenist circles at Jerusalem (cf. vi. 9, ix. 29)—and introducing him to the older apostles (ix. 27). More suggestive still of high repute as a man of insight and authority is his mission from the Jerusalem Church to inspect and judge of the new departure in the Gospel at Antioch, in Acts xi. 22. This means very much, though his modesty led him to call in the aid of his friend Saul to cope with the new and expanding situation (25 f.). After their brief joint visit to Judaea and Jerusalem (xi. 30, xii. 25) we next get a glimpse of Barnabas as still chief among the spiritual leaders of the Antiochene Church, and as called by the Spirit, along with Saul, to initiate the wider mission of the Gospel, outside Syria even, in regions beyond (xiii. 2, 4). He led the way to his native Cyprus; but in the crucial struggle with the magician Bar-Jesus, in the presence of the governor of the island (xiii. 7 ff.), Saul seems to have come so decisively to the front, that henceforth, for the author of Acts he takes the lead, and Barnabas appears as his colleague (see xiii. 13, "Paul and his company," and note the turning back of Mark, the kinsman of Barnabas). The fact that at Lystra the natives styled Barnabas, Zeus, and Paul, Hermes, while suggesting that Barnabas was the man of nobler mien, proves that Paul was the chief speaker (xiv. 12); and the notices in the Pauline epistles fully bear out the view that "the gospel of the Gentiles" which they preached was in conception Paul's (Gal. ii. 1-9). Indeed, Barnabas's vacillation at Antioch, as recorded in Gal. ii. 11 ff. (whether it preceded or followed their mission in Acts xiii.-xiv.), shows that, while gifted with true intuitions, he was not strong in thinking out his position to all its issues on principle, and that it was here that Paul was so immensely his superior. But what Barnabas did see with full reasoned conviction, he was staunch in upholding; thus he upheld the general cause of Gentile freedom from the obligation of circumcision (as distinct from perfect religious equality with Jewish believers) at the Jerusalem conference (Acts xv.). With this stand for principle, however, his main work, as a great link in the transition of the Gospel from its Jewish to its universal mission, reached its climax; and Acts transfers its attention wholly to Paul, after explaining how their roads parted under rather painful circumstances (xv. 37 ff.).

BARNABAS, in the New Testament, is the name given by the apostles (possibly to distinguish him from Joseph Barsabbas, Acts i. 23) to Joseph, "a Levite, a man from Cyprus," who, like Paul, was not one of the Twelve but came to be recognized as an apostle (Acts xiv. 4, 14, 1 Cor. ix. 6; see Disciple). The Greek version of this Semitic name son of encouragement) can be translated as "son of consolation" (as in the A.V.) or "son of exhortation" (as in the R.V.). However, there's an initial challenge regarding the Greek rendering itself, as no satisfying explanation for Bar-nabas in this sense has been proposed yet. The currently favored explanation based on linguistic similarity (see Z.N.T.W., 1906, p. 91 for a fresh example), namely Bar-Nebo, isn't really suitable for a Jew and a Levite, and doesn't align with the statement in Acts either. Therefore, it seems best to assume there's an unknown Aramaic form equivalent to παράκλησις, which is to be interpreted in the sense of comfort or encouragement. This interpretation aligns better with the usage in Acts, suggesting comfort given through encouraging words rather than merely inspiring ones (ix. 31, xi. 23, xiii. 15, xv. 31 f.; cf. Luke ii. 25, vi. 24). Everything we learn about Barnabas emphasizes his good heart ("a good man," xi. 24) as his defining trait, offering keen insight (ix. 27, xi. 25 f.) and a deep understanding of essentials (xi. 23 f.). His role as a "prophet" likely took a practically helpful and encouraging form (Acts xiii. 1, [v.03 p.0408] with 1 Cor. xiv. 3). Notably, his first appearance is characterized by generous helpfulness as described in Acts iv. 36 f. However, we should avoid viewing Barnabas as just a great character; he plays too significant a role in the New Testament for such a limitation. Thus, he appears next as someone who confronts the suspicions surrounding the former persecutor Saul (Paul)—possibly an old acquaintance from Hellenistic circles in Jerusalem (cf. vi. 9, ix. 29)—and introduces him to the older apostles (ix. 27). Even more indicative of his standing as a person of insight and authority is his mission from the Jerusalem Church to assess the new developments in the Gospel at Antioch, noted in Acts xi. 22. This was significant, though his modesty led him to seek the help of his friend Saul to handle the new and growing situation (25 f.). After their brief joint visit to Judea and Jerusalem (xi. 30, xii. 25), we next see Barnabas still as a leading figure in the Antioch Church, called by the Spirit, along with Saul, to start a broader mission of the Gospel, reaching beyond Syria to further regions (xiii. 2, 4). He led the way to his home island of Cyprus; however, in the critical confrontation with the magician Bar-Jesus, in front of the island's governor (xiii. 7 ff.), Saul seems to have stepped forward so decisively that from then on, in the view of the author of Acts, he takes the lead, while Barnabas appears as his companion (see xiii. 13, "Paul and his company," and note the departure of Mark, Barnabas's relative). The fact that in Lystra the locals identified Barnabas as Zeus and Paul as Hermes, which suggests Barnabas had a more distinguished appearance, indicates that Paul was the main speaker (xiv. 12); and the references in the Pauline letters fully support the view that "the gospel of the Gentiles" they preached was primarily Paul's vision (Gal. ii. 1-9). Indeed, Barnabas's wavering at Antioch, as recorded in Gal. ii. 11 ff. (whether this happened before or after their mission in Acts xiii.-xiv.), shows that while he had true insights, he didn't have the strength to work through his position to all its implications on principle, and it was here that Paul greatly surpassed him. But whatever Barnabas clearly understood with reasoned conviction, he stood by firmly; thus he defended the general cause of Gentile freedom from the requirement of circumcision (as distinct from full religious equality with Jewish believers) at the Jerusalem conference (Acts xv.). With this stand for principle, his main contribution as a vital link in the transition of the Gospel from its Jewish roots to its universal mission reached its peak; and Acts then shifts its focus entirely to Paul, after detailing how their paths parted under somewhat difficult circumstances (xv. 37 ff.).

When Barnabas sails away with Mark to resume work in Cyprus, the mists of history hide him from our sight. Only now and again do we catch fugitive and increasingly doubtful glimpses of him and his work. We learn from 1 Cor. ix. 6 that he adhered to Paul's principle of self-support in his mission work, and from Col. iv. 10 that his name was well known and respected at Colossae about A.D. 60. Tradition, which early regards him as one of the seventy (Clem. Alex.), carries him, plausibly enough, to Alexandria (Clem. Hom. i. 8, ii. 4; cf. the ascription to him of the Alexandrine Epistle of Barnabas). But the evidence for his having visited Rome (later tradition says also Milan) is stronger because more varied (Clem. Recog. i. 7, cf. Hom. i. 7; the early Actus Petri Vercellenses; and the late Cypriot Encomium), especially if we might trust the Western ascription to him of the epistle to the Hebrews, which begins with Tertullian (De Pud. 20). But this may itself be mere inference from its self-description (xiii. 22), as a "word of exhortation," to the "son of exhortation" (Acts iv. 36) as its author. The legend of his missionary labours in Cyprus, including martyrdom at Salamis, is quite late and untrustworthy. The date of his death is uncertain, but he was probably no longer living when Acts was written (c. A.D. 75-80).

When Barnabas sails away with Mark to continue their work in Cyprus, the details of his life become unclear. Occasionally, we catch brief and increasingly uncertain glimpses of him and his efforts. We learn from 1 Corinthians 9:6 that he followed Paul's approach of self-support in his missionary work, and from Colossians 4:10 we see that his name was well-known and respected in Colossae around A.D. 60. Tradition, which early on identifies him as one of the seventy (Clement of Alexandria), suggests he went to Alexandria (Clementine Homilies i. 8, ii. 4; see also the association of the Alexandrine Epistle of Barnabas with him). However, the evidence for him having visited Rome (and later traditions also mention Milan) is stronger and more varied (Clementine Recognitions i. 7; see also Homilies i. 7; the early Actus Petri Vercellenses; and the later Cypriot Encomium), especially if we trust the Western attribution to him of the letter to the Hebrews, which Tertullian references (De Pud. 20). But this might just be an inference based on its self-description (Hebrews 13:22) as a "word of exhortation," linking it to the "son of exhortation" (Acts 4:36) as its author. The story of his missionary work in Cyprus, including his martyrdom in Salamis, is quite late and not reliable. The exact date of his death is uncertain, but he likely was not alive when Acts was written (around A.D. 75-80).

His was essentially a mediating role. He filled a position intermediate between Jewish and Pauline Christianity—one characteristic of Christian Hellenists generally. Hence he is spoken of with respect in the Clementines; while Paul, as a radical in relation to the Law, is discountenanced. If we could confidently credit him with the authorship of the epistle to the Hebrews, we could conceive his theological standpoint more exactly. But, in any case, the Barnabas of history was a greater man than the Barnabas of modern tradition.

His role was basically to mediate. He occupied a position that was between Jewish and Pauline Christianity—something typical of Christian Hellenists in general. That's why he's regarded with respect in the Clementines; while Paul, seen as a radical concerning the Law, is looked down upon. If we could confidently attribute the authorship of the epistle to the Hebrews to him, we could understand his theological viewpoint more clearly. However, regardless, the historical Barnabas was a greater figure than the Barnabas of modern tradition.

See W. Cunningham, Epistle of Barnabas, pp. xlvii.-lxii.; O. Braunsberger, Der Apostel Barnabas, sein Leben ... (Mainz, 1876); articles s.v. in Ency. Biblica and Hastings's Dictionary of the Bible.

See W. Cunningham, Epistle of Barnabas, pp. 47-62; O. Braunsberger, Der Apostel Barnabas, sein Leben ... (Mainz, 1876); articles s.v. in Ency. Biblica and Hastings's Dictionary of the Bible.

The Epistle of Barnabas is one of the apocryphal books of the New Testament. At the end of the Codex Sinaiticus of the 4th century, as a sort of appendix to the New Testament, there stands an "Epistle of Barnabas." Here it is followed by the Shepherd of Hermas, while in an 11th-century MS., which contains also the Didachē, it is followed by two writings which themselves form an appendix to the New Testament in the Codex Alexandrinus. This means that it once enjoyed quasi-canonical authority, a fact amply borne out by what Eusebius (H. E. iii. 25) says as to its standing in the ancient Church. It was at Alexandria that its authority was greatest. Clement comments on it, as on the canonical scriptures, in his Hypotyposes; Origen cites it in the same spirit as scripture (C. Celsum, i. 63, De Princ. iii. 2, 4, 7). Clement, too, ascribes it to "the apostle" or "the prophet" Barnabas (Strom. ii. 6, 31, cf. ii. 20, 116), with explicit reference to Paul's fellow-apostle. Internal evidence makes this ascription impossible, nor does the epistle itself lay any claim to such authorship. Lightfoot, indeed, suggests that its author was "some unknown namesake" of the famous Barnabas: but it is simpler to suppose that it was fathered upon the latter by the Alexandrian Church, ready to believe that so favourite a writing was of apostolic origin.

The Letter of Barnabas is one of the apocryphal books of the New Testament. At the end of the Codex Sinaiticus from the 4th century, it appears as an appendix to the New Testament, followed by the Shepherd of Hermas. In an 11th-century manuscript that also includes the Didachē, it is followed by two writings that form an appendix to the New Testament in the Codex Alexandrinus. This indicates that it once held a sort of quasi-canonical status, a fact supported by Eusebius's remarks about its standing in the early Church (H. E. iii. 25). Its authority was particularly strong in Alexandria. Clement discusses it similarly to the canonical scriptures in his Hypotyposes; Origen cites it just like scripture (C. Celsum, i. 63, De Princ. iii. 2, 4, 7). Clement also attributes it to "the apostle" or "the prophet" Barnabas (Strom. ii. 6, 31, cf. ii. 20, 116), explicitly referring to Paul's fellow-apostle. However, internal evidence makes this attribution unlikely, and the epistle itself does not claim such authorship. Lightfoot even suggests that its author was "some unknown namesake" of the famous Barnabas, but it's simpler to think that the Alexandrian Church attributed it to him, eager to believe that such a cherished writing had apostolic origins.

"That Alexandria, the place of its earliest reception, was also the place of its birth, is borne out by the internal evidence of style and interpretation, which is Alexandrian throughout" (Lightfoot). The picture, too, which it gives of the danger lest the Christianity of its readers should be unduly Judaic in feeling and practice, suits well the experiences of a writer living in Alexandria, where Judaism was immensely strong. Further, he shows an "astonishing familiarity with the Jewish rites," in the opinion of a modern Jew (Kohler in the Jewish Encycl.); so much so, that the latter agrees with another Jewish scholar in saying that "the writer seems to have been a converted Jew, whose fanatic zeal rendered him a bitter opponent of Judaism within the Christian Church." These opinions must overrule the view of some Christian scholars that the writer often blunders in Jewish matters, the fact being that his knowledge is derived from the Judaism of Alexandria[1] rather than Palestine. But we need not therefore regard the author as of Jewish birth. It is enough, and more in keeping with the thought as a whole, to regard him as having been in close contact with Judaism, possibly as a proselyte. He now uses his knowledge to warn his readers, with intense passion, against all compromise between Judaism and the Gospel. In this he goes so far as to deny any historical connexion between the two, maintaining with all the devices of an extravagant allegorism, including the Rabbinic Gematria based on the numerical values of letters (ix. 7 f.), that the Law and Prophecy, as meant by God, had never been given to Israel as a people. The Divine oracles had ever pointed to the Christian Covenant, and had been so understood by the men of God in Israel, whereas the apostate people had turned aside to keep the ceremonial letter of the Law at the instigation of an evil angel (ix. 4). In this way he takes in succession the typical Jewish institutions—Circumcision, Foods, Ablutions, Covenant, Sabbath, Temple—showing their spiritual counterpart in the New People and its ordinances, and that the Cross was prefigured from the first. Such insight (gnosis) into the reality of the case he regards as the natural issue of Christian faith; and it is his main object to help his readers to attain such spirituality—the more so that, by similar insight applied to the signs of the times, he knows and can show that the end of the present age is imminent (i. 5, 7-iv.). The burden of his epistle, then, is, "Let us become [v.03 p.0409]spiritual, a perfect temple unto God" (iv. 11); and that not only by theoretic insight, but also by practical wisdom of life. In order to enforce this moral, he passes to "another sort of gnosis and instruction" (xviii. i), viz. the precepts of the "Two Ways," cited in a slightly different form from that found in the first part of the Teaching of the Apostles. The modifications, however, are all in a more spiritual direction, in keeping with the genuinely evangelic spirit which underlies and pervades even the allegorical ingenuities of the epistle.

"That Alexandria, the place where it was first received, was also where it was born, is supported by the internal evidence of style and interpretation, which is Alexandrian throughout" (Lightfoot). The portrayal of the concern that the Christianity of its readers might be overly Jewish in sentiment and practice fits well with the experiences of a writer living in Alexandria, where Judaism was very influential. Furthermore, he demonstrates an "astonishing familiarity with Jewish rites," according to a modern Jew (Kohler in the Jewish Encycl.); so much so that the latter agrees with another Jewish scholar in stating that "the writer seems to have been a converted Jew, whose fanatical zeal made him a strong opponent of Judaism within the Christian Church." These opinions should take precedence over the views of some Christian scholars who argue that the writer often makes mistakes regarding Jewish matters; in fact, his knowledge comes from the Judaism of Alexandria rather than Palestine. However, this does not mean we should assume the author is of Jewish descent. It is sufficient, and more aligned with the overall thought, to consider him as having been closely connected to Judaism, possibly as a proselyte. He uses this knowledge to passionately warn his readers against any compromise between Judaism and the Gospel. In this, he goes so far as to deny any historical connection between the two, insisting—through various forms of extravagant allegory, including the Rabbinic Gematria based on the numerical values of letters (ix. 7 f.)—that the Law and Prophecy, as intended by God, had never been given to Israel as a nation. The Divine oracles have always pointed toward the Christian Covenant and were understood as such by the men of God in Israel, while the wayward people turned to adhere to the ceremonial letter of the Law under the influence of an evil angel (ix. 4). He systematically addresses the typical Jewish institutions—Circumcision, Foods, Ablutions, Covenant, Sabbath, Temple—demonstrating their spiritual counterparts in the New People and its laws, asserting that the Cross was foreshadowed from the beginning. Such insight (gnosis) into the true nature of the situation is seen as a natural result of Christian faith; his main aim is to help his readers achieve this spirituality—especially since, through similar insight applied to current events, he knows and can show that the end of the present age is near (i. 5, 7-iv.). The core message of his epistle is, "Let us become spiritual, a perfect temple unto God" (iv. 11); and this should be achieved not just through theoretical knowledge but also through practical wisdom in life. To emphasize this moral, he moves to "another sort of gnosis and instruction" (xviii. i), namely the precepts of the "Two Ways," quoted in a slightly different form from that found in the first part of the Teaching of the Apostles. The modifications, however, all lean toward a more spiritual interpretation, in line with the genuinely evangelical spirit that underlies and permeates even the allegorical complexities of the epistle.

Its opening shows it to have been addressed to a Church, or rather a group of Churches, recently visited by the writer, who, while not wishing to write as an authoritative "teacher" so much as one who has come to love them as a friend (i. 8, cf. ix. 9), yet belongs to the class of "teachers" with a recognized spiritual gift (charisma), referred to e.g. in the Didachē. He evidently feels in a position to give his gnosis with some claim to a deferential hearing. This being so, the epistle was probably written, not to Alexandria, but rather by a "teacher" of the Alexandrine Church to some body of Christians in Lower Egypt among whom he had recently been visiting. This would explain the absence of specific address, so that it appears as in form a "general epistle," as Origen styles it. Its date has been much debated. But Lightfoot's reading of the apocalyptic passage in ch. iv.—with a slight modification suggested by Sir W. M. Ramsay—is really conclusive for the reign of Vespasian (A.D. 70-79). The main counter-view, in favour of a date about A.D. 130, can give no natural account of this passage, while it misconstrues the reference in ch. xvi. to the building of the spiritual temple, the Christian Church. Thus this epistle is the earliest of the Apostolic Fathers, and as such of special interest. Its central problem, the relation of Judaism and Christianity—of the Old and the New forms of a Covenant which, as Divine, must in a sense abide the same—was one which gave the early Church much trouble; nor, in absence of a due theory of the education of the race by gradual development, was it able to solve it satisfactorily.

Its opening indicates that it was addressed to a Church, or more accurately, a group of Churches that the writer had recently visited. He doesn’t want to write as an authoritative "teacher" but rather as someone who has come to love them as a friend (i. 8, cf. ix. 9). Nevertheless, he belongs to the group of "teachers" with a recognized spiritual gift (charisma), noted in the Didachē. He clearly feels qualified to share his gnosis and expects some respect in return. This suggests that the letter was likely written not to Alexandria but rather by a "teacher" of the Alexandrine Church to a group of Christians in Lower Egypt whom he had recently visited. This explains the lack of a specific address, making it appear as a "general epistle," as Origen describes it. The date of the letter has been widely debated. However, Lightfoot's interpretation of the apocalyptic passage in ch. iv.—with a slight adjustment suggested by Sir W. M. Ramsay—is actually conclusive for the reign of Vespasian (CE 70-79). The primary counter-argument, proposing a date around CE 130, fails to adequately explain this passage and misinterprets the reference in ch. xvi. to the building of the spiritual temple, the Christian Church. Thus, this letter is the earliest of the Apostolic Fathers and is particularly significant. Its main issue, the relationship between Judaism and Christianity—the Old and the New forms of a Covenant that, being Divine, must in some way remain the same—was a major challenge for the early Church, which, without a proper theory on the gradual education of humanity, couldn't resolve it satisfactorily.

Literature.—Besides collected editions of the Apostolic Fathers, see O. Braunsberger, Der Apostel Barnabas, ... u. der ihm beigelegte Brief (Mainz, 1876); W. Cunningham, Epistle of Barnabas (1877); sections in J. Donaldson, The Apostolic Fathers; E. Reuss, Théologie chrétienne, vol. ii., and in M. von Engelhardt, Das Christenthum Justins des Martyrers; and Lightfoot's fragmentary essay in his Clement of Rome, ii. 503-512. See also Apocryphal Literature, section "New Testament."

Literature.—In addition to collected editions of the Apostolic Fathers, check out O. Braunsberger’s Der Apostel Barnabas, ... u. der ihm beigelegte Brief (Mainz, 1876); W. Cunningham’s Epistle of Barnabas (1877); sections in J. Donaldson’s The Apostolic Fathers; E. Reuss’ Théologie chrétienne, vol. ii., and in M. von Engelhardt’s Das Christenthum Justins des Martyrers; along with Lightfoot's fragmentary essay in his Clement of Rome, ii. 503-512. Also, see Apocryphal Writings, section "New Testament."

Gospel of Barnabas.—We read in antiquity, e.g. in the Decretum Gelasii, of an apocryphal Gospel of Barnabas (see Apocryphal Literature), but we have no knowledge of its contents. There exists, however, in a single MS. in Italian a longish gospel with this title, written from a Mahommedan standpoint, but probably embodying materials partly Gnostic in character and origin. The Italian MS. was found by the Deist, John Toland, in a private collection at Amsterdam (see his Nazarenus, 1718); subsequently it came into the possession of Prince Eugene of Savoy, and finally was obtained with Eugene's library by the imperial library at Vienna. It has been edited, with an English translation (1907) by (Rev.) Lonsdale and Laura Ragg, who hold that it was the work of a Christian renegade to Mahommedanism about the 13th-16th century. See also preliminary notice in the Journal of Theol. Studies, vi. 424 ff. The old view held by Toland and others that the Italian was a translation from the Arabic is demonstrably wrong. The Arabic marginal notes are apparently partly pious ejaculations, partly notes for the aid of Arabic students. The work is highly imaginative and often grotesque, but it is pervaded by an unusually high ethical enthusiasm.

Gospel of Barnabas.—In ancient times, we find references, such as in the Decretum Gelasii, to an apocryphal Gospel of Barnabas (see Apocryphal Writings), but we don’t know what it contained. However, there is a long gospel in Italian with this title found in a single manuscript, written from a Muslim perspective, but likely incorporating some Gnostic elements. The Italian manuscript was discovered by the Deist John Toland in a private collection in Amsterdam (see his Nazarenus, 1718); later, it was acquired by Prince Eugene of Savoy and eventually entered the imperial library in Vienna along with Eugene's collection. It was edited, with an English translation (1907), by (Rev.) Lonsdale and Laura Ragg, who argue that it was created by a Christian who converted to Islam between the 13th and 16th centuries. See also the preliminary notice in the Journal of Theol. Studies, vi. 424 ff. The older belief held by Toland and others that the Italian text was a translation from Arabic is shown to be incorrect. The Arabic notes in the margins seem to be a mix of devotional phrases and study aids for Arabic learners. The work is very imaginative and often bizarre but is filled with an unusually strong sense of ethics.

(J. V. B.)

(J. V. B.)

[1] His reference to the wide prevalence of circumcision beyond Israel (ix. 6) is perhaps simply an exaggeration, more or less conscious.

[1] His mention of how common circumcision is outside of Israel (ix. 6) might just be an exaggeration, whether intentional or not.

Barnacles.

1. Scalpellum rostratum, Darwin, Philippine Islands.
2. Pollicipes cornucopiae, Leach, European seas.
3. Tubicinella trachealis, Shaw, attached to whales.
4. Acasta sulcata, Lamk., in sponges, New South Wales; (4′), tergum; (4″), scutum.
5. Balanus tintinnabulum, Linn., Atlantic.
5′. Section of Balanus, Linn.
6. Coronula diadema, Linn., attached to whales.

1. Scalpellum rostratum, Darwin, Philippine Islands.
2. Pollicipes cornucopiae, Leach, European seas.
3. Tubicinella trachealis, Shaw, found on whales.
4. Acasta sulcata, Lamk., in sponges, New South Wales; (4′), tergum; (4″), scutum.
5. Balanus tintinnabulum, Linn., Atlantic.
5′. Section of Balanus, Linn.
6. Coronula diadema, Linn., found on whales.

BARNACLE, a name applied to Crustacea of the division Cirripedia or Thyrostraca. Originally, the name was given to the stalked barnacles (Lepadidae of C. Darwin), which attach themselves in great numbers to drift-wood and other objects floating in the sea and are one of the chief agents in the fouling of ships' bottoms during long voyages. The sessile barnacles (Balanidae of Darwin) or "acorn-shells" are found in myriads, encrusting the rocks between tide-marks on all coasts. One of the most extraordinary and persistent myths of medieval natural history, dating back to the 12th century at least, was the cause of transferring to these organisms the name of the barnack or bernacle goose (Bernicla branta). This bird is a winter visitor to Britain, and its Arctic nesting-places being then unknown, it was fabled to originate within the shell-like fruit of a tree growing by the sea-shore. In some variants of the story this shell is said to grow as a kind of mushroom on rotting timber in the sea, and is obviously one of the barnacles of the genus Lepas. Even after the scientific study of zoology had replaced the fabulous tales of medieval writers, it was a long time before the true affinities of the barnacles were appreciated, and they were at first classed with the Mollusca, some of which they closely resemble in external appearance. It was not till Vaughan Thompson demonstrated, in 1830, their development from a free-swimming and typically Crustacean larva that it came to be recognized that, in Huxley's graphic phrase, "a barnacle may be said to be a Crustacean fixed by its head and kicking the food into its mouth with its legs." For a systematic account of the barnacles and their allies, see the article Thyrostraca.

BARNACLE, a term used for crustaceans in the division Cirripedia or Thyrostraca. The name originally referred to stalked barnacles (Lepadidae of C. Darwin), which attach themselves in large numbers to driftwood and other floating objects in the ocean and are one of the main contributors to the fouling of ship hulls during long voyages. The sessile barnacles (Balanidae of Darwin), also known as "acorn-shells," are found in countless numbers, covering the rocks between tide marks on all coasts. One of the most fascinating and enduring myths of medieval natural history, dating back at least to the 12th century, involved the association of these organisms with the barnacle or bernacle goose (Bernicla branta). This bird is a winter visitor to Britain, and because its Arctic nesting areas were unknown at the time, it was believed to emerge from the shell-like fruit of a tree growing by the shore. In some versions of the story, this shell is said to develop like a mushroom on decaying timber in the ocean, clearly referring to the barnacles of the genus Lepas. Even after the scientific study of zoology replaced the mythical narratives of medieval writers, it took a long time before the true relationships of the barnacles were understood, and they were initially classified with the Mollusca, some of which they closely resemble. It wasn't until Vaughan Thompson demonstrated in 1830 that they develop from a free-swimming, typical Crustacean larva that it was recognized, in Huxley’s vivid phrase, that “a barnacle can be described as a Crustacean fixed by its head and using its legs to bring food into its mouth.” For a systematic overview of barnacles and their relatives, see the article Thyrostraca.

(W. T. Ca.)

(W. T. Ca.)

BARNARD, LADY ANNE (1750-1825), author of the ballad "Auld Robin Gray," the eldest daughter of James Lindsay, 5th earl of Balcarres, was born at Balcarres House, Fife, on the 12th of December 1750. She was married in 1793 to Andrew Barnard, a son of the bishop of Limerick, for whom she obtained from Henry Dundas (1st Viscount Melville) an appointment as colonial secretary at the Cape of Good Hope. Thither the Barnards went in March 1797, Lady Anne remaining at the Cape until January 1802. A remarkable series of letters written by Lady Anne thence to Dundas, then secretary for war and the colonies, was published in 1901 under the title South Africa a Century Ago. In 1806, on the reconquest of the Cape by the British, Barnard was reappointed colonial secretary, but Lady Anne did not accompany him thither, where he died in 1807. The rest of her life was passed in London, where she died on the 6th of May 1825. "Auld Robin Gray" was written by her in 1772, to music by the Rev. William Leeves (1748-1828), as he admitted in 1812. It was published anonymously in 1783, Lady Anne only acknowledging the authorship of the words two years before her death in a letter to Sir Walter Scott, who subsequently edited it for the Bannatyne Club with two continuations.

BARNARD, LADY ANNE (1750-1825), author of the ballad "Auld Robin Gray," the oldest daughter of James Lindsay, 5th Earl of Balcarres, was born at Balcarres House, Fife, on December 12, 1750. She married Andrew Barnard in 1793, a son of the bishop of Limerick, for whom she secured a position as colonial secretary at the Cape of Good Hope from Henry Dundas (1st Viscount Melville). The Barnards moved there in March 1797, and Lady Anne stayed at the Cape until January 1802. A remarkable series of letters she wrote from there to Dundas, who was then the secretary for war and the colonies, was published in 1901 under the title South Africa a Century Ago. In 1806, when the British reconquered the Cape, Barnard was reinstated as colonial secretary, but Lady Anne did not travel with him to the Cape, where he died in 1807. She spent the rest of her life in London, passing away on May 6, 1825. "Auld Robin Gray" was written by her in 1772 to music by the Rev. William Leeves (1748-1828), which he acknowledged in 1812. It was published anonymously in 1783, with Lady Anne only admitting she wrote the words two years before her death in a letter to Sir Walter Scott, who later edited it for the Bannatyne Club with two continuations.

See the memoir by W. H. Wilkins, together with the original text of "Auld Robin Gray," prefixed to South Africa a Century Ago.

See the memoir by W. H. Wilkins, along with the original text of "Auld Robin Gray," included in South Africa a Century Ago.

BARNARD, FREDERICK AUGUSTUS PORTER (1809-1889), American scientist and educationalist, was born in Sheffield, Massachusetts, on the 5th of May 1809. In 1828 he graduated, second on the honour list, at Yale. He was then in turn a tutor at Yale, a teacher (1831-1832) in the American Asylum for the [v.03 p.0410]Deaf and Dumb at Hartford, Connecticut, and a teacher (1832-1838) in the New York Institute for the Instruction of the Deaf and Dumb. From 1838 to 1848 he was professor of mathematics and natural philosophy, and from 1848 to 1854 was professor of chemistry and natural history in the University of Alabama, for two years, also, filling the chair of English literature. In 1854 he was ordained as deacon in the Protestant Episcopal Church. In the same year he became professor of mathematics and natural philosophy in the University of Mississippi, of which institution he was chancellor from 1856 until the outbreak of the Civil War, when, his sympathies being with the North, he resigned and went to Washington. There for some time he was in charge of the map and chart department of the United States Coast Survey. In 1864 he became the tenth president of Columbia College (now Columbia University) in New York City, which position he held until the year before his death, his service thus being longer than that of any of his predecessors. During this period the growth of the college was rapid; new departments were established; the elective system was greatly extended; more adequate provision was made for graduate study and original research, and the enrolment was increased from about 150 to more than 1000 students. Barnard strove to have educational privileges extended by the university to women as well as to men, and Barnard College, for women (see Columbia University), established immediately after his death, was named in his honour. He died in New York City on the 27th of April 1889. Barnard was a versatile man, of catholic training, a classical and English scholar, a mathematician, a physicist, and a chemist, a good public speaker, and a vigorous but somewhat prolix writer on various subjects, his annual reports to the Board of Trustees of Columbia being particularly valuable as discussions of educational problems. Besides being the editor-in-chief, in 1872, of Johnson's Universal Cyclopaedia, he published a Treatise on Arithmetic (1830); an Analytical Grammar with Symbolic Illustration (1836); Letters on Collegiate Government (1855); and Recent Progress in Science (1869).

BARNARD, FREDERICK AUGUSTUS PORTER (1809-1889), American scientist and educator, was born in Sheffield, Massachusetts, on May 5, 1809. In 1828, he graduated second in his class at Yale. He then served as a tutor at Yale, taught at the American Asylum for the [v.03 p.0410]Deaf and Dumb in Hartford, Connecticut, from 1831 to 1832, and taught at the New York Institute for the Instruction of the Deaf and Dumb from 1832 to 1838. From 1838 to 1848, he was a professor of mathematics and natural philosophy, and from 1848 to 1854, he held the position of professor of chemistry and natural history at the University of Alabama, where he also served as the English literature chair for two years. In 1854, he was ordained as a deacon in the Protestant Episcopal Church. That same year, he became a professor of mathematics and natural philosophy at the University of Mississippi, where he was chancellor from 1856 until the start of the Civil War. With his sympathies aligned with the North, he resigned and moved to Washington, where he managed the map and chart department of the United States Coast Survey for a period. In 1864, he became the tenth president of Columbia College (now Columbia University) in New York City, a role he held until just before his death, making his tenure longer than that of any of his predecessors. During this time, the college grew rapidly; new departments were created; the elective system was greatly expanded; there was improved support for graduate studies and original research, and the student enrollment rose from about 150 to over 1000. Barnard worked to extend educational opportunities to women as well as men, and after his death, Barnard College for women (see Columbia University) was named in his honor. He died in New York City on April 27, 1889. Barnard was a well-rounded individual with diverse training; he was a classical and English scholar, a mathematician, a physicist, and a chemist. He was an effective public speaker and a dynamic yet sometimes overly detailed writer on various topics, with his annual reports to the Board of Trustees of Columbia being particularly insightful discussions on educational issues. In addition to being the editor-in-chief of Johnson's Universal Cyclopaedia in 1872, he published a Treatise on Arithmetic (1830); an Analytical Grammar with Symbolic Illustration (1836); Letters on Collegiate Government (1855); and Recent Progress in Science (1869).

See John Fulton's Memoirs of Frederick A. P. Barnard (New York, 1896).

See John Fulton's Memoirs of Frederick A. P. Barnard (New York, 1896).

BARNARD, GEORGE GREY (1863- ), American sculptor, was born at Bellefonte, Pennsylvania, on the 24th of May 1863. He first studied at the Art Institute, Chicago, and in 1883-1887 worked in P. T. Cavelier's atelier at Paris. He lived in Paris for twelve years, returning to America in 1896; and with his first exhibit at the Salon of 1894 he scored a great success. His principal works include, "The Boy" (1885); "Cain" (1886), later destroyed; "Brotherly Love," sometimes called "Two Friends" (1887); the allegorical "Two Natures" (1894, in the Metropolitan Museum, New York City); "The Hewer" (1902, at Cairo, Illinois); "Great God Pan" (in Central Park, New York City); the "Rose Maiden"; the simple and graceful "Maidenhood"; and sculptural decorations for the new Capitol building for the state of Pennsylvania at Harrisburg.

BARNARD, GEORGE GREY (1863- ), American sculptor, was born in Bellefonte, Pennsylvania, on May 24, 1863. He first studied at the Art Institute in Chicago and from 1883 to 1887 worked in P. T. Cavelier's atelier in Paris. He lived in Paris for twelve years, returning to the U.S. in 1896; his first exhibit at the Salon in 1894 was a major success. His main works include "The Boy" (1885); "Cain" (1886), which was later destroyed; "Brotherly Love," sometimes referred to as "Two Friends" (1887); the allegorical "Two Natures" (1894, in the Metropolitan Museum, New York City); "The Hewer" (1902, in Cairo, Illinois); "Great God Pan" (in Central Park, New York City); the "Rose Maiden"; the simple and graceful "Maidenhood"; and sculptural decorations for the new Capitol building for the state of Pennsylvania in Harrisburg.

BARNARD, HENRY (1811-1900), American educationalist, was born in Hartford, Connecticut, on the 24th of January 1811. He graduated at Yale in 1830, and in 1835 was admitted to the Connecticut bar. In 1837-1839 he was a member of the Connecticut legislature, effecting in 1838 the passage of a bill, framed and introduced by himself, which provided for "the better supervision of the common schools" and established a board of "commissioners of common schools" in the state. Of this board he was the secretary from 1838 till its abolition in 1842, and during this time worked indefatigably to reorganize and reform the common school system of the state, thus earning a national reputation as an educational reformer. In 1843 he was appointed by the governor of Rhode Island agent to examine the public schools of the state, and recommended improvements; and his work resulted in the reorganization of the school system two years later. From 1845 to 1849 he was the first commissioner of public schools in the state, and his administration was marked by a decided step in educational progress. Returning to Connecticut, he was, from 1851 to 1855, "superintendent of common schools," and principal of the State Normal School at New Britain, Conn. From 1859 to 1860 he was chancellor of the University of Wisconsin and agent of the board of regents of the normal school fund; in 1866 he was president of St John's College, Annapolis, Maryland; and from 1867 to 1870 he was the first United States commissioner of education, and in this position he laid the foundation for the subsequent useful work of the Bureau of Education. His chief service to the cause of education, however, was rendered as the editor, from 1855 to 1881, of the American Journal of Education, the thirty-one volumes of which are a veritable encyclopaedia of education, one of the most valuable compendiums of information on the subject ever brought together through the agency of any one man. He also edited from 1838 to 1842, and again from 1851 to 1854, the Connecticut Common School Journal, and from 1846 to 1849 the Journal of the Rhode Island Institute of Instruction. He died at Hartford, Conn., on the 5th of July 1900. Among American educational reformers, Barnard is entitled to rank next to Horace Mann of Massachusetts.

BARNARD, HENRY (1811-1900), American educator, was born in Hartford, Connecticut, on January 24, 1811. He graduated from Yale in 1830 and was admitted to the Connecticut bar in 1835. From 1837 to 1839, he served in the Connecticut legislature, where he successfully passed a bill he created and introduced in 1838 that aimed to improve "the better supervision of the common schools" and established a board of "commissioners of common schools" in the state. He was the secretary of this board from 1838 until it was dissolved in 1842, during which time he tirelessly worked to reorganize and reform the common school system in the state, gaining national recognition as an education reformer. In 1843, he was appointed by the governor of Rhode Island to examine the public schools in the state and recommend improvements, which led to the reorganization of the school system two years later. From 1845 to 1849, he was the first commissioner of public schools in Rhode Island, and his tenure was marked by significant educational advancements. Returning to Connecticut, he served as "superintendent of common schools" and principal of the State Normal School in New Britain from 1851 to 1855. He was chancellor of the University of Wisconsin from 1859 to 1860 and served as agent of the board of regents of the normal school fund; in 1866, he was president of St. John's College in Annapolis, Maryland; and from 1867 to 1870, he was the first United States commissioner of education, laying the groundwork for the future work of the Bureau of Education. His most significant contribution to education was as the editor of the American Journal of Education from 1855 to 1881, comprising thirty-one volumes that serve as a comprehensive resource on education—one of the most valuable compilations of knowledge on the subject ever produced by a single individual. He also edited the Connecticut Common School Journal from 1838 to 1842, and again from 1851 to 1854, as well as the Journal of the Rhode Island Institute of Instruction from 1846 to 1849. He passed away in Hartford, Conn., on July 5, 1900. Among American education reformers, Barnard is ranked just after Horace Mann of Massachusetts.

See a biographical sketch by A. D. Mayo in the Report of the Commissioner of Education for 1896-1897 (Washington, 1898), and W. S. Monroe's Educational Labours of Henry Barnard (Syracuse, 1893).

See a biographical sketch by A. D. Mayo in the Report of the Commissioner of Education for 1896-1897 (Washington, 1898), and W. S. Monroe's Educational Labours of Henry Barnard (Syracuse, 1893).

BARNARD, JOHN, English musician, was a minor canon of St Paul's in the reign of Charles I. He was the first to publish a collection of English cathedral music. It contains some of the finest 16th-century masterpieces, ranging from the "faux-bourdon" style of Tallis's Pieces and Responses to the most developed types of full anthem. The text, however, is not trustworthy.

BARNARD, JOHN, an English musician, served as a minor canon at St Paul's during the reign of Charles I. He was the first to release a collection of English cathedral music. This collection features some of the greatest masterpieces from the 16th century, spanning from the "faux-bourdon" style found in Tallis's Pieces and Responses to the more complex forms of full anthem. However, the text is not reliable.

BARNARD CASTLE, a market-town in the Barnard Castle parliamentary division of Durham, England, 17 m. W. of Darlington by a branch of the North Eastern railway. Pop. of urban district (1901) 4421. It is beautifully situated on the steep left bank of the Tees. A noteworthy building in the town is the octagonal town-hall, dating from 1747. There are a few picturesque old houses, and a fragment of an Augustinian convent. St Mary's church, in a variety of styles from Norman onward, contains some curious monuments; but the building of chief interest is the castle, which gives the town its name, and is the principal scene of Sir Walter Scott's Rokeby. The remains extend over a space of more than six acres. A remarkable building known as the Bowes' Mansion and Museum, bequeathed in 1874 to the town by a descendant of Sir George Bowes, contains a valuable collection of works of art. In the vicinity of the town are Egglestone Abbey, beautifully situated on the Yorkshire bank of the river, Rokeby Park on the same bank, at the confluence of the Greta, and the massive 14th century castle of Raby to the north-east. The principal manufacture is shoe-thread. The corn-market is important.

BARNARD CASTLE, a market town in the Barnard Castle parliamentary division of Durham, England, is 17 miles west of Darlington by a branch of the North Eastern railway. The population of the urban district was 4,421 in 1901. It is beautifully located on the steep left bank of the Tees. A notable building in the town is the octagonal town hall, which dates back to 1747. There are a few charming old houses and a remaining section of an Augustinian convent. St Mary's Church, showcasing various styles from Norman onward, features some interesting monuments; however, the main attraction is the castle, which names the town and serves as the central setting for Sir Walter Scott's Rokeby. The castle's remains occupy an area of over six acres. A remarkable building called Bowes' Mansion and Museum, donated to the town in 1874 by a descendant of Sir George Bowes, houses a valuable collection of artworks. Nearby are Egglestone Abbey, beautifully perched on the Yorkshire bank of the river, Rokeby Park on the same bank at the junction of the Greta, and the impressive 14th-century castle of Raby to the northeast. The main industry here is shoe-thread production, and the corn market is significant.

As part of the lordship of Gainford, Barnard Castle is said to have been granted by William Rufus to Guy Baliol Bernard, son of Guy Baliol, who built the castle, and called it after himself, Castle Bernard. To the men of the town which grew up outside the castle walls he gave, about the middle of the 12th century, a charter making them burgesses and granting them the same privileges as the town of Richmond in Yorkshire. This charter was confirmed by Bernard Baliol, son of the above Bernard. Other confirmation charters were granted to the town by Hugh, John, and Alexander Baliol. The castle and lordship remained in the hands of the Baliols until John Baliol, king of Scotland, forfeited them with his other English estates in 1296. Barnard Castle was then seized by Anthony, bishop of Durham, as being within his palatinate of Durham. Edward I., however, denied the bishop's rights and granted the castle and town to Guy Beauchamp, earl of Warwick, whose descendants continued to hold them until they passed to the crown by the marriage of Anne Nevill with Richard III., then duke of Gloucester. In 1630 Barnard Castle was sold to Sir Henry Vane, and in the same year the castle is said to have been unroofed and dismantled for the sake of the materials of which it was built. Tanning leather was formerly one of the chief industries of the town. In 1614 an act for "knights and burgesses to have place in parliament for the county palatine and city of Durham and borough of Barnard [v.03 p.0411]Castle" was brought into the House of Commons, but when the act was finally passed for the county and city of Durham, Barnard Castle was not included.

As part of the lordship of Gainford, Barnard Castle is said to have been granted by William Rufus to Guy Baliol Bernard, son of Guy Baliol, who built the castle and named it Castle Bernard. Around the mid-12th century, he gave the men of the town that grew up outside the castle walls a charter, making them burgesses and giving them the same privileges as the town of Richmond in Yorkshire. This charter was confirmed by Bernard Baliol, son of the above Bernard. Other confirmation charters were granted to the town by Hugh, John, and Alexander Baliol. The castle and lordship remained with the Baliols until John Baliol, king of Scotland, lost them along with his other English estates in 1296. Barnard Castle was then taken by Anthony, bishop of Durham, as it was within his palatinate of Durham. However, Edward I denied the bishop's rights and granted the castle and town to Guy Beauchamp, earl of Warwick, whose descendants held them until they passed to the crown through the marriage of Anne Nevill to Richard III, then duke of Gloucester. In 1630, Barnard Castle was sold to Sir Henry Vane, and that same year, the castle is said to have been unroofed and dismantled for its building materials. Tanning leather was once one of the main industries in the town. In 1614, a bill for "knights and burgesses to have a place in parliament for the county palatine and city of Durham and borough of Barnard Castle" was introduced in the House of Commons, but when the act was finally passed for the county and city of Durham, Barnard Castle was not included.

BARNARDO, THOMAS JOHN (1845-1905), English philanthropist, and founder and director of homes for destitute children, was born at Dublin, Ireland, in 1845. His father was of Spanish origin, his mother being an Englishwoman. With the intention of qualifying for medical missionary work in China, he studied medicine at the London hospital, and later at Paris and Edinburgh, where he became a fellow of the Royal College of Surgeons. His medical work in the east end of London during the epidemic of cholera in 1865 first drew his attention to the great numbers of homeless and destitute children in the cities of England. Encouraged by the support of the seventh earl of Shaftesbury and the first Earl Cairns, he gave up his early ambition of foreign missionary labour, and began what was to prove his life's work. The first of the "Dr Barnardo's Homes" was opened in 1867 in Stepney Causeway, London, where are still the headquarters of the institution. From that time the work steadily increased until, at the time of the founder's death, in 1905, there were established 112 district "Homes," besides mission branches, throughout the United Kingdom. The object for which these institutions were started was to search for and to receive waifs and strays, to feed, clothe, educate, and, where possible, to give an industrial training suitable to each child. The principle adopted has been that of free and immediate admission; there are no restrictions of age or sex, religion or nationality; the physically robust and the incurably diseased are alike received, the one necessary qualification being destitution. The system under which the institution is carried on is broadly as follows:—the infants and younger girls and boys are chiefly "boarded out" in rural districts; girls above fourteen years of age are sent to the industrial training homes, to be taught useful domestic occupations; boys above seventeen years of age are first tested in labour homes and then placed in employment at home, sent to sea or emigrated; boys of between thirteen and seventeen years of age are trained for the various trades for which they may be mentally or physically fitted. Besides the various branches necessary for the foregoing work, there are also, among others, the following institutions:—a rescue home for girls in danger, a convalescent seaside home, and a hospital for sick waifs. In 1872 was founded the girls' village home at Barkingside, near Ilford, with its own church and sanatorium, and between sixty and seventy cottage homes, forming a real "garden city"; and there Barnardo himself was buried. In 1901, through the generosity of Mr E. H. Watts, a naval school was started at North Elmham, near Norwich, to which boys are drafted from the homes to be trained for the navy and the mercantile marine. Perhaps the most useful of all the varied work instituted by Barnardo is the emigration system, by which means thousands of boys and girls have been sent to British colonies, chiefly to Canada, where there are distributing centres at Toronto and Winnipeg, and an industrial farm of some 8000 acres near Russell in Manitoba. The fact that in Canada less than 2% of the children sent out proved failures confirmed Barnardo's conviction that "if the children of the slums can be removed from their surroundings early enough, and can be kept sufficiently long under training, heredity counts for little, environment for almost everything." In 1899 the various institutions and organizations were legally incorporated under the title of "The National Association for the reclamation of Destitute Waif Children," but the institution has always been familiarly known as "Dr Barnardo's Homes." Barnardo laid great stress on the religious teaching of the children under his care. Each child is brought up under the influence and teaching of the denomination of the parents. The homes are divided into two sections for religious teaching, Church of England and Nonconformists; children of Jewish and Roman Catholic parentage are, where possible, handed over to the care of the Jewish Board of Guardians in London, and to Roman Catholic institutions, respectively. From the foundation of the homes in 1867 to the date of Barnardo's death, nearly 60,000 children had been rescued, trained and placed out in life. Barnardo died of angina pectoris in London on the 19th of September 1905. A national memorial was instituted to form a fund of £250,000 to relieve the various institutions of all financial liability and to place the entire work on a permanent basis. Dr William Baker, formerly the chairman of the council, was selected to succeed the founder of the homes as director. Barnardo was the author of many books dealing with the charitable work to which he devoted his life.

BARNARDO, THOMAS JOHN (1845-1905), was an English philanthropist and the founder and director of homes for homeless children. He was born in Dublin, Ireland, in 1845. His father was of Spanish descent, and his mother was English. Aiming to qualify as a medical missionary in China, he studied medicine at the London Hospital, and later in Paris and Edinburgh, where he became a fellow of the Royal College of Surgeons. His medical work in East London during the cholera epidemic of 1865 made him aware of the large number of homeless and needy children in England's cities. With the encouragement of the seventh Earl of Shaftesbury and the first Earl Cairns, he abandoned his ambition for foreign missionary work and dedicated himself to what became his life's mission. The first of the "Dr Barnardo's Homes" opened in 1867 in Stepney Causeway, London, which remains the headquarters of the institution to this day. From then on, the work steadily grew, and by the time of the founder's death in 1905, 112 district "Homes" and several mission branches had been established across the United Kingdom. These institutions were created to seek out and receive stray children, providing food, clothing, education, and whenever possible, vocational training tailored to each child. The principle of service was free and immediate admission, without restrictions on age, gender, religion, or nationality; both healthy and sick children were accepted, with the only requirement being that they were in need. The institution operated on a system where infants and younger boys and girls were mainly "boarded out" in rural areas; girls over fourteen were sent to industrial training homes for useful domestic skills; boys over seventeen were first assessed in labor homes before being placed in jobs, sent to sea, or emigrated; while boys aged between thirteen and seventeen were trained for the various trades they were suited for. In addition to the necessary branches for this work, there were institutions such as a rescue home for girls at risk, a seaside convalescent home, and a hospital for sick street children. In 1872, the girls' village home at Barkingside, near Ilford, was established, complete with its own church and sanatorium, and around sixty to seventy cottage homes, creating a true "garden city" where Barnardo himself was later buried. In 1901, thanks to the generosity of Mr. E. H. Watts, a naval school was started at North Elmham, near Norwich, for boys from the homes to be trained for the navy and mercantile marine. Perhaps the most impactful initiative made by Barnardo was the emigration program, which enabled thousands of boys and girls to be sent to British colonies, primarily Canada, where distribution centers were established in Toronto and Winnipeg, and an industrial farm of approximately 8,000 acres near Russell in Manitoba. The fact that less than 2% of the children sent to Canada failed confirmed Barnardo's belief that "if the children of the slums can be removed from their environments early enough, and can be kept under training long enough, heredity matters little, whereas environment is almost everything." In 1899, the various institutions were legally incorporated under the name "The National Association for the Reclamation of Destitute Waif Children," but it has always been popularly known as "Dr Barnardo's Homes." Barnardo emphasized the importance of religious education for the children in his care. Each child was raised within the faith of their parents' denomination. The homes were divided into two sections for religious instruction: Church of England and Nonconformists; children from Jewish and Roman Catholic backgrounds were, where possible, entrusted to the Jewish Board of Guardians in London and Roman Catholic institutions, respectively. From the founding of the homes in 1867 until Barnardo's death, nearly 60,000 children had been rescued, trained, and placed into society. Barnardo passed away from angina pectoris in London on September 19, 1905. A national memorial was established to create a fund of £250,000 to relieve the various institutions of financial burden and to ensure the continuity of their work. Dr. William Baker, who was formerly the chairman of the council, was chosen to succeed the founder as director of the homes. Barnardo wrote many books about the charitable work to which he dedicated his life.

His biography (1907) was written by his wife (the daughter of Mr William Elmslie) and J. Marchant.

His biography (1907) was written by his wife (the daughter of Mr. William Elmslie) and J. Marchant.

BARNAUL, a town of Asiatic Russia, government of Tomsk, standing in a plain bounded by offshoots of the Altai Mountains, and on the Barnaulka river, at its confluence with the Ob, in lat. 53° 20′ N. and long. 83° 46′ E., 220 m. S. of Tomsk. It is the capital of the Altai mining districts, and besides smelting furnaces possesses glassworks, a bell-foundry and a mint. It has also a meteorological observatory, established in 1841, a mining school and a museum with a rich collection of mineral and zoological specimens. Barnaul was founded in 1730 by A. Demidov, to whose memory a monument has been erected. Pop. (1900) 29,850.

BARNAUL, a town in Asian Russia, located in the Tomsk region, sits in a plain surrounded by the foothills of the Altai Mountains, at the confluence of the Barnaulka River and the Ob, at latitude 53° 20′ N and longitude 83° 46′ E, 220 km south of Tomsk. It is the capital of the Altai mining districts and has smelting furnaces, glassworks, a bell foundry, and a mint. Barnaul also features a meteorological observatory, which was established in 1841, a mining school, and a museum housing a rich collection of mineral and zoological specimens. Barnaul was founded in 1730 by A. Demidov, who has a monument dedicated to him. Population (1900) 29,850.

BARNAVE, ANTOINE PIERRE JOSEPH MARIE (1761-1793), one of the greatest orators of the first French Revolution, was born at Grenoble in Dauphiné, on the 22nd of October 1761. He was of a Protestant family. His father was an advocate at the parlement of Grenoble, and his mother was a woman of high birth, superior ability and noble character. He was educated by his mother because, being a Protestant, he could not attend school, and he grew up at once thoughtful and passionate, studious and social, handsome in person and graceful in manners. He was brought up to the law, and at the age of twenty-two made himself favourably known by a discourse pronounced before the local parlement on the division of political powers. Dauphiné was one of the first of the provinces to feel the excitement of the coming revolution; and Barnave was foremost to give voice to the general feeling, in a pamphlet entitled Esprit des édits enregistrés militairement le 20 mai 1788. He was immediately elected deputy, with his father, to the states of Dauphiné, and took a prominent part in their debates. A few months later he was transferred to a wider field of action. The states-general were convoked at Versailles for the 5th of May 1789, and Barnave was chosen deputy of the tiers état for his native province. He soon made an impression on the Assembly, became the friend of most of the leaders of the popular party, and formed with Adrien Duport and Alexandre Lameth (q.v.) the group known during the Constituent Assembly as "the triumvirate." He took part in the conference on the claims of the three orders, drew up the first address to the king, and supported the proposal of Sieyès that the Assembly should declare itself National. Until 1791 he was one of the principal members of the club known later as the Jacobins, of which he drew up the manifesto and first rules (see Jacobins). Though a passionate lover of liberty, he hoped to secure the freedom of France and her monarchy at the same time. But he was almost unawares borne away by the mighty currents of the time, and he took part in the attacks on the monarchy, on the clergy, on church property, and on the provincial parlements. With the one exception of Mirabeau, Barnave was the most powerful orator of the Assembly. On several occasions he stood in opposition to Mirabeau. After the fall of the Bastille he wished to save the throne. He advocated the suspensory veto, and the establishment of trial by jury in civil causes, but voted with the Left against the system of two chambers. His conflict with Mirabeau on the question of assigning to the king the right to make peace or war (from the 16th to the 23rd of May 1791) was one of the most striking scenes in the Assembly. In August 1790, after a vehement debate, he fought a duel with J. A. M. de Cazalès, in which the latter was slightly wounded. About the close of October 1790 Barnave was called to the presidency of the Assembly. On the death of Mirabeau a few months later, Barnave paid a high tribute to his worth and public services, designating him the Shakespeare of oratory. On the arrest of the king and the royal family at Varennes, while attempting to escape from France, Barnave was [v.03 p.0412]one of the three appointed to conduct them back to Paris. On the journey he was deeply affected by the mournful fate of Marie-Antoinette, and resolved to do what he could to alleviate their sufferings. In one of his most powerful speeches he maintained the inviolability of the king's person. His public career came to an end with the close of the Constituent Assembly, and he returned to Grenoble at the beginning of 1792. His sympathy and relations with the royal family, to whom he had submitted a plan for a counter-revolution, and his desire to check the downward progress of the Revolution, brought on him suspicion of treason. Denounced (15th of August 1792) in the Legislative Assembly, he was arrested and imprisoned for ten months at Grenoble, then transferred to Fort Barraux, and in November 1793 to Paris. The nobility of his character was proof against the assaults of suffering. "Better to suffer and to die," he said, "than lose one shade of my moral and political character." On the 28th of November he appeared before the Revolutionary Tribunal. He was condemned on the evidence of papers found at the Tuileries and executed the next day, with Duport-Dutertre.

BARNAVE, ANTOINE PIERRE JOSEPH MARIE (1761-1793), one of the top speakers of the first French Revolution, was born in Grenoble, Dauphiné, on October 22, 1761. He came from a Protestant family. His father was a lawyer at the parlement of Grenoble, and his mother was a woman of noble birth, exceptional ability, and strong character. Since he couldn't go to school due to his Protestant faith, he was educated by his mother and grew up to be thoughtful and passionate, studious and social, handsome and graceful. He was trained in law and, at the age of twenty-two, gained recognition with a speech delivered before the local parlement on the separation of political powers. Dauphiné was one of the first provinces to sense the excitement of the looming revolution, and Barnave was quick to express the collective sentiment in a pamphlet titled Esprit des édits enregistrés militairement le 20 mai 1788. He and his father were soon elected as deputies to the states of Dauphiné, where he actively participated in debates. A few months later, he moved to a broader arena. The states-general convened at Versailles on May 5, 1789, and Barnave was chosen as a deputy for the tiers état from his home province. He quickly made an impact on the Assembly, befriended many leaders of the popular party, and, along with Adrien Duport and Alexandre Lameth (q.v.), formed the group known as "the triumvirate" during the Constituent Assembly. He was involved in discussions about the claims of the three orders, drafted the first address to the king, and supported Sieyès' proposal for the Assembly to declare itself National. Until 1791, he was a key member of the club later known as the Jacobins, for which he wrote the manifesto and the initial rules (see Jacobins). Although a fervent advocate for liberty, he aimed to secure both the freedom of France and the monarchy. Yet, he was unwittingly swept away by the powerful currents of the time, participating in attacks on the monarchy, clergy, church property, and provincial parlements. Except for Mirabeau, Barnave was the most influential speaker in the Assembly. On several occasions, he opposed Mirabeau. After the fall of the Bastille, he wanted to save the throne. He advocated for a suspensory veto and the establishment of trial by jury in civil cases, but he voted with the Left against a two-chamber system. His conflict with Mirabeau regarding the king's right to make peace or war (from May 16 to May 23, 1791) was one of the most memorable moments in the Assembly. In August 1790, after a heated debate, he dueled with J. A. M. de Cazalès, during which the latter was slightly wounded. Around late October 1790, Barnave was elected president of the Assembly. Following Mirabeau’s death a few months later, Barnave gave a significant tribute to his contributions, calling him the Shakespeare of oratory. When the king and the royal family were arrested at Varennes while attempting to flee France, Barnave was one of three appointed to escort them back to Paris. During the journey, he was deeply moved by Marie-Antoinette's tragic situation and resolved to help ease their suffering. In one of his most compelling speeches, he defended the king's inviolability. His public career ended with the conclusion of the Constituent Assembly, and he returned to Grenoble in early 1792. His connections with the royal family, to whom he had proposed a counter-revolution plan, as well as his desire to slow the Revolution's momentum, led to suspicions of treason against him. On August 15, 1792, he was denounced in the Legislative Assembly, arrested, and imprisoned for ten months in Grenoble, later taken to Fort Barraux, and in November 1793 to Paris. His noble character withstood the trials of suffering. "Better to suffer and die," he said, "than lose any part of my moral and political character." On November 28, he faced the Revolutionary Tribunal. He was condemned based on documents found at the Tuileries and executed the following day, along with Duport-Dutertre.

Barnave's Œuvres posthumes were published in 1842 by Bérenger (de la Drôme) in 4 vols. See F. A. Aulard, Les Orateurs de l'assemblée constituante (Paris, 1882).

Barnave's Œuvres posthumes were published in 1842 by Bérenger (de la Drôme) in 4 volumes. See F. A. Aulard, Les Orateurs de l'assemblée constituante (Paris, 1882).

BARNBY, SIR JOSEPH (1838-1896), English musical composer and conductor, son of Thomas Barnby, an organist, was born at York on the 12th of August 1838. He was a chorister at York minster from the age of seven, was educated at the Royal Academy of Music under Cipriani Potter and Charles Lucas, and was appointed in 1862 organist of St Andrew's, Wells Street, London, where he raised the services to a high degree of excellence. He was conductor of "Barnby's Choir" from 1864, and in 1871 was appointed, in succession to Gounod, conductor of the Albert Hall Choral Society, a post he held till his death. In 1875 he was precentor and director of music at Eton, and in 1892 became principal of the Guildhall School of Music, receiving the honour of knighthood in July of that year. His works include an oratorio Rebekah, Ps. xcvii., many services and anthems, and two hundred and forty-six hymn-tunes (published in 1897 in one volume), as well as some part-songs (among them the popular "Sweet and Low"), and some pieces for the organ. As a conductor he possessed the qualities as well as the defects of the typical north-countryman; if he was wanting in the higher kind of imagination or ideality, he infused into those who sang under him something of his own rectitude and precision. He was largely instrumental in stimulating the love for Gounod's sacred music among the less educated part of the London public, although he displayed little practical sympathy with opera. On the other hand, he organized a remarkable concert performance of Parsifal at the Albert Hall in London in 1884. He conducted the Cardiff Festivals of 1892 and 1895. He died in London on the 28th of January 1896, and after a special service in St Paul's cathedral was buried in Norwood Cemetery.

BARNBY, SIR JOSEPH (1838-1896), was an English composer and conductor, born in York on August 12, 1838, as the son of Thomas Barnby, an organist. He became a chorister at York Minster at the age of seven and studied at the Royal Academy of Music under Cipriani Potter and Charles Lucas. In 1862, he became the organist of St Andrew's, Wells Street, London, where he significantly improved the quality of the services. He was the conductor of "Barnby's Choir" starting in 1864, and in 1871, he succeeded Gounod as the conductor of the Albert Hall Choral Society, a position he held until his death. In 1875, he was appointed precentor and director of music at Eton, and in 1892, he became the principal of the Guildhall School of Music, receiving a knighthood that July. His works include the oratorio Rebekah, Ps. xcvii., many services and anthems, and 246 hymn-tunes (published in 1897 in one volume), along with several part-songs, including the popular "Sweet and Low," and pieces for the organ. As a conductor, he embodied both the strengths and weaknesses typical of someone from the north of England; while he may have lacked a certain depth of imagination, he instilled a sense of integrity and precision in those who sang under him. He played a key role in promoting Gounod's sacred music among the less educated sectors of the London public, although he showed little interest in opera. Conversely, he organized an impressive concert performance of Parsifal at the Albert Hall in London in 1884. He conducted the Cardiff Festivals in 1892 and 1895. He passed away in London on January 28, 1896, and after a special service at St Paul’s Cathedral, he was buried in Norwood Cemetery.

BARNES, ALBERT (1798-1870), American theologian, was born at Rome, New York, on the 1st of December 1798. He graduated at Hamilton College, Clinton, N.Y., in 1820, and at the Princeton Theological Seminary in 1823, was ordained as a Presbyterian minister by the presbytery of Elizabethtown, New Jersey, in 1825, and was the pastor successively of the Presbyterian Church in Morristown, New Jersey (1825-1830) and of the First Presbyterian Church of Philadelphia (1830-1867). He held a prominent place in the New School branch of the Presbyterians, to which he adhered on the division of the denomination in 1837; he had been tried (but not convicted) for heresy in 1836, the charge being particularly against the views expressed by him in Notes on Romans (1835) of the imputation of the sin of Adam, original sin and the atonement; the bitterness stirred up by this trial contributed towards widening the breach between the conservative and the progressive elements in the church. He was an eloquent preacher, but his reputation rests chiefly on his expository works, which are said to have had a larger circulation both in Europe and America than any others of their class. Of the well-known Notes on the New Testament it is said that more than a million volumes had been issued by 1870. The Notes on Job, the Psalms, Isaiah and Daniel, found scarcely less acceptance. Displaying no original critical power, their chief merit lies in the fact that they bring in a popular (but not always accurate) form the results of the criticism of others within the reach of general readers. Barnes was the author of several other works of a practical and devotional kind, and a collection of his Theological Works was published in Philadelphia in 1875. He died in Philadelphia on the 24th of December 1870.

BARNES, ALBERT (1798-1870), American theologian, was born in Rome, New York, on December 1, 1798. He graduated from Hamilton College in Clinton, N.Y., in 1820 and from Princeton Theological Seminary in 1823. Barnes was ordained as a Presbyterian minister by the Elizabethtown presbytery in New Jersey in 1825 and served as the pastor of the Presbyterian Church in Morristown, New Jersey (1825-1830) and the First Presbyterian Church of Philadelphia (1830-1867). He played a significant role in the New School branch of the Presbyterians, which he supported after the denomination split in 1837; he had been tried (but not convicted) for heresy in 1836, with the accusation focusing on his views in Notes on Romans (1835) regarding the imputation of Adam's sin, original sin, and the atonement. The controversy generated by this trial helped deepen the divide between conservative and progressive factions in the church. Although he was an eloquent preacher, his reputation mainly rests on his expository works, which reportedly circulated more in both Europe and America than any others in their category. It is said that over a million copies of the well-known Notes on the New Testament were printed by 1870. The Notes on Job, the Psalms, Isaiah, and Daniel were also widely accepted. While they lack original critical insight, their main strength lies in presenting the results of other scholars' criticism in a popular (though not always accurate) way accessible to general readers. Barnes authored several other practical and devotional works, and a collection of his Theological Works was published in Philadelphia in 1875. He passed away in Philadelphia on December 24, 1870.

BARNES, BARNABE (1569?-1609), English poet, fourth son of Dr Richard Barnes, bishop of Durham, was born in Yorkshire, perhaps at Stonegrave, a living of his father's, in 1568 or 1569. In 1586 he was entered at Brasenose College, Oxford, where Giovanni Florio was his servitor, and in 1591 went to France with the earl of Essex, who was then serving against the prince of Parma. On his return he published Parthenophil and Parthenophe, Sonnettes, Madrigals, Elegies and Odes (ent. on Stationers' Register 1593), dedicated to his "dearest friend," William Percy, who contributed a sonnet to the eulogies prefixed to a later work, Offices. Parthenophil was possibly printed for private circulation, and the copy in the duke of Devonshire's library is believed to be unique. Barnes was well acquainted with the work of contemporary French sonneteers, to whom he is largely indebted, and he borrows his title, apparently, from a Neapolitan writer of Latin verse, Hieronymus Angerianus. It is possible to outline a story from this series of love lyrics, but the incidents are slight, and in this case, as in other Elizabethan sonnet-cycles, it is difficult to dogmatize as to what is the expression of a real personal experience, and what is intellectual exercise in imitation of Petrarch. Parthenophil abounds in passages of great freshness and beauty, although its elaborate conceits are sometimes over-ingenious and strained. Barnes took the part of Gabriel Harvey and even experimented in classical metres. This partisanship is sufficient to account for the abuse of Thomas Nashe, who accused him, apparently on no proof at all, of stealing a nobleman's chain at Windsor, and of other things. Barnes's second work, A Divine Centurie of Spirituall Sonnetts, appeared in 1595. He also wrote two plays:—The Divil's Charter (1607), a tragedy dealing with the life of Pope Alexander VI., which was played before the king; and The Battle of Evesham (or Hexham), of which the MS., traced to the beginning of the 18th century, is lost. In 1606 he dedicated to King James Offices enabling privat Persons for the speciall service of all good Princes and Policies, a prose treatise containing, among other things, descriptions of Queen Elizabeth and of the earl of Essex. Barnes was buried at Durham in December 1609.

BARNES, BARNABE (1569?-1609), English poet, fourth son of Dr. Richard Barnes, bishop of Durham, was born in Yorkshire, probably at Stonegrave, a place linked to his father, in 1568 or 1569. In 1586, he enrolled at Brasenose College, Oxford, where Giovanni Florio served him, and in 1591, he went to France with the Earl of Essex, who was then fighting against the Prince of Parma. Upon his return, he published Parthenophil and Parthenophe: Sonnets, Madrigals, Elegies, and Odes (entered in the Stationers' Register in 1593), dedicated to his "dearest friend," William Percy, who contributed a sonnet to the praises prefixed to a later work, Offices. Parthenophil was likely printed for private distribution, and the copy in the Duke of Devonshire's library is thought to be the only one. Barnes was well-versed in the works of contemporary French sonneteers, from whom he drew considerable influence, and he seemingly borrowed his title from a Neapolitan writer of Latin verse, Hieronymus Angerianus. A storyline can be traced through this collection of love lyrics, but the events are minimal, making it hard to clearly distinguish between genuine personal experience and intellectual exercise in imitation of Petrarch, as is often the case in other Elizabethan sonnet-cycles. Parthenophil features many passages of great freshness and beauty, though its complex ideas can sometimes come off as overly clever and forced. Barnes took inspiration from Gabriel Harvey and even experimented with classical meters. This loyalty likely explains the criticism from Thomas Nashe, who accused him, seemingly without any evidence, of stealing a nobleman's chain at Windsor, among other things. Barnes's second work, A Divine Century of Spiritual Sonnets, was published in 1595. He also wrote two plays: The Devil's Charter (1607), a tragedy about the life of Pope Alexander VI, which was performed before the king; and The Battle of Evesham (or Hexham), of which the manuscript, traced back to the early 18th century, is lost. In 1606, he dedicated to King James Offices Enabling Private Persons for the Special Service of All Good Princes and Policies, a prose treatise that includes, among other things, descriptions of Queen Elizabeth and the Earl of Essex. Barnes was buried in Durham in December 1609.

His Parthenophil and Spirituall Sonnetts were edited by Dr A. B. Grosart in a limited issue in 1875; Parthenophil was included by Prof. E. Arber in vol. v. of An English Garner; see also the new edition of An English Garner (Elizabethan Sonnets, ed. S. Lee, 1904, pp. lxxv. et seq.). Professor E. Dowden contributed a sympathetic criticism of Barnes to The Academy of Sept. 2, 1876.

His Parthenophil and Spirituall Sonnetts were edited by Dr. A. B. Grosart in a limited edition in 1875; Parthenophil was included by Prof. E. Arber in vol. v. of An English Garner; see also the new edition of An English Garner (Elizabethan Sonnets, ed. S. Lee, 1904, pp. lxxv. et seq.). Professor E. Dowden wrote a thoughtful critique of Barnes for The Academy on September 2, 1876.

BARNES, SIR EDWARD (1776-1838), British soldier, entered the 47th regiment in 1792, and quickly rose to field rank. He was promoted lieutenant-colonel in 1807, and colonel in 1810, and two years later went to the Peninsula to serve on Wellington's staff. His services in this capacity gained him further promotion, and as a major-general he led a brigade at Vittoria and in the Pyrenean battles. He had the cross and three clasps for his Peninsula service. As adjutant-general he served in the campaign of 1815 and was wounded at Waterloo. Already a K.C.B., he now received the Austrian order of Maria Theresa, and the Russian order of St Anne. In 1819 began his connexion with Ceylon, of which island he was governor from 1824 to 1831. He directed the construction of the great military road between Colombo and Kandy, and of many other lines of communication, made the first census of the population, and introduced coffee cultivation on the West Indian system (1824). In 1831 he received the G.C.B., and from 1831 to 1853 he was commander-in-chief in India, with the local rank of general. On his return home, after two unsuccessful attempts to secure the seat, he became M.P. for Sudbury in 1837, but he died in the following [v.03 p.0413]year. Sir Edward Barnes' portrait was painted, for Ceylon, by John Wood, and a memorial statue was erected in Colombo.

BARNES, SIR EDWARD (1776-1838) was a British soldier who joined the 47th regiment in 1792 and quickly rose through the ranks. He became a lieutenant-colonel in 1807 and a colonel in 1810. Two years later, he went to the Peninsula to serve on Wellington's staff. His work in this role earned him further promotions, and as a major-general, he led a brigade at the Battle of Vittoria and during the Pyrenean battles. He was awarded the cross and three clasps for his service in the Peninsula. As adjutant-general, he took part in the campaign of 1815 and was wounded at Waterloo. Already a K.C.B., he received the Austrian Order of Maria Theresa and the Russian Order of St. Anne. In 1819, he began his association with Ceylon, where he served as governor from 1824 to 1831. He oversaw the construction of the major military road between Colombo and Kandy, along with several other communication routes, conducted the first population census, and introduced coffee cultivation based on the West Indian model in 1824. In 1831, he was named a G.C.B., and from 1831 to 1853, he was commander-in-chief in India, holding the local rank of general. After returning home, he faced two unsuccessful attempts to secure a seat in parliament before becoming the M.P. for Sudbury in 1837, though he passed away the following year. Sir Edward Barnes' portrait was painted for Ceylon by John Wood, and a memorial statue was erected in Colombo.

BARNES, JOSHUA (1654-1712), English scholar, was born in London on the 10th of January 1654. Educated at Christ's Hospital and at Emmanuel College, Cambridge, he was in 1695 chosen regius professor of Greek, a language which he wrote and spoke with the utmost facility. One of his first publications was entitled Gerania; a New Discovery of a Little Sort of People, anciently discoursed of, called Pygmies (1675), a whimsical sketch to which Swift's Voyage to Lilliput possibly owes something. Among his other works are a History of that Most Victorious Monarch Edward III. (1688), in which he introduces long and elaborate speeches into the narrative; editions of Euripides (1694) and of Homer (1711), also one of Anacreon (1705) which contains titles of Greek verses of his own which he hoped to publish. He died on the 3rd of August 1712, at Hemingford, near St Ives, Hunts.

BARNES, JOSHUA (1654-1712), English scholar, was born in London on January 10, 1654. He was educated at Christ's Hospital and Emmanuel College, Cambridge. In 1695, he was appointed regius professor of Greek, a language he wrote and spoke with great ease. One of his first publications was titled Gerania; a New Discovery of a Little Sort of People, anciently discoursed of, called Pygmies (1675), a quirky piece that may have influenced Swift's Voyage to Lilliput. His other works include a History of that Most Victorious Monarch Edward III. (1688), which features long and detailed speeches within the narrative; editions of Euripides (1694) and Homer (1711), as well as one of Anacreon (1705), which includes titles of Greek verses he intended to publish. He passed away on August 3, 1712, at Hemingford, near St Ives, Hunts.

BARNES, ROBERT (1495-1540), English reformer and martyr, born about 1495, was educated at Cambridge, where he was a member, and afterwards prior of the convent of Austin Friars, and graduated D.D. in 1523. He was apparently one of the Cambridge men who were wont to gather at the White Horse Tavern for Bible-reading and theological discussion early in the third decade of the 16th century. In 1526, he was brought before the vice-chancellor for preaching a heterodox sermon, and was subsequently examined by Wolsey and four other bishops. He was condemned to abjure or be burnt; and preferring the former alternative, was committed to the Fleet prison and afterwards to the Austin Friars in London. He escaped thence to Antwerp in 1528, and also visited Wittenberg, where he made Luther's acquaintance. He also came across Stephen Vaughan, an agent of Thomas Cromwell and an advanced reformer, who recommended him to Cromwell: "Look well," he wrote, "upon Dr Barnes' book. It is such a piece of work as I have not yet seen any like it. I think he shall seal it with his blood" (Letters and Papers of Henry VIII. v. 593). In 1531 Barnes returned to England, and became one of the chief intermediaries between the English government and Lutheran Germany. In 1535 he was sent to Germany, in the hope of inducing Lutheran divines to approve of Henry's divorce from Catherine of Aragon, and four years later he was employed in negotiations connected with Anne of Cleves's marriage. The policy was Cromwell's, but Henry VIII. had already in 1538 refused to adopt Lutheran theology, and the statute of Six Articles (1539), followed by the king's disgust with Anne of Cleves (1540), brought the agents of that policy to ruin. An attack upon Bishop Gardiner by Barnes in a sermon at St Paul's Cross was the signal for a bitter struggle between the Protestant and reactionary parties in Henry's council, which raged during the spring of 1540. Barnes was forced to apologize and recant; and Gardiner delivered a series of sermons at St Paul's Cross to counteract Barnes' invective. But a month or so later Cromwell was made earl of Essex, Gardiner's friend, Bishop Sampson, was sent to the Tower, and Barnes reverted to Lutheranism. It was a delusive victory. In July, Cromwell was attainted, Anne of Cleves was divorced and Barnes was burnt (30th July 1540). He also had an act of attainder passed against him, a somewhat novel distinction for a heretic, which illustrates the way in which Henry VIII. employed secular machinery for ecclesiastical purposes, and regarded heresy as an offence against the state rather than against the church. Barnes was one of six executed on the same day: two, William Jerome and Thomas Gerrard, were, like himself, burnt for heresy under the Six Articles; three, Thomas Abel, Richard Fetherstone and Edward Powell, were hanged for treason in denying the royal supremacy. Both Lutherans and Catholics on the continent were shocked. Luther published Barnes' confession with a preface of his own as Bekenntnis des Glaubens (1540), which is included in Walch's edition of Luther's Werke xxi. 186.

BARNES, ROBERT (1495-1540), English reformer and martyr, born around 1495, was educated at Cambridge, where he became a member and later the prior of the Austin Friars convent, earning his D.D. in 1523. He was likely part of the Cambridge group that gathered at the White Horse Tavern for Bible study and theological discussions in the early 1520s. In 1526, he faced the vice-chancellor for delivering a controversial sermon and was subsequently examined by Wolsey and four other bishops. He was condemned to either recant or be burned at the stake; opting for the former, he was sent to the Fleet prison and later to the Austin Friars in London. In 1528, he escaped to Antwerp and also visited Wittenberg, where he met Luther. He encountered Stephen Vaughan, an agent of Thomas Cromwell and a progressive reformer, who recommended him to Cromwell: "Pay attention to Dr. Barnes' book. It's unlike anything I've seen before. I believe he'll pay for it with his life" (Letters and Papers of Henry VIII. v. 593). In 1531, Barnes returned to England and became a key link between the English government and Lutheran Germany. In 1535, he was sent to Germany to persuade Lutheran theologians to support Henry's divorce from Catherine of Aragon, and four years later he was involved in negotiations regarding Anne of Cleves' marriage. This effort was Cromwell's strategy, but Henry VIII. had already rejected Lutheran theology in 1538, and the Six Articles statute (1539), along with the king's disappointment with Anne of Cleves (1540), led to the downfall of Cromwell's agents. An attack on Bishop Gardiner by Barnes during a sermon at St. Paul's Cross triggered a fierce conflict between the Protestant and conservative factions in Henry's council that unfolded throughout the spring of 1540. Barnes was forced to apologize and retract his statements; Gardiner then delivered a series of sermons at St. Paul's Cross to counter Barnes' criticisms. However, a month later, Cromwell was named Earl of Essex, Gardiner's ally, Bishop Sampson, was imprisoned in the Tower, and Barnes returned to Lutheran beliefs. It was a misleading victory. In July, Cromwell was accused of treason, Anne of Cleves was divorced, and Barnes was executed by burning (July 30, 1540). An act of attainder was also passed against him, a somewhat unusual distinction for a heretic, demonstrating how Henry VIII. used secular means for religious ends and viewed heresy as a crime against the state rather than the church. Barnes was one of six executed that day: two, William Jerome and Thomas Gerrard, were also burned for heresy under the Six Articles; three, Thomas Abel, Richard Fetherstone, and Edward Powell, were hanged for treason for denying royal supremacy. Both Lutherans and Catholics on the continent were appalled. Luther published Barnes' confession with his own preface as Bekenntnis des Glaubens (1540), which is included in Walch's edition of Luther's Werke xxi. 186.

See Letters and Papers of Henry VIII. vols. iv.-xv. passim; Wriothesley's Chronicle; Foxe's Acts and Monuments, ed. G. Townsend Burnet's Hist. of the Ref., ed. Pocock; Dixon's Hist. of the Church; Gairdner's Church in the XVIth Century; Pollard's Henry VIII. and Cranmer; Herzog-Hauck, Realencyklopadie, 3rd ed.

See Letters and Papers of Henry VIII. vols. iv.-xv. passim; Wriothesley's Chronicle; Foxe's Acts and Monuments, ed. G. Townsend Burnet's Hist. of the Ref., ed. Pocock; Dixon's Hist. of the Church; Gairdner's Church in the XVIth Century; Pollard's Henry VIII. and Cranmer; Herzog-Hauck, Realencyklopadie, 3rd ed.

(A. F. P.)

(A. F. P.)

BARNES, THOMAS (1785-1841), British journalist, was born about 1785. Educated at Christ's Hospital and Pembroke College, Cambridge, he came to London and soon joined the famous literary circle of which Hunt, Lamb and Hazlitt were prominent members. Upon the retirement of Dr Stoddart in 1817 he was appointed editor of The Times, a position which he held until his death, when he was succeeded by Delane. Lord Lyndhurst gave expression to a very widely-held opinion when he described him as "the most powerful man in the country." He died on the 7th of May 1841.

BARNES, THOMAS (1785-1841), British journalist, was born around 1785. He was educated at Christ's Hospital and Pembroke College, Cambridge, then moved to London and quickly became part of the famous literary circle that included Hunt, Lamb, and Hazlitt. After Dr. Stoddart retired in 1817, he became the editor of The Times, a role he held until his death, after which Delane took over. Lord Lyndhurst captured a widely shared sentiment when he referred to Barnes as "the most powerful man in the country." He passed away on May 7, 1841.

BARNES, WILLIAM (1800-1886), the Dorsetshire poet, was born on the 22nd of February 1800, at Rushay, near Pentridge in Dorset, the son of John Barnes and Grace Scott, of the farmer class. He was a delicate child, in direct contrast to a strong race of forebears, and inherited from his mother a refined, retiring disposition and a love for books. He went to school at Sturminster Newton, where he was considered the clever boy of the school; and when a solicitor named Dashwood applied to the master for a quick-witted boy to join him as pupil, Barnes was selected for the post. He worked with the village parson in his spare hours at classics and studied music under the organist. In 1818 he left Sturminster for the office of one Coombs at Dorchester, where he continued his evening education with another kindly clergyman. He also made great progress in the art of wood-engraving, and with the money he received for a series of blocks for a work called Walks about Dorchester, he printed and published his first book, Orra, a Lapland Tale, in 1822. In the same year he became engaged to Julia Miles, the daughter of an excise officer. In 1823 he took a school at Mere in Wiltshire, and four years later married and settled in Chantry House, a fine old Tudor mansion in that town. The school grew in numbers, and Barnes occupied all his spare time in assiduous study, reading during these years authors so diverse in character as Herodotus, Sallust, Ovid, Petrarch, Buffon and Burns. He also began to write poetry, and printed many of his verses in the Dorset County Chronicle. His chief studies, however, were philological; and in 1829 he published An Etymological Glossary of English Words of Foreign Derivation. In 1832 a strolling company of actors visited Mere, and Barnes wrote a farce, The Honest Thief, which they produced, and a comedy which was played at Wincanton. Barnes also wrote a number of educational books, such as Elements of Perspective, Outlines of Geography, and in 1833 first began his poems in the Dorsetshire dialect, among them the two eclogues "The 'Lotments" and "A Bit o' Sly Coorten," in the pages of the local paper. In 1835 he left Mere, and returned to Dorchester, where he started another school, removing in 1837 into larger quarters. In 1844 he published Poems of Rural Life in the Dorset Dialect. Three years later Barnes took holy orders, and was appointed to the cure of Whitcombe, 3 m. from Dorchester. He had been for some years upon the books of St John's College, Cambridge, and took the degree of B.D. in 1850. He resigned Whitcombe in 1852, finding the work too hard in connexion with his mastership; and in June of that year he sustained a severe bereavement by the death of his wife. Continuing his studies in the science of language, he published his Philological Grammar in 1854, drawing examples from more than sixty languages. For the copyright of this erudite work he received £5. The second series of dialect poems, Hwomely Rhymes, appeared in 1859 (2nd ed. 1863). Hwomely Rhymes contained some of his best-known pieces, and in the year of its publication he first began to give readings from his works. As their reputation grew he travelled all over the country, delighting large audiences with his quaint humour and natural pathos. In 1861 he was awarded a civil list pension of £70 a year, and in the next year published Tiw, the most striking of his philological studies, in which the Teutonic roots in the English language are discussed. Barnes had a horror of Latin forms in English, and would have substituted English compounds for many Latin forms in common use. In 1862 he broke up his school, and [v.03 p.0414]removed to the rectory of Winterborne Came, to which he was presented by his old friend, Captain Seymour Dawson Damer. Here he worked continuously at verse and prose, contributing largely to the magazines. A new series of Poems of Rural Life in the Dorset Dialect appeared in 1862, and he was persuaded in 1868 to publish a series of Poems of Rural Life in Common English, which was less successful than his dialect poems. These latter were collected into a single volume in 1879, and on the 7th of October 1886 Barnes died at Winterborne Came. His poetry is essentially English in character; no other writer has given quite so simple and sincere a picture of the homely life and labour of rural England. His work is full of humour and the clean, manly joy of life; and its rusticity is singularly allied to a literary sense and to high technical finish. He is indeed the Victorian Theocritus; and, as English country life is slowly swept away before the advance of the railway and the telegraph, he will be more and more read for his warm-hearted and fragrant record of rustic love and piety. His original and suggestive books on the English language, which are valuable in spite of their eccentricities, include:—Se Gefylsta: an Anglo-Saxon Delectus (1849); A Grammar and Glossary of the Dorset Dialect (1864); An Outline of English Speech-Craft (1878); and A Glossary of the Dorset Dialect (Dorchester, 1886).

BARNES, WILLIAM (1800-1886), the Dorsetshire poet, was born on February 22, 1800, at Rushay, near Pentridge in Dorset, the son of John Barnes and Grace Scott, who were farmers. He was a fragile child, in stark contrast to his strong family background, and he inherited a refined, shy personality and a love for books from his mother. He attended school in Sturminster Newton, where he was seen as the bright student; when a solicitor named Dashwood asked the teacher for a sharp boy to become his pupil, Barnes was chosen for the position. In his free time, he worked with the local parson on classical studies and learned music under the organist. In 1818, he left Sturminster for Coombs' office in Dorchester, where he continued his evening education with another kind clergyman. He also made significant strides in wood-engraving, and with the money he earned from creating a series of blocks for a project called Walks about Dorchester, he printed and published his first book, Orra, a Lapland Tale, in 1822. That same year, he got engaged to Julia Miles, the daughter of an excise officer. In 1823, he took over a school in Mere, Wiltshire, and four years later, he married and moved into Chantry House, a beautiful old Tudor mansion in that town. The school grew in numbers, and Barnes spent all his spare time in dedicated study, reading authors as varied as Herodotus, Sallust, Ovid, Petrarch, Buffon, and Burns. He also started writing poetry, with many of his verses published in the Dorset County Chronicle. His main focus, however, was philology; in 1829, he published An Etymological Glossary of English Words of Foreign Derivation. In 1832, a touring group of actors came to Mere, and Barnes wrote a farce, The Honest Thief, which they performed, along with a comedy that was staged in Wincanton. He also wrote several educational books, like Elements of Perspective and Outlines of Geography, and in 1833, he began writing poems in the Dorset dialect, including the two eclogues "The 'Lotments" and "A Bit o' Sly Coorten," which appeared in the local paper. In 1835, he left Mere and returned to Dorchester, where he started another school, moving to larger premises in 1837. In 1844, he published Poems of Rural Life in the Dorset Dialect. Three years later, Barnes was ordained and took on the role of curate in Whitcombe, 3 miles from Dorchester. He had been enrolled at St John's College, Cambridge, for several years, receiving his B.D. in 1850. He resigned from Whitcombe in 1852 due to the demanding nature of combined responsibilities, and in June of that year, he experienced a significant loss with the death of his wife. He continued his language studies, publishing his Philological Grammar in 1854, using examples from more than sixty languages. He earned £5 for the copyright of this scholarly work. The second series of dialect poems, Hwomely Rhymes, was published in 1859 (2nd ed. 1863). Hwomely Rhymes included some of his best-known pieces, and the same year, he began giving readings from his works. As his reputation grew, he traveled across the country, captivating large audiences with his unique humor and genuine emotion. In 1861, he was awarded a civil list pension of £70 per year, and the following year, he published Tiw, his most significant philological study, discussing the Teutonic roots in the English language. Barnes detested Latin forms in English and advocated for English compounds in place of many commonly used Latin forms. In 1862, he closed his school and [v.03 p.0414]moved to the rectory in Winterborne Came, to which he was appointed by his old friend, Captain Seymour Dawson Damer. Here, he diligently worked on poetry and prose, contributing extensively to magazines. A new collection of Poems of Rural Life in the Dorset Dialect was released in 1862, and he was persuaded in 1868 to publish a series of Poems of Rural Life in Common English, which was not as successful as his dialect poems. These were later compiled into a single volume in 1879, and on October 7, 1886, Barnes passed away in Winterborne Came. His poetry is fundamentally English in nature; no other writer has provided such a straightforward and heartfelt representation of the everyday life and work of rural England. His work is full of humor and a pure, masculine joy for life; its rusticity is uniquely connected to a literary quality and a high level of craftsmanship. He is truly the Victorian Theocritus; and as English country life gradually diminishes with the rise of railways and telegraphs, he will increasingly be appreciated for his warm and fragrant depiction of rustic love and devotion. His original and thought-provoking books on the English language, which are valuable despite their quirks, include:—Se Gefylsta: an Anglo-Saxon Delectus (1849); A Grammar and Glossary of the Dorset Dialect (1864); An Outline of English Speech-Craft (1878); and A Glossary of the Dorset Dialect (Dorchester, 1886).

See The Life of William Barnes, Poet and Philologist (1887), by his daughter, Lucy E. Baxter, who is known as a writer on art by the pseudonym of Leader Scott; and a notice by Thomas Hardy in the Athenaeum (16th of October 1886).

See The Life of William Barnes, Poet and Philologist (1887), by his daughter, Lucy E. Baxter, who is recognized as a writer on art under the pseudonym Leader Scott; and a notice by Thomas Hardy in the Athenaeum (October 16, 1886).

BARNET, a residential district in the mid or St Albans parliamentary division of Hertfordshire, England; 10 m. N. of London, served by the main line and branches of the Great Northern railway. The three chief divisions are as follows:—(1) Chipping or High Barnet, a market town and urban district (Barnet), pop. (1901) 7876. The second epithet designates its position on a hill, but the first is given it from the market granted to the abbots of St Albans to be kept there, by Henry II. Near the town, round a point marked by an obelisk, was fought in 1471 the decisive battle between the houses of York and Lancaster, in which the earl of Warwick fell and the Lancastrians were totally defeated. The town is on the Great North Road, on which it was formerly an important coaching station. A large annual horse and cattle fair is held. (2) East Barnet, 2 m. S.E. of Chipping Barnet, has an ancient parish church retaining Norman portions, though enlarged in modern times. Pop. of East Barnet Valley urban district, 10,094. (3) New Barnet lies 1 m. E. by S. from Chipping Barnet.

BARNET, a residential area in the mid or St Albans parliamentary division of Hertfordshire, England; 10 miles north of London, served by the main line and branches of the Great Northern railway. The three main sections are: (1) Chipping or High Barnet, a market town and urban district (Barnet), population (1901) 7,876. The second name indicates its location on a hill, while the first comes from the market granted to the abbots of St Albans to be held there by Henry II. Near the town, around a point marked by an obelisk, the decisive battle between the houses of York and Lancaster was fought in 1471, where the Earl of Warwick was killed, and the Lancastrians were completely defeated. The town is on the Great North Road, where it used to be an important coaching station. A large annual horse and cattle fair takes place here. (2) East Barnet, 2 miles southeast of Chipping Barnet, has an ancient parish church that retains Norman features, although it has been expanded in modern times. The population of East Barnet Valley urban district is 10,094. (3) New Barnet is located 1 mile east-southeast of Chipping Barnet.

Friern Barnet, in the Enfield parliamentary division of Middlesex, lies 3 m. S. of Chipping Barnet. Pop. of urban district, 11,566. The prefix recalls the former lordship of the manor possessed by the friary of St John of Jerusalem in Clerkenwell, London. Friern Barnet adjoins Finchley on the north and Whetstone on the south, the whole district being residential.

Friern Barnet, in the Enfield parliamentary division of Middlesex, is located 3 miles south of Chipping Barnet. The population of the urban district is 11,566. The name comes from the former lordship of the manor owned by the friary of St John of Jerusalem in Clerkenwell, London. Friern Barnet borders Finchley to the north and Whetstone to the south, and the entire area is residential.

BARNETT, JOHN (1802-1890), English musical composer, son of a Prussian named Bernhard Beer, who changed his name on settling in England as a jeweller, was born at Bedford, and at the age of eleven sang on the Lyceum stage in London. His good voice led to his being given a musical education, and he soon began writing songs and lighter pieces for the stage. In 1834 he published a collection of Lyrical Illustrations of the Modern Poets, His Mountain Sylph—with which his name is chiefly connected—received a warm welcome when produced at the Lyceum on August 25, 1834, as the first modern English opera: and it was followed by another opera Fair Rosamund in 1837, and by Farinelli in 1839. He had a large connexion as a singing-master at Cheltenham, and published Systems and Singing-masters (1842) and School for the Voice (1844). He died on the 16th of April 1890.

BARNETT, JOHN (1802-1890), English music composer, son of a Prussian named Bernhard Beer, who changed his name upon moving to England as a jeweller, was born in Bedford. At eleven, he performed on the Lyceum stage in London. His impressive voice led to a musical education, and he soon started writing songs and lighter pieces for the stage. In 1834, he published a collection of Lyrical Illustrations of the Modern Poets. His Mountain Sylph—which he is mainly known for—was warmly received when it premiered at the Lyceum on August 25, 1834, as the first modern English opera. This was followed by another opera, Fair Rosamund, in 1837, and Farinelli in 1839. He had a large following as a singing teacher in Cheltenham and published Systems and Singing-masters (1842) and School for the Voice (1844). He passed away on April 16, 1890.

His nephew, John Francis Barnett (1837- ), son of John's brother, Joseph Alfred, also a professor of music, carried on the traditions of the family as a composer and teacher. He obtained a queen's scholarship at the Royal Academy of Music, and developed into an accomplished pianist, visiting Germany to study in 1857 and playing at a Gewandhaus concert at Leipzig in 1860. He came into notice as a composer with his symphony in A minor (1864), and followed this with a number of compositions for orchestra, strings or pianoforte. His cantata The Ancient Mariner was brought out at Birmingham in 1867, and another, Paradise and the Peri, in 1870, both with great success. In 1873 his most important work, the oratorio The Raising of Lazarus, was written, and in 1876 produced at Hereford. Many other cantatas, pianoforte pieces, &c. were composed by him, and successfully brought out; and he took an active part as a professor in the work of the Guildhall School of Music and Royal College of Music.

His nephew, John F. Barnett (1837- ), the son of John's brother, Joseph Alfred, who was also a music professor, continued the family's legacy as a composer and teacher. He earned a queen's scholarship at the Royal Academy of Music and became a skilled pianist, traveling to Germany to study in 1857 and performing at a Gewandhaus concert in Leipzig in 1860. He gained recognition as a composer with his symphony in A minor (1864), followed by several compositions for orchestra, strings, or piano. His cantata The Ancient Mariner premiered in Birmingham in 1867, and another one, Paradise and the Peri, followed in 1870, both receiving great acclaim. In 1873, he wrote his most significant work, the oratorio The Raising of Lazarus, which was performed in Hereford in 1876. He composed many other cantatas, piano pieces, and more, all successfully premiered; he also played an active role as a professor at the Guildhall School of Music and the Royal College of Music.

BARNETT, SAMUEL AUGUSTUS (1844- ), English clergyman and social reformer, was born at Bristol on the 8th of February 1844, the son of Francis Augustus Barnett, an iron manufacturer. After leaving Wadham College, Oxford, in 1866, he visited the United States. Next year he was ordained to the curacy of St Mary's, Bryanston Square, and took priest's orders in 1868. In 1872 he became vicar of St Jude's, Commercial Street, Whitechapel, and in the next year married Henrietta Octavia Rowland, who had been a co-worker with Miss Octavia Hill and was no less ardent a philanthropist than her husband. Mr and Mrs Barnett worked hard for the poor of their parish, opening evening schools for adults, providing them with music and reasonable entertainment, and serving on the board of guardians and on the managing committees of schools. Mr Barnett did much to discourage outdoor relief, as tending to the pauperization of the neighbourhood. At the same time the conditions of indoor relief were improved, and the various charities were co-ordinated, by co-operation with the Charity Organization Society and the parish board of guardians. In 1875 Arnold Toynbee paid a visit, the first of many, to Whitechapel, and Mr Barnett, who kept in constant touch with Oxford, formed in 1877 a small committee, over which he presided himself, to consider the organization of university extension in London, his chief assistants being Leonard Montefiore, a young Oxford man, and Frederick Rogers, a member of the vellum binders' trade union. The committee received influential support, and in October four courses of lectures, one by Dr S. R. Gardiner on English history, were given in Whitechapel. The Barnetts were also associated with the building of model dwellings, with the establishment of the children's country holiday fund and the annual loan exhibitions of fine art at the Whitechapel gallery. In 1884 an article by Mr Barnett in the Nineteenth Century discussed the question of university settlements. This resulted in July in the formation of the University Settlements Association, and when Toynbee Hall was built shortly afterwards Mr Barnett became its warden. He was a select preacher at Oxford in 1895-1897, and at Cambridge in 1900; he received a canonry in Bristol cathedral in 1893, but retained his wardenship of Toynbee Hall, while relinquishing the living of St Jude's. In June 1906 he was preferred to a canonry at Westminster, and when in December he resigned the wardenship of Toynbee Hall the position of president was created so that he might retain his connexion with the institution. Among Canon Barnett's works is Practicable Socialism (1888, 2nd ed. 1894), written in conjunction with his wife.

BARNETT, SAMUEL AUGUSTUS (1844- ), English clergyman and social reformer, was born in Bristol on February 8, 1844, the son of Francis Augustus Barnett, an iron manufacturer. After graduating from Wadham College, Oxford, in 1866, he visited the United States. The following year, he was ordained as a curate at St Mary's, Bryanston Square, and became a priest in 1868. In 1872, he became the vicar of St Jude's, Commercial Street, Whitechapel, and married Henrietta Octavia Rowland the next year. She had worked alongside Miss Octavia Hill and was just as passionate about philanthropy as he was. Mr. and Mrs. Barnett dedicated themselves to improving the lives of the poor in their parish by establishing evening schools for adults, providing music and affordable entertainment, and serving on the board of guardians and management committees of schools. Mr. Barnett worked hard to reduce outdoor relief, believing it contributed to the pauperization of the area. At the same time, he improved conditions for indoor relief and organized various charities in collaboration with the Charity Organization Society and the parish board of guardians. In 1875, Arnold Toynbee made his first of many visits to Whitechapel, and Mr. Barnett, who kept in close contact with Oxford, formed a small committee in 1877 to consider the organization of university extension in London, with Leonard Montefiore, a young Oxford graduate, and Frederick Rogers from the vellum binders' union as his main assistants. The committee gained significant support, and in October, four courses of lectures were offered in Whitechapel, including one on English history by Dr. S. R. Gardiner. The Barnetts also participated in creating model housing, establishing the children's country holiday fund, and hosting annual fine art loan exhibitions at the Whitechapel Gallery. In 1884, Mr. Barnett wrote an article in the Nineteenth Century discussing university settlements, which led to the founding of the University Settlements Association in July. Shortly after, when Toynbee Hall was constructed, Mr. Barnett became its warden. He was a guest preacher at Oxford from 1895 to 1897 and at Cambridge in 1900. He received a canonry at Bristol Cathedral in 1893 but continued as warden of Toynbee Hall while stepping down from St Jude's. In June 1906, he was appointed to a canonry at Westminster, and in December, when he resigned as warden of Toynbee Hall, a president position was created to keep him connected with the institution. Among Canon Barnett's works is Practicable Socialism (1888, 2nd ed. 1894), co-written with his wife.

BARNFIELD, RICHARD (1574-1627), English poet, was born at Norbury, Staffordshire, and baptized on the 13th of June 1574. His obscure though close relationship with Shakespeare has long made him interesting to students and has attracted of late years further attention from the circumstance that important discoveries regarding his life have been made. Until recently nothing whatever was known about the facts of Barnfield's career, whose very existence had been doubted. It was, however, discovered by the late Dr A. B. Grosart that the poet was the son of Richard Barnfield (or Barnefield) and Maria Skrymsher, his wife, who were married in April 1572. They resided in the parish of Norbury, in Staffordshire, on the borders of Salop, where the poet was baptized on the 13th of June 1574. The mother died in giving birth to a daughter early in 1581, and her unmarried sister, Elizabeth Skrymsher, seems to have devoted herself to the care of the children. In November 1589 Barnfield matriculated at Brasenose College, Oxford, and took his degree in [v.03 p.0415]February 1592. He "performed the exercise for his master's gown," but seems to have left the university abruptly, without proceeding to the M.A. It is conjectured that he came up to London in 1593, and became acquainted with Watson, Drayton, and perhaps with Spenser. The death of Sir Philip Sidney had occurred while Barnfield was still a school-boy, but it seems to have strongly affected his imagination and to have inspired some of his earliest verses. In November 1594, in his twenty-first year, Barnfield published anonymously his first work, The Affectionate Shepherd, dedicated with familiar devotion to Penelope, Lady Rich. This was a sort of florid romance, in two books of six-line stanza, in the manner of Lodge and Shakespeare, dealing at large with "the complaint of Daphnis for the love of Ganymede." As the author expressly admitted later, it was an expansion or paraphrase of Virgil's second eclogue—

BARNFIELD, RICHARD (1574-1627), an English poet, was born in Norbury, Staffordshire, and was baptized on June 13, 1574. His obscure yet close connection to Shakespeare has long intrigued scholars and has gained more attention recently due to significant discoveries about his life. Until recently, little was known about Barnfield's life, and there were doubts about his very existence. However, the late Dr. A. B. Grosart discovered that the poet was the son of Richard Barnfield (or Barnefield) and Maria Skrymsher, his wife, who got married in April 1572. They lived in the parish of Norbury, Staffordshire, near Salop, where the poet was baptized on June 13, 1574. The mother died giving birth to a daughter in early 1581, and her unmarried sister, Elizabeth Skrymsher, appears to have taken care of the children. In November 1589, Barnfield enrolled at Brasenose College, Oxford, and earned his degree in [v.03 p.0415]February 1592. He "completed the exercise for his master's gown," but seems to have left the university suddenly without obtaining his M.A. It’s believed he moved to London in 1593 and got to know Watson, Drayton, and possibly Spenser. The death of Sir Philip Sidney happened while Barnfield was still in school, but it seemed to have deeply impacted his imagination and inspired some of his earliest poems. In November 1594, at the age of 21, Barnfield published his first work, The Affectionate Shepherd, anonymously dedicated in affectionate terms to Penelope, Lady Rich. This piece was a kind of elaborate romance in two books of six-line stanzas, reminiscent of Lodge and Shakespeare, extensively addressing "the complaint of Daphnis for the love of Ganymede." As the author later admitted, it was an expansion or paraphrase of Virgil's second eclogue—

"Formosum pastor Corydon ardebat Alexin."

"Corydon was burning for Alexin."

This poem of Barnfield's was the most extraordinary specimen hitherto produced in England of the licence introduced from Italy at the Renaissance. Although the poem was successful, it did not pass without censure from the moral point of view. Into the conventional outlines of The Affectionate Shepherd the young poet has poured all his fancy, all his epithets, and all his coloured touches of nature. If we are not repelled by the absurd subject, we have to admit that none of the immediate imitators of Venus and Adonis has equalled the juvenile Barnfield in the picturesqueness of his "fine ruff-footed doves," his "speckled flower call'd sops-in-wine," or his desire "by the bright glimmering of the starry light, to catch the long-bill'd woodcock." Two months later, in January 1595, Barnfield published his second volume, Cynthia, with certain Sonnets, and this time signed the preface, which was dedicated, in terms which imply close personal relations, to William Stanley, the new earl of Derby. This is a book of extreme interest; it exemplifies the earliest study both of Spenser and Shakespeare. "Cynthia" itself, a panegyric on Queen Elizabeth, is written in the Spenserian stanza, of which it is probably the earliest example extant outside The Faerie Queene. This is followed by a sequence of twenty sonnets, which have the extraordinary interest that, while preceding the publication of Shakespeare's sonnets by fourteen years, they are closer to them in manner than are any others of the Elizabethan age. They celebrate, with extravagant ardour, the charms of a young man whose initials seem to have been J. U. or J. V., and of whom nothing else seems known. These sonnets, which preceded even the Amoretti of Spenser, are of unusual merit as poetry, and would rank as high in quality as in date of publication if their subject-matter were not so preposterous. They show the influence of Drayton's Idea, which had appeared a few months before; in that collection also, it is to be observed, there had appeared amatory sonnets addressed to a young man. If editors would courageously alter the gender of the pronouns, several of Barnfield's glowing sonnets might take their place at once in our anthologies. Before the publication of his volume, however, he had repented of his heresies, and had become enamoured of a "lass" named Eliza (or Elizabeth), whom he celebrates with effusion in an "Ode." This is probably the lady whom he presently married, and as we find him a grandfather in 1626 it is unlikely that the wedding was long delayed. In 1598 Barnfield published his third volume, The Encomion of Lady Pecunia, a poem in praise of money, followed by a sort of continuation, in the same six-line stanza, called "The Complaint of Poetry for the Death of Liberality." In this volume there is already a decline in poetic quality. But an appendix of "Poems in diverse Humours" to this volume of 1598 presents some very interesting features. Here appears what seems to be the absolutely earliest praise of Shakespeare in a piece entitled "A Remembrance of some English Poets," in which the still unrecognized author of Venus and Adonis is celebrated by the side of Spenser, Daniel and Drayton. Here also are the sonnet, "If Music and sweet Poetry agree," and the beautiful ode beginning "As it fell upon a day," which were until recently attributed to Shakespeare himself. In the next year, 1599, The Passionate Pilgrim was published, with the words "By W. Shakespeare" on the title-page. It was long supposed that this attribution was correct, but Barnfield claimed one of the two pieces just mentioned, not only in 1598, but again in 1605. It is certain that both are his, and possibly other things in The Passionate Pilgrim also; Shakespeare's share in the twenty poems of that miscellany being doubtless confined to the five short pieces which have been definitely identified as his. In the opinion of the present writer the sonnet beginning "Sweet Cytherea" has unmistakably the stamp of Barnfield, and is probably a gloss on the first rapturous perusal of Venus and Adonis; the same is to be said of "Scarce had the sun," which is aut Barnfield, aut diabolus. One or two other contributions to The Passionate Pilgrim may be conjectured, with less confidence, to be Barnfield's. It has been stated that the poet was now studying the law at Gray's Inn, but for this the writer is unable to discover the authority, except that several members of that society are mentioned in the course of the volume of 1598. In all probability Barnfield now married and withdrew to his estate of Dorlestone (or Darlaston), in the county of Stafford, a house romantically situated on the river Trent, where he henceforth resided as a country gentleman. In 1605 he reprinted his Lady Pecunia, and this was his latest appearance as a man of letters. His son Robert Barnfield and his cousin Elinor Skrymsher were his executors when his will was proved at Lichfield; his wife, therefore, doubtless predeceased him. Barnfield died at Dorlestone Hall, and was buried in the neighbouring parish church of St Michael's, Stone, on the 6th of March 1627. The labours of Dr Grosart and of Professor Arber have thrown much light on the circumstances of Barnfield's career. He has taken of late years a far more prominent place than ever before in the history of English literature. This is due partly to the remarkable merit of his graceful, melodious and highly-coloured verse, which was practically unknown until it was privately printed in 1876 (ed. Grosart, Roxburghe Club), and at length given to the public in 1882 (ed. Arber, English Scholars' Library). It is also due to the mysterious personal relation of Barnfield to Shakespeare, a relation not easy to prove in detail, as it is built up on a great variety of small indications. It is, however, obvious that Barnfield warmly admired Shakespeare, whose earliest imitator he may be said to have been, and that between 1595 and 1600 the younger poet was so close to the elder that the compositions of the former could be confused with those of the latter. Barnfield died, as a poet, in his twenty-fifth year. Up to that time he had displayed a talent which, if he had pursued it, might have placed him very high among the English poets. As it is, he will always interest a certain number of readers as being, in his languid "Italianate" way, a sort of ineffectual Meleager in the rich Elizabethan anthology.

This poem by Barnfield was the most remarkable example produced in England of the style that was brought over from Italy during the Renaissance. While the poem was well received, it didn't escape criticism for its moral implications. The young poet has filled the conventional framework of The Affectionate Shepherd with all his creativity, descriptive language, and vivid details from nature. If we can look past the ridiculous subject matter, we have to acknowledge that none of Barnfield's immediate followers of Venus and Adonis matched his imaginative imagery, like his "fine ruff-footed doves," his "speckled flower called sops-in-wine," or his wish "by the bright glimmering of the starry light, to catch the long-billed woodcock." Two months later, in January 1595, Barnfield released his second volume, Cynthia, with certain Sonnets, and this time he signed the preface, which was dedicated, in a way suggesting personal connections, to William Stanley, the new Earl of Derby. This book is extremely interesting; it represents some of the earliest studies of both Spenser and Shakespeare. "Cynthia," a tribute to Queen Elizabeth, is written in the Spenserian stanza, and is likely the earliest example of this form outside of The Faerie Queene. This is followed by a series of twenty sonnets, which are notably significant because, although they were published fourteen years before Shakespeare's sonnets, they share a style that is more similar to them than any others from the Elizabethan era. They passionately celebrate the beauty of a young man whose initials seem to be J. U. or J. V., and of whom nothing else appears to be known. These sonnets, published even before Spenser's Amoretti, are of exceptional quality as poetry, and would rank highly both in quality and publication date if their subject matter weren't so absurd. They show the influence of Drayton's Idea, which had come out a few months earlier; it’s also worth noting that that collection included love sonnets addressed to a young man. If editors had the courage to change the gender of the pronouns, several of Barnfield's passionate sonnets could easily find their way into our anthologies. Before he published this volume, however, he had regretted his earlier works and had fallen in love with a "lass" named Eliza (or Elizabeth), whom he sings of fondly in an "Ode." This is likely the lady he married, and since he became a grandfather in 1626, it's unlikely that the marriage was delayed for long. In 1598, Barnfield released his third volume, The Encomion of Lady Pecunia, a poem praising money, followed by a sort of sequel in the same six-line stanza called "The Complaint of Poetry for the Death of Liberality." In this volume, there's already a noticeable decline in poetic quality. However, an appendix titled "Poems in Diverse Humours" in this 1598 volume features some very intriguing aspects. It includes what seems to be the very earliest praise of Shakespeare in a piece titled "A Remembrance of some English Poets," where the still-unrecognized author of Venus and Adonis is celebrated alongside Spenser, Daniel, and Drayton. Also included are the sonnet "If Music and Sweet Poetry Agree," and the lovely ode beginning "As it fell upon a day," which were recently attributed to Shakespeare himself. The following year, in 1599, The Passionate Pilgrim was published, with "By W. Shakespeare" on the title page. It was long believed that this attribution was correct, but Barnfield claimed one of the two pieces previously mentioned, not only in 1598 but again in 1605. It's clear that both are his, and possibly a few other pieces in The Passionate Pilgrim as well; Shakespeare's contribution to the twenty poems in that collection was likely limited to the five short pieces definitively recognized as his. In my view, the sonnet starting with "Sweet Cytherea" unmistakably shows Barnfield's influence and is probably a response to the first enthusiastic reading of Venus and Adonis; the same goes for "Scarce had the sun," which is aut Barnfield, aut diabolus. A couple of other contributions to The Passionate Pilgrim might also be speculated to be Barnfield’s, although with less certainty. It has been suggested that the poet was now studying law at Gray's Inn, but I cannot find a solid source for this, other than several members of that institution being mentioned in the 1598 volume. Likely, Barnfield got married and moved to his estate of Dorlestone (or Darlaston) in Staffordshire, a house romantically situated by the River Trent, where he then lived as a country gentleman. In 1605, he reprinted Lady Pecunia, marking his last appearance as a writer. His son Robert Barnfield and his cousin Elinor Skrymsher were named as his executors when his will was proven in Lichfield; his wife probably predeceased him. Barnfield died at Dorlestone Hall and was buried in the nearby parish church of St Michael's, Stone, on March 6, 1627. The research of Dr. Grosart and Professor Arber has shed much light on the details of Barnfield's life. In recent years, he has gained a more significant place in the history of English literature than ever before. This is partly due to the notable quality of his graceful, musical, and vividly colored verse, which was almost entirely unknown until it was privately printed in 1876 (ed. Grosart, Roxburghe Club), and then made public in 1882 (ed. Arber, English Scholars' Library). It also stems from the enigmatic personal connection between Barnfield and Shakespeare, a relationship that isn't easy to outline in detail because it's based on a variety of small hints. However, it’s clear that Barnfield held Shakespeare in high regard, perhaps being his earliest imitator, and that between 1595 and 1600, the younger poet was so close to the elder that their works could easily be confused. Barnfield passed away as a poet at the age of twenty-five. Up until that point, he had shown a talent that, if he had pursued it further, could have established him as one of the top English poets. As it stands, he'll always captivate a certain audience because, in his languid "Italianate" style, he serves as a kind of ineffective Meleager in the rich Elizabethan anthology.

Besides the editions already cited, The Affectionate Shepherd was edited by Mr J. O. Halliwell-Phillipps for the Percy Society (Early English Poetry, vol. xx.); The Encomion of Pecunia and some other poems by J. Boswell (Roxburghe Club, 1816); and by J. P. Collier in Illustrations of Old English Literature (vol. i., 1866).

Besides the editions already mentioned, The Affectionate Shepherd was edited by Mr. J. O. Halliwell-Phillipps for the Percy Society (Early English Poetry, vol. xx.); The Encomion of Pecunia and some other poems by J. Boswell (Roxburghe Club, 1816); and by J. P. Collier in Illustrations of Old English Literature (vol. i., 1866).

(E. G.)

(E. G.)

BARNIM, the name of a district between the Spree, the Oder and the Havel, which was added to the mark of Brandenburg during the 13th century. In the 15th century it was divided into upper and lower Barnim, and these names are now borne by two circles (Kreise) in the kingdom of Prussia.

BARNIM, the name of a district between the Spree, the Oder, and the Havel, which became part of the Brandenburg region in the 13th century. In the 15th century, it was split into upper and lower Barnim, and these names are now used for two districts (Kreise) in the kingdom of Prussia.

BARNIM, the name of thirteen dukes who ruled over various divisions of the duchy of Pomerania. The following are the most important:—

BARNIM, the name of thirteen dukes who governed different areas of the duchy of Pomerania. Here are the most significant ones:—

Barnim I. (c. 1209-1278), called the Good, was the son of Bogislaus II., duke of Pomerania-Stettin, and succeeded to this duchy on his father's death in 1220. After he became of age he was engaged in a long struggle with external enemies, and in 1250 was compelled to recognize the supremacy of the margrave of Brandenburg. Having in 1264 united the whole of Pomerania under his rule, Barnim devoted his energies to improving its internal condition. He introduced German settlers and customs into the duchy, founded many towns, and was extremely generous towards ecclesiastical foundations. He died on the 13th or 14th of November 1278.

Barnim I. (c. 1209-1278), known as the Good, was the son of Bogislaus II, duke of Pomerania-Stettin, and took over the duchy after his father's death in 1220. Once he came of age, he engaged in a lengthy conflict with outside enemies and, in 1250, had to accept the authority of the margrave of Brandenburg. After unifying all of Pomerania under his rule in 1264, Barnim focused on improving its internal affairs. He brought in German settlers and customs, established many towns, and was very generous to religious institutions. He passed away on November 13th or 14th, 1278.

Barnim III. (c. 1303-1368), called the Great, was the son of Otto I., duke of Pomerania-Stettin, and took a prominent part in the defence and government of the duchy before his father's [v.03 p.0416]death in 1344. A long and intermittent struggle with the representatives of the emperor Louis IV., who had invested his own son Louis with the mark of Brandenburg, enabled him to gain military experience and distinction. A victory gained by him in August 1332 was mainly instrumental in freeing Pomerania for a time from the vexatious claim of Brandenburg to supremacy over the duchy, which moreover he extended by conquest. Barnim assisted the emperor Charles IV. in his struggle with the family of Wittelsbach. He died on the 24th of August 1368.

Barnim III. (c. 1303-1368), known as the Great, was the son of Otto I., duke of Pomerania-Stettin, and played a significant role in defending and governing the duchy before his father's [v.03 p.0416]death in 1344. A prolonged and sporadic conflict with the representatives of the emperor Louis IV., who had appointed his own son Louis as the ruler of Brandenburg, allowed him to gain military experience and reputation. A victory he achieved in August 1332 was crucial in temporarily freeing Pomerania from the bothersome claim of Brandenburg to dominance over the duchy, which he also expanded through conquest. Barnim supported emperor Charles IV. in his conflict with the Wittelsbach family. He passed away on August 24, 1368.

Barnim XI. (1501-1573), son of Bogislaus X., duke of Pomerania, became duke on his father's death in 1523. He ruled for a time in common with his elder brother George; and after George's death in 1531 he shared the duchy with his nephew Philip I., retaining for himself the duchy of Pomerania-Stettin. The earlier years of his rule were troubled by a quarrel with the margrave of Brandenburg, who wished to annex Pomerania. In 1529, however, a treaty was made which freed Pomerania from the supremacy of Brandenburg on condition that if the ducal family became extinct the duchy should revert to Brandenburg. Barnim adopted the doctrines of Martin Luther, and joined the league of Schmalkalden, but took no part in the subsequent war. But as this attitude left him without supporters he was obliged to submit to the emperor Charles V., to pay a heavy fine, and to accept the Interim, issued from Augsburg in May 1548. In 1569 Barnim handed over his duchy to his grand-nephew, John Frederick, and died at Stettin on the 2nd of June 1573.

Barnim XI. (1501-1573), the son of Bogislaus X., duke of Pomerania, became duke after his father's death in 1523. He initially ruled alongside his older brother George, and after George passed away in 1531, he shared the duchy with his nephew Philip I., keeping the duchy of Pomerania-Stettin for himself. The early years of his reign were marked by a conflict with the margrave of Brandenburg, who wanted to annex Pomerania. However, a treaty was signed in 1529 that freed Pomerania from Brandenburg's control, provided that if the ducal family died out, the duchy would go back to Brandenburg. Barnim adopted Martin Luther's teachings and joined the Schmalkaldic League but did not participate in the following war. However, this stance left him without allies, forcing him to submit to Emperor Charles V, pay a hefty fine, and accept the Interim, which was issued from Augsburg in May 1548. In 1569, Barnim transferred his duchy to his grand-nephew, John Frederick, and died in Stettin on June 2, 1573.

BARNSLEY (Black, or properly Bleak Barnsley), a market town and municipal borough in the Barnsley parliamentary division of the West Riding of Yorkshire, England, 15 m. N. of Sheffield. Pop. (1891) 35,427; (1901) 41,086. It is served by the Midland, Great Central, Lancashire & Yorkshire, Great Northern, and Hull & Barnsley railways. It is in the parish of Silkstone, which gives name to important collieries. It is situated on rising ground west of the river Dearne, and, though it loses in attraction owing to its numerous factories, its neighbourhood has considerable natural beauty. Among the principal buildings and institutions are several churches, of which the oldest, the parish church of St Mary, was built in 1821 on an early site; court house, public hall, institute and free library. Among several educational institutions, the free grammar school dates from 1665; and a philosophical society was founded in 1828. A monument was erected in 1905 to prominent members of the Yorkshire Miners' Association. The park was presented in 1862 by the widow of Joseph Locke, M.P. The manufacture of iron and steel, and the weaving of linen and other cloth, are the two principal industries; but there are also bleachfields, printfields, dyeworks, sawmills, cornmills and malt-houses; and the manufacture of glass, needles and wire is carried on. There are large coalfields in the neighbourhood, which, indeed, extend under the town. Coal and coke are largely exported to London and Hull. In the vicinity, Monk Bretton Priory, a Cluniac foundation of 1157, retains a Perpendicular gatehouse, some Decorated domestic remains, and fragments of the church. Wentworth Castle, built in 1730 by Thomas, earl of Strafford, stands in a singularly beautiful park, and contains a fine collection of portraits of historical interest. Besides the communications afforded by railway, Barnsley has the advantage of connexion with the Aire and Calder Navigation system of canals. The borough is under a mayor, six aldermen and eighteen councillors. Area, 2385 acres.

BARNSLEY (Black, or more accurately Bleak Barnsley), is a market town and municipal borough in the Barnsley parliamentary division of West Yorkshire, England, located 15 miles north of Sheffield. Population: (1891) 35,427; (1901) 41,086. It’s served by the Midland, Great Central, Lancashire & Yorkshire, Great Northern, and Hull & Barnsley railways. The town is part of the parish of Silkstone, known for its significant coal mines. Barnsley sits on elevated land west of the River Dearne and, despite losing some charm due to its many factories, the surrounding area has notable natural beauty. Key buildings and institutions include several churches, with the oldest being St. Mary’s parish church, built in 1821 on an earlier site; courthouse, public hall, institute, and free library. Among the educational institutions, the free grammar school dates back to 1665, and a philosophical society was established in 1828. A monument honoring notable members of the Yorkshire Miners' Association was raised in 1905. The park was gifted in 1862 by the widow of Joseph Locke, M.P. The main industries are iron and steel manufacturing, as well as linen and other cloth weaving; there are also bleachfields, printfields, dyeworks, sawmills, cornmills, and malt houses. Production of glass, needles, and wire also occurs here. The area has extensive coalfields, which indeed extend beneath the town. Coal and coke are extensively exported to London and Hull. Nearby, Monk Bretton Priory, a Cluniac establishment from 1157, retains a Perpendicular gatehouse, some Decorated domestic remains, and fragments of the church. Wentworth Castle, built in 1730 by Thomas, Earl of Strafford, is situated in a remarkably beautiful park and houses a fine collection of historically significant portraits. Besides the railway connections, Barnsley benefits from links to the Aire and Calder Navigation canal system. The borough is governed by a mayor, six aldermen, and eighteen councillors. Area: 2,385 acres.

At the time of the Domesday survey Ilbert de Lacy held Barnsley by gift of William the Conqueror as part of the honour of Pontefract, and the overlordship remained in his family until the reign of Stephen, when it was granted by Henry de Lacy to the monks of Pontefract. Henry III. in 1249 granted the prior and convent of Pontefract a market every Wednesday at Barnsley, and a fair on the vigil and feast of St Michael and two following days, and Henry VIII. in 1512 granted them a new fair on the day of the Conversion of St Paul and two following days. The monastery evidently also held another fair there called St Ellen's fair, for in 1583 Queen Elizabeth granted this fair and St Paul's fair and the market "lately belonging to the dissolved monastery of Pontefract" to one Henry Burdett, and Ralph and Henry his sons for their lives. Besides these charters and others granting land in Barnsley to the monks of Pontefract there is very little history of the town, since it was not until after the introduction of the linen manufacture in 1744 that it became really important. Before that time the chief industry had been wire-drawing, but this trade began to decrease about the end of the 18th century, just as the linen trade was becoming important. In 1869 Barnsley was incorporated.

At the time of the Domesday survey, Ilbert de Lacy held Barnsley by the gift of William the Conqueror as part of the honor of Pontefract, and the overlordship stayed in his family until the reign of Stephen, when it was granted by Henry de Lacy to the monks of Pontefract. Henry III in 1249 granted the prior and convent of Pontefract a market every Wednesday at Barnsley, and a fair on the eve and feast of St. Michael and two following days. Henry VIII in 1512 granted them a new fair on the day of the Conversion of St. Paul and two following days. The monastery also clearly held another fair there called St. Ellen's fair, for in 1583 Queen Elizabeth granted this fair and St. Paul's fair and the market "recently belonging to the dissolved monastery of Pontefract" to one Henry Burdett, and Ralph and Henry, his sons, for their lifetimes. Besides these charters and others granting land in Barnsley to the monks of Pontefract, there is very little history of the town, as it was not until after the introduction of linen manufacturing in 1744 that it became really significant. Before that, the main industry had been wire-drawing, but this trade began to decline around the end of the 18th century, just as the linen trade was gaining importance. In 1869, Barnsley was incorporated.

See Rowland Jackson, The History of the Town and Township of Barnsley (1858); Victoria County History—Yorkshire.

See Rowland Jackson, The History of the Town and Township of Barnsley (1858); Victoria County History—Yorkshire.

BARNSTABLE, a seaport township and the county-seat of the county of the same name, in Massachusetts, U.S.A. Pop. (1900) 4364, of whom 391 were foreign-born; (1910, U.S. census) 4676. Barnstable is served by the New York, New Haven & Hartford Railway. It is situated between Cape Cod Bay on the N. and Nantucket Sound on the S., extending across Cape Cod. The soil of the township, unlike that of other parts of the county, is well adapted to agriculture, and the principal industry is the growing of vegetables and the supplying of milk and poultry for its several villages, nearly all of which are summer resorts. At Hyannis is a state normal school (1897; co-educational). Cranberries are raised in large quantities, and there are oyster and other shell fisheries. In the 17th century the mackerel and whale fisheries were the basis of economic life; the latter gave way later to the cod and other fisheries, but the fishing industry is now relatively unimportant. Much of the county is a region of sands, salt-marshes, beach-grass and scattered woods. From 1865 to 1895 the county diminished 20.1% in population. Barnstable was settled and incorporated in 1639 (county created 1685), and includes among its natives James Otis and Lemuel Shaw.

BARNSTABLE, a seaport town and the county seat of the county of the same name, in Massachusetts, U.S.A. Population (1900) 4,364, of whom 391 were foreign-born; (1910, U.S. census) 4,676. Barnstable is served by the New York, New Haven & Hartford Railway. It is located between Cape Cod Bay to the north and Nantucket Sound to the south, extending across Cape Cod. The soil in this town, unlike other areas in the county, is well-suited for agriculture, with the main industries being vegetable farming and the production of milk and poultry for its various villages, nearly all of which are summer resorts. Hyannis is home to a state normal school (1897; co-educational). Cranberries are grown in large amounts, and there are oyster and other shellfish fisheries. In the 17th century, mackerel and whale fisheries were the backbone of the economy; later on, cod and other fisheries took over, but today, the fishing industry is relatively minor. Much of the county consists of sand, salt marshes, beach grass, and scattered woods. From 1865 to 1895, the county's population decreased by 20.1%. Barnstable was settled and incorporated in 1639 (the county was created in 1685) and is notable for being the birthplace of James Otis and Lemuel Shaw.

See F. Freeman, The History of Cape Cod: the Annals of Barnstable County (2 vols., Boston, 1858, 1862; and other impressions 1860 to 1869).

See F. Freeman, The History of Cape Cod: the Annals of Barnstable County (2 vols., Boston, 1858, 1862; and other editions 1860 to 1869).

BARNSTAPLE, a seaport, market town and municipal borough, in the Barnstaple parliamentary division of Devonshire, England, on the river Taw, near the north coast. Pop. (1901) 14,137. It is served by the London & South-Western, the Great Western, and the Lynton & Barnstaple railways. The Taw is here crossed by a stone bridge of sixteen arches, said to have been built in the 12th or 13th century. The town manufactures lace, gloves, sail-cloth and fishing-nets, and has extensive potteries, tanneries, sawmills and foundries, while shipbuilding is also carried on. The harbour admits only small coasting vessels. The public buildings and institutions include a guildhall (1826), a free grammar school and a large market-place. The poet John Gay was born in the vicinity, and received his education at the grammar school, which at an earlier period had numbered Bishop Jewel among its pupils. It was founded in the 14th century, in connexion with a chantry. There are also some curious Jacobean almshouses. The borough is under a mayor, six aldermen and eighteen councillors. Area, 2236 acres.

BARNSTAPLE, a seaport, market town, and municipal borough, located in the Barnstaple parliamentary division of Devonshire, England, along the river Taw, near the north coast. Population (1901) was 14,137. It is served by the London & South-Western, the Great Western, and the Lynton & Barnstaple railways. The Taw is crossed here by a stone bridge with sixteen arches, believed to have been built in the 12th or 13th century. The town produces lace, gloves, sailcloth, and fishing nets, and has large potteries, tanneries, sawmills, and foundries, with shipbuilding also taking place. The harbor only accommodates small coastal vessels. Public buildings and institutions include a guildhall (1826), a free grammar school, and a large market place. The poet John Gay was born nearby and was educated at the grammar school, which, at an earlier time, had Bishop Jewel among its students. It was founded in the 14th century in connection with a chantry. There are also some interesting Jacobean almshouses. The borough is governed by a mayor, six aldermen, and eighteen councillors. Area: 2236 acres.

Barnstaple (Berdestaple, Barnstapol, Barstaple, also Barum) ranks among the most ancient of royal boroughs. As early as Domesday, where it is several times mentioned, there were forty burgesses within the town and nine without, who rendered 40s. Tradition claims that King Athelstan threw up defensive earthworks here, but the existing castle is attributed to Joel of Totnes, who held the manor during the reign of William the Conqueror, and also founded a Cluniac priory, dedicated to St Mary Magdalene. From this date the borough and priory grew up side by side, but each preserving its independent privileges and rights of government until the dissolution of the latter in 1535. In Edward II.'s reign the burgesses petitioned for the restoration of rights bestowed by a pretended charter from Athelstan. The existence of this charter was denied, but the desired privileges were conceded, including the right to elect a mayor. The earliest authenticated charter is that of Henry I., which was confirmed in a charter of Henry II. The later charter states that the burgesses should have customs similar to those granted to London, and further charters confirmed the same right. A charter of Queen Mary in 1556 added some new privileges, and specified that the common council should consist of a mayor, two aldermen [v.03 p.0417]and twenty-four chief burgesses. James I., by a charter dated 1610, increased the number of chief burgesses to twenty-five and instituted a recorder, a clerk of the market, justices of the peace and other officers. This charter was confirmed in 1611 and 1689, and held force until the Municipal Corporations Act of 1835, which established six aldermen and eighteen councillors. The borough sent two members to parliament in 1295, and so continued to do until the Redistribution of Seats Act of 1885, when the representation was merged in that of the county. Barnstaple was once famous for its woollen trade, now entirely declined, and as early as the reign of Edward III. was an important naval port, with an extensive shipping trade. That this prosperity was not altogether uninterrupted is testified by the fact that, at the time of the Armada, the mayor pleaded inability to contribute three ships, on account of injuries to trade consequent on the war with Spain. The Friday market and the annual four days' fair in September are held by immemorial prescription.

Barnstaple (Berdestaple, Barnstapol, Barstaple, also Barum) is one of the oldest royal boroughs. As early as the Domesday Book, where it's mentioned several times, there were forty burgesses in the town and nine outside of it, who paid 40s. According to tradition, King Athelstan built defensive earthworks here, but the existing castle is attributed to Joel of Totnes, who owned the manor during William the Conqueror's reign and also founded a Cluniac priory dedicated to St Mary Magdalene. From then on, the borough and the priory developed alongside each other, each maintaining its own privileges and rights of governance until the priory was dissolved in 1535. During Edward II's reign, the burgesses requested the restoration of rights granted by a supposed charter from Athelstan. This charter was denied, but the requested privileges were granted, including the right to elect a mayor. The earliest confirmed charter is from Henry I, which was ratified in a charter from Henry II. The later charter states that the burgesses should have customs similar to those granted to London, and subsequent charters reinforced the same rights. A charter from Queen Mary in 1556 added some new privileges and specified that the common council should consist of a mayor, two aldermen [v.03 p.0417]and twenty-four chief burgesses. James I, through a charter dated 1610, increased the number of chief burgesses to twenty-five and established a recorder, a clerk of the market, justices of the peace, and other officers. This charter was confirmed in 1611 and 1689 and remained in force until the Municipal Corporations Act of 1835, which set up six aldermen and eighteen councillors. The borough sent two representatives to parliament in 1295 and continued doing so until the Redistribution of Seats Act of 1885, when the representation was merged with that of the county. Barnstaple was once renowned for its wool trade, which has since completely declined, and as early as Edward III's reign, it was an important naval port with a substantial shipping trade. The fact that this prosperity wasn't always steady is evidenced by the mayor's claim during the Armada that he couldn’t provide three ships due to the impact of the war with Spain on trade. The Friday market and the annual four-day fair in September have been held for as long as anyone can remember.

See J. B. Gribble, Memorials of Barnstaple (Barnstaple, 1830).

See J. B. Gribble, Memorials of Barnstaple (Barnstaple, 1830).

BARNUM, PHINEAS TAYLOR (1810-1891), American showman, was born in Bethel, Connecticut, on the 5th of July 1810, his father being an inn- and store-keeper. Barnum first started as a store-keeper, and was also concerned in the lottery mania then prevailing in the United States. After failing in business, he started in 1829 a weekly paper, The Herald of Freedom, in Danbury; after several libel suits and a prosecution which resulted in imprisonment, he moved to New York in 1834, and in 1835 began his career as a showman, with his purchase and exploitation of a coloured woman, Joyce Heth, reputed to have been the nurse of George Washington, and to be over a hundred and sixty years old. With this woman and a small company he made well-advertised and successful tours in America till 1839, though Joyce Heth died in 1836, when her age was proved to be not more than seventy. After a period of failure, he purchased Scudder's American Museum, New York, in 1841; to this he added considerably, and it became one of the most popular shows in the United States. He made a special hit by the exhibition, in 1842, of Charles Stratton, the celebrated "General Tom Thumb" (see Dwarf). In 1844 Barnum toured with the dwarf in England. A remarkable instance of his enterprise was the engagement of Jenny Lind to sing in America at $1000 a night for one hundred and fifty nights, all expenses being paid by the entrepreneur. The tour began in 1850. Barnum retired from the show business in 1855, but had to settle with his creditors in 1857, and began his old career again as showman and museum proprietor. In 1871 he established the "Greatest Show on Earth," a travelling amalgamation of circus, menagerie and museum of "freaks," &c. This show, incorporated in the name of "Barnum, Bailey & Hutchinson," and later as "Barnum & Bailey's" toured all over the world. In 1907 the business was sold to Ringling Brothers. Barnum wrote several books, such as The Humbugs of the World (1865), Struggles and Triumphs (1869), and his Autobiography (1854, and later editions). He died on the 7th of April 1891.

BARNUM, PHINEAS TAYLOR (1810-1891), American showman, was born in Bethel, Connecticut, on July 5, 1810, to a father who ran an inn and a store. Barnum initially worked as a storekeeper and was also involved in the lottery craze that was sweeping the United States at the time. After his business failed, he launched a weekly newspaper, The Herald of Freedom, in Danbury in 1829. Following several libel lawsuits and a prosecution that led to his imprisonment, he relocated to New York in 1834. In 1835, he began his showman career by purchasing and promoting a woman of color, Joyce Heth, who was claimed to have been George Washington's nurse and was said to be over 160 years old. He toured successfully across America with her and a small group until 1839, even though Joyce Heth passed away in 1836, and her age was later shown to be no more than seventy. After facing a period of setbacks, he bought Scudder's American Museum in New York in 1841, enhancing it significantly, which made it one of the most popular attractions in the United States. He gained notable attention in 1842 with the showcase of Charles Stratton, famously known as "General Tom Thumb" (see Dwarf). In 1844, Barnum took the dwarf on a tour of England. A remarkable example of his ambition was hiring Jenny Lind to perform in America for $1,000 a night for one hundred and fifty nights, with all expenses covered by the entrepreneur. The tour started in 1850. Barnum stepped back from show business in 1855, but by 1857 he had to settle with his creditors and returned to his former roles as a showman and museum owner. In 1871, he created the "Greatest Show on Earth," which was a traveling combination of a circus, menagerie, and museum of "freaks," etc. This show, initially named "Barnum, Bailey & Hutchinson," later became known as "Barnum & Bailey's" and toured worldwide. In 1907, the business was sold to the Ringling Brothers. Barnum authored several books, including The Humbugs of the World (1865), Struggles and Triumphs (1869), and his Autobiography (1854, and later editions). He passed away on April 7, 1891.

BAROCCHIO (or Barozzi), GIACOMO, called Da Vignola (1507-1573), Italian architect, was born at Vignola in the Modenese territory on the 1st of October 1507. His early work was conducted at Bologna, Piacenza, Assisi and Perugia, until he was summoned to Rome as papal architect under Pope Julius III. In 1564 he succeeded Michelangelo as the architect of St Peter's, and executed various portions of that fabric, besides a variety of works in Rome. The designs for the Escorial were also supplied by him. He is the author of an excellent work on the Five Orders of Architecture (Rome, 1563), and another work on Practical Perspective (Rome, 1583). To his extensive acquirements and exquisite taste were superadded an amenity of manners and a noble generosity that won the affection and admiration of all who knew him. He died in Rome on the 7th of July 1573. He was an eminent upholder of the classic style at a period when the style known as baroque was corrupting the architecture of Italy. The term baroque owes its origin to the Spanish word barrueco or berrueco, an imperfectly round pearl, and is not derived from the architect Barocchio, whose name so much resembles it. Yet it is curious that it was much used to describe a debased form of architecture encouraged by the Jesuits whose church in Rome was built by Barocchio.

BAROCCHIO (or Barozzi), GIACOMO, known as Da Vignola (1507-1573), was an Italian architect born in Vignola in the Modena region on October 1, 1507. He initially worked in Bologna, Piacenza, Assisi, and Perugia before being called to Rome as the papal architect under Pope Julius III. In 1564, he took over from Michelangelo as the architect of St. Peter's Basilica and contributed to several parts of that structure, along with various projects in Rome. He also provided the designs for the Escorial. He wrote an excellent book on the Five Orders of Architecture (Rome, 1563) and another on Practical Perspective (Rome, 1583). His extensive knowledge and refined taste were complemented by his pleasant demeanor and generous spirit, which earned him the love and respect of everyone who knew him. He passed away in Rome on July 7, 1573. He was a prominent supporter of the classical style during a time when the architectural style known as baroque was negatively influencing Italian architecture. The term baroque comes from the Spanish word barrueco or berrueco, meaning an imperfectly round pearl, and is not derived from the architect Barocchio, whose name is quite similar. Yet it's interesting that it was often used to describe a distorted form of architecture promoted by the Jesuits, whose church in Rome was built by Barocchio.

BAROCCI (or Baroccio), FEDERIGO (1528-1612), Italian painter, was born at Urbino, where the genius of Raphael inspired him. In his early youth he travelled to Rome, where he painted in fresco and was warmly commended by Michelangelo. He then returned to Urbino, where, with the exception of some short visits to Rome, he continued to reside till his death. He acquired great fame by his paintings of religious subjects, in the style of which he to some extent imitated Correggio. His own followers were very numerous, but according to Lanzi (Hist. of Painting) carried their master's peculiarities to excess. Barocci also etched from his own designs a few prints, which are highly finished, and executed with great softness and delicacy.

BAROCCI (or Baroccio), FEDERIGO (1528-1612), an Italian painter, was born in Urbino, where he was inspired by the genius of Raphael. In his early years, he traveled to Rome, where he painted frescoes and received high praise from Michelangelo. He then returned to Urbino, where he lived until his death, except for a few short visits to Rome. He gained significant fame for his paintings of religious subjects, somewhat imitating Correggio’s style. He had a large number of followers, but according to Lanzi (Hist. of Painting), they exaggerated their master’s unique characteristics. Barocci also created a few etchings from his own designs, which are highly detailed and executed with great softness and delicacy.

BARODA, a native state of India, within the Gujarat province of Bombay, but in direct relations with the governor-general. It consists of four isolated divisions, each of which is interlaced in the most intricate fashion with British territory or with other native states. Three of these divisions—Kadi, Baroda and Nausari—are in Gujarat proper; the fourth, Amreli with Okhamandal, is in the peninsula of Kathiawar. The total area covers 8099 sq. m. In 1901 the population was 1,952,692, showing a decrease of 19% in the decade, compared with an increase of 11% in the preceding decade. This decrease was due partly to the famines of 1896-1897 and 1900-1901, partly to the epidemics of cholera and fever which accompanied them, and partly to the plague which attacked the state in as great measure as the surrounding presidency.

BARODA, a native state in India, located in the Gujarat province of Bombay, but directly governed by the governor-general. It consists of four separate divisions, each intricately connected with British territory or other native states. Three of these divisions—Kadi, Baroda, and Nausari—are part of Gujarat proper; the fourth, Amreli with Okhamandal, is situated in the Kathiawar peninsula. The total area is 8,099 square miles. In 1901, the population was 1,952,692, reflecting a 19% decrease from the previous decade, compared to an 11% increase in the decade before that. This decline was partly due to the famines of 1896-1897 and 1900-1901, along with the cholera and fever epidemics that accompanied them, and partly to the plague that affected the state as severely as the surrounding presidency.

The princes of Baroda were one of the chief branches of the Mahratta confederacy, which in the 18th century spread devastation and terror over India. About 1721 one Pilaji gaekwar carved a fertile slice of territory out of Gujarat, and afterwards received the title of "Leader of the Royal Troops" from the peshwa. During the last thirty-two years of the century the house fell a prey to one of those bitter and unappeasable family feuds which are the ruin of great Indian families. In 1800 the inheritance descended to a prince feeble in body and almost idiotic in mind. British troops were sent in defence of the hereditary ruler against all claimants; a treaty was signed in 1802, by which his independence of the peshwa and his dependence on British government were secured. Three years later these and various other engagements were consolidated into a systematic plan for the administration of the Baroda territory, under a prince with a revenue of three-quarters of a million sterling, perfectly independent in all internal matters, but practically kept on his throne by subsidiary British troops. For some time the history of the gaekwars was very much the same as that of most territorial houses in India: an occasional able minister, more rarely an able prince; but, on the other hand, a long dreary list of incompetent heads, venal advisers and taskmasters oppressive to the people. At last a fierce family feud came to a climax. In 1873 an English committee of inquiry was appointed to investigate various complaints of oppression against the gaekwar, Malhar Rao, who had recently succeeded to the throne after being for a long time kept in prison by his brother, the former gaekwar. No real reform resulted, and in 1874 an attempt at poisoning the British resident led to the gaekwar being formally accused of the crime and tried by a mixed commission. The result of the trial (1875) was a failure to obtain a unanimous verdict on the charge of poisoning; the viceroy, Lord Northbrook, however, decided to depose Malhar Rao on the ground of gross misgovernment, the widow of his brother and predecessor, Khande Rao, being permitted to adopt an heir from among the descendants of the founder of the family. This heir, by name Sayaji Rao, then a boy of twelve years in the humble home of a Deccani cultivator, was educated by an English tutor, the administration being meanwhile placed for eight years under the charge of Sir T. Madhava Rao, formerly diwan of Travancore, one of the ablest and most enlightened of Indian statesmen. The result was a conspicuous success. The gaekwar showed himself a model prince, and his territories [v.03 p.0418]became as well governed and prosperous as a British district. He repeatedly visited Europe in company with his wife. In 1887 the queen-empress conferred upon him at Windsor the insignia of G.C.S.I., and in 1892 upon his wife the Imperial order of the crown of India.

The princes of Baroda were one of the main branches of the Mahratta confederacy, which wreaked havoc and fear across India in the 18th century. Around 1721, a man named Pilaji Gaekwar carved out a fertile piece of land from Gujarat and later earned the title of "Leader of the Royal Troops" from the peshwa. In the last thirty-two years of that century, the family fell victim to one of those bitter and unresolvable internal conflicts that plague many prominent Indian families. In 1800, the inheritance passed to a prince who was physically weak and nearly unable to think clearly. British troops were deployed to protect the hereditary ruler against all challengers; a treaty was signed in 1802, securing his independence from the peshwa while tying him to British governance. Three years later, these and various other agreements were merged into a systematic plan for administering the Baroda territory, under a prince with an income of three-quarters of a million pounds, completely independent in internal matters but effectively kept on the throne by British troops. For a while, the history of the Gaekwars mirrored that of most regional families in India: occasional strong ministers, even rarer strong princes; but on the flip side, a long list of ineffective leaders, corrupt advisors, and overseers who oppressed the populace. Eventually, a fierce family feud escalated. In 1873, an English committee was established to look into various allegations of oppression against the Gaekwar, Malhar Rao, who had recently taken the throne after being imprisoned for a long time by his brother, the former Gaekwar. No real reforms came from this, and in 1874, an attempt to poison the British resident led to Malhar Rao being formally accused of the crime and tried by a mixed commission. The outcome of the trial (1875) failed to achieve a unanimous verdict on the poisoning charge; however, the viceroy, Lord Northbrook, chose to oust Malhar Rao due to severe misgovernment, allowing the widow of his brother and predecessor, Khande Rao, to adopt an heir from the descendants of the family's founder. This heir, named Sayaji Rao, was then a twelve-year-old living in the humble home of a Deccani farmer. He was educated by an English tutor while the administration was placed under the effective management of Sir T. Madhava Rao, a former diwan of Travancore and one of the most capable and enlightened Indian statesmen, for eight years. The result was a significant success. The Gaekwar proved to be a model ruler, and his territories became as well-governed and prosperous as a British district. He frequently traveled to Europe with his wife. In 1887, the queen-empress honored him at Windsor with the insignia of G.C.S.I., and in 1892, she bestowed upon his wife the Imperial order of the crown of India.

The gross revenue of the state is more than a million sterling. In 1901 the state currency of Babashai rupees was withdrawn, and the British rupee was introduced. The regular military force consists of a field battery, with several regiments of cavalry and battalions of infantry. In addition, there is an irregular force of horse and foot. Compulsory education has been carried on experimentally since 1893 in the Amreli division with apparent success, the compulsory age being 7 to 12 for boys and 7 to 10 for girls. Special measures are also adopted for the education of low castes and aboriginal tribes. There is a female training college under a Christian lady superintendent. The Kala Bhavan, or technical school, has departments for drawing, carpentry, dyeing, weaving and agriculture. There is also a state museum under a European director, and a state library. Portions of the state are crossed by the Bombay & Baroda and the Rajputana railways. In addition, the state has constructed three railways of its own, on three different gauges. Other railways are in contemplation. The state possesses a cotton mill.

The state's total revenue exceeds one million pounds. In 1901, the local currency of Babashai rupees was phased out, and the British rupee was introduced. The regular military includes a field battery, several regiments of cavalry, and battalions of infantry. Additionally, there is an irregular force of mounted and foot soldiers. Since 1893, compulsory education has been implemented on a trial basis in the Amreli division, showing clear success, with compulsory schooling ages set at 7 to 12 for boys and 7 to 10 for girls. Special programs are also in place to educate lower castes and indigenous tribes. There is a women's training college overseen by a Christian woman. The Kala Bhavan, or technical school, offers courses in drawing, carpentry, dyeing, weaving, and agriculture. The state also has a museum run by a European director and a state library. Some areas of the state are connected by the Bombay & Baroda and the Rajputana railways. Furthermore, the state has built three railways of its own, each with a different gauge, with plans for more railways underway. The state owns a cotton mill.

The city of Baroda is situated on the river Viswamitri, a station on the Bombay & Baroda railway, 245 m. N. of Bombay by rail. Pop. (1901) 103,790. The whole aspect of the city has been changed by the construction of handsome public buildings, the laying-out of parks and the widening of the streets. An excellent water-supply is provided from the Ajwa lake. The cantonments, garrisoned by a native infantry regiment, are under British jurisdiction, and have a population of 4000. The city contains a college and many schools. The chief hospitals are called after the countess of Dufferin, Sayaji Rao and Jamnabai, the widow of Khande Rao.

The city of Baroda is located on the Viswamitri River, a stop on the Bombay & Baroda railway, 245 miles north of Bombay by train. Population (1901) was 103,790. The entire look of the city has transformed due to the construction of beautiful public buildings, the development of parks, and the widening of the streets. An excellent water supply is sourced from the Ajwa lake. The cantonments, occupied by a local infantry regiment, fall under British control and have a population of 4,000. The city features a college and numerous schools. The main hospitals are named after the Countess of Dufferin, Sayaji Rao, and Jamnabai, the widow of Khande Rao.

See Baroda Gazetteer, 1908.

See Baroda Gazetteer, 1908.

BAROMETER (from Gr. βάρος, pressure, and μέτρον, measure), an instrument by which the weight or pressure of the atmosphere is measured. The ordinary or mercurial barometer consists of a tube about 36 in. long, hermetically closed at the upper end and containing mercury. In the "cistern barometer" the tube is placed with its open end in a basin of mercury, and the atmospheric pressure is measured by the difference of the heights of the mercury in the tube and the cistern. In the "siphon barometer" the cistern is dispensed with, the tube being bent round upon itself at its lower end; the reading is taken of the difference in the levels of the mercury in the two limbs. The "aneroid" barometer (from the Gr. α- privative, and νηρός, wet) employs no liquid, but depends upon the changes in volume experienced by an exhausted metallic chamber under varying pressures. "Baroscopes" simply indicate variations in the atmospheric pressure, without supplying quantitative data. "Barographs" are barometers which automatically record any variations in pressure.

BAROMETER (from Gr. weight, pressure, and measure, measure) is a device used to measure the weight or pressure of the atmosphere. The typical or mercury barometer consists of a tube about 36 inches long, sealed at the top and filled with mercury. In the "cistern barometer," the tube is positioned with its open end in a basin of mercury, and atmospheric pressure is measured by the difference in the mercury levels in the tube and the basin. In the "siphon barometer," there is no basin; the tube bends back on itself at the bottom, and the reading comes from the difference in the mercury levels in the two sides. The "aneroid" barometer (from the Gr. α- privative, and νηρός, wet) doesn't use liquid but relies on changes in volume of a sealed metallic chamber due to varying pressures. "Baroscopes" simply show changes in atmospheric pressure without providing specific measurements. "Barographs" are barometers that automatically record any changes in pressure.

Philosophers prior to Galileo had endeavoured to explain the Historical. action of a suction pump by postulating a principle that "Nature abhorred a vacuum." When Galileo observed that a common suction pump could not raise water to a greater height than about 32 ft. he considered that the "abhorrence" was limited to 32 ft., and commended the matter to the attention of his pupil Evangelista Torricelli. Torricelli perceived a ready explanation of the observed phenomenon if only it could be proved that the atmosphere had weight, and the pressure which it exerted was equal to that of a 32-ft. column of water. He proved this to be the correct explanation by reasoning as follows:—If the atmosphere supports 32 feet of water, then it should also support a column of about 2½ ft. of mercury, for this liquid is about 13½ times heavier than water. This he proved in the following manner. He selected a glass tube about a quarter of an inch in diameter and 4 ft. long, and hermetically sealed one of its ends; he then filled it with mercury and, applying his finger to the open end, inverted it in a basin containing mercury. The mercury instantly sank to nearly 30 in. above the surface of the mercury in the basin, leaving in the top of the tube an apparent vacuum, which is now called the Torricellian vacuum; this experiment is sometimes known as the Torricellian experiment. Torricelli's views rapidly gained ground, notwithstanding the objections of certain philosophers. Valuable confirmation was afforded by the variation of the barometric column at different elevations. René Descartes and Blaise Pascal predicted a fall in the height when the barometer was carried to the top of a mountain, since, the pressure of the atmosphere being diminished, it necessarily followed that the column of mercury sustained by the atmosphere would be diminished also. This was experimentally observed by Pascal's brother-in-law, Florin Périer (1605-1672), who measured the height of the mercury column at various altitudes on the Puy de Dôme. Pascal himself tried the experiment at several towers in Paris,—Notre Dame, St Jacques de la Boucherie, &c. The results of his researches were embodied in his treatises De l'équilibre des liqueurs and De la pesanteur de la masse d'air, which were written before 1651, but were not published till 1663 after his death. Corroboration was also afforded by Marin Mersenne and Christiaan Huygens. It was not long before it was discovered that the height of the column varied at the same place, and that a rise or fall was accompanied by meteorological changes. The instrument thus came to be used as a means of predicting the weather, and it was frequently known as the weather-glass. The relation of the barometric pressure to the weather is mentioned by Robert Boyle, who expressed the opinion that it is exceedingly difficult to draw any correct conclusions. Edmund Halley, Leibnitz, Jean André Deluc (1727-1817) and many others investigated this subject, giving rules for predicting the weather and attempting explanations for the phenomena. Since the height of the barometric column varies with the elevation of the station at which it is observed, it follows that observations of the barometer afford a means for measuring altitudes. The early experiments of Pascal were developed by Edmund Halley, Edme Mariotte, J. Cassini, D. Bernoulli, and more especially by Deluc in his Recherches sur les modifications de l'atmosphère (1772), which contains a full account of the early history of the barometer and its applications. More highly mathematical investigations have been given by Laplace, and also by Richard Ruhlmann (Barometrischen Hohenmessung., Leipzig, 1870). The modern aspects of the relation between atmospheric pressure and the weather and altitudes are treated in the article Meteorology.

Philosophers before Galileo tried to explain the Historic. function of a suction pump by suggesting that "Nature hates a vacuum." When Galileo saw that a regular suction pump couldn't raise water more than about 32 feet, he thought that the "hatred" for vacuum was limited to that height, and he directed this problem to his student Evangelista Torricelli. Torricelli found a straightforward explanation for the observed phenomenon if he could prove that the atmosphere had weight, and that the pressure it exerted was equal to a 32-foot column of water. He confirmed this by reasoning: If the atmosphere can support 32 feet of water, it should also support a column of about 2½ feet of mercury, since mercury is about 13½ times heavier than water. He demonstrated this by taking a glass tube about a quarter of an inch in diameter and 4 feet long, sealing one end, filling it with mercury, and then inverting it in a basin of mercury while covering the open end with his finger. The mercury dropped to nearly 30 inches above the surface of the basin's mercury, leaving a vacuum at the top of the tube, which is now known as the Torricellian vacuum; this experiment is sometimes referred to as the Torricellian experiment. Torricelli's ideas quickly gained acceptance, despite some philosophers' objections. Valuable evidence came from observing the barometric column varying at different elevations. René Descartes and Blaise Pascal anticipated that the height would drop when the barometer was taken to the top of a mountain because the atmospheric pressure decreases, making it logical that the mercury column supported by the atmosphere would also decrease. This was experimentally confirmed by Pascal's brother-in-law, Florin Périer (1605-1672), who measured the mercury column's height at various altitudes on the Puy de Dôme. Pascal himself conducted the experiment at several towers in Paris—Notre Dame, St Jacques de la Boucherie, etc. He compiled the findings in his treatises De l'équilibre des liqueurs and De la pesanteur de la masse d'air, written before 1651 but published in 1663, after his death. Marin Mersenne and Christiaan Huygens also provided confirmation. Soon, it was discovered that the height of the column changed even at the same location, and that increases or decreases in height were linked to weather changes. As a result, the instrument began to be used for weather prediction and was often called the weather glass. Robert Boyle noted the connection between barometric pressure and the weather, stating it was quite challenging to draw accurate conclusions. Edmund Halley, Leibnitz, Jean André Deluc (1727-1817), and many others explored this topic, providing guidelines for weather prediction and attempting to explain the phenomena. Since the height of the barometric column varies with the elevation of where it's measured, it's possible to use barometer observations to measure altitudes. Early experiments by Pascal were expanded upon by Edmund Halley, Edme Mariotte, J. Cassini, D. Bernoulli, and notably by Deluc in his Recherches sur les modifications de l'atmosphère (1772), which offers a comprehensive account of the early history of the barometer and its uses. Higher-level mathematical investigations were conducted by Laplace and Richard Ruhlmann (Barometrischen Hohenmessung., Leipzig, 1870). The modern relationship between atmospheric pressure, weather, and altitude is discussed in the article Weather Science.

Many attempts have been made by which the variation in the height of the mercury column could be magnified, and so more exact measurements taken. It is not possible to enumerate in this article the many devices which have been proposed; and the reader is referred to Charles Hutton's Mathematical and Philosophical Dictionary (1815), William Ellis's paper on the history of the barometer in the Quarterly Journal of the Royal Meteorological Society, vol. xii. (1886), and E. Gerland and F. Traumüller's Geschichte der physikalischen Experimentierkunst (1899). Descartes suggested a method which Huygens put into practice. The barometer tube was expanded into a cylindrical vessel at the top, and into this chamber a fine tube partly filled with water was inserted. A slight motion of the mercury occasioned a larger displacement of the water, and hence the changes in the barometric pressure were more readily detected and estimated. But the instrument failed as all water-barometers do, for the gases dissolved in the water coupled with its high vapour tension destroy its efficacy. The substitution of methyl salicylate for the water has been attended with success. Its low vapour tension (Sir William Ramsay and Sydney Young give no value below 70° C.), its low specific gravity (1.18 at 10° C.), its freedom from viscosity, have contributed to its successful use. In the form patented by C. O. Bartrum it is claimed that readings to .001 of an inch of mercury can be taken without the use of a vernier.

Many efforts have been made to amplify the variation in the height of the mercury column for more precise measurements. This article won't list all the devices that have been suggested, so readers are directed to Charles Hutton's Mathematical and Philosophical Dictionary (1815), William Ellis's paper on the history of the barometer in the Quarterly Journal of the Royal Meteorological Society, vol. xii. (1886), and E. Gerland and F. Traumüller's Geschichte der physikalischen Experimentierkunst (1899). Descartes proposed a method that Huygens put into practice. The barometer tube was widened into a cylindrical vessel at the top, into which a fine tube partly filled with water was inserted. A slight movement of the mercury caused a larger movement of the water, making it easier to detect and measure changes in barometric pressure. However, the instrument failed like all water-barometers do, because the gases dissolved in the water, along with its high vapor tension, undermine its effectiveness. Replacing water with methyl salicylate has proved successful. Its low vapor tension (Sir William Ramsay and Sydney Young report no value below 70° C.), its low specific gravity (1.18 at 10° C.), and its lack of viscosity have all contributed to its successful application. In the version patented by C. O. Bartrum, it is claimed that measurements can be taken to .001 of an inch of mercury without using a vernier.

The diagonal barometer, in which the upper part of the tube is inclined to the lower part, was suggested by Bernardo Ramazzini (1633-1714), and also by Sir Samuel Morland (or Moreland). This form has many defects, and even when the [v.03 p.0419]tube is bent through 45° the readings are only increased in the ratio of 7 to 5. The wheel barometer of Dr R. Hooke, and the steel-yard barometer, endeavour to magnify the oscillation of the mercury column by means of a float resting on the surface of the mercury in the cistern; the motion of the float due to any alteration in the level of the mercury being rendered apparent by a change in the position of the wheel or steel-yard. The pendant barometer of G. Amontons, invented in 1695, consists of a funnel-shaped tube, which is hung vertically with the wide end downwards and closed in at the upper end. The tube contains mercury which adjusts itself in the tube so that the length of the column balances the atmospheric pressure. The instability of this instrument is obvious, for any jar would cause the mercury to leave the tube.

The diagonal barometer, where the upper part of the tube is tilted towards the lower part, was proposed by Bernardo Ramazzini (1633-1714) and also by Sir Samuel Morland (or Moreland). This design has several flaws, and even when the [v.03 p.0419]tube is bent at a 45° angle, the readings only increase in a ratio of 7 to 5. Dr. R. Hooke's wheel barometer and the steel-yard barometer try to enhance the movement of the mercury column using a float that sits on the surface of the mercury in the cistern; the float's movement in response to changes in mercury level is indicated by a shift in the position of the wheel or steel yard. The pendant barometer by G. Amontons, created in 1695, consists of a funnel-shaped tube that is hung vertically with the wide end facing down and sealed at the top. The tube contains mercury, which adjusts within the tube to balance the atmospheric pressure. The instability of this device is clear, as any jolt would cause the mercury to leave the tube.

Fig. 1. Siphon Barometer.

Fig. 1. Siphon Barometer.

Fig. 1. Siphon Barometer.

The Siphon Barometer (fig. 1) consists of a tube bent in the form of a siphon, and is of the same diameter throughout. A graduated scale passes along the whole length of the tube, and the height of the barometer is ascertained by taking the difference of the readings of the upper and lower limbs respectively. This instrument may also be read by bringing the zero-point of the graduated scale to the level of the surface of the lower limb by means of a screw, and reading off the height at once from the surface of the upper limb. This barometer requires no correction for errors of capillarity or capacity. Since, however, impurities are contracted by the mercury in the lower limb, which is usually in open contact with the air, the satisfactory working of the instrument comes soon to be seriously interfered with.

The Siphon Barometer (fig. 1) is made up of a tube shaped like a siphon and has a consistent diameter throughout. A marked scale runs along the entire length of the tube, and you determine the height of the barometer by finding the difference between the readings of the upper and lower ends. You can also read this instrument by aligning the zero point of the graduated scale with the level of the surface of the lower end using a screw, then directly taking the height from the surface of the upper end. This barometer doesn't need adjustments for capillarity or capacity errors. However, since impurities can accumulate in the mercury within the lower end, which is typically exposed to air, the effective functioning of the instrument can quickly become significantly affected.

 Fig. 2. Cistern Barometer.

Fig. 2. Cistern Barometer.

Fig. 2. Cistern Barometer.

Fig. 2 shows the Cistern Barometer in its essential and simplest form. This barometer is subject to two kinds of error, the one arising from capillarity, and the other from changes in the level of the surface of the cistern as the mercury rises and falls in the tube, the latter being technically called the error of capacity. If a glass tube of small bore be plunged into a vessel containing mercury, it will be observed that the level of the mercury in the tube is not in the line of that of the mercury in the vessel, but somewhat below it, and that the surface is convex. The capillary depression is inversely proportional to the diameter of the tube. In standard barometers, the tube is about an inch in diameter, and the error due to capillarity is less than .001 of an inch. Since capillarity depresses the height of the column, cistern barometers require an addition to be made to the observed height, in order to give the true pressure, the amount depending, of course, on the diameter of the tube.

Fig. 2 shows the Cistern Barometer in its basic and simplest form. This barometer is affected by two types of errors: one caused by capillarity and the other by changes in the surface level of the cistern as the mercury rises and falls in the tube, the latter being technically referred to as the error of capacity. If a narrow glass tube is inserted into a container with mercury, you’ll notice that the mercury level in the tube is lower than that in the container and that the surface is curved upwards. The capillary depression is inversely proportional to the diameter of the tube. In standard barometers, the tube is about one inch wide, and the error due to capillarity is less than .001 of an inch. Since capillarity lowers the height of the column, cistern barometers need an adjustment to be made to the observed height to provide the true pressure, with the adjustment amount depending on the diameter of the tube.

The error of capacity arises in this way. The height of the barometer is the perpendicular distance between the surface of the mercury in the cistern and the upper surface of the mercurial column. Now, when the barometer falls from 30 to 29 inches, an inch of mercury must flow out of the tube and pass into the cistern, thus raising the cistern level; and, on the other hand, when the barometer rises, mercury must flow out of the cistern into the tube, thus lowering the level of the mercury in the cistern. Since the scales of barometers are usually engraved on their brass cases, which are fixed (and, consequently, the zero-point from which the scale is graduated is also fixed), it follows that, from the incessant changes in the level of the cistern, the readings would be sometimes too high and sometimes too low, if no provision were made against this source of error.

The error of capacity happens like this. The height of the barometer is the vertical distance between the surface of the mercury in the cistern and the top of the mercurial column. When the barometer drops from 30 to 29 inches, an inch of mercury has to flow out of the tube and into the cistern, raising the cistern level. Conversely, when the barometer goes up, mercury needs to flow from the cistern back into the tube, lowering the mercury level in the cistern. Since barometers usually have their scales engraved on their fixed brass cases (meaning the zero-point for the scale is also fixed), it means that due to constant changes in the cistern's level, the readings can sometimes be too high and sometimes too low, unless measures are taken to avoid this error.

A simple way of correcting the error of capacity is—to ascertain (1) the neutral point of the instrument, or that height at which the zero of the scale is exactly at the height of the surface of the cistern, and (2) the rate of error as the barometer rises or falls above this point, and then apply a correction proportional to Fortin's Barometer. this rate. The instrument in which the error of capacity is satisfactorily (indeed, entirely) got rid of is Fortin's Barometer. Fig. 3 shows how this is effected. The upper part of the cistern is formed of a glass cylinder, through which the level of the mercury may be seen. The bottom is made like a bag, of flexible leather, against which a screw works. At the top of the interior of the cistern is a small piece of ivory, the point of which coincides with the zero of the scale. By means of the screw, which acts on the flexible cistern bottom, the level of the mercury can be raised or depressed so as to bring the ivory point exactly to the surface of the mercury in the cistern. In some barometers the cistern is fixed, and the ivory point is brought to the level of the mercury in the cistern by raising or depressing the scale.

A simple way to correct the capacity error is to determine (1) the neutral point of the instrument, which is the height at which the zero of the scale is exactly level with the surface of the cistern, and (2) the rate of error as the barometer rises or falls above this point, and then apply a correction proportional to Fortin's Barometer. The instrument that effectively eliminates (in fact, completely removes) the capacity error is Fortin's Barometer. Fig. 3 illustrates how this is done. The upper part of the cistern is made from a glass cylinder, allowing the mercury level to be visible. The bottom is designed like a bag, made of flexible leather, against which a screw operates. At the top of the inside of the cistern is a small piece of ivory, whose point lines up with the zero on the scale. By using the screw that acts on the flexible bottom of the cistern, the mercury level can be adjusted up or down to position the ivory point exactly at the surface of the mercury in the cistern. In some barometers, the cistern is fixed, and the ivory point is adjusted to the mercury level by raising or lowering the scale.

Fig. 3. Fortin's Barometer.

Fig. 3.—Fortin's Barometer.

Fig. 3.—Fortin's Barometer.

In constructing the best barometers three materials are employed, viz.:—(1) brass, for the case, on which the scale is engraved; (2) glass, for the tube containing the mercury; and (3) the mercury itself. It is evident that if the coefficient of expansion of mercury and brass were the same, the height of the mercury as indicated by the brass scale would be the true height of the mercurial column. But this is not the case, the coefficient of expansion for mercury being considerably greater than that for brass. The result is that if a barometer stand at 30 in. when the temperature of the whole instrument, mercury and brass, is 32°, it will no longer stand at 30 in. if the temperature be raised to 69°; in fact, it will then stand at 30.1 in. Corrections of the barometer reading. This increase in the height of the column by the tenth of an inch is not due to any increase of pressure, but altogether to the greater expansion of the mercury at the higher temperature, as compared with the expansion of the brass case with the engraved scale by which the height is measured. In order, therefore, to compare with each other with exactness barometric observations made at different temperatures, it is necessary to reduce them to the heights at which they would stand at some uniform temperature. The temperature to which such observations are reduced is 32° Fahr. or 0° cent.

In making the best barometers, three materials are used: (1) brass for the case that has the scale engraved on it; (2) glass for the tube that holds the mercury; and (3) the mercury itself. It's clear that if the expansion rates of mercury and brass were the same, the height of the mercury indicated by the brass scale would accurately reflect the actual height of the mercury column. But that’s not the case; mercury expands much more than brass. This means that if a barometer reads 30 inches when the entire instrument—mercury and brass—is at 32°F, it won't read 30 inches again if the temperature goes up to 69°F; instead, it will read 30.1 inches. Barometer reading corrections. This increase of a tenth of an inch is not because of a rise in pressure, but is entirely due to the greater expansion of the mercury at the higher temperature compared to the brass case with the engraved scale that measures the height. Therefore, to make accurate comparisons of barometric readings taken at different temperatures, it's necessary to adjust them to the heights they would show at a consistent temperature. The temperature to which these observations are standardized is 32°F or 0°C.

If English units be used (Fahrenheit degrees and inches), this correction is given by the formula

If English units are used (Fahrenheit degrees and inches), this correction is provided by the formula

x = -H.09T - 2.56,
1000

in the centigrade-centimetre system the correction is .0001614 HT (H being the observed height and T the observed temperature). Devices have been invented which determine these corrections mechanically, and hence obviate the necessity of applying the above formula, or of referring to tables in which these corrections for any height of the column and any temperature are given.

in the centigrade-centimetre system, the correction is .0001614 HT (with H being the observed height and T the observed temperature). Devices have been created that can determine these corrections mechanically, eliminating the need to apply the formula above or refer to tables that provide these corrections for any column height and temperature.

The standard temperature of the English yard being 62° and not 32°, it will be found in working out the corrections from the above formula that the temperature of no correction is not 32° but 28.5°. If the scale be engraved on the glass tube, or if the instrument be furnished with a glass scale or with a wooden scale, different corrections are required. These may be worked out from the above formula by substituting for the coefficient of the expansion of brass that of glass, which is assumed to be 0.00000498, or that of wood, which is assumed to be 0. Wood, however, should not be used, its expansion with temperature being unsteady, as well as uncertain.

The standard temperature for the English yard is 62° instead of 32°, so when you calculate the corrections using the formula above, you'll find that the temperature for no correction is actually 28.5°. If the scale is engraved on the glass tube or if the instrument has a glass or wooden scale, you'll need different corrections. You can figure these out using the formula by replacing the coefficient for the expansion of brass with that of glass, which is estimated to be 0.00000498, or with that of wood. However, wood shouldn't be used because its expansion with temperature is inconsistent and unreliable.

If the brass scale be attached to a wooden frame and be free to move up and down the frame, as is the case with many siphon barometers, the corrections for brass scales are to be used, since the zero-point of the scale is brought to the level of the lower limb; but if the brass scale be fixed to a wooden frame, the corrections for brass scales are only applicable provided the zero of the scale be fixed at (or nearly at) the zero line of the column, and be free to expand upwards. In siphon barometers, with which an observation is made from two readings on the scale, the [v.03 p.0420]scale must be free to expand in one direction. Again, if only the upper part of the scale, say from 27 to 31 in., be screwed to a wooden frame, it is evident that not the corrections for brass scales, but those for wooden scales must be used. No account need be taken of the expansion of the glass tube containing the mercury, it being evident that no correction for this expansion is required in the case of any barometer the height of which is measured from the surface of the mercury in the cistern.

If the brass scale is attached to a wooden frame and can move up and down freely, like in many siphon barometers, then you should use the corrections for brass scales, since the zero point of the scale is aligned with the lower limb. However, if the brass scale is fixed to the wooden frame, the corrections for brass scales only apply if the zero of the scale is set at (or very close to) the zero line of the column and can expand upwards. In siphon barometers, where observations are made using two readings on the scale, the [v.03 p.0420]scale needs to be able to expand in one direction. Furthermore, if only the upper part of the scale, for example from 27 to 31 inches, is secured to a wooden frame, it's clear that you should use the corrections for wooden scales, not brass scales. You don't need to consider the expansion of the glass tube containing the mercury, as it's clear that no correction for this expansion is necessary in any barometer where the height is measured from the surface of the mercury in the cistern.

In fixing a barometer for observation, it is indispensable that Position of barometer. it be hung in a perpendicular position, seeing that it is the perpendicular distance between the surface of the mercury in the cistern and the top of the column which is the true height of the barometer. The surface of the mercury column is convex, and in noting the height of the barometer, it is not the chord of the curve, but its tangent which is taken. This is done by setting the straight lower edge of the vernier, an appendage with which the barometer is furnished, as a tangent to the curve. The vernier is made to slide up and down the scale, and by it the height of the barometer may be read true to 0.002 or even to 0.001 in.

In setting up a barometer for observation, it is essential that Barometer reading. it is hung straight up and down because the true height of the barometer is measured by the perpendicular distance from the surface of the mercury in the cistern to the top of the column. The surface of the mercury column is curved, and when measuring the height of the barometer, it’s not the straight line across the curve that is used, but rather its tangent. This is done by aligning the straight bottom edge of the vernier, which is an attachment on the barometer, as a tangent to the curve. The vernier can be moved up and down the scale, allowing the height of the barometer to be read accurately to 0.002 or even 0.001 in.

It is essential that the barometer is at the temperature shown by the attached thermometer. No observation can be regarded as good if the thermometer indicates a temperature differing from that of the whole instrument by more than a degree. For every degree of temperature the attached thermometer differs from the barometer, the observation will be faulty to the extent of about 0.003 in., which in discussions of diurnal range, &c., is a serious amount.

It’s important that the barometer matches the temperature indicated by the attached thermometer. No observation can be considered accurate if the thermometer shows a temperature that differs from the entire instrument by more than one degree. For every degree that the attached thermometer differs from the barometer, the observation will be inaccurate by about 0.003 inches, which is significant when discussing daily temperature ranges, etc.

Before being used, barometers should be thoroughly examined as to the state of the mercury, the size of cistern (so as to admit of low readings), and their agreement with some known standard instrument at different points of the scale. The pressure of the atmosphere is not expressed by the weight of the mercury sustained in the tube by it, but by the perpendicular height of the column. Thus, when the height of the column is 30 in., it is not said that the atmospheric pressure is 14.7 lb on the square inch, or the weight of the mercury filling a tube at that height whose transverse section equals a square inch, but that it is 30 in., meaning that the pressure will sustain a column of mercury of that height.

Before using barometers, they should be thoroughly checked for the condition of the mercury, the size of the cistern (to accommodate low readings), and their alignment with a known standard instrument at various points on the scale. The pressure of the atmosphere isn't indicated by the weight of the mercury supported in the tube, but by the vertical height of the column. Therefore, when the height of the column is 30 in., it's not stated that the atmospheric pressure is 14.7 lb on a square inch or that it's the weight of the mercury filling a tube at that height with a cross-section of one square inch. Instead, it's said to be 30 in., which means the pressure can uphold a column of mercury of that height.

It is essential in gasometry to fix upon some standard pressure to which all measurements can be reduced. The height of the standard mercury column commonly used is 76 cms. (29.922 in.) of pure mercury at 0°; this is near the average height of the barometer. Since the actual force exerted by the atmosphere varies with the intensity of gravity, and therefore with the position on the earth's surface, a place must be specified in defining the standard pressure. This may be avoided by expressing the force as the pressure in dynes due to a column of mercury, one square centimetre in section, which is supported by the atmosphere. If H cms. be the height at 0°, and g the value of gravity, the pressure is 13.596 Hg dynes (13.596 being the density of mercury). At Greenwich, where g = 981.17, the standard pressure at 0° is 1,013,800 dynes. At Paris the pressure is 1,013,600 dynes. The closeness of this unit to a mega-dyne (a million dynes) has led to the suggestion that a mega-dyne per square centimetre should be adopted as the standard pressure, and it has been adopted by some modern writers on account of its convenience of calculation and independence of locality.

In gasometry, it’s important to establish a standard pressure to which all measurements can be compared. The typical height for the standard mercury column is 76 cm (29.922 in) of pure mercury at 0°; this is close to the average height of the barometer. Since the actual force exerted by the atmosphere changes with gravity's strength, which varies depending on where you are on Earth, a specific location must be mentioned when defining standard pressure. This can be avoided by expressing the force as the pressure in dynes produced by a column of mercury that has a one square centimeter cross-section, which is supported by the atmosphere. If H cm is the height at 0°, and g is the value of gravity, the pressure is 13.596 Hg dynes (13.596 being the density of mercury). At Greenwich, where g = 981.17, the standard pressure at 0° is 1,013,800 dynes. In Paris, the pressure is 1,013,600 dynes. The similarity of this unit to a mega-dyne (one million dynes) has led to the proposal that a mega-dyne per square centimeter should be used as the standard pressure, and some modern authors have adopted this for its ease of calculation and its independence from location.

The height of the barometer is expressed in English inches Barometric readings. in England and America, but the metric system is used in all scientific work excepting in meteorology. In France and most European countries, the height is given in millimetres, a millimetre being the thousandth part of a metre, which equals 39.37079 English inches. Up to 1869 the barometer was given in half-lines in Russia, which, equalling the twentieth of an English inch, were readily reduced to English inches by dividing by 20. The metric barometric scale is now used in Russia. In a few European countries the French or Paris line, equalling 0.088814 in., is sometimes used. The English measure of length being a standard at 62° Fahr., the old French measure at 61.2°, and the metric scale at 32°, it is necessary, before comparing observations made with the three barometers, to reduce them to the same temperature, so as to neutralize the inequalities arising from the expansion of the scales by heat.

The height of the barometer is measured in English inches Barometer readings. in the UK and the US, but the metric system is used for all scientific work except in meteorology. In France and most European countries, the height is given in millimeters, with a millimeter being one-thousandth of a meter, which equals 39.37079 English inches. Until 1869, the barometer in Russia was measured in half-lines, which equal one-twentieth of an English inch and could be easily converted to English inches by dividing by 20. The metric barometric scale is now used in Russia. In a few European countries, the French or Paris line, equal to 0.088814 inches, is sometimes used. The English measure of length is standardized at 62° Fahrenheit, the old French measure at 61.2°, and the metric scale at 32°, so it's necessary to adjust observations made with the three barometers to the same temperature to eliminate the differences caused by the expansion of the scales from heat.

The sympiezometer was invented in 1818 by Adie of Edinburgh. Sympiezometer. It is a revived form of Hooke's marine barometer. It consists of a glass tube, with a small chamber at the top and an open cistern below. The upper part of the tube is filled with air, and the lower part and cistern with glycerin. When atmospheric pressure is increased, the air is compressed by the rising of the fluid; but when it is diminished the fluid falls, and the contained air expands. To correct for the error arising from the increased pressure of the contained air when its temperature varies, a thermometer and sliding-scale are added, so that the instrument may be adjusted to the temperature at each observation. It is a sensitive instrument, and well suited for rough purposes at sea and for travelling, but not for exact observation. It has long been superseded by the Aneroid, which far exceeds it in handiness.

The sympiezometer was invented in 1818 by Adie of Edinburgh. Sympiezometer. It is a modern version of Hooke's marine barometer. It consists of a glass tube with a small chamber at the top and an open cistern below. The upper part of the tube is filled with air, while the lower part and the cistern are filled with glycerin. When atmospheric pressure increases, the air gets compressed as the fluid rises; when it decreases, the fluid falls and the contained air expands. To account for the error caused by the increasing pressure of the air when its temperature changes, a thermometer and sliding scale are included, allowing the instrument to be adjusted to the temperature for each reading. It is a sensitive device, suitable for rough conditions at sea and for travel, but not for precise measurements. It has long been replaced by the Aneroid, which is much more convenient.

Fig. 4. Aneroid Barometer. Fig. 4.—Aneroid Barometer.

Aneroid Barometer.—Much obscurity surrounds the invention of barometers in which variations in pressure are rendered apparent by the alteration in the volume of an elastic chamber. The credit of the invention is usually given to Lucien Vidie, who patented his instrument in 1845, but similar instruments were in use much earlier. Thus in 1799 Nicolas Jacques Conté (1755-1805), director of the aerostatical school at Meudon, and a man of many parts—a chemist, mechanician and painter,—devised an instrument in which the lid of the metal chamber was supported by internal springs; this instrument was employed during the Egyptian campaign for measuring the altitudes of the war-balloons. Although Vidie patented his device in 1845, the commercial manufacture of aneroids only followed after E. Bourdon's patent of the metallic manometer in 1849, when Bourdon and Richard placed about 10,000 aneroids on the market. The production was stopped by an action taken by Vidie against Bourdon for infringing the former's patent, and in 1858 Vidie obtained 25,000 francs (£1000) damages.

Aneroid Barometer.—There's a lot of confusion about the invention of barometers that show pressure changes by altering the volume of an elastic chamber. The invention is usually credited to Lucien Vidie, who patented his device in 1845, but similar instruments had been used long before that. For instance, in 1799, Nicolas Jacques Conté (1755-1805), the head of the aerostatical school at Meudon and a versatile individual—a chemist, mechanic, and painter—created a device where the lid of the metal chamber was held up by internal springs; this instrument was used during the Egyptian campaign to measure the altitudes of war balloons. Even though Vidie applied for his patent in 1845, actual production of aneroids only began after E. Bourdon patented the metallic manometer in 1849, leading Bourdon and Richard to release around 10,000 aneroids into the market. This production was halted after Vidie took legal action against Bourdon for patent infringement, and in 1858, Vidie was awarded 25,000 francs (£1000) in damages.

Fig. 4 represents the internal construction, as seen when the face is removed, but with the hand still attached, of an aneroid which differs only slightly from Vidie's form. a is a flat circular metallic box, having its upper and under surfaces corrugated in concentric circles. This box or chamber being partially exhausted of air, through the short tube b, which is subsequently made air-tight by soldering, constitutes a spring, which is affected by every variation of pressure in the external atmosphere, the corrugations on its surface increasing its elasticity. At the centre of the upper surface of the exhausted chamber there is a solid cylindrical projection x, to the top of which the principal lever cde is attached. This lever rests partly on a spiral spring at d; it is also supported by two vertical pins, with perfect freedom of motion. The end e of the lever is attached to a second or small lever f, from which a chain g extends to h, where it works on a drum attached to the axis of the hand, connected with a hair spring at h, changing the motion from vertical to horizontal, and regulating the hand, the attachments of which are made to the metallic plate i. The motion originates in the corrugated elastic box a, the surface of which is depressed or elevated as the weight of the atmosphere is increased or diminished, and this motion is communicated through the levers to the axis of [v.03 p.0421]the hand at h. The spiral spring on which the lever rests at d is intended to compensate for the effects of alterations of temperature. The actual movement at the centre of the exhausted box, whence the indications emanate, is very slight, but by the action of the levers is multiplied 657 times at the point of the hand, so that a movement of the 220th part of an inch in the box carries the point of the hand through three inches on the dial. The effect of this combination is to multiply the smallest degrees of atmospheric pressure, so as to render them sensible on the index. Vidie's instrument has been improved by Vaudet and Hulot. Eugène Bourdon's aneroid depends on the same principle. The aneroid requires, however, to be repeatedly compared with a mercurial barometer, being liable to changes from the elasticity of the metal chamber changing, or from changes in the system of levers which work the pointer. Though aneroids are constructed showing great accuracy in their indications, yet none can lay any claim to the exactness of mercurial barometers. The mechanism is liable to get fouled and otherwise go out of order, so that they may change 0.300 in. in a few weeks, or even indicate pressure so inaccurately and so irregularly that no confidence can be placed in them for even a few days, if the means of comparing them with a mercurial barometer be not at hand.

Fig. 4 shows the internal structure of an aneroid barometer with the face removed, but the hand still attached. It’s only slightly different from Vidie's design. a is a flat circular metal box with its top and bottom surfaces ridged in concentric circles. This box or chamber is partially evacuated of air through the short tube b, which is later sealed with solder, creating a spring that reacts to every change in external atmospheric pressure; the ridges on its surface increase its flexibility. At the center of the upper surface of the evacuated chamber is a solid cylindrical protrusion x, to which the main lever cde is attached. This lever rests partly on a spiral spring at d and is also supported by two vertical pins, allowing for free movement. The end e of the lever connects to a second, smaller lever f, from which a chain g extends to h, where it operates a drum connected to the axis of the hand, linked to a hair spring at h. This setup changes the motion from vertical to horizontal and regulates the hand, which is attached to the metal plate i. The motion starts in the flexible, ridged box a, whose surface is pushed down or lifted as the weight of the atmosphere changes, and this motion is transferred through the levers to the axis of [v.03 p.0421]the hand at h. The spiral spring under the lever at d is meant to counteract the effects of temperature changes. The actual movement at the center of the evacuated box, where the readings come from, is very small, but through the levers, is multiplied 657 times at the hand’s point, meaning that a movement of 0.001 inch in the box shifts the hand by three inches on the dial. This combination magnifies the smallest variations in atmospheric pressure so they are reflected on the index. Vidie's instrument has been enhanced by Vaudet and Hulot. Eugène Bourdon’s aneroid operates on the same principle. However, the aneroid needs to be regularly compared with a mercury barometer since it can be affected by changes in the metal chamber's elasticity or shifts in the lever system that moves the pointer. While aneroids can be made to show good accuracy, none match the precision of mercury barometers. The mechanism can get dirty and malfunction, leading to inaccuracies of 0.300 inches in just a few weeks, or cause the readings to be so unreliable and erratic that you can't trust them for even a few days without a way to compare them to a mercury barometer.

The mercurial barometer can be made self-registering by concentrating Barographs. the rays from a source of light by a lens, so that they strike the top of the mercurial column, and having a sheet of sensitized paper attached to a frame and placed behind a screen, with a narrow vertical slit in the line of the rays. The mercury being opaque throws a part of the paper in the shade, while above the mercury the rays from the lamp pass unobstructed to the paper. The paper being carried steadily round on a drum at a given rate per hour, the height of the column of mercury is photographed continuously on the paper. From the photograph the height of the barometer at any instant may be taken. The principle of the aneroid barometer has been applied to the construction of barographs. The lever attached to the collapsible chamber terminates in an ink-fed style which records the pressure of the atmosphere on a moving ribbon. In all continuously registering barometers, however, it is necessary, as a check, to make eye-observations with a mercury standard barometer hanging near the registering barometer from four to eight times daily.

The mercury barometer can be made self-recording by focusing the rays from a light source with a lens, so they hit the top of the mercury column while having a piece of sensitized paper attached to a frame and placed behind a screen with a narrow vertical slit aligned with the rays. The opaque mercury casts a shadow on part of the paper, while above the mercury, the rays from the lamp reach the paper without obstruction. As the paper rotates steadily on a drum at a specific rate per hour, the height of the mercury column is continuously recorded on the paper. From this recording, the barometer's height can be determined at any moment. The concept of the aneroid barometer has been used in creating barographs. The lever connected to the collapsible chamber ends in an ink-fed stylus that records atmospheric pressure on a moving ribbon. However, in all continuously recording barometers, it is important to do visual checks with a mercury standard barometer located near the recording barometer four to eight times a day.

See Marvin, Barometers and the Measurement of Atmospheric Pressure (1901); and C. Abbe, Meteorological Apparatus (1888). Reference may also be made to B. Stewart and W. W. H. Gee, Practical Physics (vol. i. 1901), for the construction of standard barometers, their corrections and method of reading.

See Marvin, Barometers and the Measurement of Atmospheric Pressure (1901); and C. Abbe, Meteorological Apparatus (1888). You can also check out B. Stewart and W. W. H. Gee, Practical Physics (vol. i. 1901) for how to construct standard barometers, their corrections, and how to read them.

BAROMETRIC LIGHT, the luminous glow emitted by mercury in a barometer tube when shaken. It was first observed by Jean Picard, and formed the subject of many experiments at the hands of Francis Hawksbee. The latter showed that the Torricellian vacuum was not essential to the phenomenon, for the same glow was apparent when mercury was shaken with air only partially rarefied. The glow is an effect of the electricity generated by the friction of the mercury and the air in the barometer tube.

BAROMETRIC LIGHT, the bright glow produced by mercury in a barometer tube when it’s shaken. It was first noticed by Jean Picard and was the focus of various experiments conducted by Francis Hawksbee. He demonstrated that the Torricellian vacuum wasn’t necessary for the phenomenon, as the same glow appeared when mercury was shaken with air that was only partially removed. The glow is a result of the electricity created by the friction between the mercury and the air in the barometer tube.

BARON, MICHEL (1653-1729), French actor (whose family name originally was Boyron), was born in Paris, the son of a leading actor (d. 1655) and of a talented actress (d. 1662). At the age of twelve he joined the company of children known as the Petits Comédiens Dauphins, of which he was the brightest star. Molière was delighted with his talent, and with the king's permission secured him for his own company. In consequence of a misunderstanding with Molière's wife, the actor withdrew from the dramatist's company, but rejoined it in 1670, reappearing as Domitien in Corneille's Tite et Bérénice, and in his Psyche. He remained in this company until Molière's death. He then became a member of the company at the Hôtel de Bourgogne, and from this time until his retirement in 1691 was undisputed master of the French stage, creating many of the leading rôles in Racine's tragedies, besides those in two of his own comedies, L'Homme à bonnes fortunes (1686), and La Coquette (1687). He also wrote Les Enlèvements (1685), Le Débauché (1689), and translated and acted two plays of Terence. In 1720 Baron reappeared at the Palais Royal, and his activity on the stage was renewed in a multitude of parts. He died on the 22nd of December 1729.

BARON, MICHEL (1653-1729), a French actor (originally named Boyron), was born in Paris, the son of a prominent actor (d. 1655) and a talented actress (d. 1662). At twelve, he joined the group of child performers known as the Petits Comédiens Dauphins, where he became the standout star. Molière was impressed with his talent and, with the king's approval, brought him into his own company. After a disagreement with Molière's wife, he left the company but returned in 1670, making his comeback as Domitien in Corneille's Tite et Bérénice and in his Psyche. He stayed with this company until Molière's death. He then became part of the company at the Hôtel de Bourgogne, where he dominated the French stage until his retirement in 1691, creating many leading roles in Racine's tragedies, as well as in two of his own comedies, L'Homme à bonnes fortunes (1686) and La Coquette (1687). He also wrote Les Enlèvements (1685) and Le Débauché (1689), and translated and performed two of Terence's plays. In 1720, Baron returned to the Palais Royal, resuming his activity on stage in numerous roles. He died on December 22, 1729.

His son Étienne Michel Baron (1676-1711) was also a fine actor, and left a son and two daughters who all played at the Comédie Française.

His son Étienne Michel Baron (1676-1711) was also a great actor and had a son and two daughters who all performed at the Comédie Française.

See George Monval, Un Comédien amateur d'art (1893); also the Abbé d'Allamial's Lettres à mylord XXX. sur Baron et la demoiselle Lecouvreur, in F. G. J. S. Andrieux's Collection des mémoires sur l'art dramatique (1822).

See George Monval, Un Comédien amateur d'art (1893); also the Abbé d'Allamial's Lettres à mylord XXX. sur Baron et la demoiselle Lecouvreur, in F. G. J. S. Andrieux's Collection des mémoires sur l'art dramatique (1822).

BARON. This word, of uncertain origin, was introduced into England at the Conquest to denote "the man" (i.e. one who had done him "homage") of a great lord, and more especially of the king. All who held "in chief" (i.e. directly) of the king were alike barones regis, bound to perform a stipulated service, and members, in theory at least, of his council. Great nobles, whether earls or not, also spoke of their tenants as "barons," where lesser magnates spoke of their "men" (homines). This was especially the case in earldoms of a palatine character, such as Chester, where the earl's barons were a well-recognized body, the Venables family, "barons of Kinderton," continuing in existence down to 1679. In the palatinate of Durham also, the bishop had his barons, among whom the Hiltons of Hilton Castle were usually styled "Barons of Hilton" till extinct in 1746. Other families to whom the title was accorded, independently of peerage dignity and on somewhat uncertain grounds, were "the barons of Greystock," "the barons of Stafford," and the Cornwalls, "barons of Burford." Fantosme makes Henry II. speak of "mes baruns de Lundres"; John's charter granting permission to elect a mayor speaks of "our barons of our city of London," and a London document even speaks of "the greater barons of the city." The aldermen seem to have been loosely deemed equivalent to barons and were actually assessed to the poll-tax as such under Richard II. In Ireland the palatine character of the great lordships made the title not uncommon (e.g. the barons of Galtrim, the barons of Slane, the barons of the Naas).

BARON. This word, whose origin is unclear, was brought into England during the Conquest to refer to "the man" (i.e. someone who had done "homage" to) a prominent lord, especially the king. Everyone who held land "in chief" (i.e. directly) from the king was considered barones regis, obligated to provide a specified service, and theoretically a member of his council. High-ranking nobles, whether earls or not, also referred to their tenants as "barons," while lesser nobles called them "men" (homines). This was especially true in earldoms that had palatine authority, like Chester, where the earl's barons formed a recognized group, with the Venables family, "barons of Kinderton," existing until 1679. In the palatinate of Durham, the bishop also had his barons, among whom the Hiltons of Hilton Castle were often referred to as "Barons of Hilton" until their extinction in 1746. Other families that were granted the title, independent of nobility status and on somewhat unclear grounds, included "the barons of Greystock," "the barons of Stafford," and the Cornwalls, "barons of Burford." Fantosme has Henry II. referring to "mes baruns de Lundres"; John's charter allowing the election of a mayor mentions "our barons of our city of London," and a document from London even refers to "the greater barons of the city." The aldermen seem to have been loosely regarded as equivalent to barons and were actually taxed as such under Richard II. In Ireland, the palatine nature of the large lordships made the title fairly common (e.g. the barons of Galtrim, the barons of Slane, the barons of the Naas).

As all those who held direct of the crown by military service (for those who held "by serjeanty" appear to have been classed apart), from earls downwards, were alike "barons," the great difference in their position and importance must have led, from an early date, to their being roughly divided into "greater" and "lesser" barons, and indeed, under Henry II., the Dialogus de Scaccario already distinguishes their holdings as "greater" or "lesser" baronies. Within a century of the Conquest, as we learn from Becket's case (1164), there arose the practice of sending to the greater barons a special summons to the council, while the lesser barons, it is stipulated in Magna Carta (1215), were to be summoned only through the sheriffs. Thus was introduced a definite distinction, which eventually had the effect of restricting to the greater barons the rights and privileges of peerage.

As all those who held direct lands from the crown through military service (since those who held "by serjeanty" seemed to have been categorized separately), from earls down to lower ranks, were also considered "barons," the significant differences in their positions and importance must have led to a rough division from an early time into "greater" and "lesser" barons. In fact, under Henry II, the Dialogus de Scaccario already differentiates their holdings as "greater" or "lesser" baronies. Within a century of the Conquest, as we learn from Becket's case (1164), a practice emerged of sending a special summons to the greater barons for council meetings, while the lesser barons, as stipulated in Magna Carta (1215), were to be summoned only through the sheriffs. This established a clear distinction that eventually limited the rights and privileges of peerage to the greater barons.

Thus far the baron's position was connected with the tenure of land; in theory the barons were those who held their lands of the king; in practice, they were those who so held a large amount of land. The great change in their status was effected when their presence in that council of the realm which became the House of Lords was determined by the issue of a writ of summons, dependent not on the tenure of land, but only on the king's will. Camden's statement that this change was made by Henry III. after "the Barons' War" was long and widely accepted, but it is now assigned, as by Stubbs, to Edward I., and the earliest writs accepted as creating hereditary baronies are those issued in his reign. It must not, however, be supposed that those who received such summons were as yet distinguished from commoners by any style or title. The only possible prefix at that time was Dominus (lord), which was regularly used by simple knights, and writs of summons were still issued to the lowest order of peers as knights (chevaliers) only. The style of baron was first introduced by Richard II. in 1387, when he created John de Beauchamp, by patent, Lord de Beauchamp and baron of Kidderminster, to make him "unum parium et baronum regni nostri." But it was not till 1433 that the next "baron" was created, Sir John Cornwall being then made baron of Fanhope. In spite, however, of these innovations, the former [v.03 p.0422]was only summoned to parliament by the style of "John Beauchamp of Kidderminster," and the latter by that of "John Cornwall, knight." Such creations became common under Henry VI., a transition period in peerage styles, but "Baron" could not evict "Sire," "Chevalier" and "Dominus." Patents of creation contained the formula "Lord A. (and) Baron of B.," but the grantee still styled himself "Lord" only, and it is an historically interesting fact that to this day a baron is addressed in correspondence, not by that style, but as "the Lord A.," although all peers under the rank of Duke are spoken of as "lords," while they are addressed in correspondence by their proper styles. To speak of "Baron A." or "Baron B." is an unhistorical and quite recent practice. When a barony, however, is vested in a lady it is now the recognized custom to speak of her as baroness, e.g. Baroness Berkeley.

So far, the baron’s role was tied to land ownership; in theory, barons were those who held their lands from the king; in practice, they were the ones holding large amounts of land. The major change in their status occurred when their participation in the council of the realm, which became the House of Lords, was determined by a writ of summons based not on land ownership but solely on the king's will. Camden’s claim that this change was made by Henry III after "the Barons' War" was long accepted, but it’s now credited, as Stubbs suggests, to Edward I, with the earliest writs recognized as creating hereditary baronies issued during his reign. However, it shouldn’t be assumed that those receiving such summons were distinguished from commoners by any title or style. The only possible prefix at that time was Dominus (lord), which was commonly used by simple knights, and writs of summons were still issued to the lowest rank of peers as knights (chevaliers) only. The title of baron was first introduced by Richard II in 1387 when he created John de Beauchamp, by patent, Lord de Beauchamp and baron of Kidderminster, to make him "unum parium et baronum regni nostri." However, it wasn’t until 1433 that the next "baron" was created, with Sir John Cornwall becoming the baron of Fanhope. Despite these changes, the former was summoned to parliament by the style of "John Beauchamp of Kidderminster," and the latter as "John Cornwall, knight." Such titles became common under Henry VI, marking a transitional period in peerage styles, but "Baron" couldn’t replace "Sire," "Chevalier," and "Dominus." Creation patents included the phrase "Lord A. (and) Baron of B.," but the grantee still referred to himself simply as "Lord," and it’s historically interesting that to this day, a baron is addressed in correspondence not by that title but as "the Lord A.," even though all peers below the rank of Duke are referred to as "lords," while they are addressed in correspondence by their proper titles. Referring to "Baron A." or "Baron B." is an unhistorical and quite recent practice. When a barony is held by a woman, it is now customary to refer to her as baroness, e.g. Baroness Berkeley.

The solemn investiture of barons created by patent was performed by the king himself, by enrobing the peer in the scarlet "robe of estate" during the reading of the patent, and this form continued till 13 Jac. I., when the lawyers declared that the delivery of the letters patent without ceremony was sufficient. The letters patent express the limits of inheritance of the barony. The usual limit is to the grantee and heirs male of his body, occasionally, in default of male issue, to a collateral male relative (as in the case of Lord Brougham, 1860) or (as in the case of Lord Basset, 1797, and Lord Burton, 1897) to the heirs-male of a daughter, and occasionally (as in the case of Lord Nelson, 1801) to the heirs-male of a sister. Sometimes also (as in the case of the barony of Rayleigh, 1821) the dignity is bestowed upon a lady with remainder to the heirs-male of her body. The coronation robes of a baron are the same as those of an earl, except that he has only two rows of spots on each shoulder; and, in like manner, his parliamentary robes have but two guards of white fur, with rows of gold lace; but in other respects they are the same as those of other peers. King Charles II. granted to the barons a coronet, having six large pearls set at equal distances on the chaplet. A baron's cap is the same as a viscount's. His style is "Right Honourable"; and he is addressed by the king or queen, "Right Trusty and Well-beloved." His children are by courtesy entitled to the prefix "The Honourable."

The formal ceremony for appointing barons created by patent was conducted by the king himself, who would dress the peer in the scarlet "robe of estate" while reading the patent. This tradition continued until 13 Jac. I., when legal experts declared that simply delivering the letters patent without any ceremony was sufficient. The letters patent specify the limits of inheritance for the barony. Typically, it passes to the grantee and the male heirs of his body. Occasionally, if there are no male heirs, it goes to a collateral male relative (as in the case of Lord Brougham, 1860) or, in instances like Lord Basset (1797) and Lord Burton (1897), to the male heirs of a daughter, and sometimes (like in Lord Nelson's case, 1801) to the male heirs of a sister. Sometimes, as seen with the barony of Rayleigh (1821), the title can be awarded to a woman with male heirs of her body having a claim afterward. The coronation robes of a baron are the same as those of an earl, except he has only two rows of spots on each shoulder. Similarly, his parliamentary robes feature only two bands of white fur with rows of gold lace, but are otherwise identical to those of other peers. King Charles II. granted barons a coronet adorned with six large pearls set evenly around the band. A baron's cap is the same as a viscount's. His title is "Right Honourable," and he is addressed by the king or queen as "Right Trusty and Well-beloved." His children are courtesy titled "The Honourable."

Barons of the Exchequer were formerly six judges (a chief baron and five puisne barons) to whom the administration of justice was committed in causes betwixt the king and his subjects relative to matters of revenue. Selden, in his Titles of Honour, conjectures that they were originally chosen from among the barons of the kingdom, and hence their name; but it would probably be more exact to say that they were officers of a branch of the king's Curia, which was theoretically composed of his "barons." The title has become obsolete since 1875, when the court of exchequer was merged in the High Court of Judicature.

Barons of the Exchequer were once six judges (one chief baron and five regular barons) responsible for administering justice in cases between the king and his subjects related to revenue matters. Selden, in his Titles of Honour, suggests that they were originally selected from among the barons of the kingdom, which is where their name comes from; however, it might be more accurate to say that they were officers of a part of the king's Curia, which was theoretically made up of his "barons." The title has become outdated since 1875, when the court of exchequer was merged into the High Court of Judicature.

Barons of the Cinque Ports (originally Hastings, Dover, Hythe, Romney and Sandwich) were at first the whole body of their freemen, who were so spoken of in royal charters. But the style was afterwards restricted to their mayors, jurats, and (prior to 1831) members of the House of Commons elected by the Cinque Ports, two for each port. Their right to the title is recognized in many old statutes, but in 1606 the use of the term in a message from the Lower House drew forth a protest from the peers, that "they would never acknowledge any man that sitteth in the Lower House to the right or title of a baron of parliament" (Lords' Journals). It was the ancient privilege of these "barons" to bear a canopy over the sovereign at his or her coronation and retain it as their perquisite. They petitioned as "barons of the Cinque Ports" to attend the coronation of Edward VII., and a deputation was allowed to do so.

Barons of the Cinque Ports (originally Hastings, Dover, Hythe, Romney, and Sandwich) were initially the entire group of their freemen, who were referred to in royal charters. However, the title was later narrowed down to their mayors, jurats, and (before 1831) the members of the House of Commons elected by the Cinque Ports, with two representatives for each port. Their entitlement to the title is acknowledged in many old statutes, but in 1606, the mention of the term in a message from the Lower House prompted a reaction from the peers, stating that "they would never recognize any man sitting in the Lower House as holding the right or title of a baron of parliament" (Lords' Journals). It was the historic privilege of these "barons" to carry a canopy over the sovereign during his or her coronation and to keep it as their own benefit. They requested to attend the coronation of Edward VII. as "barons of the Cinque Ports," and a delegation was permitted to do so.

Baron and Feme, in English law, is a phrase used for husband and wife, in relation to each other, who are accounted as one person. Hence, by the old law of evidence, the one party was excluded from giving evidence for or against the other in civil questions, and a relic of this is still preserved in the criminal law.

Baron and Feme, in English law, refers to husband and wife in relation to each other, who are considered as one person. As a result, under the old law of evidence, one party was not allowed to provide evidence for or against the other in civil matters, and a remnant of this rule is still present in criminal law.

Baron and Feme, in heraldry, is the term used when the coats-of-arms of a man and his wife are borne per pale in the same escutcheon, the man's being always on the dexter side, and the woman's on the sinister. But in this case the woman is supposed not to be an heiress, for then her coat must be borne by the husband on an escutcheon of pretence. (See Heraldry.)

Baron and Feme, in heraldry, refers to the situation where the coats-of-arms of a man and his wife are displayed side by side on the same shield, with the man's coat always on the right side and the woman's on the left. However, this applies only if the woman is not an heiress; if she is, her coat must be shown by the husband on a separate shield of pretence. (See Coat of arms.)

The foreign title of baron is occasionally borne by English subjects, but confers no precedence in the United Kingdom. It may be Russian, e.g. Baron Dimsdale (1762); German, e.g. Baron Stockmar, Baron Halkett (Hanoverian); Austrian, e.g. Baron Rothschild (1822), Baron de Worms; Italian, e.g. Baron Heath; French, e.g. Baron de Teissier; French-Canadian, e.g. Baron de Longueil (1700); Dutch, e.g. Baron Mackay (Lord Reay).

The foreign title of baron is sometimes held by English citizens, but it doesn’t grant any special status in the United Kingdom. It can be Russian, e.g. Baron Dimsdale (1762); German, e.g. Baron Stockmar, Baron Halkett (Hanoverian); Austrian, e.g. Baron Rothschild (1822), Baron de Worms; Italian, e.g. Baron Heath; French, e.g. Baron de Teissier; French-Canadian, e.g. Baron de Longueil (1700); Dutch, e.g. Baron Mackay (Lord Reay).

(J. H. R.)

(J. H. R.)

The Foreign Title.—On the continent of Europe the title baron, though the same in its origin, has come, owing to a variety of causes, to imply a rank and status very different from its connotation in the United Kingdom, and again varies considerably in different countries. Originally baro meant no more than "man," and is so used in the Salic and other "barbarian" laws; e.g. Si quis mortaudit barum vel feminam, &c. (Lex Aleman. tit. 76). In this way, too, it was long preserved in the sense of "husband," as in the Assize of Jerusalem (MSS. cap. 98): Si l'on appelle aucune chose femme qui aura baron, et il la veut deffendre, il la peut deffendre de son cors, &c. Gradually the word seems to have come to mean a "strong or powerful man," and thus generally "a magnate." Finally, in France in the 12th century the general expression barones was introduced in a restricted sense, as applied properly to all lords possessing an important fief, subject to the rule of primogeniture and thus not liable to be divided up, and held of one overlord alone. Sometimes it included ecclesiastical lordships of the first rank. In the 13th century the Register of King Philip Augustus places the barones regis Francie next to the dukes and counts holding in chief, the title being limited to vassals of the second rank. Towards the end of the century the title had come to mean that its bearer held his principal fief direct from the crown, and was therefore more important than that of count, since many counts were only mediate vassals. Thus the kings in granting a duchy or countship as an apanage to their brothers or sons used the phrase in comitatum et baroniam. From this period, however, the title tends to sink in comparative importance. When, in the 14th century, the feudal hierarchy was completed and stereotyped, the barons are ranked not only below counts, but below viscounts, though in power and possessions many barons were superior to many counts. In any case, until the 17th century, the title of baron could only be borne by the holder of a territorial barony; and it was Louis XIV. who first cheapened the title in France by creating numerous barons by royal letters. This entire dissociation of the title from the idea of feudal rights and obligations was completed by Napoleon's decree of March 1, 1808, reviving the ancient titles. By this instrument the title of baron was to be borne ex officio by a number of high officials, e.g. ministers, senators, councillors of state, archbishops and bishops. It was given to the 37 mayors who attended the coronation, and could be claimed by any mayor who had served to the emperor's satisfaction for ten years, and by any member of an electoral college who had attended three sessions. The title was made to descend in order of primogeniture to legitimate or adopted sons and to the nephews of bishops, the sole condition being that proof must be presented of an actual income of 15,000 fr., of which one-third should descend with the title. The creation of barons was continued by Louis XVIII., Charles X. and Louis Philippe, and, suspended at the revolution of 1848, was revived again on a generous scale by Napoleon III. The tolerant attitude of the Third Republic towards titles, which it does not officially recognize, has increased the confusion by facilitating the assumption of the title on very slender grounds of right. The result has been that in France the title of Baron, unless borne by the recognized representative of a historic name, not only involves no political status, but confers also but very slight social distinction.

The Foreign Title.—In Europe, the title of baron, although its origin is the same, has come to signify a rank and status that are quite different from its meaning in the United Kingdom, and it varies significantly across different countries. Originally, baro meant nothing more than "man," as used in the Salic and other "barbarian" laws; e.g. Si quis mortaudit barum vel feminam, &c. (Lex Aleman. tit. 76). It was also long used to mean "husband," as seen in the Assize of Jerusalem (MSS. cap. 98): Si l'on appelle aucune chose femme qui aura baron, et il la veut deffendre, il la peut deffendre de son cors, &c. Over time, the word appears to have evolved to mean a "strong or powerful man," and generally "a magnate." Finally, in France during the 12th century, the term barones was introduced in a more specific sense, referring to lords who held a significant fief, subject to the rule of primogeniture, and thus not subject to subdivision, holding it from only one overlord. Sometimes this included top-tier ecclesiastical lordships. By the 13th century, the Register of King Philip Augustus placed the barones regis Francie alongside the dukes and counts who held directly from the crown, suggesting that the title was limited to vassals of a lower rank. By the end of the century, the title implied that its holder had a principal fief that was held directly from the crown, making it more significant than that of count, as many counts were only middle-level vassals. Thus, when kings granted a dukedom or countship as an apanage to their brothers or sons, they used the phrase in comitatum et baroniam. However, from this period onward, the title gradually lost its relative importance. In the 14th century, as the feudal hierarchy was solidified, barons were ranked below counts and even viscounts, even though many barons had more power and possessions than several counts. Until the 17th century, the title of baron could only be held by someone who owned a territorial barony; it was Louis XIV. who first devalued the title in France by creating numerous barons through royal letters. This entire detachment of the title from feudal rights and obligations was finalized by Napoleon's decree of March 1, 1808, which revived ancient titles. According to this, the title of baron was to be held ex officio by various high officials, e.g. ministers, senators, state councillors, archbishops, and bishops. It was also granted to the 37 mayors who attended the coronation and could be claimed by any mayor who served the emperor satisfactorily for ten years, as well as by any electoral college member who attended three sessions. The title was set to descend by primogeniture to legitimate or adopted sons and to bishop nephews, with the only requirement being proof of an actual income of 15,000 fr., of which one-third should accompany the title. The creation of barons continued under Louis XVIII., Charles X., and Louis Philippe, was suspended during the 1848 revolution, and was generously revived by Napoleon III. The Third Republic's lenient stance toward titles, which it does not officially recognize, has added to the confusion by making it easier to assume the title with little justification. This has resulted in the title of Baron in France, unless held by the recognized representative of a historical name, providing no political status and only minimal social distinction.

The same is true, mutatis mutandis, of most other European countries, and notably of Italy. In Austria and Germany the [v.03 p.0423]case is somewhat different. Though in Latin documents of the middle ages the term barones for liberi domini was used, it was not until the 17th century that the word Baron, perhaps under the influence of the court of Versailles, began to be used as the equivalent of the old German Freiherr, or free lord of the Empire. The style Freiherr (liber dominus) implied originally a dynastic status, and many Freiherren held countships without taking the title of count. When the more important of them styled themselves counts, the Freiherren sank into an inferior class of nobility. The practice of conferring the title Freiherr by imperial letters was begun in the 16th century by Charles V., was assumed on the ground of special imperial concessions by many of the princes of the Empire, and is now exercised by all the German sovereigns. Though the practice of all the children taking the title of their father has tended to make that of Baron comparatively very common, and has dissociated it from all idea of territorial possession, it still implies considerable social status and privilege in countries where a sharp line is drawn between the caste of "nobles" and the common herd, whom no wealth or intellectual eminence can place on the same social level with the poorest Adeliger. In Japan the title baron (Dan) is the lowest of the five titles of nobility introduced in 1885, on the European model. It was given to the least important class of territorial nobles, but is also bestowed as a title of honour without reference to territorial possession.

The same applies, mutatis mutandis, to most other European countries, especially Italy. In Austria and Germany, the situation is a bit different. While the term barones for liberi domini appeared in Latin documents from the Middle Ages, it wasn't until the 17th century that the word Baron, possibly influenced by the court of Versailles, started being used as the equivalent of the old German Freiherr, or free lord of the Empire. The title Freiherr (liber dominus) originally suggested a dynastic status, and many Freiherren held countships without actually taking the title of count. As the more prominent among them began to call themselves counts, the Freiherren became part of a lower class of nobility. The practice of conferring the title Freiherr through imperial letters began in the 16th century with Charles V., and many princes of the Empire claimed it based on special imperial concessions; this practice is now upheld by all German sovereigns. Although the tradition of all children adopting their father's title has made the title of Baron relatively common and disconnected from ideas of land ownership, it still carries significant social status and privilege in countries where a sharp distinction is made between the "nobility" and the common people, whom no amount of wealth or intellectual achievement can place on the same social level as the least Adeliger. In Japan, the title of baron (Dan) is the lowest of the five noble titles introduced in 1885, following the European model. It was assigned to the least significant class of territorial nobles but is also awarded as a title of honor without any connection to land ownership.

See du Cange, Glossarium, s. "Baro" (ed. Niort, 1883); John Selden, Titles of Honor, p. 353 (ed. 1672); Achille Luchaire, Manuel des institutions françaises (Paris, 1892); Maurice Prou, art. "Baron" in La Grande Encyclopédie.

See du Cange, Glossarium, s. "Baro" (ed. Niort, 1883); John Selden, Titles of Honor, p. 353 (ed. 1672); Achille Luchaire, Manuel des institutions françaises (Paris, 1892); Maurice Prou, art. "Baron" in La Grande Encyclopédie.

(W. A. P.)

(W. A. P.)

BARONET. Although the origin of this title has been the subject of learned speculation, it is not known for certain why it was selected as that of "a new Dignitie between Barons and Knights" created by James I. The object of its institution was to raise money for the crown, as was also done by the sale of peerage dignities under this sovereign. But the money was professedly devoted to the support of troops in Ulster, that is, each grantee was to be liable for the pay of thirty men, at 8d. a day for three years. This amounted to £1095, which was the sum paid for the honour. When it was instituted, in May 1611, the king, to keep the baronetage select, covenanted that he would not create more than two hundred, and that only those who had £1000 a year in landed estate and whose paternal grandfathers had borne arms should receive the honour. But these qualifications were before long abandoned. As an inducement to apply for it, it was made to confer the prefix of "Sir" and "Lady" (or "Dame"), and was assigned precedence above knights, though below the younger sons of barons. Eight years later (30th of September 1619), the baronetage of Ireland was instituted, the king pledging himself not to create more than a hundred baronets. Meanwhile, questions had arisen as to the exact precedence of the baronets, and James by royal decree (28th of May 1612) had announced that it was his intention to rank them below the younger sons of barons. As this had the effect of stopping applications for the honour, James issued a fresh commission (18th of November 1614) to encourage them, and finally, as "the Kinges wants might be much relieved out of the vanities and ambition of the gentrie" (in Chamberlain's words), he granted, in 1616, the further privilege that the heirs apparent of baronets should be knighted on coming of age.

BARONET. While the origin of this title has been widely debated, it’s still unclear why it was chosen as "a new dignity between Barons and Knights" created by James I. The primary goal of its creation was to generate funds for the crown, similar to how peerage titles were sold under this monarch. However, the money was supposedly earmarked for supporting troops in Ulster, meaning each recipient was responsible for paying thirty men at 8 pence a day for three years. This totaled £1,095, which was the price paid for the honor. When it was established in May 1611, the king aimed to keep the baronetage exclusive by agreeing not to create more than two hundred baronets, and only granting the title to those with an income of £1,000 a year from land and whose grandfathers had served in the military. But these requirements were soon disregarded. To encourage applications, the title was made to bestow the prefix "Sir" and "Lady" (or "Dame") and was granted precedence over knights, although still below the younger sons of barons. Eight years later, on September 30, 1619, the baronetage of Ireland was established, with the king promising not to create more than one hundred baronets. Meanwhile, questions arose regarding the exact ranking of baronets, and James announced by royal decree on May 28, 1612, that he intended to rank them below the younger sons of barons. This decision led to a decline in applications for the honor, prompting James to issue a new commission on November 18, 1614, to stimulate interest. Eventually, recognizing that "the King’s needs might be much relieved out of the vanities and ambition of the gentry" (in Chamberlain's words), he granted in 1616 the additional privilege that the heirs apparent of baronets would be knighted upon reaching adulthood.

The baronetage of Nova Scotia was devised in 1624 as a means of promoting the "plantation" of that province, and James announced his intention of creating a hundred baronets, each of whom was to support six colonists for two years (or pay 2000 marks in lieu thereof) and also to pay 1000 marks to Sir William Alexander (afterwards earl of Stirling), to whom the province had been granted by charter in 1621. For this he was to receive a "free barony" of 16,000 acres in Nova Scotia, and to become a baronet of "his Hienes Kingdom of Scotland." James dying at this point, Charles I. carried out the scheme, creating the first Scottish baronet on the 28th of May 1625, covenanting in the creation charter that the baronets "of Scotland or of Nova Scotia" should never exceed a hundred and fifty in number, that their heirs apparent should be knighted on coming of age, and that no one should receive the honour who had not fulfilled the conditions, viz. paid 3000 marks (£166, 13s. 4d.) towards the plantation of the colony. Four years later (17th of November 1629) the king wrote to "the contractors for baronets," recognizing that they had advanced large sums to Sir William Alexander for the plantation on the security of the payments to be made by future baronets, and empowering them to offer a further inducement to applicants; and on the same day he granted to all Nova Scotia baronets the right to wear about their necks, suspended by an orange tawny ribbon, a badge bearing an azure saltire with a crowned inescutcheon of the arms of Scotland and the motto "Fax mentis honestae gloria." As the required number, however, could not be completed, Charles announced in 1633 that English and Irish gentlemen might receive the honour, and in 1634 they began to do so. Yet even so, he was only able to create a few more than a hundred and twenty in all. In 1638 the creation ceased to carry with it the grant of lands in Nova Scotia, and on the union with England (1707) the Scottish creations ceased, English and Scotsmen alike receiving thenceforth baronetcies of Great Britain.

The baronetage of Nova Scotia was established in 1624 to encourage the settlement of that province, and James announced his plan to create a hundred baronets. Each baronet was required to support six colonists for two years (or pay 2000 marks instead) and also to pay 1000 marks to Sir William Alexander (who later became the Earl of Stirling), to whom the province had been granted by charter in 1621. In return, they would receive a "free barony" of 16,000 acres in Nova Scotia and become a baronet of "his Hignes Kingdom of Scotland." After James's death, Charles I. continued the plan, creating the first Scottish baronet on May 28, 1625, agreeing in the creation charter that the baronets "of Scotland or of Nova Scotia" would never exceed one hundred and fifty in number. Their heirs apparent would be knighted upon reaching adulthood, and no one would receive the honor without meeting the conditions, namely paying 3000 marks (£166, 13s. 4d.) toward the colony's settlement. Four years later, on November 17, 1629, the king wrote to "the contractors for baronets," acknowledging their significant financial contributions to Sir William Alexander for the settlement and allowing them to offer additional incentives to applicants. On the same day, he granted all Nova Scotia baronets the right to wear a badge around their necks, hung from an orange tawny ribbon, featuring an azure saltire with a crowned inescutcheon of the arms of Scotland and the motto "Fax mentis honestae gloria." However, since the required number could not be reached, Charles declared in 1633 that English and Irish gentlemen could also receive the honor, and in 1634 they began to do so. Even then, he was only able to create slightly more than one hundred and twenty in total. By 1638, the creation no longer included the grant of lands in Nova Scotia, and after the union with England in 1707, Scottish creations ceased, with both English and Scotsmen receiving baronetcies of Great Britain from then on.

It is a matter of dispute whether James I. had kept faith with the baronets of England as to limiting their number; but his son soon rejected the restriction freely. Creations became one of his devices for raising money; blank patents were hawked about, and in 1641 Nicholas wrote that baronetcies were to be had for £400 or even for £350; a patent was offered about this time to Mr Wrottesley of Wrottesley for £300. On the other hand, the honour appears to have been bestowed for nothing on some ardent royalists when the great struggle began.

It’s debated whether James I kept his promise to limit the number of baronets in England, but his son quickly disregarded that limit. Creating new baronets became one of his ways to raise money; blank patents were being sold, and in 1641, Nicholas noted that baronetcies were available for £400 or even £350; a patent was offered around this time to Mr. Wrottesley of Wrottesley for £300. Conversely, the honor seems to have been granted for free to some enthusiastic royalists when the major conflict started.

Cromwell created a few baronets, but at the Restoration the honour was bestowed so lavishly that a letter to Sir Richard Leveson (3rd of June 1660) describes it as "too common," and offers to procure it for any one in return for £300 or £400. Sir William Wiseman, however, is said to have given £500.

Cromwell made a few baronets, but when the monarchy was restored, the title was given out so freely that a letter to Sir Richard Leveson (June 3, 1660) called it "too common" and offered to get it for anyone in exchange for £300 or £400. However, Sir William Wiseman reportedly paid £500.

The history of the baronetage was uneventful till 1783, when in consequence of the wrongful assumption of baronetcies, an old and then increasing evil, a royal warrant was issued (6th of December) directing that no one should be recognized as a baronet in official documents till he had proved his right to the dignity, and also that those created in future must register their arms and pedigree at the Heralds' College. In consequence of the opposition of the baronets themselves, the first of these two regulations was rescinded and the evil remained unabated. Since the union with Ireland (1800) baronets have been created, not as of Great Britain or of Ireland, but as of the United Kingdom.

The history of the baronetage was pretty quiet until 1783, when due to the wrongful claiming of baronetcies—a longstanding issue—a royal warrant was issued (December 6th) stating that no one would be recognized as a baronet in official documents until they proved their right to the title. It also required that anyone newly created must register their arms and family history at the Heralds’ College. Because of pushback from the baronets themselves, the first of these two rules was overturned, and the problem remained unresolved. Since the union with Ireland in 1800, baronets have been created not as part of Great Britain or Ireland, but as part of the United Kingdom.

In 1834 a movement was initiated by Mr Richard Broun (whose father had assumed a Nova Scotia baronetcy some years before), to obtain certain privileges for the order, but on the advice of the Heralds' College, the request was refused. A further petition, for permission to all baronets to wear a badge, as did those of Nova Scotia, met with the same fate in 1836. Meanwhile George IV. had revoked (19th of December 1827), as to all future creations the right of baronets' eldest sons to claim knighthood. Mr Broun claimed it as an heir apparent in 1836, and on finally meeting with refusal, publicly assumed the honour in 1842, a foolish and futile act. In 1854 Sir J. Kingston James was knighted as a baronet's son, and Sir Ludlow Cotter similarly in 1874, on his coming of age; but when Sir Claude de Crespigny's son applied for the honour (17th of May 1895), his application was refused, on the ground that the lord chancellor did not consider the clause in the patent (1805) valid. The reason for this decision appears to be unknown.

In 1834, a movement was started by Mr. Richard Broun (whose father had become a baronet in Nova Scotia a few years earlier) to secure certain privileges for the order, but based on the advice of the Heralds' College, the request was denied. A later petition, asking for permission for all baronets to wear a badge like those from Nova Scotia, met the same outcome in 1836. Meanwhile, George IV had revoked the right of baronets' eldest sons to claim knighthood for all future creations on December 19, 1827. Mr. Broun claimed it as an heir apparent in 1836, and after being refused, he publicly assumed the title in 1842, which was a foolish and pointless act. In 1854, Sir J. Kingston James was knighted as the son of a baronet, and Sir Ludlow Cotter received the same honor in 1874 when he came of age. However, when Sir Claude de Crespigny's son applied for the honor on May 17, 1895, his application was denied because the Lord Chancellor did not consider the clause in the 1805 patent valid. The reason behind this decision remains unknown.

Mr Broun's subsequent connexion with a scheme for reviving the territorial claims of the Nova Scotia baronets as part of a colonizing scheme need not be discussed here. A fresh agitation was aroused in 1897 by an order giving the sons of life peers precedence over baronets, some of whom formed themselves, in 1898, into "the Honourable Society of the Baronetage" for the maintenance of its privileges. But a royal warrant was issued on the 15th of August 1898, confirming the precedence complained of as an infringement of their rights. The above body, however, [v.03 p.0424]has continued in existence as the "Standing Council of the Baronetage," and succeeded in obtaining invitations for some representatives of the order to the coronation of King Edward VII. It has been sought to obtain badges or other distinctions for baronets and also to purge the order of wrongful assumptions, an evil to which the baronetage of Nova Scotia is peculiarly exposed, owing to the dignity being descendible to collateral heirs male of the grantee as well as to those of his body. A departmental committee at the home office was appointed in 1906 to consider the question of such assumptions and the best means of stopping them.

Mr. Broun's later involvement in a plan to revive the land claims of the Nova Scotia baronets as part of a colonization effort doesn't need to be discussed here. In 1897, a new stir was created by an order that gave the sons of life peers priority over baronets, leading some baronets to form "the Honourable Society of the Baronetage" in 1898 to defend their privileges. However, a royal warrant was issued on August 15, 1898, affirming the precedence that they said violated their rights. Despite this, the group has continued to exist as the "Standing Council of the Baronetage" and managed to get invitations for some of its representatives to the coronation of King Edward VII. They have also sought to get badges or other distinctions for baronets and to remove any wrongful claims, a problem particularly affecting the Nova Scotia baronetage due to the title being passed down to collateral male heirs of the grantee as well as to his direct descendants. In 1906, a departmental committee was set up at the home office to look into these wrongful claims and find ways to stop them.

All baronets are entitled to display in their coat of arms, either on a canton or on an inescutcheon, the red hand of Ulster, save those of Nova Scotia, who display, instead of it, the saltire of that province. The precedency of baronets of Nova Scotia and of Ireland in relation to those of England was left undetermined by the Acts of Union, and appears to be still a moot point with heralds. The premier baronet of England is Sir Hickman Bacon, whose ancestor was the first to receive the honour in 1611.

All baronets can display the red hand of Ulster on their coat of arms, either on a canton or on an inescutcheon, except for those from Nova Scotia, who instead display the saltire of that province. The precedence of baronets from Nova Scotia and Ireland compared to those from England was left unclear by the Acts of Union and still seems to be a debated issue among heralds. The leading baronet of England is Sir Hickman Bacon, whose ancestor was the first to receive the honor in 1611.

See Pixley's History of the Baronetage; Playfair's "Baronetage" (in British Family Antiquity, vols. vi.-ix.); Foster's Baronetage; G. E. Cokayne's Complete Baronetage; Nichols, "The Dignity of Baronet" (in Herald and Genealogist, vol. iii.)

See Pixley's History of the Baronetage; Playfair's "Baronetage" (in British Family Antiquity, vols. vi.-ix.); Foster's Baronetage; G. E. Cokayne's Complete Baronetage; Nichols, "The Dignity of Baronet" (in Herald and Genealogist, vol. iii.)

(J. H. R.)

(J. H. R.)

BARONIUS, CAESAR (1538-1607), Italian cardinal and ecclesiastical historian, was born at Sora, and was educated at Veroli and Naples. At Rome he joined the Oratory in 1557 under St Philip Neri (q.v.) and succeeded him as superior in 1593. Clement VIII., whose confessor he was, made him cardinal in 1596 and librarian of the Vatican. At subsequent conclaves he was twice nearly elected pope, but on each occasion was opposed by Spain on account of his work On the Monarchy of Sicily, in which he supported the papal claims against those of the Spanish government. Baronius is best known by his Annales Ecclesiastici, undertaken by the order of St Philip as an answer to the Magdeburg Centuries. After nearly thirty years of lecturing on the history of the Church at the Vallicella and being trained by St Philip as a great man for a great work, he began to write, and produced twelve folios (1588-1607). In the Annales he treats history in strict chronological order and keeps theology in the background. In spite of many errors, especially in Greek history, in which he had to depend upon secondhand information, the work of Baronius stands as an honest attempt to write history, marked with a sincere love of truth. Sarpi, in urging Casaubon to write against Baronius, warns him never to charge or suspect him of bad faith, for no one who knew him could accuse him of disloyalty to truth. Baronius makes use of the words of St Augustine: "I shall love with a special love the man who most rigidly and severely corrects my errors." He also undertook a new edition to the Roman martyrology (1586), which he purified of many inaccuracies.

BARONIUS, CAESAR (1538-1607), Italian cardinal and church historian, was born in Sora and educated in Veroli and Naples. He joined the Oratory in Rome in 1557 under St. Philip Neri (q.v.) and succeeded him as superior in 1593. Clement VIII, for whom he was confessor, made him a cardinal in 1596 and the librarian of the Vatican. During later conclaves, he almost became pope twice, but each time he faced opposition from Spain due to his work On the Monarchy of Sicily, where he supported papal claims against the Spanish government. Baronius is best known for his Annales Ecclesiastici, which he started on the order of St. Philip as a response to the Magdeburg Centuries. After nearly thirty years of lecturing on Church history at the Vallicella, having been shaped by St. Philip as a significant figure for a monumental task, he began to write and produced twelve volumes (1588-1607). In the Annales, he approaches history in strict chronological order while keeping theology in the background. Despite many mistakes, especially in Greek history, where he relied on secondhand information, Baronius's work is regarded as an earnest attempt to write history, marked by a genuine love for truth. Sarpi, while urging Casaubon to write against Baronius, cautioned him never to accuse him of bad faith, as no one who knew him could claim he was disloyal to the truth. Baronius expressed St. Augustine's sentiment: "I shall love with a special love the man who most rigidly and severely corrects my errors." He also worked on a new edition of the Roman martyrology (1586), which he refined by eliminating many inaccuracies.

His Annales, which end in 1198, were continued by Rinaldi (9 vols., 1676-1677); by Laderchi (3 vols., 1728-1737); and by Theiner (3 vols., 1856). The most useful edition is that of Mansi (38 vols., Lucca, 1738-1759), giving Pagi's corrections at the foot of each page.

His Annales, which finish in 1198, were extended by Rinaldi (9 vols., 1676-1677); by Laderchi (3 vols., 1728-1737); and by Theiner (3 vols., 1856). The most helpful edition is that of Mansi (38 vols., Lucca, 1738-1759), which includes Pagi's corrections at the bottom of each page.

(E. Tn.)

(E. Tn.)

BARONY, the domain of a baron (q.v.). In Ireland counties are divided into "baronies," which are equivalent to the "hundreds" (q.v.) in England, and seem to have been formed out of the territories of the Irish chiefs, as each submitted to English rule (General Report of the Census of England, iv. 181, 1873). In Scotland the term is applied to any large freehold estate even when held by a commoner. Barony also denotes the rank or dignity of a baron, and the feudal tenure "by barony."

BARONY, the territory of a baron (q.v.). In Ireland, counties are separated into "baronies," which are similar to the "hundreds" (q.v.) in England, and appear to have originated from the lands of the Irish chiefs as they accepted English authority (General Report of the Census of England, iv. 181, 1873). In Scotland, the term is used for any large freehold estate, even if owned by a commoner. Barony also refers to the rank or status of a baron, as well as the feudal holding "by barony."

BAROQUE, a technical term, chiefly applicable to architecture, furniture and household decoration. Apparently of Spanish origin—a barrueco is a large, irregularly-shaped pearl—the word was for a time confined to the craft of the jeweller. It indicates the more extravagant fashions of design that were common in the first half of the 18th century, chiefly in Italy and France, in which everything is fantastic, grotesque, florid or incongruous—irregular shapes, meaningless forms, an utter lack of restraint and simplicity. The word suggests much the same order of ideas as rococo.

BAROQUE, a technical term mainly used in architecture, furniture, and home decoration. The term appears to have originated in Spain—a barrueco is a large, irregularly-shaped pearl—and was initially used within the jewelry craft. It refers to the more extravagant design styles popular in the first half of the 18th century, especially in Italy and France, characterized by everything being fantastic, grotesque, ornate, or odd—irregular shapes, nonsensical forms, and a complete lack of restraint and simplicity. The term conveys similar ideas to rococo.

BAROSS, GABOR (1848-1892), Hungarian statesman, was born at Trencsén on the 6th of July 1848, and educated at Esztergom. He was for a time one of the professors there under Cardinal Kolos Vaszary. After acquiring considerable local reputation as chief notary of his county, he entered parliament in 1875. He at once attached himself to Kálmán Tisza and remained faithful to his chief even after the Bosnian occupation had alienated so many of the supporters of the prime minister. It was he who drew up the reply to the malcontents on this occasion, for the first time demonstrating his many-sided ability and his genius for sustained hard work. But it was in the field of economics that he principally achieved his fame. In 1883 he was appointed secretary to the ministry of ways and communications. Baross, who had prepared himself for quite another career, and had only become acquainted with the civilized West at the time of the Composition of 1867, mastered, in an incredibly short time, the details of this difficult department. His zeal, conscientiousness and energy were so universally recognized, that on the retirement of Gábor Kemény, in 1886, he was appointed minister of ways and communications. He devoted himself especially to the development of the national railways, and the gigantic network of the Austro-Hungarian railway system and its unification is mainly his work. But his most original creation in this respect was the zone system, which immensely facilitated and cheapened the circulation of all wares and produce, and brought the remotest districts into direct communication with the central point at Budapest. The amalgamation of the ministry of commerce with the ministry of ways in 1889 further enabled Baross to realize his great idea of making the trade of Hungary independent of foreign influences, of increasing the commercial productiveness of the kingdom and of gaining every possible advantage for her export trade by a revision of tolls. This patriotic policy provoked loud protests both from Austria and Germany at the conference of Vienna in 1890, and Baross was obliged somewhat to modify his system. This was by no means the only instance in which his commercial policy was attacked and even hampered by foreign courts. But wherever he was allowed a free hand he introduced epoch-making reforms in all the branches of his department, including posts, telegraphs, &c. A man of such strength of character was not to be turned from his course by any amount of opposition, and he rather enjoyed to be alluded to as "the iron-handed minister." The crowning point of his railway policy was the regulation of the Danube at the hitherto impassable Iron-Gates Rapids by the construction of canals, which opened up the eastern trade to Hungary and was an event of international importance. It was while inspecting his work there in March 1892 that he caught a chill, from which he died on the 8th of May. The day of his burial was a day of national mourning, and rightly so, for Baross had dedicated his whole time and genius to the promotion of his country's prosperity.

BAROSS, GABOR (1848-1892), Hungarian statesman, was born in Trencsén on July 6, 1848, and educated in Esztergom. For a time, he was one of the professors there under Cardinal Kolos Vaszary. After gaining considerable local respect as the chief notary of his county, he entered parliament in 1875. He immediately aligned himself with Kálmán Tisza and remained loyal to him even after the Bosnian occupation drove many of the prime minister's supporters away. He drafted the response to the dissidents on this occasion, showcasing his diverse abilities and talent for hard work. However, it was in economics where he primarily made his mark. In 1883, he was appointed secretary to the ministry of ways and communications. Baross, who had prepared for a different career and only became acquainted with the developed West during the Compromise of 1867, quickly mastered the complexities of this challenging department. His commitment, diligence, and energy were so widely acknowledged that when Gábor Kemény retired in 1886, he was appointed minister of ways and communications. He focused especially on the development of national railways, and the vast network of the Austro-Hungarian railway system and its unification is largely credited to him. His most innovative contribution in this area was the zone system, which significantly reduced costs and improved the distribution of goods, connecting remote regions directly to Budapest. The merger of the ministry of commerce with the ministry of ways in 1889 allowed Baross to pursue his vision of making Hungary’s trade less dependent on foreign influences, raising the kingdom's commercial productivity, and optimizing export trade through toll revisions. This patriotic agenda faced strong objections from Austria and Germany at the Vienna conference in 1890, forcing Baross to adjust his plans somewhat. This was not the only time his commercial policy faced criticism and obstruction from foreign powers. However, wherever he had full control, he implemented groundbreaking reforms across all areas of his department, including postal services and telegraphs. A man of such strong character was undeterred by opposition, even embracing the label "the iron-handed minister." The peak of his railway policy was his management of the Danube at the previously impassable Iron Gates Rapids through canal construction, which opened up eastern trade for Hungary and was a significant international event. While inspecting his work there in March 1892, he caught a chill, which led to his death on May 8. The day of his burial was a national day of mourning, and rightfully so, as Baross dedicated his entire life and talents to the advancement of his country’s prosperity.

See László Petrovics, Biography of Gabriel Baross (Hung. Eperies, 1892).

See László Petrovics, Biography of Gabriel Baross (Hung. Eperies, 1892).

(R. N. B.)

(R. N. B.)

BAROTAC NUEVO, a town of the province of Iloílo, Panay, Philippine Islands, near the Jalaur river, above its mouth on the S.E. coast, and about 15 m. N.E. of Iloílo, the capital. Pop. (1903) 9904; in 1903 after the census had been taken the neighbouring town of Dumangas (pop. 12,428) was annexed to Barotac Nuevo. The town lies in a fertile plain and deals in rice, trepang and pina. Here, in what was formerly Dumangas, are a fine church and convent, built of iron, pressed brick and marble. Dumangas was destroyed by fire in June 1900, during a fight with insurgents, but its rebuilding was begun in May 1901.

BAROTAC NUEVO, a town in the province of Iloílo, Panay, Philippine Islands, is located near the Jalaur River, upstream from its mouth on the southeast coast, and about 15 miles northeast of Iloílo, the capital. Population (1903) was 9,904; in 1903, after the census was taken, the nearby town of Dumangas (population 12,428) was annexed to Barotac Nuevo. The town is situated in a fertile plain and trades in rice, trepang, and pina. Here, in what was once Dumangas, stands a beautiful church and convent made of iron, pressed brick, and marble. Dumangas was destroyed by fire in June 1900 during a clash with insurgents, but rebuilding began in May 1901.

BAROTSE, BAROTSELAND, a people and country of South Central Africa. The greater part of the country is a British protectorate, forming part of Rhodesia. The Barotse are the paramount tribe in the region of the Upper Zambezi basin, but by popular usage the name is also applied to contiguous subject tribes, Barotseland being the country over which the Barotse paramount chief exercises authority. The present article treats (1) of the people, (2) of the country, (3) of the establishment of the British protectorate and of subsequent developments.

BAROTSE, BAROTSELAND, a group of people and a country in South Central Africa. Most of the country is a British protectorate and is part of Rhodesia. The Barotse are the main tribe in the Upper Zambezi basin area, but the name is also commonly used to refer to nearby subject tribes. Barotseland is the region where the Barotse paramount chief has authority. This article covers (1) the people, (2) the country, and (3) the establishment of the British protectorate and the developments that followed.

1. The Barotse.—These people, originally known as Aälui, have [v.03 p.0425]occupied the extensive plain through which the Zambezi passes from 14° 35′ S. to 16° 25′ S. throughout the reigns of twenty-two successive paramount chiefs and therefore approximately since the commencement of the 17th century. Previously, for an indefinite period, they dwelt on the Kabompo river, 200 m. to the N.E. of their present country, and here the descendants of a section of the tribe which did not migrate still remain, under the name Balokwakwa (men of the ambuscade), formerly known as Aälukolui. That the Barotse at a still more remote period emigrated from the far north-east is indicated by vague tradition as well as by a certain similarity in type and language to some tribes living in that direction, though the fact that natives from Mashonaland can understand those at Lialui (the Barotse capital) has led to the assumption by some writers that the Barotse are an offshoot of the Mashona. The variety in type among the Mashona and the homogeneity of the Barotse would rather point to an opposite conclusion.

1. The Barotse.—These people, originally known as Aälui, have [v.03 p.0425]settled on the vast plain where the Zambezi flows from 14° 35′ S. to 16° 25′ S. for the reigns of twenty-two consecutive paramount chiefs, which means they’ve been there since around the early 17th century. Before that, they lived along the Kabompo River, 200 miles northeast of their current location, and some descendants of a part of the tribe that did not migrate still live there, known as Balokwakwa (men of the ambuscade), previously called Aälukolui. Vague traditions and some similarities in appearance and language with tribes in that region suggest that the Barotse migrated from the far northeast at an even earlier time. However, the fact that natives from Mashonaland can understand those in Lialui (the Barotse capital) has led some writers to propose that the Barotse are a branch of the Mashona. Yet, the variation in appearance among the Mashona and the uniformity of the Barotse suggests the opposite.

Early in the 19th century a section of the Basuto tribe known as Makololo trekked from the south of what is now the Orange River Colony and fought their way through Bechuanaland and the Kalahari to the land of the Barotse, whom they ultimately subdued. Their chief, Sebituane, who as an administrator and general was far in advance of his compeers, established the rule of his house for some forty years, until about 1865 an organized rebellion of the Barotse led to the almost complete extinction of this Makololo oligarchy and the reinstatement of the original dynasty. It was the Makololo who gave the Barotse their present name (Rotse, plain—Burotse, country of the plain—Murotse, man of the plain—Marotse, people of the plain, the latter being inaccurately rendered Barotse, Ba being the equivalent of Ma in certain other languages).

Early in the 19th century, a group of the Basuto tribe called the Makololo traveled from the south of what is now the Orange River Colony. They fought their way through Bechuanaland and the Kalahari until they reached the land of the Barotse, whom they eventually defeated. Their chief, Sebituane, who was much more advanced as an administrator and general than his contemporaries, established his family's rule for about forty years. Around 1865, an organized rebellion from the Barotse led to the near complete downfall of this Makololo leadership and the restoration of the original dynasty. The Makololo were the ones who gave the Barotse their current name (Rotse, plain—Burotse, country of the plain—Murotse, man of the plain—Marotse, people of the plain, the last being incorrectly referred to as Barotse, with Ba being equivalent to Ma in some other languages).

The Barotse proper are comparatively few in number, but as is inferred from the fact that for many generations they have held in sway a country two and a half times the size of Great Britain, they are the intellectual and physical superiors of the vast majority of the negro races of Africa. Very black, tall in stature, deep in chest and comparatively speaking refined in feature, a Barotse is readily distinguishable amidst a mixed group of natives. Being numerically small they form an oligarchy in which, with few exceptions, each man holds rank in a chieftainship of which there are three grades. Next to the chiefs rank their descendants who have not themselves acquired chief's rank and hold an intermediate position as freeborn; all others, whether members of the subject-tribes or prisoners of war, being, up to 1906, mere slaves. This class was also graded. Slaves might own slaves who in their turn might own slaves, the highest grade always being directly responsible to some Barotse chief. As a reward of gallantry or ability the paramount chief occasionally conferred chief's rank on individuals not of Barotse birth, and these ipso facto assumed the name and privileges of the Barotse. It was a counterpart of the feudal system of Europe in which every grade from king to serf found a place. In 1906 the paramount chief, by proclamation, abolished the state of slavery, an act which, however, left untouched the predominant position of the Barotse and their rights to chieftainship. The paramount chief shares with a queen (Mokwai) his authority and prerogatives. The Mokwai is not the wife but the eldest sister of the ruling chief. With his death her privileges lapse. Theoretically, these co-rulers are equal, neither may promulgate a national decree without the assent of the other, but each has a capital town, councillors and absolute authority in a province, the two having joint authority over all other provinces. In their code of laws the Barotse show an advance on the standard of probably any other African negro state. By right, an accused chief is tried by his peers, each of whom in rotation from junior to senior gives his verdict, after which the president reports the finding of the court to the paramount chief, who passes sentence. As to their religious beliefs the Barotse imagine the sun to be the embodiment of a great god whose sole care is for the amelioration of man. Him they worship, though more pains are taken to appease evil spirits, in whose existence they also believe, to whom every evil to which man is heir is attributed. The spirits of ancestors—especially of deceased chiefs—are also objects of worship. Christianity, of a Protestant evangelical type, was first introduced into the country in 1884 by François Coillard and has made some progress among the people, among the converts being Letia, eldest son and heir of Lewanika, the paramount chief.

The Barotse people are relatively few in number, but the fact that they have maintained control over an area two and a half times the size of Great Britain for many generations suggests they are intellectually and physically superior to most of the other African ethnic groups. They are very dark-skinned, tall, broad-chested, and relatively refined in appearance, making a Barotse easily recognizable in a mixed group of locals. Because they are numerically small, they form an oligarchy where, with few exceptions, every man holds a rank within a chiefdom that has three levels. Next in rank to the chiefs are their descendants who haven't achieved chief status and hold an intermediate position as freeborn people; all others, unless they are members of subject tribes or prisoners of war, were, up until 1906, simply slaves. This class was also hierarchically organized. Slaves could own other slaves, who in turn could also own slaves, with the highest-ranking slaves always being directly accountable to a Barotse chief. Occasionally, the paramount chief would grant chief status to individuals not born into the Barotse, and these individuals would automatically gain the name and privileges of the Barotse. This was similar to the feudal system in Europe where every rank from king to serf had a place. In 1906, the paramount chief officially abolished slavery, but this act did not change the dominant position of the Barotse or their rights to chieftainship. The paramount chief shares his authority and privileges with a queen, or Mokwai, who is not his wife but his eldest sister. When he dies, her privileges end. In theory, these co-rulers are equal; neither can issue a national decree without the other's consent. However, each has their own capital, advisors, and absolute authority in their province, while they jointly govern all other provinces. The Barotse legal code shows significant advancement compared to probably any other African nation. Accused chiefs are tried by their peers, and each peer from junior to senior gives their verdict in turn. The president then reports the court's finding to the paramount chief, who delivers the sentence. Regarding their religious beliefs, the Barotse see the sun as a manifestation of a great god who primarily cares for the betterment of humanity. They worship this god, but they also put considerable effort into appeasing evil spirits, which they believe exist and to whom all human suffering is attributed. The spirits of ancestors—particularly those of deceased chiefs—are also worshiped. Christianity, specifically a Protestant evangelical version, was first introduced to the region in 1884 by François Coillard and has gained some traction among the population, including among converts like Letia, the eldest son and heir of Lewanika, the paramount chief.

2. Barotseland.—This term includes, in the sense of the country in which the authority of the paramount Barotse chief is acknowledged, not only the lands of the Barotse proper, but the territory of fifteen contiguous and subject tribes. This vast territory extends approximately from the Kwito river in the west to the Kafue river in the east, and from the Congo-Zambezi watershed in the north to the Linyante or Kwando river and Zambezi in the south, and may be divided into three groups:—

2. Barotseland.—This term refers to the region where the authority of the paramount Barotse chief is recognized. It encompasses not only the lands of the Barotse people but also the territory of fifteen neighboring tribes that are under its influence. This large area stretches roughly from the Kwito River in the west to the Kafue River in the east, and from the Congo-Zambezi watershed in the north to the Linyante or Kwando River and the Zambezi River in the south. It can be divided into three groups:—

(a) Central provinces directly administered by the paramount chief from the capital Lialui (a town on the Zambezi), by the Mokwai from Nalolo, and by two chiefs of the blood from Sesheke;

(a) Central provinces directly managed by the paramount chief from the capital Lialui (a town on the Zambezi), by the Mokwai from Nalolo, and by two hereditary chiefs from Sesheke;

(b) Outlying provinces over which, in the absence of a central local system of government, Barotse chiefs administer districts under the direction of the paramount chief; and

(b) Remote provinces where, without a central local government system, Barotse chiefs manage districts under the guidance of the paramount chief; and

(c) Tribes over which the local chiefs are permitted to retain their position subject to the payment of annual tribute and to their doing homage in person at Lialui when called upon to do so.

(c) Tribes where local chiefs can keep their positions as long as they pay an annual tribute and show their respect in person at Lialui when requested.

With the publication of the king of Italy's award in 1905 in the Anglo-Portuguese Barotse Boundary dispute (see below), the term Barotseland may be said to have acquired a second meaning. By this award the western and part of the northern section of Barotseland as described above were declared to be outside the dominion of the paramount chief and therefore not in the British sphere of influence, while tribal boundaries were complicated by the introduction of a longitudinal and latitudinal frontier. Though this award altered the political boundaries, ethnologically Barotseland remains much as above described. The area of the country under British protection is about 182,000 sq. m.

With the king of Italy's ruling in 1905 regarding the Anglo-Portuguese Barotse Boundary dispute (see below), the term Barotseland gained a new meaning. This ruling stated that the western and part of the northern section of Barotseland, as mentioned earlier, were outside the control of the paramount chief and therefore not part of the British sphere of influence. Additionally, tribal boundaries became more complicated due to the establishment of a longitudinal and latitudinal border. While this ruling changed the political boundaries, ethnologically, Barotseland largely remains as described earlier. The area of the country under British protection is approximately 182,000 sq. miles.

Excluding the ridge of high ground running east and west which, culminating at a height of 5000 ft., forms the Congo-Zambezi water-parting, the extreme east (Batoka) and the district in the immediate vicinity of the Victoria Falls (q.v.) throughout which, with local variations, a red laterite clay predominates, the main physical features of Barotseland may be described as a series of heavy white sand undulations covered with subtropical forest vegetation. These are intersected by alluvium-charged valleys through which streams and rivers flow inwards towards the central basin of the Upper Zambezi. There is evidence that this has at one time been the site of a large lake. These valleys, which towards the close of the wet season become inundated, afford rich cattle pasture, the succulence of which prevents cattle losing condition towards the end of the dry season, as is the case in many parts of Africa. There seems to be little or no indication of mineral wealth in the white sand area, but in the north and east there is not only every prospect of a great agricultural and pastoral future but also of considerable mining development. Though basalt predominates in the neighbourhood of the Victoria Falls and large fields of granite crop up on the Batoka plateau and elsewhere, there is every indication of the existence of useful minerals in these districts. Gold, copper, tin, lead, zinc and iron have been discovered.

Excluding the ridge of high ground that runs east and west and reaches a height of 5000 ft., which forms the Congo-Zambezi water divide, the far eastern area (Batoka) and the region around Victoria Falls (q.v.), where a red laterite clay is common with some local variations, the main physical features of Barotseland can be described as a series of rolling white sand hills covered with subtropical forest. These are crossed by valleys filled with alluvial deposits through which streams and rivers flow toward the central basin of the Upper Zambezi. There's evidence that this area was once home to a large lake. These valleys, which can flood at the end of the rainy season, provide rich grazing land for cattle, helping them maintain their condition even towards the end of the dry season, unlike many other places in Africa. There doesn't seem to be much mineral wealth in the white sand area, but in the north and east, there is a promising future for agriculture and livestock, as well as significant potential for mining development. While basalt is common around Victoria Falls and large granite fields appear on the Batoka plateau and elsewhere, there are strong indications of useful minerals in these regions. Gold, copper, tin, lead, zinc, and iron have been found.

Much of the area of Barotseland is within the healthy zone, the healthiest districts being the Batoka and Mashikolumbwe plateaus in the east with extreme altitudes of 4400 and 4150 ft. respectively, and the line of the Congo-Zambezi watershed which rises to 5000 ft. in many places. The Zambezi valley from the Victoria Falls (3000 ft.) to the Kabompo confluence (3500 ft.), though involving little or no risk to health to the traveller, cannot be considered suitable for white settlement. Taking into consideration the relative value of altitude to latitude, the plateauland of Barotseland compares very favourably with existing conditions elsewhere, being several degrees more temperate than would be expected. Approximately the mean [v.03 p.0426]maximum and minimum temperatures stand at 80° and 55° F. respectively, with an extreme range of 100° to 35° and a mean annual temperature of 68° to 70°. The rainfall varies according to district from 22 to 32 in. a year and has shown extraordinary stability. Since 1884, the first year in which a record was taken by François Coillard, Barotseland has known no droughts, though South Africa has suffered periodically in this respect.

Much of Barotseland is in a healthy zone, with the healthiest districts being the Batoka and Mashikolumbwe plateaus in the east, reaching altitudes of 4,400 and 4,150 feet, respectively, and the Congo-Zambezi watershed, which rises to 5,000 feet in many areas. The Zambezi valley, from Victoria Falls (3,000 feet) to the Kabompo confluence (3,500 feet), poses little to no health risk for travelers, but is not ideal for white settlement. Considering the importance of altitude compared to latitude, the plateau region of Barotseland is quite favorable compared to other areas, being several degrees more temperate than expected. The average maximum and minimum temperatures are around 80°F and 55°F, respectively, with a range from 100°F to 35°F and an average annual temperature of 68°F to 70°F. Rainfall varies by district from 22 to 32 inches per year and has been remarkably stable. Since 1884, the first year records were kept by François Coillard, Barotseland has experienced no droughts, even though South Africa has had periodic drought issues.

The Zambezi, as would be expected, forms a definite boundary line in the distribution of many species of fauna and flora. In these respects, as well as from an ethnological standpoint, Barotseland essentially belongs not to South but to Central Africa. The great river has also served to prevent the spread from South Africa into Barotseland of such disastrous cattle diseases as tick fever and lung sickness.

The Zambezi, as you'd expect, creates a clear boundary in the distribution of many animal and plant species. In these ways, as well as from an ethnological perspective, Barotseland is really part of Central Africa rather than South Africa. The great river has also helped stop the spread of harmful cattle diseases like tick fever and lung sickness from South Africa into Barotseland.

3. The Establishment of British Suzerainty.—By the charter granted to the British South Africa Company in October 1889, the company was allowed to establish its rule in the regions north of the Middle Zambezi not included in the Portuguese dominions, and by a treaty of the 11th of June 1891 between Great Britain and Portugal it was declared that the Barotse kingdom was within the British sphere of influence. The dispute between the contracting powers as to what were the western limits of Barotseland was eventually referred to the arbitration of the king of Italy, who by his award of the 30th of May 1905, fixed the frontier at the Kwando river as far north as 22° E., then that meridian up to the 13° S., which parallel it follows as far east as 24° E., and then that meridian to the Belgian Congo frontier. In the meantime the British South Africa Company had entered into friendly relations with Lewanika (q.v.), the paramount chief of the Barotse, and an administrator was appointed on behalf of the company to reside in the country. A native police force under the command of a British officer was raised and magistrates and district commissioners appointed. In the internal affairs of the Barotse the company did not interfere, and the relations between the British and Barotse have been uniformly friendly. The pioneers of Western civilization were not, however, the agents of the Chartered Company, but missionaries. F. S. Arnot, an Englishman, spent two years in the country (1882-1884) and in 1884 a mission, fruitful of good results, was established by the Société des Missions Evangéliques de Paris. Its first agent was François Coillard (1834-1904), who had previously been engaged in mission work in Basutoland and who devoted the rest of his life to the Barotse. Though always an admirer of British institutions and anxious that the country should ultimately fall under British jurisdiction, Coillard in the interests of his mission was in the first instance anxious to delay the advent of white men into the country. It was contrary to his advice that Lewanika petitioned the "Great White Queen" to assume a protectorate over his dominions, but from the moment Great Britain assumed responsibility and the advance of European civilization became inevitable, all the influence acquired by Coillard's exceptional personal magnetism and singleness of purpose was used to prepare the way for the extension of British rule. Only those few pioneers who knew the Barotse under the old conditions can fully realise what civilization and England owe to the co-operation of this high-minded Frenchman.

3. The Establishment of British Suzerainty.—By the charter granted to the British South Africa Company in October 1889, the company was allowed to establish its rule in the areas north of the Middle Zambezi that weren’t part of Portuguese territories. A treaty signed on June 11, 1891, between Great Britain and Portugal stated that the Barotse kingdom was within the British sphere of influence. The disagreement between the two powers regarding the western limits of Barotseland was eventually referred to the arbitration of the King of Italy, who, in his decision on May 30, 1905, set the border at the Kwando River north to 22° E., then along that line down to 13° S., which it follows east to 24° E., and then follows that line to the Belgian Congo border. Meanwhile, the British South Africa Company had built friendly relations with Lewanika (q.v.), the paramount chief of the Barotse, and appointed an administrator to live in the country on behalf of the company. A native police force, led by a British officer, was formed, and magistrates and district commissioners were appointed. The company didn’t interfere in the internal affairs of the Barotse, and the relationship between the British and Barotse remained friendly. However, the true pioneers of Western civilization weren’t the agents of the Chartered Company, but missionaries. F. S. Arnot, an Englishman, spent two years in the country (1882-1884), and in 1884, a mission that had great success was established by the Société des Missions Evangéliques de Paris. Its first agent was François Coillard (1834-1904), who had previously worked in Basutoland and dedicated the rest of his life to the Barotse. Although he admired British institutions and wanted the country to eventually come under British rule, Coillard was initially keen to delay the arrival of white settlers for the sake of his mission. It was against his advice that Lewanika asked the "Great White Queen" to take a protectorate over his lands, but once Great Britain took on responsibility and the spread of European civilization became unavoidable, Coillard used his remarkable personal charisma and unwavering commitment to help pave the way for the expansion of British rule. Only a handful of pioneers who experienced the Barotse under the old conditions can truly appreciate what civilization and England owe to the efforts of this principled Frenchman.

Under the Chartered Company's rule considerable progress has been made in the development of the resources of the country, especially in opening up the mining districts in the north. The seat of the administration, Kalomo, is on the "Cape to Cairo" railway, about midway between the Zambezi and Kafue rivers. The railway reached the Broken Hill copper mines, 110 m. N. of the Kafue in 1906, and the Belgian Congo frontier in 1910. From Lobito Bay in Portuguese West Africa a railway was being built in 1909 which would connect with the main line near the Congo frontier. This would not only supply Barotseland with a route to the sea alternative to the Beira and Cape Town lines, but while reducing the land route by many hundred miles would also supply a seaport outlet 1700 m. nearer England than Cape Town and thus create a new and more rapid mail route to southern Rhodesia and the Transvaal. The Zambezi also, with Kebrabasa as its one bar to navigation between Barotseland and the sea, will supply a cheap line of communication. (See Rhodesia.)

Under the Chartered Company's rule, significant progress has been made in developing the country's resources, especially in opening up the mining areas in the north. The center of administration, Kalomo, is located on the "Cape to Cairo" railway, roughly halfway between the Zambezi and Kafue rivers. The railway reached the Broken Hill copper mines, 110 miles north of the Kafue, in 1906, and the Belgian Congo border in 1910. In 1909, a railway was being constructed from Lobito Bay in Portuguese West Africa that would connect with the main line near the Congo border. This would not only provide Barotseland with an alternative route to the sea besides the Beira and Cape Town lines, but it would also reduce the land route by several hundred miles and provide a seaport outlet 1700 miles closer to England than Cape Town, thus creating a new and faster mail route to southern Rhodesia and the Transvaal. The Zambezi River, with Kebrabasa as its only navigation barrier between Barotseland and the sea, will also offer a cost-effective means of communication. (See Zimbabwe.)

See David Livingstone, Missionary Travels and Researches in South Africa (London, 1857); Major Serpa Pinto, How I crossed Africa (London, 1881); F. Coillard, On the Threshold of Central Africa (London, 1897); Major A. St H. Gibbons, Exploration and Hunting in Central Africa (London, 1898), Africa South to North through Marotseland (London, 1904); "Journeys in Marotseland," Geographical Journal, 1897; "Travels in the Upper Zambezi Basin," Geographical Journal, 1901; A. Bertrand, Aux pays des Barotse, haut Zambèze (Paris, 1898); Col. Colin Harding, In Remotest Barotseland, (London, 1905); C. W. Mackintosh, Coillard of the Zambesi (London, 1907), with a bibliography; L. Decle, Three Years in Savage Africa (London, 1898). Consult also the annual reports of the British South Africa Company, published in London.

See David Livingstone, Missionary Travels and Researches in South Africa (London, 1857); Major Serpa Pinto, How I Crossed Africa (London, 1881); F. Coillard, On the Threshold of Central Africa (London, 1897); Major A. St H. Gibbons, Exploration and Hunting in Central Africa (London, 1898), Africa South to North through Marotseland (London, 1904); "Journeys in Marotseland," Geographical Journal, 1897; "Travels in the Upper Zambezi Basin," Geographical Journal, 1901; A. Bertrand, Aux pays des Barotse, haut Zambèze (Paris, 1898); Col. Colin Harding, In Remotest Barotseland, (London, 1905); C. W. Mackintosh, Coillard of the Zambesi (London, 1907), with a bibliography; L. Decle, Three Years in Savage Africa (London, 1898). Also check the annual reports of the British South Africa Company, published in London.

(A. St H. G.)

(A. St H. G.)

BAROUCHE (Ger. barutsche, Span. barrocho, Ital. baroccio; from Lat. bi-rotus, double-wheeled), the name of a sort of carriage, with four wheels and a hood, arranged for two couples to sit inside facing one another.

BAROUCHE (Ger. barutsche, Span. barrocho, Ital. baroccio; from Lat. bi-rotus, double-wheeled), refers to a type of carriage that has four wheels and a canopy, designed for two couples to sit inside facing each other.

BARQUISIMETO, a city of western Venezuela, capital of the state of Lara, on the Barquisimeto river, 101 m. by rail S.W. of Tucacas, its port on the Caribbean coast. Pop. (est. 1899) 40,000. It is built in a small, fertile valley of the Merida Cordilleras, 1985 ft. above sea-level, has a temperate, healthy climate with a mean annual temperature of 78° F., and is surrounded by a highly productive country from which are exported coffee, sugar, cacao and rum. It is also an important distributing centre for neighbouring districts. The city is the seat of a bishopric, is regularly laid out and well built, and is well provided with educational and charitable institutions. Barquisimeto was founded in 1522 by Juan de Villegas, who was exploring the neighbourhood for gold, and it was first called Nueva Segovia after his native city. In 1807 its population had risen to 15,000, principally through its commercial importance, but on the 26th of March 1812 it was totally destroyed by an earthquake, and with it 1500 lives, including a part of the revolutionary forces occupying the town. It was soon rebuilt and is one of the few cities of Venezuela which have recovered from the ravages of the war of independence and subsequent disorders.

BARQUISIMETO, a city in western Venezuela, is the capital of the state of Lara, located on the Barquisimeto River, 101 miles by rail southwest of Tucacas, its port on the Caribbean coast. Population (est. 1899) is 40,000. It sits in a small, fertile valley of the Merida Cordilleras, 1985 feet above sea level, has a temperate, healthy climate with an average annual temperature of 78° F., and is surrounded by productive land that exports coffee, sugar, cacao, and rum. It's also a key distribution center for nearby areas. The city is the seat of a bishopric, is well-planned and well-constructed, and has various educational and charitable institutions. Barquisimeto was founded in 1522 by Juan de Villegas, who was searching the area for gold, and was initially called Nueva Segovia after his hometown. By 1807, its population had grown to 15,000, mainly due to its commercial significance, but on March 26, 1812, it was completely destroyed by an earthquake, claiming 1,500 lives, including some of the revolutionary forces in the town. It was quickly rebuilt and is one of the few Venezuelan cities that have bounced back from the impacts of the war of independence and subsequent turmoil.

BARR, a town of Germany, in the imperial province of Alsace-Lorraine, on the Kirneck, 13 m. N. from Schlettstadt by rail. It has an Evangelical and a Roman Catholic church and considerable tanneries. There is an active trade in wine and timber. Pop. (1900) 5243.

BARR, a town in Germany, located in the imperial province of Alsace-Lorraine, is situated on the Kirneck, 13 miles north of Schlettstadt by train. It has an Evangelical church and a Roman Catholic church, along with several tanneries. The town has a thriving trade in wine and timber. Population (1900) 5,243.

BARRA, or Barray (Scand. Baraey, isle of the ocean), an island of the outer Hebrides, Inverness-shire, Scotland. Pop. (1901) 2362. It lies about 5 m. S.W. of South Uist, is 8 m. in length and from 2 to 4 m. in breadth, save at the sandy isthmus 2 m. below Scurrival Point, where it is only a few hundred yards broad. The rock formation is gneiss. The highest hill is Heaval (1260 ft.) and there are several small lochs. The chief village is Castlebay, at which the Glasgow steamer calls once a week. This place derives its name from the castle of Kishmul standing on a rock in the bay, which was once the stronghold of the McNeills of Barra, one of the oldest of Highland clans. There are remains of ancient chapels, Danish duns and Druidical circles on the island. There is communication by ferry with South Uist. The parish comprises a number of smaller islands and islets—among them Frida, Gighay, Hellisay, Flodda to the N.E., and Vatersay, Pabbay, Mingalay (pop. 135) and Berneray to the S.E.—and contains 4000 acres of arable land and 18,000 acres of meadow and hill pasture. The cod, ling and herring fisheries are important, and the coasts abound with shell-fish, especially cockles, for which it has always been famous. On Barra Head, the highest point of Berneray, and also the most southerly point of the outer Hebrides chain, is a lighthouse 680 ft. above high water.

BARRA, or Barray (Scand. Baraey, isle of the ocean), is an island in the outer Hebrides, Inverness-shire, Scotland. Population (1901) was 2,362. It is located about 5 miles southwest of South Uist, measures 8 miles in length and between 2 to 4 miles in width, except for the sandy isthmus 2 miles below Scurrival Point, where it narrows to just a few hundred yards. The rock formation consists of gneiss. The highest hill is Heaval (1,260 ft.), and there are several small lochs. The main village is Castlebay, where the Glasgow steamer makes a weekly stop. This place gets its name from the castle of Kishmul, which sits on a rock in the bay and was once the stronghold of the McNeills of Barra, one of the oldest Highland clans. The island has remains of ancient chapels, Danish duns, and Druidical circles. There is ferry service to South Uist. The parish includes several smaller islands and islets—such as Frida, Gighay, Hellisay, and Flodda to the northeast, and Vatersay, Pabbay, Mingalay (population 135), and Berneray to the southeast—and covers 4,000 acres of arable land and 18,000 acres of meadow and hill pasture. The cod, ling, and herring fisheries are significant, and the coasts are rich in shellfish, especially cockles, for which it has always been known. At Barra Head, the highest point of Berneray and the southernmost point of the outer Hebrides chain, there is a lighthouse 680 ft. above high water.

BARRACKPUR, a town and magisterial subdivision of British India, in the district of Twenty-four Parganas, Bengal. The town is the largest cantonment in Lower Bengal, having accommodation for two batteries of artillery, the wing of a European regiment and two native battalions. Its name is said to be derived from the fact of troops having been stationed here since 1772. It is a station on the Eastern Bengal railway. Job [v.03 p.0427]Charnock, the founder of Calcutta, erected a bungalow and established a small bazaar here in 1689. The cantonment is situated on the left bank of the Hugli; it has also a large bazaar and several large tanks, and also a parade ground. To the south of the cantonment is situated the park, created by the taste and public spirit of Lord Wellesley. Within the park is situated the Government House, a noble building begun by Lord Minto, and enlarged into its present state by the marquess of Hastings. The park is beautifully laid out, and contains a small menagerie. Its most interesting feature is now Lady Canning's tomb. Barrackpur played an important part in the two Sepoy mutinies of 1824 and 1857, but the details of these belong to the general history of British rule in India. North Barrackpur had a population in 1901 of 12,600 and south Barrackpur of 19,307.

BARRACKPUR, a town and administrative subdivision in British India, located in the district of Twenty-four Parganas, Bengal. The town is the largest military base in Lower Bengal, accommodating two artillery batteries, a European regiment, and two native battalions. Its name is believed to come from the fact that troops have been stationed here since 1772. It is a stop on the Eastern Bengal railway. Job [v.03 p.0427]Charnock, who founded Calcutta, built a bungalow and started a small market here in 1689. The military base is located on the left bank of the Hugli River and features a large market, several sizable ponds, and a parade ground. To the south of the base is a park created by the vision and community spirit of Lord Wellesley. Inside the park is Government House, an impressive building initiated by Lord Minto and expanded into its current form by the Marquess of Hastings. The park is beautifully landscaped and includes a small zoo. Its most notable feature today is Lady Canning's tomb. Barrackpur played a significant role in the two Sepoy rebellions of 1824 and 1857, but the specifics of these events are part of the broader history of British rule in India. As of 1901, North Barrackpur had a population of 12,600 and South Barrackpur had 19,307.

Barrackpur subdivision was formed in 1904. It contains an area of 190 sq. m., which, at the census of 1901, had a population of 206,311, a large proportion being workers in the mills on the left bank of the Hugli.

Barrackpur subdivision was established in 1904. It covers an area of 190 sq. m., which, according to the 1901 census, had a population of 206,311, with a significant number of residents working in the mills on the left bank of the Hugli.

BARRACKS (derived through the French from the Late Lat. barra, a bar), the buildings used for the accommodation of military or naval forces, including the quarters for officers, warrant officers, non-commissioned officers and men, with their messes and recreation establishments, regimental offices, shops, stores, stables, vehicle sheds and other accessory buildings for military or domestic purposes. The term is usually applied to permanent structures of brick or stone used for the peace occupation of troops; but many hut barracks of corrugated iron lined with wood have been built, generally in connexion with a training ground for troops, and in these the accommodation given is somewhat less than in permanent barracks, and conditions more nearly approach those of a military encampment.

BARRACKS (derived from the French from the Late Lat. barra, meaning a bar) refers to buildings used to house military or naval forces, including living quarters for officers, warrant officers, non-commissioned officers, and enlisted personnel, along with their mess areas and recreational facilities, regimental offices, shops, storage areas, stables, vehicle sheds, and other supporting structures for military or domestic use. This term typically describes permanent buildings made of brick or stone intended for the peacetime accommodation of troops; however, many temporary hut barracks made of corrugated iron lined with wood have been constructed, usually in connection with a training ground for troops. In these hut barracks, the living conditions provided are somewhat less than those in permanent barracks, resembling more closely the conditions of a military camp.

British System.—The accommodation to be given in British military barracks is scheduled in the Barrack Synopsis, which contains "statements of particulars, based upon decisions which have, from time to time, been laid down by authority, as regards the military buildings authorized for various units, and the accommodation and fittings to be provided in connexion therewith." Each item of ordinary accommodation is described in the synopsis, and the areas and cubic contents of rooms therein laid down form the basis of the designs for any new barrack buildings. Supplementary to the synopsis is a series of "Standard Plans," which illustrate how the accommodation may be conveniently arranged; the object of the issue of these plans is to put in convenient form the best points of previous designs, and to avoid the necessity of making an entirely fresh design for each building that is to be erected, by using the standard type modified to suit local conditions. External appearance is considered with regard to the materials to be used, and the position the buildings are to occupy; convenience of plan and sound sanitary construction being the principal objects rather than external effect, designs are usually simple, and depend for architectural effect more on the grouping and balance of the parts than on ornamentation such as would add to expense. The synopsis and standard plans are from time to time revised, and brought up to date as improvements suggest themselves, and increases in scale of accommodation are authorized, after due consideration of the financial effect; so that systematic evolution of barrack design is carried on.

British System.—The accommodations in British military barracks are outlined in the Barrack Synopsis, which includes "details based on decisions made by authorities over time regarding the military buildings approved for various units, and the accommodations and fittings to be provided in connection with them." Each type of standard accommodation is detailed in the synopsis, and the dimensions of the rooms listed serve as the foundation for designs of any new barrack buildings. In addition to the synopsis, there is a series of "Standard Plans" that show how the accommodations can be effectively arranged; the purpose of these plans is to compile the best aspects of previous designs and to eliminate the need for completely new designs for each building being constructed, by adapting the standard type to fit local conditions. The external appearance is considered in relation to the materials used and the location of the buildings; the focus is on practical layout and sound sanitary construction rather than aesthetic exterior, so designs are typically straightforward and derive their architectural appeal more from the arrangement and balance of the components than from decorative elements that would increase costs. The synopsis and standard plans are periodically revised and updated as improvements are made, and expansions in accommodation capacity are approved after careful consideration of their financial impact, ensuring a systematic evolution of barrack design.

Modern British Barracks.—A description of a modern barrack for a battalion of infantry will give an idea of the standard of accommodation which is now authorized, and to which older barracks are gradually remodelled as funds permit. The unmarried soldiers are quartered in barrack-rooms usually planned to contain twelve men in each; this number forms a convenient division to suit the organization of the company, and is more popular with the men than the larger numbers which were formerly the rule in each barrack-room; there is a greater privacy, whilst the number is not too small to keep up the feeling of barrack-room comradeship which plays an important part in the soldier's training. The rooms give 600 cub. ft. of air per man, and have windows on each side: the beds are spaced between the windows so that only one bed comes in a corner, and not more than two between any two windows: inlet ventilators are fixed high up in the side walls, and an extract shaft warmed by the chimney flue keeps up a circulation of air through the room: the door is usually at one end of the room and the fireplace at the opposite end: over each man's bed is a locker and shelf where he keeps his kit, and his rifle stands near the head of his bed. Convenient of access from the door to the barrack-room is the ablution-room with basins and foot-bath; also disconnected by a lobby is a water-closet and urinal for night use, others for day use being provided in separate external blocks. Baths are usually grouped in a central bath-house adjacent to the cook-house, and have hot water laid on. For every two or four barrack-rooms, a small single room is provided for the occupation of the sergeant in charge, who is responsible for the safety of a small store, where men may leave their rifle and kit when going on furlough. Adjacent to the barrack blocks and next to the cook-house are arranged the dining-rooms where the men assemble for their meals; no food is now served in the barrack-rooms, and the air in them is thus kept much purer and fresher than under the old system. The dining-rooms are lofty and well ventilated, and are warmed by hot water; tables and forms are arranged so as to make the most of the space, and room is provided for all the men to dine simultaneously.

Modern British Barracks.—A description of a modern barracks for an infantry battalion gives an idea of the current standard of accommodation that is now approved, and to which older barracks are gradually updated as funding allows. Unmarried soldiers are housed in barrack rooms typically designed to hold twelve men each; this number is a practical division that fits the company's organization and is more popular with the soldiers compared to the larger groups that were once the norm in each barrack room. There is more privacy, while the number is still large enough to maintain the sense of companionship that plays an important role in a soldier's training. Each room provides 600 cubic feet of air per man and has windows on both sides: the beds are arranged between the windows so that only one bed is in a corner, and no more than two beds are placed between any two windows. Inlet ventilators are installed high in the side walls, and a flue-warmed extraction shaft ensures a flow of fresh air throughout the room. The door is usually at one end of the room and the fireplace at the opposite end: above each man's bed is a locker and shelf for storing his gear, and his rifle is kept near the head of his bed. Easily accessible from the barrack room door is the washroom equipped with basins and a foot bath; also separated by a lobby is a restroom with a toilet and urinal for nighttime use, while others for daytime use are located in separate outside facilities. Baths are typically located in a central bathhouse next to the kitchen, with hot water available. For every two or four barrack rooms, a small single room is designated for the sergeant in charge, who is responsible for the safety of a small store where soldiers can leave their rifles and gear when going on leave. Next to the barrack blocks and close to the kitchen are dining rooms where the men gather for their meals; no food is now provided in the barrack rooms, keeping the air in them much cleaner and fresher than under the previous system. The dining rooms are spacious and well-ventilated, heated with hot water, and the layout of tables and benches maximizes the space, allowing all the men to dine at the same time.

Barracks. Barracks

Next to the dining-room is the cook-house where the meals for a half battalion are cooked, and served direct to the dining-rooms on each side. Wash-up rooms are arranged off the serving-lobby with plate-racks and shelves for the storage of the crockery after it has been washed. The cooking apparatus is designed for economical use of coal fuel, and, if carefully used, consumes little more than ½ lb of coal per man per day. The cook-house is well lighted and ventilated by a top lantern; tables, dressers, and pastry slab are provided for preparing and serving the meals, and a sink for washing kitchen utensils. Under the kitchen block is a basement containing the boiler for heating the dining-rooms and another for the supply of hot water to baths and sinks, with in some cases also a hot-air furnace for heating drying-rooms, for drying the men's clothing when they come in wet from a route-march or field day. Not far from the barrack blocks is placed the recreation establishment or soldiers' club, where the rank and file may go for relaxation and amusement when off duty; this establishment has, on the ground floor, a large and lofty room with a stage at one end for lectures or entertainments, and at the other [v.03 p.0428]end is a supper bar, extending across the room, where mineral waters and other light refreshments are sold; tables are also arranged for suppers. A grocery shop is provided where the men and their families may purchase goods bought under regimental arrangements at wholesale prices, and sold without more profit than is necessary to keep the institution self-supporting. On the first floor are billiard and games room, reading-room and library, and writing-room. The manager's quarter and kitchen premises complete the establishment. Near the recreation establishment is the canteen, devoted solely to the sale of beer, and not permitted to vie in attractiveness with the recreation establishment. A bar is provided for the soldiers, a separate room for corporals, and a jug department for the supply of the families; this building also has a manager's quarter attached to it, and an office for the checking of accounts.

Next to the dining room is the kitchen where meals for about half a battalion are cooked and served directly to the dining rooms on each side. There are wash-up rooms off the serving lobby with plate racks and shelves for storing the dishes after they’ve been cleaned. The cooking equipment is designed for efficient use of coal, and if used properly, it consumes just over ½ lb of coal per person per day. The kitchen is well-lit and ventilated by a skylight; there are tables, dressers, and a pastry slab for preparing and serving meals, along with a sink for washing kitchen utensils. Under the kitchen is a basement that houses the boiler for heating the dining rooms and another for providing hot water for baths and sinks, with some cases also featuring a hot-air furnace for drying rooms, to dry the soldiers' clothes when they come in wet from a march or field day. Close to the barrack blocks is the recreation center or soldiers' club, where the enlisted men can relax and have fun when they’re off-duty; this facility has a large, high room on the ground floor with a stage at one end for lectures or entertainment, and at the other end is a snack bar, stretching across the room, selling bottled drinks and other light refreshments; there are also tables set up for meals. A grocery store is available where soldiers and their families can buy supplies at wholesale prices arranged through the regiment, with just enough markup to keep the store self-sustaining. On the first floor, there are billiard and game rooms, a reading room and library, and a writing room. The manager's quarters and kitchen premises round out the facility. Nearby is the canteen, dedicated solely to selling beer, and it is not allowed to compete in appeal with the recreation center. A bar is available for the soldiers, a separate room for corporals, and a jug department for family supplies; this building also includes a manager’s quarter and an office for managing accounts.

For the senior non-commissioned officers a sergeants' mess is provided, containing dining-room, reading-room and billiard-room, with kitchen premises and liquor store, which also has a jug department for the sergeants' families. The single non-commissioned officers have all their meals in this mess, and the married members also use it as a club. The warrant officers, and the proportion of non-commissioned officers and men who are on the married establishment, are provided with accommodation at some little distance from the men's barracks. In all recent schemes, on open sites, self-contained cottages have been built, and these are more popular than the older pattern of tenement buildings approached by common staircases or verandahs. The warrant officers are allowed a living-room, kitchen, and scullery, with three bedrooms and a bathroom. The married soldiers have a living-room, scullery, and one, two, or three bedrooms according to the size of their families. A laundry is provided adjacent to the married quarters, equipped with washing-troughs, wringer, drying-closet, and ironing-room; and the women are encouraged to use this in preference to doing washing in their cottages.

For the senior non-commissioned officers, there’s a mess hall that includes a dining room, a reading room, and a billiard room, along with kitchen facilities and a bar that also has a jug section for the sergeants' families. Single non-commissioned officers eat all their meals in this mess, and married members use it as a club. Warrant officers, along with some non-commissioned officers and soldiers who are married, have accommodations a short distance away from the men’s barracks. In recent plans for open sites, self-contained cottages have been built, which are more popular than the older style of tenement buildings that have shared staircases or verandahs. Warrant officers get a living room, kitchen, and scullery, plus three bedrooms and a bathroom. Married soldiers have a living room, scullery, and one to three bedrooms, depending on their family size. A laundry facility is provided next to the married quarters, equipped with washing troughs, a wringer, a drying closet, and an ironing room; and women are encouraged to use this facility instead of washing in their cottages.

Officers' Quarters.—At a little distance from the men's barracks, and usually looking over the parade or cricket ground, is the officers' mess. This building has an entrance-hall with band alcove, where the band plays on guest nights; on one side of the hall is the mess-room (or dining-room), and on the other the anteroom (or reading-room), whilst the billiard-room and kitchen are kept to the back so that lantern lights can be arranged for. A mess office is provided, and all the accessories required for the mess waiters' department, including pantry, plate-closet and cellarage, and for the kitchen or mess-man's department, with also a quarter for the mess-man. The officers' quarters are usually arranged in wings extending the frontage of the mess building, and in a storey over the mess itself. Each officer has a large room, part of which is partitioned off for a bedroom, and the field officers are allowed two rooms. The soldier servant, told off to each officer, has a small room allotted for cleaning purposes, and bathrooms, supplied with hot water from the mess kitchen, are centrally situated. A detached house, containing three sitting-rooms, seven bed- and dressing-rooms, bathroom, kitchen, servants' hall, and the usual accessories, is provided for the commanding officer: also a smaller house, having two sitting-rooms, four bedrooms, bath, kitchen, &c., for the quartermaster. Other regimental married officers are not provided for, and have to arrange to house themselves, a lodging allowance being usually granted.

Officers' Quarters.—A short distance from the men's barracks, usually overlooking the parade or cricket ground, is the officers' mess. This building features an entrance hall with a band alcove, where the band performs on guest nights. One side of the hall contains the mess room (or dining room), while the other side has the anteroom (or reading room). The billiard room and kitchen are located at the back so that lantern lights can be set up. There is a mess office, along with all the necessary facilities for the mess waiters' department, including a pantry, plate closet, and cellar, as well as for the kitchen or mess-man's department, which also includes accommodations for the mess man. The officers' quarters are generally arranged in wings extending from the front of the mess building and are located on a floor above the mess itself. Each officer has a large room, part of which is divided off as a bedroom, and field officers are allowed two rooms. The soldier servant assigned to each officer has a small room designated for cleaning tasks, and centrally located bathrooms are equipped with hot water from the mess kitchen. A separate house containing three sitting rooms, seven bedrooms and dressing rooms, a bathroom, kitchen, a servants' hall, and the usual amenities is provided for the commanding officer, along with a smaller house that has two sitting rooms, four bedrooms, a bath, a kitchen, etc., for the quartermaster. Other married regimental officers are not provided housing and must find their own accommodations, with a lodging allowance typically granted.

Regimental Accessories.—Apart from the buildings providing accommodation, others are required for administrative and military purposes. These are the guard house and regimental offices, the small-arm ammunition store, the fire-engine house, the drill and gymnastic hall, and the medical inspection block with dispensary, where the sick are seen by a medical officer and either prescribed for or sent into hospital, as may be necessary. Stables are provided for the officers' and transport horses, and a vehicle shed and storehouse for the mobilization equipment. Stores are required for bread, meat, coal, clothing, and for musketry, signalling, and general small stores under the quartermaster's charge—also workshops for armourers, carpenters, plumbers, painters and glaziers, shoemakers, and tailors. Mention of the fives court, recreation ground and parade ground completes the description of a battalion barrack.

Regimental Accessories.—Besides the buildings that provide living quarters, additional structures are needed for administrative and military functions. These include the guardhouse and regimental offices, the small-arms ammunition store, the fire station, the drill and gym hall, and the medical inspection area with a dispensary, where a medical officer treats the sick and either prescribes medication or admits them to the hospital if necessary. Stables are available for the officers' and transport horses, along with a vehicle shed and storehouse for mobilization equipment. Storage is also needed for bread, meat, coal, clothing, and supplies related to musketry, signaling, and general small items managed by the quartermaster—along with workshops for armorers, carpenters, plumbers, painters and glaziers, shoemakers, and tailors. The mention of the fives court, recreation field, and parade ground completes the overview of a battalion barrack.

Cavalry Barracks.—The accommodation provided for cavalry is very similar to that already described for infantry. The barrack blocks are arranged to suit the organization of the regiment, and are placed so that the men can turn out readily and get to their horses. Detached buildings are provided for cavalry troop stables, one block for the horses of each troop. Formerly stables were often built for convenience with the barrack-rooms over them; but this system has been abandoned on sanitary grounds, to the benefit of both men and horses. Each horse is given 1500 cub. ft. of air space, the horses' heads are turned to the outer walls, and provision is made, by traversed air-ducts below the mangers, for fresh air to be supplied to the horses while lying down. Above the horses' heads are windows which are arranged to open inwards, being hinged at the bottom and fitted with hopper checks to avoid direct draught. Ridge ventilation and skylights are given, so that all parts of the stable are well lighted and airy.

Cavalry Barracks.—The living quarters for cavalry are very similar to those already described for infantry. The barrack blocks are organized to match the regiment's structure and are positioned so that the soldiers can quickly gather and get to their horses. Separate buildings are provided for cavalry troop stables, with one block designated for the horses of each troop. In the past, stables were often conveniently built below the barrack rooms; however, this approach has been discarded for health reasons, benefiting both soldiers and horses. Each horse is allocated 1500 cubic feet of air space, with their heads facing the outer walls. There are air ducts below the feeding troughs to ensure fresh air reaches the horses while they lie down. Above the horses' heads, windows swing open inward and are designed with hopper checks to prevent direct drafts. Ridge ventilation and skylights are installed, ensuring all areas of the stable are well-lit and ventilated.

Cast-iron mangers and hay-racks are provided, and the horses are separated by bails, with chains to manger brackets and heel posts; saddle brackets are fixed to the heel posts. Each stable has a troop store, where spare saddles and gear are kept; also an expense forage store, in which the day's ration, after issue in bulk from the forage barn, is kept until it is given out in feeds. The stables are paved with blue Staffordshire paving bricks, graded to a collecting channel carrying the drainage well clear of the building, before it is taken into a gully.

Cast-iron feed bins and hay racks are provided, and the horses are separated by dividers, with chains attached to the feed bin brackets and heel posts; saddle brackets are secured to the heel posts. Each stable has a supply room where spare saddles and gear are stored; there’s also a feed storage area, where the daily rations, after being bulk-issued from the feed barn, are kept until they are distributed in individual servings. The stables have blue Staffordshire paving bricks, sloped to a drainage channel that directs water away from the building before it goes into a drain.

The space between the blocks of stables is paved with cement concrete to form a yard, and horse-troughs, litter-sheds and dung-pits are provided. Officers' stables are built in separate blocks, and usually have only one row of stalls; the stalls are divided by partitions, and separate saddle-rooms are provided. Stalls and loose boxes in infirmary stables give 2000 cub. ft. of air space per horse and are placed at some distance from the troop stables in a separate enclosure. A forge and shoeing shed is provided in a detached block near the troop stables. A forage barn and granary is usually built to hold a fortnight's supply, and a chaff-cutter driven by horse power is fixed close by. Cavalry regiments each have a large covered riding school, and a number of open manèges, for exercise and riding instruction.

The area between the stable blocks is paved with concrete to create a yard, and there are horse troughs, litter sheds, and dung pits available. Officers' stables are constructed in separate blocks and typically feature only one row of stalls; the stalls are separated by partitions, and there are individual saddle rooms. The stalls and loose boxes in the infirmary stables provide 2000 cubic feet of air space per horse and are located some distance away from the troop stables in a separate area. A forge and shoeing shed are located in a separate block near the troop stables. A forage barn and granary are usually built to hold a two-week supply, and a horse-powered chaff cutter is placed nearby. Each cavalry regiment has a large covered riding school and several open manèges for exercise and riding lessons.

Artillery, &c.—The accommodation provided for horse and field artillery is arranged to suit their organization in batteries and brigades, and is generally similar to that already described, with the addition of vehicle sheds for guns and ammunition wagons, and special shops for wheelers and saddlers. Accommodation for other units follows the general lines already laid down, but has to be arranged to suit the particular organization and requirements of each unit.

Artillery, &c.—The facilities for horse and field artillery are designed to fit their organization into batteries and brigades, and are mostly similar to what has been previously described, with added vehicle sheds for guns and ammo trucks, along with specialized shops for wheel repairs and saddlery. The accommodations for other units follow the general guidelines already established, but need to be tailored to meet the specific organization and needs of each unit.

Garrison Accessories.—In every large military station in addition to the regimental buildings which have been described, a number of buildings and works are required for the service of the garrison generally. Military hospitals are established at home and abroad for the treatment of sick officers and soldiers as well as their wives and families. Military hospitals are classified as follows:—First-grade hospitals are large central hospitals serving important districts. These hospitals are complete in themselves and fully equipped for the carrying out of operations of all kinds; they generally contain wards for officers, and may have attached to them separate isolation hospitals for the treatment of infectious cases, and military families' hospitals for women and children. Second-grade hospitals are smaller in size and less fully equipped, but are capable of acting independently and have operation rooms. Third-grade hospitals or reception stations are required for small stations principally, to act as feeders to the large hospitals, and to deal with accident and non-transportable cases. The principles of construction of military hospitals do not differ materially from the best modern civil practice; all are now built on the pavilion system with connecting corridors arranged so as to interfere as little as possible with the free circulation of air between the blocks. The site is carefully selected and enclosed with railings. The administration block [v.03 p.0429]is centrally placed, with ward blocks on each side, and accessory buildings placed where most convenient; the isolation wards are in a retired position and divided off from the hospital enclosure. Ward blocks usually have two storeys, and the ordinary large wards provide 1200 cub. ft. of air space per patient. A due proportion of special case and other special wards is arranged in which the space per patient is greater or less, as necessary.

Garrison Accessories.—In every large military base, alongside the regimental buildings described earlier, additional buildings and structures are necessary for the overall functioning of the garrison. Military hospitals are established both domestically and internationally to care for sick officers and soldiers, as well as their wives and families. Military hospitals are categorized as follows: First-grade hospitals are large central facilities that serve important regions. These hospitals are self-sufficient and fully equipped to perform all types of operations; they typically include wards for officers and may have separate isolation hospitals for treating infectious cases, along with military family hospitals for women and children. Second-grade hospitals are smaller and less equipped, but they can operate independently and have operating rooms. Third-grade hospitals or reception stations are primarily needed for small bases; they act as a support system for larger hospitals and handle emergency and non-transportable cases. The construction principles for military hospitals closely align with the best contemporary civil practices; all are now built on the pavilion system, with connecting corridors designed to minimally disrupt air circulation between the buildings. The site is carefully chosen and enclosed with fencing. The administration block [v.03 p.0429]is positioned centrally, with ward blocks on either side and accessory buildings placed for convenience; isolation wards are situated in a secluded area and separated from the hospital complex. Ward blocks typically have two stories, and the standard large wards provide 1200 cubic feet of air space per patient. A suitable proportion of special case and other specialized wards is arranged, where the space per patient is adjusted as needed.

Army schools are built to give slightly more liberal accommodation than is laid down as the minimum by the Board of Education, but the principles of planning are much the same as in civil elementary schools. Schools are usually placed between the married quarters and the barracks, so as to serve both for the instruction of the men, when working for educational certificates, and for the education of the children of the married soldiers. Garrison churches are built when arrangements for the troops to attend divine service at neighbouring places of worship cannot well be made. Only two military prisons now remain, viz. Dover and Curragh, and these are for soldiers discharged from the service with ignominy. For ordinary sentences detention barracks and branch detention barracks are attached to the military commands and districts: these are constructed in accordance with the home office regulations; but crime in the army fortunately continues to decrease, and little accommodation has recently been added. Barrack expense stores for the issue of bedding, utensils and other stores for which the troops depend upon the Army Service Corps, are necessary in all barracks; and in large stations a supply depot for the issue of provisions, with abattoir and bakery attached to it, may be necessary. An engineer office with building yard and workshops to deal with the ordinary duties in connexion with the upkeep of War Department property is required at every station, and for large stations such as Aldershot, it may be necessary to undertake special water supply schemes, works for disposal of sewage, and for the supply of electricity or gas for lighting the barracks. The system of roads, pipes and mains within the barracks are in all cases maintained by the Royal Engineers, as well as the buildings themselves. District and brigade offices are necessary for the administration of large units, and quarters for the general officer commanding and the headquarters staff may sometimes be required.

Army schools are designed to provide slightly better facilities than the minimum required by the Board of Education, but the planning principles are quite similar to those of civilian elementary schools. Schools are typically located between the married housing and the barracks, serving both as educational institutions for soldiers seeking educational certificates and for the children of married soldiers. Garrison churches are constructed when troops cannot easily attend services at nearby places of worship. Currently, there are only two military prisons, namely Dover and Curragh, which are for soldiers discharged under disgraceful conditions. For standard sentences, detention barracks and branch detention barracks are associated with military commands and districts; these are built according to home office regulations. Fortunately, crime within the army continues to decline, and little new accommodation has been added recently. Barrack supplies stores for bedding, utensils, and other necessary items provided by the Army Service Corps are essential in all barracks; in larger stations, a supply depot for issuing provisions, along with an abattoir and bakery, may be necessary. An engineer office with a building yard and workshops to handle routine maintenance of War Department property is required at every station, and for larger stations like Aldershot, special projects for water supply, sewage disposal, and electricity or gas for barrack lighting may be needed. The Royal Engineers maintain the roads, pipes, and mains within the barracks, as well as the buildings themselves. District and brigade offices are essential for managing large units, and quarters for the general officer commanding and the headquarters staff may sometimes be needed.

Location of Barracks.—The selection of a healthy site for a barrack building or new military station is a matter of great importance. In the earlier days of barrack construction, barracks were, for political reasons, usually built in large towns, where troops would be at hand for putting down disturbances, and cramped and inconvenient buildings of many storeys, were erected on a small piece of ground often surrounded by the worst slums of the city; such, for example, were the Ship Street barracks in Dublin, and the cavalry barracks at Hulme, Manchester. Worse still were cases where an existing building, such as the Linen Hall in Dublin, was purchased, and converted into barracks with little regard for the convenience of the occupants, and a total disregard for the need of a free circulation of pure air in and about the buildings, which is the first condition of health. In the present day, except in a few cases where strong local influence is allowed to prevail to retain troops in towns, where their presence, and perhaps the money they spend, are appreciated for patriotic or other motives, every opportunity is taken to move troops from the vicinity of crowded towns, and quarter them in barracks or hutments built in the open country. Due regard can then be given to sanitary location, and military training can more effectively be carried out. With improvements in communication by rail, road and telegraph, support to the civil power in case of disturbance can always be afforded in good time, without permanently stationing troops in the actual locality where their assistance may be needed. It has been recognized ever since the Crimean War, that the leading principle of barrack policy must, in the future, be to facilitate in peace time the training of the army for war, and that this can only be done by quartering troops in large bodies, including all branches of the service, in positions where they have space for training, gun and rifle practice, and manœuvring. The camps at Aldershot, Colchester, Shorncliffe and Curragh were accordingly started between 1856 and 1860, and the same policy has since been continued by the acquisition of Strensall Common, near York, Kilworth domain, near Fermoy, the lease of a portion of Dartmoor and a large area at Glen Imaal in Co. Wicklow, and the purchase of the Stobs estate in Scotland and of a large part of Salisbury Plain.

Location of Barracks.—Choosing a healthy site for a barrack building or new military station is very important. In the early days of barrack construction, barracks were often built in large towns for political reasons, so troops would be close by to manage disturbances. These were cramped, inconvenient multi-story buildings on small plots of land, frequently surrounded by the worst slums of the city; examples include the Ship Street barracks in Dublin and the cavalry barracks at Hulme, Manchester. Even worse were instances where existing buildings, like the Linen Hall in Dublin, were purchased and converted into barracks with little consideration for the comfort of the occupants, completely overlooking the need for a good flow of fresh air, which is essential for health. Nowadays, except in a few cases where strong local influence keeps troops in towns due to a sense of patriotism or economic reasons, efforts are made to relocate troops away from crowded towns and into barracks or huts built in open areas. This allows for better sanitary conditions and more effective military training. Thanks to improvements in transportation like rail, road, and telegraph, support for civil authorities during disturbances can always be provided in a timely manner without needing to keep troops stationed permanently in the area where assistance may be required. Since the Crimean War, it has been understood that the main aim of barrack policy should be to prepare the army for war during peacetime, which can only be achieved by housing troops in large groups, including all branches of service, in places with enough space for training, target practice, and maneuvering. As a result, camps at Aldershot, Colchester, Shorncliffe, and Curragh were established between 1856 and 1860, and this approach has continued with the acquisition of Strensall Common near York, Kilworth Domain near Fermoy, a lease of part of Dartmoor, a large area at Glen Imaal in Co. Wicklow, the purchase of the Stobs estate in Scotland, and a significant part of Salisbury Plain.

Barrack Construction.—The history of barrack construction in Great Britain is an interesting study, but can only be touched on briefly. As long as operations in the field were carried on by troops levied especially for the war in hand, no barracks apart from fortifications were required, except those for the royal bodyguard; and even after the standing army exceeded those limits, the necessity for additional barracks was often avoided by having recourse to the device of billeting, i.e. quartering the soldiers on the populations of the towns where they were posted. This, however, was a device burdensome to the people, subversive of discipline, and prejudicial to military efficiency in many ways, while it exposed the scattered soldiers to many temptations to disloyalty. Hence barracks were gradually provided, at first in places where such an arrangement was most necessary owing to the paucity of the population, or where concentration of troops was most important, owing to the disaffection of some of the inhabitants. The earliest barracks of which there is any record as regards England, were those for the foot guards, erected in 1660. Among the earliest of those still existing are the Royal Barracks at Dublin, dating from 1700, and during the 18th century barracks were built in several parts of Ireland; but in England it was at the end of the 18th and beginning of the 19th century that most of the earlier barracks were constructed. So long as barracks were mainly in connexion with fortresses their construction naturally fell to the duty of the King's Engineers, afterwards the Corps of Engineers, working under the master-general of the ordnance. About 1796, however, a special civil department was formed under the commissioners for the affairs of barracks, to deal with barracks apart from fortifications. In 1816 we find a warrant appointing a civilian comptroller of the barrack department to deal with the erection and upkeep of barracks and barrack hospitals not within fortified places. This warrant gives one of the earliest records of the nature of accommodation provided, and a few extracts from it are worth notice. No definite regulations as to cubic or floor space per man are laid down; but in the infantry, twelve men, and in the cavalry, eight men are allotted to one room. "Bedsteads or berths" are allowed, "a single one to each man, or a double one to two men," or "hammocks where necessary." The married soldier's wife is barely recognized, as shown by the following extract:—"The Comptroller of the barrack department may, if he sees fit, and when it in no shape interferes with or straitens the accommodation of the men, permit (as an occasional indulgence, and as tending to promote cleanliness, and the convenience of the soldier) four married women per troop or company of sixty men, and six per troop or company of a hundred men, to be resident within the barracks; but no one article shall on this account be furnished by the barrack-masters, upon any consideration whatever. And if the barrack-masters perceive that any mischief, or damage, arises from such indulgence, the commanding officer shall, on their representation, displace such women. Nor shall any dogs be suffered to be kept in the rooms of any barrack or hospital." Another regulation says: "Where kitchens are provided for the soldiers, they shall not be allowed to dress their provisions in any other places." In about 1818 the civil barrack department was abolished on account of abuses which had grown up, and the duke of Wellington as master-general of the ordnance and commander-in-chief transferred to the corps of Royal Engineers the duties of construction and maintenance of barracks. In 1826 a course of practical architecture was started at the school of military engineering at Chatham under Lieutenant-Colonel (afterwards Sir Charles) Pasley, the first commandant of the school, who himself wrote an outline of the course. Wellington interested himself in the [v.03 p.0430]barrack question, and under his orders single iron bedsteads were substituted for the wooden berths, two tiers high, in which two men slept in the same bed, then a certain cubical space per man was allotted, and cook-houses and ablution-rooms were added. Next, sergeants' messes were started, and ball courts allowed for the recreation of the men. It was not, however, till after the Crimean War that public attention was directed by the report dated 1857 of the royal commission on the sanitary state of the army, to the high death-rate, and certain sanitary defects in barracks and hospitals, such as overcrowding, defective ventilation, bad drainage and insufficient means of cooking and cleanliness, to which this excessive mortality was among other causes assigned.

Barrack Construction.—The history of barrack construction in Great Britain is an intriguing topic, but can only be briefly summarized. As long as military operations were conducted by troops specifically raised for a particular war, there was little need for barracks outside of fortifications, except for those designated for the royal bodyguard. Even when the standing army grew beyond this, the demand for additional barracks was often sidestepped by using billeting, i.e. housing soldiers with the local populations of the towns where they were stationed. This practice, however, placed a heavy burden on the people, undermined discipline, and harmed military efficiency in various ways while exposing scattered soldiers to temptations that could lead to disloyalty. Consequently, barracks began to be gradually established, initially in areas where their presence was most critical due to low population density or where troop concentration was vital due to local unrest. The oldest recorded barracks in England were those for the foot guards, built in 1660. Among the earliest still in existence are the Royal Barracks in Dublin, dating from 1700, and during the 18th century, barracks were constructed in several parts of Ireland. However, in England, most of the earlier barracks were built towards the end of the 18th century and the beginning of the 19th century. For as long as barracks were primarily associated with fortresses, their construction naturally fell to the King's Engineers, later known as the Corps of Engineers, working under the master-general of the ordnance. Around 1796, a special civil department was established under the commissioners for barrack affairs to manage barracks independent of fortifications. In 1816, a warrant appointed a civilian comptroller of the barrack department to oversee the building and maintenance of barracks and barrack hospitals outside fortified locations. This warrant provides one of the earliest records regarding the types of accommodations available, and a few excerpts from it are noteworthy. There are no specific regulations regarding cubic or floor space per man mentioned; however, in the infantry, twelve men and in the cavalry, eight men are assigned to one room. "Bedsteads or berths" are permitted, "a single one for each man, or a double one for two men," or "hammocks where necessary." The married soldier's wife is barely acknowledged, as shown by the following excerpt:—"The Comptroller of the barrack department may, at his discretion, and when it does not interfere with the accommodations for the men, allow (as an occasional privilege, intended to promote cleanliness and the convenience of the soldier) four married women per troop or company of sixty men, and six per troop or company of a hundred men, to live within the barracks; but no single item shall be supplied by the barrack masters for this reason. If the barrack masters notice any problems or damages arising from such allowances, the commanding officer shall, upon their recommendation, remove these women. Moreover, no dogs shall be allowed in the rooms of any barrack or hospital." Another regulation states: "Where kitchens are available for the soldiers, they shall not be permitted to prepare their food anywhere else." Around 1818, the civil barrack department was dismantled due to abuses that had developed, and the Duke of Wellington, as master-general of the ordnance and commander-in-chief, assigned the responsibility for constructing and maintaining barracks to the Royal Engineers. In 1826, a practical architecture course was initiated at the school of military engineering in Chatham under Lieutenant-Colonel (later Sir Charles) Pasley, the first commandant of the school, who himself created an outline of the course. Wellington took an interest in the barrack issue, and under his direction, single iron bedsteads replaced the wooden berths, arranged in two tiers, in which two men shared a bed. This was followed by establishing a certain cubic space per man, as well as the addition of cookhouses and washing rooms. Next, sergeants' messes were introduced, and ball courts were provided for the recreation of the men. However, it was not until after the Crimean War that the public's attention was drawn to the high death rate and certain sanitary issues in barracks and hospitals, such as overcrowding, poor ventilation, inadequate drainage, and insufficient facilities for cooking and cleanliness, which contributed to this excessive mortality, as highlighted by the 1857 report of the royal commission on the sanitary state of the army.

In 1857 a commission appointed for improving the sanitary condition of barracks and hospitals made an exhaustive inspection of the barracks in the United Kingdom, and reported in 1861. This was followed by similar commissions to examine the barracks in the Mediterranean stations and in India. These commissions, besides making valuable recommendations for the improvement of almost every barrack inspected by them, laid down the general sanitary principles applicable to the arrangement and construction of military barracks and hospitals; and in spite of the lapse of time, the reports repay close study by any one interested in sanitary science as applied to the construction and improvement of such buildings. The names of Sidney Herbert (afterwards Lord Herbert of Lea), Captain (afterwards Sir Douglas) Gallon, R.E., and John Sutherland, M.D., stand out prominently among those who contributed to the work. The commission was constituted a standing body in 1862, and continues its work to the present day, under the name of the Army Sanitary Committee, which advises the secretary of state for war on all sites for new barracks or hospitals, also upon type plans, especially as to sanitary details, and principles of sanitary construction and fitments. A definite standard of accommodation was laid down, which formed the basis of the first issue of the Barrack Synopsis in 1865. A general order dated 1845 had directed that a space of 450 to 500 cub. ft. per man should be provided in all new barracks at home stations; but this had not been applied in existing barracks or buildings appropriated as such, and when detailed examination was made, it was found that some men had actually less than 250 cub. ft., and out of accommodation for nominally 76,813 soldiers, 2003 only had 600 cub. ft. per man, which was the minimum scale now laid down by the royal commission of 1857. To give every soldier his allotted amount of 600 cub. ft., meant a reduction in accommodation of the barracks by nearly one-third the number. Many buildings were condemned as being entirely unsuitable for use as barracks; in other cases improvements were possible by alterations to buildings and opening-up of sites. Ventilation of the rooms was greatly improved, cook-houses, ablution-rooms and sanitary accessories were carefully examined and a proper scale laid down. Separate quarters for the married soldiers did not exist in many barracks, and in some instances married men's beds were found in the men's barrack-rooms without even a screen to separate them; in other cases, married people were accommodated together in a barrack-room, with only a blanket hung on a cord as a screen between the different families. The recommendations of the committee resulted in a single room being allotted to all married soldiers, and this accommodation has gradually improved up to the comfortable cottage now provided.

In 1857, a commission was set up to improve the sanitary conditions of barracks and hospitals, conducting a thorough inspection of barracks across the United Kingdom and reporting back in 1861. This was followed by similar commissions that examined barracks in the Mediterranean stations and in India. These commissions not only made valuable recommendations for improving nearly every barrack they inspected but also established general sanitary principles that applied to the design and construction of military barracks and hospitals. Even today, their reports are worth studying for anyone interested in sanitary science as it relates to the construction and enhancement of such buildings. Key figures like Sidney Herbert (later Lord Herbert of Lea), Captain (later Sir Douglas) Gallon, R.E., and John Sutherland, M.D., played significant roles in this work. The commission became a permanent body in 1862 and continues its work today under the name of the Army Sanitary Committee, which advises the Secretary of State for War on sites for new barracks or hospitals, as well as on design plans, especially regarding sanitary details and principles of sanitary construction and fittings. A specific standard of accommodation was established, forming the basis of the first issue of the Barrack Synopsis in 1865. A general order from 1845 stated that each soldier should have a space of 450 to 500 cubic feet in all new barracks at home stations; however, this was not applied to existing barracks or repurposed buildings. When a detailed examination was conducted, it was found that some soldiers had less than 250 cubic feet of space, and of the accommodation provided for 76,813 soldiers, only 2,003 had the minimum of 600 cubic feet per man, as established by the royal commission of 1857. To allocate each soldier their required 600 cubic feet meant reducing the barracks' accommodation by nearly one-third. Many buildings were deemed entirely unsuitable for barracks; in other cases, improvements were possible through alterations and site openings. The ventilation of the rooms was greatly enhanced, and cookhouses, washrooms, and sanitary facilities were thoroughly examined, leading to the development of proper standards. Many barracks did not have separate quarters for married soldiers, and in some cases, married men’s beds were found in the male barrack-rooms without even a screen for privacy. In other instances, families were housed together in one barrack-room with only a blanket suspended as a divider. The committee's recommendations led to a single room being assigned to all married soldiers, and this accommodation has gradually improved to the comfortable cottages available now.

From the time of this first thorough inquiry into barrack accommodation, steady and systematic progress has been made. Although lack of funds has always hampered rapid progress, and keeps the accommodation actually existing below the standard aimed at, much has been done to improve the soldiers' condition in this respect. Numerous regimental depots and other barracks were built under the Military Forces Localization Act of 1872. The Barracks Act of 1890 replaced the worn-out huts at Aldershot, Colchester, Shorncliffe and Curragh by convenient and sanitary permanent buildings, and further additions and improvements have been made under the Military Works Acts of 1897, 1899 and 1901. As some evidence of the practical result of the care and money that has been expended on this work, it is interesting to note that while, in 1857, the annual rate of mortality in the army at home per 1000 men was 17.5 (compared with 9.2 for the civil male population of corresponding age), forty years later, in 1897, the rate of mortality in the army was only 3.42 per 1000. No doubt, improved barrack accommodation contributed greatly to this result. Barrack construction work remained in the hands of the Corps of Royal Engineers until 1904, when a civil department was again formed under an architect styled "director of barrack construction," to deal with the construction of barracks at home stations, and the construction and maintenance of military hospitals.

From the time of this first thorough investigation into barrack accommodations, steady and systematic progress has been made. Although a lack of funds has always hindered rapid advancements and kept the existing accommodations below the desired standard, much has been accomplished to enhance the soldiers' living conditions. Numerous regimental depots and other barracks were constructed under the Military Forces Localization Act of 1872. The Barracks Act of 1890 replaced the outdated huts at Aldershot, Colchester, Shorncliffe, and Curragh with modern, sanitary permanent buildings, and further additions and improvements have been made under the Military Works Acts of 1897, 1899, and 1901. As evidence of the practical results of the care and funding that has been put into this work, it's notable that while, in 1857, the annual mortality rate in the army at home was 17.5 per 1000 men (compared to 9.2 for the civilian male population of the same age), forty years later, in 1897, the mortality rate in the army dropped to just 3.42 per 1000. Improved barrack accommodations undoubtedly played a major role in this outcome. Barrack construction work remained under the control of the Corps of Royal Engineers until 1904, when a civil department was re-established under an architect called the "director of barrack construction" to manage the building of barracks at home stations and the construction and maintenance of military hospitals.

British Colonial.—Barracks at colonial stations are governed by the general scale of accommodation in the Barrack Synopsis, modified according to the climate of the station, in the direction of increase in floor area and height of rooms. In the planning of rooms for occupation in tropical or sub-tropical countries provision has to be made for the freest possible circulation of air through the buildings. The walls have to be protected by verandahs from the direct rays of the sun, and the special local domestic arrangements have to be taken into consideration. For example, in hot countries it is usually undesirable to have kitchens directly attached to the dwelling-houses, sanitary arrangements vary according to the method's adopted, and in some cases it is necessary to provide a free circulation of air below the ground floors of all inhabited buildings by raising them off the ground some 4 ft. The aspect of the buildings will usually be arranged so as to catch the prevailing wind, and the mode of construction varies greatly according to the custom and resources of the country.

British Colonial.—Barracks at colonial stations follow the general guidelines in the Barrack Synopsis, adjusted based on the local climate to increase the floor area and ceiling height of rooms. When designing rooms for use in tropical or subtropical regions, it's important to ensure maximum air circulation throughout the buildings. Walls need protection from direct sunlight with verandas, and local living conditions must be taken into account. For instance, in hot climates, it's often not ideal to have kitchens directly connected to the living spaces, sanitation setups differ based on the chosen methods, and sometimes it's necessary to allow air to flow under the ground floors of occupied buildings by elevating them approximately 4 ft. The orientation of the buildings is typically arranged to catch the prevailing winds, and construction methods can vary significantly depending on local customs and available resources.

Indian Barracks.—In India, barracks for the British troops are built by the Royal Engineer officers detailed for military work duties, assisted by military foremen, who pass through the civil engineering colleges, and by a native subordinate staff. The scale of accommodation to be provided is laid down in the Indian army regulations, and is for the private soldier more liberal than is allowed by the home government for any of the colonial stations. The barrack-rooms are lofty and airy, with verandahs all round, and clerestory windows. Roofs are usually of double tiling. The allowance of space is 90 sq. ft. per man in rooms 16 ft. high, with, in addition, a day room adjoining for the use of the men for their meals or as a sitting-room. Recreation establishments are liberally provided for, and other means of recreation, such as bowling and skittle alleys, fives courts, plunge baths and cricket grounds, are given. Separate blocks of married quarters are provided, and schools for the children. Hospital accommodation on a higher scale than at home is necessary; but hill sanatoria have in recent years done much to improve the health of the troops by giving change of air, during the hot weather, to a large proportion of the men and families. Piped water supplies have replaced the old wells at many stations, and attention is being directed to improved cooking and sanitary arrangements.

Indian Barracks.—In India, barracks for British troops are built by Royal Engineer officers assigned to military tasks, along with military foremen who have gone through civil engineering colleges and a local support staff. The size of accommodations is specified in Indian army regulations and is more generous for enlisted soldiers than what the home government allows at any colonial stations. The barrack rooms are spacious and airy, featuring verandas all around and clerestory windows. Roofs are typically made of double tiles. Each soldier is allotted 90 sq. ft. in rooms that are 16 ft. high, plus an adjoining day room for meals or lounging. There are plenty of recreational facilities, including bowling and skittle alleys, fives courts, plunge baths, and cricket grounds. Separate blocks for married housing are provided, along with schools for children. Hospital facilities are generally better than those at home; however, hill sanatoria have considerably improved the health of troops in recent years by offering a change of air during hot weather for a large number of soldiers and their families. Many stations have replaced old wells with piped water supplies, and efforts are being made to enhance cooking and sanitation facilities.

Naval Barracks.—In recent years, large naval barracks have been built, notably at Portsmouth, Chatham and Devonport. These differ from military barracks principally in that they keep up the system of board-ship life to which the men are accustomed. Large barrack-rooms are provided with caulked floors like ships' decks, and have rows of hammocks slung across them; these are stowed in the day-time, when the rooms are used as mess-rooms. Ablution and sanitary arrangements are grouped together on the basement floors. Fine recreation establishments and canteens have been built. The officers' messes have splendid public rooms, but the officers' quarters are not so large as in military barracks, though no doubt spacious to the naval officer, accustomed as he is to a small cabin. Married quarters for the men are not provided except in connexion with coastguard stations.

Naval Barracks.—Recently, large naval barracks have been constructed, particularly in Portsmouth, Chatham, and Devonport. These barracks are different from military barracks mainly because they maintain the system of shipboard life that the sailors are used to. Spacious barrack rooms have caulked floors similar to ship decks and feature rows of hammocks hanging across them; these hammocks are stowed away during the day when the rooms are used as mess areas. Washroom and sanitation facilities are grouped together on the lower floors. Great recreation facilities and canteens have been established. The officers' messes have impressive public rooms, but the officers' quarters are not as large as those in military barracks, although they are probably spacious enough for a naval officer accustomed to a small cabin. Married quarters for the sailors are not available except in relation to coastguard stations.

Other Countries.—A great number of the German and French barracks are erected in the form of a large block of three or four storeys containing all the accommodation and accessories for officers, married and single non-commissioned officers and men, of a complete battalion or regiment in one building. Some of the [v.03 p.0431]modern barracks, however, are arranged more on the pavilion system with separate blocks; but the single block system is well liked on account of its compactness and the facility it gives for supervision; it is also more satisfactory from the architectural point of view. The system of allotment and arrangement of accommodation for these two great armies does not differ much, except in detail, from that adopted by the British army. The floor and cubic space allotted per man is a little less; accommodation for officers is not usually provided, except to a limited extent, unless the barracks are on a country site. The German army, however, now provides every regiment with a fine officers' mess-house furnished at the public expense. Married quarters for some of the non-commissioned officers are provided, but not for privates. American barracks are interesting, as providing for perhaps a higher class of recruit than usual; they are well designed and superior finish internally is given. The barracks are arranged usually on the separate block system, and centre round a post-exchange or soldiers' club, which is a combined recreation establishment, gymnasium and sergeants' mess, with bath-house attached. Canteens for the sale of liquor were abolished in 1901.

Other Countries.—Many German and French barracks are built as large blocks of three or four stories that house all the facilities for officers, married and single non-commissioned officers, and soldiers of an entire battalion or regiment in one building. However, some modern barracks are designed using a pavilion system with separate blocks; yet, the single block layout is preferred due to its compactness and ease of supervision, and it is also more visually appealing from an architectural standpoint. The way accommodations are allocated and arranged for these two major armies is quite similar, except for some details, to what is done by the British army. The amount of floor and cubic space assigned per person is slightly less. Accommodations for officers are usually limited unless the barracks are situated in a rural location. However, the German army now provides each regiment with a well-equipped officers' mess hall funded by the government. Married quarters are available for some non-commissioned officers but not for privates. American barracks are notable for accommodating potentially a higher caliber of recruit than typical; they are well-designed and have superior interior finishes. The barracks are generally organized using a separate block system and are centered around a post-exchange or soldiers' club, which serves as a combined recreation venue, gym, and sergeants' mess, with an attached bathhouse. Canteens selling alcohol were abolished in 1901.

See The Barrack Synopsis (1905); The Handbook of Design and Construction of Military Buildings (1905); The Army Regulations, India, vol. xii.

See The Barrack Synopsis (1905); The Handbook of Design and Construction of Military Buildings (1905); The Army Regulations, India, vol. xii.

(E. N. S.)

(E. N. S.)

BARRANDE, JOACHIM (1799-1883), Austrian geologist and palaeontologist, was born at Saugues, Haute Loire, on the 11th of August 1799, and educated in the École Polytechnique at Paris. Although he had received the training of an engineer, his first appointment was that of tutor to the duc de Bordeaux (afterwards known as the comte de Chambord), grandson of Charles X., and when the king abdicated in 1830, Barrande accompanied the royal exiles to England and Scotland, and afterwards to Prague. Settling in that city in 1831, he became occupied in engineering works, and his attention was then attracted to the fossils from the Lower Palaeozoic rocks of Bohemia. The publication in 1839 of Murchison's Silurian System incited Barrande to carry on systematic researches on the equivalent strata in Bohemia. For ten years (1840-1850) he made a detailed study of these rocks, engaging workmen specially to collect fossils, and in this way he obtained upwards of 3500 species of graptolites, brachiopoda, mollusca, crustacea (particularly trilobites) and fishes. The first volume of his great work, Système silurien du centre de la Bohême (dealing with trilobites), appeared in 1852; and from that date until 1881, he issued twenty-one quarto volumes of text and plates. Two other volumes were issued after his death in 1887 and 1894. It is estimated that he spent nearly £10,000 on these works. In addition he published a large number of separate papers. In recognition of his important researches the Geological Society of London in 1855 awarded to him the Wollaston medal.

BARRANDE, JOACHIM (1799-1883), an Austrian geologist and paleontologist, was born in Saugues, Haute Loire, on August 11, 1799, and educated at the École Polytechnique in Paris. Although he trained as an engineer, his first job was as a tutor to the duc de Bordeaux (later known as the comte de Chambord), the grandson of Charles X. When the king abdicated in 1830, Barrande accompanied the royal exiles to England, Scotland, and later to Prague. After settling in Prague in 1831, he worked on engineering projects, but soon became interested in the fossils found in the Lower Paleozoic rocks of Bohemia. The publication of Murchison's Silurian System in 1839 inspired Barrande to conduct systematic research on the equivalent rock layers in Bohemia. For ten years (1840-1850), he thoroughly studied these rocks, hiring workers specifically to collect fossils, and in this way, he gathered over 3,500 species of graptolites, brachiopods, mollusks, crustaceans (especially trilobites), and fish. The first volume of his major work, Système silurien du centre de la Bohême (focused on trilobites), was published in 1852; from that point until 1881, he released twenty-one quarto volumes of text and illustrations. Two more volumes were published posthumously in 1887 and 1894. It's estimated that he spent nearly £10,000 on these works, and he also published a significant number of individual papers. In recognition of his important research, the Geological Society of London awarded him the Wollaston medal in 1855.

The term Silurian was employed by Barrande, after Murchison, in a more comprehensive sense than was justified by subsequent knowledge. Thus the Silurian rocks of Bohemia were divided into certain stages (A to H)—the two lowermost, A and B without fossils (Azoic), succeeded by the third stage, C, which included the primordial zone, since recognized as part of the Cambrian of Sedgwick. The fourth stage (Étage D), the true lower Silurian, was described by Barrande as including isolated patches of strata with organic remains like those of the Upper Silurian. These assemblages of fossils were designated "Colonies," and regarded as evidence of the early introduction into the area of species from neighbouring districts, that became locally extinct, and reappeared in later stages. The interpretation of Barrande was questioned in 1854 by Edward Forbes, who pointed to the disturbances, overturns and crumplings in the older rocks as affording a more reasonable explanation of the occurrence of strata with newer fossils amid those containing older ones. Other geologists subsequently questioned the doctrine of "Colonies." In 1880 Dr J. E. Marr, from a personal study in the field, brought forward evidence to show that the repetitions of the fossiliferous strata on which the "Colonies" were based were due to faults. The later stages of Barrande, F, G and H, have since been shown by Emanuel Friedrich Heinrich Kayser (b. 1845) to be Devonian.

The term Silurian was used by Barrande, following Murchison, in a broader way than later knowledge warranted. The Silurian rocks of Bohemia were split into several stages (A to H)—the two lowest, A and B, lacking fossils (Azoic), followed by the third stage, C, which included the primordial zone, now recognized as part of the Cambrian period identified by Sedgwick. The fourth stage (Stage D), the actual lower Silurian, was described by Barrande as containing isolated patches of rock with organic remains resembling those of the Upper Silurian. These groups of fossils were labeled "Colonies" and viewed as evidence of early species from neighboring areas that went extinct locally but reappeared in later stages. In 1854, Edward Forbes challenged Barrande's interpretation, suggesting that the disturbances, overturns, and folds in the older rocks provided a more sensible explanation for the presence of strata with newer fossils mixed among those with older ones. Other geologists later disputed the "Colonies" concept. In 1880, Dr. J. E. Marr, based on his own field studies, presented evidence to show that the repeated fossil-rich strata that formed the basis for the "Colonies" were actually the result of faults. Emanuel Friedrich Heinrich Kayser (b. 1845) has since demonstrated that Barrande's later stages, F, G, and H, are actually Devonian.

Despite these modifications in the original groupings of the strata, it is recognized that Barrande "made Bohemia classic ground for the study of the oldest fossiliferous formations." He died at Frohsdorf on the 5th of October 1883.

Despite these changes in the original groupings of the layers, it is acknowledged that Barrande "made Bohemia a classic area for studying the oldest fossil-rich formations." He passed away in Frohsdorf on October 5, 1883.

See "Sketch of the Life of Joachim Barrande," Geol. Mag. (1883), p. 529 (with portrait).

See "Sketch of the Life of Joachim Barrande," Geol. Mag. (1883), p. 529 (with portrait).

BARRANQUILLA, a city and port of Colombia, South America, capital of a province of the same name in the department of Atlantico, on the left bank of the Magdalena river about 7 m. above its mouth and 18½ m. by rail from its seaport, Puerto Colombia. Pop. (est. 1902) 31,000. Owing to a dangerous bar at the mouth of the Magdalena the trade of the extensive territory tributary to that river, which is about 60% of that of the entire country, must pass in great part through Barranquilla and its seaport, making it the principal commercial centre of the republic. Savanilla was used as a seaport until about 1890, when shoals caused by drifting sands compelled a removal to Puerto Colombia, a short distance westward, where a steel pier, 4000 ft. in length, has been constructed to facilitate the handling of freight. The navigation of the Magdalena is carried on by means of light-draught steamboats which ascend to Yeguas, 14 m. below Honda, where goods are transhipped by rail to the latter place, and thence by pack animals to Bogotá, or by smaller boats to points farther up the river. Barranquilla was originally founded in 1629, but attracted no attention as a commercial centre until about the middle of the 19th century, when efforts were initiated to secure the trade passing through Cartagena. The city is built on a low plain, is regularly laid out, and has many fine warehouses, public buildings and residences, but its greater part, however, consists of mud-walled cabins supported by bamboo (guadua) framework and thatched with rushes. The water-supply is drawn from the Magdalena, and the city is provided with telephone, electric light and tram services. Owing to periodical inundations, the surrounding country is but little cultivated, and the greater part of the population, which is of the mixed type common to the lowlands of Columbia, is engaged in no settled productive occupation.

BARRANQUILLA, a city and port in Colombia, South America, is the capital of a province with the same name in the department of Atlantico. It sits on the left bank of the Magdalena River about 7 miles upstream from its mouth and 18½ miles by rail from its seaport, Puerto Colombia. Population (est. 1902) is 31,000. Due to a dangerous sandbar at the mouth of the Magdalena, a significant portion of the trade from the extensive territory that relies on this river—about 60% of the entire country's trade—must go through Barranquilla and its seaport, making it the main commercial hub of the republic. Savanilla served as a seaport until around 1890, when shoals caused by drifting sands forced a move to Puerto Colombia, a short distance to the west, where a 4,000-foot steel pier was constructed to help with freight handling. The Magdalena is navigated by light-draught steamboats that travel up to Yeguas, 14 miles below Honda, where goods are transferred to rail and sent to Honda, and then either carried by pack animals to Bogotá or transported by smaller boats further up the river. Barranquilla was originally founded in 1629, but it didn't become notable as a commercial center until around the mid-19th century, when efforts were made to attract trade away from Cartagena. The city is built on a low plain, is well-planned, and features many impressive warehouses, public buildings, and residences. However, much of it is made up of mud-walled cabins supported by bamboo (guadua) frameworks and thatched with rushes. The water supply comes from the Magdalena, and the city has telephone, electric light, and tram services. Due to periodic flooding, the surrounding area is minimally cultivated, and most of the population, which is of the mixed type typical of the lowlands of Colombia, is not engaged in any steady productive work.

BARRAS, PAUL FRANÇOIS NICOLAS, Comte de (1755-1829), member of the French Directory of 1795-1799, was descended from a noble family of Provence, and was born at Fox-Amphoux. At the age of sixteen he entered the regiment of Languedoc as "gentleman cadet," but embarked for India in 1776. After an adventurous voyage he reached Pondicherry and shared in the defence of that city, which ended in its capitulation to the British on the 18th of October 1778. The garrison being released, Barras returned to France. After taking part in a second expedition to the East Indies in 1782-1783, he left the army and occupied the following years with the frivolities congenial to his class and to his nature. At the outbreak of the Revolution in 1789, he espoused the democratic cause, and became one of the administrators of the department of the Var. In June 1792 he took his seat in the high national court at Orleans; and later in that year, on the outbreak of war with the kingdom of Sardinia, he became commissioner to the French army of Italy, and entered the Convention (the third of the national assemblies of France) as a deputy for the department of the Var. In January 1793 he voted with the majority for the death of Louis XVI. Much of his time, however, was spent in missions to the districts of the south-east of France; and in this way he made the acquaintance of Bonaparte at the siege of Toulon. As an example of the incorrectness of the Barras Memoirs we may note that the writer assigned 30,000 men to the royalist defending force, whereas it was less than 12,000; he also sought to minimize the share taken by Bonaparte in the capture of that city.

BARRAS, PAUL FRANÇOIS NICOLAS, Count of (1755-1829), was a member of the French Directory from 1795 to 1799. He came from a noble family in Provence and was born in Fox-Amphoux. At sixteen, he joined the Languedoc regiment as a "gentleman cadet" but set sail for India in 1776. After an eventful journey, he arrived in Pondicherry and participated in the defense of the city, which fell to the British on October 18, 1778. Once the garrison was released, Barras returned to France. Following a second trip to the East Indies in 1782-1783, he left the military and spent the next few years indulging in the pastimes typical of his class and personality. When the Revolution began in 1789, he supported the democratic movement and became an administrator for the Var department. In June 1792, he joined the high national court in Orleans, and later that year, after war broke out with the Kingdom of Sardinia, he became commissioner to the French army in Italy and entered the Convention (the third national assembly of France) as a deputy for the Var department. In January 1793, he voted with the majority for the execution of Louis XVI. Nevertheless, he spent much of his time on missions to the southeastern districts of France, where he met Bonaparte during the siege of Toulon. An example of the inaccuracies in the Barras Memoirs is that the author claimed there were 30,000 royalist defenders, while the actual number was below 12,000; he also tried to downplay Bonaparte's role in capturing the city.

In 1794 Barras sided with the men who sought to overthrow the Robespierre faction, and their success in the coup d'état of 9 Thermidor (27th of July) brought him almost to the front rank. In the next year, when the Convention was threatened by the malcontent National Guards of Paris, it appointed Barras to command the troops engaged in its defence. His nomination of Bonaparte as one of his subalterns led to the adoption of vigorous measures, which ensured the dispersion of the royalists and [v.03 p.0432]malcontents in the streets near the Tuileries, 13 Vendémiaire (5th of October 1795). Thereupon Barras became one of the five Directors who controlled the executive of the French republic. Owing to his intimate relations with Joséphine de Beauharnais, he helped to facilitate a marriage between her and Bonaparte; and many have averred, though on defective evidence, that Barras procured the appointment of Bonaparte to the command of the army of Italy early in the year 1796. The achievements of Bonaparte gave to the Directory a stability which it would not otherwise have enjoyed; and when in the summer of 1797 the royalist and constitutional opposition again gathered strength, Bonaparte sent General Augereau (q.v.), a headstrong Jacobin, forcibly to repress that movement by what was known as the coup d'état of 18 Fructidor (4th September). Barras and the violent Jacobins now carried matters with so high a hand as to render the government of the Directory odious; and Bonaparte had no difficulty in overthrowing it by the coup d'état of 18-19 Brumaire (9th-10th of November). Barras saw the need of a change and was to some extent (how far will perhaps never be known) an accomplice in Bonaparte's designs, though he did not suspect the power and ambition of their contriver. He was left on one side by the three Consuls who took the place of the five Directors and found his political career at an end. He had amassed a large fortune and spent his later years in voluptuous ease. Among the men of the Revolution few did more than Barras to degrade that movement. His immorality in both public and private life was notorious and contributed in no small degree to the downfall of the Directory, and with it of the first French Republic. Despite his profession of royalism in and after 1815, he remained more or less suspect to the Bourbons; and it was with some difficulty that the notes for his memoirs were saved from seizure on his death on the 29th of January 1829.

In 1794, Barras aligned himself with those aiming to take down the Robespierre faction, and their success in the coup d'état of 9 Thermidor (July 27) brought him nearly to the forefront. The following year, when the Convention faced threats from the discontented National Guards of Paris, it appointed Barras to lead the troops defending it. His choice of Bonaparte as one of his subordinates led to decisive actions that assured the dispersal of the royalists and [v.03 p.0432]troublemakers in the streets near the Tuileries on 13 Vendémiaire (October 5, 1795). After that, Barras became one of the five Directors who governed the executive branch of the French republic. Due to his close ties with Joséphine de Beauharnais, he helped arrange her marriage to Bonaparte; and many have claimed, albeit with shaky evidence, that Barras was responsible for getting Bonaparte appointed as the commander of the army in Italy early in 1796. Bonaparte's successes provided the Directory with a stability it wouldn't have had otherwise; however, in the summer of 1797, when the royalist and constitutional opposition gained momentum again, Bonaparte sent General Augereau (q.v.), a stubborn Jacobin, to forcefully suppress that movement in what became known as the coup d'état of 18 Fructidor (September 4). Barras and the extreme Jacobins acted with such arrogance that it made the Directory's government detestable, and Bonaparte easily overthrew it during the coup d'état of 18-19 Brumaire (November 9-10). Barras recognized the need for a change and was somewhat (how far remains uncertain) complicit in Bonaparte's plans, although he did not grasp the extent of Bonaparte's ambition. He was sidelined by the three Consuls who replaced the five Directors and found his political career coming to an end. Having accumulated a substantial fortune, he spent his later years in luxurious comfort. Among the leaders of the Revolution, few contributed more than Barras to tarnishing that movement. His notorious immorality in both public and private life played a significant role in the downfall of the Directory, and consequently, the first French Republic. Despite his professed royalism in and after 1815, he remained somewhat suspect to the Bourbons, and it was with difficulty that the notes for his memoirs were saved from confiscation upon his death on January 29, 1829.

Barras left memoirs in a rough state to be drawn up by his literary executor, M. Rousselin de St Albin. The amount of alteration which they underwent at his hands is not fully known; but M. George Duruy, who edited them on their publication in 1895, has given fairly satisfactory proofs of their genuineness. For other sources respecting Barras see the Memoirs of Gohier, Larevellière-Lépeaux and de Lescure; also Sciout, Le Directoire (4 vols., Paris, 1895-1897), A. Sorel, L'Europe et la Révolution française (esp. vols. v. and vi., Paris, 1903-1904), and A. Vandal, L'Avènement de Bonaparte (Paris, 1902-1904).

Barras left his memoirs in a rough form for his literary executor, M. Rousselin de St Albin, to finalize. The extent of the changes made by him isn't completely known; however, M. George Duruy, who edited them for publication in 1895, has provided fairly convincing evidence of their authenticity. For additional sources regarding Barras, see the Memoirs of Gohier, Larevellière-Lépeaux, and de Lescure; also, Sciout, Le Directoire (4 vols., Paris, 1895-1897), A. Sorel, L'Europe et la Révolution française (especially vols. v. and vi., Paris, 1903-1904), and A. Vandal, L'Avènement de Bonaparte (Paris, 1902-1904).

(J. Hl. R.)

(J. Hl. R.)

BARRATRY (O. Fr. bareter, barater, to barter or cheat), in English criminal law, the offence (more usually called common barratry) of constantly inciting and stirring up quarrels in disturbance of the peace, either in courts or elsewhere. It is an offence both at common law and by statute, and is punishable by fine and imprisonment. By a statute of 1726, if the person guilty of common barratry belonged to the profession of the law, he was disabled from practising in the future. It is a cumulative offence, and it is necessary to prove at least three commissions of the act. For nearly two centuries there had been no record of an indictment having been preferred for this offence, but in 1889 a case occurred at the Guildford summer assizes, R. v. Bellgrove (The Times, 8th July 1889). As, however, the defendant was convicted of another offence, the charge was not proceeded upon. (See Pollock and Maitland, History of English Law; Russell, Crimes and Misdemeanours; Stephen, Criminal Law.)

BARRATRY (O. Fr. bareter, barater, to barter or cheat), in English criminal law, the offense (more commonly called common barratry) of continually prompting and instigating disputes that disrupt the peace, either in courts or elsewhere. It is an offense recognized both at common law and by statute, punishable by fines and imprisonment. According to a statute from 1726, if someone guilty of common barratry was a member of the legal profession, they were barred from practicing law in the future. It is a cumulative offense, requiring proof of at least three instances of the act. For nearly two centuries, there had been no record of an indictment for this offense, but in 1889, a case emerged at the Guildford summer assizes, R. v. Bellgrove (The Times, 8th July 1889). However, since the defendant was convicted of another crime, the charge was not pursued. (See Pollock and Maitland, History of English Law; Russell, Crimes and Misdemeanours; Stephen, Criminal Law.)

In marine insurance barratry is any kind of fraud committed upon the owner or insurers of a ship by a master with the intention of benefiting himself at their expense. Continental jurists give a wider meaning to barratry, as meaning any wilful act by the master or crew, by whatever motive induced, whereby the owners or charterers are damnified. In bills of lading it is usual to except it from the shipowners' liability (see Affreightment).

In marine insurance, barratry refers to any type of fraud committed by a ship's captain against the owner or insurers, intended to benefit himself at their cost. Legal experts from the continent have a broader definition of barratry, considering it any intentional act by the captain or crew, regardless of their motives, that results in harm to the owners or charterers. In bills of lading, it’s common to exclude barratry from the shipowners' liability (see Chartering).

In Scotland, barratry is the crime committed by a judge who is induced by bribery to pronounce judgment.

In Scotland, barratry is the crime committed when a judge is bribed to deliver a judgment.

BARRÉ, ISAAC (1726-1802), British soldier and politician, was born at Dublin in 1726, the son of a French refugee. He was educated at Trinity College, Dublin, entered the army, and in 1759 was with Wolfe at the taking of Quebec, on which occasion he was wounded in the cheek. His entry into parliament in 1761 under the auspices of Lord Shelburne, who had selected him "as a bravo to run down Mr Pitt," was characterized by a virulent attack on Pitt, of whom, however, he became ultimately a devoted adherent. A vigorous opponent of the taxation of America, his mastery of invective was powerfully displayed in his championship of the American cause, and the name "Sons of Liberty," which he had applied to the colonists in one of his speeches, became a common designation of the American organizations directed against the Stamp Act, as well as of later patriotic clubs. His appointment in 1782 to the treasurership of the navy, which carried with it a pension of £3200 a year, at a time when the government was ostensibly advocating economy, caused great discontent; subsequently, however, he received from the younger Pitt the clerkship of the pells in place of the pension, which thus was saved to the public. Becoming blind, he retired from office in 1790 and died on the 20th of July 1802.

BARRÉ, ISAAC (1726-1802), British soldier and politician, was born in Dublin in 1726, the son of a French refugee. He was educated at Trinity College, Dublin, joined the army, and in 1759 served with Wolfe during the capture of Quebec, where he was wounded in the cheek. He entered parliament in 1761 with the support of Lord Shelburne, who had chosen him "as a tough guy to take on Mr. Pitt," and he initiated his political career with a fierce attack on Pitt, although he ultimately became a loyal supporter. A strong opponent of taxing America, he showcased his skill in rhetoric as he defended the American cause, and the term "Sons of Liberty," which he used to describe the colonists in one of his speeches, became a popular label for American groups opposing the Stamp Act, as well as later patriotic clubs. His appointment in 1782 as the treasurer of the navy, which included a pension of £3200 a year at a time when the government was publicly promoting frugality, caused significant displeasure; however, he later received the clerkship of the pells from the younger Pitt instead of the pension, which saved taxpayers' money. He became blind, retired from his position in 1790, and passed away on July 20, 1802.

BARRE, a city of Washington county, Vermont, U.S.A., in the north central part of the state, about 6 m. S.E. of Montpelier. Pop. (1890) 4146; (1900) 8448, of whom 2831 were foreign-born; (1910, census) 10,734. It is served by the Central Vermont and the Montpelier & Wells River railways, and is connected by electric street railways with Montpelier. Barre is an important seat of the granite industry, and manufactures monuments and tombstones, stone-cutting implements and other machinery. In 1905 the city's factory products were valued at $3,373,046, of which 86.9% was the value of the monuments and tombstones manufactured. Among its institutions are the Aldrich public library and Goddard Seminary (1870; Universalist). There is a beautiful granite statue of Burns (by J. Massey Rhind), erected in 1899 by the Scotsmen of Barre. The water-works are owned and operated by the municipality. Settled soon after the close of the War of Independence, the township of Barre (pop. in 1910, 4194) was organized in 1793 and named in honour of Isaac Barré (1726-1802), a defender of American rights in the British parliament. The present city, chartered in 1894, was originally a part of the township.

BARRE, a city in Washington County, Vermont, U.S.A., located in the north-central part of the state, about 6 miles southeast of Montpelier. Population (1890) 4,146; (1900) 8,448, of which 2,831 were foreign-born; (1910 census) 10,734. It is served by the Central Vermont and the Montpelier & Wells River railways, and is connected by electric streetcars to Montpelier. Barre is a key hub for the granite industry, manufacturing monuments, gravestones, stone-cutting tools, and other machinery. In 1905, the city's factory products were valued at $3,373,046, with 86.9% coming from the manufacturing of monuments and gravestones. Notable institutions include the Aldrich Public Library and Goddard Seminary (established in 1870; Universalist). There is a beautiful granite statue of Burns (by J. Massey Rhind), erected in 1899 by the Scotsmen of Barre. The waterworks are owned and operated by the city. Settled shortly after the end of the War of Independence, the township of Barre (population in 1910, 4,194) was established in 1793 and named in honor of Isaac Barré (1726-1802), a supporter of American rights in the British Parliament. The current city, chartered in 1894, was originally part of the township.

BARREL (a word of uncertain origin common to Romance languages; the Celtic forms, as in the Gaelic baraill, are derived from the English), a vessel of cylindrical shape, made of staves bound together by hoops, a cask; also a dry and liquid measure of capacity, varying with the commodity which it contains (see Weights and Measures). The term is applied to many cylindrical objects, as to the drum round which the chain is wound in a crane, a capstan or a watch; to the cylinder studded with pins in a barrel-organ or musical-box; to the hollow shaft in which the piston of a pump works; or to the tube of a gun. The "barrel" of a horse is that part of the body lying between the shoulders and the quarters. For the system of vaulting in architecture known as "barrel-vaulting" see Vault.

BARREL (a word of uncertain origin common in Romance languages; the Celtic forms, like the Gaelic baraill, are derived from the English), is a cylindrical container made of wooden staves bound together by metal rings, essentially a cask; it also refers to a unit of dry and liquid measurement, which varies depending on the material it holds (see Weights & Measurements). The term is used for many cylindrical items, such as the drum around which the chain is wound in a crane, a capstan, or a watch; the cylinder with pins found in a barrel organ or music box; the hollow shaft where a pump's piston moves; or the tube of a gun. The "barrel" of a horse describes the part of its body located between the shoulders and the hindquarters. For the architectural vaulting system known as "barrel-vaulting," see Safe.

BARREL-ORGAN (Eng. "grinder-organ," "street-organ," "hand-organ," "Dutch organ"; Fr. orgue de Barbarie, orgue d'Allemagne, orgue mécanique, cabinet d'orgue, serinette; Ger. Drehorgel, Leierkasten; Ital. organetto a manovella, organo tedesco), a small portable organ mechanically played by turning a handle. The barrel-organ owes its name to the cylinder on which the tunes are pricked out with pins and staples of various lengths, set at definite intervals according to the scheme required by the music. The function of these pins and staples is to raise balanced keys connected by simple mechanism with the valves of the pipes, which are thus mechanically opened, admitting the stream of air from the wind-chest. The handle attached to the shaft sets the cylinder in slow rotation by means of a worm working in a fine-toothed gear on the barrel-head; the same motion works the bellows by means of cranks and connecting rods on the shaft. The wind is thereby forced into a reservoir, whence it passes into the wind-chest, on the sides of which are grouped the pipes. The barrel revolves slowly from back to front, each revolution as a rule playing one complete tune. A notch-pin in the barrelhead, furnished with as many notches as there are tunes, enables the performer to shift the barrel and change the tune. The ordinary street barrel-organ had a compass varying from 24 to 34 notes, forming a diatonic scale with a few accidentals, generally F, G, C. There were usually two stops, one for the open pipes of metal, the other for the closed wooden pipes. Barrel-organs [v.03 p.0433]have been made with as many as three or four cylinders set in a circular revolving frame, but these more elaborate instruments were mainly used in churches[1] and chapels, a purpose for which they were in great demand for playing hymns, chants and voluntaries during the 18th and early 19th centuries. A barrel-organ was built for Fulham church by Wright, and a large instrument with four barrels was constructed by Bishop for Northallerton church in 1820.

BARREL-ORGAN (Eng. "grinder-organ," "street-organ," "hand-organ," "Dutch organ"; Fr. orgue de Barbarie, orgue d'Allemagne, orgue mécanique, cabinet d'orgue, serinette; Ger. Drehorgel, Leierkasten; Ital. organetto a manovella, organo tedesco), is a small portable organ that is played mechanically by turning a handle. The barrel-organ gets its name from the cylinder where the tunes are created using pins and staples of different lengths, arranged at specific intervals based on the musical pattern. These pins and staples lift balanced keys connected to simple mechanisms linked to the pipe valves, which then open mechanically to allow air from the wind-chest. The handle attached to the shaft slowly rotates the cylinder using a worm gear set on the barrel-head; this same motion operates the bellows through cranks and connecting rods on the shaft. The air is forced into a reservoir, from which it flows into the wind-chest, where the pipes are situated. The barrel turns slowly from back to front, usually playing one complete tune with each rotation. A notch-pin on the barrel head, featuring as many notches as there are tunes, lets the performer shift the barrel to change the tune. A standard street barrel-organ typically has a range of 24 to 34 notes, creating a diatonic scale with some accidentals, usually F, G, C. There were generally two stops, one for the open metal pipes and the other for the closed wooden pipes. Barrel-organs [v.03 p.0433]have been made with as many as three or four cylinders in a circular revolving frame, but these more complex instruments were mostly used in churches and chapels, where they were in high demand for playing hymns, chants, and voluntaries during the 18th and early 19th centuries. A barrel-organ was made for Fulham church by Wright, and a large instrument with four barrels was built by Bishop for Northallerton church in 1820.

Barrel-organ.

Fig. 1.—Large stationary barrel-organ worked by hydraulic power, from Solomon de Caus, Les Raisons des forces mouvantes (Frankfort-on-Main, 1615).

Fig. 1.—Large stationary barrel organ powered by hydraulics, from Solomon de Caus, Les Raisons des forces mouvantes (Frankfurt, 1615).

The origin of the barrel-organ is now clearly established, and many will doubtless be surprised to find that it must be sought in the Netherlands as early as the middle of the 15th century, and that accurate and detailed diagrams of every part of the mechanism for a large stationary barrel-organ worked by hydraulic power were published in 1615. There are letters patent preserved in the archives of Belgium appointing a certain organ-builder, Jehan van Steenken, dit Aren, "Master of organs which play of themselves"; in the original Flemish Meester van orgelen spelende bij hen selven.[2] This organ was not a portable one like English street organs, but a more imposing instrument, as we learn from other documents giving a detailed account of the moneys paid to Maistre Jehan for conveying the organs from Bruges to Brussels.[3] Steenken was, by virtue of the same letters patent, awarded an annual pension of fifty Rhenish florins in consideration of the services rendered to the duke of Burgundy, and on condition of his submitting to his liege Philip the Good all other instruments he might make in the future. There is nothing singular in the early date of this invention, for the 15th century was distinguished for the extraordinary impulse which the patronage and appreciation of the dukes of Burgundy gave to automatic contrivances of all kinds, carillons, clocks, speaking animals and other curiosities due to Flemish genius.[4] No contemporary illustration is forthcoming, but in 1615 Solomon de Caus, who avowedly owed his inspiration to Hero and Vitruvius, describes a number of hydraulic machines, amongst which is the barrel-organ,[5] illustrating his description by means of several large drawings and diagrams very carefully carried out. De Caus' organ, entitled "Machine par laquelle l'on fera sonner un jeu d'orgues par le moyen de l'eau," was built up on a wall a foot thick. In the illustrations the barrel is shown to be divided into bars, and each bar into eight beats for the quavers. The whole drum is pierced with holes at the intersecting points, the pins being movable, so that when the performer grew tired of one tune, he could re-arrange the pins to form another. The four bellows are set in motion by means of ropes strained over pulleys and attached to four cranks on the rotating shaft. Solomon de Caus lays no claim to the invention of this organ, but only to the adaptation of hydraulic power for revolving the drum; on the contrary, in a dissertation on the invention of hydraulic machines and organs, he states that there was evidently some difference between the organs of the ancients and those of his day, since there is no mention in the classics of any musical wheel by means of which tunes could be played in several parts—the ancients, indeed, seem to have used their fingers on the keyboard to sound their organs. The eighteen keys drawn in one diagram bear names, beginning at the left, D, C, B, A, G, F, F, E, D, C, B, A, G, F, E, D, C, B; De Caus states that only half the keyboard is given for want of space; the compass, therefore, probably was as shown, with a few accidentals. Notation: D6 to D2.A barrel-organ, also worked by hydraulic power, is somewhat fantastically drawn by Robert Fludd in a work[6] published two years after that of Solomon de Caus. This diagram is of no value except as a curiosity, for the author betrays a very imperfect knowledge of the mechanical principles involved. The piece of music actually set on de Caus' barrel-organ, six bars of which can be made out,[7] consists of a madrigal, "Chi fara fed' al ciel," by Alessandro Striggio, written in organ tablature by Peter Philips, organist of the Chapel Royal, Brussels, at the end of the 16th century.[8] A French barrel-organ[9] in the collection of the Brussels Conservatoire, bearing the date "5 Mars 1797," has the following compass with flats, beginning at the left:—

The origin of the barrel organ is now well established, and many will likely be surprised to find that it dates back to the Netherlands as early as the mid-15th century. Accurate and detailed diagrams of every part of a large stationary barrel organ powered by hydraulic energy were published in 1615. There are letters patent preserved in the archives of Belgium appointing a certain organ builder, Jehan van Steenken, dit Aren, "Master of organs that play by themselves"; in the original Flemish Meester van orgelen spelende bij hen selven. [2] This organ was not a portable one like English street organs but a more impressive instrument, as indicated by other documents detailing the payments made to Maistre Jehan for transporting the organs from Bruges to Brussels.[3] Steenken was granted an annual pension of fifty Rhenish florins by the same letters patent in recognition of his services to the duke of Burgundy, provided he submitted any other instruments he made in the future to his liege, Philip the Good. There is nothing unusual about the early date of this invention, as the 15th century was notable for the extraordinary drive that the dukes of Burgundy gave to automatic devices of various kinds—carillons, clocks, speaking animals, and other curiosities stemming from Flemish ingenuity.[4] No contemporary illustrations exist, but in 1615, Solomon de Caus, who openly credited his inspiration to Hero and Vitruvius, described several hydraulic machines, including the barrel organ,[5] and accompanied his description with several large, carefully executed drawings and diagrams. De Caus' organ, titled "Machine par laquelle l'on fera sonner un jeu d'orgues par le moyen de l'eau," was built into a wall a foot thick. In the illustrations, the barrel is divided into bars, and each bar is further divided into eight beats for the quavers. The whole drum has holes at the intersecting points, with movable pins, so when the performer wanted a change, they could rearrange the pins to play a different tune. The four bellows are operated by ropes over pulleys linked to four cranks on a rotating shaft. Solomon de Caus does not claim the invention of this organ but only the adaptation of hydraulic power to rotate the drum; in a dissertation about the invention of hydraulic machines and organs, he notes that there was evidently some difference between ancient organs and those of his time, as the classics do not mention any musical wheel that could play tunes in multiple parts—the ancients seem to have used their fingers on the keyboard. The eighteen keys shown in one diagram are labeled from the left as D, C, B, A, G, F, F, E, D, C, B, A, G, F, E, D, C, B; De Caus mentions that only half the keyboard is illustrated due to space limitations; thus, the range was likely as shown, with a few accidentals. Notation: D6 to D2. A barrel organ, also powered by hydraulic means, is somewhat whimsically illustrated by Robert Fludd in a work[6] published two years after Solomon de Caus' publication. However, this diagram lacks value except as a curiosity, as the author displays a very limited understanding of the mechanical principles involved. The piece of music represented on De Caus' barrel organ, of which six bars can be identified,[7] is a madrigal, "Chi fara fed' al ciel," by Alessandro Striggio, written in organ tablature by Peter Philips, the organist of the Chapel Royal in Brussels at the end of the 16th century.[8] A French barrel organ[9] in the collection of the Brussels Conservatoire, dated "5 Mars 1797," has the following range with flats, starting from the left:—

Notation: C6 B5b A5b F5 E5b D5 B4 A4 G4 E4 E6b B3b D6 E4b F4 A4b B4b C5 D5b E5 G5 A5 D6b B5.

Other evidences of the origin of the barrel-organ are not wanting. The inventory of the organs and other keyboard instruments belonging to the duke of Modena, drawn up in 1598, contains two entries of an organo Tedesco.[10] In England these organs were also known as "Dutch organs," and the name clung to the instrument even in its diminutive form of hand-organ of the itinerant musician. In Jedediah Morse's description of the [v.03 p.0434]manners and customs of the Netherlands,[11] we find the following allusion:—"The diversions of the Dutch differ not much from those of the English, who seem to have borrowed from them the neatness of their drinking booths, skittle and other grounds ... which form the amusements of the middle ranks, not to mention their hand-organs and other musical inventions." An illustration of the hand-organ of that period is given in Knight's London[12] being one of a collection of street views published by Dayes in 1789. In a description of Bartholomew Fair, as held at the beginning of the 18th century, is a further reference to the Dutch origin of the barrel-organ:—"A band at the west-end of the town, well known for playing on winter evenings before Spring Garden Coffee House, opposite Wigley's great exhibition room, consisted of a double drum, a Dutch organ, the tambourine, violin, pipes and the Turkish jingle used in the army. This band was generally hired at one of the booths of the fair."[13] Mr Thomas Brown relates that one Mr Stephens, a Poultry author, proposed to parliament for any one that should presume to keep an organ in a Publick House to be fined £20 and made incapable of being an ale-draper for the future.[14] In 1737 Horace Walpole writes[15]:—"I am now in pursuit of getting the finest piece of music that ever was heard; it is a thing that will play eight tunes. Handel and all the great musicians say that it is beyond anything they can do, and this may be performed by the most ignorant person, and when you are weary of those eight tunes, you may have them changed for any other that you like." The organ was put in a lottery and fetched £1000.

Other evidence regarding the origin of the barrel organ is available. The inventory of the organs and other keyboard instruments owned by the Duke of Modena, created in 1598, includes two entries for an organo Tedesco.[10] In England, these organs were also referred to as "Dutch organs," and the name stuck with the instrument even in its smaller version, the hand-organ used by street musicians. In Jedediah Morse's description of the [v.03 p.0434] customs and habits of the Netherlands,[11] there's a reference that says:—"The entertainment of the Dutch is not very different from that of the English, who seem to have picked up the neatness of their drinking stalls, skittle alleys, and other recreation areas... which make up the pastimes of the middle class, not to mention their hand-organs and other musical creations." An illustration of the hand-organ from that time can be found in Knight's London[12] as part of a series of street views published by Dayes in 1789. A description of Bartholomew Fair from the early 18th century further mentions the Dutch origin of the barrel organ:—"A band at the west end of town, well known for playing on winter evenings in front of Spring Garden Coffee House, across from Wigley's large exhibition room, had a double drum, a Dutch organ, tambourine, violin, pipes, and the Turkish jingle used in the army. This band was usually hired at one of the fair's booths."[13] Mr. Thomas Brown notes that a Mr. Stephens, an author from Poultry, proposed to Parliament that anyone who dared to keep an organ in a public house should be fined £20 and barred from being an ale-draper in the future.[14] In 1737, Horace Walpole wrote[15]:—"I am currently trying to obtain the finest piece of music ever heard; it's a device that plays eight tunes. Handel and other great musicians claim it's beyond anything they can create, and it can be played by the most inexperienced person. Once you tire of those eight tunes, you can swap them for any others you like." The organ was put into a lottery and sold for £1000.

There was a very small barrel-organ in use during the 18th and 19th centuries, known as the bird-organ (Fr. serinette, turlutaine, merline). One of these now in the collection of the Brussels Conservatoire is described by V. C. Mahillon.[16] The instrument is in the form of a book, on the back of which is the title "Le chant des oiseaux, Tome vi." There are ten pewter stopped pipes giving the scale of G with the addition of F and A two octaves higher. Notation: G4 A5.The whole instrument measures approximately 8 × 5½ × 2¾ in. and plays eight tunes. Mozart wrote an Andante[17] for a small barrel-organ.

There was a very small barrel organ used during the 18th and 19th centuries, known as the bird organ (Fr. serinette, turlutaine, merline). One of these, which is now part of the collection at the Brussels Conservatoire, is described by V. C. Mahillon.[16] The instrument looks like a book, with the title on the back reading "Le chant des oiseaux, Tome vi." It has ten pewter stopped pipes that produce the G scale, plus F and A two octaves higher. Notation: G4 A5. The whole instrument measures about 8 × 5½ × 2¾ inches and plays eight tunes. Mozart composed an Andante[17] for a small barrel organ.

For an illustration of the construction of the barrel-organ during the 18th century, consult P. M. D. J. Engramelle, La Tonotechnie ou l'art de noter les cylindres et tout ce qui est susceptible de notage dans les instruments de concerts méchaniques (Paris, 1775), with engravings (not in the British Museum); and for a clear diagram of the modern instrument the article on "Automatic Appliances connected with Music," by Dr. E. J. Hopkins, in Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians, vol. i. (1904), p. 134.

For an illustration of how the barrel-organ was made in the 18th century, check out P. M. D. J. Engramelle's La Tonotechnie ou l'art de noter les cylindres et tout ce qui est susceptible de notage dans les instruments de concerts méchaniques (Paris, 1775), which includes engravings (not available at the British Museum); and for a clear diagram of the modern instrument, see the article "Automatic Appliances connected with Music" by Dr. E. J. Hopkins in Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians, vol. i. (1904), p. 134.

(K. S.)

(K. S.)

[1] This practice had evidently not been adopted in Germany, as the following instance will show. The use of barrel-organs (Drehorgeln) in country churches was seriously recommended by an anonymous writer in two German papers at the beginning of the 19th century (Beobachter an der Spree, Berlin, 22nd October 1821, and in Markische Boten, Nos. 138 and 139, 1821). The organist Wilke of Leipzig published in reply an article in the Allgem. musik. Zeitung (1822, pp. 777 et seq.) in which "he very properly repudiated such a laughable recommendation."

[1] This practice clearly hadn't been adopted in Germany, as the following example demonstrates. An anonymous writer seriously suggested using barrel-organs (Drehorgeln) in rural churches in two German newspapers at the start of the 19th century (Beobachter an der Spree, Berlin, 22nd October 1821, and in Markische Boten, Nos. 138 and 139, 1821). In response, the organist Wilke from Leipzig published an article in the Allgem. musik. Zeitung (1822, pp. 777 et seq.) where "he quite rightly rejected such a ridiculous suggestion."

[2] Archives générales du royaume de Belgique, Chambre des Comptes, No. 2, 449 ro. cf. 52 ro.; and Edmund van der Straeten, La Musique aux Pays-Bas, vol. vii. pp. 230-232.

[2] General Archives of the Kingdom of Belgium, Court of Accounts, No. 2, 449 ro. cf. 52 ro.; and Edmund van der Straeten, The Music in the Netherlands, vol. vii. pp. 230-232.

[3] Van der Straeten, op. cit. p. 299.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Van der Straeten, source cited p. 299.

[4] Van der Straeten, op. cit. p. 231.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Van der Straeten, ibid. p. 231.

[5] Solomon de Caus, Les Raisons des forces mouvantes (Frankfort, 1615), problems 25, 28, 29, 30.

[5] Solomon de Caus, Les Raisons des forces mouvantes (Frankfort, 1615), problems 25, 28, 29, 30.

[6] Historia utriusque cosmi (Oppenheim, 1617), t. i., experimentum viii. p. 483.

[6] Historia utriusque cosmi (Oppenheim, 1617), t. i., experimentum viii. p. 483.

[7] Op. cit. problem 29 shows the arrangement of the bellows for the wind-supply. In problem 30 is drawn a large section of the barrel, showing six bars of music represented by the pin tablature, which can be actually deciphered by the help of the keyboard included in the drawing. These diagrams are admirably clear and of real technical value. A copy of this work is in the library of the British Museum.

[7] Op. cit. Problem 29 shows how the bellows are set up for supplying air. In problem 30, there's a large section of the barrel that displays six bars of music represented by the pin tablature, which can actually be decoded using the keyboard included in the drawing. These diagrams are very clear and truly valuable from a technical standpoint. A copy of this work is in the British Museum's library.

[8] See also E. van der Straeten, who has translated Philips' setting into modern notation, op. cit. t. vi. pp. 506 and 510.

[8] See also E. van der Straeten, who has translated Philips' score into modern notation, op. cit. t. vi. pp. 506 and 510.

[9] See V. C. Mahillon, Catalogue descriptif (Brussels, 1896), No. 1137, p. 371.

[9] See V. C. Mahillon, Descriptive Catalogue (Brussels, 1896), No. 1137, p. 371.

[10] Tedesco was applied by Italians to both German and Dutch. Count Valdrighi, Musurgiana I. Serandola, Pianoforte, Salterio (Modena, 1879), pp. 27 and 28; and E. van der Straeten, op. cit. vol. vi. p. 122.

[10] Tedesco was used by Italians to refer to both Germans and Dutch people. Count Valdrighi, Musurgiana I. Serandola, Pianoforte, Salterio (Modena, 1879), pp. 27 and 28; and E. van der Straeten, op. cit. vol. vi. p. 122.

[11] Jedediah Morse American Geography, part ii. p. 334 (Boston, Mass., 1796).

[11] Jedediah Morse American Geography, part ii. p. 334 (Boston, MA, 1796).

[12] Knight's London, vol. i. p. 144.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Knight's London, vol. 1, p. 144.

[13] Hone's Every Day Book, i. p. 1248.

[13] Hone's Every Day Book, i. p. 1248.

[14] Collection of all the Dialogues written by Mr Thomas Brown (London, 1704), p. 297.

[14] Collection of all the Dialogues written by Mr. Thomas Brown (London, 1704), p. 297.

[15] Hone's Every Day Book, ii. pp. 1452-1453.

[15] Hone's Every Day Book, ii. pp. 1452-1453.

[16] See Catalogue descriptif (Ghent, 1880), Nos. 461 and 462.

[16] See Descriptive Catalogue (Ghent, 1880), Nos. 461 and 462.

[17] Breitkopf and Härtel's Critically revised edition of Mozart's Works, series x. no. 10.

[17] Breitkopf and Härtel's Critically Revised Edition of Mozart's Works, series x. no. 10.

BARREN ISLAND, a volcanic island in the Bay of Bengal. It has an irregularly circular form of about 2 m. in diameter, composed of an outer rim rising to a height of from 700 to 1000 ft., with a central cone the altitude of which is 1015 ft. This cone rises from a depth of 800 fathoms below the sea. It was active between 1789 and 1832, but has since been dormant.

BARREN ISLAND, a volcanic island in the Bay of Bengal. It has an irregular circular shape of about 2 miles in diameter, consisting of an outer rim that rises to heights between 700 and 1,000 feet, with a central cone that reaches an altitude of 1,015 feet. This cone emerges from a depth of 800 fathoms below the sea. It was active from 1789 to 1832, but has been dormant since then.

BARRÈS, MAURICE (1862- ), French novelist and politician, was born at Charmes (Vosges) on the 22nd of September 1862; he was educated at the lycée of Nancy, and in 1883 went to Paris to continue his legal studies. He was already a contributor to the monthly periodical, Jeune France, and he now issued a periodical of his own, Les Taches d'encre, which survived for a few months only. After four years of journalism he went to Italy, where he wrote Sous l'œil des barbares (1888), the first volume of a trilogie du moi, completed by Un Homme libre (1889), and Le Jardin de Bérénice (1891). He divided the world into moi and the barbarians, the latter including all those antipathetic to the writer's individuality. These apologies for individualism were supplemented by L'Ennemi des lois (1892), and an admirable volume of impressions of travel, Du sang, de la volupté et de la mort (1893). His early books are written in an elaborate style and are often very obscure. Barrès carried his theory of individualism into politics as an ardent partisan of General Boulanger. He directed a Boulangist paper at Nancy, and was elected deputy in 1889, retaining his seat in the legislature until 1893. His play, Une Journée parlementaire, was produced at the Comédie Française in 1894. In 1897 he began his trilogy, Le Roman de l'énergie nationale, with the publication of Les Déracinés. The series is a plea for local patriotism, and for the preservation of the distinctive qualities of the old French provinces. The first narrates the adventures of seven young Lorrainers, who set out to conquer fortune in Paris. Six of them survive in the second novel of the trilogy, L'Appel au soldat (1900), which gives the history of Boulangism; the sequel, Leurs figures (1902), deals with the Panama scandals. Later works are:—Scènes et doctrines du nationalisme (1902); Les Amitiés françaises (1903), in which he urges the inculcation of patriotism by the early study of national history; Ce que j'ai vu à Rennes (1904); Au service de l'Allemagne (1905), the experiences of an Alsatian conscript in a German regiment; Le Voyage de Sparte (1906). M. Barrès was admitted to the French Academy in 1906.

BARRÈS, MAURICE (1862- ), French novelist and politician, was born in Charmes (Vosges) on September 22, 1862. He studied at the lycée of Nancy and moved to Paris in 1883 to continue his legal studies. He was already writing for the monthly magazine Jeune France, and he soon launched his own magazine, Les Taches d'encre, which lasted only a few months. After four years in journalism, he traveled to Italy, where he wrote Sous l'œil des barbares (1888), the first book in a series called trilogie du moi, followed by Un Homme libre (1889) and Le Jardin de Bérénice (1891). He split the world into moi and the barbarians, the latter being everyone who opposed his individuality. These arguments for individualism were expanded in L'Ennemi des lois (1892) and a remarkable travel account, Du sang, de la volupté et de la mort (1893). His early books have a complex style and can often be quite obscure. Barrès brought his individualism theory into politics as a passionate supporter of General Boulanger. He ran a Boulangist newspaper in Nancy and was elected as a deputy in 1889, holding his position in the legislature until 1893. His play, Une Journée parlementaire, was staged at the Comédie Française in 1894. In 1897, he began his trilogy, Le Roman de l'énergie nationale, starting with Les Déracinés. This series advocates for local patriotism and preserving the unique characteristics of the old French provinces. The first book follows the journeys of seven young Lorrainers as they seek fortune in Paris. Six of them appear in the second novel of the trilogy, L'Appel au soldat (1900), which tells the story of Boulangism; the third part, Leurs figures (1902), addresses the Panama scandals. His later works include: Scènes et doctrines du nationalisme (1902); Les Amitiés françaises (1903), where he emphasizes the need to instill patriotism through the study of national history; Ce que j'ai vu à Rennes (1904); Au service de l'Allemagne (1905), about an Alsatian conscript's experience in a German regiment; and Le Voyage de Sparte (1906). M. Barrès was admitted to the French Academy in 1906.

See also R. Doumic, Les Jeunes (1896); J. Lionnet, L'Évolution des idees (1903); Anatole France, La Vie littéraire (4th series, 1892).

See also R. Doumic, Les Jeunes (1896); J. Lionnet, L'Évolution des idées (1903); Anatole France, La Vie littéraire (4th series, 1892).

BARRETT, LAWRENCE (1838-1891), American actor, was born of Irish parents in Paterson, New Jersey, on the 4th of April 1838. His family name was Brannigan. He made his first stage appearance at Detroit as Murad in The French Spy in 1853. In December 1856 he made his first New York appearance at the Chambers Street theatre as Sir Thomas Clifford in The Hunchback. In 1858 he was in the stock company at the Boston Museum. He served with distinction in the Civil War as captain in the 28th Massachusetts infantry regiment. From 1867 to 1870, with John McCullough, he managed the California theatre, San Francisco. Among his many and varied parts may be mentioned Hamlet, Lear, Macbeth, Shylock, Richard III., Wolsey, Benedick, Richelieu, David Garrick, Hernani, Alfred Evelyn, Lanciotto in George Henry Boker's (1823-1890) Francesca da Rimini, and James Harebell in The Man o' Airlie. He played Othello to Booth's Iago and Cassius to his Brutus. He acted in London in 1867, 1881, 1883 and 1884, his Richelieu in Bulwer Lytton's drama being considered his best part. He wrote a life of Edwin Forrest in the American Actors Series (Boston, 1881), and an admirable sketch of Edwin Booth in Edwin Booth and his Contemporaries (Boston, 1886). He died on the 20th of March 1891.

BARRETT, LAWRENCE (1838-1891), American actor, was born to Irish parents in Paterson, New Jersey, on April 4, 1838. His family name was Brannigan. He made his first stage appearance in Detroit as Murad in The French Spy in 1853. In December 1856, he made his first New York debut at the Chambers Street theatre as Sir Thomas Clifford in The Hunchback. In 1858, he was part of the stock company at the Boston Museum. He served honorably in the Civil War as captain in the 28th Massachusetts infantry regiment. From 1867 to 1870, he managed the California theatre in San Francisco alongside John McCullough. Among his many diverse roles were Hamlet, Lear, Macbeth, Shylock, Richard III, Wolsey, Benedick, Richelieu, David Garrick, Hernani, Alfred Evelyn, Lanciotto in George Henry Boker's (1823-1890) Francesca da Rimini, and James Harebell in The Man o' Airlie. He played Othello to Booth's Iago and Cassius to his Brutus. He acted in London in 1867, 1881, 1883, and 1884, with his Richelieu in Bulwer Lytton's drama being regarded as his best role. He wrote a biography of Edwin Forrest in the American Actors Series (Boston, 1881), and an excellent sketch of Edwin Booth in Edwin Booth and his Contemporaries (Boston, 1886). He died on March 20, 1891.

BARRETT, LUCAS (1837-1862), English naturalist and geologist, was born in London on the 14th of November 1837, and educated at University College school and at Ebersdorf. In 1855 he accompanied R. McAndrew on a dredging excursion from the Shetlands to Norway and beyond the Arctic Circle; and subsequently made other cruises to Greenland and to the coast of Spain. These expeditions laid the foundations of an extensive knowledge of the distribution of marine life. In 1855 he was engaged by Sedgwick to assist in the Woodwardian Museum at Cambridge, and during the following three years he aided the professor by delivering lectures. He discovered bones of birds in the Cambridge Greensand, and he also prepared a geological map of Cambridge on the one-inch Ordnance map. In 1859, when twenty-two years of age, he was appointed director of the Geological Survey of Jamaica. He there determined the Cretaceous age of certain rocks which contained Hippurites, the new genus Barrettia being named after him by S. P. Woodward; he also obtained many fossils from the Miocene and newer strata. He was drowned at the early age of twenty-five, on the 18th of December 1862, while investigating the sea-bottom off Kingston, Jamaica.

BARRETT, LUCAS (1837-1862), was an English naturalist and geologist, born in London on November 14, 1837. He was educated at University College school and Ebersdorf. In 1855, he joined R. McAndrew on a dredging expedition from the Shetland Islands to Norway and into the Arctic Circle; he later participated in other trips to Greenland and the coast of Spain. These journeys helped him gain extensive knowledge about the distribution of marine life. That same year, he was hired by Sedgwick to help at the Woodwardian Museum in Cambridge, where he supported the professor by giving lectures over the next three years. He discovered bird bones in the Cambridge Greensand and created a geological map of Cambridge based on the one-inch Ordnance map. In 1859, at just twenty-two years old, he was named director of the Geological Survey of Jamaica. There, he determined that certain rocks containing Hippurites were from the Cretaceous period, and the new genus Barrettia was named in his honor by S. P. Woodward. He also collected numerous fossils from Miocene and younger strata. Tragically, he drowned at the young age of twenty-five on December 18, 1862, while studying the sea floor off Kingston, Jamaica.

Obituary by S. P. Woodward in Geologist (Feb. 1863), p. 60.

Obituary by S. P. Woodward in Geologist (Feb. 1863), p. 60.

BARRETT, WILSON (1846-1904), English actor, manager and playwright, was born in Essex on the 18th of February 1846, the [v.03 p.0435]son of a farmer. He made his first appearance on the stage at Halifax in 1864, and then played in the provinces alone and with his wife, Caroline Heath, in East Lynne. After managerial experiences at Leeds and elsewhere, in 1879 he took the management of the old Court theatre, where he introduced Madame Modjeska to London, in an adaptation of Schiller's Maria Stuart, Adrienne Lecouvreur, La Dame aux camélias and other plays. It was not till 1881, however, when he took the Princess's theatre, that he became well known to the public in the emotional drama, The Lights o' London, by G. R. Sims. The play which made him an established favourite was The Silver King by Henry Arthur Jones, perhaps the most successful melodrama ever staged, produced in 1882 with himself as Wilfred Denver, his brother George (an excellent comedian) in the cast, and E. S. Willard (b. 1853) as the "Spider,"—this being the part in which Mr Willard, afterwards a well-known actor both in America and England, first came to the front. Barrett played this part for three hundred nights without a break, and repeated his London success in W. G. Wills's Claudian which followed. In 1884 he appeared in Hamlet, but soon returned to melodrama, and though he had occasional seasons in London he acted chiefly in the provinces. In 1886 he made his first visit to America, repeated in later years, and in 1898 he visited Australia. During these years the London stage was coming under new influences, and Wilson Barrett's vogue in melodrama had waned. But in 1895 he struck a new vein of success with his drama of religious emotion, The Sign of the Cross, which crowded his theatre with audiences largely composed of people outside the ordinary circle of playgoers. He attempted to repeat the success with other plays of a religious type, but not with equal effect, and several of his later plays were failures. He died on the 22nd of July 1904. Wilson Barrett was a sterling actor of a robust type and striking physique, not remarkable for intellectual finesse, but excelling in melodrama, and very successful as the central figure on his own stage.

BARRETT, WILSON (1846-1904), was an English actor, manager, and playwright born in Essex on February 18, 1846, the [v.03 p.0435]son of a farmer. He had his first stage appearance in Halifax in 1864 and then performed in various provinces, often alongside his wife, Caroline Heath, in East Lynne. After managing theaters in Leeds and other locations, he took over the old Court theatre in 1879, where he introduced Madame Modjeska to London in adaptations of Schiller's Maria Stuart, Adrienne Lecouvreur, La Dame aux camélias, and other plays. It wasn't until 1881, when he took over the Princess's theatre, that he gained public recognition for the emotional drama, The Lights o' London, by G. R. Sims. The play that established him as a favorite was The Silver King by Henry Arthur Jones, arguably the most successful melodrama ever staged, produced in 1882 with Barrett as Wilfred Denver, featuring his brother George, an excellent comedian, and E. S. Willard (b. 1853) as the "Spider," marking the role where Mr. Willard, who later became a well-known actor in America and England, first gained prominence. Barrett played this role for three hundred consecutive nights and repeated his London success in W. G. Wills's Claudian that followed. In 1884, he appeared in Hamlet, but soon returned to melodrama, and although he had occasional seasons in London, he mainly acted in the provinces. In 1886, he made his first visit to America, which he repeated in later years, and in 1898, he visited Australia. During this time, the London stage was evolving, and Wilson Barrett's popularity in melodrama had declined. However, in 1895, he found a new source of success with his emotionally charged drama, The Sign of the Cross, which attracted audiences largely made up of people outside the usual theatergoer crowd. He tried to replicate this success with other religious-themed plays, but not with the same impact, and several of his later productions were failures. He passed away on July 22, 1904. Wilson Barrett was a strong actor with a striking presence, not known for intellectual depth, but he excelled in melodrama and was very successful as the leading figure on his own stage.

BARRHEAD, a police burgh of Renfrewshire, Scotland, situated on the Levern, 7½ m. S.W. of Glasgow by the Glasgow & South-Western railway. Pop. (1901) 9855. Founded in 1773, it has gradually absorbed the villages of Arthurlie, Dovecothall and Grahamston, and become a thriving town. The chief industries include bleaching, calico-printing, cotton-spinning, weaving, iron and brass founding, engineering and the manufacture of sanitary appliances. Neilston (pop. 2668), about 2 m. S.W., has bleachfields and print-works, and 2 m. N. by E. lie Hurlet, where are important manufactures of alum and other chemicals, and Nitshill (pop. 1242) with chemical works, quarries and collieries.

BARRHEAD, a police burgh in Renfrewshire, Scotland, located on the Levern, 7.5 miles southwest of Glasgow by the Glasgow & South-Western railway. Population (1901) 9,855. Established in 1773, it has gradually incorporated the villages of Arthurlie, Dovecothall, and Grahamston, evolving into a bustling town. The main industries include bleaching, calico-printing, cotton-spinning, weaving, iron and brass founding, engineering, and the production of sanitary appliances. Neilston (population 2,668), about 2 miles southwest, has bleachfields and print-works, and 2 miles northeast lies Hurlet, which has significant manufacturing of alum and other chemicals, along with Nitshill (population 1,242), known for its chemical works, quarries, and collieries.

BARRICADE, or Barricado (from the Span. barricada, from barrica, a cask, casks filled with earth having been early used to form barricades), an improvised fortification of earth, paving-stones, trees or any materials ready to hand, thrown up, especially across a street, to hinder the advance of an enemy; in the old wooden warships a fence or wooden rail, supported by stanchions and strengthened by various materials, extending across the quarter-deck as a protection during action.

BARRICADE, or Barricade (from the Spanish barricada, which comes from barrica, meaning a cask, as casks filled with earth were traditionally used to create barricades), refers to an improvised fortification made of earth, paving stones, trees, or any readily available materials, constructed, particularly across a street, to block the advance of an enemy; in old wooden warships, it was a fence or wooden rail, supported by posts and reinforced with various materials, running across the quarter-deck for protection during battle.

BARRIE, JAMES MATTHEW (1860- ), British novelist and dramatist, was born at Kirriemuir, a small village in Forfarshire, on the 9th of May 1860. He was educated at the Dumfries academy and Edinburgh University. He has told us in his quasi-autobiographical Margaret Ogilvy that he wrote tales in the garret before he went to school, and at Edinburgh wrote the greater part of a three-volume novel, which a publisher presumed was the work of a clever lady and offered to publish for £100. The offer was not accepted, and it was through journalism that he found his way to literature. After a short period of waiting in Edinburgh, he became leader-writer on the Nottingham Journal in February 1883. To this paper he contributed also special articles and notes, which provided an opening and training for his personal talent. He soon began to submit articles to London editors, and on the 17th of November 1884 Mr Frederick Greenwood printed in the St James's Gazette his article on "An Auld Licht Community." With the encouragement of this able editor, more Auld Licht "Idylls" followed; and in 1885 Mr Barrie moved to London. He continued to write for the St James's Gazette and for Home Chimes (edited by Mr F. W. Robinson). He was soon enlisted by Mr Alexander Riach for the Edinburgh Evening Dispatch, which in turn led to his writing (over the signature "Gavin Ogilvy ") for Dr Robertson Nicoll's British Weekly. Later he became a contributor to the Scots (afterwards National) Observer, edited by W. E. Henley, and also to the Speaker, upon its foundation in 1890. In 1887 he published his first book, Better Dead. It was a mere jeu d'esprit, a specimen of his humorous journalism, elaborated from the St James's Gazette. This was followed in 1888 by Auld Licht Idylls, a collection of the Scots village sketches written for the same paper. They portrayed the life and humours of his native village, idealized as "Thrums," and were the fruits of early observation and of his mother's tales. "She told me everything," Mr Barrie has written, "and so my memories of our little red town were coloured by her memories." Kirriemuir itself was not wholly satisfied with the portrait, but "Thrums" took its place securely on the literary map of the world. In the same year he published An Edinburgh Eleven, sketches from the British Weekly of eminent Edinburgh students; also his first long story, When a Man's Single, a humorous transcription of his experiences as journalist, particularly in the Nottingham office. The book was introduced by what was in fact another Thrums "Idyll," on a higher level than the rest of the book. In 1889 came A Window in Thrums. This beautiful book, and the Idylls, gave the full measure of Mr Barrie's gifts of humanity, humour and pathos, with abundant evidence of the whimsical turn of his wit, and of his original and vernacular style. In 1891 he made a collection of his lighter papers from the St James's Gazette and published them as My Lady Nicotine. In 1891 appeared his first long novel, The Little Minister, which had been first published serially in Good Words. It introduced, not with unmixed success, extraneous elements, including the winsome heroine Babbie, into the familiar life of Thrums, but proved the author's possession of a considerable gift of romance. In 1894 he published Margaret Ogilvy, based on the life of his mother and his own relations with her, most tenderly conceived and beautifully written, though too intimate for the taste of many. The book is full of revelations of great interest to admirers of Mr Barrie's genius. The following year came Sentimental Tommy, a story tracing curiously the psychological development of the "artistic temperament" in a Scots lad of the people. R. L. Stevenson supposed himself to be portrayed in the hero, but it may be safely assumed that the author derived his material largely from introspection. The story was completed by a sequel, Tommy and Grizel, published in 1900. The effect of this story was somewhat marred by the comparative failure of the scenes in society remote from Thrums. In 1902 he published The Little White Bird, a pretty fantasy, wherein he gave full play to his whimsical invention, and his tenderness for child life, which is relieved by the genius of sincerity from a suspicion of mawkishness. This book contained the episode of "Peter Pan," which afterwards suggested the play of that name. In the meantime Mr Barrie had been developing his talent as a dramatist. In 1892 Mr Toole had made a great success at his own theatre of Barrie's Walker, London, a farce founded on a sketch in When a Man's Single. In 1893 Mr Barrie married Miss Ansell (divorced in 1909), who had acted in Walker, London. In this year he wrote, with Sir A. Conan Doyle, a play called Jane Annie. He found more success, however, in The Professor's Love-Story in 1895; and in 1897 the popularity of his dramatized version of The Little Minister probably confirmed him in a predilection for drama, evident already in some of his first sketches in the Nottingham Journal. In 1900 Mr Bourchier produced The Wedding Guest, which was printed as a supplement to the Fortnightly Review in December of the same year. After the publication of The Little White Bird, Mr Barrie burst upon the town as a popular and prolific playwright. The struggling journalist of the early 'nineties had now become one of the most prosperous literary men of the day. In 1903 no fewer than three plays from his hand held the stage—Quality Street, The Admirable [v.03 p.0436]Crichton and Little Mary. The year 1904 produced Peter Pan, a kind of poetical pantomime, in which the author found scope for some of his most characteristic and permanently delightful gifts. In 1905 Alice-Sit-by-the-Fire and in 1908 What Every Woman Knows were added to the list. As dramatist Mr Barrie brought, to a sphere rather ridden by convention, a method wholly unconventional and a singularly fresh fancy, seasoned by a shrewd touch of satirical humour; and in Peter Pan he proved himself a Hans Andersen of the stage. In literature, the success of "Thrums" produced a crop of imitations, christened in derision by W. E. Henley the "Kailyard School," though the imitations were by no means confined to Scotland. In this school the Auld Licht Idylls and A Window in Thrums remained unsurpassed and unapproached. The Scots village tale was no novelty in literature—witness John Gait, the Chronicles of Carlingford and George MacDonald. Yet Mr Barrie, in spite of a dialect not easy to the Southron, contrived to touch a more intimate and more responsive chord. With the simplest materials he achieved an almost unendurable pathos, which yet is never forced; and the pathos is salted with humour, while about the moving homeliness of his humanity play the gleams of a whimsical wit. Stevenson, in a letter to Mr Henry James, in December 1892, said justly of Barrie that "there was genius in him, but there was a journalist on his elbow." This genius found its most perfect and characteristic expression in the humanity of "Thrums" and the bizarre and tender fantasy of Peter Pan.

BARRIE, JAMES MATTHEW (1860- ), British novelist and playwright, was born in Kirriemuir, a small village in Forfarshire, on May 9, 1860. He was educated at Dumfries Academy and Edinburgh University. In his semi-autobiographical book Margaret Ogilvy, he shared that he wrote stories in the attic before he started school, and while in Edinburgh, he wrote most of a three-volume novel, which a publisher mistakenly believed was written by a talented woman and offered to publish for £100. The offer wasn’t accepted, and he eventually found his way into literature through journalism. After a brief time waiting in Edinburgh, he became the lead writer for the Nottingham Journal in February 1883. He also contributed special articles and notes to the paper, which opened doors for his talent. Soon, he started submitting pieces to editors in London, and on November 17, 1884, Mr. Frederick Greenwood published his article "An Auld Licht Community" in the St James's Gazette. Encouraged by this skilled editor, he produced more Auld Licht "Idylls," and in 1885, Barrie moved to London. He continued writing for the St James's Gazette and Home Chimes (edited by Mr. F. W. Robinson). He was soon picked up by Mr. Alexander Riach for the Edinburgh Evening Dispatch, which led to him writing (under the pen name "Gavin Ogilvy") for Dr. Robertson Nicoll's British Weekly. Later, he also contributed to the Scots (later National) Observer, edited by W. E. Henley, and to the Speaker when it was founded in 1890. In 1887, he published his first book, Better Dead. This was simply a jeu d'esprit, a piece of his humorous journalism, expanded from the St James's Gazette. It was followed in 1888 by Auld Licht Idylls, a collection of sketches from Scottish village life written for the same paper. These stories depicted the life and humor of his hometown, idealized as "Thrums," and were the result of early observations and his mother's tales. "She told me everything," Barrie wrote, "and so my memories of our little red town were colored by her memories." Kirriemuir itself wasn't completely happy with the portrayal, but "Thrums" firmly established its place on the literary map. The same year, he published An Edinburgh Eleven, sketches from the British Weekly about notable Edinburgh students, and also his first long story, When a Man's Single, a humorous recounting of his experiences as a journalist, especially in the Nottingham office. The book included what was essentially another Thrums "Idyll," which was at a higher standard than the rest of the book. In 1889, he released A Window in Thrums. This beautiful book, along with the Idylls, showcased Barrie's humanity, humor, and emotion, with ample proof of his whimsical wit and unique vernacular style. In 1891, he compiled his lighter pieces from the St James's Gazette and published them as My Lady Nicotine. That same year, his first lengthy novel, The Little Minister, was published, having originally appeared serially in Good Words. This book introduced, with mixed success, additional elements—including the charming heroine Babbie—into the familiar setting of Thrums, proving the author's significant romantic talent. In 1894, he published Margaret Ogilvy, which was based on his mother’s life and their relationship, tenderly conceived and beautifully written, although some found it too personal. The book is filled with revelations of great interest to those who admire Barrie's genius. The following year, Sentimental Tommy was released, a story that curiously traced the psychological development of the "artistic temperament" in a Scottish boy from a humble background. R. L. Stevenson thought he was portrayed in the hero, but it's safe to say Barrie drew much of his material from self-reflection. The story was followed by a sequel, Tommy and Grizel, published in 1900. The impact of this story was somewhat diminished by the relative failure of scenes set outside Thrums. In 1902, he published The Little White Bird, a charming fantasy that showcased his whimsical imagination and tenderness for childhood, tempered by a genuine sincerity that kept it from feeling overly sentimental. This book included the episode of "Peter Pan," which later inspired the play of the same name. Meanwhile, Barrie was honing his skills as a playwright. In 1892, Mr. Toole achieved great success at his own theater with Barrie's Walker, London, a farce based on a sketch in When a Man's Single. In 1893, he married Miss Ansell (divorced in 1909), who had acted in Walker, London. That year, he co-wrote a play with Sir A. Conan Doyle called Jane Annie. However, he found even greater success with The Professor's Love-Story in 1895; and in 1897, the popularity of his theatrical adaptation of The Little Minister likely solidified his interest in drama, evident from some of his earlier sketches in the Nottingham Journal. In 1900, Mr. Bourchier produced The Wedding Guest, which was printed as a supplement to the Fortnightly Review in December of that year. After the release of The Little White Bird, Barrie emerged as a popular and prolific playwright. The struggling journalist of the early '90s had transformed into one of the most successful literary figures of his time. By 1903, three of his plays were on stage—Quality Street, The Admirable Crichton, and Little Mary. The year 1904 produced Peter Pan, a kind of poetic pantomime that allowed the author to showcase his most characteristic and delightfully enduring gifts. In 1905, Alice-Sit-by-the-Fire was released, and in 1908, What Every Woman Knows was added to his portfolio. As a playwright, Barrie introduced an unconventional method and a refreshingly original creativity to a field often burdened by tradition, enriched by a sharp touch of satirical humor; in Peter Pan, he proved himself a Hans Andersen of the stage. In literature, the success of "Thrums" resulted in a wave of imitations, mockingly dubbed the "Kailyard School" by W. E. Henley, although these imitations were not confined to Scotland. Within this school, the Auld Licht Idylls and A Window in Thrums remained unmatched and unparalleled. The Scots village tale was not a new concept in literature—see John Gait, the Chronicles of Carlingford, and George MacDonald. Yet Barrie, despite using a dialect not easy for outsiders, managed to touch a closer and more resonant chord. With the simplest materials, he crafted an almost unbearable pathos that never felt forced; this pathos was seasoned with humor, while the heartfelt simplicity of his humanity was illuminated by flashes of whimsical wit. Stevenson, in a letter to Mr. Henry James in December 1892, aptly remarked about Barrie that "there was genius in him, but there was a journalist on his elbow." This genius found its clearest and most distinctive expression in the humanity of "Thrums" and the quirky, tender fantasy of Peter Pan.

See also J. M. Barrie and His Books, by J. A. Hamerton (Horace Marshall, 1902); and for bibliography up to May 1903, English Illustrated Magazine, vol. xxix. (N.S.), p. 208.

See also J. M. Barrie and His Books, by J. A. Hamerton (Horace Marshall, 1902); and for the bibliography up to May 1903, see English Illustrated Magazine, vol. xxix. (N.S.), p. 208.

(W. P. J.)

(W. P. J.)

BARRIE, the capital of Simcoe county, Ontario, Canada, 56 m. N. of Toronto, on Lake Simcoe, an important centre on the Grand Trunk railway. It contains several breweries, carriage factories, boat-building and railway shops, and manufactories of woollens, stoves and leather. It is also a summer resort and the starting-point for the numerous Lake Simcoe steamers. Pop. (1901) 5949.

BARRIE, the capital of Simcoe County, Ontario, Canada, is located 56 miles north of Toronto, on Lake Simcoe. It serves as a significant hub for the Grand Trunk railway. The city has several breweries, carriage factories, boat-building and railway shops, as well as manufacturers of wool, stoves, and leather. It is also a popular summer destination and a launching point for various steamers on Lake Simcoe. Population (1901) 5,949.

BARRIÈRE, THÉODORE (1823-1877), French dramatist, was born in Paris in 1823. He belonged to a family of map engravers which had long been connected with the war department, and spent nine years in that service himself. The success of a vaudeville he had performed at the Beaumarchais and which was immediately snapped up for the repertory of the Palais Royal, showed him his real vocation. During the next thirty years he signed, alone or in collaboration, over a hundred plays; among the most successful were: La Vie de bohème (1849), adapted from Henri Murger's book with the novelist's help; Manon Lescaut (1851); Les Filles de marbre (1853); L'Héritage de Monsieur Plumet (1858); Les Faux Bonshommes (1856) with Ernest Capendu; Malheureux vaincus (1865), which was forbidden by the censor; Le Gascon (1878). Barrière died in Paris on the 16th of October 1877.

BARRIÈRE, THÉODORE (1823-1877), a French playwright, was born in Paris in 1823. He came from a family of map engravers that had long been associated with the military, and he himself spent nine years in that service. The success of a vaudeville he performed at the Beaumarchais, which was quickly picked up for the repertoire of the Palais Royal, revealed his true calling. Over the next thirty years, he wrote, either alone or in collaboration, more than a hundred plays. Some of the most successful include: La Vie de bohème (1849), adapted from Henri Murger's book with the novelist's assistance; Manon Lescaut (1851); Les Filles de marbre (1853); L'Héritage de Monsieur Plumet (1858); Les Faux Bonshommes (1856) with Ernest Capendu; Malheureux vaincus (1865), which was banned by the censor; Le Gascon (1878). Barrière passed away in Paris on October 16, 1877.

See also Revue des deux mondes (March 1859).

See also Revue des deux mondes (March 1859).

BARRIER TREATY, the name given first to the treaty signed on 29th of October 1709 between Great Britain and the states-general of the United Netherlands, by which the latter engaged to guarantee the Protestant succession in England in favour of the house of Hanover; while Great Britain undertook to procure for the Dutch an adequate barrier on the side of the Netherlands, consisting of the towns of Furnes, Nieuport, Ypres, Menin, Lille, Tournai, Condé, Valenciennes, Maubeuge, Charleroi, Namur, Halle, Damme, Dendermond and the citadel of Ghent. The treaty was based on the same principle of securing Holland against French aggression that had inspired that of Ryswick in 1698, by the terms of which the chief frontier fortresses of the Netherlands were to be garrisoned by Dutch troops. A second Barrier Treaty was signed between Great Britain and Holland on 29th of January 1713, by which the strong places designed for the barrier were reduced to Furnes, the fort of Knocke, Ypres, Menin, Tournai, Mons, Charleroi and the citadel of Ghent, and certain fortresses in the neighbourhood of that city and of Bruges; Great Britain undertaking to obtain the right for the Dutch to garrison them from the future sovereign of the Spanish Netherlands. Its terms were included in the treaty of Rastatt, between the emperor and France, signed on the 7th of March 1714. A third Barrier Treaty was signed in November 1715.

BARRIER TREATY, refers to the treaty signed on October 29, 1709, between Great Britain and the States-General of the United Netherlands. In this agreement, the Netherlands committed to ensuring the Protestant succession in England in favor of the House of Hanover, while Great Britain agreed to secure a proper barrier for the Dutch along the Netherlands, which included the towns of Furnes, Nieuport, Ypres, Menin, Lille, Tournai, Condé, Valenciennes, Maubeuge, Charleroi, Namur, Halle, Damme, Dendermond, and the citadel of Ghent. This treaty aimed to protect Holland from French aggression, similar to the principle that guided the Treaty of Ryswick in 1698, where key frontier fortresses in the Netherlands were to be occupied by Dutch troops. A second Barrier Treaty was signed on January 29, 1713, between Great Britain and Holland, reducing the designated strongholds for the barrier to Furnes, the fort of Knocke, Ypres, Menin, Tournai, Mons, Charleroi, and the citadel of Ghent, along with some fortresses near that city and Bruges. Great Britain agreed to secure the Dutch's right to garrison these locations from the future sovereign of the Spanish Netherlands. The terms of this treaty were incorporated into the Treaty of Rastatt, signed between the emperor and France on March 7, 1714. A third Barrier Treaty was signed in November 1715.

See Jean Dumont, Corps universel diplomatique, &c. (1726-1731), vol. viii.

See Jean Dumont, Corps universel diplomatique, &c. (1726-1731), vol. viii.

BARRILI, ANTONIO GIULIO (1836- ), Italian novelist, was born at Savona, and was educated for the legal profession, which he abandoned for journalism in Genoa. He was a volunteer in the campaign of 1859 and served with Garibaldi in 1866 and 1867. From 1865 (Capitan Dodero) onwards he published a large number of books of fiction, which had wide popularity, his work being commonly compared with that of Victor Cherbuliez. Some of the best of the later ones are Santa Cecilia (1866), Come un Sogno (1875), and L'Olmo e l' Edera (1877). His Raggio di Dio appeared in 1899. Barrili also wrote two plays and various volumes of criticism, including Il rinnovamento letterario italiano (1890). He was elected to the Italian chamber of deputies in 1876; and in 1889 became professor of Italian literature at Genoa.

BARRILI, ANTONIO GIULIO (1836- ), Italian novelist, was born in Savona and initially trained for a career in law, which he left to pursue journalism in Genoa. He volunteered during the 1859 campaign and served with Garibaldi in 1866 and 1867. Starting in 1865 with Capitan Dodero, he published a large number of popular fiction books, often being compared to Victor Cherbuliez. Some of his best later works include Santa Cecilia (1866), Come un Sogno (1875), and L'Olmo e l'Edera (1877). His Raggio di Dio was released in 1899. Barrili also wrote two plays and various critical volumes, including Il rinnovamento letterario italiano (1890). He was elected to the Italian chamber of deputies in 1876 and became a professor of Italian literature at Genoa in 1889.

BARRING-OUT, a custom, formerly common in English schools, of barring the master out of the school premises. A typical example of this practice was at Bromfield school, Cumberland, where William Hutchinson says "it was the custom, time out of mind, for the scholars, at Fasting's Even (the beginning of Lent) to depose and exclude the master from the school for three days." During this period the school doors were barricaded and the boys armed with mock weapons. If the master's attempts to re-enter were successful, extra tasks were inflicted as a penalty, and willingly performed by the boys. On the third day terms of capitulation, usually in Latin verse, were signed, and these always conceded the immediate right to indulge in football and a cockfight. The custom was long retained at Eton and figures in many school stories.

BARRING-OUT, a custom that used to be common in English schools, involved keeping the master out of the school premises. A typical example of this practice occurred at Bromfield School in Cumberland, where William Hutchinson mentions that "it was the custom, as long as anyone can remember, for the students, on Fasting's Even (the start of Lent), to overthrow and exclude the master from the school for three days." During this time, the school doors were blocked, and the boys were armed with fake weapons. If the master managed to get back in, the boys faced extra chores as punishment, which they willingly completed. On the third day, terms of surrender, usually written in Latin verse, were agreed upon, and these always granted the immediate right to play football and have a cockfight. This custom was maintained for a long time at Eton and appears in many school stories.

BARRINGTON, DAINES (1727-1800), English lawyer, antiquary and naturalist, was born in 1727, fourth son of the first Viscount Barrington. He was educated for the profession of the law, and after filling various posts, was appointed a Welsh judge in 1757 and afterwards second justice of Chester. Though an indifferent judge, his Observations on the Statutes, chiefly the more ancient, from Magna Charta to 21st James I., cap. 27, with an appendix, being a proposal for new-modelling the Statutes (1766), had a high reputation among historians and constitutional antiquaries. In 1773 he published an edition of Orosius, with Alfred's Saxon version, and an English translation with original notes. His Tracts on the Probability of reaching the North Pole (1775) were written in consequence of the northern voyage of discovery undertaken by Captain C. J. Phipps, afterwards Lord Mulgrave (1744-1792). Barrington's other writings are chiefly to be found in the publications of the Royal and Antiquarian Societies, of both of which he was long a member, and of the latter vice-president. Many of these were collected by him in a quarto volume entitled Miscellanies on various Subjects (1781). He contributed to the Philosophical Transactions for 1780 an account of Mozart's visit at eight years of age to London. In his Miscellanies on varied subjects he included this with accounts of four other prodigies, namely, Crotch, Charles and Samuel Wesley, and Garrett Wellesley, Lord Mornington. Among the most curious and ingenious of his papers are his Experiments and Observations on the Singing of Birds, and his Essay on the Language of Birds. He died on the 14th of March 1800 and was buried in the Temple church.

BARRINGTON, DAINES (1727-1800), was an English lawyer, antiquarian, and naturalist, born in 1727 as the fourth son of the first Viscount Barrington. He was trained in law and held various positions before being appointed as a Welsh judge in 1757 and later as the second justice of Chester. Although he wasn’t the best judge, his book Observations on the Statutes, chiefly the more ancient, from Magna Charta to 21st James I., cap. 27, with an appendix, being a proposal for new-modelling the Statutes (1766) gained high regard among historians and constitutional scholars. In 1773, he published an edition of Orosius, featuring Alfred's Saxon version, along with an English translation and original notes. His Tracts on the Probability of reaching the North Pole (1775) were inspired by the northern voyage of discovery led by Captain C. J. Phipps, who later became Lord Mulgrave (1744-1792). Barrington's other writings mainly appear in the publications of the Royal and Antiquarian Societies, where he was a long-time member and vice-president of the latter. Many of his works were compiled in a quarto volume titled Miscellanies on various Subjects (1781). He contributed to the Philosophical Transactions in 1780 with an account of Mozart's visit to London at the age of eight. In his Miscellanies, he included this account along with descriptions of four other prodigies: Crotch, Charles and Samuel Wesley, and Garrett Wellesley, Lord Mornington. Some of his most interesting and clever papers are his Experiments and Observations on the Singing of Birds and his Essay on the Language of Birds. He passed away on March 14, 1800, and was buried in the Temple church.

BARRINGTON, GEORGE (b. 1755), an Irishman with a curious history, was born at Maynooth on the 14th of May 1755, the son of a working silversmith named Waldron. In 1771 he robbed his schoolmaster at Dublin and ran away from school, becoming a member of a touring theatrical company under the assumed name of Barrington. At Limerick races he joined the manager of the company in pocket-picking. The manager was detected and sentenced to transportation, and Barrington fled to London, where he assumed clerical dress and continued his pocket-picking. At Covent Garden theatre he robbed the Russian prince Orlov of a snuff-box, said to be worth £30,000. He was [v.03 p.0437]detected and arrested, but as Prince Orlov declined to prosecute, was discharged, though subsequently he was sentenced to three years' hard labour for pocket-picking at Drury Lane theatre. On his release he was again caught at his old practices and sentenced to five years' hard labour, but influence secured his release on the condition that he left England. He accordingly went for a short time to Dublin, and then returned to London, where he was once more detected pocket-picking, and, in 1790, sentenced to seven years' transportation. On the voyage out to Botany Bay a conspiracy was hatched by the convicts on board to seize the ship. Barrington disclosed the plot to the captain, and the latter, on reaching New South Wales, reported him favourably to the authorities, with the result that in 1792 Barrington obtained a warrant of emancipation (the first issued), becoming subsequently superintendent of convicts and later high constable of Paramatta. In 1796 a theatre was opened at Sydney, the principal actors being convicts, and Barrington wrote the prologue to the first production. This prologue has obtained a wide publicity. It begins:—

BARRINGTON, GEORGE (b. 1755), an Irishman with an interesting history, was born in Maynooth on May 14, 1755, to a working silversmith named Waldron. In 1771, he stole from his schoolmaster in Dublin and ran away from school, joining a touring theater company under the alias Barrington. At the Limerick races, he teamed up with the company's manager in pickpocketing. When the manager was caught and sentenced to transportation, Barrington escaped to London, where he dressed as a clerk and continued his pickpocketing. At Covent Garden theatre, he stole a snuff-box from the Russian prince Orlov, which was said to be worth £30,000. He was caught and arrested, but since Prince Orlov chose not to press charges, he was released. However, he was later sentenced to three years of hard labor for pickpocketing at Drury Lane theatre. After his release, he was caught again for the same offenses and sentenced to five years of hard labor, but he was released due to influence on the condition that he leave England. He briefly went to Dublin and then returned to London, where he was again caught pickpocketing and, in 1790, sentenced to seven years of transportation. During the voyage to Botany Bay, a conspiracy was formed by the convicts on board to take over the ship. Barrington revealed the plot to the captain, who, upon reaching New South Wales, gave Barrington a good report to the authorities. As a result, in 1792, Barrington received a warrant of emancipation (the first one issued), eventually becoming superintendent of convicts and later high constable of Paramatta. In 1796, a theater opened in Sydney with convicts as the main actors, and Barrington wrote the prologue for the first performance. This prologue gained significant publicity. It begins:—

"From distant climes, o'er widespread seas, we come,

"From distant lands, over vast oceans, we come,"

Though not with much éclat or beat of drum;

Though not with much style or hype;

True patriots we, for, be it understood,

True patriots we are, for, let's make it clear,

We left our country for our country's good."

We left our country for its own good.

Barrington died at a ripe old age at Paramatta, but the exact date is not on record. He was the author of A Voyage to Botany Bay (London, 1801); The History of New South Wales (London, 1802); The History of New Holland (London, 1808).

Barrington passed away at an old age in Paramatta, but the exact date isn't recorded. He wrote A Voyage to Botany Bay (London, 1801); The History of New South Wales (London, 1802); The History of New Holland (London, 1808).

BARRINGTON, JOHN SHUTE, 1st Viscount (1678-1734), English lawyer and theologian, was the son of Benjamin Shute, merchant, and was born at Theobalds, in Hertfordshire, in 1678. He received part of his education at the university of Utrecht; and, after returning to England in 1698, studied law in the Inner Temple. In 1701 he published several pamphlets in favour of the civil rights of Protestant dissenters, to which class he belonged. On the recommendation of Lord Somers he was employed to induce the Presbyterians in Scotland to favour the union of the two kingdoms, and in 1708 he was rewarded for this service by being appointed to the office of commissioner of the customs. From this, however, he was removed on the change of administration in 1711; but his fortune had, in the meantime, been improved by the bequest of two considerable estates,—one of them left him by Francis Barrington of Tofts, whose name he assumed by act of parliament, the other by John Wildman of Becket. Barrington now stood at the head of the dissenters. On the accession of George I. he was returned to parliament for Berwick-upon-Tweed; and in 1720 the king raised him to the Irish peerage, with the title of Viscount Barrington of Ardglass. But having unfortunately engaged in the Harburg lottery, one of the bubble speculations of the time, he was expelled from the House of Commons in 1723,—a punishment which was considered much too severe, and was thought to be due to personal malice of Walpole. In 1725 he published his principal work, entitled Miscellanea Sacra or a New Method of considering so much of the History of the Apostles as is contained in Scripture, 2 vols. 8vo,—afterwards reprinted with additions and corrections, in 3 vols. 8vo, 1770, by his son Shute. In the same year he published An Essay on the Several Dispensations of God to Mankind. He died on the 14th of December 1734.

BARRINGTON, JOHN SHUTE, 1st Viscount (1678-1734), was an English lawyer and theologian, born in 1678 in Theobalds, Hertfordshire, to Benjamin Shute, a merchant. He received part of his education at the University of Utrecht, and after returning to England in 1698, he studied law at the Inner Temple. In 1701, he published several pamphlets advocating for the civil rights of Protestant dissenters, to which he belonged. Recommended by Lord Somers, he worked to persuade the Presbyterians in Scotland to support the union of the two kingdoms. In 1708, he was appointed as a commissioner of customs in recognition of his efforts. However, he was removed from this position after a change in administration in 1711. By then, his fortunes improved due to inheritances from two significant estates—one from Francis Barrington of Tofts, whose name he adopted by act of parliament, and the other from John Wildman of Becket. Barrington emerged as a leading figure among dissenters. When George I ascended the throne, he was elected to parliament for Berwick-upon-Tweed; and in 1720, the king elevated him to the Irish peerage as Viscount Barrington of Ardglass. Unfortunately, after getting involved in the Harburg lottery, one of the speculative ventures of the time, he was expelled from the House of Commons in 1723. This punishment was viewed as excessively harsh and seemed motivated by the personal animosity of Walpole. In 1725, he published his major work, titled Miscellanea Sacra or a New Method of considering so much of the History of the Apostles as is contained in Scripture, 2 vols. 8vo, which was later reprinted with updates in 3 vols. 8vo in 1770 by his son Shute. That same year, he also published An Essay on the Several Dispensations of God to Mankind. He passed away on December 14, 1734.

BARRINGTON, SAMUEL (1720-1800), British admiral, was the fourth son of the 1st Viscount Barrington. He entered the navy at an early age and in 1747 had worked his way to a post-captaincy. He was in continuous employment during the peace of 1748-1756, and on the outbreak of the Seven Years' War served with Hawke in the Basque roads in command of the "Achilles" (60). In 1759 the "Achilles" captured a powerful French privateer, after two hours' fighting. In the Havre-de-Grace expedition of the same year Barrington's ship carried the flag of Rear-Admiral Rodney, and in 1760 sailed with John Byron to destroy the Louisburg fortifications. At the peace in 1763 Barrington had been almost continuously afloat for twenty-two years. He was next appointed in 1768 to the frigate "Venus" as governor to the duke of Cumberland, who remained with him in all ranks from midshipman to rear-admiral. In 1778 the duke's flag-captain became rear-admiral and went to the West Indies, while in conjunction with the army he took the island of Santa Lucia from the French, and repulsed the attempt of the Comte d'Estaing to retake it. Superseded after a time by Byron, he remained as that officer's second-in-command and was present at Grenada and St. Kitts (6th and 22nd of July 1779). On his return home, he was offered, but refused, the command of the Channel fleet. His last active service was the relief of Gibraltar in October 1782. As admiral he flew his flag for a short time in 1790, but was not employed in the French revolutionary wars. He died in 1800.

BARRINGTON, SAMUEL (1720-1800), British admiral, was the fourth son of the 1st Viscount Barrington. He joined the navy at a young age and by 1747 had risen to the rank of post-captain. He was consistently in service during the peace from 1748 to 1756, and when the Seven Years' War began, he served under Hawke in the Basque roads commanding the "Achilles" (60). In 1759, the "Achilles" captured a formidable French privateer after two hours of fighting. During the Havre-de-Grace expedition of that same year, Barrington's ship displayed the flag of Rear-Admiral Rodney, and in 1760, he sailed with John Byron to dismantle the fortifications at Louisburg. By the peace of 1763, Barrington had been almost continuously at sea for twenty-two years. He was then appointed in 1768 to the frigate "Venus" as governor to the Duke of Cumberland, who served with him in various ranks from midshipman to rear-admiral. In 1778, the duke's flag-captain advanced to rear-admiral and traveled to the West Indies, where he, along with the army, seized the island of Santa Lucia from the French, successfully defending it against an attempt by Comte d'Estaing to reclaim it. After being replaced by Byron, he continued to serve as that officer's second-in-command and was present at Grenada and St. Kitts (on July 6th and 22nd, 1779). Upon returning home, he was offered, but turned down, the command of the Channel fleet. His last active duty was the relief of Gibraltar in October 1782. As an admiral, he flew his flag briefly in 1790 but did not take part in the French revolutionary wars. He passed away in 1800.

See Ralfe, Naval Biographies, i. 120; Charnock, Biographia Navalis, vi. 10.

See Ralfe, Naval Biographies, i. 120; Charnock, Biographia Navalis, vi. 10.

BARRINGTON, SHUTE (1734-1826), youngest son of the 1st Viscount Barrington, was educated at Eton and Oxford, and after holding some minor dignities was made bishop of Llandaff in 1769. In 1782 he was translated to Salisbury and in 1791 to Durham. He was a vigorous Protestant, though willing to grant Roman Catholics "every degree of toleration short of political power and establishment." He published several volumes of sermons and tracts, and wrote the political life of his brother, Viscount Barrington.

BARRINGTON, SHUTE (1734-1826), the youngest son of the 1st Viscount Barrington, was educated at Eton and Oxford. After holding a few minor positions, he became the bishop of Llandaff in 1769. In 1782, he was moved to Salisbury and in 1791 to Durham. He was a strong Protestant, though he was open to granting Roman Catholics "every level of tolerance except for political power and establishment." He published several volumes of sermons and tracts and wrote the political biography of his brother, Viscount Barrington.

BARRINGTON, WILLIAM WILDMAN SHUTE, 2nd Viscount (1717-1793), eldest son of the 1st Viscount Barrington, was born on the 15th of January 1717. Succeeding to the title in 1734, he spent some time in travel, and in March 1740 was returned to parliament as member for Berwick-upon-Tweed. Having taken his seat in the Irish House of Lords in 1745, he was appointed one of the lords commissioners of the admiralty in 1746, and was one of the "managers" of the impeachment of Simon, Lord Lovat. In 1754 he became member of parliament for Plymouth, in 1755 was made a privy councillor and secretary at war, and in 1761 was transferred to the office of chancellor of the exchequer. In 1762 he became treasurer of the navy, and in 1765 returned to his former position of secretary at war. He retained this office until December 1778, and during four months in 1782 was joint postmaster-general. He married in 1740 Mary, daughter of Mr Henry Lovell, but left no children. He died at Becket on the 1st of February 1793, and was buried in Shrivenham church.

BARRINGTON, WILLIAM WILDMAN SHUTE, 2nd Viscount (1717-1793), the eldest son of the 1st Viscount Barrington, was born on January 15, 1717. He inherited the title in 1734 and spent some time traveling. In March 1740, he was elected to parliament as the representative for Berwick-upon-Tweed. After taking his seat in the Irish House of Lords in 1745, he was appointed one of the lords commissioners of the admiralty in 1746 and played a role as one of the "managers" in the impeachment of Simon, Lord Lovat. In 1754, he became a member of parliament for Plymouth, was made a privy councillor and secretary at war in 1755, and in 1761, he was moved to the position of chancellor of the exchequer. In 1762, he became treasurer of the navy and in 1765 returned to his previous role as secretary at war. He held this position until December 1778 and was jointly appointed postmaster-general for four months in 1782. He married Mary, the daughter of Mr. Henry Lovell, in 1740, but they had no children. He passed away at Becket on February 1, 1793, and was buried in Shrivenham church.

See Shute Barrington, Political Life of William Wildman, Viscount Barrington (London, 1814).

See Shute Barrington, Political Life of William Wildman, Viscount Barrington (London, 1814).

BARRISTER, in England and Ireland the term applied to the highest class of lawyers who have exclusive audience in all the superior courts, the word being derived from the "bar" (q.v.) in the law courts. Every barrister in England must be a member of one of the four ancient societies called Inns of Court, viz. Lincoln's Inn, the Inner and Middle Temples, and Gray's Inn, and in Ireland, of the King's Inns. The existence of the English societies as schools can be traced back to the 13th century, and their rise is attributed to the clause in Magna Carta, by which the Common Pleas were fixed at Westminster instead of following the king's court, and the professors of law were consequently brought together in London. Associations of lawyers acquired houses of their own in which students were educated in the common law, and the degrees of barrister (corresponding to apprentice or bachelor) and sergeant (corresponding to doctor) were conferred. These schools of law are now represented by the Inns of Court (q.v.).

BARRISTER, in England and Ireland, this term refers to the highest class of lawyers who have the exclusive right to argue cases in all superior courts, derived from the "bar" (q.v.) in law courts. Every barrister in England must be a member of one of the four ancient societies known as the Inns of Court: Lincoln's Inn, the Inner and Middle Temples, and Gray's Inn, and in Ireland, of the King's Inns. The history of these English societies as educational institutions goes back to the 13th century, with their development linked to a clause in the Magna Carta that established the Common Pleas at Westminster rather than following the king’s court, leading to law scholars gathering in London. Lawyer associations established their own buildings where students learned common law, and they awarded the degrees of barrister (similar to apprentice or bachelor) and sergeant (similar to doctor). Today, these law schools are represented by the Inns of Court (q.v.).

Students are admitted as members of the Inns of Court, on paying certain fees and on passing a general (elementary) examination or (alternatively) producing evidence of having passed a public examination at a university; their subsequent call to the bar depends on their keeping twelve terms (of which there are four in each year), and passing certain further examinations (see English Law ad fin.). A term is "kept" by dining six times (three for a student whose name is on the books of a university) in hall. This is a relic of the older system in which examinations were not included, the only requisite being a certificate from a barrister that the student had read for twelve months in his chambers. Dining in hall then applied a certain social test, which has now become unmeaning. The profession of barrister is open to almost every one; but no person connected [v.03 p.0438]with the law in any inferior capacity or who is a chartered or professional accountant, can enter an Inn of Court as a student until he has entirely and bona fide ceased to act or practise in such capacity. Some of the Inns also make a restriction that their members shall not be engaged in trade. A form of admission has to be filled up, containing a declaration to this effect, and mentioning inter alia the age, nationality, condition in life and occupation of the applicant. Previous to the student's call this declaration must be repeated, and he must further declare that he is not in holy orders, has not held any clerical preferment and has not performed any clerical functions during the year preceding. Subject to the above, practising solicitors of not less than five years' standing may be called to the bar without keeping any terms, upon passing the necessary examinations, and, per contra, a barrister of the same standing may, without any period of apprenticeship, become a solicitor upon passing the final examination for solicitors. Irish barristers of three years' standing may be called to the English bar without passing any examination upon keeping three terms, and so also may barristers of those colonies where the professions of barrister and solicitor are still kept distinct. No one can become a barrister till he is twenty-one years old.

Students are admitted as members of the Inns of Court by paying certain fees and either passing a basic exam or showing proof of completing a public exam at a university. Their later call to the bar relies on completing twelve terms (there are four terms each year) and passing additional exams (see English Law ad fin.). A term is "kept" by dining six times in the hall (three times for students enrolled at a university). This system is a remnant of an earlier approach where examinations weren't part of the process; the only requirement was a certificate from a barrister confirming that the student had read in their chambers for twelve months. Dining in the hall served a specific social purpose, which has now lost its meaning. The barrister profession is open to nearly everyone, but individuals working in any lower legal capacity or those who are chartered or professional accountants cannot enter an Inn of Court as students until they completely and genuinely stop practicing in that capacity. Some Inns also require that their members not be involved in trade. A form of admission needs to be filled out, which includes a declaration stating the applicant's age, nationality, life status, and occupation. Before a student is called to the bar, this declaration must be repeated, along with a further statement confirming that they are not in holy orders, have not held any clerical position, and have not performed any clerical duties in the year prior. Subject to these conditions, practicing solicitors with at least five years of experience can be called to the bar without completing any terms, after passing the required exams, and conversely, a barrister with the same experience can, without any apprenticeship, become a solicitor by passing the final solicitors' exam. Irish barristers with three years of experience can be called to the English bar without taking an exam after keeping three terms, as can barristers from colonies where the roles of barrister and solicitor remain separate. No one can become a barrister until they are twenty-one years old.

The benchers of the different Inns of Court have the right of rejecting any applicant for membership with or without cause assigned; and for sufficient reasons, subject to an appeal to the common-law judges as visitors of the Inns, they may refuse to call a student to the bar, or may expel from their society or from the profession ("dis-bar" or "dis-bench") even barristers or benchers. The benchers appear to take cognizance of any kind of misconduct, whether professional or not, which they may deem unworthy of the rank of barrister. The grade of barrister comprehends the attorney-general and solicitor-general (appointed by and holding office solely at the will of the government of the day), who rank as the heads of the profession, king's counsel and ordinary practitioners, sometimes technically known as "utter barristers."

The benchers of the various Inns of Court have the authority to reject any applicant for membership, with or without a stated reason. For valid reasons, and subject to an appeal to the common-law judges who oversee the Inns, they can deny a student entry to the bar or expel anyone from their society or the profession ("dis-bar" or "dis-bench"), even barristers or benchers. The benchers will consider any type of misconduct, whether professional or otherwise, that they believe is unworthy of the status of a barrister. The rank of barrister includes the attorney-general and solicitor-general (who are appointed by and serve solely at the discretion of the current government), ranking as the leaders of the profession, along with king's counsel and regular practitioners, sometimes technically referred to as "utter barristers."

The peculiar business of barristers is the advocacy of causes in open court, but in England a great deal of other business falls into their hands. They are the chief conveyancers, and the pleadings (i.e. the counter statements of parties previous to joining issue) are in all but the simplest cases drafted by them. There was formerly, indeed, a separate class of conveyancers and special pleaders, being persons who kept the necessary number of terms qualifying for a call but who, instead of being called, took out licences, granted for one year only, but renewable, to practise under the bar, but now conveyancing and special pleading form part of the ordinary work of a junior barrister. The higher rank among barristers is that of king's or queen's counsel. They lead in court, and give opinions on cases submitted to them, but they do not accept conveyancing or pleading, nor do they admit pupils to their chambers. Precedence among king's counsel, as well as among outer barristers, is determined by seniority.[1] The old order of serjeants-at-law (q.v.) who ranked after king's counsel, is now extinct. Although every barrister has a right to practise in any court in England, each special class of business has its own practitioners, so that the bar may almost be said to be divided into several professions. The most marked distinction is that between barristers practising in chancery and barristers practising in the courts of common law. The fusion of law and equity brought about by the Judicature Acts 1873 and 1875 was expected in course of time to break down this distinction; but to a large extent the separation between these two great branches of the profession remains. There are also subordinate distinctions in each branch. Counsel at common law attach themselves to one or other of the circuits into which England is divided, and may not practise elsewhere unless under special conditions. In chancery the king's counsel for the most part restrict themselves to one or other of the courts of the chancery division. Business before the court of probate, divorce and admiralty, the privy council and parliamentary committees, exhibits, though in a less degree, the same tendency to specialization. In some of the larger provincial towns there are also local bars of considerable strength. The bar of Ireland exhibits in its general arrangements the same features as the bar of England. For the Scottish bar, see under Advocates, Faculty of. There is no connexion whatever between the Scottish and English bars. A distinctive dress is worn by barristers when attending the courts, consisting of a stuff gown, exchanged for one of silk (whence the expression "to take silk") when the wearer has attained the rank of king's counsel, both classes also having wigs dating in pattern and material from the 18th century.

The unique role of barristers involves advocating for cases in open court, but in England, they handle a lot of other tasks as well. They are the main experts in drafting legal documents, and the pleadings (i.e. the statements exchanged by parties before the case goes to trial) are prepared by them in all but the simplest cases. There used to be a separate group of conveyancers and special pleaders, who qualified for the bar but chose to take yearly renewable licenses to practice without being officially called; now, conveyancing and special pleading are regular parts of a junior barrister's work. The more senior barristers are known as king’s or queen’s counsel. They lead cases in court and provide opinions on matters brought to them, but they don’t handle conveyancing or pleadings, nor do they take on pupils in their chambers. Seniority determines who has precedence among king's counsel as well as among junior barristers. The old class of serjeants-at-law, who ranked just below king’s counsel, is now no longer in existence. While every barrister has the right to practice in any court in England, different types of legal work have their own specialists, which means the bar is almost like a collection of professions. The most notable division is between barristers who work in chancery and those who work in common law courts. The merging of law and equity through the Judicature Acts of 1873 and 1875 was thought to eventually eliminate this distinction; however, for the most part, the separation between these two significant branches of the profession still exists. There are also smaller distinctions within each branch. Common law counsel typically affiliate with one of the legal circuits across England and may only practice elsewhere under specific conditions. In chancery, king’s counsel mostly limit themselves to the courts within the chancery division. Cases in the probate, divorce, and admiralty courts, as well as before the privy council and parliamentary committees, show a similar tendency toward specialization, though to a lesser extent. Some larger provincial towns also have robust local bars. The bar in Ireland shares similar characteristics with the bar in England. For information on the Scottish bar, see Faculty Advocates. There is no connection whatsoever between the Scottish and English bars. Barristers wear distinctive robes in court, switching from a fabric gown to a silk one (which is where the term "to take silk" comes from) when they reach the rank of king's counsel; both ranks also wear wigs that have been in style since the 18th century.

Counsel is not answerable for anything spoken by him relative to the cause in hand and suggested in the client's instructions, even though it should reflect on the character of another and prove absolutely groundless, but if he mention an untruth of his own invention, or even upon instructions if it be impertinent to the matter in hand, he is then liable to an action from the party injured. Counsel may also be punished by the summary power of the court or judge as for a contempt, and by the benchers of the inn to which he may belong on cause shown.

Counsel is not responsible for anything they say related to the case at hand that comes from the client's instructions, even if it negatively impacts someone else's character and turns out to be completely baseless. However, if they mention a lie of their own making, or even follow instructions if it’s irrelevant to the case, they could face a lawsuit from the affected party. Counsel can also be punished by the court or judge for contempt, as well as by the benchers of their inn if there is a valid reason.

The rank of barrister is a necessary qualification for nearly all offices of a judicial character, and a very usual qualification for other important appointments. Not only the judgeships in the superior courts of law and equity in England and in her colonies, but nearly all the magistracies of minor rank—recorderships, county court judgeships, &c.—are restricted to the bar. The result is a unique feature in the English system of justice, viz. the perfect harmony of opinion and interest between the bar as a profession and all degrees of the judicial bench. Barristers have the rank of esquires, and are privileged from arrest whilst in attendance on the superior courts and on circuit, and also from serving on juries whilst in active practice.

The role of a barrister is a necessary qualification for almost all judicial positions and is a common requirement for other important roles. Not only are the judgeships in the higher courts of law and equity in England and its colonies limited to barristers, but nearly all lower magistrate positions—like recorders and county court judges—are also restricted to the legal profession. This creates a unique aspect of the English justice system: a perfect alignment of opinions and interests between barristers and all levels of the judiciary. Barristers hold the status of esquires and are exempt from arrest while attending the higher courts and during circuit court sessions, as well as from serving on juries while they are actively practicing.

Revising Barristers are counsel of not less than seven years' standing appointed to revise the lists of parliamentary voters.

Revising Barristers are attorneys with at least seven years of experience who are appointed to review the lists of parliamentary voters.

Barristers cannot maintain an action for their fees, which are regarded as gratuities, nor can they, by the usage of the profession, undertake a case without the intervention of a solicitor, except in criminal cases, where a barrister may be engaged directly, by having a fee given him in open court, nor is it competent for them to enter into any contract for payment by their clients with respect to litigation.

Barristers can't sue for their fees, which are seen as tips, and they can't take on a case without the involvement of a solicitor, except in criminal cases, where a barrister can be hired directly by receiving a fee in open court. They also can't enter into any payment contract with their clients regarding litigation.

See J. R. V. Marchant, Barrister-at-law: an Essay on the legal position of Counsel in England (1905).

See J. R. V. Marchant, Barrister-at-law: an Essay on the legal position of Counsel in England (1905).

[1] A king's counsel is appointed by letters patent to be "one of His Majesty's counsel learned in the law." The appointment rests with the lord chancellor, to whom the barrister desiring a silk gown makes application. There is no definite time required to elapse between "call" and application for a seat within the bar, but it is generally understood that a barrister must be of at least ten years' standing before he is appointed a king's counsel. The first king's counsel was Sir Francis Bacon, who was appointed by Queen Elizabeth "queen's counsel extraordinary," and received a payment, by way of "pledge and fee," of £40 a year, payable half-yearly. Succeeding king's counsel received a similar payment, until its abolition in 1831. There was not another appointment of a king's counsel until 1668, when Lord Chancellor Francis North was so honoured. From 1775 king's counsel may be said to have become a regular order. Their number was very small so late as the middle of the 19th century (20 in 1789; 30 in 1810; 28 in 1850), but at the beginning of the 20 century there were over 250. A king's counsel may not, unless by special licence, take a brief against the crown, but such a licence is never refused unless the crown desires his services in the case.

[1] A king's counsel is appointed through official letters to be "one of His Majesty's legal advisors." The lord chancellor is responsible for the appointment, and barristers interested in receiving a silk gown must apply to him. There's no set time that must pass between being "called" and applying for a position at the bar, but it’s generally expected that a barrister should have at least ten years of experience before being appointed as a king's counsel. The first king's counsel was Sir Francis Bacon, appointed by Queen Elizabeth as "queen's counsel extraordinary," who received a payment of £40 a year as a "pledge and fee," paid biannually. Subsequent king's counsels received a similar payment until it was abolished in 1831. There were no further appointments of king's counsel until 1668, when Lord Chancellor Francis North received this honor. By 1775, king's counsel became a regular title. Their numbers were quite small until the mid-19th century (20 in 1789; 30 in 1810; 28 in 1850), but by the early 20th century, there were over 250. A king's counsel cannot, unless granted special permission, take a case against the crown, but such permission is rarely denied unless the crown wants his services for that case.

BARROIS, CHARLES (1851- ), French geologist, was born at Lille on the 21st of April 1851, and educated at the college in that town, where he studied geology under Prof. Jules Gosselet and qualified as D. ès Sc. To this master he dedicated his first comprehensive work, Recherches sur le terrain crétacé supérieur de l'Angleterre et de l'Irlande, published in the Mémoires de la société géologique du Nord in 1876. In this essay the palaeontological zones in the Chalk and Upper Greensand of Britain were for the first time marked out in detail, and the results of Dr Barrois's original researches have formed the basis of subsequent work, and have in all leading features been confirmed. In 1876 Dr Barrois was appointed a collaborateur to the French Geological Survey, and in 1877 professor of geology in the university [v.03 p.0439]of Lille. In other memoirs, among which may be mentioned those on the Cretaceous rocks of the Ardennes and of the Basin of Oviedo, Spain; on the (Devonian) Calcaire d'Erbray; on the Palaeozoic rocks of Brittany and of northern Spain; and on the granitic and metamorphic rocks of Brittany, Dr Barrois has proved himself an accomplished petrologist as well as palaeontologist and field-geologist. In 1881 he was awarded the Bigsby medal, and in 1901 the Wollaston medal by the Geological Society of London. He was chosen member of the Institute (Academy of Sciences) in 1904.

BARROIS, CHARLES (1851- ), French geologist, was born in Lille on April 21, 1851, and educated at the college in that town, where he studied geology under Prof. Jules Gosselet and earned his doctorate in science. He dedicated his first major work, Recherches sur le terrain crétacé supérieur de l'Angleterre et de l'Irlande, published in the Mémoires de la société géologique du Nord in 1876, to this mentor. In this essay, he detailed the paleontological zones in the Chalk and Upper Greensand of Britain for the first time, and the results of Dr. Barrois's original research have laid the groundwork for future studies, being confirmed in all key aspects. In 1876, Dr. Barrois was appointed a collaborator with the French Geological Survey, and in 1877 he became a professor of geology at the university of Lille. In additional papers, including those on the Cretaceous rocks of the Ardennes and the Basin of Oviedo, Spain; the (Devonian) Calcaire d'Erbray; the Paleozoic rocks of Brittany and northern Spain; and the granitic and metamorphic rocks of Brittany, Dr. Barrois demonstrated his expertise as both a petrologist and a paleontologist as well as a field geologist. In 1881, he received the Bigsby medal, and in 1901, he was awarded the Wollaston medal by the Geological Society of London. He became a member of the Institute (Academy of Sciences) in 1904.

BARROS, JOÃO DE (1496-1570), called the Portuguese Livy, may be said to have been the first great historian of his country. Educated in the palace of King Manoel, he early conceived the idea of writing history, and, to prove his powers, composed, at the age of twenty, a romance of chivalry, the Chronicle of the Emperor Clarimundo, in which he is said to have had the assistance of Prince John, afterwards King John III. The latter, on ascending the throne, gave Barros the captaincy of the fortress of St George of Elmina, whither he proceeded in 1522, and he obtained in 1525 the post of treasurer of the India House, which he held until 1528. The pest of 1530 drove him from Lisbon to his country house near Pombal, and there he finished a moral dialogue, Rhopica Pneuma, which met with the applause of the learned Juan Luis Vives. On his return to Lisbon in 1532 the king appointed Barros factor of the India and Mina House—positions of great responsibility and importance at a time when Lisbon was the European emporium for the trade of the East. Barros proved a good administrator, displaying great industry and a disinterestedness rare in that age, with the result that he made but little money where his predecessors had amassed fortunes. At this time, John III., wishful to attract settlers to Brazil, divided it up into captaincies and gave that of Maranhão to Barros, who, associating two partners in the enterprise with himself, prepared an armada of ten vessels, carrying nine hundred men, which set sail in 1539. Owing to the ignorance of the pilots, the whole fleet suffered shipwreck, which entailed serious financial loss on Barros, yet not content with meeting his own obligations, he paid the debts of those who had perished in the expedition. During all these busy years he had continued his studies in his leisure hours, and shortly after the Brazilian disaster he offered to write a history of the Portuguese in India, which the king accepted. He began work forthwith, but, before printing the first part, he again proved his pen by publishing a Portuguese grammar (1540) and some more moral Dialogues. The first of the Decades of his Asia appeared in 1552, and its reception was such that the king straightway charged Barros to write a chronicle of King Manoel. His many occupations, however, prevented him from undertaking this book, which was finally composed by Damião de Goes (q.v.). The Second Decade came out in 1553 and the Third in 1563, but the Fourth and final one was not published until 1615, long after the author's death. In January 1568 Barros retired from his remunerative appointment at the India House, receiving the rank of fidalgo together with a pension and other pecuniary emoluments from King Sebastian, and died on the 20th of October 1570. A man of lofty character, he preferred leaving his children an example of good morals and learning to bequeathing them a large pecuniary inheritance, and, though he received many royal benefactions, they were volunteered, never asked for. As an historian and a stylist Barros deserves the high fame he has always enjoyed. His Decades contain the early history of the Portuguese in Asia and reveal careful study of Eastern historians and geographers, as well as of the records of his own country. They are distinguished by clearness of exposition and orderly arrangement. His style has all the simplicity and grandeur of the masters of historical writing, and the purity of his diction is incontestable. Though, on the whole, impartial, Barros is the narrator and apologist of the great deeds of his countrymen, and lacks the critical spirit and intellectual acumen of Damião de Goes. Diogo do Couto continued the Decades, adding nine more, and a modern edition of the whole appeared in Lisbon in 14 vols. in 1778-1788. The title of Barros's work is Da Asia de João de Barros, dos feitos que os Portuguezes fizeram no descubrimento e conquista dos mares e terras do Oriente, and the edition is accompanied by a volume containing a life of Barros by the historian Manoel Severim de Faria and a copious index of all the Decades. An Italian version in 2 vols. appeared in Venice in 1561-1562 and a German in 5 vols. in 1821. Clarimundo has gone through the following editions: 1522, 1555, 1601, 1742, 1791 and 1843, all published in Lisbon. It influenced Francisco de Moraes (q.v.); cf. Purser, Palmerin of England, Dublin, 1904, pp. 440 et seq.

BARROS, JOÃO DE (1496-1570), known as the Portuguese Livy, is considered the first great historian of his country. Educated at the palace of King Manoel, he early on developed the ambition to write history. At just twenty, he wrote a chivalric romance, the Chronicle of the Emperor Clarimundo, reportedly with help from Prince John, who later became King John III. When John ascended the throne, he appointed Barros as the captain of the fortress of St George of Elmina, which he took over in 1522. In 1525, he became the treasurer of the India House, a role he held until 1528. The plague in 1530 forced him to leave Lisbon for his country house near Pombal, where he completed a moral dialogue, Rhopica Pneuma, which received praise from the scholar Juan Luis Vives. After returning to Lisbon in 1532, the king made Barros the factor of the India and Mina House—highly responsible positions at a time when Lisbon was the center of East Asian trade. Barros proved to be an effective administrator, showing great diligence and a rare selflessness for his time, resulting in him earning little compared to his predecessors who had amassed wealth. At this time, John III wanted to attract settlers to Brazil, dividing it into captaincies and assigning the Maranhão captaincy to Barros. Partnering with two associates, he prepared a fleet of ten ships, carrying nine hundred men, which set sail in 1539. Due to pilot errors, the entire fleet was shipwrecked, causing Barros significant financial losses. Despite this, he went beyond his own obligations by covering the debts of those who died in the expedition. Throughout these busy years, he continued his studies in his spare time and, shortly after the Brazilian mishap, offered to write a history of the Portuguese in India, which the king approved. He started working on it immediately, but before printing the first part, he showcased his writing skills by publishing a Portuguese grammar (1540) and additional moral dialogues. The first of the Decades of his Asia was published in 1552, receiving such acclaim that the king promptly requested Barros to write a chronicle of King Manoel. However, his many commitments prevented him from taking on this project, which was eventually completed by Damião de Goes (q.v.). The Second Decade was published in 1553 and the Third in 1563, but the Fourth and final one wasn't released until 1615, long after Barros's death. In January 1568, Barros retired from his position at the India House, receiving the title of fidalgo, along with a pension and other financial benefits from King Sebastian. He died on October 20, 1570. A man of high moral character, he chose to leave his children a legacy of good values and education rather than a large financial inheritance, and although he received many royal gifts, they were always given voluntarily, not solicited. As a historian and a writer, Barros deserves the acclaim he has received. His Decades document the early history of the Portuguese in Asia and reflect thorough research of Eastern historians and geographers, as well as the records of his own country. They are known for their clarity and organization. His writing style exhibits the simplicity and grandeur typical of historical masters, and the purity of his language is undeniable. While generally impartial, Barros chronicles and defends the great achievements of his fellow countrymen and lacks the critical insight and intellectual sharpness of Damião de Goes. Diogo do Couto continued the Decades, adding nine more, and a modern edition of the entire work was published in Lisbon in 14 volumes between 1778-1788. The title of Barros's work is Da Asia de João de Barros, dos feitos que os Portuguezes fizeram no descubrimento e conquista dos mares e terras do Oriente, accompanied by a volume containing a biography of Barros by the historian Manoel Severim de Faria and a comprehensive index of all the Decades. An Italian version in 2 volumes was published in Venice in 1561-1562, and a German translation in 5 volumes appeared in 1821. Clarimundo has been through the following editions: 1522, 1555, 1601, 1742, 1791, and 1843, all published in Lisbon. It influenced Francisco de Moraes (q.v.); cf. Purser, Palmerin of England, Dublin, 1904, pp. 440 et seq.

The minor works of Barros are described by Innocencio da Silva: Diccionario Bibliographico Portuguez, vol. iii. pp. 320-323 and vol. x. pp. 187-189, and in Severim de Faria's Life, cited above. A compilation of Barros's Varia was published by the visconde de Azevedo (Porto, 1869).

The lesser works of Barros are detailed by Innocencio da Silva in his Diccionario Bibliographico Portuguez, vol. iii. pp. 320-323 and vol. x. pp. 187-189, and in Severim de Faria's Life, mentioned earlier. A collection of Barros's Varia was published by the visconde de Azevedo (Porto, 1869).

(E. Pr.)

(E. Pr.)

BARROT, CAMILLE HYACINTHE ODILON (1791-1873), French politician, was born at Villefort (Lozère) on the 19th of September 1791. He belonged to a legal family, his father, an advocate of Toulouse, having been a member of the Convention who had voted against the death of Louis XVI. Odilon Barrot's earliest recollections were of the October insurrection of 1795. He was sent to the military school of Saint-Cyr, but presently removed to the Lycée Napoleon to study law and was called to the Parisian bar in 1811. He was placed in the office of the conventionel Jean Mailhe, who was advocate before the council of state and the court of cassation and was proscribed at the second restoration. Barrot eventually succeeded him in both positions. His dissatisfaction with the government of the restoration was shown in his conduct of some political trials. For his opposition in 1820 to a law by which any person might be arrested and detained on a warrant signed by three ministers, he was summoned before a court of assize, but acquitted. Although intimate with Lafayette and others, he took no actual share in their schemes for the overthrow of the government, but in 1827 he joined the association known as Aide-toi, le ciel t'aidera. He presided over the banquet given by the society to the 221 deputies who had signed the address of March 1830 to Charles X., and threatened to reply to force by force. After the ordinances of the 26th of July 1830, he joined the National Guard and took an active part in the revolution. As secretary of the municipal commission, which sat at the hôtel-de-ville and formed itself into a provisional government, he was charged to convey to the chamber of deputies a protest embodying the terms which the advanced Liberals wished to impose on the king to be elected. He supported the idea of a constitutional monarchy against the extreme Republicans, and he was appointed one of the three commissioners chosen to escort Charles X. out of France. On his return he was nominated prefect of the department of the Seine. His concessions to the Parisian mob and his extreme gentleness towards those who demanded the prosecution of the ministers of Charles X. led to an unflattering comparison with Jérôme Pétion under similar circumstances. Louis Philippe's government was far from satisfying his desires for reform, and he persistently urged the "broadening of the bases of the monarchy," while he protested his loyalty to the dynasty. He was returned to the chamber of deputies for the department of Eure in 1831. The day after the demonstration of June 1832 on the occasion of the funeral of General Lamarque, he made himself indirectly the mouthpiece of the Democrats in an interview with Louis Philippe, which is given at length in his Mémoires. Subsequently, in pleading before the court of cassation on behalf of one of the rioters, he secured the annulling of the judgments given by the council of war. The death of the duke of Orleans in 1842 was a blow to Barrot's party, which sought to substitute the regency of the duchess of Orleans for that of the duke of Nemours in the event of the succession of the count of Paris. In 1846 Barrot made a tour in the Near East, returning in time to take part a second time in the preliminaries of revolution. He organized banquets of the disaffected in the various cities of France, and demanded electoral reform to avoid revolution. He did not foresee the strength of the outbreak for which his eloquence had prepared the way, and clung to the programme of 1830. He tried to support the regency of the duchess in the chamber on the 24th of February, only to find that the time was past for [v.03 p.0440]half-measures. He acquiesced in the republic and gave his adhesion to General Cavaignac. He became the chief of Louis Napoleon's first ministry in the hope of extracting Liberal measures, but was dismissed in 1849 as soon as he had served the president's purpose of avoiding open conflict. After the coup d'état of December 1851 he was one of those who sought to accuse Napoleon of high treason. He was imprisoned for a short time and retired from active politics for some ten years. He was drawn once more into affairs by the hopes of reform held out by Émile Ollivier, accepting in 1869 the presidency of an extra-parliamentary committee on decentralization. After the fall of the empire he was nominated by Thiers, whom he had supported under Louis Philippe, president of the council of state. But his powers were now failing, and he had only filled his new office for about a year when he died at Bougival on the 6th of August 1873. He had been sufficiently an optimist to believe in the triumph of the liberal but non-republican institutions dear to him under the restoration, under Louis Philippe and Louis Napoleon successively. He was unable to foresee and unwilling to accept the consequences of his political agitation in 1830 and 1848, and in spite of his talents and acknowledged influence he thus failed to secure the honours won by more uncompromising politicians. He was described by Thureau-Dangin as "le plus solennel des indécis, le plus méditatif des irréfléchis, le plus heureux des ambitieux, le plus austère des courtisans de la foule."

BARROT, CAMILLE HYACINTHE ODILON (1791-1873), French politician, was born in Villefort (Lozère) on September 19, 1791. He came from a legal family; his father, an advocate from Toulouse, was a member of the Convention who voted against the execution of Louis XVI. Odilon Barrot's earliest memories were of the October uprising in 1795. He attended the military school of Saint-Cyr but was soon transferred to the Lycée Napoleon to study law, being called to the Paris bar in 1811. He worked in the office of the conventionel Jean Mailhe, who was an advocate before the Council of State and the Court of Cassation and was exiled during the second restoration. Barrot eventually took over both positions. His dissatisfaction with the restoration government showed in his handling of several political trials. For opposing a 1820 law that allowed for arrest and detention on a warrant signed by three ministers, he was brought before a court but acquitted. Although close to Lafayette and others, he did not actively participate in their plans to overthrow the government; however, in 1827, he joined the association known as Aide-toi, le ciel t'aidera. He presided over a banquet held by the society for the 221 deputies who signed the address to Charles X in March 1830, threatening to respond to force with force. After the ordinances of July 26, 1830, he joined the National Guard and played an active role in the revolution. As secretary of the municipal commission that met in the town hall and established itself as a provisional government, he was tasked with delivering a protest to the Chamber of Deputies, outlining the demands advanced by the Liberals to be imposed on the king. He supported the idea of a constitutional monarchy against extreme republicans and was appointed as one of three commissioners to escort Charles X out of France. Upon his return, he was appointed prefect of the Seine department. His concessions to the Parisian populace and his extreme gentleness towards those urging the prosecution of Charles X's ministers led to unfavorable comparisons with Jérôme Pétion under similar circumstances. Louis Philippe's government did not meet his reform expectations, and he consistently pushed for "broadening the bases of the monarchy," while affirming his loyalty to the dynasty. He was elected to the Chamber of Deputies for the Eure department in 1831. The day after the June 1832 demonstration at General Lamarque's funeral, he indirectly represented the Democrats in an interview with Louis Philippe, detailed in his Mémoires. Later, while advocating for one of the rioters before the Court of Cassation, he successfully overturned judgments made by the war council. The death of the Duke of Orleans in 1842 dealt a blow to Barrot's party, which sought to replace the regency of the Duke of Nemours with that of the Duchess of Orleans if the Count of Paris succeeded. In 1846, Barrot traveled to the Near East and returned in time to participate in the early stages of revolution once again. He organized banquets for the discontented in various cities across France and called for electoral reform to prevent revolution. He did not anticipate the magnitude of the upheaval his eloquence had helped set in motion and clung to the agenda of 1830. He attempted to support the Duchess's regency in the chamber on February 24, only to find the moment had passed for half-measures. He accepted the Republic and aligned himself with General Cavaignac. He became the head of Louis Napoleon's first ministry, hoping to introduce Liberal reforms, but was dismissed in 1849 once he had served the president's purpose of avoiding open conflict. After the December 1851 coup d'état, he was among those who accused Napoleon of high treason. He was briefly imprisoned and withdrew from active politics for about ten years. He became involved again due to the reform promises from Émile Ollivier, accepting in 1869 the presidency of an extra-parliamentary committee on decentralization. After the empire's fall, he was appointed by Thiers, whom he had supported during Louis Philippe's reign, as president of the Council of State. However, his health was failing, and he had only held the office for about a year when he died in Bougival on August 6, 1873. He had been optimistic enough to believe in the success of the liberal yet non-republican institutions he valued during the restoration, under Louis Philippe, and under Louis Napoleon. He was unable to foresee, and unwilling to accept, the consequences of his political agitation in 1830 and 1848, and despite his talents and recognized influence, he failed to achieve the honors secured by more uncompromising politicians. Thureau-Dangin described him as "the most solemn of the indecisive, the most meditative of the thoughtless, the happiest of the ambitious, the most austere of the crowd's courtiers."

His personal relations with Louis Philippe and Napoleon, with his views on the events in which he was concerned, are described in the four volumes of his Mémoires, edited by Duvergier de Hauranne in 1875-1876. See also Thureau-Dangin, Hist. de la monarchie de juillet.

His personal relationships with Louis Philippe and Napoleon, along with his perspectives on the events he was involved in, are detailed in the four volumes of his Mémoires, edited by Duvergier de Hauranne in 1875-1876. Also, see Thureau-Dangin, Hist. de la monarchie de juillet.

BARROW, ISAAC (1630-1677), English mathematician and divine, was the son of Thomas Barrow, a linen-draper in London, belonging to an old Suffolk and Cambridgeshire family. His uncle was Bishop Isaac Barrow of St Asaph (1614-1680). He was at first placed for two or three years at the Charterhouse school. There, however, his conduct gave but little hopes of his ever succeeding as a scholar. But after his removal from this establishment to Felsted school in Essex, where Martin Holbeach was master, his disposition took a happier turn; and having soon made considerable progress in learning, he was in 1643 entered at St Peter's College, and afterwards at Trinity College, Cambridge, where he applied himself to the study of literature and science, especially of natural philosophy. He at first intended to adopt the medical profession, and made some progress in anatomy, botany and chemistry, after which he studied chronology, geometry and astronomy. He then travelled in France and Italy, and in a voyage from Leghorn to Smyrna gave proofs of great personal bravery during an attack made by an Algerine pirate. At Smyrna he met with a kind reception from the English consul, Mr Bretton, upon whose death he afterwards wrote a Latin elegy. From this place he proceeded to Constantinople, where he received similar civilities from Sir Thomas Bendish, the English ambassador, and Sir Jonathan Dawes, with whom he afterwards contracted an intimate friendship. While at Constantinople he read and studied the works of St Chrysostom, whom he preferred to all the other Fathers. He resided in Turkey somewhat more than a year, after which he proceeded to Venice, and thence returned home through Germany and Holland in 1659.

BARROW, ISAAC (1630-1677), was an English mathematician and theologian, the son of Thomas Barrow, a linen draper in London, from an old family in Suffolk and Cambridgeshire. His uncle was Bishop Isaac Barrow of St Asaph (1614-1680). He initially attended Charterhouse school for two or three years, but his behavior gave little hope of him becoming a successful student. However, after he was moved to Felsted school in Essex, where Martin Holbeach was the headmaster, he started to thrive and quickly made significant progress in his studies. In 1643, he enrolled at St Peter's College and later at Trinity College, Cambridge, where he focused on literature and science, especially natural philosophy. He originally planned to pursue a career in medicine, making strides in anatomy, botany, and chemistry, then studying chronology, geometry, and astronomy. He traveled to France and Italy, and during a journey from Leghorn to Smyrna, he demonstrated great courage during an attack by an Algerine pirate. In Smyrna, he was warmly welcomed by the English consul, Mr. Bretton, and later wrote a Latin elegy upon his death. From there, he went to Constantinople, where he received similar hospitality from Sir Thomas Bendish, the English ambassador, and formed a close friendship with Sir Jonathan Dawes. While in Constantinople, he read and studied St Chrysostom's works, whom he preferred over other Church Fathers. He lived in Turkey for a little over a year before heading to Venice and then returning home through Germany and Holland in 1659.

Immediately on his reaching England he received ordination from Bishop Brownrig, and in 1660 he was appointed to the Greek professorship at Cambridge. When he entered upon this office he intended to have prelected upon the tragedies of Sophocles; but he altered his intention and made choice of Aristotle's rhetoric. His lectures on this subject, having been lent to a friend who never returned them, are irrecoverably lost. In July 1662 he was elected professor of geometry in Gresham College, on the recommendation of Dr John Wilkins, master of Trinity College and afterwards bishop of Chester; and in May 1663 he was chosen a fellow of the Royal Society, at the first election made by the council after obtaining their charter. The same year the executors of Henry Lucas, who, according to the terms of his will, had founded a mathematical chair at Cambridge, fixed upon Barrow as the first professor; and although his two professorships were not inconsistent with each other, he chose to resign that of Gresham College, which he did on the 20th of May 1664. In 1669 he resigned his mathematical chair to his pupil, Isaac Newton, having now determined to renounce the study of mathematics for that of divinity. Upon quitting his professorship Barrow was only a fellow of Trinity College; but his uncle gave him a small sinecure in Wales, and Dr Seth Ward, bishop of Salisbury, conferred upon him a prebend in that church. In the year 1670 he was created doctor in divinity by mandate; and, upon the promotion of Dr Pearson to the see of Chester, he was appointed to succeed him as master of Trinity College by the king's patent, bearing the date of the 13th of February 1672. In 1675 Dr Barrow was chosen vice-chancellor of the university. He died on the 4th of May 1677, and was interred in Westminster Abbey, where a monument, surmounted by his bust, was soon after erected by the contributions of his friends.

As soon as he arrived in England, he was ordained by Bishop Brownrig, and in 1660 he was appointed to the Greek professorship at Cambridge. When he took on this role, he planned to lecture on the tragedies of Sophocles, but he changed his mind and chose to focus on Aristotle's rhetoric instead. His lectures on this topic were lent to a friend who never returned them, so they are permanently lost. In July 1662, he was elected professor of geometry at Gresham College, following a recommendation from Dr. John Wilkins, the master of Trinity College and later the bishop of Chester. In May 1663, he was elected a fellow of the Royal Society in the first election held by the council after they received their charter. That same year, the executors of Henry Lucas, who had established a mathematical chair at Cambridge in his will, selected Barrow as the first professor. Although his two professorships didn't conflict, he chose to resign from Gresham College, which he did on May 20, 1664. In 1669, he handed over his mathematical chair to his student, Isaac Newton, because he had decided to shift his focus from mathematics to theology. After leaving his professorship, Barrow was only a fellow of Trinity College; however, his uncle provided him with a small sinecure in Wales, and Dr. Seth Ward, bishop of Salisbury, awarded him a prebend at that church. In 1670, he was granted a doctorate in divinity by mandate, and when Dr. Pearson was promoted to the see of Chester, he was appointed by the king’s patent to succeed him as master of Trinity College on February 13, 1672. In 1675, Dr. Barrow was elected vice-chancellor of the university. He died on May 4, 1677, and was buried in Westminster Abbey, where a monument featuring his bust was quickly erected by the contributions of his friends.

By his English contemporaries Barrow was considered a mathematician second only to Newton. Continental writers do not place him so high, and their judgment is probably the more correct one. He was undoubtedly a clear-sighted and able mathematician, who handled admirably the severe geometrical method, and who in his Method of Tangents approximated to the course of reasoning by which Newton was afterwards led to the doctrine of ultimate ratios; but his substantial contributions to the science are of no great importance, and his lectures upon elementary principles do not throw much light on the difficulties surrounding the border-land between mathematics and philosophy. (See Infinitesimal Calculus.) His Sermons have long enjoyed a high reputation; they are weighty pieces of reasoning, elaborate in construction and ponderous in style.

By his English contemporaries, Barrow was seen as a mathematician second only to Newton. Writers from the continent don't rate him as highly, and their judgment is likely closer to the truth. He was definitely a sharp and skilled mathematician who mastered the rigorous geometrical method, and in his Method of Tangents, he made strides toward the type of reasoning that would later lead Newton to the concept of ultimate ratios. However, his significant contributions to the field aren't very impactful, and his lectures on basic principles don’t provide much insight into the challenges at the intersection of mathematics and philosophy. (See Calculus.) His Sermons have long been respected; they are substantial pieces of reasoning, complex in structure and heavy in style.

His scientific works are very numerous. The most important are:—Euclid's Elements; Euclid's Data; Optical Lectures, read in the public school of Cambridge; Thirteen Geometrical Lectures; The Works of Archimedes, the Four Books of Apollonius's Conic Sections, and Theodosius's Spherics, explained in a New Method; A Lecture, in which Archimedes' Theorems of the Sphere and Cylinder are investigated and briefly demonstrated; Mathematical Lectures, read in the public schools of the university of Cambridge. The above were all written in Latin. His English works have been collected and published in four volumes folio.

His scientific works are extensive. The most significant include: —Euclid's Elements; Euclid's Data; Optical Lectures, presented at the public school of Cambridge; Thirteen Geometrical Lectures; The Works of Archimedes; the Four Books of Apollonius's Conic Sections; and Theodosius's Spherics, explained in a New Method; A Lecture in which Archimedes' Theorems of the Sphere and Cylinder are explored and briefly demonstrated; Mathematical Lectures, delivered at the public schools of the University of Cambridge. All of these were originally written in Latin. His English works have been compiled and published in four folio volumes.

See Ward, Lives of the Gresham Professors, and Whewell's biography prefixed to the 9th volume of Napier's edition of Barrow's Sermons.

See Ward, Lives of the Gresham Professors, and Whewell's biography included in the 9th volume of Napier's edition of Barrow's Sermons.

BARROW, SIR JOHN (1764-1848), English statesman, was born in the village of Dragley Beck in the parish of Ulverston in Lancashire, on the 19th of June 1764. He started in life as superintending clerk of an iron foundry at Liverpool and afterwards taught mathematics at a school in Greenwich. Through the interest of Sir George Staunton, to whose son he taught mathematics, he was attached on the first British embassy to China as comptroller of the household to Lord Macartney. He soon acquired a good knowledge of the Chinese language, on which he subsequently contributed interesting articles to the Quarterly Review; and the account of the embassy published by Sir George Staunton records many of Barrow's valuable contributions to literature and science connected with China.

BARROW, SIR JOHN (1764-1848), English statesman, was born in the village of Dragley Beck in the parish of Ulverston in Lancashire, on June 19, 1764. He started his career as the supervising clerk of an iron foundry in Liverpool and later taught mathematics at a school in Greenwich. With the help of Sir George Staunton, whose son he tutored in mathematics, he was assigned to the first British embassy to China as the comptroller of the household to Lord Macartney. He quickly learned the Chinese language well, which led him to write interesting articles for the Quarterly Review; the account of the embassy published by Sir George Staunton highlights many of Barrow's significant contributions to literature and science related to China.

Although Barrow ceased to be officially connected with Chinese affairs after the return of the embassy in 1794, he always took much interest in them, and on critical occasions was frequently consulted by the British government. In 1797 he accompanied Lord Macartney, as private secretary, in his important and delicate mission to settle the government of the newly acquired colony of the Cape of Good Hope. Barrow was entrusted with the task of reconciling the Boers and Kaffirs and of reporting on the country in the interior. On his return from his journey, in the course of which he visited all parts of the colony, he was appointed auditor-general of public accounts. He now decided to settle in South Africa, married Anne Maria Trüter, and in 1800 bought a house in Cape Town. But the surrender of the colony at the peace of Amiens (1802) upset this plan. He returned to England in 1804, was appointed by Lord Melville second secretary to the admiralty, a post which he held for [v.03 p.0441]forty years. He enjoyed the esteem and confidence of all the eleven chief lords who successively presided at the admiralty board during that period, and more especially of King William IV. while lord high admiral, who honoured him with tokens of his personal regard. Barrow was a fellow of the Royal Society, and in 1821 received the degree of LL.D. from Edinburgh University. A baronetcy was conferred on him by Sir Robert Peel in 1835. He retired from public life in 1845 and devoted himself to writing a history of the modern Arctic voyages of discovery (1846), of which he was a great promoter, as well as his autobiography, published in 1847. He died suddenly on the 23rd of November 1848.

Although Barrow stopped being officially involved with Chinese affairs after the embassy returned in 1794, he always remained very interested in them and was often consulted by the British government during critical times. In 1797, he joined Lord Macartney as a private secretary on his important and sensitive mission to establish governance in the newly acquired Cape of Good Hope colony. Barrow was responsible for reconciling the Boers and Kaffirs and reporting on the interior of the country. After returning from his journey, during which he explored all parts of the colony, he was appointed auditor-general of public accounts. He then decided to settle in South Africa, married Anne Maria Trüter, and bought a house in Cape Town in 1800. However, the surrender of the colony at the peace of Amiens in 1802 disrupted this plan. He returned to England in 1804 and was appointed second secretary to the admiralty by Lord Melville, a position he held for forty years. He earned the respect and trust of all eleven chief lords who presided over the admiralty board during that time, particularly from King William IV while he was lord high admiral, who showed him personal appreciation. Barrow was a fellow of the Royal Society and received an LL.D. degree from Edinburgh University in 1821. He was made a baronet by Sir Robert Peel in 1835. He retired from public life in 1845 and focused on writing a history of modern Arctic voyages of discovery, published in 1846, along with his autobiography released in 1847. He passed away suddenly on November 23, 1848.

Besides the numerous articles in the Quarterly Review already mentioned, Barrow published among other works, Travels in China (1804); Travels into the Interior of South Africa (1806); and lives of Lord Macartney (1807), Lord Anson (1839), Lord Howe (1838). He was also the author of several valuable contributions to the seventh edition of the Encyclopaedia Britannica.

Besides the many articles in the Quarterly Review already mentioned, Barrow published other works such as Travels in China (1804), Travels into the Interior of South Africa (1806), and biographies of Lord Macartney (1807), Lord Anson (1839), and Lord Howe (1838). He also made several valuable contributions to the seventh edition of the Encyclopaedia Britannica.

See Memoir of John Barlow, by G. F. Staunton (1852).

See Memoir of John Barlow, by G. F. Staunton (1852).

BARROW, a river of south-eastern Ireland. It rises in the Slieve Bloom mountains, and flows at first easterly and then almost due south, until, on joining the Suir, it forms the estuary of the south coast known as Waterford Harbour. Including the 12 m. of the estuary, the length of its valley is rather more than 100 m., without counting the lesser windings of the river. The total area of drainage to Waterford Harbour (including the basin of the Suir) is 3500 sq. m., and covers the whole of the county Kilkenny, with parts of Waterford, Cork and Limerick, Tipperary, Carlow, King's and Queen's counties. The chief towns on the banks of the Barrow are Athy (where it becomes navigable and has a junction with the Grand Canal), Carlow, Bagenalstown and New Ross. The chief affluent is the Nore, which it receives from the north-west a little above New Ross. The scenery on its banks is in parts very beautiful.

BARROW, a river in southeastern Ireland. It starts in the Slieve Bloom mountains and flows initially eastward and then almost directly south, until it joins the Suir, forming the estuary at the south coast known as Waterford Harbour. Including the 12 miles of the estuary, its valley length is just over 100 miles, not counting the smaller twists of the river. The total drainage area for Waterford Harbour (including the Suir basin) is 3,500 square miles, covering the entirety of County Kilkenny, along with parts of Waterford, Cork, Limerick, Tipperary, Carlow, King's, and Queen's counties. The main towns along the Barrow are Athy (where it becomes navigable and connects with the Grand Canal), Carlow, Bagenalstown, and New Ross. The primary tributary is the Nore, which it receives from the northwest just above New Ross. The scenery along its banks is quite beautiful in some areas.

BARROW (from A.S. beorh, a mount or hillock), a word found occasionally among place-names in England applied to natural eminences, but generally restricted in its modern application to denote an ancient grave-mound. The custom of constructing barrows or mounds of stone or earth over the remains of the dead was a characteristic feature of the sepulchral systems of primitive times. Originating in the common sentiment of humanity, which desires by some visible memorial to honour and perpetuate the memory of the dead, it was practised alike by peoples of high and of low development, and continued through all the stages of culture that preceded the introduction of Christianity. The primary idea of sepulture appears to have been the provision of a habitation for the dead; and thus, in its perfect form, the barrow included a chamber or chambers where the tenant was surrounded with the prized possessions of his previous life. A common feature of the earlier barrows is the enclosing fence, which marked off the site from the surrounding ground. When the barrow was of earth, this was effected by an encircling trench or a low vallum. When the barrow was a stone structure, the enclosure was usually a circle of standing stones. Sometimes, instead of a chamber formed above ground, the barrow covered a pit excavated for the interment under the original surface. In later times the mound itself was frequently dispensed with, and the interments made within the enclosure of a trench, a vallum or a circle of standing stones. Usually the great barrows occupy conspicuous sites; but in general the external form is no index to the internal construction and gives no definite indication of the nature of the sepulchral usages. Thus, while the long barrow is characteristic of the Stone Age, it is impossible to tell without direct examination whether it may be chambered or unchambered, or whether the burials within it may be those of burnt or of unburnt bodies.

BARROW (from A.S. beorh, meaning a mount or small hill), is a term occasionally found in place names in England, applied to natural elevations, but today it mostly refers to an ancient burial mound. The tradition of building barrows or mounds of stone or earth over the remains of the deceased was a key aspect of burial practices in ancient times. This stemmed from a common human desire to create a visible memorial to honor and remember the dead. It was practiced by societies of all levels of development and continued throughout all cultural stages before the spread of Christianity. The main idea behind burial seems to have been to provide a resting place for the dead; thus, in its complete form, a barrow included one or more chambers where the deceased was surrounded by valued belongings from their life. An early feature of these barrows was an enclosing fence that separated the burial site from the surrounding area. If the barrow was made of earth, this was done with a surrounding trench or a low vallum. For stone structures, the enclosure was typically a circle of standing stones. Sometimes, rather than having a chamber above ground, the barrow would cover a pit dug for burial below the original surface. In later periods, the mound itself was often omitted, and burials occurred within an enclosed trench, a vallum, or a circle of standing stones. Generally, large barrows are located in prominent spots, but their outer shape often doesn’t indicate the internal structure or the specific burial practices used. For instance, while long barrows are typical of the Stone Age, it’s often impossible to determine without further investigation whether they contain chambers or not, or whether the remains inside are cremated or uncremated.

In England the long barrow usually contains a single chamber, entering by a passage underneath the higher and wider end of the mound. In Denmark the chambers are at irregular intervals along the body of the mound, and have no passages leading into them. The long barrows of Great Britain are often from 200 to 400 ft. in length by 60 to 80 ft. wide. Their chambers are rudely but strongly built, with dome-shaped roofs, formed by overlapping the successive courses of the upper part of the side walls. In Scandinavia, on the other hand, such dome-roofed chambers are unknown, and the construction of the chambers as a rule is megalithic, five or six monoliths supporting one or more capstones of enormous size. Such chambers, denuded of the covering mound, or over which no covering mound has been raised, are popularly known in England as "cromlechs" and in France as "dolmens" (see Stone Monuments). The prevailing mode of sepulture in all the different varieties of these structures is by the deposit of the body in a contracted position, accompanied by weapons and implements of stone, occasionally by ornaments of gold, jet or amber. Vessels of clay, more or less ornate in character, which occur with these early interments of unburnt bodies, have been regarded as food-vessels and drinking-cups, differing in character and purpose from the cinerary urns of larger size in which the ashes of the dead were deposited after cremation.

In England, long barrows typically have a single chamber that you enter through a passage at the higher and wider end of the mound. In Denmark, the chambers are spaced irregularly along the mound and don’t have passages leading into them. The long barrows in Great Britain often measure between 200 and 400 feet in length and 60 to 80 feet in width. Their chambers are roughly but sturdily constructed, featuring dome-shaped roofs made by overlapping layers of the upper part of the side walls. In Scandinavia, however, dome-roofed chambers aren’t found, and the chambers are usually megalithic, supported by five or six large stones beneath one or more massive capstones. These chambers, stripped of their covering mounds or lacking any covering mounds, are commonly referred to as "cromlechs" in England and "dolmens" in France (see Stone Structures). The common burial practice across all these structures involves placing the body in a curled position, along with weapons and stone tools, and sometimes ornaments made of gold, jet, or amber. Clay vessels, which vary in decoration, are found alongside these early burials of unburned bodies and are believed to be food vessels or drinking cups, different from the larger cinerary urns used for holding the ashes of the cremated.

The custom of burning the body commenced in the Stone Age, before the long barrow or the dolmen had passed out of use. While cremation is rare in the long barrows of the south of England, it is the rule in those of Yorkshire and the north of Scotland. In Ireland, where the long barrow form is all but unknown, the round barrow or chambered cairn prevailed from the earliest Pagan period till the introduction of Christianity. The Irish barrows occur in groups in certain localities, some of which seem to have been the royal cemeteries of the tribal confederacies, whereof eight are enumerated in an ancient Irish manuscript, the Leabhar na h-Uidhri, compiled c. A.D. 1100. The best-known of these is situated on the banks of the Boyne above Drogheda, and consists of a group of the largest cairns in Ireland. One, at New Grange, is a huge mound of stones and earth, over 300 ft. in diameter and 70 ft. in height. Around its base are the remains of a circle of large standing stones. The chamber, which is 20 ft. high in the centre, is reached by a passage about 70 ft. in length. In the Loughcrew Hills, Co. Meath, there is a group of about thirty stone barrows or cairns, mostly chambered, their bases measuring from 5 or 6 to 60 yds. in diameter. They are unusually interesting from the fact that many of the exposed slabs in the walls of the chambers are ornamented with spirals and other devices, rudely incised. As in the case of the long barrows, the traditional form of the circular, chambered barrow was retained through various changes in the sepulchral customs of the people. It was the natural result of the practice of cremation, however, that it should induce a modification of the barrow structure. The chamber, no longer regarded as a habitation to be tenanted by the deceased, became simply a cist for the reception of the urn which held his ashes. The degradation of the chamber naturally produced a corresponding degradation of the mound which covered it, and the barrows of the Bronze Age, in which cremation was common, are smaller and less imposing than those of the Stone Age, but often surprisingly rich in the relics of the life and of the art workmanship of the time. In addition to the varied and beautiful forms of implements and weapons—frequently ornamented with a high degree of artistic taste—armlets and other personal ornaments in gold, amber, jet and bronze are not uncommon. The barrows of the bronze period, like some of those of the Stone Age, appear to have been used as tribal or family cemeteries. In Denmark as many as seventy deposits of burnt interments have been observed in a single mound, indicating its use as a burying-place throughout a long succession of years.

The practice of cremating bodies started in the Stone Age, even before long barrows or dolmens fell out of use. While cremation is uncommon in the long barrows of southern England, it's standard in those of Yorkshire and northern Scotland. In Ireland, where the long barrow style is nearly unknown, the round barrow or chambered cairn was dominant from the earliest Pagan times until the arrival of Christianity. Irish barrows often appear in groups in specific areas, some seeming to have served as royal cemeteries for tribal confederacies, of which eight are listed in an ancient Irish manuscript, the Book of Uidhri, compiled around CE 1100. The most famous of these is located along the Boyne River above Drogheda, consisting of a cluster of the largest cairns in Ireland. One, at New Grange, is a massive mound of stones and earth, over 300 ft. in diameter and 70 ft. tall. Around its base are the remains of a circle made up of large standing stones. The chamber, which reaches 20 ft. high at the center, can be accessed through a passage about 70 ft. long. In the Loughcrew Hills, Co. Meath, there’s a collection of around thirty stone barrows or cairns, mostly chambered, with bases measuring from 5 or 6 to 60 yards in diameter. They are particularly interesting because many of the exposed slabs in the chamber walls are decorated with spirals and other rudely carved designs. Similar to the long barrows, the traditional circular, chambered barrow format was maintained through various changes in burial customs. However, the practice of cremation naturally led to a change in the barrow structure. The chamber, no longer viewed as a dwelling for the deceased, became simply a container for the urn holding their ashes. This change in the chamber resulted in a corresponding decrease in the size of the mound covering it, leading to Bronze Age barrows, where cremation was common, being smaller and less grand than those from the Stone Age, though they often contained surprisingly rich artifacts from life and craftsmanship of that era. Alongside the diverse and beautiful shapes of tools and weapons—often adorned with great artistic skill—armlets and other personal adornments made of gold, amber, jet, and bronze are fairly common. The barrows from the Bronze Age, much like some from the Stone Age, seem to have been used as tribal or family cemeteries. In Denmark, as many as seventy deposits of cremated remains have been found in a single mound, suggesting it was used as a burial site over many years.

In the Iron Age there was less uniformity in the burial customs. In some of the barrows in central France, and in the wolds of Yorkshire, the interments include the arms and accoutrements of a charioteer, with his chariot, harness and horses. In Scandinavia a custom, alluded to in the sagas, of burying the viking in his ship, drawn up on land, and raising a barrow over it, is exemplified by the ship-burials discovered in Norway. The ship found in the Gokstad mound was 78 ft. long, and had a mast and sixteen pairs of oars. In a chamber abaft the mast the viking had been laid, with his weapons, and together with him were [v.03 p.0442]buried twelve horses, six dogs and a peacock. An interesting example of the great timber-chambered barrow is that at Jelling in Jutland, known as the barrow of Thyre Danebod, queen of King Gorm the Old, who died about the middle of the 10th century. It is a mound about 200 ft. in diameter, and over 50 ft. in height, containing a chamber 23 ft. long, 8 ft. wide and 5 ft. high, formed of massive slabs of oak. Though it had been entered and plundered in the middle ages, a few relics were found when it was reopened, among which were a silver cup, ornamented with the interlacing work characteristic of the time and some personal ornaments. It is highly illustrative of the tenacity with which the ancient sepulchral usages were retained even after the introduction of Christianity that King Harold, son and successor of Gorm the Old, who is said to have christianized all Denmark and Norway, followed the pagan custom of erecting a chambered tumulus over the remains of his father, on the summit of which was placed a rude pillar-stone, bearing on one side the memorial inscription in runes, and on the other a representation of the Saviour of mankind distinguished by the crossed nimbus surrounding the head. The so-called Kings' Hows at Upsala in Sweden rival those of Jelling in size and height. In the chamber of one, opened in 1829, there was found an urn full of calcined bones; and along with it were ornaments of gold showing the characteristic workmanship of the 5th and 6th centuries of the Christian era. Along with the calcined human bones were bones of animals, among which those of the horse and the dog were distinguished.

In the Iron Age, burial customs were less consistent. In some of the burial mounds in central France and the hills of Yorkshire, the remains included a charioteer’s weapons, along with his chariot, harness, and horses. In Scandinavia, a custom referenced in the sagas involved burying a Viking in his ship, pulled ashore, with a mound constructed over it, as shown by the ship-burials discovered in Norway. The ship found in the Gokstad mound measured 78 ft. long and had a mast and sixteen pairs of oars. A chamber behind the mast contained the laid-out Viking with his weapons, along with twelve horses, six dogs, and a peacock buried with him. An interesting example of the large timber-chambered mound is the one at Jelling in Jutland, known as the mound of Thyre Danebod, the queen of King Gorm the Old, who died around the middle of the 10th century. It is a mound approximately 200 ft. in diameter and over 50 ft. high, containing a chamber that is 23 ft. long, 8 ft. wide, and 5 ft. high, made of massive oak slabs. Although it had been entered and looted in the Middle Ages, a few artifacts were found when it was reopened, including a silver cup decorated with the interlaced design typical of the period, along with some personal ornaments. This highlights how deeply rooted the ancient burial practices were, even after Christianity was introduced; King Harold, the son and successor of Gorm the Old, who is said to have Christianized all of Denmark and Norway, still followed the pagan tradition of constructing a chambered mound over his father's remains. Atop this mound was a crude stone pillar, which on one side had an inscription in runes and on the other a depiction of the Savior, marked by a halo around his head. The so-called Kings' Mounds at Upsala in Sweden are comparable in size and height to those at Jelling. In the chamber of one, excavated in 1829, there was an urn filled with cremated bones, along with gold ornaments reflecting the craftsmanship of the 5th and 6th centuries of the Christian era. Alongside the cremated human bones were also animal bones, prominently featuring those of a horse and a dog.

Comparing the results of the researches in European barrows with such notices of barrow-burial as may be gleaned from early writings, we find them mutually illustrative.

Comparing the findings from research on European barrows with accounts of barrow burials from early texts, we see that they shed light on each other.

The Homeric account of the building of the barrow of Hector (Il. xxiv.) brings vividly before us the scene so often suggested by the examination of the tumuli of prehistoric times. During nine days wood was collected and brought, in carts drawn by oxen, to the site of the funeral pyre. Then the pyre was built and the body laid upon it. After burning for twenty-four hours the smouldering embers were extinguished with libations of wine. The white and calcined bones were then picked out of the ashes by the friends and placed in a metallic urn, which was deposited in a hollow grave or cist and covered over with large well-fitting stones. Finally, a barrow of great magnitude was heaped over the remains and the funeral feast was celebrated. The obsequies of Achilles, as described in the Odyssey, were also celebrated with details which are strikingly similar to those observed in tumuli both of the Bronze and Iron Ages. The body was brought to the pile in an embroidered robe and jars of unguents and honey were placed beside it. Sheep and oxen were slaughtered at the pile. The incinerated bones were collected from the ashes and placed in a golden urn along with those of Patroclus, Achilles's dearest friend. Over the remains a great and shapely mound was raised on the high headland, so that it might be seen from afar by future generations of men.

The epic story of how Hector's burial mound was built (Il. xxiv.) vividly illustrates a scene often imagined when looking at ancient burial mounds. For nine days, wood was gathered and transported, using ox-drawn carts, to the site of the funeral pyre. The pyre was then constructed, and the body was placed on it. After burning for twenty-four hours, the smoldering ashes were doused with wine. Friends then picked out the white, charred bones from the ashes and placed them in a metal urn, which was buried in a shallow grave or cist and covered with large, fitting stones. Finally, a massive mound was piled on top of the remains, followed by a funeral feast. The funeral rites for Achilles, as recounted in the Odyssey, also included strikingly similar details to those seen in burial mounds from both the Bronze and Iron Ages. The body was brought to the pyre in an embroidered robe, with jars of oils and honey beside it. Sheep and oxen were sacrificed at the pyre. The burnt bones were gathered from the ashes and placed in a golden urn along with those of Patroclus, Achilles's closest friend. A large, well-shaped mound was raised over the remains on a high headland, so it could be seen from a distance by future generations.

Herodotus, describing the funeral customs of the Scythians, states that, on the death of a chief, the body was placed upon a couch in a chamber sunk in the earth and covered with timber, in which were deposited all things needful for the comfort of the deceased in the other world. One of his wives was strangled and laid beside him, his cup-bearer and other attendants, his charioteer and his horses were killed and placed in the tomb, which was then filled up with earth and an enormous mound raised high over all. The barrows which cover the plains of ancient Scythia attest the truth of this description. A Siberian barrow, described by Demidov, contained three contiguous chambers of unhewn stone. In the central chamber lay the skeleton of the ancient chief, with his sword, his spear, his bow and a quiver full of arrows. The skeleton reclined upon a sheet of pure gold, extending the whole length of the body, which had been wrapped in a mantle broidered with gold and studded with precious stones. Over it was extended another sheet of pure gold. In a smaller chamber at the chief's head lay the skeleton of a female, richly attired, extended upon a sheet of pure gold and similarly covered with a sheet of the same metal. A golden chain adorned her neck and her arms were encircled with bracelets of pure gold. In a third chamber, at the chief's feet, lay the skeleton of his favourite horse with saddle, bridle and stirrups.

Herodotus, describing the funeral customs of the Scythians, states that when a chief died, the body was laid on a couch in a chamber dug into the ground and covered with wood, and inside were placed all the items needed for the deceased's comfort in the afterlife. One of his wives was strangled and laid beside him, along with his cup-bearer and other attendants, his charioteer, and his horses, which were all killed and put in the tomb. This was then filled with earth, and a huge mound was raised over everything. The burial mounds that dot the plains of ancient Scythia confirm this description. A Siberian burial mound, described by Demidov, contained three adjacent chambers made of unhewn stone. In the central chamber lay the skeleton of the ancient chief, along with his sword, spear, bow, and a quiver full of arrows. The skeleton rested on a sheet of pure gold that ran the entire length of its body, wrapped in a mantle embroidered with gold and adorned with precious stones. Another sheet of pure gold was placed over it. In a smaller chamber at the chief's head lay the skeleton of a woman, richly dressed, resting on a sheet of pure gold and similarly covered with another sheet of the same metal. A golden chain adorned her neck, and her arms were decorated with bracelets of pure gold. In a third chamber, at the chief's feet, lay the skeleton of his favorite horse, complete with saddle, bridle, and stirrups.

So curiously alike in their general features were the sepulchral usages connected with barrow-burial over the whole of Europe, that we find the Anglo-Saxon Saga of Beowulf describing the chambered tumulus with its gigantic masonry "held fast on props, with vaults of stone," and the passage under the mound haunted by a dragon, the guardian of the treasures of heathen gold which it contained. Beowulf's own burial is minutely described in terms which have a strong resemblance to the parallel passages in the Iliad and Odyssey. There is first the preparation of the pile, which is hung round with helmets, shields and coats of mail. Then the corpse is brought and laid in the midst; the pile is kindled and the roaring flame rises, mingled with weeping, till all is consumed. Then, for ten long days, the warriors labour at the rearing of his mighty mound on the headland, high and broad, to be seen afar by the passers-by on land and sea.

So remarkably similar in their overall features were the burial customs related to barrow burial throughout Europe that we see the Anglo-Saxon saga of Beowulf describing the chambered mound with its huge stonework "held fast on supports, with stone vaults," and the passage beneath the mound guarded by a dragon, the keeper of the treasures of pagan gold it held. Beowulf's own burial is described in detail using language that closely resembles similar passages in the Iliad and Odyssey. First, there’s the preparation of the pyre, adorned with helmets, shields, and suits of armor. Then the body is brought and laid in the center; the pyre is ignited, and the roaring flames rise, mixed with mourning, until everything is consumed. Then, for ten long days, the warriors work on building his massive mound on the cliff, tall and wide, so it can be seen from far away by those passing by on land and sea.

The pyramids of Egypt, the mausolea of the Lydian kings, the circular, chambered sepulchres of Mycenae, and the Etruscan tombs at Caere and Volci, are lineally descended from the chambered barrows of prehistoric times, modified in construction according to the advancement of architectural art at the period of their erection. There is no country in Europe destitute of more or less abundant proofs of the almost universal prevalence of barrow-burial in early times. It can also be traced on both sides of the basin of the Mediterranean, and from Asia Minor across the continent to India, China and Japan.

The pyramids of Egypt, the tombs of the Lydian kings, the circular chambered graves of Mycenae, and the Etruscan tombs in Caere and Volci all originated from the chambered barrows of prehistoric times, adapted in design to match the architectural advancements of their era. No country in Europe lacks evidence of the widespread practice of barrow burial in ancient times. This practice can also be found on both sides of the Mediterranean Basin, extending from Asia Minor across the continent to India, China, and Japan.

In the new world as well as in the old, similar customs prevailed from a very remote period. In the great plains of North America the dead were buried in barrows of enormous magnitude, which occasionally present a remarkable similarity to the barrows of Great Britain. In these mounds cremation appears more frequently than inhumation; and both are accompanied by implements, weapons and ornaments of stone and bone. The pottery accompanying the remains is often elaborately ornamented, and the mound builders were evidently possessed of a higher development of taste and skill than is evinced by any of the modern aboriginal races, by whom the mounds and their contents are regarded as utterly mysterious.

In both the new world and the old, similar customs existed from a very early time. In the vast plains of North America, the dead were buried in huge burial mounds, which sometimes closely resemble the barrows found in Great Britain. In these mounds, cremation seems to occur more often than burial; both practices are accompanied by tools, weapons, and ornaments made of stone and bone. The pottery found with the remains is often intricately decorated, and the mound builders clearly had a greater sense of taste and skill than any of the modern native groups, who find the mounds and their contents completely mysterious.

It is not to be wondered at that customs so widely spread and so deeply rooted as those connected with barrow-burial should have been difficult to eradicate. In fact, compliance with the Christian practice of inhumation in the cemeteries sanctioned by the church, was only enforced in Europe by capitularies denouncing the punishment of death on those who persisted in burying their dead after the pagan fashion or in the pagan mounds. Yet even in the middle ages kings of Christian countries were buried with their swords and spears, and queens with their spindles and ornaments; the bishop was laid in his grave with his crozier and comb; the priest with his chalice and vestments; and clay vessels filled with charcoal (answering to the urns of heathen times) are found in the churches of France and Denmark.

It’s not surprising that customs as widespread and deeply ingrained as those related to barrow-burial were hard to eliminate. In fact, adherence to the Christian practice of burial in church-sanctioned cemeteries was only enforced in Europe through laws imposing the death penalty on those who continued to bury their dead in the old pagan ways or in burial mounds. Yet, even in the Middle Ages, kings in Christian countries were buried with their swords and spears, and queens with their spindles and accessories; bishops were laid to rest with their staffs and combs; priests with their chalices and vestments; and clay pots filled with charcoal (similar to the urns of pagan times) can still be found in churches in France and Denmark.

Authorities.—Canon W. Greenwell, British Barrows (London, 1877); Dr J. Thurnam, "On Ancient British Barrows," in Archaeologia, vols. 42, 43 (1869); J. R. Mortimer, Forty Years' Researches in Burial Mounds of East Yorkshire (London, 1905); J. Anderson, Scotland in Pagan Times (Edinburgh, 1886); Dr T. H. Bryce, "Records of Explorations among the Cairns of Arran and Bute," in Proceedings of the Society of Antiquaries of Scotland, vols. 36, 37, 38 (1901-1903); W. C. Borlase, The Dolmens of Ireland (London, 1897); Dictionnaire archéologique de la Gaule (Paris, 1875); A. P. Madsen, Gravhoie og Gravfund fra Stenalderen i Danmark (Copenhagen, 1900); S. Müller, Nordische Altertumskunde aus Dänemark und Schleswig (Strassburg, 1897); O. Montelius, The Civilization of Sweden in Heathen Times (London, 1888), and Der Orient und Europa (Stockholm, 1899); E. Cartailhac, Les Âges préhistoriques de l'Espagne et du Portugal (Paris, 1886); W. Gowland, "The Dolmens and Burial Mounds in Japan," in Archaeologia, vol. 55 (1897); C. Thomas, "Report on the Mound Explorations of the Bureau of Ethnology" (Twelfth Annual Report for 1890-1891, Washington, 1894.)

Authorities.—Canon W. Greenwell, British Barrows (London, 1877); Dr. J. Thurnam, "On Ancient British Barrows," in Archaeologia, vols. 42, 43 (1869); J. R. Mortimer, Forty Years' Researches in Burial Mounds of East Yorkshire (London, 1905); J. Anderson, Scotland in Pagan Times (Edinburgh, 1886); Dr. T. H. Bryce, "Records of Explorations among the Cairns of Arran and Bute," in Proceedings of the Society of Antiquaries of Scotland, vols. 36, 37, 38 (1901-1903); W. C. Borlase, The Dolmens of Ireland (London, 1897); Dictionnaire archéologique de la Gaule (Paris, 1875); A. P. Madsen, Gravhoie og Gravfund fra Stenalderen i Danmark (Copenhagen, 1900); S. Müller, Nordische Altertumskunde aus Dänemark und Schleswig (Strassburg, 1897); O. Montelius, The Civilization of Sweden in Heathen Times (London, 1888), and Der Orient und Europa (Stockholm, 1899); E. Cartailhac, Les Âges préhistoriques de l'Espagne et du Portugal (Paris, 1886); W. Gowland, "The Dolmens and Burial Mounds in Japan," in Archaeologia, vol. 55 (1897); C. Thomas, "Report on the Mound Explorations of the Bureau of Ethnology" (Twelfth Annual Report for 1890-1891, Washington, 1894).

(J. An.)

(J. An.)

BARROWE, HENRY (?1550-1593), English Puritan and Separatist, was born about 1550, at Shipdam, Norfolk, of a family related by marriage to the lord keeper Bacon, and [v.03 p.0443]probably to Aylmer, bishop of London. He matriculated at Clare Hall, Cambridge, in November 1566, and graduated B.A. in 1569-1570. Afterwards he "followed the court" for some time, leading a frivolous if not licentious life. He was a member of Gray's Inn for a few years from 1576, but was never called to the bar. About 1580 or 1581 he was deeply impressed by a sermon, whereupon he retired to the country, and was led by study and meditation to the strictest form of Puritanism. Subsequently, in what manner is not known, he came into intimate relations with John Greenwood, the Separatist leader, whose views (probably due, in part at least, to Browne's influence) he adopted without reserve. Though not strictly resident in London at this time, he was associated with "the brethren of the Separation" there, in whose secret meetings his natural earnestness and eloquence made him conspicuous. Greenwood having been imprisoned in the Clink, Barrowe came from the country to visit him, and on the 19th of November 1586 was detained by the gaoler and brought before Archbishop Whitgift. He insisted on the illegality of this arrest, refused either to take the ex officio oath or to give bail for future appearance, and was committed to the Gatehouse. After nearly six months' detention and several irregular examinations before the high commissioners, he and Greenwood were formally indicted (May 1587) for recusancy under an act originally directed against Papists. They were ordered to find heavy bail for comformity, and to remain in the Fleet Prison until it was forthcoming. Barrowe continued a prisoner for the remainder of his life, nearly six years, sometimes in close confinement, sometimes having "the liberty of the prison." He was subjected to several more examinations, once before the privy council at Whitehall on the 18th of March 1588, as a result of petition to the queen. On these occasions he vigorously maintained the principle of separatism, denouncing the prescribed ritual of the Church as "a false worship," and the bishops as oppressors and persecutors. During his imprisonments he was engaged in written controversy with Robert Browne (down to 1588), who had yielded a partial submission to the established order, and whom he therefore accounted a renegade. He also wrote several vigorous treatises in defence of separatism and congregational independency, the most important being:—A True Description of the Visible Congregation of the Saints, &c. (1589); A Plain Refutation of Mr Gifford's Booke, intituled A Short Treatise Gainst the Donatistes of England (1590-1591), and A Brief Discovery of the False Church (1591). Others were written in conjunction with his fellow-prisoner, Greenwood. These writings were taken charge of by friends and mostly printed in Holland. By 1590 the bishops thought it advisable to try other means of convincing or silencing these indomitable controversialists, and sent several conforming Puritan ministers to confer with them, but without effect. At length it was resolved to proceed on a capital charge of "devising and circulating seditious books," for which, as the law then stood, it was easy to secure a conviction. They were tried and sentenced to death on the 23rd of March 1593. What followed is, happily, unique in the history of English misrule. The day after sentence they were brought out as if for execution and respited. On the 31st of March they were taken to the gallows, and after the ropes had been placed about their necks were again respited. Finally they were hanged early on the morning of the 6th of April. The motive of all this is obscure, but there is some evidence that the lord treasurer Burghley endeavoured to save their lives, and was frustrated by Whitgift and other bishops.

BARROWE, HENRY (?1550-1593), English Puritan and Separatist, was born around 1550 in Shipdam, Norfolk, to a family connected by marriage to the lord keeper Bacon, and [v.03 p.0443]probably to Aylmer, bishop of London. He enrolled at Clare Hall, Cambridge, in November 1566 and graduated with a B.A. in 1569-1570. Afterward, he spent some time in court, leading a carefree if not immoral life. He was a member of Gray's Inn for a few years starting in 1576 but was never called to the bar. Around 1580 or 1581, he was deeply moved by a sermon, prompting him to retreat to the countryside, where he immersed himself in study and meditation, eventually embracing the strictest form of Puritanism. How he came to be closely associated with John Greenwood, the Separatist leader, is unclear, but he fully adopted his views (which were likely influenced by Browne). Although not strictly living in London at the time, he was connected with “the brethren of the Separation” there, where his natural earnestness and eloquence made him stand out in their secret meetings. After Greenwood was imprisoned in the Clink, Barrowe traveled from the countryside to visit him and was detained by the jailer on November 19, 1586, and brought before Archbishop Whitgift. He argued that his arrest was illegal, refused to take the ex officio oath or provide bail for a future appearance, and was sent to the Gatehouse. After nearly six months of detention and various irregular examinations by the high commissioners, he and Greenwood were formally charged (May 1587) with recusancy under an act originally aimed at Catholics. They were ordered to provide heavy bail for conformity and to remain in the Fleet Prison until it was secured. Barrowe spent the rest of his life as a prisoner, close to six years, sometimes in solitary confinement and other times with "the liberty of the prison." He underwent several more examinations, including one before the privy council at Whitehall on March 18, 1588, following a petition to the queen. During these occasions, he passionately defended the principle of separatism, condemning the established church's rituals as "false worship" and the bishops as oppressors and persecutors. While imprisoned, he engaged in written debates with Robert Browne (up to 1588), who had partially submitted to the established order and whom Barrowe considered a turncoat. He also wrote several strong treatises defending separatism and congregational independence, the most notable being: — A True Description of the Visible Congregation of the Saints, &c. (1589); A Plain Refutation of Mr Gifford's Book, intituled A Short Treatise Against the Donatistes of England (1590-1591), and A Brief Discovery of the False Church (1591). Others were written in collaboration with Greenwood. These works were cared for by friends and largely printed in Holland. By 1590, the bishops deemed it necessary to try different methods to persuade or silence these relentless debaters, sending several conforming Puritan ministers to engage with them, but to no avail. Ultimately, they decided to pursue a capital charge of "devising and circulating seditious books," which was easy to secure a conviction for, given the laws at the time. They were tried and sentenced to death on March 23, 1593. What happened next is, thankfully, unique in the history of English misrule. The day after the sentence, they were brought out as if for execution but were spared. On March 31, they were taken to the gallows, and after the nooses were placed around their necks, they were again spared. Ultimately, they were hanged early on the morning of April 6. The reasons behind all this are unclear, but there is some evidence that Lord Treasurer Burghley tried to save their lives, only to be obstructed by Whitgift and other bishops.

The opinions of Browne and Barrowe had much in common, but were not identical. Both maintained the right and duty of the Church to carry out necessary reforms without awaiting the permission of the civil power; and both advocated congregational independency. But the ideal of Browne was a spiritual democracy, towards which separation was only a means. Barrowe, on the other hand, regarded the whole established church order as polluted by the relics of Roman Catholicism, and insisted on separation as essential to pure worship and discipline (see further Congregationalism). Barrowe has been credited by H. M. Dexter and others with being the author of the "Marprelate Tracts"; but this is improbable.

The views of Browne and Barrowe had a lot in common, but they weren’t the same. Both argued that the Church had the right and responsibility to make necessary reforms without waiting for the civil authorities to approve; they also both supported congregational independence. However, Browne envisioned a spiritual democracy, viewing separation as just a step toward that goal. In contrast, Barrowe saw the entire established church structure as tainted by remnants of Roman Catholicism and believed that separation was vital for true worship and discipline (see further Congregationalism). H. M. Dexter and others have credited Barrowe with being the author of the "Marprelate Tracts"; however, this seems unlikely.

Authorities.—H. M. Dexter, The Congregationalism of the Last Three Hundred Years; F. J. Powicke, Henry Barrowe and the Exiled Church. See also B. Brook, Lives of the Puritans; and Cooper, Athenae Cantabrigienses (1861), vol. ii.

Authorities.—H. M. Dexter, The Congregationalism of the Last Three Hundred Years; F. J. Powicke, Henry Barrowe and the Exiled Church. See also B. Brook, Lives of the Puritans; and Cooper, Athenae Cantabrigienses (1861), vol. ii.

BARROW-IN-FURNESS, a seaport and municipal, county and parliamentary borough of Lancashire, England, 264½ m. N.W. by N. from London, on the Furness railway. Pop. (1891) 51,712; (1901) 57,586. It lies on the seaward side of the hammer-shaped peninsula forming part of the district of Furness, between the estuary of the Duddon and Morecambe Bay, where a narrow channel intervenes between the mainland and the long low island of Walney, on which the erection of a strong fort was undertaken by the War Office in 1904. In 1905 the connexion of Walney with the mainland by a bridge was undertaken. In the channel is Barrow Island (among others) which is connected with the mainland, reclamation having been carried on until only a narrow channel was left, which was utilized as docks. Barrow is of modern and remarkably rapid growth. Its rise was dependent primarily on the existence and working of the veins of pure haematite iron ore in the district of Furness (q.v.). At the outset Barrow merely exported the ore to the furnaces of South Wales and the midlands. At the beginning of the 19th century this export amounted at most to a few thousand tons, and though by the middle of the century it had reached some 50,000 in 1847 the population of Barrow was only 325. In 1846 the first section of the Furness railway was opened, connecting Barrow with the mines near Dalton; in the ensuing years a great increase in trade justified the opening of further communications, and in 1859 the iron works of Messrs Schneider & Hannay were instituted. The Barrow Haematite Steel Company (1866) absorbed this company, and a great output of steel produced by the Bessemer process was begun. Other industries followed. Of these the shipbuilding works have surpassed the steel works in importance, the celebrated firm of Vickers, Sons & Maxim having a yard where they construct numerous vessels of war as well as others. There are also a petroleum storage establishment, a paper-pulp factory, jute works, and engineering and wagon works.

BARROW-IN-FURNESS, a seaport and borough in Lancashire, England, is located 264½ miles northwest of London, accessible via the Furness railway. Its population was 51,712 in 1891 and 57,586 in 1901. The town is situated on the seaward side of a hammer-shaped peninsula that is part of the Furness district, nestled between the estuary of the Duddon and Morecambe Bay. A narrow channel separates the mainland from the long, low island of Walney, where a strong fort was built by the War Office in 1904. In 1905, work began on a bridge connecting Walney to the mainland. The channel also includes Barrow Island, which is linked to the mainland through reclamation efforts that left only a narrow channel, now used as docks. Barrow has experienced rapid growth in modern times, primarily due to the presence of rich haematite iron ore deposits in the Furness area (q.v.). Initially, Barrow exported ore to the furnaces in South Wales and the Midlands. In the early 19th century, exports were only a few thousand tons, but by the mid-century, exports had increased to about 50,000 tons, and in 1847, Barrow’s population was just 325. The first section of the Furness railway opened in 1846, connecting Barrow with the mines near Dalton, and the subsequent rise in trade led to the establishment of additional transport links. In 1859, the ironworks of Messrs Schneider & Hannay were founded. The Barrow Haematite Steel Company, established in 1866, absorbed this company and began significant steel production using the Bessemer process. Other industries soon followed, with shipbuilding becoming more prominent than steel production. The well-known firm of Vickers, Sons & Maxim has a yard that builds numerous military vessels as well as other types of ships. Additionally, there are petroleum storage facilities, a paper-pulp factory, jute works, and engineering and wagon manufacturing plants.

The docks in the strait between Barrow Island and the mainland were constructed in 1867, and named the Devonshire and Buccleuch docks. The Ramsden docks are a subsequent extension. These are 24 ft. in depth. There are also a graving dock 500 ft. long, a depositing dock accommodating vessels of 16 ft. draught, and two electric cranes each able to lift 150 tons. The Furness railway company is the dock authority. Passenger steamers run on weekdays to Belfast.

The docks in the strait between Barrow Island and the mainland were built in 1867 and named the Devonshire and Buccleuch docks. The Ramsden docks are a later extension. They are 24 feet deep. There's also a graving dock that's 500 feet long, a depositing dock that can accommodate vessels with a 16-foot draft, and two electric cranes, each capable of lifting 150 tons. The Furness Railway Company is in charge of the docks. Passenger ferries operate to Belfast on weekdays.

The town is laid out in rectangular form, and contains several handsome churches, municipal buildings, exchange and other public buildings. An electric tramway service connects the outskirts and the centre. There are statues of Lord Frederick Cavendish (assassinated at Dublin, 1882), in front of the town-hall, and of Sir James Ramsden (d. 1896), managing director of the Furness railway and first mayor of Barrow, to whom, together with the dukes of Devonshire and Buccleuch, the town owed much of its rise in the middle of the 19th century. The cottage inhabited by George Romney the painter from 1742 to 1755 has been preserved from demolition and retained as a memorial. Educational institutions include a school of science and art, a girls' high school and a technical school. Barrow is a suffragan bishopric in the diocese of Carlisle. The parliamentary borough (1885), falling within the North Lonsdale division of the county, returns one member. The town was incorporated in 1867, and became a county borough in 1888. The corporation consists of a mayor, 8 aldermen and 24 councillors. Area, 11,023 acres.

The town is laid out in a rectangular shape and features several beautiful churches, municipal buildings, an exchange, and other public structures. An electric tram service connects the outskirts to the center. There are statues of Lord Frederick Cavendish (who was assassinated in Dublin in 1882) in front of the town hall, and of Sir James Ramsden (who died in 1896), the managing director of the Furness Railway and the first mayor of Barrow, to whom the town owes a lot of its growth in the mid-19th century, along with the dukes of Devonshire and Buccleuch. The cottage where painter George Romney lived from 1742 to 1755 has been preserved from being torn down and stands as a memorial. Educational institutions include a school of science and art, a girls' high school, and a technical school. Barrow is a suffragan bishopric in the diocese of Carlisle. The parliamentary borough (established in 1885) is part of the North Lonsdale division of the county and elects one member. The town was incorporated in 1867 and became a county borough in 1888. The corporation consists of a mayor, 8 aldermen, and 24 councillors. Area: 11,023 acres.

BARRY, SIR CHARLES (1795-1860), English architect, was born in London on the 23rd of May 1795, the son of a stationer. He was articled to a firm of architects, with whom he remained till 1817, when he set out on a three years' tour in Greece and Italy, Egypt and Palestine for the purpose of studying [v.03 p.0444]architecture. On his return to England in 1820 he settled in London. One of the first works by which his abilities as an architect became generally known was the church of St Peter at Brighton, completed in 1826. He built many other churches; but the marked preference for Italian architecture, which he acquired during his travels, showed itself in various important undertakings of his earlier years. In 1831 he completed the Travellers' Club in Pall Mall, a splendid work in the Italian style and the first of its kind built in London. In the same style and on a grander scale he built in 1837 the Reform Club. He was also engaged on numerous private mansions in London, the finest being Bridgewater House (1847). Birmingham possesses one of his best works in King Edward's grammar school, built in the Tudor style between 1833 and 1836. For Manchester be designed the Royal Institution of Fine Arts (1824) and the Athenaeum (1836); and for Halifax the town-hall. He was engaged for some years in reconstructing the Treasury buildings, Whitehall. But his masterpiece, notwithstanding all unfavourable criticism, is the Houses of Parliament at Westminster (1840-1860). Barry was elected A.R.A. in 1840 and R.A. in the following year. His genius and achievements were recognized by the representative artistic bodies of the principal European nations; and his name was enrolled as a member of the academies of art at Rome, Berlin, St Petersburg, Brussels and Stockholm. He was chosen F.R.S. in 1849 and was knighted by Queen Victoria in 1852. He died suddenly at Clapham near London on the 12th of May 1860, and his remains were interred in Westminster Abbey. As a landscape gardener he was no less brilliant than as an architect, and in connexion with the building of the Houses of Parliament he formed schools of modelling, stone and wood carving, cabinet-making, metal-working, glass and decorative painting, and of encaustic tile-making. In 1867 appeared a life of him by his son Bishop Alfred Barry. A claim was thereupon set up on behalf of Pugin, the famous architect, who was dead and who had been Barry's assistant, to a much larger share in the work of designing the Houses of Parliament than was admitted in Dr Barry's narrative. The controversy raged for a time, but without substantiating Pugin's claim.

BARRY, SIR CHARLES (1795-1860), English architect, was born in London on May 23, 1795, the son of a stationer. He began his apprenticeship with a firm of architects, staying with them until 1817, when he embarked on a three-year journey through Greece, Italy, Egypt, and Palestine to study architecture. Upon returning to England in 1820, he settled in London. One of the first projects that showcased his architectural talent was St Peter's Church in Brighton, completed in 1826. He designed many other churches, but his strong preference for Italian architecture, developed during his travels, was evident in several significant projects in his early career. In 1831, he completed the Travellers' Club in Pall Mall, a remarkable work in the Italian style and the first of its kind built in London. He constructed the Reform Club in the same style but on a grander scale in 1837. He also worked on numerous private mansions in London, the finest being Bridgewater House (1847). Birmingham is home to one of his best works, King Edward's Grammar School, built in the Tudor style between 1833 and 1836. For Manchester, he designed the Royal Institution of Fine Arts (1824) and the Athenaeum (1836), and he also designed the town hall for Halifax. For several years, he was involved in reconstructing the Treasury buildings in Whitehall. However, his masterpiece, despite facing criticism, is the Houses of Parliament at Westminster (1840-1860). Barry was elected A.R.A. in 1840 and R.A. the following year. His talent and accomplishments were recognized by the leading artistic organizations of Europe, and he became a member of the academies of art in Rome, Berlin, St Petersburg, Brussels, and Stockholm. He was elected F.R.S. in 1849 and was knighted by Queen Victoria in 1852. He died unexpectedly at Clapham near London on May 12, 1860, and was buried in Westminster Abbey. As a landscape gardener, he was just as talented as he was as an architect, and in connection with the construction of the Houses of Parliament, he established schools for modeling, stone and wood carving, cabinet-making, metalworking, glass and decorative painting, and encaustic tile-making. In 1867, a biography written by his son, Bishop Alfred Barry, was published. This led to a claim on behalf of Pugin, the well-known architect who had been Barry's assistant and was now deceased, asserting that he played a much larger role in designing the Houses of Parliament than Dr. Barry’s account acknowledged. The debate continued for a while but did not provide sufficient evidence to support Pugin's claim.

His second son, Alfred Barry (1826- ), was educated at King's College, London, and Trinity College, Cambridge, where he was 4th wrangler and gained a first-class in the classical tripos in 1848. He was successively sub-warden of Trinity College, Glenalmond (1849-1854), head-master of Leeds grammar school (1854-1862), principal of Cheltenham College (1862-1868), and principal of King's College, London (1868-1883). He was canon of Worcester from 1871 to 1881, and of Westminster from 1881 to 1884. From 1884 to 1889 he served as bishop of Sydney and primate of Australia, and on his return to England he was assistant bishop in the diocese of Rochester from 1889 to 1891, and rector of St James's, Piccadilly, from 1895 to 1900. He was appointed canon of Windsor in 1891 and assistant bishop in West London in 1897. Besides the life of his father mentioned above, he published numerous theological works.

His second son, Alfred Barry (1826- ), was educated at King's College, London, and Trinity College, Cambridge, where he ranked 4th among the top scholars and earned a first-class degree in the classical tripos in 1848. He served as sub-warden of Trinity College, Glenalmond (1849-1854), headmaster of Leeds Grammar School (1854-1862), principal of Cheltenham College (1862-1868), and principal of King's College, London (1868-1883). He was a canon of Worcester from 1871 to 1881 and of Westminster from 1881 to 1884. From 1884 to 1889, he was the bishop of Sydney and primate of Australia, and upon returning to England, he became assistant bishop in the diocese of Rochester from 1889 to 1891, and rector of St James's, Piccadilly, from 1895 to 1900. He was appointed canon of Windsor in 1891 and assistant bishop in West London in 1897. In addition to the biography of his father mentioned above, he published numerous theological works.

Another son, Edward Middleton Barry (1830-1880), was also an architect. He acted as assistant to his father during the latter years of Sir Charles's life. On the death of his father, the duty of completing the latter's unfinished work devolved upon him. Amongst other buildings thus completed were the Houses of Parliament at Westminster (see Architecture, fig. 91, and Plate X. fig. 118), and Halifax town-hall (Id. fig. 90). In 1861 he was elected an associate of the Royal Academy; and in 1869 a full academician. From 1873 till his death he held the Academy's professorship of architecture. Among other buildings designed by him were Covent Garden theatre, Charing Cross and Cannon Street hotels, the Birmingham and Midland Institute, new galleries for the National Gallery and new chambers for the Inner Temple. He died on the 27th of January, 1880.

Another son, Edward Middleton Barry (1830-1880), was also an architect. He worked as an assistant to his father during the later years of Sir Charles's life. After his father passed away, it became his responsibility to finish the incomplete work. Among the buildings he completed were the Houses of Parliament at Westminster (see Architecture, fig. 91, and Plate X. fig. 118), and Halifax town hall (Id. fig. 90). In 1861, he was elected an associate of the Royal Academy; and in 1869, he became a full academician. From 1873 until his death, he was the Academy's professor of architecture. Other buildings he designed include Covent Garden theatre, Charing Cross and Cannon Street hotels, the Birmingham and Midland Institute, new galleries for the National Gallery, and new chambers for the Inner Temple. He died on January 27, 1880.

The youngest son, Sir John Wolfe Wolfe-Barry (1836- ), the eminent engineer, who assumed the additional name of Wolfe in 1898, was educated at Glenalmond, and was articled as engineering pupil to Sir John Hawkshaw, with whom he was associated in the building of the railway bridges across the Thames at Charing Cross and Cannon Street. In 1867 he began to practise on his own account, and soon gained an extensive connexion with railway companies, both in Great Britain and in other countries. Among the works on which he was engaged were extensions of the Metropolitan District railway, the St Paul's station and bridge of the London, Chatham & Dover railway, the Barry Docks of the Barry railway company near Cardiff, and the Tower and new Kew bridges over the Thames. On the completion of the Tower Bridge in 1894, he was made a C.B., becoming K.C.B. three years later. He served on several royal commissions, including those on Irish Public Works (1886-1890), Highlands and Islands of Scotland (1889-1890), Accidents to Railway Servants (1899-1900), Port of London (1900-1902), and London Traffic (1903-1905). He was elected president of the Institution of Civil Engineers in 1896, and published books on Railway Appliances (1874), and, with Sir F. J. Bramwell, on Railways and Locomotives (1882).

The youngest son, Sir John Wolfe-Barry (1836- ), a prominent engineer, took on the additional surname Wolfe in 1898. He was educated at Glenalmond and started his engineering apprenticeship under Sir John Hawkshaw, working with him on the construction of railway bridges across the Thames at Charing Cross and Cannon Street. In 1867, he began to work independently and quickly established strong connections with railway companies in Great Britain and abroad. His projects included extensions of the Metropolitan District railway, the St Paul's station and bridge for the London, Chatham & Dover railway, the Barry Docks for the Barry railway company near Cardiff, and the Tower and new Kew bridges over the Thames. After the completion of Tower Bridge in 1894, he was honored as a C.B., and three years later he became a K.C.B. He served on several royal commissions, including those on Irish Public Works (1886-1890), the Highlands and Islands of Scotland (1889-1890), Accidents to Railway Servants (1899-1900), Port of London (1900-1902), and London Traffic (1903-1905). He was elected president of the Institution of Civil Engineers in 1896 and published books on Railway Appliances (1874), and, with Sir F. J. Bramwell, on Railways and Locomotives (1882).

BARRY, ELIZABETH (1658-1713), English actress, of whose early life the details are meagre. At first she was so unsuccessful on the stage as to be more than once dismissed; but she was coached by her lover the earl of Rochester, who had laid a wager that in a short time he would make a first-rate actress of her, and the results confirmed his judgment. Mrs Barry's performance as Isabella, queen of Hungary, in the earl of Orrery's Mustapha, was said to have caused Charles II. and the duke and duchess of York so much delight that the duchess took lessons in English from her, and when she became queen she gave Mrs Barry her coronation robes in which to appear as Elizabeth in Banks's Earl of Essex. Mrs Barry is said to have created over 100 parts, and she was particularly successful in the plays of Thomas Otway. Betterton says that her acting gave "success to plays that would disgust the most patient reader." Dryden pronounced her "always excellent." Cibber is authority for the statement that it was on her behalf that benefits, which up to that time were reserved for authors, were first established for actors by command of James II. Mrs Barry had a child by Lord Rochester and a second by Sir George Etheredge, both of whom were provided for by their fathers. In 1709 she retired from the stage and died on the 7th of November 1713.

BARRY, ELIZABETH (1658-1713), was an English actress, and details about her early life are sparse. Initially, she struggled on stage and was dismissed multiple times; however, she was encouraged by her lover, the Earl of Rochester, who bet he could turn her into a first-rate actress in no time, and his confidence proved to be right. Mrs. Barry's performance as Isabella, queen of Hungary, in the Earl of Orrery's Mustapha, reportedly delighted Charles II. and the Duke and Duchess of York so much that the Duchess took English lessons from her. When she became queen, she gave Mrs. Barry her coronation robes to wear while portraying Elizabeth in Banks's Earl of Essex. Mrs. Barry is said to have created over 100 roles and found particular success in the plays of Thomas Otway. Betterton remarked that her acting brought "success to plays that would disgust the most patient reader." Dryden described her as "always excellent." Cibber states that it was for her that benefits, which had previously been reserved for authors, were first established for actors by the command of James II. Mrs. Barry had a child with Lord Rochester and another with Sir George Etheredge, both of whom were supported by their fathers. In 1709, she retired from acting and died on November 7, 1713.

BARRY, JAMES (1741-1806), English painter, was born at Cork on the 11th of October 1741. His father had been a builder, and, at one time of his life, a coasting trader between the two countries of England and Ireland. To this business of trader James was destined, and he actually made when a boy several voyages; but he manifested such an aversion to the life and habits of a sailor as to induce his father to suffer him to pursue his own inclinations, which led strongly towards drawing and study. At the schools in Cork to which he was sent he was regarded as a prodigy. About the age of seventeen he first attempted oil-painting, and between that and the age of twenty-two, when he first went to Dublin, he produced several large pictures, which decorated his father's house, such as "Aeneas escaping with his Family from the Flames of Troy," "Susanna and the Elders," "Daniel in the Lions' Den," &c. At this period he also produced the painting which first brought him into public notice, and gained him the acquaintance and patronage of Edmund Burke. The picture was founded on an old tradition of the landing of St Patrick on the sea-coast of Cashel, and of the conversion and baptism of the king of that district by the patron saint of Ireland. It was exhibited in London in 1762 or 1763.

BARRY, JAMES (1741-1806), English painter, was born in Cork on October 11, 1741. His father was a builder and, at one point in his life, a coastal trader between England and Ireland. James was initially set to follow in his father's trading footsteps and even made several voyages as a boy. However, he showed such a strong dislike for the sailor's life that his father allowed him to pursue his own interests, which leaned heavily toward drawing and studying art. At the schools in Cork where he was enrolled, he was seen as a prodigy. Around the age of seventeen, he first tried oil painting, and between then and the age of twenty-two, when he moved to Dublin, he created several large works that decorated his father's home, including "Aeneas Escaping with His Family from the Flames of Troy," "Susanna and the Elders," and "Daniel in the Lions' Den," among others. During this time, he also created a painting that brought him public attention and led to his friendship and support from Edmund Burke. This painting was based on an old tradition about St. Patrick landing on the coast of Cashel and converting and baptizing the king of that region. It was exhibited in London in 1762 or 1763.

By the liberality of Burke and his other friends, Barry in the latter part of 1765 was enabled to go abroad. He went first to Paris, then to Rome, where he remained upwards of three years, from Rome to Florence and Bologna, and thence home through Venice. His letters to the Burkes, giving an account of Raphael, Michelangelo, Titian and Leonardo da Vinci, show remarkable insight. Barry painted two pictures while abroad, an Adam and Eve, and a Philoctetes, neither of them of any merit. Soon after his return to England in 1771 he produced his picture of Venus, which was compared, though with little justice, to the Galatea of Raphael, the Venus of Titian and the Venus de Medici. In 1773 he exhibited his "Jupiter and Juno on Mount Ida." His [v.03 p.0445]"Death of General Wolfe," in which the British and French soldiers are represented in very primitive costumes, was considered as a falling-off from his great style of art. His fondness for Greek costume was assigned by his admirers as the cause of his reluctance to paint portraits. His failure to go on with a portrait of Burke which he had begun caused a misunderstanding with his early patron. The difference between them is said to have been widened by Burke's growing intimacy with Sir Joshua Reynolds, and by Barry's feeling some little jealousy of the fame and fortune of his rival "in a humbler walk of the art." About the same time he painted a pair of classical subjects, Mercury inventing the lyre, and Narcissus looking at himself in the water, the last suggested to him by Burke. He also painted a historical picture of Chiron and Achilles, and another of the story of Stratonice, for which last the duke of Richmond gave him a hundred guineas. In 1773 it was proposed to decorate the interior of St Paul's with historical and sacred subjects; but the plan fell to the ground, from not meeting with the concurrence of the bishop of London and the archbishop of Canterbury. Barry was much mortified at the failure, for he had in anticipation fixed upon the subject he intended to paint—the rejection of Christ by the Jews when Pilate proposes his release. In 1773 he published An Inquiry into the real and imaginary Obstructions to the Acquisition of the Arts in England, vindicating the capacity of the English for the fine arts and tracing their slow progress hitherto to the Reformation, to political and civil dissensions, and lastly to the general direction of the public mind to mechanics, manufactures and commerce. In 1774 a proposal was made through Valentine Green to Reynolds, West, Cipriani, Barry, and other artists to ornament the great room of the Society for the Encouragement of Arts, Manufactures and Commerce in the Adelphi with historical and allegorical paintings. This proposal was at the time rejected by the artists themselves; but in 1777 Barry made an offer to paint the whole on condition of being allowed the choice of his subjects, and being paid by the society the expenses of canvas, paints and models. His offer was accepted, and he finished the series of pictures at the end of seven years to the entire satisfaction of the members of the society, who granted him two exhibitions, and at different periods voted him 50 guineas, their gold medal and 200 guineas. Of the six paintings making up the series, only one, that of the Olympic Games, shows any artistic power.

Thanks to the generosity of Burke and his friends, Barry was able to travel overseas in late 1765. He first went to Paris, then to Rome, where he stayed for over three years, then traveled to Florence and Bologna, and finally returned home through Venice. His letters to the Burkes, which described Raphael, Michelangelo, Titian, and Leonardo da Vinci, show impressive insight. While abroad, Barry painted two works, Adam and Eve and Philoctetes, neither of which were very good. Shortly after returning to England in 1771, he created his painting of Venus, which was unfairly compared to Raphael's Galatea, Titian's Venus, and the Venus de Medici. In 1773, he showcased his "Jupiter and Juno on Mount Ida." His [v.03 p.0445]"Death of General Wolfe," where British and French soldiers are depicted in very basic outfits, was seen as a decline from his earlier great style of art. His preference for Greek costume was thought by his fans to be the reason for his hesitance to paint portraits. His inability to continue a portrait of Burke that he had started led to a misunderstanding with his early supporter. It's said that the rift between them grew due to Burke's increasing closeness with Sir Joshua Reynolds and Barry's slight jealousy of the fame and success of his rival "in a more modest area of art." Around the same time, he painted two classical subjects: Mercury inventing the lyre and Narcissus gazing at his reflection in the water, with the latter suggested to him by Burke. He also created a historical painting of Chiron and Achilles, and another depicting the story of Stratonice, for which the Duke of Richmond paid him a hundred guineas. In 1773, there was a proposal to decorate the interior of St Paul's with historical and sacred subjects; however, the plan fell through because it didn't gain the support of the Bishop of London and the Archbishop of Canterbury. Barry was very disappointed by this failure because he had already chosen the subject he intended to paint—the rejection of Christ by the Jews when Pilate offers his release. In 1773, he published An Inquiry into the Real and Imaginary Obstructions to the Acquisition of the Arts in England, defending the ability of the English people in the fine arts and linking their slow progress to the Reformation, political and civil conflicts, and a broader societal focus on mechanics, manufacturing, and trade. In 1774, a proposal was made through Valentine Green to Reynolds, West, Cipriani, Barry, and other artists to enhance the grand room of the Society for the Encouragement of Arts, Manufactures and Commerce in the Adelphi with historical and allegorical paintings. Initially, the artists themselves rejected this proposal; however, in 1777, Barry offered to paint the entire series on the condition that he could choose the subjects and that the society would cover the costs of canvas, paints, and models. His offer was accepted, and he completed the series of paintings after seven years, to the full satisfaction of the society's members, who awarded him two exhibitions and various monetary rewards, including 50 guineas, their gold medal, and 200 guineas. Of the six paintings in the series, only one, depicting the Olympic Games, demonstrates any artistic strength.

Soon after his return from the continent Barry had been chosen a member of the Royal Academy; and in 1782 he was appointed professor of painting in the room of Mr Penny with a salary of £30 a year. Among other things, he insisted on the necessity of purchasing a collection of pictures by the best masters as models for the students, and proposed several of those in the Orleans collection. This recommendation was not relished, and in 1799 Barry was expelled from the academy, soon after the appearance of his Letter to the Dilettanti Society, a very amusing but eccentric publication, full of enthusiasm for his art and at the same time of contempt for the living professors of it. After the loss of his salary, a subscription was set on foot by the earl of Buchan to relieve him from his difficulties, and to settle him in a larger house to finish his picture of Pandora. The subscription amounted to £1000, with which an annuity was bought, but on the 6th of February 1806 he was seized with illness and died on the 22nd of the same month. On the 14th of March his remains were interred in St Paul's.

Soon after he returned from the continent, Barry was chosen as a member of the Royal Academy. In 1782, he was appointed professor of painting, taking over from Mr. Penny, with a salary of £30 a year. Among other things, he emphasized the need to acquire a collection of paintings by the best masters for the students to use as models and suggested several from the Orleans collection. This proposal wasn't well received, and in 1799, Barry was expelled from the academy shortly after the release of his Letter to the Dilettanti Society, a humorous but eccentric publication filled with enthusiasm for his art, while also expressing disdain for the current professors. After losing his salary, a subscription was organized by the Earl of Buchan to help him with his financial struggles and to secure a larger house for him to complete his painting of Pandora. The subscription raised £1000, which was used to purchase an annuity, but on February 6, 1806, he fell ill and died on the 22nd of that month. His remains were laid to rest in St. Paul's on March 14.

As an artist, Barry was more distinguished for the strength of his conceptions, and for his resolute and persistent determination to apply himself only to great subjects, than for his skill in designing or for beauty in his colouring. His drawing is rarely good, his colouring frequently wretched. He was extremely impulsive and unequal; sometimes morose, sometimes sociable and urbane; jealous of his contemporaries, and yet capable of pronouncing a splendid eulogy on Reynolds.

As an artist, Barry was better known for his strong ideas and his firm commitment to focusing only on significant subjects than for his drawing skills or the beauty of his colors. His drawing is often poor, and his coloring is frequently terrible. He was very impulsive and inconsistent; sometimes gloomy, sometimes friendly and sophisticated; jealous of his peers, yet able to give a great praise to Reynolds.

BARRY, SIR REDMOND (1813-1880), British colonial judge, son of Major-General H. G. Barry, of Ballyclough, Co. Cork, was educated at a military school in Kent, and at Trinity College, Dublin, and was called to the Irish bar in 1838. He emigrated to Australia, and after a short stay at Sydney went to Melbourne, with which city he was ever afterwards closely identified. After practising his profession for some years, he became commissioner of the court of requests, and after the creation in 1851 of the colony of Victoria, out of the Port Phillip district of New South Wales, was the first solicitor-general with a seat in the legislative and executive councils. Subsequently he held the offices of judge of the Supreme Court, acting chief-justice and administrator of the government. He represented Victoria at the London International Exhibition of 1862 and at the Philadelphia Exhibition of 1876. He was knighted in 1860 and was created K.C.M.G. in 1877. Sir Redmond Barry was the first person in Victoria to take an interest in higher education, and induced the local government to expend large sums of money upon that object. He was the founder of the university of Melbourne (1853), of which he was the first chancellor, was president of the Melbourne public library (1854), national gallery and museum, and was one of the first to foster the volunteer movement in Australia. To his exertions is due the prosperity of the two institutions with which his memory is identified.

BARRY, SIR REDMOND (1813-1880), British colonial judge, was the son of Major-General H. G. Barry from Ballyclough, Co. Cork. He was educated at a military school in Kent and at Trinity College, Dublin, and was called to the Irish bar in 1838. He moved to Australia and, after a brief time in Sydney, went to Melbourne, which he became closely associated with for the rest of his life. After practicing law for a few years, he became the commissioner of the court of requests. When the colony of Victoria was formed in 1851 from the Port Phillip district of New South Wales, he became the first solicitor-general with a seat in the legislative and executive councils. Later, he served as a judge of the Supreme Court, acting chief justice, and government administrator. He represented Victoria at the London International Exhibition of 1862 and the Philadelphia Exhibition of 1876. He was knighted in 1860 and made K.C.M.G. in 1877. Sir Redmond Barry was the first person in Victoria to take an interest in higher education and encouraged the local government to invest significant funds in that area. He founded the University of Melbourne in 1853, where he was the first chancellor, and served as president of the Melbourne public library (1854), national gallery, and museum. He was also among the first to promote the volunteer movement in Australia. The success of the two institutions associated with his name can be attributed to his efforts.

BARRY, SPRANGER (1719-1777), British actor, was born in Dublin on the 23rd of November 1719, the son of a silversmith, to whose business he was brought up. His first appearance on the stage was at the Smock Alley theatre on the 5th of February 1744, and his engagement at once increased its prosperity. His first London appearance was made in 1746 as Othello at Drury Lane. Here his talents were speedily recognized, and in Hamlet and Macbeth he alternated with Garrick, arousing the latter's jealousy by his success as Romeo. This resulted in his leaving Drury Lane for Covent Garden in 1750, accompanied by Mrs Cibber, his Juliet. Both houses now at once put on Romeo and Juliet for a series of rival performances, and Barry's impersonation was preferred by the critics to Garrick's. In 1758 Barry built the Crow Street theatre, Dublin, and later a new theatre in Cork, but he was not successful as a manager and returned to London to play at the Haymarket, then under the management of Foote. As his second wife, he married in 1768 the actress Mrs Dancer (1734-1801), and he and Mrs Barry played under Garrick's management, Barry appearing in 1767, after ten years' absence from the stage, in Othello, his greatest part. In 1774 they both moved to Covent Garden, where Barry remained until his death on the 10th of January 1777. He was a singularly handsome man, with the advantage of height which Garrick lacked.

BARRY, SPRANGER (1719-1777), a British actor, was born in Dublin on November 23, 1719, the son of a silversmith, and grew up in that trade. He made his stage debut at the Smock Alley theatre on February 5, 1744, and his presence immediately boosted the theatre's success. His first performance in London was in 1746 as Othello at Drury Lane, where his talent was quickly acknowledged. He alternated with Garrick in Hamlet and Macbeth, sparking jealousy in Garrick due to his popularity as Romeo. This led him to leave Drury Lane for Covent Garden in 1750, alongside Mrs. Cibber, his Juliet. Both theatres then staged Romeo and Juliet in a series of competing performances, with critics favoring Barry's portrayal over Garrick's. In 1758, Barry built the Crow Street theatre in Dublin and later a new theatre in Cork, but he struggled as a manager and returned to London to perform at the Haymarket, which was then managed by Foote. In 1768, he married actress Mrs. Dancer (1734-1801), and he and Mrs. Barry worked under Garrick’s management, with Barry returning to the stage in 1767 after a ten-year break to play Othello, his most famous role. In 1774, they both moved to Covent Garden, where Barry remained until his death on January 10, 1777. He was notably handsome and had the height advantage that Garrick did not.

His second wife, Ann Street Barry, was born in Bath in 1734, the daughter of an apothecary. Early in life she married an actor of the name of Dancer, and it was as Mrs Dancer that she made her first recorded appearance in 1758 as Cordelia to Spranger Barry's Lear at the Crow Street theatre. During the next nine years she played all the leading tragic parts, but without any great success, and it was not until she came to Drury Lane with Barry that her reputation advanced to the high point at which it afterwards stood. After his death, she remained at Covent Garden and married a man much younger than herself, named Crawford, being first billed as Mrs Crawford in 1778. Her last appearance is said to have been as Lady Randolph in Douglas at Covent Garden in 1798. This part, and that of Desdemona, were among her great impersonations; in both she was considered by some critics superior to Mrs Siddons, who expressed her fear of her in one of her letters. She died on the 29th of November 1801 and was buried in Westminster Abbey.

His second wife, Ann Street, Barry, was born in Bath in 1734, the daughter of a pharmacist. Early in her life, she married an actor named Dancer, and it was as Mrs. Dancer that she made her first recorded appearance in 1758 as Cordelia to Spranger Barry's Lear at the Crow Street Theatre. Over the next nine years, she played all the leading tragic roles, but without much success, and it wasn't until she joined Drury Lane with Barry that her reputation reached the high point it later achieved. After his death, she stayed at Covent Garden and married a man much younger than herself, named Crawford, becoming first billed as Mrs. Crawford in 1778. Her last appearance is said to have been as Lady Randolph in Douglas at Covent Garden in 1798. This role, along with her portrayal of Desdemona, were among her great performances; in both, some critics considered her superior to Mrs. Siddons, who expressed her concern about her in one of her letters. She died on November 29, 1801, and was buried in Westminster Abbey.

BARRY, an urban district and seaport of Glamorganshire, Wales, on the Bristol Channel, 153 m. by rail from London and 8 m. S.W. from Cardiff. Its station is a terminus on the Barry railway, which starts at Hafod in the Rhondda Valley, where it joins the Taff Vale railway, having also junctions with the same line for Aberdare and Merthyr at Treforest, and for Cardiff and Penarth at Cogan, and with the Great Western main line at Peterstone and St Fagans. A branch from the main line at Tyn-y-caeau connects with the Rhymney railway, the London & North-Western railway, and the Brecon & Merthyr railway. The Vale of Glamorgan railway (which is worked by [v.03 p.0446]the Barry company and has a junction with the Great Western railway at Bridgend) affords a direct route to Barry from the Llynvi, Ogmore and Garw coalfields. The urban district of Barry, with a population in 1901 of 27,030, comprises the ecclesiastical parishes of Barry, Cadoxton, Merthyr-Dovan, and a portion of Sully in which is included Barry Island (194 acres), now, however, joined to the mainland. The total population of this area in 1881 was only about 500, that of Barry village alone being only 85. A small brook named Barri runs here into the sea, whence the place was formerly known in Welsh as Aber-Barri, but the name of both the river and the island is supposed to be derived from Baruch, a Welsh saint of the 7th century, who had a cell on the island. His chapel (which still existed in Leland's time) was a place of pilgrimage in the middle ages. According to Giraldus, his own family derived its name de Barri from the island which they once owned. One of the followers of Fitzhamon settled at Barry about the end of the 11th century, building there a castle of which only a gateway remains. Besides the small old parish churches of Merthyr-Dovan and Cadoxton, and the rebuilt parish church of Barry, there are four modern churches (in one of which Welsh services are held). There are about thirty nonconformist chapels, in nearly a third of which the services are Welsh. There are also a Roman Catholic church, and one for German and Scandinavian seamen. The other public buildings are a county intermediate school for 250 boys and girls, built in 1896, a free library (opened in 1892) with four branch reading-rooms, a seamen's institute, the Barry market, built in 1890 at a cost of £3500 (but now used as a concert-hall), and Romilly hall for public meetings.

BARRY, an urban district and seaport in Glamorganshire, Wales, located on the Bristol Channel, is 153 miles by rail from London and 8 miles southwest of Cardiff. Its railway station serves as a terminus on the Barry railway, which begins at Hafod in the Rhondda Valley, connecting with the Taff Vale railway. It also has junctions with this line for Aberdare and Merthyr at Treforest, and for Cardiff and Penarth at Cogan, as well as links to the Great Western main line at Peterstone and St Fagans. A branch from the main line at Tyn-y-caeau connects with the Rhymney railway, the London & North-Western railway, and the Brecon & Merthyr railway. The Vale of Glamorgan railway (operated by the Barry company, which has a junction with the Great Western railway at Bridgend) provides a direct route to Barry from the Llynvi, Ogmore, and Garw coalfields. The urban district of Barry had a population of 27,030 in 1901 and includes the ecclesiastical parishes of Barry, Cadoxton, Merthyr-Dovan, and part of Sully, which includes Barry Island (194 acres), now connected to the mainland. In 1881, the total population of this area was only about 500, with Barry village having just 85 residents. A small brook named Barri flows into the sea here, from which the place was historically known in Welsh as Aber-Barri. The names of both the river and the island are thought to come from Baruch, a Welsh saint from the 7th century who had a cell on the island. His chapel (which still existed in Leland's time) was a pilgrimage site during the Middle Ages. According to Giraldus, his family took the name de Barri from the island they once owned. One of Fitzhamon's followers settled in Barry around the end of the 11th century, building a castle there, of which only a gateway remains. In addition to the small old parish churches of Merthyr-Dovan and Cadoxton, and the rebuilt parish church of Barry, there are four modern churches (one of which holds Welsh services). There are about thirty nonconformist chapels, nearly a third of which conduct services in Welsh. There is also a Roman Catholic church and one for German and Scandinavian seamen. Other public buildings include a county intermediate school for 250 boys and girls, established in 1896, a free library (opened in 1892) with four branch reading rooms, a seamen's institute, the Barry market (built in 1890 at a cost of £3500, but now used as a concert hall), and Romilly Hall for public meetings.

Barry owes its seaport to the determination of a number of colliery owners to secure an alternative port to Cardiff, with an independent railway to it from the coalfields. After failing in 1883, they obtained parliamentary powers for this purpose in 1884, and the first sod of the new dock at Barry was cut in November of that year. The docks are 114 acres in extent, and have accommodation for the largest vessels afloat. Dock No. 1, opened on the 18th of July 1889, is 73 acres (with a basin of 7 acres) and occupies the eastern side of the old channel between the island and the mainland, having a well-sheltered deep-sea entrance. There is good anchorage between Barry and Sully islands. Dock No. 2 (34 acres) was opened on the 10th of October 1898. There are 41 acres of timber-ponds and three large graving-docks. For loading the coal there are thirty fixed and seven movable coal-hoists. The total tonnage of the exports in 1906 was 9,757,380 (all of which, except 26,491 tons, was coal), and of the imports 506,103 tons.

Barry owes its seaport to the determination of several colliery owners who wanted an alternative port to Cardiff, along with a separate railway connecting it to the coalfields. After failing in 1883, they gained parliamentary approval for this in 1884, and the groundbreaking for the new dock at Barry took place in November that year. The docks cover 114 acres and can accommodate the largest vessels. Dock No. 1, which opened on July 18, 1889, spans 73 acres (with a basin of 7 acres) and is located on the eastern side of the old channel between the island and the mainland, featuring a well-sheltered deep-sea entrance. There’s good anchorage between Barry and Sully islands. Dock No. 2, covering 34 acres, was opened on October 10, 1898. The docks include 41 acres of timber ponds and three large graving docks. For loading coal, there are thirty fixed and seven movable coal-hoists. In 1906, the total tonnage of exports was 9,757,380 (with all but 26,491 tons being coal), while imports totaled 506,103 tons.

BAR-ṢALĪBĪ, JACOB or DIONYSIUS,[1] the best-known and most voluminous writer in the Syrian Jacobite church of the 12th century, was, like Bar-Hebraeus, a native of Malatia on the Upper Euphrates. In 1154 he was created bishop of Mar‛ash by the patriarch Athanasius VIII.; a year later the diocese of Mabbōg was added to his charge. In 1166 Michael I., the successor of Athanasius, transferred him to the metropolitan see of Āmid in Mesopotamia, and there he remained till his death in 1171. A long account of his writings, with copious extracts from some of them, has been given by Assemani (Bibl. Orient. ii. pp. 156-211); and W. Wright (Syriac Literature, pp. 246-250) has added further particulars as to the MSS. in which they are contained. Probably the most important are his exhaustive commentaries on the text of the Old and New Testaments, in which he has skilfully interwoven and summarized the interpretations of previous writers such as Ephrem, Chrysostom, Cyril, Moses Bar-Kēphā and John of Dārā, whom he mentions together in the preface to his commentary on St Matthew. Among his other main works are a treatise against heretics, containing inter alia a polemic against the Jews and the Mahommedans; liturgical treatises, epistles and homilies. His commentaries on the Gospels were to some extent used by Dudley Loftus in the 17th century. But the systematic editing of his works was only begun in 1903 with H. Labourt's edition and translation of his Exposition of the Liturgy (Paris). His commentaries on the Gospels have been edited and translated by J. Sedlaček and J. B. Chabot (Fasc. I., Paris, 1906), and the Syriac text of the treatise against the Jews has been edited by J. de Zwaan (Leiden, 1906). Bar-Ṣalībī was undoubtedly an able theologian; his vigour combined with terseness in argument is well seen, for instance, in the introductory sections of his commentary on St Matthew. Of his originality it is hard to judge, as he does not usually indicate in detail the sources of his arguments and interpretations. He does not, however, claim for himself to be more than a compiler, at least in his commentaries. His Syriac style is good, considering the lateness of the period at which he wrote.

BAR-ṢALĪBĪ, JACOB or DIONYSIUS,[1] the most famous and prolific writer in the Syrian Jacobite church during the 12th century, was, like Bar-Hebraeus, from Malatia on the Upper Euphrates. In 1154, he was appointed bishop of Mar‛ash by Patriarch Athanasius VIII. A year later, he took on the additional diocese of Mabbōg. In 1166, Michael I., the successor of Athanasius, moved him to the metropolitan see of Āmid in Mesopotamia, where he remained until his death in 1171. Assemani provided a detailed account of his writings, along with extensive excerpts from some of them (Bibl. Orient. ii. pp. 156-211); W. Wright (Syriac Literature, pp. 246-250) has added more information about the manuscripts containing these works. His most significant contributions are his thorough commentaries on the Old and New Testaments, where he skillfully wove together and summarized the interpretations of earlier writers like Ephrem, Chrysostom, Cyril, Moses Bar-Kēphā, and John of Dārā, whom he mentions in the preface to his commentary on St. Matthew. Other major works include a treatise against heretics, which includes inter alia a critique of Jews and Muslims; liturgical writings; letters; and sermons. His Gospel commentaries were somewhat utilized by Dudley Loftus in the 17th century. However, systematic editing of his works didn't begin until 1903 with H. Labourt's edition and translation of his Exposition of the Liturgy (Paris). J. Sedlaček and J. B. Chabot edited and translated his commentaries on the Gospels (Fasc. I., Paris, 1906), and J. de Zwaan edited the Syriac text of his treatise against the Jews (Leiden, 1906). Bar-Salibi was certainly a skilled theologian; his energy combined with brevity in argument is clearly demonstrated, for example, in the introductory sections of his commentary on St. Matthew. It's challenging to assess his originality, as he typically does not specify the sources of his arguments and interpretations in detail. However, he does not claim to be more than a compiler, at least in his commentaries. His Syriac writing is quite good, considering the late period in which he wrote.

(N. M.)

(N. M.)

[1] Jacob was his baptismal name; Dionysius he assumed when consecrated to the bishopric.

[1] Jacob was his baptismal name; he took on the name Dionysius when he was appointed as bishop.

BARSI, a town of British India, in the Sholapur district of Bombay, lying within a tract entirely surrounded by the Nizam's dominions. Pop. (1901) 24,242. Barsi is a flourishing centre of trade, exporting to Bombay large quantities of cotton and oil-seeds. It has several factories for ginning and pressing cotton—some on a large scale. It is connected with the main line of the Great Indian Peninsula railway by a light railway.

BARSI, a town in British India, located in the Sholapur district of Bombay, is completely surrounded by the Nizam's territories. Population (1901) 24,242. Barsi is a thriving trade hub, exporting large amounts of cotton and oilseeds to Bombay. It has several factories for ginning and pressing cotton, some of which operate on a large scale. It is linked to the main line of the Great Indian Peninsula Railway by a light railway.

BAR-SUR-AUBE, a town of north-eastern France, capital of an arrondissement in the department of Aube, 34 m. E. by S. of Troyes on the main line of the Eastern railway between that town and Belfort. Pop. (1906) 4276. Bar-sur-Aube lies at the foot of hills on the right bank of the Aube at its confluence with the Bresse. A circle of boulevards occupies the site of the old ramparts, fragments of which still remain. Of the ecclesiastical buildings, the most noteworthy are St Pierre and St Maclou, both dating mainly from the end of the 12th century. St Pierre has wooden exterior galleries and two fine Gothic porches. The sacristy of St Maclou is conjectured to have formed the chapel of the castle of the counts of Bar, of which the square tower flanking the north side of the church formed the entrance. The town is the seat of a sub-prefect, and the public institutions include a tribunal of first instance and a communal college. Flour-milling, tanning, and the manufacture of brandy, hosiery and agricultural implements are carried on. The wine of the district is much esteemed.

BAR-SUR-AUBE, a town in northeastern France, is the capital of an arrondissement in the Aube department, located 34 miles ESE of Troyes along the main Eastern railway line connecting Troyes and Belfort. Population (1906) was 4,276. Bar-sur-Aube is situated at the base of hills on the right bank of the Aube River where it meets the Bresse River. A ring of boulevards now occupies the site of the old ramparts, although some remnants still exist. Among the notable churches are St Pierre and St Maclou, both primarily dating back to the late 12th century. St Pierre features wooden exterior galleries and two beautiful Gothic porches. The sacristy of St Maclou is believed to have been part of the chapel of the counts of Bar's castle, with the square tower on the north side of the church serving as the entrance. The town hosts a sub-prefect, and public institutions include a local court and a community college. Industries such as flour milling, tanning, and the production of brandy, hosiery, and agricultural tools are active here. The local wine is highly regarded.

Traces of a Roman settlement have been found on hills to the south of the town. Under the domination of the counts of Champagne, it became the scene of important fairs which did not cease till 1648. In 1814 several actions between the French and the army of the allies took place at Bar-sur-Aube (see Napoleonic Wars).

Traces of a Roman settlement have been discovered on the hills south of the town. Under the rule of the counts of Champagne, it became the site of significant fairs that continued until 1648. In 1814, several confrontations occurred between the French and the allied army at Bar-sur-Aube (see Napoleonic Wars).

BAR-SUR-SEINE, a town of eastern France, capital of an arrondissement in the department of Aube, on the left bank of the Seine, 20 m. S.E. of Troyes by the Eastern railway. Pop. (1906) 2812. The town lies at the foot of a wooded hill on which stand the ruins of the castle of the counts of Bar, and is composed chiefly of one long street, bordered in places by houses of the 16th century. Its principal building is the church of St Etienne, of the 16th and 17th centuries, which contains some fine stained glass. Bar-sur-Seine has a sub-prefecture and a tribunal of first instance. Tanning, dyeing, flour-milling, brandy-distilling and the manufacture of glass are among the industries. The Canal de la Haute-Seine begins at this point. The town was devastated in 1359 by the English, when, according to Froissart, no fewer than 900 mansions were burnt. Afterwards it suffered greatly in the religious wars of the 16th century.

BAR-SUR-SEINE, a town in eastern France, is the capital of an arrondissement in the Aube department, located on the left bank of the Seine, 20 miles southeast of Troyes via the Eastern railway. Population (1906) was 2,812. The town is situated at the base of a wooded hill, where the ruins of the castle of the counts of Bar can be found, and it mainly consists of a long street lined in certain areas with 16th-century houses. The main landmark is the church of St. Etienne, built in the 16th and 17th centuries, which features some beautiful stained glass. Bar-sur-Seine has a sub-prefecture and a district court. Industries here include tanning, dyeing, flour-milling, brandy distilling, and glass manufacturing. The Canal de la Haute-Seine starts at this location. The town was devastated in 1359 by the English, during which, according to Froissart, as many as 900 mansions were burned. It also faced significant hardship during the religious wars in the 16th century.

BART, JEAN (1651-1702), French naval commander, son of a fisherman, was born in Dunkirk on the 21st of October 1651. He served when young in the Dutch navy, but when war broke out between Louis XIV. and Holland in 1672 he entered the French service. He gained great distinction in the Mediterranean, where he held an irregular sort of commission, not being then able from his low birth to receive a command in the navy. His success was so great, however, that he was made a lieutenant in 1679. He rose rapidly to the rank of captain and then to that of admiral. The peace of Ryswick put a close to his active service. Many anecdotes are narrated of the courage and bluntness of the uncultivated sailor, who became the popular hero [v.03 p.0447]of the French naval service. The town of Dunkirk has honoured his memory by a statue and by naming a public square after him.

BART, JEAN (1651-1702), a French naval commander and the son of a fisherman, was born in Dunkirk on October 21, 1651. He started his career in the Dutch navy as a young man, but when war broke out between Louis XIV and Holland in 1672, he joined the French service. He achieved great success in the Mediterranean, where he had an informal commission, as he couldn't secure a command in the navy due to his low social status. His remarkable achievements led to his promotion to lieutenant in 1679. He quickly climbed the ranks to captain and then admiral. The peace of Ryswick ended his active service. Many stories are told about the bravery and straightforwardness of this unrefined sailor, who became a celebrated hero of the French navy. The town of Dunkirk has honored his memory with a statue and by naming a public square after him.

See Richer, Vie de Jean Bart (1780), and many editions since; Vanderest, Histoire de Jean Bart.

See Richer, Vie de Jean Bart (1780), and many editions since; Vanderest, Histoire de Jean Bart.

BARTAN, more correctly Bartin, a town in the vilayet of Kastamuni, Asiatic Turkey, retaining the name of the ancient village Parthenia and situated near the mouth of the Bartan-su (anc. Parthenius), which formed part of the boundary between Bithynia and Paphlagonia. Various aetiological explanations of the name Parthenius were given by the ancients, e.g. that the maiden Artemis hunted on its banks, or that the flow of its waters was gentle and maiden-like. The town, which is the residence of a kaïmakam, is built on two low limestone hills and its streets are paved with limestone blocks. It is noted for the fine boxwood grown in the vicinity, is a port of call for Black Sea coasting steamers and carries on a considerable trade with Constantinople which might be increased were it not for the obstruction of the harbour by a bar. Pop. 8677, according to Cuinet, La Turquie d'Asie (1894).

BARTAN, more accurately Bartın, is a town in the Kastamuni province of Asia Minor, Turkey. It keeps the name of the ancient village Parthenia and is located near the mouth of the Bartan River (anc. Parthenius), which marked the boundary between Bithynia and Paphlagonia. The ancients offered various explanations for the name Parthenius, like the idea that the goddess Artemis hunted along its banks or that the river's gentle flow resembled that of a maiden. The town, which is the seat of a kaïmakam, is built on two low limestone hills, and its streets are paved with limestone blocks. It's known for the high-quality boxwood grown nearby and serves as a port for Black Sea coasting steamers. It has a significant trade relationship with Constantinople, which could grow if not for the harbor being obstructed by a sandbar. The population is 8,677, according to Cuinet's La Turquie d'Asie (1894).

BARTELS, HANS VON (1856- ), German painter, was born in Hamburg, the son of Dr N. F. F. von Bartels, a Russian government official. He studied first under the marine painter R. Hardorff in Hamburg, then under C. Schweitzer in Düsseldorf and C. Oesterley in Hamburg, and finally at the Berlin School of Art. After travelling extensively, especially in Italy, he settled in Munich in 1885 and was appointed professor of painting in 1891. An oil painter of great power, he is one of the leading German water-colour painters, mainly of marines and scenes of fishing life, painted with rude vigour and a great display of technical skill. He excels in storm scenes and in depicting the strong, healthy fishing-folk of the northern coasts. He became an honorary member of leading English, German, Dutch, Belgian and Austrian art societies. Among his principal works are:—"Sturmflut" (Berlin Gallery); "Lonely Beach" (Hungarian National Gallery); "Potato Harvest—Rügen" (Prague); "Storm—Bornholm" (German emperor's collection); and "Moonlight on the Zuyder Zee" (New Pinakothek, Munich).

BARTELS, HANS VON (1856- ), German painter, was born in Hamburg, the son of Dr. N. F. F. von Bartels, a Russian government official. He initially studied under the marine painter R. Hardorff in Hamburg, then with C. Schweitzer in Düsseldorf and C. Oesterley in Hamburg, and finally at the Berlin School of Art. After traveling extensively, particularly in Italy, he settled in Munich in 1885 and became a professor of painting in 1891. An oil painter of significant talent, he is one of the leading German watercolor painters, focusing mainly on marine scenes and fishing life, which he depicted with raw energy and exceptional technical skill. He especially shines in storm scenes and in capturing the strong, robust fishermen of the northern coasts. He was made an honorary member of prominent English, German, Dutch, Belgian, and Austrian art societies. Some of his major works include:—"Sturmflut" (Berlin Gallery); "Lonely Beach" (Hungarian National Gallery); "Potato Harvest—Rügen" (Prague); "Storm—Bornholm" (German emperor's collection); and "Moonlight on the Zuyder Zee" (New Pinakothek, Munich).

BARTENSTEIN, a town of Germany, in the kingdom of Prussia, on the Alle, 34 m. S. of Königsberg by rail. Pop. (1900) 6805. It has a considerable trade in corn and live stock, and its industries comprise founding and carriage-building, tanneries, breweries and potteries. Bartenstein is celebrated for the treaty concluded here on the 26th of April 1807, between Prussia and Russia.

BARTENSTEIN, a town in Germany, located in the kingdom of Prussia, along the Alle River, 34 miles south of Königsberg by train. Population (1900) 6,805. The town has a significant trade in grain and livestock, and its industries include foundries, carriage manufacturing, tanneries, breweries, and pottery. Bartenstein is known for the treaty signed here on April 26, 1807, between Prussia and Russia.

BARTER (from Fr. barater, to truck, to exchange), the exchange of commodities for commodities, in contra-distinction to the exchange of commodities for money. Barter was the simplest form of trading among primitive communities, but its inconveniences led, at an early stage of civilization, to the adoption of metals as mediums of exchange. Barter, however, is still very common in dealings with uncivilized peoples, and traders in many countries find that the most satisfactory method of effecting exchange is to furnish themselves with such commodities as weapons, tools and ornaments, which are more readily taken than money.

BARTER (from Fr. barater, to trade or exchange) is the practice of exchanging goods for other goods, as opposed to exchanging goods for money. Barter was the most basic form of trading among early communities, but its drawbacks led to the early adoption of metals as a medium of exchange in civilization. However, barter is still quite common in interactions with unsophisticated societies, and traders in many countries find that the most effective way to make exchanges is to stock up on items like weapons, tools, and ornaments, which are often preferred over cash.

For the history of barter and the steps by which a system of currency was gradually evolved, see Money. Consult also W. S. Jevons, Money and the Mechanism of Exchange; A. Marshall, Economics; W. Ridgeway, Origin of Currency and Weight Standards.

For the history of bartering and how a currency system gradually developed, see Cash. Also check out W. S. Jevons, Money and the Mechanism of Exchange; A. Marshall, Economics; W. Ridgeway, Origin of Currency and Weight Standards.

BARTET (Regnault), JEANNE JULIA (1854- ), French actress, was born in Paris and trained at the Conservatoire. In 1872 she began a successful career at the Vaudeville, and in 1879 was engaged at the Comédie Francaise, of which she became a sociétaire in 1880. For many years she played the chief parts both in tragedy and comedy, her grand style and exquisite finesse making her supreme among the younger actresses on the French stage. She had a season in London in 1908, when her consummate art was displayed in a number of parts.

BARTET (Regnault), JEANNE JULIA (1854- ), French actress, was born in Paris and trained at the Conservatoire. In 1872, she began a successful career at the Vaudeville, and in 1879, she was engaged at the Comédie Francaise, where she became a sociétaire in 1880. For many years, she played leading roles in both tragedy and comedy, with her dramatic style and refined skills making her the standout among the younger actresses on the French stage. She had a season in London in 1908, where her exceptional talent was showcased in several roles.

BARTH, HEINRICH (1821-1865), German explorer, was born at Hamburg on the 16th of February 1821, and educated at Berlin University, where he graduated in 1844. He had already visited Italy and Sicily and had formed a plan to journey through the Mediterranean countries. After studying Arabic in London he set out on his travels in 1845. From Tangier he made his way overland throughout the length of North Africa, visiting the sites of the ancient cities of Barbary and Cyrenaica. He also travelled through Egypt, ascending the Nile to Wadi Halfa and crossing the desert to Berenice. While in Egypt he was attacked and wounded by robbers. Crossing the Sinai peninsula he traversed Palestine, Syria, Asia Minor, Turkey and Greece, everywhere examining the remains of antiquity; and returned to Berlin in 1847. For a time he was engaged there as Privat-docent, and in preparing for publication the narrative of his Wanderungen durch die Küstenländer des Mittelmeeres, which appeared in 1849.

BARTH, HEINRICH (1821-1865), German explorer, was born in Hamburg on February 16, 1821, and educated at Berlin University, from which he graduated in 1844. He had already visited Italy and Sicily and had made plans to travel through the Mediterranean countries. After studying Arabic in London, he began his travels in 1845. From Tangier, he traveled overland through North Africa, visiting the ruins of ancient cities in Barbary and Cyrenaica. He also traveled through Egypt, sailing up the Nile to Wadi Halfa and crossing the desert to Berenice. While in Egypt, he was attacked and injured by robbers. Crossing the Sinai Peninsula, he journeyed through Palestine, Syria, Asia Minor, Turkey, and Greece, where he examined the remnants of antiquity and returned to Berlin in 1847. For a time, he worked there as a Privat-docent and prepared for publication the narrative of his Wanderungen durch die Küstenländer des Mittelmeeres, which was released in 1849.

At the instance of Bunsen and other scientists, Barth and Adolf Overweg, a Prussian astronomer, were appointed colleagues of James Richardson, an explorer of the Sahara who had been selected by the British government to open up commercial relations with the states of the central and western Sudan. The party left Tripoli early in 1850, but the deaths of Richardson (March 1851) and Overweg (September 1852) left Barth to early on the mission alone. He returned to Europe in September 1855, after one of the most fruitful expeditions ever undertaken in inner Africa. In addition to journeys across the Sahara, Barth traversed the country from Lake Chad and Bagirmi on the east to Timbuktu on the west and Cameroon on the south, making prolonged sojourns in the ancient sultanates or emirates of Bornu, Kano, Nupe, Sokoto and Gando and at Timbuktu. He studied minutely the topography, history, civilizations and resources of the countries he visited. The story of his travels was published simultaneously in English and German, under the title Travels and Discoveries in North and Central Africa (1857-1858, 5 vols.). For accuracy, interest, variety and extent of information Barth's Travels have few rivals among works of the kind. It is a book that will always rank as a standard authority on the regions in question, of which a great part, under the name of Nigeria, has since come under British rule. Except a C.B., Barth himself received no recognition of his services from the British government. He returned to Germany, where he prepared a collection of Central African vocabularies (Gotha, 1862-1866). In 1858 he undertook another journey in Asia Minor, and in 1862 visited Turkey in Europe. In the following year he was appointed professor of geography at Berlin University and president of the Geographical Society. He died at Berlin on the 25th of November 1865.

At the request of Bunsen and other scientists, Barth and Adolf Overweg, a Prussian astronomer, were appointed to work alongside James Richardson, an explorer of the Sahara who had been chosen by the British government to establish commercial relations with the states of central and western Sudan. The team set out from Tripoli in early 1850, but the deaths of Richardson (March 1851) and Overweg (September 1852) left Barth to continue the mission alone. He returned to Europe in September 1855, after one of the most successful expeditions ever undertaken in inner Africa. Besides traveling across the Sahara, Barth crossed the region from Lake Chad and Bagirmi in the east to Timbuktu in the west and Cameroon in the south, spending extensive time in the ancient sultanates or emirates of Bornu, Kano, Nupe, Sokoto, and Gando, as well as in Timbuktu. He meticulously studied the topography, history, civilizations, and resources of the countries he visited. The account of his travels was published simultaneously in English and German, titled Travels and Discoveries in North and Central Africa (1857-1858, 5 vols.). For its accuracy, interest, variety, and breadth of information, Barth's Travels has few rivals among similar works. It is a book that will always be regarded as a standard reference on the regions in question, a significant part of which, now known as Nigeria, has since come under British rule. Aside from a C.B., Barth himself received no recognition for his services from the British government. He returned to Germany, where he compiled a collection of Central African vocabularies (Gotha, 1862-1866). In 1858, he undertook another journey in Asia Minor, and in 1862 he visited Turkey in Europe. The following year, he was appointed professor of geography at Berlin University and president of the Geographical Society. He died in Berlin on November 25, 1865.

See Schubert's Heinrich Barth, der Bahnbrecher der deutschen Afrikaforschung (Berlin, 1897). An edition of the Travels in two volumes was published in London in 1890 (Minerva Library of Famous Books).

See Schubert's Heinrich Barth, the Pioneer of German African Research (Berlin, 1897). An edition of the Travels in two volumes was published in London in 1890 (Minerva Library of Famous Books).

BARTH, KASPAR VON (1587-1658), German philologist, was born at Küstrin in the province of Brandenburg on the 21st of June 1587. He was an extremely precocious child, and was looked upon as a marvel of learning. After studying at Gotha, Eisenach, Wittenberg and Jena, he travelled extensively, visiting most of the countries of Europe. Too independent to accept any regular post, he lived alternately at Halle and on his property at Sellerhausen near Leipzig. In 1636, his library and MSS. at Sellerhausen having been destroyed by fire, he removed to the Paulinum at Leipzig, where he died on the 17th of September 1658. Barth was a very voluminous writer; his works, which were the fruits of extensive reading and a retentive memory, are unmethodical and uncritical and marred by want of taste and of clearness. He appears to have been excessively vain and of an unamiable disposition. Of his writings the most important are; Adversaria (1624), a storehouse of miscellaneous learning, dealing not only with classical but also with medieval and modern writers; and commentaries on Claudian (1612, 1650) and Statius (1664).

BARTH, KASPAR VON (1587-1658), a German philologist, was born in Küstrin, Brandenburg, on June 21, 1587. He was an extremely bright child and was seen as a prodigy of learning. After studying in Gotha, Eisenach, Wittenberg, and Jena, he traveled extensively, visiting most European countries. Too independent to take a regular position, he lived alternately in Halle and on his property in Sellerhausen near Leipzig. In 1636, after his library and manuscripts at Sellerhausen were destroyed by fire, he moved to the Paulinum in Leipzig, where he died on September 17, 1658. Barth was a prolific writer; his works, resulting from extensive reading and a strong memory, are disorganized and lack critical analysis, often suffering from poor taste and clarity. He seems to have been excessively vain and not particularly pleasant to deal with. Among his most important writings are Adversaria (1624), a collection of miscellaneous knowledge covering classical, medieval, and modern authors, and commentaries on Claudian (1612, 1650) and Statius (1664).

BARTH, a town of Germany, in the kingdom of Prussia, on the Barther Bodden, a lake connecting with the Baltic, 15 m. N.W. from Stralsund by rail. Pop. (1900) 7070. It contains a fine Gothic Protestant church (St Mary's) dating from the 13th century and has several educational establishments, notably a [v.03 p.0448]school of seamanship. Its industries comprise iron-founding, ship-building, brewing, and the manufacture of cigars, leather and tinned fish. There is an active export trade in grain.

BARTH, a town in Germany, located in the kingdom of Prussia, sits on the Barther Bodden, a lake that connects with the Baltic Sea, 15 miles northwest of Stralsund by rail. Population (1900) was 7,070. The town features an impressive Gothic Protestant church (St. Mary's) from the 13th century and has several educational institutions, including a [v.03 p.0448]seamanship school. Its industries include iron foundry work, shipbuilding, brewing, and the production of cigars, leather, and canned fish. There is also a lively export trade in grain.

BARTHÉLEMY, ANATOLE JEAN-BAPTISTE ANTOINE DE (1821-1904), French archaeologist and numismatist, was born at Reims on the 1st of July 1821, and died at Ville d'Avray on the 27th of June 1904. In collaboration with J. Geslin de Bourgogne he published Études sur la révolution en Bretagne in 1858, and between 1855 and 1879 an exhaustive work in six volumes on the Anciens évêchés de Bretagne; histoire et monuments. In 1880 appeared the Choix de documents inédits sur l'histoire de la ligue en Bretagne, by himself alone. But it was, above all, his numismatical work which established his reputation. This included several popular publications, such as the Nouveau manuel complet de numismatique ancienne (1851; second edition, revised, 1890), and the Nouveau manuel complet de numismatique du moyen âge et moderne (1853; new edition revised by Adrien Planchet), and a large number of monographs and articles in the technical reviews. The following may be specially mentioned: Numismatique mérovingienne (1865); Essai sur la monnaie parisis (1874); Note sur l'origine de la monnaie tournoise (1896); and in the series of instructions issued by the Comité des travaux historiques et scientifiques he edited the number on La Numismatique de la France (1891). In 1897 he was elected a member of the Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-lettres.

BARTHÉLEMY, ANATOLE JEAN-BAPTISTE ANTOINE DE (1821-1904), French archaeologist and numismatist, was born in Reims on July 1, 1821, and passed away in Ville d'Avray on June 27, 1904. In collaboration with J. Geslin de Bourgogne, he published Études sur la révolution en Bretagne in 1858, and between 1855 and 1879, he completed an extensive six-volume work titled Anciens évêchés de Bretagne; histoire et monuments. In 1880, he released Choix de documents inédits sur l'histoire de la ligue en Bretagne, authored solely by him. However, it was primarily his work in numismatics that solidified his reputation. This included several popular publications, such as the Nouveau manuel complet de numismatique ancienne (1851; revised second edition, 1890) and the Nouveau manuel complet de numismatique du moyen âge et moderne (1853; new edition revised by Adrien Planchet), as well as numerous monographs and articles in technical journals. Notable works include: Numismatique mérovingienne (1865); Essai sur la monnaie parisis (1874); Note sur l'origine de la monnaie tournoise (1896); and he edited the volume on La Numismatique de la France (1891) as part of the series of instructions published by the Comité des travaux historiques et scientifiques. In 1897, he was elected a member of the Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-lettres.

His younger brother, Édouard Marie, comte de Barthélemy, who was born in Angers in 1830, has published a number of documents upon the ancient French nobility and upon the history of Champagne.

His younger brother, Édouard Marie, Count of Barthélemy, who was born in Angers in 1830, has published several documents on the ancient French nobility and the history of Champagne.

BARTHÉLEMY, AUGUSTE MARSEILLE (1796-1867), French satirical poet, was born at Marseilles in 1796. His name can hardly be separated from that of his friend and compatriot, J. P. A. Méry (1798-1866), with whom he carried on so intimate a collaboration that it is not possible to distinguish their personalities in their joint works. After having established some local reputation as a poet, Barthélemy went to Paris, where by one of his first efforts, Le Sacre de Charles X (1825) he gained the favour of the court. His energies, however, were soon enlisted in the service of the opposition party. In 1825 appeared a clever political satire, Les Sidiennes, followed by La Villéliade ou la prise du château de Rivoli (1827), La Corbiéréide (1827), La Peyronnéide (1827), the joint productions of Barthélemy and Méry. The success was immediate and pronounced; fifteen editions of the Villéliade were called for during the year. A rapid succession of political squibs and satires was now poured forth by the authors, among the most remarkable being Biographie des quarante de l'académie française (1826) and Napoléon en Égypte (1828), which passed through nearly a dozen editions in a year. In 1829 Barthélemy was imprisoned and fined 1000 francs for the publication of their Fils de l'homme, a poem on the duke of Reichstadt, Napoleon's son. The Revolution of 1830 liberated him; and in company with Méry, he celebrated the triumph of the people in one of their most brilliant efforts, L'Insurrection. From March 1831 to April 1832 they produced a series of verse satires issued weekly, the Némésis, attacking the government and ministers of Louis Philippe. The small pension of which Barthélemy was the recipient was stopped. When the publication ceased there was a strong suspicion that Barthélemy had been paid for his silence. In 1832 he published an anonymous poem, supporting some acts of the government which were peculiarly obnoxious to the Liberal party. This change of front destroyed his influence and his later writings passed unnoticed. For the next few years he enjoyed a handsome pension from the government and refrained from all satirical writing. He again resumed his old style in 1844 but without the former success. From that date he contented himself with merely occasional poems. Barthélemy died on the 23rd of August 1867 at Marseilles. Joseph Méry was an ardent romanticist and wrote a great number of stories now forgotten. He produced several pieces at the Paris theatres, and also collaborated with Gérard de Nerval in adaptations from Shakespeare and in other plays. He received a pension from Napoleon III. and died in Paris on the 16th of June 1866.

BARTHÉLEMY, AUGUSTE MARSEILLE (1796-1867), French satirical poet, was born in Marseille in 1796. His name is closely linked to that of his friend and fellow countryman, J. P. A. Méry (1798-1866), with whom he collaborated so closely that it’s hard to tell their individual contributions in their joint works. After building a local reputation as a poet, Barthélemy moved to Paris, where he quickly gained the favor of the court with his first major work, Le Sacre de Charles X (1825). However, he soon devoted his efforts to the opposition party. A clever political satire, Les Sidiennes, was published in 1825, followed by La Villéliade ou la prise du château de Rivoli (1827), La Corbiéréide (1827), and La Peyronnéide (1827), all co-written by Barthélemy and Méry. The success was immediate and remarkable; fifteen editions of the Villéliade were requested during that year. A flurry of political sketches and satires soon followed, including Biographie des quarante de l'académie française (1826) and Napoléon en Égypte (1828), which went through nearly a dozen editions in just one year. In 1829, Barthélemy was imprisoned and fined 1,000 francs for publishing their poem Fils de l'homme, about the Duke of Reichstadt, Napoleon's son. The Revolution of 1830 led to his release; together with Méry, he celebrated the people’s victory in one of their standout works, L'Insurrection. From March 1831 to April 1832, they published a series of weekly verse satires called Némésis, targeting the government and ministers of Louis Philippe. Barthélemy’s small pension was cut off. When the publication stopped, there was strong suspicion that Barthélemy had been paid to stay quiet. In 1832, he released an anonymous poem that supported certain government actions that were particularly unpopular with the Liberal party. This shift ruined his influence, and his later writings went largely unnoticed. For the following years, he enjoyed a generous pension from the government and stopped writing satire altogether. He returned to his previous style in 1844, but without the same success. After that, he settled for writing occasional poems. Barthélemy passed away on August 23, 1867, in Marseille. Joseph Méry was a passionate romanticist and wrote many now-forgotten stories. He created several works for the Paris theaters and collaborated with Gérard de Nerval on adaptations of Shakespeare and other plays. He received a pension from Napoleon III and died in Paris on June 16, 1866.

The Œuvres of Barthélemy and Méry were collected, with a notice by L. Reybaud, in 1831 (4 vols.). See also Barthélemy et Méry étudiés spécialement dans leurs rapports avec la légende napoléonienne, by Jules Garsou in vol. lviii. of the Mémoires of the Académie Royale ... de Belgique, which contains full information on both authors.

The Œuvres of Barthélemy and Méry were gathered, with a note by L. Reybaud, in 1831 (4 vols.). Also, check out Barthélemy et Méry étudiés spécialement dans leurs rapports avec la légende napoléonienne, by Jules Garsou in vol. lviii. of the Mémoires of the Académie Royale ... de Belgique, which has complete information on both authors.

BARTHÉLEMY, FRANÇOIS, Marquis de (1747 or 1750-1830), French politician, was educated by his uncle the abbé Jean Jacques Barthélemy for a diplomatic career, and after serving as secretary of legation in Sweden, in Switzerland and in England, was appointed minister plenipotentiary in Switzerland, in which capacity he negotiated the treaties of Basel with Prussia and Spain (1795). Elected a member of the Directory in May 1797, through royalist influence, he was arrested at the coup d'état of the 18 Fructidor (17th of September 1797) and deported to French Guiana, but escaped and made his way to the United States and then to England. He returned to France after the 18 Brumaire, entered the senate in February 1800 and contributed to the establishment of the consulship for life and the empire. In 1814 he abandoned Napoleon, took part in the drawing up of the constitutional charter and was named peer of France. During the Hundred Days he lived in concealment, and after the second Restoration obtained the title marquis, and in 1819 introduced a motion in the chamber of peers tending to render the electoral law more aristocratic.

BARTHÉLEMY, FRANÇOIS, Marquis de (1747 or 1750-1830), a French politician, was educated by his uncle, Abbé Jean Jacques Barthélemy, for a career in diplomacy. After serving as a secretary of legation in Sweden, Switzerland, and England, he was appointed minister plenipotentiary in Switzerland, where he helped negotiate the treaties of Basel with Prussia and Spain in 1795. Elected to the Directory in May 1797 due to royalist influence, he was arrested during the coup d'état on the 18 Fructidor (September 17, 1797) and deported to French Guiana. However, he escaped, traveled to the United States, and then to England. After the 18 Brumaire, he returned to France, entered the senate in February 1800, and helped establish the consulship for life and the empire. In 1814, he distanced himself from Napoleon, played a role in drafting the constitutional charter, and was named a peer of France. During the Hundred Days, he lived in hiding, and after the second Restoration, he received the title of marquis. In 1819, he proposed a motion in the chamber of peers aimed at making the electoral law more aristocratic.

His Papiers have been published by J. Kaulek, 4 vols. (Paris, 1886-1888). See A. Sorel, L'Europe et la Révolution française, iv. (Paris, 1892); L. Sciout, Le Directoire (Paris, 1895).

His Papiers were published by J. Kaulek, 4 volumes (Paris, 1886-1888). See A. Sorel, L'Europe et la Révolution française, vol. iv (Paris, 1892); L. Sciout, Le Directoire (Paris, 1895).

BARTHÉLEMY, JEAN JACQUES (1716-1795) French writer and numismatist, was born on the 20th of January 1716 at Cassis, in Provence. He was educated first at the college of the Oratory in Marseilles, and afterwards at that of the Jesuits in the same city. While studying for the priesthood, which he intended to join, he devoted much attention to oriental languages, and was introduced by his friend M. Gary of Marseilles to the study of classical antiquities, particularly in the department of numismatics. In 1744 he went to Paris with a letter of introduction to M. Gros de Boze, perpetual secretary of the Academy of Inscriptions and Belles-lettres and keeper of the royal collection of medals. He became assistant to de Boze, on whose death (1753) he became keeper of the medals. In 1755 he accompanied the French ambassador, M. de Stainville, afterwards duc de Choiseul, to Italy, where he spent three years in archaeological research. Choiseul had a great regard for Barthélemy, and on his return to France, Barthélemy became an inmate of his house, and received valuable preferments from his patron. In 1789, after the publication of his Voyage du jeune Anacharsis, he was elected a member of the French Academy. During the Revolution Barthélemy was arrested as an aristocrat. The Committee of Public Safety, however, were no sooner informed by the duchess of Choiseul of the arrest, than they gave orders for his immediate release, and in 1793 he was nominated librarian of the Bibliothèque Nationale. He refused this post but resumed his old functions as keeper of medals, and enriched the national collection by many valuable accessions. Barthélemy died on the 30th of April 1795.

BARTHÉLEMY, JEAN JACQUES (1716-1795) was a French writer and numismatist, born on January 20, 1716, in Cassis, Provence. He was first educated at the college of the Oratory in Marseilles, and later at the Jesuit college in the same city. While preparing for the priesthood, which he planned to pursue, he focused on oriental languages and was introduced to the study of classical antiquities, especially numismatics, by his friend M. Gary of Marseilles. In 1744, he moved to Paris with a letter of introduction to M. Gros de Boze, the perpetual secretary of the Academy of Inscriptions and Belles-lettres and keeper of the royal medal collection. He became de Boze's assistant, and after de Boze's death in 1753, Barthélemy took over as the keeper of the medals. In 1755, he traveled to Italy with the French ambassador, M. de Stainville (who later became duc de Choiseul), and spent three years conducting archaeological research. Choiseul highly esteemed Barthélemy, and upon his return to France, Barthélemy lived in Choiseul's home and received significant benefits from his patron. In 1789, following the publication of his Voyage du jeune Anacharsis, he was elected a member of the French Academy. During the Revolution, Barthélemy was arrested as an aristocrat. However, the Committee of Public Safety acted quickly when the duchess of Choiseul informed them of his arrest, ordering his immediate release, and in 1793, he was appointed librarian of the Bibliothèque Nationale. He declined this position but returned to his previous role as keeper of medals, enhancing the national collection with many valuable additions. Barthélemy passed away on April 30, 1795.

Barthélemy was the author of a number of learned works on antiquarian subjects, but the great work on which his fame rests is Voyage du jeune Anacharsis en Grèce, vers le milieu du quatrième siècle avant l'ère chrétienne (4 vols., 1787). He had begun it in 1757 and had been working on it for thirty years. The hero, a young Scythian descended from the famous philosopher Anacharsis, is supposed to repair to Greece for instruction in his early youth, and after making the tour of her republics, colonies and islands, to return to his native country and write this book in his old age, after the Macedonian hero had overturned the Persian empire. In the manner of modern travellers, he gives an account of the customs, government and antiquities of the country he is supposed to have visited; a copious introduction supplies whatever may be wanting in respect to historical details; whilst various dissertations on the music of the Greeks, on the literature of the Athenians, and on the economy, pursuits, ruling passions, manners and customs of the surrounding states supply ample [v.03 p.0449]information on the subjects of which they treat. Modern scholarship has superseded most of the details in the Voyage, but the author himself did not imagine his book to be a register of accurately ascertained facts; he rather intended to afford to his countrymen, in an interesting form, some knowledge of Greek civilization. The Charicles of W. A. Becker is an attempt in a similar direction, but, though superior in scholarship, it wants the charm of style of the Anacharsis.

Barthélemy wrote several academic works on historical subjects, but his most renowned piece is Voyage du jeune Anacharsis en Grèce, vers le milieu du quatrième siècle avant l'ère chrétienne (4 vols., 1787). He started it in 1757 and spent thirty years developing it. The protagonist, a young Scythian and descendant of the famous philosopher Anacharsis, is said to travel to Greece for education as a youth. After exploring its republics, colonies, and islands, he returns home to write this book in his old age, following the Macedonian hero's conquest of the Persian empire. In the style of modern travelers, he describes the customs, government, and ancient relics of the country he supposedly visited; an extensive introduction covers any missing historical details, while various essays on Greek music, Athenian literature, and the economies, activities, dominant passions, manners, and customs of neighboring states provide thorough [v.03 p.0449]information on the topics discussed. Modern research has replaced much of the information in the Voyage, but Barthélemy didn't view his book as a precise catalog of facts; instead, he aimed to offer his fellow countrymen an engaging glimpse into Greek civilization. W. A. Becker's Charicles seeks to achieve a similar goal, but despite its stronger scholarship, it lacks the stylistic charm found in the Anacharsis.

Barthélémy's correspondence with Paolo Paciaudi, chiefly on antiquarian subjects, was edited with the Correspondance inédite du comte de Caylus in 1877 by Ch. Nisard; his letters to the comte de Caylus were published by Antoine Serieys as Voyage en Italie (1801); and his letters to Mme du Deffand, with whom he was on intimate terms, in the Correspondance complète de Mme du Deffand avec la duchesse de Choiseul, l'abbé Barthélemy et M. Craufurt (3 vols., 1866), edited by the marquis de Sainte-Aulaire. See also Mémoires sur la vie de l'abbé Barthélemy, écrits par lui-même (1824), with a notice by Lalande. His Œuvres complètes (4 vols. 1821), contain a notice by Villenave.

Barthélémy's letters to Paolo Paciaudi, mainly about antiquarian topics, were compiled in the Correspondance inédite du comte de Caylus in 1877 by Ch. Nisard; his letters to the comte de Caylus were published by Antoine Serieys as Voyage en Italie (1801); and his letters to Mme du Deffand, with whom he had a close relationship, appeared in the Correspondance complète de Mme du Deffand avec la duchesse de Choiseul, l'abbé Barthélemy et M. Craufurt (3 vols., 1866), edited by the marquis de Sainte-Aulaire. Also see Mémoires sur la vie de l'abbé Barthélemy, écrits par lui-même (1824), which includes a foreword by Lalande. His Œuvres complètes (4 vols., 1821) contains a note by Villenave.

BARTHÉLEMY SAINT-HILAIRE, JULES (1805-1895), French philosopher and statesman, was born at Paris on the 19th of August 1805. In his early years he was an active political journalist, and from 1826 to 1830 opposed the reactionary policy of the king in Le Globe. At the revolution of 1830 he signed the protestation of the journalists on the 28th of July 1830. After 1830 he contributed to different newspapers—Le Constitutionnel, Le National and the Courrier français—until 1833, when he gave up politics in order to devote himself to the history of ancient philosophy, undertaking a translation of Aristotle, which occupied him the greater part of his life (1837-1892). The reputation which he gained from this work won for him the chair of ancient philosophy at the Collège de France (1838) and a seat at the Academy of Moral and Political Science (1839). After the revolution of 1848 he was elected as a republican deputy; but was obliged to withdraw after the coup d'état of Louis Napoleon. In 1855 he went as member of the international commission to Egypt to report on the possibility of the proposed Suez canal, and by the articles which he wrote he contributed largely to making the project popular in France. Elected deputy again in 1869, he joined the opposition to the Empire, and in 1871 bent all his efforts to the election of Thiers as president of the republic, acting afterwards as his secretary. Appointed senator for life in 1875, he took his place among the moderate republicans, and from September 1880 to November 1881 was minister of foreign affairs in the cabinet of Jules Ferry. The most important event of his administration was the annexation of Tunis under the form of a French protectorate, which he actively promoted. He died on the 24th of November 1895. His principal works, besides the translation of Aristotle and a number of studies connected with the same subject, are Des Védas (1854), Du Bouddhisme (1856) and Mahomet et le Coran (1865).

BARTHÉLEMY SAINT-HILAIRE, JULES (1805-1895), a French philosopher and statesman, was born in Paris on August 19, 1805. In his early years, he was an active political journalist and from 1826 to 1830, he opposed the king's conservative policies in Le Globe. During the revolution of 1830, he signed the journalists' protest on July 28, 1830. After 1830, he contributed to various newspapers—Le Constitutionnel, Le National, and Courrier français—until 1833, when he left politics to focus on the history of ancient philosophy, working on a translation of Aristotle, which occupied most of his life (1837-1892). The recognition he gained from this work earned him the chair of ancient philosophy at the Collège de France (1838) and a seat at the Academy of Moral and Political Science (1839). After the revolution of 1848, he was elected as a republican deputy but had to step down after Louis Napoleon's coup d'état. In 1855, he joined the international commission to Egypt to assess the proposed Suez Canal and significantly contributed to making the project popular in France through his writings. He was elected deputy again in 1869, opposing the Empire, and in 1871, he worked hard to elect Thiers as president of the republic, later serving as his secretary. Appointed senator for life in 1875, he aligned with the moderate republicans, and from September 1880 to November 1881, he served as minister of foreign affairs in Jules Ferry's cabinet. The most significant event of his tenure was the annexation of Tunis as a French protectorate, which he actively supported. He passed away on November 24, 1895. His main works, in addition to the translation of Aristotle and various related studies, include Des Védas (1854), Du Bouddhisme (1856), and Mahomet et le Coran (1865).

BARTHEZ, or Barthès, PAUL JOSEPH (1734-1806), French physician, was born on the 11th of December 1734 at Montpellier. He was educated at Narbonne and Toulouse, and began the study of medicine at Montpellier in 1750, taking his doctor's degree in 1753. In 1756 he obtained the appointment of physician to the military hospital in Normandy attached to the army of observation commanded by Marshal d'Estrées, but a severe attack of hospital fever compelled him to leave this post. In 1757 his services were required in the medical staff of the army of Westphalia, where he had the rank of consulting physician, and on his return to Paris he acted as joint editor of the Journal des savants and the Encyclopédie méthodique. In 1759 he obtained a medical professorship at Montpellier, and in 1774 he was created joint chancellor of the university. In 1778 he published his most famous work, Nouveaux élémens de la science de l'homme, in which he employs the expression "vital principle" as a convenient term for the cause of the phenomena of life, without committing himself to either a spiritualistic or a materialistic view of its nature. Taking the degree of doctor of civil law in 1780, he secured the appointment of counsellor to the Supreme Court of Aids at Montpellier, but he soon took up his residence in Paris, having been nominated consulting physician to the king.

BARTHEZ, or Barthes, PAUL JOSEPH (1734-1806), a French doctor, was born on December 11, 1734, in Montpellier. He studied at Narbonne and Toulouse, and started studying medicine at Montpellier in 1750, earning his medical degree in 1753. In 1756, he became the physician at a military hospital in Normandy, which was part of the army of observation led by Marshal d'Estrées, but a serious case of hospital fever forced him to leave this position. In 1757, he was needed on the medical staff of the army in Westphalia, where he served as a consulting physician. After returning to Paris, he co-edited the Journal des savants and the Encyclopédie méthodique. In 1759, he was appointed a medical professor at Montpellier, and in 1774, he became co-chancellor of the university. In 1778, he published his most well-known work, Nouveaux élémens de la science de l'homme, in which he used the term "vital principle" as a way to describe the cause of life’s phenomena, without taking a definitive spiritual or material stance on its nature. He received a doctor of civil law degree in 1780 and was appointed a counselor to the Supreme Court of Aids in Montpellier, but soon moved to Paris after being named consulting physician to the king.

On the outbreak of the French Revolution he lost much of his fortune and retired to Carcassonne, where he devoted himself to the study of theoretical medicine. It was from this retreat that he gave to the world his Nouvelle mécanique des mouvemens de l'homme et des animaux, which appeared in 1798. In 1802 he published his Traitement des maladies goutteuses, and he afterwards occupied himself in preparing for the press a new edition of his Élémens de la science de l'homme, of which he just lived to see the publication. His health had been declining for some years before his death, which took place soon after his removal to Paris, on the 15th of October 1806. He bequeathed his books and manuscripts to J. Lordat, who published two volumes of his Consultations de médecine in 1810. His Traité du beau was also published posthumously in 1807.

At the start of the French Revolution, he lost much of his wealth and moved to Carcassonne, where he focused on studying theoretical medicine. From this retreat, he published his Nouvelle mécanique des mouvemens de l'homme et des animaux, which came out in 1798. In 1802, he released his Traitement des maladies goutteuses, and later worked on preparing a new edition of his Élémens de la science de l'homme, of which he lived long enough to see published. His health had been declining for several years before he died shortly after moving to Paris, on October 15, 1806. He left his books and manuscripts to J. Lordat, who published two volumes of his Consultations de médecine in 1810. His Traité du beau was also published posthumously in 1807.

BARTHOLINUS, GASPARD [Caspar Berthelsen], (1585-1629), physician, was born in 1585 at Malmö, in Sweden. His precocity was extraordinary; at three years of age he was able to read, and in his thirteenth year he composed Greek and Latin orations and delivered them in public. When he was about eighteen he went to the university of Copenhagen and afterwards studied at Rostock and Wittenberg. He then travelled through Germany, the Netherlands, England, France and Italy, and was received with marked respect at the different universities he visited. In 1613 he was chosen professor of medicine in the university of Copenhagen, and filled that office for eleven years, when, falling into a dangerous illness, he made a vow that if he should recover he would apply himself solely to the study of divinity. He fulfilled his vow by becoming professor of divinity at Copenhagen and canon of Roskilde. He died on the 13th of July 1629 at Sorö in Zeeland.

BARTHOLINUS, GASPARD [Caspar Berthelsen], (1585-1629), physician, was born in 1585 in Malmö, Sweden. His intelligence was remarkable; by the age of three, he could read, and by thirteen, he was writing Greek and Latin speeches and delivering them publicly. At about eighteen, he went to the University of Copenhagen and later studied at Rostock and Wittenberg. He then traveled through Germany, the Netherlands, England, France, and Italy, where he was received with great respect at the various universities he visited. In 1613, he was appointed professor of medicine at the University of Copenhagen and held that position for eleven years. After falling seriously ill, he vowed that if he recovered, he would dedicate himself entirely to the study of theology. He honored his vow by becoming a professor of theology at Copenhagen and a canon of Roskilde. He passed away on July 13, 1629, in Sorö, Zeeland.

Of his sons, Thomas (1616-1680) was born at Copenhagen, where, after a long course of study in various universities of Europe, he was appointed successively professor of mathematics (1647) and anatomy (1648). During his tenure of the latter chair he distinguished himself by observations on the lymphatics. In 1661 he retired to Hagestaed. In 1670 his house and library were burnt, and in consideration of his loss he was appointed physician to the king, with a handsome salary, and librarian to the university of Copenhagen. He died at Hagestaed in 1680. Another son, Erasmus (1625-1698), born at Roskilde, spent ten years in visiting England, Holland, Germany and Italy, and filled the chairs of mathematics and medicine at Copenhagen. He discovered double refraction in Iceland spar (Experimenta crystalli islandici disdiaclastici, Copenhagen, 1669). He died at Copenhagen in 1698. In the third generation Caspar Thomeson (1655-1738), son of Thomas, also taught anatomy at Copenhagen, his name being associated with the description of one of the ducts of the sublingual gland and of the glandulae Bartholini, while his younger brother, Thomas (1659-1690), was a student of northern antiquities who published Antiquitatum Danicarum libri tres in 1689.

Of his sons, Thomas (1616-1680) was born in Copenhagen, where, after a long period of studying at various universities in Europe, he was appointed as the professor of mathematics in 1647 and anatomy in 1648. During his time in the latter role, he made notable observations on the lymphatic system. In 1661, he retired to Hagestaed. In 1670, his house and library were destroyed in a fire, and as compensation for his loss, he was appointed physician to the king with a generous salary, as well as librarian at the University of Copenhagen. He passed away in Hagestaed in 1680. Another son, Erasmus (1625-1698), born in Roskilde, spent ten years traveling through England, Holland, Germany, and Italy, and held the positions of professor of mathematics and medicine at Copenhagen. He discovered double refraction in Iceland spar (Experimenta crystalli islandici disdiaclastici, Copenhagen, 1669). He died in Copenhagen in 1698. In the third generation, Caspar Thomeson (1655-1738), son of Thomas, also taught anatomy at Copenhagen, with his name associated with the description of one of the ducts of the sublingual gland and the glandulae Bartholini, while his younger brother, Thomas (1659-1690), studied northern antiquities and published Antiquitatum Danicarum libri tres in 1689.

BARTHOLOMEW, SAINT, one of the twelve apostles, regarding whose early life we know nothing, unless in accordance with a widely-spread belief he is to be identified with Nathanael (q.v.). If so, Bartholomew is probably a patronymic, the apostle's full name being Nathanael Bartolmai, i.e. the son of Tolmai. On the other hand, according to a Syrian tradition, Bartholomew's original name was Jesus, which he dropped owing to its being the name of the Master Himself. In the synoptic gospels Bartholomew is never mentioned except in the lists of the apostles, where his name always appears after Philip's. He is said to have gone, after the ascension of the Lord, on a missionary tour to India (then a very wide geographical designation) where, according to a story in Eusebius (H.E. v. 10), he left behind him a copy of St Matthew's gospel. According to the traditional account he was flayed alive and then crucified with his head downwards, at Albanopolis in Armenia, or, according to Nicephorus, at Urbanopolis in Cilicia. In works of art he is generally represented with a large knife, the instrument of his martyrdom, or, as in Michelangelo's "Last Judgment," with his own skin hanging over his arm. The festival of St Bartholomew is celebrated on the 24th of August.

SAINT BARTHOLOMEW, one of the twelve apostles, has an unknown early life, unless he is believed, as many think, to be the same person as Nathanael (q.v.). If that’s the case, Bartholomew is likely a family name, with his full name being Nathanael Bartolmai, meaning the son of Tolmai. Alternatively, a Syrian tradition claims that Bartholomew’s original name was Jesus, which he changed because it was the same as that of the Master Himself. In the synoptic gospels, Bartholomew is only mentioned in the lists of the apostles, where he consistently follows Philip. After the Lord’s ascension, it's said he went on a missionary journey to India (which at the time covered a vast area) where, according to a story in Eusebius (H.E. v. 10), he left a copy of St. Matthew's gospel. Traditionally, he was flayed alive and then crucified upside down in Albanopolis in Armenia, or, as Nicephorus states, in Urbanopolis in Cilicia. In art, he is usually depicted with a large knife, the tool of his martyrdom, or, as seen in Michelangelo's "Last Judgment," with his own skin draped over his arm. The feast day of St. Bartholomew is celebrated on August 24th.

[v.03 p.0450]

[v.03 p.0450]

Dr. Nestle has drawn attention to the fact that in the Syriac translation of Eusebius' history the name Tolmai, i.e. Bartholomew, takes the place of Matthias, the apostle who was appointed in place of Judas (i. 12, cf. ii. 1, iii. 25 and 29). If this identification can be made out there would, in the list of apostles as finally constituted, be two men who bore the patronymic Bartholomew. See further Expository Times, ix. pp. 566 ff. (1898).

Dr. Nestle has highlighted that in the Syriac translation of Eusebius' history, the name Tolmai, i.e. Bartholomew, replaces Matthias, the apostle who was chosen to take Judas' place (i. 12, cf. ii. 1, iii. 25 and 29). If this connection is valid, there would be two men with the surname Bartholomew in the final list of apostles. See further Expository Times, ix. pp. 566 ff. (1898).

BARTHOLOMEW, JOHN (1831-1893), Scottish cartographer, was born at Edinburgh on the 25th of December 1831. His father had a cartographical establishment there and he was educated in the work. He was subsequently assistant to the German geographer August Petermann, until in 1856 he took up the management of his father's firm. For this establishment, now known as the Edinburgh Geographical Institute, Bartholomew built up a reputation unsurpassed in Great Britain for the production of the finest cartographical work. Among his numerous publications mention may be specially made of the series of maps of Great Britain reduced from the Ordnance Survey to scales of ½ in. and ¼ in. to 1 m., with relief shown by contours and a systematic scale of colours. The ½ in. series, which was extended (and its principles applied to many other works) by Mr. J. G. Bartholomew, who succeeded his father in the business, is the finest of its kind ever produced. John Bartholomew died in London on the 29th of March 1893.

BARTHOLOMEW, JOHN (1831-1893), Scottish cartographer, was born in Edinburgh on December 25, 1831. His father ran a cartography business there, and he learned the trade. He later worked as an assistant to the German geographer August Petermann, until he took over his father's firm in 1856. Under his leadership, the establishment, now known as the Edinburgh Geographical Institute, gained an unmatched reputation in Great Britain for producing exceptional cartographic work. Notable among his many publications is a series of maps of Great Britain scaled down from the Ordnance Survey to ½ inch and ¼ inch to 1 mile, featuring relief through contours and a consistent color scale. The ½ inch series, which was expanded (and its principles applied to many other projects) by J. G. Bartholomew, who succeeded his father, is the finest of its kind ever made. John Bartholomew passed away in London on March 29, 1893.

BARTHOLOMEW FAIR, a fair held in West Smithfield, London, on St Bartholomew's Day (24th of August, O.S.) from 1133 to 1855. The charter authorizing its holding was granted by Henry I. to his former minstrel, Rahere, who had taken orders and had founded the priory of St Bartholomew close by. For many centuries the fair lasted a fortnight, but in 1691 it was shortened to four days only. In 1641 it had become so large that it involved no less than four parishes: Christ Church, Great and Little St Bartholomew's and St Sepulchre's. It was customary for the lord mayor of London to open the fair formally on St Bartholomew's Eve, and on his way to stop at Newgate where he received from the governor a cup of sack. In 1753, owing to the change in the calendar, the fair was proclaimed on the 3rd of September. During its earlier history the fair grew to be a vast national market and the chief cloth sale in the kingdom. Down to 1854 it was usual for the representative of the Merchant Taylors' Gild to proceed to the cloth fair which formed part of Bartholomew fair, and test the measures used for selling cloth there by the company's silver yard. The fair was finally closed in 1855.

BARTHOLOMEW FAIR, a fair held in West Smithfield, London, on St Bartholomew's Day (August 24th, O.S.) from 1133 to 1855. The charter allowing its operation was granted by Henry I. to his former minstrel, Rahere, who had become a monk and founded the nearby priory of St Bartholomew. For many centuries, the fair lasted two weeks, but in 1691 it was reduced to just four days. By 1641, it had grown so large that it included four parishes: Christ Church, Great and Little St Bartholomew's, and St Sepulchre's. It was traditional for the lord mayor of London to officially open the fair on St Bartholomew's Eve, and on his way, he would stop at Newgate to receive a cup of sack from the governor. In 1753, due to the change in the calendar, the fair was announced to take place on September 3rd. Throughout its early history, the fair became a massive national market and the leading cloth sale in the country. Until 1854, it was common for the representative of the Merchant Taylors' Guild to go to the cloth fair, which was part of Bartholomew Fair, and check the measurements used for selling cloth against the company's silver yard. The fair was ultimately closed in 1855.

For a full account see Prof. H. Morley, Memoirs of Bartholomew Fair (1859).

For a complete account, see Prof. H. Morley, Memoirs of Bartholomew Fair (1859).

BARTIZAN (according to the New English Dictionary, from bertizene, a Scottish corruption of "bratticing" or "brattishing," from O. Fr. bretesche, and meaning a battlemented parapet; apparently first used by Sir Walter Scott), a small battlemented turret, corbelled out at the angle of a wall or tower to protect a warder and enable him to see around him. Bartizans generally are furnished with oylets or arrow-slits.

BARTIZAN (according to the New English Dictionary, from bertizene, a Scottish twist on "bratticing" or "brattishing," from Old French bretesche, meaning a battlemented parapet; apparently first used by Sir Walter Scott) is a small battlemented turret that juts out at the corner of a wall or tower to protect a guard and allow him to see his surroundings. Bartizans usually have openings or arrow slits.

BARTLETT, JOHN (1820-1905), American publisher and compiler, was born in Plymouth, Massachusetts, on the 14th of June 1820. He became a bookseller and publisher in Cambridge, Mass., and from 1865 to 1889, when he retired, was a member of the bookselling and publishing firm of Little, Brown & Co., in Boston. In 1855 he published the first edition of his Familiar Quotations, subsequently greatly expanded and long the best-known collection of the sort, and in 1894 (although it had been copyrighted five years before), after many years' labour, he published his New and Complete Concordance or Verbal Index to Words, Phrases and Passages in the Dramatic Works of Shakespeare; with a Supplementary Concordance to the Poems—surpassing any of its predecessors in the number and fulness of its citations from the poet's writings.. In all of his work he was greatly assisted by his wife, a daughter of Sidney Willard (1780-1856), professor of Hebrew at Harvard from 1807 to 1831. Bartlett died at Cambridge, Mass., on the 3rd of December 1905.

BARTLETT, JOHN (1820-1905), an American publisher and compiler, was born in Plymouth, Massachusetts, on June 14, 1820. He became a bookseller and publisher in Cambridge, Massachusetts, and from 1865 to 1889, when he retired, he was a member of the bookselling and publishing firm of Little, Brown & Co. in Boston. In 1855, he published the first edition of his Familiar Quotations, which was greatly expanded later and became the best-known collection of its kind. In 1894, after many years of work (although it had been copyrighted five years earlier), he published his New and Complete Concordance or Verbal Index to Words, Phrases and Passages in the Dramatic Works of Shakespeare; with a Supplementary Concordance to the Poems—surpassing any previous editions in the number and detail of citations from the poet's writings. He received significant assistance in all his work from his wife, a daughter of Sidney Willard (1780-1856), who was a professor of Hebrew at Harvard from 1807 to 1831. Bartlett passed away in Cambridge, Massachusetts, on December 3, 1905.

BARTLETT, JOHN RUSSELL (1805-1886), American historical and linguistic student, was born in Providence, Rhode Island, on the 23rd of October 1805. From his first to his eighteenth year he lived in Kingston, Canada; he was then in turn, from 1824 to 1836, a clerk in a dry goods store, a book-keeper and a bank cashier at Providence, and for more than ten years after 1836 he was a bookseller in New York City, returning to Providence in 1850. In 1850-1853 he was the commissioner on the part of the United States for the survey of the boundary between the United States and Mexico, but owing to the lack of funds did not finish the work. After being superseded by another commissioner upon the accession of President Franklin Pierce, he published A Personal Narrative of Explorations and Incidents in Texas, New Mexico, California, Sonora and Chihuahua (2 vols., 1854), which contains much valuable scientific and historical material concerning the south-west. From 1855 to 1872 he was secretary of state of Rhode Island, and while serving in this capacity thoroughly re-arranged and classified the state records, and prepared various bibliographies and compilations, relating chiefly to the history of the state. He is chiefly remembered however, for his Dictionary of Americanisms (1848), a pioneer work, which, although later dialect changes have, of course, deprived it of completeness or final authoritativeness, is still of value to students of language and remains the chief contribution to the subject. He died in Providence on the 28th of May 1886.

BARTLETT, JOHN RUSSELL (1805-1886), an American historian and linguist, was born in Providence, Rhode Island, on October 23, 1805. He lived in Kingston, Canada, from his birth until he was eighteen. From 1824 to 1836, he worked as a clerk in a dry goods store, a bookkeeper, and a bank cashier in Providence. After that, he was a bookseller in New York City for over ten years, returning to Providence in 1850. From 1850-1853, he served as the U.S. commissioner for surveying the boundary between the United States and Mexico, but he couldn't complete the work due to a lack of funding. After being replaced by another commissioner when President Franklin Pierce took office, he published A Personal Narrative of Explorations and Incidents in Texas, New Mexico, California, Sonora and Chihuahua (2 vols., 1854), which contains valuable scientific and historical information about the Southwest. From 1855 to 1872, he was secretary of state for Rhode Island, during which time he thoroughly reorganized and classified the state records, and prepared various bibliographies and compilations primarily related to the state's history. However, he is best remembered for his Dictionary of Americanisms (1848), a pioneering work that, although later changes in dialect have rendered it less complete and authoritative, is still valuable to language students and remains a major contribution to the field. He passed away in Providence on May 28, 1886.

BARTLETT, PAUL WAYLAND (1865- ), American sculptor, was born in New Haven, Connecticut, the son of Truman H. Bartlett, an art critic and sculptor. When fifteen he began to study at Paris under Frémiet, modelling from animals in the Jardin des Plantes. He won a medal at the Paris Salon of 1887. Among his principal works are: "The Bear Tamer," in the Metropolitan Museum of Art, New York; the equestrian statue of Lafayette, in the Place du Carrousel, Paris, presented to the French Republic by the school children of America; the powerful and virile Columbus and Michelangelo, in the Congressional Library, Washington, D.C.; the "Ghost Dancer," in the Pennsylvania Academy, Philadelphia; the "Dying Lion"; the equestrian statue of McClellan in Philadelphia; and a statue of Joseph Warren in Boston, Massachusetts. His bronze patinas of reptiles, insects and fish are also remarkable.

BARTLETT, PAUL WAYLAND (1865- ), American sculptor, was born in New Haven, Connecticut, the son of Truman H. Bartlett, an art critic and sculptor. At fifteen, he started studying in Paris under Frémiet, modeling animals in the Jardin des Plantes. He won a medal at the Paris Salon in 1887. Some of his main works include: "The Bear Tamer," at the Metropolitan Museum of Art in New York; the equestrian statue of Lafayette in the Place du Carrousel in Paris, which was presented to the French Republic by American school children; the powerful Columbus and Michelangelo sculptures in the Congressional Library in Washington, D.C.; the "Ghost Dancer" at the Pennsylvania Academy in Philadelphia; the "Dying Lion"; the equestrian statue of McClellan in Philadelphia; and a statue of Joseph Warren in Boston, Massachusetts. His bronze finishes of reptiles, insects, and fish are also noteworthy.

BARTOLI, DANIELLO (1608-1685), Italian Jesuit priest, was born at Ferrara and entered the Society of Jesus in 1623. Debarred from the foreign mission field, he attained high distinction as a preacher and as a teacher of rhetoric in Genoa, Florence and Rome. He wrote (in Italian) a book called The Learned Man as a counterblast to the widespread reading of romances, and also a history of his order in 6 vols. (Rome, 1650-1673), which is particularly informing with regard to the early work of the society in Asia. He died at Rome.

BARTOLI, DANIELLO (1608-1685), an Italian Jesuit priest, was born in Ferrara and joined the Society of Jesus in 1623. Unable to serve in foreign missions, he gained significant recognition as a preacher and as a rhetoric teacher in Genoa, Florence, and Rome. He wrote a book titled The Learned Man in Italian as a response to the popular reading of romantic novels, as well as a six-volume history of his order (Rome, 1650-1673), which provides valuable insights into the organization's early work in Asia. He passed away in Rome.

A collected edition of his works, in 12 vols., was published by Marietti at Turin, 1825-1856; another in 50 vols. at Florence in 1826.

A collected edition of his works, in 12 volumes, was published by Marietti in Turin from 1825 to 1856; another edition in 50 volumes was released in Florence in 1826.

BARTOLINI, LORENZO (1777-1850), Italian sculptor, was born in Vernio in Tuscany. After acquiring great skill and reputation as a modeller in alabaster, he went in 1797 to Paris, where he studied painting under Desmarets, and afterwards sculpture under F. F. Lemot. The bas-relief "Cleobis and Biton," with which he gained the second prize of the Academy in 1803, at once established his fame as a sculptor and gained for him a number of influential patrons. He executed many minor pieces for Denon, besides busts of Méhul and Cherubini. His great patron, however, was Napoleon, for whom he executed a colossal bust, and who sent him to Carrara to found a school of sculpture. Here he remained till after the fall of Napoleon, and then took up his residence in Florence, where he resided till his death. His works are varied and include an immense number of busts. The best are, perhaps, the group of Charity, the "Hercules and Lichas" and the "Faith in God," which exemplify the highest types of Bartolini's style. Popular opinion in Italy associates his qualities as a sculptor with those of Thorwaldsen and Canova.

BARTOLINI, LORENZO (1777-1850), Italian sculptor, was born in Vernio, Tuscany. After gaining impressive skills and recognition as a modeller in alabaster, he moved to Paris in 1797, where he studied painting under Desmarets and later sculpture under F. F. Lemot. The bas-relief "Cleobis and Biton," which won him the second prize at the Academy in 1803, quickly established his reputation as a sculptor and attracted several influential patrons. He created many smaller pieces for Denon, along with busts of Méhul and Cherubini. His largest patron was Napoleon, for whom he created a colossal bust and was sent to Carrara to establish a school of sculpture. He stayed there until after Napoleon's downfall, then moved to Florence, where he lived until his death. His works are diverse, featuring an extensive number of busts. The best include the group of Charity, "Hercules and Lichas," and "Faith in God," which showcase the peak of Bartolini's style. In Italy, public opinion links his sculptural qualities with those of Thorwaldsen and Canova.

BARTOLOMMEI, MARQUIS FERDINANDO (1821-1869), Italian revolutionist and statesman, who played an important part in the political events of Tuscany from 1848 to 1860. From the beginning of the revolutionary movement Bartolommei was always an ardent Liberal, and although belonging to an old and [v.03 p.0451]noble Florentine family his sympathies were with the democratic party rather than with the moderately liberal aristocracy. In 1847-1848 his house was a centre of revolutionary committees, and during the brief constitutional régime he was much to the fore. After the return of the grand duke Leopold II. in 1849 under Austrian protection, Bartolommei was present at a requiem service in the church of Santa Croce for those who fell in the late campaign against Austria; on that occasion disorders occurred and he was relegated to his country estate in consequence (1851). Shortly afterwards he was implicated in the distribution of seditious literature and exiled from Tuscany for a year. He settled at Turin for a time and established relations with Cavour and the Piedmontese liberals. He subsequently visited France and England, and like many Italian patriots became enamoured of British institutions. He returned to Florence in 1853; from that time onward he devoted himself to the task of promoting the ideas of Italian independence and unity among the people, and although carefully watched by the police, he kept a secret printing-press in his palace in Florence. Finding that the nobility still hesitated at the idea of uncompromising hostility to the house of Lorraine, he allied himself more firmly with the popular party, and found an able lieutenant in the baker Giuseppe Dolfi (1818-1869), an honest and whole-hearted enthusiast who had great influence with the common people. As soon as war between Piedmont and Austria appeared imminent, Bartolommei organized the expedition of Tuscan volunteers to join the Piedmontese army, spending large sums out of his own pocket for the purpose, and was also president of the Tuscan branch of the Società Nazionale (see under La Farina and Cavour). He worked desperately hard conspiring for the overthrow of the grand duke, assisted by all the liberal elements, and on the 27th of April 1859, Florence rose as one man, the troops refused to fire on the people, and the grand duke departed, never to return. Sapristi! pas un carreau cassé! was the comment of the French minister to Tuscany on this bloodless revolution. A provisional government was formed and Bartolommei elected gonfaloniere. He had much opposition to encounter from those who still believed that the retention of the grand duke as a constitutional sovereign and member of an Italian confederation was possible. In the summer elections were held, and on the meeting of parliament Bartolommei's Unitarian views prevailed, the assembly voting the resolution that the house of Lorraine had forfeited its rights and that Tuscany must be united to Italy under King Victor Emmanuel. Bartolommei was made senator of the Italian kingdom and received various other honours. His last years were spent in educational and philanthropic work. He died on the 15th of June 1869, leaving a widow and two daughters.

BARTOLOMMEI, MARQUIS FERDINANDO (1821-1869), Italian revolutionary and statesman, who played a significant role in the political events of Tuscany from 1848 to 1860. From the start of the revolutionary movement, Bartolommei was always a passionate Liberal, and although he came from an old noble Florentine family, he sided with the democratic party rather than the moderately liberal aristocracy. In 1847-1848, his home was a hub for revolutionary committees, and during the brief constitutional régime he was very active. After the return of Grand Duke Leopold II in 1849 under Austrian protection, Bartolommei attended a requiem service in Santa Croce for those who died in the recent campaign against Austria; on that occasion, unrest broke out, and he was sent to his country estate as a result (1851). Shortly after, he was involved in distributing seditious literature and was exiled from Tuscany for a year. He settled in Turin for a while and built connections with Cavour and the Piedmontese liberals. He later visited France and England, and like many Italian patriots, he became enamored with British institutions. He returned to Florence in 1853; from then on, he dedicated himself to promoting the ideas of Italian independence and unity among the people, and although closely monitored by the police, he operated a secret printing press in his palace in Florence. Recognizing that the nobility still hesitated to fully oppose the House of Lorraine, he aligned himself more closely with the popular party, finding a capable ally in the baker Giuseppe Dolfi (1818-1869), an honest and passionate supporter with significant influence among the common people. As soon as war between Piedmont and Austria seemed inevitable, Bartolommei organized the expedition of Tuscan volunteers to join the Piedmontese army, spending a substantial amount of his own money for this purpose, and he also served as president of the Tuscan branch of the Società Nazionale (see under La Farina and Cavour). He worked tirelessly to conspire for the overthrow of the Grand Duke, supported by all the liberal factions, and on April 27, 1859, Florence rose as one, the troops refused to fire on the people, and the Grand Duke left, never to return. Sapristi! pas un carreau cassé! was the remark of the French minister to Tuscany on this bloodless revolution. A provisional government was established, and Bartolommei was elected gonfaloniere. He faced significant opposition from those who still believed that retaining the Grand Duke as a constitutional sovereign and part of an Italian confederation was possible. In the summer, elections were held, and when parliament convened, Bartolommei's Unitarian views triumphed, with the assembly voting that the House of Lorraine had lost its rights and that Tuscany must unite with Italy under King Victor Emmanuel. Bartolommei was made a senator of the Italian kingdom and received various other honors. His last years were dedicated to educational and philanthropic work. He died on June 15, 1869, leaving behind a widow and two daughters.

The best biography of Bartolommei is contained in Il Rivolgimento Toscano e l'azione popolare, by his daughter Matilde Gioli (Florence, 1905), but the author attributes perhaps an undue preponderance to her father in the Tuscan revolution, and is not quite fair towards Bettino Ricasoli (q.v.) and other leaders of the aristocratic party. Cf. Lettere e documenti di B. Ricasoli (Florence, 1887-1896), and D. Zanichelli's Lettere politiche di B. Ricasoli, U. Peruzzi, N. Corsini, e C. Ridolfi (Bologna, 1898).

The best biography of Bartolommei can be found in Il Rivolgimento Toscano e l'azione popolare, written by his daughter Matilde Gioli (Florence, 1905). However, the author might give her father too much credit for his role in the Tuscan revolution and does not treat Bettino Ricasoli (q.v.) and other leaders of the aristocratic party fairly. See also Lettere e documenti di B. Ricasoli (Florence, 1887-1896), and D. Zanichelli's Lettere politiche di B. Ricasoli, U. Peruzzi, N. Corsini, e C. Ridolfi (Bologna, 1898).

BARTOLOMMEO DI PAGHOLO, FRA (1475-1517), the Italian historical and portrait painter,—known also as Baccio (short for Bartolommeo) Bella Porta (because he lived near the Porta Romana) was born at Soffignano, near Florence, in 1475, and died at Florence in 1517. He received the first elements of his artistic education from Cosimo Roselli; and after leaving him, devoted himself to the study of the great works of Leonardo da Vinci. Of his early productions, which are distinguished for their grace and beauty, the most important is the fresco of the Last Judgment, in which he was assisted by his friend Mariotto Albertinelli. While he was engaged upon some pieces for the convent of the Dominican friars, he made the acquaintance of Savonarola, who quickly acquired great influence over him, and Bartolommeo was so affected by his cruel death, that he soon after entered the convent, and for some years gave up his art. He had not long resumed it, in obedience to his superior, when Raphael came to Florence and formed a close friendship with him. Bartolommeo learned from the younger artist the rules of perspective, in which he was so skilled, while Raphael owes to the frate the improvement in his colouring and handling of drapery, which was noticeable in the works he produced after their meeting. Some years afterwards he visited Rome, and was struck with admiration and a feeling of his own inferiority when he contemplated the masterpieces of Michelangelo and Raphael. With the latter, however, he remained on the most friendly terms, and when he departed from Rome, left in his hands two unfinished pictures which Raphael completed. Fra Bartolommeo's figures had generally been small and draped. These qualities were alleged against him as defects, and to prove that his style was not the result of want of power, he painted the magnificent figure of St Mark (his masterpiece, at Florence), and the undraped figure of St Sebastian. The latter was so well designed, so naturally and beautifully coloured, and so strongly expressive of suffering and agony, that it was found necessary to remove it from the place where it had been exhibited in the chapel of a convent. The majority of Bartolommeo's compositions are altar-pieces. They are remarkable for skill in the massing of light and shade, richness and delicacy of colouring, and for the admirable style in which the drapery of the figures is handled, Bartolommeo having been the first to introduce and use the lay-figure with joints.

BARTOLOMMEO DI PAGHOLO, FRA (1475-1517), the Italian historical and portrait painter,—also known as Bacio (short for Bartolommeo) Beautiful Door (because he lived near the Porta Romana) was born in Soffignano, near Florence, in 1475, and died in Florence in 1517. He received his initial artistic training from Cosimo Roselli, and after studying with him, he focused on the great works of Leonardo da Vinci. Among his early works, which are known for their grace and beauty, the most significant is the fresco of the Last Judgment, which he worked on with his friend Mariotto Albertinelli. While creating some pieces for the convent of the Dominican friars, he met Savonarola, who quickly gained a lot of influence over him. Bartolommeo was so impacted by Savonarola's brutal death that he entered the convent shortly after and temporarily gave up his art. He didn’t stay away for long; at the urging of his superior, he resumed painting when Raphael came to Florence and they became close friends. Bartolommeo learned perspective techniques from the younger artist, while Raphael improved his coloring and drapery handling, which became evident in his works after their meeting. A few years later, he visited Rome, where he was awestruck and felt inferior when seeing the masterpieces of Michelangelo and Raphael. Nonetheless, he maintained a good friendship with Raphael and, when leaving Rome, entrusted him with two unfinished paintings that Raphael completed. Fra Bartolommeo's figures were typically small and draped, which were criticized as flaws, so to demonstrate that his style was not due to a lack of ability, he painted the magnificent figure of St Mark (his masterpiece, in Florence) and the undraped figure of St Sebastian. The latter was designed so well, with natural and beautiful coloring, and so powerfully expressive of suffering and agony, that it had to be removed from where it was displayed in the convent chapel. Most of Bartolommeo's compositions are altar pieces. They are notable for their skillful use of light and shade, rich and delicate coloring, and for the excellent style of the figures' drapery, as Bartolommeo was the first to introduce and employ the jointed lay-figure.

BARTOLOZZI, FRANCESCO (1725-1815), Italian engraver, was born at Florence. He was originally destined to follow the profession of his father, who was a gold- and silver-smith; but he manifested so much skill and taste in designing that he was placed under the superintendence of two Florentine artists, who instructed him in painting. After devoting three years to that art, he went to Venice and studied engraving. He made very rapid progress, and executed some works of considerable importance at Venice.. He then removed for a short time to Rome, where he completed a set of engravings representing events from the life of St Nilus, and, after returning to Venice, set out for London in 1764. For nearly forty years he resided in London, and produced an enormous number of engravings, the best being those of Clytie, after Annibale Caracci, and of the Virgin and Child, after Carlo Dolce. A great proportion of them are from the works of Cipriani and Angelica Kauffmann. Bartolozzi also contributed a number of plates to Boydell's Shakespeare Gallery. In 1802 he was invited to Lisbon as director of the National Academy. He remained in Portugal till his death. His son Gaetano Stephano (1757-1821), also an engraver, was the father of Madame Vestris.

BARTOLOZZI, FRANCESCO (1725-1815), an Italian engraver, was born in Florence. He was initially set to follow in his father's footsteps, who was a gold and silversmith; however, he showed such talent and interest in design that he was placed under the guidance of two Florentine artists who taught him painting. After spending three years on that art, he moved to Venice to study engraving. He progressed quickly and completed several significant works there. He then briefly relocated to Rome, where he finished a series of engravings depicting events from the life of St. Nilus, and after returning to Venice, he left for London in 1764. He lived in London for nearly forty years, producing a vast number of engravings, with some of his best works being Clytie, after Annibale Caracci, and the Virgin and Child, after Carlo Dolce. A large portion of his engravings were based on the works of Cipriani and Angelica Kauffmann. Bartolozzi also created several plates for Boydell's Shakespeare Gallery. In 1802, he was invited to Lisbon as the director of the National Academy. He stayed in Portugal until his death. His son Gaetano Stephano (1757-1821), who was also an engraver, was the father of Madame Vestris.

BARTOLUS (1314-1357), Italian jurist, professor of the civil law at the university of Perugia, and the most famous master of the dialectical school of jurists, was born in 1314, at Sassoferrato, in the duchy of Urbino, and hence is generally styled Bartolus de Saxoferrato. His father was Franciscus Severi, and his mother was of the family of the Alfani. He studied the civil law first of all under Cinus at Perugia, and afterwards under Oldradus and Jacobus de Belvisio at Bologna, where he was promoted to the degree of doctor of civil law in 1334. His great reputation dates from his appointment to a chair of civil law in the university of Perugia, 1343, where he lectured for many years, raising the character of the law school of Perugia to a level with that of Bologna. He died in 1357 at Perugia, where a magnificent monument recorded the interment of his remains in the church of San Francisco, by the simple inscription of "Ossa Bartoli." Bartolus left behind him a great reputation, and many writers have sought to explain the fact by attributing to him the introduction of the dialectical method of teaching law; but this method had been employed by Odofredus, a pupil of Accursius, in the previous century, and the successors of Odofredus had abused it to an extent which has rendered their writings in many instances unprofitable to read, the subject matter being overlaid with dialectical forms. It was the merit of Bartolus, on the other hand, that he employed the dialectical method with advantage as a teacher, and discountenanced the abuse of it; but his great reputation was more probably owing to the circumstance that he revived the exegetical system of teaching law (which had been [v.03 p.0452]neglected since the ascendancy of Accursius) in a spirit which gave it new life, whilst he imparted to his teaching a practical interest, from the judicial experience which he had acquired while acting as assessor to the courts at Todi and at Pisa before he undertook the duties of a professorial chair. His treatises On Procedure and On Evidence are amongst his most valuable works, whilst his Commentary on the Code of Justinian has been in some countries regarded as of equal authority with the code itself.

BARTOLUS (1314-1357), Italian jurist and professor of civil law at the University of Perugia, was the most renowned master of the dialectical school of jurists. He was born in 1314 in Sassoferrato, in the duchy of Urbino, and is commonly referred to as Bartolus de Saxoferrato. His father was Franciscus Severi, and his mother belonged to the Alfani family. He first studied civil law under Cinus in Perugia, then under Oldradus and Jacobus de Belvisio at Bologna, where he earned his doctorate in civil law in 1334. His fame grew after he was appointed to a chair of civil law at the University of Perugia in 1343, where he lectured for many years, elevating the reputation of Perugia's law school to match that of Bologna. He passed away in 1357 in Perugia, where a grand monument marks his burial in the church of San Francisco, simply inscribed with "Ossa Bartoli." Bartolus left a lasting legacy, and many writers have attempted to explain his renown by crediting him with introducing the dialectical method of teaching law; however, this method had already been used by Odofredus, a student of Accursius, in the previous century, and Odofredus' followers had misused it, making many of their writings difficult to read due to excessive dialectical forms. Bartolus, in contrast, successfully utilized the dialectical method as a teacher and discouraged its misuse. Yet, his significant reputation was likely due to his revival of the exegetical system of teaching law—previously neglected after Accursius' rise—infusing it with new energy while adding practical relevance through his judicial experience gained as an assessor in the courts of Todi and Pisa before taking on a professorial role. His works, On Procedure and On Evidence, are among his most important contributions, and his Commentary on the Code of Justinian has been considered in some countries to hold authority equal to the code itself.

BARTON, BENJAMIN SMITH (1766-1815), American naturalist, was born at Lancaster, Pennsylvania, in 1766, studied for two years at Edinburgh, and afterwards graduated at Göttingen. He settled at Philadelphia, and soon obtained a considerable practice. In 1789 he was appointed professor of botany and natural history in the College of Philadelphia, now the University of Pennsylvania; he was made professor of materia medica in 1795, and on the death of Dr Benjamin Rush in 1813 he obtained the chair of practical medicine. In 1802 he was chosen president of the American Philosophical Society, of which he was a strong supporter. Barton was the author of various works on natural history, botany and materia medica, his Elements of Botany (1803) being the best known. He died at Philadelphia on the 19th of December 1815.

BARTON, BENJAMIN SMITH (1766-1815), American naturalist, was born in Lancaster, Pennsylvania, in 1766. He studied for two years at Edinburgh and later graduated from Göttingen. He settled in Philadelphia and quickly built a successful practice. In 1789, he was appointed professor of botany and natural history at the College of Philadelphia, now the University of Pennsylvania. He became professor of materia medica in 1795, and after Dr. Benjamin Rush passed away in 1813, he took over the chair of practical medicine. In 1802, he was elected president of the American Philosophical Society, which he strongly supported. Barton authored several works on natural history, botany, and materia medica, with his most well-known work being Elements of Botany (1803). He died in Philadelphia on December 19, 1815.

BARTON, BERNARD (1784-1849), English poet, was born at Carlisle on the 31st of January 1784. His parents were Quakers, and he was commonly known as the Quaker poet. After some experience of business, he became, in 1809, clerk to Messrs Alexander's bank at Woodbridge, Suffolk, and retained this post till his death. His first volume of verse—Metrical Effusions—was published in 1812. It brought him into correspondence with Southey, and shortly afterwards, through the medium of a set of complimentary verses, he made the acquaintance of Hogg. From this time onwards to 1828 Barton published various volumes of verse. After 1828 his work appeared but rarely in print, but his Household Verses published in 1845 secured him, on the recommendation of Sir Robert Peel, a Civil List pension of £100 a year, £1200 having already been raised for him by some members of the Society of Friends. Barton is chiefly remembered for his friendship with Charles Lamb, which arose, curiously enough, out of a remonstrance addressed by him to the author of Essays of Elia on the freedom with which the Quakers had been handled in that volume. When Barton contemplated resigning his bank clerkship and supporting himself entirely by literature, Lamb strongly dissuaded him. "Keep to your bank," he wrote, "and the bank will keep you." Barton died at Woodbridge on 19th February 1849. His daughter Lucy married Edward FitzGerald.

BARTON, BERNARD (1784-1849), an English poet, was born in Carlisle on January 31, 1784. His parents were Quakers, and he was often referred to as the Quaker poet. After gaining some business experience, he became, in 1809, a clerk at Messrs Alexander's bank in Woodbridge, Suffolk, where he worked until his death. His first book of poetry—Metrical Effusions—was published in 1812. It led him to correspond with Southey, and shortly after that, he got to know Hogg through a set of complimentary verses. From then until 1828, Barton published several volumes of poetry. After 1828, his work appeared less frequently in print, but his Household Verses, published in 1845, earned him a Civil List pension of £100 a year on the recommendation of Sir Robert Peel, with £1200 already raised for him by some members of the Society of Friends. Barton is mainly remembered for his friendship with Charles Lamb, which oddly developed from a letter he wrote to the author of Essays of Elia concerning the way Quakers were portrayed in that work. When Barton considered quitting his bank job to pursue a full-time writing career, Lamb strongly advised against it, saying, "Stick to your bank, and the bank will take care of you." Barton passed away in Woodbridge on February 19, 1849. His daughter Lucy married Edward FitzGerald.

See Poems and Letters of Bernard Barton, selected by Lucy Barton, with a biographical notice by Edward FitzGerald (1849).

See Poems and Letters of Bernard Barton, selected by Lucy Barton, with a biographical notice by Edward FitzGerald (1849).

BARTON, CLARA (1821- ), American philanthropist, was born in Oxford, Massachusetts, in 1821. She was educated at the Clinton Liberal Institute (then in Clinton, New York). Ill-health compelled her to give up the profession of teaching, which she had taken up when she was only sixteen years old, and from 1854 to 1857 she was a clerk in the Patent Office at Washington. During the Civil War she distributed large quantities of supplies for the relief of wounded soldiers; and at its close she organized at Washington a bureau of records to aid in the search of missing men for whom inquiries were made. In connexion with this work, which was continued for about four years, she identified and marked the graves of more than twelve thousand soldiers in the National Cemetery at Andersonville, Georgia. In 1869 she went for her health to Switzerland. Upon her arrival at Geneva she was visited by members of the International Committee of the Red Cross, who sought her co-operation in the work of their society. The United States had declined to become a party to the treaty of Geneva on the basis of which the Red Cross Society was founded, but upon the outbreak of the Franco-Prussian War Miss Barton went with members of this society to the seat of hostilities and assisted them in organizing their military hospitals. In 1871 she superintended the distribution of relief to the poor in Strassburg, and in 1872 performed a like service in Paris. For her services she was decorated with the Iron Cross by the German emperor. In 1873 she returned to the United States, where she at once began her efforts to effect the organization of the United States branch of the Red Cross and to bring her country into the treaty of Geneva, which efforts were successful in 1881-1882. She was the first president of the American Red Cross, holding the position until 1904: and represented the United States at the International conference held at Geneva, 1884; Karlsruhe, 1887; Rome, 1892; Vienna, 1897; and St Petersburg, 1903. She was the author of the American amendment to the constitution of the Red Cross which provides that the society shall distribute relief not only in war but in times of such other calamities as famines, floods, earthquakes, cyclones, and pestilence, and in accordance with this amended constitution, she conducted the society's relief for sufferers from the yellow fever in Florida (1887), the flood at Johnstown, Pennsylvania (1889), the famine in Russia (1891), the hurricane along the coast of South Carolina (1893), the massacre in Armenia (1896), the Spanish-American War in Cuba (1898), the hurricane at Galveston, Texas (1900), and several other calamities. Upon her retirement from the Red Cross she incorporated and became president of "The National First Aid of America" for "first aid to the injured." She wrote An Official History of the Red Cross (1882), The Red Cross in Peace and War (1898), A Story of the Red Cross (1904), and Story of my Childhood (1907).

BARTON, CLARA (1821- ), American philanthropist, was born in Oxford, Massachusetts, in 1821. She was educated at the Clinton Liberal Institute (then in Clinton, New York). Health issues forced her to leave teaching, which she started at just sixteen years old. From 1854 to 1857, she worked as a clerk in the Patent Office in Washington. During the Civil War, she provided large amounts of supplies to help wounded soldiers; after the war, she set up a records bureau in Washington to help find missing men. She worked on this for about four years, identifying and marking the graves of over twelve thousand soldiers in the National Cemetery at Andersonville, Georgia. In 1869, she traveled to Switzerland for her health. Upon arriving in Geneva, she was approached by members of the International Committee of the Red Cross, who sought her cooperation with their organization. Although the United States did not join the Geneva Treaty that established the Red Cross Society, when the Franco-Prussian War broke out, Miss Barton joined the society's members at the front lines, helping organize military hospitals. In 1871, she oversaw relief efforts for the poor in Strassburg, and in 1872, she did the same in Paris. For her work, she was awarded the Iron Cross by the German emperor. In 1873, she returned to the United States, promptly starting her efforts to establish the U.S. branch of the Red Cross and to have her country join the Geneva Treaty, which was successful in 1881-1882. She became the first president of the American Red Cross, serving until 1904, and represented the United States at international conferences in Geneva (1884), Karlsruhe (1887), Rome (1892), Vienna (1897), and St. Petersburg (1903). She authored the American amendment to the Red Cross constitution, which stated that the organization would provide aid not only during wars but also during other disasters like famines, floods, earthquakes, cyclones, and epidemics. Following this amendment, she led relief efforts for victims of yellow fever in Florida (1887), the Johnstown flood in Pennsylvania (1889), the famine in Russia (1891), the hurricane in South Carolina (1893), the Armenian massacre (1896), the Spanish-American War in Cuba (1898), the Galveston hurricane in Texas (1900), and various other disasters. After retiring from the Red Cross, she founded and became president of "The National First Aid of America" to provide first aid to the injured. She wrote An Official History of the Red Cross (1882), The Red Cross in Peace and War (1898), A Story of the Red Cross (1904), and Story of my Childhood (1907).

BARTON, ELIZABETH (c. 1506-1534), "the maid of Kent," was, according to her own statement, born in 1506 at Aldington, Kent. She appears to have been a neurotic girl, subject to epilepsy, and an illness in her nineteenth year resulted in hysteria and religious mania. She was at the time a servant in the house of Thomas Cobb, steward of an estate near Aldington owned by William Warham, archbishop of Canterbury. During her convalescence she passed into trances lasting for days at a time, and in this state her ravings were of such "marvellous holiness in rebuke of sin and vice" that the country folk believed her to be inspired. Cobb reported the matter to Richard Masters, the parish priest, who in turn acquainted Archbishop Warham. The girl having recovered, and finding herself the object of local admiration, was cunning enough, as she confessed at her trial, to feign trances, during which she continued her prophecies. Her fame steadily growing, the archbishop in 1526 instructed the prior of Christ Church, Canterbury, to send two of his monks to hold an inquiry into the case. One of these latter, Edward Bocking, obtained her admission as a nun to St Sepulchre's convent, Canterbury. Under Bocking's instruction Barton's prophecies became still more remarkable, and attracted many pilgrims, who believed her to be, as she asserted, in direct communication with the Virgin Mary. Her utterances were cunningly directed towards political matters, and a profound and widespread sensation was caused by her declaration that should Henry persist in his intention of divorcing Catherine he "should no longer be king of this realm ... and should die a villain's death." Even such men as Fisher, bishop of Rochester, and Sir Thomas More, corresponded with Barton. On his return from France in 1532 Henry passed through Canterbury and is said to have allowed the nun to force herself into his presence, when she made an attempt to terrify him into abandoning his marriage. After its solemnization in May 1533. her utterances becoming still more treasonable, she was examined before Cranmer (who had in March succeeded to the archbishopric on Warham's death) and confessed. On the 25th of September Bocking and another monk, Hadley, were arrested, and in November, Masters and others were implicated. The maid and her fellow prisoners were examined before the Star Chamber, and were by its order publicly exposed at St Paul's Cross, where they each read a confession. In January 1534 by a bill of attainder the maid and her chief accomplices were condemned to death, and were executed at Tyburn on the 20th of April. It has been held that her confession was extracted by force, and therefore valueless, but the evidence of her imposture seems conclusive.

BARTON, ELIZABETH (c. 1506-1534), "the maid of Kent," was, according to her own account, born in 1506 at Aldington, Kent. She appears to have been a troubled girl, prone to epilepsy, and an illness during her nineteenth year led to hysteria and religious fervor. At the time, she was a servant in the household of Thomas Cobb, steward of an estate near Aldington owned by William Warham, archbishop of Canterbury. During her recovery, she fell into trances lasting for days, and in this state, her ravings had such "marvelous holiness in rebuke of sin and vice" that the local people believed she was inspired. Cobb reported the situation to Richard Masters, the parish priest, who then informed Archbishop Warham. After the girl recovered and found herself the center of local admiration, she cleverly, as she later admitted at her trial, pretended to have trances, during which she continued to make prophecies. As her reputation grew, the archbishop in 1526 directed the prior of Christ Church, Canterbury, to send two of his monks to investigate the case. One of these, Edward Bocking, secured her admission as a nun to St Sepulchre's convent, Canterbury. Under Bocking's guidance, Barton's prophecies became even more notable, drawing many pilgrims who believed she was, as she claimed, in direct communication with the Virgin Mary. Her statements were cleverly focused on political issues, and her warning that if Henry went through with his divorce from Catherine, he "would no longer be king of this realm... and would die a villain's death" caused a significant stir. Men like Fisher, bishop of Rochester, and Sir Thomas More, even corresponded with Barton. When he returned from France in 1532, Henry passed through Canterbury and is said to have let the nun pressure her way into seeing him, where she tried to frighten him into renouncing his marriage. After the marriage was finalized in May 1533, her statements became even more treasonous, and she was interrogated by Cranmer (who had succeeded to the archbishopric in March after Warham’s death) and confessed. On September 25th, Bocking and another monk, Hadley, were arrested, and by November, Masters and others were implicated. The maid and her fellow prisoners were questioned before the Star Chamber and publicly exposed at St Paul's Cross, where they each read a confession. In January 1534, through a bill of attainder, the maid and her main accomplices were sentenced to death, and they were executed at Tyburn on April 20th. It has been argued that her confession was obtained under duress and therefore lacks value, but the evidence of her deception seems definitive.

See Froude, History of England; Burnet, History of the Reformation; Lingard, History of England; F. A. Gasquet, Henry VIII. [v.03 p.0453]and the English Monasteries (ch. iii. 1899 ed.); T. E. Bridgett, Life of Blessed John Fisher (1888); vols. vi. and vii. of Letters and Papers of Henry VIII.; James Gairdner, The English Church in the 16th Century (1899); Strype, Memorials, I. i. 271, and Cranmer; a detailed account of the case is contained in the published Act of Attainder 25 Henry VIII. c. 12.

See Froude, History of England; Burnet, History of the Reformation; Lingard, History of England; F. A. Gasquet, Henry VIII. [v.03 p.0453]and the English Monasteries (ch. iii. 1899 ed.); T. E. Bridgett, Life of Blessed John Fisher (1888); vols. vi. and vii. of Letters and Papers of Henry VIII.; James Gairdner, The English Church in the 16th Century (1899); Strype, Memorials, I. i. 271, and Cranmer; a detailed account of the case is contained in the published Act of Attainder 25 Henry VIII. c. 12.

BARTON BEDS, in geology, the name given to a series of softish grey and brown clays, with layers of sand, of Upper Eocene age, which are found in the Hampshire Tertiary basin, where they are particularly well exposed in the cliffs of Barton, Hordwell, and in the Isle of Wight. Above the highly fossiliferous Barton Clay there is a sandy series with few fossils; these are the Headon Hill or Barton Sands. Either of these names is preferable to the term "Upper Bagshot Beds," which has been applied to these sands. The Barton Beds are absent from the London basin, and the Upper Bagshot Sands of that area are probably at a lower horizon than the Barton Sands. The term "Bartonien" was introduced by Mayer-Eymar in 1857 for the continental equivalents of the series.

BARTON BEDS, in geology, refers to a set of soft gray and brown clays, along with layers of sand, from the Upper Eocene period. These are mainly found in the Hampshire Tertiary basin, where they are particularly visible in the cliffs of Barton, Hordwell, and the Isle of Wight. Above the fossil-rich Barton Clay lies a sandy layer with few fossils, known as the Headon Hill or Barton Sands. Either of these names is preferred over the term "Upper Bagshot Beds," which has also been used for these sands. The Barton Beds do not exist in the London basin, and the Upper Bagshot Sands there are likely at a lower geological level than the Barton Sands. The term "Bartonien" was introduced by Mayer-Eymar in 1857 to describe the continental equivalents of this series.

Hampshire basin and
Isle of Wight.

Hampshire basin and Isle of Wight.

 

Paris Basin.

Paris Basin.

Barton Sands
Barton Clay

Barton Sands
Barton Clay

140-200 ft.
162-255 ft

140-200 ft.
162-255 ft

}

}

Bartonien

Bartonian

{

{

Limestone of St. Ouen.
Sands of Beauchamp (sables moyen).

Limestone of St. Ouen.
Sands of Beauchamp (medium sands).

Fusus longaevus, Volutilithes luctatrix, Ostrea gigantea, Pectunculus (Glycimeris) deleta are characteristic fossils; fishes (Lamna, Arius, &c.) and a crocodile (Diplocynodon) are also found in the Barton Clay. The sands are very pure and are used in glass making.

Fusus longaevus, Volutilithes luctatrix, Ostrea gigantea, and Pectunculus (Glycimeris) deleta are typical fossils; fish (Lamna, Arius, etc.) and a crocodile (Diplocynodon) can also be found in the Barton Clay. The sands are very pure and are used in glass production.

See "Geology of the Isle of Wight," Mem. Geol. Survey (2nd ed., 1889); and "The Geology of the Country around Southampton," Mem. Geol. Survey (1902).

See "Geology of the Isle of Wight," Mem. Geol. Survey (2nd ed., 1889); and "The Geology of the Country around Southampton," Mem. Geol. Survey (1902).

(J. A. H.)

(J. A. H.)

BARTON-UPON-HUMBER, a market town in the N. Lindsey or Brigg parliamentary division of Lincolnshire, England, the terminus of a branch of the Great Central railway, 44 m. N. by E. of Lincoln. Pop. of urban district (1901) 5671. It lies beneath low hills, on flat ground bordering the Humber, but the centre of the town is a mile from the river. The church of St Peter has a remarkable west tower of pre-Conquest workmanship, excepting the early Norman top storey. Against the western face is a low building of the date of the lower tower-storeys, measuring 15 ft. by 12, with rude, deeply-splayed windows. The tower itself is arcaded in the two lower storeys, having round arches in the lower and triangular in the upper, and there is a round-headed S. doorway and a triangular-headed N. doorway. The rest of the church is Decorated and Perpendicular. The church of St Mary is fine Early English with Perpendicular clerestory. Industries include brick-making, malting, and rope-making. Barton appears in Domesday, when the ferry over the Humber existed. As a port, moreover, it subsequently rose into some importance, for it was able to supply eight ships and men to the expedition of Edward III. to Brittany.

BARTON-UPON-HUMBER, a market town in the N. Lindsey or Brigg parliamentary division of Lincolnshire, England, is the endpoint of a branch of the Great Central railway, located 44 miles N. by E. of Lincoln. The population of the urban district in 1901 was 5,671. It sits below low hills on flat ground next to the Humber, but the town center is a mile away from the river. The church of St Peter features an impressive west tower made before the Conquest, except for the early Norman top section. Attached to the western face is a small building from the period of the lower tower sections, measuring 15 ft. by 12, with rudely shaped, deeply-splayed windows. The tower itself has arcades in the two lower sections, with round arches in the lower and triangular arches in the upper section, along with a round-headed south doorway and a triangular-headed north doorway. The rest of the church is in the Decorated and Perpendicular styles. The church of St Mary is a beautiful example of Early English architecture with a Perpendicular clerestory. Industries in the area include brick-making, malting, and rope-making. Barton is mentioned in the Domesday Book, noting that the ferry over the Humber was already in existence. It later became a notable port, as it was able to provide eight ships and crews for Edward III's expedition to Brittany.

BARUCH, the name (meaning "Blessed" in Hebrew) of a character in the Old Testament (Jer. xxxvi., xxxvii., xliii.), associated with the prophet Jeremiah, and described as his secretary and spokesman.

BARUCH, the name (meaning "Blessed" in Hebrew) of a character in the Old Testament (Jer. xxxvi., xxxvii., xliii.), linked to the prophet Jeremiah, and noted as his secretary and spokesperson.

Book of Baruch. This deutero-canonical book of the Old Testament is placed by the LXX. between Jeremiah and Lamentations, and in the Vulgate after Lamentations. It consists of several parts, which cohere so badly that we are obliged to assume plurality of authorship.

Baruch Book. This deuterocanonical book of the Old Testament is positioned by the LXX between Jeremiah and Lamentations, and in the Vulgate after Lamentations. It has multiple sections that fit together so poorly that we have to assume it was written by different authors.

Contents.—The book consists of the following parts:—

Contents.—The book includes the following parts:—

i. 1-14. The historical preface with a description of the origin and purpose of the book.

i. 1-14. The historical introduction that explains the origins and purpose of the book.

i. 15-ii. 5. A confession of sin used by the Palestinian Remnant. This confession was according to i. 14 sent from Babylon (i. 4, 7) to Jerusalem to be read "on the day of the feast and on the days of the solemn assembly." The confession is restricted to the use of the remnant at home (see next paragraph). In this confession there is a national acknowledgment of sin and a recognition of the Exile as a righteous judgment.

i. 15-ii. 5. A confession of sin used by the Palestinian Remnant. This confession was sent from Babylon (i. 4, 7) to Jerusalem, as noted in i. 14, to be read "on the day of the feast and on the days of the solemn assembly." The confession is meant for the remnant to use at home (see next paragraph). In this confession, there is a collective acknowledgment of sin and an understanding that the Exile is a just punishment.

ii. 6-iii. 8. A confession of the captives in Babylon and a prayer for restoration. This confession opens as the former (in i. 15) with the words found also in Daniel ix. 7, "To the Lord our God belongeth righteousness, &c." The confession is of the Exiles and not of the remnant in Palestine, as Marshall has pointed out. Thus it is the Exiles clearly who are speaking in ii. 13, "We are but a few left among the heathen where thou hast scattered us"; ii. 14, "Give us favour in the sight of them which have led us away captive"; iii. 7, "We will praise thee in our captivity"; iii. 8, "We are yet this day in our captivity where thou hast scattered us." On the other hand the speakers in the confession in i. 15-ii. 5 are clearly the remnant in Jerusalem. i. 15, "To the Lord our God belongeth righteousness, but unto us confusion of face ... to the men of Judah and the inhabitants of Jerusalem." The Exiles are mentioned by way of contrast to the speakers; ii. 4, 5, "He hath given them to be in subjection to all the kingdoms that are round about us to be a reproach among all the people round about where the Lord hath scattered them. Thus were they cast down ... because we sinned against the Lord our God."[1]

ii. 6-iii. 8. A confession of the captives in Babylon and a prayer for restoration. This confession starts just like the previous one (in i. 15) with the same words found in Daniel ix. 7, "To the Lord our God belongs righteousness, etc." The confession is from the Exiles and not from the remnant in Palestine, as Marshall has noted. So it’s clear that the Exiles are the ones speaking in ii. 13, "We are just a few left among the nations where you’ve scattered us"; ii. 14, "Grant us favor in the eyes of those who have taken us captive"; iii. 7, "We will praise you in our captivity"; iii. 8, "We are still today in our captivity where you have scattered us." In contrast, the speakers in the confession from i. 15-ii. 5 are clearly the remnant in Jerusalem. i. 15, "To the Lord our God belongs righteousness, but to us, confusion of face ... to the men of Judah and the inhabitants of Jerusalem." The Exiles are mentioned in contrast to the speakers; ii. 4, 5, "He has made them subject to all the kingdoms around us, to be a reproach among all the peoples around where the Lord has scattered them. They were cast down ... because we sinned against the Lord our God."[1]

iii. 9-iv. 4. The glorification of wisdom, that is, of the Law. Israel is bidden to walk in the light of it; it is the glory of Israel and is not to be given to another.

iii. 9-iv. 4. The praise of wisdom, which is the Law. Israel is instructed to walk in its light; it is the glory of Israel and should not be given to anyone else.

iv. 5-v. 9. Consolation of Israel with the promise of deliverance and lasting happiness and blessing to Jerusalem.

iv. 5-v. 9. Comfort for Israel with the assurance of rescue and enduring joy and blessings for Jerusalem.

Integrity.—From the foregoing description it seems clear that the book is derived from a plurality of authors. Most scholars, such as Fritzsche, Hitzig, Kneucker, Hilgenfeld, Reuss, agree in assuming that i.-iii. 8 and iii. 9-v. 9 are from distinct writers. But some critics have gone farther. Thus Rothstein (Kautzsch, Apok. und Pseud. i. 213-215) holds that there is no unity in iii. 9-v. 9, but that it is composed of two independent writings—iii. 9-iv. 4 and iv. 5-v. 9. Marshall (Hastings' Bible Dictionary, i. 251-254) gives a still more complex analysis. He finds in it the work of four distinct writers: i. 1-14, i. 15-iii. 8, iii. 9-iv. 4, iv. 5-v. 9. The evidence for a fourfold authorship is strong though not convincing. In any case i.-iii. 8 and iii. 9-v. 9 must be ascribed to different authors.

Integrity.—From the previous description, it’s clear that the book comes from multiple authors. Most scholars, like Fritzsche, Hitzig, Kneucker, Hilgenfeld, and Reuss, agree that i.-iii. 8 and iii. 9-v. 9 are written by different people. However, some critics take it further. Rothstein (Kautzsch, Apok. und Pseud. i. 213-215) argues that there’s no unity in iii. 9-v. 9, stating it consists of two separate writings—iii. 9-iv. 4 and iv. 5-v. 9. Marshall (Hastings' Bible Dictionary, i. 251-254) provides an even more detailed breakdown, identifying the work of four distinct writers: i. 1-14, i. 15-iii. 8, iii. 9-iv. 4, and iv. 5-v. 9. The evidence for four authorship is strong but not entirely convincing. In any case, i.-iii. 8 and iii. 9-v. 9 must be attributed to different authors.

Original Language.—(1) Some scholars, as Ewald, Kneucker, Davidson, Rothstein and König, believe that the whole book was originally written in Hebrew; (2) Fritzsche, Hilgenfeld, Reuss, Gifford, Schürer, and Toy advocate a Hebrew original of i.-iii. 8 and a Greek original of the rest; (3) Marshall argues that i.-iii. 8 is translated from a Hebrew original, iii. 9-iv. 4 from an Aramaic, and the rest from the Greek; (4) and lastly, Bertholdt, Havernick and Nöldeke regard the Greek as the primitive text. The last view must be put aside as unworkable. For the third no convincing evidence has been adduced, nor does it seem likely that any can be. We have therefore to decide between the two remaining theories. In any case we can hardly err in admitting a Hebrew original of i.-iii. 8. For (1) we have such Hebraisms as οὗ ... ἐπ' αὐτῷ = אשר ... עליו (ii. 26); οὗ ... ἐκεῖ = אשר ... שׁם (ii. 4, 13, 29; iii. 8); ὧν ... τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτῶν = אשר ... רוחם (ii. 7). (2) We have meaningless expressions which are really mistranslations of the Hebrew. It is noteworthy that these mistranslations are for the most part found in Jeremiah—a fact which has rightly drawn scholars to the conclusion that we owe the LXX of Baruch i.-iii. 8, and of Jeremiah to the same translator. Thus in i. 9 we have δεσμώτης, "prisoner," where the text had מַסְגֵר and the Greek should have been rendered "locksmith." The same mistranslation is found in Jer. xxiv. 1, xxxvi. (xxix.) 2. Next in ii. 4 we have ἄβατον, "wilderness," where the text had שׁמה and the translation should have ἔκστασιν. The same misrendering is found several times in Jeremiah. Again ἐργάζεσθαι is used in i. 22, ii. 21, 22, 24 as a translation of עבד in the sense of "serving," where δουλεύειν ought to have been the rendering. So also in Jer. xxxiv. (xxvii.) 11, xxxvii. (xxx.) 8, &c. Again in πόλεων Ἰούδα καὶ ἔξωθεν Ἰερουσαλήμ the ἔξωθεν is a misrendering of בחוצות as in Jer. xi. 6, xl. [v.03 p.0454](xxxiii.) 10, &c., where the translator should have given πλατειῶν.[2] For βόμβησις (ii. 29) המון we should have πλῆθος. (3) Finally there are passages where by re-translation we discover that the translator either misread his text or had a corrupt text before him. Thus μάννα in i. 10 is a corrupt translation of מנחה as elsewhere in a dozen passages of the LXX. In iii. 4 τεθνηκότων = מֵתֵי—which the translator should have read as מְתֵי = ἀνθρώπων.

Original Language.—(1) Some scholars, like Ewald, Kneucker, Davidson, Rothstein, and König, think that the whole book was initially written in Hebrew; (2) Fritzsche, Hilgenfeld, Reuss, Gifford, Schürer, and Toy propose that there is a Hebrew original for chapters i.-iii. 8 and a Greek original for the rest; (3) Marshall claims that chapters i.-iii. 8 are translated from a Hebrew original, iii. 9-iv. 4 from an Aramaic source, and the remaining sections from Greek; (4) finally, Bertholdt, Havernick, and Nöldeke consider the Greek to be the original text. The last opinion must be dismissed as impractical. For the third theory, there has been no convincing evidence presented, and it seems unlikely that any will be found. Therefore, we must choose between the two remaining theories. In any event, we are unlikely to be wrong in accepting a Hebrew original for chapters i.-iii. 8. For (1) we have Hebraisms such as οὗ ... on it = that ... on it (ii. 26); οὗ ... there = אשר ... שם (ii. 4, 13, 29; iii. 8); ὧν ... τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτῶν = אשר ... רוחם (ii. 7). (2) We can see meaningless phrases that are actually mistranslations of the Hebrew. Notably, these mistranslations mostly appear in Jeremiah, which has correctly led scholars to conclude that the LXX of Baruch i.-iii. 8, and of Jeremiah, was produced by the same translator. For example, in i. 9 we find prisoner, "prisoner," where the original text had מסגר and the Greek should have translated this as "locksmith." This same mistranslation appears in Jer. xxiv. 1, xxxvi. (xxix.) 2. Next, in ii. 4 we have forbidden, "wilderness," whereas the original contained שׁמה and the correct translation should have been ecstasy. The same translation error occurs multiple times in Jeremiah. Again, in i. 22, ii. 21, 22, 24, work is used as a translation of עבד meaning "serving," when it should have been work. This is also the case in Jer. xxxiv. (xxvii.) 11, xxxvii. (xxx.) 8, etc. Again in cities of Judah and outside Jerusalem, the outside is a mistranslation of In the streets as seen in Jer. xi. 6, xl. [v.03 p.0454](xxxiii.) 10, etc., where the translator should have used πλατειών.[2] For βόμβησις (ii. 29) המון should have been rendered as crowd. (3) Finally, there are instances where we discover through re-translation that the translator either misread his text or had a faulty text to work with. For instance, manna in i. 10 is a corrupt translation of מנחה as seen in numerous passages of the LXX. In iii. 4, dead = מֵתֵי—which the translator should have read as מֵת = humans.

From the above instances, which could be multiplied, we have no hesitation in postulating a Hebrew original of i.-iii. 8.

From the examples above, which could be expanded, we confidently propose that there is a Hebrew original of i.-iii. 8.

As regards iii. 9-v. 9 the case is different. This section is free from such notable Hebraisms as we have just dealt with, and no convincing grounds have been advanced to prove that it is a translation from a Semitic original.

As for iii. 9-v. 9, the situation is different. This section doesn’t contain the prominent Hebraisms we just discussed, and no solid evidence has been presented to show that it is a translation from a Semitic source.

Date.—The dates of the various constituents of the book are quite uncertain. Ewald, followed by Gifford and Marshall, assigns i.-iii. 8 to the period after the conquest of Jerusalem by Ptolemy I. in 320 B.C.; Reuss to some decades later; and Fritzsche, Schrade, Keil and Toy to the time of the Maccabees. Hitzig, Kneucker and Schürer assume that it was written after A.D. 70. Ryle and James (Pss. of Solomon, pp. lxxii.-lxxvii.) hold that iv. 31-v. 9 is dependent on the Greek version of Ps. xi., and that, accordingly, Baruch was reduced to its present form after A.D. 70. The most probable of the above dates appears to be that maintained by Fritzsche, that is, if we understand by the Maccabean times the early decades of the 2nd cent. B.C. For during the palmy days of the Maccabean dynasty the Twelve tribes were supposed to be in Palestine. The idea that the Jewish Kingdom embraced once again the entire nation easily arose when the Maccabees extended their dominion northwards over Samaria and Galilee and eastwards beyond the Jordan. This belief displaced the older one that the nine and a half tribes were still in captivity. With the downfall of the Maccabean dynasty, however, the older idea revived in the 1st cent. A.D. To the beginnings of the 2nd cent. A.D. the view of the dead given in ii. 17 would point, where it is said that those whose spirits had been taken from their bodies would not give glory unto the Lord. The statement as to the desolate condition of the Temple in ii. 26a is with Kneucker to be rejected as an interpolation.

Date.—The dates of the different parts of the book are quite uncertain. Ewald, followed by Gifford and Marshall, assigns chapters i.-iii. 8 to the period after Ptolemy I. conquered Jerusalem in 320 BCE; Reuss suggests it was several decades later; and Fritzsche, Schrade, Keil, and Toy attribute it to the time of the Maccabees. Hitzig, Kneucker, and Schürer believe it was written after CE 70. Ryle and James (Pss. of Solomon, pp. lxxii.-lxxvii.) argue that iv. 31-v. 9 is based on the Greek version of Ps. xi., which means that Baruch was shaped into its current form after AD 70. The most likely date seems to be the one suggested by Fritzsche, assuming the Maccabean times refer to the early decades of the 2nd century B.C. During the height of the Maccabean dynasty, the Twelve tribes were believed to be in Palestine. The idea that the Jewish Kingdom once again included the whole nation easily emerged when the Maccabees expanded their control northward over Samaria and Galilee and eastward beyond the Jordan. This belief replaced the older view that the nine and a half tribes were still in captivity. However, with the fall of the Maccabean dynasty, the older belief resurfaced in the 1st century CE The perspective on the dead given in ii. 17 suggests this, stating that those whose spirits were taken from their bodies would not give glory to the Lord. Kneucker dismisses the claim about the Temple's desolate condition in ii. 26a as an interpolation.

Canonicity.—The Book of Baruch was never accepted as canonical by the Palestinian Jews (Baba Batra 14b), though the Apostolic Constitutions, v. 10, state that it was read in public worship on the 10th day of the month Gorpiaeus, but this statement can hardly be correct. It was in general use in the church till its canonicity was rejected by the Protestant churches and accepted by the Roman church at the council of Trent.

Canonicity.—The Book of Baruch was never recognized as canonical by the Palestinian Jews (Baba Batra 14b), although the Apostolic Constitutions, v. 10, claim that it was read during public worship on the 10th day of the month Gorpiaeus, but this statement is likely incorrect. It was commonly used in the church until its canonicity was dismissed by Protestant churches and accepted by the Roman church at the Council of Trent.

Literature. Versions and Editions.—The versions are the two Latin, a Syriac, and an Arabic. The Latin one in the Vulgate belongs to a time prior to Jerome, and is tolerably literal. Another, somewhat later, was first published by Jos. Maria Caro in 1688, and was reprinted by Sabatier, side by side with the ante-Hieronymian one, in his Bibliorum Sacrorum Latinae Versiones Antiquae. It is founded upon the preceding one, and is less literal. The Syriac and Arabic versions, printed in the London Polyglot, are literal. The Hexaplar-Syriac version made by Paul, bishop of Tella, in the beginning of the 7th century has been published by Ceriani.

Literature. Versions and Editions.—The versions include two Latin, one Syriac, and one Arabic. The Latin version in the Vulgate is from a time before Jerome and is fairly literal. Another version, slightly later, was first published by Jos. Maria Caro in 1688 and was reprinted by Sabatier, alongside the ante-Hieronymian version, in his Bibliorum Sacrorum Latinae Versiones Antiquae. This version is based on the earlier one and is less literal. The Syriac and Arabic versions, included in the London Polyglot, are literal. The Hexaplar-Syriac version created by Paul, bishop of Tella, in the early 7th century has been published by Ceriani.

The most convenient editions of the Greek text are Tischendorf's in the second volume of his Septuagint, and Swete's in vol. iii.; Fritzsche's in Libri Apocryphi Veteris Testamenti Graece (1871). The best editions of the book are Kneucker's Das Buch Baruch (1879); Gifford's in the Speaker's Apoc. ii. See also the articles in the Encyc. Biblica, Hastings' Bible Dictionary; Schürer, History of Jewish People.

The most convenient editions of the Greek text are Tischendorf's in the second volume of his Septuagint, and Swete's in vol. iii.; Fritzsche's in Libri Apocryphi Veteris Testamenti Graece (1871). The best editions of the book are Kneucker's Das Buch Baruch (1879); Gifford's in the Speaker's Apoc. ii. See also the articles in the Encyc. Biblica, Hastings' Bible Dictionary; Schürer, History of Jewish People.

Apocalypse of Baruch. The discovery of this long lost apocalypse was due to Ceriani. This apocalypse has survived only in the Syriac version of which Ceriani discovered a 6th century MS. in the Milan library. Of this he published a Latin translation in 1866 (Monumenta Sacra, I. ii. 73-98), which Fritzsche reproduced in 1871 (Libri Apocryphi V. T., pp.654-699), and the text in 1871 (Mon. Sacra. V. ii. 113-180), and subsequently in photo-lithographic facsimile in 1883. Chaps. lxxviii.-lxxxvi., indeed, of this book have long been known. These constitute Baruch's epistle to the nine and a half tribes in captivity, and have been published in Syriac and Latin in the London and Paris Polyglots, and in Syriac alone from one MS. in Lagarde's Libri V. T. Apocryphi Syr. (1861); and by Charles from ten MSS. (Apocalypse of Baruch, 1896, pp. 124-167). The entire book was translated into English by the last-named writer (op. cit. pp. 1-167), and into German by Ryssel (Kautzsch's Apok. und Pseud., 1900, ii. pp. 413-446).

Baruch's Apocalypse. The discovery of this long-lost apocalypse was made by Ceriani. This text has only survived in the Syriac version, of which Ceriani found a 6th-century manuscript in the Milan library. He published a Latin translation in 1866 (Monumenta Sacra, I. ii. 73-98), which Fritzsche reproduced in 1871 (Libri Apocryphi V. T., pp. 654-699), and the text in 1871 (Mon. Sacra. V. ii. 113-180), and later in a photo-lithographic facsimile in 1883. Chapters lxxviii.-lxxxvi. of this book have been known for a long time. These make up Baruch's letter to the nine and a half tribes in captivity and have been published in Syriac and Latin in the London and Paris Polyglots, and in Syriac alone from one manuscript in Lagarde's Libri V. T. Apocryphi Syr. (1861); and by Charles from ten manuscripts (Apocalypse of Baruch, 1896, pp. 124-167). The entire book was translated into English by the latter author (op. cit. pp. 1-167), and into German by Ryssel (Kautzsch's Apok. und Pseud., 1900, ii. pp. 413-446).

The Syriac is translated from the Greek; for Greek words are occasionally transliterated, and passages can be explained only on the hypothesis that the wrong alternative meanings of certain Greek words were followed by the translator. The Greek in turn is derived from the Hebrew, for unintelligible expressions in the Syriac can be explained and the text restored by retranslation into Hebrew. Thus in xxi. 9, 11, 12, xxiv. 2, lxii. 7 we have an unintelligible antithesis, "those who sin and those who are justified." The source of the error can be discovered by retranslation. The Syriac in these passages is a stock rendering of δικαιοῦσθαι, and this in turn of צדק. But צדק means not only δικαιοῦσθαι but also δίκαιος εἶναι, and this is the very meaning required by the context in the above passages: "those who sin and those who are righteous."[3] Again xliv. 12 the text reads: "the new world which does not turn to corruption those who depart on its beginning and has no mercy on those who depart to torment." Here "on its beginning" is set over antithetically against "to torment," whereas the context requires "to its blessedness." The words "on its beginning"—כראשו, a corruption of באשרו—"to its blessedness." Again in lvi. 6 it is said that the fall of man brought grief, anguish, pain, trouble and boasting into the world. The term "boasting" in this connexion cannot be right. The word = καύχημα = תהלה(?), corrupt for מחלה, "disease." A further ground for inferring a Hebrew original is to be found in the fact that paronomasiae not infrequently discover themselves in the course of retranslation into Hebrew. One instance will suffice. In xlviii. 35, "Honour will be turned into shame, strength humiliated into contempt ... and beauty will become a scorn" contains three such:

The Syriac is translated from the Greek; occasionally, Greek words are written in their original form, and some passages can only be understood if we assume that the translator misunderstood certain Greek words. The Greek, in turn, comes from the Hebrew, as unclear expressions in the Syriac can be clarified and the text restored by translating it back into Hebrew. For example, in xxi. 9, 11, 12, xxiv. 2, lxii. 7, we encounter a confusing contrast, "those who sin and those who are justified." We can trace the source of the error by retranslation. The Syriac in these passages reflects a standard interpretation of δικαιοῦσθαι, which also derives from Justice. However, Justice means not only δικαιοῦσθαι but also be just, which is the exact meaning needed in the aforementioned passages: "those who sin and those who are righteous." [3] Similarly, in xliv. 12, the text states: "the new world which does not lead to corruption those who depart on its beginning and shows no mercy towards those who depart to torment." Here, "on its beginning" is set against "to torment," while the context actually requires "to its blessedness." The phrase "on its beginning"—כראשו, a misinterpretation of באשרו—means "to its blessedness." Again, in lvi. 6, it states that the fall of man brought grief, anguish, pain, trouble, and boasting into the world. The term "boasting" here does not seem correct. The word corresponds to boast = תהילה(?), which is a corruption of Illness, meaning "disease." Another reason to suggest a Hebrew original is that word plays often become evident during retranslation into Hebrew. One example will suffice. In xlviii. 35, "Honour will be turned into shame, strength humiliated into contempt... and beauty will become a scorn" includes three such instances:

כבוד יהפך לקלון עז יורד אל בוז וּופי יהיה לדופי

Honor will turn into shame, descending into disgrace, and the shape will become a reflection.

(see Charles, Apoc. Bar. pp. xliv.-liii). The necessity of postulating a Hebrew original was first shown by the present writer, and has since been maintained by Wellhausen (Skizzen u. Vorarbeiten, vi. 234), by Ryssel (Apok. und Pseudepig. A. T., 1900, ii. 411), and Ginzberg (Jewish Encyclopaedia, ii. 555).

(see Charles, Apoc. Bar. pp. xliv.-liii). The need to assume a Hebrew original was first demonstrated by the current author and has since been supported by Wellhausen (Skizzen u. Vorarbeiten, vi. 234), Ryssel (Apok. und Pseudepig. A. T., 1900, ii. 411), and Ginzberg (Jewish Encyclopaedia, ii. 555).

Different Elements in the Book and their Dates.—As there are undoubtedly conflicting elements in the book, it is possible to assume either a diversity of authorship or a diversity of sources. The latter view is advocated by Ryssel and Ginzberg, the former by Kabisch, de Faye, R. H. Charles and Beer (Herzog's Realenc., art. "Pseudepigraphen des Alten Testaments," p. 250). A short summary may here be given of the grounds on which the present writer has postulated a diversity of authorship. If the letter to the tribes in captivity (lxxviii.-lxxxvi.) be disregarded, the book falls into seven sections separated by fasts, save in one case (after xxxv.) where the text is probably defective. These sections, which are of unequal length, are—(1) i.-v. 6; (2) v. 7-viii.; (3) ix.-xii. 4; (4) xii. 5-xx.; (5) xxi.-xxxv.; (6) xxxvi.-xlvi.; (7) xlvii.-lxxvii. These treat of the Messiah and the Messianic kingdom, the woes of Israel in the past and the destruction of Jerusalem in the present, as well as of theological questions relating to original sin, free will, works, the number of the saved, the nature of the resurrection body, &c. The views expressed on several of the above subjects are often conflicting. In one class of passages there is everywhere manifest a vigorous optimism as to Israel's ultimate well-being on earth, and the blessedness of the chosen people in the Messianic kingdom is sketched in glowing and sensuous colours (xxix., xxxix.-xl., lxiii.-lxxiv.). Over against these passages stand others of a hopelessly pessimistic character, wherein, alike as to Israel's [v.03 p.0455]present and future destiny on earth, there is written nothing save "lamentation, and mourning, and woe." The world is a scene of corruption, its evils are irremediable, its end is nigh, and the advent of the new and spiritual world at hand. The first to draw attention to the composite elements in this book was Kabisch (Jahrbücher f. protest. Theol., 1891, pp. 66-107). This critic regarded xxiv. 3-xxix., xxxvi.-xl. and liii.-lxxiv. as independent sources written before the fall of Jerusalem, A.D. 70, and his groundwork, which consists of the rest of his book, with the exception of a few verses, as composed after that date. All these elements were put together by a Christian contemporary of Papias. Many of these conclusions were arrived at independently by a French scholar, De Faye (Les Apocalypses juives, 1892, pp. 25-28, 76-103, 192-204). The present writer (Apocalypse of Baruch, 1896, pp. liii.-lxvii.), after submitting the book to a fresh study, has come to the following conclusions:—The book is of Pharisaic authorship and composed of six independent writings—A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3. The first three were composed when Jerusalem was still standing and the Messiah and the Messianic kingdom were expected: A1, a mutilated apocalypse = xxvii.-xxx. 1; A2, the Cedar and Vine Vision = xxxvi.-xl.; A3, the Cloud Vision = liii.-lxxiv. The last three were written after A.D. 70, and probably before 90. Thus B3 = lxxxv. was written by a Jew in exile, who, despairing of a national restoration, looked only for a spiritual recompense in heaven. The rest of the book is derived from B1 and B2, written in Palestine after A.D. 70. These writings belong to very different types of thought. In B1 the earthly Jerusalem is to be rebuilt, but not so in B2; in the former the exiles are to be restored, but not in the latter; in the former a Messianic kingdom without a Messiah is expected, but no earthly blessedness of any kind in the latter, &c. B1 = i.-ix. 1, xxxii. 2-4, xliii.-xliv. 7, xlv.-xlvi., lxxvii.-lxxxii., lxxxiv., lxxxvi.-lxxxvii. B2 = ix.-xxv., xxx. 2-xxxv., xli.-xlii., xliv. 8-15, xlvii.-lii., lxxv.-lxxvi., lxxxiii. The final editor of the work wrote in the name of Baruch the son of Neriah.

Different Elements in the Book and their Dates.—Since there are clearly conflicting elements in the book, one can either assume a variety of authors or a mix of sources. Ryssel and Ginzberg support the latter view, while Kabisch, de Faye, R. H. Charles, and Beer advocate for the former (Herzog's Realenc., art. "Pseudepigraphen des Alten Testaments," p. 250). A brief summary will outline the reasons the current writer believes in diverse authorship. If we ignore the letter to the tribes in captivity (lxxviii.-lxxxvi.), the book is divided into seven sections, separated by fasts, except in one instance (after xxxv.) where the text is likely incomplete. These sections, which vary in length, are—(1) i.-v. 6; (2) v. 7-viii.; (3) ix.-xii. 4; (4) xii. 5-xx.; (5) xxi.-xxxv.; (6) xxxvi.-xlvi.; (7) xlvii.-lxxvii. They discuss the Messiah and the Messianic kingdom, the historical struggles of Israel, and the destruction of Jerusalem currently, along with theological issues like original sin, free will, deeds, the number of the saved, the nature of the resurrected body, etc. The perspectives presented on several of these topics often conflict. In some passages, there is an evident optimistic tone regarding Israel's ultimate well-being on earth, with the blessedness of the chosen people in the Messianic kingdom vividly illustrated (xxix., xxxix.-xl., lxiii.-lxxiv.). In contrast, other passages express a hopelessly pessimistic view about Israel’s current and future state on earth, filled with "lamentation, and mourning, and woe." The world is depicted as corrupt, its evils irreparable, its end approaching, and the arrival of a new, spiritual world imminent. Kabisch was the first to highlight the mixed elements in this book (Jahrbücher f. protest. Theol., 1891, pp. 66-107). This critic considered xxiv. 3-xxix., xxxvi.-xl., and liii.-lxxiv. as independent sources written before the fall of Jerusalem, CE 70, and proposed that the rest of the book, except for a few verses, was composed after that date. All these elements were compiled by a Christian contemporary of Papias. A French scholar, De Faye (Les Apocalypses juives, 1892, pp. 25-28, 76-103, 192-204), independently arrived at many of these conclusions. The current writer (Apocalypse of Baruch, 1896, pp. liii.-lxvii.), after reevaluating the book, has reached the following conclusions:—The book is of Pharisaic authorship and is made up of six independent writings—A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3. The first three were created when Jerusalem still stood and the Messiah and the Messianic kingdom were anticipated: A1, a fragmentary apocalypse = xxvii.-xxx. 1; A2, the Cedar and Vine Vision = xxxvi.-xl.; A3, the Cloud Vision = liii.-lxxiv. The last three were written after CE 70 and likely before 90. Therefore, B3 = lxxxv. was written by a Jewish exile who, unable to hope for a national restoration, sought only a spiritual reward in heaven. The remaining parts of the book are taken from B1 and B2, which were written in Palestine after C.E. 70. These writings represent very different types of thought. In B1, the earthly Jerusalem is to be rebuilt, but not in B2; in the former, the exiles are to be restored, but not in the latter; in the former, a Messianic kingdom is expected without a Messiah, but in the latter, there’s no earthly blessedness anticipated, etc. B1 = i.-ix. 1, xxxii. 2-4, xliii.-xliv. 7, xlv.-xlvi., lxxvii.-lxxxii., lxxxiv., lxxxvi.-lxxxvii. B2 = ix.-xxv., xxx. 2-xxxv., xli.-xlii., xliv. 8-15, xlvii.-lii., lxxv.-lxxvi., lxxxiii. The final editor of the work wrote in the name of Baruch, son of Neriah.

The above critical analyses were attacked and rejected by Clemen (Stud. und Krit., 1898, 211 sqq.). He fails, however, in many cases to recognize the difficulties at issue, and those which cannot be ignored he sets down to the conflicting apocalyptic traditions, on which the author was obliged to draw for his subject-matter. Though Ryssel (Kautzsch, Apok. u. Pseud. des A. T. ii. 409) has followed Clemen, neither has given any real explanation of the disorder of the book as it stands at present. Beer (op. cit.) agrees that xxxvi.-xl. and liii.-lxx. are of different authorship from the rest of the book and belong to the earlier date.

The critical analyses mentioned earlier were challenged and dismissed by Clemen (Stud. und Krit., 1898, 211 sqq.). However, he often fails to recognize the underlying issues, and those he cannot overlook he attributes to the conflicting apocalyptic traditions that the author had to draw upon for the content. Although Ryssel (Kautzsch, Apok. u. Pseud. des A. T. ii. 409) followed Clemen's lead, neither provided a genuine explanation for the disarray of the book as it currently exists. Beer (op. cit.) concurs that xxxvi.-xl. and liii.-lxx. are written by different authors than the rest of the book and date from an earlier time.

Relation to 4 Ezra.—The affinities of this book and 4 Ezra are so numerous (see Charles, op. cit. 170-171) that Ewald and Ryle assumed identity of authorship. But their points of divergence are so weighty (see op. cit. pp. lxix.-lxxi.) that this view cannot be sustained. Three courses still remain open. If we assume that both works are composite, we shall perforce admit that some of the constituents of 4 Ezra are older than the latest of Baruch, and that other constituents of Baruch are decidedly older than the remaining ones of 4 Ezra. On the other hand, if we assume unity of authorship, it seems impossible to arrive at finality on the chronological relations of these two works. Langen, Hilgenfeld, Wieseler, Stähelin, Renan, Hausrath, Drummond, Dillmann, Rosenthal, Gunkel, have maintained on various grounds the priority of 4 Ezra; and Schürer, Bissell, Thomson, Deane, Kabisch, De Faye, Wellhausen, and Ryssel the priority of Baruch on grounds no less convincing.

Relation to 4 Ezra.—The similarities between this book and 4 Ezra are so numerous (see Charles, op. cit. 170-171) that Ewald and Ryle believed they were written by the same author. However, their differences are significant (see op. cit. pp. lxix.-lxxi.) which means this idea cannot be supported. Three options are still available. If we assume that both works are compilations, we have to accept that some parts of 4 Ezra are older than the latest sections of Baruch, and that certain parts of Baruch are definitely older than some parts of 4 Ezra. On the other hand, if we assume a single authorship, it seems impossible to reach a conclusive understanding of the chronological relationships between these two works. Langen, Hilgenfeld, Wieseler, Stähelin, Renan, Hausrath, Drummond, Dillmann, Rosenthal, and Gunkel have all argued for the precedence of 4 Ezra for various reasons, while Schürer, Bissell, Thomson, Deane, Kabisch, De Faye, Wellhausen, and Ryssel have argued convincingly for the precedence of Baruch.

Relation to Rabbinical Literature.—A very close relation subsists between our book and rabbinical literature. Indeed in some instances the parallels are so close that they are almost word for word. The description of the destruction of Jerusalem by angels in vi.-viii. is found also in the Pesikta Rabbati 26 (ed. Friedmann 131a). By means of this passage we are, as Ginzberg has shown, able to correct the corrupt reading "the holy Ephod" (vi. 7), אפוד הקודש into "the holy Ark," i.e. ארון הקודש. What might be taken as poetic fancies in our text are recounted as historical facts in rabbinical literature. Thus the words (x. 18):

Relation to Rabbinical Literature.—There is a very close connection between our book and rabbinical literature. In fact, in some cases, the similarities are so striking that they are nearly identical. The description of the destruction of Jerusalem by angels in vi.-viii. is also found in the Pesikta Rabbati 26 (ed. Friedmann 131a). Through this passage, we can, as Ginzberg has demonstrated, correct the corrupted reading "the holy Ephod" (vi. 7), אֵפֹוד הַקֹּֽדֶשׁ to "the holy Ark," i.e. ארון הקודש. What might be viewed as poetic expressions in our text are presented as historical events in rabbinical literature. Thus the words (x. 18):

"And ye priests, take ye the keys of the sanctuary,

"And you priests, take the keys of the sanctuary,

And cast them into the height of heaven,

And throw them up to the sky,

And give them to the Lord and say:

And give them to the Lord and say:

'Guard Thine own house; for lo we are found unfaithful stewards,'"

'Take care of your own home; for we have been unfaithful caretakers.'

are given in various accounts of the fall of Jerusalem. (See Ta'anith, 29a; Pesiḳt. R., loc. cit.; Yalquṭ Shim‛oni on Is. xxi; Aboth of Rabbi Nathan vii.). Even the statement that the bodies of Sennacherib's soldiers were burned while their garments and armour remained unconsumed has its parallel in Sanh. 94a.

are mentioned in various accounts of the fall of Jerusalem. (See Ta'anith, 29a; Pesiḳt. R., loc. cit.; Yalquṭ Shim‛oni on Is. xxi; Aboth of Rabbi Nathan vii.). Even the claim that the bodies of Sennacherib's soldiers were burned while their clothing and armor remained untouched is similar to what is found in Sanh. 94a.

Integrity of the Book.—In lxxvii. 19 it is said that Baruch wrote two epistles, one to the nine and a half tribes and the other to the two and a half at Babylon. The former is found in lxxviii.-lxxxvi.; the latter is lost, but is probably preserved either wholly or in part in the Book of Baruch, iii. 9-iv. 29 (see Charles, op. cit. pp. lxv.-lxvii). On the other hand, it is not necessary to infer from lxxv. that an account of Baruch's assumption was to be looked for in the book.

Integrity of the Book.—In lxxvii. 19 it states that Baruch wrote two letters, one to the nine and a half tribes and the other to the two and a half in Babylon. The first letter is found in lxxviii.-lxxxvi.; the second is lost, but is likely preserved either fully or partially in the Book of Baruch, iii. 9-iv. 29 (see Charles, op. cit. pp. lxv.-lxvii). However, it isn’t necessary to conclude from lxxv. that there was supposed to be an account of Baruch's assumption in the book.

Authorities.—The literature is fully cited in Schürer, Gesch. iii. 223-232, and R. H. Charles, Apocalypse of Baruch, pp. xxx.-xliii. Ginzberg's article in the Jewish Encyclopaedia, ii. 551-556, is a fresh and valuable contribution.

Authorities.—The literature is fully cited in Schürer, Gesch. iii. 223-232, and R. H. Charles, Apocalypse of Baruch, pp. xxx.-xliii. Ginzberg's article in the Jewish Encyclopaedia, ii. 551-556, is a new and valuable contribution.

Rest of the Words of Baruch. This book was undoubtedly written originally by a Jew but was subsequently revised by a Christian, as has been shown by Kohler in the Jewish Quarterly Review (1893), pp. 407-409. It passed under a double name in the Abyssinian Church, where it was known both as "the Rest of the Words of Baruch" and "the Rest of the Words of Jeremiah." Its Greek name is the latter—τὰ παραλειπόμενα Ἱερεμίου προφήτου. It has been preserved in Greek, Ethiopic, Armenian and Slavonic. The Greek was first printed at Venice in 1609, next by Ceriani in 1868 in his Mon. Sacra, v. 11-18; by Harris, The Rest of the Words of Baruch, in 1889; and Bassiliev, Anec. Graeco-Byzantina, i. 308 sqq. (1893). The book begins like the Syriac Apocalypse of Baruch with an account of the removal of the sacred vessels of the Temple before its capture by the Chaldees. Baruch remains in Jerusalem and Jeremiah accompanies the Exiles to Babylon. After 66 years' exile Jeremiah brings back the Jews to Jerusalem, but refuses to admit such as had brought with them heathen wives. Then follows a vision of Jeremiah which is Christian.

The Remaining Words of Baruch. This book was definitely originally written by a Jew but was later revised by a Christian, as demonstrated by Kohler in the Jewish Quarterly Review (1893), pp. 407-409. It was known by two names in the Abyssinian Church, referred to as both "the Rest of the Words of Baruch" and "the Rest of the Words of Jeremiah." Its Greek title is the latter—τὰ παραλειπόμενα Ἱερεμίου προφήτου. It has been preserved in Greek, Ethiopic, Armenian, and Slavonic. The Greek text was first printed in Venice in 1609, then again by Ceriani in 1868 in his Mon. Sacra, v. 11-18; by Harris in The Rest of the Words of Baruch in 1889; and by Bassiliev in Anec. Graeco-Byzantina, i. 308 sqq. (1893). The book starts like the Syriac Apocalypse of Baruch with a story about the removal of the sacred vessels from the Temple before it was captured by the Chaldees. Baruch remains in Jerusalem while Jeremiah travels with the exiles to Babylon. After 66 years in exile, Jeremiah returns the Jews to Jerusalem but refuses to allow those who brought back heathen wives. Then follows a vision of Jeremiah that has Christian elements.

Harris regards the book in its present form as an eirenicon addressed to the Jews by a Christian after the rebellion of Bar Cochba (Barcochebas) and written about 136. Though the original work was dependent on the Apocalypse of Baruch it cannot have been written much before the close of the 1st cent. A.D. Its terminus ad quem is at present indeterminable.

Harris sees the book as a peace offering to the Jews from a Christian after the Bar Kochba rebellion, written around 136. While the original work relied on the Apocalypse of Baruch, it likely wasn't written until close to the end of the 1st century A.D. Its endpoint is currently unclear.

(R. H. C.)

(R. H. C.)

[1] Toy (Jewish Enc. ii. 556) thinks that the "them" in ii. 4, 5 may be a scribal slip and that we have here not the confession of the Palestinian remnant and that of the Exiles, but simply a juxtaposition of two forms of confession.

[1] Toy (Jewish Enc. ii. 556) believes that the "them" in ii. 4, 5 might be a writing error and that what we have here isn’t the confession of the Palestinian remnant and the Exiles, but just a comparison of two types of confession.

[2] In ii. 25 we have the word ἀποστολή with the extraordinary meaning of "plague" as in Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 36.

[2] In ii. 25 we have the word mission with the unusual meaning of "plague," similar to Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 36.

[3] Ryssel has adopted Charles's restoration of the text in these passages and practically also in xliv. 12. but without acknowledgment.

[3] Ryssel has taken on Charles's edits to the text in these sections and also in xliv. 12, but without giving credit.

BARUGO, a town on the north coast of the province of Leyte, island of Leyte, Philippine Islands, on Carigara Bay. Pop. (1903) 12,360. It exports large quantities of hemp and copra, and imports rice, petroleum, and cotton-goods.

BARUGO, a town on the north coast of Leyte province, island of Leyte, Philippines, located on Carigara Bay. Population (1903) 12,360. It exports a lot of hemp and copra and imports rice, oil, and cotton goods.

BARWANI, a native state of India, in the Bhopawar agency in central India. It lies in the Satpura mountains, south of the Nerbudda. Area, 1178 sq. m.; pop. (1901) 76,136. Many of the inhabitants are Bhils. The chief, whose title is Rana, is a Rajput of the Sisodhyia clan, connected with the Udaipur family. Though the family lost most of its possessions during the Mahratta invasion in the 14th century, it never became tributary to any Malwa chief. The forests are under an English official. The town of Barwani is situated near the left bank of the Nerbudda. The population in 1901 was 6277.

BARWANI, a native state of India, located in the Bhopawar agency in central India. It sits in the Satpura mountains, south of the Narmada River. Area: 1,178 sq. miles; population (1901) 76,136. Many of the residents are Bhils. The chief, titled Rana, is a Rajput from the Sisodhyia clan, linked to the Udaipur family. Although the family lost most of its land during the Mahratta invasion in the 14th century, it never became a tributary to any Malwa chief. The forests are managed by an English official. The town of Barwani is located near the left bank of the Narmada. The population in 1901 was 6,277.

BARYATINSKY, ALEXANDER IVANOVICH, Prince (1814-1879), Russian soldier and governor of the Caucasus, was privately educated, entered the school of the ensigns of the Guard in his seventeenth year and, on the 8th of November 1833, received his commission of cornet in the Life Guards of the cesarevich Alexander. In 1835 he served with great gallantry in the Caucasus, and on his return to St Petersburg was rewarded with a gold sword "for valour." On the first of January 1836 he was attached to the suite of Alexander, and in 1845 was again ordered off to the Caucasus and again most brilliantly distinguished himself, especially in the attack on Shamyl's stronghold, for which he received the order of St George. In 1846 he assisted [v.03 p.0456]Fieldmarshal Paskievich to suppress the Cracow rising. From 1848 to 1856 he took a leading part in all the chief military events in the Caucasus, his most notable exploits being his victory at Mezeninsk in 1850 and his operations against Shamyl at Chechen. His energetic and at the same time systematic tactics inaugurated a new era of mountain warfare. On the 6th of January 1853 he was appointed adjutant-general and, on July 5th of the same year, chief of the staff. In 1854 he took part in the brilliant Kürük Dere campaign. On the 1st of January 1856 he became commander-in-chief of the Caucasian army, and, subsequently, governor of the Caucasus. As an administrator he showed himself fully worthy of his high reputation. Within three years of his appointment, the whole of the eastern Caucasus was subdued and the long elusive Shamyl was taken captive. Baryatinsky also conquered many of the tribes of the western Caucasus dwelling between the rivers Laba and Byelaya. For these fresh services he was created a fieldmarshal. But his health was now entirely broken by his strenuous labours, and on the 6th of December 1862 he was, at his own request, relieved of his post. He spent the last days of his life abroad and died at Geneva, after forty-eight years of active service.

BARYATINSKY, ALEXANDER IVANOVICH, Prince (1814-1879), was a Russian soldier and governor of the Caucasus. He received a private education and joined the Guards' ensign school at seventeen. On November 8, 1833, he got his commission as a cornet in the Life Guards of the cesarevich Alexander. In 1835, he fought bravely in the Caucasus and was awarded a gold sword "for valor" upon returning to St. Petersburg. On January 1, 1836, he became part of Alexander's entourage, and in 1845, he returned to the Caucasus, where he excelled, particularly during the attack on Shamyl's stronghold, earning the order of St. George. In 1846, he helped Fieldmarshal Paskievich suppress the Cracow rising. From 1848 to 1856, he played a key role in major military events in the Caucasus, with notable achievements including his victory at Mezeninsk in 1850 and operations against Shamyl at Chechen. His dynamic yet systematic tactics marked a new era in mountain warfare. On January 6, 1853, he was appointed adjutant-general, and on July 5 of that year, he became chief of staff. In 1854, he participated in the impressive Kürük Dere campaign. On January 1, 1856, he was named commander-in-chief of the Caucasian army and later became governor of the Caucasus. As an administrator, he proved to be fully deserving of his high reputation. Within three years of his appointment, he subdued the entire eastern Caucasus and captured the elusive Shamyl. Baryatinsky also conquered many tribes in the western Caucasus between the Laba and Byelaya rivers. For these efforts, he was promoted to fieldmarshal. However, by this time, his health was severely affected by his hard work, and on December 6, 1862, he requested to be relieved of his position. He spent his final days abroad and passed away in Geneva after forty-eight years of active service.

See A. L. Zisserman, Fieldmarshal Prince A. I. Baryatinski (Russ.) (Moscow, 1888-1891).

See A. L. Zisserman, Fieldmarshal Prince A. I. Baryatinski (Russ.) (Moscow, 1888-1891).

BARYE, ANTOINE LOUIS (1796-1875), French sculptor, was born in Paris on the 24th of September 1796. Like many of the sculptors of the Renaissance he began life as a goldsmith. After studying under Bosio, the sculptor, and Gros, the painter, he was in 1818 admitted to the École des Beaux Arts. But it was not till 1823, when he was working for Fauconnier, the goldsmith, that he discovered his real bent from watching the wild beasts in the Jardin des Plantes, making vigorous studies of them in pencil drawings worthy of Delacroix and then modelling them in sculpture on a large or small scale. In 1831 he exhibited his "Tiger devouring a Crocodile," and in 1832 had mastered a style of his own in the "Lion and Snake." Thenceforward Barye, though engaged in a perpetual struggle with want, exhibited year after year these studies of animals—admirable groups which reveal him as inspired by a spirit of true romance and a feeling for the beauty of the antique, as in "Theseus and the Minotaur" (1847), "Lapitha and Centaur" (1848), and numerous minor works now very highly valued. Barye was no less successful in sculpture on a small scale, and excelled in representing animals in their most familiar attitudes. As examples of his larger work we may mention the Lion of the Column of July, of which the plaster model was cast in 1839, various lions and tigers in the gardens of the Tuileries, and the four groups—War, Peace, Strength, and Order (1854). In 1852 he cast his bronze "Jaguar devouring a Hare." The fame he deserved came too late to the sculptor. He was made professor at the museum in 1854, and was elected to the Academy of Fine Arts in 1868. He died on the 25th of June 1875. The mass of admirable work left to us by Barye entitles him to be regarded as the greatest artist of animal life of the French school, and as the creator of a new class of art which has attracted such men as Frémiet, Peter, Cain, and Gardet, who are regarded with justice as his worthiest followers.

BARYE, ANTOINE LOUIS (1796-1875), a French sculptor, was born in Paris on September 24, 1796. Like many Renaissance sculptors, he started his career as a goldsmith. After studying under the sculptor Bosio and the painter Gros, he was admitted to the École des Beaux Arts in 1818. However, it wasn't until 1823, while working for the goldsmith Fauconnier, that he found his true passion by observing wild animals in the Jardin des Plantes, creating powerful studies of them in pencil drawings that were worthy of Delacroix, and then sculpting them both large and small. In 1831, he showcased his "Tiger devouring a Crocodile," and by 1832, he had developed his own style with the "Lion and Snake." From then on, Barye, despite continually struggling with poverty, exhibited year after year his stunning animal studies, which reveal his inspiration from true romanticism and an appreciation for the beauty of the antique, as seen in "Theseus and the Minotaur" (1847), "Lapitha and Centaur" (1848), and many other highly valued smaller works. Barye was equally successful in small-scale sculptures, excelling in depicting animals in their most familiar poses. Notable examples of his larger work include the Lion of the Column of July, with the plaster model cast in 1839, various lions and tigers in the Tuileries gardens, and the four groups—War, Peace, Strength, and Order (1854). In 1852, he cast his bronze "Jaguar devouring a Hare." Unfortunately, the recognition he deserved came too late for the sculptor. He became a professor at the museum in 1854 and was elected to the Academy of Fine Arts in 1868. He died on June 25, 1875. The remarkable body of work left by Barye establishes him as the greatest artist of animal life in the French school and as the creator of a new genre of art that has inspired notable artists like Frémiet, Peter, Cain, and Gardet, who are rightly considered his most worthy successors.

Authorities.—Emile Lamé, Les Sculpteurs d'animaux; M. Barye (Paris, 1856); Gustave Planche, "M. Barye," Revue des deux mondes (July 1851); Théophile Silvestre, Histoires des artistes vivants (Paris, 1856); Arsène Alexandre, "A. L. Barye," Les Artistes célèbres, ed. E. Muntz (Paris, 1889) (with a bibliog.); Charles DeKay, Life and Works of A. L. Barye (1889), published by the Barye Monument Assoc. of New York; Jules Claretie, Peintres et sculpteurs contemporains (1882); Roger Ballu, L'Œuvre de Barye (1890); Charles Sprague Smith, Barbizon Days (1903).

Authorities.—Emile Lamé, The Sculptors of Animals; M. Barye (Paris, 1856); Gustave Planche, "M. Barye," Review of Two Worlds (July 1851); Théophile Silvestre, Stories of Living Artists (Paris, 1856); Arsène Alexandre, "A. L. Barye," Famous Artists, ed. E. Muntz (Paris, 1889) (with a bibliography); Charles DeKay, Life and Works of A. L. Barye (1889), published by the Barye Monument Association of New York; Jules Claretie, Contemporary Painters and Sculptors (1882); Roger Ballu, The Work of Barye (1890); Charles Sprague Smith, Barbizon Days (1903).

(H. Fr.)

(H. Fr.)

BARYTES, a widely distributed mineral composed of barium sulphate (BaSO4). Its most striking feature and the one from which it derives its name barytes, barite (from the Greek βαρύς heavy) or heavy spar, is its weight. Its specific gravity of 4.5 is about twice as great as that of salt and of many other colourless, transparent and glassy minerals not unlike barytes in general appearance. The mineral is usually found in a state of considerable chemical purity, though small amounts of strontium and calcium sulphates may isomorphously replace the barium sulphate: ammonium sulphate is also sometimes present, whilst clay, silica, bituminous matter, &c., may be enclosed as impurities.

BARYTES, is a common mineral made up of barium sulfate (BaSO4). Its most notable characteristic, which is also the reason for its name barytes, barite (from the Greek heavy meaning heavy) or heavy spar, is its density. With a specific gravity of 4.5, it is about twice as heavy as salt and many other colorless, transparent, and glassy minerals that look somewhat like barytes. This mineral is typically found in a state of high chemical purity, although small amounts of strontium and calcium sulfates can isomorphically replace the barium sulfate; ammonium sulfate is sometimes present as well, and impurities like clay, silica, and bituminous matter may also be included.

Crystal forms of barytes.

Crystals of barytes are orthorhombic and isomorphous with the strontium and lead sulphates (celestite and anglesite); they are usually very perfectly developed and present great variety of form. The simplest are rhomb-shaped tables (fig. 1) bounded by the two faces of the basal pinacoid (c) and the four faces of the prism (m); the angle between the prism-faces (mm) is 78° 23′, whilst that between c and m is 90°. The mineral has a very perfect cleavage parallel to the faces c and m, and the cleavage surfaces are perfectly smooth and bright. The crystals of prismatic habit represented in figs. 2 and 3 are bounded by the domes d and f and the basal pinacoid c; fig. 4 is a plan of a still more complex crystal. Twinning is represented only by twin-lamellae, which are parallel to the planes m and f and are of secondary origin, having been produced by pressure.

Crystals of barytes are orthorhombic and share a similar structure with strontium and lead sulfates (celestite and anglesite); they are typically well-developed and come in a wide range of forms. The simplest ones are rhomb-shaped plates (fig. 1) made up of two faces of the basal pinacoid (c) and four faces of the prism (m); the angle between the prism faces (mm) is 78° 23′, while the angle between c and m is 90°. The mineral has excellent cleavage along the faces c and m, and the cleavage surfaces are perfectly smooth and shiny. The prismatic crystals shown in figs. 2 and 3 are bounded by the domes d and f and the basal pinacoid c; fig. 4 shows a plan of an even more complex crystal. Twinning is indicated only by twin-lamellae, which are parallel to the planes m and f and are of secondary origin, having formed due to pressure.

Crystals of barytes may be transparent and colourless, or white and opaque, or of a yellow, brown, bluish or greenish colour. Well developed crystals are extremely common, but the mineral occurs also in a granular, earthy, or stalactitic condition. It is known as cawk in the Derbyshire lead mines. The "crested" or "cock's comb" barytes occurs as rounded aggregations of thin lamellar crystals.

Crystals of barytes can be transparent and colorless, white and opaque, or come in yellow, brown, blue, or green shades. Well-formed crystals are very common, but the mineral can also be found in a granular, earthy, or stalactitic form. In the Derbyshire lead mines, it’s referred to as cawk. The "crested" or "cock's comb" barytes appears as rounded clusters of thin, layered crystals.

Barytes is of common occurrence in metalliferous veins, especially those which yield ores of lead and silver; some of the largest and most perfect crystals of colourless barytes were obtained from the lead mines near Dufton in Westmorland. It is found also in beds of iron ore, and the haematite mines of the Cleator Moor district in west Cumberland have yielded many extremely fine crystals, specimens of which may be seen in all mineral collections. In the neighbourhood of Nottingham, and other places in the Midlands, barytes forms a cementing material in the Triassic sandstones; amber-coloured crystals of the same mineral are found in the fuller's earth at Nutfield in Surrey; and the septarian nodules in London Clay contain crystals of barytes as well as of calcite. Crystals are found as a rarity in the amygdaloidal cavities of igneous rocks.

Barytes is commonly found in metalliferous veins, particularly those that produce lead and silver ores; some of the largest and most perfect colorless barytes crystals were sourced from the lead mines near Dufton in Westmorland. It is also present in beds of iron ore, and the haematite mines in the Cleator Moor area of west Cumberland have produced many exceptional crystals, some of which can be found in mineral collections everywhere. In the Nottingham area and other parts of the Midlands, barytes acts as a cementing material in the Triassic sandstones; amber-colored crystals of the same mineral are located in the fuller's earth at Nutfield in Surrey; and the septarian nodules in London Clay contain crystals of barytes as well as calcite. Crystals are occasionally found in the amygdaloidal cavities of igneous rocks.

Artificially prepared crystals of barytes may be obtained by allowing a solution of a soluble barium salt to diffuse slowly into a solution of a soluble sulphate. Barium chloride is present in some natural waters, and when this is the case the interaction of sulphates results in a deposition of barytes, as has occurred in the pipes and water-boxes of the Newcastle-on-Tyne coal mines.

Artificially made barytes crystals can be produced by letting a solution of a soluble barium salt slowly mix with a solution of a soluble sulfate. Barium chloride is found in some natural waters, and when this happens, the interaction with sulfates leads to the formation of barytes, as seen in the pipes and water boxes of the coal mines in Newcastle-on-Tyne.

Commercially, barytes is used in the preparation of barium compounds, as a body for certain kinds of paper and cloth, and as a white pigment ("permanent white"). The finely powdered and washed mineral is too crystalline and consequently of insufficient opacity to be used alone as a paint, and is therefore mixed with "white lead," of which material it is also used as an adulterant.

Commercially, barytes is used to make barium compounds, as a filler for certain types of paper and fabric, and as a white pigment ("permanent white"). The finely powdered and processed mineral is too crystalline and lacks enough opacity to be used alone as paint, so it's mixed with "white lead," which it is also used to adulterate.

(L. J. S.)

(L. J. S.)

Barytocalcite crystal.

BARYTOCALCITE, a rare mineral found only at Alston Moor in Cumberland, where it occurs as diverging groups of white transparent crystals lining cavities in the Mountain Limestone. [v.03 p.0457]The crystals belong to the monoclinic system and are usually prismatic or blade-shaped in habit. The hardness is 4, and the sp. gr. 3.65. There are perfect cleavages parallel to the prism faces inclined at an angle of 73° 6′, and a less perfect cleavage parallel to the basal plane, the angle between which and the prism faces is 77° 6′; the angles between these three cleavages thus approximate to the angles (74° 55′) between the three cleavages of calcite, and there are other points of superficial resemblance between these two minerals. Chemically, barytocalcite is a double salt of barium and calcium carbonates, BaCa(CO3)2, thus differing from the orthorhombic bromlite (q.v.) which is an isomorphous mixture of the two carbonates.

BARYTOCALCITE, is a rare mineral found only at Alston Moor in Cumberland, where it appears as diverging groups of white transparent crystals lining cavities in the Mountain Limestone. [v.03 p.0457]The crystals belong to the monoclinic system and are usually prismatic or blade-shaped. The hardness is 4, and the specific gravity is 3.65. There are perfect cleavages parallel to the prism faces at an angle of 73° 6′, and a less perfect cleavage parallel to the basal plane, with an angle of 77° 6′ between it and the prism faces; the angles between these three cleavages closely match the angles (74° 55′) between the three cleavages of calcite, and there are other superficial similarities between these two minerals. Chemically, barytocalcite is a double salt of barium and calcium carbonates, BaCa(CO3)2, which distinguishes it from the orthorhombic bromlite (q.v.), an isomorphous mixture of the two carbonates.

(L. J. S.)

(L. J. S.)

BARYTONE, or Baritone (Ital. baritono, from Gr. βαρύτονος, deep sounding), a musical term for the male voice whose range lies between those of the tenor and of the bass—a high bass rather than a low tenor; also the name of an obsolete stringed instrument like the viola da Gamba, and of the small B or C saxhorn.

BARYTONE, or Baritone singer (Ital. baritono, from Gr. βαρύτονος, deep sounding), is a musical term for the male voice that has a range between the tenor and bass—more of a high bass than a low tenor. It also refers to an outdated stringed instrument similar to the viola da gamba, as well as the small B or C saxhorn.

BASALT, in petrology, one of the oldest rock names, supposed to be derived from an Ethiopian word basal, signifying a stone which yields iron; according to Pliny, the first basalts were obtained in Ethiopia. In current usage the term includes a large variety of types of igneous rock belonging to the basic subdivision, dark in colour weathering to brown, and comparatively rich in magnesia and iron. Some basalts are in large measure glassy (tachylites), and many are very fine grained and compact; but it is more usual for them to exhibit porphyritic structure, showing larger crystals of olivine, augite or felspar in a finely crystalline groundmass. Olivine and augite are the commonest porphyritic minerals in basalts, the former green or yellowish (and weathering to green or brown serpentine), the latter pitch-black. Porphyritic plagioclase felspars, however, are also very common, and may be one or two inches in length, though usually not exceeding a quarter of an inch; when fresh they are dark grey with smooth lustrous cleavage surfaces; when decomposed they become turbid, and assume grey or greenish shades. Basaltic lavas are frequently spongy or pumiceous, especially near their surfaces; and, in course of time, the steam cavities become filled with secondary minerals such as calcite, chlorite and zeolites. Another characteristic of this group of rocks is the perfection with which many of them show prismatic or columnar jointing, a structure often called "basaltic jointing."

BASALT, in petrology, is one of the oldest rock names, believed to come from an Ethiopian word basal, meaning a stone that yields iron; according to Pliny, the first basalts were found in Ethiopia. Today, the term refers to a wide variety of igneous rocks that fall under the basic category, typically dark in color and weathering to brown, and are relatively rich in magnesia and iron. Some basalts are mostly glassy (tachylites), and many are very fine-grained and compact; however, it's more common for them to have a porphyritic structure, featuring larger crystals of olivine, augite, or feldspar in a finely crystalline matrix. Olivine and augite are the most common porphyritic minerals found in basalts, with olivine appearing green or yellowish (weathering to green or brown serpentine), while augite is pitch-black. Porphyritic plagioclase feldspars are also quite common and can be one or two inches long, though they usually don’t exceed a quarter of an inch; when fresh, they are dark grey with smooth, shiny cleavage surfaces; when weathered, they turn cloudy and take on grey or greenish hues. Basaltic lavas are often spongy or pumiceous, especially near the surface; over time, the steam cavities fill with secondary minerals like calcite, chlorite, and zeolites. Another defining feature of this group of rocks is their impressive prismatic or columnar jointing, a structure often referred to as "basaltic jointing."

The minerals of basaltic rocks have a fairly uniform character throughout the whole group. In microscopic section the olivine is pale green or colourless, and is very frequently more or less altered to serpentine. The secondary mineral begins to form upon the surfaces and along the cracks of the olivine, gradually producing a mesh-work in the interstices of which small kernels of olivine remain; and when the process is completed the mesh structure persists in the resulting pseudomorph, giving a clear indication as to its history. The augite is mostly brown, often with a purplish tinge, hardly at all dichroic, but frequently showing zonal or hour-glass structure, and various types of twinning. It weathers to chlorite, uralite, calcite, &c. The plagioclase felspar, if fresh, is transparent and appears simple in ordinary light, but when polarized breaks up into a series of bars of different colours owing to its complex twinned structure. Practically all varieties of this mineral from anorthite to albite are known to occur in basalt, but by far the commonest species are bytownite and labradorite. Weathering destroys the limpid character of the fresh mineral, producing turbid pseudomorphs containing epidote, calcite, white micas, kaolin, &c. When these minerals occur as phenocrysts their crystalline outlines may be very perfect (though, especially in the olivine, corrosion and partial resorption may give rise to rounded or irregular forms).

The minerals found in basaltic rocks have a fairly consistent nature across the entire group. In microscopic sections, olivine appears pale green or colorless, and is often altered to serpentine. The secondary mineral starts to form on the surfaces and along the cracks of the olivine, gradually creating a mesh-like structure in which small pieces of olivine remain; and once the process is complete, the mesh structure remains in the resulting pseudomorph, clearly indicating its history. Augite is mostly brown, sometimes with a purplish tint, and exhibits very little dichroism, but often shows zonal or hour-glass structures and various types of twinning. It weathers to chlorite, uralite, calcite, etc. Plagioclase feldspar, if fresh, is transparent and appears simple under regular light, but when polarized, it breaks up into a series of bars of different colors due to its complex twinned structure. Almost all varieties of this mineral, from anorthite to albite, can be found in basalt, but by far the most common types are bytownite and labradorite. Weathering diminishes the clear character of the fresh mineral, creating cloudy pseudomorphs that contain epidote, calcite, white micas, kaolin, etc. When these minerals appear as phenocrysts, their crystalline outlines can be very distinct (though, especially in olivine, corrosion and partial resorption may result in rounded or irregular shapes).

In the groundmass, or second generation of crystal, not only are the ingredients smaller, but their crystals are less perfect; yet in many basalts small lath-shaped felspars and minute prisms of augite, densely crowded together, form the matrix. With these there may be a greater or less amount of brown, isotropic glass. Olivine rarely occurs as an ingredient of the groundmass. In the vitreous basalts sometimes very few crystallized minerals are observable; the greater part of the rock is a dark brown glassy material, almost opaque even in the thinnest sections, and generally charged with black grains of magnetite, skeleton crystals of augite or felspar, spherulites, perlitic cracks, or steam vesicles. In other basaltic rocks no glassy material appears, but the whole mass is thoroughly crystallized; rocks of this nature are generally known to British petrologists as dolerites (q.v.). Till recent years it was widely believed by continental geologists that the pre-Tertiary basalts differed so fundamentally from their Tertiary and recent representatives that they were entitled to be regarded as a distinct class. For the older rocks the names anamesite, diabase porphyrite, diabas-mandel-stein, or melaphyre were used, and are still favoured by many writers, to indicate varieties and states of more or less altered basalts and dolerites, though no longer held to differ in any essential respects from the better preserved basalts. Still older is the term trap, which is derived from a Swedish word meaning "a stair," for in many places superposed sheets of basalt weather with well-marked step-like or terraced features. This designation is still used as a general term for the whole suite of basaltic rocks by many geologists and travellers (e.g. trap-dikes, the "traps" of the Deccan).

In the groundmass, or second generation of crystals, not only are the components smaller, but their crystals are also less perfect; however, in many basalts, small lath-shaped feldspars and tiny prisms of augite, tightly packed together, form the matrix. Along with these, there may be varying amounts of brown, isotropic glass. Olivine rarely appears as a part of the groundmass. In vitreous basalts, sometimes very few crystallized minerals can be seen; most of the rock consists of a dark brown, glassy material, nearly opaque even in the thinnest sections, and typically filled with black grains of magnetite, skeleton crystals of augite or feldspar, spherulites, perlitic cracks, or steam vesicles. In other basaltic rocks, no glassy material is present, but the entire mass is completely crystallized; rocks of this type are commonly referred to by British petrologists as dolerites (q.v.). Until recently, continental geologists widely believed that pre-Tertiary basalts differed so fundamentally from their Tertiary and recent counterparts that they should be viewed as a distinct class. For the older rocks, terms like anamesite, diabase porphyrite, diabas-mandel-stein, or melaphyre were used, and many writers still prefer these to indicate varieties and states of more or less altered basalts and dolerites, though they are no longer considered to differ in any essential way from the better-preserved basalts. Even older is the term trap, which comes from a Swedish word meaning "a stair," because in many locations, stacked sheets of basalt erode with well-defined step-like or terraced features. This term is still utilized as a general designation for the entire range of basaltic rocks by many geologists and travelers (e.g. trap-dikes, the "traps" of the Deccan).

In the early years of the 19th century a great controversy convulsed the geological world as to the origin of the older basalts or "floetz-traps." Werner, the Saxon mineralogist, and his school held them to be of aqueous origin, the chemical precipitates deposited in primeval seas, but Hutton and a number of French geologists maintained that they were really volcanic rocks emitted by craters now extinct (see Geology: Historical).

In the early 1800s, a major debate shook the geological community over the origins of the older basalts, also known as "floetz-traps." Werner, a mineralogist from Saxony, and his followers believed these rocks were formed from chemical deposits in ancient oceans. Meanwhile, Hutton and several French geologists argued that they were actually volcanic rocks produced by now-extinct craters (see Earth Science: Historical).

Of the less common minerals of basalt, a few may be mentioned. Black hornblende, dark brown in thin sections, and often corroded, is not uncommon, especially in intrusive basalts. Hypersthene occurs also, usually replacing olivine. Black mica (biotite) is not infrequently to be seen. Sapphire, garnet and zircon are rare. Minerals of the felspathoid group occur in a large number of basaltic rocks; nepheline and leucite are the most common, but haüyne is occasionally present. If nepheline entirely replaces felspar, the rock is known as nepheline-basalt; if the replacement is only partial the term nepheline-basanite is used. Similarly there are leucite-basalts and leucite-basanites. The nepheline is in small six-sized prisms, and usually cannot be detected with the unaided eye. Even with the help of the microscope nepheline basalts are not always easy to determine, as the crystals may be exceedingly small and imperfect, and they readily decompose into analcite and zeolites. In some cases only the presence of an anisotropic substance, with weak double refraction and readily attacked by acids (the so-called "nephelinitoid"), can be made out. This substance may be imperfectly crystallized nepheline, or a peculiar glass which is rich in soda. Most nepheline basalts are fine grained, very dark coloured rocks, and belong to the Tertiary period. They are fairly common in some parts of Germany and occur also in Tripoli, Asia Minor, Montana, Cape Verde Islands, &c. Leucite-basalts contain small rounded crystals of leucite in place of plagioclase felspar. Rocks of this group are well known in the Eifel, and other volcanic districts in Germany, also in Bohemia, Italy, Java, Montana, Celebes, &c. The minerals haüyne, nosean, sodalite and melilite tend to occur with some frequency in nepheline and leucite-basalts, though rare in ordinary basalts. Melilite, a lime-alumina-silicate, is characteristic of certain very basic rocks, the melilite-basalts. It is pale yellow or colourless in thin sections, and yields peculiar and characteristic dark blue polarization colours. This rare group of rocks is known to occur in Bohemia, Swabia and South Africa. Perofskite, in small dark brown cubic crystals, is a constant accessory in these rocks. The augite is usually violet coloured, and shows zonal and hour-glass structures. Green augite may occur in the nepheline-basalts, and aegerine (soda-iron-augite) is occasionally found in them.

Of the less common minerals found in basalt, a few are worth mentioning. Black hornblende, which appears dark brown in thin sections and is often corroded, is not uncommon, especially in intrusive basalts. Hypersthene is also present, typically replacing olivine. Black mica (biotite) is frequently observed. Sapphire, garnet, and zircon are rare. Minerals from the felspar group are found in many basaltic rocks; nepheline and leucite are the most common, while haüyne is occasionally present. If nepheline completely replaces feldspar, the rock is called nepheline-basalt; if the replacement is only partial, it's referred to as nepheline-basanite. The same applies to leucite-basalts and leucite-basanites. Nepheline appears as small six-sided prisms and usually can't be seen without a microscope. Even with a microscope, it's not always easy to identify nepheline basalts since the crystals can be very small and imperfect, and they quickly break down into analcite and zeolites. In some cases, the only detectable material is an anisotropic substance, with weak double refraction that is easily affected by acids (the so-called "nephelinitoid"). This may be poorly crystallized nepheline or an unusual glass high in soda. Most nepheline basalts are fine-grained, very dark rocks from the Tertiary period. They are relatively common in certain areas of Germany and are also found in Tripoli, Asia Minor, Montana, the Cape Verde Islands, etc. Leucite-basalts feature small rounded leucite crystals instead of plagioclase feldspar. Rocks from this group are well known in the Eifel and other volcanic regions in Germany, as well as in Bohemia, Italy, Java, Montana, Celebes, etc. The minerals haüyne, nosean, sodalite, and melilite are more commonly found in nepheline and leucite-basalts, although they are rare in typical basalts. Melilite, a lime-alumina-silicate, is characteristic of certain very basic rocks known as melilite-basalts. It appears pale yellow or colorless in thin sections and exhibits distinctive dark blue polarization colors. This rare rock group is known to occur in Bohemia, Swabia, and South Africa. Perovskite, in small dark brown cubic crystals, is a constant accessory in these rocks. The augite is typically violet and shows zonal and hour-glass structures. Green augite may be found in nepheline-basalts, and aegerine (soda-iron-augite) is occasionally present.

The distribution of basalts is world-wide; and in some places [v.03 p.0458]they occur in immense masses, and cover great areas. In Washington, Oregon, and Idaho many thousands of square miles are occupied by basaltic-lava flows. In the Sandwich Islands and Iceland they are the prevalent lavas; and the well-known columnar jointed basalts of Skye, Staffa, and Antrim (Giant's Causeway) form a southward extension of the Icelandic volcanic province, with which they are connected by the similar rocks of the Faeroe Islands. In the Deccan in India great basaltic lava fields are known; and Etna and Vesuvius emit basaltic rocks. In older geological periods they were not less common; for example, in the Carboniferous in Scotland.

The distribution of basalts is global, and in some locations [v.03 p.0458]they exist in vast amounts and cover large areas. In Washington, Oregon, and Idaho, basaltic lava flows occupy many thousands of square miles. In the Sandwich Islands and Iceland, these are the dominant lavas; and the well-known columnar jointed basalts of Skye, Staffa, and Antrim (Giant's Causeway) extend southward from the Icelandic volcanic region, connected by similar rocks found in the Faeroe Islands. In the Deccan region of India, there are extensive basaltic lava fields; and both Etna and Vesuvius produce basaltic rocks. In earlier geological periods, they were equally common, such as during the Carboniferous period in Scotland.

(J. S. F.)

(J. S. F.)

BASCOM, JOHN (1827- ), American educationalist and philosophical writer, was born at Genoa, New York, on the 1st of May 1827. He graduated at Williams College in 1849 and at the Andover Theological Seminary in 1855, was professor of rhetoric at Williams College from 1855 to 1874, and was president of the University of Wisconsin and professor of mental and moral philosophy there from 1874 to 1887. In 1887-1891 and in 1901-1903 he was lecturer in sociology, and in 1891-1901 professor of economics in Williams College. He retired in 1903. Among his publications may be mentioned: Aesthetics (1862); Philosophy of Rhetoric (1865); Science, Philosophy and Religion (1871); Philosophy of English Literature (1874); Philosophy of Religions (1876); Problems in Philosophy (1885); The New Theology (1891); Social Theory (1895); Evolution and Religion (1896); Growth of Nationality in the United States (1899); and God and His Goodness (1901).

BASCOM, JOHN (1827- ), American educator and philosophical writer, was born in Genoa, New York, on May 1, 1827. He graduated from Williams College in 1849 and from Andover Theological Seminary in 1855. He was a professor of rhetoric at Williams College from 1855 to 1874 and served as president of the University of Wisconsin and professor of mental and moral philosophy there from 1874 to 1887. In 1887-1891 and again in 1901-1903, he was a lecturer in sociology, and from 1891 to 1901, a professor of economics at Williams College. He retired in 1903. Some of his publications include: Aesthetics (1862); Philosophy of Rhetoric (1865); Science, Philosophy and Religion (1871); Philosophy of English Literature (1874); Philosophy of Religions (1876); Problems in Philosophy (1885); The New Theology (1891); Social Theory (1895); Evolution and Religion (1896); Growth of Nationality in the United States (1899); and God and His Goodness (1901).

BASE. (1) (Fr. bas, Late Lat. bassus, low; cf. Gr. βαθύς) an adjective meaning low or deep, and so mean, worthless, or wicked. This sense of the word has sometimes affected the next, which is really distinct. (2) (Gr. βάσις, strictly "stepping," and so a foundation or pedestal) a term for a foundation or starting point, used in various senses; in sports, e.g. hockey and baseball; in geometry, the line or face on which a figure or solid stands; in crystallography, e.g. "basal plane"; in surveying, in the "base line," an accurately measured distance between the points from which the survey is conducted; in heraldry, in the phrase "in base," applied to any figure or emblem placed in the lowest part of a shield.

BASE. (1) (Fr. bas, Late Lat. bassus, low; cf. Gr. deep) an adjective meaning low or deep, and therefore mean, worthless, or wicked. This meaning of the word has sometimes influenced the next one, which is actually distinct. (2) (Gr. basis, literally "stepping," and so a foundation or pedestal) a term for a foundation or starting point, used in various contexts; in sports, e.g. hockey and baseball; in geometry, the line or face that a figure or solid stands on; in crystallography, e.g. "basal plane"; in surveying, in the "base line," an accurately measured distance between the points from which the survey is conducted; in heraldry, in the phrase "in base," applied to any figure or emblem placed in the lowest part of a shield.

In chemistry the term denotes a substance which combines with an acid to form a salt. In inorganic chemistry such compounds are almost invariably oxides or hydroxides, and water in eliminated during the combination; but in organic chemistry many compounds exist, especially ammonia derivatives, which directly combine with acids. Chemical bases are consequently antithetical to acids; and an acid is neutralized by a base with the production of a salt. They reverse certain colour reactions of acids, e.g. turn red litmus blue; this is termed an "alkaline reaction."

In chemistry, the term refers to a substance that reacts with an acid to create a salt. In inorganic chemistry, these compounds are typically oxides or hydroxides, with water being produced during the reaction. However, in organic chemistry, there are many compounds, particularly ammonia derivatives, that can directly react with acids. Thus, chemical bases oppose acids; an acid is neutralized by a base, resulting in the formation of a salt. They also reverse some color reactions associated with acids, e.g. turning red litmus paper blue; this is called an "alkaline reaction."

In architecture the "base" is the lowest member of a column or shaft. In Egyptian and Greek architecture it is the raised slab in stone or cement on which the primitive timber column was placed, to keep it dry. Afterwards it was always reproduced in Egypt, even although the column, being in stone, no longer required it; a custom probably retained because, being of a much larger circumference than the lower part of the column, it gave increased stability. In Assyrian architecture, where it served to carry wooden posts or columns, it took the form of a large torus moulding with enrichments. In Persian architecture the base was much higher than in any other style, and was elaborately carved. In primitive Greek work the base consisted of the stone plinth as found in Crete and Tiryns, and of three small steps at Mycenae. In archaic Greek work it has already disappeared in the Doric order, but in the Ionic and Corinthian orders it is more or less richly moulded, the most elaborate examples being those found in the temple of Apollo at Branchidae in Milesia. For the contour of the mouldings see Orders. The Roman orders all have the favourite design known as the Attic base. Romanesque bases were rude but vigorous copies of the old classic base, and were often decorated with projections or spurs (Fr. griffes) at the angles of the square dies, thus connecting them with the square base. In the Early English style, these spurs followed the conventional design of the period, and about the same time the mouldings were deeply sunk and occasionally cut downwards, so that they would have held water if used externally. Later, the base becomes less bold in treatment, but much more complex in its contours, and in the 15th century is given an unusual height with two stages, the lower one constituting a kind of plinth, which is sometimes known as the ground table, or the base course.

In architecture, the "base" is the lowest part of a column or shaft. In Egyptian and Greek architecture, it’s the raised slab made of stone or cement that the early wooden column was placed on to keep it dry. It was later always made in Egypt, even though the stone column no longer needed it, probably because it was wider than the bottom part of the column, which added stability. In Assyrian architecture, where it supported wooden posts or columns, it took the form of a large torus molding with decorative features. In Persian architecture, the base was much taller than in any other style and had elaborate carvings. In early Greek work, the base included a stone plinth as seen in Crete and Tiryns, along with three small steps in Mycenae. In archaic Greek work, it had already disappeared in the Doric order, but in the Ionic and Corinthian orders, it is generally more or less elaborately molded, with the most intricate examples found in the temple of Apollo at Branchidae in Milesia. For the outline of the moldings, see Orders. The Roman orders all feature the popular design known as the Attic base. Romanesque bases were rough but strong copies of the old classic base, often decorated with projections or spurs (Fr. griffes) at the corners of the square bases, linking them to the square base. In the Early English style, these spurs followed the traditional design of the time, and around the same period, the moldings were set deeply and sometimes cut downwards, so they would hold water if used outside. Later, the base becomes less bold in design but much more complex in shape, and in the 15th century, it is given an unusual height with two levels, the lower one acting as a kind of plinth, sometimes called the ground table or the base course.

A Base Court (Fr. basse cour, i.e. the lower court), is the first open space within the gates of a castle. It was used for exercising cavalry, and keeping live stock during a siege. (See Enceinte).

A trial court (Fr. basse cour, i.e. the lower court) is the first open area inside the gates of a castle. It was used for cavalry training and for keeping livestock during a siege. (See Pregnant).

The Base of a Wall or Ground Table, in architecture, is the mouldings round a building just above ground; they mostly consist of similar members to those above described and run round the buttresses. The flat band between the plinth and upper mouldings is frequently panelled and carved with shields, as in Henry VII. Chapel at Westminster.

Wall Base or Ground Table, in architecture, refers to the moldings around a building just above the ground; they usually consist of similar elements to those mentioned above and extend around the buttresses. The flat band between the plinth and upper moldings is often paneled and carved with shields, like in Henry VII Chapel at Westminster.

BASE-BALL (so-called from the bases and ball used), the national summer sport of the United States, popular also throughout Canada and in Japan. Its origin is obscure. According to some authorities it is derived from the old English game of rounders (q.v.), several variations of which were played in America during the colonial period; according to other authorities, its resemblance to rounders is merely a coincidence, and it had its origin in the United States, probably at Cooperstown, New York, in 1839, when it is said, Abner Doubleday (later a general in the U.S. army) devised a scheme for playing it. About the beginning of the 19th century a game generally known as "One Old Cat" became popular with schoolboys in the North Atlantic states; this game was played by three boys, each fielding and batting in turn, a run being scored by the batsman running to a single base and back without being put out. Two Old Cat, Three Old Cat, and Four Old Cat were modifications of this game, having respectively four, six, and eight players. A development of this game bore the name of town-ball and the Olympic Town-Ball Club of Philadelphia was organized in 1833. Matches between organized base-ball clubs were first played in the neighbourhood of New York, where the Washington Baseball Club was founded in 1843. The first regular code of rules was drawn up in 1845 by the Knickerbocker Baseball Club and used in its matches with the Gotham Eagle and Empire clubs of New York, and the Excelsior, Putnam, Atlantic and Eckford clubs of Brooklyn. In 1858 the first National Association was organized, and, while its few simple laws were generally similar to the corresponding rules of the present code, the ball was larger and "livelier," and the pitcher was compelled to deliver it with a full toss, no approach to a throw being allowed. The popularity of the game spread rapidly, resulting in the organization of many famous clubs, such as the Beacon and Lowell of Boston, the Red Stockings of Cincinnati, the Forest City of Cleveland and the Maple Leaf of Guelph, but owing to the sharp rivalry between the foremost teams, semi-professionalism soon crept in, although in those days a man who played for a financial consideration always had some other means of livelihood, as the income to be derived from playing ball in the summer time was not enough to support him throughout the year. In spite of its popularity, the game acquired certain undesirable adjuncts. The betting and pool selling evils became prominent, and before long the game was in thorough disrepute. It was not only generally believed that the matches were not played on their merits, but it was known that players themselves were not above selling contests. At that time many of the journals of the day foretold the speedy downfall of the sport. A convention of those interested financially and otherwise in the game, was held in 1867 in Philadelphia, and an effort was made to effect a reformation. That the sport even then was by no means insignificant can be seen from the fact that in that convention some 500 organizations were represented. While the work done at the convention did not accomplish all that was expected, it did produce certain reforms, and the sport grew rapidly thereafter both in the eastern and in the middle western part of the United States. In the next five years the [v.03 p.0459]interest in the game became so great that it was decided to send a representation of American base-ball players to England; and two clubs, the Bostons, who were the champions that year, and the Athletics, former champions, crossed the Atlantic and played several exhibition games with each other. While successful in exciting some interest, the trip did not succeed in popularizing base-ball in Great Britain. Fifteen years later two other nines of representative American base-ball players made a general tour of Australia and various other countries, completing their trip by a contest in England. This too, however, had little effect, and later attempts to establish base-ball in England have likewise been unsuccessful. But in America the game continued to prosper. The first entirely professional club was the Cincinnati Red Stockings (1868). Two national associations were formed in 1871, one having jurisdiction over professional clubs and the other over amateurs. In 1876 was formed the National League, of eight clubs under the presidency of Nicholas E. Young, which contained the expert ball-players of the country. There were so many people in the United States who wanted to see professional base-ball that this organization proved too small to furnish the desired number of games, and hence in 1882 the American Association was formed. For a time it seemed that there would be room for both organizations; but there was considerable rivalry, and it was not until an agreement was made between the two organizations that they were able to work together in harmony. They practically controlled professional base-ball for many years, although there were occasional attempts to overthrow their authority, the most notable being the formation in 1890 of a brotherhood of players called the Players' League, organized for the purpose of securing some of the financial benefits accruing to the managers, as well as for the purpose of abolishing black-listing and other supposed abuses. The Players' League proved not sufficiently strong for the task, and fell to pieces. For some years the National League consisted of twelve clubs organized as stock companies, representing cities as far apart as Boston and St Louis, but in 1900 the number was reduced to eight, namely, Boston, Brooklyn, Chicago, Cincinnati, New York, Pittsburg, Philadelphia and St Louis. Certain aggressive and dissatisfied elements took advantage of this change to organize a second great professional association under the presidency of B. B. Johnson, the "American League," of eight clubs, six of them in cities where the National League was already represented. Most of the clubs of both leagues flourish financially, as also do the many minor associations which control the clubs of the different sections of the country, among which are the Eastern League, the American Association, Western League, Southern Association, New England League, Pacific League and the different state leagues. Professional base-ball has not been free from certain objectionable elements, of which the unnecessary and rowdyish fault-finding with the umpires has been the most evident, but the authorities of the different leagues have lately succeeded, by strenuous legislation, in abating these. Of authorities on base-ball, Henry Chadwick (d. 1908) is the best known.

BASEBALL (named for the bases and ball used) is the national summer sport of the United States, also popular in Canada and Japan. Its origin is unclear. Some experts believe it comes from the old English game of rounders (q.v.), which had various versions played in America during the colonial period. Other experts think the similarities to rounders are just coincidental and that it originated in the United States, likely in Cooperstown, New York, in 1839, when Abner Doubleday (who later became a general in the U.S. Army) is said to have created a way to play it. Around the early 19th century, a game commonly known as "One Old Cat" became popular among schoolboys in the Northeastern states; this game involved three boys, with each taking turns fielding and batting, scoring a run by running to a single base and back without being tagged out. Variants like Two Old Cat, Three Old Cat, and Four Old Cat included four, six, and eight players, respectively. A version of this game called town-ball was developed, and the Olympic Town-Ball Club of Philadelphia was formed in 1833. Organized baseball matches first occurred near New York, where the Washington Baseball Club was established in 1843. The first official set of rules was created in 1845 by the Knickerbocker Baseball Club for games against the Gotham Eagle and Empire clubs of New York, and the Excelsior, Putnam, Atlantic, and Eckford clubs of Brooklyn. In 1858, the first National Association was created, and although its simple rules were quite similar to today's regulations, the ball was larger and “livelier,” and pitchers had to deliver it with a full toss, without any throwing motion. The game's popularity grew quickly, leading to the formation of well-known clubs like the Beacon and Lowell of Boston, the Red Stockings of Cincinnati, the Forest City of Cleveland, and the Maple Leaf of Guelph, but intense competition among top teams soon led to semi-professionalism. However, players at that time always had another source of income, as summer baseball wasn't enough to support them year-round. Despite its popularity, the game faced several undesirable issues. Betting and gambling became rampant, and soon the sport was viewed poorly. It was widely believed that games weren't played fairly, and players were known to sell matches. Many newspapers at the time predicted the sport's downfall. In 1867, a convention of people interested in the game was held in Philadelphia in an attempt to reform it. The fact that around 500 organizations were represented shows that the sport was significant even then. While the convention didn’t achieve everything hoped, it did result in some reforms, and the sport grew rapidly in both the eastern and midwestern United States. Over the next five years, interest in the game skyrocketed, leading to the decision to send a representative group of American baseball players to England, with the Bostons (the year’s champions) and the Athletics (former champions) crossing the Atlantic to play several exhibition games against each other. While it sparked some interest, it didn’t lead to widespread popularity for baseball in Great Britain. Fifteen years later, another team of American players toured Australia and other countries, ending their trip with a game in England, but that had little impact as well. Meanwhile, baseball in America continued to thrive. The first entirely professional team was the Cincinnati Red Stockings in 1868. Two national associations were established in 1871, one overseeing professional clubs and the other amateurs. In 1876, the National League formed with eight clubs under Nicholas E. Young's presidency, featuring the country’s best players. There were so many people in the United States eager to see professional baseball that the organization quickly became too small to meet demand, leading to the American Association's creation in 1882. For a while, it appeared that both organizations could coexist, but rivalry was significant, and it wasn’t until they reached an agreement that they could work together smoothly. They effectively controlled professional baseball for many years, although there were occasional attempts to challenge their authority, the most notable being the formation of a players' union called the Players' League in 1890, aiming to secure some financial benefits for players and eliminate practices like blacklisting. However, the Players' League was not strong enough and fell apart. For several years, the National League comprised twelve clubs organized as stock companies, representing cities from Boston to St. Louis, but in 1900, that number was reduced to eight: Boston, Brooklyn, Chicago, Cincinnati, New York, Pittsburgh, Philadelphia, and St. Louis. Some dissatisfied factions took this opportunity to form a second major professional association, the “American League,” led by B.B. Johnson, with eight clubs, six located in cities already represented by the National League. Most clubs in both leagues are financially successful, as are various minor leagues controlling clubs in different regions, including the Eastern League, American Association, Western League, Southern Association, New England League, Pacific League, and various state leagues. Professional baseball has not been without its issues, notably the unnecessary and rowdy criticism of umpires, which has been the most apparent. However, league authorities have recently succeeded in reducing these problems through strict regulations. Among baseball authorities, Henry Chadwick (d. 1908) is the most well-known.

Amateur base-ball, in its organized phase, is played mostly by school and university clubs as well as those of athletic associations. The first college league was formed in 1879 and comprised Harvard, Princeton, Amherst, Brown and Dartmouth, Yale joining a year later. The Eastern College League, with Columbia, Harvard, Princeton and Yale, followed in 1887. This was afterwards dissolved and at present the most important universities of the eastern states are members of no league, although such organizations exist in New England and different parts of the west and south. Amateur base-ball has progressed along the same lines as professional, although the college playing rules formerly differed in certain minor points from those of the professional leagues.

Amateur baseball, in its organized form, is mostly played by school and university clubs, as well as athletic associations. The first college league was established in 1879 and included Harvard, Princeton, Amherst, Brown, and Dartmouth, with Yale joining the following year. The Eastern College League, featuring Columbia, Harvard, Princeton, and Yale, was formed in 1887. This league was later dissolved, and currently, the major universities in the eastern states are not part of any league, though such organizations do exist in New England and various areas in the west and south. Amateur baseball has evolved similarly to professional baseball, even though the college playing rules used to differ in some minor aspects from those of the professional leagues.

The following is a general description of the field and of the manner in which the game is played, but as the game has become highly complicated, situations may arise in playing in which general statements do not strictly hold. Any smooth, level field about 150 yds. long and 100 yds. broad will serve for a base-ball ground. Upon this field is marked out with white chalk a square, commonly called the diamond, smooth, like a cricket pitch, the sides of which measure 30 yds. each, and the nearest corner of which is distant about 30 yds. from the limit of the field. This corner is marked with a white plate, called the home-base or plate, five-sided in shape, two of the sides being 1 ft. long and that towards the pitcher 17 in. At the other three corners and attached to pegs are white canvas bags 15 in. square filled with some soft material, and called, beginning at the right as one looks towards the field, first-base, second-base and third-base respectively. The lines from home-base to first, and from home to third are indefinitely prolonged and called foul-lines. The game is played by two sides of nine men each, one of these taking its turn at the bat while the other is in the field endeavouring, as provided by certain rules, to put out the side at bat. Each side has nine turns, or innings, at bat, unless the side last at bat does not need its ninth innings in order to win; a tie at the end of the ninth innings makes additional innings necessary. A full game usually takes from 1½ to 2 hrs. to play. Three batsmen are put out in each innings, and the side scoring the greatest number of runs (complete encircling of the bases without being put out) wins. A runner who is not put out but fails to reach home-base does not score a run, but is "left on base."

The following is a general overview of the field and how the game is played, but since the game has become quite complicated, situations may come up during play where general statements don’t apply. Any flat, level field about 150 yards long and 100 yards wide will work as a baseball field. On this field, a square, commonly called the diamond, is marked out with white chalk, smooth like a cricket pitch, with each side measuring 30 yards, and the nearest corner is about 30 yards from the edge of the field. This corner is marked with a white plate, called home base or plate, which has five sides—two sides measuring 1 foot and the side facing the pitcher measuring 17 inches. At the other three corners, attached to pegs, are white canvas bags that are 15 inches square, filled with some soft material, and these are called, starting from the right when looking towards the field, first base, second base, and third base, respectively. The lines connecting home base to first base and from home to third base extend indefinitely and are known as foul lines. The game involves two teams of nine players each; one team takes its turn at bat while the other plays in the field, trying, according to specific rules, to get the batting team out. Each team has nine turns, or innings, at bat unless the team that's batting last doesn't need its ninth inning to win; if there's a tie at the end of the ninth inning, extra innings are played. A full game typically lasts from 1½ to 2 hours. Three batters get out in each inning, and the team that scores the most runs (by completely circling the bases without getting out) wins. A runner who isn’t out but fails to reach home base doesn’t score a run and is considered "left on base."

Implements of the Game.—The ball, which is 9-9¼ in. in circumference and weighs 5-5¼ oz., is made of yarn wound upon a small core of vulcanized rubber and covered with white leather, which may not be intentionally discoloured. The bat must be round, not over 2¾ in. in diameter at the thickest part, nor more than 42 in. in length. It is usually made of ash or some other hard wood, and the handle may be wound with twine. Three-cornered spikes are usually worn on the players' shoes. The catcher and first-baseman (v. infra) may wear a glove of any size on one hand; the gloves worn by all other players may not measure more than 14 in. round the palm nor weigh more than 10 oz.

Implements of the Game.—The ball, which is 9-9¼ inches in circumference and weighs 5-5¼ ounces, is made of yarn wrapped around a small core of vulcanized rubber and covered with white leather, which must not be intentionally stained. The bat must be round, no more than 2¾ inches in diameter at its thickest point, and no longer than 42 inches. It is typically made of ash or another type of hardwood, and the handle can be wrapped with twine. Players usually wear three-cornered spikes on their shoes. The catcher and first-baseman (v. infra) can wear a glove of any size on one hand; however, the gloves used by all other players cannot exceed 14 inches around the palm or weigh more than 10 ounces.

The Players.—The fielding side consists of (a) the pitcher and catcher, called the battery, (b) the first-baseman, second-baseman, third-baseman and short-stop, called infielders, and (c) the left-fielder, centre-fielder and right-fielder, called out-fielders.

The Players.—The fielding team consists of (a) the pitcher and catcher, known as the battery, (b) the first baseman, second baseman, third baseman, and shortstop, known as infielders, and (c) the left fielder, center fielder, and right fielder, known as outfielders.

The pitcher, who delivers the ball to the batsman, is the most important member of the side. In the act of pitching, which is throwing either over or underhand, he must keep one foot in contact with a white plate, called the pitcher's plate, 24 in. long and 6 in. wide, placed 60.5 ft. from the back of the home-base. Before 1875 the pitcher was obliged to deliver the ball with a full toss only, but about that time a disguised underhand throw, which greatly increased the pace, began to be used so generally that it was soon legalized, and the overhand throw followed as a matter of course. As long as the arm was held stiff no curve could be imparted to the flight of the ball in the air, but with the increase of pace came the possibility of doing this by a movement of the wrist as the ball left the hand, the twist thus given causing the ball, by the pressure on the air, to swerve to one side or the other, or downwards, according to the position of the hand and fingers as the ball is let go. The commonest of these swerving deliveries, and the first one invented, is the out-curve, the ball coming straight towards the batsman until almost within reach of his bat, when it suddenly swerves away from him towards the right, if he be right-handed. The other important curves are the incurve, shooting sharply to the left, and the drop, with their many variations, nearly every pitcher using some favourite curve. Change of pace, disguised as well as possible, is also an important part of pitching strategy, as well as variation of the delivery and the play upon the known weaknesses or idiosyncrasies of the batsman. Good control over the ball is a necessity, as four "balls" called by the umpire,—that is, balls not over the base, or over the base and not between the shoulder and knee of the batsman,—entitle the batsman to become a base-runner and take his first base. If the pitcher disregards the restrictions placed upon him by the rules (e.g. he may not, while in position, make a motion to deliver the ball to the batsman without actually [v.03 p.0460]delivering it, or to first-base, while that base is occupied by a runner, without completing the throw), he is said to have made a balk, which permits a base runner to advance a base. In fielding batted balls the pitcher takes all that come directly to him, especially slow ones which the other fielders cannot reach in time. One of his duties is to "back up" the first-baseman in order to stop balls thrown wide, and to cover first-base in place of the baseman whenever that player has to leave his base to field a ground ball. On occasion he also backs up other positions.

The pitcher, who throws the ball to the batter, is the most important player on the team. When pitching, which can be done overhand or underhand, he must keep one foot on a white plate called the pitcher's plate, which is 24 inches long and 6 inches wide, placed 60.5 feet from the back of home plate. Before 1875, pitchers had to throw the ball with a full toss only, but around that time, a sneaky underhand throw that significantly increased speed became popular, and it was soon made legal. The overhand throw followed naturally. As long as the pitcher kept his arm stiff, he couldn't put any curve on the ball's flight, but with increased speed came the ability to curve the ball by twisting the wrist as the ball left the hand. This twist caused the ball to move sideways or drop, depending on the position of the hand and fingers as it was released. The most common curve, and the first one invented, is the out-curve, where the ball travels straight toward the batter and then suddenly curves away to the right if the batter is right-handed. Other important curves include the incurve, which shoots sharply to the left, and the drop, along with their many variations, with nearly every pitcher having a favorite curve. Changing speeds while disguising it as much as possible is also a key part of pitching strategy, as well as varying the deliveries and exploiting the known weaknesses of the batter. Good control over the ball is essential, as four "balls" called by the umpire—that is, pitches not over the plate or pitches that are over the plate but not between the shoulders and knees of the batter—allow the batter to advance to first base. If the pitcher ignores the rules (for example, he cannot make a motion to pitch the ball to the batter without actually delivering it, or throw to first base while that base is occupied by a runner without completing the throw), it's called a balk, which allows a base runner to advance. When fielding batted balls, the pitcher handles all that come directly to him, especially slower ones that other fielders can't reach in time. One of his responsibilities is to "back up" the first baseman to stop wide throws and to cover first base when the baseman leaves to field a ground ball. Occasionally, he also supports other positions.

The catcher usually stands about 1 yd. behind the home plate, and he must never be more than 10 ft. behind the home plate when the pitcher delivers the ball to the batsman. He generally catches the ball from the pitcher before it strikes the ground, and, when a man of the opposing side has succeeded in getting to a base, must be on the alert to head this opponent off should he endeavour to steal the next base, i.e. run to it while the pitcher is delivering the ball to the batsman. For this reason the catcher must be a quick, strong and accurate thrower. As the catcher alone faces the whole field, he is able to warn the pitcher when to throw to a base in order to catch a runner napping off the base, and by secretly signalling to the pitcher (usually by means of signs with his fingers) he directs what kind of a ball is to be pitched, so that he may be in the proper position to receive the ball, be it high or low, to left or right. Some pitchers, however, prefer to reserve their choice of balls and therefore do the signalling themselves. The catcher wears a mask, a breast-pad, and a large glove, without which the position would be a very dangerous one.

The catcher usually stands about 1 yard behind home plate, and he must never be more than 10 feet behind home plate when the pitcher throws the ball to the batter. He typically catches the ball from the pitcher before it hits the ground, and when an opponent gets to a base, he needs to be ready to stop this player if he tries to steal the next base, that is, run to it while the pitcher is pitching to the batter. Because of this, the catcher must be a quick, strong, and accurate thrower. Since the catcher has a view of the entire field, he can alert the pitcher when to throw to a base to catch a runner napping off the base, and by signaling to the pitcher (usually with finger signs), he guides what type of pitch is thrown so that he can be in position to receive the ball, whether it’s high or low, to the left or the right. Some pitchers, however, prefer to keep their choice of pitches to themselves and signal directly. The catcher wears a mask, a chest protector, and a large glove, as the position would be very dangerous without these.

Base-ball Field. Diagram of Base-ball Field.

As every batsman upon hitting the ball must run for the first-base, the first-baseman must be a sure catch of balls thrown to head runners off, even those thrown too low, high or wide. A tall man is usually chosen for this position. The second-baseman usually stands about 30 ft. to the right of second-base and back of the line between the bases, and attends to balls batted to his side of the diamond. He also backs up any exposed position and must be ready to cover second-base whenever a runner tries to steal down from first-base, or whenever there is a runner on second-base, a duty which he shares with the short-stop, whose position corresponds to that of the second-baseman on the left side of the diamond. Short-stop must be a quick and accurate thrower and a lively fielder, as he is required to back up second- and third-base. Both he and the second-baseman must field ground balls cleanly and are often called upon to catch fly balls also. The requirements of third-baseman are very similar, but he must be an exceptionally good thrower, as he has the longest distance to throw to the first-base; and as he plays nearer to the batsman than do the second-baseman and the short-stop, the balls batted in his direction are apt to be faster and more difficult to field. One of the third-baseman's chief duties is to be ready to run in towards the batsman to field "bunts," i.e. balls blocked by allowing them to rebound from a loosely held bat. These commonly roll slowly in the direction of third-baseman, who, in order to get them to first-base in time to put the runner out, must run in, pick them up, usually with one hand, so as to be in position to throw without the loss of an instant, and "snap" them to the first-baseman, i.e. throw them underhand without taking time to raise his body to an erect position. Many of these bunts can be fielded either by the pitcher or, if they drop dead in front of the home-plate, by the catcher. The positions of the three outfielders can be seen on the diagram. Their duties consist of catching all "flies" batted over the heads of the infielders (i.e. high batted balls that have not touched the ground), stopping and returning ground balls that pass the infield, and backing up the baseman. The accompanying diagram indicates the territory roughly allotted to the different fielders. "Backing up" is a very prominent feature in fielding. Even the pitcher, for example, should run behind the first-baseman when the ball is thrown to the latter by another, in order to stop a widely thrown or missed ball, which, if allowed to pass, would enable the runner to gain one or more additional bases. Bases vacated by their basemen while fielding balls must often, also, be promptly covered by another player. The general rule of defence strategy is similar to that in cricket, namely, to have as many men as possible at the probable point of attack. There is usually an infield and an outfield captain for the special purpose of calling the name of the player who is to take a certain fly ball, to prevent collisions.

As every batter must run to first base after hitting the ball, the first baseman has to reliably catch throws aimed at stopping runners, even those that are too low, high, or wide. Typically, a tall player is selected for this position. The second baseman usually stands about 30 feet to the right of second base and behind the line between the bases, handling balls hit towards his side of the diamond. He also backs up any positions that are exposed and must be ready to cover second base whenever a runner tries to steal from first base, or when there is a runner on second base, a responsibility he shares with the shortstop, who plays on the left side of the diamond in a position similar to the second baseman's. The shortstop needs to be a quick and accurate thrower as well as an agile fielder, being responsible for backing up second and third base. Both he and the second baseman must cleanly field ground balls and are often called on to catch fly balls too. The requirements for the third baseman are quite similar, but he needs to be an exceptional thrower since he has the longest throw to first base. Because he plays closer to the batter than the second baseman and the shortstop do, the balls hit his way tend to come at him faster and are harder to field. One of the third baseman's main tasks is to be ready to run in towards the batter to field "bunts," which are balls that are blocked by letting them bounce off a loosely held bat. These usually roll slowly towards the third baseman, who must run in to pick them up, typically with one hand, so he can throw to first base quickly without losing a moment and "snap" them to the first baseman, meaning he throws them underhand without standing up straight. Many of these bunts can also be handled by the pitcher or, if they stop directly in front of home plate, by the catcher. The positions of the three outfielders can be seen in the diagram. Their responsibilities include catching all "flies" hit over the infielders' heads (i.e., high balls that haven't touched the ground), stopping and returning ground balls that get past the infield, and backing up the basemen. The diagram shows the areas roughly assigned to the different fielders. "Backing up" is a very important aspect of fielding. Even the pitcher should run behind the first baseman when the ball is thrown to him by another player to stop a wild throw or missed ball, which could allow the runner to take extra bases if it gets past. Bases left unoccupied by their basemen while fielding balls must also be promptly covered by another player. The general rule of defensive strategy is similar to that in cricket: to have as many players as possible at the likely point of attack. There is usually an infield and outfield captain whose role is to call out which player is supposed to catch a particular fly ball to prevent collisions.

The batsman stands three-quarters facing the pitcher within a parallelogram ("box") 6 ft. long and 4 ft. wide, the lines of which he may not overstep, on penalty of being declared out. His object is to get to first-base without being put out. This he may do in several ways. (1) He may make a "safe-hit," i.e. one that is "fair" but cannot be caught, or fielded in time to put him out. (2) He is entitled to first-base if the pitcher pitches four bad balls, at none of which he (the batsman) has struck. (3) He may be unavoidably struck by a pitched ball, in which case he is given his base. (4) He may, except in certain specified cases, after a third strike, if the catcher has failed to catch the third one, earn his base if he can reach it before the catcher can throw the ball to the first-baseman, and the first-baseman, with the ball in his possession, touch first-base. (5) He may reach his base by an error of some fielder, which may be either a muffed fly, a failure to stop and field a ground ball, a muffed thrown ball or a bad throw. Only balls batted within the foul-lines (see diagram) are fair. All others are "fouls," and the batsman cannot run on them. All foul-struck balls are called strikes until two strikes have been called by the umpire, after which fouls are not counted.

The batter stands sideways to the pitcher in a rectangular area (the "box") that is 6 feet long and 4 feet wide. He can't step outside the lines or he'll be called out. His goal is to reach first base without being tagged out. He can do this in several ways: (1) He can get a "safe-hit," meaning the hit is fair but can't be caught or fielded in time to get him out. (2) He gets to first base if the pitcher throws four bad balls that he doesn’t swing at. (3) If he gets hit by a pitched ball, he gets to take his base. (4) After a third strike, if the catcher misses catching the ball, he can earn first base if he reaches it before the catcher throws it to the first baseman, who then has to touch first base with the ball. (5) He can also reach first base due to an error by a fielder, like missing a fly ball, failing to field a ground ball, messing up a throw, or making a bad throw. Only hits that land within the foul lines (see diagram) are considered fair. Any others are "foul" balls, and the batter can’t run on those. All foul strikes are counted as strikes until two strikes have been called by the umpire; after that, fouls don’t count.

Batting, as in cricket, is a science by itself, although comparatively more stress is laid on fielding than in cricket. A good batsman can place the ball in any part of the field he chooses by meeting the ball at different angles. He may make a safe hit either by hitting the ball on the ground directly through the infield out of reach of the fielders, or so hard that it cannot be [v.03 p.0461]stopped. In the last case a failure to stop and field it does not count as an "error" (misplay) for the fielder, even though it came straight at him, the decision as to errors appearing in the score (v. infra) depending upon the official scorer of the home club. The batsman may also hit safely by placing the ball over the heads of the infielders, but not far enough to be caught by the outfielders, or over the heads of the outfielders themselves, or he may bunt successfully. A hit by which two bases can be made (without errors by opponents) is a "two-base-hit," one for three bases a "three-base-hit," and one for four bases a "home-run." The batsman may be put out in various ways. For example, he is out (1) if he fails to bat in the order named in the published batting-list; (2) if he fails to take his position within one minute after the umpire has summoned him; (3) if he makes a foul hit which is caught before it strikes the ground (a ball barely ticked by the bat ["foul-tip"] does not count); (4) if he oversteps the batting-lines; (5) if he intentionally obstructs or interferes with the catcher; (6) if he unsuccessfully attempts the third strike and the ball hits his person or is caught by the catcher (under certain conditions he is out whether the ball is so caught or not), or, not being caught, is thrown to first-base and held there by an opposing player before the batsman can get there; (7) if a fair ball be caught before striking the ground; (8) if any fair ball is fielded to first-baseman before he reaches the base. The batsman becomes a base-runner the moment he starts for first-base. He may, when he first reaches first-base, overrun his base (provided he turns to his right in returning to it) without risk of being put out, but thereafter can be put out by being touched with the ball in the hands of a fielder unless some part of the runner's person is in contact with the base. When a fair or foul ball struck by a batsman on his side is caught on the fly, he must retouch his base, or be put out if the baseman receives the ball before he can do so. A runner on first-base is forced to run to second as soon as a fair ball is batted, or, being on second with another runner on first, he is forced to run to third. This is called being "forced off his base." In such a situation the forced runner can be put out if the ball is thrown to the baseman at the next base before the runner gets there. He does not require to be touched with the ball. The runner on first is entitled, however, to advance to second without risk of being put out if the batsman becomes similarly entitled to first-base (e.g. on being unavoidably struck by the ball, or on four balls). Frequently, if the ball is batted to the infield while a runner is on first-base, the fielder tosses it to second-baseman, putting out the runner, and the second-baseman has still time to throw the ball to first-base ahead of the batsman, thus completing a "double play." Triple plays are sometimes made when there are runners on two or on all of the bases. Base-running is one of the important arts of base-ball play. A good base-runner takes as long a lead off the base as he dares, starts to run the moment the pitcher makes the first movement to deliver the ball, and if necessary throws himself with a slide, either feet or head first, on to the objective base, the reason for the slide being to make it more difficult for the baseman to touch the runner, having to stoop in order to do so, thus losing time. A base-runner is out if he interferes with an opponent while the latter is fielding a ball or if he is hit by a batted ball. An example of modern base-running is offered by the "double steal," carried out, e.g., when there is a runner on first-base and a runner on third-base. The runner on first starts for second leisurely in order to draw a throw to second by the catcher. If the catcher throws, the runner on third runs for the home-plate, the second-baseman returning the ball to the catcher in order to put the runner out. The play often results in a score, but the runner is frequently caught if the throws are quick and accurate, or when the catcher deceives the runner by throwing, not to the player at second-base, but to a man stationed for the purpose much nearer the home-plate, this man intercepting the ball and returning it to the catcher if the runner on third is attempting to score, or letting it pass to the player on second-base, if the runner on third does not make the attempt.

Batting, like in cricket, is a unique skill, though more emphasis is placed on fielding compared to cricket. A good batter can hit the ball anywhere on the field by meeting it at different angles. They can make a safe hit either by hitting the ball on the ground through the infield where the fielders can't reach it, or so hard that it can't be stopped. In the latter case, if the fielder fails to stop it, it isn’t counted as an "error" even if it came straight at them; the scoring of errors is determined by the official scorer of the home club. The batter can also hit safely by sending the ball over the infielders' heads but not far enough to be caught by the outfielders, or over the outfielders' heads, or they might successfully bunt. A hit that allows the batter to reach two bases (without errors from the opponents) is called a "two-base hit," three bases is a "three-base hit," and four bases is a "home run." The batter can be out in several ways: (1) if they fail to bat in the order listed; (2) if they don't take their position within a minute after being called by the umpire; (3) if they hit a foul ball that is caught before it hits the ground (a slight touch of the bat on the ball, referred to as "foul tip," doesn't count); (4) if they cross the batting lines; (5) if they deliberately block or interfere with the catcher; (6) if they fail in the third strike and either get hit by the ball or the catcher catches it (under certain conditions they can be out regardless of whether the ball is caught), or if it's not caught, and the ball is thrown to first base before they can reach it; (7) if a fair ball is caught before it hits the ground; (8) if any fair ball is thrown to the first baseman before the batter gets there. The batter becomes a base-runner the moment they head for first base. Once they reach first base, they can overrun it (as long as they turn right to return) without the risk of being put out, but afterward, they can be tagged out by a fielder unless some part of their body is touching the base. When a fair or foul ball hit by the batter is caught on the fly, they must retouch their base, or they are out if the baseman catches the ball first. A runner on first base has to run to second as soon as a fair ball is hit, or, if they are on second while there’s a runner on first, they must run to third. This is called being "forced off the base." In this situation, the forced runner can be tagged out if the ball is thrown to the baseman at the next base before they arrive. They don’t need to be touched with the ball. However, the runner on first can safely advance to second if the batter is also allowed to reach first base (for example, if they are hit by the ball or walk due to four balls). Often, if the ball is hit to the infield while there’s a runner on first, the fielder will throw it to the second baseman to get the runner out, and then the second baseman can throw it to first base ahead of the batter, completing a "double play." Triple plays can happen when there are runners on two or all bases. Base-running is a crucial skill in baseball. A good base-runner takes a long lead off the base, starts running as soon as the pitcher begins their delivery, and if needed, slides into the base—whether head or feet first—to make it harder for the baseman to tag them, as they have to bend down to touch the runner, losing time. A base-runner is out if they interfere with an opponent while they are fielding a ball or if they are hit by a batted ball. An example of modern base running includes the "double steal," which occurs when there is a runner on first and a runner on third. The runner on first moves to second slowly to draw a throw from the catcher. If the catcher throws, the runner on third dashes for home plate, and the second baseman throws the ball back to the catcher to try to get the runner out. This play can lead to a run scoring, but the runner can get caught if the throws are quick and precise, or if the catcher tricks the runner by throwing to another player closer to home plate who intercepts the ball and returns it to the catcher if the third runner tries to score, or lets it go to the player at second base if the third runner doesn’t attempt to score.

Team batting is the co-operation of batsman and base-runner. The commonest example is the "hit and run" play, e.g. when a runner is on first-base. After the runner has ascertained by a false start which infielder, whether second-baseman or short-stop, will cover second-base, the batsman signals to the runner that he will hit the next ball. As soon as the pitcher delivers the ball the runner starts for second and the batsman hits the ball to that part of the infield vacated by the fielder who has gone to receive the ball at second from the catcher. If successful this play results in a safe hit, while the runner not infrequently makes, not only second, but third-base as well. Another instance of team batting is when a runner is on third-base and the batsman signals that he will hit the next ball. This enables the runner to get a long start, making his scoring nearly certain if the batsman succeeds in hitting the ball fairly. If the ball is hit without the signal and consequent long start by the runner, the latter is frequently put out at the plate, as the infielder who fields the ball will ignore the batsman and throw the ball to the catcher to head off the runner and prevent a run being scored. In close games the "sacrifice-hit," a part of team batting, is an important element. It consists, when a runner is on base, of a hit by the batsman resulting in his own retirement but the advancement to the next base of the runner. The sacrifice-hit is most frequently a bunt, as this gives the batsman the best chance of reaching first-base safely, besides surely advancing the runner. Another kind of sacrifice-hit is a long fly to the outfield. On such a hit a runner on third-base (as on the other bases) must remain on the base until after the ball is caught, but the distance from the outfield to the home-plate is so great that a fast runner can generally beat the ball and score his run. When men are on bases, coaches are allowed to stand near first and third bases to direct the runners.

Team batting is all about the collaboration between the batter and the runner. The most common example is the "hit and run" play, for instance, when a runner is on first base. After the runner makes a false start to figure out which infielder, either the second baseman or shortstop, will cover second base, the batter signals to the runner that he will hit the next pitch. As soon as the pitcher throws the ball, the runner heads for second, and the batter hits the ball to the area of the infield left open by the fielder who has moved to take the throw at second base. If done right, this play results in a safe hit, and the runner often makes it to third base as well. Another example of team batting occurs when there's a runner on third base, and the batter signals that he will hit the next pitch. This allows the runner to get a good jump, making it almost guaranteed that he will score if the batter connects properly. If the batter hits the ball without signaling and the runner doesn't get a long start, the runner is often tagged out at home plate because the infielder who fields the ball will ignore the batter and throw to the catcher to cut off the runner and prevent a run. In tightly contested games, the "sacrifice hit," which is part of team batting, plays an important role. This occurs when a runner is on base and the batter hits the ball, resulting in his own out but allowing the runner to advance to the next base. The sacrifice hit is usually a bunt since it gives the batter the best chance of reaching first base safely while definitely advancing the runner. Another type of sacrifice hit is a long fly ball to the outfield. In this case, a runner on third base (as well as on the other bases) must stay on the base until the ball is caught, but since the distance from the outfield to home plate is so large, a fast runner can usually beat the throw and score. When there are runners on base, coaches are permitted to stand near first and third bases to give directions to the runners.

One umpire, who has absolute jurisdiction over all points of play, usually officiates in base-ball, but, in important games, two umpires are often employed, one of them standing behind the catcher and calling the good and bad balls pitched, and the other, posted in the infield, giving decisions on plays at the bases.

One umpire, who has complete authority over all aspects of the game, typically officiates in baseball, but for significant matches, two umpires are often used. One stands behind the catcher to call balls and strikes, while the other is positioned in the infield to make calls on plays at the bases.

In cases where the game is tied after nine innings, extra ones are played, the umpire "calling" a game when it becomes too dark to play. In case of rain, play is suspended by the umpire, who calls the game if the rain continues for one half-hour. Should play be permanently interrupted the game counts if five innings have been completed by each side.

In situations where the game is tied after nine innings, extra innings are played, with the umpire ending the game if it gets too dark to continue. If it rains, the umpire suspends play and calls the game if the rain lasts for half an hour. If play is permanently interrupted, the game counts only if both teams have completed five innings.

Scoring.—The base-ball score shows, in vertical columns, (1) how many times each player has been at bat (bases taken on balls and sacrifice-hits not counted); (2) how many runs he has scored; (3) how many base-hits he has made; (4) how many sacrifice-hits he has made; (5) how many opponents he has put out; (6) how many "assists," i.e. times he has assisted in putting out (e.g. stopping a ground ball and throwing it to first-base); (7) the number of errors he has made, wild pitches and "passed balls," i.e. not held by the catcher, as well as balks and bases on balls, not being counted as errors but set down under the regular columns, together with the record of stolen bases, extra long hits, double and triple plays, batsmen struck out by each pitcher, the number of men struck by each pitcher with the ball, the time of the game and the name of the umpire.

Scoring.—The baseball score displays, in vertical columns, (1) how many times each player has been at bat (walks and sacrifice hits are not included); (2) how many runs he has scored; (3) how many hits he has made; (4) how many sacrifice hits he has made; (5) how many opponents he has put out; (6) how many "assists," i.e. times he has helped in putting out (e.g. stopping a ground ball and throwing it to first base); (7) the number of errors he has made, wild pitches, and "passed balls," i.e. balls not caught by the catcher, as well as balks and walks, which are not counted as errors but recorded in the regular columns, along with stolen bases, extra-base hits, double and triple plays, the number of batters struck out by each pitcher, the number of batters hit by each pitcher, the game time, and the name of the umpire.

Careful record is kept of the batting, fielding, pitching and base-running averages of both professional and amateur players. To find the batting record of a player, divide the number of hits made by the number of times at bat. To find a fielding record, divide the number of accepted chances by the total chances, e.g. A.B. put 1188 men out, and assisted sixty-four times, while making fifteen errors; his fielding average is therefore 1252 divided by 1267, or 988, 1000 being perfect fielding.

A careful record is kept of the batting, fielding, pitching, and base-running averages of both professional and amateur players. To find a player's batting average, divide the number of hits by the number of at-bats. To find a fielding average, divide the number of accepted chances by the total chances, e.g. A.B. put out 1188 players and assisted sixty-four times, while making fifteen errors; his fielding average is therefore 1252 divided by 1267, or 988, with 1000 being a perfect fielding average.

See Spalding's Base-ball Guide, in Spalding's Athletic Library, published annually; How to Play Base-ball, by T. H. Murnane, Spalding's Athletic Library; The Book of School and College Sports, by R. H. Barbour (New York, 1904).

See Spalding's Base-ball Guide, in Spalding's Athletic Library, published every year; How to Play Base-ball, by T. H. Murnane, Spalding's Athletic Library; The Book of School and College Sports, by R. H. Barbour (New York, 1904).

(E. B.)

(E. B.)

BASEDOW, JOHANN BERNHARD (1723-1790), German educational reformer, was born at Hamburg on the 11th of September 1723, the son of a hairdresser. He was educated at the Johanneum in that town, where he came under the influence of the rationalist H. S. Reimarus (1694-1768), author of the [v.03 p.0462]famous Wolfenbütteler Fragmente, published by Lessing. In 1744 he went to Leipzig as a student of theology, but gave himself up entirely to the study of philosophy. This at first induced sceptical notions; a more profound examination of the sacred writings, and of all that relates to them, brought him back to the Christian faith, but, in his retirement, he formed his belief after his own ideas, and it was far from orthodox. He returned to Hamburg, and between 1749 and 1753 was private tutor in a nobleman's family in Holstein. Basedow now began to exhibit his really remarkable powers as an educator of the young, and acquired so much distinction that, in 1753, he was chosen professor of moral philosophy and belles-lettres in the academy of Sorö in Denmark. On account of his theological opinions he was in 1761 removed from this post and transferred to Altona, where some of his published works brought him into great disfavour with the orthodox clergy. He was forbidden to give further instruction, but did not lose his salary; and, towards the end of 1767, he abandoned theology to devote himself with the same ardour to education, of which he conceived the project of a general reform in Germany. In 1768 appeared his Vorstellung an Menschenfreunde für Schulen, nebst dem Plan eines Elementarbuches der menschlichen Erkenntnisse, which was strongly influenced by Rousseau's Émile. He proposed the reform of schools and of the common methods of instruction, and the establishment of an institute for qualifying teachers,—soliciting subscriptions for the printing of his Elementarwerk, where his principles were to be explained at length, and illustrated by plates. The subscriptions for this object amounted to 15,000 Talers (£2250), and in 1774 he was able to publish the work in four volumes. It contains a complete system of primary education, intended to develop the intelligence of the pupils and to bring them, so far as possible, into contact with realities, not with mere words. The work was received with great favour, and Basedow obtained means to establish an institute for education at Dessau, and to apply his principles in training disciples, who might spread them over all Germany. The name of Philanthropin which he gave to the institution appeared to him the most expressive of his views; and he engaged in the new project with all his accustomed ardour. But he had few scholars, and the success by no means answered his hopes. Nevertheless, so well had his ideas been received that similar institutions sprang up all over the land, and the most prominent writers and thinkers openly advocated the plan. Basedow, unfortunately, was little calculated by nature or habit to succeed in an employment which required the greatest regularity, patience and attention; his temper was intractable, and his management was one long quarrel with his colleagues. He resigned his directorship of the institution in 1778, and it was finally closed in 1793. Basedow died at Magdeburg on the 25th of July 1790.

BASEDOW, JOHANN BERNHARD (1723-1790), a German educational reformer, was born in Hamburg on September 11, 1723, the son of a hairdresser. He was educated at the Johanneum in that city, where he was influenced by the rationalist H. S. Reimarus (1694-1768), author of the famous Wolfenbütteler Fragmente, published by Lessing. In 1744, he went to Leipzig to study theology but became completely engrossed in philosophy. This initially led to skeptical thoughts; however, a deeper examination of sacred texts and related matters brought him back to Christianity, but in his own way, which was far from orthodox. He returned to Hamburg and worked as a private tutor for a noble family in Holstein from 1749 to 1753. During this time, Basedow demonstrated his exceptional abilities as an educator and gained enough recognition to be appointed professor of moral philosophy and belles-lettres at the academy of Sorö in Denmark in 1753. In 1761, due to his theological views, he was removed from this position and transferred to Altona, where his published works drew considerable ire from the orthodox clergy. Although he was forbidden to teach further, he retained his salary. By the end of 1767, he left theology to dedicate himself passionately to education, proposing a comprehensive reform of education in Germany. In 1768, he published Vorstellung an Menschenfreunde für Schulen, nebst dem Plan eines Elementarbuches der menschlichen Erkenntnisse, heavily influenced by Rousseau's Émile. He advocated for reforming schools and teaching methods and establishing an institute to train teachers, soliciting funds to print his Elementarwerk, which would thoroughly explain and illustrate his principles. He raised 15,000 Talers (£2250) for this purpose and published the work in four volumes in 1774. It outlines a complete system of primary education aimed at enhancing students' intelligence and connecting them with reality rather than just words. The work was well-received, allowing Basedow to establish a training institute in Dessau, applying his principles and training disciples to spread them throughout Germany. He named the institution Philanthropin, believing it best expressed his views, and he threw himself into the new project with his usual enthusiasm. However, he had few students, and the success was far from his expectations. Nevertheless, his ideas gained traction, leading to the emergence of similar institutions across the country, with many prominent writers and thinkers supporting the cause. Unfortunately, Basedow was not suited by nature or habit for a role requiring great regularity, patience, and attention; his temperament was difficult, leading to constant disputes with his colleagues. He resigned as director of the institution in 1778, and it ultimately closed in 1793. Basedow died in Magdeburg on July 25, 1790.

See H. Rathmann, Beiträge zur Lebensgeschichte Basedows (Magdeburg, 1791); J. C. Meyer, Leben, Charakter und Schriften Basedows (2 vols., Hamburg, 1791-1792); G. P. R. Hahn, Basedow und sein Verhaltnis zu Rousseau (Leipzig, 1885); A. Pinloche, Basedow et le philanthropinisme (Paris, 1890); C. Gössgen, Rousseau und Basedow (1891).

See H. Rathmann, Contributions to the Life Story of Basedow (Magdeburg, 1791); J. C. Meyer, Life, Character, and Writings of Basedow (2 vols., Hamburg, 1791-1792); G. P. R. Hahn, Basedow and His Relation to Rousseau (Leipzig, 1885); A. Pinloche, Basedow and Philanthropinism (Paris, 1890); C. Gössgen, Rousseau and Basedow (1891).

BASE FEE, in law, a freehold estate of inheritance which is limited or qualified by the existence of certain conditions. In modern property law the commonest example of a base fee is an estate created by a tenant in tail, not in possession, who bars the entail without the consent of the protector of the settlement. Though he bars his own issue, he cannot bar any remainder or reversion, and the estate (i.e. the base fee) thus created is determinable on the failure of his issue in tail. An example of this kind of estate was introduced by George Eliot into the plot of Felix Holt. Another example of a base fee is an estate descendible to heirs general, but terminable on an uncertain event; for example, a grant of land to A and his heirs, tenants of the manor of Dale. The estate terminates whenever the prescribed qualification ceases. An early meaning of base fee was an estate held not by free or military service, but by base service, i.e. at the will of the lord.

BASE FEE, in law, refers to a freehold estate of inheritance that is limited or conditioned based on certain requirements. In today's property law, the most common example of a base fee is an estate created by a tenant in tail, not currently in possession, who terminates the entail without getting approval from the protector of the settlement. While he affects his own descendants, he cannot affect any remainder or reversion, and the estate (i.e. the base fee) that results is subject to termination if his descendants in tail fail. An example of this type of estate was presented by George Eliot in the story of Felix Holt. Another example of a base fee is an estate that can be passed down to general heirs but ends upon an uncertain event; for example, a grant of land to A and his heirs, who are tenants of the manor of Dale. The estate ends whenever the specified condition is no longer met. A historical meaning of base fee was an estate held not by free or military service, but by base service, i.e. at the discretion of the lord.

BASEL (Fr. Bâle), one of the most northerly of the Swiss cantons, and the only one (save Schaffhausen) that includes any territory north of the Rhine. It is traversed by the chain of the Jura, and is watered by the Birs and the Ergolz, both tributaries (left) of the Rhine. It is traversed by railways from Basel to Olten (25 m.) and to Laufen (14¼ m.), besides local lines from Basel to Flühen (8 m.) for the frequented pilgrimage resort of Mariastein, and from Liestal to Waldenburg (8¾ m.), From 1803 to 1814 the canton was one of the six "Directorial" cantons of the Confederation. Since 1833 it has been divided into two half cantons, with independent constitutions.

BASEL (Fr. Bâle), is one of the northernmost Swiss cantons and the only one (except Schaffhausen) that has any territory north of the Rhine. The Jura mountain range runs through it, and it’s watered by the Birs and Ergolz rivers, both of which are left tributaries of the Rhine. The region is served by railways connecting Basel to Olten (25 m.) and Laufen (14¼ m.), along with local lines from Basel to Flühen (8 m.), which is a popular pilgrimage destination at Mariastein, and from Liestal to Waldenburg (8¾ m.). From 1803 to 1814, the canton was one of the six "Directorial" cantons of the Confederation. Since 1833, it has been split into two half cantons, each with its own constitution.

One is that of Basel Stadt or Bâle Ville, including, besides the city of Basel, the three rural districts (all to the north of the Rhine) of Riehen, Bettingen and Klein Hüningen (the latter now united to the city). The total area of this half canton is 13.7 sq. m. only, of which 11 sq. m. are classed as "productive," forests occupying 1.5 sq. m., but its total population in 1900 was 112,227 (of whom 3066 inhabited the rural districts), mainly German-speaking, and numbering 73,063 Protestants, 37,101 Romanists (including the Old Catholics), and 1897 Jews. The cantonal constitution dates from 1889. The executive of seven members and the legislature (Grossrat) of 130 members, as well as the one member sent to the Federal Ständerat and the six sent to the Federal Nationalrat, are all elected by a direct popular vote for the term of three years. Since 1875, 1000 citizens can claim a popular vote (facultative Referendum) on all bills, or can exercise the right of initiative whether as to laws or the revision of the cantonal constitution.

One is that of Basel Stadt or Bâle Ville, which includes, in addition to the city of Basel, three rural districts (all located north of the Rhine) - Riehen, Bettingen, and Klein Hüningen (the latter now merged with the city). The total area of this half-canton is only 13.7 sq. m., with 11 sq. m. classified as "productive" and forests covering 1.5 sq. m. However, its total population in 1900 was 112,227 (of whom 3,066 lived in the rural districts), primarily German-speaking, with 73,063 Protestants, 37,101 Roman Catholics (including Old Catholics), and 1,897 Jews. The cantonal constitution was established in 1889. The executive body consists of seven members, and the legislature (Grossrat) comprises 130 members, along with one representative to the Federal Ständerat and six to the Federal Nationalrat, all elected by direct popular vote for a three-year term. Since 1875, 1,000 citizens can request a popular vote (facultative Referendum) on any bills or can exercise the right of initiative regarding laws or the revision of the cantonal constitution.

The other half canton is that of Basel Landschaft or Bâle Campagne, which is divided into four administrative districts and comprises seventy-four communes, its capital being Liestal. Its total area is 165 sq. m., of which all but 5 sq. m. is reckoned "productive" (including 55.9 sq. m. of forests). In 1900 its total population was 68,497, nearly all German-speaking, while there were 52,763 Protestants, 15,564 Romanists, and 130 Jews.

The other half canton is Basel Landschaft or Bâle Campagne, which is split into four administrative districts and includes seventy-four communes, with Liestal as its capital. Its total area is 165 square miles, of which all but 5 square miles is considered "productive" (including 55.9 square miles of forests). In 1900, the total population was 68,497, almost all German-speaking, with 52,763 Protestants, 15,564 Catholics, and 130 Jews.

The cantonal constitution dates from 1892. The executive of 5 members and the legislature or Landrat (one member per 800 inhabitants or fraction over 400), as well as the single member sent to the Federal Ständerat and the three sent to the Federal Nationalrat, are all elected by a direct popular vote for three years. The "obligatory Referendum" obtains in the case of all laws, while 1500 citizens have the right of "initiative" whether as to laws or the revision of the cantonal constitution. Silk ribbon weaving, textile industries and the manufacture of tiles are carried on.

The cantonal constitution was established in 1892. The executive consists of 5 members, and the legislature, known as the Landrat, has one member for every 800 residents or any fraction over 400. Additionally, there is one representative sent to the Federal Ständerat and three representatives sent to the Federal Nationalrat, all of whom are directly elected by popular vote for a term of three years. An "obligatory Referendum" applies to all laws, and 1500 citizens have the right to propose an "initiative" for laws or amendments to the cantonal constitution. Silk ribbon weaving, textile industries, and tile manufacturing are in operation.

(W. A. B. C.)

(W. A. B. C.)

BASEL (Fr. Bâle, but Basle is a wholly erroneous form; Ital. Basilea), the capital of the Swiss half canton of Basel Stadt or Bâle Ville. It is now the second most populous (109,161 inhabitants) town (ranking after Zürich) in the Swiss Confederation, while it is reputed to be the richest, the number of resident millionaires (in francs) exceeding that of any other Swiss town. Both facts are largely due to the opening (1882) of the St Gotthard railway, as merchandise collected from every part of north and central Europe is stored in Basel previous to being redistributed by means of that line. Hence the city has an extremely large and flourishing transit trade, despite the rather dingy appearance of its older portions. The city is divided by the Rhine into Gross Basel (south) and Klein Basel (north), the former being by far the larger. There are several bridges over the river, the old wooden bridge having been replaced in 1905 by one built of stone. The central or main railway station is in Gross Basel, while the Baden station is in Klein Basel. The most prominent building in the city is the cathedral or Münster, built of deep red sandstone, on a terrace high above the Rhine. It was consecrated in 1019, but was mainly rebuilt after the disastrous earthquake of 1356 that nearly ruined the city. The public meetings of the great oecumenical council (1431-1449) were held in the choir, while the committees sat in the chapter-house. Erasmus lived in Basel 1521-1529, and on his death there (1536) was buried in the cathedral, attached to which are cloisters, in which various celebrated men are buried, e.g. Oecolampadius (d. 1531), Grynaeus (d. 1541), Buxtorf (d. 1732). The 16th-century Rathaus or town hall has recently been restored. In the museum is a fine collection of works of art by Holbein (who lived in Basel from [v.03 p.0463]1528 to 1531), while the historical museum (in the old Franciscan church) contains many treasures, and among them the fragments of the famous Dance of Death, wrongly attributed to Holbein. The university (founded by Pius II. in 1460) is the oldest in Switzerland, and of late years has been extended by the construction of detached buildings for the study of the natural sciences, e.g. the Vesalianum and the Bernoullianum. The university library is very rich, and contains the original MSS. of the acts of the great oecumenical council. There are a number of modern monuments in the city, the most important being that set up to the memory of the Swiss who fell in the battle of St Jakob (1444), won by the French. Basel is the seat of the chief missionary society in Switzerland, the training school for missionaries being at St Chrischona, 6 m. out of the city.

BASEL (Fr. Bâle, but Basle is an incorrect form; Ital. Basilea), the capital of the Swiss half canton of Basel Stadt or Bâle Ville. It is currently the second most populous town (109,161 residents) in the Swiss Confederation, following Zürich, and is known to be the richest, with a higher number of resident millionaires (in francs) than any other Swiss town. Both of these facts are largely due to the opening (1882) of the St Gotthard railway, as goods collected from all over northern and central Europe are stored in Basel before being redistributed via that line. As a result, the city has a very large and thriving transit trade, despite the somewhat shabby look of its older areas. The city is divided by the Rhine into Gross Basel (south) and Klein Basel (north), with the former being much larger. There are several bridges across the river, the old wooden bridge having been replaced in 1905 by a stone one. The main railway station is in Gross Basel, while the Baden station is located in Klein Basel. The most notable building in the city is the cathedral or Münster, made of deep red sandstone, sitting on a terrace high above the Rhine. It was consecrated in 1019, but was mostly rebuilt after the devastating earthquake of 1356 that nearly destroyed the city. The public meetings of the great ecumenical council (1431-1449) took place in the choir, while the committees convened in the chapter-house. Erasmus lived in Basel from 1521 to 1529, and upon his death there (1536) was buried in the cathedral, which has cloisters where various prominent figures are interred, e.g. Oecolampadius (d. 1531), Grynaeus (d. 1541), Buxtorf (d. 1732). The 16th-century Rathaus or town hall has been recently restored. The museum houses a fine collection of artworks by Holbein (who lived in Basel from [v.03 p.0463]1528 to 1531), while the historical museum (in the old Franciscan church) contains many treasures, including fragments of the famous Dance of Death, mistakenly attributed to Holbein. The university (founded by Pius II in 1460) is the oldest in Switzerland and has recently been expanded with new buildings for the study of natural sciences, e.g. the Vesalianum and the Bernoullianum. The university library is very extensive and holds the original manuscripts of the acts of the great ecumenical council. There are several modern monuments in the city, the most significant being the one commemorating the Swiss who died in the battle of St Jakob (1444), which was won by the French. Basel is home to the chief missionary society in Switzerland, with the training school for missionaries located at St Chrischona, 6 miles outside the city.

The town was founded in A.D. 374 by the emperor Valentinian, from whose residence there it takes its name. In the 5th century the bishop of Augusta Rauricorum (now called Kaiser Augst), 7½ m. to the east, moved his see thither. Henceforth the history of the city is that of the growing power, spiritual and temporal, of the bishops, whose secular influence was gradually supplanted in the 14th century by the advance of the rival power of the burghers. In 1356 the city was nearly destroyed by a great earthquake. After long swaying between the neighbouring Rhine cities and the Swiss Confederation, it was admitted into the latter in 1501. It later became one of the chief centres of the Reformation movement in Switzerland, so that the bishop retired in 1525 to Porrentruy, where he resided till 1792, finally settling at Soleure in 1828, the bishopric having been wholly reorganized since 1814. As in other Swiss towns the trade gilds got all political power into their hands, especially by the 18th century. They naturally favoured the city at the expense of the rural districts, so that in 1832 the latter proclaimed their independence, and in 1833 were organized into the half canton of Basel Landschaft, the city forming that of Basel Stadt.

The town was founded in CE 374 by Emperor Valentinian, from whom it takes its name. In the 5th century, the bishop of Augusta Rauricorum (now called Kaiser Augst), located 7½ miles to the east, moved his see there. From then on, the city's history followed the growing power, both spiritual and secular, of the bishops, whose influence was gradually overtaken in the 14th century by the rising power of the burghers. In 1356, a major earthquake nearly destroyed the city. After a long struggle between the nearby Rhine cities and the Swiss Confederation, it joined the latter in 1501. The city later became one of the main centers of the Reformation movement in Switzerland, prompting the bishop to move to Porrentruy in 1525, where he stayed until 1792, finally settling in Soleure in 1828, after the bishopric had been completely reorganized in 1814. Like other Swiss towns, the trade guilds seized all political power, especially by the 18th century. They naturally favored the city at the expense of the rural areas, leading to the latter declaring their independence in 1832, and in 1833 they were organized into the half canton of Basel Landschaft, with the city becoming Basel Stadt.

See Basler Biographien (3 vols., 1900-1905); Basler Chroniken (original chronicles), (5 vols., Leipzig, 1872-1890); H. Boos, Geschichte von Basel, vol. i. (to 1501) alone published (1877); A. Burckhardt, Bilder aus d. Geschichte von Basel (3 vols., 1869-1882); Festschrift z. 400ten Jahrestage d. ewig. Bundes zwisch. B. und den Eidgenossen (1901); T. Geering, Handel und Industrie d. Stadt Basel (1885); A. Heusler, Verfassungsgeschichte d. Stadt Basel im Mittelalter (1860), and Rechtsquellen von Basel (2 vols., 1856-1865); L. A. Stocker, Basler Stadtbilder (1890); L. Stouff, Pouvoir temporel des évêques de Bâle (2 vols., Paris, 1891); R. Thommen, Gesch. d. Universität B., 1532-1632 (1889); Urkundenbuch d. Landschaft B. (pub. from 1881), and ditto for the city (pub. from 1890); W. Vischer, Gesch. d. Universität B., 1460-1529 (1860); R. Wackernagel, Gesch. d. Stadt Basel (3 vols., 1906 sqq.); K. Weber, Die Revolution im Kanton Basel, 1830-1833 (1907); G. Gautherot, La République rauracienne (1908).

See Basler Biographien (3 vols., 1900-1905); Basler Chroniken (original chronicles) (5 vols., Leipzig, 1872-1890); H. Boos, Geschichte von Basel, vol. i. (to 1501) published alone (1877); A. Burckhardt, Bilder aus d. Geschichte von Basel (3 vols., 1869-1882); Festschrift z. 400ten Jahrestage d. ewig. Bundes zwisch. B. und den Eidgenossen (1901); T. Geering, Handel und Industrie d. Stadt Basel (1885); A. Heusler, Verfassungsgeschichte d. Stadt Basel im Mittelalter (1860), and Rechtsquellen von Basel (2 vols., 1856-1865); L. A. Stocker, Basler Stadtbilder (1890); L. Stouff, Pouvoir temporel des évêques de Bâle (2 vols., Paris, 1891); R. Thommen, Gesch. d. Universität B., 1532-1632 (1889); Urkundenbuch d. Landschaft B. (published since 1881), and the same for the city (published since 1890); W. Vischer, Gesch. d. Universität B., 1460-1529 (1860); R. Wackernagel, Gesch. d. Stadt Basel (3 vols., 1906 onwards); K. Weber, Die Revolution im Kanton Basel, 1830-1833 (1907); G. Gautherot, La République rauracienne (1908).

(W. A. B. C.)

(W. A. B. C.)

BASEL, CONFESSION OF, one of the many statements of faith produced by the Reformation. It was put out in 1534 and must be distinguished from the First and Second Helvetic Confessions, its author being Oswald Myconius, who based it on a shorter confession promulgated by Oecolampadius, his predecessor in the church at Basel. Though it was an attempt to bring into line with the reforming party both those who still inclined to the old faith and the anabaptist section, its publication provoked a good deal of controversy, especially on its statements concerning the Eucharist, and the people of Strassburg even reproached those of Basel with celebrating a Christless supper. Up to the year 1826 the Confession (sometimes also known as the Confession of Mühlhausen from its adoption by that town) was publicly read from the pulpits of Basel on the Wednesday of Passion week in each year. In 1872 a resolution of the great council of the city practically annulled it.

BASEL, CONFESSION OF, one of the many statements of faith produced during the Reformation. It was published in 1534 and should be distinguished from the First and Second Helvetic Confessions. Its author was Oswald Myconius, who based it on a shorter confession released by Oecolampadius, his predecessor in the church at Basel. Although it aimed to align both those who still leaned toward the old faith and the Anabaptist faction with the reforming party, its publication sparked considerable controversy, especially regarding its statements about the Eucharist. The people of Strassburg even accused those in Basel of holding a Christless supper. Up until 1826, the Confession (sometimes referred to as the Confession of Mühlhausen due to its adoption by that town) was publicly read from the pulpits of Basel on the Wednesday of Passion week each year. In 1872, a resolution from the city’s great council effectively annulled it.

BASEL, COUNCIL OF. A decree of the council of Constance (9th of October 1417) sanctioned by Martin V. had obliged the papacy periodically to summon general councils. At the expiry of the first term fixed by this decree, Martin V. did, in fact, call together at Pavia a council, which it was necessary to transfer almost at once to Siena, owing to an epidemic, and which had to be dissolved owing to circumstances still imperfectly known, just as it was beginning to discuss the subject of reform (1424). The next council was due to assemble at the expiry of seven years, i.e. in 1431; with his usual punctuality, Martin V. duly convoked it for this date to the town of Basel, and selected to preside over it the cardinal Julian Cesarini, a man of the greatest worth, both intellectually and morally. Martin himself, however, died before the opening of the synod.

BASEL, COUNCIL OF. A decree from the Council of Constance (October 9, 1417), approved by Martin V, required the papacy to regularly call general councils. When the first term set by this decree ended, Martin V called a council to meet in Pavia, which had to be moved almost immediately to Siena because of an epidemic, and it was ultimately dissolved due to circumstances that are still not fully understood, just as it was starting to discuss reform (1424). The next council was scheduled to meet seven years later, i.e. in 1431; as expected, Martin V convened it for that date in the town of Basel, appointing Cardinal Julian Cesarini, a highly esteemed individual both intellectually and morally, to preside. However, Martin passed away before the synod began.

From Italy, France and Germany the fathers were slow in appearing at Basel. Cesarini devoted all his energies to the war against the Hussites, until the disaster of Taus forced him hastily to evacuate Bohemia. The progress of heresy, the reported troubles in Germany, the war which had lately broken out between the dukes of Austria and Burgundy, and finally, the small number of fathers who had responded to the summons of Martin V., caused that pontiff's successor, Eugenius IV., to think that the synod of Basel was doomed to certain failure. This opinion, added to the desire which he had of himself presiding over the council, induced him to recall the fathers from Germany, whither his health, impaired of late, probably owing to a cerebral congestion, rendered it all the more difficult for him to go. He commanded the fathers to disperse, and appointed Bologna as their meeting-place in eighteen months' time, his intention being to make the session of the council coincide with some conferences with representatives of the Greek church, which were to be held there with a view to union (18th December 1431).

From Italy, France, and Germany, the fathers took a long time to arrive in Basel. Cesarini focused all his efforts on the war against the Hussites until the disaster at Taus forced him to quickly leave Bohemia. The spread of heresy, the reported issues in Germany, the war that had recently broken out between the dukes of Austria and Burgundy, and finally, the small number of fathers who had responded to Martin V's call made his successor, Eugenius IV, believe that the synod in Basel was doomed to fail. This belief, along with his desire to preside over the council himself, led him to recall the fathers from Germany, where his recent health issues, likely due to a brain condition, made it even more challenging for him to travel. He ordered the fathers to disperse and scheduled a meeting in Bologna eighteen months later, intending for the council session to align with some discussions with representatives of the Greek church, aimed at achieving unity (18th December 1431).

This order led to an outcry among the fathers of Basel and incurred the deep disapproval of the legate Cesarini. The Hussites, it was said, would think that the Church was afraid to face them; the laity would accuse the clergy of shirking reform; in short, this failure of the councils would produce disastrous effects. In vain did the pope explain his reasons and yield certain points; the fathers would listen to nothing, and, relying on the decrees of the council of Constance, which amid the troubles of the schism had proclaimed the superiority, in certain cases, of the council over the pope, they insisted upon their right of remaining assembled, hastily beat up the laggards, held sessions, promulgated decrees, interfered in the government of the papal countship of Venaissin, treated with the Hussites, and, as representatives of the universal Church, presumed to impose laws upon the sovereign pontiff himself. Eugenius IV. resolved to resist this supremacy, though he did not dare openly to repudiate a very widespread doctrine considered by many to be the actual foundation of the authority of the popes before the schism. However, he soon realized the impossibility of treating the fathers of Basel as ordinary rebels, and tried a compromise; but as time went on, the fathers became more and more intractable, and between him and them gradually arose an impassable barrier.

This order sparked a backlash among the leaders of Basel and deeply upset the legate Cesarini. It was said that the Hussites would believe the Church was afraid to confront them; the laity would accuse the clergy of avoiding reform; in short, this failure of the councils would have disastrous consequences. Despite the pope explaining his reasons and conceding some points, the leaders refused to listen, relying on the decrees of the council of Constance, which had declared, during the turmoil of the schism, that in some cases the council was superior to the pope. They insisted on their right to remain in session, quickly rallied those who were lagging behind, held meetings, issued decrees, interfered in the governance of the papal countship of Venaissin, negotiated with the Hussites, and, as representatives of the universal Church, assumed the authority to impose laws on the pope himself. Eugenius IV. decided to stand against this authority, although he did not dare to outright reject a widely held belief that many considered the foundation of the popes' authority before the schism. However, he soon realized it was impossible to treat the leaders of Basel as mere rebels and sought a compromise; but as time passed, the leaders became increasingly stubborn, and a significant divide formed between him and them.

Abandoned by a number of his cardinals, condemned by most of the powers, deprived of his dominions by condottieri who shamelessly invoked the authority of the council, the pope made concession after concession, and ended on the 15th of December 1433 by a pitiable surrender of all the points at issue in a bull, the terms of which were dictated by the fathers of Basel, that is, by declaring his bull of dissolution null and void, and recognizing that the synod had not ceased to be legitimately assembled. It would be wrong, however, to believe that Eugenius IV. ratified all the decrees coming from Basel, or that he made a definite submission to the supremacy of the council. No express pronouncement on this subject could be wrung from him, and his enforced silence concealed the secret design of safeguarding the principle of sovereignty.

Abandoned by several of his cardinals and condemned by most of the powers, the pope was stripped of his territories by condottieri who blatantly claimed the authority of the council. He made one concession after another and ultimately, on December 15, 1433, he pitifully surrendered all the disputed points in a papal bull, the terms of which were dictated by the fathers of Basel. This involved declaring his bull of dissolution null and void and acknowledging that the synod was still legitimately assembled. However, it would be wrong to think that Eugenius IV. approved all the decrees from Basel or that he fully submitted to the supremacy of the council. He never made a clear statement on this issue, and his forced silence hid his secret intention to protect the principle of sovereignty.

The fathers, who were filled with suspicion, would only allow the legates of the pope to preside over them on condition of their recognizing the superiority of the council; the legates ended by submitting to this humiliating formality, but in their own name only, thus reserving the judgment of the Holy See. Nay more, the difficulties of all kinds against which Eugenius had to contend, the insurrection at Rome, which forced him to escape by the Tiber, lying in the bottom of a boat, left him at first little chance of resisting the enterprises of the council. Emboldened by their success, the fathers approached the subject of reform, their principal object being to curtail the power and resources of the papacy. This is why, besides the disciplinary [v.03 p.0464]measures which regulated the elections, the celebration of divine service, the periodical holding of diocesan synods and provincial councils, are found also decrees aimed at some of the "rights" by which the popes had extended their power, and helped out their finances at the expense of the local churches. Thus annates (q.v.) were abolished, the abuse of "reservation" of the patronage of benefices by the pope was much limited, and the right claimed by the pope of "next presentation" to benefices not yet vacant (known as gratiae expectativae) was done away with altogether. By other decrees the jurisdiction of the court of Rome was much limited, and rules were even made for the election of popes and the constitution of the Sacred College. The fathers continued to devote themselves to the subjugation of the Hussites; they also intervened, in rivalry with the pope, in the negotiations between France and England which led only to the treaty of Arras, concluded by Charles VII. with the duke of Burgundy; finally, they investigated and judged numbers of private cases, lawsuits between prelates, members of religious orders and holders of benefices, thus themselves falling into one of the serious abuses for which they had most blamed the court of Rome.

The fathers, who were very suspicious, would only let the pope's legates preside over them if they acknowledged the council's authority; the legates ultimately agreed to this embarrassing requirement, but they did so only in their own name, thereby reserving the judgment of the Holy See. Moreover, the various challenges that Eugenius faced, including the uprising in Rome that forced him to flee down the Tiber hidden beneath a boat, initially left him with little ability to oppose the actions of the council. Encouraged by their success, the fathers began discussing reform, primarily aiming to limit the power and resources of the papacy. This is why, in addition to the disciplinary [v.03 p.0464]measures that regulated elections, the celebration of religious services, and the regular holding of diocesan synods and provincial councils, there were also decrees targeting some of the "rights" through which the popes had increased their power and boosted their finances at the expense of local churches. For example, annates (q.v.) were abolished, the misuse of the pope's "reservation" of benefices was significantly restricted, and the claimed right of the pope to "next presentation" to benefices not yet vacant (known as gratiae expectativae) was completely eliminated. Other decrees greatly limited the jurisdiction of the Roman court, and rules were even established for electing popes and organizing the Sacred College. The fathers continued to focus on defeating the Hussites; they also intervened, competing with the pope, in the negotiations between France and England, which ultimately resulted in the treaty of Arras, concluded by Charles VII with the duke of Burgundy. Finally, they investigated and ruled on numerous private cases, disputes between prelates, members of religious orders, and benefice holders, thereby falling into one of the major abuses they had criticized the Roman court for.

The democratic character of the assembly of Basel was the result both of its composition and of its organization; not only was the number of prelates in it always small in comparison with that of the doctors, masters, representatives of chapters, monks or clerks of inferior orders, but the influence of the superior clergy had all the less weight because, instead of being separated into "nations," as at Constance, the fathers divided themselves according to their tastes or aptitudes into four large committees or "deputations" (deputationes), one concerned with questions of faith (fidei), another with negotiations for peace (pacis), the third with reform (reformatorii), the fourth with what they called "common concerns" (pro communibus). Every decision made by three of these "deputations"—and in each of them the lower clergy formed the majority—was ratified for the sake of form in general congregation, and if necessary led to decrees promulgated in session. It was on this account that the council could sometimes be called, not without exaggeration, "an assembly of copyists" or even "a set of grooms and scullions."

The democratic nature of the Basel assembly came from both its makeup and organization; the number of bishops was always small compared to the doctors, masters, representatives of chapters, monks, or lower clerks. Additionally, the influence of the higher clergy was less significant because, instead of being divided into "nations" like at Constance, the members grouped themselves based on their interests or expertise into four large committees or "deputations" (deputationes): one focused on matters of faith (fidei), another on peace negotiations (pacis), the third on reform (reformatorii), and the fourth on what they called "common concerns" (pro communibus). Every decision made by any three of these "deputations"—with the lower clergy forming the majority in each—was officially approved in the general assembly and could lead to decrees issued in session if necessary. For this reason, the council was sometimes called, not without exaggeration, "an assembly of copyists" or even "a group of grooms and kitchen helpers."

Eugenius IV., however much he may have wished to keep on good terms with the fathers of Basel, was neither able nor willing to accept or observe all their decrees. The question of the union with the Greek church, especially, gave rise to a misunderstanding between them which soon led to a rupture. The emperor John Palaeologus, pressed hard by the Turks, showed a great desire to unite himself with the Catholics; he consented to come with the principal representatives of the Greek church to some place in the west where the union could be concluded in the presence of the pope and of the Latin council. Hence arose a double negotiation between him and Eugenius IV. on the one hand and the fathers of Basel on the other. The chief object of the latter was to fix the meeting-place at a place remote from the influence of the pope, and they persisted in suggesting Basel or Avignon or Savoy, which neither Eugenius nor the Greeks would on any account accept. The result was that Palaeologus accepted the offers of the pope, who, by a bull dated the 18th of September 1437, again pronounced the dissolution of the council of Basel, and summoned the fathers to Ferrara, where on the 8th of January 1438 he opened a new synod which he later transferred to Florence. In this latter town took place the momentary union, which was more apparent than real, between the Latin and the Greek church (6th July 1439). During this time the council of Basel, though abandoned by Cesarini and most of its members, persisted none the less, under the presidency of Cardinal Aleman, in affirming its oecumenical character. On the 24th of January 1438 it suspended Eugenius IV., and went on in spite of the intervention of most of the powers to pronounce his deposition (25th June 1439), finally giving rise to a new schism by electing on the 4th of November Amadeus VIII., duke of Savoy, as pope, who took the name of Felix V.

Eugenius IV, despite his desire to maintain good relations with the council of Basel, was neither able nor willing to accept or follow all their decisions. The issue of uniting with the Greek church, in particular, created a misunderstanding between them that quickly led to a split. The emperor John Palaeologus, under pressure from the Turks, strongly wanted to unite with the Catholics; he agreed to meet with the main representatives of the Greek church at a location in the west where the union could be finalized in the presence of the pope and the Latin council. This led to a dual negotiation between him and Eugenius IV on one side and the leaders of Basel on the other. The main goal of the latter was to choose a meeting place far from the pope's influence, and they consistently suggested Basel, Avignon, or Savoy, which neither Eugenius nor the Greeks would accept under any conditions. As a result, Palaeologus accepted the pope's proposals, who, in a bull dated September 18, 1437, declared the council of Basel dissolved and summoned the members to Ferrara, where on January 8, 1438, he opened a new synod that he later moved to Florence. In this latter city, a temporary union occurred between the Latin and Greek churches (July 6, 1439), which was more symbolic than actual. During this time, the council of Basel, although abandoned by Cesarini and most of its members, nonetheless continued, under Cardinal Aleman, to assert its ecumenical status. On January 24, 1438, it suspended Eugenius IV and, despite the intervention of most powers, declared his deposition on June 25, 1439, ultimately leading to a new schism by electing Amadeus VIII, duke of Savoy, as pope on November 4, who took the name Felix V.

This schism lasted fully ten years, although the antipope found hardly any adherents outside of his own hereditary states, those of Alphonso of Aragon, of the Swiss confederation and certain universities. Germany remained neutral; Charles VII. of France confined himself to securing to his kingdom by the Pragmatic Sanction of Bourges, which became law on the 13th of July 1438, the benefit of a great number of the reforms decreed at Basel; England and Italy remained faithful to Eugenius IV. Finally, in 1447 Frederick III., king of the Romans, after negotiations with Eugenius, commanded the burgomaster of Basel not to allow the presence of the council any longer in the imperial city. In June 1448 the rump of the council migrated to Lausanne. The antipope, at the instance of France, ended by abdicating (7th April 1449). Eugenius IV. died on the 23rd of February 1447, and the fathers of Lausanne, to save appearances, gave their support to his successor, Nicholas V., who had already been governing the Church for two years. Trustworthy evidence, they said, proved to them that this pontiff accepted the dogma of the superiority of the council as it had been defined at Constance and at Basel. In reality, the struggle which they had carried on in defence of this principle for seventeen years, with a good faith which it is impossible to ignore, ended in a defeat. The papacy, which had been so fundamentally shaken by the great schism of the West, came through this trial victorious. The era of the great councils of the 15th century was closed; the constitution of the Church remained monarchical.

This divide lasted a full ten years, although the antipope had few supporters outside of his own inherited territories, those of Alphonso of Aragon, the Swiss confederation, and certain universities. Germany stayed neutral; Charles VII of France focused on securing a lot of the reforms passed at Basel for his kingdom through the Pragmatic Sanction of Bourges, which became law on July 13, 1438. England and Italy remained loyal to Eugenius IV. Finally, in 1447, Frederick III, king of the Romans, after discussions with Eugenius, ordered the mayor of Basel not to allow the council to meet in the imperial city anymore. In June 1448, the remaining members of the council moved to Lausanne. The antipope, acting on France's advice, ended up resigning on April 7, 1449. Eugenius IV passed away on February 23, 1447, and the leaders in Lausanne, to maintain appearances, decided to support his successor, Nicholas V, who had already been leading the Church for two years. They claimed they had reliable evidence that showed this pope accepted the idea of the council's superiority as defined at Constance and Basel. In reality, the effort they had put in to defend this principle for seventeen years, with a sincerity that can't be overlooked, ended in failure. The papacy, which had been significantly weakened by the great schism of the West, emerged from this crisis victorious. The era of the great councils of the 15th century came to an end; the structure of the Church remained monarchical.

Authorities.—Mansi, vol. xxix.-xxxi.; Aeneas Sylvius, De rebus Basileae gestis (Fermo, 1803); Hefele, Conciliengeschichte, vol. vii. (Freiburg-im-Breisgau, 1874); O. Richter, Die Organisation und Geschaftsordnung des Baseler Konzils (Leipzig, 1877); Monumenta Conciliorum generalium seculi xv., Scriptorum, vol. i., ii. and iii. (Vienna, 1857-1895); J. Haller, Concilium Basiliense, vol. i.-v. (Basel, 1896-1904); G. Perouse, Le Cardinal Louis Aleman, président du concile de Bâle (Paris, 1904). Much useful material will also be found in J. C. L. Gieseler's Ecclesiastical History, vol. iv. p. 312, &c., notes (Eng. trans., Edinburgh, 1853).

Authorities.—Mansi, vol. xxix.-xxxi.; Aeneas Sylvius, De rebus Basileae gestis (Fermo, 1803); Hefele, Conciliengeschichte, vol. vii. (Freiburg-im-Breisgau, 1874); O. Richter, Die Organisation und Geschaftsordnung des Baseler Konzils (Leipzig, 1877); Monumenta Conciliorum generalium seculi xv., Scriptorum, vol. i., ii. and iii. (Vienna, 1857-1895); J. Haller, Concilium Basiliense, vol. i.-v. (Basel, 1896-1904); G. Perouse, Le Cardinal Louis Aleman, président du concile de Bâle (Paris, 1904). Much useful material will also be found in J. C. L. Gieseler's Ecclesiastical History, vol. iv. p. 312, & c., notes (Eng. trans., Edinburgh, 1853).

(N. V.)

(N. V.)

BASEMENT, the term applied to the lowest storey of any building placed wholly or partly below the level of the ground. It is incorrectly applied to the ground storey of any building, even when, as for instance in the case of Somerset House, London, the ground floor is of plain or rusticated masonry, and the upper storey which it supports is divided up and decorated with columns or pilasters.

BASEMENT, the term used for the lowest floor of any building that is completely or partially below ground level. It is incorrectly used for the ground floor of any building, even when, as in the case of Somerset House, London, the ground floor is made of plain or rough masonry, and the upper floor it supports is divided and decorated with columns or pilasters.

BASHAHR, or Bisahir, a Rajput hill state, within the Punjab, amid the Himalayan mountains, with an area of 3820 sq. m. and a population in 1901 of 80,582. In 1898, the raja being of weak intellect and without heir, the administration was undertaken by a British official. In 1906 there were some local troubles owing to the refusal of the people to pay taxes. The revenue is obtained chiefly from land and forests, the latter being leased to the British government.

BASHAHR, or Bisahir, is a Rajput hill state located in Punjab, surrounded by the Himalayan mountains. It covers an area of 3,820 square miles and had a population of 80,582 in 1901. In 1898, since the raja was of weak intellect and had no heir, a British official took over the administration. In 1906, there were local issues due to the people's refusal to pay taxes. The revenue mainly comes from land and forests, with the latter leased to the British government.

BASHAN, a region lying E. of the Jordan, and towards its source. Its boundaries are not very well defined, but it may be said in general to have been north of the territory of Gilead. The name first appears in Hebrew history in connexion with the wanderings of the Israelites. According to Numbers xxi. 33, the tribes after the rout of Sihon, king of the Amorites, turned to go by the land of Bashan; and its king, Og, met them at Edrei, and was there defeated and slain. The value of this narrative is a matter of much dispute. The gigantic stature of the king, and the curious details about his "bedstead" (Deut. iii. 11) are regarded as suggestive of legend; to say nothing of the lateness of all the documents relating to the wars of Og, and the remoteness of Bashan from the regions of the Israelites' wandering. The story, however, had so firm a hold on Hebrew tradition that it can hardly fail to have some basis in fact; and an invasion by Israel of Bashan before coming to Jordan is by no means an improbability.

BASHAN, a region located east of the Jordan River, near its source. Its boundaries aren’t very clearly defined, but it’s generally considered to be north of the territory of Gilead. The name first appears in Hebrew history in connection with the Israelites' wanderings. According to Numbers 21:33, after defeating Sihon, the king of the Amorites, the tribes headed toward the land of Bashan; there, its king, Og, confronted them at Edrei and was defeated and killed. The credibility of this account is heavily debated. The king's enormous size and the strange details about his "bed" (Deut. 3:11) are thought to suggest a legendary aspect, not to mention the later dates of all the documents related to Og's wars and the distance of Bashan from the regions where the Israelites wandered. However, the story was so firmly embedded in Hebrew tradition that it likely has some factual basis; it’s not improbable that the Israelites invaded Bashan before reaching the Jordan.

The great stature of Og is explained in the passage of Deuteronomy mentioned by the statement that he was of the remnant of the aboriginal Rephaim. This was a race distinguished by lofty stature; and in Genesis xiv. 5 we find them established in Ashteroth-Karnaim (probably the same as Ashtaroth, which, as we shall see, was an important city of Bashan). The territory [v.03 p.0465]was allotted on the partition of the conquered land to the eastern division of the tribe of Manasseh (Numbers xxxiii. 33; Josh. xiii. 29). One of the cities of refuge, Golan, was in Bashan (Deut. iv. 43). By Solomon, Bashan, or rather "the region of Argob in Bashan," containing "threescore great cities with walls and brazen bars," was assigned to the administrative district of Ben-Geber, one of his lieutenants (1 Kings iv. 13, compare ver. 19). In the days of Jehu the country was taken from Israel by Hazael, king of Syria (2 Kings x. 33). This is the last historical event related in the Old Testament of Bashan. In the poetical and prophetic books it is referred to in connexion with the products for which it was noted. From a passage in the "Blessing of Moses" (Deut. xxxiii. 22) it seems to have been inhabited by lions. Elsewhere it is referred to in connexion with its cattle (Deut. xxxii. 14; Ezek. xxxix. 18), which seem to have been proverbial for ferocity (Ps. xxii. 12); Amos (iv. 1) calls the wealthy women of Samaria, who oppressed the poor, "kine of Bashan." It is also noted for its mountain (Ps. lxviii. 15), and especially for oaks, which are coupled with the cedars of Lebanon (Isa. ii. 13; compare xxxiii. 9; Zechariah xi. 2). Oars were made from them (Ezek. xxvii. 6).

The impressive height of Og is explained in the passage from Deuteronomy that mentions he was part of the remnant of the original Rephaim. This was a race known for their tall stature; and in Genesis 14:5, we find them located in Ashteroth-Karnaim (most likely the same as Ashtaroth, which, as we will see, was a significant city in Bashan). The land was allocated during the division of the conquered territories to the eastern portion of the tribe of Manasseh (Numbers 33:33; Joshua 13:29). One of the cities of refuge, Golan, was situated in Bashan (Deuteronomy 4:43). By the time of Solomon, Bashan, or more accurately "the region of Argob in Bashan," which included "sixty great cities with walls and bronze bars," was assigned to the administrative district of Ben-Geber, one of his officials (1 Kings 4:13, see verse 19). In the days of Jehu, the region was taken from Israel by Hazael, king of Syria (2 Kings 10:33). This is the last historical event mentioned in the Old Testament regarding Bashan. In the poetic and prophetic texts, it is referenced in relation to the products for which it was known. From a passage in the "Blessing of Moses" (Deuteronomy 33:22), it seems to have been home to lions. Elsewhere, it is mentioned in relation to its livestock (Deuteronomy 32:14; Ezekiel 39:18), which were known for their ferocity (Psalm 22:12); Amos 4:1 refers to the wealthy women of Samaria, who exploited the poor, as "cows of Bashan." It is also noted for its mountains (Psalm 68:15), and especially for its oaks, which are mentioned alongside the cedars of Lebanon (Isaiah 2:13; see also 33:9; Zechariah 11:2). Oars were made from these oaks (Ezekiel 27:6).

The boundaries of Bashan may to some extent be deduced from the indications afforded in the earlier historical books. Og dwelt at Ashteroth, and did battle with the Israelites at Edrei (Deut. i. 4). In Deut. iii. 4, "the region of Argob" with its threescore cities is mentioned; Mt. Hermon is referred to as a northern limit, and Salecah is alluded to in addition to the other cities already mentioned. Josh. xii. 4 and Josh. xiii. 29 confirm this. Josephus (Ant. iv. 5. 3; Wars, ii. 6. 3) enumerates four provinces of Bashan, Gaulanitis, Trachonitis, Auranitis and Batanaea. Gaulanitis (which probably derived its name from the city of refuge, Golan, the site of which has not yet been discovered) is represented by the modern Jaulān, a province extending from the Jordan lakes to the Haj Road. Josephus (Wars, iv. 1. 1) speaks of it as divided into two sections, Gamalitis and Sogana. Trachonitis (mentioned in Luke iii. 1 as in the territory of Philip the tetrarch) adjoined the territory of Damascus, Auranitis and Batanaea. This corresponds to the Trachōnes of Strabo (xvi. 20), and the modern district of the Lejā; inscriptions have been found in the Lejā giving Trachōn as its former name. Auranitis is the Hauran of Ezekiel xlvii. 16, and of the modern Arabs. It is south of the Jaulān and north of Gilead. According to Porter (Journal Soc. Lit., 1854, p. 303), the name is locally restricted to the plain south of the Lejā. and the narrow strip on the west; although it is loosely applied by strangers to the whole country east of the Jaulān. The fourth province, Batanaea, which still is remembered in the name ‛Ard el-Bathaniyeh, lies east of the Lejā and the Hauran plain, and includes the Jebel ed-Drūz or Hauran mountain.

The boundaries of Bashan can be somewhat inferred from the clues found in the earlier historical texts. Og lived at Ashteroth and fought against the Israelites at Edrei (Deut. i. 4). In Deut. iii. 4, "the region of Argob," with its sixty cities, is mentioned; Mt. Hermon is noted as a northern boundary, and Salecah is also referenced along with the other cities previously mentioned. Josh. xii. 4 and Josh. xiii. 29 confirm this. Josephus (Ant. iv. 5. 3; Wars, ii. 6. 3) lists four provinces of Bashan: Gaulanitis, Trachonitis, Auranitis, and Batanaea. Gaulanitis (likely named after the city of refuge, Golan, the location of which has not yet been found) corresponds to the modern Jaulān, a province that stretches from the Jordan lakes to the Haj Road. Josephus (Wars, iv. 1. 1) describes it as being divided into two areas, Gamalitis and Sogana. Trachonitis (mentioned in Luke iii. 1 as part of Philip the tetrarch's territory) was next to Damascus, Auranitis, and Batanaea. This aligns with the Trachōnes that Strabo refers to (xvi. 20), and the present-day district of the Lejā; inscriptions found in the Lejā indicate Trachōn as its earlier name. Auranitis refers to the Hauran of Ezekiel xlvii. 16, and of modern Arabs. It lies south of the Jaulān and north of Gilead. According to Porter (Journal Soc. Lit., 1854, p. 303), the name is locally confined to the plain south of the Lejā and the narrow strip to the west; however, it is generally used by outsiders to describe the entire region east of the Jaulān. The fourth province, Batanaea, which is still recognized in the name ‛Ard el-Bathaniyeh, is situated east of the Lejā and the Hauran plain, covering the Jebel ed-Drūz or Hauran mountains.

The identification of Argob, a region of the kingdom of Og, is a matter of much difficulty. It has been equated on philological grounds to the Lejā. But these arguments have been shown to be shaky if not baseless, and the identification is now generally abandoned. The confidence with which the great cities of Og were identified with the extensive remains of ancient sites in the Lejā and Hauran has also been shown to be without justification. All the so-called "giant cities of Bashan" without exception are now known to be Greco-Roman, not earlier than the time of Herod, and, though in themselves of very high architectural and historical interest, have no connexion whatever with the more ancient periods. No tangible traces of Og and his people, or even of their Israelite supplanters, have yet been found.

The identification of Argob, a region in the kingdom of Og, is quite challenging. It's been linked to the Lejā based on language analysis. However, these connections have proven to be weak, if not completely unfounded, and this identification is now largely dismissed. The certainty with which the major cities of Og were associated with the extensive ruins in the Lejā and Hauran has also been shown to lack support. All the so-called "giant cities of Bashan" are now recognized as Greco-Roman, dating no earlier than the time of Herod, and while they are architecturally and historically significant, they have no connection to the ancient periods. No concrete evidence of Og and his people, or even their Israelite replacements, has been discovered yet.

This fact somewhat weakens the various identifications that have been proposed for the cities of Bashan enumerated by name. Edrei for example is identified with Ed-Dera‛a. This is perhaps the most satisfactory comparison, for besides the Greco-Roman remains there is an extensive subterranean city of unknown date, which may be of great antiquity, though even this is still sub judice. The other identifications that have commanded most acceptance are as follows:—Ashteroth Karnaim, also called Ashtaroth and (Josh. xxi. 27) Be-eshterah, has been identified with Busrah (Bostra), where are very important Herodian ruins, but there is no tangible evidence yet adduced that the history of this site is of so remote antiquity. From the similarity of the names, it has also been sought at Tell Ashari and Tell ‛Ashtera. The true site can be determined, if at all; by excavation only; identifications based on mere outward similarity of names have always been fruitful sources of error. Salecah is perhaps less doubtful; it is a remarkable name, and a ruin similarly styled, Salkhat, is to be seen in the Hauran. It is inhabited by Druses. Another town in eastern Manasseh, namely Kenath, has been identified by Porter with Kanawat, which may be correct.

This fact somewhat weakens the various identifications that have been proposed for the cities of Bashan listed by name. Edrei, for example, is linked to Ed-Dera‛a. This might be the most convincing comparison, as in addition to the Greco-Roman remains, there’s an extensive underground city of unknown age that could be very ancient, though even this is still sub judice. The other identifications that have been most widely accepted are as follows:—Ashteroth Karnaim, also known as Ashtaroth and (Josh. xxi. 27) Be-eshterah, has been identified with Busrah (Bostra), which has significant Herodian ruins, but there is no concrete evidence yet presented that the history of this site goes back so far. Due to the similarity of the names, it has also been sought at Tell Ashari and Tell ‛Ashtera. The true site can be determined, if at all, only through excavation; identifications based merely on superficial name similarities have always been prone to error. Salecah is perhaps less doubtful; it is a notable name, and a ruin with a similar name, Salkhat, can be seen in the Hauran. It is inhabited by Druses. Another town in eastern Manasseh, called Kenath, has been identified by Porter with Kanawat, which may be correct.

In the later history Bashan became remarkable as a refuge for outlaws and robbers, a character it still retains. The great subterranean "city" at Ed-Dera‛a has been partially destroyed by the local sub-governor, in order to prevent it becoming a refuge of fugitives from justice or from government requirements (conscription, taxation, &c.). Strabo refers to a great cave in Trachonitis capable of holding 4000 robbers. Arab tradition regards it as the home of Job; and it is famous as being the centre of the Ghassanid dynasty. The Hauran is one of the principal habitations of the sect of the Druses (q.v.).

In later history, Bashan became known as a hideout for outlaws and criminals, a reputation it still holds today. The large underground "city" at Ed-Dera‛a has been partly destroyed by the local sub-governor to stop it from becoming a safe haven for those fleeing justice or government duties (like conscription or taxes). Strabo mentions a huge cave in Trachonitis that could accommodate 4,000 robbers. Arab tradition considers it the home of Job, and it’s renowned as the center of the Ghassanid dynasty. The Hauran is one of the main areas inhabited by the Druze sect (q.v.).

The physical characteristics of Bashan are noteworthy. Volcanic in origin—the Jebel ed-Druz is a group of extinct volcanoes—the friable volcanic soil is extraordinarily fertile. It is said to yield wheat eighty-fold and barley a hundred. The oaks for which the country was once famous still distinguish it in places.

The physical features of Bashan are impressive. Formed by volcanic activity—the Jebel ed-Druz is a range of extinct volcanoes—the loose volcanic soil is incredibly fertile. It is said to produce wheat eighty times over and barley a hundred times. The oaks that once made the area famous can still be found in some places.

Bibliography.—In addition to books mentioned under Palestine see the following:—U. J. Seetzen, Reisen durch Syrien, Palastina, Phonicien, &c. (4 vols., 1854); Rev. J. L. Porter, Five Years in Damascus (2 vols., 1855); The Giant Cities of Bashan (out of date, but some of the descriptions good, 1865); J. G. Wetzstein, Reisebericht über Hauran und die Trachonen (Berlin, 1860); Sir R. F. Burton and C. F. T. Drake, Unexplored Syria (1872); G. Schumacher, The Jaulān (1888); Abila, Fella and Northern Ajlun (1890); Across the Jordan (1886), (Palestine Exploration Fund); Rev. W. Ewing, A Journey in the Hauran (with a large collection of inscriptions); Palestine Exploration Fund Quarterly Statement, 1895; W. H. Waddington's Inscriptions of Syria may also be consulted; Dussaud (René) and Frédéric Macler, Voyage archéologique au Safâ et dans le Djabel ed-Drūz (1901). In 1900 an important survey of the Hauran and neighbouring regions was made under American auspices, directed by Dr Enno Littmann; the publication of the great harvest of results was begun in 1906.

References.—Along with the books mentioned under Palestine, see the following:—U. J. Seetzen, Travels through Syria, Palestine, Phoenicia, etc. (4 vols., 1854); Rev. J. L. Porter, Five Years in Damascus (2 vols., 1855); The Giant Cities of Bashan (outdated, but some descriptions are good, 1865); J. G. Wetzstein, Travel Report on Hauran and the Trachones (Berlin, 1860); Sir R. F. Burton and C. F. T. Drake, Unexplored Syria (1872); G. Schumacher, The Jaulān (1888); Abila, Fella and Northern Ajlun (1890); Across the Jordan (1886), (Palestine Exploration Fund); Rev. W. Ewing, A Journey in the Hauran (including a large collection of inscriptions); Palestine Exploration Fund Quarterly Statement, 1895; W. H. Waddington's Inscriptions of Syria may also be consulted; Dussaud (René) and Frédéric Macler, Archaeological Journey to the Safā and in the Djabel ed-Drūz (1901). In 1900, an important survey of Hauran and surrounding areas was conducted under American sponsorship, directed by Dr. Enno Littmann; the publication of the extensive results began in 1906.

(R. A. S. M.)

(R. A. S. M.)

BASHI-BAZOUK, the name given to a species of irregular mounted troops employed by the Turks. They are armed and maintained by the government but do not receive pay. They do not wear uniform or distinctive badges. They fight either mounted or dismounted, chiefly the latter, but are incapable of undertaking serious work, because of their lack of discipline. Their uncertain temper has sometimes made it necessary for the Turkish regular troops to disarm them by force, but they are often useful in the work of reconnaissance and in outpost duty. They are accused, and generally with justice, of robbery and maltreatment of the civil population, resembling in those things, as in their fighting methods and value, the Croats, Pandours and Tolpatches of 18th-century European armies. The term is also used of a mounted force, existing in peace time in various provinces of the Turkish empire, which performs the duties of gendarmerie.

BASHI-BAZOUK, the term for a type of irregular mounted troops used by the Turks. They are armed and supported by the government but don’t get paid. They don’t wear uniforms or distinctive badges. They fight either on horseback or on foot, mostly the latter, but they can’t handle serious tasks due to their lack of discipline. Their unpredictable behavior has sometimes forced the Turkish regular troops to disarm them by force, yet they can be helpful in reconnaissance and outpost duties. They are often accused, and generally justifiably so, of stealing and mistreating the local population, similar to the Croats, Pandours, and Tolpatches of 18th-century European armies in terms of their fighting style and effectiveness. The term is also used for a mounted force that exists in peacetime across various provinces of the Turkish empire, performing gendarmerie duties.

BASHKALA, the chief town of a sanjak of the vilayet of Van in Asiatic Turkey. It is a military station, situated at an elevation of 7500 ft. above sea-level in the valley of the Great Zab river. It stands on the east slope of lofty bare mountains, overlooking a wide valley on the farther side of which flows the Zab. On a knoll above is a ruined fortress formerly occupied by a Kurdish Bey. The population numbers some 10,000, principally Kurds, but including 1500 Armenians and 1000 Jews. The place is important as the centre of the Hakkiari sanjak, a very difficult mountain district to the south-west containing numerous tribes of Kurds and Nestorian Christians, and also the many Kurdish tribes along the Persian frontier. The houses are well built of sun-dried brick, and the streets are wide and fairly clean. Good smiths' and carpenters' work is [v.03 p.0466]done. The bazaar is small, although a thriving trade is done with the mountain districts. Owing to the great elevation the winter is extremely severe, and the summer of short duration. Wheat, barley, millet and sesame are cultivated on the plain, but fruit and vegetables have mostly to be imported from Persia. Roads lead to Van, Urmia in Persia and Mosul through the Nestorian country. The Kurd and Nestorian tribes in the wilder parts of the Hakkiari Mountains are under slight government control, and are permitted to pay tribute and given self-government in a large degree.

BASHKALA, the main town of a district in the Van region of Eastern Turkey. It serves as a military base, located at an altitude of 7,500 feet above sea level in the valley of the Great Zab river. It sits on the eastern slope of tall, bare mountains, overlooking a broad valley on the other side where the Zab river flows. On a small hill nearby is a ruined fortress that was once occupied by a Kurdish chief. The population is around 10,000, mainly consisting of Kurds, but also includes 1,500 Armenians and 1,000 Jews. The town is significant as the center of the Hakkiari region, a challenging mountainous area to the southwest that is home to various Kurdish tribes and Nestorian Christians, as well as many Kurdish tribes along the Persian border. The houses are well-constructed from sun-dried bricks, and the streets are wide and relatively clean. Skilled blacksmiths and carpenters carry out their trades here. The bazaar is small, but a vibrant trade exists with the mountain regions. Due to the high elevation, winters are very harsh, and summers are short. Wheat, barley, millet, and sesame are grown in the plains, but most fruits and vegetables need to be brought in from Persia. Roads connect to Van, Urmia in Persia, and Mosul through the Nestorian areas. The Kurdish and Nestorian tribes in the more remote parts of the Hakkiari Mountains have limited government oversight, allowing them to pay tribute and enjoy a considerable degree of self-rule.

(F. R. M.)

(F. R. M.)

BASHKIRS, a people inhabiting the Russian governments of Ufa, Orenburg, Perm and Samara, and parts of Vyatka, especially on the slopes and confines of the Ural, and in the neighbouring plains. They speak a Tatar language, but some authorities think that they are ethnically a Finnish tribe transformed by Tatar influence. The name Bashkir or Bash-kûrt appears for the first time in the beginning of the 10th century in the writings of Ibn-Foslan, who, describing his travels among the Volga-Bulgarians, mentions the Bashkirs as a warlike and idolatrous race. The name was not used by the people themselves in the 10th century, but is a mere nickname.

BASHKIRS, are a group of people living in the Russian regions of Ufa, Orenburg, Perm, and Samara, as well as parts of Vyatka, particularly in the foothills and surrounding areas of the Ural Mountains, and in the adjacent plains. They speak a Tatar language, but some experts believe that they are ethnically a Finnish tribe that has been influenced by Tatar culture. The name Bashkir or Bash-kûrt first appeared in the early 10th century in the writings of Ibn-Foslan, who, during his travels among the Volga-Bulgarians, described the Bashkirs as a warlike and idolatrous group. The name was not used by the people themselves in the 10th century; it was simply a nickname.

Of European writers, the first to mention the Bashkirs are Joannes de Plano Carpini (c. 1200-1260) and William of Rubruquis (1220-1293). These travellers, who fell in with them in the upper parts of the river Ural, call them Pascatir, and assert that they spoke at that time the same language as the Hungarians. Till the arrival of the Mongolians, about the middle of the 13th century, the Bashkirs were a strong and independent people and troublesome to their neighbours, the Bulgarians and Petchenegs. At the time of the downfall of the Kazan kingdom they were in a weak state. In 1556 they voluntarily recognized the supremacy of Russia, and, in consequence, the city of Ufa was founded to defend them from the Kirghiz, and they were subjected to a fur-tax. In 1676 they rebelled under a leader named Seit, and were with difficulty reduced; and again in 1707, under Aldar and Kûsyom, on account of ill-treatment by the Russian officials. Their third and last insurrection was in 1735, at the time of the foundation of Orenburg, and it lasted for six years. In 1786 they were freed from taxes; and in 1798 an irregular army was formed from among them. They are now divided into cantons and give little trouble, though some differences have arisen between them and the government about land questions. By mode of life the Bashkirs are divided into settled and nomadic. The former are engaged in agriculture, cattle-rearing and bee-keeping, and live without want. The nomadic portion is subdivided, according to the districts in which they wander, into those of the mountains and those of the steppes. Almost their sole occupation is the rearing of cattle; and they attend to that in a very negligent manner, not collecting a sufficient store of winter fodder for all their herds, but allowing part of them to perish. The Bashkirs are usually very poor, and in winter live partly on a kind of gruel called yûryu, and badly prepared cheese named skûrt. They are hospitable but suspicious, apt to plunder and to the last degree lazy. They have large heads, black hair, eyes narrow and flat, small foreheads, ears always sticking out and a swarthy skin. In general, they are strong and muscular, and able to endure all kinds of labour and privation. They profess Mahommedanism, but know little of its doctrines. Their intellectual development is low.

Of European writers, the first to mention the Bashkirs are Joannes de Plano Carpini (c. 1200-1260) and William of Rubruquis (1220-1293). These travelers, who encountered them in the upper parts of the Ural River, called them Pascatir and stated that they spoke the same language as the Hungarians at that time. Before the Mongolian invasion in the mid-13th century, the Bashkirs were a strong and independent people, causing trouble for their neighbors, the Bulgarians and Petchenegs. By the time of the fall of the Kazan kingdom, they were in a weak position. In 1556, they willingly acknowledged the supremacy of Russia, prompting the establishment of the city of Ufa to protect them from the Kirghiz, and they were subject to a fur tax. In 1676, they rebelled under a leader named Seit and were subdued with difficulty; they rebelled again in 1707, led by Aldar and Kûsyom, due to mistreatment by Russian officials. Their third and final uprising occurred in 1735, coinciding with the founding of Orenburg, and lasted for six years. In 1786, they were exempted from taxes, and in 1798, an irregular army was formed from among them. Today, they are divided into cantons and cause little trouble, though some disputes have arisen with the government over land issues. The Bashkirs have two ways of life: settled and nomadic. Those who are settled engage in agriculture, cattle-rearing, and bee-keeping and live without need. The nomadic group is divided depending on the areas they wander, into mountain and steppe Bashkirs. Their main occupation is raising cattle, but they tend to do so carelessly, often failing to gather enough winter feed for all their herds, resulting in losses. The Bashkirs are typically very poor, and in winter, they mostly survive on a type of gruel called yûryu and poorly made cheese known as skûrt. They are hospitable but suspicious, prone to theft, and extremely lazy. They have large heads, black hair, narrow, flat eyes, small foreheads, ears that stick out, and a dark complexion. Overall, they are strong and muscular and can withstand various kinds of toil and hardship. They follow Islam but have a limited understanding of its teachings. Their intellectual development is low.

See J. P. Carpini, Liber Tartarorum, edited under the title Relations des Mongols ou Tartares, by d'Avezac (Paris, 1838); Gulielmus de Rubruquis, The Journey of William of Rubruck to the Eastern Parts of the World, translated by W. W. Rockhill (London, 1900); Semenoff, Slovar Ross. Imp., s.v.; Frahn, "De Baskiris," in Mém. de l'Acad. de St-Pétersbourg (1822); Florinsky, in Westnik Evropi (1874); and Katarinskij, Dictionnaire Bashkir-Russe (1900).

See J. P. Carpini, Liber Tartarorum, edited under the title Relations des Mongols ou Tartares, by d'Avezac (Paris, 1838); Gulielmus de Rubruquis, The Journey of William of Rubruck to the Eastern Parts of the World, translated by W. W. Rockhill (London, 1900); Semenoff, Slovar Ross. Imp., s.v.; Frahn, "De Baskiris," in Mém. de l'Acad. de St-Pétersbourg (1822); Florinsky, in Westnik Evropi (1874); and Katarinskij, Dictionnaire Bashkir-Russe (1900).

BASHKIRTSEFF, MARIA CONSTANTINOVA [Marie] (1860-1884), Russian artist and writer, was born at Gavrontsi in the government of Pultowa in Russia on the 23rd of November 1860. When Marie was seven years old, as her father (marshal of the nobility at Pultowa) and her mother were unable through incompatibility to live together, Madame Bashkirtseff with her little daughter left Russia to spend the winters at Nice or in Italy, and the summers at German watering-places. Marie acquired an education superior to that given to most girls of her rank. She could read Plato and Virgil in the original, and write four languages with almost equal facility. A gifted musician, she at first hoped to be a singer, and studied seriously in Italy to that end; her voice, however, was not strong enough to stand hard work and failed her. Meanwhile she was also learning to draw. When she lost her voice she devoted herself to painting, and in 1877 settled in Paris, where she worked steadily in Tony Robert-Fleury's studio. In 1880 she exhibited in the salon a portrait of a woman; in 1881 she exhibited the "Atelier Julian"; in 1882 "Jean et Jacques"; in 1884 the "Meeting," and a portrait in pastel of a lady—her cousin—now in the Luxembourg gallery, for which she was awarded a mention honorable. Her health, always delicate, could not endure the labour she imposed on herself in addition to the life of fashion in which she became involved as a result of her success as an artist, and she died of consumption on the 31st of October 1884, leaving a small series of works of remarkable promise. From her childhood Marie Bashkirtseff kept an autobiographical journal; but the editors of these brilliant confessions (Journal de Marie Bashkirtseff, 1890), aiming apparently at captivating the reader's interest by the girl's precocious gifts and by the names of the various distinguished persons with whom she came in contact, so treated certain portions as to draw down vehement protest. This, to some extent, has brought into question the stamp of truthfulness which constitutes the chief merit of this extraordinarily interesting book. A further instalment of Marie Bashkirtseff literature was published in the shape of letters between her and Guy de Maupassant, with whom she started a correspondence under a feigned name and without revealing her identity.

BASHKIRTSEFF, MARIA CONSTANTINOVA [Marie] (1860-1884), was a Russian artist and writer born in Gavrontsi, Pultowa, Russia, on November 23, 1860. When Marie was seven, her parents, who couldn't get along, separated. Her mother, Madame Bashkirtseff, took Marie to spend winters in Nice or Italy and summers at health resorts in Germany. Marie received an education that was better than what most girls of her status received. She could read Plato and Virgil in the original text and write in four languages with nearly equal skill. A talented musician, she originally wanted to be a singer and studied seriously in Italy to pursue that dream; however, her voice wasn't strong enough to handle the demands, and she lost it. At the same time, she was also learning to draw. After losing her voice, she focused on painting and settled in Paris in 1877, where she worked diligently in Tony Robert-Fleury's studio. In 1880, she exhibited a portrait of a woman at the salon; in 1881, she exhibited "Atelier Julian"; in 1882, "Jean et Jacques"; and in 1884, "Meeting," along with a pastel portrait of her cousin, which is now in the Luxembourg gallery, for which she received a mention honorable. Her already fragile health couldn't handle the demanding lifestyle she adopted due to her success as an artist, and she died from tuberculosis on October 31, 1884, leaving behind a small group of works with great potential. From childhood, Marie Bashkirtseff kept an autobiographical journal; however, the editors of these insightful writings (Journal de Marie Bashkirtseff, 1890), seemingly trying to capture readers' attention with her precocious talents and the names of notable individuals she encountered, edited certain parts in a way that sparked strong backlash. This has raised questions about the authenticity that is a key quality of this incredibly fascinating book. Another set of Marie Bashkirtseff's writings was published in the form of letters exchanged between her and Guy de Maupassant, with whom she began a correspondence using a fake name without revealing her true identity.

See Mathilde Blind, A Study of Marie Bashkirtseff (T. Fisher Unwin, 1892); The Journal of Marie Bashkirtseff: an Exposure and a Defence, by "S." (showing that there is throughout a mistake of four years in the date of the diary); Black and White, 6th Feb. and 11th April 1891, pp. 17, 304; The Journal of Marie Bashkirtseff, translated, with an Introduction, by Mathilde Blind (2 vols., London, 1890); The Letters of Marie Bashkirtseff (1 vol.).

See Mathilde Blind, A Study of Marie Bashkirtseff (T. Fisher Unwin, 1892); The Journal of Marie Bashkirtseff: an Exposure and a Defence, by "S." (which shows that there’s a consistent error of four years in the diary date); Black and White, February 6 and April 11, 1891, pp. 17, 304; The Journal of Marie Bashkirtseff, translated with an Introduction by Mathilde Blind (2 vols., London, 1890); The Letters of Marie Bashkirtseff (1 vol.).

(B. K.)

(B. K.)

BASIL,[1] known as Basil the Great (c. 330-379), bishop of Caesarea, a leading churchman in the 4th century, came of a famous family, which gave a number of distinguished supporters to the Church. His eldest sister, Macrina, was celebrated for her saintly life; his second brother was the famous Gregory of Nyssa; his youngest was Peter, bishop of Sebaste; and his eldest brother was the famous Christian jurist Naucratius. There was in the whole family a tendency to ecstatic emotion and enthusiastic piety, and it is worth noting that Cappadocia had already given to the Church men like Firmilian and Gregory Thaumaturgus. Basil was born about 330 at Caesarea in Cappadocia. While he was still a child, the family removed to Pontus; but he soon returned to Cappadocia to live with his mother's relations, and seems to have been brought up by his grandmother Macrina. Eager to learn, he went to Constantinople and spent four or five years there and at Athens, where he had Gregory (q.v.) of Nazianzus for a fellow-student. Both men were deeply influenced by Origen, and compiled the well-known anthology of his writings, known as Philocalia (edited by J. A. Robinson, Cambridge, 1893). It was at Athens that he seriously began to think of religion, and resolved to seek out the most famous hermit saints in Syria and Arabia, in order to learn from them how to attain to that enthusiastic piety in [v.03 p.0467]which he delighted, and how to keep his body under by maceration and other ascetic devices. After this we find him at the head of a convent near Arnesi in Pontus, in which his mother Emilia, now a widow, his sister Macrina and several other ladies, gave themselves to a pious life of prayer and charitable works. He was not ordained presbyter until 365, and his ordination was probably the result of the entreaties of his ecclesiastical superiors, who wished to use his talents against the Arians, who were numerous in that part of the country and were favoured by the Arian emperor, Valens, who then reigned in Constantinople. In 370 Eusebius, bishop of Caesarea, died, and Basil was chosen to succeed him. It was then that his great powers were called into action. Caesarea was an important diocese, and its bishop was, ex officio, exarch of the great diocese of Pontus. Hot-blooded and somewhat imperious, Basil was also generous and sympathetic. "His zeal for orthodoxy did not blind him to what was good in an opponent; and for the sake of peace and charity he was content to waive the use of orthodox terminology when it could be surrendered without a sacrifice of truth." He died in 379.

BASIL,[1] known as Basil the Great (c. 330-379), bishop of Caesarea, a prominent church leader in the 4th century, came from a renowned family that produced several notable supporters of the Church. His eldest sister, Macrina, was famous for her holy life; his second brother was the well-known Gregory of Nyssa; his youngest brother was Peter, bishop of Sebaste; and his eldest brother was the distinguished Christian lawyer Naucratius. The entire family had a tendency toward ecstatic emotion and passionate piety, and it's worth noting that Cappadocia had already contributed figures like Firmilian and Gregory Thaumaturgus to the Church. Basil was born around 330 in Caesarea, Cappadocia. When he was still a child, the family moved to Pontus; however, he soon returned to Cappadocia to live with his mother's relatives and appears to have been raised by his grandmother Macrina. Eager to learn, he went to Constantinople and spent four or five years there and in Athens, where he studied alongside Gregory (q.v.) of Nazianzus. Both were deeply influenced by Origen and compiled the well-known anthology of his writings, titled Philocalia (edited by J. A. Robinson, Cambridge, 1893). It was in Athens that he began to seriously contemplate religion and decided to seek out the most renowned hermit saints in Syria and Arabia, hoping to learn from them how to achieve the enthusiastic piety he admired and how to discipline his body through fasting and other ascetic practices. After this, he became the head of a convent near Arnesi in Pontus, where his mother Emilia, now a widow, his sister Macrina, and several other women dedicated themselves to a life of prayer and charitable works. He wasn't ordained as a presbyter until 365, and this ordination was likely due to the urging of his church leaders, who wanted to utilize his abilities against the Arians, who were prevalent in that region and were supported by the Arian emperor, Valens, who was ruling in Constantinople at the time. In 370, Eusebius, the bishop of Caesarea, passed away, and Basil was chosen to succeed him. It was then that his significant abilities came into play. Caesarea was an important diocese, and its bishop was, ex officio, exarch of the larger diocese of Pontus. Passionate and somewhat authoritative, Basil was also generous and empathetic. "His zeal for orthodoxy did not prevent him from recognizing the good in an opponent; and for the sake of peace and charity, he was willing to forego using orthodox terminology when it could be done without compromising the truth." He passed away in 379.

The principal theological writings of Basil are his De Spiritu Sancto, a lucid and edifying appeal to Scripture and early Christian tradition, and his three books against Eunomius, the chief exponent of Anomoian Arianism. He was a famous preacher, and many of his homilies, including a series of lenten lectures on the Hexaëmeron, and an exposition of the psalter, have been preserved. His ascetic tendencies are exhibited in the Moralia and Regulae, ethical manuals for use in the world and the cloister respectively. His three hundred letters reveal a rich and observant nature, which, despite the troubles of ill-health and ecclesiastical unrest, remained optimistic, tender and even playful. His principal efforts as a reformer were directed towards the improvement of the liturgy, and the reformation of the monastic orders of the East. (See Basilian Monks.)

The main theological works of Basil are his De Spiritu Sancto, a clear and insightful appeal to Scripture and early Christian tradition, and his three books against Eunomius, the leading proponent of Anomoian Arianism. He was a well-known preacher, and many of his sermons, including a series of Lenten lectures on the Hexaëmeron and an explanation of the Psalms, have been preserved. His ascetic tendencies are shown in the Moralia and Regulae, ethical guides for use in the world and in monastic life, respectively. His three hundred letters reveal a rich and observant character that, despite struggles with health issues and church conflicts, remained hopeful, compassionate, and even playful. His main reform efforts focused on improving the liturgy and reforming the monastic orders in the East. (See Basilian monks.)

Bibliography.—Editions of his works appeared at Basel (1532); Paris, by J. Garnier and P. Maranus (1721-1730), and by L. de Sinner (1839). Migne's Patrol. ser. graec. 29-32; De Spiritu Sancto, ed. C. F. H. Johnston (Oxford, 1892); Liturgia, ed. A. Robertson (London, 1894). See also the patrologies, e.g. that of O. Bardenhewer, and the histories of dogma, e.g. those of A. Harnack and F. Loofs.

References.—Editions of his works appeared in Basel (1532); Paris, by J. Garnier and P. Maranus (1721-1730), and by L. de Sinner (1839). Migne's Patrol. ser. graec. 29-32; De Spiritu Sancto, edited by C. F. H. Johnston (Oxford, 1892); Liturgia, edited by A. Robertson (London, 1894). See also the patrologies, e.g. that of O. Bardenhewer, and the histories of dogma, e.g. those of A. Harnack and F. Loofs.

[1] The name Basil also belongs to several other distinguished churchmen, (1) Basil, bishop of Ancyra from 336 to 360, a semi-Arian, highly favoured by the emperor Constantine, and a great polemical writer; none of his works are extant. (2) Basil of Seleucia (fl. 448-458), a bishop who shifted sides continually in the Eutychian controversy, and who wrote extensively; his works were published in Paris in 1622. (3) Basil of Ancyra, fl. 787; he opposed image-worship at the second council of Nicaea, but afterwards retracted. (4) Basil of Achrida, archbishop of Thessalonica about 1155; he was a stanch upholder of the claims of the Eastern Church against the widening supremacy of the papacy.

[1] The name Basil is also associated with several other notable church leaders: (1) Basil, bishop of Ancyra from 336 to 360, a semi-Arian, who was highly favored by Emperor Constantine, and a significant writer in religious debates; none of his works survive. (2) Basil of Seleucia (fl. 448-458), a bishop who frequently changed his stance during the Eutychian controversy, and who wrote a lot; his works were published in Paris in 1622. (3) Basil of Ancyra, fl. 787; he opposed image-worship at the second council of Nicaea but later retracted his position. (4) Basil of Achrida, archbishop of Thessalonica around 1155; he was a strong supporter of the Eastern Church's claims against the growing dominance of the papacy.

BASIL I. (d. 886), known as the "Macedonian", Roman emperor in the East, was born of a family of Armenian (not Slavonic) descent, settled in Macedonia. He spent a part of his boyhood in captivity in Bulgaria, whither his family was carried by the Bulgarian prince Krum in 813. He succeeded in escaping and was ultimately lucky enough to enter the service of Theophilitzes, a relative of the Caesar Bardas (uncle of Michael III.), as groom. It seems that while serving in this capacity he visited Patrae with his master, and gained the favour of Danielis, a very wealthy lady of that place, who received him into her household, and endowed him with a fortune. He earned the notice of Michael III. by winning a victory in a wrestling match, and soon became the emperor's boon companion and was appointed chamberlain (parakoemōmenos). A man of his stamp, advancing unscrupulously on the road of fortune, had no hesitation in divorcing his wife and marrying a mistress of Michael, Eudocia Ingerina, to please his master. It was commonly believed that Leo VI., Basil's successor and reputed son, was really the son of Michael. The next step was to murder the powerful Caesar Bardas, who, as the emperor was devoted to amusement, virtually ruled the empire; this was done with the emperor's consent by Basil's own hand (April 866), and a few weeks later Basil was raised to the imperial dignity. Hitherto few perhaps had divined in the unprincipled adventurer, who shared in the debauches of the imperial drunkard, the talents of a born ruler. On the throne he soon displayed the serious side of his nature and his exceptional capacities for administration. In September 867 he caused his worthless benefactor to be assassinated, and reigned alone. He inaugurated a new age in the history of the empire, associated with the dynasty which he founded,—"the Macedonian dynasty" it is usually called; it would be more instructive to call it "Armenian." It was a period of territorial expansion, during which the empire was the strongest power in Europe. The great legislative work which Basil undertook and his successor completed, and which may be described as a revival of Justinianean law, entitles him to the designation of a second Justinian (the Basilica, a collection of laws in sixty books; and the manuals known as the Prochiron and Epanagogē. For this legislation see Basilica and Roman Empire, Later). His financial administration was prudent. His ecclesiastical policy was marked by a wish to keep on good terms with Rome. One of his first acts was to exile the patriarch Photius and restore his rival Ignatius, whose claims were supported by the pope. Yet he had no intention of yielding to Rome's pretensions beyond a certain point. The decision of the Bulgarian tsar Michael to submit the new Bulgarian Church to the jurisdiction of Constantinople was a great blow to Rome, who had hoped to secure it for herself. In 877 Photius became patriarch again, and there was a virtual though not a formal breach with Rome. Thus the independence of the Greek Church may be said to date from the time of Basil. His reign was marked by a troublesome war with the Paulician heretics, an inheritance from his predecessor; the death of their able chief Chrysochir led to the definite subjection of this little state, of which the chief stronghold was Tephrice on the upper Euphrates, and which the Saracens had helped to bid a long defiance to the government of Constantinople. There was the usual frontier warfare with the Saracens in Asia Minor. Cyprus was recovered, but only retained for seven years. Syracuse was lost, but Bari was won back and those parts of Calabria which had been occupied by the Saracens. The last successes opened a new period of Byzantine domination in southern Italy. Above all, New Rome was again mistress of the sea, and especially of the gates of the Adriatic. Basil reigned nineteen years as sole sovereign. His death (29th of August 886) was due to a fever contracted in consequence of a serious accident in hunting. A stag dragged him from his horse by fixing its antlers in his belt. He was saved by an attendant who cut him loose with a knife. His last act was to cause his saviour to be beheaded, suspecting him of the intention to kill and not to rescue. Basil is one of the most remarkable examples of a man, without education and exposed to the most demoralizing influences, manifesting extraordinary talents in the government of a great state, when he had climbed to the throne by acts of unscrupulous bloodshed.

BASIL I. (d. 886), known as the "Macedonian", Roman emperor in the East, was born to a family of Armenian (not Slavonic) descent, settled in Macedonia. He spent part of his childhood captive in Bulgaria, where his family was taken by the Bulgarian prince Krum in 813. He managed to escape and was fortunate enough to enter the service of Theophilitzes, a relative of Caesar Bardas (uncle of Michael III.), as a groom. While working in this position, he visited Patrae with his master and won the favor of Danielis, a very wealthy woman from that area, who welcomed him into her household and gifted him a fortune. He caught the attention of Michael III. by winning a wrestling match and soon became the emperor's close companion, eventually being appointed chamberlain (parakoemōmenos). A man like him, ruthlessly pursuing success, had no qualms about divorcing his wife and marrying Michael's mistress, Eudocia Ingerina, to please his master. It was widely believed that Leo VI., Basil's successor and supposed son, was actually the son of Michael. The next step was to murder the powerful Caesar Bardas, who essentially ran the empire while the emperor indulged in entertainment; this was done with the emperor's approval and by Basil himself (April 866), and a few weeks later, Basil was elevated to imperial status. Until then, few might have seen in the unscrupulous adventurer, who participated in the excesses of the imperial drunkard, the qualities of a natural ruler. Once on the throne, he quickly revealed his serious side and exceptional skills in administration. In September 867, he had his worthless benefactor assassinated and ruled alone. He started a new era in the history of the empire, linked to the dynasty he founded, often referred to as "the Macedonian dynasty"; it would be more accurate to call it "Armenian." This was a time of territorial expansion, during which the empire became the strongest power in Europe. The major legislative efforts that Basil initiated and his successor completed, which can be seen as a revival of Justinian law, qualify him to be called a second Justinian (the Basilica, a collection of laws in sixty books; and the manuals known as the Prochiron and Epanagogē. For this legislation see Cathedral and Roman Empire, Later). His financial administration was wise. His church policy was characterized by a desire to maintain good relations with Rome. One of his first actions was to exile Patriarch Photius and restore his rival Ignatius, whose claims were backed by the pope. However, he did not intend to concede to Rome's demands beyond a certain limit. The decision of Bulgarian tsar Michael to place the new Bulgarian Church under the jurisdiction of Constantinople was a significant blow to Rome, which had hoped to claim it for itself. In 877, Photius became patriarch again, leading to a virtual, though not formal, split with Rome. Thus, the independence of the Greek Church can be traced back to Basil's time. His reign was marked by a challenging war with the Paulician heretics, a legacy from his predecessor; the death of their capable leader Chrysochir resulted in the definitive subjugation of this small state, whose chief stronghold was Tephrice on the upper Euphrates, and which had long resisted the government of Constantinople with the help of the Saracens. There was also the usual frontier warfare with the Saracens in Asia Minor. Cyprus was reclaimed but only held for seven years. Syracuse was lost, but Bari was regained along with those areas of Calabria previously occupied by the Saracens. These last victories initiated a new phase of Byzantine control in southern Italy. Most importantly, New Rome once again held dominance over the sea, particularly at the gates of the Adriatic. Basil ruled as the sole sovereign for nineteen years. His death (August 29, 886) was due to fever contracted from a serious hunting accident. A stag knocked him from his horse by getting its antlers caught in his belt. He was rescued by an attendant who cut him free with a knife. His last act was to have his rescuer beheaded, suspecting him of intending to kill rather than save him. Basil stands out as one of the most notable examples of a man, lacking education and subjected to the most corrupting influences, showcasing extraordinary talents in governing a vast state, having ascended to the throne through ruthless bloodshed.

Sources.—Vita Basilii, by his grandson Constantine VII. (bk. v. of the Continuation of Theophanes, ed. Bonn); Genesius (ed. Bonn); Vita Euthymii, ed. De Boor (Berlin, 1888). Of the Arabic sources Tabari is the most important.

References.—Vita Basilii, by his grandson Constantine VII. (bk. v. of the Continuation of Theophanes, ed. Bonn); Genesius (ed. Bonn); Vita Euthymii, ed. De Boor (Berlin, 1888). Of the Arabic sources, Tabari is the most important.

Modern Works.—Finlay, History of Greece, vol. ii. (Oxford, 1877); Gibbon, Decline and Fall, vols. v. and vi. (ed. Bury, London, 1898); Hergenröther, Photius, Patriarch von Constantinopel, vol. ii. (Regensburg, 1867).

Current Works.—Finlay, History of Greece, vol. ii. (Oxford, 1877); Gibbon, Decline and Fall, vols. v. and vi. (ed. Bury, London, 1898); Hergenröther, Photius, Patriarch of Constantinople, vol. ii. (Regensburg, 1867).

(J. B. B.)

(J. B. B.)

BASIL II. (c. 958-1025), known as Bulgaroktonos (slayer of Bulgarians), Roman emperor in the East, son of Romanus II. and Theophano, great-great-grandson of Basil I., was born about 958 and crowned on the 22nd of April 960. After their father's death (963) he and his younger brother Constantine were nominal emperors during the actual reigns of Nicephorus Phocas, their stepfather, and John Tzimisces. On the death of the latter (10th of January 976) they assumed the sovereignty without a colleague, but throughout their joint reign Constantine exercised no power and devoted himself chiefly to pleasure. This was in accordance with the Byzantine principle that in the case of two or more co-regnant basileis only one governed. Basil was a brave soldier and a superb horseman; he was to approve himself a strong ruler and an able general. He did not at first display the full extent of his energy. The administration remained in the hands of the eunuch Basileios (an illegitimate son of Romanus I.), president of the senate, a wily and gifted man, who hoped that the young emperors would be his puppets. Basil waited and watched without interfering, and devoted himself to learning the details of administrative business and instructing himself in military science. During this time the throne was seriously endangered by the rebellion of an ambitious general who aspired to play the part of Nicephorus Phocas or Tzimisces. This was Bardas [v.03 p.0468]Sclerus, whom the eunuch deposed from his post of general in the East. He belonged to the powerful landed aristocracy of Asia Minor, whose pretensions were a perpetual menace to the throne. He made himself master of the Asiatic provinces and threatened Constantinople. To oppose him, Bardas Phocas, another general who had revolted in the previous reign and been interned in a monastery, was recalled. Defeated in two battles, he was victorious in a third and the revolt was suppressed (979). Phocas remained general in the East till 987, when he rebelled and was proclaimed emperor by his troops. It seems that the minister Basileios was privy to this act, and the cause was dissatisfaction at the energy which was displayed by the emperor, who showed that he was determined to take the administration into his own hands and personally to control the army. Phocas advanced to the Hellespont and besieged Abydos. Basil obtained timely aid, in the shape of Varangian mercenaries, from his brother-in-law Vladimir, the Russian prince of Kiev, and marched to Abydos. The two armies were facing each other, when Basil galloped forward, seeking a personal combat with the usurper who was riding in front of his lines. Phocas, just as he prepared to face him, fell from his horse and was found to be dead. This ended the rebellion.

BASIL II. (c. 958-1025), known as Bulgaroktonos (slayer of Bulgarians), was a Roman emperor in the East, the son of Romanus II and Theophano, and the great-great-grandson of Basil I. He was born around 958 and crowned on April 22, 960. After their father's death in 963, he and his younger brother Constantine were nominal emperors during the actual reigns of Nicephorus Phocas, their stepfather, and John Tzimisces. Following the death of the latter on January 10, 976, they took full control without a colleague, but throughout their joint reign, Constantine exercised no power and focused mainly on pleasure. This was in line with the Byzantine principle that among co-ruling basileis, only one truly governs. Basil was a brave soldier and an excellent horseman; he was to prove himself a strong ruler and a capable general. Initially, he did not show the full extent of his energy. The administration was under the control of the eunuch Basileios, an illegitimate son of Romanus I, who was the president of the senate—a clever and talented man who hoped the young emperors would be his puppets. Basil waited and observed without intervening, dedicating himself to learning the details of administration and studying military strategy. During this time, the throne was seriously threatened by the rebellion of an ambitious general, Bardas Sclerus, who aimed to emulate Nicephorus Phocas or Tzimisces. The eunuch removed Sclerus from his position as general in the East. He was part of the powerful landed aristocracy of Asia Minor, whose ambitions consistently threatened the throne. Sclerus managed to control the Asiatic provinces and posed a threat to Constantinople. To counter him, Bardas Phocas, another general who had revolted during the previous reign and had been confined to a monastery, was called back. After losing two battles, he triumphed in a third, and the rebellion was quelled in 979. Phocas remained the general in the East until 987 when he rebelled and was declared emperor by his troops. It seems that the minister Basileios was involved in this act due to dissatisfaction with the emperor's assertiveness, as he showed determination to take control of the administration and personally lead the army. Phocas moved to the Hellespont and laid siege to Abydos. Basil received timely help in the form of Varangian mercenaries from his brother-in-law Vladimir, the Russian prince of Kiev, and marched to Abydos. The two armies faced off, and as Basil charged forward looking for a personal duel with the usurper leading his lines, Phocas unexpectedly fell from his horse and was found to be dead. This concluded the rebellion.

The fall of Basileios followed; he was punished with exile and the confiscation of his enormous property. Basil made ruthless war upon the system of immense estates which had grown up in Asia Minor and which his predecessor, Romanus I., had endeavoured to check. (For this evil and the legislation which was aimed at it see Roman Empire, Later.) He sought to protect the lower and middle classes.

The fall of Basileios came next; he was exiled and had his vast property taken away. Basil waged a fierce battle against the system of large estates that had developed in Asia Minor and that his predecessor, Romanus I., had tried to curb. (For this issue and the legislation aimed at it, see Later Roman Empire.) He aimed to safeguard the lower and middle classes.

Basil gained some successes against the Saracens (995); but his most important work in the East was the annexation of the principalities of Armenia. He created in those highlands a strongly fortified frontier, which, if his successors had been capable, should have proved an effective barrier against the invasions of the Seljuk Turks. The greatest achievement of the reign was the subjugation of Bulgaria. After the death of Tzimisces (who had reduced only the eastern part of the Bulgarian kingdom), the power of Bulgaria was restored by the Tsar Samuel, in whom Basil found a worthy foe. The emperor's first efforts against him were unsuccessful (981), and the war was not resumed till 996, Samuel in the meantime extending his rule along the Adriatic coast and imposing his lordship on Servia. Eastern Bulgaria was finally recovered in 1000; but the war continued with varying successes till 1014, when the Bulgarian army suffered an overwhelming defeat. Basil blinded 15,000 prisoners, leaving a one-eyed man to every hundred to lead them to their tsar, who fainted at the sight and died two days later. The last sparks of resistance were extinguished in 1018, and the great Slavonic realm lay in the dust. The power of Byzantium controlled once more the Illyrian peninsula. Basil died in December 1025 in the midst of preparations to send a naval expedition to recover Sicily from the Saracens.

Basil achieved some victories against the Saracens (995); however, his most significant accomplishment in the East was the annexation of the principalities of Armenia. He established a well-fortified frontier in those highlands, which, if his successors had been capable, should have effectively defended against the invasions of the Seljuk Turks. The greatest success of his reign was the conquest of Bulgaria. After Tzimisces died (who had only conquered the eastern part of the Bulgarian kingdom), the power of Bulgaria was restored under Tsar Samuel, a formidable opponent for Basil. The emperor's initial attempts to defeat him were unsuccessful (981), and the conflict didn't resume until 996, during which Samuel expanded his territory along the Adriatic coast and asserted control over Servia. Eastern Bulgaria was finally reclaimed in 1000; however, the war continued with mixed results until 1014, when the Bulgarian army suffered a devastating defeat. Basil ordered 15,000 prisoners to be blinded, leaving one one-eyed man for every hundred to lead them back to their tsar, who fainted at the sight and died two days later. The final resistance was quashed in 1018, and the vast Slavic realm lay in ruins. Byzantine power once again dominated the Illyrian peninsula. Basil died in December 1025 while preparing to launch a naval expedition to reclaim Sicily from the Saracens.

Basil's reign marks the highest point of the power of the Eastern empire since Justinian I. Part of the credit is due to his predecessors Nicephorus and Tzimisces, but the greater part belongs to him. He dedicated himself unsparingly to the laborious duties of ruling, and he had to reckon throughout with the ill-will of a rich and powerful section of his subjects. He was hard and cruel, without any refinement or interest in culture. In a contemporary psalter (preserved in the library of St Mark at Venice) there is a portrait of him, with a grey beard, crowned and robed in imperial costume.

Basil's reign represents the peak of the Eastern Empire's power since Justinian I. While some credit goes to his predecessors Nicephorus and Tzimisces, most of it belongs to him. He devoted himself tirelessly to the demanding responsibilities of ruling and constantly had to deal with the hostility of a wealthy and powerful portion of his subjects. He was harsh and ruthless, lacking any sophistication or interest in culture. In a contemporary psalter (kept in the library of St Mark in Venice), there's a portrait of him with a grey beard, crowned and dressed in imperial attire.

Authorities.—Leo Diaconus (ed. Bonn, 1828); Psellus, History (ed. Sathas, London, 1899); George Cedrenus (Chronicle, transcribed from the work of John Scylitzes, vol. ii., ed. Bonn, 1839); Zonaras, bk. xvii. (ed. Bonn, vol. iii., 1897); Cecaumenus, Strategikon (ed. Vasilievski and Jernstedt, St Petersburg, 1896); Yahyā of Antioch (contemporary Asiatic chronicle), extracts with Russian translation by Rosen (St Petersburg, 1883); Al Mekin (Elmacinus), Historia Saracenica, (ed. with Latin translation by Erpenius, Leiden, 1625); "Laws (Novellae) of Basil" (ed. Zachariä von Lingenthal, in Jus Graeco-Romanum, vol. iii., 1853); Finlay, Hist. of Greece; Gibbon, Decline and Fall; G. Schlumberger, L'Épopée byzantine, part i. and part ii. (Paris, 1896, 1900).

Sources.—Leo Diaconus (ed. Bonn, 1828); Psellus, History (ed. Sathas, London, 1899); George Cedrenus (Chronicle, transcribed from the work of John Scylitzes, vol. ii., ed. Bonn, 1839); Zonaras, bk. xvii. (ed. Bonn, vol. iii., 1897); Cecaumenus, Strategikon (ed. Vasilievski and Jernstedt, St Petersburg, 1896); Yahyā of Antioch (contemporary Asian chronicle), extracts with Russian translation by Rosen (St Petersburg, 1883); Al Mekin (Elmacinus), Historia Saracenica, (ed. with Latin translation by Erpenius, Leiden, 1625); "Laws (Novellae) of Basil" (ed. Zachariä von Lingenthal, in Jus Graeco-Romanum, vol. iii., 1853); Finlay, Hist. of Greece; Gibbon, Decline and Fall; G. Schlumberger, L'Épopée byzantine, part i. and part ii. (Paris, 1896, 1900).

(J. B. B.)

(J. B. B.)

BASIL (Russ. Vasily), the name of four grand-dukes of Moscow and tsars of Muscovy.

BASIL (Russ. Vasily), the name of four grand dukes of Moscow and tsars of Muscovy.

Basil I. Dmitrevich (1371-1425), son of Dmitri (Demetrius) Donskoi, whom he succeeded in 1389, married Sophia, the daughter of Vitovt, grand-duke of Lithuania. In his reign the grand-duchy of Muscovy became practically hereditary, and asserted its supremacy over all the surrounding principalities. Nevertheless Basil received his yarluik, or investiture, from the Golden Horde and was compelled to pay tribute to the grand khan, Tokhtamuish. He annexed the principality of Suzdal to Moscovy, together with Murom, Kozelsk Peremyshl, and other places; reduced the grand-duchy of Rostov to a state of vassalage; and acquired territory from the republic of Great Novgorod by treaty. In his reign occurred the invasion of Timur (1395), who ruined the Volgan regions, but did not penetrate so far as Moscow. Indeed Timur's raid was of service to the Russian prince as it all but wiped out the Golden Horde, which for the next twelve years was in a state of anarchy. During the whole of this time no tribute was paid to the khan, though vast sums of money were collected in the Moscow treasury for military purposes. In 1408 the Mirza Edigei ravaged Muscovite territory, but was unable to take Moscow. In 1412, however, Basil found it necessary to pay the long-deferred visit of submission to the Horde. The most important ecclesiastical event of the reign was the elevation of the Bulgarian, Gregory Tsamblak, to the metropolitan see of Kiev (1425) by Vitovt, grand-duke of Lithuania; the immediate political consequence of which was the weakening of the hold of Muscovy on the south-western Russian states. During Basil's reign a terrible visitation of the "Black Death" decimated the population.

Basil I. Dmitrevich (1371-1425), son of Dmitri (Demetrius) Donskoi, who he took over from in 1389, married Sophia, the daughter of Vitovt, the grand-duke of Lithuania. During his rule, the grand-duchy of Muscovy became nearly hereditary and established dominance over all nearby principalities. However, Basil still received his yarluik, or formal investiture, from the Golden Horde and was forced to pay tribute to the grand khan, Tokhtamuish. He added the principality of Suzdal to Moscovy, along with Murom, Kozelsk, Peremyshl, and other areas; made the grand-duchy of Rostov a vassal state; and secured land from the republic of Great Novgorod through a treaty. His reign saw the invasion of Timur (1395), who devastated the Volga regions but did not reach Moscow. In fact, Timur's invasion actually benefited the Russian prince by almost eliminating the Golden Horde, which then faced twelve years of chaos. During this time, no tribute was paid to the khan, although large amounts of money were amassed in the Moscow treasury for military needs. In 1408, Mirza Edigei ravaged Muscovite lands but could not capture Moscow. However, in 1412, Basil found it necessary to finally pay the overdue tribute to the Horde. The most significant religious event of his reign was the appointment of Gregory Tsamblak from Bulgaria to the metropolitan see of Kiev (1425) by Vitovt, grand-duke of Lithuania; this weakened Muscovy's influence over the southwestern Russian states. Basil's reign was also marked by a devastating outbreak of the "Black Death," which significantly reduced the population.

See T. Schiemann, Russland bis ins 17. Jahrhundert (Gotha, 1885-1887).

See T. Schiemann, Russia up to the 17th Century (Gotha, 1885-1887).

Basil II., called Temny ("the Blind") (1415-1462), son of the preceding, succeeded his father as grand-duke of Moscow in 1425. He was a man of small ability and unusual timidity, though not without tenacity of purpose. Nevertheless, during his reign Moscow steadily increased in power, as if to show that the personality of the grand-dukes had become quite a subordinate factor in its development. In 1430 Basil was seized by his uncle, George of Halicz, and sent a prisoner to Kostroma; but the nation, dissatisfied with George, released Basil and in 1433 he returned in triumph to Moscow. George, however, took the field against him and Basil fled to Novgorod. On the death of George, Basil was at constant variance with George's children, one of whom, Basil, he had blinded; but in 1445 the grand-duke fell into the hands of blind Basil's brother, Shemyak, and was himself deprived of his sight and banished to Uglich (1445). The clergy and people, however, being devoted to the grand-duke, assisted him not only to recover his throne a second time, but to put Shemyak to flight, and to seize Halicz, his patrimony. During the remainder of Basil II.'s reign he slowly and unobtrusively added district after district to the grand-duchy of Muscovy, so that, in fine, only the republics of Novgorod and Pskov and the principalities of Tver and Vereya remained independent of Moscow. Yet all this time the realm was overrun continually by the Tatars and Lithuanians, and suffered severely from their depredations. Basil's reign saw the foundation of the Solovetsk monastery and the rise of the khanate of the Crimea. In 1448 the north Russian Church became virtually independent of the patriarchal see of Constantinople by adopting the practice of selecting its metropolitan from among native priests and prelates exclusively.

Basil II., known as Temny ("the Blind") (1415-1462), son of the previous grand-duke, took over as the grand-duke of Moscow in 1425. He was not particularly skilled and tended to be timid, although he was determined. Despite this, during his rule, Moscow consistently grew in power, indicating that the influence of the grand-dukes had become a minor aspect of its progress. In 1430, Basil was captured by his uncle, George of Halicz, and imprisoned in Kostroma; however, the people, unhappy with George, freed Basil, and he returned to Moscow triumphantly in 1433. George, however, opposed him, forcing Basil to flee to Novgorod. After George's death, Basil frequently clashed with George's children, one of whom he had blinded; but in 1445, he was captured by blind Basil's brother, Shemyak, who then made him blind and exiled him to Uglich (1445). The clergy and citizens, loyal to the grand-duke, helped him regain his throne for a second time, leading to Shemyak’s flight and the capture of Halicz, his ancestral land. Throughout the rest of Basil II.'s reign, he gradually and quietly expanded the grand-duchy of Muscovy, so that only the republics of Novgorod and Pskov, along with the principalities of Tver and Vereya, remained independent of Moscow. All the while, the region was constantly invaded by the Tatars and Lithuanians, suffering greatly from their raids. Basil's reign saw the founding of the Solovetsk monastery and the emergence of the Crimean khanate. In 1448, the north Russian Church became nearly independent from the patriarchal authority of Constantinople by choosing its metropolitan exclusively from local priests and leaders.

See S. M. Solovev, History of Russia (Russ.), (Petersburg, 1895).

See S. M. Solovev, History of Russia (Russ.), (Petersburg, 1895).

Basil III., Ivanovich (1479-1533), tsar of Muscovy, son of Ivan III. and Sophia Palaeologa, succeeded his father in 1505. A crafty prince, with all the tenacity of his race, Basil succeeded in incorporating with Muscovy the last remnants of the ancient independent principalities, by accusing the princes of Ryazan and Syeversk of conspiracy against him, seizing their persons, and annexing their domains (1517-1523). Seven years earlier (24th of January 1510) the last free republic of old Russia, Pskov, was deprived of its charter and assembly-bell, which were sent [v.03 p.0469]to Moscow, and tsarish governors were appointed to rule it. Basil also took advantage of the difficult position of Sigismund of Poland to capture Smolensk, the great eastern fortress of Poland (1512), chiefly through the aid of the rebel Lithuanian, Prince Michael Glinsky, who provided him with artillery and engineers from western Europe. The loss of Smolensk was the first serious injury inflicted by Muscovy on Poland and only the exigencies of Sigismund compelled him to acquiesce in its surrender (1522). Equally successful, on the whole, was Basil against the Tatars. Although in 1519 he was obliged to buy off the khan of the Crimea, Mahommed Girai, under the very walls of Moscow, towards the end of his reign he established the Russian influence on the Volga, and in 1530 placed the pretender Elanyei on the throne of Kazan. Basil was the first grand-duke of Moscow who adopted the title of tsar and the double-headed eagle of the East Roman empire. By his second wife, Helena Glinska, whom he married in 1526, Basil had a son Ivan, who succeeded him as Ivan IV.

Basil III, Ivanovich (1479-1533), tsar of Muscovy, son of Ivan III and Sophia Palaeologa, took over from his father in 1505. A cunning ruler, with all the determination of his lineage, Basil managed to bring together the last remnants of the ancient independent principalities by accusing the princes of Ryazan and Syeversk of plotting against him, capturing them, and annexing their lands (1517-1523). Seven years earlier (January 24, 1510), the last free republic of old Russia, Pskov, lost its charter and assembly-bell, which were sent to Moscow, and tsarist governors were put in charge. Basil also capitalized on Sigismund of Poland's difficult situation to seize Smolensk, the major eastern fortress of Poland (1512), largely thanks to the support of the rebel Lithuanian, Prince Michael Glinsky, who supplied him with artillery and engineers from western Europe. The loss of Smolensk was the first serious blow Muscovy dealt to Poland, and it was only because of Sigismund's pressing circumstances that he agreed to its surrender (1522). Basil was also largely successful against the Tatars. Although in 1519 he had to pay off the Crimean khan, Mahommed Girai, right at the gates of Moscow, by the end of his reign he established Russian influence over the Volga and in 1530 placed the pretender Elanyei on the throne of Kazan. Basil was the first grand duke of Moscow to take the title of tsar and adopt the double-headed eagle of the East Roman Empire. With his second wife, Helena Glinska, whom he married in 1526, Basil had a son, Ivan, who succeeded him as Ivan IV.

See Sigismund Herberstain, Rerum Moscoviticarum Commentarii (Vienna, 1549); P. A. Byelov, Russian History Previous to the Reforms of Peter the Great (Russ.), (Petersburg, 1895); E. I. Kashprovsky, The War of Basil III. with Sigismund I. (Russ.), (Nyezhin, 1899).

See Sigismund Herberstain, Commentaries on Moscovian Affairs (Vienna, 1549); P. A. Byelov, Russian History Before the Reforms of Peter the Great (Russ.), (Petersburg, 1895); E. I. Kashprovsky, The War of Basil III with Sigismund I (Russ.), (Nyezhin, 1899).

Basil IV., Shuisky (d. 1612), tsar of Muscovy, was during the reigns of Theodore I. and Boris Godunov, one of the leading boyars of Muscovy. It was he who, in obedience to the secret orders of Tsar Boris, went to Uglich to inquire into the cause of the death of Demetrius, the infant son of Ivan the Terrible, who had been murdered there by the agents of Boris. Shuisky obsequiously reported that it was a case of suicide; yet, on the death of Boris and the accession of his son Theodore II., the false boyar, in order to gain favour with the first false Demetrius, went back upon his own words and recognized the pretender as the real Demetrius, thus bringing about the assassination of the young Theodore. Shuisky then plotted against the false Demetrius and procured his death (May 1606) also by publicly confessing that the real Demetrius had been indeed slain and that the reigning tsar was an impostor. This was the viler in him as the pseudo-Demetrius had already forgiven him one conspiracy. Shuisky's adherents thereupon proclaimed him tsar (19th of May 1606). He reigned till the 19th of July 1610, but was never generally recognized. Even in Moscow itself he had little or no authority, and was only not deposed by the dominant boyars because they had none to put in his place. Only the popularity of his heroic cousin, Prince Michael Skopin-Shuisky, who led his armies and fought his battles for him, and soldiers from Sweden, whose assistance he purchased by a disgraceful cession of Russian territory, kept him for a time on his unstable throne. In 1610 he was deposed, made a monk, and finally carried off as a trophy by the Polish grand hetman, Stanislaus Zolkiewski. He died at Warsaw in 1612.

Basil IV, Shuisky (d. 1612), tsar of Muscovy, was one of the top boyars during the reigns of Theodore I and Boris Godunov. It was he who, following secret orders from Tsar Boris, went to Uglich to investigate the death of Demetrius, the infant son of Ivan the Terrible, who had been murdered there by Boris’s agents. Shuisky submissively reported that it was a suicide; however, after Boris's death and the rise of his son Theodore II, the deceitful boyar reversed his statement to gain favor with the first false Demetrius, thereby causing the assassination of the young Theodore. Shuisky then conspired against the false Demetrius and ensured his death (May 1606) by publicly confessing that the real Demetrius had indeed been killed and that the current tsar was an impostor. This was more despicable of him since the pseudo-Demetrius had already forgiven him for one conspiracy. Shuisky's supporters then proclaimed him tsar (May 19, 1606). He ruled until July 19, 1610, but was never widely recognized. Even in Moscow, he had little authority and was only kept from being ousted by the dominant boyars because they had no one else to replace him. Only the popularity of his heroic cousin, Prince Michael Skopin-Shuisky, who led his armies and fought his battles, along with soldiers from Sweden, whom he paid for with a shameful surrender of Russian territory, allowed him to stay on his shaky throne for a while. In 1610, he was deposed, became a monk, and was ultimately taken prisoner by the Polish grand hetman, Stanislaus Zolkiewski. He died in Warsaw in 1612.

See D. I. Ilovaisky, The Troubled Period of the Muscovite Realm (Russ.), (Moscow, 1894); S. I. Platonov, Sketches of the Great Anarchy in the Realm of Moscow (Petersburg, 1899); D. V. Tsvyeltev, Tsar Vasily Shuisky (Russ.), (Warsaw, 1901-1903); R. Nisbet Bain, Slavonic Europe, ch. viii. (Cambridge, 1907).

See D. I. Ilovaisky, The Troubled Period of the Muscovite Realm (Russ.), (Moscow, 1894); S. I. Platonov, Sketches of the Great Anarchy in the Realm of Moscow (Petersburg, 1899); D. V. Tsvyeltev, Tsar Vasily Shuisky (Russ.), (Warsaw, 1901-1903); R. Nisbet Bain, Slavonic Europe, ch. viii. (Cambridge, 1907).

(R. N. B.)

(R. N. B.)

BASILIAN MONKS, those who follow the rule of Basil the Great. The chief importance of the monastic rule and institute of St Basil lies in the fact that to this day his reconstruction of the monastic life is the basis of the monasticism of the Greek and Slavonic Churches, though the monks do not call themselves Basilians. St Basil's claim to the authorship of the Rules and other ascetical writings that go under his name, has been questioned; but the tendency now is to recognize as his at any rate the two sets of Rules. Probably the truest idea of his monastic system may be derived from a correspondence between him and St Gregory Nazianzen at the beginning of his monastic life, the chief portions whereof are translated by Newman in the Church of the Fathers, "Basil and Gregory," §§ 4, 5. On leaving Athens Basil visited the monasteries of Egypt and Palestine; in the latter country and in Syria the monastic life tended to become more and more eremitical and to run to great extravagances in the matter of bodily austerities (see Monasticism). When (c. 360) Basil formed his monastery in the neighbourhood of Neocaesarea in Pontus, he deliberately set himself against these tendencies. He declared that the cenobitical life is superior to the eremitical; that fasting and austerities should not interfere with prayer or work; that work should form an integral part of the monastic life, not merely as an occupation, but for its own sake and in order to do good to others; and therefore that monasteries should be near towns. All this was a new departure in monachism. The life St Basil established was strictly cenobitical, with common prayer seven times a day, common work, common meals. It was, in spite of the new ideas, an austere life, of the kind called contemplative, given up to prayer, the reading of the Scriptures and heavy field-work. The so-called Rules (the Longer and the Shorter) are catechisms of the spiritual life rather than a body of regulations for the corporate working of a community, such as is now understood by a monastic rule. Apparently no vows were taken, but obedience, personal poverty, chastity, self-denial, and the other monastic virtues were strongly enforced, and a monk was not free to abandon the monastic life. A novitiate had to be passed, and young boys were to be educated in the monastery, but were not expected to become monks.

BASILIAN MONKS, those who follow the teachings of Basil the Great. The main significance of the monastic rule and institution of St. Basil is that his approach to monastic life serves as the foundation for monasticism in the Greek and Slavic Churches to this day, although the monks don’t refer to themselves as Basilians. While there has been some debate about St. Basil's authorship of the Rules and other ascetic writings that bear his name, there is a growing consensus to attribute at least the two sets of Rules to him. A good understanding of his monastic system can be gained from his correspondence with St. Gregory Nazianzen at the start of his monastic journey; significant sections of this correspondence are translated by Newman in the Church of the Fathers, "Basil and Gregory," §§ 4, 5. After leaving Athens, Basil visited monasteries in Egypt and Palestine; in the latter region and in Syria, monastic life increasingly became more hermitic and included extreme bodily austerities (see Monastic life). When he established his monastery around Neocaesarea in Pontus (circa 360), he intentionally opposed these trends. He asserted that communal (cenobitical) life is superior to solitary (eremitical) life, that fasting and austerities should not hinder prayer or work, that work should be an essential aspect of monastic life—not just as a pastime but to benefit others; thus, monasteries should be situated near towns. This was a significant shift in monastic practice. The life St. Basil created was strictly cenobitical, featuring communal prayer seven times a day, shared work, and common meals. Despite these new ideas, it remained an austere life, categorized as contemplative, focused on prayer, Scripture reading, and demanding agricultural labor. The so-called Rules (the Longer and the Shorter) serve more as guides to spiritual life rather than regulations for the communal organization we now associate with a monastic rule. Apparently, no formal vows were taken, but obedience, personal poverty, chastity, self-denial, and other monastic virtues were strongly emphasized, and a monk could not simply leave monastic life. A period of novitiate was required, and young boys were to be educated in the monastery, although they were not expected to become monks.

St Basil's influence, and the greater suitability of his institute to European ideas, ensured the propagation of Basilian monachism; and Sozomen says that in Cappadocia and the neighbouring provinces there were no hermits but only cenobites. However, the eastern hankering after the eremitical life long survived, and it was only by dint of legislation, both ecclesiastical (council of Chalcedon) and civil (Justinian Code), that the Basilian cenobitic form of monasticism came to prevail throughout the Greek-speaking lands, though the eremitical forms have always maintained themselves.

St. Basil's influence, along with the greater fit of his teachings for European ideals, helped spread Basilian monasticism. Sozomen notes that in Cappadocia and the nearby regions, there were no hermits, only cenobites. However, the Eastern desire for a solitary life continued for a long time, and it was only through laws—both from the church (like the Council of Chalcedon) and civil law (the Justinian Code)—that Basilian communal monasticism became dominant in Greek-speaking areas, even though the solitary forms of monastic life have always persisted.

Greek monachism underwent no development or change for four centuries, except the vicissitudes inevitable in all things human, which in monasticism assume the form of alternations of relaxation and revival. The second half of the 8th century seems to have been a time of very general decadence; but about the year 800 Theodore, destined to be the only other creative name in Greek monachism, became abbot of the monastery of the Studium in Constantinople. He set himself to reform his monastery and restore St Basil's spirit in its primitive vigour. But to effect this, and to give permanence to the reformation, he saw that there was need of a more practical code of laws to regulate the details of the daily life, as a supplement to St Basil's Rules. He therefore drew up constitutions, afterwards codified (see Migne, Patrol. Graec. xcix., 1704-1757), which became the norm of the life at the Studium monastery, and gradually spread thence to the monasteries of the rest of the Greek empire. Thus to this day the Rules of Basil and the Constitutions of Theodore the Studite, along with the canons of the Councils, constitute the chief part of Greek and Russian monastic law.

Greek monasticism didn’t really change or develop for four centuries, aside from the usual ups and downs that happen in all human endeavors, which in monasticism took the form of swings between relaxation and revival. The second half of the 8th century appears to have been a period of significant decline; however, around the year 800, Theodore, who would become the only other influential figure in Greek monasticism, became the abbot of the monastery of Studium in Constantinople. He focused on reforming his monastery and bringing back the spirit of St. Basil in its original strength. To achieve this and ensure lasting change, he recognized the need for a more practical set of laws to manage the daily life of the monks, which would complement St. Basil's Rules. He therefore created constitutions, which were later compiled (see Migne, Patrol. Graec. xcix., 1704-1757), and these became the standard for life at the Studium monastery, eventually spreading to other monasteries throughout the Greek empire. Today, the Rules of Basil and the Constitutions of Theodore the Studite, along with the canons from the Councils, still form the core of Greek and Russian monastic law.

The spirit of Greek monachism, as regenerated by Theodore, may best be gathered from his Letters, Discourses and Testament.[1] Under the abbot were several officials to superintend the various departments; the liturgical services in the church took up a considerable portion of the day, but Theodore seems to have made no attempt to revive the early practice of the Studium in this matter (see Acoemeti); the rest of the time was divided between reading and work; the latter included the chief handicrafts, for the monks, only ten in number, when Theodore became abbot, increased under his rule to over a thousand. One kind of work practised with great zeal and success by the Studite monks, was the copying of manuscripts, so that to them and to the schools that went forth from them we owe a great number of existing Greek MSS. and the preservation of many works of classical and ecclesiastical antiquity. In addition to this, literary and theological studies were pursued, and the mysticism of pseudo-Dionysius was cultivated. The life, though simple and self-denying and hard, was not of extreme austerity. There was a division of the monks into two classes, similar to the division in vogue in later time in the West into choir-monks and lay-brothers. The life of the choir-monks was predominantly contemplative, [v.03 p.0470]being taken up with the church services and private prayer and study; the lay-brothers carried on the various trades and external works. There is little or no evidence of works of charity outside the monastery being undertaken by Studite monks. Strict personal poverty was enforced, and all were encouraged to approach confession and communion frequently. Vows had been imposed on monks by the council of Chalcedon (451). The picture of Studite life is the picture of normal Greek and Slavonic monachism to this day.

The essence of Greek monasticism, revitalized by Theodore, can best be understood through his Letters, Discourses, and Testament.[1] Under the abbot, there were several officials overseeing different departments; liturgical services in the church occupied a significant part of the day, but Theodore didn’t seem to try to revive the early practices of the Studium in this regard (see Acoemeti). The remaining time was divided between reading and work, which included essential crafts since the number of monks grew from just ten when Theodore became abbot to over a thousand under his leadership. One type of work that the Studite monks engaged in with great dedication and success was copying manuscripts, contributing to a significant number of existing Greek manuscripts and the preservation of many classical and ecclesiastical works. Additionally, they pursued literary and theological studies and embraced the mysticism of pseudo-Dionysius. Their life, though simple, self-denying, and challenging, was not excessively austere. The monks were divided into two classes, similar to the choir-monks and lay-brothers in later Western practices. The choir-monks primarily led a contemplative life, focused on church services, private prayer, and study; the lay-brothers took care of various trades and external tasks. There is little to no evidence of the Studite monks engaging in charitable works outside the monastery. Strict personal poverty was enforced, and all were encouraged to frequently participate in confession and communion. The council of Chalcedon (451) had imposed vows on the monks. The representation of Studite life accurately reflects typical Greek and Slavic monasticism to this day.

During the middle ages the centre of Greek monachism shifted from Constantinople to Mount Athos. The first monastery to be founded here was that of St Athanasius (c. 960), and in the course of the next three or four centuries monasteries in great numbers—Greek, Slavonic and one Latin—were established on Mount Athos, some twenty of which still survive.

During the Middle Ages, the center of Greek monasticism moved from Constantinople to Mount Athos. The first monastery established there was that of St. Athanasius (around 960), and over the following three or four centuries, many monasteries—Greek, Slavonic, and one Latin—were founded on Mount Athos, about twenty of which still exist today.

Basilian monachism spread from Greece to Italy and Russia. Rufinus had translated St Basil's Rules into Latin (c. 400) and they became the rule of life in certain Italian monasteries. They were known to St Benedict, who refers his monks to "the Rule of our holy Father Basil,"—indeed St Benedict owed more of the ground-ideas of his Rule to St Basil than to any other monastic legislator. In the 6th and 7th centuries there appear to have been Greek monasteries in Rome and south Italy and especially in Sicily. But during the course of the 8th, 9th and 10th centuries crowds of fugitives poured into southern Italy from Greece and Sicily, under stress of the Saracenic, Arab and other invasions; and from the middle of the 9th century Basilian monasteries, peopled by Greek-speaking monks, were established in great numbers in Calabria and spread northwards as far as Rome. Some of them existed on into the 18th century, but the only survivor now is the monastery founded by St Nilus (c. 1000) at Grottaferrata in the Alban Hills. Professor Kirsopp Lake has (1903) written four valuable articles (Journal of Theological Studies, iv., v.) on "The Greek monasteries of South Italy"; he deals in detail with their scriptoria and the dispersal of their libraries, a matter of much interest, in that some of the chief collections of Greek MSS. in western Europe—as the Bessarion at Venice and a great number at the Vatican—come from the spoils of these Italian Basilian houses.

Basilian monasticism spread from Greece to Italy and Russia. Rufinus translated St. Basil's Rules into Latin (around 400 AD), and they became the way of life in some Italian monasteries. St. Benedict was aware of them and referred his monks to "the Rule of our holy Father Basil." In fact, St. Benedict based many fundamental ideas of his own Rule on St. Basil more than on any other monastic leader. In the 6th and 7th centuries, there seem to have been Greek monasteries in Rome, southern Italy, and especially Sicily. However, during the 8th, 9th, and 10th centuries, many refugees fled to southern Italy from Greece and Sicily due to invasions by the Saracens, Arabs, and others. Starting in the middle of the 9th century, numerous Basilian monasteries, populated by Greek-speaking monks, were established in Calabria and spread north to Rome. Some of these monasteries continued to exist into the 18th century, but the only one still standing today is the monastery founded by St. Nilus (around 1000 AD) at Grottaferrata in the Alban Hills. Professor Kirsopp Lake wrote four valuable articles (Journal of Theological Studies, vol. iv, v.) in 1903 on "The Greek monasteries of South Italy," where he discusses in detail their scriptoria and the distribution of their libraries. This topic is particularly interesting because some of the major collections of Greek manuscripts in Western Europe, such as the Bessarion in Venice and many at the Vatican, originated from the treasures of these Italian Basilian houses.

Of much greater importance was the importation of Basilian monachism into Russia, for it thereby became the norm of monachism for all the Slavonic lands. Greek monks played a considerable part in the evangelization of the Slavs, and the first Russian monastery was founded at Kiev (c. 1050) by a monk from Mount Athos. The monastic institute had a great development in Russia, and at the present day there are in the Russian empire some 400 monasteries of men and 100 of women, many of which support hospitals, almshouses and schools. In the other Slavonic lands there are a considerable number of monasteries, as also in Greece itself, while in the Turkish dominions there are no fewer than 100 Greek monasteries. The monasteries are of three kinds: cenobia proper, wherein full monastic common life, with personal poverty, is observed; others called idiorrhythmic, wherein the monks are allowed the use of their private means and lead a generally mitigated and free kind of monastic life; and the lauras, wherein the life is semi-eremitical. Greek and Slavonic monks wear a black habit. The visits of Western scholars in modern times to Greek monasteries in search of MSS.—notably to St Catherine's on Mount Sinai, and to Mount Athos—has directed much attention to contemporary Greek monachism, and the accounts of these expeditions commonly contain descriptions, more or less sympathetic and intelligent, of the present-day life of Greek monks. The first such account was Robert Curzon's in parts iii. (1834) and iv. (1837) of the Monasteries of the Levant; the most recent in English is Athelstan Riley's Athos (1887). The life is mainly given up to devotional contemplative exercises; the church services are of extreme length; intellectual study is little cultivated; manual labour has almost disappeared; there are many hermits on Athos (q.v.).

Of much greater importance was the introduction of Basilian monasticism into Russia, as it became the standard for monastic life across all Slavic regions. Greek monks played a significant role in spreading Christianity among the Slavs, and the first Russian monastery was established in Kiev (around 1050) by a monk from Mount Athos. The monastic community expanded greatly in Russia, and today, there are approximately 400 male monasteries and 100 female monasteries within the Russian Empire, many of which operate hospitals, orphanages, and schools. Other Slavic countries also have a notable number of monasteries, as does Greece itself, while the Turkish territories host at least 100 Greek monasteries. The monasteries fall into three categories: proper cenobitic monasteries, where communal living and personal poverty are strictly followed; idiorrhythmic monasteries, where monks can use their personal resources and live a more relaxed, individualistic form of monastic life; and lauras, which offer a semi-eremitic lifestyle. Greek and Slavic monks wear a black robe. Recent visits by Western scholars to Greek monasteries seeking manuscripts—especially to St. Catherine's on Mount Sinai and Mount Athos—have drawn significant attention to contemporary Greek monasticism. These expeditions often include descriptions, varying in sympathy and insight, of the current lives of Greek monks. The first such account was Robert Curzon's in parts III (1834) and IV (1837) of the *Monasteries of the Levant*; the most recent English account is Athelstan Riley's *Athos* (1887). The monastic life is primarily focused on devotional and contemplative practices; church services are extremely lengthy; intellectual study is not widely pursued; manual labor has nearly vanished; and there are many hermits on Athos (see below).

The ecclesiastical importance of the monks in the various branches of the Orthodox Church lies in this, that as bishops must be celibate, whereas the parochial clergy must be married, the bishops are all recruited from the monks. But besides this they have been a strong spiritual and religious influence, as is recognized even by those who have scant sympathy with monastic ideals (see Harnack, What is Christianity? Lect. xiii., end).

The church's significance of monks in the different branches of the Orthodox Church is that while bishops must remain celibate, the local clergy can be married, which means that all bishops come from the monastic community. In addition to this, they have been a powerful spiritual and religious influence, acknowledged even by those who have little sympathy for monastic ideals (see Harnack, What is Christianity? Lect. xiii., end).

Outside the Orthodox Church are some small congregations of Uniat Basilians. Besides Grottaferrata, there are Catholic Basilian monasteries in Poland, Hungary, Galicia, Rumania; and among the Melchites or Uniat Syrians.

Outside the Orthodox Church, there are a few small groups of Uniat Basilians. In addition to Grottaferrata, there are Catholic Basilian monasteries in Poland, Hungary, Galicia, Romania, and among the Melchites or Uniat Syrians.

There have been Basilian nuns from the beginning, St Macrina, St Basil's sister, having established a nunnery which was under his direction. The nuns are devoted to a purely contemplative life, and in Russia, where there are about a hundred nunneries, they are not allowed to take final vows until the age of sixty. They are very numerous throughout the East.

There have been Basilian nuns since the beginning, with St. Macrina, St. Basil's sister, founding a convent that was supervised by him. The nuns dedicate themselves to a fully contemplative life, and in Russia, where there are around a hundred convents, they cannot take final vows until they turn sixty. They are quite numerous throughout the East.

Authorities.—In addition to the authorities for different portions of the subject-matter named in the course of this article, may be mentioned, on St Basil and his Rules, Montalembert, Monks of the West, second part of bk. ii., and the chapter on St Basil in James O. Hannay's Spirit and Origin of Christian Monasticism (1903). On the history and spirit of Basilian Monachism, Helyot, Hist. des Ordres Religieux, i. (1714); Heimbucher, Orden und Kongregationen (1907), i., § 11; Abbé Marin, Les Moines de Constantinople (1897); Karl Holl, Enthusiasmus und Bussgewalt beim griechischen Mönchtum (1898); Otto Zöckler, Askese und Mönchtum, pp. 285-309 (1897). For general information see Wetzer und Welte, Kirchenlexicon (ed. ii.), art. "Basilianer," and Herzog-Hauck, Realencyklopädie (ed. iii.), in articles "Mönchtum," "Orientalische Kirche," and "Athosberg," where copious references will be found.

Authorities.—In addition to the authorities for different sections of the topic mentioned throughout this article, we can refer to Montalembert, Monks of the West, second part of bk. ii., and the chapter on St. Basil in James O. Hannay's Spirit and Origin of Christian Monasticism (1903). For the history and essence of Basilian Monasticism, see Helyot, Hist. des Ordres Religieux, i. (1714); Heimbucher, Orden und Kongregationen (1907), i., § 11; Abbé Marin, Les Moines de Constantinople (1897); Karl Holl, Enthusiasmus und Bussgewalt beim griechischen Mönchtum (1898); Otto Zöckler, Askese und Mönchtum, pp. 285-309 (1897). For general information, refer to Wetzer und Welte, Kirchenlexicon (ed. ii.), article "Basilianer," and Herzog-Hauck, Realencyklopädie (ed. iii.), in the articles "Mönchtum," "Orientalische Kirche," and "Athosberg," where you will find extensive references.

(E. C. B.)

(E. C. B.)

[1] Specimen passages, and also a general picture of the life, will be found in Miss Alice Gardner's Theodore of Studium, ch. v.

[1] You can find example passages and an overview of the life in Miss Alice Gardner's Theodore of Studium, ch. v.

BASILICA, a word of Greek origin (see below), frequently used in Latin literature and inscriptions to denote a large covered building that could accommodate a considerable number of people. Strictly speaking, a basilica was a building of this kind situated near the business centre of a city and arranged for the convenience of merchants, litigants and persons engaged on the public service; but in a derived sense the word might be used for any large structure wherever situated, such as a hall of audience (Vitruv. vi. 5. 2) or a covered promenade (St Jerome, Ep. 46) in a private palace; a riding school (basilica equestris exercitatoria, C.I.L. vii. 965); a market or store for flowers (basilica floscellaria [Notitia]), or other kinds of goods (basilica vestiaria, C.I.L. viii. 20156), or a hall of meeting for a religious body. In this derived sense the word came naturally to be applied to the extensive buildings used for Christian worship in the age of Constantine and his successors.

BASILICA, a word that comes from Greek (see below), is often found in Latin literature and inscriptions to describe a large covered structure that can hold a significant number of people. Technically, a basilica was a building of this type located near the commercial hub of a city and designed for the convenience of traders, litigants, and those involved in public service. However, in a broader sense, the term could refer to any large building, regardless of its location, such as an audience hall (Vitruv. vi. 5. 2) or a covered walkway (St. Jerome, Ep. 46) in a private palace; a riding school (basilica equestris exercitatoria, C.I.L. vii. 965); a marketplace or shop for flowers (basilica floscellaria [Notitia]), or other types of goods (basilica vestiaria, C.I.L. viii. 20156), or a gathering space for a religious group. In this broader sense, the term eventually came to be used for the large buildings designated for Christian worship during the time of Constantine and his successors.

The question whether this word conveyed to the ancients any special architectural significance is a difficult one, and some writers hold that the name betokened only the use of the building, others that it suggested also a certain form. Our knowledge of the ancient basilica as a civil structure is derived primarily from Vitruvius, and we learn about it also from existing remains and from incidental notices in classical writers and in inscriptions. If we review all the evidence we are led to the conclusion that there did exist a normal form of the building, though many examples deviated therefrom. This normal form we shall understand if we consider the essential character of the building in the light of what Vitruvius tells us of it.

The question of whether this word had any special architectural meaning for the ancients is a tough one. Some writers believe that the name only indicated the building's function, while others think it also suggested a specific design. Our understanding of the ancient basilica as a civil structure mainly comes from Vitruvius, along with existing remains and references in classical texts and inscriptions. Reviewing all the evidence leads us to conclude that there was indeed a standard form of the building, even if many examples strayed from it. We can grasp this standard form by examining the essential nature of the building based on what Vitruvius tells us about it.

Vitruvius treats the basilica in close connexion with the forum, to which in his view it is an adjunct. In the earlier classical times, both in Greece and Italy, business of every kind, political, commercial and legal, was transacted in the open forum, and there also were presented shows and pageants. When business increased and the numbers of the population were multiplied, it was found convenient to provide additional accommodation for these purposes. Theatres and amphitheatres took the performances and games. Markets provided for those that bought and sold, while for business of more important kinds accommodation could be secured by laying out new agorae or fora in the immediate vicinity of the old. At Rome this was done by means of the so-called imperial fora, the latest and most splendid of which was that of Trajan. These fora corresponded to the later Greek or Hellenistic agora, which, as Vitruvius tells us, was of regular form and surrounded by colonnades in two stories, and they had the practical use of relieving the pressure on the [v.03 p.0471]original forum (Cic., ad Att., iv. 16). The basilica was a structure intended for the same purposes. It was to all intents and purposes a covered forum, and in its normal form was constituted by an arrangement of colonnades in two stories round a rectangular space, that was not, like the Greek agora, open, but covered with a roof. Vitruvius writes of it as frequented by merchants, who would find in it shelter and quiet for the transaction of their business. Legal tribunals were also set up in it, though it is a mistake to suppose the basilica a mere law court. The magistrates who presided over these tribunals had sometimes platforms, curved or rectangular in plan, provided as part of the permanent fittings of the edifice.

Vitruvius discusses the basilica in close relation to the forum, which he sees as an extension of it. In early classical times, both in Greece and Italy, all kinds of business—political, commercial, and legal—were conducted in the open forum, which also hosted shows and events. As business grew and populations increased, it became necessary to create more space for these activities. Theatres and amphitheatres hosted performances and games. Markets catered to buyers and sellers, while more significant business needed dedicated areas, leading to the establishment of new agorae or fora near the original ones. In Rome, this was accomplished through the so-called imperial fora, the most recent and grandest being that of Trajan. These fora were similar to the later Greek or Hellenistic agora, which, as Vitruvius notes, had a regular shape and was surrounded by two-story colonnades. They served the practical purpose of alleviating pressure on the original forum (Cic., ad Att., iv. 16). The basilica was built for the same purposes. Essentially, it was a covered forum, typically arranged with two-story colonnades around a rectangular space that, unlike the Greek agora, was covered with a roof. Vitruvius mentions it was frequented by merchants, who found shelter and peace there to conduct their business. Legal courts were also established within it, although it's a mistake to think of the basilica as just a law court. The magistrates overseeing these courts sometimes had platforms, either curved or rectangular in design, incorporated as part of the building's permanent features.

According to Vitruvius (v. 1. 4, cf. also vi. 3. 9) the building is to be in plan a rectangle, not more than three times nor less than twice as long as it is broad. If the site oblige the length to be greater, the surplus is to be cut off to form what he calls chalcidica, by which must be meant open vestibules. The interior is divided into a central space and side aisles one-third the width of this. The ground plan of the basilica at Pompeii (fig. 1) illustrates this description, though the superstructure did not correspond to the Vitruvian scheme. The columns between nave and aisles, Vitruvius proceeds, are the same height as the width of the latter, and the aisle is covered with a flat roof forming a terrace (contignatio) on which people can walk. Surrounding this on the inner side is a breastwork or parapet (pluteum), which would conceal these promenaders from the view of the merchants in the basilica below. On the top of this parapet stood the upper row of columns, three-quarters as high as the lower ones. The spaces between these columns, above the top of the pluteum, would be left free for the admission of light to the central space, which was covered by a roof called by Vitruvius (v. 1. 6) mediana testudo. Nothing is said about a permanent tribunal or about an apse.

According to Vitruvius (v. 1. 4, cf. also vi. 3. 9), the building should be designed as a rectangle, not more than three times and not less than twice as long as it is wide. If the site requires a longer building, the excess should be trimmed to create what he refers to as chalcidica, which likely means open vestibules. The interior is divided into a central area and side aisles that are one-third the width of the central space. The ground plan of the basilica at Pompeii (fig. 1) illustrates this description, although the structure didn't match Vitruvius's design. The columns between the nave and aisles are the same height as the width of the aisles, and the aisle features a flat roof that creates a terrace (contignatio) for people to walk on. Surrounding this area on the inside is a breastwork or parapet (pluteum), which would hide these walkers from the view of the merchants in the basilica below. On top of this parapet stands an upper row of columns, three-quarters the height of the lower ones. The spaces between these columns, above the top of the pluteum, are left open to allow light into the central space, which is covered by a roof called by Vitruvius (v. 1. 6) mediana testudo. There’s no mention of a permanent tribunal or an apse.

Fig. 1. Basilica at Pompeii.

Fig. 1.—Basilica at Pompeii. 1, Portico (Chalcidicum); 2, hall of basilica; 3, aisles; 4, altar; 5, tribunal; 6, offices.

Fig. 1.—Basilica at Pompeii. 1, Portico (Chalcidicum); 2, main hall; 3, side aisles; 4, altar; 5, tribunal; 6, offices.

How far existing remains agree with the Vitruvian scheme will be seen as we proceed. We have now to consider the derivation of the word "basilica," the history of the form of building, and its architectural scheme as represented in actual relics.

How much the existing remains match the Vitruvian plan will become clear as we continue. We now need to look at the origin of the word "basilica," the history of this type of building, and its architectural layout as shown in real artifacts.

The word "basilica" is a Latinized form of the Greek adjective βασιλική, "royal," and some feminine substantive, such as domus, or stoa, must be understood with it. A certain building at Athens, wherein the ἄρχων βασιλεύς transacted business and the court of the Areopagus sometimes assembled, was called βασίλειος στοά, and it is an accredited theory, though it is by no means proved, that we have here the origin of the later basilica. It is difficult to see why this was called "royal" except for some special but accidental reason such as can in this case be divined. There are other instances in which a term that becomes specific has been derived from some one specimen accidentally named. "Labyrinth" is one case in point, and "basilica" may be another. It is true that we do not know what was the shape of the King Archon's portico, but the same name (βασίλειος στοά) was given to the grand structure erected by Herod the Great along the southern edge of the Temple platform at Jerusalem, and this corresponded to the Vitruvian scheme of a columned fabric, with nave and aisles and clerestory lighting.

The term "basilica" is a Latinized version of the Greek adjective queen, which means "royal." It needs to be understood alongside certain feminine nouns like domus or stoa. There was a specific building in Athens where the ruling king conducted business and where the court of the Areopagus sometimes gathered, which was called Royal Arcade. It's a recognized theory, although not definitively proven, that this could be the origin of the later basilica. It’s not clear why it was labeled "royal" unless there was a particular but coincidental reason that can be speculated upon. There are other cases where a term that becomes specific originates from a randomly named instance. "Labyrinth" is one example, and "basilica" might be another. While we don’t know the exact shape of the King Archon's portico, the same name (Basil's portico) was also used for the grand structure built by Herod the Great along the southern edge of the Temple platform in Jerusalem, which matched the Vitruvian design of a columned structure with a nave, aisles, and clerestory lighting.

Whether the Roman basilicas, with which we are chiefly concerned, were derived directly from the Athenian example, or mediately from this through structures of the same kind erected in the later Greek cities, is hard to say. We should naturally look in that direction for the prototypes of the Roman basilicas, but as a fact we are not informed of any very early basilicas in these cities. The earliest we know of is the existing basilica at Pompeii, that may date back into the 2nd century B.C., whereas basilicas made their appearance at Rome nearly at the beginning of that century. The first was erected by M. Porcius Cato, the censor, in 184 B.C., and was called after his name Basilica Porcia. Cato had recently visited Athens and had been struck by the beauty of the city, so that it is quite possible that the importation was direct.

Whether the Roman basilicas, which are our main focus, were directly influenced by the Athenian model or indirectly through similar structures built in later Greek cities is hard to determine. We would naturally look in that direction for the prototypes of the Roman basilicas, but in fact, we don't have evidence of any very early basilicas in those cities. The oldest one we know of is the existing basilica at Pompeii, which may date back to the 2nd century BCE, whereas basilicas appeared in Rome almost at the start of that century. The first was built by M. Porcius Cato, the censor, in 184 BCE, and was named Basilica Porcia. Cato had recently visited Athens and was impressed by the city's beauty, so it’s quite possible that the influence was direct.

Fig. 2. Plan of Basilica Julia. Fig. 2.—Plan of Basilica Julia, Rome.

(From Baedeker's Central Italy, by permission of Karl Baedeker.)

(From Baedeker's Central Italy, by permission of Karl Baedeker.)

Fig. 3. Plan of Basilica Ulpia. Fig. 3.—Plan of Basilica Ulpia, from Capitoline plan of Rome.

Rome soon obtained other basilicas, of which the important Basilica Fulvia-Aemilia came next in point of time, till by the age of Augustus there were at least five in the immediate neighbourhood of the forum, the latest and most extensive being the Basilica Julia, which ran parallel to its southern side, and is shown in plan in fig. 2. The great Basilica Ulpia was built by Trajan in connexion with his forum about A.D. 112, and a fragment of the Capitoline plan of Rome gives the scheme of it (fig. 3), while an attempted restoration of the interior by Canina is shown in fig. 4. The vaulted basilica of Maxentius or Constantine on the Via Sacra dates from the beginning of the 4th century, and fig. 5 gives the section of it. The number of public basilicas we read of at Rome alone amounts to about a score, while many private basilicas, for business or recreation, must also have existed, that in the palace of Domitian on the Palatine being the best known. In provincial cities in Italy, and indeed all over the empire, basilicas were almost universal, and in the case of Italy we have proof of this as early as the date of the death of Augustus, for Suetonius (Aug. 100) tells us that the body of that emperor, when it was brought from Nola in Campania to Rome, rested "in basilica cujusque oppidi."

Rome soon acquired other basilicas, the notable Basilica Fulvia-Aemilia being the next in line. By the time of Augustus, there were at least five in the immediate area of the forum, with the most recent and largest being the Basilica Julia, which ran parallel to its southern side, as shown in plan in fig. 2. The grand Basilica Ulpia was constructed by Trajan in connection with his forum around CE 112, and a fragment of the Capitoline plan of Rome illustrates its layout (fig. 3), while Canina's attempted restoration of the interior is shown in fig. 4. The vaulted basilica of Maxentius or Constantine on the Via Sacra dates back to the early 4th century, with fig. 5 providing its section. The number of public basilicas documented in Rome alone amounts to about twenty, and many private basilicas for business or leisure must have also existed, with the one in the palace of Domitian on the Palatine being the most well-known. In provincial cities throughout Italy and the entire empire, basilicas were nearly universal, and in Italy, we have evidence of this as early as the death of Augustus. Suetonius (Aug. 100) tells us that the body of that emperor, when transported from Nola in Campania to Rome, rested "in basilica cujusque oppidi."

Fig. 4. Trajan's Basilica. Fig. 4.—Interior view of Trajan's Basilica (Basilica Ulpia), as restored by Canina.

As regards existing examples, neither in the peninsula nor the provinces can it be said that these give any adequate idea of the former abundance and wide distribution of basilicas. Northern Africa contributes one or two examples, and a plan is given of that at Timgad (fig. 6). The Gallic basilicas, which must have been very numerous, are represented only by the noble structure at Trier (Trèves), which is now a single vast hall 180 ft. long, 90 ft. wide and 100 ft. high, commanded at one end by a spacious apse. There is reason to conjecture that this is the basilica erected by Constantine, and some authorities believe that originally it had internal colonnades. In England basilicas remain in part at Silchester (fig. 7), Uriconium (Wroxeter), [v.03 p.0472]Chester (?) and Lincoln, while three others are mentioned in inscriptions (C.I.L. vii. 287, 445, 965).

Regarding the existing examples, it's clear that neither the peninsula nor the provinces provide a true representation of the former abundance and widespread presence of basilicas. Northern Africa has one or two examples, and a plan is given of the one at Timgad (fig. 6). The Gallic basilicas, which must have been quite numerous, are only exemplified by the impressive structure at Trier (Trèves), which is now a single large hall measuring 180 ft. long, 90 ft. wide, and 100 ft. high, featuring a spacious apse at one end. There’s reason to speculate that this is the basilica built by Constantine, and some experts think it originally had internal colonnades. In England, basilicas can still be found partially at Silchester (fig. 7), Uriconium (Wroxeter), [v.03 p.0472]Chester (?), and Lincoln, with three others noted in inscriptions (C.I.L. vii. 287, 445, 965).

A comparison of the plans of existing basilicas shows considerable variety in form. Some basilicas (Julia, Ulpia, Pompeii) have the central space surrounded by galleries supported on columns or piers, according to the normal scheme, and the newly excavated Basilica Aemilia, north of the Roman forum, agrees with these. In some North African examples, in the palace basilica of Domitian, and at Silchester, there are colonnades down the long sides but not across the ends. Others (Trier [?], Timgad) have no interior divisions. One (Maxentius) is entirely a vaulted structure and in form resembles the great halls of the Roman Thermae. At Pompeii, Timgad and Silchester, there are fixed tribunals, while vaulted apses that may have contained tribunals occur in the basilica of Maxentius. In the Basilica Julia there was no tribunal at all, though we know that the building was regularly used for the centumviral court (Quint. xii. 5. 6), and the same was the case in the Ulpia, for the semicircular projection at the end shown on the Capitoline-plan, was not a vaulted apse and was evidently distinct from the basilica.

A comparison of the designs of existing basilicas shows a lot of variety in their shapes. Some basilicas (like Julia, Ulpia, and Pompeii) have the main area surrounded by galleries supported by columns or piers, which follows the typical layout, and the recently excavated Basilica Aemilia, north of the Roman Forum, fits this pattern. In some North African examples, in the palace basilica of Domitian, and at Silchester, there are colonnades along the longer sides but not across the ends. Others (like Trier [?] and Timgad) have no interior divisions at all. One (Maxentius) is completely vaulted and resembles the large halls of the Roman baths. At Pompeii, Timgad, and Silchester, there are fixed tribunals, while vaulted apses that likely held tribunals can be found in the Basilica of Maxentius. In the Basilica Julia, there wasn't any tribunal, although we know that the building was regularly used for the centumviral court (Quint. xii. 5. 6), and the same was true for the Ulpia, as the semicircular section at the end shown on the Capitoline layout was not a vaulted apse and was clearly separate from the basilica.

Fig. 5. Basilica of Maxentius.

Fig. 5.—Section of the Basilica of Maxentius or Constantine (Temple of Peace).

Fig. 5.—Section of the Basilica of Maxentius or Constantine (Temple of Peace).

In view of the above it might be questioned whether it is safe to speak of a normal form of the basilica, but when we consider the vast number of basilicas that have perished compared to the few that have survived, and the fact that the origins and traditions of the building show it to have been, as Vitruvius describes it, essentially a columned structure, there is ample justification for the view expressed earlier in this article. There can be little doubt that the earlier basilicas, and the majority of basilicas taken as a whole, had a central space with galleries, generally in two stories, round it, and some arrangement for clerestory lighting. Later basilicas might vary in architectural scheme, while affording the same sort of accommodation as the older ones.

Given this, one might wonder if it's appropriate to refer to a standard form of the basilica. However, when we consider the large number of basilicas that have been lost compared to the few that still exist, along with the fact that the origins and traditions of these buildings indicate, as Vitruvius describes, that they were mainly columned structures, there is plenty of support for the viewpoint expressed earlier in this article. It's clear that the earlier basilicas, and most basilicas overall, featured a central area surrounded by galleries, typically in two levels, along with some way to allow light from the clerestory. Later basilicas may differ in architectural design but still provide a similar type of space as the earlier ones.

The relation of the civil basilica of the Romans to the Christian church has been extensively discussed, and the reader will find the controversy ably summarized in Kraus's Geschichte der christlichen Kunst, bk. 5. There is nothing remarkable in the fact that a large church was called a basilica, for the term was applied, as we have seen, to structures of many kinds, and we even find "basilica" used for the meeting-place of a pagan religious association (Röm. Mitt. 1891, p. 109). The similarity in some respects of the early Christian churches to the normal form of the columned basilica is so striking, that we can understand how the theory was once held that Christian churches were the actual civil basilicas turned over from secular to religious uses. There is no evidence for this in the case of public basilicas, and it stands to reason that the demands on these for secular purposes would remain the same whether Christianity were the religion of the empire or not. Moreover, though there are one or two civil basilicas that resemble churches, the latter differ in some most important respects from the form of the basilica that we have recognized as normal. The early Christian basilicas, at any rate in the west, had very seldom, if ever, galleries over the side aisles, and their interior is always dominated by the semi-dome of an apse that terminates the central nave, whereas, with the doubtful exception of Silchester (Archaeologia, liii. 549), there is no instance known of a vaulted apse in a columned civil basilica of the normal kind.

The connection between the Roman civil basilica and the Christian church has been widely debated, and you can find a solid summary of the arguments in Kraus's Geschichte der christlichen Kunst, bk. 5. It's not surprising that a large church was called a basilica since the term was used for various types of structures, and we even see "basilica" used for the gathering place of a pagan religious group (Röm. Mitt. 1891, p. 109). The similarities between early Christian churches and the standard columned basilica are so noticeable that it’s easy to see why some believed Christian churches were simply civil basilicas converted for religious use. However, there’s no evidence to support this regarding public basilicas, and it makes sense that their secular functions would stay the same regardless of whether Christianity was the empire's religion. Additionally, while a few civil basilicas may look like churches, the latter have some significant differences from the traditional basilica design we recognize. Early Christian basilicas, at least in the West, rarely, if ever, had galleries over the side aisles, and their interiors are dominated by the semi-dome of an apse at the end of the central nave. Meanwhile, aside from the questionable case of Silchester (Archaeologia, liii. 549), there are no known examples of a vaulted apse in a standard columned civil basilica.

Fig. 6. Basilica of Timgad.

Fig. 6.—Plan of Basilica adjoining the Forum of the Roman city of Timgad, in North Africa.

Fig. 6.—Plan of the Basilica next to the Forum of the Roman city of Timgad, in North Africa.

(From Gsell's Monuments antiques de l'Algerie, by permission of A. Fontemoing.)

(From Gsell's Monuments antiques de l'Algerie, by permission of A. Fontemoing.)

When buildings were first expressly erected for Christian worship, in the 3rd or perhaps already in the 2nd century A.D. (Leclercq, Manuel, ch. iii. "Les édifices chrétiens avant la paix de l'église"), they probably took the form of an oblong interior [v.03 p.0473]terminated by an apse. After the time of Constantine, when the numbers of the faithful were enormously increased, side aisles were added, and in this way the structure came to assume an appearance similar to that of the civil basilica. A striking confirmation of this view has recently come to light at S. Saba on the Aventine at Rome, where a small and very early church, without aisles, has been discovered beneath the floor of the present basilica.

When buildings were first specifically designed for Christian worship, in the 3rd or possibly as early as the 2nd century CE (Leclercq, Manuel, ch. iii. "Les édifices chrétiens avant la paix de l'église"), they likely had an oblong interior [v.03 p.0473]ending with an apse. After Constantine's time, when the number of believers grew significantly, side aisles were added, making the structure look similar to that of a civil basilica. A notable confirmation of this idea has recently been found at S. Saba on the Aventine in Rome, where a small and very early church, without aisles, was uncovered beneath the floor of the current basilica.

There are, on the other hand, instances in which private basilicas in palaces and mansions were handed over to the Christians for sacred uses. We know that to have been the case with the basilicas of S. Croce in Gerusalemme and S. Maria Maggiore at Rome, which originated in the halls of the Sessorian and Liberian palaces respectively, granted by Constantine to the Christians. We may adduce also as evidence of the same practice a passage in bk. x. ch. 71 of the theological romance known as The Recognitions of Clement, probably dating from the early half of the 3rd century, in which we are told that Theophilus of Antioch, on his conversion by St Peter, made over "the basilica of his house" for a church. But however this may have been, with, perhaps, the single exception of S. Croce, the existing Christian basilicas were erected from the ground for their sacred purpose. At Rome the columns, friezes and other materials of the desecrated temples and public buildings furnished abundant materials for their construction. The decadence of art is plainly shown by the absence of rudimentary architectural knowledge in these reconstructions. Not only are columns of various heights and diameters made to do duty in the same colonnade, but even different orders stand side by side (e.g. Ionic, Corinthian and Composite at S. Maria in Trastevere); while pilasters assume a horizontal position and serve as entablatures, as at S. Lorenzo fuori le Mura. There being no such quarry of ready-worked materials at Ravenna, the noble basilicas of that city are free from these defects, and exhibit greater unity of design and harmony of proportions.

On the other hand, there are instances where private basilicas in palaces and mansions were handed over to Christians for sacred uses. We know this was true for the basilicas of S. Croce in Gerusalemme and S. Maria Maggiore in Rome, which originated in the halls of the Sessorian and Liberian palaces respectively, granted to Christians by Constantine. We can also cite evidence of this practice from a passage in book x, chapter 71 of the theological romance known as The Recognitions of Clement, likely from the early 3rd century, which tells us that Theophilus of Antioch, upon his conversion by St. Peter, dedicated "the basilica of his house" for use as a church. However, aside from perhaps S. Croce, the existing Christian basilicas were built from the ground up for their sacred purpose. In Rome, the columns, friezes, and other materials from desecrated temples and public buildings provided ample resources for their construction. The decline of art is clearly shown by the lack of basic architectural knowledge in these reconstructions. Not only are columns of various heights and diameters used in the same colonnade, but different orders are even placed side by side (e.g., Ionic, Corinthian, and Composite at S. Maria in Trastevere); meanwhile, pilasters are used horizontally as entablatures, as seen at S. Lorenzo fuori le Mura. With no such source of ready-worked materials in Ravenna, the grand basilicas of that city avoid these flaws and display greater unity in design and harmony in proportions.

Fig. 7. Basilica of Silchester.

Fig. 7.—Plan of Basilica adjoining the Forum of the Roman city at Silchester, Hants. (From Archaeologia, vol. liii.)

Fig. 7.—Plan of the Basilica next to the Forum of the Roman city at Silchester, Hants. (From Archaeologia, vol. liii.)

An early Christian basilica may be thus described in its main features:—A porch supported on pillars (as at S. Clemente) gave admission into an open court or atrium, surrounded by a colonnaded cloister (S. Clemente, Old St Peter's, S. Ambrogio at Milan, Parenzo). In the centre of the court stood a cistern or fountain (cantharus, phiale), for drinking and ablutions. In close contiguity to the atrium, often to the west, was the baptistery, usually octagonal (Parenzo). The church was entered through a long narrow porch (narthex), beyond which penitents, or those under ecclesiastical censure, were forbidden to pass. Three or more lofty doorways, according to the number of the aisles, set in marble cases, gave admission to the church. The doors themselves were of rich wood, elaborately carved with scriptural subjects (S. Sabina on the Aventine), or of bronze similarly adorned and often gilt. Magnificent curtains, frequently embroidered with sacred figures or scenes, closed the entrance, keeping out the heat of summer and the cold of winter.

An early Christian basilica can be described by its main features: A porch supported by pillars (like at S. Clemente) led into an open court or atrium, surrounded by a colonnaded cloister (S. Clemente, Old St Peter's, S. Ambrogio in Milan, Parenzo). In the center of the court was a cistern or fountain (cantharus, phiale) for drinking and washing. Close to the atrium, often to the west, was the baptistery, usually octagonal (Parenzo). People entered the church through a long narrow porch (narthex), beyond which penitents, or those under ecclesiastical censure, were not allowed to pass. Three or more tall doorways, depending on the number of aisles, set in marble frames, provided access to the church. The doors themselves were made of rich wood, intricately carved with biblical scenes (like at S. Sabina on the Aventine), or of bronze, similarly decorated and often gilded. Beautiful curtains, often embroidered with sacred figures or scenes, closed off the entrance, keeping out the summer heat and winter cold.

The interior consisted of a long and wide nave, sometimes as much as 80 ft. across, terminating in a semicircular apse, with one or sometimes (St Paul's, Old St Peter's, St John Lateran) two aisles on each side, separated by colonnades of marble pillars supporting horizontal entablatures (Old St Peter's, S. Maria Maggiore, S. Lorenzo) or arches (St Paul's, S. Agnese, S. Clemente, the two basilicas of S. Apollinare at Ravenna). Above the pillars the clerestory wall rose to a great height, pierced in its upper part by a range of plain round-headed windows. The space between the windows and the colonnade (the later triforium-space) was usually decorated with a series of mosaic pictures in panels. The colonnades sometimes extended quite to the end of the church (the Ravenna basilicas), sometimes ceased some little distance from the end, thus admitting the formation of a transverse aisle or transept (St Paul's, Old St Peter's, St John Lateran). Where this transept occurred it was divided from the nave by a wide arch, the face and soffit of which were richly decorated with mosaics. Over the crown of the arch we often find a bust of Christ or the holy lamb lying upon the altar, and, on either side, the evangelistic symbols, the seven candlesticks and the twenty-four elders. Another arch spanned the semicircular apse, in which the church always terminated. From Carolingian times this was designated the arch of triumph, because a cross was suspended from it.

The inside featured a long, wide nave, sometimes as much as 80 ft. across, ending in a semicircular apse, with either one or two aisles on each side, separated by columns of marble pillars that held up horizontal beams or arches. Above the pillars, the clerestory wall rose high, with a row of simple round-headed windows at the top. The area between the windows and the columns, later known as the triforium space, was usually adorned with a series of mosaic images in panels. The columns sometimes extended all the way to the end of the church (as seen in the Ravenna basilicas), or they stopped a little before the end, allowing for a transverse aisle or transept (like at St Paul's, Old St Peter's, St John Lateran). Where the transept was located, it was separated from the nave by a wide arch, richly decorated with mosaics on its surface and underside. Above the arch’s peak, there was often a bust of Christ or a holy lamb resting on the altar, with the symbols of the four evangelists, the seven candlesticks, and the twenty-four elders on either side. Another arch spanned the semicircular apse, marking the church's final section. From the Carolingian period onward, this was called the arch of triumph because a cross was hung from it.

Fig. 8. S. Apollinare. Fig. 8.—S. Apollinare in Classe, Ravenna.

The conch or semi-dome that covered the apse was always covered with mosaic pictures, usually paintings of our Lord, either seated or standing, with St Peter and St Paul, and other apostles and saints, on either hand. The beams of the roof were sometimes concealed by a flat ceiling, richly carved and gilt. The altar, standing in the centre of the chord of the apse on a raised platform reached by flights of steps, was rendered conspicuous by a lofty canopy supported by marble pillars (ciborium, baldacchino), from which depended curtains of the richest materials. Beneath the altar was the confessio, a subterranean chapel, containing the body of the patron saint, and relics of other holy persons. This was approached by descending flights of steps from the nave or aisles. The confessio in some cases reproduced the original place of interment of the patron saint, either in a catacomb-chapel or in an ordinary grave, and thus formed the sacred nucleus round which the church arose. We have good examples of this arrangement at St Peter's and St Paul's at Rome, and S. Apollinare in Classe, Ravenna. It was copied in the original cathedral of Canterbury. The bishop or officiating presbyter advanced from his seat in the centre of the semicircle of the apse to the altar, and celebrated the Eucharist with his face to the congregation below. At the foot of the altar steps a raised platform, occupying the upper portion of the nave, formed a choir for the singers, readers and other inferior clergy. This oblong space was separated from the aisles and from the western portion of the nave by low marble walls or railings (cancelli). From these walls projected ambones or pulpits with desks, also of marble, ascended by steps.

The dome or semi-dome covering the apse was always adorned with mosaic images, usually depicting our Lord, either seated or standing, flanked by St. Peter and St. Paul, along with other apostles and saints. The roof beams were sometimes hidden by a flat, intricately carved and gilded ceiling. The altar, located in the center of the apse's curve on a raised platform accessible by stairs, was made prominent by a tall canopy supported by marble columns (ciborium, baldacchino), from which hung curtains made of luxurious fabrics. Beneath the altar was the confessio, a chapel below ground level that housed the body of the patron saint, as well as relics of other holy figures. This area could be accessed by descending staircases from the nave or aisles. The confessio sometimes mirrored the original burial site of the patron saint, whether in a catacomb chapel or a regular grave, serving as the sacred center around which the church was built. Good examples of this setup can be found at St. Peter's and St. Paul's in Rome, and S. Apollinare in Classe, Ravenna. This design was also replicated in the original cathedral of Canterbury. The bishop or officiating priest would advance from his seat in the middle of the semicircle of the apse to the altar, celebrating the Eucharist facing the congregation below. At the base of the altar steps, a raised platform covering the upper part of the nave served as a choir for singers, readers, and other lower clergy. This rectangular area was separated from the aisles and the western part of the nave by low marble walls or railings (cancelli). From these walls extended ambones or pulpits with desks, also made of marble, accessible by steps.

The exterior of the basilicas was usually of an extreme plainness. The vast brick walls were unrelieved by ornament, save occasionally by arcading as at S. Apollinare in Classe, Ravenna, and had no compensating grace of outline or beauty of proportion. An exception was made for the entrance front, which was sometimes covered with plates of marble mosaics or painted stucco (Old St Peter's, S. Lorenzo). But in spite of any decorations the external effect of a basilica must always have been heavy and unattractive. S. Apollinare in Classe at Ravenna (fig. 8) affords a typical [v.03 p.0474]example. The campanile is a later addition. Within, apart from the beautiful mosaic decoration, a fine effect was produced by the arch of triumph and the apse, which terminated the nave and dominated the whole vast space of the interior.

The outside of the basilicas was typically very plain. The large brick walls had no decorative features, except for some arcading like at S. Apollinare in Classe, Ravenna, and lacked any elegant shape or beautiful proportions. The entrance front was an exception, sometimes adorned with marble mosaics or painted stucco (Old St Peter's, S. Lorenzo). However, despite any decorations, the overall appearance of a basilica always felt heavy and uninviting. S. Apollinare in Classe at Ravenna (fig. 8) is a typical example. The campanile is a later addition. Inside, besides the beautiful mosaic decorations, a striking effect was created by the triumphal arch and the apse, which concluded the nave and dominated the entire large interior space.

Fig. 9. Old St Peter's, Rome. Fig. 9.—Façade of old St Peter's, Rome.
Fig. 10. Ground-Plan of the original St Peter's.

Fig. 10.—Ground-Plan of the original Basilica of St Peter's at Rome.

Fig. 10.—Layout of the original Basilica of St. Peter's in Rome.

a, Porch. b, Atrium. c, Cloisters. d, Narthex. e, Nave. f, f, Aisles, g, Bema. h, Altar, protected by a double screen. i, Bishop's throne in centre of the apse. k, Sacristy. l, Tomb of Honorius. m, Church of St Andrew.

a, Porch. b, Atrium. c, Cloisters. d, Narthex. e, Nave. f, f, Aisles, g, Bema. h, Altar, protected by a double screen. i, Bishop's throne in the center of the apse. k, Sacristy. l, Tomb of Honorius. m, Church of St Andrew.

To pass from general description to individual churches, the first place must be given, as the earliest and grandest examples of the type, to the world-famous Roman basilicas; those of St Peter, St Paul and St John Lateran, "omnium urbis et orbis ecclesiarum mater et caput." It is true that no one of these exists in its original form, Old St Peter's having been entirely removed in the 16th century to make room for its magnificent successor; and both St Paul's and St John Lateran having been greatly injured by fire, and the last named being so completely modernized as to have lost all interest. Of the two former, however, we possess drawings and plans and minute descriptions, which give an accurate conception of the original buildings. To commence with St Peter's, from the illustrations annexed (figs. 9, 10, 11) it will be seen that the church was entered through a vast colonnaded atrium, 212 ft. by 235 ft., with a fountain in the centre,—the atrium being preceded by a porch mounted by a noble flight of steps. The church was 212 ft. wide by 380 ft. long; the nave, 80 ft. in width, was six steps lower than the side aisles, of which there were two on each side. The four dividing colonnades were each of twenty-two Corinthian columns. Those next the nave supported horizontal entablatures. The inner colonnades bore arches, with a second clerestory. The main clerestory walls were divided into two rows of square panels containing mosaics, and had windows above. The transept projected beyond the body of the church,—a very unusual arrangement. The apse, of remarkably small dimensions, was screened off by a double row of twelve wreathed columns of Parian marble. The pontifical chair was placed in the centre of the curve of the apse, on a platform raised several steps above the presbytery. To the right and left the seats of the cardinals followed the line of the apse. At the centre of the chord stood the high altar beneath a ciborium, resting on four pillars of porphyry. Beneath the altar was the subterranean chapel, the centre of the devotion of so large a portion of the Christian world, believed to contain the remains of St Peter; a vaulted crypt ran round the foundation wall of the apse in which many of the popes were buried. The roof showed its naked beams and rafters.

To transition from a general description to specific churches, we must first highlight the earliest and most impressive examples: the world-famous Roman basilicas—specifically those of St. Peter, St. Paul, and St. John Lateran, "the mother and head of all churches in the city and the world." It's true that none of these structures exist in their original form; Old St. Peter's was completely taken down in the 16th century to make way for its stunning successor, while both St. Paul’s and St. John Lateran suffered extensive damage from fire, with the latter being so thoroughly modernized that it has lost much of its original charm. However, we do have drawings, plans, and detailed descriptions of the first two, which provide a clear idea of what the original buildings looked like. Starting with St. Peter's, the attached illustrations (figs. 9, 10, 11) show that the church was accessed through a large, colonnaded atrium measuring 212 ft. by 235 ft., with a fountain in the middle—the atrium led up to a porch with an impressive set of steps. The church itself measured 212 ft. wide by 380 ft. long; the nave, 80 ft. wide, was six steps lower than the two side aisles. Each of the four colonnades had twenty-two Corinthian columns, with the columns closest to the nave supporting horizontal entablatures. The inner colonnades featured arches and a second clerestory. The main clerestory walls were divided into two rows of square panels filled with mosaics, and there were windows above them. The transept extended beyond the main body of the church, which was quite unusual. The apse, surprisingly small, was separated by a double row of twelve twisted columns made of Parian marble. The pontifical chair was located at the center of the apse’s curve, on a platform elevated several steps above the presbytery. To the right and left, the cardinals' seats followed the curve of the apse. At the center of the chord stood the high altar under a ciborium, resting on four pillars of porphyry. Below the altar was the underground chapel, a focal point of devotion for a large part of the Christian world, believed to house the remains of St. Peter; a vaulted crypt encircled the foundation wall of the apse, where many popes were buried. The roof displayed its bare beams and rafters.

Fig. 11. Sectional view of the original St Peter's.

Fig. 11.—Sectional view of the old Basilica of St Peter, before its destruction in the 16th century.

Fig. 11.—Sectional view of the old Basilica of St. Peter, before it was destroyed in the 16th century.

Fig. 12. Ground-Plan of St Paul's, Rome.

Fig. 12.—Ground-Plan of St Paul's, Rome, before its destruction by fire.

Fig. 12.—Floor Plan of St Paul's, Rome, before it was destroyed by fire.

a, Narthex. b, Nave. c, c, Side aisles. d, Altar. e, Bema. f, Apse.

a, Narthex. b, Nave. c, Side aisles. d, Altar. e, Bema. f, Apse.

The basilica of St Paul without the walls, dedicated 324 A.D., rebuilt 388-423, remained in a sadly neglected state, but substantially unaltered, till the disastrous fire of 1823, which reduced the nave to a calcined ruin. Its plan and dimensions (figs. 12, 13) were almost identical with those of St Peter's.

The Basilica of St. Paul Outside the Walls, dedicated in 324 CE, was rebuilt from 388 to 423 and stayed in a sadly run-down condition, though mostly unchanged, until the devastating fire of 1823, which turned the nave into a charred ruin. Its layout and dimensions (figs. 12, 13) were almost identical to those of St. Peter's.

The only parts of the modernized five-aisled basilica of St John Lateran (of which we have a plan in its original state, Agincourt, pl. lxxiii. No. 22) which retain any interest, are the double-vaulted aisle which runs round the apse, a most unusual arrangement, and the baptistery. The latter is an octagonal building standing some little distance from the basilica to the south. Its roof is supported by a double range of columns, one above the other, encircling the baptismal basin sunk below the floor.

The only parts of the updated five-aisled basilica of St. John Lateran (of which we have a plan in its original state, Agincourt, pl. lxxiii. No. 22) that still hold any interest are the double-vaulted aisle that circles the apse, a really unique setup, and the baptistery. The baptistery is an octagonal structure located a short distance to the south of the basilica. Its roof is supported by two rows of columns, one above the other, surrounding the baptismal basin that is set below the floor.

Of the three-aisled basilicas the best example is the Liberian or S. Maria Maggiore dedicated 365, and reconstructed 432 A.D. Its internal length to the chord of the apse is 250 ft. by 100 ft. in breadth. The Ionic pillars of grey granite, uniform in style, twenty on each side, form a colonnade of great dignity and beauty, unfortunately broken towards the east by intrusive arches opening into chapels. The clerestory, though modern, is excellent in style and arrangement. Corinthian pilasters divide the windows, beneath which are very remarkable mosaic pictures of subjects from Old Testament history, generally supposed to [v.03 p.0475]date from the pontificate of Sixtus III., 432-440. The face of the arch of triumph presents also a series of mosaics illustrative of the infancy of our Lord, of great value in the history of art. The apse is of later date, reconstructed by Paschal I. in 818.

Of the three-aisled basilicas, the best example is the Liberian or S. Maria Maggiore, dedicated in 365 and rebuilt in 432 CE Its internal length to the curve of the apse is 250 ft. and 100 ft. wide. The Ionic pillars made of grey granite, matching in style, twenty on each side, create a colonnade that is dignified and beautiful, though unfortunately interrupted to the east by arches leading into chapels. The clerestory, while modern, is designed excellently. Corinthian pilasters separate the windows, below which are impressive mosaic images depicting scenes from Old Testament history, usually believed to [v.03 p.0475]date back to the papacy of Sixtus III, from 432 to 440. The arch of triumph also features a series of mosaics illustrating the infancy of our Lord, which are highly significant in the history of art. The apse is from a later period, reconstructed by Paschal I in 818.

Fig. 13. Section of the Basilica of St Paul, Rome. Fig. 13.—Section of the Basilica of St Paul, Rome.
Fig. 14. Basilica of S. Agnese. Fig. 14.—Section of Basilica of S. Agnese at Rome.

Of the remaining Roman basilicas that of S. Sabina on the Aventine is of special interest as its interior, dating from about A.D. 430, has preserved more of the primitive aspect than any other. Its carved wooden doors of early Christian date are of unique value, and in the spandrils of its inner arcades, upborne by splendid antique Corinthian columns, are some good specimens of opus sectile or mosaic of cut marble. The ancient roof is an open one. The basilicas of S. Lorenzo fuori le Mura and S. Agnese deserve particular notice, as exhibiting galleries corresponding to those of the civil basilicas and to the later triforium, carried above the aisles and returned across the entrance end. It is doubtful, however, whether these galleries are part of the original schemes. The architectural history of S. Lorenzo's is curious. When originally constructed in A.D. 432, it consisted of a short nave of six bays, with an internal narthex the whole height of the building. In the 13th century Honorius III. disorientated the church by pulling down the apse and erecting a nave of twelve bays on its site and beyond it, thus converting the original nave into a square-ended choir, the level being much raised, and the magnificent Corinthian columns half buried. As a consequence of the church being thus shifted completely round, the face of the arch of triumph, turned away from the present entrance, but towards the original one, is invested with the usual mosaics (Agincourt, pl. xxviii. Nos. 29, 30, 31). The basilica of S. Agnese, of which we give a section (fig. 14), is a small but interesting building, much like what S. Lorenzo must have been before it was altered.

Of the remaining Roman basilicas, S. Sabina on the Aventine is particularly noteworthy because its interior, dating from around CE 430, has retained more of its original appearance than any other. Its carved wooden doors from the early Christian period are uniquely valuable, and in the spandrels of its inner arcades, supported by impressive antique Corinthian columns, you can find some excellent examples of opus sectile or mosaic made from cut marble. The ancient roof is open. The basilicas of S. Lorenzo fuori le Mura and S. Agnese are also worth mentioning, as they feature galleries that correspond to those of the civil basilicas and later triforiums, which run above the aisles and extend across the entrance end. However, it is uncertain whether these galleries were part of the original designs. The architectural history of S. Lorenzo's is quite interesting. When it was originally built in CE 432, it had a short nave with six bays and an internal narthex that was the full height of the building. In the 13th century, Honorius III altered the church by demolishing the apse and building a nave with twelve bays on its site and beyond it, turning the original nave into a square-ended choir, raising the floor level and partially burying the magnificent Corinthian columns. As a result of this complete reorientation of the church, the face of the arch of triumph, which now faces away from the current entrance but towards the original one, is adorned with the usual mosaics (Agincourt, pl. xxviii. Nos. 29, 30, 31). The basilica of S. Agnese, of which we provide a section (fig. 14), is a small but fascinating building, very similar to what S. Lorenzo must have looked like before its modifications.

Fig. 15. Basilica of S. Clemente.

Fig. 15.—Plan of Basilica of S. Clemente in Rome.

Fig. 15.—Plan of the Basilica of St. Clemente in Rome.

1. Porch. 2. Atrium. 3. Nave. 4. Aisle for men. 5. Aisle for women. 6. Chorus cantorum. 7. Altar. 8. Gospel-ambo. 9. Epistle-ambo. 10. Confessio. 11. Bishop's throne.

1. Porch. 2. Atrium. 3. Main hall. 4. Men's aisle. 5. Women's aisle. 6. Choir area. 7. Altar. 8. Gospel podium. 9. Epistle podium. 10. Confession area. 11. Bishop's chair.

Though inferior in size, and later in date than most of the basilicas already mentioned, that of S. Clemente is not surpassed in interest by any one of them. This is due to its having retained its original ritual arrangements and church-fittings more perfectly than any other. These fittings have been removed from the earlier church, lying below the existing building, which at some unknown date and for some unrecorded reason was abandoned and filled up with earth, while a new building was erected upon it as a foundation. The most probable account is that the earlier church was so completely overwhelmed in the ruin of the city in 1084, when Robert Guiscard burnt all the public buildings from the Lateran to the Capitol, that it was found simpler and more convenient to build a new edifice at a higher level than to repair the old one. The annexed plan (fig. 15) and view (fig. 16) show the peculiarities of the existing building. The church is preceded by an atrium, the only perfect example remaining in Rome, in the centre of which is the cantharus or fountain for ablutions. The atrium is entered by a portico made up of earlier fragments very carelessly put together. The chorus cantorum, which occupies about one-third of the nave, is enclosed by a low marble screen, about 3 ft. high, a work of the 9th century, preserved from the old church but newly arranged. The white marble slabs are covered with patterns in low relief, and are decorated with ribbons of glass mosaic of the 13th century. These screen-walls stand quite free of the pillars, leaving a passage between. On the ritual north stands the gospel-ambo, of octagonal form, with a double flight of steps westwards and eastwards. To the west of it stands the great Paschal candlestick, with a spiral shaft, decorated with mosaic. Opposite, to the south, is the epistle-ambo, square in plan, with two marble reading-desks facing east and west, for the reading of the epistle and the gradual respectively. The sanctuary is raised two steps above the choir, from which it is divided by another portion of the same marble screen. The altar stands beneath a lofty ciborium, supported by marble columns, with a canopy on smaller shafts above. It retains the rods and rings for the curtains to run on. Behind the altar, in the centre of the curved line of the apse, is a marble episcopal throne, bearing the monogram of Anastasius who was titular cardinal of this church in 1108. The conch of the apse is inlaid with mosaics of quite the end of the 13th century. The subterranean church, disinterred by the zeal of Father Mullooly, the prior of the adjacent Irish Dominican convent, is supported by columns of very rich marble of various kinds. The aisle walls, as well as those of the narthex, are covered with fresco-paintings of various dates from the 7th to the 11th century, in a marvellous state of preservation (See St Clement, Pope and Martyr, and his Basilica in Rome, by Joseph Mullooly, O.P., Rome, 1873.)

Though smaller and built later than most of the basilicas mentioned, S. Clemente is just as interesting as any of them. This is because it has kept its original layout and church furnishings better than the others. These furnishings were taken from the earlier church, which is beneath the current building. At some unknown time and for some unrecorded reason, it was abandoned and filled with earth, while a new building was constructed on top of it. The most likely explanation is that the earlier church was so thoroughly buried during the city's destruction in 1084, when Robert Guiscard set fire to all public buildings from the Lateran to the Capitol, that it was easier and more practical to build a new structure at a higher level than to restore the old one. The attached plan (fig. 15) and view (fig. 16) highlight the unique features of the existing building. The church is preceded by an atrium, the only complete example left in Rome, which features a cantharus or fountain for washing. The atrium is accessed through a portico made from earlier fragments that are not very well assembled. The chorus cantorum, which takes up about one-third of the nave, is enclosed by a low marble screen, about 3 ft. high, a 9th-century piece preserved from the old church but rearranged. The white marble slabs are adorned with patterns in low relief and decorated with ribbons of 13th-century glass mosaic. These screen-walls are entirely free from the pillars, creating a passage between them. On the north side for rituals stands the gospel-ambo, which is octagonal and has a double flight of steps leading to the west and east. To the west of it is the grand Paschal candlestick with a spiral shaft decorated with mosaic. On the opposite side, to the south, is the epistle-ambo, square in design, with two marble reading-desks facing east and west for reading the epistle and the gradual, respectively. The sanctuary is raised two steps above the choir, separated by another section of the same marble screen. The altar is placed beneath a tall ciborium, upheld by marble columns, with a canopy supported by smaller shafts above. It still has rods and rings for hanging curtains. Behind the altar, in the center of the apse's curved line, is a marble episcopal throne featuring the monogram of Anastasius, who was the titular cardinal of this church in 1108. The apse’s conch is inlaid with mosaics from the late 13th century. The underground church, uncovered by the efforts of Father Mullooly, the prior of the nearby Irish Dominican convent, is supported by columns of various types of richly colored marble. The aisle walls, as well as those of the narthex, are adorned with fresco paintings from different periods, dating from the 7th to the 11th century, remarkably well preserved (See St Clement, Pope and Martyr, and his Basilica in Rome, by Joseph Mullooly, O.P., Rome, 1873.)

Fig. 16. Interior of S. Clemente. Fig. 16.—Interior of S. Clemente in Rome.

The fullest lists of early Christian basilicas outside Rome are given in Kraus's Realencyklopädie der christlichen Alterthümer, Freiburg i. B., 1882, art. "Basilica," and more recently in Leclercq's Manuel d'archéologie chrétienne, Paris 1907, vol. i. App. i., "Essai de Classement des Principaux Monuments." Only a few characteristic specimens in different regions can here be noticed. In Italy, apart from Rome, the most remarkable basilican churches are the two dedicated to S. Apollinare at Ravenna. They are of smaller dimensions than those of Rome, but the design and proportions are better. The cathedral of this city, a noble basilica with double aisles, erected by Archbishop Ursus, A.D. 400 (Agincourt, pl. xxiii. No. 21), was unfortunately destroyed on the erection of the present tasteless building. Of the two basilicas of S. Apollinare, the earlier, S. Apollinare Nuovo, originally an Arian church erected by Theodoric, 493-525, measuring 315 ft. in length by 115 ft. in breadth, has a nave 51 ft. wide, separated from the single aisles by colonnades of twenty-two pillars, supporting arches, a small prismatic block bearing a sculptured cross intervening with very happy effect between the capital and the arch. Below the windows a continuous band of saintly figures, male on one side and female on the other, advancing in stately procession towards Our Lord and the Virgin Mother respectively, affords one of the most beautiful examples of mosaic ornamentation to be found [v.03 p.0476]in any church (fig. 17). The design of the somewhat later and smaller church of S. Apollinare in Classe, A.D. 538-549, measuring 216 ft. by 104 ft., is so similar that they must have proceeded from the same architect (Agincourt, pl lxxiii. No. 35).

The most comprehensive lists of early Christian basilicas outside of Rome are found in Kraus's Realencyklopädie der christlichen Alterthümer, Freiburg i. B., 1882, article "Basilica," and more recently in Leclercq's Manuel d'archéologie chrétienne, Paris 1907, vol. i. App. i., "Essai de Classement des Principaux Monuments." Here, we can only highlight a few distinctive examples from various regions. In Italy, aside from Rome, the most notable basilicas are the two dedicated to S. Apollinare in Ravenna. They are smaller than the ones in Rome, but their design and proportions are superior. The cathedral in this city, a magnificent basilica with double aisles built by Archbishop Ursus, CE 400 (Agincourt, pl. xxiii. No. 21), was unfortunately destroyed when the current unattractive building was constructed. Of the two basilicas of S. Apollinare, the earlier one, S. Apollinare Nuovo, which was originally an Arian church built by Theodoric between 493-525, measures 315 ft. in length and 115 ft. in breadth, with a nave 51 ft. wide, separated from the single aisles by colonnades of twenty-two pillars that support arches. A small prismatic block with a sculptured cross is placed very effectively between the capital and the arch. Below the windows is a continuous band of saintly figures—male on one side and female on the other—progressing in a stately procession toward Christ and the Virgin Mother, showcasing one of the most beautiful examples of mosaic decoration found in any church [v.03 p.0476]. The design of the slightly later and smaller church of S. Apollinare in Classe, A.D. 538-549, which measures 216 ft. by 104 ft., is so similar that they must have come from the same architect (Agincourt, pl lxxiii. No. 35).

Fig. 17. Arches of S Apollinare Nuovo.

Fig. 17.—Arches of S Apollinare Nuovo, Ravenna.

Fig. 17.—Arches of S Apollinare Nuovo, Ravenna.

The cathedral on the island of Torcello near Venice, originally built in the 7th century, but largely repaired c. A.D. 1000, deserves special attention from the fact that it preserves, in a more perfect state than can be seen elsewhere, the arrangements of the seats in the apse (fig. 18). The bishop's throne occupies the centre of the arc, approached by a steep flight of steps. Six rows of stone benches for the presbyters, rising one above another like the seats in a theatre, follow the curve on either side—the whole being singularly plain and almost rude. The altar stands on a platform; the sanctuary is divided from the nave by a screen of six pillars. The walls of the apse are inlaid with plates of marble. The church is 125 ft. by 75 ft. The narrow aisles are only 7 ft. in width.

The cathedral on the island of Torcello near Venice, originally built in the 7th century but largely restored around A.D. 1000, deserves special attention because it retains, in a more complete state than can be found elsewhere, the arrangement of seats in the apse (fig. 18). The bishop's throne is located at the center of the arc, accessed by a steep flight of steps. Six rows of stone benches for the presbyters rise one above another like theater seats, following the curve on either side—the overall look is remarkably simple and almost crude. The altar is positioned on a platform; the sanctuary is separated from the nave by a screen of six pillars. The walls of the apse are decorated with marble plates. The church measures 125 ft. by 75 ft., and the narrow aisles are only 7 ft. wide.

Fig. 18. Apse of Basilica, Torcello.

Fig. 18.—Apse of Basilica, Torcello, with Bishop's throne and seats for the clergy. (From a drawing by Lady Palgrave.)

Fig. 18.—Apse of the Basilica, Torcello, featuring the Bishop's throne and seating for the clergy. (From a drawing by Lady Palgrave.)

Another very remarkable basilica, less known than it deserves to be, is that of Parenzo in Istria, c. A.D. 542. Few basilicas have sustained so little alteration. From the annexed ground-plan (fig. 19) it will be seen that it retains its atrium and a baptistery, square without, octagonal within, to the west of it. Nine pillars divide each aisle from the nave, some of them borrowed from earlier buildings. The capitals are Byzantine. The choir occupies the three easternmost bays. The apse, as at Torcello, retains the bishop's throne and the bench for the presbyters apparently unaltered. The mosaics are singularly gorgeous, and the apse walls, as at Torcello, are inlaid with rich marble and mother-of-pearl. The dimensions are small—121 ft. by 32 ft. (See Kunstdenkmale des österreichischen Kaiserreichs, by Dr G. Heider and others.)

Another remarkable basilica, less known than it should be, is the one in Parenzo, Istria, c. A.D. 542. Few basilicas have undergone so little change. From the attached ground plan (fig. 19), you can see that it still has its atrium and a baptistery, square on the outside and octagonal on the inside, located to the west. Nine pillars separate each aisle from the nave, some taken from earlier buildings. The capitals are Byzantine. The choir occupies the three easternmost bays. The apse, like at Torcello, still features the bishop's throne and the bench for the presbyters, seemingly unchanged. The mosaics are particularly beautiful, and the apse walls, similar to those at Torcello, are decorated with rich marble and mother-of-pearl. The dimensions are small—121 ft. by 32 ft. (See Kunstdenkmale des österreichischen Kaiserreichs, by Dr. G. Heider and others.)

Fig. 19. Ground-Plan of Cathedral of Parenzo.

Fig. 19.—Ground-Plan of Cathedral of Parenzo, Istria.

Fig. 19.—Floor Plan of the Cathedral of Parenzo, Istria.

a, Cloistered atrium. +, Narthex. b, Nave. c, c, Aisles. d, Chorus cantorum. e, Altar. f, Bishop's throne. g, Baptistery. h, Belfry. i, Chapel of St Andrew.

a, Cloistered atrium. +, Narthex. b, Nave. c, c, Aisles. d, Chorus cantorum. e, Altar. f, Bishop's throne. g, Baptistery. h, Belfry. i, Chapel of St Andrew.

In the Eastern church, though the erection of St Sophia at Constantinople introduced a new type which almost entirely superseded the old one, the basilican form, or as it was then termed dromical, from its shape being that of a race-course (dromos), was originally as much the rule as in the West. The earliest church of which we have any clear account, that of Paulinus at Tyre, A.D. 313-322, described by Eusebius (Hist. Eccl. x. 4 § 37), was evidently basilican, with galleries over the aisles, and had an atrium in front. That erected by Constantine at Jerusalem, on the side of the Holy Sepulchre, 333, followed the same plan (Euseb., Vit. Const. iii. c. 29), as did the original churches of St Sophia and of the Apostles at Constantinople. Both these buildings have entirely passed away, but we have an excellent example of an oriental basilica of the same date still standing in the church of the Nativity at Bethlehem, rebuilt by Justinian in the 6th century (fig. 20). Here we find an oblong atrium, a vestibule or narthex, double aisles with Corinthian columns, and a transept, each end of which terminates in an apse, in addition to that in the usual position. Beneath the centre of the transept is the subterranean church of the Nativity (Vogué, Les Églises de la Terre Sainte, p. 46).

In the Eastern church, even though the construction of St. Sophia in Constantinople introduced a new style that largely replaced the old one, the basilican form, or what was then called dromical because its shape resembled a racetrack (dromos), was originally as prevalent as it was in the West. The earliest church we have clear records of, that of Paulinus in Tyre, CE 313-322, which Eusebius described (Hist. Eccl. x. 4 § 37), was clearly basilican, featuring galleries over the aisles, along with an atrium in front. The church built by Constantine in Jerusalem, next to the Holy Sepulchre in 333, followed the same design (Euseb., Vit. Const. iii. c. 29), as did the original St. Sophia and Apostles churches in Constantinople. Both of those buildings are completely gone now, but we can still see a great example of an oriental basilica from that time, which is the church of the Nativity in Bethlehem, rebuilt by Justinian in the 6th century (fig. 20). Here, we find an oblong atrium, a vestibule or narthex, double aisles supported by Corinthian columns, and a transept, each end of which leads to an apse, in addition to the usual one. Under the center of the transept is the underground church of the Nativity (Vogué, Les Églises de la Terre Sainte, p. 46).

Constantinople preserved till recently a basilican church of the 5th century, that of St John Studios, 463, now a ruin. It had a nave and side aisles divided by columns supporting a horizontal entablature, with another order supporting arches forming a gallery above. There was the usual apsidal termination. The chief difference between the Eastern and Roman basilicas is in the galleries. This feature is very rare in the West, and only occurs in some few examples, the antiquity of which is questioned at Rome but never at Ravenna. It is, on the other hand, a characteristic feature of Eastern churches, the galleries being intended for women, for whom privacy was more studied than in the West (Salzenberg, Altchrist. Baudenkmale von Constantinople).

Constantinople recently had a basilica from the 5th century, the Church of St. John Studios, 463, which is now in ruins. It featured a nave and side aisles separated by columns that supported a horizontal entablature, with another level of columns holding arches that formed a gallery above. The typical apsidal ending was present. The main difference between Eastern and Roman basilicas lies in the galleries. This feature is quite rare in the West, with only a few examples, the age of which is debated in Rome but not in Ravenna. Conversely, it is a defining feature of Eastern churches, as the galleries were designed for women, whose privacy was better accommodated than in the West (Salzenberg, Altchrist. Baudenkmale von Constantinople).

Fig. 20. Plan of church of the Nativity, Bethlehem.

Fig. 20.—Plan of church of the Nativity, Bethlehem. 1, Narthex; 2, nave; 3, 3, aisles.

Fig. 20.—Plan of the Church of the Nativity, Bethlehem. 1, Narthex; 2, nave; 3, aisles.

Other basilican churches in the East which deserve notice are those of the monastery of St Catherine on Mt. Sinai built by Justinian, that of Dana between Antioch and Bir of the same date, St Philip at Athens, Bosra in Arabia, Xanthus in Lycia, and the very noble church of St Demetrius at Thessalonica. Views and descriptions of most of these may be found in Texier and Pullan's Byzantine Architecture, Couchaud's Choix d'églises byzantines, and the works of the count de Vogué. In the Roman province of North Africa there are abundant remains of early Christian churches, and S. Gsell, Les Monuments antiques de l'Algérie, has noticed more than 130 examples. Basilicas of strictly early Christian date are not now to be met with in France, Spain or Germany, but the interesting though very plain "Basse Œuvre" at Beauvais may date from Carolingian times, while Germany can show at Michelstadt in the Odenwald an unaltered basilica of the time of Charles the Great. The fine-columned basilica of St Mauritius, near Hildesheim, dates from the 11th century, and the basilican form has been revived in the noble modern basilica at Munich.

Other basilica churches in the East that are worth mentioning include those at the monastery of St. Catherine on Mt. Sinai, built by Justinian, the one at Dana between Antioch and Bir from the same period, St. Philip in Athens, Bosra in Arabia, Xanthus in Lycia, and the impressive church of St. Demetrius in Thessalonica. You can find views and descriptions of most of these in Texier and Pullan's Byzantine Architecture, Couchaud's Choix d'églises byzantines, and the works of Count de Vogué. In the Roman province of North Africa, there are many remains of early Christian churches, and S. Gsell, in Les Monuments antiques de l'Algérie, has noted over 130 examples. There are no strictly early Christian basilicas left in France, Spain, or Germany, but the simple yet interesting "Basse Œuvre" in Beauvais may date back to Carolingian times, while Germany has an unaltered basilica from the time of Charlemagne at Michelstadt in the Odenwald. The beautifully columned basilica of St. Mauritius, near Hildesheim, dates from the 11th century, and the basilica style has been revived in the impressive modern basilica in Munich.

Fig. 21. Early Christian Basilica at Silchester.

Fig. 21.—Plan of early Christian Basilica of about the 4th century at Silchester, Hants.

Fig. 21.—Layout of the early Christian Basilica from around the 4th century in Silchester, Hants.

(From Archaeologia, liii.)

(From Archaeologia, liii.)

England can show more early Christian survivals than France or Germany. In the course of the excavation of the Roman city of Silchester, there was brought to light in 1892 the remains of a small early Christian basilica dating from the 4th century of which fig. 21 gives the plan (Archaeologia, vol. liii.). It will be [v.03 p.0477]noted that the apse is flanked by two chambers, of the nature of sacristies, cut off from the rest of the church, and known in ecclesiastical terminology as prothesis and diaconicon. These features, rare in Italy, are almost universal in the churches of North Africa and Syria. Another existing English basilica of early date is that of Brixworth in Northamptonshire, probably erected by Saxulphus, abbot of Peterborough, c. A.D. 680. It consisted of a nave divided from its aisles by quadrangular piers supporting arches turned in Roman brick, with clerestory windows above, and a short chancel terminating in an apse, outside which, as at St Peter's at Rome, ran a circumscribing crypt entered by steps from the chancel. At the west end was a square porch, the walls of which were carried up later in the form of a tower.

England has more early Christian remnants than France or Germany. During the excavation of the Roman city of Silchester, the remains of a small early Christian basilica from the 4th century were discovered in 1892, as shown in fig. 21 (Archaeologia, vol. liii.). It's worth noting that the apse is flanked by two chambers, functioning as sacristies, separated from the rest of the church, known in church terminology as prothesis and diaconicon. These features, which are rare in Italy, are almost common in the churches of North Africa and Syria. Another early English basilica still standing is Brixworth in Northamptonshire, likely built by Saxulphus, abbot of Peterborough, around A.D. 680. It had a nave divided from its aisles by rectangular piers supporting arches made of Roman brick, with clerestory windows above, and a short chancel leading to an apse. Outside the apse, similar to St. Peter's in Rome, there was a surrounding crypt accessed by steps from the chancel. At the west end, there was a square porch, the walls of which were later raised into a tower.

Fig. 22. Ground-Plan of the original Cathedral at Canterbury.

Fig. 22.—Ground-Plan of the original Cathedral at Canterbury, as restored by Willis.

Fig. 22.—Floor plan of the original Cathedral at Canterbury, as restored by Willis.

A, High altar. B, Altar of our Lord. C, C, Steps to crypt. D, Crypt. E, F, Chorus cantorum. G, Our Lady's altar. H, Bishop's throne. K, South porch with altar. L, North porch containing school. M, Archbishop Odo's tomb.

A, High altar. B, Altar of our Lord. C, C, Steps to crypt. D, Crypt. E, F, Choir. G, Our Lady's altar. H, Bishop's throne. K, South porch with altar. L, North porch containing school. M, Archbishop Odo's tomb.

The first church built in England under Roman influence was the original Saxon cathedral of Canterbury. From the annexed ground-plan (fig. 22), as conjecturally restored from Eadmer's description, we see that it was an aisled basilica, with an apse at either end, containing altars standing on raised platforms approached by steps. Beneath the eastern platform was a crypt, or confessio, containing relics, "fabricated in the likeness of the confessionary of St Peter at Rome" (Eadmer). The western apse, dedicated to the Blessed Virgin, contained the bishop's throne. From this and other indications Willis thinks that this was the original altar end, the eastern apse being a subsequent addition of Archbishop Odo, c. 950, the church having been thus turned from west to east, as at the already-described basilica of S. Lorenzo at Rome. The choir, as at S. Clemente's, occupied the eastern part of the nave, and like it was probably enclosed by breast-high partitions. There were attached porches to the north and south of the nave. The main entrance of the church was through that to the south. At this suthdure, according to Eadmer, "all disputes from the whole kingdom, which could not legally be referred to the king's court, or to the hundreds and counties, received judgment." The northern porch contained a school for the younger clergy.

The first church built in England under Roman influence was the original Saxon cathedral of Canterbury. From the attached ground plan (fig. 22), which has been speculatively reconstructed from Eadmer's description, we can see that it was an aisled basilica, with an apse at each end, containing altars on raised platforms accessed by steps. Beneath the eastern platform was a crypt, or confessio, holding relics, "designed to resemble the confessional of St. Peter in Rome" (Eadmer). The western apse, dedicated to the Blessed Virgin, housed the bishop's throne. Based on this and other clues, Willis believes this was the original altar end, with the eastern apse being a later addition by Archbishop Odo, around 950, effectively turning the church from west to east, similar to the previously described basilica of S. Lorenzo in Rome. The choir, like that at S. Clemente's, occupied the eastern section of the nave and was likely surrounded by low partitions. There were porches attached to the north and south of the nave. The main entrance to the church was through the southern porch. According to Eadmer, at this suthdure, "all disputes from the entire kingdom, that could not be legally taken to the king's court, or to the hundreds and counties, were resolved." The northern porch included a school for younger clergy.

Authorities.—Vitruvius, De Architectura, v. 1, vi. 3, 9; Huelsen, The Roman Forum (1906); Mau, Pompeii: its Life and Art; C. Lange, Haus und Halle; Canina, Edifizii di Roma Antica; Ciampini, Vetera Monimenta; Seroux d'Agincourt, L'Histoire de l'art par les monumens; Bunsen and Plattner, Beschreibung der Stadt Rom; Gutensohn and Knapp, Basiliken des christlichen Roms; Zestermann, Die antiken u. die christlichen Basiliken; Hübsch, Die altchristlichen Kirchen; Messmer, Über den Ursprung, &c., der Basilica; Letarouilly, Edifices de Rome moderne; Von Quast, Altchristliche Bauwerke von Ravenna; Texier and Pullan, Byzantine Architecture; Vogué, Eglises de la Terre Sainte; Syrie Centrale, Architecture, &c.; Couchaud, Choix d'églises byzantines; Dehio und von Bezold, Die kirchliche Baukunst des Abendlandes; Holtzinger, Die altchristliche Architectur in systematischer Darstellung; Kraus, Geschichte der christlichen Kunst; Leclercq, Manuel d'archéologie chrétienne (Paris, 1907).

Authorities.—Vitruvius, De Architectura, v. 1, vi. 3, 9; Huelsen, The Roman Forum (1906); Mau, Pompeii: its Life and Art; C. Lange, Haus und Halle; Canina, Edifizii di Roma Antica; Ciampini, Vetera Monimenta; Seroux d'Agincourt, L'Histoire de l'art par les monumens; Bunsen and Plattner, Beschreibung der Stadt Rom; Gutensohn and Knapp, Basiliken des christlichen Roms; Zestermann, Die antiken u. die christlichen Basiliken; Hübsch, Die altchristlichen Kirchen; Messmer, Über den Ursprung, &c., der Basilica; Letarouilly, Edifices de Rome moderne; Von Quast, Altchristliche Bauwerke von Ravenna; Texier and Pullan, Byzantine Architecture; Vogué, Eglises de la Terre Sainte; Syrie Centrale, Architecture, &c.; Couchaud, Choix d'églises byzantines; Dehio und von Bezold, Die kirchliche Baukunst des Abendlandes; Holtzinger, Die altchristliche Architectur in systematischer Darstellung; Kraus, Geschichte der christlichen Kunst; Leclercq, Manuel d'archéologie chrétienne (Paris, 1907).

(E. V.; G. B. B.)

(E. V.; G. B. B.)

BASILICA, a code of law, drawn up in the Greek language, with a view to putting an end to the uncertainty which prevailed throughout the East Roman empire in the 9th century as to the authorized sources of law. This uncertainty had been brought about by the conflicting opinions of the jurists of the 6th century as to the proper interpretation to be given to the legislation of the emperor Justinian, from which had resulted a system of teaching which had deprived that legislation of all authority, and the imperial judges at last were at a loss to know by what rules of law they were to regulate their decisions. An endeavour had been made by the emperor Leo the Isaurian to remedy this evil, but his attempted reform of the law had been rather calculated to increase its uncertainty; and it was reserved for Basil the Macedonian to show himself worthy of the throne, which he had usurped, by purifying the administration of justice and once more reducing the law into an intelligible code. There has been considerable controversy as to the part which the emperor Basil took in framing the new code. There is, however, no doubt that he abrogated in a formal manner the ancient laws, which had fallen into desuetude, and the more probable opinion would seem to be, that he caused a revision to be made of the ancient laws which were to continue in force, and divided them into forty books, and that this code of laws was subsequently enlarged and distributed into sixty books by his son Leo the Philosopher. A further revision of this code is stated to have been made by Constantine Porphyrogenitus, the son and successor of Leo, but this statement rests only on the authority of Theodorus Balsamon, a very learned canonist of the 12th century, who, in his preface to the Nomocanon of Patriarch Photius, cites passages from the Basilica which differ from the text of the code as revised by the emperor Leo. The weight of authority, however, is against any further revision of the code having been made after the formal revision which it underwent in the reign of the emperor Leo, who appointed a commission of jurists under the presidency of Sympathius, the captain of the body-guard, to revise the work of his father, to which he makes allusion in the first of his Novellae. This latter conclusion is the more probable from the circumstance, that the text of the code, as revised by the emperor Leo, agrees with the citations from the Basilica which occur in the works of Michael Psellus and Michael Attaliates, both of them high dignitaries of the court of Constantinople, who lived a century before Balsamon, and who are silent as to any second revision of the code having taken place in the reign of Constantine Porphyrogenitus, as well as with other citations from the Basilica, which are found in the writings of Mathaeus Blastares and of Constantine Harmenopulus, both of whom wrote shortly after Balsamon, and the latter of whom was far too learned a jurist and too accurate a lawyer to cite any but the official text of the code.

BASILICA, is a set of laws created in Greek aimed at ending the confusion surrounding the recognized sources of law throughout the East Roman Empire in the 9th century. This confusion was caused by the differing interpretations from the 6th-century jurists about the legislation of Emperor Justinian, leading to a system of teaching that undermined that legislation's authority. As a result, imperial judges were ultimately unsure of the legal rules they should follow in their decisions. Emperor Leo the Isaurian attempted to fix this problem, but his reforms only made the legal uncertainty worse; it fell to Basil the Macedonian to prove himself worthy of the throne he had taken by improving the administration of justice and reestablishing the law in a clear code. There has been significant debate about the role Emperor Basil played in creating the new code. However, it is clear that he formally repealed the ancient laws that had fallen out of use, and it seems likely that he ordered a review of the ancient laws that would remain in effect, organizing them into forty books. His son, Leo the Philosopher, later expanded this code to sixty books. A further revision of this code is said to have been made by Constantine Porphyrogenitus, Leo's son and successor, but this claim relies solely on the authority of Theodorus Balsamon, a knowledgeable canonist from the 12th century, who, in his preface to the Nomocanon of Patriarch Photius, references passages from the Basilica that differ from Leo's revised text. However, most authorities seem to support that no further revisions occurred after the formal update made during Leo's reign, during which he appointed a commission of jurists led by Sympathius, the head of the bodyguard, to review his father's work, as mentioned in his first Novellae. This latter conclusion appears more valid given that the text of the code, as revised by Emperor Leo, aligns with the excerpts from the Basilica cited in the works of Michael Psellus and Michael Attaliates, both prominent members of the court of Constantinople who lived a century before Balsamon. They made no mention of a second revision of the code during Constantine Porphyrogenitus's reign, and the citations from the Basilica found in the writings of Mathaeus Blastares and Constantine Harmenopulus, both written shortly after Balsamon, also match. The latter was far too knowledgeable as a jurist and too precise as a lawyer to refer to anything but the official text of the code.

Authors are not agreed as to the origin of the term Basilica, by which the code of the emperor Leo is now distinguished. The code itself appears to have been originally entitled The Revision of the Ancient Laws (ἡ ἀνακάθαρσις τῶν παλαιῶν νόμων); next there came into use the title ἡ ἑξηκοντάβιβλος, derived from the division of the work into sixty books; and finally, before the conclusion of the 10th century, the code came to be designated ὁ βασιλικός, or τὰ βασιλικά, being elliptical forms of ὁ βασιλικὸς νόμος and τὰ βασιλικά νόμιμα, namely the Imperial Law or the Imperial Constitutions. This explanation of the term "Basilica" is more probable than the derivation of it from the name of the father of the emperor Leo, inasmuch as the Byzantine jurists of the 11th and 12th centuries ignored altogether the part which the emperor Basil had taken in initiating the legal reforms, which were completed by his son; besides the name of the father of the emperor Leo was written βασίλειος, from which substantive, according to the genius of [v.03 p.0478]the ancient Greek language, the adjective βασιλικός could not well be derived.

Authors do not agree on the origin of the term Basilica, which is how the code of Emperor Leo is now recognized. The code itself seems to have originally been titled The Revision of the Ancient Laws (the purification of the old laws); later, it was commonly called the sixty-book, based on the division of the work into sixty books. Finally, by the end of the 10th century, the code was referred to as The royal or the royal, which are shortened forms of the royal law and royal laws, meaning the Imperial Law or the Imperial Constitutions. This explanation of the term "Basilica" is more likely than the idea that it comes from the name of Emperor Leo's father, especially since 11th and 12th-century Byzantine jurists completely ignored the role Emperor Basil played in starting the legal reforms that were finished by his son. Additionally, the name of Leo's father was written as Βασίλειος, from which, according to the rules of the ancient Greek language, the adjective basil could not easily be derived.

No perfect MS. has been preserved of the text of the Basilica, and the existence of any portion of the code seems to have been ignored by the jurists of western Europe, until the important bearing of it upon the study of the Roman law was brought to their attention by Viglius Zuichemus, in his preface to his edition of the Greek Paraphrase of Theophilus, published in 1533. A century, however, elapsed before an edition of the sixty books of the Basilica, as far as the MSS. then known to exist supplied materials, was published in seven volumes, by Charles Annibal Fabrot, under the patronage of Louis XIII. of France, who assigned an annual stipend of two thousand livres to the editor during its publication, and placed at his disposal the royal printing-press. This edition, although it was a great undertaking and a work of considerable merit, was a very imperfect representation of the original code. A newly-restored and far more complete text of the sixty books of the Basilica was published at Leipzig in six volumes (1833-1870), edited by K. W. E. Heimbach and G. E. Heimbach. It may seem strange that so important a body of law as the Basilica should not have come down to us in its integrity, but a letter has been preserved, which was addressed by Mark the patriarch of Alexandria to Theodoras Balsamon, from which it appears that copies of the Basilica were in the 12th century very scarce, as the patriarch was unable to procure a copy of the work. The great bulk of the code was an obstacle to the multiplication of copies of it, whilst the necessity for them was in a great degree superseded by the publication from time to time of synopses and encheiridia of its contents, composed by the most eminent jurists, of which a very full account will be found in the Histoire au droit byzantin, by the advocate Mortreuil, published in Paris in 1846.

No perfect manuscript of the text of the Basilica has been preserved, and the existence of any part of the code seems to have been overlooked by the legal scholars of Western Europe until Viglius Zuichemus highlighted its significance for the study of Roman law in his preface to his edition of the Greek Paraphrase of Theophilus, published in 1533. However, it wasn't until a century later that an edition of the sixty books of the Basilica, based on the known manuscripts, was published in seven volumes by Charles Annibal Fabrot, with support from Louis XIII of France, who provided an annual stipend of two thousand livres to the editor during its publication and made the royal printing press available to him. This edition, despite being a significant endeavor and a noteworthy work, was an incomplete representation of the original code. A newly restored and much more complete text of the sixty books of the Basilica was published in Leipzig in six volumes (1833-1870), edited by K. W. E. Heimbach and G. E. Heimbach. It might seem strange that such an important body of law as the Basilica has not survived in its entirety, but a letter has been preserved, addressed by Mark, the patriarch of Alexandria, to Theodoras Balsamon, indicating that copies of the Basilica were quite rare in the 12th century, as the patriarch was unable to obtain a copy of the work. The considerable length of the code hindered the production of multiple copies, while the need for them was largely reduced by the periodic publication of summaries and handbooks of its contents, created by the most distinguished jurists, a detailed overview of which can be found in the Histoire au droit byzantin by advocate Mortreuil, published in Paris in 1846.

BASILICATA, a territorial division of Italy, now known as the province of Potenza, which formed a part of the ancient Lucania (q.v.). It is bounded N. by the province of Foggia, N E. by those of Bari and Lecce, E. by the Gulf of Taranto (for a distance of 24 m.), S. by the province of Cosenza, and W. by the Mediterranean (for a distance of 10 m. only), and by the provinces of Salerno and Avellino. It has an area of 3845 sq. m. The province is as a whole mountainous, the highest point being the Monte Pollino (7325 ft.) on the boundary of the province of Cosenza, while the Monte Vulture, at the N.W. extremity, is an extinct volcano (4365 ft.). It is traversed by five rivers, the Bradano, Basento, Cavone or Salandrella, Agri and Sinni. The longest, the Bradano, is 104 m. in length; all run S.E. or E. into the Gulf of Taranto. The province is traversed from W. to E. by the railway from Naples to Taranto and Brindisi, which passes through Potenza and reaches at Metaponto the line along the E. coast from Taranto to Reggio di Calabria. A branch line runs N. from Potenza via Melfi to Rocchetta S. Antonio, a junction for Foggia, Gioia del Colle and Avellino (the second of these lines runs through the province of Potenza as far as Palazzo S. Gervasio), while a branch S. from the Naples and Taranto line at Sicignano terminates at Lagonegro, on the W. edge of the province. Communications are rendered difficult by the mountainous character of the interior. The mountains are still to some extent clothed with forests; in places the soil is fertile, especially along the Gulf of Taranto, though here malaria is the cause of inefficient cultivation. Olive-oil is the most important product. The total population of the province was 490,705 in 1901. The chief towns are Potenza (pop. 1901, 16,186), Avigliana (18,313), Matera (17,237), Melfi (14,649), Rionero in Vulture (11,809), Lauria (10,099).

BASILICATA, a region in Italy, now known as the province of Potenza, was part of the ancient Lucania (q.v.). It is bordered to the north by the province of Foggia, northeast by Bari and Lecce, east by the Gulf of Taranto (for a distance of 24 miles), south by Cosenza, and west by the Mediterranean (for a distance of just 10 miles) as well as the provinces of Salerno and Avellino. It covers an area of 3,845 square miles. The province is mainly mountainous, with the highest point being Monte Pollino (7,325 feet) on the border with Cosenza, while Monte Vulture, located at the northwest tip, is an extinct volcano (4,365 feet). Five rivers flow through the region: the Bradano, Basento, Cavone or Salandrella, Agri, and Sinni. The Bradano is the longest at 104 miles; all of them flow southeast or east into the Gulf of Taranto. The railway from Naples to Taranto and Brindisi runs from west to east through the province, passing through Potenza and linking at Metaponto to the line along the eastern coast from Taranto to Reggio di Calabria. A branch line goes north from Potenza via Melfi to Rocchetta Sant'Antonio, providing access to Foggia, Gioia del Colle, and Avellino (the second of these lines travels through Potenza as far as Palazzo San Gervasio), while another branch south from the Naples and Taranto line at Sicignano ends at Lagonegro, on the western edge of the province. The mountainous terrain makes transportation challenging. The mountains still have some forests, and in certain areas, the soil is fertile, particularly around the Gulf of Taranto, although malaria hampers agricultural productivity here. Olive oil is the primary product. The total population of the province was 490,705 in 1901. The main towns are Potenza (population in 1901, 16,186), Avigliana (18,313), Matera (17,237), Melfi (14,649), Rionero in Vulture (11,809), and Lauria (10,099).

BASILIDES, one of the most conspicuous exponents of Gnosticism, was living at Alexandria probably as early as the first decades of the 2nd century. It is true that Eusebius, in his Chronicle, dates his first appearance from A.D. 133, but according to Eusebius, Hist. Eccl. iv. 7 §§ 6-8, Agrippa Castor, who lived under Hadrian (117-138), already wrote a polemic against him, so that his activity may perhaps be set back to a date earlier than 138. Basilides wrote an exegetical work in twenty-four books on "his" gospel, but which this was is not known. In addition to this there are certain writings by his son Isidorus Περὶ προσφυοῦς ψυχῆς; Ἐξηγητικά on the prophet Parchor (Παρχώρ); Ἠθικά. The surviving fragments of these works are collected and commented on in Hilgenfeld's Ketzergeschichte, 207-218. The most important fragment published by Hilgenfeld (p. 207), part of the 13th book of the Exegetica, in the Acta Archelai et Manetis c. 55, only became known in its complete form later, and was published by L. Traube in the Sitzungsbericht der Münchener Akad., phil. histor. Kl. (1903), pp. 533-549. Irenaeus (Adv. Haer. i. 24 §§ 3-7) gives a sketch of Basilides' school of thought, perhaps derived from Justin's Syntagma. Closely related to this is the account in the Syntagma of Hippolytus, which is preserved in Epiphanius, Haer. 24, Philaster, Haer. 32, and Pseudo-Tertullian, Haer. 4. These are completed and confirmed by a number of scattered notices in the Stromateis of Clemens Alexandrinus. An essentially different account, with a pronounced monistic tendency, is presented by the so-called Philosophumena of Hippolytus (vii. 20-27; x. 14). Whether this last account, or that given by Irenaeus and in the Syntagma of Hippolytus, represents the original system of Basilides, has been the subject of a long controversy. (See Hilgenfeld p. 205, note 337.) The most recent opinion tends to decide against the Philosophumena; for, in its composition, Hippolytus appears to have used as his principal source the compendium of a Gnostic author who has introduced into most of the systems treated by him, in addition to the employment of older sources, his own opinions or those of his sect. The Philosophumena, therefore, cannot be taken into account in describing the teaching of Basilides (see also H. Stachelin, "Die gnostischen Quellen Hippolyts" in Texte und Untersuchungen, vi. 3; and the article Gnosticism). A comparison of the surviving fragments of Basilides, moreover, with the outline of his system in Irenaeus-Hippolytus (Syntagma) shows that the account given by the Fathers of the Church is also in the highest degree untrustworthy. The principal and most characteristic points are not noticed by them. If we assume, as we must needs do, that the opinions which Basilides promulgates as the teaching of the "barbari" (Acta Archelai c. 55) were in fact his own, the fragments prove him to have been a decided dualist, and his teaching an interesting further development of oriental (Iranian) dualism. Entirely consistent with this is the information given by the Acta Archelai that Basilides, before he came to Alexandria, had appeared publicly among the Persians (fuit praedicator apud Persas); and the allusion to his having appealed to prophets with oriental names, Barkabbas and Barkoph (Agrippa in Eusebius Hist. Eccl. iv. 7 § 7). So too his son Isidorus explained the prophecies of a certain Parchor ( = Barkoph) and appealed to the prophecies of Cham[1] (Clemens Alexandrinus, Stromat. vi. 6 § 53). Thus Basilides assumed the existence of two principles, not derivable from each other: Light and Darkness. These had existed for a long time side by side, without knowing anything of each other, but when they perceived each other, the Light had only looked and then turned away; but the Darkness, seized with desire for the Light, had made itself master, not indeed of the Light itself, but only of its reflection (species, color). Thus they had been in a position to form this world: unde nec perfectum bonum est in hoc mundo, et quod est, valde est exiguum. This speculation is clearly a development of that which the Iranian cosmology has to tell about the battles between Ahura-Mazda and Angro-Mainyu (Ormuzd and Ahriman). The Iranian optimism has been replaced here by a strong pessimism. This material world is no longer, as in Zoroastrianism, essentially a creation of the good God, but the powers of evil have created it with the aid of some stolen portions of light. This is practically the transference of Iranian dualism to the more Greek antithesis of soul and body, spirit and matter (cf. Irenaeus i. 24 § 5: animae autem eorum solam esse salutem, corpus enim natura corruptibile existit). The fundamental dualism of Basilides is confirmed also by one or two other passages. In the parable of the rich man and Lazarus, Basilides saw the proof of naturam sine radice et sine loco rebus supervenientem (Acta Archelai). According to Clemens, Strom. iv. 12 § 83, &c., Basilides taught that even those who have not sinned in act, even Jesus himself, possess a sinful nature. It is possibly also in connexion with the dualism of his fundamental [v.03 p.0479]views that he taught the transmigration of souls (Origen in Ep. ad Rom. lib. v.; Opp. de la Rue iv. 549; cf. Clemens, Excerpta ex Theodoto, § 28). Isidorus set up celibacy, though in a modified form, as the ideal of the perfect (Clemens, Strom. iii. 1 § 1, &c.) Clemens accuses Basilides of a deification of the Devil (θειάζειν τὸν διάβολον), and regards as his two dogmas that of the Devil and that of the transmigration of souls (Strom. iv. 12 § 85: cf. v. 11 § 75). It is remarkable too that Isidorus held the existence of two souls in man, a good and a bad (Clemens, Strom. ii. 20 113); with which may be compared the teaching of Mani about the two souls, which it is impossible to follow F, Ch. Baur in excluding,[2] and also the teaching of the Pistis Sophia (translated by C. Schmidt, p. 182, &c.). According to Clemens (Strom. ii. 20 § 112), the followers of Basilides spoke of πνεύματά τινα προσηρτημένα τῇ λογικῇ φυχῇ κατά τινα τάραχον καὶ σύγχυσιν ἀρχικήν: that is to say, here also is assumed an original confusion and intermingling. Epiphanius too tells us that the teaching of Basilides had its beginning in the question as to the origin of evil (Haer. xxiv. 6).

BASILIDES, one of the most prominent figures in Gnosticism, was likely living in Alexandria as early as the first decades of the 2nd century. While Eusebius in his Chronicle dates his first emergence to CE 133, he also notes in Hist. Eccl. iv. 7 §§ 6-8 that Agrippa Castor, who lived during Hadrian's reign (117-138), had already written a critique against him, suggesting that his activities might date back to before 138. Basilides wrote a commentary in twenty-four books on "his" gospel, though it remains unknown which gospel that was. Additionally, there are various writings attributed to his son Isidorus, including Περί προσφυγής ψυχής; Explanatory on the prophet Parchor (Parhor); and Ethics. The remaining fragments of these works can be found compiled and discussed in Hilgenfeld's Ketzergeschichte, 207-218. The most significant fragment published by Hilgenfeld (p. 207), extracted from the 13th book of the Exegetica, in the Acta Archelai et Manetis c. 55, only surfaced in complete form later, thanks to L. Traube's publication in the Sitzungsbericht der Münchener Akad., phil. histor. Kl. (1903), pp. 533-549. Irenaeus (Adv. Haer. i. 24 §§ 3-7) provides a brief overview of Basilides' philosophy, possibly derived from Justin's Syntagma. A closely related account appears in the Syntagma by Hippolytus, preserved in Epiphanius, Haer. 24, Philaster, Haer. 32, and Pseudo-Tertullian, Haer. 4. These are supplemented and confirmed by several scattered mentions in the Stromateis by Clemens Alexandrinus. A notably different account, with a strong tendency toward monism, is presented in the so-called Philosophumena by Hippolytus (vii. 20-27; x. 14). The ongoing debate over whether this last account, or the one provided by Irenaeus and the Syntagma of Hippolytus, accurately reflects Basilides' original system has been extensive. (See Hilgenfeld p. 205, note 337.) Recent perspectives lean toward dismissing the Philosophumena; it appears Hippolytus relied primarily on a summary from a Gnostic author who incorporated his own views into the majority of the systems he discussed, alongside older sources. Thus, the Philosophumena cannot be factored in when describing Basilides' teachings (see also H. Stachelin, "Die gnostischen Quellen Hippolyts" in Texte und Untersuchungen, vi. 3; and the article Gnosticism). Furthermore, comparing the remaining fragments of Basilides with the summary of his system in Irenaeus-Hippolytus (Syntagma) shows that the accounts provided by the Church Fathers are extremely unreliable. They overlook the main and most distinctive elements. If we assume, as we must, that the beliefs Basilides advocated as the teachings of the "barbarians" (Acta Archelai c. 55) truly were his own, the fragments reveal him as a definite dualist, and his teachings reflect an intriguing evolution of oriental (Iranian) dualism. This aligns with the information in the Acta Archelai that Basilides, before coming to Alexandria, had publicly proclaimed among the Persians (fuit praedicator apud Persas); plus the mention of his appeal to prophets with eastern names, Barkabbas and Barkoph (Agrippa in Eusebius Hist. Eccl. iv. 7 § 7). Likewise, his son Isidorus interpreted the prophecies of a certain Parchor ( = Barkoph) and referred to the prophecies of Cham[1] (Clemens Alexandrinus, Stromat. vi. 6 § 53). Thus, Basilides posited the existence of two principles that do not derive from one another: Light and Darkness. These have coexisted for a long time without awareness of each other, but once they recognized one another, the Light merely glanced and then withdrew; however, the Darkness, filled with desire for the Light, took control—not of the Light itself, but only of its reflection (species, color). This enabled them to shape this world: unde nec perfectum bonum est in hoc mundo, et quod est, valde est exiguum. This speculation undoubtedly evolves from Iranian cosmology regarding the conflicts between Ahura-Mazda and Angro-Mainyu (Ormuzd and Ahriman). Here, Iranian optimism is supplanted by pronounced pessimism. This material world is no longer, as in Zoroastrianism, fundamentally a creation of the benevolent God; instead, the forces of evil have formed it with stolen fragments of light. This represents a substantial shift of Iranian dualism onto the more Greek opposition of soul and body, spirit and matter (cf. Irenaeus i. 24 § 5: animae autem eorum solam esse salutem, corpus enim natura corruptibile existit). The basic dualism of Basilides is also confirmed in one or two other passages. In the parable of the rich man and Lazarus, Basilides interpreted it as evidence of naturam sine radice et sine loco rebus supervenientem (Acta Archelai). According to Clemens, Strom. iv. 12 § 83, &c., Basilides taught that even those who have not sinned through actions, even Jesus himself, have a sinful nature. It may also relate to the dualism of his fundamental views that he taught the transmigration of souls (Origen in Ep. ad Rom. lib. v.; Opp. de la Rue iv. 549; cf. Clemens, Excerpta ex Theodoto, § 28). Isidorus promoted celibacy, albeit in a modified way, as the ideal for the perfect (Clemens, Strom. iii. 1 § 1, &c.) Clemens accuses Basilides of endorsing the deification of the Devil (χειραγώγηση του διαβόλου) and considers his two main doctrines to be that of the Devil and that of transmigration of souls (Strom. iv. 12 § 85: cf. v. 11 § 75). It is also notable that Isidorus believed in the existence of two souls in humans, one good and one bad (Clemens, Strom. ii. 20 113); which may be compared to Mani's teaching on the two souls, making it difficult to exclude F, Ch. Baur's perspective and also the teachings of the Pistis Sophia (translated by C. Schmidt, p. 182, &c.). According to Clemens (Strom. ii. 20 § 112), the followers of Basilides talked about Some spirits attached to the rational soul due to a certain initial disturbance and confusion.: indicating that they also presumed an original confusion and mixture. Epiphanius mentions that Basilides' teachings originated from the inquiry into the nature of evil (Haer. xxiv. 6).

Now, of this sharply-defined dualism there is scarcely a trace in the system described by the Fathers of the Church. It is therefore only with caution that we can use them to supplement our knowledge of the true Basilides. The doctrine described by them that from the supreme God (the innatus pater) had emanated 365 heavens with their spirits, answers originally to the astronomical conception of the heavens with their 365 daily aspects (Irenaeus i. 24. 7; Trecentorum autem sexaginta quinque caelorum locales positiones distribuunt similiter ut mathematici). When, therefore, the supreme God is called by the name Αβρασαξ or Αβραξας, which contains the numerical value 365, it is worthy of remark that the name of the Persian god Mithras (Μείθρας) also was known in antiquity to contain this numerical value (Jerome in Amos 3; Opp. Vallarsi VI. i. 257). Speculations about the Perso-Hellenistic Mithras appear to have been transferred to the Gnostic Abraxas. Further, if the Pater innatus be surrounded by a series of (from five to seven) Hypostases (according to Irenaeus i. 24. 3; Νοῦς, Λόγος, Φρόνησις, Σοφία, Δύναμις; according to Clemens, Strom. iv. 25 § 164, Δικαιοσύνη and Ἐιρήνη may perhaps be added), we are reminded of the Ameshas-spentas which surround Ahura-Mazda. Finally, in the system of Basilides, the (seven ?) powers from whom this world originates are accepted as the lowest emanations of the supreme God. This conception which is repeated in nearly every Gnostic system, of (seven) world-creating angels, is a specifically oriental speculation. The seven powers which create and rule the world are without doubt the seven planetary deities of the later Babylonian religion. If, in the Gnostic systems, these become daemonic or semi-daemonic forces, this points to the fact that a stronger monotheistic religion (the Iranian) had gained the upper hand over the Babylonian, and had degraded its gods to daemons. The syncretism of the Babylonian and the Persian religion was also the nursing-ground of Gnosticism. When, then, Basilides identified the highest angel of the seven, the creator of the worlds, with the God of the Jews, this is a development of the idea which did not occur until late, possibly first in the specifically Christian circles of the Gnostics. We may note in this connexion that the system of Basilides ascribes the many battles and quarrels in the world to the privileged position given to his people by the God of the Jews.[3]

Now, there’s hardly any sign of this clear dualism in the system described by the Church Fathers. So, we should proceed with caution when using their writings to enhance our understanding of the real Basilides. The teaching they describe—that from the supreme God (the innatus pater) 365 heavens and their spirits emerged—originally corresponds to the astronomical view of the heavens with their 365 daily aspects (Irenaeus i. 24. 7; Trecentorum autem sexaginta quinque caelorum locales positiones distribuunt similiter ut mathematici). Thus, when the supreme God is referred to as Αβρασαξ or Αβραξας, which has the numerical value of 365, it’s significant that the name of the Persian god Mithras (Μείθρας) was also known in ancient times to have this same numerical value (Jerome in Amos 3; Opp. Vallarsi VI. i. 257). Ideas about the Perso-Hellenistic Mithras seem to have been transferred to the Gnostic Abraxas. Moreover, if the Pater innatus is surrounded by a series of Hypostases (ranging from five to seven) (according to Irenaeus i. 24. 3; Mind, Word, Prudence, Wisdom, Power; according to Clemens, Strom. iv. 25 § 164, Justice and Peace may also be included), we are reminded of the Ameshas-spentas that surround Ahura-Mazda. Finally, in Basilides' system, the (seven?) powers from which this world originates are considered the lowest emanations of the supreme God. This idea, which is echoed in nearly every Gnostic system about (seven) world-creating angels, is distinctly eastern thought. The seven powers that create and govern the world are certainly the seven planetary deities of the later Babylonian religion. If, in Gnostic systems, these powers become demonic or semi-demonic, it suggests that a stronger monotheistic religion (the Iranian) had triumphed over the Babylonian one and had reduced its gods to demons. The blending of Babylonian and Persian religions was also the breeding ground for Gnosticism. Therefore, when Basilides identified the highest angel among the seven, who creates the worlds, with the God of the Jews, this represents an idea that probably emerged later, perhaps first within specifically Christian Gnostic circles. In this context, it’s worth noting that Basilides' system attributes the many conflicts and disputes in the world to the special status given to his people by the God of the Jews.[3]

It is at this point that the idea of salvation is introduced into the system. The confusion in the world has meanwhile risen to such a pitch that the supreme God sends his Nous, who is also called Christ, into the world (Irenaeus i. 24. 4). According to Clemens, the Saviour is termed πνεῦμα διακονούμενον (Strom. ii. 8 § 36) or διάκονος (Excerpta ex Theodoto, § 16). It is impossible certainly to determine how Basilides conceived the relation of this Saviour to Jesus of Nazareth. Basilides himself (Strom. iv. 12 § 83) knows of an earthly Jesus and denies the principle of his sinlessness (see above). According to the account given by Irenaeus, the Saviour is said to have appeared only as a phantasm; according to the Excerpta ex Theodoto, 17, the Diakonos descended upon Jesus at His baptism in the form of a dove, for which reason the followers of Basilides celebrated the day of the baptism of Jesus, the day of the ἐπιφανεία. as a high festival (Clemens, Strom. i. 21 § 18). The various attempts at combination probably point to the fact that the purely mythical figure of a god-saviour (Heros) was connected first by Basilides with Jesus of Nazareth. As to what the conception of Basilides was of the completion of the process of redemption, the available sources tell us next to nothing. According to an allusion in Clemens, Strom. ii. 8 § 36, with the mission of the Saviour begins the great separation of the sexes, the fulfilment and the restoration of all things. This agrees with the beginning of the speculation of Basilides. Salvation consists in this, that that which was combined for evil is once more separated.

It is at this point that the concept of salvation is introduced into the system. The chaos in the world has reached such a level that the supreme God sends His Nous, also known as Christ, into the world (Irenaeus i. 24. 4). According to Clemens, the Savior is referred to as spirit serving (Strom. ii. 8 § 36) or deacon (Excerpta ex Theodoto, § 16). It's difficult to determine exactly how Basilides viewed the relationship between this Savior and Jesus of Nazareth. Basilides himself (Strom. iv. 12 § 83) recognizes an earthly Jesus and denies the idea of His sinlessness (see above). According to Irenaeus, the Savior is said to have appeared only as a phantasm; in the Excerpta ex Theodoto, 17, the Diakonos is said to have descended upon Jesus at His baptism in the form of a dove, which is why Basilides' followers celebrated the day of Jesus' baptism, the day of the epiphany, as a major festival (Clemens, Strom. i. 21 § 18). The various attempts at synthesis likely indicate that the purely mythical figure of a god-savior (Heros) was first associated by Basilides with Jesus of Nazareth. As for Basilides' understanding of how the redemption process is completed, the existing sources provide little information. According to a reference in Clemens, Strom. ii. 8 § 36, the mission of the Savior marks the beginning of a significant separation of the sexes, the fulfillment, and the restoration of all things. This aligns with the beginning of Basilides' speculative ideas. Salvation consists of separating that which was combined for evil.

Among the later followers of Basilides, actual magic played a determining part. They hand down the names of the rulers of the several heavens as a weighty secret. This was a result of the belief, that whoever knew the names of these rulers would after death pass through all the heavens to the supreme God. In accordance with this, Christ also, in the opinion of these followers of Basilides, was in the possession of a mystic name (Caulacau = קַו לָקַו Jes. xxviii. 10) by the power of which he had descended through all the heavens to earth, and had then again ascended to the Father. Redemption, accordingly, could be conceived as simply the revelation of mystic names. In this connexion the name Abraxas and the Abraxas gems must be remembered. Whether Basilides himself had already given this magic tendency to Gnosticism cannot be decided.

Among the later followers of Basilides, actual magic played a key role. They passed down the names of the rulers of the various heavens as a significant secret. This stemmed from the belief that whoever knew these rulers' names would, after death, pass through all the heavens to reach the supreme God. Following this, Christ, according to these followers of Basilides, possessed a mystical name (Caulacau = קו לקו Jes. xxviii. 10), through which he descended through all the heavens to earth, and then ascended back to the Father. Thus, redemption could be seen as simply the revelation of mystical names. In this context, the name Abraxas and the Abraxas gems are important to mention. It's unclear whether Basilides himself introduced this magical element into Gnosticism.

Basilides, then, represents that form of Gnosticism that is closest to Persian dualism in its final form. His doctrine is most closely related to that of Satornil (Saturninus). From most of the other Gnostic sects, with the exception perhaps of the Jewish-Christian Gnosticism, he is distinguished by the fact that with him the figure of the fallen female god (Sophia Achamoth), and, in general, the idea of a fall within the godhead is entirely wanting. So far as we can see, on the other hand, Basilides appears actually to represent a further development of Iranian dualism, which later produced the religious system of Mani.

Basilides represents a form of Gnosticism that is closest to Persian dualism in its final form. His beliefs are most closely related to those of Satornil (Saturninus). He stands out from most other Gnostic sects, except maybe for Jewish-Christian Gnosticism, in that he lacks the figure of the fallen female god (Sophia Achamoth) and the overall concept of a fall within the godhead. However, it seems that Basilides actually represents an advance in Iranian dualism, which eventually led to the religious system of Mani.

Accounts of the teaching of Basilides are to be found in all the more complete works on Gnosticism (see bibliography to the article Gnosticism). The original sources are best reproduced in Hilgenfeld, Ketzergeschichte des Urchristentums (1884), pp. 195-230. See also Krüger, article "Basilides," in Herzog-Hauck, Realencyklopadie, ed. 3.

Accounts of the teachings of Basilides can be found in all the more comprehensive works on Gnosticism (refer to the bibliography in the article Gnosticism). The original sources are best reproduced in Hilgenfeld's Ketzergeschichte des Urchristentums (1884), pages 195-230. Also, check out Krüger's article "Basilides" in Herzog-Hauck's Realencyklopadie, 3rd edition.

(W. Bo.)

(W. Bo.)

[1] = Nimrod = Zoroaster, cf. Pseudo-Clement, Homil. ix. 3; Recogn. iv. 27.

[1] = Nimrod = Zoroaster, see Pseudo-Clement, Homil. ix. 3; Recogn. iv. 27.

[2] The materials are in Baur, Das manichäische Religionssystem (1831), p. 162, &c.

[2] The materials are in Baur, The Manichaean Religious System (1831), p. 162, &c.

[3] Whether the myth of the creation of the first man by the angels, which recurs in many Gnostic systems, found a place also in the system of Basilides, cannot be determined with any certainty. Philastrius, however, says: hominem autem ab angelis factum asserit, while according to Epiphanus xxiv. 2, men are created by the God of the Jews.

[3] It's uncertain whether the myth about angels creating the first man, which appears in many Gnostic systems, was also part of Basilides' system. However, Philastrius states: he asserts that man was made by angels, while according to Epiphanus xxiv. 2, men are created by the God of the Jews.

BASILISK (the Βασιλίσκος of the Greeks, and Tsepha (cockatrice) of the Hebrews), a name given by the ancients to a horrid monster of their own imagination, to which they attributed the most malignant powers and an equally fiendish appearance. The term is now applied, owing to a certain fanciful resemblance, to a genus of lizards belonging to the family Iguanidae, the species of which are characterized by the presence, in the males, of an erectile crest on the head, and a still higher, likewise erectile crest—beset with scales—on the back, and another on the long tail. Basiliscus americanus reaches the length of one yard; its colour is green and brown, with dark crossbars, while the crest is reddish. This beautiful, strictly herbivorous creature is rather common amidst the luxuriant vegetation on the banks of rivers and streams of the Atlantic hot lands of Mexico and Guatemala. The lizards lie upon the branches of trees overhanging the water, into which they plunge at the slightest alarm. Then they propel themselves by rapid strokes of the hind limbs, beating the water in a semi-erect position and letting the long rudder-like tail drag behind. They are universally known as pasa-rios, i.e. ferrymen.

BASILISK (the Basilisk of the Greeks, and Tsepha (cockatrice) of the Hebrews) is a name given by ancient people to a terrible monster from their imagination, which they believed had extremely evil powers and a hideously frightening appearance. Today, the term is used, due to a certain fanciful resemblance, to refer to a group of lizards in the family Iguanidae. These lizards are known for having an erectile crest on the head in males, as well as a higher erectile crest covered in scales on their backs, and another on their long tails. Basiliscus americanus can grow up to one yard long; it has a green and brown color with dark crossbars, and a reddish crest. This beautiful, strictly herbivorous creature is quite common among the lush vegetation along the banks of rivers and streams in the warm regions of Mexico and Guatemala. The lizards rest on branches of trees that hang over the water, diving in at the slightest disturbance. They then swim by rapidly moving their hind limbs, splashing the water while holding their bodies semi-upright, letting their long tail drag behind them. They are commonly known as pasa-rios, i.e. ferrymen.

BASIM, a town of India, in the Akola district, Berar, 52 m. S.S.E. from Akola station of the Great Indian Peninsula railway. Pop. (1901) 13,823. Until 1905 it was the headquarters of the district of Basim, which had an area of 2949 sq. m.; but in that [v.03 p.0480]year the district was abolished, its component taluks being divided between the districts of Akola and Yeotmal. Its western portion, the Basim taluk, consists of a fertile tableland, about 1000 ft. above sea-level, sloping down westward and southward to the rich valley of the Penganga; its eastern portion, the taluks of Mangrul and Pasud, mainly of a succession of low hills covered with poor grass. In the Pasud taluk, however, there are wide stretches of woodland, while some of the peaks rise to a height of 2000 ft., the scenery (especially during the rains) being very beautiful. The climate of the locality is better than that of the other districts of Berar; the hot wind which blows during the day in the summer months being succeeded at night by a cool breeze. The principal crops are millet, wheat, other food grains, pulse, oilseeds and cotton; there is some manufacture of cotton-cloth and blankets, and there are ginning factories in the town. In 1901 the population was 353,410, showing a decrease of 11% in the decade, due to the famine of 1899-1900, which was severely felt in the district.

BASIM, a town in India, located in the Akola district of Berar, is 52 miles S.S.E. from the Akola station of the Great Indian Peninsula railway. Population (1901) was 13,823. Until 1905, it served as the headquarters for the Basim district, which had an area of 2,949 square miles; however, that year the district was dissolved, with its taluks divided between the Akola and Yeotmal districts. The western part, the Basim taluk, consists of fertile tableland situated about 1,000 feet above sea level, sloping down to the west and south toward the rich Penganga valley. The eastern part includes the taluks of Mangrul and Pasud, characterized by a series of low hills with sparse grass. Nonetheless, in the Pasud taluk, there are large areas of woodland, and some peaks reach heights of 2,000 feet, creating very beautiful scenery, especially during the rainy season. The climate is more favorable than in other Berar districts; the hot winds of summer are followed at night by a cool breeze. The main crops are millet, wheat, other grains, pulses, oilseeds, and cotton. There is some production of cotton fabric and blankets, as well as ginning factories in the town. In 1901, the population was 353,410, reflecting an 11% decrease over the decade, largely due to the severe famine of 1899-1900 that impacted the district hard.

BASIN, THOMAS (1412-1491), bishop of Lisieux and historian, was born probably at Caudebec in Normandy, but owing to the devastation caused by the Hundred Years' War, his childhood was mainly spent in moving from one place to another. In 1424 he went to the university of Paris, where he became a master of arts in 1429, and afterwards studied law at Louvain and Pavia. He attended the council of Ferrara, and was soon made canon of the church at Rouen, professor of canon law in the new university of Caen and vicar-general for the bishop of Bayeux. In 1447 he became bishop of Lisieux. He was much involved in the wars between the English and French and was employed by Charles VII. of France, and by his successor Louis XI., at whose request Basin drew up a memorandum setting forth the misery of the people and suggesting measures for alleviating their condition. In 1464 the bishop joined the league of the Public Weal, and fell into disfavour with the king, who seized the temporalities of his see. After exile in various places Basin proceeded to Rome and renounced his bishopric. At this time (1474) Pope Sixtus IV. bestowed upon him the title of archbishop of Caesarea. Occupied with his writings Basin then passed some years at Trier, and afterwards transferred his residence to Utrecht, where he died on the 3rd of December 1491. He was buried in the church of St John, Utrecht.

BASIN, THOMAS (1412-1491), bishop of Lisieux and historian, was likely born in Caudebec, Normandy, but due to the destruction from the Hundred Years' War, he spent most of his childhood moving around. In 1424, he started at the University of Paris, earning his master’s degree in 1429, and later studied law at Louvain and Pavia. He participated in the council of Ferrara and quickly became a canon of the church in Rouen, a professor of canon law at the new University of Caen, and vicar-general for the bishop of Bayeux. In 1447, he became the bishop of Lisieux. He was heavily involved in the conflicts between the English and French, serving both Charles VII of France and his successor Louis XI, who asked Basin to draft a memo outlining the suffering of the people and suggesting ways to improve their situation. In 1464, the bishop joined the League of the Public Weal and fell out of favor with the king, who took control of his bishopric's assets. After being exiled in various places, Basin went to Rome and renounced his bishopric. At that time (1474), Pope Sixtus IV gave him the title of archbishop of Caesarea. Focused on his writings, Basin spent several years in Trier before moving to Utrecht, where he died on December 3, 1491. He was buried in the church of St. John in Utrecht.

Basin's principal work is his Historiae de rebus a Carolo VII. et Ludovico XI. Francorum regibus eorumque in tempore in Gallia gestis. This is of considerable historical value, but is marred to some extent by the author's dislike for Louis XI. At one time it was regarded as the work of a priest of Liége, named Amelgard, but it is now practically certain that Basin was the writer. He also wrote a suggestion for reform in the administration of justice entitled Libellus de optimo ordine forenses lites audiendi et deferendi; an Apologia, written to answer the charges brought against him by Louis XI; a Breviloquium, or allegorical account of his own misfortunes; a Peregrinatio; a defence of Joan of Arc entitled Opinio et consilium super processu et condemnatione Johanne, dicte Puelle, and other miscellaneous writings. He wrote in French, Advis de Monseigneur de Lysieux au roi (Paris, 1677).

Basin's main work is his Historiae de rebus a Carolo VII. et Ludovico XI. Francorum regibus eorumque in tempore in Gallia gestis. This piece holds significant historical value, but it's somewhat biased due to the author's dislike for Louis XI. It was once thought to be written by a priest from Liège named Amelgard, but it's now almost certain that Basin was the author. He also wrote a proposal for reform in the justice system called Libellus de optimo ordine forenses lites audiendi et deferendi; an Apologia, which was his response to the accusations made against him by Louis XI; a Breviloquium, an allegorical account of his own misfortunes; a Peregrinatio; a defense of Joan of Arc titled Opinio et consilium super processu et condemnatione Johanne, dicte Puelle, along with several other miscellaneous writings. He wrote in French, Advis de Monseigneur de Lysieux au roi (Paris, 1677).

See the edition of the Historiae, by J. E. J. Quicherat (Paris, 1855-1859); also G. du F. de Beaucourt, Charles VII et Louis XI d'après Thomas Basin (Paris, 1858).

See the edition of the Historiae, by J. E. J. Quicherat (Paris, 1855-1859); also G. du F. de Beaucourt, Charles VII et Louis XI d'après Thomas Basin (Paris, 1858).

BASIN, or Bason (the older form bacin is found in many of the Romanic languages, from the Late Lat. baccinus or bacchinus, probably derived from bacca, a bowl), a round vessel for holding liquids. Hence the term has various technical uses, as of a dock constructed with flood-gates in a tidal-river, or of a widening in a canal for unloading barges; also, in physical geography, of the drainage area of a river and its tributaries.

BASIN, or Basin (the older form bacin is found in many Romance languages, derived from Late Latin baccinus or bacchinus, likely from bacca, meaning a bowl), is a round container for holding liquids. Therefore, the term has several technical applications, such as a dock designed with floodgates in a tidal river, or a widened area in a canal for unloading barges; it also refers, in physical geography, to the drainage area of a river and its tributaries.

In geology, "basin" is equivalent to a broad shallow syncline, i.e. it is a structure proper to the bed rock of the district covered by the term; it must not be confused with the physiographic river basin, although it occasionally happens that the two coincide to some extent. Some of the better known geological basins in England are, the London basin, a shallow trough or syncline of Tertiary, Cretaceous and Jurassic rocks; the Hampshire basin, of similar formations; and the numerous coal basins, e.g. the S. Wales coalfield, the Forest of Dean, N. Staffordshire coalfield, &c. The Paris basin is made of strata similar to those in the London and Hampshire basins. Strictly speaking, a structural basin is formed of rock beds which exhibit a centroclinal dip; an elongated narrow syncline or trough is not a basin. "Rock-basins" are comparatively small, steep-sided depressions that have been scooped out of the solid rock in mountainous regions, mainly through the agency of glaciers (see Cirque). Lakes sometimes occupy basins that have been caused by the removal in solution of some of the more soluble constituents (rock salt, &c.) in the underlying strata; occasionally lake basins have been formed directly by crustal movements.

In geology, a "basin" refers to a broad, shallow syncline, meaning it is a structure specific to the bedrock of the area covered by this term. It shouldn't be confused with a physiographic river basin, even though the two sometimes overlap to some degree. Some of the well-known geological basins in England include the London basin, which is a shallow trough or syncline of Tertiary, Cretaceous, and Jurassic rocks; the Hampshire basin, with similar formations; and several coal basins, such as the South Wales coalfield, the Forest of Dean, North Staffordshire coalfield, etc. The Paris basin is made up of strata similar to those in the London and Hampshire basins. Strictly speaking, a structural basin consists of rock beds that show a centroclinal dip; a long, narrow syncline or trough is not considered a basin. "Rock-basins" are relatively small, steep-sided depressions that have been carved out of solid rock in mountainous areas, primarily through glaciers (see Circus). Lakes sometimes occupy basins that were created by the dissolution of some of the more soluble components (like rock salt, etc.) in the underlying strata; at times, lake basins have been formed directly by crustal movements.

BASINET (a diminutive of "basin"), a form of helmet or headpiece. The original small basinet was a light open cap, with a peaked crown. This was used alternately to, and even in conjunction with, the large heavy heaume. But in the latter half of the 13th century the basinet was developed into a complete war head-dress and replaced the heaume. In this form it was larger and heavier, had a vizor (though not always a pivoted vizor like that of the later armet), and was connected with the gorget by a "camail" or mail hood, the head and neck thus being entirely covered. It is always to be recognized by its peaked crown. The word is spelt in various forms, "bassinet," "bascinet," "bacinet," or "basnet." The form "bassinet" is used for the hooded wicker cradle or perambulator for babies.

BASINET (a small version of "basin"), is a type of helmet or headpiece. The original small basinet was a lightweight open cap with a pointed crown. It was used occasionally alongside, and even together with, the large heavy heaume. However, in the latter half of the 13th century, the basinet evolved into a full war helmet and replaced the heaume. In this form, it became larger and heavier, featured a visor (although not always a pivoting visor like that of the later armet), and was connected to the gorget by a "camail" or mail hood, fully covering the head and neck. It is always recognizable by its pointed crown. The word is spelled in various ways, including "bassinet," "bascinet," "bacinet," or "basnet." The form "bassinet" is also used to refer to the hooded wicker cradle or stroller for babies.

BASINGSTOKE, a market-town and municipal borough of Hampshire, England, 48 m. W.S.W. from London by the London & South-Western railway; served also by a branch of the Great Western railway. Pop. (1901) 9793. The church of St Michael and All Angels is a fine specimen of a late Perpendicular building (principally of the time of Henry VIII.). The chapel of the Holy Ghost is a picturesque ruin, standing in an ancient cemetery, built for the use of the local gild of the Holy Ghost which was founded in 1525, but flourished for less than a century. Close to the neighbouring village of Old Basing are remains of Basing House, remarkable as the scene of the stubborn opposition of John, fifth marquess of Winchester, to Cromwell, by whom it was taken after a protracted siege in 1645. A castle occupied its site from Norman times. Numerous prehistoric relics have been discovered in the district, and a large circular encampment is seen at Winklebury Hill. Basingstoke has considerable agricultural trade, and brewing, and the manufacture of agricultural implements, and of clothing, are carried on. The Basingstoke canal, which connects the town with the river Wey and so with the Thames, was opened about 1794, but lost its trade owing to railway competition. It was offered for sale by auction unsuccessfully in 1904, but was bought in 1905. The municipal borough is under a mayor, four aldermen and twelve councillors. Area, 4195 acres.

BASINGSTOKE, a market town and municipal borough in Hampshire, England, is located 48 miles W.S.W. from London by the London & South-Western railway; it is also served by a branch of the Great Western railway. The population was 9,793 in 1901. The church of St Michael and All Angels is an impressive example of late Perpendicular architecture, mainly from the era of Henry VIII. The chapel of the Holy Ghost is a charming ruin located in an ancient cemetery, originally built for the local guild of the Holy Ghost, which was established in 1525 but thrived for less than a century. Near the neighboring village of Old Basing, you can find the remains of Basing House, notable for the fierce resistance of John, the fifth marquess of Winchester, against Cromwell, who captured it after a lengthy siege in 1645. A castle has stood on this site since Norman times. Many prehistoric artifacts have been found in the area, and a large circular encampment can be seen at Winklebury Hill. Basingstoke has a significant agricultural trade, and industries such as brewing and the manufacturing of agricultural tools and clothing are active here. The Basingstoke canal, which links the town to the river Wey and, consequently, to the Thames, was opened around 1794 but lost business due to competition from railways. It was put up for auction unsuccessfully in 1904 but was purchased in 1905. The municipal borough has a mayor, four aldermen, and twelve councillors. The area covers 4,195 acres.

Basingstoke is a town of great antiquity, and excavations have brought to light undoubted traces of Roman occupation. The first recorded historical event relating to the town is a victory won here by Æthelred and Alfred over the Danes in 871. According to the Domesday survey it had always been a royal manor, and comprised three mills and a market. A charter from Henry III. in 1256 granted to the men of Basingstoke the manor and hundred of that name and certain other privileges, which were confirmed by Edward III., Henry V. and Henry VI. As compensation for loss sustained by a serious fire, Richard II. in 1392 granted to the men of Basingstoke the rights of a corporation and a common seal. A charter from James I. dated 1622 instituted two bailiffs, fourteen capital burgesses, four justices of the peace, a high steward and under steward, two serjeants-at-mace and a court of record. Charles I. in 1641 changed the corporation to a mayor, seven aldermen and seven burgesses. Basingstoke returned two members to parliament in 1295, 1302 and 1306, but no writs are extant after this date. In 1202-1203 the market day was changed from Sunday to Monday, but in 1214 was transferred to Wednesday, and has not since been [v.03 p.0481]changed. Henry VI. granted a fair at Whitsun to be held near the chapel of the Holy Ghost. The charter from James I. confirmed another fair at the feast of St Michael the Archangel, and that of Charles I. granted two fairs on Basingstoke Down at Easter and on the 10th and 11th of September. The wool trade flourished in Basingstoke at an early date, but later appears to have declined, and in 1631 the clothiers of Basingstoke were complaining of the loss of trade and consequent distress.

Basingstoke is an ancient town, and excavations have revealed clear evidence of Roman settlement. The first recorded historical event related to the town is a victory achieved by Æthelred and Alfred over the Danes in 871. According to the Domesday survey, it has always been a royal manor, consisting of three mills and a market. A charter from Henry III in 1256 granted the men of Basingstoke the manor and hundred of that name along with certain other privileges, which were confirmed by Edward III, Henry V, and Henry VI. In 1392, to compensate for losses caused by a severe fire, Richard II granted the men of Basingstoke the rights of a corporation and a common seal. A charter from James I in 1622 established two bailiffs, fourteen capital burgesses, four justices of the peace, a high steward and under steward, two serjeants-at-mace, and a court of record. Charles I changed the corporation in 1641 to include a mayor, seven aldermen, and seven burgesses. Basingstoke sent two members to parliament in 1295, 1302, and 1306, but no records exist after this date. In 1202-1203, the market day was moved from Sunday to Monday, and in 1214 it was shifted to Wednesday, where it has remained since. Henry VI granted a fair at Whitsun to be held near the chapel of the Holy Ghost. The charter from James I confirmed another fair at the feast of St Michael the Archangel, and Charles I granted two fairs on Basingstoke Down at Easter and on September 10th and 11th. The wool trade thrived in Basingstoke early on but later seemed to decline, and in 1631, the clothiers of Basingstoke were complaining about the loss of trade and the resulting hardship.

See Victoria County History—Hants; F. G. Baigent and J. E. Millard, History of Basingstoke (Basingstoke, 1889).

See Victoria County History—Hants; F. G. Baigent and J. E. Millard, History of Basingstoke (Basingstoke, 1889).

BASIN-STAND, a piece of furniture consisting of a small stand, usually supported on three legs, and most commonly made of mahogany or rosewood, for holding a wash-hand basin. The smaller varieties were used for rose-water ablutions, or for the operation of hair-powdering. The larger ones, which possessed sockets for soap-dishes, were the predecessors of the ample modern wash-hand stand. Both varieties, often of very elegant form, were in extensive use throughout a large part of the 18th century.

BASIN-STAND, a piece of furniture that consists of a small stand, typically supported on three legs, and most often made of mahogany or rosewood, designed to hold a washbasin. The smaller versions were used for rose-water rituals or for applying hair powder. The larger ones, which had spaces for soap dishes, were the predecessors of today's larger washbasins. Both types, often very elegantly designed, were widely used during much of the 18th century.

BASKERVILLE, JOHN (1706-1775), English printer, was born at Wolverley in Worcestershire on the 28th of January 1706. About 1726 he became a writing master at Birmingham, and he seems to have had a great talent for calligraphy and for cutting inscriptions in stone. While at Birmingham he made some important improvements in the process of japanning, and gained a considerable fortune. About the year 1750 he began to make experiments in type-founding, producing types much superior in distinctness and elegance to any that had hitherto been employed. He set up a printing-house, and in 1757 published his first work, a Virgil in royal quarto, followed, in 1758, by his famous edition of Milton. In that year he was appointed printer to the university of Cambridge, and undertook editions of the Bible and the Book of Common Prayer. The Horace, published in 1762, is distinguished even among the productions of the Baskerville press for its correctness and for the beauty of the paper and type. A second Horace appeared in 1770 in quarto, and its success encouraged Baskerville to publish a series of quarto editions of Latin authors, which included Catullus, Tibullus, Propertius, Lucretius, Terence, Sallust and Florus. This list of books issued by Baskerville from his press lends some irony to the allegation that he was a person of no education. These books are admirable specimens of typography; and Baskerville is deservedly ranked among the foremost of those who have advanced the art of printing. His contemporaries asserted that his books owed more to the quality of the paper and ink than to the type itself, but the difficulty in obtaining specimens from the Baskerville press shows the estimation in which they are now held. His wife, Sarah Baskerville, carried on the business for some time after his death, which took place on the 8th of January 1775.

BASKERVILLE, JOHN (1706-1775), English printer, was born in Wolverley, Worcestershire on January 28, 1706. Around 1726, he became a writing teacher in Birmingham and showed a strong talent for calligraphy and carving inscriptions in stone. While in Birmingham, he made significant improvements in the process of japanning and built a considerable fortune. Around 1750, he started experimenting with type-founding, creating types that were much clearer and more elegant than any previously used. He established a printing house, and in 1757 published his first work, a Virgil in royal quarto, followed by his renowned edition of Milton in 1758. That same year, he was named printer to the University of Cambridge and took on editions of the Bible and the Book of Common Prayer. The Horace, published in 1762, is notable even among Baskerville's works for its accuracy and the beauty of the paper and type. A second Horace was released in 1770 in quarto, and its success motivated Baskerville to publish a series of quarto editions of Latin authors, including Catullus, Tibullus, Propertius, Lucretius, Terence, Sallust, and Florus. This list of titles from Baskerville's press ironically counters the claim that he was uneducated. These books are excellent examples of typography, and Baskerville is justly recognized among the leaders in advancing the art of printing. His contemporaries claimed that his books were more about the quality of the paper and ink than the type itself, but the difficulty in finding copies from the Baskerville press highlights their valued status today. His wife, Sarah Baskerville, continued the business for a while after his death on January 8, 1775.

BASKET, a vessel made of twigs, cane or rushes, as well as of a variety of other materials, interwoven together, and used for holding, protecting or carrying any commodity. The process of interweaving twigs, rushes or leaves, is practised among the rudest nations of the world; and as it is one of the most universal of arts, so also does it rank among the most ancient industries, being probably the origin of all the textile arts of the world. Decorative designs in old ceramic ware are derived from the marks left by the basket mould used before the invention of the potter's wheel, and in the willow pattern on old china, and the basket capitals or mouldings of Byzantine architecture, the influence of the basketmaker's art is clearly traceable. Essentially a primitive craft, its relative importance is in inverse ratio to the industrial development of a people.

BASKET, a container made from twigs, reeds, or rushes, as well as various other materials, woven together, and used for holding, protecting, or transporting goods. The technique of weaving twigs, rushes, or leaves is practiced by some of the most basic societies in the world; since it is one of the most widespread crafts, it also ranks among the oldest industries, likely being the foundation of all textile arts globally. Decorative patterns in ancient pottery come from the impressions left by the basket molds used before the potter's wheel was invented, and in the willow pattern on vintage china, as well as in the basket capitals or moldings of Byzantine architecture, the impact of basket weaving is clearly evident. Essentially a simple craft, its significance decreases as a society becomes more industrialized.

The word "basket" has been generally identified with the Latin bascauda, as in Martial (xiv. 99):—

The word "basket" is commonly linked to the Latin bascauda, as noted in Martial (xiv. 99):—

"Barbara de pictis veni bascauda Britannis:

"Barbara from the painted people comes with a cap from Britain:"

Sed me iam mavult dicere Roma suam."

Sed me iam mavult dicere Roma suam."

But its etymology is unknown, and the New English Dictionary states that there is no evidence to connect basket with bascauda, which denotes rather a tub, tray or brazen vessel.

But its origin is unknown, and the New English Dictionary states that there’s no proof to link basket with bascauda, which actually refers to a tub, tray, or metal container.

Among many uncivilized tribes, baskets of a superior order are made and applied to various useful purposes. The North American Indians prepare strong water-tight Wattape baskets from the roots of a species of abies, and these they frequently adorn with very pretty patterns made from the dyed quills of their native porcupine, Erethizon dorsatum. Wealthy Americans have formed collections of the beautiful ware treasured as heirlooms in Indian families, and large prices have been paid for baskets made by the few squaws who have inherited the traditions and practice of the art, as much as £300 having been given for one specimen. It has been computed that baskets to the value of £1,000,000 were recently drawn from California and Arizona within two years. The Indians of South America weave baskets equally useful from the fronds of the Carnahuba and other palms. The Kaffirs and Hottentots of South Africa are similarly skilful in using the Ilala reed and the roots of plants; while the Abyssinians and the tribes of Central Africa display great adroitness in the art of basket-weaving.

Among many uncivilized tribes, baskets of a higher quality are made and used for various practical purposes. The North American Indians create strong, water-tight Wattape baskets from the roots of a type of abies, which they often decorate with beautiful patterns made from the dyed quills of the local porcupine, Erethizon dorsatum. Wealthy Americans have collected these beautiful baskets, which are treasured as heirlooms in Indian families, and large amounts have been paid for baskets made by the few women who have kept the traditions and skills of the craft alive, with as much as £300 being paid for a single piece. It has been estimated that baskets worth £1,000,000 were recently taken from California and Arizona in just two years. The Indians of South America also weave baskets that are just as useful from the fronds of the Carnahuba and other palms. The Kaffirs and Hottentots of South Africa are similarly skilled in using the Ilala reed and the roots of plants, while the Abyssinians and tribes of Central Africa show great skill in the art of basket-weaving.

Basket-making, however, has by no means been confined to the fabrication of those simple and useful utensils from which its name is derived. Of old, the shields of soldiers were fashioned of wicker-work, either plain or covered with hides. Xenophon, in his story of the Thirty Tyrants at Athens, relates that the exiled Greeks who had seized on the Peiraeus made themselves shields of whitened osiers; and similar weapons of defence are still constructed by modern savages. The huts of the earliest settlers in Rome and in western Europe generally were made of osier work plastered with clay. Some interesting remains of British dwellings of this nature found near Lewes in 1877 were described by Major-General H. L. F. Pitt-Rivers in Archaeologia, vol. xlvi. pp. 456-458. Boats of the same material, covered with the skins of animals, attracted the notice of the Romans in Britain; they seem to have been of the ordinary boat-shape. The basketwork boats mentioned by Herodotus as being used on the Tigris and Euphrates were round and covered with bitumen. Boats of this shape are still used on these rivers, and boats of analogous construction are employed in crossing the rivers of India, in which the current is not rapid. Nor have methods of making much changed. The strokes employed in the construction of basket-work found in Etruscan tombs and now exhibited in the Museo Etrusco at Florence, and in similar articles discovered in Egyptian tombs, are the same as those used by the English basket-maker to-day. General Pitt-Rivers, on comparing the remains excavated near Lewes with a modern hamper in his possession, found the method to be identical.

Basket-making, however, has not just been limited to creating those simple and useful items that gave it its name. In the past, soldiers' shields were made from wickerwork, either plain or covered with hides. Xenophon, in his account of the Thirty Tyrants at Athens, mentions that the exiled Greeks who took over Peiraeus made shields from whitened willow branches. Similar types of defensive weapons are still made by some modern tribes. The earliest settlers in Rome and western Europe generally built their huts from wickerwork plastered with clay. Some interesting remains of British homes of this kind found near Lewes in 1877 were described by Major-General H. L. F. Pitt-Rivers in Archaeologia, vol. xlvi. pp. 456-458. Boats made from the same material, covered with animal skins, caught the attention of the Romans in Britain; they appeared to be in the usual boat shape. The basketwork boats noted by Herodotus, used on the Tigris and Euphrates, were round and coated with bitumen. Boats of this shape are still used on those rivers, and similarly constructed boats are used to cross the slower rivers in India. The methods of making them haven't changed much. The techniques seen in the basket-work from Etruscan tombs, displayed in the Museo Etrusco in Florence, and in similar items found in Egyptian tombs are the same as those used by today's English basket-makers. General Pitt-Rivers, when comparing the remains found near Lewes with a modern hamper he owned, found their construction methods to be identical.

Since about the middle of the 19th century the character of basket-work in England has been greatly modified. The old English cradle, reticule, and other small domestic wares, have been driven out of the market by cheap goods made on the continent of Europe, and the coarse brown osier packing and hampers have been largely superseded by rough casks and cases made from cheap imported timber. This loss has, however, been more than counterbalanced by the production of work of a higher class, such as finely made chairs, tables, lounges and other articles of furniture; luncheon and tea-baskets and similar requisites of travel. In addition to the foregoing the chief categories of English manufacture are: vegetable and fruit baskets, transit and travelling hampers, laundry and linen baskets, partition baskets for wine, and protective wicker cases for fragile ware such as glass carboys, stone and other bottles. Wicker shields or cases made from cane pith, for the protection of shells, have been introduced by the English military authorities. Some evidence of the above-mentioned developments is afforded by a comparison of the wages lists of the London Union of Journeymen Basketmakers issued in 1865 and in 1896. The former consists of 87 printed pages; the latter of 144 pages, and these more closely set.

Since around the middle of the 19th century, the style of basket-making in England has changed significantly. Traditional items like the old English cradle, reticule, and other small household goods have been pushed out of the market by inexpensive products made in continental Europe. The rough brown willow packing and hampers have largely been replaced by basic casks and cases made from cheap imported wood. However, this loss has been more than made up for by the creation of higher-quality items, such as beautifully crafted chairs, tables, lounges, and other furniture, as well as lunch and tea baskets and other travel essentials. Additionally, the main types of English-made products include vegetable and fruit baskets, transit and travel hampers, laundry and linen baskets, partition baskets for wine, and protective wicker cases for fragile items like glass carboys and stone bottles. Wicker shields or cases made from cane pith for protecting shells have also been introduced by the British military. Evidence of these developments can be seen by comparing the wage lists of the London Union of Journeymen Basketmakers from 1865 and 1896. The first list has 87 printed pages, while the latter has 144 pages, and these are more densely printed.

No machinery is used in basket-making. A considerable training and natural aptitude go to form the expert workman, for the ultimate perfection of shape and beauty of texture depend upon the more or less perfect conception of form in the [v.03 p.0482]craftsman's mind and on his power to impress it on a recalcitrant material. In England at least, he rarely uses a mould; every stroke made has a permanent effect on the symmetry of the whole work and no subsequent pressure will alter it. Wages in London vary from 25s. to 50s. per week according to aptitude. The Basketmakers' Company is one of the oldest craft gilds of the city of London and still exists.

No machinery is used in basket-making. It takes considerable training and a natural talent to become an expert, as the ultimate perfection of shape and beauty of texture relies on the craftsman's understanding of form and his ability to shape a difficult material. In England, he rarely uses a mold; every stroke has a lasting effect on the symmetry of the entire piece, and no later pressure can change it. Wages in London range from £1.25 to £2.50 per week, depending on skill. The Basketmakers' Company is one of the oldest craft guilds in the city of London and still exists.

Employment is given by the London Association for the Welfare of the Blind to a number of partially or wholly blind workpeople, who are engaged in the making of some of the coarser kinds of baskets; but the work, which bears obvious traces of its origin, is not commercially remunerative, and the association depends for partial support on the contributions of the charitable, and on supplementary sales of fine or fancy work produced under ordinary conditions and largely imported. Similar associations exist in some English provincial towns, in Edinburgh, in Dublin and Belfast, and in certain European cities.

Employment is provided by the London Association for the Welfare of the Blind for several partially or fully blind workers, who are involved in making some of the rougher types of baskets. However, the work, which clearly shows its origins, doesn't earn enough money commercially, so the association relies on donations from charitable individuals and on extra sales of higher quality or decorative items made under regular conditions and mostly imported. Similar organizations can be found in some provincial towns in England, as well as in Edinburgh, Dublin, Belfast, and various European cities.

The materials which are actually employed in the construction of basket-work are numerous and varied, but it is from certain species of willow that the largest supply of basket-making materials is produced. Willows for basket-work are extensively grown on the continent of Europe, whence large quantities are exported to Great Britain and the United States; but no rods surpass those of English growth for their tough and leathery texture, and the finest of basket-making willows are now cultivated in England—in Leicestershire, Nottinghamshire and the valleys of the Thames and the Trent. In the early part of the 19th century, considerable attention was given in Britain to the cultivation of willows suitable for basket-making, and the industry was first stimulated by premiums offered by the Society of Arts. Mr William Scaling of Basford, Notts, was a most successful grower and published some admirable pamphlets on the cultivation of willows. The most extensive English willow plantation or salicetum (Lat. salix, willow) of the present day is that planted by Mr W. P. Ellmore at Thurmaston near Leicester, and consists of about 100 acres of the finest qualities. Mr Ellmore, a practical basket-maker, successfully introduced some valuable continental varieties (see Osier).

The materials used for making baskets are numerous and varied, but most of the basket-making supplies come from specific types of willow. Willows for basket-making are widely grown in mainland Europe, with large quantities exported to Great Britain and the United States; however, no rods compare to those grown in England due to their tough and leathery texture. The best basket-making willows are now cultivated in England—in Leicestershire, Nottinghamshire, and the valleys of the Thames and the Trent. In the early 19th century, significant attention was given in Britain to growing willows suitable for basket-making, and the industry was initially boosted by premiums offered by the Society of Arts. Mr. William Scaling of Basford, Notts, was a highly successful grower and published excellent pamphlets on willow cultivation. The largest English willow plantation, or salicetum (Lat. salix, willow), today is the one planted by Mr. W. P. Ellmore at Thurmaston near Leicester, covering about 100 acres of the finest qualities. Mr. Ellmore, a practical basket-maker, successfully introduced some valuable continental varieties (see Willow).

Willows are roughly classed by the basket-maker into "osier" and "fine." The former consists of varieties of the true osier, Salix viminalis; the latter of varieties of Salix triandra, S. purpurea and some other species and hybrids of tougher texture. For the coarsest work, dried unpeeled osiers, known as "brown stuff," are used; for finer work, "white (peeled) stuff" and "buff" (willows stained a tawny hue by boiling them previous to peeling). Brown stuff is sorted, before it reaches the workman, into lengths varying from 3½ ft. to 8 or 10 ft., the smallest being known in London and the home counties as "luke," the largest as "great," and the intermediate sizes as "long small," "threepenny" and "middleboro." White and buff rods are more carefully sorted, the smallest, about 2 ft. or less, being known as "small tack," and rising sizes as "tack," "short small," "small," "long small," "threepenny," "middleboro" and "great." Rods of two to three years' growth, known as "sticks," are used to form the rigid framework of the bottoms and lids of square work. In every case, except the last, the stuff is soaked in tanks to render it pliable before use—brown from three to seven days, white and buff from half-an-hour to half a day. The rods are used whole for ordinary work, but for baskets of slight and finer texture each is divided into "skains" of different degrees of size. "Skains" are osiers cleft into three or four parts, by means of an implement called a "cleaver," which is a wedge-shaped tool of boxwood inserted at the point or top end of the rod and run down through its entire length. They are next drawn through an implement resembling the common spokeshave, keeping the grain of the split next the iron or stock of the shave, while the pith is presented to the steel edge of the instrument, and in order to bring the split into a shape still more regular, it is passed through another implement called an upright, consisting of a flat piece of steel, each end of which is fashioned into a cutting edge, like that of an ordinary chisel and adjusted to the required width by means of a thumb-screw.

Willows are usually classified by basket makers into "osier" and "fine." The first category includes varieties of true osier, Salix viminalis; the second includes varieties of Salix triandra, S. purpurea, and some tougher species and hybrids. For the coarsest work, dried, unpeeled osiers, known as "brown stuff," are used; for finer work, "white (peeled) stuff" and "buff" (willows stained a tawny color by boiling before peeling). Brown stuff is sorted before reaching the worker into lengths ranging from 3½ ft. to 8 or 10 ft., with the smallest being called "luke" in London and nearby areas, the largest "great," and the intermediate sizes "long small," "threepenny," and "middleboro." White and buff rods are sorted more carefully, with the smallest, around 2 ft. or less, known as "small tack," and larger sizes called "tack," "short small," "small," "long small," "threepenny," "middleboro," and "great." Rods that have grown for two to three years, called "sticks," are used to create the rigid framework for the bottoms and lids of square work. In every case except the last, the material is soaked in tanks to make it pliable before use—brown for three to seven days, white and buff for half an hour to half a day. The rods are used whole for general work, but for baskets that are light and finer, each is split into "skains" of various sizes. "Skains" are osiers split into three or four parts using a tool called a "cleaver," a wedge-shaped tool made of boxwood that is inserted at the tip of the rod and run down its entire length. They are then drawn through a tool similar to a common spokeshave, keeping the grain of the split next to the iron or stock of the shave, while the pith faces the steel edge. To shape the split even more evenly, it is passed through another tool called an upright, which is a flat piece of steel with each end shaped into a cutting edge like a regular chisel, adjusted to the desired width with a thumb-screw.

The tools required by a basket-maker are few and simple. They consist, besides the foregoing, of a shop-knife for cutting out material; a picking knife for cutting off the protruding butts and tops of the rods after the work is completed; two or three bodkins of varying sizes; a flat piece of iron somewhat narrowly triangular in shape for driving the work closely together; a stout pair of shears and a "dog" or "commander" for straightening sticks. The employer supplies a screw block or vice for gripping the bottom and cover sticks of square work, and a lapboard on which the workman fixes the upsetted bottom while siding up the basket. This is the full kit. A common round or oval basket may, however, be made with no other tools than a shop-knife and a bodkin. On the continent of Europe shapes or blocks are in use on which the fabric is in some cases woven.

The tools needed by a basket maker are few and simple. They include a shop knife for cutting material, a picking knife for trimming the ends of the rods after finishing the work, two or three bodkins of different sizes, a flat piece of iron that’s somewhat triangular for tightening the work together, a sturdy pair of shears, and a "dog" or "commander" for straightening sticks. The employer provides a screw block or vice for holding the bottom and cover sticks of square work, along with a lapboard where the worker secures the base while shaping the basket. That’s the complete set. However, a basic round or oval basket can be made with just a shop knife and a bodkin. In Europe, shapes or blocks are sometimes used for weaving the fabric.

Terminology of basket-making.

The technicalities of basket-making may be easily followed by a glance at the illustration here reproduced by the courtesy of the Society of Arts.[1] It will be seen that the "bye-stakes" are merely inserted in the "upsett," whereas the stakes are driven in at each side of the "bottom-sticks" and pricked up to form the rigid framework of the side. When the "bottom-stick" and "stake" are formed of one and the same continuous rod, it is termed a "league." If the bottom is made on a hoop the butts of the stakes are "sliped," i.e. cut away with a long cut of the shop-knife, and turned tightly round the hoop; they are then said to be "scallomed" on. The chief strokes used in constructing an ordinary basket are:—the "slew"—two or more rods woven together; the "rand," rods woven in singly; the "fitch," two rods tightly worked alternately one under the other, employed for skeleton work such as cages and waste-paper baskets; the "pair," two rods worked alternately one over the other, used for filling up bottoms and covers of round and oval baskets; and the "wale," three or more rods worked alternately, forming a string or binding course. Various forms of plaiting, roping and tracking are used for bordering off or finishing.

The details of basket-making can be easily understood with a look at the illustration provided by the Society of Arts. You'll see that the "bye-stakes" are simply inserted into the "upsett," while the stakes are driven in on each side of the "bottom-sticks" and pricked up to create the solid framework of the side. When the "bottom-stick" and "stake" are made from the same continuous rod, it’s called a "league." If the bottom is created on a hoop, the butts of the stakes are "sliped," meaning they're trimmed with a long cut of the shop knife and tightly wrapped around the hoop; they are then said to be "scallomed" on. The main techniques used in making a standard basket include: the "slew"—two or more rods woven together; the "rand," which involves rods woven individually; the "fitch," where two rods are tightly worked alternately one under the other, used for structures like cages and waste-paper baskets; the "pair," consisting of two rods worked alternately one over the other, used to fill the bottoms and covers of round and oval baskets; and the "wale," which involves three or more rods worked alternately to form a string or binding course. Different types of plaiting, roping, and tracking are used for edging or finishing.

An ordinary oval basket is made by preparing the requisite number of bottom sticks, preserving their length greater than the required width of the bottom. They are ranged in pairs on the floor parallel to each other at small intervals, in the direction of the longer diameter of the basket, thus forming what may be called the "woof," for basket-work is literally a web. These parallel rods are then crossed at right angles by two pairs of the largest osiers, on the butt ends of which the workman places his feet; and they are confined in their places by being each woven alternately over and under the parallel pieces first laid down and their own butts which form the end bottom sticks. The whole now forms what is technically called the "slath," which is the foundation of the basket. Next other rods are taken and [v.03 p.0483]woven under and over the sticks all round the bottom until it be of sufficient size, and the woof be occupied by them. Thus the bottom or foundation on which the superstructure is to be raised is finished. This latter part is accomplished by sharpening the large ends of as many long and stout osiers as may be necessary to form the stakes or skeleton. These are forced between the bottom sticks from the edge towards the centre, and are turned up or "upset" in the direction of the sides; then other rods are woven in and out between each of them, until the basket is raised to the intended height, or, more correctly speaking, the depth it is to receive. The edge or border is finished by turning down the ends of the stakes, now standing up, behind and in front of each other, whereby the whole is firmly and compactly united, and it is technically known as the "belly." A lid is constructed on the same plan as that of the bottom, and tied on with hinges formed of twisted rods; simple handles may be made by inserting similar rods by the sides of two opposite stakes and looping them under the border to form rope-like handles of three strands. This is the most simple kind of basket, from which others differ only in being made with finer materials and in being more nicely executed; but in these there is considerable scope for taste and fancy, and articles are produced of extreme neatness and ingenuity in construction.

An ordinary oval basket is made by preparing the required number of bottom sticks, making sure their length is greater than the necessary width of the bottom. These sticks are laid out in pairs on the floor, parallel to each other at small intervals along the longer diameter of the basket, forming what can be called the "woof," since basket-making is essentially a weaving process. These parallel rods are then crossed at right angles with two pairs of larger willows, with the ends resting on the ground where the worker stands; each is secured in place by weaving alternately over and under the initial parallel sticks and their own ends, which become the bottom sticks. This assembly is technically known as the "slath," serving as the base of the basket. Next, more rods are taken and woven in and out around the bottom sticks until it reaches the desired size and the woof is filled. This completes the base on which the structure will be built. The next step involves sharpening the large ends of long, thick willows needed to create the stakes or skeleton. These are pushed between the bottom sticks from the edges towards the center and then turned up or "upset" towards the sides; additional rods are woven in and out between each stake until the basket reaches the intended height, or more accurately, the depth it needs to be. The edge or border is finished by folding down the ends of the stakes, standing up in front and behind each other, which tightly binds everything together, known as the "belly." A lid is made using the same method as the bottom and is attached with hinges made from twisted rods; simple handles can be created by inserting similar rods beside two opposite stakes and looping them under the border to create three-strand rope-like handles. This represents the most basic type of basket; others differ only by using finer materials and more meticulous work, but there is plenty of room for creativity and style in these, leading to highly neat and cleverly constructed items.

In addition to willows many other materials are employed in the fabrication of wicker-work. Among the more important of these is the stem of Calamus viminalis or other allied species—the cane or rattan of commerce—which is used whole or made into skains. Since 1880 the central pith of this material, known as "cane-pulp" or "cane-pith," has been largely used in Great Britain and on the continent of Europe in the manufacture of furniture and other finer classes of work. About the same period plaited rush and straw, often coloured, came into use together with enamelled skains of cane. It must be admitted, however, that basket-work in these developments has encroached somewhat on the domain of cabinet-making; for wood and nails are now much used in constructing basket-work chairs, tables and other furniture.

In addition to willows, many other materials are used in making wickerwork. Among the more important ones is the stem of Calamus viminalis or related species—the cane or rattan of commerce—which can be used whole or made into skains. Since 1880, the central pith of this material, known as "cane-pulp" or "cane-pith," has been widely used in Great Britain and on the European continent for making furniture and other finer items. Around the same time, plaited rush and straw, often dyed, became popular, along with enamelled skains of cane. However, it must be noted that basketwork in these developments has somewhat encroached on the area of cabinet-making; wood and nails are now commonly used in making basketwork chairs, tables, and other furniture.

With splits of various species of bamboo the Japanese and Chinese manufacture baskets of unequalled beauty and finish. The bamboo wicker-work with which the Japanese sometimes encase their delicate egg-shell porcelain is a marvellous example of manipulation, and they and the Chinese excel in the application of bamboo wicker-work to furniture. In India "Cajan" baskets are extensively made from the fronds of the Palmyra palm, Borassus flabelliformis, and this manufacture has been established in the Black Forest of Germany, where it is now an important and characteristic staple. Among the other materials may be enumerated the odorous roots of the khus-khus grass, Anatherum muricatum, and the leaves of various species of screw pine, used in India and the East generally. The fronds of the palm of the Seychelles, Lodoicea sechellarum, are used for very delicate basket-work in those islands. Strips of the New Zealand flax plant, Phormium tenax, are made into baskets in New Zealand. Esparto fibre is used in Spain and Algeria for rude fruit baskets. Various species of Maranta yield basket materials in the West Indies and South America; and the Tirite, a species of Calathea, a member of the order Zingiberaceae, is also employed similarly in Trinidad. Baskets are also frequently made from straw, from various sedges (Cyperus), and from shavings and splints of many kinds of wood.

With different types of bamboo, the Japanese and Chinese create baskets of unmatched beauty and craftsmanship. The bamboo wickerwork that the Japanese sometimes use to encase their delicate egg-shell porcelain is a fantastic example of skill, and both the Japanese and the Chinese are masters at applying bamboo wickerwork to furniture. In India, "Cajan" baskets are widely made from the fronds of the Palmyra palm, Borassus flabelliformis, and this craft has been established in the Black Forest of Germany, where it has become a significant and distinctive staple. Other materials include the fragrant roots of khus-khus grass, Anatherum muricatum, and leaves from various species of screw pine, used in India and generally throughout the East. The fronds of the Seychelles palm, Lodoicea sechellarum, are used for delicate basket-making in those islands. Strips of the New Zealand flax plant, Phormium tenax, are woven into baskets in New Zealand. Esparto fiber is used in Spain and Algeria for simple fruit baskets. Various species of Maranta provide basket materials in the West Indies and South America, and the Tirite, a species of Calathea, part of the order Zingiberaceae, is also used similarly in Trinidad. Baskets are also often made from straw, various sedges (Cyperus), and from shavings and splints of many types of wood.

The chief centres of English basket manufacture outside London are Thurmaston near Leicester, Basford near Nottingham, and Grantham. Large but decreasing quantities of light basket-work are made for the English market in Verdun, in the department of the Aisne, and in other parts of France; and great quantities of fancy and other work are produced in Belgium, in the Netherlands and in Germany, notably at Lichtenfels in Bavaria, at Sonnefeld in Saxony and in the Black Forest.

The main centers for basket making in England, besides London, are Thurmaston near Leicester, Basford near Nottingham, and Grantham. A significant but shrinking number of light baskets are produced for the English market in Verdun, located in the Aisne department, and in other areas of France. Additionally, a large volume of decorative and other types of baskets come from Belgium, the Netherlands, and Germany, especially from Lichtenfels in Bavaria, Sonnefeld in Saxony, and the Black Forest.

The import and export values of baskets and basket-ware, and of willows and rods for basket-making, have been enumerated in the Board of Trade returns for the United Kingdom since 1900, in which year basket-ware from foreign countries was imported to the value of £239,402. In 1901 the imports increased to £264,183; then they declined to £227,070 in 1905. The main sources of supply are shown in this comparison of 1900 and 1905:

The import and export values of baskets and basket products, as well as willows and rods for basket-making, have been listed in the Board of Trade returns for the United Kingdom since 1900. In that year, imported basket products from foreign countries were valued at £239,402. In 1901, imports rose to £264,183; however, they dropped to £227,070 in 1905. The main sources of supply are highlighted in this comparison between 1900 and 1905:

 

1900.

1900.

1905.

1905.

 

Belgium

Belgium

£72,031

£72,031

£77,766

£77,766

+£5,735

+£5,735

Holland

Netherlands

58,214

58,214

54,407

54,407

-  3,807

3,807

France

France

55,870

55,870

27,910

27,910

-27,960

-27,960

Germany

Germany

33,155

33,155

22,892

22,892

-10,263

-10,263

Japan

Japan

8,140

8,140

25,536

25,536

+17,396

+17,396

Portugal

Portugal

5,066

5,066

3,971

3,971

-  1,095

1,095

The increase from Japan (for 1904 the value was £52,377) and the decrease from France are remarkable.

The increase from Japan (in 1904, the value was £52,377) and the decrease from France are striking.

The import values of foreign willows increased from £52,219 in 1900 to £62,286 in 1905, the most important exporting countries being:—

The import values of foreign willows rose from £52,219 in 1900 to £62,286 in 1905, with the main exporting countries being:—

 

1900.

1900.

1905.

1905.

 

Germany

Germany

£22,594

£22,594

£34,752

£34,752

+£12,158

+£12,158

Belgium

Belgium

18,800

18,800

11,864

11,864

-    6,936

6,936

Holland

Netherlands

9,771

9,771

12,750

12,750

+    2,979

+ 2,979

Small British re-exports of willows (£1808 in 1900 and £371 in 1905) and of baskets (£3785 in 1900 and £6633 in 1905) to foreign parts and British possessions are tabulated. No particulars of exports of British produce and manufacture are specified in the returns.

Small British re-exports of willows (£1808 in 1900 and £371 in 1905) and of baskets (£3785 in 1900 and £6633 in 1905) to foreign countries and British territories are listed. No details of exports of British goods and manufacturing are included in the reports.

(T. O.)

(T. O.)

[1] See the report of a paper by T. Okey, published in the Journal of the Society of Arts, January 11th, 1907.

[1] Check out the report of a paper by T. Okey, published in the Journal of the Society of Arts, January 11th, 1907.

BASKET-BALL, a game adapted to the open air, but usually played upon the floor of a gymnasium and in the cold season. It was the invention, in 1891, of James Naismith, an instructor in the gymnasium of the Young Men's Christian Association training-school at Springfield, Massachusetts. A demand had arisen for a game for the gymnasium class, which would break the monotony and take the place, during the winter months, of football and baseball, and which was not too rough to be played indoors. The idea of the game was first published in the Triangle, the school paper. It soon became one of the most popular indoor games of America, for girls as well as for men, and spread to England and elsewhere.

BASKETBALL, a game designed for outdoor play but typically played inside a gym, especially during the cold season. It was created in 1891 by James Naismith, an instructor at the Young Men's Christian Association training school in Springfield, Massachusetts. There was a need for a game for the gym class that would liven things up and serve as an alternative to football and baseball during the winter months, without being too rough for indoor play. The concept of the game was first published in the Triangle, the school newspaper. It quickly became one of the most popular indoor games in America, enjoyed by both girls and boys, and spread to England and beyond.

Basket-ball is played on a marked-off space 60 ft. by 40 ft. in extent, though in the open air the dimensions may be greater. In the middle of each short side and 10 ft. above the floor or ground, is placed a basket consisting of a net suspended from a metal ring 18 in. in diameter, backed, at a distance of 6 in., by a back-board 6 ft. long and 4 ft. high. The object of the game is to propel an inflated, leather-covered ball, 30 in. in circumference, into the opponents' basket, which is the goal, by striking it with the open hands. The side wins that scores most goals during two periods of play divided by an interval of rest. Although there is practically no limit to the number of players on each side, all indoor matches are played by teams of five, in positions opposing one another as in lacrosse, centre, right and left forwards and right and left guards (or backs). A referee has the general supervision of the game and decides when goals have been properly scored, and an umpire watches for infringements of the rules, which constitute fouls. There are also a scorer and timekeeper.

Basketball is played on a designated area that measures 60 ft. by 40 ft., although outdoor courts can be larger. On each short side, 10 ft. above the floor or ground, there's a basket made of a net hanging from a metal ring that's 18 in. in diameter, backed by a backboard that is 6 ft. long and 4 ft. high, set 6 in. away. The goal of the game is to shoot an inflated ball, covered in leather and measuring 30 in. in circumference, into the opponents' basket by hitting it with open hands. The team that scores the most goals during two halves, with a break in between, wins. While there’s virtually no limit to how many players can be on each team, indoor games are played with five players each, arranged in positions similar to lacrosse: center, right and left forwards, and right and left guards (or backs). A referee oversees the game and determines if goals are scored correctly, while an umpire monitors for rule violations, known as fouls. There’s also a scorer and a timekeeper.

The game is started with the two opposing centres standing within a 4-foot ring in the middle of the floor. The referee puts the ball in play by tossing it into the air over the heads of the centres, who jump into the air for its possession or endeavour to bat it towards the opposing goal. From this moment the ball is in play until it falls into a basket, or passes the boundary-lines, or a foul is made. After a goal has been scored, the ball is again put in play by the referee in the centre. Should it be thrown across the boundary, a player of the opposing side, standing on the line at the point where the ball went over, puts it in play by passing or throwing it to one of his own side in any direction, there being no off-side rule—another point of similarity to lacrosse. His opponents, of course, try to prevent the pass or intercept the throw, thus securing the ball themselves. When a foul has been called, a player of the opposing side is allowed a "free throw" for his opponents' basket from a mark 15 ft. distant from it and without interference. A goal scored from a [v.03 p.0484]free throw counts one point; one scored while the ball is in play counts two. Hacking, striking, holding and kicking are foul, but a player may interfere with an opponent who has the ball so long as he uses one arm only and does not hold. A player must throw the ball from where he gets it, no running with it being allowed excepting when continuously bounding it on the floor. Basket-ball is an extremely fast game and admits of a high degree of combination or team-play. The principal qualifications of a good player are quickness of movement and of judgment, coolness, endurance, accuracy and self-control. Good dodging, throwing, passing and team-play are the important requisites of the game, which is looked upon as excellent winter training for outdoor games. Basket-ball, with somewhat modified rules, is extremely popular with young women.

The game starts with the two opposing centers standing in a 4-foot circle in the center of the court. The referee puts the ball in play by tossing it in the air over the heads of the centers, who jump up to try to gain possession or knock it toward the opposing goal. From this point, the ball is in play until it goes into a basket, goes out of bounds, or a foul is called. After a goal is scored, the referee puts the ball back in play at the center. If the ball goes out of bounds, a player from the opposing team, standing on the line where the ball crossed, puts it back in play by passing or throwing it to a teammate in any direction, as there is no off-side rule—similar to lacrosse. His opponents will try to block the pass or intercept the throw to gain possession. When a foul is called, a player from the opposing team is given a "free throw" for their opponents' basket from a spot 15 feet away, without interference. A goal scored from a free throw counts as one point, while a goal scored during play counts as two. Hitting, striking, holding, and kicking are fouls, but a player can challenge an opponent with the ball as long as they only use one arm and do not hold. A player must throw the ball from where they catch it; running with it is not allowed unless they are continuously bouncing it on the floor. Basketball is a very fast-paced game that allows for high levels of teamwork. The main qualities of a good player include speed, quick judgment, calmness, endurance, accuracy, and self-discipline. Good dodging, throwing, passing, and teamwork are essential skills. The game is considered great winter training for outdoor sports. Basketball, with slightly modified rules, is very popular among young women.

See Spalding's Basket-Ball Guide; and George T. Hepbron, How to Play Basket-Ball; and Spalding's Basket-Ball Guide for Women.

See Spalding's Basket-Ball Guide; and George T. Hepbron, How to Play Basket-Ball; and Spalding's Basket-Ball Guide for Women.

BASNAGE, JACQUES (1653-1723), French Protestant divine, was the eldest son of the eminent lawyer Henri Basnage, sieur de Franquenay (1615-1695), and was born at Rouen in Normandy in 1653. He studied classical languages at Saumur and afterwards theology at Geneva. He was pastor at Rouen (his native place) from 1676 till 1685, when, on the revocation of the edict of Nantes, he obtained leave of the king to retire to Holland. He settled at Rotterdam as a minister pensionary till 1691, when he was chosen pastor of the Walloon church. In 1709 the grand pensionary A. Heinsius (1641-1720) secured his election as one of the pastors of the Walloon church at the Hague, intending to employ him mainly in civil affairs. Accordingly he was engaged in a secret negotiation with Marshal d'Uxelles, plenipotentiary of France at the congress of Utrecht—a service which he executed with so much success that he was entrusted with several important commissions, all of which he discharged with great ability. In 1716 Dubois, who was at the Hague at the instance of the regent Orleans, for the purpose of negotiating the Triple Alliance between France, Great Britain and Holland, sought the advice of Basnage, who, in spite of the fact that he had failed to receive permission to return to France on a short visit the year before, did his best to further the negotiations. The French government also turned to him for help in view of the threatened rising in the Cevennes. Basnage had welcomed the revival of the Protestant church due to the zeal of Antoine Court; but he assured the regent that no danger of active resistance was to be feared from it, and, true to the principles of Calvin, he denounced the rebellion of the Camisards (q.v.) in his Instructions pastorales aux Réformés de France sur l'obéissance due aux souverains (Paris, 1720), which was printed by order of the court and scattered broadcast in the south of France. Basnage died on the 22nd of September 1723.

BASNAGE, JACQUES (1653-1723), French Protestant theologian, was the eldest son of the prominent lawyer Henri Basnage, sieur de Franquenay (1615-1695), and was born in Rouen, Normandy, in 1653. He studied classical languages at Saumur and then theology at Geneva. He served as pastor in Rouen (his hometown) from 1676 until 1685, when, following the revocation of the Edict of Nantes, he received permission from the king to move to Holland. He settled in Rotterdam as a minister pensionary until 1691, when he was appointed pastor of the Walloon church. In 1709, the Grand Pensionary A. Heinsius (1641-1720) facilitated his election as one of the pastors of the Walloon church in The Hague, intending for him to focus on civil matters. As a result, he was involved in a secret negotiation with Marshal d'Uxelles, the French plenipotentiary at the Congress of Utrecht—a task he performed so successfully that he was given several important missions, all of which he accomplished with great skill. In 1716, Dubois, who was in The Hague at the request of the regent Orleans to negotiate the Triple Alliance between France, Great Britain, and Holland, sought Basnage's advice. Despite having been denied permission to return to France for a short visit the previous year, Basnage did his utmost to assist in the negotiations. The French government also consulted him regarding the anticipated uprising in the Cevennes. Basnage welcomed the revival of the Protestant church due to the efforts of Antoine Court; however, he reassured the regent that no immediate threat of active resistance was to be expected. True to Calvinist principles, he condemned the rebellion of the Camisards (q.v.) in his Instructions pastorales aux Réformés de France sur l'obéissance due aux souverains (Paris, 1720), which was published by court order and widely distributed in southern France. Basnage died on September 22, 1723.

Basnage was a good preacher and a prolific writer. His works include several dogmatic and polemical treatises, but the most important are the historical. Of these may be mentioned Histoire de la religion des églises réformées (Rotterdam, 1690), the Histoire de l'église depuis Jésus-Christ jusqu'à présent (ib. 1699)—both of them written from the point of view of Protestant polemics—and, of greater scientific value, the Histoire des Juifs (Rotterdam, 1706, Eng. trans. 1708) and the Antiquités judaiques ou remarques critiques sur la république des Hébreux (1713). He also wrote short explanatory introductions and notes to a collection of copper-plate engravings, much valued by connoisseurs, called Histoires du Vieux et du Nouveau Testament, représentées par des figures gravées en taille-douce par R. de Hooge (Amsterdam, 1704).

Basnage was a skilled preacher and a prolific writer. His works include several theological and argumentative essays, but the most significant are the historical ones. Notable among these are Histoire de la religion des églises réformées (Rotterdam, 1690) and Histoire de l'église depuis Jésus-Christ jusqu'à présent (ib. 1699)—both written from a Protestant perspective—and, of greater scholarly importance, the Histoire des Juifs (Rotterdam, 1706, Eng. trans. 1708) and the Antiquités judaiques ou remarques critiques sur la république des Hébreux (1713). He also authored concise explanatory introductions and notes for a collection of copperplate engravings, highly regarded by collectors, titled Histoires du Vieux et du Nouveau Testament, représentées par des figures gravées en taille-douce par R. de Hooge (Amsterdam, 1704).

BASOCHE, or Bazoche, with the analogous forms Basoque, Basogue and Bazouges; from the Lat. basilica, in the sense of law courts, a French gild of clerks, from among whom legal representatives (procureurs) were recruited. This gild was very ancient, even older than the gild of the procureurs, with which it was often at variance. It dated, no doubt, from the time when the profession of procureur (procurator, advocate or legal representative) was still free in the sense that persons rendering that service to others when so permitted by the law were not yet public and ministerial officers. For this purpose there was established near each important juridical centre a group of clerks, that is to say, of men skilled in law (or reputed to be so), who at first would probably fill indifferently the rôles of representative or advocate. Such was the origin of the Basoche of the parlement of Paris; which naturally formed itself into a gild, like other professions and trades in the middle ages. But this organization eventually became disintegrated, dividing up into more specialized bodies: that of the advocates, whose history then begins; and that of legal representatives, whose profession was regularized in 1344, and speedily became a saleable charge. The remnant of the original clerks constituted the new Basoche, which thenceforward consisted only of those who worked as clerks for the procureurs, the richer ones among them aspiring themselves to attain the position of procureur. They all, however, retained some traces of their original conditions. "They are admitted," writes an 18th-century author, "to plead before M. le lieutenant civil sur les réferés[1] and before M. le juge auditeur; so that the procureurs of these days are but the former clerks of the Basoche, admitted to officiate in important cases in preference to other clerks and to their exclusion." From its ancient past the Basoche had also preserved certain picturesque forms and names. It was called the "kingdom of the Basoche," and for a long time its chief, elected each year in general assembly, bore the title of "king." This he had to give up towards the end of the 16th century, by order, it is said, of Henry III., and was thenceforth called the "chancellor." The Basoche had besides its maîtres des requêtes, a grand court-crier, a referendary, an advocate-general, a procureur-général, a chaplain, &c. In early days, and until the first half of the 16th century, it was organized in companies in a military manner and held periodical reviews or parades (montres), sometimes taking up arms in the king's service in time of war. Of this there survived later only an annual cavalcade, when the members of the Basoche went to the royal forest of Bondy to cut the maypole, which they afterwards set up in the court-yard of the Palais. We hear also of satirical and literary entertainments given by clerks of the Palais de Justice, and of the moralities played by them in public, which form an important element in the history of the national theatre; but at the end of the 16th century these performances were restricted to the great hall of the Palais.

BASOCHE, or Bazoche, with similar forms Basoque, Basogue, and Bazouges; comes from the Latin basilica, referring to law courts, a French guild of clerks, from which legal representatives (procureurs) were recruited. This guild was very old, even older than the guild of the procureurs, with which it often conflicted. It likely originated from the time when the role of procureur (procurator, advocate, or legal representative) was still open, meaning that individuals providing this service when allowed by the law were not yet public and ministerial officials. To facilitate this, a group of clerks—competent in law (or considered to be)—was established near each important legal center; initially, they probably took on the roles of representative or advocate interchangeably. This was how the Basoche of the parlement of Paris emerged, naturally forming itself into a guild like other professions and trades in the Middle Ages. However, over time, this organization broke down into more specialized groups: one for advocates, whose history then began; and another for legal representatives, whose profession was formalized in 1344 and quickly became a sellable position. The remnants of the original clerks made up the new Basoche, which thereafter consisted only of those who worked as clerks for the procureurs, the wealthier among them aspiring to become procureurs themselves. They all, however, retained some aspects of their original roles. "They are admitted," writes an 18th-century author, "to plead before M. le lieutenant civil sur les réferés[1] and before M. le juge auditeur; so that the procureurs of these days are but the former clerks of the Basoche, allowed to officiate in important cases over others and excluding them." From its ancient history, the Basoche also kept some colorful forms and names. It was known as the "kingdom of the Basoche," and for a long time, its chief, elected each year at a general assembly, held the title of "king." He had to relinquish this title towards the end of the 16th century, supposedly at the order of Henry III., and was thereafter known as the "chancellor." The Basoche also had its maîtres des requêtes, a grand court crier, a referendary, an advocate-general, a procureur-général, a chaplain, etc. In its early days, and until the first half of the 16th century, it was organized in a military fashion and held periodic reviews or parades (montres), sometimes taking up arms in the king's service during wartime. Later, only an annual cavalcade remained, when the members of the Basoche went to the royal forest of Bondy to cut the maypole, which they then erected in the courtyard of the Palais. We also hear about satirical and literary performances held by clerks of the Palais de Justice, and of the morality plays they performed in public, which are a significant part of the history of national theatre; but by the end of the 16th century, these performances were limited to the grand hall of the Palais.

To the last the Basoche retained two principal prerogatives. (1) In order to be recognized as a qualified procureur it was necessary to have gone through one's "stage" in the Basoche, to have been entered by name for ten years on its register. It was not sufficient to have been merely clerk to a procureur during the period and to have been registered at his office. This rule was the occasion of frequent conflicts during the 17th and 18th centuries between the members of the Basoche and the procureurs, and on the whole, despite certain decisions favouring the latter, the parlement maintained the rights of the Basoche. Opinion was favourable to it because the certificats de complaisance issued by the procureurs were dreaded. These certificats held good, moreover, in places where there was no Basoche. (2) The Basoche had judiciary powers recognized by the law. It had disciplinary jurisdiction over its members and decided personal actions in civil law brought by one clerk against another or by an outsider against a clerk. The judgment, at any rate if delivered by a maître des requêtes, was authoritative, and could only be contested by a civil petition before the ancient council of the Basoche. The Châtelet of Paris had its special basoche, which claimed to be older even than that of the Palais de Justice, and there was contention between them as to certain rights. The clerks of the procureurs at the cour des comptes of Paris had their own Basoche of great antiquity, called the "empire de Galilée." The Basoche of the Palais de Justice had in its ancient days the right to create provostships in localities within the jurisdiction of the parlement of Paris, and thus there sprang up a certain number of local basoches. Others were independent in origin; among such being the "regency" of Rouen and the Basoche of the parlement of Toulouse.

To the end, the Basoche held onto two main privileges. (1) To be recognized as a qualified procureur, you needed to complete your "stage" in the Basoche and be listed by name on its register for ten years. Simply being a clerk to a procureur during that time and registered at his office wasn’t enough. This rule led to frequent conflicts in the 17th and 18th centuries between the Basoche members and the procureurs, and overall, despite some decisions favoring the latter, the parlement upheld the rights of the Basoche. Public opinion supported it because the certificats de complaisance issued by the procureurs were feared. These certificats were also valid in areas without a Basoche. (2) The Basoche had judicial powers recognized by law. It held disciplinary authority over its members and resolved civil suits initiated by one clerk against another or by an outsider against a clerk. Any judgment, especially if made by a maître des requêtes, was authoritative and could only be challenged through a civil petition to the ancient council of the Basoche. The Châtelet of Paris had its own Basoche, claiming to be even older than that of the Palais de Justice, which led to disputes over certain rights. The clerks of the procureurs at the cour des comptes in Paris had their own Basoche, known as the "empire de Galilée," with a long history. The Basoche of the Palais de Justice originally had the right to create provostships in localities within the jurisdiction of the parlement of Paris, resulting in the establishment of several local basoches. Others were independently established, such as the "regency" of Rouen and the Basoche of the parlement of Toulouse.

[v.03 p.0485]

[v.03 p.0485]

See also Répertoire de jurisprudence des Guyot; Recueil des Statuts du royaume de la basoche (Paris, 1654); L. A. Fabre, Études historiques sur les clercs de la basoche (Paris, 1856).

See also Répertoire de jurisprudence des Guyot; Recueil des Statuts du royaume de la basoche (Paris, 1654); L. A. Fabre, Études historiques sur les clercs de la basoche (Paris, 1856).

(J. P. E.)

(J. P. E.)

[1] A procedure for obtaining a provisional judgment on urgent cases.

[1] A process for getting a temporary ruling in urgent situations.

BASQUE PROVINCES (Provincias Vascongadas), a division of north-eastern Spain, comprising the three provinces of Álava, Biscay or Vizcaya and Guipúzcoa. Pop. (1900) 603,596; area 2739 sq. m., the third in density in Spain. The territory occupied by the Basque Provinces forms a triangle bounded on the west and south by the provinces of Santander, Burgos and Logrono, on the east by Navarre, on the north by France and the Bay of Biscay. The French Pays Basque forms part of the arrondissements of Bayonne and Mauléon. For an account of the people, their origin, customs and language, see Basques. Of the Provinces, Guipúzcoa is the only one which is wholly Basque, Álava is the least so. Its capital, Vitoria, is said to have been founded by the Gothic king Leovigild (581). Older than these divisions, the date of which is uncertain, the ancient limits of the dioceses of Pamplona, Bayonne and Calahorra, probably corresponded more nearly to the boundaries of the ancient tribes, the Autrigones, the Caristi, the Varduli and the Vascones, with their still differing dialects, than do these civil provinces.

BASQUE PROVINCES (Provincias Vascongadas), a region in northeastern Spain, includes the three provinces of Álava, Biscay (or Vizcaya), and Guipúzcoa. Population (1900) was 603,596; area 2,739 sq. mi., making it the third densest region in Spain. The Basque Provinces form a triangle bordered to the west and south by the provinces of Santander, Burgos, and Logrono, to the east by Navarre, and to the north by France and the Bay of Biscay. The French Pays Basque is part of the districts of Bayonne and Mauléon. For details on the people, their origins, customs, and language, see Basque people. Among the Provinces, Guipúzcoa is the only one that is entirely Basque, while Álava is the least Basque. Its capital, Vitoria, is said to have been founded by the Gothic king Leovigild (581). Older than these divisions, which date is uncertain, the ancient boundaries of the dioceses of Pamplona, Bayonne, and Calahorra likely corresponded more closely to the territories of the ancient tribes—Autrigones, Caristi, Varduli, and Vascones—with their still distinct dialects—than do these civil provinces.

Leaving aside the legendary and uncertain portion of their history, we find the Provinces in some districts dependent allies of Navarre, in others of Castile. In Biscay the counts of Haro were lords of Biscay from 1093 to 1350. There was a short union with Castile under Pedro the Cruel, but the definitive union did not take place till 1370. In Álava the ruling power was the confederation of Arriaga (so called after its meeting place), which united the province to the crown of Castile in 1332. Guipúzcoa, which had been dependent sometimes on Navarre, sometimes on Castile, was definitively united to Castile in 1200. From the year 1425 the provinces were desolated by party wars among the lesser nobles (parientes mayores) but these came to an end in 1460-1498, when Henry IV. and Ferdinand the Catholic strengthened the power of the towns and forbade the erection of any fortified house in the country. Though the three Basque Provinces were thus united to the crown of Spain, they still remained a land apart (tierra apartada). Their juntas acted to some extent in common; and although no written federal pact is known to have existed, they employed, as the symbol of their unity, a seal with the word Iruracbat, "The Three One," engraved upon it. They preserved their own laws, customs, fueros (see Basques), which the Spanish kings swore to observe and maintain. Unless countersigned by the juntas the decrees of Cortes and Spanish legislation or royal orders had no force in the Provinces. In the junta of 1481 Guipúzcoa alone proposed a treaty of friendship, peace and free trade for ten years with England, and this was signed in Westminster, on the 9th of March 1482 (see Rymer, Foedera). The Basques still made their own treaties with England and France and are mentioned apart from Spain in the treaty of Utrecht (1713). They still preserved in their municipal institutions the old style of republicas derived from the civitates and respublicae of ancient Rome. This kind of independence and autonomy lasted unchallenged until the death of Ferdinand VII. in 1833, when, in default of male heirs, his brother Don Carlos claimed the throne, confirmed the Basque fueros, and raised the standard of revolt against his niece, Isabel II. A seven years' war followed, in which an English legion under Sir George de Lacy Evans and a naval force under Lord John Hay took part. It was ended by the Convenio de Vergara (August 31st, 1839) in which the concession and modification of the fueros was demanded. The troubled period which followed the expulsion of Isabel II. in 1868 gave opportunity for a second Carlist war from 1872 to 1876. This ended, unlike the former one, in the utter defeat of the Carlist forces, and left the Provinces at the mercy of the government, without terms or agreement. In general government and legislation the Provinces were then assimilated to the rest of the nation. After 1876, the Provincial parliaments (diputaciones) were elected like the other provincial councils of Spain, deprived of many privileges and subjected to the ordinary interference of the civil governors. But their representatives, assisted by the senators and deputies of the Basque Provinces in the Cortes, negotiated successive pacts, each lasting several years, securing for the three Provinces their municipal and provincial self-government, and the assessment, distribution and collection of their principal taxes and octroi duties, on the understanding that an agreed sum should be paid annually to the state, subject to an increase whenever the national taxation of other provinces was augmented. In December 1906, after long discussion, the contribution of the Basque Provinces to the state, according to the law of the 21st of July 1876, was fixed for the next twenty years; for the first ten years at 8,500,000 pesetas, for the next ten an additional 500,000 pesetas, from 31st December 1916 to 31st December 1926, the province of Guipúzcoa paying in addition 700,000 pesetas to the treasury. These pacts have hitherto been scrupulously observed, and as the local authorities levy the contribution after their own local customs, landed property and the industrial and commercial classes are less heavily taxed in these territories than in the rest of Spain. Enough is raised, however, besides the amount handed over to the government, to enable the schools, roads, harbours and public works of every kind to be maintained at a standard which compares very favourably with other parts of Spain. When the three provinces sent in their first contingent of conscripts in 1877, it was found that all but about sixty knew how to read and write, and succeeding contingents have kept up this high standard.

Leaving aside the legendary and uncertain parts of their history, we find the Provinces in some areas dependent on Navarre, and in others, on Castile. In Biscay, the counts of Haro were lords from 1093 to 1350. There was a brief union with Castile under Pedro the Cruel, but a permanent union didn't occur until 1370. In Álava, the ruling power was the confederation of Arriaga (named after its meeting place), which united the province to the crown of Castile in 1332. Guipúzcoa, which had alternated between dependency on Navarre and Castile, was definitively united to Castile in 1200. From 1425, the provinces were ravaged by civil wars among the lesser nobles (parientes mayores), but this ended between 1460 and 1498, when Henry IV and Ferdinand the Catholic strengthened the power of the towns and prohibited the construction of fortified houses in the region. Although the three Basque Provinces were thus united to the crown of Spain, they remained a distinct land (tierra apartada). Their juntas operated somewhat collectively; and while there was no written federal agreement, they used a seal with the word Iruracbat, "The Three One," as a symbol of their unity. They retained their own laws, customs, and fueros (see Basque people), which the Spanish kings vowed to respect and uphold. Unless countersigned by the juntas, the decrees of the Cortes and Spanish legislation or royal orders held no authority in the Provinces. In the junta of 1481, Guipúzcoa alone proposed a ten-year treaty of friendship, peace, and free trade with England, which was signed in Westminster on March 9, 1482 (see Rymer, Foedera). The Basques continued to make their agreements with England and France, and they are mentioned separately from Spain in the treaty of Utrecht (1713). They still maintained their municipal institutions in the old style of republicas, derived from the civitates and respublicae of ancient Rome. This level of independence and autonomy remained unchallenged until the death of Ferdinand VII in 1833, when, without male heirs, his brother Don Carlos claimed the throne, confirmed the Basque fueros, and raised a rebellion against his niece, Isabel II. A seven-year war ensued, with an English legion under Sir George de Lacy Evans and a naval force under Lord John Hay participating. It ended with the Convenio de Vergara (August 31, 1839), which demanded the concession and modification of the fueros. The turbulent period following Isabel II's expulsion in 1868 allowed for a second Carlist war from 1872 to 1876. This ended, unlike the previous one, with the total defeat of the Carlist forces and left the Provinces vulnerable to the government, without terms or agreements. Overall, the governance and legislation of the Provinces were then assimilated into the rest of the nation. After 1876, the provincial parliaments (diputaciones) were elected like other provincial councils in Spain, stripped of many privileges, and subjected to the routine interference of civil governors. However, their representatives, supported by senators and deputies of the Basque Provinces in the Cortes, negotiated successive agreements, each lasting several years, securing municipal and provincial self-government, as well as the assessment, distribution, and collection of their main taxes and duties, with the understanding that an agreed sum would be paid to the state annually, subject to increases whenever national taxes in other provinces rose. In December 1906, after extensive discussions, the Basque Provinces' contribution to the state, according to the law of July 21, 1876, was fixed for the next twenty years—initially at 8,500,000 pesetas for the first ten years, plus an additional 500,000 pesetas for the next ten, with Guipúzcoa paying an extra 700,000 pesetas to the treasury from December 31, 1916, to December 31, 1926. These agreements have been strictly maintained, and since local authorities levy contributions according to their customs, landed property and industrial and commercial sectors face lighter taxes in these regions than the rest of Spain. Still, enough is raised, alongside the amount given to the government, to allow schools, roads, harbors, and public works to be maintained at a standard that compares very favorably to other areas in Spain. When the three provinces sent their first group of conscripts in 1877, it turned out that almost all but around sixty could read and write, and subsequent groups have maintained this high standard.

In agriculture the Basque Provinces and the Pays Basque were great cider countries, but during the 19th century this was gradually replaced by wine-growing. The chief industries of the Basque Provinces are the sea fisheries and iron mining. Some of the mines round Bilbao have been worked from prehistoric times. In 1905 the Basque Provinces produced 5,302,344 tons of iron, over five millions of which came from Biscay, out of a total of 9,395,314 tons for the whole of Spain. More than the half of this total 5,845,895 tons, was exported to England. The swords of Mondragon in Guipúzcoa were renowned before those of Toledo. Eibar in the same province has long been a small-arms factory. There in the 19th century Señor Zuloaga successfully revived the artistic inlaying of gold and silver in steel and iron.

In agriculture, the Basque Provinces and the Pays Basque were known for their cider production, but during the 19th century, this was gradually replaced by wine-growing. The main industries in the Basque Provinces are fishing and iron mining. Some of the mines around Bilbao have been in operation since prehistoric times. In 1905, the Basque Provinces produced 5,302,344 tons of iron, over five million of which came from Biscay, out of a total of 9,395,314 tons for all of Spain. More than half of this total, 5,845,895 tons, was exported to England. The swords from Mondragon in Guipúzcoa were famous even before those from Toledo. Eibar, also in Guipúzcoa, has long been known as a small-arms manufacturing center. In the 19th century, Señor Zuloaga successfully revived the artistic craft of inlaying gold and silver into steel and iron there.

Bibliography.—Of older works, though often uncritical, R. P. Henao's Averiguaciones de las Antiguedades de Cantabria (Salamanca, 1688) is still valuable (new edition, 1894). For all that relates to the manners and customs of the people, Corografía de Guipúzcoa, by R. P. M. de Larramendi, S.J., is indispensable. Written about 1750, it was first printed in Barcelona in 1882 (later edition, San Sebastian, 1896). There are excellent chapters on the Basque Provinces in the Introduccion a la Historia Natural, y a la Geografía Fisica de España, by D. Guillermo Bowles (Madrid, 1775). El Guipuzcoano instruido (San Sebastian, 1780), in the form of a dictionary, gives full details of the life, the rights, duties and obligations of a Basque citizen of that date. The Diccionario Geografico-Historico de España, tome i., ii. El Reyno de Navarra Senorio de Vizcaya y Provincias de Álava y Guipúzcoa (Madrid, 1802), is full of local information, but with a strong bias in favour of the central government. The best works on the various editions of the fueros are Historia de la Legislacion ... civil de España, by A. Marichalar, Marques de Montesa, and Cayetano Manrique; Fueros de Navarra Vizcaya, Guipúzcoa y Álava (Madrid, 2nd ed., 1868); and the Noticia de las cosas memorables de Guipúzcoa, by D. Pablo de Gorosabel (Tolosa, 1899-1901), the last volume of which by C. de Echegaray, gives the legislative acts down to May 1900. Las Provincias Vascongadas a Fines de la Edad Media, by D. Carmelo de Echegaray (San Sebastian, 1895), is excellent. There is a Historia de Bizcaya, by Dr E. de Labayru, and a Compendio of the same by Fermin Herran (Bilbao, 1903). D. Carmelo de Echegaray, Cronista de las Provincias Vascongadas, with his colleagues D. Serapio Mugica, F. Soraluce, and other historians, has examined, catalogued and indexed the municipal archives of all the towns, without which no true history can be written. Several discoveries of important missing documents and MSS. were thus made. The development of the Basque mining industry is fully described in Las Minas de hierro de la provincia de Vizcaya, progressos realizados en esta region derde 1870 hasta 1899 (Bilbao, 1900).

References.—Among older works, although often uncritical, R. P. Henao's Averiguaciones de las Antiguedades de Cantabria (Salamanca, 1688) is still valuable (new edition, 1894). For everything related to the manners and customs of the people, Corografía de Guipúzcoa by R. P. M. de Larramendi, S.J., is essential. Written around 1750, it was first published in Barcelona in 1882 (later edition, San Sebastian, 1896). There are excellent chapters about the Basque Provinces in Introduccion a la Historia Natural, y a la Geografía Fisica de España by D. Guillermo Bowles (Madrid, 1775). El Guipuzcoano instruido (San Sebastian, 1780), presented as a dictionary, provides comprehensive details about the life, rights, duties, and obligations of a Basque citizen at that time. The Diccionario Geografico-Historico de España, volumes i., ii. El Reyno de Navarra Senorio de Vizcaya y Provincias de Álava y Guipúzcoa (Madrid, 1802), is filled with local information but has a strong bias favoring the central government. The best works on the various editions of the fueros are Historia de la Legislacion ... civil de España by A. Marichalar, Marques de Montesa, and Cayetano Manrique; Fueros de Navarra Vizcaya, Guipúzcoa y Álava (Madrid, 2nd ed., 1868); and Noticia de las cosas memorables de Guipúzcoa by D. Pablo de Gorosabel (Tolosa, 1899-1901), the last volume of which by C. de Echegaray provides the legislative acts up to May 1900. Las Provincias Vascongadas a Fines de la Edad Media by D. Carmelo de Echegaray (San Sebastian, 1895) is excellent. There is a Historia de Bizcaya by Dr E. de Labayru and a Compendio of the same by Fermin Herran (Bilbao, 1903). D. Carmelo de Echegaray, Cronista de las Provincias Vascongadas, along with his colleagues D. Serapio Mugica, F. Soraluce, and other historians, has examined, cataloged, and indexed the municipal archives of all the towns, without which no true history can be written. Several discoveries of important missing documents and manuscripts were made as a result. The development of the Basque mining industry is thoroughly described in Las Minas de hierro de la provincia de Vizcaya, progressos realizados en esta region derde 1870 hasta 1899 (Bilbao, 1900).

(W. We.)

(W. We.)

BASQUES, a people inhabiting the three Basque Provinces—Biscay, Álava and Guipúzcoa—and Navarre in Spain, and the arrondissement of Bayonne and Mauléon in France. The number of those who can be considered in any sense pure Basques is [v.03 p.0486]probably about 600,000 in Europe, with perhaps 100,000 emigrants in the Americas, chiefly in the region of La Plata in South America. The word Basques is historically derived from Vascones, which, written Wascones, has also given the name Gascons to a very different race. The Basques call themselves Eskualdunak, i.e. "those who possess the Eskuara," and their country Eskual-Herria.

BASQUES, a group of people living in the three Basque Provinces—Biscay, Álava, and Guipúzcoa—and Navarre in Spain, along with the districts of Bayonne and Mauléon in France. The total number of those who could be considered genuinely Basque is [v.03 p.0486] probably around 600,000 in Europe, with about 100,000 emigrants in the Americas, primarily in the La Plata region of South America. The term Basques comes from Vascones, which, when written as Wascones, also contributed to the name Gascons for a very different people. The Basques refer to themselves as Eskualdunak, meaning "those who possess the Eskuara," and their homeland as Eskual-Herria.

Language.—The original and proper name of the language is Eskuara (euskara, uskara), a word the exact meaning of which has not yet been ascertained, but which probably corresponds with the idea "clearly speaking." The language is highly interesting and stands as yet absolutely isolated from the other tongues of Europe, though from the purely grammatical point of view it recalls the Magyar and Finnic languages. It is an agglutinative, incorporating and polysynthetic system of speech; in the general series of organized linguistic families it would take an intermediate place between the American on the one side and the Ugro-Altaic or Ugrian on the other.

Language.—The original and proper name of the language is Eskuara (euskara, uskara), a term whose exact meaning is still unclear, but it likely conveys the idea of "clearly speaking." The language is quite fascinating and remains completely unique among other languages in Europe, although from a purely grammatical perspective, it resembles the Magyar and Finnic languages. It features an agglutinative, incorporating, and polysynthetic structure. In the broader classification of organized language families, it would occupy a position between the American languages on one side and the Ugro-Altaic or Ugrian languages on the other.

Basque has no graphic system of its own and uses the Roman character, either Spanish or French; a few particular sounds are indicated in modern writings by dotted or accented letters. The alphabet would vary according to the dialects. Prince L. L. Bonaparte counts, on the whole, thirteen simple vowels, thirty-eight simple consonants. Nasal vowels are found in some dialects as well as "wet" consonants—ty, dy, ny, &c. The doubling of consonants is not allowed and in actual current speech most of the soft consonants are dropped. The letter r cannot begin a word, so that rationem is written in Basque arrazoin.

Basque doesn’t have its own writing system and instead uses the Roman alphabet, either Spanish or French; a few specific sounds are represented in modern texts with dotted or accented letters. The alphabet can differ based on the dialects. Prince L. L. Bonaparte identifies, in total, thirteen simple vowels and thirty-eight simple consonants. Some dialects include nasal vowels as well as "wet" consonants—ty, dy, ny, etc. Doubling consonants isn’t permitted, and in current everyday speech, most of the soft consonants are dropped. The letter r cannot start a word, so rationem is written in Basque as arrazoin.

Declension is replaced by a highly developed postpositional system; first, the definite article itself a (plural ak) is a postposition—zaldi, "horse," zaldia "the horse," zaldiak, "the horses." The declensional suffixes or postpositions, which, just like our prepositions, may be added to one another, are postponed to the article when the noun is definite. The principal suffixes are k, the mark of the plural, and of the singular nominative agent; n, "of" and "in"; i, "to"; z, "by"; ik, "some"; ko, "from," "of" (Lat. a); tik, "from" (Lat. ex); tzat, kotzat, tzako, "for"; kin, gaz, "with"; gatik, "for the sake of"; gana, "towards"; ra, rat, "to," "into," "at," &c. Of these suffixes some are joined to the definite, others to the indefinite noun, or even to both.

Declension is replaced by a highly developed postpositional system; first, the definite article itself a (plural ak) functions as a postposition—zaldi, "horse," zaldia, "the horse," zaldiak, "the horses." The declensional suffixes or postpositions, which, similar to our prepositions, can be combined, are placed after the article when the noun is definite. The main suffixes are k, indicating plural and singular nominative agent; n, meaning "of" and "in"; i, meaning "to"; z, meaning "by"; ik, meaning "some"; ko, meaning "from," "of" (Lat. a); tik, meaning "from" (Lat. ex); tzat, kotzat, tzako, meaning "for"; kin, gaz, meaning "with"; gatik, meaning "for the sake of"; gana, meaning "towards"; ra, rat, meaning "to," "into," "at," etc. Some of these suffixes are attached to definite nouns, others to indefinite nouns, or even to both.

The personal pronouns, which to a superficial observer appear closely related to those of the Semitic or Hamitic languages, are ni, "I"; hi, "thou"; gu, "we"; zu, "you" in modern times, zu has become a polite form of "thou," and a true plural "you" (i.e. more than one) has been formed by suffixing the pluralizing sign k—zuek. The pronouns of the third person are mere demonstratives. There are three: hura or kura, "that"; hau or kau, "this"; ori or kori, "this" or "that." Other unexplained forms are found in the verbal inflexions, e.g. d, it, and t, "I" or "me"; d-akus-t, "it see I" = I see it; d-arrai-t, "it follows me." The demonstratives are used as articles: gazt-en-or, "this younger one"; andre-ori, "this lady at some distance." The reflective "self" is expressed by buru, "head." The relative does not exist, and in its place is used as a kind of verbal participle with the ending n: doa, "he goes"; doana, "he who is going"; in the modern Basque, however, by imitation of French or Spanish, the interrogative zein, zoin, is used as a relative. Other interrogatives are nor, "who"; zer, "what"; zembait, "how much," &c. Bat, "one"; batzu, "several"; bakotch, "each"; norbait, "some one"; hanitz or hainitz, "much"; elkar, "both"; are the most common indefinite pronouns. The numeral system is vicesimal; e.g. 34 is hogoi ta hamalaur, "twenty and fourteen." The numbers from one to ten are: 1, bat; 2, bi; 3, hiru; 4, lau; 5, bortz or bost; 6, sei; 7, zazpi; 8, zortzi; 9, bederatzi; 10, hamar; 20, hogoi or hogei; 40, berrogoi (i.e. twice twenty); 100, ehun. There is no genuine word for a thousand.

The personal pronouns, which might seem similar to those in Semitic or Hamitic languages at first glance, are ni, "I"; hi, "you"; gu, "we"; zu, "you" in contemporary usage; zu has become a polite version of "you," and a true plural "you" (meaning more than one) is created by adding the pluralizing sign k—zuek. The third-person pronouns are just demonstratives. There are three: hura or kura, "that"; hau or kau, "this"; ori or kori, "this" or "that." Other unspecified forms can be found in verb inflections, for example, d, it, and t, "I" or "me"; d-akus-t, "it see I" = I see it; d-arrai-t, "it follows me." The demonstratives are used as articles: gazt-en-or, "this younger one"; andre-ori, "this lady at some distance." The reflective "self" is expressed by buru, "head." There is no relative pronoun, and it is replaced by a type of verbal participle ending in n: doa, "he goes"; doana, "he who is going"; however, in modern Basque, by mimicry of French or Spanish, the interrogative zein, zoin, is used as a relative pronoun. Other interrogatives include nor, "who"; zer, "what"; zembait, "how much," etc. Bat, "one"; batzu, "several"; bakotch, "each"; norbait, "someone"; hanitz or hainitz, "much"; elkar, "both" are the most common indefinite pronouns. The numeral system is based on twenty; for example, 34 is hogoi ta hamalaur, "twenty and fourteen." The numbers from one to ten are: 1, bat; 2, bi; 3, hiru; 4, lau; 5, bortz or bost; 6, sei; 7, zazpi; 8, zortzi; 9, bederatzi; 10, hamar; 20, hogoi or hogei; 40, berrogoi (meaning twice twenty); 100, ehun. There is no true word for a thousand.

The genders in Basque grammar are distinguished only in the verbal forms, in which the sex of the person addressed is indicated by a special suffix; so that eztakit means, "I do not know it"; but to a woman one says also: eztakinat, "I do not know it, oh woman!" To a man one says: eztakiat (for eztakikat), "I do not know it, oh man!" moreover, certain dialectic varieties have a respectful form: eztakizut, "I do not know it, you respectable one," from which also a childish form is derived, eztakichut, "I do not know it, oh child!"

The genders in Basque grammar are only distinguished in the verb forms, where the sex of the person being addressed is shown by a specific suffix; so eztakit means, "I don’t know it"; but when speaking to a woman, you say: eztakinat, "I don’t know it, oh woman!" When speaking to a man, you say: eztakiat (instead of eztakikat), "I don’t know it, oh man!" Additionally, some dialects have a respectful form: eztakizut, "I don’t know it, you respectable one," which also has a childish form: eztakichut, "I don’t know it, oh child!"

The Basque conjugation appears most complicated, since it incorporates not only the subject pronouns, but, at the same time, the indirect and direct complement. Each transitive form may thus offer twenty-four variations—"he gives it," "he gives it to you," "he gives them to us," &c., &c. Primitively there were two tenses only, an imperfect and a present, which were distinguished in the transitive verb by the place of the personal subject element: dakigu, "we are knowing it" (gu, i.e. we), and ginaki, "we were knowing it"; in the intransitive by a nasalization of the radical: niz, "I am"; nintz, "I was." In modern times a conjectural future has been derived by adding the suffix ke, dakiket, "I will, shall or probably can know it." No proper moods are known, but subjunctive or conjunctive forms are formed by adding a final n, as dakusat, "I am looking at it"; dakusadan, "if I see it." No voices appear to have been used in the same radical, so that there are separate transitive and intransitive verbs.

The Basque conjugation seems very complex because it includes not only the subject pronouns but also the indirect and direct objects. Each transitive form can have up to twenty-four variations—"he gives it," "he gives it to you," "he gives them to us," etc. Originally, there were just two tenses: an imperfect and a present, which were distinguished in the transitive verb by the position of the personal subject element: dakigu, "we are knowing it" (gu, i.e. we), and ginaki, "we were knowing it"; in the intransitive form, a nasalization of the root indicated the tense: niz, "I am"; nintz, "I was." Nowadays, a hypothetical future has been created by adding the suffix ke, as in dakiket, "I will, shall, or probably can know it." There are no proper moods, but subjunctive or conjunctive forms are created by adding a final n, like dakusat, "I am looking at it"; dakusadan, "if I see it." It seems that no voices were used in the same root, so there are separate transitive and intransitive verbs.

In its present state Basque only employs its regular conjugation exceptionally; but it has developed, probably under the influence of neo-Latin, a most extensive conjugation by combining a few auxiliary verbs and what may be called participles, in fact declined nouns: ikusten dut, "I have it in seeing," "I see it"; ikusiko dut, "I have it to be seen," "I will see it," &c. The principal auxiliaries are: izan, "to be"; and ukan, "to have"; but edin, "to can"; eza, "to be able"; egin, "to make"; joan, "to go"; eroan, "to draw," "to move," are also much used in this manner.

In its current form, Basque rarely uses its standard conjugation; instead, it has likely developed, influenced by neo-Latin, a very extensive way of conjugating by combining a few auxiliary verbs with what could be called participles, which are actually declined nouns: ikusten dut, "I have it in seeing," "I see it"; ikusiko dut, "I have it to be seen," "I will see it," etc. The main auxiliary verbs are: izan, "to be"; and ukan, "to have"; but edin, "to can"; eza, "to be able"; egin, "to make"; joan, "to go"; eroan, "to draw," "to move," are also frequently used this way.

The syntax is simple, the phrases are short and generally the order of words is: subject, complement, verb. The determining element follows the determined: gizon handia, "man great the"—the great man: the genitive, however, precedes the nominative—gizonaren etchea, "the man's house." Composition is common and it has caused several juxtaposed words to be combined and contracted, so that they are partially fused with one another—a process called polysyntheticism; odei, "cloud," and ots, "noise," form odots, "thunder"; belar, "forehead," and oin, "foot," give belaun, "knee," front of the foot. The vocabulary is poor; general and synthetic words are often wanting; but particular terms abound. There is no proper term for "sister," but arreba, a man's sister, is distinguished from ahizpa, a woman's sister. We find no original words for abstract ideas, and God is simply "the Lord of the high."

The syntax is straightforward, the phrases are brief, and generally, the order of words is: subject, complement, verb. The determining element comes after the determined: gizon handia, "man great the"—the great man; however, the genitive precedes the nominative—gizonaren etchea, "the man's house." Composition is common, leading to several combined and contracted words that are partially fused together—a process called polysyntheticism; odei, "cloud," and ots, "noise," combine to form odots, "thunder"; belar, "forehead," and oin, "foot," create belaun, "knee," front of the foot. The vocabulary is limited; general and synthetic words are often lacking, but there are plenty of specific terms. There is no exact term for "sister," but arreba, a man's sister, is different from ahizpa, a woman's sister. We find no original words for abstract ideas, and God is simply "the Lord of the high."

The vocabulary, however, varies extremely from place to place and the dialectic varieties are very numerous. They have been summed up by Prince L. L. Bonaparte as eight; these may be reduced to three principal groups: the eastern, comprising the Souletine and the two lower Navarrese; the central formed by the two upper Navarrese, the Guipúzcoan and the Labourdine; and the western, formed by the Biscayan, spoken too in Álava. These names are drawn from the territorial subdivisions, although the dialects do not exactly correspond with them.

The vocabulary, however, varies greatly from place to place, and there are many different dialects. Prince L. L. Bonaparte summarized them as eight, which can be grouped into three main categories: the eastern group, which includes Souletine and the two lower Navarrese; the central group, made up of the two upper Navarrese, the Guipúzcoan, and the Labourdine; and the western group, which consists of the Biscayan, also spoken in Álava. These names are based on territorial divisions, even though the dialects don't perfectly align with them.

Ethnology and Anthropology.—The earliest notices of the geography of Spain, from the 5th century B.C., represent Spain as occupied by a congeries of tribes distinguished mainly as Iberi, Celtiberi and Celts. These had no cohesion together, and unless temporarily united against some foreign foe, were at war with one another and were in constant movement; the ruder tribes being driven northwards by the advancing tide of Mediterranean civilization. The tribes in the south in Baetica had, according to Trogus and Strabo, written laws, poems of ancient date and a literature. Of this nothing has reached us. We have only some inscriptions, legends on coins, marks on pottery and on megalithic monuments, in alphabets slightly differing, and belonging to six geographical districts. These still await an interpreter; but they show that a like general language was once spoken through the whole of Spain, and for a short distance on [v.03 p.0487]the northern slope of the Pyrenees. The character of the letters is clearly of Levant origin, but the particular alphabets, to which each may be referred, and their connexion, if any, with the Basque, are still undetermined. It was early remarked by the classical scholars among the Basques after the Renaissance that certain names in the ancient toponymy of Spain, though transcribed by Greek and Latin writers, i.e. by foreigners, ignorant of the language, yet bear a strong resemblance to actual place-names in Basque (e.g. Iliberis, Iriberry); and in a few cases (Mondiculeia, Mendigorry; Iluro, Oloron) the site itself shows the reason of the name. Andres de Poza (1587), Larramendi (1760), Juan B. Erro (1806) and others had noted some of these facts, but it was W. von Humboldt (1821) who first aroused the attention of Europe to them. This greater extension of a people speaking a language akin to the Basque throughout Spain, and perhaps in Sicily and Sardinia, has been accepted by the majority of students, though some competent Basque scholars deny it; and the certain connexion of the Basques, either with the Iberians or Celtiberians, whether in race or language, cannot be said to be conclusively proved as long as the so-called Celtiberian inscriptions remain uninterpreted. (See also Iberians.)

Ethnology and Anthropology.—The earliest accounts of the geography of Spain, dating back to the 5th century B.C., depict Spain as being inhabited by a mix of tribes primarily identified as Iberi, Celtiberi, and Celts. These tribes lacked unity and were typically at war with each other, unless they temporarily banded together against a common enemy; they were constantly on the move, with the more primitive tribes being pushed northward by the rise of Mediterranean civilization. The tribes in the southern region of Baetica reportedly had, according to Trogus and Strabo, written laws, ancient poems, and a body of literature. Unfortunately, none of this has survived. All that remains are some inscriptions, legends on coins, markings on pottery, and megalithic monuments, which use slightly different alphabets belonging to six distinct geographical areas. These artifacts still need interpretation, but they indicate that a similar general language was once spoken throughout most of Spain and possibly a short distance on the northern slope of the Pyrenees. The letters clearly have a Levantine origin, but the specific alphabets they belong to and any connection to the Basque language remain unclear. Notably, classical scholars among the Basques after the Renaissance observed that certain names in ancient Spanish place names, although recorded by Greek and Latin writers who were unfamiliar with the language, strongly resemble current Basque place names (for example, Iliberis, Iriberry); in some instances (like Mondiculeia, Mendigorry; Iluro, Oloron), the geographical location itself explains the name. Andres de Poza (1587), Larramendi (1760), Juan B. Erro (1806), and others documented some of these observations, but it was W. von Humboldt (1821) who first brought them to the attention of Europe. The idea that a population speaking a language related to Basque once existed throughout Spain, and possibly in Sicily and Sardinia, is now accepted by most scholars, though some qualified Basque researchers dispute it; the definitive connection between the Basques and either the Iberians or Celtiberians, in terms of race or language, remains unproven as long as the so-called Celtiberian inscriptions are still not interpreted. (See also Iberians.)

After so many centuries of close contact and interpenetration with other peoples, we can hardly expect to find a pure physical type among the present Basques. All that we can expect is to be able to differentiate them from their neighbours. The earliest notice we have of the Basques, by Einhard (778), speaks of their wonderful agility. The next, the pilgrim of the Codex Calixtinus (12th century), says the Basques are fairer in face (facie candiliores) than the Navarrese.

After so many centuries of close contact and blending with other groups, it’s unrealistic to expect to find a completely pure physical type among the current Basques. All we can do is try to differentiate them from their neighbors. The earliest mention we have of the Basques, by Einhard (778), talks about their incredible agility. The next reference, from the pilgrim of the Codex Calixtinus (12th century), states that the Basques have fairer faces (facie candiliores) than the people of Navarre.

Anthropologists no longer rely solely on craniology, and the measurement of the skull, to distinguish race. The researches of Aranzadi (1889 and 1905) and of Collignon (1899) show them as less fair than northern Europeans, but fairer than any of the southern races; not so tall as the Scandinavians, Teutons or British, but taller than their neighbours of southern races. There is no tendency to prognathism, as in some of the Celts. The profile is often very fine; the carriage is remarkably upright. Neither markedly brachycephalous nor dolichocephalous, the skull has yet certain peculiarities. In the conjunction of the whole physical qualities, says Collignon, there is a Basque type, differing from all those he has studied in Europe and northern Africa. There are differences of type among themselves, yet, when they emigrate to South America, French and Spanish Basques are known simply as Basques, distinct from all other races.

Anthropologists no longer just use craniology and skull measurements to identify race. Research by Aranzadi (1889 and 1905) and Collignon (1899) indicates that they are less fair-skinned than northern Europeans but fairer than southern races. They're not as tall as Scandinavians, Teutons, or the British, but taller than their southern neighbors. There's no tendency toward prognathism, which can be seen in some Celts. Their profile is often very refined, and their posture is notably upright. The skull is neither particularly brachycephalic nor dolichocephalic, yet it has its own unique features. According to Collignon, when considering all physical traits, there's a Basque type that stands out from all others he has examined in Europe and northern Africa. Although there are variations among them, when they move to South America, French and Spanish Basques are simply referred to as Basques, different from all other races.

On the origin of the Basques, the chief theories are:—(1) that they are descended from the tribes whom the Greeks and Latins called Iberi; (2) that they belong to some of the fairer Berber tribes ("Eurafrican," Hervé) and through the ancient Libyans, from a people depicted on the Egyptian monuments; (3) the Atlantic theory, that they belong to a lost Atlantic continent, whose inhabitants were represented by the Guanches of the Canary Islands, and by a fair race on the western coast of Africa; (4) that they are an indigenous race, who have never had any greater extension than their present quarters.

On the origin of the Basques, the main theories are:—(1) that they are descended from the tribes that the Greeks and Romans referred to as Iberi; (2) that they are related to some of the lighter-skinned Berber tribes ("Eurafrican," Hervé) and trace their roots back to an ancient people shown in Egyptian monuments; (3) the Atlantic theory, which suggests they come from a lost Atlantic continent, whose people are represented by the Guanches of the Canary Islands and a lighter-skinned group on the western coast of Africa; (4) that they are an indigenous group who have never expanded beyond their current territory.

The remains of prehistoric races hitherto discovered in Spain throw little light on the subject, but some skulls found in southeastern Spain in the age of metal resemble the Basque skulls of Zaraus.

The remains of prehistoric people found so far in Spain provide limited insight into the topic, but some skulls discovered in southeastern Spain during the metal age are similar to the Basque skulls from Zaraus.

The megalithic remains, the dolmens, menhirs, cromlechs and stone circles are said to resemble more closely those of northern Africa than the larger remains of Brittany and of the British Isles. Aristotle tells us that the Iberi fixed obelisks round the tomb of each warrior in number equal to the enemies he had slain (Polit. vii. c. 2. 6), but proof is wanting that these Iberi were Basques.

The megalithic remains, like dolmens, menhirs, cromlechs, and stone circles, are said to be more similar to those in northern Africa than to the larger structures found in Brittany and the British Isles. Aristotle tells us that the Iberi placed obelisks around the tomb of each warrior, in a number equal to the enemies he had killed (Polit. vii. c. 2. 6), but there is no evidence that these Iberi were Basques.

Iberian inscriptions have been found on the so-called toros de guisando, rude stone bulls or boars, on other monuments of northern Spain and in ancient sepulchres; some of these figures, e.g. at the Cerro de los Santos in Murcia, recall the physical type of the modern Basques, but they are associated with others of very varied types.

Iberian inscriptions have been discovered on the so-called toros de guisando, rough stone bulls or boars, on other monuments in northern Spain and in ancient tombs; some of these figures, e.g. at the Cerro de los Santos in Murcia, resemble the physical type of modern Basques, but they are linked with others of very different types.

Of the religion of the Basques anterior to Christianity, little is certainly known. The few notices we have point to a worship of the elements, the sun, the moon and the morning star, and to a belief in the immortality of the unburnt and unburied body. The custom of the couvade, attributed by Strabo to the Cantabri, is unknown among the modern Basques. As elsewhere, the Romans assimilated Basque local deities to their own pantheon, thus we find Deo Baicorrixo (Baigorry) and Herauscorrtsehe in Latin inscriptions. But the name which the Basques themselves give to the Deity is Jaincoa, Jaungoikoa, which may mean lord or master, Lord of the high; but in the dialect of Roncal, Goikoa means "the moon," and Jaungoikokoa would mean "Lord of the moon." The term Jaun, lord or master, Etcheko Jauna, the lord or master of the house, is applied to every householder.

Of the Basque religion before Christianity, not much is definitively known. The few accounts we have suggest that they worshiped the elements, the sun, the moon, and the morning star, and believed in the immortality of bodies that are neither burned nor buried. The practice of the couvade, which Strabo attributed to the Cantabri, is not known among modern Basques. Like elsewhere, the Romans incorporated Basque local gods into their own pantheon; thus we find Deo Baicorrixo (Baigorry) and Herauscorrtsehe in Latin inscriptions. However, the name that the Basques themselves use for God is Jaincoa, Jaungoikoa, which may mean lord or master, or Lord of the high; but in the Roncal dialect, Goikoa means "the moon," so Jaungoikokoa would mean "Lord of the moon." The term Jaun, meaning lord or master, as in Etcheko Jauna, the lord or master of the house, is used for all household heads.

There is no aid to be got from folk-tales; none can be considered exclusively Basque and the literature is altogether too modern. The first book printed in Basque, the Linguae Vasconum Primitiae, the poems of Bernard d'Echepare, is dated 1545. The work which is considered the standard of the language is the Protestant translation of the New Testament made by Jean de Liçarrague, under the auspices of Jeanne d'Albret, and printed at La Rochelle in 1571. The pastorales are open-air dramas, like the moralities and mysteries of the middle ages. They are derived from French materials; but a dancing chorus, invariably introduced, and other parts of the mise-en-scène, point to possibly earlier traditions. No MS. hitherto discovered is earlier than the 18th century. The greater part of the other literature is religious and translated. It is only recently that a real literature has been attempted in Basque with any success.

There’s no help to be found in folk tales; none can be seen as purely Basque, and the literature is generally too modern. The first book printed in Basque, the Linguae Vasconum Primitiae, the poems of Bernard d'Echepare, dates back to 1545. The work regarded as the standard of the language is the Protestant translation of the New Testament done by Jean de Liçarrague, with the support of Jeanne d'Albret, and printed in La Rochelle in 1571. The pastorales are outdoor dramas, similar to the moralities and mysteries of the Middle Ages. They come from French sources; however, the dancing chorus and other elements of the mise-en-scène suggest possibly older traditions. No manuscript found so far is earlier than the 18th century. Most of the other literature is religious and translated. It’s only recently that a genuine Basque literature has been attempted with any success.

In spite of this modernity in literature there are other matters which show how strong the conservatism of the Basques really is. Thus, in dealing with the language, the only true measure of the antiquity of the race, we find that all cutting instruments are of stone; that the week has only three days. There are also other survivals now fast disappearing. Instead of the plough, the Basques used the laya, a two-pronged short-handled steel digging fork, admirably adapted to small properties, where labour is abundant. They alone of the peoples of western Europe have preserved specimens of almost every class of dance known to primitive races. These are (1) animal (or possibly totem) dances, in which men personate animals, the bear, the fox, the horse, &c.; (2) dances to represent agriculture and the vintage performed with wine-skins; (3) the simple arts, such as weaving, where the dancers, each holding a long coloured ribbon, dance round a pole on which is gradually formed a pattern like a Scotch tartan; (4) war-dances, as the sword-dance and others; (5) religious dances in procession before the Host and before the altar; (6) ceremonial dances in which both sexes take part at the beginning and end of a festival, and to welcome distinguished people. How large a part these played in the life of the people, and the value attached to them, may be seen in the vehement defence of the religious dances by Father Larramendi, S.J., in his Corografia de Guipúzcoa, and by the large sums paid for the privilege of dancing the first Saut Basque on the stage at the close of a Pastorale.

In spite of the modern trends in literature, there are still signs of how strong Basque conservatism remains. For example, when it comes to language, the only true measure of the race's age, we notice that all cutting tools are made of stone, and the week consists of just three days. There are also other traditional practices that are quickly fading away. Instead of using a plow, the Basques traditionally used the laya, a two-pronged, short-handled steel digging fork, which is great for small farms where labor is plentiful. They are the only people in Western Europe who have maintained examples of nearly every type of dance associated with primitive cultures. These include (1) animal (or possibly totem) dances where men impersonate animals like the bear, fox, horse, etc.; (2) dances representing agriculture and the harvest, performed with wine-skins; (3) simple arts like weaving, where dancers holding long colored ribbons perform around a pole, creating a pattern similar to a Scottish tartan; (4) war dances, such as sword dances and others; (5) religious dances that take place in procession before the Host and the altar; (6) ceremonial dances involving both men and women at the start and end of festivals, as well as to welcome honored guests. The significant role these dances played in people's lives and the value placed on them is evident in the passionate defense of religious dances by Father Larramendi, S.J., in his Corografia de Guipúzcoa, and in the large sums paid for the opportunity to perform the first Saut Basque on stage at the end of a Pastorale.

The old Basque house is the product of a land where stone and timber were almost equally abundant. The front-work is of wood with carved beams; the balconies and huge over-hanging roof recall the Swiss chalet, but the side and back walls are of stone often heavily buttressed. The cattle occupy the ground-floor, and the first storey is reached often by an outside staircase. The carven tombstones with their ornaments resemble those of Celtic countries, and are found also at Bologna in Italy.

The old Basque house reflects a place where stone and timber were both plentiful. The exterior features wooden carvings and beams, while the balconies and large overhanging roof bring to mind a Swiss chalet. However, the side and back walls are made of stone, often strongly supported. Cattle are kept on the ground floor, and you usually access the first floor via an outdoor staircase. The carved tombstones with their designs are similar to those found in Celtic regions and can also be seen in Bologna, Italy.

In customs, in institutions, in administration, in civil and political life there is no one thing that we can say is peculiarly and exclusively Basque; but their whole system taken together marks them off from other people and especially from their neighbours.

In customs, in institutions, in administration, and in civil and political life, there's nothing we can point to that is uniquely and exclusively Basque; however, their entire system combined sets them apart from other people, especially their neighbors.

Character.—The most marked features in the Basque character are an intense self-respect, a pride of race and an obstinate conservatism. Much has been written in ridicule of the claim of all Basques to be noble, but it was a fact both in the laws of [v.03 p.0488]Spain, in the fueros and in practice. Every Basque freeholder (vecino) could prove himself noble and thus eligible to any office. They are not a town race; a Basque village consists of a few houses; the population lives in scattered habitations. They do not fear solitude, and this makes them excellent emigrants and missionaries. They are splendid seamen, and were early renowned as whale fishermen in the Bay of Biscay. They were the first to establish the cod-fishery off the coast of Newfoundland. They took their full part in the colonization of America. Basque names abound in the older colonial families, and Basque newspapers have been published in Buenos-Aires and in Los Angeles, California. As soldiers they are splendid marchers; they retain the tenacity and power of endurance which the Romans remarked in the Iberians and Celtiberians. They are better in defence than in attack. The failure to take Bilbao was the turning-point in both Carlist wars. In civil institutions and in the tenures of property the legal position of women was very high. The eldest born, whether boy or girl, inherited the ancestral property, and this not only among the higher classes but among the peasantry also. In the fueros an insult done to a woman, or in the presence of a woman, is punished more severely than a similar offence among men. This did not prevent women from working as hard as, or even harder than, the men. All authors speak of the robust appearance of the women-rowers on the Bidassoa, and of those who loaded and unloaded the ships in Bilbao.

Character.—The most notable traits of the Basque character are strong self-respect, pride in their heritage, and a stubborn conservatism. A lot has been written mocking the Basque claim to nobility, but it was indeed reflected in Spanish law, in the fueros, and in practice. Every Basque landowner (vecino) could prove his noble status, making him eligible for any office. They aren't an urban people; a Basque village is made up of just a few houses, with the population living in scattered homes. They aren’t afraid of solitude, which makes them excellent emigrants and missionaries. They are exceptional sailors and were well-known early on as whale fishermen in the Bay of Biscay. They were the first to start the cod fishery off the coast of Newfoundland and played a significant role in the colonization of America. Basque surnames are common among older colonial families, and Basque newspapers have been published in Buenos Aires and Los Angeles, California. As soldiers, they are fantastic marchers; they carry the tenacity and endurance that the Romans noted in the Iberians and Celtiberians. They're better at defense than at offense. The failure to capture Bilbao was a crucial moment in both Carlist wars. In terms of civil institutions and property rights, women held a very high legal status. The firstborn, whether male or female, inherited family property, and this applied to both the upper classes and the peasantry. The fueros mandated that an insult against a woman, or in the presence of a woman, is punished more severely than a similar offense among men. This didn't stop women from working as hard, or even harder, than the men. All writers comment on the strong appearance of the women rowers on the Bidassoa, as well as those who loaded and unloaded ships in Bilbao.

Institutions.—In their municipal institutions they kept the old Roman term respublica for the civitas and the territory belonging to it. All municipal officers were elective in some form or other, and there is hardly any mode of election, from universal suffrage to nomination by a single person chosen by lot, that the Basques have not tried. The municipalities sent deputies to the juntas or parliaments of each province. These assemblies took place originally in the open air, as in other parts of the Pyrenees, under trees, the most celebrated of which is the oak of Guernica in Biscay, or under copses, as the Bilzaar in the French Pays Basque. The cortes of Navarre met at Pamplona. Delegates from the juntas met annually to consider the common interests of the three provinces. Besides the separate municipalities and the juntas, there were often associations and assemblies of three or five towns, or of three or four valleys, to preserve the special privilege or for the special needs of each. Hence was formed a habit of self-government, the practice of legislative, judicial and administrative functions, which resulted gradually in a code of written or unwritten laws embodied in the fueros or fors of each province, and the cartas-pueblos of the towns. In form these fueros or charters are often grants from the lord or sovereign; in reality they are only a confirmation or codification of unwritten customary laws in practice among the people, the origin of which is lost in antiquity. The kings of Castile, of Spain and of Navarre were obliged at their accession, either in person, or by deputy, to swear to observe these fueros; and this oath was really kept. While the cortes were trampled upon and absolutism reigned both in Spain and in France, the Basque fueros were respected; in Spain to the middle of the 19th century and in France down to the Revolution. The fueros thus observed made the Basque provinces a land apart (una tierra apartada), a self-governing republic (una verdadera autonomia), under an absolute monarchy, to which, however, they were always loyal. And this independence was acknowledged, not only in local, but also in international and European treaties, as in art. 15 of the treaty of Utrecht 1713. So the act of the 3rd of June 1876, which assimilated the Basque Provinces to the rest of Spain, acknowledged the true self-government which they had enjoyed for centuries.

Institutions.—In their local governments, they maintained the old Roman term respublica for the civitas and its territory. All local officials were elected in various ways, and the Basques experimented with almost every election method possible, from universal suffrage to a single person nominated through a lottery. The municipalities sent representatives to the juntas or parliaments of each province. These assemblies originally took place outdoors, like in other parts of the Pyrenees, under trees, the most famous being the oak of Guernica in Biscay, or in groves, like the Bilzaar in the French Pays Basque. The cortes of Navarre convened in Pamplona. Delegates from the juntas met annually to discuss the shared interests of the three provinces. Besides the individual municipalities and juntas, there were often associations and assemblies of three or five towns, or three or four valleys, organized to maintain specific privileges or address particular needs. This fostered a culture of self-governance and the practice of legislative, judicial, and administrative functions, which gradually led to a set of written or unwritten laws represented in the fueros or fors of each province and the cartas-pueblos of the towns. Formally, these fueros or charters often appear as grants from the lord or sovereign; in reality, they were merely confirmations or codifications of unwritten customary laws that the people had practiced, with origins lost to history. Kings of Castile, Spain, and Navarre were required at their accession, either in person or through representatives, to vow to uphold these fueros; and this oath was indeed honored. While the cortes were disregarded and absolutism ruled in both Spain and France, the Basque fueros were respected; in Spain until the mid-19th century and in France until the Revolution. The adherence to these fueros made the Basque provinces a distinct land (una tierra apartada), a self-governing republic (una verdadera autonomia), under an absolute monarchy, to which they were always loyal. This independence was recognized not just locally but also in international and European treaties, such as article 15 of the treaty of Utrecht 1713. Therefore, the act of June 3, 1876, which integrated the Basque Provinces into the rest of Spain, acknowledged the genuine self-government they had enjoyed for centuries.

The circumstances and methods which enabled the Basques to preserve this independence were, first, the isolation caused by their peculiar language; next, the mountainous and easily-defended nature of the country, its comparative poverty and the possession of a sea-board. Then there were the rights and the safeguards which the fueros themselves gave against encroachments. The rights were:—freedom of election to all offices and to the juntas; exemption from all forced military service except for the defence of the country and under their own officers; and payment beforehand exacted for all service beyond their own frontiers (this did not of course exclude voluntary service of individuals in the Spanish or French armies). Then there was free trade with foreign nations, and especially between the Basques of both nations. The customs' frontier of Spain really began on the Ebro. Then no decree or sentence of the royal authorities could have effect in the provinces except countersigned by the junta. Otherwise the resisting and even the killing of a royal officer was no murder. But chiefest of all the safeguards was the provision that no tax or contribution should be levied or paid to the crown till all petitions had been heard and wrongs redressed; that such a vote should be the last act of the junta or cortes, and the money should be paid not as a demand of right or a tax, but as a free gift and above all a voluntary one. It was paid in a lump sum, and the repartition and levying were left entirely in the hands of the junta and the municipalities.

The circumstances and methods that allowed the Basques to maintain their independence were, first, the isolation created by their unique language; next, the mountainous terrain that was easy to defend, its relative poverty, and access to the coast. Additionally, there were the rights and protections provided by the fueros against encroachments. These rights included: the freedom to elect all officials and to the juntas; exemption from mandatory military service except for defending the country and under their own officers; and prepayment required for any service beyond their own borders (this, of course, didn't prevent individuals from voluntarily serving in the Spanish or French armies). There was also free trade with foreign nations, especially between the Basques from both Spain and France. The customs frontier of Spain actually began at the Ebro River. Moreover, no decree or ruling from the royal authorities could take effect in the provinces without being countersigned by the junta. Otherwise, resisting or even killing a royal officer wasn’t considered murder. However, the most important safeguard was the provision that no tax or payment could be collected for the crown until all petitions had been addressed and wrongs corrected; that such a vote should be the final act of the junta or cortes, and that the money should be given not as a demand of right or a tax, but as a free gift and, above all, as a voluntary contribution. It was paid in a lump sum, with the distribution and collection entirely in the hands of the junta and the municipalities.

As a further precaution against the inroads of absolutism, no lawyer was allowed to be a deputy to the junta and all clergy were likewise excluded. The Basques considered that men of these professions would be always on the side of tyranny. One lawyer (letrado) was present at the juntas for consultation on the points of law, but he was not allowed to vote. So strictly was this observed that after the battle of Vitoria in 1813, when it was difficult to get together a quorum for the reorganization of the country, the letrado, though one of the most active and influential members in consultation, was not allowed to vote.

As an additional precaution against the rise of absolutism, no lawyer was permitted to be a deputy to the junta, and all clergy were also excluded. The Basques believed that individuals from these professions would always align with tyranny. One lawyer (letrado) was present at the juntas to provide legal advice, but he was not allowed to vote. This rule was enforced so strictly that after the battle of Vitoria in 1813, when it was challenging to gather enough members for the country's reorganization, the letrado, despite being one of the most active and influential participants in discussions, was still not allowed to cast a vote.

The relations between Church and State among the Basques have been very remarkable. They are a highly religious people, eminently conservative in their religious practices. In religion alone, through Ignatius de Loyola of Guipúzcoa and Francis Xavier of Navarre, they have left their mark upon Europe. They have kept the earliest form of Christian marriage and of the primitive order of deaconesses, forgotten elsewhere in the West. The feast of Corpus Christi instituted by Pope Urban IV. (1262) still appears in Basque almanacs as Phesta-berria, the New Feast. The earliest notice that we have of them speaks of their liberality to the clergy; yet with all this religious conservatism they have never allowed themselves to be priest-ridden. They constantly resisted the attempts of the crown to force upon them the authority of the Spanish bishops. When Ferdinand the Catholic came to Biscay in 1477 to swear to the fueros, he was compelled to send back the bishop of Pamplona whom he had brought with him. No strange priest could enter the town when the junta was sitting, and in some places if a deputy was seen speaking to a priest before a session he lost his vote for that day. The bishops had no share in ecclesiastical patronage in Guipúzcoa; all was in the hands of the king, of the nobles or of the municipalities, or else the priests were chosen by competitive examination or elected by the people. They would not allow the priest to interfere with the games or dances, and when the drama was forbidden in all Spain in 1757 by the authority of the Spanish bishops, the cortes of Navarre compelled the king to withdraw the order.

The relationship between the Church and State among the Basques has been quite notable. They are a deeply religious people, very conservative in their religious practices. Through Ignatius de Loyola from Guipúzcoa and Francis Xavier from Navarre, they have left their impression on Europe through their faith. They have preserved the earliest form of Christian marriage and the original order of deaconesses, which have been forgotten in other parts of the West. The feast of Corpus Christi established by Pope Urban IV. (1262) still appears in Basque calendars as Phesta-berria, the New Feast. The first records we have about them mention their generosity towards the clergy; however, despite this religious conservatism, they have never allowed themselves to be dominated by priests. They consistently resisted the crown's attempts to impose the authority of the Spanish bishops on them. When Ferdinand the Catholic came to Biscay in 1477 to pledge to the fueros, he had to send back the bishop of Pamplona that he had brought along. No foreign priest could enter the town while the junta was in session, and in some places, if a deputy was seen talking to a priest before a session, they would lose their vote for that day. The bishops had no role in ecclesiastical patronage in Guipúzcoa; it was all managed by the king, nobles, or municipalities, or the priests were selected through competitive exams or elected by the people. They would not permit priests to interfere with games or dances, and when the Spanish bishops banned drama across Spain in 1757, the cortes of Navarre forced the king to lift the order.

For a stranger coming from lands of larger farms and apparently higher cultivation, the agriculture of the Basques seems poor, but the old scattered homesteads show a sense of security that has been lacking in many parts of Spain; and the Basques have shown great adaptability in suiting their agriculture to new conditions, helped by the presence of the courts at San Sebastian and Biarritz. When the old self-sufficient village industries declined, in consequence of the invention of machinery and manufacture elsewhere, the Basques entered at once upon emigration to the agricultural parts of the Americas, and the result has been that the Basque Provinces and the Pays Basque probably have never been more prosperous than they are now, and perhaps a new Eskual-herria and a new Eskuara are being built up in the distant lands to which they are such valued immigrants.

For someone coming from areas with larger farms and seemingly more advanced agriculture, the farming in the Basque region might seem lacking. However, the old, scattered homesteads reflect a level of security that is missing in many parts of Spain. The Basques have shown incredible adaptability in adjusting their farming practices to new circumstances, aided by the presence of courts in San Sebastian and Biarritz. When traditional self-sufficient village industries declined due to the rise of machinery and manufacturing in other regions, the Basques immediately began to emigrate to agricultural areas in the Americas. As a result, the Basque Provinces and Pays Basque are probably more prosperous now than ever, and it's possible that a new Eskual-herria and a new Eskuara are being developed in the distant lands where they are such valued immigrants.

Bibliography.—For so restricted a literature the Essai d'une bibliographie de la langue basque, by Julien Vinson (Paris, 1891), with the volume of additions and corrections, 1898, is practically exhaustive, and is a mine of information on the principal works. See also for the language, A. Oihenart, Notitia utriusque Vasconiae (Paris. 1638 and 1656), 4to., ch. xiv.; Fl. Lecluse, Manuel de la [v.03 p.0489]langue basque (Toulouse, 1826); C. Ribary, Essai sur la langue basque (1866), translated from the Hungarian by Julien Vinson (Paris, 1877); W. J. Van Eys, Grammaire comparée des dialectes basques (Paris, London, Amsterdam, 1879); Prince L. L. Bonaparte, Le Verbe basque en tableaux (London, 1864-1869); J. Vinson, articles in Revue de linguistique (Paris, 1867-1906); L'Abbé Ithurry, Grammaire basque (Bayonne, 1895-1906); Dr H. Schuchardt, Die Entstehung der Bezugsformen des Baskischen (Wien, 1893); W. J. Van Eys, Dictionnaire basque-français (Paris, 1873); R. M. de Azkue, Diccionario vascongado español-français (Tours, 1906); Monumenta Linguae Ibericae, edidit Aemilius Hubner, fol. (Berlin, 1893) (texts and introduction good; analysis and interpretation faulty). Other works of interest on various subjects are:—Wentworth Webster, Basque Legends (London, 1877 and 1879); Puyol y Camps, "La Epigraphia Numismatica Iberica," in tomo xvi. of Boletin de la Real Academia de la Historia (Madrid, 1890), (for geographical distribution of the alphabets); T. de Aranzadi, El Pueblo Euskalduna. Estudio de Antropologia (San Sebastian, 1889); and the same author's Existe una raza Euskara? Sus caracteres antropologicos (1905); La Tradition au pays basque (Paris, 1899), (a collection of papers by local authorities); Julien Vinson, Les Basques et le pays basque (Paris, 1882), a sufficient survey for the general reader; the same author's Le Folk-Lore du pays basque (Paris, 1883), treats of the Pastorales and embraces the whole Folk-Lore; Le Codex de Saint-Jacques de Compostella, lib. iv. (Paris, 1882), by R. P. F. Fita and J. Vinson, gives the first Basque vocabulary; Les Coutumes générales gardées et observées au pais & baillage de Labourt (Bordeaux, 1700); G. Olphe-Galliard, Le Paysan basque à travers les âges (Paris, 1905); Pierre Yturbide, Le Pays de Labourd avant 1789 (Bayonne, 1905), (for the time of the English domination); Henry O'Shea, La Tombe basque (Pau, 1889), (valuable for the comparison of Basque and Celtic sepulchral ornament). See also the bibliography to Basque Provinces.

References.—For such a limited literature, the Essai d'une bibliographie de la langue basque by Julien Vinson (Paris, 1891), along with the volume of additions and corrections published in 1898, is almost comprehensive and a rich source of information on the main works. Also, for the language, check out A. Oihenart’s Notitia utriusque Vasconiae (Paris, 1638 and 1656), 4to., ch. xiv.; Fl. Lecluse’s Manuel de la langue basque (Toulouse, 1826); C. Ribary’s Essai sur la langue basque (1866), translated from Hungarian by Julien Vinson (Paris, 1877); W. J. Van Eys's Grammaire comparée des dialectes basques (Paris, London, Amsterdam, 1879); Prince L. L. Bonaparte’s Le Verbe basque en tableaux (London, 1864-1869); J. Vinson’s articles in Revue de linguistique (Paris, 1867-1906); L'Abbé Ithurry’s Grammaire basque (Bayonne, 1895-1906); Dr H. Schuchardt’s Die Entstehung der Bezugsformen des Baskischen (Wien, 1893); W. J. Van Eys's Dictionnaire basque-français (Paris, 1873); R. M. de Azkue’s Diccionario vascongado español-français (Tours, 1906); Monumenta Linguae Ibericae, edited by Aemilius Hubner, fol. (Berlin, 1893) (texts and introduction are good; analysis and interpretation are flawed). Other noteworthy works on various subjects include: Wentworth Webster’s Basque Legends (London, 1877 and 1879); Puyol y Camps' "La Epigraphia Numismatica Iberica," in volume xvi of Boletin de la Real Academia de la Historia (Madrid, 1890), (for geographical distribution of the alphabets); T. de Aranzadi’s El Pueblo Euskalduna. Estudio de Antropologia (San Sebastian, 1889); and the same author’s Existe una raza Euskara? Sus caracteres antropologicos (1905); La Tradition au pays basque (Paris, 1899), (a collection of papers by local authorities); Julien Vinson’s Les Basques et le pays basque (Paris, 1882), a sufficient overview for the general reader; the same author's Le Folk-Lore du pays basque (Paris, 1883), which discusses the Pastorales and covers the entire Folk-Lore; Le Codex de Saint-Jacques de Compostella, lib. iv. (Paris, 1882), by R. P. F. Fita and J. Vinson, presents the first Basque vocabulary; Les Coutumes générales gardées et observées au pais & baillage de Labourt (Bordeaux, 1700); G. Olphe-Galliard’s Le Paysan basque à travers les âges (Paris, 1905); Pierre Yturbide’s Le Pays de Labourd avant 1789 (Bayonne, 1905), (regarding the time of English rule); Henry O'Shea’s La Tombe basque (Pau, 1889), (valuable for comparing Basque and Celtic burial ornaments). See also the bibliography for Basque Country.

(W. We.; J. Vn.)

(W. We.; J. Vn.)

BASRA (written also Busra, Bassora and Bussora), the name of a vilayet of Asiatic Turkey, and of its capital. The vilayet has an area of 16,470 sq. m., formed in 1884 by detaching the southern districts of the Bagdad vilayet. It includes the great marshy districts of the lower Euphrates and Tigris, and of their joint stream, the Shatt el-Arab, and a sanjak on the western shore of the Persian Gulf. A settled population is found only along the river banks. Except the capital, Basra, there are no towns of importance. Korna, at the junction of the two great rivers; Amara on the Tigris; Shatra on the Shatt el-Haï canal, connecting the Tigris and Euphrates; Nasrieh, at the junction of that canal with the Euphrates and Suk esh-Sheiukh, on the lower reaches of the Euphrates, are the principal settlements, with a population varying from 3000 to 10,000 or somewhat less. Along the Shatt el-Arab and the lower reaches of the Tigris and Euphrates there are vast plantations of date-palms, which produce the finest dates known. Here and there are found extensive rice-fields; liquorice, wheat, barley and roses are also cultivated in places. But in general the ancient canals on which the fertility of the country depends have been allowed to go to ruin. The whole land is subject to inundations which render settled agriculture impracticable, and the population consists chiefly of nomadic and semi-nomadic tribes whose wealth consists in herds of buffaloes, horses, sheep and goats. The principal exports are wool, dates, cereals, gum, liquorice-root and horses. The climate is humid and unhealthy. The population is estimated at about 200,000 almost exclusively Moslems, of whom three-quarters are Shi‛ites. There are about 4000 Jews and perhaps 6000 Christians, among whom are reckoned the remains of the curious sect of Sabaeans or Mandaeans, whose headquarters are in the neighbourhood of Suk esh-Sheiukh.

BASRA (also spelled Busra, Basra, and Basra) is the name of a province in Asia Minor, as well as its capital. The province covers an area of 16,470 square miles and was established in 1884 by separating the southern districts from the Bagdad province. It includes the vast marshy areas of the lower Euphrates and Tigris rivers and their combined waterway, the Shatt el-Arab, along with a district on the western shore of the Persian Gulf. A permanent population is only found along the banks of the rivers. Other than the capital, Basra, there are no significant towns. Korna is located at the confluence of the two major rivers; Amara is on the Tigris; Shatra is on the Shatt el-Haï canal, which connects the Tigris and Euphrates; Nasrieh is at the junction of that canal with the Euphrates, and Suk esh-Sheiukh is situated on the lower reaches of the Euphrates. These are the main settlements, with populations ranging from 3,000 to about 10,000 or slightly less. Along the Shatt el-Arab and the lower parts of the Tigris and Euphrates, there are large date-palm plantations that produce some of the best dates known. There are also extensive rice fields, along with crops of liquorice, wheat, barley, and roses grown in certain areas. However, the ancient canals that contributed to the region's fertility have fallen into disrepair. The entire area is prone to floods, making settled agriculture difficult, and most of the population comprises nomadic and semi-nomadic tribes whose wealth is based on herds of buffaloes, horses, sheep, and goats. The main exports include wool, dates, grains, gum, liquorice root, and horses. The climate is humid and unhealthy. The population is estimated to be around 200,000, almost entirely Muslim, with around three-quarters being Shi'ites. There are about 4,000 Jews and perhaps 6,000 Christians, including the remnant of the unique sect of Sabaeans or Mandaeans, whose center is near Suk esh-Sheiukh.

The capital of the vilayet, also called Basra, is situated in 47° 34′ E. long. and 32° N. lat., near the western bank of the Shatt el-Arab, about 55 m. from the Persian Gulf. The town proper lies on the canal el-‛Assar about 1½ to 2 m. W. of the Shatt el-Arab. There are no public buildings of importance. The houses are meanly built, partly of sun-dried and partly of burnt bricks, with flat roofs surrounded by parapets. The bazaars are miserable structures, covered with mats laid on rafters of date trees. The streets are irregular, narrow and unpaved. The greater part of the area of the town is occupied by gardens and plantations of palm-trees, intersected by a number of little canals, cleansed twice daily with the ebb and flow of the tide, which rises here about 9 ft. These canals are navigated by small boats, called bellem (plur. ablam), resembling dug-outs in form, but light and graceful. At high-tide, accordingly, the town presents a very attractive appearance, but at low-tide, when the mud banks are exposed, it seems dirty and repulsive, and the noxious exhalations are extremely trying. The whole region is subject to inundations. The town itself is unhealthy and strangers especially are apt to be attacked by fever. Basra is the port of Bagdad, with which it has steam communication by an English line of river steamers weekly and also by a Turkish line. The Shatt el-Arab is deep and broad, easily navigable for ocean steamers, and there is weekly communication by passenger steamer with India, while two or more freight lines, which also take passengers, connect Basra directly with the Mediterranean, and with European and British ports. It is the great date port of the world, and the dates of Basra are regarded as the finest in the market. Besides dates the principal articles of export are wool, horses, liquorice, gum and attar of roses. The annual value of the exports is approximately £1,000,000 and of the imports a little more. The foreign trade is almost exclusively in the hands of the English, but of late the Germans have begun to enter the market, and the Hamburg-American line of steamers has established direct communication. Since 1898 there has been a British consul at Basra (before that time he was a representative of the Indian government). France and Russia also maintain consular establishments at Basra. The settled population of Basra is probably under 50,000, but how much it is impossible to estimate. It is a heterogeneous mixture of all the nations and religions of the East—Turks, Arabs, Persians, Indians, Armenians, Chaldaeans and Jews. Of the latter there are about 1900, engaged in trade and commerce. Fewest in number are the Turks, comprising only the officials. Most numerous are the Arabs, chiefly Shi‛ites. The wealthiest and most influential personage in the capital and the vilayet is the nakib, or marshal of the nobility (i.e. descendants of the family of the prophet, who are entitled to wear the green turban). Basra is a station of the Arabian mission of the Dutch Reformed Church of America.

The capital of the vilayet, also called Basra, is located at 47° 34′ E. longitude and 32° N. latitude, near the western bank of the Shatt el-Arab, about 55 miles from the Persian Gulf. The town itself lies on the canal el-‘Assar, about 1½ to 2 miles west of the Shatt el-Arab. There are no significant public buildings. The houses are poorly constructed, some made of sun-dried bricks and others of fired bricks, with flat roofs surrounded by low walls. The bazaars are shabby structures, covered with mats laid on date tree rafters. The streets are irregular, narrow, and unpaved. Most of the town consists of gardens and palm tree plantations, crossed by several small canals, which are cleaned twice daily by the ebb and flow of the tide, rising here about 9 feet. These canals are used by small boats called bellem (plural ablam), which look like dugouts but are light and elegant. At high tide, the town looks quite appealing, but at low tide, when the mud banks are exposed, it appears dirty and uninviting, with unpleasant odors being very bothersome. The entire area is prone to flooding. The town itself is unhealthy, and especially visitors are likely to suffer from fever. Basra is the port for Baghdad, with a weekly steam service operated by an English line of river steamers, as well as a Turkish line. The Shatt el-Arab is deep and wide, making it easy for ocean steamers to navigate, and there is weekly passenger service to India, along with two or more freight lines that also take passengers connecting Basra directly to the Mediterranean and European and British ports. It is the world's major date port, and Basra dates are considered the finest on the market. Besides dates, the main exports include wool, horses, licorice, gum, and rose oil. The annual export value is around £1,000,000, with imports slightly higher. Foreign trade is almost entirely controlled by the English, although recently the Germans have started to enter the market, and the Hamburg-American line of steamers has set up direct service. Since 1898, there has been a British consul in Basra (prior to that, he represented the Indian government). France and Russia also have consular offices in Basra. The settled population of Basra is likely under 50,000, but it is difficult to estimate the exact number. It is a mixed community of people from various nations and religions in the East—Turks, Arabs, Persians, Indians, Armenians, Chaldeans, and Jews. There are about 1,900 Jews engaged in trade and commerce. The Turks are the smallest group, primarily officials. The largest group is the Arabs, mainly Shi‘ites. The wealthiest and most influential person in the capital and the vilayet is the nakib, or marshal of the nobility (i.e., descendants of the prophet's family who are entitled to wear the green turban). Basra is a station of the Arabian mission of the Dutch Reformed Church of America.

History.—The original city of Basra was founded by the caliph Omar in A.D. 636 about 8 m. S.W. of its present site, on the edge of the stony and pebbly Arabian plateau, on an ancient canal now dry. The modern town of Zobeir, a sort of health suburb, occupied by the villas of well-to-do inhabitants of Basra, lies near the ruin mounds which mark the situation of the ancient city. In the days of its prosperity it rivalled Kufa and Wasit in wealth and size, and its fame is in the tales of the Arabian Nights. With the decay of the power of the Abbasid caliphate its importance declined. The canals were neglected, communication with the Persian Gulf was cut off and finally the place was abandoned altogether. The present city was conquered by the Turks in 1668, and since that period has been the scene of many revolutions. It was taken in 1777 after a siege of eight months by the Persians under Sadik Khan. In about a year it fell again into the hands of the Turks, who were again deprived of it by the sheikh of the Montefik (Montafiq) Arabs. The town was in the October following recovered by Suleiman Pasha, who encountered the sheikh on the banks of the Euphrates and put him to flight; it has since remained in the hands of the Turks.

History.—The original city of Basra was founded by Caliph Omar in CE 636, about 8 miles southwest of where it is today, on the edge of the rocky Arabian plateau, near an ancient canal that is now dry. The modern town of Zobeir, a sort of health suburb with villas belonging to wealthy residents of Basra, is located close to the ruins that mark the site of the ancient city. In its prosperous days, Basra rivaled Kufa and Wasit in wealth and size, and its fame is captured in the stories of the Arabian Nights. As the power of the Abbasid caliphate declined, so did Basra's significance. The canals fell into disrepair, access to the Persian Gulf was lost, and eventually, the city was abandoned completely. The present city was conquered by the Turks in 1668 and has since been the site of many revolutions. It was seized in 1777 after an eight-month siege by the Persians under Sadik Khan. About a year later, it fell back into Turkish hands, only to be taken again by the sheikh of the Montefik (Montafiq) Arabs. The town was recovered in October by Suleiman Pasha, who confronted the sheikh on the banks of the Euphrates and drove him away; it has remained under Turkish control since then.

(J. P. Pe.)

(J. P. Pe.)

BASS, the name of a family of English brewers. The founder of the firm, William Bass (b. 1720), was originally a carrier, one of his chief clients being Benjamin Printon, a Burton-on-Trent brewer. By 1777 Bass had saved a little money, and seeing the growing demand for Burton beer he started as a brewer himself. The principal market for Burton beer at that time was in St Petersburg, whither the beer could be sent by water direct from Burton via the Trent and Hull, and William Bass managed to secure a tolerable share of the large Russian orders. But in 1822 the Russian government placed a prohibitory duty on Burton ales, and the Burton brewers were forced into cultivating the home market. William Bass opened up a connexion with London, and established a fairly profitable home trade. A misunderstanding between the East India Company and the London brewers who were the proprietors of Hodgson's India [v.03 p.0490]Pale Ale, at that time the standard drink of Englishmen in the East, resulted in Bass being asked to supply a beer which would withstand the Indian climate and be generally suitable to the Indian market. After a series of experiments he produced what is still known as Bass's pale ale. This new and lighter beer at once became popular all over India, and Bass's firm became the largest in Burton. After William Bass's death the business was carried on by his son, M. T. Bass, and then by his grandson, Michael Thomas Bass (1799-1884). In 1827 a vessel laden with Bass's beer was wrecked in the Irish Channel. A large proportion of the cargo was however salved and sold at Liverpool, where it met with great approval in the local market, and through this chance circumstance the firm opened up a regular trade in the north-west of England and Ireland. "Bass" was, however, little drunk in London till 1851, when it was supplied on draught at the Exhibition of that year, since which time its reputation has been world-wide. In 1880 the business was turned into a limited liability company. Michael Thomas Bass, besides actively conducting and extending the firm's operations, was a man of great public spirit and philanthropy, and the towns of Burton and Derby are largely indebted to his munificence. He took a keen interest in all questions affecting the welfare of the working classes, and was largely instrumental in securing the abolition of imprisonment for debt. On his death, prior to which he had taken into partnership Messrs Ratcliff and Gretton, two of the leading officials of the brewery, converting the business into a limited company known as Messrs Bass, Ratcliff & Gretton, Ltd., the control of the firm passed to his sons, Michael Arthur Bass and Hamar Bass (d. 1898). Michael Arthur Bass (1837-1909), after twenty-one years in parliament as member first for Stafford, then for two divisions of Staffordshire, was in 1886 raised to the peerage as Baron Burton; by a special patent of 1897 the peerage descended to his daughter, Nellie, the wife of Mr J. E. Baillie of Dochfour, the baronetcy descending to his nephew W. A. Hamar Bass (b. 1879).

BASS is the name of a family of English brewers. The founder of the firm, William Bass (b. 1720), started out as a carrier, with Benjamin Printon, a brewer from Burton-on-Trent, being one of his main clients. By 1777, Bass had saved up some money, and noticing the increasing demand for Burton beer, he became a brewer himself. At that time, the main market for Burton beer was in St Petersburg, where it could be shipped by water directly from Burton through the Trent and Hull, and William Bass managed to secure a decent share of the significant Russian orders. However, in 1822, the Russian government imposed a heavy duty on Burton ales, forcing the Burton brewers to focus on the home market. William Bass established connections with London and created a fairly profitable domestic trade. A misunderstanding between the East India Company and the London brewers, who owned Hodgson's India Pale Ale—the standard drink for Englishmen in the East—led to Bass being asked to produce a beer that could withstand the Indian climate and suit the Indian market. After a series of experiments, he created what is still known as Bass's pale ale. This new, lighter beer quickly gained popularity across India, and Bass's firm became the largest in Burton. After William Bass's death, the business was continued by his son, M. T. Bass, and then by his grandson, Michael Thomas Bass (1799-1884). In 1827, a ship carrying Bass's beer sank in the Irish Channel. A large portion of the cargo was salvaged and sold in Liverpool, where it received great acclaim in the local market, allowing the firm to establish a regular trade in the northwest of England and Ireland. However, "Bass" was only rarely consumed in London until 1851, when it was served on draft at that year's Exhibition, after which its reputation became global. In 1880, the business was converted into a limited liability company. Michael Thomas Bass, who actively managed and expanded the company's operations, was also a man of great public spirit and philanthropy, contributing significantly to the towns of Burton and Derby. He was deeply interested in issues affecting the welfare of the working class and played a key role in the abolition of imprisonment for debt. Upon his death, he had taken in partners Messrs Ratcliff and Gretton, two of the brewery's leading officials, transforming the business into a limited company called Messrs Bass, Ratcliff & Gretton, Ltd. Control of the firm then passed to his sons, Michael Arthur Bass and Hamar Bass (d. 1898). Michael Arthur Bass (1837-1909) served in parliament for twenty-one years, first representing Stafford and then two divisions of Staffordshire. In 1886, he was elevated to the peerage as Baron Burton. By a special patent in 1897, the peerage was passed down to his daughter, Nellie, who was married to Mr. J. E. Baillie of Dochfour, while the baronetcy went to his nephew W. A. Hamar Bass (b. 1879).

BASS (the same word as "base," and so pronounced, but influenced in spelling by the Ital. basso), deep, low; especially in music, the lower part in the harmony of a composition, the lowest male voice, or the lowest-pitched of a class of instruments, as the bass-clarinet.

BASS (pronounced the same as "base," but influenced in spelling by the Italian basso), refers to something deep and low, especially in music. It represents the lower part in the harmony of a composition, the lowest male voice, or the lowest-pitched instrument in a class, such as the bass clarinet.

Bass or bast (a word of doubtful origin, pronounced băs) is the fibrous bark of the lime tree, used in gardening for tying up plants, or to make mats, soft plaited baskets, &c. Basswood is the American lime-tree, Tilia Americana; white basswood is T. heterophylla.

Bass or bast (a word of uncertain origin, pronounced băs) is the fibrous bark of the lime tree, used in gardening for tying up plants, or to make mats, soft plaited baskets, etc. Basswood is the American lime tree, Tilia Americana; white basswood is T. heterophylla.

The name bass is also given to a fish closely resembling the perch.

The name bass is also used for a fish that looks a lot like the perch.

BASSA, a province of the British protectorate of Northern Nigeria, occupying the angle made by the meeting of the Benue river with the Niger. It has an area of 7000 sq. m., with a population estimated at about one and a half millions. It is bounded N. by the Benue, W. by the Niger, S. by the frontier of Southern Nigeria, and E. by the province of Muri. The province is heavily forested, and is estimated to be one of the richest of the protectorate in natural products. It has never been penetrated by Moslem influence, and is inhabited in the greater part by warlike and unruly pagans. Early in the 16th century the Igbira (Okpoto or Ibo) were one of the most powerful pagan peoples of Nigeria and had their capital at Iddah. At a later period the Bassas conquered the western portion of the state and the Munshis the eastern, while the Okpoto still held the south and a wedge-shaped district partially dividing the Munshis and Bassas. The Bassas are a very remarkable pagan race who permeate the entire protectorate of Northern Nigeria, and are to be found in small colonies in almost every province. They are clever agriculturists, naturally peaceful and industrious. The Munshis, though also good agriculturists, are a warlike and most unruly race, as are also the Okpoto.

BASSA, a province in the British protectorate of Northern Nigeria, is located at the point where the Benue River meets the Niger. It covers an area of 7,000 square miles and has a population of about 1.5 million people. It is bordered to the north by the Benue, to the west by the Niger, to the south by the boundary of Southern Nigeria, and to the east by the province of Muri. The province is densely forested and is considered one of the richest in the protectorate in terms of natural resources. It has never been significantly influenced by Islam and is mostly inhabited by fierce and unruly pagans. In the early 16th century, the Igbira (Okpoto or Ibo) were among the most powerful pagan groups in Nigeria, having their capital at Iddah. Later, the Bassas conquered the western part of the region, while the Munshis took over the eastern area, and the Okpoto maintained control over the south and a wedge-shaped area that partially separated the Munshis and Bassas. The Bassas are a notable pagan community that spreads throughout the Northern Nigerian protectorate, with small groups found in almost every province. They are skilled farmers and generally peaceful and hardworking. The Munshis, although they are also good at farming, are known to be a warlike and very unruly people, as are the Okpoto.

The districts which now comprise the province of Bassa came nominally under British control in 1900, but up to the year 1903 administrative authority was confined to the western half with Dekina (in 7° 3′ E., 7° 41′ N.) for its capital. In December of 1903 a disturbance resulting in the murder of the British resident led to the despatch of a military expedition, and as a result of the operations the frontiers of the districts under control were extended to the borders of the Munshi country in about 8° E. The western portion of the province, occupied by friendly and peaceful tribes upon the Niger, has been organized for administration on the same system as the rest of the protectorate. Courts of justice are operative and taxes are peacefully collected. The Okpoto, however, remain turbulent, as do their neighbours the Munshis. Spirits, of which the importation is forbidden in Northern Nigeria, are freely smuggled over the border from Southern Nigeria. Arms and powder are also imported. The slave-trade is still alive in this district, and an overland route for slaves is believed to have been established through eastern Bassa to the Benue. In consequence of the natural wealth of the province, there are trading establishments of the Niger Company and of Messrs Holt on the Niger and Benue, and colonies of native traders have penetrated the country from the north. Roman Catholic and Protestant missions are established at Dekina and Gbebe.

The regions that now make up the province of Bassa came under British control around 1900, but until 1903, the administrative authority only covered the western half, with Dekina (at 7° 3′ E., 7° 41′ N.) as the capital. In December 1903, a disturbance that led to the murder of the British resident prompted a military expedition. As a result of this operation, the boundaries of the districts under control were expanded to the borders of Munshi country, around 8° E. The western part of the province, inhabited by friendly and peaceful tribes along the Niger, has been organized for administration in the same way as the rest of the protectorate. Courts of justice are functioning, and taxes are being collected peacefully. However, the Okpoto continue to be disruptive, along with their neighbors, the Munshis. Spirits, which are banned from Northern Nigeria, are commonly smuggled across the border from Southern Nigeria. Weapons and ammunition are also brought in. The slave trade is still active in this district, and it’s believed that a land route for slaves has been set up through eastern Bassa to the Benue. Due to the province's natural resources, there are trading establishments from the Niger Company and Messrs Holt on the Niger and Benue, and groups of native traders have moved into the area from the north. Roman Catholic and Protestant missions have been established in Dekina and Gbebe.

BASSANO, JACOPO DA PONTE (1510-1592), Venetian painter, was born at Bassano. He was educated by his father, who was himself an artist, and then completed his studies at Venice. On the death of his father he returned to Bassano and settled there. His subjects were generally peasants and villagers, cattle and landscapes, with some portraits and historical designs. His figures are well designed, and his animals and landscapes have an agreeable air of simple nature. His compositions, though they have not much eloquence or grandeur, have abundance of force and truth; the local colours are well observed, the flesh-tints are fresh and brilliant, and his chiaroscuro and perspective are unexceptionable. He is said to have finished a great number of pictures; but his genuine works are somewhat rare and valuable—many of those which are called originals being copies either by the sons of Bassano or by others. Bassano's style varied considerably during his lifetime. He naturally was at first a copier of his father, but his productions in this style are not of great value. He was then strongly attracted by the lightness and beautiful colouring of Titian, and finally adopted the style which is recognized as his own. Although he painted few great pictures, and preferred humble subjects, yet his altar-piece of the Nativity at Bassano is estimated highly by the best judges, and in Lanzi's opinion is the finest work of its class.

BASSANO, JACOPO DA PONTE (1510-1592), was a Venetian painter born in Bassano. He learned from his father, who was also an artist, and then finished his education in Venice. After his father passed away, he returned to Bassano and settled there. His subjects primarily included peasants and villagers, cattle, and landscapes, along with some portraits and historical scenes. His figures are well-crafted, and his animals and landscapes have a pleasing simplicity. While his compositions may lack a lot of eloquence or grandeur, they are powerful and true; the local colors are accurately depicted, the flesh tones are vibrant and bright, and his use of chiaroscuro and perspective is flawless. It’s said that he completed a large number of paintings; however, his genuine works are quite rare and valuable—many pieces labeled as originals are actually copies made either by Bassano's sons or others. His style changed significantly throughout his life. He initially imitated his father, but those early works aren’t very valuable. He was later drawn to the brightness and beautiful colors of Titian, and ultimately developed his own distinctive style. Although he painted few large pieces and favored humble subjects, his altar piece of the Nativity in Bassano is highly regarded by experts, with Lanzi considering it the finest work of its kind.

BASSANO, a city of Venetia, Italy, in the province of Vicenza, 24 m. N.E. of Vicenza and 30 m. N. of Padua by rail, at the foot of the Venetian Alps. Pop. (1901) town, 7553; commune, 15,097. It is well situated upon the Brenta, which is here spanned by a covered wooden bridge, and commands fine views. The castle, erected by the Ezzelini in the 13th century, lies in the upper portion of the town, above the river; a tower, erected by a member of the same family, is a conspicuous feature. The museum and cathedral and some of the other churches contain pictures by the da Ponte family (16th and early 17th century), surnamed Bassano from their birth-place; Jacopo is the most eminent of them. The museum also contains drawings and letters of the sculptor Antonio Canova. The church of S. Francesco, begun in the 12th century in the Lombard Romanesque style, was continued in the 13th in the Gothic style. Some of the houses have traces of paintings on their façades. In the 11th century Eccelin, a German, obtained fiefs in this district from Conrad II. and founded the family of the Ezzelini, who were prominent in the history of North Italy in the 13th and 14th centuries. Bassano apparently came into existence about A.D. 1000. Its possession was disputed between Padua and Vicenza; it passed for a moment under the power of Gian Galeazzo Visconti of Milan, who fortified it. At the beginning of the 15th century it went over to Venice; its industries flourished under Venetian government, especially its printing-press and manufacture of majolica, the latter of which still continues. On the 8th of September 1796 an action was fought here between the French and the Austrians, in which the French were victorious.

BASSANO, a city in the Veneto region of Italy, located in the province of Vicenza, is 24 miles northeast of Vicenza and 30 miles north of Padua by train, at the base of the Venetian Alps. Its population in 1901 was 7,553 for the town and 15,097 for the commune. The city is ideally situated along the Brenta River, which is crossed by a covered wooden bridge that offers beautiful views. The castle, built by the Ezzelini family in the 13th century, is located in the upper part of the town, overlooking the river; a tower built by a family member stands out prominently. The museum and cathedral, along with several other churches, feature paintings by the da Ponte family (16th and early 17th century), who are known as Bassano because of their birthplace, with Jacopo being the most renowned among them. The museum also houses drawings and letters from the sculptor Antonio Canova. The church of S. Francesco, which began construction in the 12th century in the Lombard Romanesque style, continued in the 13th century with Gothic elements. Some buildings show remnants of paintings on their façades. In the 11th century, Eccelin, a German, received fiefs in this area from Conrad II and established the Ezzelini family, who played a significant role in the history of Northern Italy during the 13th and 14th centuries. Bassano likely emerged around A.D. 1000. Control of the town was contested between Padua and Vicenza; it briefly fell under the authority of Gian Galeazzo Visconti of Milan, who fortified it. At the start of the 15th century, it became part of Venice; its industries thrived under Venetian rule, particularly in printing and majolica production, which continues to this day. On September 8, 1796, a battle took place here between the French and the Austrians, resulting in a French victory.

(T. As.)

(T. As.)

BASSARAB or Bassaraba, the name of a dynasty in Rumania, which ruled Walachia from the dawn of its history until 1658. [v.03 p.0491]The origin of the name and family has not yet been explained. It undoubtedly stands in close connexion with the name of the province of Bessarabia, which oriental chroniclers gave in olden times to the whole of Walachia. The heraldic sign, three heads of negroes in the Bassarab shield, seems to be of late western origin and to rest on a popular etymology connecting the second half of the word with Arabs, who were taken to signify Moors (blacks). The other heraldic signs, the crescent and the star, have evidently been added on the same supposition of an oriental origin of the family. The Servian chroniclers connect its origin with their own nationality, basing this view upon the identification of Sarab with Sorb or Serbia. All this is mere conjecture. It is, however, a fact that the first appearance of the Bassarabs as rulers (knyaz, ban or voivod) is in the western part of Rumania (originally called Little Walachia), and also in the southern parts of Transylvania—the old dukedoms of Fogarash and Almash, which are situated on the right bank of the Olt (Aluta) and extend south to Severin and Craiova. Whatever the origin of the Bassarabs may be, the foundation of the Walachian principality is undoubtedly connected with a member of that family, who, according to tradition, came from Transylvania and settled first in Câmpulung and Tîrgovishtea. It is equally certain that almost every one of the long line of princes and voivods bore a Slavonic surname, perhaps due to the influence of the Slavonic Church, to which the Rumanians belonged. Starting from the 13th Century the Bassarabs soon split into two rival factions, known in history as the descendants of the two brothers Dan and Dragul. The form Drakul—devil—by which this line is known in history is no doubt a nickname given by the rival line. It has fastened on the family on account of the cruelties perpetrated by Vlad Drakul (1433-1446) and Vlad Tsepesh (1456-1476), who figure in popular legend as representatives of the most fiendish cruelty. The feud between the rival dynasties lasted from the beginning of the 15th century to the beginning of the 17th.

BASSARAB or Bassaraba, the name of a dynasty in Romania, ruled Wallachia from the beginning of its history until 1658. [v.03 p.0491] The origin of the name and family has not yet been clarified. It is likely closely related to the name of the province of Bessarabia, which ancient historians used to refer to the entire region of Wallachia. The heraldic symbol of three heads of black people on the Bassarab shield seems to be a later western addition, resting on a popular misinterpretation that connects part of the name to Arabs, who were often associated with Moors (blacks). Other heraldic symbols, like the crescent and star, have clearly been added based on the same assumption of an eastern origin for the family. Serbian historians link its origin to their own nationality, based on the identification of Sarab with Sorb or Serbia. All of this remains speculative. However, it is a fact that the Bassarabs first appeared as rulers (knyaz, ban, or voivod) in the western part of Romania (originally called Little Wallachia) and in southern Transylvania—the old dukedoms of Fogarash and Almash, located on the right bank of the Olt (Aluta) and extending south to Severin and Craiova. Regardless of the Bassarab origins, the establishment of the Wallachian principality is definitely linked to a member of that family, who, according to tradition, came from Transylvania and initially settled in Câmpulung and Tîrgovishtea. It is also clear that nearly every one of the long line of princes and voivods had a Slavic surname, likely due to the influence of the Slavic Church, which the Romanians followed. Beginning in the 13th century, the Bassarabs quickly divided into two rival factions, historically known as the descendants of the two brothers Dan and Dragul. The name Drakul—meaning devil—used to refer to this line is undoubtedly a nickname given by the rival faction. It became associated with the family due to the brutal actions of Vlad Drakul (1433-1446) and Vlad Țepeș (1456-1476), who are portrayed in popular legend as symbols of extreme cruelty. The feud between the rival dynasties lasted from the early 15th century until the early 17th century.

The most prominent members of the family were Mircea (1386-1418), who accepted Turkish suzerainty; Neagoe, the founder of the famous cathedral at Curtea de Argesh (q.v.); Michael, surnamed the Brave (1592-1601); and Petru Cercel, famous for his profound learning, who spoke twelve languages and carried on friendly correspondence with the greater scholars and poets of Italy. He was drowned by the Turks in Constantinople in 1590 through the intrigues of Mihnea, who succeeded him on the throne of Walachia. The British Museum possesses the oldest MSS. of the Rumanian Gospels, once owned by this Petru Cercel, and containing his autograph signature. The text was published by Dr M. Caster at the expense of the Rumanian government. Mateiu Bassarab (1633-1654) established the first printing-press in Rumania, and under his influence the first code of laws was compiled and published in Bucharest in 1654. The Bassarab dynasty became extinct with Constantine Sherban in 1658. See Rumania: Language and Literature.

The most notable members of the family were Mircea (1386-1418), who accepted Turkish control; Neagoe, who founded the famous cathedral at Curtea de Argesh (q.v.); Michael, known as the Brave (1592-1601); and Petru Cercel, recognized for his deep knowledge, who spoke twelve languages and maintained friendly correspondence with prominent scholars and poets from Italy. He was drowned by the Turks in Constantinople in 1590 due to the schemes of Mihnea, who took over the throne of Walachia. The British Museum holds the oldest manuscripts of the Romanian Gospels, which were once owned by Petru Cercel and bear his signature. The text was published by Dr. M. Caster at the expense of the Romanian government. Mateiu Bassarab (1633-1654) set up the first printing press in Romania, and under his influence, the first code of laws was compiled and published in Bucharest in 1654. The Bassarab dynasty ended with Constantine Sherban in 1658. See Romania: Language and Literature.

(M. G.)

(M. G.)

BASS CLARINET (Fr. clarinette basse; Ger. Bass-Klarinette; Ital. clarinetto basso or darone), practically the A, B or C clarinet speaking an octave lower; what therefore has been said concerning the fingering, transposition, acoustic properties and general history of the clarinet (q.v.) also applies to the bass clarinet. Owing to its greater length the form of the bass clarinet differs from that of the clarinets in that the bell joint is bent up in front of the instrument, terminating in a large gloxinea-shaped bell, and that the mouthpiece is attached by means of a strong ligature and screws to a serpent-shaped crook of brass or silver. The compass of the modern orchestral bass clarinet is in the main the same as that of the higher clarinets in C, B and A, but an octave lower, and therefore for the bass clarinet in C is Notation: E2 B5.; for the bass clarinet in B the real sounds are one tone, and for the bass clarinet in A 1½ tone lower, although the notation is the same for all three.

BASS CLARINET (Fr. clarinette basse; Ger. Bass-Klarinette; Ital. clarinetto basso or darone) is essentially the A, B, or C clarinet playing an octave lower; thus, everything mentioned about the fingering, transposition, acoustic properties, and general history of the clarinet (q.v.) also applies to the bass clarinet. Due to its longer length, the design of the bass clarinet differs from that of the other clarinets in that the bell joint bends up at the front of the instrument, ending in a large gloxinia-shaped bell, and the mouthpiece is attached with a strong ligature and screws to a serpent-shaped crook made of brass or silver. The range of the modern orchestral bass clarinet is mainly the same as that of the higher clarinets in C, B, and A, but it’s an octave lower. Therefore, for the bass clarinet in C, it is Notation: E2 B5.; for the bass clarinet in B, the real sounds are one tone lower, and for the bass clarinet in A, it's 1½ tones lower, although the notation is the same for all three.

Sometimes the treble clef is used in notation for the bass clarinet. It must then be understood that the instrument in C speaks an octave lower, the bass clarinet in B a major ninth and the bass clarinet in A a minor tenth lower. The tenor clef is also frequently used in orchestral works.

Sometimes the treble clef is used in notation for the bass clarinet. It must then be understood that the instrument in C sounds an octave lower, the bass clarinet in B sounds a major ninth lower, and the bass clarinet in A sounds a minor tenth lower. The tenor clef is also commonly used in orchestral works.

The quality of tone is less reedy in the bass clarinet than in the higher instruments. It resembles the bourdon stop on the organ, and in the lowest register, more especially, the tone is somewhat hollow and wanting in power although mellower than that of the bassoon. In the lowest octave the instrument speaks slowly and is chiefly used for sustained bass or melody notes; rapid passages are impossible.

The tone of the bass clarinet is less reedy compared to higher instruments. It’s similar to the bourdon stop on an organ, and especially in the lowest register, the sound is a bit hollow and lacks power, although it's warmer than the bassoon's tone. In the lowest octave, the instrument plays slowly and is mainly used for sustained bass or melody notes; fast passages are not feasible.

The modern orchestral model may be fitted with almost every kind of key-mechanism, including the Boehm, and the degree of perfection and ingenuity attained has removed the all but insuperable difficulties which stood in the way of the original inventors who, not understanding key-work, made many futile attempts to bridge the necessarily great distance between the finger-holes by making the bore serpentine, boring the holes obliquely, &c.

The modern orchestral model can be equipped with nearly every type of key mechanism, including the Boehm system. The level of perfection and creativity achieved has overcome the almost impossible challenges faced by the original inventors, who, lacking a grasp of key work, made numerous unsuccessful attempts to bridge the significant gap between the finger holes by creating a serpentine bore, drilling the holes at angles, and so on.

The low pitch of the bass clarinet (8 ft. tone) contrasted with the moderate length of the instrument—whose bore measures only some 42 to 43 inches from mouthpiece to bell, whereas that of the bassoon, an instrument of the same pitch, is twice that length—is a puzzle to many. An explanation of the fact is to be found in the peculiar acoustic properties of the cylindrical tube played by means of a reed mouthpiece characterizing the clarinet family, which acts as a closed pipe speaking an octave lower than an open pipe of the same length, and overblowing a twelfth instead of an octave. This is more fully explained in the articles Clarinet and Aulos.

The low pitch of the bass clarinet (8 ft. tone) contrasts with the relatively short length of the instrument—its bore measures only about 42 to 43 inches from mouthpiece to bell, while the bassoon, which has the same pitch, is twice that length—leaving many puzzled. The explanation lies in the unique acoustic properties of the cylindrical tube played with a reed mouthpiece that defines the clarinet family, which functions as a closed pipe producing sound an octave lower than an open pipe of the same length and overblowing a twelfth instead of an octave. This is explained in more detail in the articles Clarinet and Aulos.

The construction of the bass clarinet demands the greatest care. The bore should theoretically be strictly cylindrical throughout its length from mouthpiece to bell joint; the slightest deviation from mathematical accuracy, such as an undue widening of the bell from the point where it joins the body to the mouth of the bell, would tend to muffle the lower notes of the instrument and to destroy correct intonation.

The construction of the bass clarinet requires the utmost attention to detail. The bore should ideally be perfectly cylindrical along its entire length from the mouthpiece to the bell joint; even a small deviation from mathematical precision, like an improper widening of the bell from the point where it connects to the body to the mouth of the bell, could muffle the lower notes of the instrument and ruin its intonation.

The origin of the bass clarinet must be sought in Germany, where Heinrich Grenser of Dresden, one of the most famous instrument-makers of his day, made the first bass clarinet in 1793. The basset horn (q.v.) or tenor clarinet, which had reached the height of its popularity, no doubt suggested to Grenser, who was more especially renowned for his excellent fagottos, the possibility of providing for the clarinet a bass of its own. One of these earliest attempts in the form of a fagotto, stamped "A. Grenser, Dresden," with nine square-flapped brass keys working on knobs, is in the Grossherzogliches Museum at Darmstadt and was lent to the Royal Military Exhibition, London 1890.[1] Two other early specimens,[2] belonging originally to Adolphe Sax and to M. de Coussemaker, are now respectively preserved in the museums of the Brussels Conservatoire and of the Berlin Hochschule (Snoeck Collection). The tubes are of great thickness and the holes are bored obliquely through the walls. Both instruments are in A.

The bass clarinet originated in Germany, where Heinrich Grenser of Dresden, one of the most well-known instrument makers of his time, created the first bass clarinet in 1793. The basset horn (q.v.) or tenor clarinet, which was extremely popular then, likely inspired Grenser, who was especially famous for his outstanding fagottos, to create a bass version for the clarinet. One of these early attempts, in the shape of a fagotto, marked "A. Grenser, Dresden," features nine square-flapped brass keys that operate on knobs and is housed in the Grossherzogliches Museum in Darmstadt; it was displayed at the Royal Military Exhibition in London in 1890.[1] Two other early examples,[2] originally owned by Adolphe Sax and M. de Coussemaker, are now housed in the museums of the Brussels Conservatoire and the Berlin Hochschule (Snoeck Collection). The tubes are quite thick, and the holes are drilled at an angle through the walls. Both instruments are in A.

Attempts were made in Italy to overcome the mechanical difficulties by making the bore of the bass clarinet serpentine. A specimen by Nicolas Papalini of Pavia[3] in the museum of the Brussels Conservatoire has the serpentine bore pierced through two slabs of pear-wood; the two halves, each forming a vertical section of the instrument, are fitted together with wooden pins. The outside length is only 2 ft. 3½ in. and there are nineteen finger-holes.

Attempts were made in Italy to solve the mechanical issues by creating a serpentine bore for the bass clarinet. A specimen by Nicolas Papalini of Pavia[3] in the museum of the Brussels Conservatoire features a serpentine bore that has been drilled through two pieces of pear wood; the two halves, each making up a vertical section of the instrument, are secured together with wooden pins. The total length is just 2 ft. 3½ in., and it has nineteen finger holes.

Joseph Uhlmann of Vienna[4] constructed a bass clarinet, also termed "bass basset horn," with twenty-three keys and a compass from B through four complete octaves with all chromatic [v.03 p.0492]semitones. These instruments resemble the saxophones (q.v.), having the bell joint bent up in front and the crook almost at right angles backwards, but the bore of the saxophone is conical.

Joseph Uhlmann from Vienna[4] built a bass clarinet, also known as a "bass basset horn," with twenty-three keys and a range from B♭ to four complete octaves, including all chromatic semitones. These instruments look similar to saxophones (q.v.), featuring a bell joint that curves up in front and a crook that bends almost at right angles backward, but the saxophone has a conical bore. [v.03 p.0492]

Georg Streitwolf (1779-1837), an ingenious musical instrument-maker of Göttingen, produced in 1828 a bass clarinet with a compass extending from A to F, nineteen keys and a fingering the same as that of the clarinet with but few exceptions. In form it resembled the fagotto and had a crook terminating in a beak mouthpiece. The Streitwolf bass clarinet was adopted in 1834 by the Prussian infantry as bass to the wood-wind.[5] Streitwolf's first bass clarinets were in C, but later he constructed instruments in B as well. Like the basset horn, Streitwolf's instruments had the four chromatic open keys extending the compass downwards to B. The tone was of very fine quality. One of these instruments is in the possession of Herr C. Kruspe of Erfurt,[6] and another is preserved in the Berlin collection at the Hochschule.

Georg Streitwolf (1779-1837), a brilliant musical instrument maker from Göttingen, created a bass clarinet in 1828 that had a range from A to F, featuring nineteen keys and a fingering similar to the standard clarinet, with only a few differences. Its shape resembled that of a bassoon and it had a crook that ended in a beak mouthpiece. The Streitwolf bass clarinet was adopted by the Prussian infantry as the bass instrument for the woodwind section in 1834.[5] Streitwolf's initial bass clarinets were in C, but he later also made instruments in B. Similar to the basset horn, Streitwolf's instruments included four chromatic open keys that extended the range down to B. The sound quality was exceptional. One of these instruments is owned by Herr C. Kruspe of Erfurt,[6] and another is kept in the Berlin collection at the Hochschule.

It was, however, the successive improvements of Adolphe Sax (Paris, 1814-1894), working probably from Grenser's and later from Streitwolf's models, which produced the modern bass clarinet, and following up the work of Halary and Buffet in the same field, he secured its introduction into the orchestra at the opera. The bass clarinet in C made its first appearance in opera in 1836 in Meyerbeer's Huguenots, Act V., where in a fine passage the lower register of the instrument is displayed to advantage, and later in Dinorah (Le pardon de Ploermel). Two years later (1838) at the theatre of Modena a bass clarinet by P. Maino of Milan, differing in construction from the Sax model, was independently introduced into the orchestra.[7] Wagner employed the bass clarinet in B and C in Tristan und Isolde,[8] where at the end of Act II. it is used with great effect to characterize the reproachful utterance of King Mark, thus:

It was the ongoing improvements made by Adolphe Sax (Paris, 1814-1894), probably building on Grenser's and later Streitwolf's designs, that led to the creation of the modern bass clarinet. Following in the footsteps of Halary and Buffet in this area, he made sure it was introduced into the orchestra at the opera. The bass clarinet in C first appeared in opera in 1836 in Meyerbeer's Huguenots, Act V., where a beautiful passage highlights the instrument's lower register effectively, and later in Dinorah (Le pardon de Ploermel). Two years later (1838) at the theater in Modena, a bass clarinet by P. Maino of Milan, which had a different design from the Sax model, was independently introduced into the orchestra.[7] Wagner used the bass clarinet in B and C in Tristan und Isolde,[8] where it is powerfully employed at the end of Act II. to express the reproachful words of King Mark, thus:

Excerpt from Tristan und Isolde.

etc.

etc.

(K. S.)

(K. S.)

[1] See Captain C. R. Day, Descriptive Catalogue (London, 1891), No. 266, p. 125.

[1] See Captain C. R. Day, Descriptive Catalogue (London, 1891), No. 266, p. 125.

[2] See Victor Mahillon, Catalogue descriptif, vol. ii. (1896), pp. 224-226, No. 940.

[2] See Victor Mahillon, Descriptive Catalogue, vol. ii. (1896), pp. 224-226, No. 940.

[3] See Captain C. R. Day, op. cit. p. 123, pl. v. B. and p. 123, No. 262.

[3] See Captain C. R. Day, op. cit. p. 123, pl. v. B. and p. 123, No. 262.

[4] See Dr Schafhäutl's report on the Munich exhibition, Bericht der Beurtheilungscommission für Musikinstrumente (Munich, 1855), P. 153.

[4] See Dr. Schafhäutl's report on the Munich exhibition, Bericht der Beurtheilungscommission für Musikinstrumente (Munich, 1855), p. 153.

[5] See Allgemeine musikalische Zeitung (Leipzig, 1834), Bd. xxxvi. March, p. 193.

[5] See Allgemeine musikalische Zeitung (Leipzig, 1834), Vol. xxxvi. March, p. 193.

[6] See Wilhelm Altenburg, Die Klarinette (Heilbronn, 1904-1905), p. 33.

[6] See Wilhelm Altenburg, The Clarinet (Heilbronn, 1904-1905), p. 33.

[7] See W. Altenburg, op. cit. p. 34.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See W. Altenburg, op. cit. p. 34.

[8] Orchestral score, p. 284.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Orchestra score, p. 284.

BASSEIN, a district and town in the Irrawaddy division of Lower Burma, in the delta of the Irrawaddy. The district has been reduced to 4127 sq. m., from 8954 sq. m. in 1871, having given up a large tract to the district of Myaungmya formed in 1896.

BASSEIN, a district and town in the Irrawaddy division of Lower Burma, located in the delta of the Irrawaddy River. The district has shrunk to 4,127 sq. miles, down from 8,954 sq. miles in 1871, having ceded a large area to the Myaungmya district established in 1896.

A mountain range called the Anauk-pet Taungmyin stretches through the district from N. to S. along the coast. The principal river of the district is the Irrawaddy, which debouches on the sea at its eastern extremity through a delta intersected with salt water creeks, among which the Pyamalaw, Pyinzalu, Kyuntôn, and Ngawun Shagègyi or Bassein river rank as important arms of the sea. Irrawaddy and Inyègyi are the only two lakes in the district. The delta of the Irrawaddy forms, wherever cultivable, a vast sheet of rice, with cotton, sesamum, and tobacco as subsidiary crops. In 1901 the population was 391,427.

A mountain range called the Anauk-pet Taungmyin runs through the district from north to south along the coast. The main river in the district is the Irrawaddy, which flows into the sea at its eastern end through a delta filled with saltwater creeks. Among these creeks, the Pyamalaw, Pyinzalu, Kyuntôn, and Ngawun Shagègyi or Bassein river are notable branches of the sea. Irrawaddy and Inyègyi are the only two lakes in the district. The delta of the Irrawaddy produces a large area of rice wherever farming is possible, with cotton, sesame, and tobacco as secondary crops. In 1901, the population was 391,427.

Bassein, the chief town and port, is the capital of the district and division, and is situated on the eastern bank of the Bassein river, one of the main arteries by which the waters of the Irrawaddy discharge themselves into the sea. It forms an important seat of the rice trade with several steam rice mills, and has great capabilities both from a mercantile and a military point of view, as it commands the great outlet of the Irrawaddy. It fell before the British arms, in May 1852, during the second Burmese war. In 1901 it had a population of 31,864. The vessels of the Irrawaddy Flotilla Company ply between Rangoon and Bassein, &c., by inland waters, and a railway opened in 1903 runs northeastward through the centre of the district, to Henzada and Letpadan.

Bassein, the main town and port, is the capital of the district and division, located on the eastern bank of the Bassein river, which is one of the primary waterways that channel the Irrawaddy's waters into the sea. It serves as a key hub for the rice trade, featuring several steam rice mills, and has significant potential from both commercial and military perspectives, as it oversees the major outlet of the Irrawaddy. It fell to British forces in May 1852 during the second Burmese war. By 1901, its population was 31,864. The vessels of the Irrawaddy Flotilla Company operate between Rangoon and Bassein and other locations via inland waters, and a railway that opened in 1903 runs northeast through the heart of the district, connecting to Henzada and Letpadan.

BASSELIN, OLIVIER (c. 1400-c. 1450), French poet, was born in the Val-de-Vire in Normandy about the end of the 14th century. He was by occupation a fuller, and tradition still points out the site of his mill. His drinking songs became famous under the name of Vaux-de-Vire, corrupted in modern times into "vaudeville." From various traditions it may be gathered that Basselin was killed in the English wars about the middle of the century, possibly at the battle of Formigny (1450). At the beginning of the 17th century a collection of songs was published by a Norman lawyer, Jean Le Houx, purporting to be the work of Olivier Basselin. There seems to be very little doubt that Le Houx was himself the author of the songs attributed to Basselin, as well as of those he acknowledged as his own.

BASSELIN, OLIVIER (c. 1400-c. 1450), a French poet, was born in the Val-de-Vire region of Normandy around the end of the 14th century. He worked as a fuller, and tradition still points to the location of his mill. His drinking songs gained fame under the name of Vaux-de-Vire, which has since been corrupted into "vaudeville." Various accounts suggest that Basselin was killed in the English wars around the middle of the century, possibly at the battle of Formigny (1450). At the beginning of the 17th century, a collection of songs was published by a Norman lawyer, Jean Le Houx, claiming to be the work of Olivier Basselin. It seems very likely that Le Houx was actually the author of the songs attributed to Basselin, as well as of those he acknowledged as his own.

It has been suggested that Basselin's name may be safely connected with some songs preserved in the Bibliothèque Nationale at Paris, and published at Caen in 1866 by M. Armand Gasté. The question is discussed in M. V. Patard's La Vérité dans la question Olivier Basselin et Jean le Houx à propos du Vau-de-Vire (1897). A. Gasté's edition (1875) of the Vaux-de-Vire was translated (1885) by J. P. Muirhead.

It has been suggested that Basselin's name can be reliably linked to some songs preserved in the Bibliothèque Nationale in Paris, and published in Caen in 1866 by M. Armand Gasté. The topic is explored in M. V. Patard's La Vérité dans la question Olivier Basselin et Jean le Houx à propos du Vau-de-Vire (1897). A. Gasté's edition (1875) of the Vaux-de-Vire was translated in 1885 by J. P. Muirhead.

BASSES-ALPES, a department of south-eastern France, formed in 1790 out of the northern portion of Provence. It is bounded N. by the department of the Hautes Alpes, E. by Italy and the department of the Alpes Maritimes, S. by that of the Var, and W. by those of Vaucluse and the Drôme. Its area is about 2698 sq. m., while its greatest length is 89½ m. and its greatest breadth 56 m. Pop. (1906) 113,126. The river Durance passes through the western part of this department, receiving (left), as affluents, the Ubaye, the Bléone and the Asse (the entire course of each of these rivers is included within the department) as well as the Verdon, the upper course of which is within the department, while the lower course forms its southern limit. It is a poor and hilly district, the highest summits (the loftiest is the Aiguille de Chambeyron, 11,155 ft.) rising round the head waters of the Ubaye. The department is divided into five arrondissements (Digne, Barcelonnette, Castellane, Forcalquier, and Sisteron), 30 cantons and 250 communes. It forms the bishopric of Digne, formerly in the ecclesiastical province of Embrun, but since 1802 in that of Aix-en-Provence. Its chief towns are Digne, Barcelonnette, Castellane, Forcalquier, and Sisteron. It is poorly supplied with railways (total length 109½ m.), the main line from Grenoble to Avignon running through it from Sisteron to Manosque, and sending off two short branch lines to Digne (14 m.) and to Forcalquier (9 m.). It is a poor department from the material point of view, being very mountainous and containing many mountain pastures. But these pastures have been much damaged by the Provençal shepherds to whom they are let out, while the forests have been very much thinned (though extensive reafforestments are now being carried out) so that the soil is very dry and made drier by exposure to the southern sun. From near the head of the Ubaye valley the pass of the Col de l'Argentière (6545 ft.) leads over from Barcelonnette to Cuneo, in Italy; it was perhaps traversed by Hannibal, and certainly in 1515 by Francis I.

BASSES-ALPES, a department in southeastern France, was created in 1790 from the northern part of Provence. It is bordered to the north by the Hautes Alpes department, to the east by Italy and the Alpes Maritimes department, to the south by the Var department, and to the west by Vaucluse and the Drôme. Its area is about 2,698 square miles, with a maximum length of 89.5 miles and a maximum width of 56 miles. The population was 113,126 in 1906. The Durance River flows through the western part of the department, receiving the Ubaye, Bléone, and Asse rivers as tributaries (the entire courses of these rivers are within the department), as well as the Verdon, whose upper course is also within the department while its lower course forms the southern boundary. It is a poor and hilly area, with the highest peaks (the tallest being Aiguille de Chambeyron at 11,155 feet) rising around the headwaters of the Ubaye. The department is divided into five arrondissements (Digne, Barcelonnette, Castellane, Forcalquier, and Sisteron), 30 cantons, and 250 communes. It is part of the Digne bishopric, which was previously in the ecclesiastical province of Embrun, but has been under the Aix-en-Provence province since 1802. Its main towns are Digne, Barcelonnette, Castellane, Forcalquier, and Sisteron. The railway system is limited (total length of 109.5 miles), with the main line running from Grenoble to Avignon passing through from Sisteron to Manosque, plus two short branch lines to Digne (14 miles) and Forcalquier (9 miles). The department is economically poor, being very mountainous and featuring many mountain pastures. However, these pastures have been significantly damaged by the Provençal shepherds renting them, and the forests have been heavily depleted (though extensive reforestation efforts are currently underway), resulting in very dry soil, further exacerbated by exposure to the southern sun. Near the head of the Ubaye valley, the Col de l'Argentière pass (6,545 feet) connects Barcelonnette to Cuneo in Italy; it may have been crossed by Hannibal and certainly was by Francis I in 1515.

See C. J. J. M. Féraud, Histoire, géographie et statistique du Département des Basses-Alpes (Digne, 1861).

See C. J. J. M. Féraud, History, Geography, and Statistics of the Department of Basses-Alpes (Digne, 1861).

(W. A. B. C.)

(W. A. B. C.)

BASSES-PYRÉNÉES, a department of south-western France, at the angle of the Bay of Biscay, formed in 1790, two-thirds of it from Béarn and the rest from three districts of Gascony—Basse-Navarre, Soule and Labourd. The latter constitute the Basque region of France (see Basques) and cover the west of the department. Basses-Pyrénées is bounded N. by Landes and Gers, E. by Hautes-Pyrénées (which has two enclaves forming five communes within this department), S. by Spain, and W. by the Atlantic Ocean. Pop. (1906) 426,817. Area, 2977 sq. m. The whole of the south of the department is occupied by the western and lower summits of the Pyrenees. The remainder consists of a region of heaths and plateaus to the northeast of the Gave de Pau, and of hills divided by numberless fertile valleys to the west of that river. The height of the mountains of the southern frontier increases gradually from west to east. The peak of the Rhune, to the south of St Jean de Luz, rises only to 2950 ft.; and on the border of the Basque country the mean height of the summits is not much greater. The peak of Orhy alone, in the south of the valley of Mauléon, reaches 6618 ft. But beyond that of Anie (8215 ft.), on the meridian of Orthez, which marks the boundary of Béarn, much loftier elevations appear,—Mourrous (9760 ft.), on the border of Hautes-Pyrénées, and the southern peak of Ossau (9465 ft.). The frontier between France and Spain, for the most part, [v.03 p.0493]follows the crest-line of the main range. Forts guard the upper valleys of the Nive and the Aspe, along which run important passes into Spain. The general direction of the rivers of the department is towards the north-west. The streams almost all meet in the Adour through the Gave de Pau, the Bidouze, and the Nive. In the north-east the two Luys flow directly to the Adour, which they join in Landes. In the south-west the Nivelle and the Bidassoa flow directly into the sea. The lower course of the Adour forms the boundary between Basses-Pyrénées and Landes; it enters the sea a short distance below Bayonne over a shifting bar, which has often altered the position of its mouth. The Gave de Pau, a larger stream than the Adour, passes Pau and Orthez, but its current is so swift that it is only navigable for a few miles above its junction with the Adour. On the left it receives the Gave d'Oloron, formed by the Gave d'Ossau, descending from the Pic du Midi, and the Gave d'Aspe, which rises in Spain. An important affluent of the Gave d'Oloron, the Saison or Gave de Mauléon, descends from the Pic d'Orhy. From the Pic des Escaliers, which rises above the forest of Iraty, the Bidouze descends northwards; while the forest, though situated on the southern slope of the chain, forms a part of French territory. The Nive, a beautiful river of the Basque country, takes its rise in Spain; after flowing past St Jean-Pied-de-Port, formerly capital of French Navarre and fortified by Vauban to guard the pass of Roncevaux, it joins the Adour at Bayonne. The Nivelle also belongs only partly to France and ends its course at St Jean-de-Luz. The Bidassoa, which is only important as forming part of the frontier, contains the Ile des Faisans, where the treaty of the Pyrenees was concluded (1659), and debouches between Hendaye (France) and Fuenterrabia (Spain).

BASSES-PYRÉNÉES, a department in the south-west of France, at the corner of the Bay of Biscay, was created in 1790, with two-thirds of it coming from Béarn and the rest from three districts of Gascony—Basse-Navarre, Soule, and Labourd. The latter make up the Basque region of France (see Basque people) and cover the western part of the department. Basses-Pyrénées borders Landes and Gers to the north, Hautes-Pyrénées to the east (which includes two enclaves forming five communes in this department), Spain to the south, and the Atlantic Ocean to the west. The population was 426,817 in 1906. The area covers 2,977 square miles. The entire southern part of the department is taken up by the western and lower peaks of the Pyrenees. The rest consists of heathlands and plateaus to the northeast of the Gave de Pau and hills divided by numerous fertile valleys to the west of that river. The height of the mountains along the southern border gradually increases from west to east. The peak of the Rhune, just south of St Jean de Luz, reaches only 2,950 feet; and on the border of the Basque country, the average height of the peaks isn't much greater. The peak of Orhy alone, in the southern part of the Mauléon valley, rises to 6,618 feet. Beyond Anie (8,215 feet), on the meridian of Orthez, which marks the boundary of Béarn, much taller elevations are found—Mourrous (9,760 feet) on the border of Hautes-Pyrénées, and the southern peak of Ossau (9,465 feet). The border between France and Spain mostly follows the ridge line of the main range. Forts protect the upper valleys of the Nive and the Aspe, which are key passes into Spain. The rivers in the department generally flow northwest. Almost all the streams converge into the Adour through the Gave de Pau, the Bidouze, and the Nive. In the northeast, the two Luys flow directly into the Adour, joining it in Landes. In the southwest, the Nivelle and the Bidassoa flow directly into the sea. The lower section of the Adour marks the boundary between Basses-Pyrénées and Landes; it enters the sea just below Bayonne over a shifting sandbar, which has frequently changed the position of its mouth. The Gave de Pau, a larger stream than the Adour, flows past Pau and Orthez, but its current is so fast that it's only navigable for a few miles above its meeting point with the Adour. On the left side, it connects with the Gave d'Oloron, made up of the Gave d'Ossau, flowing down from the Pic du Midi, and the Gave d'Aspe, which originates in Spain. An important tributary of the Gave d'Oloron, the Saison or Gave de Mauléon, flows down from the Pic d'Orhy. From the Pic des Escaliers, located above the forest of Iraty, the Bidouze flows northward; the forest, although on the southern slope of the range, is part of French territory. The Nive, a scenic river from the Basque region, starts in Spain; after flowing past St Jean-Pied-de-Port, which was once the capital of French Navarre and fortified by Vauban to protect the Roncevaux pass, it joins the Adour at Bayonne. The Nivelle also only partially belongs to France and ends at St Jean-de-Luz. The Bidassoa, which is mainly significant for forming part of the border, contains the Ile des Faisans, where the Treaty of the Pyrenees was signed (1659), and flows out between Hendaye (France) and Fuenterrabia (Spain).

The climate of the department is mild and it has an abundant rainfall, partly due to the west wind which drives the clouds from the gulf of Gascony. The spring is rainy; the best seasons are summer and autumn, the heat of summer being moderated by the sea. The winters are mild. The air of Pau agrees with invalids and delicate constitutions, and St Jean-de-Luz and Biarritz are much frequented by winter visitors.

The climate in the area is mild with plenty of rainfall, thanks in part to the west wind that brings in clouds from the Gulf of Gascony. Spring tends to be rainy, while summer and autumn are the best seasons, as the summer heat is cooled by the sea. Winters are mild. The air in Pau is good for people with health issues or delicate constitutions, and places like St Jean-de-Luz and Biarritz are popular among winter visitors.

Despite extensive tracts of uncultivated land, the department is mainly agricultural. Maize and wheat are the chief cereals; potatoes, flax and vegetables are also produced. Pasture is abundant, and horses, cattle, sheep and pigs are largely reared. The vine is grown on the lower slopes sheltered from the north wind, the wines of Jurançon, near Pau, being the most renowned. Of the fruits grown, chestnuts, cider-apples, and pears are most important. About one-thirteenth of the department consists of woods, a very small proportion of which belong to the government, the rest to the communes and private individuals.

Despite large areas of uncultivated land, the department is primarily agricultural. Corn and wheat are the main grains; potatoes, flax, and various vegetables are also grown. There's plenty of pasture available, and horses, cattle, sheep, and pigs are commonly raised. Vines are cultivated on the lower slopes that are protected from the north wind, with the wines of Jurançon, near Pau, being the most famous. Among the fruits produced, chestnuts, cider apples, and pears are the most significant. About one-thirteenth of the department is covered by forests, with only a small fraction owned by the government, while the majority belongs to local communities and private individuals.

The department furnishes salt, building-stone, and other quarry products. There are mineral springs at Eaux-Bonnes, Eaux-Chaudes, Cambo-les-Bains (resorted to by the Basques on St John's Eve), St Christau, and Salies. At Le Boucau, 3 m. from Bayonne, there are large metallurgical works, the Forges de l'Adour, and chemical works. The manufactures of the department include woollen caps and sashes, cord slippers, chocolate, and paper, and there are also tanneries, saw- and flour-mills. "Bayonne hams" and other table delicacies are prepared at Orthez. There is a considerable fishing population at Bayonne and St Jean-de-Luz. Bayonne is the principal port. Exports consist chiefly of timber, mine-props, minerals, wine, salt and resinous products. Coal, minerals, phosphates, grain and wool are leading imports. The interior commerce of the department is, however, of greater importance to its inhabitants; it takes the form of exchange of products between the regions of mountain and plain. The railway lines of Basses-Pyrénées, the chief of which is that from Bayonne to Toulouse via Orthez and Pau, belong to the Southern Company. The Adour, the Nive and the Bidouze are navigable on their lower courses. The department has five arrondissements—Pau, Bayonne, Oloron, Orthez and Mauléon, divided into 41 cantons and 559 communes. It constitutes the diocese of Bayonne, comes within the educational circumscription (académie) of Bordeaux and belongs to the district of the XVIII. army corps. Pau, the capital and seat of a court of appeal, Bayonne, Oloron, Biarritz, Orthez, Eaux-Bonnes, and St Jean-de-Luz are the principal towns. The following places are also of interest:—Lescar, which has a church of the 12th and 16th century, once a cathedral; Montaner, with a stronghold built in 1380 by Gaston Phoebus, count of Foix and viscount, of Béarn; and Sauveterre, a town finely situated on the Gave d'Oloron, with an old bridge, remains of a feudal castle, and a church in the Romanesque and Gothic styles.

The department provides salt, building stone, and other quarry products. There are mineral springs at Eaux-Bonnes, Eaux-Chaudes, Cambo-les-Bains (visited by the Basques on St John's Eve), St Christau, and Salies. At Le Boucau, 3 miles from Bayonne, there are large metallurgical works, the Forges de l'Adour, along with chemical facilities. The department produces woolen caps and sashes, cord slippers, chocolate, and paper, and it also has tanneries, sawmills, and flour mills. "Bayonne hams" and other delicacies are made in Orthez. There is a significant fishing community in Bayonne and St Jean-de-Luz. Bayonne is the main port, with exports primarily consisting of timber, mine props, minerals, wine, salt, and resinous products. Leading imports include coal, minerals, phosphates, grain, and wool. However, the internal commerce of the department is more important to its residents, involving the exchange of products between mountainous and flat regions. The railway lines in Basses-Pyrénées, the main one being from Bayonne to Toulouse via Orthez and Pau, are operated by the Southern Company. The Adour, the Nive, and the Bidouze rivers are navigable in their lower sections. The department has five arrondissements—Pau, Bayonne, Oloron, Orthez, and Mauléon—divided into 41 cantons and 559 communes. It forms the diocese of Bayonne, falls under the educational area (académie) of Bordeaux, and is part of the XVIII army corps district. Pau serves as the capital and the seat of a court of appeal, with Bayonne, Oloron, Biarritz, Orthez, Eaux-Bonnes, and St Jean-de-Luz being the principal towns. Other points of interest include: Lescar, which has a church from the 12th and 16th centuries that was once a cathedral; Montaner, featuring a stronghold built in 1380 by Gaston Phoebus, the count of Foix and viscount of Béarn; and Sauveterre, a town beautifully located on the Gave d'Oloron, with an old bridge, remnants of a feudal castle, and a church in both Romanesque and Gothic styles.

BASSET, or Bassette, a French game of cards played by five persons with a pack of fifty-two cards. Once very popular, it is now practically obsolete. It is said to be of Venetian origin and to have been introduced into France by Justiniani, the ambassador of Venice in the second half of the 17th century. It resembles lansquenet (q.v.) in a general way, in that it is played between a banker and several punters, the players winning or losing according as cards turned up match those already exposed or not.

BASSET, or Bassett, is a French card game played by five people using a standard deck of fifty-two cards. It used to be very popular, but now it's almost forgotten. It's believed to have originated in Venice and was brought to France by Justiniani, the Venetian ambassador, in the late 17th century. The game is somewhat similar to lansquenet (q.v.) in that it involves a banker and several players, with the outcome determined by whether the cards revealed match those that have already been shown.

BASSET HORN (Fr. Cor de Basset, or Cor de Bassette; Ger. Bassethorn, Basshorn; Ital. Corno di Bassetto), a wood-wind instrument, not a "horn," member of the clarinet family, of which it is the tenor. The basset horn consists of a nearly cylindrical tube of wood (generally cocus or box-wood), having a cylindrical bore and terminating in a metal bell wider than that of the clarinet. For convenience in reaching the keys and holes, the modern instrument is usually bent or curved either near the mouthpiece or at the bell, which is turned upwards. The older models were bent in the middle at an obtuse angle, and had at the bottom of the lower joint, near the bell, a wooden block, inside which the bore was reflexed, and bent down upon itself.[1] The basset horn has the same fingering as the clarinet, and corresponds to the tenor of that instrument, being pitched a fifth below the clarinet in C. The alto clarinet in E is often substituted for the basset horn, especially in military bands, but the instruments differ in three particulars:—(1) The basset horn has a metal bell instead of the pear-shaped contracted bell of the alto clarinet. (2) The bore of the basset horn is wider than that of the alto clarinet in E, or of the tenor clarinet in F. (3) The tube of the basset horn is longer than that of the clarinet, and contains four additional long keys, worked by the thumb of the right hand, which in the clarinet is only used to steady the instrument. These keys give the basset horn an extended compass of two tones downwards to F Notation: F2. whereas the E clarinet only extends to G Notation: G2. and the F clarinet to A Notation: A2. (actual sounds). This brings the compass of the basset horn to a range of four octaves from Notation: C3 to C7., actual sounds Notation: F2 to F6..

BASSET HORN (Fr. Cor de Basset, or Cor de Bassette; Ger. Bassethorn, Basshorn; Ital. Corno di Bassetto), a woodwind instrument, not a "horn," and a member of the clarinet family as its tenor. The basset horn is made of a nearly cylindrical tube of wood (usually cocus or boxwood), featuring a cylindrical bore and ending in a metal bell that is wider than that of the clarinet. To make it easier to reach the keys and holes, the modern version is typically bent or curved either near the mouthpiece or at the bell, which is angled upwards. Older models were curved in the middle at an obtuse angle and included a wooden block at the bottom of the lower joint near the bell, where the bore was reflexed and curved back onto itself. The basset horn has the same fingerings as the clarinet, corresponding to the tenor of that instrument, pitched a fifth lower than the C clarinet. The alto clarinet in E is often used in place of the basset horn, especially in military bands, but these instruments differ in three main ways: (1) The basset horn has a metal bell instead of the pear-shaped, narrower bell of the alto clarinet. (2) The bore of the basset horn is wider than that of the alto clarinet in E or the tenor clarinet in F. (3) The tube of the basset horn is longer than that of the clarinet and has four additional long keys, operated by the thumb of the right hand, which in the clarinet is just used to hold the instrument steady. These keys give the basset horn an extended pitch range of two tones down to F, while the E clarinet only goes down to G and the F clarinet down to A (actual sounds). This results in the basset horn having a pitch range of four octaves from Notation: C3 to C7., actual sounds Notation: F2 to F6..

[v.03 p.0494]

[v.03 p.0494]

Fig. 1.

Fig. 1. (From photographs lent by M. Victor Mahillon.)

Fig. 1. (From photos provided by M. Victor Mahillon.)

Like the clarinet, the basset horn is a transposing instrument, its music being written a fifth higher than the actual sounds. The treble clef is used in notation for all but the lowest register. The technical capabilities of the basset horn are the same as for the clarinet, except that the extra low notes from A to F (actual sounds) can only be intoned slowly and staccato; the notes of the upper register being better represented in the clarinet are seldom used in orchestral music.

Like the clarinet, the basset horn is a transposing instrument, with music written a fifth higher than the actual sounds. The treble clef is used for notation in all registers except the lowest. The technical abilities of the basset horn are similar to those of the clarinet, except that the extra low notes from A to F (actual sounds) can only be played slowly and staccato; the notes in the upper register, which are better represented on the clarinet, are rarely used in orchestral music.

The tone of the basset horn is extremely reedy and rich, especially in the medium and low registers; the tone colour is similar to that of the clarinet without its brilliancy; it is mellow and sensuous, but slightly sombre, and therefore well adapted for music of an elegiac funereal character.

The tone of the basset horn is very reedy and rich, especially in the mid and low ranges; the sound is similar to that of the clarinet but lacks its brightness; it’s warm and smooth, yet a bit dark, making it perfect for music that has a somber, mournful quality.

The basset horn flourished mainly in Germany, where at the end of the 18th century it was the favourite solo instrument of many celebrated instrumentalists, such as Czerny, David, Lotz, Springer, &c. Among the great masters, Mozart seems to have been foremost in his appreciation of this beautiful instrument. In his Requiem, the reed family is represented by two basset horns having independent parts, and two bassoons. Mozart has also used the instrument with great effect in his opera La Clemenza di Tito, where he has written a fine obbligato for it in the aria "Non piu di Flori"; in Zauberflöte; and in chamber music, viz. short adagio for two basset horns and bassoon, and another for two clarinets and three basset horns (Series 10 of Breitkopf & Härtel's complete edition). Beethoven employed it in his Prometheus overture. Mendelssohn used it in military music, and in two concerted pieces for clarinet and basset horn with pianoforte accompaniment, in F and D min., opp. 113 and 114, dedicated to Heinrich and Carl Bärmann.

The basset horn thrived mainly in Germany, where by the late 18th century it became the favorite solo instrument of many famous musicians, like Czerny, David, Lotz, Springer, etc. Among the great composers, Mozart was particularly fond of this beautiful instrument. In his Requiem, the reed family includes two basset horns playing separate parts, along with two bassoons. Mozart also used the basset horn effectively in his opera La Clemenza di Tito, where he composed a lovely obbligato for it in the aria "Non piu di Flori"; in Zauberflöte; and in chamber music, specifically a short adagio for two basset horns and bassoon, and another for two clarinets and three basset horns (Series 10 of Breitkopf & Härtel's complete edition). Beethoven included it in his Prometheus overture. Mendelssohn featured it in military music, as well as in two concerted pieces for clarinet and basset horn with piano accompaniment, in F and D minor, opp. 113 and 114, dedicated to Heinrich and Carl Bärmann.

The archetypes of the basset horn are the same as those of the clarinet (q.v.). The basset horn was the outcome of the desire, prevailing during the 16th and 17th centuries, to obtain complete families of instruments to play in concert. The invention of the basset horn in 1770 is attributed to a clarinet maker of Passau, named Horn, whose name was given to the instrument;[2] by a misnomer, the basset horn became known in Italy as corno di bassetto, and in France as cor de basset. In 1782, Theodore Lotz of Pressburg made some modifications in the instrument, which was further improved by two instrumentalists of Vienna, Anton and Johann Stadler, and finally in 1812 by Iwan Mueller, a famous clarinettist, who invented the alto clarinet in E from the basset horn, by giving the latter a construction and fingering analogous to those of the clarinet in B, which he took as his model, instead of the clarinet in C.

The basset horn shares the same archetypes as the clarinet (q.v.). The basset horn was created from the desire, prevalent in the 16th and 17th centuries, to have complete families of instruments for concerts. The invention of the basset horn in 1770 is credited to a clarinet maker from Passau named Horn, after whom the instrument was named; [2] due to a mistaken name, the basset horn became known in Italy as corno di bassetto and in France as cor de basset. In 1782, Theodore Lotz from Pressburg made some changes to the instrument, which were further refined by two musicians from Vienna, Anton and Johann Stadler, and ultimately in 1812 by Iwan Mueller, a well-known clarinetist, who created the alto clarinet in E from the basset horn, giving the latter a construction and fingering similar to those of the clarinet in B, which he used as his model, instead of the clarinet in C.

See J. G. H. Backofen, Anweisung zur Klarinette, nebst einer kurzen Abhandlung über das Basset-Horn, with illustration, p. 37 (Leipzig, Breitkopf & Härtel, 1803); Iwan Mueller, Anweisung zu der neuen Clarinette und der Clarinette-alto, nebst einigen Bemerkungen für Instrumentenmacher (Leipzig, Freidrich Hofmeister, 1826, with illustrations); Gottfried Weber, "Über Clarinette und Bassethorn," Cacilia, Band xi. pp. 35-37 (Mainz, 1834); Wilhelm Altenburg, Die Clarinette, ihre Entstehung und Entwickelung bis zur Jetztzeit in akustischer, technischer u. musikalischer Beziehung (Heilbronn, 1904), pp. 16-32; good heliogravures of early basset horns in Descriptive Catalogue of the Musical Instruments at the Royal Military Exhibition, London, 1890, compiled by Capt. C. R. Day (1891), pl. v.

See J. G. H. Backofen, Anweisung zur Klarinette, nebst einer kurzen Abhandlung über das Basset-Horn, with illustration, p. 37 (Leipzig, Breitkopf & Härtel, 1803); Iwan Mueller, Anweisung zu der neuen Clarinette und der Clarinette-alto, nebst einigen Bemerkungen für Instrumentenmacher (Leipzig, Freidrich Hofmeister, 1826, with illustrations); Gottfried Weber, "Über Clarinette und Bassethorn," Cacilia, Band xi. pp. 35-37 (Mainz, 1834); Wilhelm Altenburg, Die Clarinette, ihre Entstehung und Entwickelung bis zur Jetztzeit in akustischer, technischer u. musikalischer Beziehung (Heilbronn, 1904), pp. 16-32; good heliogravures of early basset horns in Descriptive Catalogue of the Musical Instruments at the Royal Military Exhibition, London, 1890, compiled by Capt. C. R. Day (1891), pl. v.

(K. S.)

(K. S.)

[1] An instrument of this type, stamped "H. Grenser, S. Wiesner, Dresden," is in the collection of the Rev. F. W. Galpin, of Hatfield, Broad Oak.

[1] An instrument like this, marked "H. Grenser, S. Wiesner, Dresden," is part of the collection of Rev. F. W. Galpin, from Hatfield, Broad Oak.

[2] Cantor Lectures on Musical Instruments, their Construction and Capabilities, by A. J. Hipkins, p. 15; Henri Lavoix, Histoire de l'instrumentation depuis le seizième siècle jusqu'à nos jours (Paris, 1878), on p. 123 the date is given as 1777.

[2] Cantor Lectures on Musical Instruments, Their Construction and Capabilities, by A. J. Hipkins, p. 15; Henri Lavoix, History of Instrumentation from the Sixteenth Century to Today (Paris, 1878), states on p. 123 that the date is 1777.

BASSI, LAURA MARIA CATERINA (1711-1778), an Italian lady eminently distinguished for her learning, was born at Bologna in 1711. On account of her extraordinary attainments she received a doctor's degree, and was appointed professor in the philosophical college, where she delivered public lectures on experimental philosophy till the time of her death. She was elected member of many literary societies and carried on an extensive correspondence with the most eminent European men of letters. She was well acquainted with classical literature, as well as with that of France and Italy. In 1738 she married Giuseppe Verrati, a physician, and left several children. She died in 1778.

BASSI, LAURA MARIA CATERINA (1711-1778), an exceptional Italian woman known for her intelligence, was born in Bologna in 1711. Due to her remarkable skills, she earned a doctorate and became a professor at the philosophical college, where she gave public lectures on experimental philosophy until her death. She was elected to numerous literary societies and maintained extensive correspondence with many of the leading European writers of her time. She was well-versed in classical literature, as well as the literatures of France and Italy. In 1738, she married Giuseppe Verrati, a physician, and had several children. She passed away in 1778.

BASSI, UGO (1800-1849), Italian patriot, was born at Cento, and received his early education at Bologna. An unhappy love affair induced him to become a novice in the Barnabite order when eighteen years old. He repaired to Rome, where he led a life of study and devotion, and entered on his ministry in 1833. It was as a preacher that he became famous, his sermons attracting large crowds owing to their eloquence and genuine enthusiasm. He lived chiefly at Bologna, but travelled all over Italy preaching and tending the poor, so poor himself as to be sometimes almost starving. On the outbreak of the revolutionary movements in 1848, when Pope Pius IX. still appeared to be a Liberal and an Italian patriot, Bassi, filled with national enthusiasm, joined General Durando's papal force to protect the frontiers as army chaplain. His eloquence drew fresh recruits to the ranks, and he exercised great influence over the soldiers and people. When the pope discarded all connexion with the national movement, it was only Bassi who could restrain the Bolognese in their indignation. At Treviso, where he had followed Guidotti's volunteers against the Austrians, he received three wounds, delighted to shed his blood for Italy (12th of May, 1848). He was taken to Venice, and on his recovery he marched unarmed at the head of the volunteers in the fight at Mestre. After the pope's flight from Rome and the proclamation of the Roman republic, Bassi took part with Garibaldi's forces against the French troops sent to re-establish the temporal power. He exposed his life many times while tending the wounded under fire, and when Garibaldi was forced to leave Rome with his volunteers the faithful monk followed him in his wanderings to San Marino. When the legion broke up Garibaldi escaped, but Bassi and a fellow-Garibaldian, Count Livraghi, after endless hardships, were captured near Comacchio. On being brought before the papal governor, Bassi said: "I am guilty of no crime save that of being an Italian like yourself. I have risked my life for Italy, and your duty is to do good to those who have suffered for her." The governor would have freed the prisoners; but he did not dare, and gave them over to an Austrian officer. They were escorted to Bologna, falsely charged before a court martial with having been found with arms in their hands (Bassi had never borne arms at all), and shot on the 8th of August, 1849. Bassi is one of the most beautiful figures of the Italian revolution, a gentle unselfish soul, who, although unusually gifted and accomplished, had an almost childlike nature. His execution excited a feeling of horror all over Italy.

BASSI, UGO (1800-1849), Italian patriot, was born in Cento and received his early education in Bologna. A troubled love affair led him to become a novice in the Barnabite order at eighteen. He moved to Rome, where he dedicated himself to study and devotion, beginning his ministry in 1833. He gained fame as a preacher, drawing large crowds with his eloquent and passionate sermons. Although he primarily lived in Bologna, he traveled throughout Italy to preach and care for the impoverished, often struggling with poverty himself. When the revolutionary movements erupted in 1848, during a time when Pope Pius IX still seemed to support liberal and nationalist causes, Bassi, filled with national fervor, joined General Durando's papal forces as an army chaplain to safeguard the borders. His speeches attracted new recruits, and he had a substantial influence on both the soldiers and the public. When the pope distanced himself from the national movement, only Bassi was able to calm the anger of the people in Bologna. At Treviso, where he accompanied Guidotti's volunteers against the Austrians, he suffered three wounds, happy to shed his blood for Italy (May 12, 1848). After being taken to Venice and recovering, he marched unarmed at the front of the volunteers during the fight at Mestre. Following the pope's departure from Rome and the declaration of the Roman Republic, Bassi fought alongside Garibaldi's forces against the French troops sent to restore the papal authority. He risked his life multiple times caring for the wounded under fire, and when Garibaldi had to flee Rome with his volunteers, the devoted monk followed him on his journey to San Marino. When the legion disbanded, Garibaldi managed to escape, but Bassi and fellow Garibaldian Count Livraghi were captured near Comacchio after enduring countless hardships. Brought before the papal governor, Bassi stated: "I am guilty of no crime except being an Italian like you. I have risked my life for Italy, and your duty is to help those who have suffered for her." The governor considered releasing them; however, he lacked the courage and handed them over to an Austrian officer. They were escorted to Bologna, falsely accused of being found with weapons (Bassi had never carried arms), and executed on August 8, 1849. Bassi is regarded as one of the most remarkable figures of the Italian revolution, a kind and selfless individual who, despite being exceptionally talented and accomplished, possessed an almost childlike innocence. His execution sparked widespread horror throughout Italy.

Countess Martinengo gives a charming sketch of his life in her Italian Characters (2nd ed., London, 1901); see also Zironi, Vita del Padre Ugo Bassi (Bologna, 1879); F. Venosta, "Ugo Bassi, Martire di Bologna," in the Pantheon dei Martiri Italiani (Milan, 1863).

Countess Martinengo provides a delightful overview of his life in her Italian Characters (2nd ed., London, 1901); also check out Zironi, Vita del Padre Ugo Bassi (Bologna, 1879); F. Venosta, "Ugo Bassi, Martire di Bologna," in the Pantheon dei Martiri Italiani (Milan, 1863).

(L. V.*)

(L. V.*)

BASSIANUS, JOANNES, Italian jurist of the 12th century. Little is known of his origin, but he is said by Corolus de Tocco to have been a native of Cremona. He was a professor in the law school of Bologna, the pupil of Bulgarus (q.v.), and the master of Azo (q.v.). The most important of his writings which have been preserved in his Summary on the Authentica, which Savigny regarded as one of the most precious works of the school of the Gloss-writers. Joannes, as he is generally termed, was remarkable for his talent in inventing ingenious forms for explaining his ideas with greater precision, and perhaps his most celebrated work is his "Law-Tree," which he entitled Arbor Arborum, and which has been the subject of numerous commentaries. The work presents a tree, upon the branches of which the various kinds of actions are arranged after the manner of fruit. The civil actions, or actiones stricti juris, being forty-eight in number, are arranged on one side, whilst the equitable or praetorian actions, in number one hundred and twenty-one, are arranged on the other side. A further scientific division of actions was made by him under twelve heads, and by an ingenious system of notation the student was enabled to class at once each of the civil or praetorian actions, as the case might be, under its proper head in the scientific division. By the side of the tree a few glosses were added by Joannes to explain and justify his classification. His Lectures on the Pandects and the Code, which were collected by his pupil Nicolaus Furiosus, have unfortunately perished.

BASSIANUS, JOANNES, an Italian jurist from the 12th century. Not much is known about his background, but Corolus de Tocco suggests he was originally from Cremona. He was a professor at the law school in Bologna, studied under Bulgarus (q.v.), and taught Azo (q.v.). The most significant of his works that have survived is his Summary on the Authentica, which Savigny considered one of the most valuable contributions from the Gloss-writers. Joannes, as he's commonly known, was known for his ability to create clever formats to explain his ideas more clearly, with his most famous work being the "Law-Tree," titled Arbor Arborum, which has inspired many commentaries. This work features a tree where the different types of legal actions are organized like fruit. The civil actions, or actiones stricti juris, numbering forty-eight, are placed on one side, while the equitable or praetorian actions, totaling one hundred and twenty-one, are on the other side. He also made a further scientific classification of actions under twelve categories, and with a clever system of notation, students could quickly identify each civil or praetorian action within the appropriate scientific category. Next to the tree, Joannes included a few glosses to clarify and support his classification. Unfortunately, his Lectures on the Pandects and Code, collected by his student Nicolaus Furiosus, have sadly been lost.

[v.03 p.0495]

Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. [v.03 p.0495]

BASSOMPIERRE, FRANÇOIS DE (1579-1646), French courtier, son of Christophe de Bassompierre (1547-1596), was born at the castle of Harrouel in Lorraine. He was descended from an old family which had for generations served the dukes of Burgundy and Lorraine, and after being educated with his brothers in Bavaria and Italy, was introduced to the court of Henry IV. in 1598. He became a great favourite of the king and shared to the full in the dissipations of court life. In 1600 he took part in the brief campaign in Savoy, and in 1603 fought in Hungary for the emperor against the Turks. In 1614 he assisted Marie de' Medici in her struggle against the nobles, but upon her failure in 1617 remained loyal to the King Louis XIII. and assisted the royalists when they routed Marie's supporters at Ponts-de-Cé in 1620. His services during the Huguenot rising of 1621-22 won for him the dignity of marshal of France. He was with the army of the king during the siege of La Rochelle in 1628, and in 1629 distinguished himself in the campaign against the rebels of Languedoc. In 1615 Bassompierre had purchased from Henri, duc de Rohan (1579-1638), the coveted position of colonel-general of the Swiss and Grisons; on this account he was sent to raise troops in Switzerland when Louis XIII. marched against Savoy in 1629, and after a short campaign in Italy his military career ended. As a diplomatist his career was a failure. In 1621 he went to Madrid as envoy extraordinary to arrange the dispute concerning the seizure of the Valteline forts by Spain, and signed the fruitless treaty of Madrid. In 1625 he was sent into Switzerland on an equally futile mission, and in 1626 to London to secure the retention of the Catholic ecclesiastics and attendants of Henrietta Maria, wife of Charles I. The personal influence of Henry IV. had deterred Bassompierre from a marriage with Charlotte de Montmorency, daughter of the constable Montmorency, afterwards princesse de Condé, and between 1614 and 1630 he was secretly married to Louise Marguerite, widow of Francois, prince de Conti, and through her became implicated in the plot to overthrow Richelieu on the "Day of Dupes" 1630. His share was only a slight one, but his wife was an intimate friend of Marie de' Medici, and her hostility to the cardinal aroused his suspicions. By Richelieu's orders, Bassompierre was arrested at Senlis on the 25th of February 1631, and put into the Bastille, where he remained until Richelieu's death in 1643. On his release his offices were restored to him, and he passed most of his time at the castle of Tillières in Normandy, until his death on the 12th of October 1646. He left a son, François de la Tour, by the princesse de Conti, and an illegitimate son, Louis de Bassompierre, afterwards bishop of Saintes. His Mémoires, which are an important source for the history of his time, were first published at Cologne in 1665. He also left an incomplete account of his embassies to Spain, Switzerland and England (Cologne, 1668) and a number of discourses upon various subjects.

BASSOMPIERRE, FRANÇOIS DE (1579-1646), French courtier, was born at the castle of Harrouel in Lorraine, the son of Christophe de Bassompierre (1547-1596). He came from an old family that had served the dukes of Burgundy and Lorraine for generations. After being educated with his brothers in Bavaria and Italy, he joined the court of Henry IV in 1598. He quickly became a favorite of the king and fully indulged in the extravagant lifestyle of the court. In 1600, he participated in a brief campaign in Savoy, and in 1603, he fought in Hungary for the emperor against the Turks. In 1614, he supported Marie de' Medici in her conflict with the nobles, but after her defeat in 1617, he remained loyal to King Louis XIII and helped the royalists defeat Marie’s supporters at Ponts-de-Cé in 1620. His efforts during the Huguenot uprising of 1621-22 earned him the title of marshal of France. He was with the king’s army during the siege of La Rochelle in 1628, and in 1629, he distinguished himself in the campaign against the rebels in Languedoc. In 1615, Bassompierre purchased the desired position of colonel-general of the Swiss and Grisons from Henri, duc de Rohan (1579-1638); because of this, he was sent to gather troops in Switzerland when Louis XIII marched against Savoy in 1629, and his military career ended after a brief campaign in Italy. He did not succeed as a diplomat. In 1621, he went to Madrid as an extraordinary envoy to resolve the issue over Spain's takeover of the Valteline forts and signed the ineffective treaty of Madrid. In 1625, he was sent to Switzerland on another unsuccessful mission, and in 1626, to London to ensure the retention of Catholic clergy and attendants for Henrietta Maria, the wife of Charles I. The influence of Henry IV had stopped Bassompierre from marrying Charlotte de Montmorency, daughter of the constable Montmorency, who later became princesse de Condé. Between 1614 and 1630, he secretly married Louise Marguerite, the widow of François, prince de Conti, and became involved in the plot to overthrow Richelieu during the "Day of Dupes" in 1630. His involvement was minimal, but his wife was a close friend of Marie de' Medici, and her animosity towards the cardinal raised suspicions against him. On Richelieu's orders, Bassompierre was arrested in Senlis on February 25, 1631, and imprisoned in the Bastille, where he remained until Richelieu's death in 1643. Upon his release, his positions were reinstated, and he spent most of his remaining days at the castle of Tillières in Normandy until his death on October 12, 1646. He had a son, François de la Tour, with the princesse de Conti, and an illegitimate son, Louis de Bassompierre, who later became bishop of Saintes. His Mémoires, an important historical resource, were first published in Cologne in 1665. He also left an unfinished account of his diplomatic missions to Spain, Switzerland, and England (Cologne, 1668) and several essays on various topics.

The best edition of the Mémoires is that issued by the Société de l'Histoire de France (Paris, 1877); see also G. Tallemant des Reaux, Historiettes de la princesse de Conti, et du maréchal de Bassompierre (Paris, 1854-1860).

The best edition of the Mémoires is the one published by the Société de l'Histoire de France (Paris, 1877); also check out G. Tallemant des Reaux, Historiettes de la princesse de Conti, et du maréchal de Bassompierre (Paris, 1854-1860).

Fig. 1. Bassoon with 17 keys

Fig. 1.—Bassoon with 17 keys. Savary Model. (Rudall, Carte & Co.)

Fig. 1.—Bassoon with 17 keys. Savary Model. (Rudall, Carte & Co.)

BASSOON (Fr. basson; Ger. Fagott; Ital. fagotto), a woodwind instrument with double reed mouthpiece, a member of the oboe (q.v.) family, of which it is the bass. The German and Italian names of the instrument were bestowed from a fancied resemblance to a bundle of sticks, the bassoon being the first instrument of the kind to be doubled back upon itself; its direct ancestor, the bass pommer, 6 ft. in length, was quite straight. The English and French names refer to the pitch of the instrument as the bass of the wood-wind.

BASSOON (Fr. basson; Ger. Fagott; Ital. fagotto), a woodwind instrument with a double reed mouthpiece, is a member of the oboe (q.v.) family, serving as the bass instrument. The German and Italian names for the instrument were inspired by its resemblance to a bundle of sticks, as the bassoon is the first of its kind to curve back on itself; its direct ancestor, the bass pommer, was 6 feet long and completely straight. The English and French names refer to the pitch of the instrument, being the bass of the woodwind family.

The bassoon is composed of five pieces, which, when fitted together, form a wooden tube about 8 ft. long (93 in.) with a conical bore tapering from a diameter of 1¾ in., at the bell, to 3/16 in. at the reed. The tube is doubled back upon itself, the shorter joint extending to about two-thirds of the length of the longer, whereby the height of the instrument is reduced to about 4 ft. The holes are brought into a convenient position for the fingers by the device of boring them obliquely through the thickness of the wood. The five pieces are:—(1) the bell; (2) the long joint, forming the upper part of the instrument when played, although its notes are the lowest in pitch; (3) the wing overlapping the long joint and having a projecting flap through which are bored three holes; (4) the butt or lower end of the instrument (when played) containing the double bore necessitated by the abrupt bend of the tube upon itself. Both bores are pierced in one block of wood, the prolongation of the double tube being usually stopped by a flat oval pad of cork in the older models, whereas the modern instruments have instead a U-shaped tube; (5) the crook, a narrow curved metal tube about 12 in. long, to which is attached the double reed forming the mouthpiece.

The bassoon is made up of five pieces that, when put together, create a wooden tube about 8 feet long (93 inches) with a conical bore that narrows from a diameter of 1¾ inches at the bell to 3/16 inches at the reed. The tube bends back on itself, with the shorter joint extending to about two-thirds of the length of the longer joint, which reduces the height of the instrument to about 4 feet. The holes are positioned for easy access by the fingers through a technique that drills them at an angle through the wood's thickness. The five pieces are: (1) the bell; (2) the long joint, which forms the upper part of the instrument when played, even though it has the lowest notes; (3) the wing, which overlaps the long joint and has a protruding flap with three drilled holes; (4) the butt or lower end of the instrument (when played), which contains the double bore required by the sharp bend of the tube. Both bores are drilled in a single block of wood, with the extended part of the double tube typically sealed by a flat oval cork pad in older models, while modern instruments use a U-shaped tube instead; (5) the crook, a narrow curved metal tube about 12 inches long, to which the double reed for the mouthpiece is attached.

The performer holds the instrument in a diagonal position; the lower part of the tube (the butt joint) played by the right hand resting against his right thigh, and the little bell, turned upwards, pointing over his left shoulder; a strap round the neck affords additional support. The notes are produced by means of seven holes and 16, 17, or 19 keys. The mechanism and fingering are very intricate. Theoretically the whole construction of the bassoon is imperfect and arbitrary, important acoustic principles being disregarded, but these mechanical defects only enhance its value as an artistic musical instrument. The player is obliged to rely very much on his ear in order to obtain a correct intonation, and next to the strings no instrument gives greater scope to the artist.

The performer holds the instrument at an angle; the lower part of the tube (the butt joint) rests against his right thigh, played by his right hand, while the little bell points upward over his left shoulder. A strap around his neck provides extra support. The notes come from seven holes and 16, 17, or 19 keys. The mechanics and fingering are quite complex. Although theoretically the entire design of the bassoon is flawed and arbitrary, ignoring important acoustic principles, these mechanical issues only add to its value as a musical instrument. The player has to rely heavily on their ear to achieve correct intonation, and next to string instruments, no other instrument offers the artist as much flexibility.

The bassoon has an eight foot tone, the compass extending from B bass [1] Notation: B1b. to A treble Notation: A4b., or in modern instruments by means of additional mechanism to C or even F Notation: C5 or F5.. These extra high notes are from their extreme sweetness called vox humana. The pitch of the bassoon apparently lies two octaves below that of the oboe, since the lowest note of both is B, but in reality the interval is only a twelfth, as may be ascertained by comparing their fundamental scales. On the bassoon the fundamental scale is that of F maj., obtained by opening and closing the holes; the notes downwards from F to B Notation: F2 to B1b. are extra notes obtained by means of interlocking keys on the long joint, worked by the left thumb; they have no counterpart on the oboe and do not belong to the fundamental scale of the bassoon. The fundamental scale of the oboe is that of C, although the compass has been extended a tone to B Notation: B3b.. Therefore the difference in pitch between the bassoon and the oboe is a twelfth. In the first [v.03 p.0496]register of the bassoon, seven semitones Notation: B1b to E2. are obtained, as stated above, by means of keys in the long joint and bell; the next eight notes (holes and keys) each produce two sounds—the fundamental tone, and, by increased pressure of the breath, its harmonic octave. The remaining notes are obtained by cross fingering and by overblowing the notes of the fundamental scale a twelfth as far as A Notation: A4b. which forms the normal compass. From A to E the vox humana notes are produced by the help of small harmonic holes opened by means of keys at the top of the wind joint; exceptional players obtain, without additional keys, two or more higher harmonic notes, which, however, are only used by virtuosi. This then forms the intricate scheme of fingering for the bassoon, and in order to appreciate the efforts of such instrument makers as Carl Almenräder in Germany, Triebert and Jancourt in France, Sax in Belgium, Cornelius Ward and Morton in England, to introduce improvements based upon acoustic principles, it is necessary to understand what these general principles are, and why they have been disregarded in the bassoon. In all tubes the note given by the vibrating air column is influenced directly by the length of the tube, but very little, if at all, by the diameter of the bore. The pitch, however, is greatly affected by the diameter of the opening, whether lateral or at the bell, through which the vibrating column of air is again brought into communication with the outer air. The tube only sounds the normal note in proportion to its length, when the diameter of the lateral opening is equal to the internal diameter of the tube at the opening. As in most of our early wood-wind instruments the holes would in that case have been too large to be stopped by the fingers, and key-mechanism was still primitive, instrument-makers resorted to the expedient of substituting a hole of smaller diameter nearer the mouthpiece for one of greater diameter in the position the hole should theoretically occupy. This important principle was well understood by the Romans, and perhaps even by the ancient Greeks, as is proved by existing specimens of the aulos (q.v.) and by certain passages from the classics.[2]

The bassoon has an eight-foot tone, with a range that goes from B♭ bass [1] Notation: B1b. to A♭ treble Notation: A4b., or in modern instruments, through additional mechanisms, up to C or even F Notation: C5 or F5.. These extra high notes are known for their extreme sweetness, called vox humana. The bassoon's pitch is about two octaves lower than that of the oboe, as both instruments share the lowest note, B, but in reality, the interval is only a twelfth, which can be checked by comparing their fundamental scales. The bassoon's fundamental scale is F major, achieved by opening and closing the holes; the notes descending from F to B♭ Notation: F2 to B1b. are extra notes created with interlocking keys on the long joint, operated by the left thumb; these notes do not have a counterpart on the oboe and are not part of the bassoon's fundamental scale. The fundamental scale of the oboe is C, although its range has been expanded a tone to B♭ Notation: B3b.. Thus, the pitch difference between the bassoon and the oboe is a twelfth. In the first [v.03 p.0496]register of the bassoon, seven semitones Notation: B1b to E2. are obtained, as mentioned earlier, through keys in the long joint and bell; the next eight notes (from holes and keys) each produce two sounds—the fundamental tone, and by increasing breath pressure, its harmonic octave. The remaining notes are accessed through cross-fingering and overblowing notes from the fundamental scale up to A♭ Notation: A4b., which forms the normal range. From A to E♭, the vox humana notes are created with the aid of small harmonic holes opened by keys at the top of the wind joint; exceptional players can achieve, without extra keys, two or more higher harmonic notes, which are typically used only by virtuosi. This forms the complex fingering system for the bassoon, and to appreciate the efforts of instrument makers like Carl Almenräder in Germany, Triebert and Jancourt in France, Sax in Belgium, Cornelius Ward and Morton in England, who sought to introduce improvements based on acoustic principles, it's essential to understand what these general principles are and why they've been overlooked in the bassoon. In all tubes, the note produced by the vibrating air column is directly influenced by the tube's length, but very minimally, if at all, by the diameter of the bore. However, the pitch is significantly affected by the diameter of the opening, whether it's on the side or at the bell, through which the vibrating air column reconnects with the outside air. The tube only produces the normal note in relation to its length when the diameter of the lateral opening equals the internal diameter of the tube at the opening. Since in most early woodwind instruments, the holes would be too large to be covered by fingers, and key mechanisms were still rudimentary, instrument makers used the technique of replacing a hole of larger diameter with one of smaller diameter closer to the mouthpiece in the position where the hole should theoretically be. This crucial principle was well understood by the Romans, and possibly even by the ancient Greeks, as demonstrated by existing examples of the aulos (q.v.) and certain passages from classical texts.[2]

Another curious acoustic phenomenon bears upon the construction of wind instruments, and especially upon the bassoon. When the diameter of the lateral opening or bell is smaller than that of the bore, the portion of the tube below the hole, which should theoretically be as though non-existent, asserts itself, lowering the pitch of the note produced at the hole and damping the tone; this is peculiarly noticeable in the A of the bassoon Notation: A2. whose hole is much too high and too small in diameter.[3] To cite an example of the scope of Carl Almenräder's improvements in the bassoon, he readjusted the position of the A hole, stopped by the third finger of the right hand, boring lower down the tube, not one large hole, but two of medium diameter, covered by an open key to be closed by the same finger from the accustomed position; one of these A holes communicates with the narrower bore in the butt joint, and the other with the wider bore. The effect is a perfectly clear, full and accurate tone. Almenräder's other alterations were made on the same principle, and produced an instrument more perfect mechanically and theoretically than Savary's, but lacking some of the characteristics of the bassoon. In Germany Almenräder's improvements[4] have been generally adopted and his model with 16 keys is followed by most makers, and notably by Heckel of Biebrich.[5]

Another interesting acoustic phenomenon relates to the design of wind instruments, especially the bassoon. When the diameter of the side opening or bell is smaller than that of the bore, the section of the tube below the hole, which should theoretically be noneffective, actually comes into play, lowering the pitch of the note produced at the hole and muting the tone. This is particularly noticeable in the A note of the bassoon Notation: A2. whose hole is too high and too small in diameter.[3] To illustrate the extent of Carl Almenräder's improvements to the bassoon, he adjusted the position of the A hole, which is played by the third finger of the right hand, drilling it lower down the tube. Instead of a single large hole, he created two medium-sized holes, which are covered by an open key that the same finger can close from the usual position. One of these A holes connects with the narrower bore in the butt joint, while the other connects with the wider bore. The result is a clear, full, and precise sound. Almenräder's other modifications were based on the same principle, producing an instrument that is mechanically and theoretically more advanced than Savary's, though it lacks some of the bassoon's characteristics. In Germany, Almenräder's improvements [4] have been widely adopted, and his model with 16 keys is followed by most manufacturers, particularly by Heckel of Biebrich.[5]

The unwieldy bass pommers of the 15th and 16th centuries led to many attempts to produce a more practical bass for the orchestra by doubling back the long tube of the instrument. Thus transformed, the pommer became a fagotto. The invention of the bassoon or fagotto is ascribed to Afranio, a canon of Ferrara, in a work by his nephew, Theseus Ambrosius Albonesius, entitled Introductio in Chaldaicam Linguam ... et descriptio ac Simulacrum Phagoti Afranii (Pavia, 1539). The illustration of the instrument, showing front and back views (p. 179), taken in conjunction with the detailed description (pp. 33-38), at once disposes of the suggestion that the phagotus of Afranio and the fagotto or bassoon were in any way related; the author himself is greatly puzzled as to the etymology of the word. The phagotus in fact, resembles nothing so much as the musical curiosity known as flûte-à-bec à colonne[6], but double and played by bellows, assigned by G. Chouquet to the 16th century. This flute consisted of a column, with base and capital, both stopped, the vent and the whistle being concealed within perforated brass boxes, in the upper and lower parts of the column. Afranio's phagotus consisted of two similar twin columns with base and capital containing finger-holes and keys; between the columns in front was a shorter column for ornament, and at the back of it another still shorter whose capital could be lifted, and a sort of bellows or bag-pipe inserted by means of which the instrument was sounded. The first instrument was made, we are told, by Ravilius of Ferrara, from Afranio's design.[7] Mersenne[8], who does not seem to have any difficulty in understanding the construction of Afranio's phagotus, does not consider him the inventor of the fagotto or bassoon, but of another kind of fagotto which he classes with the Neapolitan sourdeline, a complicated kind of musette[9] (see Bag-Pipe). Afranio's instrument consists, he states, of two bassons as it were interconnected by tubes and blown by bellows. As in the sourdeline, these only speak when the springs (keys) are open. He disposes of Theseus Albonesius's fanciful etymology of the name by showing it to be nothing but the French word fagot, and that it was applied because the instrument consists of two or more "flutes," bound or fagotées together. There is no evidence that the phagotus contained a reed, which would account for Mersenne calling the pipes flutes. Mersenne's statements thus seem to uphold the theory that Afranio's phagotus was only a double flûte à colonne with bellows. Evidence is at hand that in 1555 a contrabass wind instrument was well known as fagotto. In the catalogue of the musical instruments belonging to the Flemish band of Marie de Hongrie in Spain, we find the following: "Ala dicha prinçesa y al dicho matoto dos ynstrumentos de musica contrabaxos, que llaman fagotes, metidos en dos caos redondas como pareçe por el dicho entrego."[10] Sigmund Schnitzer[11] of Nuremberg (d. 1578), a maker of wind instruments who attained considerable notoriety, has been [v.03 p.0497]named as the probable author of the transformation of pommer into bassoon.

The bulky bass pommers of the 15th and 16th centuries led to many efforts to create a more practical bass for the orchestra by curling the long tube of the instrument back upon itself. This change transformed the pommer into a fagotto. The creation of the bassoon or fagotto is attributed to Afranio, a canon from Ferrara, in a work by his nephew, Theseus Ambrosius Albonesius, titled Introductio in Chaldaicam Linguam ... et descriptio ac Simulacrum Phagoti Afranii (Pavia, 1539). The illustration of the instrument, showing views from the front and back (p. 179), alongside the detailed description (pp. 33-38), clearly addresses the suggestion that Afranio's phagotus and the fagotto or bassoon were related; the author himself is quite confused about the word's origin. The phagotus actually resembles nothing so much as the musical oddity known as flûte-à-bec à colonne[6], but doubled and played with bellows, which G. Chouquet assigned to the 16th century. This flute had a column, with a base and capital, both closed off, with the vent and the whistle hidden inside perforated brass boxes at both the top and bottom of the column. Afranio's phagotus consisted of two similar twin columns with base and capital containing finger-holes and keys; in front of the columns was a shorter column for decoration, and behind it was another even shorter column with a removable capital, into which a kind of bellows or bagpipe was inserted to produce sound. The first instrument was reportedly created by Ravilius of Ferrara, based on Afranio's design.[7] Mersenne[8], who seems to have understood the structure of Afranio's phagotus without issues, does not regard him as the inventor of the fagotto or bassoon; instead, he sees him as the inventor of another type of fagotto, which he categorizes alongside the Neapolitan sourdeline, a complex type of musette[9] (see Bagpipe). Mersenne states that Afranio's instrument consists of two bassons connected by tubes and played using bellows. Similar to the sourdeline, these only produce sound when the springs (keys) are open. He dismisses Theseus Albonesius's fanciful etymology of the name by showing that it's simply the French word fagot, applied because the instrument consists of two or more "flutes" bound or fagotées together. There is no proof that the phagotus had a reed, which would explain Mersenne calling the pipes flutes. Mersenne's remarks thus seem to support the theory that Afranio's phagotus was merely a double flûte à colonne with bellows. Evidence suggests that in 1555, a contrabass wind instrument was well known as fagotto. In the inventory of musical instruments belonging to the Flemish band of Marie de Hongrie in Spain, we find: "Ala dicha prinçesa y al dicho matoto dos ynstrumentos de musica contrabaxos, que llaman fagotes, metidos en dos caos redondas como pareçe por el dicho entrego."[10] Sigmund Schnitzer[11] of Nuremberg (d. 1578), a well-known maker of wind instruments, is mentioned as the likely creator of the transformation from pommer to bassoon.

We learn from an historical work of the 18th century, that he was renowned "almost everywhere" as a maker of fagotte of extraordinary size, of skilful workmanship and pure intonation, speaking easily. Schnitzer's instruments were so highly appreciated not only all over Germany, but also in France and Italy, that he was kept continually at work producing fagotte for lovers of music.[12]

We learn from a historical work of the 18th century that he was famous "almost everywhere" as a maker of fagotte of extraordinary size, with skilled craftsmanship and clear tone, playing effortlessly. Schnitzer's instruments were so well-regarded not only throughout Germany but also in France and Italy that he was always busy making fagotte for music lovers.[12]

An earlier chronicler of the artistic celebrities and craftsmen of Nuremberg, Johann Neudorfer, writing in 1549,[13] names Sigmund Schnitzer merely as Pfeifenmacher und Stadtpfeifer. Had he been also noted as an inventor of a new form of instrument, the fellow-citizen and contemporary chronicler would not have failed to note the fact. If Schnitzer had been the first to reduce the great length of the bass pommer by doubling the tube back upon itself, he would hardly have been handed down to posterity as the clever craftsman who made fagottos of extraordinary size; Doppelmaier, who chronicles in these eulogistic terms, wrote nearly two centuries after the supposed invention of the fagotto, the value of which was realized later by retrospection.

An earlier chronicler of the artistic celebrities and craftsmen of Nuremberg, Johann Neudorfer, writing in 1549, names Sigmund Schnitzer simply as Pfeifenmacher und Stadtpfeifer. If he had also been recognized as the inventor of a new type of instrument, his fellow citizen and contemporary chronicler would have definitely mentioned it. If Schnitzer had been the first to shorten the long bass pommer by doubling the tube back on itself, he wouldn’t have been remembered just as the skilled craftsman who made fagottos of extraordinary size; Doppelmaier, who wrote in such complimentary terms, published nearly two centuries after the supposed invention of the fagotto, the significance of which was appreciated later through reflection.

Fig. 2.--Old English double curtail.

Fig. 2.—Old English double curtail (before 1688). (From Harl MS 2034 in Brit. Mus.)

Fig. 2.—Old English double curtail (before 1688). (From Harl MS 2034 in the British Museum.)

An explanation may perhaps be found in Eisel's statement about the Deutscher Basson, which he distinguishes from the Basson (our bassoon). "The Deutsche Bassons, Fagotte or Bombardi, as our German ancestors termed them, before music was clothed in Italian and French style, are no longer in use" (Eisel wrote in 1738) "and therefore it is unnecessary to waste paper on them."[14] This refers, of course, to the bombard or bass pommer, the extraordinarily long instruments which Schnitzer made so successfully. From this it would seem that our bassoon was not of German origin. In the meanwhile we get a clue to the early history of the pommer in transition, but we find it under a different name in no way connected with fagotto. In order to shorten the unwieldy proportions of the tenor pommer in C, and to increase its portability, it was constructed out of a block of wood of rather more than double the diameter of the pommer, in which two bores were cut, communicating at the bottom of the instrument which was flat. The bell and the crook containing the double reed mouthpiece were side by side at the top. This instrument, which had six holes in front and one at the back as well as two keys, was known as the dulceian, dolcian, douçaine, and also in France as courtaud and in England as the curtail, curtal,[15] curtoll, &c., being mentioned in 1582—"The common bleting musick of ye Drone, Hobius (Hautboy) and Curtoll." The next step in the evolution produced the double curtail, a converted bass pommer an octave below the single curtail and therefore identical in pitch as in construction with the early fagotto in C. The instrument is shown in fig. 2, the reproduction of a drawing in the MS. of The Academy of Armoury by Randle Holme,[16] written some time before 1688. At the side of the drawing is the following description: "A double curtaile.[17] This is double the bigness of the single, mentioned ch. xvi. n. 6" (the MS. begins at ch. xvii. of bk. 3) "and is played 8 notes deeper. It is as it were 2 pipes fixed in on(e) thick bass pipe, one much longer than the other, from the top of the lower comes a crooked pipe of brass in which is fixed a reed, through it the wind passeth to make the instrument make a sound. It hath 6 holes on the outside and one on that side next the man or back part and 2 brass keys, the highest called double La sol re, and the other double B mi."

An explanation might be found in Eisel's statement about the Deutscher Basson, which he distinguishes from the Basson (our bassoon). "The Deutsche Bassons, Fagotte or Bombardi, as our German ancestors referred to them, before music was influenced by Italian and French styles, are no longer in use" (Eisel wrote in 1738) "and therefore it is unnecessary to waste paper on them."[14] This refers, of course, to the bombard or bass pommer, the incredibly long instruments that Schnitzer made so successfully. From this, it seems that our bassoon was not of German origin. Meanwhile, we get a clue to the early history of the pommer in transition, but we find it under a different name that has no connection with fagotto. To make the bulky tenor pommer in C smaller and more portable, it was made from a block of wood with more than double the diameter of the pommer, in which two bores were cut that connected at the bottom of the flat instrument. The bell and the crook that held the double reed mouthpiece were placed side by side at the top. This instrument, which had six holes in front and one at the back as well as two keys, was known as the dulceian, dolcian, douçaine, and also in France as courtaud and in England as the curtail, curtal, [15] curtoll, etc., mentioned in 1582—"The common bleting musick of ye Drone, Hobius (Hautboy) and Curtoll." The next step in the evolution produced the double curtail, a modified bass pommer an octave lower than the single curtail and therefore identical in pitch and construction to the early fagotto in C. The instrument is shown in fig. 2, a reproduction of a drawing in the MS. of The Academy of Armoury by Randle Holme, [16] written sometime before 1688. Beside the drawing is the following description: "A double curtaile.[17] This is double the size of the single, mentioned ch. xvi. n. 6" (the MS. begins at ch. xvii. of bk. 3) "and is played 8 notes deeper. It is as if it were 2 pipes fixed into one thick bass pipe, one much longer than the other, from the top of the lower comes a crooked pipe of brass in which a reed is fixed, through which the wind passes to make the instrument sound. It has 6 holes on the outside and one on the side next to the player or back part and 2 brass keys, the higher one called double La sol re, and the other double B mi."

We may therefore conclude that the satirical name fagotto, presumably bestowed in Italy, since the French equivalent fagot was never used for the basson, was not necessarily applied to the new form of pommer at the outset, but in any case before 1555; that the very term Phagoto d'Afranio, by which the instrument was known during its short fabulous existence, with its pretended Greek etymology, presupposes the pre-existence in Italy of another fagotto with which Afranio was acquainted, perhaps imperfectly. Afranio's was the age of ingenious mechanical devices applied to musical instruments, many of which, like Afranio's, being mere freaks, did not survive the inventor. A document selected from the valuable archives published by Edm. van der Straeten[18] suggests a satisfactory clue. In 1426 Louis Willay, a musical instrument maker of Bruges, sold to Philippe le Bon a triple set of wood-wind instruments, i.e. "4 bombardes, 4 douçaines and 4 flûtes," to be sent as a gift to Nicolas III., marquis of Ferrara. The new instrument, the douçaine, we may imagine, by its unusual appearance provoked the satirical wit of some courtier, and was henceforth known as fagotto. Just a century later Ravilius of Ferrara made Afranio's first phagotus from the inventor's design.

We can conclude that the satirical name fagotto, likely given in Italy since the French equivalent fagot was never used for the basson, wasn't necessarily applied to the new type of pommer at first, but definitely before 1555; that the term Phagoto d'Afranio, by which the instrument was known during its brief and legendary existence, along with its supposed Greek origin, suggests that there was an earlier fagotto in Italy that Afranio was familiar with, possibly only partially. Afranio lived in an era of clever mechanical innovations for musical instruments, many of which, like Afranio's, were just novelties that didn’t last beyond their creator. A document from the valuable archives published by Edm. van der Straeten[18] offers a helpful lead. In 1426, Louis Willay, a musical instrument maker from Bruges, sold Philippe le Bon a triple set of woodwind instruments, namely "4 bombardes, 4 douçaines, and 4 flûtes," as a gift for Nicolas III, marquis of Ferrara. The new instrument, the douçaine, likely drew the satirical comments of a courtier due to its unusual look and was henceforth called fagotto. Just a hundred years later, Ravilius of Ferrara created Afranio's first phagotus based on the inventor's design.

The bassoon has been a favourite with all the great masters, excepting Handel. Beethoven uses the bassoon largely in his symphonies, writing everywhere for it independent parts of great beauty and originality. Bach, in his mass in B min., has parts for two bassoons. Mozart wrote a concerto in B for bassoon, with orchestra (Kochel, No. 191). Weber has also written a concerto for bassoon in F (op. 75), scored for full orchestra.

The bassoon has been a favorite among all the great masters, except for Handel. Beethoven extensively uses the bassoon in his symphonies, creating independent parts of great beauty and originality everywhere. Bach, in his Mass in B minor, includes parts for two bassoons. Mozart composed a concerto in B♭ for bassoon and orchestra (Kochel, No. 191). Weber also wrote a concerto for bassoon in F (op. 75), arranged for full orchestra.

See also Etienne Ozi, Nouvelle Methode du Bassoon (Paris, 1788 and 1800); J. B. J. Willent-Bordogny, Gran Methodo completo per il Fagotto (Milan, 1844), with illustrations of early bassoons (English edition, London, J. R. Lafleur & Son); Joseph Fröhlich, Vollständige Musikschule für alle beym Orchester gebrauchliche wichtigere Instrumente (many practical illustrations) (Cologne, Bonn, 1811); article "Bassoon," by W. H. Stone and D. J. Blaikley in Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians (2nd ed.); article "Fagott" in Mendel's Musikalisches Conversations-Lexikon; for the history of the instrument, and of its prototypes, see OBOE and BOMBARD.

See also Étienne Ozi, Nouvelle Methode du Bassoon (Paris, 1788 and 1800); J. B. J. Willent-Bordogny, Gran Methodo completo per il Fagotto (Milan, 1844), with illustrations of early bassoons (English edition, London, J. R. Lafleur & Son); Joseph Fröhlich, Vollständige Musikschule für alle beym Orchester gebrauchliche wichtigere Instrumente (many practical illustrations) (Cologne, Bonn, 1811); article "Bassoon," by W. H. Stone and D. J. Blaikley in Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians (2nd ed.); article "Fagott" in Mendel's Musikalisches Conversations-Lexikon; for the history of the instrument and its prototypes, see OBOE and BOMBARD.

(K. S.)

(K. S.)

[1] At Wagner's instigation, the wind-instrument-maker, W. Heckel of Biebrich-am-Rhein, made bassoons with an extra key, extending the compass downwards to A.

[1] At Wagner's suggestion, the wind instrument maker, W. Heckel of Biebrich-am-Rhein, created bassoons with an additional key, allowing for a lower range down to A.

[2] Macrobius in Somn. Scip. lib. ii. cap. 4. 5.

[2] Macrobius in Somn. Scip. book II, chapter 4, sections 5.

[3] Gottfried Weber, "Verbesserungen des Fagotts," in Cacilia (Mainz, 1825), vol. ii. p. 123.

[3] Gottfried Weber, "Improvements of the Bassoon," in Cacilia (Mainz, 1825), vol. ii. p. 123.

[4] See Traité sur le perfectionnement du basson, avec 2 tableaux, par Charles Almenräder (Mayence, Schott), and also the above mentioned article by Gottfried Weber in Cacilia, whose explanations are clearer than those of the inventor.

[4] See Treatise on the Improvement of the Bassoon, with 2 Tables, by Charles Almenräder (Mainz, Schott), and also the previously mentioned article by Gottfried Weber in Cecilia, whose explanations are clearer than those of the inventor.

[5] For a description of the modern instrument see Victor Charles Mahillon, Catalogue descriptif et analytique du musée instrumental du Conservatoire Royal de Musique (Bruxelles, 1896), vol. ii. pp. 275-276, No. 999.

[5] For a description of the modern instrument see Victor Charles Mahillon, Descriptive and Analytical Catalogue of the Instrument Museum of the Royal Conservatory of Music (Brussels, 1896), vol. ii. pp. 275-276, No. 999.

[6] As far as is known only three of these curious instruments are in existence; two in the museum of the Conservatoire, Paris, and one in Brussels; all three bear a trefoil as maker's mark; the smallest, in F, is reproduced in the Catalogue of the Musical Instruments exhibited at the Royal Military Exhibition, London, 1890, by Capt. C. R. Day (London, 1891), pl. iv. F. It is also described (without illustration) in Mahillon's Catalogue, p. 201, No. 189. The two flutes in Paris, measuring 73 cm. and 94 cm., are described by Gustave Chouquet, Le Musée du Conservatoire National de Musique—Catalogue descriptif et raisonné (Paris, 1884), Nos. 409 and 410, p. 106.

[6] As far as we know, only three of these unusual instruments exist; two are in the museum at the Conservatoire in Paris, and one is in Brussels. All three have a trefoil as the maker's mark. The smallest one, in F, is featured in the Catalogue of the Musical Instruments exhibited at the Royal Military Exhibition, London, 1890, by Capt. C. R. Day (London, 1891), pl. iv. F. It's also described (without illustration) in Mahillon's Catalogue, p. 201, No. 189. The two flutes in Paris, measuring 73 cm and 94 cm, are described by Gustave Chouquet in Le Musée du Conservatoire National de Musique—Catalogue descriptif et raisonné (Paris, 1884), Nos. 409 and 410, p. 106.

[7] An Italian translation of the description is given by Count L. F. Valdrighi in Musurgiana, No. 4 (Milano, 1881), "Il Phagotus di Afranio," p. 40 et seq. (without illustration). An illustration of the phagotus is given by W. J. von Wasielewski in Gesch. d. Instrumentalmusik im XVI. Jahrh. (Berlin, 1878), pl. v. and vi., text p. 74.

[7] An Italian translation of the description is provided by Count L. F. Valdrighi in Musurgiana, No. 4 (Milan, 1881), "Il Phagotus di Afranio," p. 40 and following (without illustration). An illustration of the phagotus is included by W. J. von Wasielewski in Gesch. d. Instrumentalmusik im XVI. Jahrh. (Berlin, 1878), pl. v. and vi., text p. 74.

[8] See L'Harmonie universelle (Paris, 1636), part ii. p. 305.

[8] See The Universal Harmony (Paris, 1636), part ii. p. 305.

[9] Ibid., illustrated and described, bk. v. p. 293.

[9] Same source, illustrated and described, bk. v. p. 293.

[10] See Edm. van der Straeten, Hist. de la musique aux Pays-Bas, vol. vii. pp. 433, 436, 448.

[10] See Edm. van der Straeten, History of Music in the Netherlands, vol. vii. pp. 433, 436, 448.

[11] J. J. Quantz, Frederick the Great's flute-master, gives France the credit of transforming the bombard (pommer) into the bassoon, and the schalmey into oboe, see Versuch einer Anweisung die Flote traversière zu spielen (Berlin, 1752), p. 24 and again p. 241, § 6.

[11] J. J. Quantz, Frederick the Great's flute teacher, credits France for turning the bombard (pommer) into the bassoon and the schalmey into the oboe, see Versuch einer Anweisung die Flote traversière zu spielen (Berlin, 1752), p. 24 and again p. 241, § 6.

[12] J. G. Doppelmaier, Historische Nachricht von den Nürnbergischen Mathematicis und Künstlern (Nürnberg, 1730), p. 293.

[12] J. G. Doppelmaier, Historische Nachricht von den Nürnbergischen Mathematicis und Künstlern (Nürnberg, 1730), p. 293.

[13] See "Nachrichten von Künstlern und Werkleuten Nürnbergs aus dem Jahre 1549," in R. Eitelberger von Edelberg's Quellenschriften für Kunstgeschichte und Kunsttechnik des Mittelalters (Vienna. 1875), vols. viii.-x.

[13] See "News from Artists and Craftsmen in Nuremberg from the Year 1549," in R. Eitelberger von Edelberg's Source Writings for Art History and Art Techniques of the Middle Ages (Vienna. 1875), vols. viii.-x.

[14] See J. J. Eisel, Musicus autodidactus oder der sich selbst informierende Musicus (Erfurt, 1738), pp. 104 and 100, and also J. Mattheson, Das neu-eröffnete Orchester (Hamburg, 1713), "Basson," from whom Eisel borrowed.

[14] See J. J. Eisel, Musicus autodidactus oder der sich selbst informierende Musicus (Erfurt, 1738), pp. 104 and 100, and also J. Mattheson, Das neu-eröffnete Orchester (Hamburg, 1713), "Basson," from whom Eisel borrowed.

[15] See the New English Dictionary, and Bateman upon Bartholinus, 423, 1, margin.

[15] Check out the New English Dictionary, and Bateman's commentary on Bartholinus, 423, 1, margin.

[16] British Museum, Harl. MS. 2034, fol. 207b, a reference communicated by Augustus Hughes-Hughes from his valuable appendix to part iii. (Instrumental Music and Works on Music) of a Catalogue of MS. Music in the British Museum (London, 1908-1909). The Appendix contains a list of typical musical instruments represented in illuminated MSS., or described in other MSS. in the British Museum, with a brief description and full references.

[16] British Museum, Harl. MS. 2034, fol. 207b, a reference provided by Augustus Hughes-Hughes from his valuable appendix to part iii. (Instrumental Music and Works on Music) of a Catalogue of MS. Music in the British Museum (London, 1908-1909). The Appendix includes a list of typical musical instruments shown in illuminated manuscripts or described in other manuscripts in the British Museum, along with a brief description and complete references.

[17] Compare Randle Holme's double curtail with the dolcian in C, pl. vi. H. of Capt. C. R. Day's catalogue, and with a dolcian or single curtail by J. C. Denner in Paul de Wit's Katalog des Musikhistorischen Museums von Paul de Wit (Leipzig, 1903), p. 127, No. 380, and illust. p. 121 (Collection now transferred to Cologne). Consult also Mersenne, op. cit., and Michael Praetorius, Syntagma Musicum (Wolfenbüttel, 1618), both of whom describe and figure these forms of early bassoons.

[17] Compare Randle Holme's double curtail with the dolcian in C, pl. vi. H. of Capt. C. R. Day's catalog, and with a dolcian or single curtail by J. C. Denner in Paul de Wit's Katalog des Musikhistorischen Museums von Paul de Wit (Leipzig, 1903), p. 127, No. 380, and illustrated p. 121 (Collection now moved to Cologne). Also refer to Mersenne, op. cit., and Michael Praetorius, Syntagma Musicum (Wolfenbüttel, 1618), both of whom describe and illustrate these forms of early bassoons.

[18] Op. cit. vol. vii. p. 38.

[18] Op. cit. vol. 7. p. 38.




        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!